financial accounting depreciation accounting 497175

Financial Accounting

1. On September 30 of the current year, a company acquired and placed in service a machine at a cost of $700,000. It has been estimated that the machine has a service life of five years and a salvage value of $40,000. Using the double-declining-balance method of depreciation, prepare a schedule showing depreciation amounts for the current year and the next 4 years (round answers to the nearest dollar). The company closes its books on December 31 of each year.

Answer:

Year

Depreciation for the Period

End of Period

Beginning of Period Book Value

Depreciation Rate

Depreciation Expense

Accumulated Depreciation

Book Value

1

2

3

4

5

6

2. A company purchased land with a building for a total cost of $2,570,000 ($500,000 paid in cash and the balance on a long-term note). It was estimated that the land and building had market values of $900,000 and $2,100,000, respectively.

Determine the cost to be apportioned to the land and to the building and prepare the journal entry to record the acquisition.

Answer:

Asset Appraised Value Percent of Total Apportioned Cost

Land

Building

Total

Land…………………………

Building……………………..

Cash……………………..

Long-Term Note Payable.

3. On January 1, a machine costing $260,000 with a 4-year life and an estimated $5,000 salvage value was purchased. It was also estimated that the machine would produce 500,000 units during its life. The actual units produced during its first year of operation were 110,000. Determine the amount of depreciation expense for the first year under each of the following assumptions:

1. The company uses the straight-line method of depreciation.

2. The company uses the units-of-production method of depreciation.

3. The company uses the double-declining-balance method of depreciation.

4. A company purchased a truck on October 1 of the current year at a cost of $40,000. The truck is expected to last six years and has a salvage value of $2,200. The company’s annual accounting period ends on December 31.

1. What is the depreciation expense for the current year, assuming the straight-line method is used?

2. What is the depreciation expense for the current year, assuming the double-declining-balance method is used?

5. On July 1 of the current year, a company purchased and placed in service a machine with a cost of $240,000. The company estimated the machine’s useful life to be four years or 60,000 units of output with an estimated salvage value of $60,000. During the current year, 15,000 units were produced.

Prepare the necessary December 31 adjusting journal entry to record depreciation for the current year assuming the company uses:

a. The straight-line method of depreciation

b. The units-of-production method of depreciation

c. The double-declining balance method of depreciation

Answer:

a. Depreciation Expense Machinery…………………………..

Accumulated Depreciation Machinery…….:

b. Depreciation Expense Machinery…………………

Accumulated Depreciation Machinery

c. Depreciation Expense Machinery…………………

Accumulated Depreciation Machinery

fin 5500 497128

1. On January 1, 2013, Daniels Corporation issued $5,000,000, 10-year, 8% bonds at 103. Interest is payable semiannually on January 1 and July 1. The journal entry to record this transaction on January 1, 2013 is

a. Cash 5,000,000
Bonds Payable 5,000,000

b. Cash 5,150,000
Bonds Payable 5,150,000

c. Premium on Bonds Payable 150,000
Cash 5,000,000
Bonds Payable 5,150,000

d. Cash 5,150,000
Bonds Payable 5,000,000
Premium on Bonds Payable 150,000

2. Levin Company issued 500 shares of no-par common stock for $5,500. Which of the following journal entries would be made if the stock has a stated value of $2 per share?

a. Cash 5,500
Common Stock 5,500

b. Cash 5,500
Common Stock 1,000 Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par 4,500

c. Cash 5,500
Common Stock 1,000
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value 4,500

d. Common Stock 5,500
Cash 5,500

3. Motes industries owns 45% of Newton Company. For the current year, Newton reports net income of $250,000 and declares and pays a $60,000 cash dividend. Which of the following correctly presents the journal entries to record Motes equity in Newton s net income and the receipt of dividends from Newton?

a. Dec. 31 Stock Investments 112,500
Revenue from Stock Investments 112,500
Dec. 31 Cash 27,000
Stock Investments 27,000

b. Dec. 31 Stock Investments 112,500
Revenue from Stock Investments 112,500
Dec. 31 Cash 60,000
Stock Investments 60,000

c. Dec. 31 Stock Investments 85,500
Revenue from Stock Investments 85,500
Dec. 31 Cash 27,000
Stock Investments 27,000

d. Dec. 31 Revenue from Stock Investments 112,500
Stock Investments 112,500
Dec. 31 Stock Investments 27,000
Cash 27,000

4. Talbot, Inc. has the following income statement (in millions):
Wilkinson, INC.
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 3
Net Sales $300
Cost of Goods Sold 120
Gross Profit 180
Operating Expenses 44
Net Income $136

Using vertical analysis, what percentage is assigned to Cost of Goods Sold?

a. 30%
b. 40%
c. 100%
d. None of the above

5. Mah, Inc. completed Job No. B14 during 2013. The job cost sheet listed the following:
Direct materials $55,000
Direct labor $30,000
Manufacturing overhead applied $20,000
Units produced 3,000 units
Units sold 1,800 units

How much is the cost of the finished goods on hand from this job?

a. $105,000
b. $63,000
c. $42,000
d. $51,000

6. In the month of June, a department had 20,000 units in beginning work in process that were 70% complete. During June, 80,000 units were transferred into production from another department. At the end of June there were 10,000 units in ending work in process that were 40% complete. Materials are added at the beginning of the process, while conversion costs are incurred uniformly throughout the process. The equivalent units of production for materials for June were

a. 90,000 equivalent units.
b. 100,000 equivalent units.
c. 104,000 equivalent units.
d. 80,000 equivalent units.

7. A company budgeted unit sales of 204,000 units for January, 2013 and 240,000 units for February, 2013. The company has a policy of having an inventory of units on hand at the end of each month equal to 30% of next month’s budgeted unit sales. If there were 61,200 units of inventory on hand on December 31, 2013, how many units should be produced in January, 2013 in order for the company to meet its goals?

a. 214,800 units
b. 204,000 units
c. 193,200 units
d. 276,000 units

8. A company’s planned activity level for next year is expected to be 200,000 machine hours. At this level of activity, the company budgeted the following manufacturing overhead costs:
Variable Fixed
Indirect materials $280,000 Depreciation $120,000
Indirect labor 400,000 Taxes 20,000
Factory supplies 40,000 Supervision 100,000
A flexible budget prepared at the 160,000 machine hours level of activity would show total manufacturing overhead costs of

a. $576,000.
b. $720,000.
c. $768,000.
d. $816,000.

9. A company developed the following per-unit standards for its product: 2 pounds of direct materials at $4 per pound. Last month, 1,500 pounds of direct materials were purchased for $5,700. The direct materials price variance for last month was

a. $5,700 favorable.
b. $300 favorable.
c. $150 favorable.
d. $300 unfavorable.

10. In incremental analysis,

a. costs are not relevant if they change between alternatives.
b. all costs are relevant if they change between alternatives.
c. only fixed costs are relevant.
d. only variable costs are relevant.

Problem 1:
Here are comparative balance sheets for Hayes Company.
Hayes Company
Comparative Balance Sheets
December 31, 2013
Assets 2013 2012
Cash $ 43,000 $ 10,000
Accounts receivable 18,000 14,000
Inventories 25,000 18,000
Prepaid expenses 6,000 9,000
Long-term investments 0 18,000
Equipment 60,000 32,000
Accumulated depreciation Equipment (20,000) (14,000)
Total assets $ 122,000 $ 87,000

Liabilities and Stockholder s Equity
Accounts payable $ 17,000 $ 7,000
Bonds payable 37,000 47,000
Common stock ($1 par) 40,000 23,000
Retained earnings 28,000 10,000
Total liabilities and stockholder s equity $ 122,00 $ 87,000

Additional information:
1. The 2013 Income Statement reported $6,000 in depreciation expense, a $4,000 loss on
sale of investments and Net income of $43,000.
2. Cash dividends of $15,000 were declared and paid.
3. Long-term investments that has a cost of $18,000 were sold for $14,000
4. Sales for 2013 were $120,000.
Instructions: Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2013 using the indirect method.
Hayes Company
Statement of Cash Flows
For the Year Ended December 31, 2013

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities

Problem 2:
Doherty Corporation is projecting a cash balance of $31,785 in its December 31, 2013, balance sheet. Doherty schedule of expected collections from customers for the first quarter of 2013 shows total collections of $189,885. The schedule of expected payments for direct materials for the first quarter of 2013 shows total payments of $40,200. Other information gathered for the first quarter of 2013 is: sale of equipment $3,392; direct labor $70,178, manufacturing overhead $34,583, and purchase of securities $12,372. Selling and administrative expenses are projected to be $45,117; this figure includes $1,117 in depreciation expense on the office equipment. All costs and expenses will be paid in cash. Doherty wants to maintain a balance of at least $30,000 cash at the end of each quarter.

Instructions: Complete the cash budget for the first quarter.

Doherty Corporation
Cash Budget
For the Quarter Ending March 31, 2013

Problem 3

Delaney Corporation has the following cost records for February 2013.

Indirect factory labor $ 4,612 Factory utilities $ 601
Direct materials used 22,361 Depreciation, factory equipment 1,585
Work in process, 6/1/12 2,769 Direct labor 31,084
Work in process, 6/30/12 3,733Maintenance, factory equipment 1,792
Finished goods, 6/1/12 4,609 Indirect materials 2,268
Finished goods, 6/30/12 7,429 Factory manager’s salary 3,315

Instructions: Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule for February 2013.

Delaney Corporation
Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule
For the Month Ended June 30, 2013

Manufacturing overhead:

Problem 4:
Wallace Corporation has 72,615 shares of common stock outstanding. It declares a $2.10 per share cash dividend on August 1 to stockholders of record on September 15. The dividend is paid on October 31.

Instructions: Prepare the entries on the appropriate dates to record the declaration and payment of the cash dividend.

Date Account Description Debit Credit

Problem 5:
Hawkins Manufacturing incurs unit costs of $7.90 ($6.10 variable and $1.80 fixed) in making a sub-assembly part for its finished product. A supplier offers to make 12,000 of the assembly part at $5.75 per unit. If the offer is accepted, Hawkins will save all variable costs but no fixed costs.

Instructions: Prepare an analysis showing the total cost savings, if any, Hawkins will realize by buying the part.

Make Buy

Total annual cost

Hawkins Company should _______________ the part because total annual costs to
make are less than total costs to buy.

Problem 6
On July 1, Ketel Corporation purchases 500,000 shares of its $6 par value common stock for the treasury at a cash price of $10 per share. On September 1, it sells 275,000 shares of the treasury stock for cash at $13 per share. The balance in the retained earnings account is $6,345,000.

Instructions: Journalize the two treasury stock transactions.

Date Account Description Debit Credit

Problem 7:
Reed Company has a unit-selling price of $500, variable costs per unit of $269, and fixed costs of $265,580.

Instructions: Compute the break-even point in units using either (a) the mathematical equation or (b) contribution margin per unit. Round answer up to the next whole unit.

Problem 8:
Lopez Company has a factory machine with a book value of $89,851 and a remaining useful life of 4 years. A new machine is available at a cost of $325,275. This machine will have a 4-year useful life with no salvage value. The new machine will lower annual variable manufacturing costs from $630,925 to $425,840.

Instructions: Prepare an analysis showing whether the old machine should be retained or replaced.

Retain Equipment Replace Equipment

Total costs

The equipment should be _______________ because total costs are lower than to retain the machine.

Problem 9:
For Mathers Company, variable costs are 68% of sales, and fixed costs are $215,000. Management’s net income goal is $68,610.

Instructions: Compute the required sales needed to achieve management’s target net income of $78,610.

fin 571 final exam 497129

Final Exam Please provide your answers as follows in the Assignment newsgroup (Excel spreadsheet is preferred): 1. A 2. B 3. B, etc Chapter 1 The Goals and Functions of Financial Management Multiple Choice Questions 1. What is the primary goal of financial management? A) Increased earnings B) Maximizing cash flow C) Maximizing shareholder wealth D) Minimizing risk of the firm Answer: C Difficulty: Easy Type: Memorization 2. The partnership form of organization A) avoids the double taxation of earnings and dividends found in the corporate form of organization. B) usually provides limited liability to the partners. C) has unlimited life. D) simplifies decision making. Answer: A Difficulty: Easy Type: Memorization 3. Increased productivity due to technology has A) increased corporations’ reliance on debt for capital expansion needs. B) created larger asset values on the firm’s historical balance sheet. C) made it cheaper (in terms of interest costs) for firms to borrow money. D) helped to keep corporate costs in check. Answer: D Difficulty: Medium Type: Conceptual 4. Insider trading occurs when A) someone has information not available to the public which they use to profit from trading in stocks. B) corporate officers buy stock in their company. C) lawyers, investment bankers, and others buy common stock in companies represented by their firms. D) any stock transactions occur in violation of the Federal Trade Commissions restrictions on monopolies. Answer: A Difficulty: Medium Type: Memorization Chapter 2 Review of Accounting 5. When a firm’s earnings are falling more rapidly than its stock price, its P/E ratio will: A) remain the same B) go up C) go down D) could go either up or down

fin 571 wiley week 6 answers 497130

1. Briarcrest Condiments is a spice-making firm. Recently, it developed a new process for producing spices. The process requires new machinery that would cost $1,675,348. have a life of five years, and would produce the cash flows shown in the following table.

Year Cash Flow
1 $610,331
2 -207,722
3 964,925
4 843,041
5 595,412

What is the NPV if the discount rate is 16.84 percent? (Enter negative amounts using negative sign e.g. -45.25. Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 15.25.)
NPV is $_____________

2.Archer Daniels Midland Company is considering buying a new farm that it plans to operate for 10 years. The farm will require an initial investment of $11.90 million. This investment will consist of $2.40 million for land and $9.50 million for trucks and other equipment. The land, all trucks, and all other equipment is expected to be sold at the end of 10 years at a price of $5.04 million, $2.47 million above book value. The farm is expected to produce revenue of $2.01 million each year, and annual cash flow from operations equals $1.83 million. The marginal tax rate is 35 percent, and the appropriate discount rate is 9 percent. Calculate the NPV of this investment. (Round intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 15.25.)

NPV$ ___________

The project should be accepted or rejected

3. Bell Mountain Vineyards is considering updating its current manual accounting system with a high-end electronic system. While the new accounting system would save the company money, the cost of the system continues to decline. The Bell Mountain s opportunity cost of capital is 17.9 percent, and the costs and values of investments made at different times in the future are as follows:

Year Cost Value of Future Savings
(at time of purchase)
0 $5,000 $7,000
1 4,500 7,000
2 4,000 7,000
3 3,500 7,000
4 3,000 7,000
5 2,500 7,000
Calculate the NPV of each choice. (Round answers to the nearest whole dollar, e.g. 5,275.)
The NPV of each choice is:

NPV0 = $_________

NPV1 = $________

NPV2 = $_________

NPV3 = $_________

NPV4 = $_________

NPV5 = $_________

Suggest when should Bell Mountain buy the new accounting system?
Bell Mountain should purchase the system in .
year 1 or year 2 or year 3 or year 4

4.Chip s Home Brew Whiskey management forecasts that if the firm sells each bottle of Snake-Bite for $20, then the demand for the product will be 15,000 bottles per year, whereas sales will be 84 percent as high if the price is raised 14 percent. Chip s variable cost per bottle is $10, and the total fixed cash cost for the year is $100,000. Depreciation and amortization charges are $20,000, and the firm has a 30 percent marginal tax rate. Management anticipates an increased working capital need of $3,000 for the year. What will be the effect of the price increase on the firm s FCF for the year? (Round answers to nearest whole dollar, e.g. 5,275.)

At $20 per bottle the Chip s FCF is $__________ and at the new price Chip s FCF is $____________.

5.Capital Co. has a capital structure, based on current market values, that consists of 20 percent debt, 1 percent preferred stock, and 79 percent common stock. If the returns required by investors are 10 percent, 11 percent, and 16 percent for the debt, preferred stock, and common stock, respectively, what is Capital s after-tax WACC? Assume that the firm s marginal tax rate is 40 percent. (Round intermediate calculations to 4 decimal places, e.g. 1.2514 and final answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 15.25%.)

After tax WACC =_____________%

fin 6301 497131

PROBLEM SET 4

1. Consider Macbeth Spot Removers, a publically traded company with an infinite life span, which faces a range of annual operating incomes as depicted in the table below. The rate of return on Treasury bonds is 10%.

Data

Number of shares

700

Price per share

$12

Market value of equity

$8400

Outcomes

Operating income

$500

$1,000

$1,500

$2,000

Earnings per share

$0.71

$1.43

$2.14

$2.86

Return on equity

5.95%

11.90%

17.86%

23.81%

a. Calculate the earnings per share and return on equity in the table above. Macbeth Spot Removers issues $2,400 of risk-free debt and uses the proceeds to repurchase 200 shares.

b. Rework the table above to show how earning per share and equity returns now vary with operating income.

c. If the beta of Macbeth s unlevered assets is 0.8 and its debt is risk-free, what would be the beta of the equity after the debt issue?

Ms. Macbeth s investment bankers have just informed her that the new issue of debt is risky. Debtholders will demand a return of 12.5%, which is 2.5% above the risk-free interest rate.

d. How does this affect return on assets and return on equity? Calculate these values.

e. Suppose that the of unlevered equity was 0.6. What will A, E, and D be after the change to the capital structure?

2. Happy Valet, Inc. has a 14.5% cost of unlevered equity and can issue debt at a rate of 8%. It faces marginal corporate income tax rate of 40% and has debt and equity assets of 30% and 70%, respectively (calculated using market values).

a. What rate of return do stockholders require on Happy Valet s levered equity assets?

b. What is the firm s WACC?

3. Consider the case of Henrietta Ketchup, a budding entrepreneur with two possible investment projects that offer the following payoffs:

Investment

Payoff

Probability of Payoff

Project 1

20.4

25.5

1.0

Project 2

20.4

40.8

0.6

0

0.4

Ms. Ketchup approaches her bank and asks to borrow the present value of $10 (she will fund the rest out of internal funds).

a. Calculate the expected payoffs to the bank and to Ms. Ketchup if the bank lends the present value of $10. Which project would Ms. Ketchup undertake?

b. Is this the same project that the bank would want Ms. Ketchup to undertake? Explain why or why not.

c. What is the maximum amount the bank could lend that would induce Ms. Ketchup to take the bank s preferred project?

d. If the bank was to lend the $10, but was acting strategically in its own interest, what interest rate would the bank require on its loan?

4. You have the following information about Ledd a publicly traded (and therefore infinitely lived) company:

Operating income: $20 million

Cost of unlevered equity: 10%

Risk-free interest rate: 5%

Corporate marginal tax rate: 0

a. If Ledd is financed entirely by equity,

i. What is the value of the firm?

ii. What is the return required by stockholders?

iii. What is the company s WACC?

b. Ledd decides to issue bonds with the market value of 40% of total assets, using the proceeds to repurchase equity. The bonds are considered to be risk-free.

i. What is the value of Ledd with the new capital structure?

ii. What is the return required by stockholders of the leveraged firm?

iii. What is the WACC?

iv. What is the tax shield of debt?

c. The government implements a marginal corporate tax rate of 36%.

i. Recalculate your answers to a) and b) in a world with taxes.

fin370 497132

Preview
1.FIN370 W 2/
2.FIN370 W 2/FIN 370 W2 DQ1.doc
3.FIN370 W 2/FIN 370 W2 DQ2.doc
4.FIN370 W 2/FIN 370 W2 DQ3.doc
5.FIN370 W 2/FIN 370 W2 DQs.zip
6.FIN370 W 2/FIN370 Week 2 Individual Assignment Chapter Study Questions.doc
7.FIN370 W 2/FIN370 WEEK 2 INDIVIDUAL ASSIGNMENT Company Evaluation Paper Starbucks.doc
8.FIN370 W 2/W2/
9.FIN370 W 2/W2/FIN 370 W2 Problem 15-13A.doc
10.FIN370 W 2/W2/FIN 370 W2 Problem 15-2A.doc
11.FIN370 W 2/W2/FIN 370 Week 2 Individual Assignment Chapter Study Questions.zip
12.FIN370 W 2/W2/FIN 370 Week 2 Problem 14.1.doc
13.FIN370 W 2/W2/FIN 370 Week 2 Problem 14.3.doc
14.FIN370 W 2/W2/FIN 370 Week 2 Problem 14.4.doc
15.FIN370 W 3/
16.FIN370 W 3/FIN 370 W3 DQ1.doc
17.FIN370 W 3/FIN 370 W3 DQ2.doc
18.FIN370 W 3/FIN370 WEEK 3 TEAM ASSIGNMENT Caladonia Products Integrative Problems/
19.FIN370 W 3/FIN370 WEEK 3 TEAM ASSIGNMENT Caladonia Products Integrative Problems/FIN 370 Week 3 Team Assignment Caladonia Products Integrative Problems.docx
20.FIN370 W 3/W3/
21.FIN370 W 3/W3/FIN 370 W3 Problem 4-6A (Cash budget).xls
22.FIN370 W 3/W3/FIN 370 W3 Problem 5-1A. (Compound interest).xls
23.FIN370 W 3/W3/FIN 370 W3 Problem 5-4A (Present value).doc
24.FIN370 W 3/W3/FIN 370 W3 Problem 5-5A (Compound annuity).doc
25.FIN370 W 3/W3/FIN 370 W3 Problem 5-6A (Present value of an annuity).doc
26.FIN370 W 3/W3/FIN 370 Week 3 Case Study and Text Problems.xls
27.FIN370 W 3/W3/FIN 370 Week 3 Case Study and Text Problems.zip
28.FIN370 W 4/
29.FIN370 W 4/FIN 370 W4 DQ1.doc
30.FIN370 W 4/FIN 370 W4 DQ2.doc
31.FIN370 W 4/FIN 370 W4 DQ3.doc
32.FIN370 W 4/FIN 370 W4 DQs.zip
33.FIN370 W 4/FIN 370 Week 4 Individual Assignment Reeds Clothier Case Study and Questions.doc
34.FIN370 W 5/
35.FIN370 W 5/FIN 370 Final Exam.doc
36.FIN370 W 5/FIN 370 W5 DQ1.doc
37.FIN370 W 5/FIN 370 W5 DQ2.doc
38.FIN370 W 5/FIN 370 W5 DQ3.doc
39.FIN370 W 5/FIN 370 W5 DQs.zip
40.FIN370 W 5/FIN 370 W5 Final Exam.doc
41.FIN370 W 5/FIN370 Week 5 Individual Assignment Problem 3 Chapter 21.xls
42.FIN370 W 1/
43.FIN370 W 1/FIN 370 W1 DQ1.doc
44.FIN370 W 1/FIN 370 W1 DQ2.doc
45.FIN370 W 1/FIN 370 W1 DQ3.doc
46.FIN370 W 1/FIN 370 W1 DQs.zip
47.FIN370 W 1/FIN 370 Week 1 Individual Assignment Defining Financial Terms.doc

fin 571 for john canther 497133

Capital Co. has a capital structure, based on current market values, that consists of 42 percent debt, 13 percent preferred stock, and 45 percent common stock. If the returns required by investors are 10 percent, 11 percent, and 18 percent for the debt, preferred stock, and common stock, respectively, what is Capital s after-tax WACC? Assume that the firm s marginal tax rate is 40 percent.Chip s Home Brew Whiskey management forecasts that if the firm sells each bottle of Snake-Bite for $20, then the demand for the product will be 15,000 bottles per year, whereas sales will be 91 percent as high if the price is raised 9 percent. Chip s variable cost per bottle is $10, and the total fixed cash cost for the year is $100,000. Depreciation and amortization charges are $20,000, and the firm has a 30 percent marginal tax rate. Management anticipates an increased working capital need of $3,000 for the year. What will be the effect of the price increase on the firm s FCF for the year?

Bell Mountain Vineyards is considering updating its current manual accounting system with a high-end electronic system. While the new accounting system would save the company money, the cost of the system continues to decline. The Bell Mountain s opportunity cost of capital is 16.7 percent, and the costs and values of investments made at different times in the future are as follows:

Year Cost Value of Future Savings
(at time of purchase)
0 $5,000 $7,000
1 4,300 7,000
2 3,600 7,000
3 2,900 7,000
4 2,200 7,000
5 1,500 7,000

Calculate the NPV of each choice.
(Round answers to the nearest whole dollar, e.g. 5,275.)

The NPV of each choice is:

Archer Daniels Midland Company is considering buying a new farm that it plans to operate for 10 years. The farm will require an initial investment of $12.20 million. This investment will consist of $2.90 million for land and $9.30 million for trucks and other equipment. The land, all trucks, and all other equipment is expected to be sold at the end of 10 years at a price of $5.14 million, $2.26 million above book value. The farm is expected to produce revenue of $2.03 million each year, and annual cash flow from operations equals $1.89 million. The marginal tax rate is 35 percent, and the appropriate discount rate is 9 percent. Calculate the NPV of this investment. (Round intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 15.25.)

NPV $

The project should be .

final exam 497134

: Week 8 Exam 3 – Exam

Unfavorable variances are those that contribute to decreases in operating income. (Points : 2)

True
False

Standard costs provide a basis for assessing the reasonableness of actual costs incurred for producing a product or service.(Points : 2)

True

False

Service companies do not have work in process and finished goods accounts.(Points : 2)

True
False

At the end of the period, the balance remaining in Finished Goods is reported on the income statement.(Points : 2)

True

False

Cost of goods manufactured must be determined prior to computing cost of goods sold.(Points : 2)

True

False

If Paterno Company’s turnover(asset utilization) measure is 2.5 and its margin is 7.5%, its ROI is 10%. (Points : 2)

True
False

Organization charts are drawn in a hierarchical fashion with low level managers shown at the bottom of the chart, middle level managers in the middle of the chart, and senior level managers shown at the top of the chart. (Points : 2)

True
False

Direct costs must be allocated across departments.(Points : 2)

True

Responsibility performance reports usually compare actual costs to the budgeted costs amounts.(Points : 2)

True
FalseFalse

When direct labor is the best cost driver for variable manufacturing overhead, a favorable direct labor efficiency variance would result in:

(Points : 2)

A favorable variable manufacturing overhead efficiency variance
An unfavorable variable manufacturing overhead efficiency variance
An unfavorable variable manufacturing overhead efficiency variance and an unfavorable total variable manufacturing overhead variance
The answer cannot be determined

The July manufacturing overhead budget of Kyoto Corporation, shown below, was constructed assuming an activity level of 48,000 direct labor hours:

Variable costs:

Indirect labor

$48,000

Indirect materials

24,000

Factory supplies

19,200

$91,200

Fixed costs:

Depreciation

$38,400

Supervision

69,600

Property taxes

36,000

144,000

Total overhead costs

$235,200

If management prepared a flexible budget for July using 40,000 direct labor hours, what amount would this flexible budget show for total variable costs?(Points : 2)

$76,000
$83,600
$87,200
$91,200

Which of the following statements is false?(Points : 2)

Under absorption costing some fixed manufacturing costs are deferred in ending inventory if production is greater than sales.
When production and sales are equal, net income will be greater under variable costing than it will be under absorption costing.
Under absorption costing only the fixed manufacturing cost associated with inventory sold are expensed.
Under variable costing fixed manufacturing costs are expensed in the period in which they are incurred regardless of when the inventory is sold.

A credit to the Raw Materials account represents(Points : 2)

raw materials purchased.
raw materials used.
raw materials available for use.
none of these

Select the response that indicates the correct sequence of product cost flows from production to sale. (Points : 2)

Raw materials, work in process, finished goods, and cost of goods sold
Cost of goods sold, finished goods, work in process, raw materials
Work in process, finished goods, cost of goods sold
Raw materials, finished goods, cost of goods sold

In which of the following is a manager responsible for only costs?(Points : 2)

Responsibility center
Cost center
Profit center
Investment center

A report that specifies the expected and actual costs under the control of a manager is a: (Points : 2)

Managerial cost report.
Departmental accounting report.
Responsibility accounting report.
Controllable expense report.
Segmental accounting report.

K. Jackson Corporation has the following operating data for 2005:

Net income

$ 75,000

Revenue

500,000

Total assets

400,000

Given this information, if net income increased to $90,000, the return on investment would be:(Points : 2)

15.0%
18.75%
22.5%
25.0%

Which of the following would not improve ROI? (Points : 2)

Decrease costs
Decrease assets
Increase revenue
Increase inventory

Taft Company had no beginning work in process inventory. Its total manufacturing costs for the year were $878,000. If cost of goods manufactured was $676,000 and cost of goods sold was $518,000, the amount of ending work in process inventory would have been what (Input only the whole number with no punctuation.)(Points : 4)

Wilson Company applies overhead based on direct labor cost. During 2012, Wilson Company estimated that it would incur $88,000 in manufacturing overhead costs and $59,000 of direct labor costs. In 2012, actual manufacturing overhead cost totaled $73,000 and actual direct labor costs totaled $53,000. If total manufacturing costs were $158,000, what amount of direct materials was used during the period (Input only the whole number with no punctuation.)(Points : 4)

Weymouth Company made a $240,000 investment in new machinery. Assuming the company’s margin is 3%, what income will be earned if the investment generates $510,000 in additional sales (Input only the whole number with no punctuation.)(Points : 4)

The following company information is available:

Direct materials used for production

36,000 gallons

Standard quantity for actual units produced

31,800 gallons

Standard cost per gallon of direct material

$6.03

Actual cost per gallon of direct material

$6.53

The direct materials usage variance is what (Input only the whole number followed by F or U for favorable or unfavorable. Example: 100 F)(Points : 4)

final exam 497135

1. What is biology?
A) The study of life
B) The study of the environment
C) The study of DNA
D) The study of genetics
E) The study of the earth
2. Which of the following can be considered definitions of “theory”?
A) A theory can be an explanation of scientific laws.
B) A theory is an integrated explanation of numerous hypotheses, each supported by a large
body of observations.
C) A theory is a condensation and simplification of many data that previously appeared
unrelated.
D) A theory is a prediction for new data suggesting new relationships among a range of natural
phenomena.
E) All of the above.
3. An integrated explanation of numerous hypotheses is known as a ______.
A) fact
B) law
C) control
D) theory
E) guess

Page 2 of 17

4. What is the correct sequence of steps in the scientific method?
I. State a problem
II. Analyze and interpret data
III. Develop a hypothesis
IV. Share the results with other scientists
V. Design and perform experiment to test the hypothesis
A) I II -III -IV V
B) III I -V II IV
C) V IV III II I
D) I III V II IV
E) V II I III -IV
5. To test a hypothesis about a given variable, experimental and control groups are tested in parallel.
Which of the following best explains the dual experiments?
A) In the experimental group, a chosen variable is altered in a known way. In the control group,
that chosen variable is not altered so a comparison can be made.
B) In the control group, a chosen variable is altered in a known way. In the experimental group,
that chosen variable is not altered so a comparison can be made.
C) In the experimental group, a chosen variable plus all other variables are altered. In the
control group, the chosen variable is altered; however, all other variables are held constant.
D) In the experimental and control groups, two different variables are altered.
E) Experimental and control groups experiments are identical and run in parallel to get
repeatable results.
6. The smallest unit of life is the
A) cell
B) organelle
C) macromolecule
D) atom
7.You examine a cell under a microscope and you do not see a well defined nucleus. You conclude
the cell must a _____________________ cell.
A) prokaryotic
B) eukaryotic
C) plant
D) animal
8. All of the following are examples of elements except?
A) oxygen
B) water
C) hydrogen
D) carbon

9. Two atoms with the same atomic number, but different mass numbers are called____________.
A) radioactive
B) isotopes
C) proteins
D) electrons
E) nuclei
10. Select the element that is not one of the four most common elements in living matter.
A) carbon
B) hydrogen
C) nitrogen
D) oxygen
E) phosphorous
11. Organic compounds consist mainly of ________ atoms.
A) oxygen
B) nitrogen
C) calcium
D) carbon
E) phosphorous
12. A substance with a pH greater than 7 is ___________, while a substance with a pH less that 7 is
___________.
A) basic, acidic
B) acidic, basic
C) basic, neutral
D) neutral, acidic
E) neutral, basic
13. The bond in which 2 atoms share one or more pairs of electrons is a ______________ bond.
A) polar
B) hydrogen
C) ionic
D) covalent
14. The energy required for photosynthesis is provided by?
A) proteins
B) sunlight
C) chlorophyll
D) carbohydrates
E) lipids
15. The term below that includes the other terms is
A) atom
B) molecule
C) electron
D) element
16. An element has 43 protons and 50 neutrons. The atomic number of the element is
___________________.

A) 43
B) 50
C) 86
D) 93
E) 100
17. The diffusion of water through a selectively permeable membrane is called
___________________________________.
A) facilitated diffusion
B) active transport
C) osmosis
D) phagocytosis
E) endocytosis
18. A dog gets many nutrients from its food including amino acids. Which of these can be built
directly using the amino acids _________________________.
A) proteins
B) carbohydrates
C) lipids
D) nucleic acids
E) glucose
19. Most carbohydrates in the human body are ___________________________.
A) used as building blocks for proteins
B) used as catalysts for reactions in cells
C) consumed as a source of energy
D) not easily absorbed into the bloodstream
E) not necessary for regular bodily functions
20. A scientist removed the plasma membranes from bacteria cells in a culture. She analyzed the cell
membranes for specific molecules. Which of these was probably the most common type of
molecule present in the bacteria plasma membranes?
A) carbohydrate
B) nucleic acid
C) amino acid
D) lipid
E) ATP
21. The site of protein synthesis in the cell is ___________________________.
A) the mitochondria
B) the nucleus
C) the Golgi apparatus
D) the ribosomes

22. Cyanide is a poison that prevents mitochondria from using oxygen. As a result, the mitochondria
cannot produce __________.
A) lipids

B) proteins
C) energy
D) sugars
E) nucleic acids
23. The replication of DNA ______________________________________________.
A) produces RNA molecules
B) produces completely new strands of DNA
C) produces two DNA molecules, each of which is half-“new” and half-“old” DNA
D) generates excessive DNA, which eventually causes the nucleus to divide
24. The form of RNA that is complementary to DNA and carries the code from the DNA to the site where
the protein is synthesized is ______________________________________.
A) messenger RNA
B) nuclear RNA
C) ribosomal RNA
D) transfer RNA
25. If the amounts of bases in a DNA molecule are measured, you would find that
_______________________________.
A) A = C and G=T
B) A = G and C=T
C) T = Aand C =G
D) A = U and C=G
E) U = Cand A =G
26. In humans, the allele for dimples (D) is dominant.The allele for not having dimples (d) is recessive. If a
woman (DD) and a man (Dd) have four children, how many of the children will not have dimples?
A) 0
B) 1
C) 2
D) 3
E) 4
27. Which of these statements best explains how genes and proteins are related?
A) Genes are segments of DNA that code for proteins.
B) Proteins are segments of DNA that code for genes.
C) Genes are segments of proteins that code for DNA.
D) Proteins are the building blocks of genes.
E) Genes are the building blocks of proteins.

28. Which of the following could not be a sequence of RNA?
A) GCGUUU
B) UAUGCG
C) ATGCGT

Page 6 of 17

D) AUGCGU
E) AAACUG
29. Information stored in DNA is transferred from the nucleus to the cytoplasm of eukaryotic cells in the
form of ________.
A) lipids
B) DNA
C) RNA
D) proteins
E) carbohydrates
30. Researchers are studying slider turtles. Slider turtles hatch on the beach and travel to the sea. The
researchers discover that the larger baby turtles were more likely to survive than the smaller baby turtles.
They hypothesized that the larger turtles could move more quickly toward the water than the smaller
turtles, and therefore, the larger turtles reduced their exposure to predators.
The survival advantage for the larger baby turtles is a result of __________________________.
A) natural selection
B) genetic engineering
C) diversity
D) artificial selection
E) migration
31. The theory of natural selection states that
____________________________________________________________________.
A) some live and some die in each generation.
B) only the largest and strongest survive.
C) random assortment of genes results in better characteristics in the following generations.
D) the best adapted individuals survive and reproduce, contributing the most genes to the next
generation.
E) individuals that mutate in response to their environment will survive.
32. Inheritable mutations, which may allow a population to evolve are produced
______________________________.
A) by chance
B) as a response to environmental
C) as a response to selection pressure
D) by natural selection
E) by artificial selection

33.When a biologist studies the way organisms interact with each other and with their environment, they
are studying their____________________.
A) physiology
B) anatomy
C) chemistry
D) genetics

E) ecology
34. In a deciduous oak forest of the American northeast, one example of an abiotic component of the
ecosystem would be ____________________________.
A) worms in the soil that feed on plant roots
B) worms in the soil that feed on dead organic matter
C) sunlight that filters through the canopy
D) animals such as deer that migrate through the forest but do not eat in the forest
E) plants and animals in the same area
35. Which of the following activities decreases greenhouse gases in the atmosphere?
A) Cutting down trees.
B) Driving gasoline powered vehicles.
C) Using electricity from coal-powered plants.
D) Planting trees.
E) Heating your home.

36. If a bird eats an insect that ate a plant, the bird would be considered a(n)
_______________________.
A) autotroph
B) primary producer
C) primary consumer
D) secondary consumer
E) tertiary consumer
37. When energy is converted from one form to another, some of the original energy is lost as
________.
A) water
B) heat
C) electrons
D) mechanical energy
E) electrical energy
38. The statement best describes the relationship between plants and animals on earth is
______________________.
A) plants produce O2 and sugars from CO2
B) animals produce CO2 and H2O from sugars and O2
C) plants produce O2 and sugars and animals produce CO2 and H2O
D) animals produce O2 and sugars and plants produce CO2 and H2O

39. What do plants and animals have in common?
A) They are both heterotrophic.
B) They are both autotrophic.
C) They are both prokaryotic.
D) They are both eukaryotic.
E) The are both hydrophobic

40. The innermost electron shell of an atom holds a maximum of ________ electrons.
A) 2
B) 4
C) 6
D) 8
E) 10
41. Elephants travel long distances in search of food. Using vibrations felt in the ground, family
members traveling separately can communicate with each other. Based on your knowledge of
evolution, the ability to communicate over long distances probably developed
___________________________.
A) slowly over millions of years
B) by accident
C) over a ten year period
D) as a strategy to decrease reproduction
E) as a way to communicate with humans
42. The plasma membrane is _____________________.
A) completely permeable
B) selectively permeable
C) impermeable
D) found only in eukaryotic cells
E) found only in prokaryotic cells
43. Humans are composed of ______ cells.
A) prokaryotic
B) bacterial
C) eukaryotic
D) viral
E) fungal
44. Certain fungi that are important in nutrient recycling because they release nutrients from dead
organisms back into the ecosystem are _____________________.
A) producers
B) consumers
C) decomposers
D) recyclers
E) feeders

45. Humans are ______.
A) ecosystems
B) consumers
C) decomposers
D) cells
E) producers
46. One of the end products of respiration is _____________.

A) glucose
B) starch
C) sucrose
D) water
E) oxygen
47.A protein molecule which is denatured, has __________________________.
A) split into smaller molecules
B) changed its shape
C) combined with another molecule
D) been diluted..
48. ___________________ is the term that refers to the energy-requiring movement of a substance
across a biological membrane .
A) facilitated diffusion
B) active transport
C) osmosis
D) diffusion
E) endocytosis
49. All of the following are characteristics of life except _____________________________________.
A) growth
B) homeostasis
C) movement
D) reproduction
E) energy use
50. In the scientific method, a hypothesis __________.
A) is a statement of fact
B) makes a prediction that can be tested
C) is usually proven to be correct
D) can only be tested once
E) all of these

51. Think of the cell as a factory, in which the organelles are specialized sites of production. All cells have
a power plant, the mitochondrion. Plant cells have an additional reactor for the production of usable
energy. It is called the _____.
A) golgi body
B) rough endoplasmic reticulum
C) central vacuole
D) vesicle
E) chloroplast
52.

You have formulated a hypothesis that light is necessary for seed germination.

To test your hypothesis, one set of lettuce seeds is placed in light with warm
temperatures and adequate moisture. Another set of identical seeds is placed in
the dark under the same set of conditions. The control in the experiment is
(a) seeds in the dark
(b) seeds in the light
(c) warm temperature
(d) adequate moisture
(e) germination rate

53.
A group of medical researchers recently tested the effects of a cholesterol-lowering medication,
Drug A on men who had high blood levels of cholesterol. The researchers did the following experiment
and obtained the indicated results. One group of 150 men took a tablet containing 40 mg of Drug A for 90
days; 120 of this group decreased their blood levels of cholesterol by at least 10 %. Another group of 150
men was given a tablet with no added Drug A for 90 days; 25 of these men decreased their blood levels
of cholesterol by at least 10%.
Which of the following is the most reasonable and accurate conclusion based on
results obtained in this experiment?
A) Drug A is good for men
B) Drug A is found in the blood of men
C) men taking tablets supplemented with Drug A will show a decrease in cholesterol
levels in the blood
D) men taking tablets supplemented with Drug A will show an increase in cholesterol
levels in the blood
E) blood levels of cholesterol are not affected by oral supplementation of Drug A
54.

The sexually transmissible disease gonorrhea has become increasingly resistant
to treatment with antibiotics. What is the most likely scientific explanation?
(a) The gonorrhea bacteria learned to avoid antibiotics
(b) The gonorrhea bacteria changed their genes when they sensed antibiotics
(c) Antibiotic-sensitive gonorrhea bacteria died out, but antibiotic-resistant gonorrhea
bacteria have flourished and persisted
(d) The antibiotic increased the mutation rate in the gonorrhea bacteria
(e) both b and d

55.

Which statement best describes the relationship between plants and animals on earth?
(a) Plants produce O2 and sugars from CO2
(b) Animals produce CO2 and H2O from sugars and O2
(c) Plants produce O2 and sugars and animals produce CO2 and H2O
(d) Animals produce O2 and sugars and plants produce CO2 and H2O

56.
A researcher planted seeds from four types of wheat (Types A, B, C, and D) in a greenhouse to
determine which type of wheat grew fastest. The plants were grown for 10 days and measured. The
results are shown below. Choose the data set that demonstrates that Type C wheat grew the fastest.
1

(a) A = 20 cm, B = 11 cm, C= 5 cm, D= 2 cm.

Page 11 of 17

2
3
4
5

(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)

A = 2 cm, B = 5 cm, C= 1 cm, D= 2 cm.
A = 22 cm, B = 11 cm, C= 25 cm, D= 4 cm.
A = 30 cm, B = 12 cm, C= 28 cm, D= 1 cm.
A = 21 cm, B = 12 cm, C= 20 cm, D= 15 cm.

Use the following information to answer questions 57 & 58 below. A group of medical researchers
recently investigated the effects of Drug X on lowering blood pressure in a group of hypertensive middleaged women. The researchers did the following experiment and obtained the indicated results: One
group of 150 women took a tablet containing Drug X for 3 weeks 95 of these women decreased their
blood pressure by at least 10% (three women from this group dropped out of the study). Another group of
150 women was given a tablet with no added Drug X for 3 weeks 10 of these women decreased their
blood pressure by at least 10% (two women from this group dropped out of the study).
57. Which of the following was the control group in this experiment?
a. the group of participants that received tablets containing Drug X.
b. the group of participants that received tablets that did not contain Drug X
c. the number of participants in each group at the beginning of the experiment
d. the number of participants in each group at the end of the experiment
e. the amount of Drug X contained in the tablet
58. Which of the following is the most reasonable and accurate conclusion based on the results
obtained in this experiment?
a. Drug X is good for hypertensive women.
b. Drug X is good for both men and women.
c. Hypertensive women receiving Drug X for 3 weeks may show a decrease in blood
pressure.
d. Hypertensive women receiving Drug X for 3 weeks may show an increase in blood
pressure.
e. Drug X has no effect on blood pressure.
59.A proton has ____ charge.
a. no
b. a neutral

c. a negative
d. a positive

60.Electrons are located
a. in the core of an atom.
b. only in complex molecules.
c. in a shell that surrounds the atom s core.
d. in both the core and inner shell of an atom.

************************************************************************************************************
MATCHING SECTION #1
MATCHING SECTION INSTRUCTIONS: Read all instructions carefully. Please answer all
questions. Each question is worth 1 point. This Matching section is worth 10 points.
**Do not enter your answers here.** Type in the letter you select from the right column as
the best answer on the Answer Sheet provided by your instructor.
TERM or CONCEPT

Definition/Association

1. ATP (adenosine triphosphate)
2. chromosome
3. crossing over
4. gamete
5. gene
6. germ cell
7.meiosis
8. mitosis
9. translation
10. transcription

A. DNA molecule with attached proteins
B. a haploid cell that combines with another
haploid cell during fertilization
C. a specific portion of a chromosome that contains
information for a particular inherited trait
D. a type of cell whose primary function is the
formation of gametes for sexual reproduction
E. an interaction during meiosis in which
chromatids exchange segments; results in genetic
recombination
F. nucleotide that drives most energy-requiring
metabolic reactions
G. the process in which ribosomes synthesize
proteins using the mRNA transcript
H. the synthesis of mRNA from a DNA template
I. the type of cell division which is used in asexual
reproduction and tissue growth and repair
J. the type of cell division responsible for gamete
formation and sexual reproduction

MATCHING SECTION #2
MATCHING SECTION INSTRUCTIONS: Read all instructions carefully. Please answer all
questions. Each question is worth 1 point. This Matching section is worth 10 points.
**Do not enter your answers here.** Type in the letter you select from the right column as
the best answer on the Answer Sheet provided by your instructor.
TERM or CONCEPT
1. microtubules
2. chloroplasts

Definition/Association

A. contain enzymes for intracellular digestion
B. are primary cellular structures (or components)
where proteins are assembled

3. Golgi bodies
4. DNA molecules
5. RNA molecules
6. central vacuoles
7. lysosomes
8. mitochondria
9. nucleoli
10. ribosomes
C. package cellular secretions for export
D. extract energy stored in carbohydrates;
synthesize ATP; produce water and carbon dioxide
E. synthesize subunits that will be assembled into
two part ribosomes in the cytoplasm
F. translate hereditary instructions into specific
proteins
G. increase cell surface area; store substances
H. encode hereditary information
I. help distribute chromosomes to the new cells
during cell division
J. convert light energy to chemical energy stored in
the chemical bonds of glucose or starch

SHORT ANSWER SECTION
Complete ALL questions in this Short Answer Section
INSTRUCTIONS: Each question is worth 5 points. Total points for this section is 20
points.
**Do not enter your answers here.** Type your answers into the Answer Sheet provided
by your instructor.

1) Lithops, also called Stoneplants, are a type of plant that resembles little stones. These
plants have the ability to blend in with there surrounding, which affords them protection
from predators. If you were in an area containing Lithops, describe four characteristics you could identify
to distinguish these plants from the stones they mimic.
2) A population of grasshoppers in the Kansas prairie has two color phenotypes, green and
brown. Typically, the prairie receives adequate water to maintain healthy, green grass.
Assume a bird that eats grasshoppers moves into the prairie. How will this affect natural
selection of the grasshoppers? How might this change in a drought year?
3) DNA and RNA are similar yet distinct components of the cell. Describe three differences
between RNA and DNA with respect to their chemical composition and structure. Provide a
detailed description of each characteristic you chose in your response.
4) Give an example of how human activities can change the environment.

ESSAY SECTION
Complete ALL questions in this Essay Section
INSTRUCTIONS: Each question is worth 10 points. Total points for this section is 50
points.
**Do not enter your answers here.** Type your answers into the Answer Sheet provided
by your instructor.
REQUIRED QUESTIONS

1. Before bringing a new drug to the marketplace, extensive testing is done on the drug by
administering the drug to large numbers of individuals. Explain the importance of the scientific
method, sample size, controls and variable in the drug evaluation process.

2. List the four large molecules of life. Identify their composition and structure, (in detail) and
describe one function they perform in the cell.

3. How can you explain the occurrence of birth defects (caused by altered genes) in children
and grandchildren of WWII atomic bomb victims, when the victims themselves were only mildly
affected?

4. During the past 50 years, more than 200 species of insects that attack crop plants have
become highly resistant to DDT and other pesticides. Based on what you have learned in this
class regarding evolution, explain the rapid and widespread evolution of resistance. Now that
DDT has been banned in the US, what do you expect to happen to levels of resistance to DDT
among insect populations?

5. Water is crucial for life as we know it. One of the most important characteristics of water is its
ability to act as a solvent. Explain why water is such a good solvent for polar and charged
molecules.

final exam 497136

Identify the choice that best completes the statement or answers the question.

1 The commonly accepted goal of the MNC is to:
A) maximize short-term earnings.
B) maximize shareholder wealth.
C) minimize risk.
D) A and C.
E) maximize international sales.

2 For the MNC, agency costs are typically:
A) non-existent.
B) larger than agency costs of a small purely domestic firm.
C) smaller than agency costs of a small purely domestic firm.
D) the same as agency costs of a small purely domestic firm.

3 Which of the following could reduce agency problems for an MNC?
A) stock options as managerial compensation.
B) hostile takeover threat.
C) investor monitoring.
D) all of the above are forms of corporate control that could reduce agency problems for an MNC.

4 The valuation of an MNC should rise when an event causes the expected cash flows from foreign to ____ and when foreign currencies denominating these cash flows are expected to ____.
A) decrease; appreciate
B) increase; appreciate
C) decrease; depreciate
D) increase; depreciate

5 Which of the following theories identifies specialization as a reason for international business?

A) theory of comparative advantage.
B) imperfect markets theory.
C) product cycle theory.
D) none of the above

6 Which of the following theories identifies the non-transferability of resources as a reason for international business?
A) theory of comparative advantage.
B) imperfect markets theory.
C) product cycle theory.
D) none of the above

7 Which of the following theories suggests that firms seek to penetrate new markets over time?
A) theory of comparative advantage.
B) imperfect markets theory.
C) product cycle theory.
D) none of the above

8 Which of the following industries would most likely take advantage of lower costs in some less developed foreign countries?

A) assembly line production.
B) specialized professional services.
C) nuclear missile planning.

D) planning for more sophisticated computer technology.

9 Due to the risks involved in international business, firms should:
A) only consider international business in major countries.
B) maintain international business to no more than 20% of total business.
C) maintain international business to no more than 35% of total business.
D) none of the above

10 The agency costs of an MNC are likely to be lower if it:
A) scatters its subsidiaries across many foreign countries.
B) increases its volume of international business.
C) uses a centralized management style.
D) A and B.

11 An MNC may be more exposed to agency problems if most of its shares are held by:
A) a few mutual funds
B) a widely dispersed set of individual investors
C) a few pension funds
D) all of the above would prevent agency problems

12 The Sarbanes-Oxley Act improves corporate governance of MNCs because it:
A) makes executives more accountable for verifying financial statements
B) eliminates stock options as a form of compensation
C) ties executive compensation to firm performance
D) places a limit on the amount of funds that managers can spend

13 MNCs can improve their internal control process by all of the following, except:
A) establishing a centralized data base of information
B) ensuring that all data are reported consistently among subsidiaries
C) ensuring that the MNC always borrows from countries where interest rates are lowest
D) using a system that checks internal data for unusual discrepancies

14 In comparing exporting to direct foreign investment (DFI), an exporting operation will likely incur ____ fixed production costs and ____ transportation costs than DFI.
A) higher; higher
B) higher; lower
C) lower; lower
D) lower; higher

15 Which of the following is an example of direct foreign investment?
A) exporting to a country.
B) establishing licensing arrangements in a country.
C) purchasing existing companies in a country.
D) investing directly (without brokers) in foreign stocks.

16 ____ are most commonly classified as a direct foreign investment.
A) Foreign acquisitions
B) Purchases of international stocks
C) Licensing agreements
D) Exporting transactions

17 Which of the following is not mentioned in the text as an additional risk resulting from international business?

A) exchange rate fluctuations.
B) political risk.
C) interest rate risk.
D) exposure to foreign economies.

18 Licensing obligates a firm to provide ____, while franchising obligates a firm to provide ____.

A) a specialized sales or service strategy; its technology

B) its technology; a specialized sales or service strategy
C) its technology; its technology
D) a specialized sales or service strategy; a specialized sales or service strategy
E) its technology; an initial investment

19 Which of the following is not a way in which agency problems can be reduced through corporate control?
A) executive compensation.
B) threat of hostile takeover.
C) acquisition of a foreign subsidiary.
D) monitoring by large shareholders.

20 International trade:
A) is a relatively conservative approach to foreign market penetration.
B) entails minimal risk.
C) does not require large amount of investment.
D) all of the above.

21 Assume that an American firm wants to engage in international business without major investment in the foreign country. Which method is least appropriate in this situation?
A) International Trade
B) Licensing
C) Franchising
D) Direct foreign investment

22 The MNC’s value depends on all of the following, except:

A) MNC’s required rate of return
B) Amount of MNC’s cash flows in particular currency
C) The exchange rate at which cash flows are converted to dollars
D) The value of MNC depends on all of the above factors

23 Which of the following is not an example of political risk?
A) Government may impose taxes on subsidiary
B) Government may impose barriers on subsidiary
C) Consumers may boycott the MNC
D) Consumers’ income levels will decrease, thus decreasing consumption.

24 International trade generally results in ____ exposure to international political risk and ____ exposure to international economic conditions, when compared to other methods of international business.
A) higher; lower
B) higher; higher
C) lower; higher
D) lower; lower

25 Assume that Boca Co. wants to expand its business to Japan, and wants complete control over the operations in Japan. Which method of international business is most appropriate for Boca Co?

A) Joint venture
B) Licensing
C) Partial acquisition of existing Japanese firm
D) Establishment of Japanese subsidiary

26 Assume that Live Co. has expected cash flows of $200,000 from domestic operations, SF200,000 from Swiss operations, and 150,000 euros from Italian operations at the end of the year. The Swiss franc’s value and euro’s value are expected to be $.83 and $1.29 respectively, at the end this year. What are the expected dollar cash flows of Live Co?

A) $200,000
B) $559,500
C) $582,500

D) $393,500

27 Saller Co. has a subsidiary in Mexico. The expected cash flows in pesos to be received in the future from this subsidiary have not changed since last month, but the valuation of Saller Co. has declined since last month. What could’ve caused this decline in value?
A) A weaker Mexican economy
B) Lower Mexican interest rates
C) Depreciation of the Mexican peso
D) Appreciation of the Mexican peso.

28 Jensen Co. wants to establish a new subsidiary in Mexico that will sell computers to Mexican customers and remit earnings back to the U.S. parent. The value of this project will be favorably affected if the value of the peso ____

while it establishes the new subsidiary and ____ when the subsidiary starts operations.
A) depreciates; appreciates
B) appreciates; appreciates
C) appreciates; depreciates
D) depreciates; depreciates

29 Livingston Co. has a subsidiary in Korea. The subsidiary reinvests half of its net cash flows into operations and remits half to the parent. Livingston’s expected cash flows from domestic business are $100,000 and the Korean subsidiary is expected to generate 100 million Korean won at the end of the year. The expected value of won is $.0012. What are the expected dollar cash flows of Livingston Co.?

A) $100,000
B) $200,000
C) $160,000
D) $60,000

30 The goal of a multinational corporation (MNC) is
A) The minimization of taxes remitted from foreign subsidiaries.
B) The establishment of subsidiaries in any country where operations would provide a return over and above the cost of capital, even if better projects are available domestically.
C) The maximization of shareholder wealth.
D) The maximization of social benefits resulting from actions such as the employment of foreign managers.

31 Agency costs faced by multinational corporations (MNCs) may be larger than those faced by purely domestic firms because
A) Monitoring of managers located in foreign countries is more difficult.
B) Foreign subsidiary managers raised in different cultures may not follow uniform goals.
C) MNCs are relatively large.
D) All of the above
E) A and B only

32 Which of the following is not one of the more common methods used by MNCs to improve their internal control process?
A) Establishing a centralized database of information
B) Ensuring that all data are reported consistently among subsidiaries
C) Speeding the process by which all departments and all subsidiaries have access to the data that they need
D) Making executives more accountable for financial statements by personally verifying their accuracy
E) All of the above are common methods used by MNCs to improve their internal control process.
33 Which of the following is not mentioned in the text as a theory of international business?

A) Theory of Comparative Advantage

B) Imperfect Markets Theory
C) Product Cycle Theory
D) Globalization of Business Theory
E) All of the above are mentioned in the text as theories of international business

34 The most risky method(s) by which firms conduct international business is (are):
A) Franchising.
B) The acquisitions of existing operations.
C) The establishment of new subsidiaries.
D) All of the above
E) B and C only

35 The least risky method by which firms conduct international business is:
A) Franchising.
B) The acquisitions of existing operations.
C) International Trade.
D) The establishment of new subsidiaries.
E) Licensing

36 Which of the following does not constitute a form of direct foreign investment?
A) Franchising
B) International trade
C) Joint ventures
D) Acquisitions of existing operations
E) Establishment of new foreign subsidiaries

True/False

Indicate whether the statement is true or false.

1 A product cycle is the process by which a firm provides a specialized sales or service strategy, support assistance, and possibly an initial investment in the franchise in exchange for periodic fees.
A) True
B) False

2 Licensing is the process by which a firm provides its technology (copyrights, patents, trademarks, or trade names) in exchange for fees or some other specified benefits.

A) True
B) False

3 Franchising is the process by which national governments sell state owned operations to corporations and other investors.
A) True
B) False

4 The parent of MNC can implement compensation plans that directly reward the subsidiary managers for enhancing the value of the MNC.
A) True
B) False

5 If a publicly-traded MNC’s managers make poor decisions that reduce its value, it may encourage other firms to acquire it.
A) True
B) False

6 Institutional investors such as mutual funds or pension funds which have large holdings of an MNC’s stock do not normally want to take control of it and therefore have no influence over management of the MNC.

A) True
B) False

7 Imperfect markets represent conditions under which factors of production are immobile.
A) True
B) False

8 The Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX) was enacted in 2002 required MNCs and other firms to implement an internal reporting process that could be easily monitored by executives and the board of directors.
A) True
B) False

9 If markets were perfect, then labor and other costs of production would be perfectly stable (no movement across borders).

A) True
B) False

10 The valuation of an MNC is reduced if the required return on its investments in foreign countries is reduced.
A) True
B) False

11 The goal of a multinational corporation (MNC) is the maximization of shareholder wealth.
A) True
B) False

12 A centralized management style, where major decisions about a foreign subsidiary are made by the parent company, results in an increase in agency costs.
A) True
B) False

13 If a U.S. firm sets up a plant in Mexico to benefit from low cost labor, it will likely have a comparative advantage over other firms in Mexico that sell the same product.
A) True
B) False

14 Although MNCs may need to convert currencies occasionally, they do not face any exchange rate risk, as exchange rates are stable over time.

A) True
B) False

15 One of the most prevalent factors conflicting with the realization of the goal of an MNC is the existence of agency problems.

A) True
B) False

16 A centralized management style for an MNC results in relatively high agency costs.
A) True
B) False

17 The imperfect markets theory states that factors of production are somewhat immobile, allowing firms to capitalize on a foreign country’s resources.
A) True
B) False

18 If a U.S.-based MNC focused completely on importing, then its valuation would likely be adversely affected if most currencies were expected to appreciate against the dollar over time.

A) True
B) False

19 The acquisition of a foreign subsidiary is commonly considered by MNCs because the cost is less expensive than establishing a new subsidiary of the same size.
A) True
B) False

20 If a U.S.-based MNC focused completely on exporting, then its valuation would likely be adversely affected if most currencies were expected to appreciate against the dollar over time.
A) True
B) False

21 If markets were perfect, then labor and other costs of production would be easily transferable.
A) True
B) False

22 The valuation of MNC accounts for all the cash flows received by the foreign subsidiaries plus all the cash flows remitted by the subsidiaries.
A) True
B) False

23 A microeconomic perspective focuses on external forces such as economic conditions that can affect the value of an MNC.
A) True

B) False

24 Assume that an MNC has a subsidiary in Italy, which exports its products to various countries in Europe. Since all of the countries where it exports use Euro as their currency, this MNC is not subject to the exchange rate risk.

A) True
B) False

25 A decentralized management style of MNC results in relatively high agency costs.
A) True
B) False

26 The establishment of a new subsidiary is commonly considered by MNCs because the cost is less expensive than acquiring a foreign subsidiary of the same size.
A) True
B) False

27 A macroeconomic perspective focuses on the financial management decisions that affect the value of MNC.
A) True
B) False

28 An MNC will always use the same required rate of return in the valuation of foreign projects, as it would for its domestic projects.
A) True
B) False

29 A U.S.-based MNC has many foreign subsidiaries in Europe and does not expect to increase its investment there. Its value should increase if the value of the euro weakens over time.
A) True
B) False

30 If managers of foreign subsidiaries make decisions that maximize the values of their respective subsidiaries, they automatically maximize the value of the entire corporation.

A) True
B) False

31 A decentralized management style, where subsidiary managers make the relevant decisions regarding their subsidiary, may result in better decision making, as subsidiary managers are generally better informed about their subsidiary’s operations.

A) True
B) False

32 U.S.-based MNCs are typically not monitored by mutual funds and pension funds, as these institutions rarely hold stock in MNCs.
A) True
B) False

33 The Sarbanes-Oxley Act ensures a more transparent process for managers to report on the productivity and financial condition of their firm.
A) True
B) False

34 The Theory of Comparative Advantage begins by assuming that a given firm first becomes established in its home country and may subsequently penetrate foreign markets via geographic or product differentiation.

A) True
B) False

35 Under the Imperfect Markets Theory, it is assumed that factors of production are entirely mobile, so that firms can capitalize on a foreign country’s resources.
A) True
B) False

36 Under the Product Cycle Theory, foreign demand can be initially satisfied by exporting.
A) True
B) False

37 Licensing allows firms to use their technology in foreign markets without a major investment in foreign countries.
A) True
B) False

38 International trade is the most common form of direct foreign investment (DFI).
A) True
B) False

39 When the parent’s home currency is weak, remitted funds from foreign subsidiaries will convert to a smaller amount of the home currency.

A) True
B) False

40 A purely domestic firm may be affected by exchange rate fluctuations if it faces at least some foreign competition.

A) True
B) False

41 One form of an exposure to political risk is terrorism.
A) True
B) False

final exam 6168501 497137

1. The work-in-process inventory account of a manufacturing company shows a balance of $3,000 at the end of an accounting period. The job-cost sheets of the two incomplete jobs show charges of $500 and $300 for direct materials, and charges of $400 and $600 for direct labor. From this information, it appears that the company is using a predetermined overhead rate as a percentage of direct labor costs. What percentage is the rate?

2. The break-even point in dollar sales for Rice Company is $480,000 and the company s contribution margin ratio is 40 percent. If Rice Company desires a profit of $84,000, how much would sales have to total?

3. Williams Company s direct labor cost is 25 percent of its conversion cost. If the manufacturing overhead for the last period was $45,000 and the direct material cost was $25,000, how much is the direct labor cost?

4. Grading Company s cash and cash equivalents consist of cash and marketable securities. Last year the company s cash account decreased by $16,000 and its marketable securities account increased by $22,000. Cash provided by operating activities was $24,000. Net cash used for financing activities was $20,000. Based on this information, was the net cash flow from investing activities on the statement of cash flows a net increase or decrease? By how much?

5. Gladstone Footwear Corporation s flexible budget cost formula for supplies, a variable cost, is $2.82 per unit of output. The company s flexible budget performance report for last month showed an $8,140 unfavorable spending variance for supplies. During that month, 21,250 units were produced. Budgeted activity for the month had been 20,900 units. What is the actual cost per unit for indirect materials?

6. Lyons Company consists of two divisions, A and B. Lyons Company reported a contribution margin of $60,000 for Division A, and had a contribution margin ratio of 30 percent in Division B, when sales in Division B were $240,000. Net operating income for the company was $22,000 and traceable fixed expenses were $45,000. How much were Lyons Company s common fixed expenses?

7. Atlantic Company produces a single product. For the most recent year, the company s net operating income computed by the absorption costing method was $7,800, and its net operating income computed by the variable costing method was $10,500. The company s unit product cost was $15 under variable costing and $24 under absorption costing. If the ending inventory consisted of 1,460 units, how many units must have been in the beginning inventory.

8. Black Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The company s ending work-inprocess inventory consists of 6,000 units, 75 percent complete with respect to materials and 50 percent complete with respect to labor and overhead. If the total dollar value of the inventory is $80,000 and the cost per equivalent unit for labor and overhead is $6.00, what is the cost per equivalent unit for materials?

9. At Overland Company, maintenance cost is exclusively a variable cost that varies directly with machine-hours. The performance report for July showed that actual maintenance costs totaled $11,315 and that the associated rate variance was $146 unfavorable. If 7,300 machine-hours were actually worked during July, what is the budgeted maintenance cost per machine-hour?

10. The cost of goods sold in a retail store totaled $650,000. Fixed selling and administrative expenses totaled $115,000 and variable selling and administrative expenses were $420,000. If the store s contribution margin totaled $590,000, how much were the sales?

11. Denny Corporation is considering replacing a technologically obsolete machine with a new state-of-the-art numerically controlled machine. The new machine would cost $600,000 and would have a 10-year useful life. Unfortunately, the new machine would have no salvage value. The new machine would cost $20,000 per year to operate and maintain, but would save $125,000 per year in labor and other costs. The old machine can be sold now for scrap for $50,000. What percentage is the simple rate of return on the new machine rounded to the nearest tenth of a percent? (Ignore income taxes in this problem.)

12. Lounsberry Inc. regularly uses material O55P and currently has in stock 375 liters of the material, for which it paid $2,700 several weeks ago. If this were to be sold as is on the open market as surplus material, it would fetch $6.35 per liter. New stocks of the material can be purchased on the open market for $7.20 per liter, but it must be purchased in lots of 1,000 liters. You ve been asked to determine the relevant cost of 900 liters of the material to be used in a job for a customer. What is the relevant cost of the 900 liters of material O55P?

13. Harwichport Company has a current ratio of 3.0 and an acid-test ratio of 2.8. Current assets equal $210,000, of which $5,000 consists of prepaid expenses. The remainder of current assets consists of cash, accounts receivable, marketable securities, and inventory. What is the amount of Harwichport Company s inventory?

14. Tolla Company is estimating the following sales for the first six months of next year:

January $350,000

February $300,000

March $320,000

April $410,000

May $450,000

June $470,000

Sales at Tolla are normally collected as 70 percent in the month of sale, 25 percent in the month following the sale, and the remaining 5 percent being uncollectible. Also, customers paying in the month of sale are given a 2 percent discount. Based on this information, how much cash should Tolla expect to collect during the month of April?

15. Trauscht Corporation has provided the following data from its activity-based costing system:

Activity Cost Pool Total Cost Total Activity

Assembly $704,880 44,000 machine-hours

Processing orders $91,428 1,900 orders

Inspection $117,546 1,950 inspection-hours

The company makes 360 units of product P23F a year, requiring a total of 725 machine-hours, 85 orders, and 45 inspection-hours per year. The product s direct materials cost is $42.30 per unit and its direct labor cost is $14.55 per unit. The product sells for $132.10 per unit. According to the activity-based costing system, what is the product margin for product P23F?

16. Williams Company s direct labor cost is 30 percent of its conversion cost. If the manufacturing overhead for the last period was $59,500 and the direct materials cost was $37,000, what is the direct labor cost?

17. In a recent period, 13,000 units were produced, and there was a favorable labor efficiency variance of $23,000. If 40,000 labor-hours were worked and the standard wage rate was $13 per labor-hour, what would be the standard hours allowed per unit of output?

18. The balance in White Company s work-in-process inventory account was $15,000 on August 1 and $18,000 on August 31. The company incurred $30,000 in direct labor cost during August and requisitioned $25,000 in raw materials (all direct material). If the sum of the debits to the manufacturing overhead account total $28,000 for the month, and if the sum of the credits totaled $30,000, then was Finished Goods debited or credited? By how much?

19. A company has provided the following data:

Sales 4,000 units

Sales price $80 per unit

Variable cost $50 per unit

Fixed cost $30,000

If the dollar contribution margin per unit is increased by 10 percent, total fixed cost is decreased by 15 percent, and all other factors remain the same, will net operating income increase or decrease? By how much?

20. For the current year, Paxman Company incurred $175,000 in actual manufacturing overhead cost. The manufacturing overhead account showed that overhead was overapplied in the amount of $9,000 for the year. If the predetermined overhead rate was $8.00 per direct labor-hour, how many hours were worked during the year?

accounting i final exam 497138

  • Final Exam !!

1.The Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System (MACRS) specifies which of the following depreciation methods for buildings

A. 150% declining-balance.

B. Double-declining-balance.

C. Straight line.

D. Buildings are not depreciable assets.

2. The Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System (MACRS) specifies which of the following depreciation methods for land

A. 150% declining-balance.

B. Double-declining-balance.

C. Straight line.

D. Land is not a depreciable asset.

3. If an organization has an obligation to pay $5,000 to a supplier two years from now, the present value of the obligation:

A. is less than $5,000.

B. is $5,000.

C. is more than $5,000.

D. could be calculated using an annuity factor from the present value tables.

4. Depreciation, in accounting, is a process that results in:

A. depreciable assets being reported in the balance sheet at their fair market value.

B. accumulating cash for the replacement of the asset.

C. an accurate measurement of the economic usefulness of an asset.

D. spreading the cost of an asset over its useful life to the entity.

Use the below present value tables for problems 5, 6 and 7

5. The present value of $3,000 to be received in 7 years at 10% is:

A. $616.22

B. $1,539.60

C. $3,000.00

D. $5,845.67

6. The present value of $3,000 to be received every year for 9 years, at 10%, is:

A. $7,073.80

B. $12,273.00

C. $17,277.00

D. $27,000.00

7. The present value of an obligation of $4,000 payable in 7 years at 8% is:

A. $1,760

B. $2,334

C. $3,206

D. $3,680

8. A particular common stock has an annual cash dividend of $2.00 per share and is predicted to have a market value of $30 per share 5 years from now. Assuming a discount rate of 10%, a fair market price for the stock today is:

A. $20.00

B. $26.21

C. $37.58

D. $56.21

9. Psyche Company wants to acquire Trim Company. Trim’s ROI has been above average for its industry; net income has averaged $70,000 a year more than the industry average. These “excess” earnings are expected to continue at this amount for 5 years. Assuming a discount rate of 8%, how much goodwill will arise from Psyches’ purchase of Trim

A. $40,836

B. $88,157

C. $279,489

D. $350,000

10. Leasehold is an example of which of the following types of assets

A. Current asset.

B. Property, plant and equipment.

C. Goodwill.

D. Intangible asset.

11. The principal challenge to calculating depletion is estimating:

A. the cost of the asset.

B. the salvage value of the exploration equipment.

C. the demand for the product.

D. the quantity of material to be recovered.

12. Long-lived, intangible assets such as leasehold improvements, patents, and copyrights are all subject to:

A. depreciation

B. amortization

C. depletion

D. consolidation

13. When a depreciable asset is sold:

A. a gain arises if the sales proceeds exceed the net book value.

B. a loss arises if the sales proceeds exceed the net book value.

C. any cash received results in a gain.

D. depreciation expense is adjusted so there is no gain or loss.

14. Goodwill is an asset that arises because the present value of an acquired company’s estimated future earnings, discounted at the acquiring firm’s ROI:

A. is less than the fair market value of the net assets of the acquired company.

B. is more than the fair market value of the net assets of the acquired company.

C. is more than the fair market value of the net assets of the acquiring company.

D. is less than the fair market value of the net assets of the acquiring company.

15. The intangible asset “goodwill:”

A. represents the management team’s assessment of its value to the company.

B. may arise when one company purchases another company.

C. arises because the market value of a company’s assets is greater than cost.

D. all of the above are correct.

16. Many current liabilities are affected by accrual accounting entries. This happens because:

A. liabilities are usually paid when they are incurred.

B. accrual accounting involves recognizing liabilities before they are paid.

C. the only way to reduce a liability account balance is with an adjusting entry.

D. accrual accounting frequently involves recognizing liabilities before they are incurred.

17. Which of the following is not usually associated with bonds

A. Coupon rate.

B. Maturity value.

C. Face amount.

D. Maturity rate.

18. An Accounts Payable could result from which of the following transactions

A. Purchasing accounts for cash.

B. Purchasing property, plant and equipment on credit.

C. Purchasing goods and services from suppliers on credit.

D. All of the above.

19. The current liability for Wages Payable (or Accrued Payroll) represents the:

A. gross pay earned by employees for which they have not yet been paid.

B. net pay earned by employees for which they have not yet been paid.

C. employer’s federal and state payroll tax obligation.

D. employer’s liability for various with holdings taken out of the gross pay earned by employees.

20. The financial leverage characteristic of long-term debt results in:

A. a reduction of the risk that creditors will not be paid.

B. a magnification of ROE relative to what it would be without long-term debt.

C. a magnification of ROI relative to what it would be without long-term debt.

D. the deductibility, for income tax purposes, of dividends to stockholders.

21. When a company issues a bond at a premium:

A. the company is more profitable than most companies in its industry.

B. investors perceive the bond to be a very safe investment.

C. the investors’ interest income will be less than the interest received each year.

D. the investors’ interest income will be more than the interest received each year.

22. Which of the following is not sometimes associated with bonds

A. Debenture.

B. Callable.

C. Cumulative.

D. Convertible

23. If the market price of a bond exceeds its face amount:

A. the coupon rate is less than the market interest rate.

B. the coupon rate is more than the market interest rate.

C. the company’s ROI and working capital have been increasing over time.

D. the maturity rate has been declining.

24. The market value of a bond is the sum of the present value of future interest payments and the present value of the amount to be repaid at maturity, discounted at:

A. the market rate.

B. the coupon rate.

C. the dividend rate.

D. the prime rate.

25. Financial leverage refers to which of the following

A. The difference between the rate of return earned on assets (ROI) and the rate of return earned on owners’ equity (ROE).

B. The difference between the rate of return earned on current assets and the rate of return earned on retained earnings.

C. The leverage a firm obtains from increasing production.

D. Decreasing fixed costs per unit by increasing production.

26. When a company issues a bond at a discount:

A. the company will pay less than the face amount of the bond at its maturity.

B. the company will pay more than the face amount of the bond at its maturity.

C. the company’s interest expense will be less than the interest paid each year.

D. the company’s interest expense will be more than the interest paid each year.

27. When bonds are issued at a premium:

A. interest expense on the bonds will be less than the interest paid.

B. interest expense on the bonds will be more than the interest paid.

C. the bonds are sold for less than their face amount.

D. the coupon interest rate is less than the market interest rate.

28. Which of the following is (are) a true statement(s) pertaining to bonds

A. Bonds can be sold at a discount, par, or payable.

B. Bonds can be sold at a discount, par, or premium.

C. The SEC sets the market price of a bond.

D. The issuing firm sets the price of a bond.

E. None of the above.

29. Which of the following is true regarding bond discounts and/or premiums

A. Bond discount is amortized but bond premium is not.

B. Bond premium is amortized but bond discount is not.

C. Neither bond discount nor premium is amortized.

D. Both bond discount and premium are amortized.

30. The amortization of bond discount:

A. increases the cash paid to bondholders for interest.

B. results in bond interest expense being greater than the interest paid to bondholders.

C. results in bond interest expense being less than the interest paid to bondholders.

D. reduces the carrying value of bonds payable on the balance sheet.

31. Factors that usually affect retained earnings directly include:

A. net income or loss, and dividends.

B. extraordinary items and losses from discontinued operations.

C. stock dividends and gains or losses from the sale of treasury stock.

D. net income or loss, and the issuance of stock at an amount in excess of par value.

32. In comparison to the owners’ equity section of a corporation’s balance sheet, owners’ equity of a proprietorship or partnership:

A. normally does not make a distinction between invested capital and retained earnings.

B. normally uses “Capital” accounts for each individual owner, rather than a “Retained Earnings” account for all of the owners.

C. normally uses a “Drawings” account for each individual owner, rather than a “Dividends” account for all of the owners.

D. all of the above.

33. The declaration of a cash dividend by the directors results in:

A. a decrease in cash and a decrease in retained earnings.

B. a decrease in retained earnings and an increase in current liabilities.

C. a decrease in net income and a decrease in cash.

D. a decrease in net income and an increase in current liabilities.

34. In most states, par value of issued shares represents:

A. Legal capital.

B. No par capital.

C. Noncontrolling capital.

D. Corporate capital.

35. The term preemptive right pertains to which of the following

A. The Board of Directors rights in liquidation.

B. Present shareholders right to purchase shares from any additional share issuances.

C. Present shareholders right to purchase treasury shares when reissued.

D. Preferred stockholders right to dividends.

36. Balance sheet disclosures for preferred stock include all of the following except:

A. The number of shares issued.

B. The number of shares outstanding.

C. The liquidating or redemption value.

D. The credit or market value.

E. The number of shares authorized.

37. The declaration date pertains to:

A. The date used to determine who receives dividends.

B. The date on which the board of directors declares it’s going to liquidate the firm.

C. The date on which the board of directors declares a dividend.

D. The date a dividend is paid.

38. Fred Jones owns 56 shares of the Robust Corporation’s stock. Robust announces a 3 for 2 stock split. How many shares will Fred have after this split

A. 178 shares.

B. 112 shares.

C. 84 shares.

D. 56 shares.

39. Braco has 40,000 shares of $100 par value common stock outstanding, and 10,000 shares in the treasury. The number of additional shares that would be issued in a 5% stock dividend is:

A. 500

B. 1,000

C. 1,500

D. 2,000

40. When a stock dividend is declared and issued:

A. total paid-in capital does not change.

B. total owners’ equity does not change.

C. the balance in the retained earnings account is decreased by the par value of the shares issued in the dividend.

D. total paid-in capital is decreased by the market value of the shares issued in the dividend.

41. When a company splits its common stock 3 for 1:

A. total paid-in capital increases by a factor of 3.

B. the balance in the retained earnings account is decreased by the market value of the shares issued.

C. the market value of the company’s stock falls by two-thirds.

D. the shareholders are assured of receiving larger cash dividends.

42. The principal reason for a company having a common stock split is to:

A. increase the total cash dividends paid to stockholders.

B. capitalize retained earnings.

C. decrease total owners’ equity.

D. decrease the market value per share of common stock.

43. When a firm purchases its own shares for the treasury:

A. total owners’ equity is decreased.

B. total owners’ equity is increased.

C. the balance in the retained earnings account is decreased.

D. paid-in capital is decreased.

44. If a firm sells treasury stock for more than its cost:

A. a gain is recognized in the income statement.

B. the balance in the retained earnings account is increased.

C. additional paid-in capital is increased.

D. total owners’ equity does not change.

45. The statement of changes in retained earnings for the year shows:

A. the retained earnings balance at the beginning of the year.

B. amounts received from the sale of additional common stock during the year.

C. extraordinary gains or losses during the year.

D. the effect of a stock split during the year.

46. Which of the following is an accurate statement regarding a statement of cash flows

A. Only cash items that affect the income statement are included.

B. Only material cash items that affect the income statement are included.

C. Material non-cash transactions are included.

D. Immaterial financing activities that affect cash do not need to be included.

E. None of the above.

47. In the statement of cash flows, the amount of depreciation and amortization expense is added back to net income because:

A. these expenses do not affect cash, but were subtracted in the determination of net income.

B. these expenses affect investing activities, not operating activities.

C. the cash disbursements for these accrued expenses will be made in a future period.

D. these expenses are recognized for accounting purposes, but they do not represent economic costs.

48. In the statement of cash flows, an increase in the accounts receivable balance from the beginning of the period to the end of the period would:

A. be added to net income because this represents earned revenues that have not been collected.

B. be subtracted from net income because this represents earned revenue provided by operating earnings.

C. be added to net income because this means that revenues were less than cash collected.

D. be subtracted from net income because this means that revenues were more than cash collected.

49. Revenue may be recognized:

A. from the sale of a company’s own common stock.

B. if a company trades inventory at its usual sale value for newspaper advertising.

C. if management believes the market value of land held for future development rises.

D. in 2010 from the sale of subscriptions of a magazine to be published in 2011.

50. The term, “realization,” in revenue recognition refers to which of the following

A. The entity has completed, or substantially completed, the activities it must perform to be entitled to the revenue benefits.

B. The product or service has been exchanged for cash, claims to cash, or an asset that is readily convertible to a known amount of cash or claims to cash.

C. The entity has received an irrevocable order for goods or services.

D. Cash has been received with an irrevocable order for goods or services.

E. None of the above.

ESSAY:

1.Use the appropriate information from the data provided below for the year ended December 31, 2009 to calculate the following:

a. Operating income
b. Income from continuing operations
c. Net income

Cost of goods sold $117,000
General and administrative expenses 48,000
Net cash provided by financing activities 69,000
Dividends paid 16,000
Extraordinary loss from a flood,net of
tax savings of $32,000 74,000
Income tax expenses 11,000
Other Selling expenses 26,000
Net sales 278,000
Advertising expenses 39,000
Accounts receivable 33,000

2. The balance sheet caption for common stock is:

Common stock, $10 par value, 7,000,000 shares authorized, 5,700,000 shares issued, 5,500,000 shares outstanding.

(a.) Calculate the dollar amount that will be presented opposite of this caption.

(b.) Calculate the total amount of a cash dividend of $1.00 per share.

(c.) What accounts for the difference between issued shares and outstanding shares

final exam acct 497139

1. You have an opportunity to buy a $1,000 bond which matures in 10 years. The bond pays $30 every six months. The current market interest rate is 8%. What is the most you would be willing to pay for this bond?

2. In January, 1998, Harold Black bought 100 shares of Country Homes for $37.50 per share. He sold them in January, 2008 for a total of $9,715.02. Calculate Harold’s annual rate of return.

3. Samuel Johnson invested in gold U.S. coins ten years ago, paying $216.53 for one-ounce gold “double eagle” coins. He could sell these coins for $734 today. What was his annual rate of return for this investment?

4. Gary Kiraly wants to buy a new Italian sports car in three years. The vehicle is expected to cost $80,000 at that time. If Gary should be so lucky as to find an investment yielding 12% over that three-year period, how much would he have to invest now in order to accumulate $80,000 at the end of the three years?

5. Mr. Sullivan is borrowing $2 million to expand his business. The loan will be for ten years at 12% and will be repaid in equal quarterly installments. What will the quarterly payments be?

6. Marcia Stubern is planning for her golden years. She will retire in 20 years, at which time she plans to begin withdrawing $60,000 annually. She is expected to live for 20 years following her retirement. Her financial advisor thinks she can earn 9% annually. How much does she need to invest each year to prepare for her financial needs after her retirement?

7. Sara Shouppe has invested $100,000 in an account at her local bank. The bank will pay her a constant amount each year for 6 years, starting one year from today, and the account’s balance will be 0 at the end of the sixth year. If the bank has promised Ms. Shouppe a 10% return, how much will they have to pay him each year?

8. The Swell Computer Company has developed a new line of desktop computers. It is estimated that the cash returns generated by the new product line will be $800,000 per year for the next five years, and then $500,000 per year for 3 years after that (the cash returns occur at the end of each year). At a 9% interest rate, what is the present value of these cash returns?

9. Kimberly Ford invested $10,000 10 years ago at 16 percent, compounded quarterly. How much has she accumulated?

10. Sponge Bob will receive a payment of $5,000 per year for 7 years beginning three years from today. At a discount rate of 9 percent, what is the present value of this deferred annuity?

11. Fullerton Company’s bonds are currently selling for $1,157.75 per $1000 par-value bond. The bonds have a 10% coupon rate and will mature in 10 years. What is the approximate yield to maturity?

12. Madison Corporation has a $1000 par value bond outstanding paying annual interest of 7%. The bond matures in 20 years. If the present yield to maturity for this bond is 9%, calculate the current price of the bond using annual compounding. Use annual analysis.

13. Washington Corporation has a $1000 par value bond outstanding paying annual interest of 8%. The bond matures in 20 years. If the present yield to maturity for this bond is 10%, calculate the current price of the bond. Use annual analysis

14. The preferred stock of Gapers Inc. pays an annual dividend of $6.50. What is the price of the preferred stock if the required return is:

a) 6%
b) 8%
c) 10%

15. The preferred stock of Lewis-Schultz Enterprises pays an annual dividend of $6.00. What is the required return if the market value of the preferred stock:

a) $60
b) $70
c) $80

16. State Street Corp. will pay a dividend on common stock of $4.80 per share at the end of the year. The required return on common stock (Ke) is 13.2%. The firm has a constant growth rate of 7.2%. Compute the current price of the stock (Po).

17. Simon Fixtures Corp. is expected to pay $2.00 per share in dividends at the end of the next 12 months. The growth rate in dividends is expected to be constant at 8% per year. If the stock is selling for $50 per share, what is the required rate of return?


– Sent to Business Expert Tutor on 12/14/2010 at 8:39am
You asked:

Solve the following, show how you reach the final answer.

1. You have an opportunity to buy a $1,000 bond which matures in 10 years. The bond pays $30 every six months. The current market interest rate is 8%. What is the most you would be willing to pay for this bond?

2. In January, 1998, Harold Black bought 100 shares of Country Homes for $37.50 per share. He sold them in January, 2008 for a total of $9,715.02. Calculate Harold’s annual rate of return.

3. Samuel Johnson invested in gold U.S. coins ten years ago, paying $216.53 for one-ounce gold “double eagle” coins. He could sell these coins for $734 today. What was his annual rate of return for this investment?

4. Gary Kiraly wants to buy a new Italian sports car in three years. The vehicle is expected to cost $80,000 at that time. If Gary should be so lucky as to find an investment yielding 12% over that three-year period, how much would he have to invest now in order to accumulate $80,000 at the end of the three years?

5. Mr. Sullivan is borrowing $2 million to expand his business. The loan will be for ten years at 12% and will be repaid in equal quarterly installments. What will the quarterly payments be?

6. Marcia Stubern is planning for her golden years. She will retire in 20 years, at which time she plans to begin withdrawing $60,000 annually. She is expected to live for 20 years following her retirement. Her financial advisor thinks she can earn 9% annually. How much does she need to invest each year to prepare for her financial needs after her retirement?

7. Sara Shouppe has invested $100,000 in an account at her local bank. The bank will pay her a constant amount each year for 6 years, starting one year from today, and the account’s balance will be 0 at the end of the sixth year. If the bank has promised Ms. Shouppe a 10% return, how much will they have to pay him each year?

8. The Swell Computer Company has developed a new line of desktop computers. It is estimated that the cash returns generated by the new product line will be $800,000 per year for the next five years, and then $500,000 per year for 3 years after that (the cash returns occur at the end of each year). At a 9% interest rate, what is the present value of these cash returns?

9. Kimberly Ford invested $10,000 10 years ago at 16 percent, compounded quarterly. How much has she accumulated?

10. Sponge Bob will receive a payment of $5,000 per year for 7 years beginning three years from today. At a discount rate of 9 percent, what is the present value of this deferred annuity?

11. Fullerton Company’s bonds are currently selling for $1,157.75 per $1000 par-value bond. The bonds have a 10% coupon rate and will mature in 10 years. What is the approximate yield to maturity?

12. Madison Corporation has a $1000 par value bond outstanding paying annual interest of 7%. The bond matures in 20 years. If the present yield to maturity for this bond is 9%, calculate the current price of the bond using annual compounding. Use annual analysis.

13. Washington Corporation has a $1000 par value bond outstanding paying annual interest of 8%. The bond matures in 20 years. If the present yield to maturity for this bond is 10%, calculate the current price of the bond. Use annual analysis

14. The preferred stock of Gapers Inc. pays an annual dividend of $6.50. What is the price of the preferred stock if the required return is:

a) 6%
b) 8%
c) 10%

15. The preferred stock of Lewis-Schultz Enterprises pays an annual dividend of $6.00. What is the required return if the market value of the preferred stock:

a) $60
b) $70
c) $80

16. State Street Corp. will pay a dividend on common stock of $4.80 per share at the end of the year. The required return on common stock (Ke) is 13.2%. The firm has a constant growth rate of 7.2%. Compute the current price of the stock (Po).

17. Simon Fixtures Corp. is expected to pay $2.00 per share in dividends at the end of the next 12 months. The growth rate in dividends is expected to be constant at 8% per year. If the stock is selling for $50 per share, what is the required rate of return?

final exam help 497140

1. Many forms of leisure and recreation have shifted from spontaneous or informal activities to formal and organized ones true or false
Answer True
False
2. The care of the elderly is primarily a task entrusted to the family.
Answer True
False
3. true or false The United States has the lowest infant mortality rate in the world
Answer True
False
4. is it true or false that The media have always been an instrument of the state as well as a tool for social change.
Answer True
False
5. Under certain conditions, the Federal Communication Commission allows a single company to own every media outlet in a single market.
Answer True
False
6. The nature of health can be defined by its social rather than biological context.
Answer True
False
7. What led to the increase in leisure time in the twentieth century?
Answer

a. Changes in values and norms made leisure seem more desirable.

b. increases in industrial productivity and time-saving technologies

c. decreases in family size

d. urbanization

e. increases in life span and better health care
8. Revolutionary social change is often the result of technological developments.
Answer True
False

9. The tragedy of the commons is a kind of social dilemma in which:
Answer

a. science needs to come up with better technical solutions to environmental problems.

b. individually rational behavior leads to collective disaster.

c. individuals must be convinced to contribute to a collective resource that they may or may not benefit from.

d. fortunately most people are not motivated by self-interest.

e. the more critical the situation becomes, the more likely people are to cooperate with one another.

10. The spread of material and nonmaterial culture to new cultural groups, even when there is no migration of people, is called:
Answer

a. postmodernism.

b. cultural leveling.

c. cultural lag.

d. cultural diffusion.

e. culture shock.

11. Which of the following people would be most likely to join a social movement?
Answer

a. a young woman who attends college and is involved in campus government and volunteers for local and state political campaigns

b. a disaffected loner, taking lots of math classes, but without a real social life or a good outlet to make friends or form romantic relationships

c. a young man from the lower class who gets a job in a campus cafeteria and notices how well off the students he serves are

d. an average student who spends a lot of time smoking marijuana and switches majors several times

e. a single mother who works nights as a stocker at a grocery store and has relatives both in the deep south and on the west coast
12. How does the U.S. Census Bureau define family
Answer

a. two or more individuals related by blood, marriage, or adoption who share a household

b. a social group bound to one another through legal, biological, or emotional ties

c. people who are emotionally and/or materially interdependent

d. people who share a household

e. parents living with minor children

13. Death and illness in a population is bad for productivity of the system and is a destabilizing force. Which theory takes this approach to medicine?
Answer

a. sick role

b. ecological

c. structural functionalism

d. symbolic interactionism

e. conflict
14. Which of the following is NOT considered to be protected speech?
Answer

a. information about bombs and weapons

b. hateful language directed at racial and ethnic minorities

c. pictures taken of celebrities on public property

d. information about the personal lives of political candidates

e. material considered to be obscene

15. If an urban neighborhood were to suddenly develop an assortment of upscale restaurants, coffee shops, hip boutiques, and art galleries, then the neighborhood is:
Answer

a. becoming gentrified.

b. growing into an edge city.

c. reacting to the rural rebound.

d. changing patterns of pollution and resource use.

e. experiencing smart growth.

16. Whereas the top causes of death in the United States are ________________, those in the developing world are continually affected by the threat of _______________.
Answer

a. acute; curative

b. preventive; crisis

c. preventive; chronic

d. chronic; acute

e. crisis; acute

17. Jorge has learned that he has a mental illness. Since then, he has begun to act according to the illness, in ways that he thinks others expect someone with a mental illness to act. Which theory of health and illness best explains his situation?
Answer

a. conflict

b. stigma

c. symbolic interactionism

d. sick role

e. doctor patient confidentiality

18. How does Robert Bellah believe that style enclaves are different from real communities
Answer

a. They tend to remain focused on shared interests rather than on the larger community.

b. They usually lead to more altruistic behaviors and an interest in others.

c. They have greater community spirit.

d. They tend to be integrated into a larger social group.

e. all of the above

19. How do rates of domestic abuse differ across racial groups?
Answer

a. They are lower among Asian Americans than in other racial groups.

b. They are about equal across racial groups.

c. They are higher among non-English-speaking individuals than among English speakers.

d. They are lower among immigrants from Southeast Asia than in other groups.

e. They are higher among African Americans and Hispanics than in other racial groups.

20. Activities that are recreation today were necessities in the past.
Answer True
False

21. Real environmental justice would mean that poor communities would not have to choose between economic development and a healthy environment.
Answer True
False

22. C. Wright Mills used the term the sociological imagination to refer to important interconnections between personal troubles and public issues. What would he have said about deprivation amplification?
Answer

a. It didn t really apply to a sociological imagination.

b. Both public issues and personal troubles contribute to poor health and so work needs to be done at both levels to more properly address disease rates.

c. Neither public issues nor personal troubles contribute to poor health and so work done at these levels would not address disease rates any differently.

d. Personal troubles cause poor health and so work needs to be done to more properly address disease rates.

e. Public issues cause poor health and so work needs to be done to more properly address disease rates.

23. According to conflict theory, how does the nuclear family facilitate exploitation?
Answer

a. by making geographic mobility possible

b. by employing members of other social groups to do its dirty work

c. by exploiting the working class, whose products it consumes

d. through the use of nannies and domestic workers

e. through a sexual division of labor within the home
24. All successful social movements are eventually incorporated into institutions.
Answer True
False

25. Which of the following is a basic demographic variable?
Answer

a. agglomeration

b. dystopia

c. pluralism

d. migration

e. sustainable development

26. Which of the following sounds most like recreation, as your textbook defines it?
Answer

a. a magician who puts up flyers and works at children s birthday parties

b. a guitarist on tour who has to sell t-shirts and CDs at the merchandise table after each show

c. a student s time between getting out of class and going to work

d. the recess period given to children in primary school, when they can spend unstructured time on the playground

e. someone learning the calculus required to compute the amount and type of fuel needed to power a model rocket that he wants to launch in a par
27. Paolo broke a finger playing soccer. He was seen by a medical practitioner very soon after the accident. His ailment would be classified as a chronic illness.
Answer True
False

28. The United States is the only industrialized nation without some nationalized health care.
Answer True
False

29. According to relative deprivation theory, why do people join social movements?
Answer

a. They are ordered to do so by the government.

b. Social movements are good places to meet people and network.

c. They are filling a psychological need to belong to something.

d. Joining a social movement is a rational response to inequality or oppression.

e. Social movements are a necessary part of a system of social stratification.

30. Because many media companies are now global, the content that they produce reflects a wide range of Western and nonwestern values.
Answer True
False

31. In Lincoln, Nebraska, in the summer of 2009, two groups held rallies about health care, one supporting and one opposing legislation proposed to overhaul America s health care system. At one point, the two groups went beyond holding signs and shouting slogans and tempers flared. Objects were thrown, shoving matches broke out, and the police had to step in to break up the:
Answer

a. social movement.

b. rally.

c. contagion.

d. march.

e. riot.

32. As an agent of socialization, who does the family influence?
Answer

a. only children

b. everyone

c. women

d. the elderly

e. none of the above
33. How do people with an anthropocentric relationship with the environment perceive nature?
Answer

a. as something to be preserved

b. as the ultimate source of meaning

c. as something to be studied and examined before it is tainted by human activity

d. as a place to find spiritual truth

e. as something to be conquered
34. More recently, epidemiologists are studying the role of temperature increases in the spread of diseases globally. Specifically they have found that increases in temperature can also increase pathogen-carrying agents called:
Answer

a. infectious agents.

b. mosquitoes.

c. pathogens.

d. ecosystem deterrents.

e. vector organisms.

35. A woman who recently moved from New York to North Carolina had a year of probation left from a fraud conviction, but was told that North Carolina would not supervise her probation because she was guilty of lewd and lascivious association. Specifically she lived with her boyfriend. She later said that, when she moved to North Carolina, it was the first time she had heard of:
Answer

a. divorce.

b. intentional communities.

c. cohabitation.

d. noncustodial parents.

e. symbolic interactionism.

36. In the early 1900s, what percentage of Americans lived in cities?
Answer

a. 10 percent

b. 99 percent

c. 6 percent

d. 40 percent

e. 90 percent

37. If the vast majority of people in the cities and towns of Riverside County, California, were to commute to work in Los Angeles, these communities would be edge cities.
Answer True
False

38. The movement that attempts to rebuild group values and a sense of collective responsibility is called:
Answer

a. socialism.

b. functionalism.

c. Marxism.

d. communitarianism.

e. textual poaching.

39. The increasing number of Americans who move out of state to attend college will decrease the importance of ____________, assuming that students start new romantic relationships in school.
Answer

a. exogamy

b. homogamy

c. miscegenation

d. monogamy

e. propinquity

40. The documentary Unnatural Causes explores the lives of several Louisville, Kentucky residents at different socio-economic status levels and from various racial backgrounds. It found that poorer Louisville residents suffered greater rates of illness and died earlier than wealthier ones. What is this an example of?
Answer

a. anomie

b. deprivation amplification

c. food deserts

d. impression management

e. environmental racism

41. In the past, which group of people had the time and resources necessary to pursue recreational activity?
Answer

a. the middle class and the upper class

b. only the wealthy

c. only the clergy

d. almost everyone

e. only the very poor

42. Propinquity refers to:
Answer

a. the appeal of the family.

b. geographical proximity.

c. the desire for the exotic and the foreign.

d. a fixed set of beliefs.

e. the tendency to seek people with similar backgrounds.

43. The bureaucratization stage of a social movement:
Answer

a. in the U.S. labor movement, happened when the AFL and the CIO merged.

b. always happens at the beginning.

c. happened during the gay rights movement with the Stonewall riot.

d. happened for the environmental rights movement with the release of the film An Inconvenient Truth

e. has not yet happened for the gay rights movement.

44. Leisure and work are complementary activities. What links them together?
Answer

a. the weekend

b. consumption

c. children and the family

d. food

e. democracy

45. According to Georg Simmel, how do city dwellers relate to one another?
Answer

a. by constantly monitoring one another in order to detect violations of norms and values

b. through restrictive constraints on personal behavior

c. in terms of class-based loyalties

d. through family connections

e. in objective and instrumental terms

46. Hunger remains widespread in many parts of the world, but not in the United States.
Answer True
False

47. The Mall of America has more than 10,000 workers, occupies more than 4 million square feet, and receives more than 40 million visitors each year. However, the mall offers more than just shopping. Concerts, plays, story times for children, flight simulators, and an indoor aquarium are just a few of the elements of what the mall calls its retail experience. What point does this illustrate?
Answer

a. Alternative media sources are driving Americans to consider new ideas and experience life differently.

b. Rather than paying for things, more and more Americans are now making their own fun.

c. Shopping is now as much about entertainment as it is about purchasing things.

d. Many forms of leisure and recreation seem to have shifted from organized and formal activities to spontaneous or informal activities.

e. Americans are increasingly less likely to go out for a dose of the arts and more likely to stay home and enjoy performances in front of their home entertainment centers.

48. The Golden Gate Bridge in San Francisco is an icon of the city by the bay and a world renowned tourist destination. It is also the number one suicide magnet in the world. Which theoretical explanation for suicide would best explain the high rates of suicide at the bridge?
Answer

a. psychological

b. anomic

c. contagion

d. selectionan

e. ecological

49. What sport is immensely popular in almost every part of the world EXCEPT the United States?
Answer

a. track and field

b. basketball

c. baseball

d. soccer

e. hockey

50. Media are one of the United States most profitable exports.
Answer True
False

51. The 2010 Health Care Reform Act (formally called the Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act ) represents:
Answer

a. the medical establishment.

b. the importance of medical systems in the United States.

c. a sweeping overhaul of the U.S. health care system.

d. patients power and status.

e. doctor patient confidentiality.

52. How would a sociologist define family
Answer

a. two or more individuals related by blood, marriage, or adoption who share a household

b. both the nuclear family and the extended family to the extent that family members share emotional and material responsibilities

c. almost any social group so long as they share responsibilities for raising children

d. an interdependent social group bound by legal, biological, or emotional ties

e. a group of related people who share a household

53. A sociologist who examines how cities are organized or the migration of human populations is studying:
Answer

a. social ecology.

b. environmental attitudes.

c. renewable resources.

d. environmental justice.

e. grassroots environmentalism.

54. The transformation of culture over time is called:
Answer

a. social iteration.

b. social revolution.

c. cultural evolution.

d. social change.

e. cultural translation.

55. The Industrial Revolution made cities necessary, as a large number of people had to be brought in to work in factories, but ever since then many people have found city life attractive. Why?
Answer

a. Cities offer a profound sense of security.

b. Cities bring people together and help to develop community.

c. Cities offer a high degree of personal freedom.

d. Cities help people develop deep and intense relationships.

e. all of the above

56. Health and illness are mostly physical states that do not include other life aspects such as mental well-being or changing cultural beliefs.
Answer True
False

57. In countries where ____________ has happened, there no longer is a natural increase in population.
Answer

a. the Industrial Revolution

b. human exemptionalism

c. the demographic freefall

d. extreme water pollution

e. the demographic transition

58. Family friends who are referred to as Aunt or Uncle are examples of:
Answer

a. the Full House effect.

b. fictive kin.

c. polygyny.

d. extended families.

e. homogamy.
59. Some cell phone providers are now offering hardware, like small laptops, and media to play on it, like songs and TV shows. Phone companies believe that each product they offer will encourage and promote other products, as phones can easily send data to laptops, which can store media that can easily be watched on phones, and so on. What is this called?
Answer

a. synergy

b. the hypodermic needle theory

c. conglomeration

d. media concentration

e. bandwidth

60. A typical media conglomerate might include which of the following?
Answer

a. a book and magazine publisher

b. radio and television broadcasters

c. a sports franchise

d. none of the above

e. all of the above

61. How has technology enabled the shift from spontaneous to organized recreation?
Answer

a. It has made organized recreation more fun.

b. It has made it easier to organize people.

c. It has made organized recreation more competitive.

d. It has produced the tools necessary for organized recreation.

e. It has made shopping easier.

62. Is medicine in the United States a social institution?
Answer

a. Yes, because organizations like the American Medical Association set policy and shape definitions of health and illness throughout the nation.

b. Yes, because doctors need licenses to practice.

c. No, because it is more of an ideal than a social institution.

d. No, because organizations like the American Medical Association are brick and mortar places and not really widescale patterns of interaction.

e. Yes, because a study was done that polled Americans which reported that it is.

63. When a large number of people either collectively or individually engage in similar behaviors, sociologists call it:
Answer

a. collective behavior.

b. contagion.

c. mass behavior.

d. a social movement.

e. riots.

64. Although the hacky sack was invented in 1972, it exploded in popularity in the middle of the 1990s and is now somewhat less common. This is a good example of a:
Answer

a. social movement.

b. cultural diffusion.

c. fashion.

d. fad.

e. social dilemma.

Figure 13.1 The Concentration of Media Outlets

According to Figure 13.1, Google corporation has acquired a very large number of otherwise unrelated businesses in a variety of different sectors. For example, it is the owner of the largest wind farm on Earth. This process of acquiring businesses is called:
Answer

a. conglomeration.

b. synergy.

c. merger.

d. concentration.

e. fourth estate.

Talcott Parsons researched this from a structural functionalist perspective:
Answer

a. the medical establishment

b. medical policy

c. doctors power and status

d. doctor patient confidentiality

e. the sick role

67. What do demographers call larger urban areas, those with more than one million inhabitants?
Answer

a. global cities

b. megacities

c. Metropolitan Statistical Areas

d. global density centers

e. metropolises

68. What do the 19th Amendment to the Constitution, Nazism, birth control, and Protestantism all have in common?
Answer

a. They all involve social stratification.

b. They all began in the twentieth century.

c. They all have had a negative effect on society.

d. They all are the products of a single charismatic leader.

e. They all are the products of social movements.

69. The modern era is characterized by improvised or do-it-yourself forms of family.
Answer True
False

70. When a Star Trek fan club raises money for an animal welfare organization that is sponsored by the Star Trek actor William Shatner, what is this evidence of?
Answer

a. the inability of such groups to contribute to the common good

b. the fragmented nature of such groups

c. the narrow focus of a lifestyle enclave

d. the lack of real community in such groups

e. the ability of a lifestyle enclave to develop a larger sense of social responsibility

71. Although the family always influences its members, it is not always a very consistent influence because:
Answer

a. changes outside the family impact its members.

b. inequality between siblings changes the way that each child is socialized.

c. birth order changes the family experience.

d. divorce and remarriage can radically alter the way a family socializes its members at different points in time.

e. all of the above

72. Epidemiologists are studying global climate change and disease and have found a link between temperature increases and the spread of diseases.
Answer True
False

73. Although critics might see soap operas as brainwashing their viewers to accept a particular version of gender roles, some sociologists would insist that the people who produce soap operas actually have to be constantly attentive to the desires of their audience and are to some extent responding to their audience. If you believe this, then you probably see soap opera viewers as:
Answer

a. the bourgeoisie.

b. an active audience.

c. helpless dupes.

d. collectors.

e. new voices in the media.

74. What do sociologists call the tendency to marry someone of a similar background?
Answer

a. endogamy

b. heterogamy

c. in-group orientation

d. exogamy

e. romance medians

75. Seagram s, a company best known for its gin, also owns Universal Records. This is an example of what trend in the media industry?
Answer

a. antidisestablishmentarianism

b. inequality

c. conglomeration

d. deregulation

e. monopoly

76. Regressive or reactionary social movements are always:
Answer

a. the most common type of social movement.

b. motivated by prejudice or hate.

c. successful only when they use violence.

d. working to make sure things stay the same, or even to turn them back to an earlier point in history.

e. motivated by a desire to protect the environment.

77. How does the birth of children change the gendered division of labor within the household?
Answer

a. It makes the gendered division of labor more traditional.

b. It has no influence on the gendered division of labor.

c. It gets fathers more involved.

d. It makes the gendered division of labor more traditional in families that were always somewhat traditional, but it has no effect on those who had a more progressive division of labor.

e. It brings the extended family into the household more.

78. Popular urban legends sometimes circulate for years.
Answer True
False

79. An office has a coffee fund, an old coffee can where people can toss change anytime they pour a cup of coffee. The fund can be used to buy new coffee for the office when the supply runs out. However, one individual always takes coffee and never puts any money in the fund, making him a:
Answer

a. prisoner.

b. free rider.

c. dilemma.

d. resource mobilizer.

e. contrarian.

80 Which of the following would NOT be a family as sociologists define the term?
Answer

a. a married couple who maintain separate apartments on different sides of Central Park in New York City

b. a lesbian couple who have a child using a sperm donor

c. a couple who remarries and shares a household with children from their previous marriages

d. an unmarried couple who never have children

e. two men who enter a business partnership in which one runs a retail outlet while the other produces products to sell in it

81. When an individual describes someone who is related to them biologically as not really kin, what are they saying?
Answer

a. The relative has not exercised her rights or fulfilled her obligations as a family member.

b. The relative is part of the extended, rather than the nuclear family.

c. The relative doesn t belong to the relevant voluntary associations.

d. The relative has died.

e. all of the above

82. What feature of fan-staged encounters can be problematic?
Answer

a. how powerless a fan is in such circumstances

b. the brief and inadequate nature of the contact

c. the amount of money that they cost

d. they usually occur without the consent of the celebrity

e. all of the above

final exam take home problem 20 points based on the information provided below prepa 497141

Final Exam Take Home Problem (20 points)

Based on the information provided below, prepare the statement of cash flows for the Gulp-it-Down Coffee Co.

Gulp-it-Down Coffee Co.

Comparative Balance Sheet

For the Year Ended December 31, 2012

2012

2011

Assets

Cash

140,000

160,000

Accounts Receivables

400,000

380,000

Inventory

480,000

420,000

Fixed Assets (net of accumulated Depreciation)

1,860,000

1,720,000

Less: Accumulated Depreciation

(1,000,000)

(900,000)

Total

1,880,000

1,780,000

Liabilities & Owner s Equity

Accounts Payable

240,000

260,000

Accrued expense

120,000

100,000

Bonds Payable

780,000

720,000

Capital Stock

420,000

420,000

Retained Earnings

320,000

280,000

Total

1,880,000

1,780,000

Additional Information:
(1.) Net income for the year amounted to $60,000, and cash dividends were declared and paid in the amount of $20,000.
(2.) Gulp-it-Down Coffee Co.’s only noncash expense was depreciation Expense which totaled $100,000.
(3.) The company purchased plant assets for $140,000.
(4.) Bonds payable in the amount of $60,000 were issued during the year.

final exam v1 mcqs 497144

Final Exam_V1_MCQs
Question Detail:

Identify the letter of the choice that best completes the statement or answers the question.

Bexley Company produces retractable pens. November budgeted production costs are given below:

Pens to be produced

100,000

Direct material (variable)

$30,000

Direct Labor (variable)

$50,000

Supplies (variable)

$25,000

Supervision (fixed)

$40,000

Depreciation (fixed)

$30,000

Other (fixed)

$10,000

In December, Bexley expects to produce 120,000 pens. Assuming no structural changes, what is Bexley s budgeted production cost per pen for December?

A)

$1.54

B)

$1.72

C)

$1.85

D)

$1.93

Use the cost information in (1) above. In October, the actual direct labor costs were $46,000 and Bexley produced and sold 90,000 pens. The direct material performance variance (difference) is:

A)

$5,000 unfavorable.

B)

$5,000 favorable.

C)

$1,000 unfavorable.

D)

$1,000 favorable.

A typical use of managerial accounting is to:

A)

Help investors and creditors to assess the financial position of the company.

B)

Help management get a clean audit report.

C)

Help the SEC decide whether management is in compliance with its policies.

D)

Help the marketing manager decide which product promotion to implement.

A manufacturing company produces 80,000 units of product A at a total cost of $2.4 million. Total fixed costs are $1million. If the company increases production by 25% and uses a 40% markup the price per unit will be:

A)

$30.80

B)

$31.54

C)

$37.10

D)

$38.50

Use the following to answer questions 5-6:

RNO Company’s market for the Model 55 has changed significantly, and RNO has had to drop the price per unit from $285 to $200. There are some units in the work in process inventory that have costs of $280 per unit associated with them. RNO could sell these units in their current state for $160 each. It will cost RNO $35 per unit to complete these units so that they can be sold for $200 each.

A new employee looks at the analysis and exclaims, We’ll lose money with either of these alternatives! Let’s just throw these units in the trash! Suppose the alternative to trashing is choosing the more profitable of the two alternatives (that the new employee looked at and did not like). What effect will the trashing option (that the new employee

wants) have on net income?

A)

Net income will increase by $35 per unit for each unit discarded.

B)

Net income will decrease by $115 per unit for each unit discarded.

C)

It will have no effect on net income.

D)

Net income will decrease by $165 per unit for each unit discarded.

When the incremental revenues and expenses are analyzed, the company is better off by

A)

$5 per unit if they complete the units.

B)

$15 per unit if they sell the units in their current state.

C)

$25 per unit if they sell the units in their current state.

D)

$35 per unit if they complete the units.

A company using activity based pricing marks up the direct cost of goods by 39% plus charges customers for indirect costs based on the activities utilized by the customer. Indirect costs are charged as follows: $6.00 per order placed; $3.00 per separate item ordered; $28.00 per return. A customer places 10 orders with a total direct cost of $2,210, orders 312 separate items, and makes 8 returns. What will the customer be charged?

A)

$3,000

B)

$4,292

C)

$5,330

D)

$5,755

Manufacturing overhead is allocated to products based on the number of machine hours required. In a year when 20,000 machine hours were anticipated, costs were budgeted at $125,000. If a product requires 7,000 machine hours, how much manufacturing overhead will be allocated to this product?

A)

$41,667

B)

$43,750

C)

$1,120

D)

$50,000

Use the following information to answer questions 9-10:

The Sunrise Hotel has 200 rooms. Each room rents at $160 per night and variable costs total $35 per room per night of occupancy. Fixed costs total $80,000 per month.

If the hotel spends an additional $10,000 in the month of February on advertising they feel that they can expect occupancy rate to increase by 10%. What would be the financial impact of spending this additional money on advertising for the month of February (28 days)?

A)

Total fixed costs will increase by $10,500.

B)

Net income will increase by $50,000.

C)

Net income will increase by $26,320.

D)

Total fixed costs will remain the same.

If 70% of the rooms are occupied each night in the month of February (28 days) what will total costs be for the month?

A)

$118,560.

B)

$173,600.

C)

$217,200.

D)

$155,680.

A company believes it can sell 6,000,000 of its proposed optical mouse for $14 each. There will be $7,500,000 in fixed costs associated with the mouse. If the company desires to make a profit of $3,000,000 on the mouse, what is the target variable cost per mouse?

A)

$10.60

B)

$11.00

C)

$12.25

D)

$9.00

12. Below is a performance report that compares budgeted and actual profit of Boyles Beer

for the month of April:

Budget

Actual

Difference

Sales

$200,000

$202,000

$2,000

Less:

Cost of ingredients

$162,000

$166,000

$4,000

Salaries

$31,000

$31,200

$200

Controllable Profit

$47,000

$44,800

-$2,200

In evaluating the department in terms of its increase in sales and expenses, what will be

most important to investigate?

A) Sales

B) Cost of ingredients

C) Salaries

D) All three components have equal importance.

K-Henry’s Dull Diner has a contribution margin ratio of 16%. If fixed costs are $148,952, how many dollars of revenue must K-Henry’s generate in order to reach the break-even point?

A)

$930,950

B)

$1,060,800

C)

$208,476

D)

$1,105,000

A company has a total cost of $50.00 per unit at a volume of 100,000 units. The variable cost per unit is $20.00. What would the price be if the company expected a volume of 120,000 units and used a markup of 50%?

A)

$75.00

B)

$62.50

C)

There is not enough information in the problem to answer

D)

$67.50

Max s Pizza produced and sold 1,000 pizzas last month and had total variable ingredients that cost $4,575. If production and sales are expected to increase by 17% next month, which of the following statements is true?

A)

Total variable materials costs are expected to be $4,779.50

B)

Variable material cost per unit is expected to be $4.99.

C)

Total variable materials costs are expected to be $4,345

D)

Total variable materials costs are expected to be $5,352.75

16. FarnsworthCompany s break-even point is 14,377. Each unit generates variable costs

Of $3.2, and is sold for $4.90. What are the fixed costs?

A)

$26,845.

B)

$59,780.

C)

$24,441.

D)

$32,940.

17. One Small Grill Company is a start up with the following profile:

Unit selling price = $230; Variable cost per unit = $130; Fixed Costs = $36,000;

Tax rate = 40%. How many units should Small Grill sell to achieve an after-tax target

income of $6,000?

A)

200

B)

460

C)

230

D)

300

Western Apparel Company owns two stores and management is considering eliminating the East store due to declining sales. Segmented contribution income statements are as follows and common fixed costs are allocated on the basis of sales.

West

East

Total

Sales

$500,500

90,000

$590,500

Variable costs

262,500

45,000

307,500

Direct fixed costs

62,500

25,000

87,500

Segment margin

175,500

20,000

195,500

Allocated fixed costs

137,500

35,000

172,500

Net Income

$38,000

($15,000)

$23,000

Western feels that if they eliminate the East store that sales in the West store will decline by 15%. If they close the East store, overall company net income will:

A)

decline by $90,000.

B)

decline by $62,000.

C)

decline by $85,625.

D)

decline by $55,700.

JungleGym, a best-selling toy has a selling price of $15. If the contribution margin ratio is 40% and if the fixed costs are $60,000, how many JungleGyms must the company sell to realize a profit of $450,000?

A)

100,000

B)

30,000

C)

34,000

D)

85,000

After a good year in 2012, JungleGym decides it needs to increase sales by 12% in 2013. Which of the following is most likely to stay the same in 2013?

A)

Total sales revenue.

B)

Total variable costs

C)

Total fixed costs

D)

Total contribution margin

Information for Questions 21-22

Anderson Manufacturing makes a single product. Budget information regarding the current period is given below:

Revenue (100,000 units at $8.00)

$800,000

Direct materials

150,000

Direct labor

125,000

Variable manufacturing overhead

235,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead

110,000

Net income

$180,000

Dye Company approaches Anderson with a special order for 15,000 units at a price of $7.50 per unit. Variable costs will be the same as the current production and accepting the special order will not have any impact on the rest of the company’s orders. However, Anderson is operating at capacity and will incur an additional $50,000 in fixed manufacturing overhead if the order is accepted.

What is the incremental income (loss) associated with accepting the special order?

A)

($14,000)

B)

$36,000

C)

($23,500)

D)

$27,000

What is the incremental revenue associated with accepting the special order?

A)

$170,000

B)

$112,500

C)

$70,000

D)

$120,000

On July 26, 2012, radio Shack announced disappointing 2nd quarter earnings that caused the stock to fall 29% to all time lows. Although sales were up 1.2% to $953.2 million gross profit fell 16.6% to $360.3 million. Assuming Radio Shack s store count and fixed costs were the same in the 2nd quarter of 2011 and 2012, which of the following statements is the best explanation for the decrease in the firm s profitability?

A)

Opportunity costs decreased.

B)

Margin of safety decreased.

C)

Contribution margin decreased.

D)

Selling price decreased.

Innovations, Inc is looking to achieve a net income of 15 percent of sales. Unit sales price is $10; variable cost per unit is $6; total fixed costs are $50,000 what is the level of sales (in units) required to achieve a net income of 15 percent of sales

A)

12,000 units.

B)

21,000 units.

C)

16,000 units.

D)

20,000 units.

Anthony s Bakery sold 2,000 muffins last month and had fixed costs of $6,000. If production and sales are expected to increase by 10% next month, which of the following statements is true?

A)

Total fixed costs will decrease.

B)

Fixed cost per unit will decrease.

C)

Total fixed costs will increase.

D)

Fixed cost per unit will increase.

The Dynamaco Company uses cost-plus pricing with a 50% mark-up. The company is currently selling 100,000 units at $12 per unit. Each unit has a variable cost of $6. In addition, the company incurs $200,000 in fixed costs annually. If demand falls to 80,000 units and the company wants to continue to earn a 50% return, what price should the company charge?

A)

$12.75

B)

$14.55

C)

$13.50

D)

$10.95

27. An auto executive is considering how to price a 2014 hybrid in order to maximize profits for

the company. Manufacturing each hybrid involves $9,500 of materials, $12,500 of labor,

$3,800 of shipping and $4,000 of other supplies. The facility where the car is manufactured

has $12.5 million of fixed costs. The marketing department says that adding a Bose sound

system would boost demand, but it would add an additional $750 per car.

The quantity demanded at each unit price is as follows:

Price

Quantity Demanded (No Bose)

Quantity Demanded (with Bose)

$31,000

8,960

10,752

$32,000

7,168

8,602

$33,000

5,734

6,881

$34,000

4,588

5,505

$35,000

3,670

4,404

$36,000

2,936

3,523

$37,000

2,349

2,819

$38,000

1,879

2,255

$39,000

1,503

1,804

What profit maximizing price should the executive choose?

A)

$34,000 without Bose sound system.

B)

$39,000 with Bose sound system.

C)

$36,000 without Bose sound system.

D)

$35,000 with Bose sound system

Use the following to answer question 28:

The Wall Street Journal has the following monthly data for newspapers sold and total cost.

Month

Issues Sold

Total Cost

January

1,000,000

$20,000,000

February

950,000

$19,100,000

March

1,050,000

$21,060,000

April

1,200,000

$23,000,000

May

1,060,000

$21,075,000

June

800,000

$18,000,000

Using the high-low method, what is the total cost that the Wall Street Journal will incur if it is expecting to sell 750,000 newspapers in July?

A)

$17,625,000

B)

$17,500,000

C)

$17,375,000

D)

$17,250,000

During 2011, Bonzai Corporation reported revenues of $891,640 and profits of $91,486. Fixed costs were $332,043 and 44,582 units were sold. If costs and prices are expected to stay the same in 2012, and Bonzai expects to sell 45,000 units, what will be the company s budgeted profit

A)

$95,457

B)

$142,957

C)

$525,000

D)

$667,957

Visit finance.yahoo.com and determine which of the following statements is incorrect:

A)

The market cap of Microsoft is more than double that of Google.

B)

Revenues of Microsoft for 2011 were more than double revenues of Google.

C)

The Price per share of Google is more than ten times that of Microsoft.

D)

Assets of Microsoft at the end of 2011 were more than that of Google.

final paper 497145

Ashford 6: – Week 5 – Final Paper

Final Paper

Focus of the Final Paper

Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.

Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:

Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?

Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet

Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.

Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.

Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.

Writing the Final Paper

1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:

a. Title of paper

b. Student s name

c. Course name and number

d. Instructor s name

e. Date submitted

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

final paper 497146

Final Paper

Focus of the Final Paper

Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.

Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:

Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in? What are its main products or services? Who are its competitors?

Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet

Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.

Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios? Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.

Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company? What strengths do you see? What risks do you see? It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.

Writing the Final Paper

1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:

a. Title of paper

b. Student s name

c. Course name and number

d. Instructor s name

e. Date submitted

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

Carefully review the Grading Rubric for the criteria that will be used to evaluate your assignment.

final paper ashford aac 205 looking for best price 5 pages 497147

Final Paper

Focus of the Final Paper

Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.

Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:

Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?

Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet

Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.

Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.

Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.

Writing the Final Paper

1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:

a. Title of paper

b. Student s name

c. Course name and number

d. Instructor s name

e. Date submitted

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

final paper ashford acc205 principles of accounting i 497148

Final Paper

Focus of the Final Paper

Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.

Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:

Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?

Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet

Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.

Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.

Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.

Writing the Final Paper

1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:

a. Title of paper

b. Student s name

c. Course name and number

d. Instructor s name

e. Date submitted

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

final paper ashford this is for martin 497149

Final Paper

Focus of the Final Paper

Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.

Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:

Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?

Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet

Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.

Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.

Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.

Writing the Final Paper

1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:

a. Title of paper

b. Student s name

c. Course name and number

d. Instructor s name

e. Date submitted

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

fin 534 paper 497126

In this assignment,
assume you are a savvy financial analyst researching companies in which to
invest.

Select a U.S.
publically-traded company you think might be a good investment and perform a
financial analysis
.

Your analysis should include the
following:

Company Overview. Conduct research and describe the
company, its operations, locations, markets, and lines of business. Collect
financial statements for the past three (3) years, fiscal or calendar (please
insert these in the appendix). These financial statements must include at least
the income statement and the balance sheet.

Evaluate the company s
vulnerability to current financial threats
such as a recession, higher interest rates, and global
competition.

Financial Performance. Based on the financial trends of the
company, predict how these trends will impact financial performance in future
periods. Explain your rationale for this prediction.

Stock Price Analysis. Given the performance of the stock in the periods
presented on the company s financial statements, discuss how the stock is
likely to perform in the future, what type of investor would be drawn to this
stock, and make a recommendation to management to improve stock performance.

Submit your analysis
in the form of a 6-8 page paper in which you:

Provide a detailed overview
of a U.S. publicly traded company. This should be one to two (1-2) pages.

Evaluate the company s
vulnerability to current financial threats such as a recession, higher interest
rates, and global competition

Based on the financial
trends of the company, predict how these trends will impact financial
performance in future periods. Explain your rationale for this prediction.

Cite at least five (5) quality
references.

fin 540 chapter 3 problems 497127

FIN 540 chapter 3 problems

Problems

Margin purchase

1.Assume you buy 100 shares of stock at $40 per share on margin (50 percent). If the price rises to $55 per share, what is your percentage gain on the initial equity?

Margin purchase

2.In problem 1, what would the percentage loss on the initial equity be if the price had decreased to $28?

Minimum margin

3.Assume you have a 25 percent minimum margin standard in problems 1 and 2. With a price decline to $28, will you be called upon to put up more margin to meet the 25 percent rule? Disregard the $2,000 minimum margin balance requirement.

Minimum margin

4.Recompute the answer to problem 3 based on a stock decline to $23.75.

Selling short

5.You sell 100 shares of Norton Corporation short. The price of the stock is $60 per share. The margin requirement is 50 percent.

a.How much is your initial margin?

b.If stock goes down to $42, what is your percentage gain or loss on the initial margin (equity)?

c.If stock goes up to $67.50, what is your percentage gain or loss on the initial margin (equity)?

d.In partc, if the minimum margin standard is 30 percent, will you be required to put up more margin? (Do the additional necessary calculations to answer this question.)

Margin purchase and Selling short

6.You are very optimistic about the personal computer industry, so you buy 200 shares of Microtech Inc. at $45 per share. You are very pessimistic about the machine tool industry, so you sell short 300 shares of King Tools Corporation at $55. Each transaction requires a 50 percent margin balance.

a.What is the initial equity in your account?

b.Assume the price of each stock is as follows for the next three months (month-end).

Commission percentage

7.Lisa Loeb is considering buying 100 shares of CMA Record Company. The price of the shares is $52. She has checked around with different types of brokers and has been given the following commission quotes for the trade: online broker, $7; discount broker, $45; full-service broker, $98.

a.Compute the percentage commission for all three categories.

b.How many times larger is the percentage commission of the full-service broker compared with the online broker? Round two places to the right of the decimal point for this answer.

Computing tax obligations

8.Compute the tax obligation for the following using Table 3 1 on page 52.

a.An individual with taxable income of $59,000.

b.A married couple with taxable income of $130,000.

c.What is the average tax rate in partb?

Capital gains tax

9.Gill Thomas is in the 35 percent tax bracket. Her long-term capital gains tax rate is 15 percent. She makes $16,200 on a stock trade. Compute her tax obligation based on the following holding periods:

a.6 months.

b.14 months.

3-9.

Selling short and capital gains

10.Al Rodriguez sells 500 shares of Gold Mine Corp. short at $80 per share. The margin requirement is 50 percent. The stock falls to $62 over a three-month time period, and he closes out his position.

a.How much is his initial margin?

b.What is his percentage gain or loss on his initial margin?

c.If he is in a 35 percent tax bracket for short-term capital gains and a 15 percent bracket for long-term capital gains, what is his tax obligation?

d.If the stock went up to $94 instead of down to $62, what would be his dollar loss?

e.Assuming this is his only transaction for the year (2007), how large a tax deduction could he take against other income?

Price-weighted average

11.There are three stocks in a price-weighted index:

A $100

B 20

C 60

a.What is the average value for the index?

b.Assume stock A goes down by 25 percent and stock B goes up by 25 percent, and stock C remains the same. What is the new average value for the index?

c.Explain why in partbthe average changed with two stocks moving up and down by the same percentage amount.

Computing an index

12.Assume the following five companies are used in computing an index:

Company

Shares Outstanding

Base Period January 1, 1984 Market Price

Current Period December 31, 2007 Market Price

A

6,000

$ 6

$12

B

2,000

5

18

C

10,000

8

40

D

1,000

20

10

E

4,000

15

32

a.If the index is price weighted, what will be the value of the index on December 31, 2007? (Take the average price on December 31, 2007, and divide by the average price on January 1, 1984, and multiply by 100.)

b.If the index is value weighted, what will be the value of the index on December 31, 2007? (Take the total market value on December 31, 2007, and divide by the total market value on January 1, 1984, and multiply by 100.)

c.Explain why the answer in partbis different from the answer in parta.


Changing index values in a value-weighted index

13.Assume the following stocks make up avalue-weightedindex:

Corporation

Shares Outstanding

Market Price

Reese

4,000

$35

Robinson

16,000

4

Snider

6,000

10

Hodges

40,000

20

a.Compute the total market value and the weights assigned to each stock. Round to two places to the right of the decimal point. (The weights may add up to slightly more than 100 percent due to rounding.)

b.Assume the price of the shares of the Snider Corporation go up by 50 percent, while those of the Hodges Corporation go down by a mere 10 percent. The other two stocks remain constant. What will be the newly established value for the index?

c.Explain why the index followed the pattern it did in partb.

Changing index values in a value-weighted index

14.In problem 13, if the initial price of the shares of the Snider Corporation double while those of the Hodges Corporation go down by 7.5 percent, would the value of the index change? The other two stocks remain constant. Do the necessary computations.

fairchild company direct and indirect method cash flow 497102

Condensed financial data of Fairchild Company for 2010 and 2009 are presented below.

FAIRCHILD COMPANY
Comparative Balance Sheet

as of December 31 2010 and
2009

2010

2009

Cash $1,800 $1,100
Receivables 1,750 1,300
Inventory 1,600 1,900
Plant assets 1,900 1,700
Accumulated depreciation (1,200) (1,170)
Long-term investments (Held-to-maturity)

1,300

1,470

$7,150

$6,300

Accounts payable $1,200 $ 800
Accrued liabilities 200 250
Bonds payable 1,400 1,650
Capital stock 1,900 1,700
Retained earnings

2,450

1,900

$7,150

$6,300

FAIRCHILD COMPANY
Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31,
2010

Sales $6,900
Cost of goods sold

4,700

Gross margin 2,200
Selling and administrative expense

930

Income from operations 1,270
Other revenues and gains
Gain on sales of investments

80

Income before tax 1,350
Income tax expense

540

Net income

$810

Additional information:
During the year, $70 of common stock was issued in exchange for plant assets. No plant assets were sold in 2010. Cash dividends
were $260.

Instructions

Complete the statement of cash flows using the direct method and indirect method.

fall 2013 acct 4111 section 010 extra credit assignment 497103

ACCT 4111
Fall 2013 ACCT 4111 Section: 010
Extra Credit Assignment
Instructions:
1. Prepare a cash flow statement using the information below. Use BOTH the direct and
indirect method to prepare the Operating Activities section (i.e., I expect to see 2 Operating
Activities sections, 1 Investing, and 1 Financing).
2. Each cash flow item in the statement should be appropriately labeled (use the naming
conventions used on the text).
3. Show all calculations / work used to prepare the 3 different sections of the cash flow
statement (this should be on a separate sheet). You will not receive credit for the
assignment if you do not show all work for each number.
4. Work should be neat and clearly labeled so that I can follow the calculations corresponding
to the cash flow item within the cash flow statement sections.
5. Be sure to clearly label and cross-reference each cash flow item on the statement to the
calculations that correspond to that cash flow item. E.g., if you have cash received from
customers in your cash flow statement, label this item as A or 1 in the margin and also
label the calculations that correspond to this number as A or 1 on your calculations
worksheet. In this way, I can easily find the calculations you performed for each item on
your cash flow statement.
6. Appropriately label the cash flow statement and the related sections follow the format
used in the text.
7. This is not a group assignment. Individual work is expected. No points will be given if
submitted assignment is not your own work.
Points: Total of 10 Points
Points are allocated as follows:
4 points for the Operating Activities direct
2 points for the Operating Activities indirect
2 points for the Investing Activities, and
2 points for the Financing Activities
As agreed, points will NOT be awarded for partially correct work in each section. Each
section must be accurately completed in its entirety to receive the allocated points
(including showing related calculations or T accounts).
Due Date: No Exceptions
This assignment is due no later than 6am on Tuesday, November 26, 2013.
There are no exceptions. Late submissions will not be accepted.

1

Assignment Submission
Select 1 of 2 Ways to submit assignment:
1. The assignment may be submitted via email. Scanned images that are clearly legible and
submitted in PDF format will be accepted. Work in MSExcel or MSWord will also be
accepted with clearly labeled pages/tabs (as appropriate).
2. Hardcopy slipped under my office door in RCB 5th Floor room 515 by the due date. Please
notify me ahead of time by email me if you choose this option. Note that access is
restricted to the RCB building after 7pm daily.

Assignment
In addition to the financial statements presented on the next pages, also find the notes below.
Use information as necessary from the notes and the financial statements to construct the cash
flow statement for the company for the year ending December 31, 2012
Notes:
1. All equipment/furniture purchases are made using cash. There were no disposals during
the year.
2. Land that originally cost $14,000 was sold for $9,800.
3. Short-term investments are not classified as a cash equivalent and are non-trade related.
Any purchases or sales are made in cash.
4. Long-term notes payable and bonds payable are shown in the balance sheet at their face
value and indicate repayments or issuances as appropriate.
5. Cash dividends were paid to shareholders during the year.

2

Green Lantern Company
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2012 and 2011
($ in 000s)
2012

2011

Assets
Current Assets
Cash
Accounts Receivable
Short-term Investments
Inventory
Total Current Assets
Property Plant and Equipment
Land
Equipment and Furniture
Less: Accumulated Depreciation
Net Property Plant and Equipment

$
$
$
$
$

58.8
102.2
56.0
105.0
322.0

$

70.0

$

84.0

609.0
679.0

$ 560.0
$ (105.0) $ 455.0
$ 539.0

$ 1,001.0

$ 805.0

Current Liabilities
Accounts Payable
Salaries Payable
Interest Payable
Income Tax Payable
Total Current Liabilities

$
$
$
$
$

39.2
2.8
7.0
12.6
61.6

$
$
$
$
$

Long-term Liabilities
Notes Payable
Bonds Payable
Total Long-term Liabilities

$
$
$

224.0
224.0

$ 42.0
$ 140.0
$ 182.0

Shareholders’ Equity
Common Stock
Paid in Capital – excess of par
Retained Earnings
Total Shareholders’ Equity

$
$
$
$

350.0
176.4
189.0
715.4

$
$
$
$

Total Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity

$ 1,001.0

Total Assets

$ 770.0
$ (161.0) $
$

$ 42.0
$ 105.0
$ 21.0
$ 98.0
$ 266.0

Liabilities

49.0
7.0
4.2
16.8
77.0

280.0
140.0
126.0
546.0

$ 805.0

3

Green Lantern Company
Income Statement
For Year Ended December 31, 2012
($ in 000s)

Revenues
Sales Revenue
Expenses
Cost of Goods Sold
Salaries Expense
Depreciation Expense
Interest Expense
Loss on Sale of Land
Income Tax Expense
Net Income

$ 532.0

$ 182.0
$ 63.0
$ 56.0
$ 16.8
$
4.2
$ 98.0 $ (420.0)
$ 112.0

4

fancy distributing company of atlanta sells fans 497104

Fancy Distributing Company of Atlanta sells fans and heaters to retail outlets throughout the Southeast. Joe Fancy, the president of the company, is thinking about changing the firm s credit policy to attract customers away from competitors. The present policy calls for 1/10, net 30 cash discount. The new policy would call for a 5/10, net 45 cash discount. Currently, 35 percent of Fancy customers are taking the discount, and it is anticipated that this number would go up to 65 percent with the new discount policy. It is further anticipated that annual sales would increase from a level of $200,000 to $600,000 as a result of the change in the cash discount policy.

The increased sales would also affect the inventory level. The average inventory carried by Logan is based on a determination of an EOQ. Assume sales of fans and heaters increase from 11,500 to 23,750 units. The ordering cost for each order is $175, and the carrying cost per unit is $2.50 (these values will not change with the discount). The average inventory is based on EOQ/2. Each inventory has an average cost of $12.50.
Cost of goods sold is equal to 60 percent of net sales; general and administrative expenses are 15 percent of net sales; and interest payments of 14 percent will only be necessary for the increase in the accounts receivable and inventory balances. Taxes will be 34 percent of before-tax income.

a. Compute the accounts receivable balance before and after the change in the cash discount policy. Use the net sales (total sales minus cash discounts) to determine the average daily sales.
b. Determine the EOQ before and after the change in the cash discount policy. Translate this into average inventory (in units and dollars) before and after the change in the cash discount policy.
c. Compute the following income statement.

d. Should the new cash discount policy be utilized? Briefly comment.

farman appliance mart ending inventory under a perpetual inventory system 497106

Problem 6-9A

Farman Appliance Mart began operations on May 1. It uses a perpetual inventory system. During May, the company had the following purchases and sales for its Model 25 Sureshot camera.

Purchases
Date Units Unit Cost Sales Units
May 1 210 $153
May 4 120
May 8 240 $173
May 12 150
May 15 180 $188
May 20 90
May 25 120

Calculate the average cost per unit at May 1, 4, 8, 12, 15, 20 & 25. (Round answers to 3 decimal places, e.g. $105.252.)
Average cost for each unit
May 1 $ 153
May 4 $ 153
May 8 $ 167.545
May 12 $ 167.545
May 15 $ 177.772
May 20 $ 177.772
May 25 $ 177.772

Determine the ending inventory under a perpetual inventory system using (1) FIFO, (2) moving-average cost, and (3) LIFO. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,150.)

The ending inventory under a perpetual inventory system
1) FIFO
2)MOVING-AVERAGE
3)LIFO

the fashion shoe company operates a chain of women s shoe shops around the country 497108

The Fashion Shoe Company operates a chain of women s shoe shops around the country. The shops carry many styles of shoes that are all sold at the same price. Sales personnel in the shops are paid a substantial commission on each pair of shoes sold (in addition to a small basic salary) in order to encourage them to be aggressive in their sales efforts. The following worksheet contains cost and revenue data for Shop 48 and is typical of the company s many outlets:

Per Pair of Shoes

Selling price $ 30.00

Variable expenses:

Invoice cost $ 13.50

Sales commission 4.50

Total variable expenses $ 18.00

Annual Fixed expenses:

Advertising $ 30,000

Rent 20,000

Salaries 100,000

Total fixed expenses $ 150,000

1. Calculate the annual break-even point in dollar sales and in unit sales for Shop 48.

2. Prepare a CVP graph showing cost and revenue data for Shop 48 from zero shoes up to 17,000 pairs of shoes sold each year. Clearly indicate the break-even point on the graph.

3. If 12,000 pairs of shoes are sold in a year, what would be Shop 48’s net operating income or loss?

4. The company is considering paying the store manager of Shop 48 an incentive commission of Shop 48 an incentive commission of 75 cents per pair of shoes (in addition to the salesperson’s commission). If this change is made, what will be the new break-even point in dollar sales and in unit sales?

5. Refer to the original data. As an alternative to (4) above, the company is considering paying the store manager 50 cents commission on each pair of shoes sold in excess of the break-even point. If this change is made, what will be the shop’s net operating income or loss if 15,000 pairs of shoes are sold?

6. Refer to the original data. The company is considering eliminating sales commissions entirely in its shops and increasing fixed salaries by $31,500 annually. If this change is made, what will be the new break-even point in dollar sales and in unit sales for Shop 48? Would you recommend that the change be made? Explain.

fed tax quiz 497110

(TCOs 1 and 8) Sarah and Emily form Red Corporation with the following investments: Sarah transfers computers worth $200,000 (basis of $80,000), and Emily transfers real estate worth $180,000 (basis of $40,000) and services (worth $20,000) rendered in organizing the corporation. Each is issued 600 shares in Red Corporation. With respect to the transfers, (Points : 5)

Sarah has no recognized gain; Emily recognizes income/gain of $160,000.
Neither Sarah nor Emily recognizes gain or income.
Red Corporation has a basis of $60,000 in the real estate.
Emily has a basis of $60,000 in the shares of Red Corporation.
None of the above

Question 2. 2.(TCOs 1 and 8) Hunter and Warren form Tan Corporation. Hunter transfers equipment (basis of $210,000 and fair market value of $180,000), and Warren transfers land (basis of $15,000 and fair market value of $150,000) and $30,000 of cash. Each receives 50% of Tan’s stock. As a result of these transfers, (Points : 5)

Hunter has a recognized loss of $30,000; Warren has a recognized gain of $135,000.
Neither Hunter nor Warren has any recognized gain or loss.
Hunter has no recognized loss; Warren has a recognized gain of $30,000.
Tan Corporation has a basis in the land of $45,000.
None of the above

Question 3. 3.(TCOs 1, 8, and 9) Eagle Corporation owns stock in Hawk Corporation and has taxable income of $160,000 for the year before considering the dividends received deduction. Hawk Corporation pays Eagle a dividend of $200,000, which was considered in calculating the $160,000. What amount of dividends received deduction may Eagle claim if it owns 15% of Hawk’s stock? (Points : 5)

$0
$112,000
$140,000
$160,000
None of the above

Question 4. 4.(TCOs 1 and 8) Emerald Corporation, a calendar year C corporation, was formed and began operations on July 1, 2010. The following expenses were incurred during the first tax year (July 1 through December 31, 2010) of operations:

Expenses of temporary directors and of organizational meetings

$9,000

Fee paid to the state of incorporation

$1,000

Accounting services incident to organization

$2,500

Legal services for drafting the corporate charter and bylaws

$3,500

Expenses incident to the printing and sale of stock certificates

$4,000

Assuming a 248 election, what is the Emerald’s deduction for organizational expenditures for 2010? (Points : 5)

$0
$533
$5,367
$5,500
None of the above

Question 5. 5.(TCOs 1 and 9) Beige Corporation (a calendar year taxpayer) has taxable income of $150,000, and its financial records reflect the following for the year.

Federal income taxes paid

$75,000

Net operating loss carry forward deducted currently

$35,000

Gain recognized this year on an installment sale from a prior year

$22,000

Depreciation deducted on tax return (ADS depreciation would have been $5,000)

$20,000

Interest income on Iowa state bonds

$4,000

What is Beige Corporation’s current E & P? (Points : 5)

$68,000
$77,000
$103,000
$107,000
None of the above

Question 6. 6.(TCOs 1 and 9) Stacey and Andrew each own one half of the stock in Parakeet Corporation, a calendar year taxpayer. Cash distributions from Parakeet are $350,000 to Stacey on April 1 and $150,000 to Andrew on May 1. If Parakeet’s current E & P is $60,000, how much is allocated to Andrew’s distribution? (Points : 5)

$5,000
$10,000
$18,000
$30,000
None of the above

Question 7. 7.(TCOs 1 and 10) Which, if any, of the following can be eligible shareholders of an S corporation? (Points : 5)

A resident alien
Partnership
A foreign corporation
A nonqualifying trust
None of the above

Question 8. 8.(TCOs 1 and 10) Samantha owned 1,000 shares in Evita, Inc. an S corporation, that uses the calendar year. On October 11, 2010, Samantha sells all of her Evita stock. Her basis at the beginning of 2010 was $60,000. Her share of the corporate income for 2010 was $22,000, and she receives a distribution of $37,000 between January 1 and October 11, 2010. What is her basis at the time of the sale? (Points : 5)

$45,000
$60,000
$75,000
$82,000

Question 9. 9.(TCOs 1 and 10) On January 1, 2010, Kinney, Inc. an electing S corporation, has $4,000 of AEP and a balance of $10,000 in AAA. Kinney has two shareholders, Erin and Maine, each of whom owns 500 shares of Kinney’s stock. Kinney’s 2010 taxable income is $5,000. Kinney distributes $6,000 to each shareholder on February 1, 2010, and distributes another $3,000 to each shareholder on September 1. How is Erin taxed on this distribution? (Points : 5)

$500 dividend income
$1,000 dividend income
$1,500 dividend income
$3,000 dividend income
None of the above

Question 10. 10.(TCOs 1 and 10) Lott Corporation in Macon, Georgia, converts to S corporation status in 2010. Lott used the LIFO inventory method in 2009 and had a LIFO inventory of $420,000 (FIFO value of $550,000). How much tax must be added to the 2009 corporate tax liability, assuming that Lott is subject to a 35% tax rate? (Points : 5)

$0
$11,375
$45,500
$130,000
None of the above

  1. You re probably of the opinion that the distinction between separately stated and non-separately stated income is one of the most confusing concepts that you ve encountered this week. For Congress to come up with something this confusing, you know it must have had a good reason (or at least we’d like to think so!). Think about the concept for a moment. What is the broad tax policy behind separating these two categories of income? What is Congress trying to achieve? What problems does it prevent? What problems does it cause?
  2. In enacting Subchapter S of the Code, Congress decided to give a certain group of corporations a break from the burden of double taxation. Given this fact, there MUST be limitations on the corporations that can select S corporation status! Provide an example of one such limitation, including the text of the Code section that provides the limitation

fed tax quiz and short answers 497111

(TCOs 1 and 8) Sarah and Emily form Red Corporation with the following investments: Sarah transfers computers worth $200,000 (basis of $80,000), and Emily transfers real estate worth $180,000 (basis of $40,000) and services (worth $20,000) rendered in organizing the corporation. Each is issued 600 shares in Red Corporation. With respect to the transfers, (Points : 5)
Sarah has no recognized gain; Emily recognizes income/gain of $160,000.
Neither Sarah nor Emily recognizes gain or income.
Red Corporation has a basis of $60,000 in the real estate.
Emily has a basis of $60,000 in the shares of Red Corporation.
None of the above

Question 2. 2. (TCOs 1 and 8) Hunter and Warren form Tan Corporation. Hunter transfers equipment (basis of $210,000 and fair market value of $180,000), and Warren transfers land (basis of $15,000 and fair market value of $150,000) and $30,000 of cash. Each receives 50% of Tan’s stock. As a result of these transfers, (Points : 5)
Hunter has a recognized loss of $30,000; Warren has a recognized gain of $135,000.
Neither Hunter nor Warren has any recognized gain or loss.
Hunter has no recognized loss; Warren has a recognized gain of $30,000.
Tan Corporation has a basis in the land of $45,000.
None of the above

Question 3. 3. (TCOs 1, 8, and 9) Eagle Corporation owns stock in Hawk Corporation and has taxable income of $160,000 for the year before considering the dividends received deduction. Hawk Corporation pays Eagle a dividend of $200,000, which was considered in calculating the $160,000. What amount of dividends received deduction may Eagle claim if it owns 15% of Hawk’s stock? (Points : 5)
$0
$112,000
$140,000
$160,000
None of the above

Question 4. 4. (TCOs 1 and 8) Emerald Corporation, a calendar year C corporation, was formed and began operations on July 1, 2010. The following expenses were incurred during the first tax year (July 1 through December 31, 2010) of operations:
Expenses of temporary directors and of organizational meetings $9,000
Fee paid to the state of incorporation $1,000
Accounting services incident to organization $2,500
Legal services for drafting the corporate charter and bylaws $3,500
Expenses incident to the printing and sale of stock certificates $4,000

Assuming a 248 election, what is the Emerald’s deduction for organizational expenditures for 2010? (Points : 5)
$0
$533
$5,367
$5,500
None of the above

Question 5. 5. (TCOs 1 and 9) Beige Corporation (a calendar year taxpayer) has taxable income of $150,000, and its financial records reflect the following for the year.
Federal income taxes paid $75,000
Net operating loss carry forward deducted currently $35,000
Gain recognized this year on an installment sale from a prior year $22,000
Depreciation deducted on tax return (ADS depreciation would have been $5,000) $20,000
Interest income on Iowa state bonds $4,000

What is Beige Corporation’s current E & P? (Points : 5)
$68,000
$77,000
$103,000
$107,000
None of the above

Question 6. 6. (TCOs 1 and 9) Stacey and Andrew each own one half of the stock in Parakeet Corporation, a calendar year taxpayer. Cash distributions from Parakeet are $350,000 to Stacey on April 1 and $150,000 to Andrew on May 1. If Parakeet’s current E & P is $60,000, how much is allocated to Andrew’s distribution? (Points : 5)
$5,000
$10,000
$18,000
$30,000
None of the above

Question 7. 7. (TCOs 1 and 10) Which, if any, of the following can be eligible shareholders of an S corporation? (Points : 5)
A resident alien
Partnership
A foreign corporation
A nonqualifying trust
None of the above

Question 8. 8. (TCOs 1 and 10) Samantha owned 1,000 shares in Evita, Inc. an S corporation, that uses the calendar year. On October 11, 2010, Samantha sells all of her Evita stock. Her basis at the beginning of 2010 was $60,000. Her share of the corporate income for 2010 was $22,000, and she receives a distribution of $37,000 between January 1 and October 11, 2010. What is her basis at the time of the sale? (Points : 5)
$45,000
$60,000
$75,000
$82,000

Question 9. 9. (TCOs 1 and 10) On January 1, 2010, Kinney, Inc. an electing S corporation, has $4,000 of AEP and a balance of $10,000 in AAA. Kinney has two shareholders, Erin and Maine, each of whom owns 500 shares of Kinney’s stock. Kinney’s 2010 taxable income is $5,000. Kinney distributes $6,000 to each shareholder on February 1, 2010, and distributes another $3,000 to each shareholder on September 1. How is Erin taxed on this distribution? (Points : 5)
$500 dividend income
$1,000 dividend income
$1,500 dividend income
$3,000 dividend income
None of the above

Question 10. 10. (TCOs 1 and 10) Lott Corporation in Macon, Georgia, converts to S corporation status in 2010. Lott used the LIFO inventory method in 2009 and had a LIFO inventory of $420,000 (FIFO value of $550,000). How much tax must be added to the 2009 corporate tax liability, assuming that Lott is subject to a 35% tax rate? (Points : 5)
$0
$11,375
$45,500
$130,000
None of the above

(TCOs 1 and 8) Sarah and Emily form Red Corporation with the following investments: Sarah transfers computers worth $200,000 (basis of $80,000), and Emily transfers real estate worth $180,000 (basis of $40,000) and services (worth $20,000) rendered in organizing the corporation. Each is issued 600 shares in Red Corporation. With respect to the transfers, (Points : 5)
Sarah has no recognized gain; Emily recognizes income/gain of $160,000.
Neither Sarah nor Emily recognizes gain or income.
Red Corporation has a basis of $60,000 in the real estate.
Emily has a basis of $60,000 in the shares of Red Corporation.
None of the above

Question 2. 2. (TCOs 1 and 8) Hunter and Warren form Tan Corporation. Hunter transfers equipment (basis of $210,000 and fair market value of $180,000), and Warren transfers land (basis of $15,000 and fair market value of $150,000) and $30,000 of cash. Each receives 50% of Tan’s stock. As a result of these transfers, (Points : 5)
Hunter has a recognized loss of $30,000; Warren has a recognized gain of $135,000.
Neither Hunter nor Warren has any recognized gain or loss.
Hunter has no recognized loss; Warren has a recognized gain of $30,000.
Tan Corporation has a basis in the land of $45,000.
None of the above

Question 3. 3. (TCOs 1, 8, and 9) Eagle Corporation owns stock in Hawk Corporation and has taxable income of $160,000 for the year before considering the dividends received deduction. Hawk Corporation pays Eagle a dividend of $200,000, which was considered in calculating the $160,000. What amount of dividends received deduction may Eagle claim if it owns 15% of Hawk’s stock? (Points : 5)
$0
$112,000
$140,000
$160,000
None of the above

Question 4. 4. (TCOs 1 and 8) Emerald Corporation, a calendar year C corporation, was formed and began operations on July 1, 2010. The following expenses were incurred during the first tax year (July 1 through December 31, 2010) of operations:
Expenses of temporary directors and of organizational meetings $9,000
Fee paid to the state of incorporation $1,000
Accounting services incident to organization $2,500
Legal services for drafting the corporate charter and bylaws $3,500
Expenses incident to the printing and sale of stock certificates $4,000

Assuming a 248 election, what is the Emerald’s deduction for organizational expenditures for 2010? (Points : 5)
$0
$533
$5,367
$5,500
None of the above

Question 5. 5. (TCOs 1 and 9) Beige Corporation (a calendar year taxpayer) has taxable income of $150,000, and its financial records reflect the following for the year.
Federal income taxes paid $75,000
Net operating loss carry forward deducted currently $35,000
Gain recognized this year on an installment sale from a prior year $22,000
Depreciation deducted on tax return (ADS depreciation would have been $5,000) $20,000
Interest income on Iowa state bonds $4,000

What is Beige Corporation’s current E & P? (Points : 5)
$68,000
$77,000
$103,000
$107,000
None of the above

Question 6. 6. (TCOs 1 and 9) Stacey and Andrew each own one half of the stock in Parakeet Corporation, a calendar year taxpayer. Cash distributions from Parakeet are $350,000 to Stacey on April 1 and $150,000 to Andrew on May 1. If Parakeet’s current E & P is $60,000, how much is allocated to Andrew’s distribution? (Points : 5)
$5,000
$10,000
$18,000
$30,000
None of the above

Question 7. 7. (TCOs 1 and 10) Which, if any, of the following can be eligible shareholders of an S corporation? (Points : 5)
A resident alien
Partnership
A foreign corporation
A nonqualifying trust
None of the above

Question 8. 8. (TCOs 1 and 10) Samantha owned 1,000 shares in Evita, Inc. an S corporation, that uses the calendar year. On October 11, 2010, Samantha sells all of her Evita stock. Her basis at the beginning of 2010 was $60,000. Her share of the corporate income for 2010 was $22,000, and she receives a distribution of $37,000 between January 1 and October 11, 2010. What is her basis at the time of the sale? (Points : 5)
$45,000
$60,000
$75,000
$82,000

Question 9. 9. (TCOs 1 and 10) On January 1, 2010, Kinney, Inc. an electing S corporation, has $4,000 of AEP and a balance of $10,000 in AAA. Kinney has two shareholders, Erin and Maine, each of whom owns 500 shares of Kinney’s stock. Kinney’s 2010 taxable income is $5,000. Kinney distributes $6,000 to each shareholder on February 1, 2010, and distributes another $3,000 to each shareholder on September 1. How is Erin taxed on this distribution? (Points : 5)
$500 dividend income
$1,000 dividend income
$1,500 dividend income
$3,000 dividend income
None of the above

Question 10. 10. (TCOs 1 and 10) Lott Corporation in Macon, Georgia, converts to S corporation status in 2010. Lott used the LIFO inventory method in 2009 and had a LIFO inventory of $420,000 (FIFO value of $550,000). How much tax must be added to the 2009 corporate tax liability, assuming that Lott is subject to a 35% tax rate? (Points : 5)
$0
$11,375
$45,500
$130,000
None of the above

1. You re probably of the opinion that the distinction between separately stated and non-separately stated income is one of the most confusing concepts that you ve encountered this week. For Congress to come up with something this confusing, you know it must have had a good reason (or at least we’d like to think so!). Think about the concept for a moment. What is the broad tax policy behind separating these two categories of income? What is Congress trying to achieve? What problems does it prevent? What problems does it cause?

2. In enacting Subchapter S of the Code, Congress decided to give a certain group of corporations a break from the burden of double taxation. Given this fact, there MUST be limitations on the corporations that can select S corporation status! Provide an example of one such limitation, including the text of the Code section that provides the limitation

federal accounting 497112

part 1

David, a CPA for a large accounting firm, works 10- to 12-hour days. As a requirement for his position, he must attend social events to recruit new clients. In addition to his job with the accounting firm, he also has private clients in his unincorporated professional practice. David purchased exercise equipment for $3,000. He works out on the equipment to maintain his stamina and good health that enable him to carry such a heavy workload. What tax issues should David consider? Please cite IRC code at least once.

part 2 I need a question or observation to say ask or tell to a fellow student who posted the answer below to the same question. It only needs to be 2 or 3 sentences long.

Betty said:

David should consider the substantiation of the expenses that he incurs when he must attend social events for his employer.01 Section 162(a) allows a deduction for all ordinary and necessary expenses paid or incurred during the taxable year in carrying on any trade or business, including certain expenses for meals and entertainment.If you are an employee and have ordinary and necessary business-related expenses for travel away from home, local transportation, entertainment, and gifts, you may be able to deduct these expenses. Generally, you must file Form 2106 or Form 2106-EZ to claim these expenses.

IRC Section 274(d) and Treas. Regs. Section 1.274-5 also provide for full disallowance of meals, entertainment and lodging expenses unless the taxpayer can substantiate the business purpose of the expenditure. The following details must be documented for each lodging and other expenditures in excess of $75:1) the amount of expense 2) the time and place of the meal, entertainment, etc. 3) the business purpose of the expenditure and 4) the business relationships of those in attendance. In regards to his own business he needs to keep separate records from his regular job. He may consider taking the in home office deduction on Form8829.

To be tax deductible, an office in the home, unless it is in a separate structure, must be used as either the principle place of business or as a place of business used to meet customers, clients, or patients in the normal course of business. In all cases, the office in the home must be used exclusively for business and on a regular basis for these purposes. An employee can only qualify if the business use is for the convenience of the employer. Section 280A.

In regards to the $3,000 treadmill David cannot take it as a medical expense unless he gets a doctor s note indicating that he needs the treadmill for a medical reason such as obesity or a heart problem. He would record it on Schedule A subjectto a 10% ceiling of AGI (2013).

part 3

Wayne and Maria file a joint tax return on which they itemize their deductions and report AGI of $50,000. During the year, they incurred $1,500 of medical expenses when Maria broke her leg. Furthermore, their dentist informed them that their daughter, Alicia, needs $3,000 of orthodontic work to correct her overbite. Wayne also needs a new pair of eyeglasses that will cost $300. What tax issues should Wayne and Maria consider?

federal tax questions 497113

1.. Distinguish between realized gains and losses and recognized gains and losses.

2.Amos, a single individual with a salary of $50,000, incurred and paid the following expenses during the year:
Medical expenses: $5,000
Alimony: $14,000
Casualty loss (after $100 floor): $1,000
State income taxes: $4,000
Moving expenses: $1,500
Contribution to a traditional IRA: $2,000
Student loan interest: $1,200

Analyze the above expenses and determine which ones are deductible for AGI. Please support your position.

3. Carl had the following transactions for 2010.
Salary: $55,000
Damage award (compensatory) for city bus accident: $20,000
Loss on sale of stock investment: $4,500
Loan from father to purchase auto: $10,000
Alimony paid to former wife: $11,000

What is Carl’s AGI for 2010?

4. Sara owns a sole proprietorship, and Phil is the sole shareholder of a C (regular) corporation. Each business sustained a $9,000 operating loss and a $2,000 capital loss for the year. Evaluate how these losses will affect the taxable income of the two owners.

5. John forms a corporation and transfers property having a basis to him of $18,000 and a fair market value of $26,000 to the corporation for 1,000 shares of $10 par stock. One year later, Hal transfers property having a basis to him of $2,500 and a fair market value of $3,500 for 100 shares of the stock. Hal is not related to John. The corporation issued no other stock.

(a) How much gain does John recognize on his exchange? What is the basis to John of his 1,000 shares?
(b) What gain or loss is recognized by the corporation when it issues its shares to John? What is the basis to the corporation of the property it received from John?
(c) How much gain does Hal recognize on his exchange? What is the basis to Hal of his 100 shares?

6. XYZ Company had a net loss of $90,000 from operations in 2007. Tina owns XYZ and works 20 hours a week in the business. She has a large amount of income from other sources and is in the 33% marginal tax bracket. Would Tina’s tax situation be better if XYZ were a proprietorship or a C corporation? Explain why

7. On April 18, 2011, Tara Wilson purchased 30 shares of ABC stock for $210, and on September 29, 2011, she purchased 90 additional shares for $900. On November 28, 2011, she sold 48 shares, which could not be specifically identified, for $576, and on December 8, 2011, she sold another 25 shares for $200. What is her recognized gain or loss?

8. In 2010, OK Company had a net loss of $82,000 from operations. Jane owns OK Company and works 20 hours a week in the business. She has a large amount of income from other sources and is in the 35% marginal tax bracket. Would Jane’s tax situation be better if OK Company were a proprietorship or a C corporation? Explain why.

9. Bob Smith, a professional basketball player, raises Black Angus cattle under circumstances that would indicate that the activity is a hobby. His adjusted gross income for the year is $80,000, and he has $1,000 of other miscellaneous itemized deductions, all of which are subject to the two-percent floor. During the taxable year, the feed for the cattle cost $3,000. The income from the sale of cattle was $2,800.

(a) Under the hobby loss rule, to what extent is the expense of $3,000 deductible?

(b) Under the two-percent-of-adjusted-gross-income limitation, how much is the overall deductible amount of his itemized deductions?

fenton company applied fifo 497114

Fenton Company applied FIFO to its inventory and got the following results for its ending inventory.
Cameras 100 units at a cost per unit of $68
DVD players 150 units at a cost per unit of $75
iPods 125 units at a cost per unit of $80
The cost of purchasing units at year-end was cameras $70, DVD players $69, and iPods $78.
Determine the amount of ending inventory at lower-of-cost-or-market.

few mcq 497115

5. The owner of BobCats R Us paid his personal MasterCard bill using a company check. The correct entry to record the transaction is:

6. The business provided services to a cash customer. To record this:

7. The entry to record Tom’s payment of a home telephone bill is:

8. Which of the statements of the rules of debit and credit is true

9. Which of the following entries would be used to record the billing of fees earned

17. Dennis, owner of Dennis’ Golf Center, withdrew $900 in cash from the business. Record the transaction by

19. A credit to an asset account was posted to the Capital account. This error would cause

20. The owner invested personal equipment in the business. To record this transaction

fi504 microsoft and oracle comparative analysis latest 2011 data 497116

Financial Statement Analysis Project — A Comparative Analysis of Oracle Corporation and Microsoft Corporation

Here is the link for the financial statements for Oracle Corporation for the fiscal year ending 2011. First, select 2011 using the drop-down arrow labeled for Year on the right-hand side of the page, and then select Annual Reports using the drop-down arrow labeled Filing Type on the left-hand side of the page.

You should select the 10k dated 6/28/2011 and choose to download in PDF, Word, or Excel format.

http://www.oracle.com/us/corporate/investor-relations/sec/index.html

Here is the link for the financial statements for Microsoft Corporation for the fiscal year ending 2011. You should select the 10k dated 7/28/2011 and choose to download in Word or Excel
format.

http://www.microsoft.com/investor/SEC/default.aspx?year=2011&filing=annual

Required Ratios for Final Project Submission

1)
Earnings per Share

2)
Current Ratio

3)
Gross Profit Rate

4)
Profit Margin Ratio

5)
Inventory Turnover Ratio

6)
Days in Inventory

7)
Receivables Turnover Ratio

8)
Average Collection Period

9)
Asset Turnover Ratio
10) Return on Assets Ratio

11) Debt to Total Assets Ratio

12) Times Interest Earned Ratio

13) Payout ratio

14) Return on Common Stockholders Equity Ratio

15) Free Cash Flow

16) Current Cash Debt Coverage Ratio

17) Cash Debt Coverage Ratio

18)
Price/Earnings Ratio [For the
purpose of this ratio, for Oracle, use the market price per share on May 30, 2011
and for Microsoft, use the market price per share on June 30, 2011]

fianacial analysis 497117

Problem 17-1A Ratios, common-size statements, and trend percents L.O. P1, P2, P3

[The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

Selected comparative financial statements of Bennington Company follow:

BENNINGTON COMPANY

Comparative Income Statements

For Years Ended December 31, 2012, 2011, and 2010

2012

2011

2010

Sales

$

457,083

$

350,163

$

243,000

Cost of goods sold

275,164

219,202

155,520

Gross profit

181,919

130,961

87,480

Selling expenses

64,906

48,322

32,076

Administrative expenses

41,137

30,814

20,169

Total expenses

106,043

79,136

52,245

Income before taxes

75,876

51,825

35,235

Income taxes

14,113

10,624

7,153

Net income

$

61,763

$

41,201

$

28,082

BENNINGTON COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31, 2012, 2011, and 2010

2012

2011

2010

Assets

Current assets

$

47,321

$

37,023

$

49,491

Long-term investments

0

1,200

3,960

Plant assets, net

85,231

90,490

53,188

Total assets

$

132,552

$

128,713

$

106,639

Liabilities and Equity

Current liabilities

$

19,353

$

19,178

$

18,662

Common stock

71,000

71,000

53,000

Other paid-in capital

8,875

8,875

5,889

Retained earnings

33,324

29,660

29,088

Total liabilities and equity

$

132,552

$

128,713

$

106,639

references

value:
1.00 points

Problem 17-1A Part 1

Required:

Compute each year’s current ratio. (Round your answers to 1 decimal place.)

Current ratio

December 31, 2012:

to

Current ratio

December 31, 2011:

to

Current ratio

December 31, 2010:

to

eBook Links (3)references

value:
1.00 points

Problem 17-1A Part 2

Express the income statement data in common-size percents. (Percents are rounded to two decimals and thus may not exactly sum to totals and subtotals. Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

BENNINGTON COMPANY
Common-Size Comparative Income Statements
For Years Ended December 31, 2012, 2011, and 2010

2012

2011

2010

Sales

%

%

%

Cost of goods sold

Gross profit

Selling expenses

Administrative expenses

Total expenses

Income before taxes

Income taxes

Net income

%

%

%

eBook Links (3)references

value:
1.00 points

Problem 17-1A Part 3

Express the balance sheet data in trend percents with 2010 as the base year. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

BENNINGTON COMPANY
Balance Sheet Data in Trend Percents
December 31, 2012, 2011, and 2010

2012

2011

2010

Assets

Current assets

%

%

%

Long-term investments

Plant assets

Total assets

Liabilities and Equity

Current liabilities

%

%

%

Common stock

Other contributed capital

Retained earnings

Total liabilities and equity

eBook Links (3)references

Problem 17-4A Calculation of financial statement ratios L.O. P3

Selected year-end financial statements of McCord Corporation follow. (All sales were on credit; selected balance sheet amounts at December 31, 2010, were inventory, $53,900; total assets, $229,400; common stock, $95,000; and retained earnings, $52,348.)

McCORD CORPORATION
Income Statement
For Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales

$

450,600

Cost of goods sold

297,450

Gross profit

153,150

Operating expenses

99,500

Interest expense

3,900

Income before taxes

49,750

Income taxes

20,041

Net income

$

29,709

McCORD CORPORATION
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2011

Assets

Liabilities and Equity

Cash

$

16,000

Accounts payable

$

16,500

Short-term investments

8,800

Accrued wages payable

4,800

Accounts receivable, net

31,400

Income taxes payable

3,300

Notes receivable (trade)*

4,000

Long-term note payable, secured

Merchandise inventory

32,150

by mortgage on plant assets

65,400

Prepaid expenses

3,050

Common stock

95,000

Plant assets, net

153,300

Retained earnings

63,700

Total assets

$

248,700

Total liabilities and equity

$

248,700

* These are short-term notes receivable arising from customer (trade) sales.

Required:

Compute the following. (Use 365 days a year. Do not round intermediate calculations and round your final answers to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response):

(1)

Current ratio

to

(2)

Acid-test ratio

to

(3)

Days’ sales uncollected (including note)

days

(4)

Inventory turnover

times

(5)

Days’ sales in inventory

days

(6)

Debt-to-equity ratio

to

(7)

Times interest earned

times

(8)

Profit margin ratio

%

(9)

Total asset turnover

times

(10)

Return on total assets

%

(11)

Return on common stockholders’ equity

%

fiber technology inc manufactures glass fibers used in the communications industry t 497119

Exercise 3

Economic Order Quantity

For each of the following independent cases, use the equation method to compute the economic order quantity.

Case A Case B Case C

Annual requirement (in units) 13,230 1,681 560

Cost per order $250 $40 $10

Annual holding cost per unit 6 20 7

Exercise 4

Lead Time and Safety Stock

Andrew and Fulton, Inc. uses 780 tons of a chemical bonding agent each year. Monthly demand fluctuates between 50 and 80 tons. The lead time for each order is one month, and the economic order quantity is 130 tons.

1. Determine the safety stock appropriate for the chemical bonding agent.

2. At what order point, in terms of tons remaining in inventory, should Andrew and Fulton, Inc. order the bonding agent?

Exercise 5

Economic Order Quantity Equation Approach; JIT Purchasing

Fiber Technology, Inc. manufactures glass fibers used in the communications industry. The company s materials and parts manager is currently revising the inventory policy for XL-20, one of the chemicals used in the production process. The chemical is purchased in 10 pound canisters for $95 each. The firm uses 4,800 canisters per year. The controller estimates that it costs $150 to place and receive a typical order of XL-20. The annual cost of storing XL-20 is $4 per canister.

1. Write the formula for the total annual cost of ordering and storing XL-20.

2. Use the EOQ formula to determine the optimal order quantity.

3. What is the total annual cost of ordering and storing XL-20 at the economic order quantity?

4. How many orders will be placed per year?

5. Fiber Technology s controller Jay Turnbull, recently attended a seminar on JIT purchasing. Afterward he analyzed the cost of storing XL-20 including the cost of wasted space and inefficiency. He was shocked when he concluded that the real annual holding cost was $19.20 per canister. Turnbull then met with Doug Kaplan, Fiber Technology s purchasing manager. Together they contacted Reno Industries, the supplier of XL-20, about a JIT purchasing arrangement. After some discussion and negotiation, Kaplan concluded that the cost of placing an order for XL-20 could be reduced to just $20. Using these new cost estimates, Turnbull computed the new EOQ for XL-20.

a. Use the equation approach to compute the new EOQ.

b. How many orders will be placed per year?

fin 14 quiz question 1 1 which cost is a period cost points 5 497121

Question 1.1. Which cost is a period cost? (Points : 5)

Depreciation of factory equipment

Transportation-in for raw material

Patent amortization for the company’s product

Depreciation of office equipment

Question 2. 2. (TCO 2) Which product would use job-order costing? (Points : 5)

Ink pens

Custom boot maker

Soda pop

Horse saddles

Question 3. 3. (TCO 3) In a process costing system, which would be TRUE? (Points : 5)

There is no need to use time tickets to assign costs to processes.

There is no need to track materials to processes.

A process costing system is more expensive to maintain because it has more work-in-process accounts.

All of the above

Question 4. 4. (TCO 8) A company keeps 60 days of materials inventory on hand to avoid shutdowns due to materials shortages. Carrying costs average $5,000 per day. A competitor keeps 30 days of inventory on hand, and the competitor’s carrying costs average $2,000 per day. The non-value-added costs for the company are (Points : 5)

$300,000.

$150,000.

$60,000.

$0.

Question 5. 5. (TCO 8) Which is an example of a non-value-added manufacturing activity? (Points : 5)

Assembly

Scheduling

Finishing

All of the above are value-added activities.

Question 6. 6. (TCO 1) The break-even point is (Points : 5)

the volume of activity where all fixed costs are recovered.

where fixed costs equal total variable costs.

where total revenues equal total costs.

where total costs equal total contribution margin.

Question 7. 7. (TCO 1) Lewis Production Company had the following projected information for 2010.

Selling price per unit $150

Variable cost per unit $90

Total fixed costs $300,000

Which is the break-even point in units? (Points : 5)

2,000 units

5,000 units

3,333 units

60,000 units

Question 8. 8. (TCO 7) Which cost category would most likely use the number of employees or new hires as its activity driver? (Points : 5)

Maintenance

Purchasing

Personnel

Accounting

Question 9. 9. (TCO 7) Yo Department Store incurred $8,000 of indirect advertising costs for its operations. The following data have been collected for 2013 for its three departments.

Shoes Cosmetics Crafts

Sales$120,000$100,000$100,000

Direct advertising costs $9,000$7,000 $4,000

Newspaper ad space60%20% 20%

How much of the indirect advertising costs will be allocated to the Crafts Department if newspaper ad space is the activity driver? (Points : 5)

$8,000

$1,600

$800

$6,400

Question 10. 10. (TCO 5) When budgets are used for control, (Points : 5)

budgeted amounts from different years are compared.

actual amounts from different years are compared.

budgeted amounts are compared to actual amounts.

None of the above

Question 11. 11. (TCO 5) Canceco Company produces and sells pillows. It expects to sell 10,000 pillows in the year 2014 and had 1,000 pillows in finished goods inventory at the end of 2013. Canceco would like to complete operations in the year 2014 with at least 1,250 completed pillows in inventory. There is no ending work-in-process inventory. The pillows sell for $5 each.

How many pillows would be produced in the year 2014? (Points : 5)

10,000 pillows

11,000 pillows

11,250 pillows

10,250 pillows

Question 12. 12. (TCO 4) Which is the primary difference between variable and absorption costing? (Points : 5)

Inclusion of fixed selling expenses in product costs

Inclusion of variable factory overhead in period costs

Inclusion of fixed selling expenses in period costs

Inclusion of fixed factory overhead in product costs

Question 13. 13. (TCO6) Which factor would cause an UNFAVORABLE material quantity variance? (Points : 5)

Using poorly maintained machinery

Using higher quality materials

Using more highly skilled workers

Receiving discounts for purchasing larger-than-normal quantities

Question 14. 14. (TCO 6) Which equation measures the direct labor rate variance? (Points : 5)

(SR * AH) – (SR * SH).

(AR * SH) – (SR * AH).

(AR * AH) – (SR * AH).

None of the above

fin 335 test 1 497122

1. Which one of the following is a capital structure decision?

a. Should a new machine be purchased this year?

b. Should the credit terms offered to customers be revised?

c. Should debt or equity financing be used to purchase a building?

d. Should the level of inventory be increased?

2. Which one of the following functions is generally under the control of the corporate treasurer?

a. cost accounting

b. tax management

c. financial planning

d. financial accounting

3. Which one of the following best describes the liability a general partner has for the partnership debts?

a. none

b. liability limited to amount invested in the firm

c. liability limited based on percentage ownership

d. unlimited

4. Which one of the following provides you with the greatest control over a firm s daily operations?

a. limited partner

b. major stockholder in a corporation

c. minor stockholder in a joint stock company

d. sole proprietor

5. A limited partner:

a. has no personal responsibility for the debts incurred by the partnership.

b. is guaranteed a return of his or her entire investment in the partnership if the partnership terminates.

c. can only control the daily operations for an individual segment of the partnership.

d. has minimal control, if any, over the daily operations of the partnership.

6. The Sarbanes-Oxley Act in 2002 is designed to protect the public against:

a. a firm s net operating losses if those losses extend beyond a 2-year period.

b. declines in the market value of a firm s outstanding shares of stock.

c. financial malpractice and accounting fraud.

d. a firm s issuing additional shares of stock if the issue will reduce the market value of the current

outstanding shares.

7. Who has the ultimate control over a corporation?

a.SHAREHOLDERS

b. chief executive officer

c. chairman of the board

d. board of directors

8. Which one of the following is a primary market transaction?

a. Theo, the president of ABC, sells some of his shares in ABC on the NYSE

b. ABC offers newly issued shares to the general public

c. Tom instructs his broker to sell all of his shares in ABC, Inc.

d. Mary gifts shares of ABC stock to her son

Use these financial statements to answer questions 9 through 13.

Balance Sheet

2007 2008 2007 2008

Cash $ 1,700 $ 1,600 Accounts payable $13,800 $ 12,900

Accounts receivable 14,300 17,400 Long-term debt 47,500 48,600

Inventory 22,500 23,700 Common stock 17,000 22,000

Net fixed assets 82,900 81,600 Retained earnings 43,100 40,800

Total assets $121,400 $124,300 Total liabilities and equity $121,400 $124,300

Income Statement

Net Sales $163,700

Costs 108,200

Depreciation 14,100

EBIT 41,400

Interest 3,800

Taxable income 37,600

Taxes 13,200

Net Income $ 24,400

9. What is the amount of the operating cash flow?

a. $24,400 b. $30,500 c. $38,500 d. $42,300

10 What is the cash flow to stockholders for 2008?

a. $5,000 b. $19,400 c. $21,700 d. $29,400

11. What is the net new borrowing for 2008?

a. -$2,700 b. $200 c. $1,100 d. $4,900

12. What is the change in net working capital for 2008?

a. $5,100 b. $6,300 c. $24,700 d. $25,200

13. What is the cash flow to creditors for 2008?

a. -$2,700 b. -$1,100 c. $1,100 d. $2,700

14. A firm currently has an average tax rate of 20 percent and a marginal tax rate of 25 percent based on its

current taxable income of $36,600. What will the firm s average tax rate be if it increases its taxable income by $1,100?

a. 20 percent b. 20.05 percent c. 20.09 percent d. 20.15 percent

15. Redding Industrial Supply had common stock of $6,800 and retained earnings of $4,925 at the beginning of the year. At the end of the year, the common stock balance is $7,000 and the retained earnings account balance is $5,498. The net income for the year is $938. What is the retention ratio?

a. 17.59 percent b. 38.91 percent c. 61.09 percent d. 82.41 percent

16. Which one of the following formulas is correct?

a. Profit margin = EBIT / Sales

b. Capital intensity ratio = 1 / Return on assets

c. ROA = ROE / Equity multiplier

d. Quick ratio = Cash / Current liabilities

17. If a firm uses cash to purchase inventory, its quick ratio will increase.

a.

True

b.

False

18. Use the following tax table to answer this question.

Taxable Income

Tax Rate

$0-50,000

15%

$50,001-75,000

25%

$75,001-100,000

34%

$100,001-335,000

39%

Pools, Inc., has taxable income of $77,000 for the year. Which one of the following statements is correct concerning Pools’ tax situation?

a.

Pools’ average tax rate is 18.74 percent.

b.

Pools’ average tax rate is 34.00 percent.

c.

Pools’ marginal tax rate is 15.00 percent.

d.

Pools’ marginal tax rate is 18.74 percent.

19. You currently have $7,200 in your investment account. You can earn an average rate of return of 11.7 percent per year. How long will you have to wait until your account is worth $50,000?

a. 9.47 years b. 11.28 years c. 14.67 years d. 17.51 years

20. Your savings account is currently worth $1,200. The account pays 4.5 percent interest compounded annually. How much will your account be worth 6 years from now?

a. $1,524.00 b. $1,562.71 c. $1,611.18 d. $1,627.19

21. You purchased a new1972 Plymouth Barracuda Ragtop with a 426-Hemi36 years ago at a cost of $3,900. You took care of this car, realizing it s divine nature. Today, you sold that car for $1,750,000 in order to afford tuition and meals and buy a little gas for your moped. What annual rate of return did you earn on this vehicle?

a.1.42 percent b.18.48 percent c. 8.48 percent d. 8.38 percent

22. The Corner Bank is offering you a credit card with an APR of 12.9 percent. The bank compounds the interest rate on a monthly basis. What is the effective annual rate?

a. 13.69 percent b. 13.87 percent c. 14.03 percent d. 14.14 percent

23. A preferred stock is currently valued at $62.80 a share and pays an annual dividend of $7. The par value is

$100 per share. What is the rate of return on this security?

a. 8.97 percent b. 10.58 percent c. 11.15 percent d. 11.33 percent

24. Over the past 30 years your parents saved money each month for their retirement. They retired this week and expect to live another 28 years. Their investment account is currently valued at $487,300 and is expected to earn 7 percent annually in the future. How much money can they withdraw annually if they wish to spend all of their money during their lifetime?

a. $5,158.75 b. $6,038.59 c. $39,269.75 d. $40,149.59

25. Suzie has $16,000 in her investment account today. She saves $500 a quarter and earns 8 percent interest, compounded quarterly. How much money will she have in her account three years from now?

a. $16,821.87 b. $18,509.53 c. $22,300.16 d. $26,997.91

26. Tom invested $150 at the beginning of each month for the last 14 years and earned 6 percent interest, compounded monthly. Julia invested $300 at the end of each month for the past 7 years and earned 6 percent interest, compounded monthly. Today, Tom has ______ than Julia.

a. $8,164.15 less

b. $8,320.26 less

c. $8,164.15 more

d. $8,320.26 more

27. A series of equal cash flows that occur at the beginning of each time period for a limited number of time periods is called a(n):
a. ordinary annuity.
b. beginning annuity.
c. annuity due.
d. perpetuity.
e. perpetuity due.

28. In Canada and the United Kingdom, a perpetuity is also called a(n):
a. consul.
b. infinite bond.
c. infinity flow.
d. dowry.
e. forever bond.

29. Which type of loan is comparable to the present value of a future lump sum
a. effective annual rate
b. amortized
c. interest-only
d. annual percentage
e. pure discount

30. Which one of the following is a correct statement, all else held constant
a. The present value is inversely related to the future value.
b. The future value is inversely related to the period of time.
c. The period of time is directly related to the interest rate.
d. The present value is inversely related to the interest rate.
e. The interest rate is inversely related to the future value.

31. Which one of the following is a breakdown of the ROE into its three component parts
a. equity analysis
b. efficiency breakout
c. Du Pont identity
d. sustainable growth
e. profitability ratios

32. Suppose given NI= $132,186, Sales = $2,678,461, TA = $784,596 and Debt/Asset = 0.48062. Calc ROE.

a. 32.44

b. 44.32

c. nope

d. not this one either.

33. (5 Points) In 2006 a 50-cent piece (0.50 coin) issued in 1904 sold for $1,300. What is the rate of return on this investment? Show your work.

fin 382 final project 497124

I. Choice of Companies and an Overview of Their Operations and Industry briefly outline what the company does and its industry. (5 pts)

II. Discussion of Current Issues Impacting Financial Statements include any relevant current event information, news that has affected financial statements, or world events that could impact the businesses. Research will have to be done on this. Some good sources of information include the most recent annual reports for each company (these can be found online for all publicly traded companies; utilize the most current year end annual reports available), Yahoo! Finance, the MSN Money website (this will provide current information on your company and some ratio information), and various business magazines. You can find the websites suggested under the Webliography tab in the course. A minimum of one business article needs to be utilized that is under one year written. You must cite the source of the article. This should only be one paragraph for your company, not the competitor. (5 pts)

III. Relevant Ratios and Discussion list what ratios you think are relevant to your companies and industry. Go to the Excel spreadsheet in Doc Sharing, review the ratios listed under the ratio tab, and pick what you think may be relevant. In two paragraphs (no more), briefly discuss six ratios you think may be important, and at least one ratio must be included from each ratio category. The ratios will be automatically calculated on the spreadsheet (please see section IV regarding this). DO NOT manually calculate these ratios..they will be done on the ss (10 pts)

IV. Excel Spreadsheet FinSAS.xlsx Manually input the financial data for your company under the Input tab on the spreadsheet. The ss can be found in doc sharing. Download it and save it to your computer and back it up. You should insert numbers highlighted only in blue. These numbers should be found in the company’s most recent year end annual reports (utilize the most year end numbers; the spreadsheet has it starting at 2008, but change the year to 2011 and go five years historically from there to 2007), which can be obtained online under your company choice. Complete a separate spreadsheet for each company. Write here that you completed the input for the spreadsheet for both companies and that the spreadsheet works. To check this, once you input the data in the input tab only, check the other tabs (ratio, vertical analysis) to ensure that you see the automated calculations. ONLY INPUT INTO THE INPUT TABS..the spreadsheet will then calculate everything else. Download and save the document on your computer and back it up. (20 pts)

V. Bibliography – you should start this and have a few sources at this point including the article and annual report you are utilizing.

fin 534 497125

In this assignment, assume you are a savvy financial analyst researching companies in which to invest.

Select a U.S. publically-traded company you think might be a good investment and perform a financial analysis.

Your analysis should include the following:

Company Overview.Conduct research and describe the company, its operations, locations, markets, and lines of business. Collect financial statements for the past three (3) years, fiscal or calendar (please insert these in the appendix). These financial statements must include at least
the income statement and the balance sheet.

Evaluate the company s vulnerability to current financial threatssuch as a recession, higher interest rates, and global competition.

Financial Performance. Based on the financial trends of the company, predict how these trends will impact financial performance in future periods. Explain your rationale for this prediction.

Stock Price Analysis. Given the performance of the stock in the periods presented on the company s financial statements, discuss how the stock is likely to perform in the future, what type of investor would be drawn to this stock, and make a recommendation to management to improve stock performance.

Submit your analysis in the form of a 6-8 page paper in which you:

Provide a detailed overview of a U.S. publicly traded company. This should be one to two (1-2) pages.

Evaluate the company s vulnerability to current financial threats such as a recession, higher inerest rtes, and global competition

Based on the financial trnds of the company, predict how these trends will impact financial
performance in future periods. Explain your rationale for this prediction.

Cite at least five (5) quality
references.

excel assignment 497051

Tutorial 8, Case Problem 4, pgs 482 485
You will submit the following documents from the Alia s Senior Living workbook: Documentation sheet, Invoice and Product Pricing and Shipping sheet.

In step 4o, the best solution for the shipping cost is an IF Function with a nested vlookup (the IF checks if the subtotal is >=200 and thevlookup references the shipping cost table).

Below is a link to the book…

https://www.dropbox.com/s/2eyf12hgbv3jmx5/New%20Perspectives%20on%20Microsoft%20Excel%202010%20Comprehensive.pdf

Here is a dropbox link to the data files…

https://www.dropbox.com/sh/24hij3u0lff4o0h/HA9YTlylIs

2. Complete Tutorial 10, Case Problem 4 (through Step 4 only) on pages 611 612. There are no data files for this assignment – you will complete this worksheet from scratch. The following instructions will help you complete this assignment.

3. Save the workbook as: xx NewGen Robotics (replace xx with your first and last initials).

4. When creating the income statement for Step 2 in the textbook, use the categories (row labels) listed in Figure 10-5 on page 558, but not the data. Use the data (numbers) shown in step 2 on page 611. Create formulas for: Total Revenue, Total Material Cost, Total Manufacturing Cost, Total Variable Expenses, Total Fixed Expenses, Total Revenue, Total Expenses and Net Income.

5. Create a formula in the Income Statement for Units Produced that assumes that the company produces enough cleaning robots to have a 1 percent surplus over Units Sold.

6. Format the income statement professionally and name the sheet tab Income Statement. Create a copy of the Income Statement sheet and name the copied sheet tab Goal Seek.

7. In the Goal Seek sheet you created above, use the Goal Seek feature to complete Step 3 in the text.

8. To complete Step 4 in the text, create the one-variable data table on the Income Statement sheet. Name the data table Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis. Do not complete the CVP chart.

9. Make sure each sheet in the workbook will print on one page. Save and print the finished workbook. You will submit the xx NewGen Robotics workbook to the Week 10


This assignment is not in your textbook. Complete the steps listed below:

Problem: Ellen Felton is events coordinator at Kirk Harbor Inn, which is located on Cape Cod. She schedules weddings, conferences, engagements, and so forth at this water-front Victorian inn. She constantly is sending quotes to potential clients and asks you to assist her in linking the workbook she developed to the letter she sends to potential clients.

Complete the following:

1. Open the NewQuote_2010 workbook located in the Appendix C misc folder and then save it as xx Harbor Quote (replace xx with your first and last initials).

2. In the Documentation sheet, enter the date and your name, and then switch to the Quote worksheet.

3. Open the Event document located in the Appendix C misc folder and then save the document as xx Event Planner.

4. Return to the Harbor Quote workbook, and then copy the range C2:G19 in the Quote worksheet.

5. Return to the Event Planner document, and then paste the selected range as a link below the sentence Here are the details.

6. Ellen s client requests two changes: move the wedding to the Salon room and change the number of guests to 160. Make these changes in the Harbor Quote workbook, and then verify that the Event Planner document is updated.

7. Create a pie chart of expenses in the Harbor Quote document: select the ranges F13:G14 and F16:G18 (do not
select the Subtotal or Grand Total) and insert a 3-D Pie chart.

8. Add a Chart Title above the chart that reads: Wedding Expenses.

9. Copy the chart and embed it in the Event Planner Word document. Place it directly after the Excel worksheet (before the sentence that reads: We look forward to working with you in helping to make this special event a memorable one for you. )

exchange rate shifts that cause the sing to be weaker versus the brazilian real a m 497053

. Exchange rate shifts that cause the Sing$ to be weaker versus the Brazilian real
a. make the export of footwear from Asia-Pacific plants to Latin America less competitive and give rise to negative/favorable exchange rate cost adjustments.
b. make the export of footwear from Asia-Pacific plants to Latin America less competitive and give rise to positive/unfavorable exchange rate cost adjustments.
c. make the export of footwear from Asia-Pacific plants to Latin America more competitive and give rise to negative/favorable exchange rate cost adjustments.
d. make the export of footwear from Asia-Pacific plants to Latin America less competitive and give rise to negative/unfavorable exchange rate cost adjustments.
e. None of the above is accurate.

exercies 497054

ACC 206 Week Two Assignment

Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in theappropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.

1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity

Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X6 and 20X5 follow:

20X6

20X5

Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10%

$580,000

$500,000

Common stock, $10 par value

2,350,000

1,750,000

Paid-in capital in excess of par value

Preferred

24,000

Common

4,620,000

3,600,000

Retained earnings

8,470,000

6,920,000

Total stockholders’ equity

$16,044,000

$12,770,000

a. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X6.

b. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X6.

c. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X6?

d. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X6? By what amount?

2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization

Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 20X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.

Case A The bonds are issued at 100.

Case B The bonds are issued at 96.

Case C The bonds are issued at 105.

Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization.

Instructions:

Complete the following table:

Case A

Case B

Case C

  1. Cash inflow on the issuance date

_______

_______

_______

  1. Total cash outflow through maturity

_______

_______

_______

  1. Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue

_______

_______

_______

  1. Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X1

_______

_______

_______

  1. Amortization for the year ended December 31, 20X1

_______

_______

_______

  1. Unamortized premium as of December 31, 20X1

_______

_______

_______

  1. Unamortized discount as of December 31, 20X1

_______

_______

_______

  1. Bond carrying value as of December 31, 20X1

_______

_______

_______

3. Definitions of manufacturing concepts
Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:

Materials and supplies used

Brass $75,000

Repair parts 16,000

Machine lubricants 9,000

Wages and salaries Machine operators 128,000

Production supervisors 64,000

Maintenance personnel 41,000

Other factory overhead Variable 35,000

Fixed 46,000

Sales commissions 20,000

Compute:

a. Total direct materials consumed

b. Total direct labor

c. Total prime cost

d. Total conversion cost

4. Scheduleof cost of goods manufactured, income statement

The following information was taken from the ledger of Jefferson Industries, Inc.:

Direct labor

$85,000

Administrative expenses

$59,000

Selling expenses

34,000

Work in. process:

Sales

300,000

Jan. 1

29,000

Finished goods

Dec. 31

21,000

Jan. 1

115,000

Direct material purchases

88,000

Dec. 31

131,000

Depreciation: factory

18,000

Raw (direct) materials on hand

Indirect materials used

10,000

Jan. 1

31,000

Indirect labor

24,000

Dec. 31

40,000

Factory taxes

8,000

Factory utilities

11,000

Prepare the following:

a. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.

b. An income statement for the year ended December 31.

5. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior

Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light-gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.

Per Unit

Variable Cost

Fixed Cost

Direct materials

$4.50

$

Direct labor

6.5

Factory overhead

9

50,000

Selling

70,000

Administrative

135,000

Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.

Instructions:

a. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light-gauge aluminum.

b. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31

c. On the basis of the information presented:

1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.

2. What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?

exercise 18 22 phelps glass inc has reported the following financial data 497059

Exercise 18- 22 Phelps Glass Inc. has reported the following financial data:

net revenue of $10 million.

Variable cost of $5 million,

controllable fixed costs of $2 million,

non-controllable fixed costs $1 million

and untraceable costs of $500,000.

The accounting manager has supplied you with data and asked you to come up with the

controllable margin,

total contribution,

and CPC

and operating income.

exercise 19 7 cost flows in a job order cost system l o p1 p2 p3 p4 the following in 497061

Exercise 19-7 Cost flows in a job order cost system L.O. P1, P2, P3, P4 The following information is available for Lock-Down Company, which produces special-order security products and uses a job order cost accounting system. April 30 May 31 Inventories Raw materials $ 32,000 $ 43,000 Goods in process 9,800 19,200 Finished goods 66,000 33,800 Activities and information for May Raw materials purchases (paid with cash) 189,000 Factory payroll (paid with cash) 500,000 Factory overhead Indirect materials 8,000 Indirect labor 67,000 Other overhead costs 115,000 Sales (received in cash) 1,400,000 Predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor cost 55 % Compute the following amounts for the month of May. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

exercise 497062

Week One Exercise Assignment

Basic Accounting Equations

1. Recognition of normal balances

The following items appeared in the accounting records of Triguero’s, a retail music store that also sponsors concerts. Classify each of the items as an asset, liability; revenue; or expense from the company’s viewpoint. Also indicate the normal account balance of each item.

a. Amounts paid to a mall for rent.

b. Amounts to be paid in 10 days to suppliers.

c. A new fax machine purchased for office use.

d. Land held as an investment.

e. Amounts due from customers.

f. Daily sales of merchandise sold.

g. Promotional costs to publicize a concert.

h. A long-term loan owed to Citizens Bank.

i. The albums, tapes, and CDs held for sale to customers.

2.Basic journal entries

The following transactions pertain to the Jennifer Royall Company:

May 1

Jenni fer Royall invested cash of $25,000 and land valued at $15,000 into the business.

5

Provided $1,000 of services to Jason Ratchford, a client, on account.

9

Paid $1,250 of salaries to an employee.

14

Acquired a new computer for $4,200, on account.

20

Collected $800 from Jason Ratchford for services provided on May 5.

24

Borrowed $2,500 from BestBanc by securing a six-month loan.

Prepare journal entries (and explanations) to record the preceding transactions and events.

3. Balance sheet preparation. The following data relate to Preston Company as of December 31, 20XX:

Building $40,000 Accounts receivable $24,000

Cash 21,000 Loan payable 30,000

J. Preston, Capital 65,000 Land 21,000

Accounts payable ?

Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 20XX. (See Exhibit 1.1 and 1.4)

4. Basic transaction processing. On November 1 of the current year, Richard Simmons established a sole proprietorship. The following transactions occurred during the month:

1: Simmons invested $32,000 into the business for $32,000 in common stock.

2: Paid $5,000 to acquire a used minivan.

3: Purchased $1,800 of office furniture on account.

4: Performed $2,100 of consulting services on account.

5: Paid $300 of repair expenses.

6: Received $800 from clients who were previously billed in item 4.

7: Paid $500 on account to the supplier of office furniture in item 3.

8: Received a $150 electric bill, to be paid next month.

9: Simmons withdrew $800 from the business.

10: Received $250 in cash from clients for consulting services rendered.

Instructions

a. Arrange the following asset, liability, and owner s equity elements of the account ing equation: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Office Furniture, Van, Accounts Payable, Common Stock/Dividends, and Revenues/Expenses. (See Exhibit 1.5)

b. Record each transaction on a separate line. After all transactions have been recorded, compute the balance in each of the preceding items.

c. Answer the following questions for Simmons.

(1) How much does the company owe to its creditors at month-end? On which financial statement(s) would this information be found?

(2) Did the company have a good month from an accounting viewpoint? Briefly explain.

5. Transaction analysis and statement preparation. The transactions that follow

relate to Burton Enterprises for March 20X1, the company s first month of activity.

3/1

Joanne Burton, the owner, invested $20,000 cash into the business.

3/4

Performed $2,400 of services on account.

3/7

Acquired a small parcel of land by paying $6,000 cash

3/12

Received $500 from a client who was billed previously on March 4.

3/15

Paid $200 to the Journal Herald for advertising expense.

3/18

Acquired 9,000 of equipment from Park Central Outfitters by Paying

$7,000 down and agreeing to remit the balance owed within two weeks (A/P).

3/22

Received $300 cash from clients for services.

3/24

Paid $1,500 on account to Park Central Outfitters in partial settlement of

the balance due from the transaction on March 18.

3/28

Rented a car from United Car Rental for use on March 28. Total charges

amounted to $125, with United billing Burton for the amount due.

3/31

Paid $600 for March wages

3/31

Processed a $600 cash withdrawal (dividend) from the business for Joanne Burton

Instructions

a. Determine the impact of each of the preceding transactions on Burton s assets,

liabilities, and owner s equity. See exhibit 1.5. Use the following format:

Assets = Liabilities + Owner s Equity

Cash, Accounts Receivable, Land, Equipment Accounts Payable (+)Common Stock (+) Revenues

(-) Dividends (-) Expenses

a. Record each transaction on a separate line. Calculate balances only after the last transaction has been recorded.

b. Prepare an income statement, a statement of retained earnings, and a balance sheet, (See Exhibit 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4)

6.Entry and trial balance preparation. Lee Adkins is a portrait artist. The following schedule represents Lee s combined chart of accounts and trial balance as of May 31.

Account number Account name Debit Credit

110

Cash

$ 2,700

120

Accounts Receivable

12,100

130

Equipment and Supplies

2,800

140

Studio

45,000

210

Accounts Payable

$2,600

310

Lee Adkins, Capital

57,400

320

Lee Adkins, Drawing

30,000

410

Professional Fee Revenue

39,000

510

Advertising Expense

2,300

520

Salaries Expense

2,100

540

Utilities Expense

2,000

$99,000

$99,000

The general ledger also revealed account no. 530, Legal and Accounting Expense. The following transactions occurred during June:

6/2

Collected $3,000 on account from customers

6/7

Sold 25% of the equipment and supplies to a young artist for $700 cash

6/10

Received a $300 invoice from the accountant for preparing last quarter’s financial Statements.

6/15

Paid $1,900 to creditors on account.

6/27

Adkins withdrew $2,000 cash for personal use.

6/30

Billed a customer $3,000 for a portrait painted this month.

a. Record the necessary journal entries for June on page 2 of the company s general journal. (See Exhibit 2.6)

b. Open running balance ledger T accounts by entering account titles, account num bers, and May 31 balances. (See exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)

c. Post the journal entries to the T accounts.

d. Prepare a trial balance as of June 30. (See exhibit 2.9)

7. Journal entry preparation.On January 1 of the current year, Peter Houston invested $80,000 cash into his company MuniServ. The cash was obtained from an owner investment by Peter Houston of $50,000 and a $30,000 bank loan. Shortly thereafter, the company ac quired selected assets of a bankrupt competitor. The acquisition included land ($10,000), a building ($40,000), and vehicles ($10,000). MuniServ paid $45,000 at the time of the transaction and agreed to remit the remaining balance due of $15,000 (an account payable) by February 15.

During January, the company had additional cash outlays for the follow ing items:

Purchases of store equipment

$4,600

Note payment

500

Salaries expense

2,300

Advertising expense

700

The January utility bill of $200 was received on January 31 and will be paid next month. MuniServ rendered services to clients on account amounting to $9,400. All customers have been billed; by month end, $3,700 had been received in settlement of account balances.

Instructions

a. Present journal entries that reflect MuniServ’s January transactions, including the $80,000 raised from the owner investment and loan. (See exhibit 2.6)

b. Compute the total debits, total credits, and ending balance that would be found in the company’s Cash account. (Post to T Accounts, see exhibit 2.3 and 2.4)

c. Determine the amount that would be shown on the January 31 trial balance for Accounts

Payable. Is the balance a debit or a credit?

exercise 2 2 qualitative characteristics 497063

Exercise 2-2 (Qualitative Characteristics)

The qualitative characteristics that make accounting information useful for decision-making purposes are as follows.

Relevance Timeliness Representational faithfulness

Reliability Verifiability Comparability

Predictive value Neutrality Consistency

Feedback value

Instructions

Identify the appropriate qualitative characteristic(s) to be used given the information provided below.

  1. Qualitative characteristic being employed when companies in the same industry are using the same accounting principles.
  1. Quality of information that confirms users earlier expectations.

3. Imperative for providing comparisons of a company from period to period.

  1. Ignores the economic consequences of a standard or rule.
  1. Requires a high degree of consensus among individuals on a given measurement.
  1. Predictive value is an ingredient of this primary quality of information.
  1. Two qualitative characteristics that are related to both relevance and reliability.
  1. Neutrality is an ingredient of this primary quality of accounting information.
  1. Two primary qualities that make accounting information useful for decision-making purposes

  1. Issuance of interim reports is an example of what primary ingredient of relevance?

exercise 5 497064

Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.

1. Basic present value calculations

Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar:

a. A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at a 12% rate of return.

b. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at a 14% rate of return.

c. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 10% rate of return.

d. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has a 16% rate of return.

2. Cash flow calculationsand net present value

On January 2, 20X1, Bruce Greene invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 20X1 and 20X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 20X3. On December 31, 20X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments.

a. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note:Greene is entitled to the 20X3 dividend.

b. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.

c. Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.

3. Straightforwardnet present value and internal rate of return

The City of Bedford is studying a 600-acre site on Route 356 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:

Purchase cost: $450 per acre

Site preparation: $175,000

The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Bedford, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.

a. Should the landfill be acquired if Bedford desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net-present-value method to determine your answer.

4. Straightforward net-present-value and payback computations

STL Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight-seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:

Cost of boat

$500,000

Service life

10 summer seasons

Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons

$100,000

Capacity per trip

300 passengers

Fixed operating costs per season (including straight-line depreciation)

$160,000

Variable operating costs per trip

$1,000

Ticket price

$5 per passenger

All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 120,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.

Instructions:

By using the net-present-value method, determine whether STL Entertainment should acquire the boat. Assume a 14% desired return on all investments- round calculations to the nearest dollar.

5. Equipment replacement decision

Columbia Enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally cost $74,000. The equipment is expected to provide six more years of service if $8,700 of major repairs are performed in two years. Annual cash operating costs total $27,200. Columbia can sell the equipment now for $36,000; the estimated residual value in six years is $5,000.

New equipment is available that will reduce annual cash operating costs to $21,000. The equipment costs $103,000, has a service life of six years, and has an estimated residual value of $13,000. Company sales will total $430,000 per year with either the existing or the new equipment. Columbia has a minimum desired return of 12% and depreciates all equipment by the straight-line method.

Instructions:

a. By using the net-present-value method, determine whether Columbia should keep its present equipment or acquire the new equipment. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar, and ignore income taxes.

b. Columbia’s management feels that the time value of money should be considered in all long-term decisions. Briefly discuss the rationale that underlies management’s belief.

exercise 8 23 assume that pinnacle golf equipment completed these selected transacti 497066

Assume that Pinnacle Golf Equipment completed these selected transactions during December 20X7.

a. Sales of $2,000,000 are subject to estimated warranty cost of 3%. The estimated warranty payable at the beginning of the year was $30,000, and warranty payments for the year totaled $55,000.

b. On December 1, Pinnacle signed a $100,000 note payable that requires annual payments of $20,000 plus 9% interest on the unpaid balance each December 1.

c. Academy Sports, a chain of sporting goods stores, ordered $100,000 of golf equipment. With its order, Academy Sports sent a check for $100,000, and Pinnacle shipped $85,000 of the goods. Pinnacle will ship the remainder of the goods on January 3, 20X8.

d. The December payroll of $100,000 is subject to employee withheld income tax of 9% and FICA tax of 8%. On December 31, Pinnacle pays employees their take-home pay and accrues all tax amounts.

Instructions:

Classify each liability as current or long-term and report the liability and its amount that would appear on the Pinnacle Golf Equipment balance sheet at December 31, 20X7. Show a total for current liabilities.

exercise questions 497067

Week Three Assignment

Please complete the following five exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.

1. Overhead application: Working backward

The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:

Division A

Division B

Actual machine hours

22,500

?

Estimated machine hours

20,000

?

Overhead application rate

$4.50

$5.00

Actual overhead

$110,000

?

Estimated overhead

?

$90,000

Applied overhead

?

$86,000

Over- (under-) applied overhead

?

$6,500

Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.

2. Computationsusing a job order system

General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;

Work in process $ 35,200

Finished goods 86,900

Cost of goods sold 128,700

Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:

Direct Materials

Direct Labor

Job No.

Amount

Job No.

Amount

101

$5,000

101

$7,800

115

19,500

103

20,800

116

36,200

115

42,000

Other

35,800

116

18,000

$96,500

Other

25,900

$114,500

Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.

General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.

Instructions:

a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.

b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.

c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.

d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.

3. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X6 operations of Heritage Products:

Quarter 1

Quarter 2

Quarter 3

Quarter 4

Shipping costs

$58,200

$58,620

$60,125

$59,400

Orders shipped

120

140

175

150

The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.

a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.

b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.

c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders.

4. Break-even and other CVP relationships

Cedars Hospital has average revenue of $180 per patient day. Variable costs are $45 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,320,000 per year.

a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?

b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $540,000?

c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?

5. Direct and absorption costing

The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 20X6.

Inventory, 1/1/X6

24,000 units

Units manufactured

80,000

Units sold

82,000

Inventory, 12/31/X6

? units

Manufacturing costs:

Direct materials

$3 per unit

Direct labor

$5 per unit

Variable factory overhead

$9 per unit

Fixed factory overhead

$280,000

Selling & administrative expenses:

Variable

$2 per unit

Fixed

$136,000

The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.

Instructions:

a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.

b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:

1. Direct costing.

2. Absorption costing.

c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using direct costing.

d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using absorption costing.

exercise week 3 497068

Week Three Exercise Assignment

Inventory

1. Specific identification method. Boston Galleries uses the specific identification method for inventory valuation. Inventory information for several oil paintings follows.

Painting

Cost

1/2 Beginning inventory

Woods

$21,000

4/19 Purchase

Sunset

21,800

6/7 Purchase

Earth

31,200

12/16 Purchase

Moon

4,000

Woodsand Moonwere sold during the year for a total of $35,000. Determine the firm s

a. cost of goods sold.

b. gross profit.

c. ending inventory.

2. Inventory valuation methods: basic computations. The January beginning inven tory of the Gilette Company consisted of 300 units costing $40 each. During the first quarter, the company purchased two batches of goods: 700 Units at $44 on February 21 and 800 units at $50 on March 28. Sales during the first quarter were 1,400 units at $75 per unit. The White Company uses a periodic inventory system. Using the White Company data, fill in the following chart to compare the results obtained under the FIFO, LIFO, and weighted-average inventory methods.

FIFO

LIFO

Weighted Average

Goods available for sale

$

$

$

Ending inventory, March 31

Cost of goods sold

3.Perpetual inventory system: journal entries. At the beginning of 20X3, Beehler Company implemented a computerized perpetual inventory system. The first transactions that occurred during 20X3 follow:

1/2/20X3 Purchases on account: 500 units @$6 = $3,000

1/15/20X3 Sales on account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550

1/20/20X3 Purchases on Account: 200 units @ 5 = $1,000

1/25/20X3 Sales on Account: 300 units @ $8.50 = $2,550

The company president examined the computer-generated journal entries for these transactions and was confused by the absence of a Purchases account.

a. Duplicate the journal entries that would have appeared on the computer printout under FIFO & LIFO

b. Calculate the balance in the firm s Inventory account under each method.

c. Briefly explain the absence of the Purchases account to the company president.

4. Inventory valuation methods: computations and concepts.

Wild Riders Surfboard Company began business on January 1 of the current year. Purchases of surfboards were as follows:

Date

Quantity

Unit Cost

Total Cost

1/3

100

$125

$12,500

4/3

200

$135

$27,000

6/3

100

$145

$14,500

7/3

100

$155

$15,500

Total

500

$69,500

Wild Riders sold 400 boards at $250 per board on the dates listed below. The company uses a perpetual inventory system.

Date

Quantity Sold

Unit Price

Total Sales

3/17

50

$250

$12,500

5/17

75

$250

$18,750

8/10

275

$250

$68,750

Total

400

$100,000

Instructions

a. Calculate cost of goods sold, ending inventory, and gross profit under each of the following inventory valuation methods:

First-in, first-out

Last-in, first-out

Weighted average

b. Which of the three methods would be chosen if management s goal is to

(1) produce an up-to-date inventory valuation on the balance sheet?

(2) show the lowest net income for tax purposes?

5. Depreciation methods.Mike Davis Enterprises purchased a delivery van for $40,000 in January 20X7. The van was estimated to have a service life of 5 years and a resid ual value of $6,000. The company is planning to drive the van 20,000 miles annually. Compute depreciation expense for 20X8 by using each of the following methods:

a. Units-of-output, assuming 17,000 miles were driven during 20X8

b. Straight-line

c. Double-declining-balance

6. Depreciation computations.Alpha Alpha Alpha, a college fraternity, purchased a new heavy-duty washing machine on January 1, 20X3. The machine, which cost $2,000, had an estimated residual value of $100 and an estimated service life of 4 years (1,800 washing cycles). Calculate the following:

a. The machine s book value on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the straight-line depreciation method

b. Depreciation expense for 20X4, assuming use of the units-of-output depreciation method. Actual washing cycles in 20X4 totaled 500.

c. Accumulated depreciation on December 31, 20X5, assuming use of the double-declining-balance depreciation method.

7. Depreciation computations: change in estimate.Aussie Imports purchased a specialized piece of machinery for $50,000 on January 1, 20X3. At the time of acquisition, the machine was estimated to have a service life of 5 years (25,000 operating hours) and a residual value of $5,000. During the 5 years of operations (20X3 – 20X7), the machine was used for 5,100, 4,800, 3,200, 6,000, and 5,900 hours, respectively.

Instructions

a. Compute depreciation for 20X3 – 20X7 by using the following methods: straight line, units of output, and double-declining-balance.

b. On January 1, 20X5, management shortened the remaining service life of the machine to 15 months. Assuming use of the straight-line method, compute the company s depreciation expense for 20X5.

c. Briefly describe what you would have done differently in part (a) if Aussie Imports had paid $47,800 for the machinery rather than $50,000 In addition, assume that the company incurred $800 of freight charges $1,400 for machine setup and testing, and $300 for insurance during the first year of use.

exercises 9 1 9 4 and 9 7 497069

Complete Exercises 9.1, 9.4 and 9.7. Use the Excel document below to record your answers.
Note: For 9.7, provide a short response to the following (9.7j): “Use the measures in 9.7h and i for the final comparison among the three sites, and discuss potential problems at each site or overall for the company. What are your recommendations to correct them?”

Exercise 9.1:
The chief at the ultrasound division of the radiology department in a community hospital would like to measure the multi-factor productivity for a complete abdomen procedure. The last three years of data were accumulated, as shown in Table EX. 9.1
TABLE EX 9.1
Measurement Year 1 Year 2 Year 3
Price ($) 880 883 886
Volume 5,583 6,312 6,129
Labor ($) 75,000 77,000 80,000
Materials ($) 2,750 2,900 3,100
6,500 6,700 7,000

a. What are the multi-factor productivity ratios for these years?

b. What can you conclude about the productivity trend for this procedure?

Exercise 9.4:
Calculate the case mix index for the following hospitals, which use the same patient classification system, using the data in Table EX. 9.4.

TABLE EX. 9.4
Patient Classification Direct Care
Hours
Hospital 1
Hospital 2
Hospital 3
Hospital 4
Low-level care 3.0 0.50 0.35 0.30 0.20
Medium-level care 6.0 0.35 0.40 0.30 0.25
High-level care 9.0 0.10 0.15 0.22 0.30
Extreme care 12.0 0.05 0.10 0.18 0.25

Exercise 9.7:
The PERFORMSBETTER MEDICAL CENTER (PMC) , a three-site urology group practice, requires productivity monitoring. To create a benchmark for future years and to be able to compare performance to similar peer practices, the data in Table EX 9.7 were gathered for each of the three lacations.

TABLE EX 9.7
Measurements/Sites Location 1 Location 2 Location 3
Annual Visits 135,000 94,000 101,000
Annual Paid Hours 115,000 112,000 125,000
Patient Classification (Based on CPT Coding)
Initial Visit (.55)* .30 .10 .15
Low-Level Decision Making (.50) .40 .20 .15
Medium -Level Decision Making (.75) .20 .40 .35
High -Level Decision Making (1.40) .10 .30 .35
Skill-Mix Distribution
Specialists ($110/hr.)+ .50 .30 .70
General Practitioners ($85/hr.) .30 .50 .30
Nurse Practitioners ($45/hr.) .20 .20 .00

*Represents total hours of direct care required per patient visit within the category
+ Represents hourly compensation including fringe benefits for the skill level

Assume that 1 general practitioner = .75 specialists, and 1 nurse practitioner = .35 specialists for economic measure of skill substitution.

Calculate:
a. Work hours/visits
b. Adjusted work hours /visits
c. Work hours /adjusted visits
d. Adjusted work hours/adjusted visits
e. Total salary expense/visits
f. Total salary expense /adjusted visits
g. Percent of work hours in direct patient care
h. Percent of adjusted work hours in direct patient care
i. Total salary expense/hours of direct patient care
to evaluate their procedures involving the evaluation of long term investment opportunities. You have agreed to provide a detailed report illustrating the use of several techniques for evaluating capital projects including the weighted average cost of capital to the firm, the anticipated cash flows for the projects, and the methods used for project selection. In addition, you have been asked to evaluate two projects, incorporating risk into the calculations.

You have also agreed to provide an 8-10 page report, in good form, with detailed explanation of your methodology, findings, and recommendations.

Company Information

Wheel Industries is considering a three-year expansion project, Project A. The project requires an initial investment of $1.5 million. The project will use the straight-line depreciation method. The project has no salvage value. It is estimated that the project will generate additional revenues of $1.2 million per year before tax and has additional annual costs of $600,000. The Marginal Tax rate is 35%.

Required:

Wheel has just paid a dividend of $2.50 per share. The dividends are expected to grow at a constant rate of six percent per year forever. If the stock is currently selling for $50 per share with a 10% flotation cost, what is the cost of new equity for the firm? What are the advantages and disadvantages of using this type of financing for the firm?
The firm is considering using debt in its capital structure. If the market rate of 5% is appropriate for debt of this kind, what is the after tax cost of debt for the company? What are the advantages and disadvantages of using this type of financing for the firm?
The firm has decided on a capital structure consisting of 30% debt and 70% new common stock. Calculate the WACC and explain how it is used in the capital budgeting process.
Calculate the after tax cash flows for the project for each year. Explain the methods used in your calculations.
If the discount rate were 6 percent calculate the NPV of the project. Is this an economically acceptable project to undertake? Why or why not?
Now calculate the IRR for the project. Is this an acceptable project? Why or why not? Is there a conflict between your answer to part C? Explain why or why not?

Wheel has two other possible investment opportunities, which are mutually exclusive, and independent of Investment A above. Both investments will cost $120,000 and have a life of 6 years. The after tax cash flows are expected to be the same over the six year life for both projects, and the probabilities for each year’s after tax cash flow is given in the table below.

Investment B Investment C
Probability After Tax Cash Flow Probability After Tax Cash Flow

0.25 $20,000 0.30 $22,000
0.50 32,000 0.50 40,000
0.25 40,000 0.20 50,000

What is the expected value of each project s annual after tax cash flow? Justify your answers and identify any conflicts between the IRR and the NPV and explain why these conflicts may occur.
Assuming that the appropriate discount rate for projects of this risk level is 8%, what is the risk-adjusted NPV for each project? Which project, if either, should be selected? Justify your conclusions.

exhibit 1 the testa company has 500 obsolete microcomputers that are carried in inve 497070

Exhibit 1: The Testa Company has 500 obsolete microcomputers that are carried in inventory at a total cost of $720,000. If these microcomputers are upgraded at a total cost of$100,000, they can be sold for a total of$160,000. As an alternative, the microcomputers can be sold in their present condition for $50,000.

I. Refer to Exhibit 1. The sunk cost in this situation is:

2. Refer to Exhibit 1: What is the net advantage or disadvantage to the company from upgrading the computers rather than selling them in their present condition?

3. Refer to Exhibit 1. Suppose the selling price of the upgraded computers has not been set. At what selling price per unit would the company be as well off upgrading the computers as if it just sold the computers in their present condition?

Exhibit 2: The Wright Company has established standard cost for its single product as follows:

Direct material ………………………….. 2 gallons at $3 per gallon Direct labor ……………………………… 0.5 hours at $8 per hour Variable overhead ……………………….. 0.5 hours at $2 per hour
During May, the company made 4,000 units and incurred the following costs: Direct materials purchased: 8,100 gallons at $3.I 0 per gallon
Direct material used: 7,600 gallons
Direct labor used: 2,200 hours at $8.25 per hour
Actual Variable overhead cost:$4,175

4. Refer to Exhibit 2. The materials price variance is:

5. Refer to Exhibit 2. The materials quantity variance is:

6. Refer to Exhibit 2. The labor rate variance is:

on, showing your calculation, and overall company’s net operating income or loss, before and after eliminating Northern Division.

6. United Corporation manufactures laser printers. United currently manufactures the 32,000 imaging drums that it uses in its printers. The annual costs to manufacture these 32,000 drums are as follows:

Cost of drum

Total cost

Variable manufacturing cost …………… $23 $736,000
Fixed manufacturing cost ……………….. $2.080.000
Total cost $88 $2.816.000

Hardware Solutions Inc. has offered to provide United with all of its imaging drum needs for $72 per drum. If United accepts this offer, 70% of the fixed manufacturing cost above could be totally eliminated. Also, United will be able to use the freed up space to generate $240,000 of income each year in the production of alternative products.

Based on the information presented, would United be better off to make the drums or buy the drums and by bow much?

7. Apex Company had the following data for the current fiscal period:

Units in process at the beginning of the month 6,000
Units in process at the end of the month 4,000
Units started during the month 20,000

Materials are added at the beginning of the process. Beginning work-in-process was 40 percent complete as to conversion. Ending work-in-process was 70 percent complete as to conversion.
Calculate the number of units completed and transferred out during the period?

a. Weighted Average method:
b. FIFO method:

8. Speedy Delivery Services has the collected the following information about operating expenditures for its delivery truck
fleet for the past five years:

Year Miles Ooerating Costs
2007 110,000 $390,000
2008 140,000 $420,000
2009 100,000 $360,000
2010 130,000 $410,000
2011 150,000 $440,000

a. Using the high-low method, what is the cost estimate for variable costs for 2012?

b. Using the high-low method, what is the cost estimate forfzxed costs for 2012?

c. What is the best estimate of total operating expenses for 2012 using the high-low method based on total expected miles of 120,000?

exotic adventures statement of cash flows 497071

Exotic adventures, a chain of stores servicing the ecotourism industry, has provided you with the folloing list of accounts and balances for the year ended june 30, 2012.
All amounts shown are in thousands of dollars. You have been asked by the company’s CFO to use a spreadsheet to prepare financial statements for exotic advenures, including
income statement, retained earnings, and balance sheet. The CFO cant remember the AR balance. She asked you to figure it out when you prepare the balance sheet.
FINANCIALS
Financial Statement Preparation
Exotic Adventures
Years Ended June 30
2012 2011
Accounts payable $764.8 $771.8
Accounts receivable ? 315.8
Accumulated depreciation – buildings 512.8 473.6
Accumulated depreciation – fixtures 689.6 729.0
Advances from customers 21.0 25.8
Advertising expense 271.0 256.0
Allowance for bad debts 12.6 12.6
Bad debt expense 23.0 30.0
Bonds payable (due 9/1/20) 916.6 516.6
Buildings 1,166.4 1,166.4
Cash 112.8 98.8
Common stock 470.4 422.4
Copyrights 20.8 22.4
Cost of goods sold 5,727.8 6,488.0
Depreciation expense 227.8 204.0
Discontinued operations loss (net of tax) 376.6 0.0
Dividends declared on common 201.8 180.0
Dividends declared on preferred 21.2 21.2
Fixtures 1,789.4 1,737.0
Gain on the sale of old fixtures 108.8 0.0
Goodwill 106.8 113.4
Income tax expense 280.2 40.0
Income tax payable 75.0 100.0
Interest expense 77.6 70.0
Interest payable 14.2 9.4
Inventories 690.2 510.2
Land 201.8 201.8
Long-term notes payable 99.4 121.6
Other operating expenses 691.2 1,000.0
Paid in capital in excess of par 361.4 333.4
Preferred stock 265.8 265.8
Prepaid advertising 65.6 84.2
Rent expense 0.0 650.0
Retained earnings (beginning of year) 613.0 538.2
Salaries expense 1,246.2 1,428.0
Salaries payable 121.2 111.4
Sales 9,173.2 10,766.0
Short-term investments 267.8 56.0
Short-term notes payable 9.4 27.8
Supplies expense 256.4 324.0
Treasury stock (at cost) 228.2 228.2

expert solutions 497083

Q1. A Call Option on the stock of XYZ Company has a market price of $9.00. The price of the underlying stock is $36.00, and the strike price of the option is $30.00 per share. What is the Exercise Value of this Call Option? What is the Time Value of the Option?

Q2. The Exercise (Strike) Price on ABC Company s Option is $21.00, its Exercise Value is $23.00, and its Time Value is $7.00. What is the Market Value of the Option? What is the price of the underlying stock?

Q3. Company A can issue floating-rate debt at LIBOR + 1%, and it can issue fixed rate debt at 9%. Company B can issue floating-rate debt at LIBOR + 1.5%, and it can issue fixed-rate debt at 9.4%.

Suppose A issues floating-rate debt and B issues fixed-rate debt, after which they engage in the following swap: A will make a fixed 7.95% payment to B, and B will make a floating-rate payment equal to LIBOR to A.

What are the resulting net payments of A and B?

Q4. What is the implied interest rate yield on a Treasury Bond ($100,000) futures contract that settled at 100 24 (or 100 24/32)? If interest rates increased by 0.75%, what would be the contract s new value?

Assume that this is based on 20 Years, with an annual yield of 8%, with semi-annual payments.

expert solutions 497088

1 A gift that is made in contemplation of death is known as a(n) ________.

2 ________ is a method of acquiring ownership, when a manufacturer purchases raw materials and then manufactures a finished good.

3 Carmen, Westbrook, and Ashton are concurrent owners of a large commercial building. Ashton executes a will that leaves all his property to his son in the event of his death. But after Ashton passes away, his ownership interest in the building was acquired by the two remaining tenants of the building. Which of the following kinds of concurrent ownership would allow such a passage of title?

4 The voluntary transfer of title to property without payment of consideration by the donee is known as a(n) ________.

expert solutions 497091

1. A financing statement

Must be filed on the same date of the attachment of the security interest

Must contain the names of the debtor and secured party, an indication of the collateral, and the signatures of the debtor and the secured party

Is usually effective for 5 years.

Must be filed on consumer goods in order to be perfected

2. On February 1, Debtor Co. borrowed $100,000 from Secured Bank to finance Debtor s current and future inventory. On that same date, the money was transferred into Debtor s account. On February 2, the debtor signed the loan documents. On February 21, Debtor authenticated a security agreement giving Bank a security interest in the inventory. On February 23, Debtor authenticated a financing statement and signed the document in favor of Bank. Thereafter, Bank filed the financing statement on February 25. Notice to the other creditors was received by the other creditors on February 27. Bank s security interest was perfected on

February 2

February 21

February 23

February 25

February 27

3. The Secured Transactions Article of the UCC recognizes various methods of perfecting a security interest in collateral. Which of the following methods is not recognized by the UCC?

Filing a financing statement

Creditor possession without filing financing statement

A pawned asset without filing a financing statement

A retailer obtains a security interest in consumer goods without filing

The parties clearly state in the security agreement that the transaction is perfected.

4. Which of the following is a true statement about bankruptcy law

Tort claims for negligence cannot be discharged in bankruptcy.

Federal exemptions set limits on health aids.

Retirement funds are normally not exempt assets and that the trustee may seize.

It takes a minimum of 5 creditors to force an involuntary bankruptcy

There are exemption limits for tools of the trade.

extreme sport inc a company quality suppliers inc ross company 497098

1. Extreme Sport, Inc. uses the allowance method to account for bad debts. During 2010, the company recorded $560,000 in credit sales. At the end of 2010 before adjustments, account balances were accounts receivable $180,000, and allowance for uncollectible accounts, ($900). If bad debt expense is estimated to be 3% of credit sales, how much bad debts expense will be on that year-end income statement?

2. A company started the year with accounts receivable of $15,000 and an allowance for uncollectible accounts of $ ($1,500). Duiring the year, sales (all on account) were $110,000 and cash collections for sales amounted to $105,000. Also, $1,000 worth of uncollectible accounts were specifically identified and written off. Then, at year end, the company estimated that 10% of ending accounts receivable would be uncollectible.

a) What amount will be shown on the year-end income statement for bad debts expense?

b) What is the balance in the allowance for uncollectible accounts after all adjustments have been made?

3. Quality Suppliers Inc. accepts cash or credit card payments from customers.Durning June, Quality provided $170,000 worth of supplies to customers who used Discovered cards to pay for their purchases. Discover charges Quality suppliers 3% of sales for card services. How will Quality Suppliers record these sales?

4. Ross Company had the following balances:

Receivables, net (Dec, 31,2010) $200,000

Recievables, net (dec,31,2019) $250,000

Sales (all credit) (Dec,31,2010) $1,600,000

Sales (all credit) (Dec,31,2019)$1,000,000

a) Calculate the accounts receivable turnover ratio for 2010

b) Calculate the average number of days to collect?

extreme wreaths inc makes wreaths in batches of 12 at a time the cutting process tak 497100

Extreme Wreaths, Inc. makes wreaths in batches of 12 at a time. The cutting process takes 4 minutes per wreath, the assembly process is 6 minutes per wreath, and the decorating process time is 7 minutes per wreath. It takes 5 minutes to move the wreaths from the cutting process to the assembly process. The cutting and assembly process are done at the same time, but only one wreath can be decorated at a time.

In a effort to improve the lead time, the company has tried reducing the batch size to 8 units. The new process is as follows: cutting process – 3 minutes, assembly process – 4 minutes, and the decorating process is still 7 minutes per wreath. It takes 5 minutes to move the wreaths from the cutting process to the assembly process. The cutting and assembly process are done at the same time, but only one wreath can be decorated at a time.

(a) Compute the value added, nonvalue added, and the total lead time of the wreath process for both the old and the new manufacturing process

(b) Management is considering manufacturing a new product to increase plant usage which is now at 70% of capacity. How should management organize the production activities to remain efficient? What principles should they incorporate from JIT manufacturing practices to accomodate and facilitate new product production

fa required in excel 497101

Question 3: Sheffer

The Sheffer Company s statement of cash flows for 2012 showed the following calculation of

the cash flow from operating activities:

Collections from customers $ 2,245

Payments to suppliers (1,375)

Payments to employees ( 688)

Payments to the IRS (for income tax) ( 72)

Cash flow from operating activities $ 110

The company s balance sheet at the beginning and end of 2012 showed the following:

Beginning End

of year of year

Accounts payable $ 92 $ 103

Accounts receivable 218 262

Accumulated depreciation 93 122

Income tax payable 142 180

Merchandise inventory 141 189

Plant and equipment (at cost) 338 371

Wages payable 36 37

A note to the financial statements showed that the company bought plant and equipment during

the year for $33.

Required:

a.Prepare an income statement for the Sheffer Company for 2012.

b.Did the Sheffer Company use the direct or the indirect method in preparing its statement of

cash flows?

c.Recently, the FASB has decided to eliminate goodwill amortization. Suppose certain

goodwill was recognized in 2012, and consider the financial statements for a subsequent

year, say 2017, under the assumption there is no impairment. Will the proposed change

result in an increase or a decrease to the Retained Earnings account? Explain.

erikus county amp annette county public works capital accounting problem 497018

5 7 Recording Capital Projects Fund Transactions. In Erikus County, the Parks and Recreation Department constructed a library in one of the county s high growth areas. The construction was funded by a number of sources. Below is selected information related to the funding and closing of the Library Capital Project Fund. All activity related to the library construction occurred within the 2011 fiscal year.

1. The county issued $6,000,000, 4 percent bonds, with interest payable semiannually on June 30 and December 31. The bonds sold for 101 on July 30, 2010. Proceeds from the bonds were to be used for construction of the library, with all interest and premiums received to be used to service the debt issue.

2. A $650,000 federal grant was received to help finance construction of the library.

3. The Library Special Revenue Fund transferred $250,000 for use in construction of the library.

4. A construction contract was awarded in the amount of $6,800,000.

5. The library was completed on June 1, 2011, four months ahead of schedule. Total construction expenditures for the library amounted to $6,890,000. When the project was completed, the cost of the library was allocated as follows: $200,000 to land, $6,295,000 to building, and the remainder to equipment.

6. The capital projects fund was closed. It was determined that remaining funds were related to the bond issue, and thus they were appropriately transferred to the debt service fund.

Required

Make all necessary entries in the capital projects fund general journal and the governmental activities general journal at the government-wide level.

5 8 Statement of Revenues, Expenditures, and Changes in Fund Balance. The pre-closing trial balance for the Annette County Public Works Capital Project Fund is provided below.

Required

a. Prepare the June 30, 2011, statement of revenues, expenditures, and changes in fund balance for the capital projects fund.

b. Has the capital project been completed? Explain your answer.

espinosa corporation had 1 100 000 in invested assets sales of 1 210 000 497020

True or False: Please indicate whether each statement is true or false. (2 points per question)

1. The standard cost is how much a product should cost to manufacture.
2. Because accountants have financial expertise, they are the only ones that are able to set standard costs for the production area.
3. An unfavorable cost variance occurs when budgeted cost at actual volumes exceeds actual cost.
4. A centralized business organization is one in which all major planning and operating decisions are made by top management.
5. The plant managers in a cost center can be held responsible for major differences between budgeted and actual costs in their plants.
6. Property tax expense for a department store’s store equipment is an example of a direct expense.
7. Differential revenue is the amount of increase or decrease in revenue expected from a particular course of action as compared with an alternative.
8. The product cost concept includes all manufacturing costs plus selling and administrative expenses in the cost amount to which the markup is added to determine product price.
9. When a bottleneck occurs between two products, the company must determine the contribution margin for each product and manufacture the product that has the highest contribution margin per bottleneck hour.
10. Care must be taken involving capital investment decisions, since normally a long-term commitment of funds is involved and operations could be affected for many years.
11. Average rate of return equals average investment divided by estimated average annual income.
12. Managers depend on product costing to make decisions regarding continuing operations, advertising, and product mix.
13. The single plantwide overhead rate method is very expensive to apply.
14. In the just-in-time (JIT) philosophy, unexpected downtime is the result of unreliable processes.
15. In a just-in-time (JIT) system, the work in process account will show more transactions than in a traditional cost system.

Multiple Choice (2 points per question):

16. If the actual quantity of direct materials used in producing a commodity differs from the standard quantity, the variance is termed:
a. controllable variance
b. price variance
c. quantity variance
d. rate variance

17. The Joyner Corporation purchased and used 126,000 board feet of lumber in production, at a total cost of $1,449,000. Original production had been budgeted for 22,000 units with a standard material quantity of 5.5 board feet per unit and a standard price of $12 per board foot. Actual production was 23,000 units.

Compute the material price variance.
a. 63,000F
b. 63,000U
c. 6,000F
d. 6,000U

18. The standard factory overhead rate is $10 per direct labor hour ($8 for variable factory overhead and $2 for fixed factory overhead) based on 100% capacity of 30,000 direct labor hours. The standard cost and the actual cost of factory overhead for the production of 5,000 units during May were as follows:

Standard: 25,000 hours at $10 $250,000
Actual: Variable factory overhead 202,500
Fixed factory overhead 60,000
What is the amount of the factory overhead volume variance?
a. $12,500 favorable
b. $10,000 unfavorable
c. $12,500 unfavorable
d. $10,000 favorable

19. Espinosa Corporation had $1,100,000 in invested assets, sales of $1,210,000, income from operations amounting to $242,000, and a desired minimum rate of return of 15%.

The profit margin for Espinosa is:
a. 20%
b. 22%
c. 15%
d. 32%

20. Materials used by Bristol Company in producing Division C’s product are currently purchased from outside suppliers at a cost of $10 per unit. However, the same materials are available from Division A. Division A has unused capacity and can produce the materials needed by Division C at a variable cost of $8.50 per unit. A transfer price of $9.50 per unit is negotiated and 30,000 units of material are transferred, with no reduction in Division A’s current sales.

How much would Division C’s income from operations increase?
a. $0
b. $90,000
c. $15,000
d. $60,000

21. The balanced scorecard measures
a. only financial information
b. only nonfinancial information
c. both financial and nonfinancial information
d. external and internal information

22. All of the following should be considered in a make or buy decision except
a. cost savings
b. quality issues with the supplier
c. future growth in the plant and other production opportunities
d. the supplier will make a profit that would no longer belong to the business

23. What cost concept used in applying the cost-plus approach to product pricing includes only desired profit in the “markup”?
a. Product cost concept
b. Variable cost concept
c. Sunk cost concept
d. Total cost concept

True or False: Please indicate whether each statement is true or false. (2 points per question)

1. The standard cost is how much a product should cost to manufacture.
2. Because accountants have financial expertise, they are the only ones that are able to set standard costs for the production area.
3. An unfavorable cost variance occurs when budgeted cost at actual volumes exceeds actual cost.
4. A centralized business organization is one in which all major planning and operating decisions are made by top management.
5. The plant managers in a cost center can be held responsible for major differences between budgeted and actual costs in their plants.
6. Property tax expense for a department store’s store equipment is an example of a direct expense.
7. Differential revenue is the amount of increase or decrease in revenue expected from a particular course of action as compared with an alternative.
8. The product cost concept includes all manufacturing costs plus selling and administrative expenses in the cost amount to which the markup is added to determine product price.
9. When a bottleneck occurs between two products, the company must determine the contribution margin for each product and manufacture the product that has the highest contribution margin per bottleneck hour.
10. Care must be taken involving capital investment decisions, since normally a long-term commitment of funds is involved and operations could be affected for many years.
11. Average rate of return equals average investment divided by estimated average annual income.
12. Managers depend on product costing to make decisions regarding continuing operations, advertising, and product mix.
13. The single plantwide overhead rate method is very expensive to apply.
14. In the just-in-time (JIT) philosophy, unexpected downtime is the result of unreliable processes.
15. In a just-in-time (JIT) system, the work in process account will show more transactions than in a traditional cost system.

Multiple Choice (2 points per question):

16. If the actual quantity of direct materials used in producing a commodity differs from the standard quantity, the variance is termed:
a. controllable variance
b. price variance
c. quantity variance
d. rate variance

17. The Joyner Corporation purchased and used 126,000 board feet of lumber in production, at a total cost of $1,449,000. Original production had been budgeted for 22,000 units with a standard material quantity of 5.5 board feet per unit and a standard price of $12 per board foot. Actual production was 23,000 units.

Compute the material price variance.
a. 63,000F
b. 63,000U
c. 6,000F
d. 6,000U

18. The standard factory overhead rate is $10 per direct labor hour ($8 for variable factory overhead and $2 for fixed factory overhead) based on 100% capacity of 30,000 direct labor hours. The standard cost and the actual cost of factory overhead for the production of 5,000 units during May were as follows:

Standard: 25,000 hours at $10 $250,000
Actual: Variable factory overhead 202,500
Fixed factory overhead 60,000
What is the amount of the factory overhead volume variance?
a. $12,500 favorable
b. $10,000 unfavorable
c. $12,500 unfavorable
d. $10,000 favorable

19. Espinosa Corporation had $1,100,000 in invested assets, sales of $1,210,000, income from operations amounting to $242,000, and a desired minimum rate of return of 15%.

The profit margin for Espinosa is:
a. 20%
b. 22%
c. 15%
d. 32%

20. Materials used by Bristol Company in producing Division C’s product are currently purchased from outside suppliers at a cost of $10 per unit. However, the same materials are available from Division A. Division A has unused capacity and can produce the materials needed by Division C at a variable cost of $8.50 per unit. A transfer price of $9.50 per unit is negotiated and 30,000 units of material are transferred, with no reduction in Division A’s current sales.

How much would Division C’s income from operations increase?
a. $0
b. $90,000
c. $15,000
d. $60,000

21. The balanced scorecard measures
a. only financial information
b. only nonfinancial information
c. both financial and nonfinancial information
d. external and internal information

22. All of the following should be considered in a make or buy decision except
a. cost savings
b. quality issues with the supplier
c. future growth in the plant and other production opportunities
d. the supplier will make a profit that would no longer belong to the business

23. What cost concept used in applying the cost-plus approach to product pricing includes only desired profit in the “markup”?
a. Product cost concept
b. Variable cost concept
c. Sunk cost concept
d. Total cost concept

25. All of the following qualitative considerations may impact upon capital investments analysis except:
a. time value of money
b. employee morale
c. the impact on product quality
d. manufacturing flexibility

26. All of the following are factors that may complicate capital investment analysis except:
a. the leasing alternative
b. changes in price levels
c. sunk cost
d. the federal income tax

27. The Nite Lite Factory produces two products – small lamps and desk lamps. It has two separate departments – finishing and production. The overhead budget for the finishing department is $550,000, using 500,000 direct labor hours. The overhead budget for the production department is $400,000 using 80,000 direct labor hours. If the budget estimates that a desk lamp will require 1 hours of finishing and 2 hours of production, how much factory overhead will be allocated to each unit of desk lamps using the multiple production department factory overhead rate method with an allocation base of direct labor hours?
a. $11.10
b. $4.91
c. $5.00
d. $10.00

28. Using a plant-wide factory overhead rate distorts product costs when:
a. products require different ratios of allocation-base usage in each production department
b. significant differences exist in the factory overhead rates used across different production departments
c. both A and B exist
d. either A or B exist

29. Which of the following is characteristic of a traditional cost system?
a. Many work in process account transactions
b. Reliance on financial performance measures
c. Many process control points
d. All of the above

30. The local college is aggressively working in reducing the time that a student needs to enroll for each semester. All except one of the following changes is helping in their efforts.
a. Counselors are specializing in common degree plans.
b. One application is good at the Community college and at the transferring University.
c. A one stop area includes registration, admissions, advising, and ID s. Each working closely with each other.
d. Reduce the number of degrees being offered.

Problems:

31. Diamond Company produces a chair that requires 5 yds. of material per unit. The standard price of one yard of material is $7.50. During the month, 8,500 chairs were manufactured, using 40,000 yards at a cost of $7.60. Determine the (a) price variance, (b) quantity variance, and (c) cost variance (6 points).

32. Some items are omitted from each of the following condensed divisional income statements of Willis Inc (8 points):

Division L Division M Division N
Sales $ (1) $320,000 $580,000
Cost of goods sold 480,000 120,000 $ (5)
Gross profit $220,000 $ (3) $180,000
Operating expenses 95,000 160,000 $ (6)
Income from operations $ (2) $ (4) $ 75,000

(a) Determine the amount of the missing items, identifying them by number.
(b) Based on income from operations, which division is the most profitable?

33. Delicious Cake Factory normally sells their specialty cake for $22. An offer to buy 100 cakes for $18 per cake was made by an organization hosting a national event in the city. The variable cost per cake is $12. A special decoration per cake will add another $1 to the cost. Determine the differential income or loss per cake from selling the cakes (10 points).

34.
Year 6% 10% 12%
1 .943 .909 .893
2 1.833 1.736 1.690
3 2.673 2.487 2.402
4 3.465 3.170 3.037
5 4.212 3.791 3.605
6 4.917 4.355 4.111
7 5.582 4.868 4.564
8 6.210 5.335 4.968
9 6.802 5.759 5.328
10 7.360 6.145 5.650

A project is estimated to cost $273,840 and provide annual cash flows of $60,000 for seven years. Determine the internal rate of return for this project, using the above table (6 points).

35. Nite Lite Factory produces two similar products – small lamps and desk lamps. The total plant budget is $800,000 with 640,000 estimated direct labor hours. It is further estimated that small lamp production will have 375,000 direct labor hours and desk lamp production will require 265,000 direct labor hours (10 points).
(a) Determine the single plant factory overhead rate based on direct labor hours.
(b) How much is the factory overhead cost per unit if each small lamp uses 3 hours per unit?
(c) How much is the factory overhead cost per unit if each desk lamp uses 2.5 hours per unit?
(d) How much total factory overhead will be allocated to the small lamp production if 130,000 units are produced during the period?
(e) How much total factory overhead will be allocated to the desk lamp production if 104,000 are produced during the period?

esplanade company 039 s credit sales have the following historical pattern 497021

Esplanade Company’s credit sales have the following historical pattern:

70% Collected in the month of sale

15% Collected in the first month after sale

10% Collected in the second month after sale

4% Collected in the third month after sale

1% Uncollectible

These sales on open account (credit sales) have been budgeted for the last six months in 2010:

July $60,000

August $70,000

September $80,000

October $90,000

November $100,000

December $85,000

1) Determine the estimated total cash collections from accounts receivable during October 2010.

2) Compute the estimated total cash collections during the fourth quarter from credit sales of the fourth quarter.

essay discussion questions 497023

I have 5 discussion questions for Accounting.

Each answer/responds needs to be 200 words at a minimum and have a reference with it.

Please distinguish between job costing and process costing.

Please give 6 examples of cost drivers for service and non-for-profit organizations

Please give three examples of industries where process-costing system is used. Please give three examples of non-for-profit organizations where process costing is used.

The total conversion costs are divided by the equivalent units for the work done to date. Does the previous sentence describe the weighted average method or does it describe the FIFO method? Please explain.

Activity-based costing is useful for product costing, but not for planning and control. Do you agree? Explain.

eth 316 week 2 learning team community profile presentation 497025

What is a socially responsible effort? Social responsibility comes from the belief that people, governments, and organizations have a responsibility to the greater welfare of society. What each person determines to be socially responsible, however, is subject to personal ideals and beliefs. Examples of socially responsible efforts include, but are not limited to:

Recycling and using CFL light bulbs (individual or organizational)

Donating time to volunteer organizations

Monetary donations

Developing green buildings

Createa brief personal profile ofyourcommunity or one that you are very familiar with. Your individual profile should be 350 to 700 words in length and will be usedonlyin the team forum. As a last resort, you may use the City of Kelsey Virtual community accessible from the student website. In your individual profile, describe the following for your community:

Type of people who live in your community

Type of work the residents do

How and where members of the community interact such as festivals, grocery stores, community events, and so forth

Additionally, address the following questions in your profile:

oHow would you describe the responsibilities of the individuals to the community?

oWhat are the community s responsibilities to the individuals?

oAs a member of this community, what do you think it means to be socially responsible?

As a team combine your individual community profiles to create and submita 3- to 5-slide MicrosoftPowerPointpresentation includingdetailedspeaker notesin which the team addresses the following bycomparingeach community against the others (this slide presentation isnota recap of each community):

Compare the differences and similarities between the different communities represented by each team member.

Evaluate the effects of socially responsible efforts in each community.

Summarize your team findings from this comparison and evaluation.

Formatyour speaker notes consistent with APA guidelines.

eth 376 week 5 need original non plagiarized essay 497030

Resource: The ABC Corporation Case located on your student website

Write a 750- to 1,050-word paper accomplishing the following:

Describe four types of audit opinions Green and Associates may provide at the conclusion of a corporate financial audit. Specifically, describe and illustrate an unqualified, unqualified with explanatory paragraph, qualified, and adverse opinion. Differentiate between the opinions and provide specific criteria that warrant each type of opinion.

Determine whether the inventory valuation method used by ABC Corporation was legal and compliant with GAAP.

Is the client s refusal to procure an audit of Internal Controls over Financial Reporting in violation of Sarbanes-Oxley? Why or why not?

In compliance with GAAS, which type of audit opinion should Green and Associates issue?

Discuss the ethical issues involved for ABC Corporation and for Green and Associates.

Formatyour paper consistent with APA guidelines.

eth 557 accounting ethics uop full course assignments 497033

Week 1

Individual – Ethics Case Study

Write a 350- to 700-word paper explaining the following:

Given the current pressures on China, Jamaica, and America expressed in the article, how would ethics play a role in decision making for financial, environmental, and cultural issues?

How are the concepts of positive and normative economics reflected in this context?

How do market efficiency, economizing, and the market system affect these ethical issues?

Format the paper consistent with APA guidelines.

Click the Assignment Files tab to submit your assignment.

Week2

Price and Consumer Behavior

Research the elasticity of beef and eggs in regards to price changes. How do supply, demand, and price controls interact to affect equilibrium price of eggs? Why do customers have a more elastic buying response to beef than to eggs?

What would be the consumer buying response to Coca-Cola if the price of Pepsi doubled? If the prices of Coca- Cola and Pepsi remained constant, what would be the consumer’s typical buying response to these products
if their income was reduced by 30%? Suppose all carbonated beverages tripled in price. How would the
concepts of utility, income, and substitution predict consumer behavior based on the rise in the cost of carbonated
beverages?

Week3

Ethical Challenges and Agency Issues

Adverse financial situations occurring throughout the 20th century led to government legislative interventions regarding corporate financial accounting on several occasions.

Resource: Cost Management

Readthe following case studies from the text:

  • Timely Reporting of Budget Problems Case Study on pp. 388 & 389 (Ch. 10).
  • Level of Executive Pay Case Study on pp. 605-607 (Ch. 15).

Writea 700- to 1,400-word paper, 350 to 700 words for each team member, analyzing the ethical challenges as well as any agency issues. In the same paper, explain how the 1933, 1934, and SOX Acts were reactions to financial crises arising from similar challenges.

Clickthe Assignment Files tab to submit your assignment.

Submit a Learning Team Evaluation for this assignment.

Week 4

Individual: Ethics of Penn Square Bank and the Dow Corning Bankruptcy

Resources:This week s Electronic Reserve Readings

Conductadditional research, and then answer each question in two 350- to 700-word responses:

  • Penn Square Bank: What were the ethical pressures on the firm concerning documentation, credit extension, and revenue recognition that lead to the final collapse? What should have been done to reduce or offset these pressures?
  • Dow Corning Bankruptcy: What were the business ethical challenges involved in filing bankruptcy for Dow Corning? Analyze the actions of the two parent companies, Dow and Corning, that represent the largest ethical issues.

Clickthe Assignment Files tab to submit your assignment.

Week5

Internal Policies

Your firm must establish internal policies regarding the creation of business contracts as well as electronic communications (e-mail) including document retention.

Draftthe internal policies as a team. The policies should be clear and include a set of procedures.

Clickthe Assignment Files tab to submit your assignment.

I

eth 557 final need in two hours no later than 1pm pacific time 497034

ABC Company owes XYZ Enterprises $1 million for goods purchased from XYZ over a year ago. XYZ Enterprises continues to list the $1 million in their accounts receivable balance and does not record any allowance for doubtful accounts. XYZ Enterprises is failing to follow

Financial Accounting Standards Board FAS 157

SFAS 169

Financial Accounting Standards Board Statement No. 5

SFAS 101

2

The bankruptcy of WorldCom in 2002 was due to the company s actions in

recording fictitious liabilities

failing to record revenues

classifying expenses as assets

expensing equipment purchases rather than capitalizing these purchases

3

The price elasticity of demand coefficient measures

buyer responsiveness to price changes

the slope of the demand curve

how far business executives can stretch their fixed costs

the extent to which a demand curve shifts as incomes change

4

Which of the following is a fundamental characteristic of the market system?

Government-set wages and prices

Property rights

Central planning by government

Unselfish behavior

5

In 2002, Adelphia Cable filed bankruptcy when it was discovered that

bank debt in excess of $2.3 billion was not shown on the financial statements

sales in excess of $72 billion were omitted from the financial statements

excess fictitious expenses of $1 million were added to the income statement

assets on the financial statements were considerably undervalued

6

When applying for a bank loan or trade credit, one way a company can appear to be in a healthier financial position would be to

overstate its expenses

undervalue its assets

understate its sales

understate its liabilities

7

A normative statement is one that

applies to macroeconomics

is based on value judgments

applies only to microeconomics

is based on the law of averages

8

Section 55 of the Principles of Professional Conduct of the AICPA states that

members should perform all professional responsibilities with the highest sense of integrity

a member should observe the profession s technical and ethical standards, strive continually to improve competence and quality of services, and discharge professional responsibility to the best of the member s ability

members should accept the obligation to act in a way that will serve the public interest, honor the public trust, and demonstrate commitment to professionalism

a member should maintain objectivity and be free of conflicts of interest in discharging professional responsibilities

9

Four professional general standards and responsibilities for Certified Public Accountants are quality control and assurance, professional judgment, competence, and:

knowledge

diligence

integrity

independence

10

When budgets are used to measure performance, there is a danger that budgetary slack may occur. This happens when

sales budgets are set too low and cost budgets are set too high

sales budgets are set too high and cost budgets are set too high

sales budgets are set too high and cost budgets are set too low

sales budgets are set too low and cost budgets are set too low

11

Failure to provide any care in fulfilling a duty owed to another is called

gross negligence

constructive fraud

breach of contract

negligence

12

Assuming an economy has fixed quantities of resources, that economy

is able to satisfy all consumer wants

will produce the same output whether or not resources are used efficiently

is more efficient, the larger the amount of goods and services it produces

is able to produce the same amount of output regardless of the production technologies it chooses

13

When revenue is recognized and shipment has not been made and the criteria for recognizing revenue on bill-and-hold transactions set out in SEC Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 101 have not been met, this is known as

premature revenue recognition

postrevenue recognition

timely revenue recognition

conservative revenue recognition

14

According to the Agency Theory, in a corporation there are two types of information consumers known as

agents and principals

customers and agents

principals and vendors

vendors and customers

15

The EU Privacy Directive presents problems for the United States in that

several layers of approval are necessary before any data may be transferred to a non-EU entity

data may not be transferred to a non-EU entity unless guarantees are provided that equal security measures are in place

high transfer charges are required to be paid by the recipient in the currency of the country transferring the data

transferred data may not be translated into another language

16

Tom Donaldson and Tom Dunfee are proponents of ethical guidelines related to technology that are based on differentiating hypernorms from nonhypernorms. This theory is known as

Transparent Ethical Dilemma Theory

Electronic Communications Privacy Theory

Integrative Social Contracts Theory

Social Contract Network Theory

17

If a conflict of interest arises prior to entering into a business contract, the parties should

commence a cooling-off period until the conflict is removed

determine the type of conflict and if disclosure of the conflict of interest is sufficient to proceed with the contract

stop negotiations immediately and contact a mediator to negotiate the terms of the contract

cease and desist because all conflicts of interest are irreconcilable

18

When evaluating the performance of managers in investment centers, performance metrics should be based on

revenue and costs under their control

only costs under their control

revenues, costs, and investments under their control

only investments under their control

19

Agency costs arise when agents fail to act in the best interests of the principals. One example of losses from poor decisions would be

increasing the scope of the audit of the financial statements

investing additional funds in profitable projects

prioritizing projects, according to the best interests of the corporation

purchasing inferior material to earn yearly bonus

20

If the price of normal good X rises, the income

effect will induce the consumer to buy more of X and the substitution effect will induce him to buy less

and substitution effects will both induce the consumer to buy less of X

and substitution effects will both induce the consumer to buy more of X

effect will induce the consumer to buy less of X and the substitution will induce him to buy more

21

Suppose that as the price of Y falls from $2.00 to $1.90 the quantity of Y demanded increases from 110 to 118. Then, the price elasticity of demand is

3.94

1.37

4.00

2.09

22

Many conflicts of interest in business contracts can be remedied ethically by which of the following?

Camouflage and consent

Deception and disclosure

Conflicts of interest can never be remedied ethically

Disclosure and consent

23

The pursuit of self-interest

means the same as selfishness

is highly detrimental to the market system

gives direction to the market system

is reflected in the behavior of firms, but not in the behavior of consumers

24

The concept of economic efficiency is primarily concerned with

the limited wants-unlimited resources dilemma

obtaining the maximum output from available resources

the conservation of irreplaceable natural resources

considerations of equity in the distribution of wealth

25

Other things equal, an excise tax on a product will

increase its supply

increase the quantity sold

increase its price

increase its demand

26

When the economist says that economic wants are insatiable, this means that

these wants are virtually unlimited and therefore incapable of complete satisfaction

economic resources are valuable only because they can be used to produce consumer goods

the structure of consumer demand varies from time to time and from country to country

economic resources land, labor, capital, and entrepreneurial ability are scarce

27

The income effect indicates that

when the price of a product falls, the lower price will induce the consumer to buy more of that product now that it is relatively cheaper

when the price of a product falls, a consumer will be able to buy more of it with a specific income

consumers should substitute among various products until the marginal utility from the last unit of each product purchased is the same

a rise in money income will cause consumers to buy smaller quantities of normal goods

28

In 2003, FASB and IASB met and established four criteria for establishing revenue recognition. To recognize revenue, which of the following conditions must be present?

Payment for the sale must be received prior to recognizing the revenue.

A promise to deliver has been established.

A change in assets has occurred and can be appropriately measured.

The product or deliverable, in the case of a service business, has been received by the customer.

29

Productive efficiency refers to

the production of the product-mix most wanted by society

the full employment of all available resources

production at some point inside of the production possibilities curve

the use of the least-cost method of production

30

Which of the following is a normative statement?

It will cool off later this evening.

The humidity is high today.

It is too hot to play tennis today.

The temperature is high today.

evaluation of corporate performance 497038

he Final Project will involve applying the concepts learned in class to an analysis of a company using data from its annual report. Using the concepts from this course, you will analyze the strengths and weaknesses of the company and write a report either recommending or not recommending purchase of the company stock.

Research Tip: The Mergent database in the Ashford University Library contains company profiles and financial information for publicly traded companies and their competitors. To access this database enter the Ashford Library and select Find Articles and More in the top menu panel. Next, select Databases A-Z and go to section M for Mergent . For help with using Mergent, use Mergent Online Quick Tips.

For help with reading an annual report access this handy guide from Money Chimp.

The completed report should include:

  1. An introduction to the company, including background information.
  2. A complete and thorough financial statement review.
  3. Pro Forma financial statements (Balance Sheet and Income Statement) for the next fiscal year, assuming a 10 percent growth rate in sales and Cost of Goods Sold (COGS) for the next year.
  4. Complete ratio analysis for the last fiscal year using at least two ratios from each of the following categories:
    1. Liquidity
    2. Financial leverage
    3. Asset management
    4. Profitability
    5. Market value
  5. A calculation of Return on Equity (ROE) using the DuPont system.
  6. Assessment of management performance by calculating Economic Value Added (EVA).
  7. A synopsis of your findings, including your recommendations and rationale for whether or not to purchase stock from this company.

This report should be eight to ten pages long (excluding title page and reference pages) using APA 6th edition formatting guidelines. Support your findings and recommendations with evidence from at least five scholarly resources, such as the textbook, industry reports, and articles from the Ashford University library.

Writing the Final Paper

The Final Paper:

  1. Must be eight to ten double-spaced pages in length and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the approved APA style guide.
  2. Must include a cover page that includes:
    1. Title of paper
    2. Student’s name
    3. Course name and number
    4. Instructor’s name
    5. Date submitted
  3. Must include an introductory paragraph with a succinct thesis statement.
  4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
  5. Must conclude with a restatement of the thesis and a conclusion paragraph.
  6. Must use at least five scholarly resources from the Ashford University Library.
  7. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the approved APA style guide.
  8. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

ex 16 cash flow from operating activities 497039

EX 16-4 Cash flows from operating activities and indirect method

Indicate whether each of the following would be added to or deducted from net income in determining net cash flow from operating activities by the indirect method:

1.

Decrease in accounts payable

2.

Increase in notes receivable due in 90 days from customers

3.

Decrease in accounts receivable

4.

Loss on disposal of fixed assets

5.

Increase in notes payable due in 90 days to vendors

6.

Amortization of patent

7.

Depreciation of fixed assets

8.

Gain on retirement of long-term debt

9.

Decrease in salaries payable

10.

Increase in merchandise inventory

11.

Decrease in prepaid expenses

exact questions 497040

31. Golden Sales has bought $135,000 in fixed assets on January 1st associated with sales equipment. The residual value of these assets is estimated at $10,000 after they service their 4 year service life. Golden Sales managers want to evaluate the options of depreciation (10 points).

(a) Compute the annual straight-line depreciation and provide the depreciation journal entry to be posted at the end of each of the years.

(b) Write the journal entries for each year of the service life for these assets using the double declining balance method.

32. The units of an item available for sale during the year were as follows:

Jan. 1 Inventory 20 units at $50
Feb. 4 Purchase 10 units at $52
July 7 Purchase 30 units at $55
Oct. 15 Purchase 15 units at $60

There are 30 units of the item in the physical inventory at December 31. The periodic inventory system is used. Determine the inventory cost using the first-in, first-out costing method (6 points).

33. Using the following bank reconciliation for Allen Co. for June 30, 2007, record the appropriate journal entries that would be necessary (7 points).

Allen Co.
Bank Reconciliation
June 30, 2007

Cash balance according to bank statement $8,000.00
Add deposits in transit not recorded by bank 500.00
$8,500.00
Deduct outstanding checks 2,200.00
Adjusted balance $6,300.00
Cash balance according to depositor’s records $3,675.00
Add: Note collected by bank, including
$50 interest $2,850.00
Error in recording cash sales of
$342 as $324 18.00 2,868.00
$6,543.00
Deduct: NSF check from XXXXX XXXXX $ 218.00
Bank service charges 25.00 243.00
Adjusted balance $6,300.00

34. Wolfe Company issued a 60-day, 8% note for $15,000, dated April 5, to Lamb Company on account (9 points).

(a) Determine the due date of the note.
(b) Determine the maturity value of the note.
(c) Journalize the entries to record the following:
(1) receipt of the note by the payee, and
(2) receipt by the payee of the amount due on the note at maturity. Round answers to the nearest $1.

35. ABC Country Club has acquired a lot to construct a clubhouse. ABC had the following costs related to the construction:

Architects Fees $20,000
Construction Labor 80,000
Engineers Fees 15,000
Fences around building 9,000
Grading and leveling 10,000
Insurance costs incurred during construction 7,000
Interest on money borrowed for construction 5,000
Land 37,000
Building Materials 237,000
Sales Taxes 3,000
Trees and Shrubs 6,000

Determine the cost of the Club House to be reported on the balance sheet. Please be sure to list each of the items included in the cost to determine the cost of the Club House

exam 497041

1. (TCO 4) An entrepreneur who wishes to start a business with little delay or hassle, and who wants to be his or her own boss, should organize the business as a:
sole proprietorship.
cooperative.
C corporation.
general partnership.
2. (TCO 4) In a limited liability partnership, each partner’s risk of losing personal assets is:
limited to the amount that each partner invested in the company.
limited to losses that result from their own acts and omissions and the acts and omissions of those who work under their supervision.
determined entirely by the maximum loss provision established by the articles of co-partnership.
nonexistent.
3. (TCO 4) The form of business ownership that is best suited to raising large amounts of money for expansion is the:
sole proprietorship.
partnership.
corporation.
cooperative.
4. (TCO 4) Entrepreneurs applying for a bank loan should realize that bankers will
expect to receive a share of ownership in the business in exchange for their loan.
expect the entrepreneur to have a well-prepared business plan.
generally make loans only to small businesses in dot.com related industries.
offer only short-term financing.
5. (TCO 3) Free trade between nations generally results in:
industrialized nations gaining at the expense of developing nations.
the loss of jobs in developed nations.
mutually beneficial exchange relationships.
higher prices for goods that are imported.
6. (TCO 3) The two basic types of tariffs are:
goods and services.
revenue and protective.
comparative and absolute.
general and limited.
7. (TCO 3) Which of the following represents the value of one nation’s currency relative to the currencies of another country?
Euro rate.
Currency exchange rate.
Value rate.
Standard of living.
8. (TCO 2) Which of the following reflects the desire of an ethical manager to achieve a “win-win” relationship with others?
Is it legal?
Is it balanced?
How will it make me feel about myself?
How can I benefit at the expense of others?
9. (TCO 2) After developing a code of ethics, it should be communicated to:
everyone with whom the business has dealings.
the Attorney General in jurisdictions where the business has operations.
all levels of management.
stockholders.
10. (TCO 2) Corporate ________ encompasses various issues such as setting minority hiring practices, manufacturing safe products, and minimizing pollution.
responsibility
philanthropy
diversity
structure and strategy
11. (TCO 2) The Enron scandal revealed ________ corporate behavior.
legal but unethical
predictable
illegal
ethical
12. (TCO 1) A typical supply curve shows a relationship between the:
amount of labor a firm hires and the amount of output it can produce.
amount of time required to produce a good and the relevant production costs.
price of a good and the quantity sellers would be willing to offer for sale.
amount of a good a firm produces and the total profit it earns.
13. (TCO 1) When the government runs a budget deficit, it increases the:
national debt.
balance of payments deficit.
federal capital account.
money supply.
1. (TCO 1) Kathleen manages a manufacturing plant for ScanRite, Inc., a producer of scanners and other input devices connected to computers. About six months ago, Kathleen asked an assistant to keep track of both work hours and output at her plant. She has compared these figures, and has found that even though the number of workers (and the hours they worked) remained relatively steady over the past six months, the plant’s output increased significantly. This indicates that:
the productivity of workers at the ScanRite plant has increased.
the ScanRite plant must have sold off some of its excess inventory.
ScanRite prices have increased faster than the wages it pays to its workers.
Kathleen should hire more workers.
2. (TCO 9) Harriet Smith started her own used bookstore four years ago. Her business has prospered and she now has a large number of regular customers. She wants to computerize her records so that she can easily keep track of the names, addresses, and phone numbers of each customer, as well as the types of books each customer likes. She plans to use this information to contact customers when she receives books they might like. The type of software that would be most useful to Harriet is:
a database program.
groupware.
a systems configuration package.
communications software.

3.(TCO 9) The most likely reason a firm would decide to establish an extranet would be the desire to:(Points : 6)speed the flow of information on its private network by increasing the bandwidth.
make the information on its network widely available to the general public.
share information and collaborate with a select group of outside organizations or individuals.
overcome the speed and capacity limitations of its external connection to the Internet by gaining access to the very high speed Backbone Network Service.

4.(TCO 8) As the campaign manager for a candidate for the U.S. Senate, Pete works to learn as much as possible about potential voters. With this information, he hopes to focus the campaign on the issues most important to voters. This represents:(Points : 6)

the use of marketing by a nonprofit organization.
a nonprofit application of the production era strategy.
the selling of a candidate in a political campaign.
an extension of the profit orientation to a nonprofit organization.

5.(TCO 10) Stockholders of the Sasha Deal Company are concerned about irregularities in the firm’s accounting system. One approach to identify problems in the records of the company would be to have a(n) ________ performed.(Points : 6)

internal audit
independent audit
certified audit
GAAP analysis

6.(TCO 6) Monica has just been hired by the Misty Mount Corporation to take over as the new chief executive officer. Her initial impression is that the company is in disarray, primarily because the employees do not have a sense of purpose or a common set of values. Monica’s observations suggest that she needs to provide a(n) _________ for Misty Mount:(Points : 6)

vision
contingency plan
objective function
corporate logo

7.(TCO 6) Which of the following statements about worker motivation is most consistent with the findings of the Hawthorne studies?(Points : 6)

Worker motivation will fall significantly if lighting conditions, temperature, and other elements of the physical environment are not at kept at their optimal levels.
Workers are more motivated if they feel they are part of a special group or project.
The best way to motivate workers is to offer pay raises, bonuses, and other financial incentives to workers who meet or exceed clearly specified goals.
Worker motivation is unimportant in determining the level of worker productivity, because productivity is primarily determined by external factors such as the speed of the machinery the workers operate.

8.(TCO 6) In comparing the types of skills used by managers at different levels within an organization, it is generally true that:(Points : 6)

top managers use mainly technical skills, and middle and first-line managers use mostly conceptual skills.
first-line managers use mainly technical and human relations skills, while top managers devote most of their time to activities involving human relations and conceptual skills.
the types of skills used by managers do not change much from one level of management to another.
the specific skills used at different levels of management do vary, but conceptual skills are the most important at all levels.

9.(TCO 7) A basic characteristic of flexible manufacturing is that it:(Points : 6)

relies heavily on labor, since humans are more adaptable than machines.
uses machines designed to perform multiple tasks so they can be used to produce a variety of products.
achieves its flexibility at the cost of much slower rates of production than mass production techniques.
is only possible when using mass production processes.

10.(TCO 5) ___________ means selling goods and services to ultimate consumers over the Internet.(Points : 6)

Electronic retailing
B2B distribution
selling
Intercommerce

11.(TCO 10) __________ is the accounting practice of recording every transaction in two places.(Points : 6)

Double-entry bookkeeping
Trial balancing
Account matching
Entry duplication

12.(TCO 9) A firm would use data mining if it wanted to:(Points : 6)

store copies of crucial data in several different locations to protect against its loss during disasters such as earthquakes, floods, or terrorist attacks.
protect its data from unauthorized outsiders.
increase the rate at which information flows through a firm’s intranet.
discover hidden relationships among the data it accumulates.

exam 2 chapters 5 6 and 7 acct 2101 497042

Allied Parts was organized on May 1, 2013, and made its first purchase of merchandise on May 3. The purchase was for 1,800 units at a price of $7 per unit. On May 5, Allied Parts sold 1,080 of the units for $11 per unit to Baker Co. Terms of the sale were 2/10, n/60. a. On May 7, Baker returns 378 units because they did not fit the customer’s needs. Allied Parts restores the units to its inventory. b. On May 8, Baker discovers that 90 units are damaged but are still of some use and, therefore, keeps the units. Allied Parts sends Baker a credit memorandum for $270 to compensate for the damage. c. On May 15, Baker discovers that 108 units are the wrong color. Baker keeps 65 of these units because Allied Parts sends a $128 credit memorandum to compensate. Baker returns the remaining 43 units to Allied Parts. Allied Parts restores the 43 returned units to its inventory. Prepare entries for Allied Parts to record the May 5 sale and each of the above separate transactions a through c using a perpetual inventory system.

2)

Allied Parts was organized on May 1, 2013, and made its first purchase of merchandise on May 3. The purchase was for 1,200 units at a price of $10 per unit. On May 5, Allied Parts sold 720 of the units for $14 per unit to Baker Co. Terms of the sale were 2/10, n/60. a. On May 7, Baker returns 252 units because they did not fit the customer s needs. Allied Parts restores the units to its inventory. b. On May 8, Baker discovers that 60 units are damaged but are still of some use and, therefore, keeps the units. Allied Parts sends Baker a credit memorandum for $360 to compensate for the damage. c. On May 15, Baker discovers that 72 units are the wrong color. Baker keeps 43 of these units because Allied Parts sends a $92 credit memorandum to compensate. Baker returns the remaining 29 units to Allied Parts. Allied Parts restores the 29 returned units to its inventory. Prepare the appropriate journal entries for Baker Co. to record the May 5 purchase and each of the three separate transactions a through c. Baker is a retailer that uses a perpetual inventory system and purchases these units for resale.

3) Following are the merchandising transactions for Chilton Systems. 1. On November 1, Chilton Systems purchases merchandise for $1,200 on credit with terms of 2/5, n/30, FOB shipping point; invoice dated November 1. 2. On November 5, Chilton Systems pays cash for the November 1 purchase. 3. On November 7, Chilton Systems discovers and returns $155 of defective merchandise purchased on November 1 for a cash refund. 4. On November 10, Chilton Systems pays $60 cash for transportation costs with the November 1 purchase. 5. On November 13, Chilton Systems sells merchandise for $1,296 on credit. The cost of the merchandise is $648. 6. On November 16, the customer returns merchandise from the November 13 transaction. The returned items sell for $205 and cost $102. The merchandise is returned to inventory. Journalize the above merchandising transactions for Chilton Systems assuming it uses a perpetual inventory system.

4-7)

Laker Company reported the following January purchases and sales data for its only product. Date Activities Units Acquired at Cost Units sold at Retail Jan. 1 Beginning Inventory 250 units @ $ 9.00 = $ 2,250 Jan. 10 Sales 140 units @ $ 17.00 Jan. 20 Purchase 320 units @ $ 8.00 = 2,560 Jan. 25 Sales 245 units @ $ 17.00 Jan. 30 Purchase 190 units @ $ 7.00 = 1,330 Totals 760 units $ 6,140 385 units Laker Company uses a perpetual inventory system. For specific identification, ending inventory consists of 375 units, where 190 are from the January 30 purchase, 80 are from the January 20 purchase, and 105 are from beginning inventory.

1. Complete the table to determine the cost assigned to ending inventory and cost of goods sold using specific identification. 2. Determine the cost assigned to ending inventory and to cost of goods sold using weighted average. (Round cost per unit to 2 decimal places. Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign.) 3. Determine the cost assigned to ending inventory and to cost of goods sold using FIFO. 4. Determine the cost assigned to ending inventory and to cost of goods sold using LIFO.

8) Martinez Co. reported the following current-year data for its only product. The company uses a periodic inventory system, and its ending inventory consists of 360 units 120 from each of the last three purchases. Jan. 1 Beginning inventory 220 units @ $2.80 = $ 616 Mar. 7 Purchase 480 units @ $3.25 = 1,560 July 28 Purchase 1,120 units @ $3.30 = 3,696 Oct. 3 Purchase 1,000 units @ $3.60 = 3,600 Dec. 19 Purchase 400 units @ $3.70 = 1,480 Totals 3,220 units $ 10,952 Determine the cost assigned to ending inventory and to cost of goods sold for the following. (Do not round intermediate calculations and round your answers to 2 decimal places.)

9)

Ali Co. uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of November. Nov. 3 The company purchased $4,600 of merchandise on credit from Hart Co., terms n/20. 7 The company sold merchandise costing $1,214 on credit to J. Than for $1,334, subject to an $27 sales discount if paid by the end of the month. 9 The company borrowed $2,700 cash by signing a note payable to the bank. 13 J. Ali, the owner, contributed $4,000 cash to the company. 18 The company sold merchandise costing $193 to B. Cox for $344 cash. 22 The company paid Hart Co. $4,600 cash for the merchandise purchased on November 3. 27 The company received $1,307 cash from J. Than in payment of the November 7 purchase. 30 The company paid salaries of $2,300 in cash. Journalize the November transactions that should be recorded in the cash receipts journal assuming the perpetual inventory system is used. 10) Marx Supply uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of April. April 3 Purchased merchandise for $3,000 on credit from Seth, Inc., terms 2/10, n/30. 9 Issued check no. 210 to Kitt Corp. to buy store supplies for $480. 12 Sold merchandise costing $530 on credit to C. Myrs for $890, terms n/30. 17 Issued check no. 211 for $1,500 to pay off a note payable to City Bank. 20 Purchased merchandise for $3,600 on credit from Lite, terms 2/10, n/30. 28 Issued check no. 212 to Lite to pay the amount due for the purchase of April 20, less the discount. 29 Paid salary of $1,950 to B. Dock by issuing check no. 213. 30 Issued check no. 214 to Seth, Inc., to pay the amount due for the purchase of April 3. Journalize the April transactions that should be recorded in the cash disbursements journal assuming the perpetual inventory system is used.

11-13)

At the end of May, the sales journal of Mountain View appears as follows. Date Account Debited Invoice Number PR Accounts Receivable Dr. Sales Cr. Cost of Goods Sold Dr. Inventory Cr. May 6 Aaron Reckers 190 2,060 1,566 10 Sara Reed 191 1,120 924 17 Anna Page 192 498 293 25 Sara Reed 193 199 117 31 Totals 3,877 2,900 Mountain View also recorded the return of defective merchandise with the following entry. Date General Journal Debit Credit May 20 Sales Returns and Allowances 325 Accounts Receivable Anna Page 325 Customer returned (worthless) merchandise.

3. Prepare a schedule of accounts receivable.

Required: 1. Post to the customer accounts the entries in the sales journal and any portion of the general journal entry that affects a customer’s account.

2. Post the sales journal amounts first and then any portion of the general journal entry that affects these accounts. Dates may not be chronological in the general ledger accounts.

exam 497043

Question 1 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following statements is true about referring to visuals in the text of a document?

A. In general, you should refer to visuals in the text of the document.

B. In general, the audience will check the visual whether you refer to it in the text or not.

C. Textual references should never be placed in parenthetical references.

D. If you embed a textual reference in a sentence, the reader will not pay attention to it.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 2 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following statements about the placement of visuals is true?

A. Visuals that readers need to refer to repeatedly should be placed at the front of the document.

B. Always place visuals on the right side of the page; people tend not to look at visuals placed on the left side of a page.

C. If a visual requires an entire page in a document printed only on one side of the paper, place the visual on the page following the text reference.

D. If a formal report has more than two visuals, include a list of figures or a list of tables at the beginning of the document.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 3 of 20 5.0 Points
Symbols used by most countries in which there is a yellow triangle with a black band and a black graphic on it:

A. are used to give directions to travelers.

B. prohibit whatever is written on the sign.

C. signal a safety precaution, such as “ear protection necessary.”

D. warn about whatever is displayed in the triangle.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 4 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following statements is true about scatter graphs?

A. Because scatter graphs are relatively easy to interpret, their statistical relevance does not have to be discussed in the text.

B. If the dots are randomly scattered, they have a high degree of correlation.

C. If the diagonal runs from the upper left to the lower right, the correlation is positive.

D. Because interpreting scatter graphs is often difficult, their use is generally limited to professional and expert audiences.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 5 of 20 5.0 Points
The type of graph which is used to emphasize the proportionate distribution of something is a:

A. bar graph.

B. pie graph.

C. scatter graph.

D. subdivided bar graph.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 6 of 20 5.0 Points
In identifying and distinguishing between insects, __________ is the most helpful aspect of a visual.

A. color

B. font size

C. chart design

D. organization
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 7 of 20 5.0 Points
A(n) __________ portrays the hierarchy of a corporation by putting each position in a separate block.

A. organizational chart

B. flowchart

C. block chart

D. free-form chart
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 8 of 20 5.0 Points
As visuals, photographs often provide too much detail; therefore, _______ is/are often placed on the photograph to draw attention to the main features.

A. dots

B. text

C. callout arrows

D. grid lines
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 9 of 20 5.0 Points
Color can be misused when there are too many colors, too much color, inappropriate colors, or when:

A. colors are used as symbols, such as when neon orange is used to signify warnings.

B. the intensity differs according to purpose.

C. colors attract attention to a topic.

D. color is used simply as decoration, contradicting the basic premise that color in technical documents should be functional.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 10 of 20 5.0 Points
According to the OSHA and APWA Safety Colors chart, which of the following is a correct match?

A. Red = WARNING

B. Yellow = CAUTION

C. Blue = SAFETY

D. Green = NOTICE
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 11 of 20 5.0 Points
The seven important uses of color are: signaling safety, attracting attention, enabling accurate identification, showing structure and organization, highlighting components and their function or movement, aiding comprehension, and:

A. decorating documents.

B. guiding reading.

C. influencing interpretation.

D. organizing information.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 12 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following is the most common way to collect information about visitors to Web sites?

A. Hit counters

B. Adware

C. Spyware

D. Cookies
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 13 of 20 5.0 Points
The protocol that allows computers to locate and communicate with each other is called:

A. TCP/IP.

B. ISP.

C. PPP.

D. URL.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 14 of 20 5.0 Points
Of the factors that have been identified as particularly important to online reading, which relates to how easily readers can move through and locate places on the Web?

A. Responsiveness

B. Navigation

C. Legibility

D. Equipment and service
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 15 of 20 5.0 Points
When Web site designers consider the framework that structures the information in such a way that that it meets the goals and expectations of the user, they are considering:

A. online video presentations.

B. content.

C. page/screen design.

D. information architecture.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 16 of 20 5.0 Points
Which link’s primary function is to authenticate the site and its content by describing the organization’s legal status, its formal policies, contact information, and so on?

A. Authorizing

B. Commenting

C. Referencing/Citing

D. Exemplifying
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 17 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following ways to navigate Web sites are sequential lists of pages that let users know where they are on the site and where they have been in relation to either the site’s home page or their entry point onto the site?

A. Menus

B. Embedded links

C. Breadcrumb trails

D. Dialogue boxes
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 18 of 20 5.0 Points
Web site designers should work to prevent (or keep from having):

A. vertical scrolling.

B. horizontal scrolling.

C. white space.

D. more content than navigation on a page
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 19 of 20 5.0 Points
As discussed in the textbook, which of the following is not supported by older browsers?

A. PNG images

B. JPG images

C. GIF images

D. According to the textbook, all of the above image types are completely supported by all browsers.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 20 of 20 5.0 Points
When writing for electronic communication:

A. use a pyramid structure for organizing information (details first, followed by the main point in summation).

B. provide extensive in-text links to other sites.

C. use at least 150-250 words in each information chunk.

D. use headings and bulleted lists.

Question 1 of 20 5.0 Points
Questions such as “Who uses it? and “What is its value? relate to which component of a definition?

A. Physical characteristics

B. Function

C. Operation

D. Comparison
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 2 of 20 5.0 Points
In constructing formal definitions, you should:

A. make the genus as broad as possible.

B. make the genus as narrow as possible.

C. make the differentia as exclusive as possible.

D. avoid all classifications.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 3 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following would NOT be used in creating an informal definition?

A. A synonym

B. An antonym

C. A classification

D. An analogy
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 4 of 20 5.0 Points
A(n) __________ definition summarizes or outlines the primary steps involved in the function, usually in chronological order.

A. classification

B. informal

C. expanded

D. operational
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 5 of 20 5.0 Points
Expanded definitions commonly include history, examples, and:

A. etymology.

B. synonyms.

C. stipulations.

D. drawings and illustrations.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 6 of 20 5.0 Points
A(n) __________ is a mini-dictionary usually located either at the beginning or end of a technical document.

A. sidebar

B. glossary

C. appendix

D. online help link
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 7 of 20 5.0 Points
When documents are lengthy and audience’s backgrounds are widely varied, __________ can be created and placed at the end of the document to provide operational and expanded definitions of critical concepts; they can be used by those who need additional information and ignored by readers who do not need the explanations.

A. appendices

B. sidebars

C. footnotes

D. information notes
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 8 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following statements is NOT true about technical descriptions?

A. Technical descriptions provide accurate information about physical features, but they rarely have any further impact.

B. Sometimes technical descriptions constitute an entire document.

C. Most of the time, technical descriptions are limited to a single segment of a longer document or presentation.

D. Technical descriptions provide verifiable information that corresponds to assumed questions, such as What is it? What does it look like
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 9 of 20 5.0 Points
Common applications for technical descriptions include observation notes, training materials, and:

A. editorial viewpoints.

B. proposals and reports.

C. newspaper articles.

D. e-mail communications.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 10 of 20 5.0 Points
Some characteristics that help to make technical descriptions accessible in technical manuals are run-in headings, serif font, and:

A. accurate vocabulary.

B. lengthy explanations.

C. embedded figures.

D. short paragraphs.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 11 of 20 5.0 Points
Components which comprise the physical aspects of a device, without regard to purpose are:

A. graphical components.

B. functional parts.

C. structural parts.

D. dimensions.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 12 of 20 5.0 Points
If the purpose of a specific visual is to describe individual parts in relation to the whole or to give an image of each individual component, then the selected visual should be:

A. photographs, realistic drawings, or contour maps.

B. phantom views, schematics, or cross-section maps.

C. exploded views, cutaways, blueprints, or drawings of individual parts.

D. photographs, videos, or realistic drawings.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 13 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following is appropriate for the conclusion of a technical description?

A. What is its history

B. What separates it from similar objects

C. What are the benefits or problems

D. Where does the object fit in relation to similar ones
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 14 of 20 5.0 Points
__________ explain sequential actions to members of an audience who need enough details to understand an action or process, but not enough to necessarily enable them to complete it.

A. Process explanations

B. Technical descriptions

C. Instructions

D. Benefits or advantages
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 15 of 20 5.0 Points
Faced with negative consequences such as difficulty getting hired at other companies within the same field, what would most likely be a valid reason for why a technical communicator would choose to be a whistleblower when directed, for example, to document in writing the safety of a hazardous product or process?

A. Attention-seeking behavior

B. Legal requirements and a sense of responsibility to the community.

C. Promotion or pay raise

D. Lack of loyalty to employer
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 16 of 20 5.0 Points
An effective way to present a process explanation that precedes step-by-step instructions is:

A. to insert a photograph of the final product.

B. to make a chart of the benefits of the product.

C. to construct a graph of production outcomes for the last month.

D. to create a flowchart.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 17 of 20 5.0 Points
In preparing a process explanation, the step of __________ forms the basis (backbone) of the process explanation and aids in designing visuals.

A. listing the sequence of steps in the process

B. identifying the audience

C. organizing the material

D. choosing the diction
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 18 of 20 5.0 Points
An overview of an entire sequence can be provided by timelines as well as by:

A. pie charts.

B. bar graphs.

C. schedules.

D. scatter graphs.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 19 of 20 5.0 Points
When writing process explanations, use active voice when:

A. the action involves a person and you want to emphasize the recipient of the action.

B. when the person doing the the action is insignificant or unimportant.

C. when the action does not involve a person and you want to emphasize the recipient of the action.

D. the action involves a person and you want to emphasize the operator or the doer of the action.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 20 of 20 5.0 Points
Because process explanations are chronological, writers often use __________ to signal movement from one part of the process to the next.

A. thesis statements

B. headings and subheadings

C. commas

D. bullets

Question 1 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following is the best example of a formal presentation situation?

A. Presentation of your findings at weekly departmental meetings

B. A short presentation to a group of people who will use the information you present as a springboard for a group discussion

C. A meeting with your immediate supervisor

D. A presentation to corporate executives or international customers
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 2 of 20 5.0 Points
Audience members who include people in decision-making positions who may have limited technical experience, such as corporate officers, governmental officials, and military leaders, are best described as:

A. professional peers.

B. nonexpert professionals.

C. international audiences.

D. general audiences.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 3 of 20 5.0 Points
When you show your audience how something is done, define and describe a process as it happens, and educate the audience, you are providing:

A. an informal presentation.

B. a persuasive presentation.

C. a demonstration.

D. a training session.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 4 of 20 5.0 Points
When you avoid cramming too much information into the allotted time, intersperse difficult material with easier material, and use a variety of activities, you are using the strategy of:

A. making what you say easy to listen to and remember.

B. varying the pacing and structure of your presentation.

C. encouraging active involvement.

D. creating an audience-centered atmosphere.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 5 of 20 5.0 Points
Making the statement “So far I have explained three common methods to eliminate exposed asbestos in your facility” is an example of __________ the presentation.

A. including summaries in

B. using transitions in

C. previewing the organization of

D. drawing conclusions from facts presented in
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 6 of 20 5.0 Points
When using flip charts or posters in a presentation, the people in the last row should be able to easily read the information on the visual; allow __________ of letter height for every ten feet of audience.

A. 1/2 inch

B. 1 1/2 inches

C. 1 inch

D. 2 inches
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 7 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following statements is true about handouts?

A. Handouts should provide only the key points of your presentation; otherwise, your audience will read the handouts instead of listening to you.

B. You should always give the handout at the very beginning of the presentation.

C. Handouts should be presented as loose pages so that the participants can bind them in their preferred manner.

D. In a long set of handouts, it is easier for the audience to “turn to the page following the blue page divider” than to “turn to page 9 in your handout.”
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 8 of 20 5.0 Points
Correspondence is different from other genres of technical communication; examples of correspondence include:

A. reports.

B. e-mail and memos.

C. training manuals.

D. technical instructions.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 9 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following is NOT true concerning electronic messages?

A. Do not respond immediately to a message that upsets you.

B. Keep the message brief and on topic.

C. You do not need to refer to the content of the original message by quoting or summarizing the subject.

D. Cover only one topic in each message to make replying, forwarding, or organizing archived messages easier.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 10 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following is true concerning e-mail?

A. A survey by the American Management Association found that 95% of employees work for companies that have e-mail policies and all of those employees are familiar with their company’s policies.

B. According to a court decision in a case involving Nissan (as discussed in your textbook), companies do not own everything that is sent on the networks they own; employees who send private e-mails on the company network retain ownership of all of the e-mails they write.

C. In professional correspondence it is appropriate to use emoticons and abbreviated spellings, such as “c u” for “see you” as these make people feel more comfortable with your message.

D. Never write anything in an e-mail that you would not be willing to say to your boss or in a court of law.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 11 of 20 5.0 Points
When writing e-mail, memos, and letters, organize material __________ if you anticipate a neutral or positive response.

A. in direct (descending) order

B. in indirect (ascending) order

C. using bullets

D. by first asking questions which are then followed by explanatory material
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 12 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following is an example of using the “you” attitude as discussed in the textbook?

A. Your order will be shipped on March 17, one week later than originally anticipated.

B. I appreciate your hard work on this project.

C. We need your crew to follow the new procedures.

D. Our department is backlogged, so we will have to delay shipment of your order.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 13 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following is the only component listed below that is different in a response that rejects an inquiry than in one that accepts an inquiry?

A. Acknowledge the inquiry.

B. Offer an alternative.

C. Build goodwill.

D. Conclude in a friendly manner.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 14 of 20 5.0 Points
Your textbook reviews the domino effect of correspondence by presenting the Tele-Robics case. Which of the following types of correspondence was NOT included in this chain of events?

A. Complaint letter to field service office

B. Several e-mails and memos

C. Letters to vendor and other customers

D. All of the correspondence in a-c above was used in the case.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 15 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following is NOT a stated purpose of a proposal?

A. Solve a problem

B. Investigate a subject

C. Advocate a particular political viewpoint

D. Sell a product or service
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 16 of 20 5.0 Points
Theorists in psychology and communication believe that people reject or at least devalue information that conflicts with their existing beliefs; this principle is called:

A. internal conflict.

B. comprehension failure.

C. objective disagreement.

D. cognitive dissonance.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 17 of 20 5.0 Points
A(n) __________ is a syllogism in which the major premise is unacknowledged; thus it can address probabilities rather an verifiable information and can employ ethical and emotional arguments as well as logical arguments.

A. logical conclusion

B. false syllogism

C. enthymeme

D. rebuttal
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 18 of 20 5.0 Points
The ten most common reasons that proposals are turned down include lack of new or original ideas, absence of acceptable scientific rationale, and:

A. poor grammar and other written conventions.

B. uncertainty concerning the future direction.

C. scope of the work is too narrow.

D. plan is too specifically focused.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 19 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following parts of the proposal explains the methodology that will be used to implement the plan?

A. Approach

B. Benefits

C. Evaluation

D. Plan
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 20 of 20 5.0 Points
Proposals are usually intended for management personnel or external readers and may range from __________ pages in length.

A. 20-30

B. 50-150

C. a few to several hundred

D. 1-5

exam 497044

1) Northwest Airlines applied mathematical models to determine which customers in its database were currently responsible for most of its profitability and which customers were not currently profitable but had similar characteristics to the most profitable customers. Northwest Airlines utilized _____ to identify these customers. A. computer programming B. data warehousing C. customer relationships management D. data mining

2) Minute Maid sees research as the fundamental first step in any business decision, and it created proprietary methods for conducting research. At what level of the hierarchy of business decision makers does Minute Maid operate? A. Top tier B. Middle tier C. Base tier D. Foundation tier

3) Which of the following questions is considered first when discussing a management dilemma? A. How can management eliminate negative symptoms? B. What does the manager need to know to choose the best alternative from the available sources of action? C. What is the recommended course of action? D. What symptoms cause management concern?

4) The goal of ethics in research is to _____. A. ensure that no one is harmed B. protect researchers from legal liability C. identify what behavior is appropriate D. ensure research sponsors fulfill their legal obligations

5) _____ occurs when the participants are told only part of the truth or when the truth is fully compromised. A. Coercion B. Deception C. Informed consent D. Debriefing

6) The process of stating the basic dilemma and then developing other questions by progressively breaking down the original question into more specific ones is called the _____. A. research question B. management-research question hierarchy C. management dilemma D. management question

7) The fundamental weakness in the research process is _____. A. incorrectly defining the research question B. identifying a flawed sampling frame C. misdefining the target population D. failing to identify all relevant secondary information

8) Which type of management question asks what do we want to achieve? A. Choice of purpose B. Evaluation of solutions C. Troubleshooting D. Control

9) In the Southeast, the potato chip market share held by the Lays brand is 46%. This is an example of _____. A. a research question B. a descriptive hypothesis C. a relational hypothesis D. an explanatory hypothesis

10) An increase in hours of television viewing leads to increases in the sales of snack foods. This is an example of a _____. A. research question B. descriptive hypothesis C. correlational hypothesis D. causal hypothesis

11) To be categorized as a customer, an individual must have a history of shopping at the establishment at least twice before the start of the study with expenditures of more than $10. This is an example of _____. A. a hypothetical construct B. a conceptual scheme C. an operational definition D. a dictionary definition

12) James is entering data on client gender. Because the values entered reflect male or female, this variable is _____. A. discrete B. dichotomous C. continuous D. ratio-scaled

13) Which variable in an experiment is the variable expected to be affected by the manipulation? A. Dependent variable B. Extraneous variable C. Moderating variable D. Independent variable

14) Qualitative research seeks to _____ theory while quantitative research _____ it. A. examine; interprets B. build; tests C. test; understands D. apply; builds

15) Which of the following is true of quantitative research? A. It uses a nonprobability sampling method B. Results are generalizable C. Data analysis is ongoing during the project D. Sample sizes are generally small

16) The use of a control group in experimentation _____. A. provides for the manipulation of the independent variable B. serves as a comparison to assess the manipulation C. minimizes the cost of experimentation D. allows for discovery of the average effect of the independent variable in different situations

17) What is the first step in conducting an experiment? A. Specify the level(s) of the treatment B. Choose the experimental design C. Control the experimental environment D. Select relevant variables

18) Data originating from studies that are conducted by others and created for a purpose different from the purpose of the study for which the data are being reviewed are called _____ data. A. primary B. secondary C. quantitative D. statistical

19) The goal of a formal study is to _____. A. discover future research tasks B. expand understanding of a topic C. test hypotheses D. provide insight

20) A _____ scale is a scale that scores an object or property without making a direct comparison to another object or property. A. ranking B. rating C. categorization D. sorting

exam 501757rr ethics and law enforcement practices 497045

Questions 1 to 20: Select the best answer to each question. Note that a question and its answers may be split across a page break, so be sure that you have seen the entire question and all the answers before choosing an answer.
1. The most scholarly viewpoint on how criminal justice professionals learn ethical and unethical behavior is the _______ approach.
A. differential
B. rational-choice C. values-added D. values-learned
2. With the passage of _______, community police departments were allocated money by Congress. A. Neighborhood Watch
B. Alternative Policing Strategy
C. the Violent Crime Control and Law Enforcement Act of 1994
D. the President’s Crime Commission of 1965
3. The _______ theory of leadership emphasizes the relationship between the leader and his or her subordinates.
A. learning
B. contingency C. train
D. objective
4. Which of the following is universally agreed upon as part of a police officer’s domain? A. Discretion
B. Acceptance of gratuities
C. Differential treatment of special groups
D. Public service
5. Which of the following statements about police officer loyalty is true? A. The blue curtain of secrecy is breaking down.
B. Loyalty is extended in a rational way.
C. The code of silence is mostly a myth.
D. Departmental loyalty is mostly a negative factor because it leads to corruption and cover-ups.
6. _______ justice is associated with the determination of and methods of punishment. A. Corrective
B. Natural
C. Distributive
D. Commutative
7. If an officer is found negligent, his or her supervisor can be sued in civil court. This is called A. criminal culpability.
B. ethical liability.
C. vicarious liability.
D. guilt by association.
8. Which of the following drives police actions the most? A. Police subculture
B. Code of ethics
C. Rule book
D. Political pressure
9. The primary mission of policing established by Sir Robert Peel was to A. prevent crime and disorder.
B. control riots.
C. implement a police hierarchy.
D. investigate crimes.
10. Abuse-of-authority rules are found in A. the Police Code of Conduct.
B. each state’s penal code.
C. the Bill of Rights.
D. Title 42 of the U.S. Code.
11. Which of the following actions is consistent with the police subculture? A. Respect for individual rights
B. Use of illegal investigation tactics
C. Restraint in the use of force
D. Consistent truth-telling
12. The watchman style of policing evolved due to A. urbanization.
B. the Gold Rush of 1849.
C. the Boston Tea Party.
D. railroad construction.
13. “Hostile environment” and “quid pro quo sexual harassment” were defined in A. Miranda v. Arizona.
B. Katz v. Dole.
C. Katz v. Siempre.
D. Dole v. Ward.
14. The idea that an employee’s attitude toward work is largely influenced by his or her individual characteristics comes from the _______ model.
A. importation B. trait
C. environmental D. ethics
15. The Wickersham Commission was established by President A. Nixon.
B. Eisenhower.
C. Kennedy.
D. Hoover.
16. The tendency to rationalize one’s behavior, avoid pain, gain rewards, and weigh risks and benefits while learning unethical behavior is explained by the _______ theory.
A. noble-cause B. legitimacy
C. values-learned D. rational-choice
17. The _______ system was a politician-centered system of policing. A. progressive
B. alderman
C. Peelian
D. community-policing
18. The alderman system of policing, established during the nineteenth Century, was considered A. the best deterrent to organized crime.
B. highly disorganized and decentralized.
C. organized and efficient.
D. the model that modern police forces should follow.
19. The formal law enforcement code of ethics promoted by the International Association of Chiefs of Police is a code that
A. provides principles or guidelines that relate to the value system of the organization. B. generally describes the tenets of professional conduct.
C. specifies ideal behavior in an aspirational manner.
D. provides mandatory rules of conduct that can serve as a basis of discipline.
20. Coercive interrogation techniques were declared improper by A. Roe v. Wade.
B. Mapp v. Ohio.
C. Miranda v. Arizona.
D. Walker v. Katz.

exam accounting for merchandising 497046

1.Which of the following would probably not cause inventory shrinkage?

2.Goods available for sale are $350,000; beginning inventory is $24,000; ending inventory is $32,000; and
cost of goods sold is $275,000. The inventory turnover is

3.Which items may not limit the effectiveness of internal control systems in an organization?

4.The balance sheet format that lists assets above liabilities is the _______ form.

5.Isaiah Sporting Goods uses the perpetual average cost method of determining inventory costs. Below is
the inventory record for Product C124:
Date Received Sold Cost/Unit Balance
April 22 534 $6.58 $3,513.72
May 17 433 $6.70 $2,901.10
June 21 389 $6.76 $2,629.64
August 2 436 $6.44 $2,807.84

6.Meranda Corporation purchases $3,500 of inventory on account from Ashley Corporation. The journal
entry to record this purchase for Meranda under a perpetual inventory system is

7.If current assets decrease and current liabilities increase, the current ratio

8.Net sales times the historical gross profit percentage yields the estimated

9.When a merchandiser sells on account, which of the following is not needed to record the transaction?

10.The major difference in the statement of retained earnings between a service business and a
merchandising business is

11.Committing a fraud because the employee feels that it will be easy to do is indicative of which part of
the fraud triangle?

12.A company’s gross profit percentage decreases from 58% to 51%. What does this mean?

13.Casey Company’s beginning inventory and purchases during the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012,
were as follows: (
Note: The company uses a perpetual system of inventory.)
What is the cost of goods sold for Casey Company for 2012 using LIFO?
Units Unit Price Total Cost
January 1 Beginning Inventory 20 $12 $240
March 8 Sold 14
April 2 Purchase 30 $13 $390
June 5 Sold 25
Aug 6 Purchase 25 $14 $350
Sept 11 Sold 22
Total Cost of Inventory $980
Ending inventory is 14 units.

14.Which of the following may not limit the effectiveness of internal control systems in an organization?

15.ABC Corporation pays an invoice for $350 in time to take a 3% discount. The journal entry to record
the payment of this invoice is

16.In a balance sheet prepared in report form, liabilities must be listed after

17.Under a perpetual inventory system, the account to which transportation charges on incoming
merchandise is generally entered is

18.Which of the following is an incorrect statement if ending inventory is understated?

19.To overstate earnings, a company can

20.Physical inventory counts must be done

exam help 497047

1. Which of the following has the lowest authoritative status but may be useful in assisting the auditor in applying the SASs?
A. Statements on Auditing Standards.
B. Auditing Statements of Position.
C. Journal of Accountancy articles.
D. Auditing Interpretations.

2. The independent auditor’s plan for an examination in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards is influenced by the possibility of material misstatements. The auditor will therefore conduct the examination with an attitude of
A. Professional skepticism.
B. Subjective mistrust.
C. Objective indifference.
D. Professional responsiveness.

The auditor should plan and perform the audit with an attitude of professional skepticism, recognizing that the application of auditing procedures may produce evidential matter indicating the possibility of errors or fraud.

3. Hawkins requested permission to communicate with the predecessor auditor and review certain portions of the predecessor auditor’s working papers. The prospective client’s refusal to permit this will bear directly on Hawkins’ decision concerning the
A. Adequacy of the preplanned audit program.
B. Ability to establish consistency in application of accounting principles between years.
C. Apparent scope limitation.
D. Integrity of management.

Since obtaining evidence relative to the integrity of management is one of the objectives to be accomplished during such a review.

4. When a CPA is approached to perform an audit for the first time, the CPA should make inquiries of the predecessor auditor. This is a necessary procedure because the predecessor may be able to provide the successor with information that will assist the successor in determining
A. Whether the predecessor s work should be utilized.
B. Whether the company follows the policy of rotating its auditors.
C. Whether in the predecessor s opinion internal control of the company has been satisfactory.
D. Whether the engagement should be accepted.

5. Which of the following procedures is least likely to be performed as a part of obtaining an understanding during an audit engagement of a new audit client previously audited by another CPA?
A. Communication with the predecessor auditor.
B. Performing analytical procedures.
C. Obtaining confirmation of cash balances.
D. Considering internal control.

6, Which of the following is not a factor included in the control environment?
A. Board of directors or audit committee participation.
B. Commitment to competence.
C. Monitoring.
D. Organizational structure.

Monitoring is one of the five interrelated components of internal control, not a factor of the control environment. The seven control environment factors are as follows:
(1) Integrity and ethical values,
(2) Commitment to competence,
(3) Human resource policies and practices,
(4) Assignment of authority and responsibility,
(5) Management’s philosophy and operating style,
(6) Board of directors or audit committee participation, and
(7) Organizational structure.

7. If internal control is properly designed, the same employee should not be permitted to
A. Sign checks and cancels supporting documents.
B. Receive merchandise and prepare a receiving report.
C. Prepare disbursement vouchers and sign checks.
D. Initiate a request to order merchandise and approve merchandise received.

Because the preparation of disbursement vouchers and signing of checks places an individual in a position in which s/he can both prepare erroneous vouchers and then pay them

8. In the consideration of internal control, the auditor is basically concerned that internal control provides reasonable assurance that
A. Controls have not been circumvented by collusion.
B. Misstatements have been prevented or detected.
C. Operational efficiency has been achieved in accordance with management plans.
D. Management cannot override controls.

Because the function of internal control, from the viewpoint of the independent auditor, is to provide reasonable assurance that material misstatements may either be prevented or discovered with reasonable promptness, thus assuring the reliability and integrity of the financial records.

9. Which of the following controls would an auditor be least likely to review?
A. Segregation of the asset-handling and recordkeeping functions.
B. Company policy regarding credit and collection efforts.
C. Cost records classified by date of product introduction.
D. Authorization of additions to plant and equipment

Because an auditor is usually not concerned with the date a product was introduced.

10. When tests of controls reveal that controls are not operating as anticipated, it is most likely that the assessed level of the risk of material misstatement will
A. Be less than the planned level.
B. Equal the planned level.
C. Be greater than the planned level.
D. Be less than the actual level.

11. When an auditor increases the risk of material misstatement because certain control procedures were determined to be ineffective, the auditor would most likely increase the
A. Extent of tests of details.
B. Levels of inherent risk.
C. Extent of tests of controls.
D. Level of detection risk.

12. Of the following, which is the least persuasive type of audit evidence?
A. Documents mailed by outsiders to the auditor.
B. Correspondence between auditor and vendors.
C. Copies of sales invoices inspected by the auditor.
D. Computations made by the auditor

Because copies of sales invoices represent internally generated evidence, which is considered less reliable than externally generated evidence received directly by the auditor

13, Failure to detect material dollar misstatements in the financial statements is a risk which the auditor primarily mitigates by
A. Performing substantive procedures.
B. Performing tests of controls.
C. Assessing internal control.
D. Obtaining a client representation letter.

Because substantive tests are used to control the risk of incorrect acceptance of a population which is materially in error. The auditor faces two separate risks. The first risk is that material misstatements may occur in the accounting process, and the second risk is that material misstatements that have occurred will not be detected in the auditor’s examination. The auditor relies on internal control to reduce the first risk and substantive tests to reduce the second risk.

14. An auditor’s decision either to apply analytical procedures as substantive procedures or to perform tests of transactions and account balances usually is determined by the
A. Availability of data aggregated at a high level.
B. Relative effectiveness and efficiency of the tests.
C. Timing of tests performed after the balance sheet date.
D. Auditor s familiarity with industry trends

Because the decision on the appropriate mix of substantive tests is based on the auditor’s judgment on the expected effectiveness and efficiency of the available procedures

15. As one of the year-end audit procedures, the auditor instructed the client’s personnel to prepare a standard bank confirmation request for a bank account that had been closed during the year. After the client’s treasurer had signed the request, it was mailed by the assistant treasurer. What is the major flaw in this audit procedure?
A. The confirmation request was signed by the treasurer.
B. Sending the request was meaningless because the account was closed before the year-end.
C. The request was mailed by the assistant treasurer.
D. The CPA did not sign the confirmation request before it was mailed.

Because allowing the client to mail the confirmation directly violated the requirement that the confirmations remain under the auditor’s control. The auditor is unable to ascertain whether the confirmation reached the proper party.

16. During the process of confirming receivables as of December 31, 2007, a positive confirmation was returned indicating the “balance owed as of December 31 was paid on January 9, 2008.” The auditor would most likely
A. Determine whether there were any changes in the account between January 1 and January 9, 2008.
B. Determine whether a customary trade discount was taken by the customer.
C. Reconfirm the zero balance as of January 10, 2008.
D. Verify that the amount was received.

17. Although the quantity and content of audit working papers vary with each particular engagement, an auditor’s permanent files most likely include
A. Schedules that support the current year s adjusting entries.
B. Prior years accounts receivable confirmations that were classified as exceptions.
C. Documentation indicating that the audit work was adequately planned and supervised.
D. Analyses of capital stock and other owners equity accounts.

Because permanent files include information affecting more than 1 year, such as analyses of capital stock and other owners’ equity accounts. While these accounts include few transactions annually, they have substantial balances which carry over to each following year.

18. Which of the following is not a typical analytical procedure?
A. Study of relationships of the financial information with relevant nonfinancial information.
B. Comparison of the financial information with similar information regarding the industry in which the entity operates.
C. Comparison of recorded amounts of major disbursements with appropriate invoices.
D. Comparison of the financial information with budgeted amounts.

Because it is an example of a test of details of transactions and balances rather than an analytical procedure Analytical procedures are used to gather evidence with respect to relationships among various accounting and non accounting data

19. An auditor traced a sample of purchase orders and the related receiving reports to the purchases journal and the cash disbursements journal. The purpose of this substantive audit procedure most likely was to
A Verify that cash disbursements were for goods actually received.
B Test whether payments were for goods actually ordered.
C Determine that purchases were properly recorded.
D Identify unusually large purchases that should be investigated further

20. An auditor testing long-term investments would ordinarily use analytical procedures to ascertain the reasonableness of the
A. Existence of unrealized gains or losses.
B. Completeness of recorded investment income.
C. Valuation of trading securities.
D. Classification as available-for-sale or trading securities

21. In determining the adequacy of the allowance for uncollectible accounts, the least reliance should be placed upon which of the following?
A. The credit manager s opinion.
B. An aging schedule of past due accounts.
C. Collection experience of the client s collection agency.
D. Ratios calculated showing the past relationship of the valuation allowance to net credit sales.

22. Immediately upon receipt of cash, a responsible employee should
A. Record the amount in the cash receipts journal.
B. Prepare a remittance listing.
C. Update the subsidiary accounts receivable records.
D. Prepare a deposit slip in triplicate

23. Auditors should request that an audit client send a letter of inquiry to those attorneys who have been consulted concerning litigation, claims, or assessments. The primary reason for this request is to provide
A. Corroborative evidential matter.
B. An expert opinion as to whether a loss is possible, probable, or remote.
C. An estimate of the dollar amount of the probable loss.
D. Information concerning the progress of cases to date

24. When auditing related party transactions, an auditor places primary emphasis on
A. Ascertaining the rights and obligations of the related parties.
B. Evaluating the disclosure of the related party transactions.
C. Verifying the valuation of the related party transactions.
D. Confirming the existence of the related parties

25. Which of the following circumstances most likely will cause an auditor to consider whether material misstatements due to fraud exist in an entity s financial statements?
A. Reportable conditions previously communicated to management are not corrected.
B. Management places little emphasis on meeting earnings projections of external parties.
C. Transactions selected for testing are not supported by proper documentation.
D. The board of directors oversees the financial reporting process and internal control

26. The existence of a related party transaction may be indicated when another entity
A. Borrows from the corporation at a rate of interest equal to the current market rate.
B. Absorbs expenses of the corporation.
C. Lends to the corporation at a rate of interest equal to the current market rate.
D. Sells real estate to the corporation at a price that is comparable to its appraised value.

27. Which of the following statements concerning the auditor s use of the work of a specialist is true?
A. If the auditor believes that the determinations made by the specialist are unreasonable, only a qualified opinion may be expressed.
B. If the specialist is related to the client, the auditor is still permitted to use the specialist s findings as corroborative evidence.
C. The specialist may be identified in the auditor s report only when the auditor expresses an unqualified opinion.
D. The specialist need not have an understanding of the auditor s corroborative use of the specialist s findings

28. Which of the following is a false statement about materiality?
A. An auditor s consideration of materiality is influenced by the auditor s perception of the needs of a reasonable person who will rely on the financial statements.
B. The concept of materiality recognizes that some matters are important for fair presentation of financial statements in conformity with GAAP, while other matters are not important.
C. Materiality judgments are made in light of surrounding circumstances and necessarily involve both quantitative and qualitative judgments.
D. An auditor considers materiality for planning purposes in terms of the largest aggregate level of misstatements that could be material to any one of the financial statements.

29. Analytical procedures are
A. Never required.
B. Required for planning, substantive testing, and overall review of the financial statements.
C. Required for planning and overall review of the financial statements.
D. Required during planning only.

30. Which of the following situations would most likely require special audit planning?
A. Some items of factory and office equipment do not bear identification numbers.
B. Depreciation methods used on the client s tax return differ from those used on the books.
C. Assets costing less than $500 are expensed even though the expected life exceeds one year.
D. Inventory is comprised of precious stones.

31. The objectives of internal control for a production cycle are to provide assurance that transactions are properly executed and recorded, and that
A. Custody of work-in-process and of finished goods is properly maintained.
B. Production orders are prenumbered and signed by a supervisor.
C. Independent internal verification of activity reports is established.
D. Transfers to finished goods are documented by a completed production report and a quality control report

32. The authority to accept incoming goods in receiving should be based on a(n)
A. Bill of lading.
B. Approved purchase order.
C. Vendor s invoice.
D. Materials requisition

33. Which of the following questions would an auditor most likely include on an internal control questionnaire for notes payable?
A. Are assets that collateralize notes payable critically needed for the entity s continued existence?
B. Are two or more authorized signatures required on checks that repay notes payable?
C. Are the proceeds from notes payable used for the purchase of noncurrent assets?
D. Are direct borrowings on notes payable authorized by the board of directors?

exam number 061684 the impact of management 497049

1. The work-in-process inventory account of a manufacturing company shows a balance of $3,000 at the end of an accounting period. The job-cost sheets of the two incomplete jobs show charges of $500 and $300 for direct materials, and charges of $400 and $600 for direct labor. From this information, it appears that the company is using a predetermined overhead rate as a percentage of direct labor costs. What percentage is the rate?

2. The break-even point in dollar sales for Rice Company is $480,000 and the company s contribution margin ratio is 40 percent. If Rice Company desires a profit of $84,000, how much would sales have to total?

3. Williams Company s direct labor cost is 25 percent of its conversion cost. If the manufacturing overhead for the last period was $45,000 and the direct material cost was $25,000, how much is the direct labor cost?

4. Grading Company s cash and cash equivalents consist of cash and marketable securities. Last year the company s cash account decreased by $16,000 and its marketable securities account increased by $22,000. Cash provided by operating activities was $24,000. Net cash used for financing activities was $20,000. Based on this information, was the net cash flow from investing activities on the statement of cash flows a net increase or decrease? By how much?

5. Gladstone Footwear Corporation s flexible budget cost formula for supplies, a variable cost, is $2.82 per unit of output. The company s flexible budget performance report for last month showed an $8,140 unfavorable spending variance for supplies. During that month, 21,250 units were produced. Budgeted activity for the month had been 20,900 units. What is the actual cost per unit for indirect materials?

6. Lyons Company consists of two divisions, A and B. Lyons Company reported a contribution margin of $60,000 for Division A, and had a contribution margin ratio of 30 percent in Division B, when sales in Division B were $240,000. Net operating income for the company was $22,000 and traceable fixed expenses were $45,000. How much were Lyons Company s common fixed expenses?

7. Atlantic Company produces a single product. For the most recent year, the company s net operating income computed by the absorption costing method was $7,800, and its net operating income computed by the variable costing method was $10,500. The company s unit product cost was $15 under variable costing and $24 under absorption costing. If the ending inventory consisted of 1,460 units, how many units must have been in the beginning inventory.

8. Black Company uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. The company s ending work-inprocess inventory consists of 6,000 units, 75 percent complete with respect to materials and 50 percent complete with respect to labor and overhead. If the total dollar value of the inventory is $80,000 and the cost per equivalent unit for labor and overhead is $6.00, what is the cost per equivalent unit for materials?

9. At Overland Company, maintenance cost is exclusively a variable cost that varies directly with machine-hours. The performance report for July showed that actual maintenance costs totaled $11,315 and that the associated rate variance was $146 unfavorable. If 7,300 machine-hours were actually worked during July, what is the budgeted maintenance cost per machine-hour?

10. The cost of goods sold in a retail store totaled $650,000. Fixed selling and administrative expenses totaled $115,000 and variable selling and administrative expenses were $420,000. If the store s contribution margin totaled $590,000, how much were the sales?

11. Denny Corporation is considering replacing a technologically obsolete machine with a new state-of-the-art numerically controlled machine. The new machine would cost $600,000 and would have a 10-year useful life. Unfortunately, the new machine would have no salvage value. The new machine would cost $20,000 per year to operate and maintain, but would save $125,000 per year in labor and other costs. The old machine can be sold now for scrap for $50,000. What percentage is the simple rate of return on the new machine rounded to the nearest tenth of a percent? (Ignore income taxes in this problem.)

12. Lounsberry Inc. regularly uses material O55P and currently has in stock 375 liters of the material, for which it paid $2,700 several weeks ago. If this were to be sold as is on the open market as surplus material, it would fetch $6.35 per liter. New stocks of the material can be purchased on the open market for $7.20 per liter, but it must be purchased in lots of 1,000 liters. You ve been asked to determine the relevant cost of 900 liters of the material to be used in a job for a customer. What is the relevant cost of the 900 liters of material O55P?

13. Harwichport Company has a current ratio of 3.0 and an acid-test ratio of 2.8. Current assets equal $210,000, of which $5,000 consists of prepaid expenses. The remainder of current assets consists of cash, accounts receivable, marketable securities, and inventory. What is the amount of Harwichport Company s inventory?

14. Tolla Company is estimating the following sales for the first six months of next year:

January $350,000

February $300,000

March $320,000

April $410,000

May $450,000

June $470,000

Sales at Tolla are normally collected as 70 percent in the month of sale, 25 percent in the month following the sale, and the remaining 5 percent being uncollectible. Also, customers paying in the month of sale are given a 2 percent discount. Based on this information, how much cash should Tolla expect to collect during the month of April?

15. Trauscht Corporation has provided the following data from its activity-based costing system:

Activity Cost Pool Total Cost Total Activity

Assembly $704,880 44,000 machine-hours

Processing orders $91,428 1,900 orders

Inspection $117,546 1,950 inspection-hours

The company makes 360 units of product P23F a year, requiring a total of 725 machine-hours, 85 orders, and 45 inspection-hours per year. The product s direct materials cost is $42.30 per unit and its direct labor cost is $14.55 per unit. The product sells for $132.10 per unit. According to the activity-based costing system, what is the product margin for product P23F?

16. Williams Company s direct labor cost is 30 percent of its conversion cost. If the manufacturing overhead for the last period was $59,500 and the direct materials cost was $37,000, what is the direct labor cost?

17. In a recent period, 13,000 units were produced, and there was a favorable labor efficiency variance of $23,000. If 40,000 labor-hours were worked and the standard wage rate was $13 per labor-hour, what would be the standard hours allowed per unit of output?

18. The balance in White Company s work-in-process inventory account was $15,000 on August 1 and $18,000 on August 31. The company incurred $30,000 in direct labor cost during August and requisitioned $25,000 in raw materials (all direct material). If the sum of the debits to the manufacturing overhead account total $28,000 for the month, and if the sum of the credits totaled $30,000, then was Finished Goods debited or credited? By how much?

19. A company has provided the following data:

Sales 4,000 units

Sales price $80 per unit

Variable cost $50 per unit

Fixed cost $30,000

If the dollar contribution margin per unit is increased by 10 percent, total fixed cost is decreased by 15 percent, and all other factors remain the same, will net operating income increase or decrease? By how much?

20. For the current year, Paxman Company incurred $175,000 in actual manufacturing overhead cost. The manufacturing overhead account showed that overhead was overapplied in the amount of $9,000 for the year. If the predetermined overhead rate was $8.00 per direct labor-hour, how many hours were worked during the year?

examine the requirements for measuring assets at fair value in the following account 497050

1500 words

Examine the requirements for measuring assets at fair value in the following accounting standards:

IAS3/AASB 3Business CombinationsIAS116/AASB116Property, plant and equipmentIAS138/AASB138Intangible assets

  1. How can fair value be determined in each of the standards?

  2. What impact would the differences in the methods allowed to determine fair value

    have on the financial reports?

  3. Do you think the requirements for an active market in relation to intangibles assets is

    justified? What problems could occur if the active market requirement was not included for intangible assets?

    Assessment criteria

    2000 words max.

    Excellent (HD)

    Very Good (D)

    Good (C)

    Satisfactory (P)

    Unsatisfactory (F)

    1. Introduction (10)

    2. Body/Discussion (40)Criticalevaluation of topic

    3. Recommendation/s (10) Conclusion (5)

    4. Examples (10)

    6. Referencing, citations (5)

    7. Evidence of reading, quality and quantity (10)

    8. English expression, coherence, grammar and spelling. Logical flow of ideas (10)

ebit eps 496954

solve the problem below: (There are 5 questions, each is worth 3 points. Total points will be added to your final comprehensive score.) Data-Check is considering two capital structures. The key information is shown in the following table. Assume 40% tax rate. Source of capital Structure A Structure B Long-term debt $100,000 at 16% coupon rate $200,000 at 17% coupon rate Common Stock 4,000 shares 2,000 shares a. Calculate two EBIT-EPS coordinates for each of the structures by using $50,000 and $60,000 EBIT and finding their associated EPS values. Calculate the Financial Break Even point for each of the structures. b. Plot the two capital structures on a set of EBIT-EPS axes. c. Indicate over what EBIT range, if any, each structure is preferred. d. Discuss the leverage and risk aspects of each structure. e. If the firm is fairly certain that its EBIT will exceed $75,000, which structure would you recommend? Why?

eco 212 entire class 496956

Preview
1.ECO 212 Entire Class/
2.ECO 212 Entire Class/.DS_Store
3.__MACOSX/
4.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/
5.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/._.DS_Store
6.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 2/
7.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 2/.DS_Store
8.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 2/
9.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 2/._.DS_Store
10.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 2/ECO 212 Week 2 DQ 1.doc
11.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 2/._ECO 212 Week 2 DQ 1.doc
12.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 2/ECO 212 Week 2 DQ 2.doc
13.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 2/._ECO 212 Week 2 DQ 2.doc
14.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 2/ECO 212 Week 2 Supply and Demand and Price Elasticity Quiz.doc
15.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 2/._ECO 212 Week 2 Supply and Demand and Price Elasticity Quiz.doc
16.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 2/ECO 212 Week 2 LTA Supply and Demand and Price and Elasticity Paper.doc
17.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 2/._ECO 212 Week 2 LTA Supply and Demand and Price and Elasticity Paper.doc
18.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/._ECO 212 W 2
19.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 3/
20.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 3/ECO 212 Week 3 DQ 1.doc
21.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 3/
22.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 3/._ECO 212 Week 3 DQ 1.doc
23.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 3/ECO 212 Week 3 DQ 2.doc
24.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 3/._ECO 212 Week 3 DQ 2.doc
25.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 3/ECO 212 Week 3 LTA Market Sturcture Table.doc
26.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 3/._ECO 212 Week 3 LTA Market Sturcture Table.doc
27.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 3/ECO 212 Week 3 LTA Differentiating Between Market Structures Paper.doc
28.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 3/._ECO 212 Week 3 LTA Differentiating Between Market Structures Paper.doc
29.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/._ECO 212 W 3
30.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 4/
31.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 4/ECO 212 Week 4 DQ 1.doc
32.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 4/
33.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 4/._ECO 212 Week 4 DQ 1.doc
34.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 4/ECO 212 Week 4 DQ 2.doc
35.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 4/._ECO 212 Week 4 DQ 2.doc
36.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 4/ECO 212 Week 4 IA Measuring Economic Health Memo.doc
37.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 4/._ECO 212 Week 4 IA Measuring Economic Health Memo.doc
38.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/._ECO 212 W 4
39.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 5/
40.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 5/ECO 212 Week 5 DQ 1.doc
41.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 5/
42.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 5/._ECO 212 Week 5 DQ 1.doc
43.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 5/ECO 212 Week 5 Final Examination.doc
44.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 5/._ECO 212 Week 5 Final Examination.doc
45.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 5/ECO 212 Week 5 DQ 2.doc
46.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 5/._ECO 212 Week 5 DQ 2.doc
47.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 5/ECO 212 Week 5 LTA International Trade Simulation and Report.doc
48.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 5/._ECO 212 Week 5 LTA International Trade Simulation and Report.doc
49.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 5/ECO 212 Week 5 IA Federal Reserve Paper.doc
50.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 5/._ECO 212 Week 5 IA Federal Reserve Paper.doc
51.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/._ECO 212 W 5
52.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 1/
53.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 1/.DS_Store
54.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 1/
55.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 1/._.DS_Store
56.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 1/ECO 212 Week 1 DQ 1.doc
57.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 1/._ECO 212 Week 1 DQ 1.doc
58.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 1/ECO 212 Week 1 DQ 2.doc
59.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 1/._ECO 212 Week 1 DQ 2.doc
60.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 1/ECO 212 Learning Team Charter.doc
61.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 1/._ECO 212 Learning Team Charter.doc
62.ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 1/ECO 212 Week 1 IA How People Make Economic Decisions Paper.doc
63.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/ECO 212 W 1/._ECO 212 Week 1 IA How People Make Economic Decisions Paper.doc
64.__MACOSX/ECO 212 Entire Class/._ECO 212 W 1
65.__MACOSX/._ECO 212 Entire Class

eco 365 final 496957

1) An economist who is studying the relationship between the money supply, interest rates, and the rate of inflation is engaged in

A. microeconomic research
B. macroeconomic research
C. theoretical research, because there is no data on these variables
D. empirical research, because there is no economic theory related to these variables

2) A basic difference between microeconomics and macroeconomics is that microeconomics
A. focuses on the choices of individual consumers, while macroeconomics considers the behavior of large businesses
B. focuses on financial reporting by individuals, while macroeconomics focuses on financial reporting by large firms
C. examines the choices made by individual participants in an economy, while macroeconomics considers the economy’s overall performance
D. focuses on national markets, while macroeconomics concentrates on international markets

3) The distinction between supply and the quantity supplied is best made by saying that
A. the quantity supplied is represented graphically by a curve and supply as a point on that curve associated with a particular price
B. supply is represented graphically by a curve and the quantity supplied as a point on that curve associated with a particular price
C. the quantity supplied is in direct relation with prices, whereas supply is in inverse relation
D. the quantity supplied is in inverse relation with prices, whereas supply is in direct relation

4) After several years of slow economic growth, world demand for petroleum began to rise rapidly in the 1990s. Much of the increase in demand was met by additional supplies from sources outside the Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC). OPEC, during this time, was unable to restrain output among members in its effort to lift oil prices. What best describes these events?
A. The rise in demand shifted the demand for oil to the right. OPEC actions shifted the demand for oil back to the left.
B. The rise in demand shifted the demand for oil to the right. As price rose, the supply of oil also rose.
C. The rise in demand shifted the demand for oil to the right. As price rose, the quantity of oil supplied rose.
D. The rise in demand reflects a movement down along the demand curve as supply shifted to the right when suppliers produced more oil.

5) Price elasticity of demand is the:
A. change in the quantity of a good demanded divided by the change in the price of that good
B. change in the price of a good divided by the change in the quantity of that good demanded
C. percentage change in price of that good divided by the percentage change in the quantity of that good demanded
D. percentage change in quantity demanded of a good divided by the percentage change in the price of that good

6) If average movie ticket prices rise by about 5 percent and attendance falls by about 2 percent, other things being equal, the elasticity of demand for movie tickets is about:
A. 0.0
B. 0.4
C. 0.6
D. 2.5

7) When labor is the variable input, the average product equals the
A. marginal product divided by the number of workers
B. marginal product multiplied by the number of workers
C. number of workers divided by the quantity of output
D. quantity of output divided by the number of workers

8) The increase in output obtained by hiring an additional worker is known as
A. the average product
B. the marginal product
C. the total product
D. value added

9) Which of the following is the best example of a long-run decision?
A).An automobile manufacturing company is considering whether or not to invest in robotic equipment to develop a more cost-effective production technique.
B).An automobile manufacturing company is considering whether or not to expand its existing workforce, while keeping the same factory and equipment.
C).A business consulting firm is considering whether or not to hire interns to assist with research and data processing.
D).A business consulting firm is considering whether or not to add new computers while maintaining the same number of employees.

10) Other things being equal, when average productivity falls,
A. average fixed cost must rise
B. marginal cost must rise
C. average total cost must rise
D. average variable cost must rise

11) According to economist Colin Camerer of the California Institute of Technology, many New York taxi drivers decide when to finish work by setting an income goal for themselves. If this is true, then on busy days when the effective hourly wage is higher, taxi drivers will
A. work the same number of hours as they will on slower days
B. work fewer hours than they will on slower days
C. work more hours than they will on slower days
D. not work any hours
12) A firm’s demand for labor is derived from the
A. opportunity costs associated with labor and leisure
B. desires and needs of the entrepreneur
C. cost of labor inputs
D. demand for its output

13) Owen runs a delivery business and currently employs three drivers. He owns three vans that employees use to make deliveries, but he is considering hiring a fourth driver. If he hires a fourth driver, he can schedule breaks and lunch hours so all three vans are in constant use, allowing him to increase deliveries per day from 60 to 75. This will cost an additional $75 per day to hire the fourth driver. The marginal cost per delivery of increasing output beyond 60 deliveries per day.
A. is $0 because Owen does not have to purchase another van
B. is $5
C. is $75
D. cannot be calculated without knowing Owen’s total fixed costs
14) Expected economic profit per unit is equal to
A. expected price
B. expected average total cost
C. the difference between expected average price and expected average total cost
D. the difference between expected total revenue and expected total cost
15) If a firm in a perfectly competitive market experiences a technological breakthrough,
A. other firms would find out about it eventually
B. other firms would find out about it immediately
C. other firms would not find out about it
D. some firms would find out about it, but others would not
16) A significant difference between monopoly and perfect competition is that
A. free entry and exit is possible in a monopolized industry, but impossible in a competitive industry
B. competitive firms control market supply, but monopolies do not
C. the monopolist’s demand curve is the industry demand curve, while the competitive firm’s demand curve is perfectly elastic
D. profits are driven to zero in a monopolized industry, but may be positive in a competitive industry.
17) A monopoly firm is different from a competitive firm in that
A. there are many substitutes for a monopolist’s product while there are no substitutes for a competitive firm’s product
B. a monopolist’s demand curve is perfectly inelastic while a competitive firm’s demand curve is perfectly elastic
C. a monopolist can influence market price while a competitive firm cannot
D. a competitive firm has a U-shaped average cost curve while a monopolist does not
18) The difference between a perfectly competitive firm and a monopolistically competitive firm is that a monopolistically competitive firm faces a
A. horizontal demand curve and price equals marginal cost in equilibrium
B. horizontal demand curve and price exceeds marginal cost in equilibrium
C. downward-sloping demand curve and price equals marginal cost in equilibrium
D. downward-sloping demand curve and price exceeds marginal cost in equilibrium
19) As long as marginal cost is below marginal revenue, a perfectly competitive firm should
A. increase production
B. hold production constant
C. decrease production
D. reconsider past production decisions
20) Because a monopolistic competitor has some monopoly power, advertising to increase that monopoly power makes sense as long as the marginal
A. benefit of advertising is positive
B. cost of advertising is positive
C. benefit of advertising exceeds the marginal cost of advertising
D. cost of advertising exceeds the marginal benefit of advertising
21) In the Flint Hills area of Kansas, proposals to build wind turbines to generate electricity have pitted environmentalist against environmentalist. Members of the Kansas Sierra Club support the turbines as a way to reduce fossil fuel usage, while local chapters of the Nature Conservancy say they will befoul the landscape. The Sierra Club argues that wind turbines
A. are a source of negative externalities
B. reduce negative externalities elsewhere in the economy
C. create a free-rider problem
D. are a way of solving a free-rider problem
22) When negative externalities are present, market failure often occurs because
A. the marginal external cost resulting from the activity is not reflected in the market price
B. the marginal external cost resulting from the activity is reflected in the market price
C. the existence of imports from foreign countries takes jobs and income away from U.S. citizens
D. consumers will consume the good at a level where their individual marginal benefits exceed the marginal costs borne by the firm producing the good
23) A merger between a textile mill and a clothing manufacturing company would be considered a
A. horizontal merger
B. vertical merger
C. conglomerate merger
D. diagonal merger
24) A merger between a baby food company and a life insurance company would be considered a
A. horizontal merger
B. vertical merger
C. conglomerate merger
D. diagonal merger
25) From the point of view of consumer and producer surplus, what problem may be created when a country subsidizes the cost of energy to consumers to help alleviate the burden of higher energy costs?
A. It hurts the poor and benefits the rich.
B. It leads to less fuel being used than the amount that maximizes consumer surplus.
C. It encourages the consumption of too much fuel at the expense of other goods.
D. It has no effect; consumers gain a surplus, but taxpayers lose the same amount because they must finance the subsidy.
26) Suppose people freely choose to spend 40 percent of their income on health care, but the government decides to tax 40 percent of a person’s income to provide the same level of coverage as before. What can be said about deadweight loss in each case
A. Taxing income results in deadweight loss, while purchasing health care on one’s own does not result in deadweight loss.
B. Taxing income results in less deadweight loss, because government knows better what health care coverage is good for society.
C. There is no difference because the goods are purchased in the market in either case.
D. There is no difference because the total spending remains the same and the health care purchased remains the same.
27) The U.S. textile industry is relatively small because the US imports most of its clothing. A clear result of the importation of clothing is
A. there is less variety available than there would be without imports
B. the quality of clothing is lower than it would be without imports
C. the price of clothing is higher than it would be without imports
D. the price of clothing is lower than it would be without imports
28) Countries can expect to gain from international trade as long as they
A. keep production diversified
B. specialize according to their comparative advantage
C. produce only those goods for which they have a relatively high opportunity cost
D. use trade restrictions to reduce competition for domestic producers
29) Which of the following is an example of the law of one price
A. Exchange rates tend to have equivalent values. For example, one Italian lire equals one U.S. dollar.
B. Because people have essentially the same basic needs wherever they live, they tend to buy the same bundle of goods.
C. Because wages are so much lower in China, eventually all U.S. jobs will be outsourced to China, leaving the US to import all goods at one price.
D. Because their countries have similar institutions, the price paid for a computer in Germany and the United States are about the same when converted into the same currency.
30) The fact those U.S. managers’ salaries are substantially greater than those of comparable managers in Japan may be related to

A. an increase in the demand for CEOs

B. an increase in the supplyof CEOs

C. the comparatively greater competitive markets in Japan

D. the greater number of public goods provided in the United States

eco 545 week 3 solved all 10 questions 496959

1.(TCO A) There is a decrease in the cost of labor for producing bicycles.
(4 pts.) What happens to bicycle supply?
(6 pts.) What happens to bicycle demand? (Points : 10)

2.(TCO A) Ceteris paribus, Diet Cola Brand X and Diet Cola Brand Y are substitutes in consumption. The price of Diet Cola Brand Y falls.
(4 pts.) a. What happens to the demand for Diet Cola Brand X?
(6 pts.) b. What happens to the demand for Diet Cola Brand Y? (Points : 10)

3.(TCO A) The number of new home sellers in a given market decreases.
(4 pts.) What happens to the supply of new homes?
(6 pts.) What happens to the demand for new homes? (Points : 10)

4. (TCO A) A market is in equilibrium with equilibrium Quantity of MEQ and equilibrium Price of MEP.

(2 pts.) a. What happens to market equilibrium Price (MEP) if there is an increase in Demand?

(4 pts.) b. What happens to market equilibrium Quantity (MEQ) if Supply decreases as Demand increase?

(4 pts.) c. What happens to market equilibrium Price if there is an increase in Supply followed by a decrease in Demand which if followed by another increase in Supply?

(Points : 10)

5.The following table shows part of the demand function for tickets to an outdoor summer concert by a popular singing group:

Price (P)…Quantity (Q)
50……….. 100
35………. 180
20…………300
10…………500

a. (2 pts.) What is demand elasticity in the $10 – $20 price range? Is demand elastic, inelastic, or of unitary elasticity Calculate the value and show all of your work. Be sure to use the midpoint equation used to determine elasticity.

b. (4 pts.) Assume demand elasticity is 1.3 in the $35 – $50 price range. In this range of demand, by what percentage would quantity demanded change if price increases by 9 percent? Show your detailed calculations.

c. (4 pts.)What is the effect of a price decline from $35 to $20 on total revenue for the event Does total revenue (TR) increase, decrease, or remain the same By how much Show your detailed calculations.

(Points : 10)

6.(TCO B) For a given labor supply, would the potential unemployment impact of an increase in the minimum wage be greater in the case of elastic or inelastic demand for labor? Explain why, using hypothetical numbers to illustrate your case. (Points : 10)

7.TCO C) You have been hired to manage a small manufacturing facility whose cost and production data are given in the table below.

No. of workers Total Labor Cost Output Total Revenue
1 $145 100 $190
2 290 105 380
3 435 111 840
4 580 120 1320
5 725 125 1650
6 870 129 1780
7 1015 131 1800
(2 points) What is the marginal product of the fourth worker?
(2 points) What is the marginal revenue product of the fifth worker?
(2 points) What is the marginal cost of the second worker?
(4 points) Based on your knowledge of marginal analysis, how many workers should you hire? Explain you answer. (Points : 10)

8.(TCO C) Answer the next question on the basis of the following cost data for a purely competitive seller:
Total Product TFC TVC
0 $70 $0
1 70 70
2 70 120
3 70 150
4 70 220
5 70 300
6 70 390
Refer to the above data. If the product price is $75 at its optimal output, exactly how many units should be produced to maximize profits or minimize losses? How much will the profit or loss be Show all calculations. (Points : 10)

9.(TCO C) Answer the next question on the basis of the following cost data for a purely competitive seller:

TP TFC TVC
0 $45 $0
1 45 170
2 45 320
3 45 450
4 45 620
5 45 800
6 45 990
Refer to the above data. If the product price is $165 at its optimal output, exactly how many units should be produced to maximize profits or minimize losses? How much will the profit or loss be Show all calculations. (Points : 10)

10.(TCO C) A firm has Total Costs (TC) of $10,000 over the next three months (TOTAL for the 3 months – not per month), of which $6,000 are fixed costs (TFC) for rent on its lease that cannot be broken. If it stays in business over those months, then the firm will collect only $5,000 in revenues (TR). So, considering only this information, should they stay in business for those three months or should they close down right now? Provide your reasoning. (Points

eco203 principles of macroeconomics ashford dq 496960

  1. Economics Systems

    Discuss how your college education could be considered an investment in human capital. What is the opportunity cost of your degree?

    Reference: Chapter 1, section 1.1: Economics and Chapter 2, section 2.1: Limited Resources.

    Guided Response: Review and respond to at least two of your classmates posts by replying to their posts on how a college education contributes to human capital and the opportunity cost of a degree. Be sure to refer to concepts found in the reading when responding to your classmates.

  2. Role of Government

    Economics is the study of how society chooses to allocate its scarce productive resources (labor, capital, land, entrepreneurial talent).

    In a mixed economy, elements of both central planning and market allocation of resources are used in allocating productive resources. The United States economy is a mixed economy, with a bias towards market allocation of resources. This means most resources are allocated in the private sector by way of markets.

    Discuss whether you favor a larger or smaller role of government in the economy. Refer to concepts found in the reading to support your opinion.

    Reference: Chapter 2: Markets, Governments, and Nations: The Organization of Economic Activity

    Instructor Westover

    This is just a reminder that the initial response to the DQs must be at least 200 words and formally “cite” (APA) our textbook readings to support your initial response. At least two of your comments to other students must be “substantive” (as defined by the rubric) in order to eligible for the maximum score. A substantive comment is at least 100 words. If ever there are any questions regarding the expectations for any of the activities or assignments, please feel free to give me a call.

economics mid 496961

Answer the questions as completely as possible. Draw diagrams and give examples whenever and wherever, you think, they help make your point. Show all your work to receive full credit for correct answers, and partial credit for incorrect answers.

1. Majuli, the island country produces only lobsters and crabs. The following table gives the prices and quantities in 2009, 2010 and 2011. GOODS 2009 2010 2011 Price Quantity Price Quantity Price Quantity Lobster 20 1000 25 1100 30 1100 Crab 10 500 12 525 15 525

a) Calculate Majuli s Nominal GDP in 2009, 2010, and 2011. b) Calculate real GDP and GDP Deflator in 2009, 2010, and 2011, taking 2009 as the base year. c) What can you say about the growth of quantity and prices in 2010 and 2011 from your calculations of real GDP and GDP deflator? Calculate the growth rates to answer this question.

2. a) Consider the following price indexes: 90 in 2009, 100 in 2010, 110 in 2011, and 121 in 2012. Answer the following questions. i) What is the base year? ii) What is the inflation rate from 2009 to 2010? iii) What is the inflation rate from 2011 to 2012? iv) If the cost of the consumption basket in 2010 is $2,000, what is the cost of the same basket of goods and services in 2009? In 2012? b) Currently, the CPI used to calculate the inflation rate is equal to 90. The general expectation throughout the economy is that next year the value of CPI will be 94.5. The current nominal interest rate is 4.75 percent. What is the real interest rate?

3. Suppose that there are 10 million workers in Canada and that each of these workers can produce either 2 cars or 30 bushels of wheat in a year. a) What is the opportunity cost of producing a car in Canada? What is the opportunity cost of producing a bushel of wheat in Canada? Explain the relationship between the opportunity costs of the two goods. b) Draw Canada s production possibilities frontier. If Canada chooses to consume 10 million cars, how much wheat can it consume without trade? Label this point on the production possibilities frontier. c) Now suppose that the United States offers to buy 10 million cars from Canada in exchange for 20 bushels of wheat per car. If Canada continues to consume 10 million cars, how much wheat does this deal allow Canada to consume? Label this point on your diagram. Should Canada accept the deal?

economics statistics math 496962


www.padowan.dk/graph DB3

Scenario:For your next project, your boss asks you to research an application of linear equations in a business setting and present your findings to the team. Do research using the Internet to find more information on 1 of the following topics:

  • Market Equilibrium
  • Break-even analysis
  • Inflation

Part I: Primary Task Response

In 3 paragraphs, report your findings to your classmates by discussing the following:

  • Provide a general overview of the topic. There is no need to go deep into the math; simply explain what the topic means in lay terms.
  • Identify at least 2 ways the topic can be applied in business settings. Explain.
  • Conclude your discussion by summarizing your key learning from researching the topic.

IP3. In this equation, constant charges may be rent, salaries, or other fixed costs. This includes anything that you have to pay for periodically as a business owner. This value is negative because this cost must be paid each period and must be paid whether you make a sale or not.

Your company may wish to release a new e-reader device. Based on data collected from various sources, your company has come up with the following regression equation for the profit of the new e-reader:

Profit = $0.15 number of e-readers sold $28

Or, assuming x = the number of e-readers sold, this would be the same regression equation:

Profit = 0.15x 28

In this case, the values are given in thousands (i.e., the cost of making an individual e-reader will be $150 [0.15 1,000], with $28,000 [28 * 1,000] in constant charges).

Answer the following questions based on the given regression equation:

  1. Using the graphing program that you downloaded, graph the profit equation. Discuss the meaning of the x- and y-axis values on the graph. (Hint: Be sure to label the axis)
  2. Discuss the meaning of the slope of the equation that you have just graphed. How is it related to the cost of each e-reader?
  3. Based on the results of the graph and the profit equation provided, discuss the relationship between profits and number of e-readers produced. (Hint: Consider the slope and y-intercept.)
  4. If the company does not sell a single e-reader, how much is lost ? Mathematically, what is this value called in the equation?
  5. If the company sells 5,000 e-readers, how much will the company make (or lose)?
  6. If profit must equal 100 thousand, how many e-readers will your company need to sell? (Round up to the nearest e-reader.)
  7. If your company is hoping to break even, how many e-readers will need to be sold to accomplish this? (Round up to the nearest e-reader.)Please submit your assignment

DB4
Part I: Most of the systems that we have discussed this week have been
independent and consistentsystems. This means that the pair of lines intersects at one point so the system of equations has one solution. Do some research and discuss what is meant by a system that is EITHER
inconsistentor
dependent. Be sure to include in your response what each of these terms means in regards to graphs of the lines in addition to the behavior of the equations when you solve the system algebraically. Be sure to include the source that you used and to give an example of the system that you are describing. IP4 Previously, when equations and inequalities were covered, you found many uses of various equations and inequalities and how they can be applied in real-world settings. In 2 paragraphs, discuss the following:

a. How can equations and inequalities help a business maximize profit or minimize costs?

b. What is the importance of understanding how to set up and solve equations and inequalities (discuss in general without a mathematical example)?

This part of the assignment will contribute 20 points of the grade for this IP.

Part III

Break-Even Analysis: A Look at Profit and Loss:As an entrepreneur, there are going to be many decisions that you need to make, such as the price to charge your customers for your goods and services. You have just graduated from college and recently opened a specialty pizza restaurant. Based on surveys conducted in your area, you determine that it is feasible to sell your specialty pizzas for $15. The cost for making the pizzas includes a fixed cost of $55 and a labor cost of $4 per pizza.

a. Establish an equation to determine revenue.
b. Establish an equation to determine total cost.
c. How many pizzas must be sold to break even (i.e., you experience neither a profit nor a loss)? Interpret your result.

As a business owner, it is very important to have an understanding of profit and loss. The formula for determining profit is Profit = revenue cost (P = R C).

d. Determine the profit if 500 specialty pizzas are sold. Interpret your result.
e. How many specialty pizzas would need to be sold to make a profit of $1,100? Interpret your result.
f. How many specialty pizzas would you need to sell if you wanted to make a profit greater than $1,595? Interpret your result.

This part of the assignment will contribute 50 points of the grade for this IP.

Mathematics of Finance

Part IV: As an entrepreneur, there may be times when you must borrow money to fund the start of your business. You have just graduated from college, and your dream is to start your own business. Before you start your dream business, you need to research funding options.

Think of a business that you would like to own. Do research using the Internet to find more information about loans for small-business owners.

  • Discuss how small-business loans work and your options for obtaining a loan.
  • Discuss the process and procedures for obtaining the loan.
  • Report your findings in 2 paragraphs.

This part of the assignment will contribute 20 points of the grade for this IP.

IP5

1. You find that a small business loan in the amount of 50,000 is the amount you need to purchase the restaurant location. After researching banks to find the best interest rate, you find that banks for small businesses offer the best interest rate of 9% interest that compounds monthly for 7 years.

a. What is the monthly payment for this loan?
b. Show the formula that you used and the values used for each variable to calculate the monthly payment.
c. What is the unpaid balance of the loan at the end of the 1st year?
d. Show the formula that you used and the values used for each variable to calculate the unpaid balance at the end of the 1st year.
e. What is the unpaid balance at the end of the 6th year? Show the formula that you used and the values used for each variable to calculate the unpaid balance at the end of the 6th year.

2. Diane works at a public university. She contributes $625 at the end of each month to her retirement fund. For the past 10 years, this fund has returned 3.84% a year, compounded monthly.

a. Assuming the 3.84% rate continues, how much will she have in her retirement account after 15 years?

b. Assume the economy has gotten better and that the fund now has a return of 7.72% compounded monthly. Since Diane s salary has risen over the first 15 years, she can now contribute $1000 per month. At the end of the next 15 years, how much is her account worth?

edcp 103 final exam 496963

EDCP 103 Final Exam

Section I: Multiple choice and fill-in-the-blank

Three passages out of the four in each question contain sentence fragments or run-on sentences. Choose the one correct sentence that is error-free.

1.

A) I am hoping for a job in human resources, I have been training in this field for two years.
B) I am hoping for a job in human resources; I have been training in this field for two years.
C) I am hoping for a job in human resources. Because I have been training in this field for two years.
D) I am hoping for a job in human resources I have been training in this field for two years.

2.

A) All of the hotel s rooms offer wireless internet service, which is free for our guests.
B) The hotel offers copying and faxing services. Only for hotel guests, though.
C) The swimming pool is open every evening. Be careful, there is no lifeguard.
D) When you check out, leave your key in the room. Or at the front desk.

3.

A) Parking spaces are limited often I must park far away and walk.
B) Before exercising, you should stretch and warm up to avoid any future injury.
C) The skydiver jumped from the plane, when she had fallen far enough she then released her parachute.
D) The rooms in the maternity section of the hospital have colored wallpaper, they are cheerful and pleasant.

4.

A) After Max finished high school. He had an easier time getting a job.
B) Many computer problems are difficult to figure out. Most definitely hard drive problems. Mostly due to the fact that the hard drive is difficult to see.
C) The street was beginning to show its wear, potholes dotted its rough surface. But also gave it character.
D) Janet inquired about my r sum ; she felt that the dates of my employment were confusing.

5.

A) The girls woke up screaming. Because someone entered the room.
B) The girls woke up screaming because someone entered the room.
C) The girls woke up screaming. When someone entered the room.
D) Someone entered the room the girls woke up screaming.

6.

A) Many students do not have a specific career goal. Though they have a general direction in mind.
B) I especially enjoy poetry by Walt Whitman, his poems are intense and revealing.
C) Before visiting Israel, Carolyn read several guidebooks, but in the end none were very helpful.
D) Take courses in a variety of disciplines you may discover new interests.

7. The executive committee __ __ its decisions through our newsletter. (publicizes, publicize)

8. The children or the babysitter ______ going to clean up that mess. (is, are)

9. Sprawled across the floor ____ numerous clues to who committed the crime. (was, were)

10. There ___ four areas of the park in which dogs are welcome. (is, are)

11. A cup of tea and a good TV show _______ me relax after a long day. (helps, help)

12. A full box of cookies ____ too tempting for the children to pass up. (was, were)

Questions 13-16
Choose the sentence that uses correct parallel structure.

13.

A) My favorite aerobic activities are running, skiing, and I also like kickboxing.
B) To run, to ski, and kickboxing are my favorite aerobic activities.
C) My favorite aerobic activities are running, skiing, and to go kickboxing.
D) Running, skiing, and kickboxing are my favorite aerobic activities.

14.

A) The tortoise and the hare stood at the starting line, took a deep breath, glanced at the official, and both hope he blows the whistle.
B) The tortoise and the hare stood at the starting line, took a deep breath, glanced at the official, and they both hoped he would blow the whistle.
C) The tortoise and the hare both stood at the starting line, took deep breaths, glanced at the official, and hoped he would blow the whistle.
D) The tortoise and the hare stood at the starting line, taking a deep breath, glancing at the official, and both hoped he blows the whistle.

15.

A) Getting calls from telemarketers, missing my morning bus, and receiving large bills are my biggest annoyances.
B) My biggest annoyances are to get calls from telemarketers, missing my morning bus, and to receive large bills.
C) Getting calls from telemarketers, having missed my morning bus, and to receive large bills are my biggest annoyances.
D) My biggest annoyances are getting calls from telemarketers, missing my morning bus, and receiving large bills is the worst.

16.

A) I asked the children to hang up their coats, place their mittens in the box, and taking their boots off.
B) I asked the children to hang up their coats, place their mittens in the box, and to take their boots off.
C) I informed the children that they needed to hang up their coats, placing their mittens in the box was very important, and that they should have taken their boots off.
D) I asked the children to hang up their coats, to place their mittens in the box, and to take their boots off.

17.

A) Juan is the smartest student in our class, Juliet said.
B) Juan is the smartest student in our class, Juliet said.
C) Juan is the smartest student in our class Juliet said.
D) Juan is the smartest student in our class, Juliet said.

18.

A) The father picked up his two daughters skate s.
B) The father picked up his two daughter s skates.
C) The father picked up his two daughters skates.
D) The father picked up his two daughters skates.

19.

A) Whenever, it rains heavily the basement floods.
B) Whenever it rains heavily, the basement floods.
C) Whenever, it rains heavily, the basement floods.
D) Whenever it rains heavily the basement, floods.

20.

A) I have studied for hours but I m still nervous about my history test.
B) I have studied for hours, but I m still nervous about my history test.
C) I have studied for hours but; I m still nervous about my history test.
D) I have studied for hours but, I m still nervous about my history test.

21.

A) UMUC, which is located in Maryland is the largest public nontraditional university.
B) UMUC which, is located in Maryland, is the largest public nontraditional university.
C) UMUC, which is located in Maryland, is the largest public nontraditional university.
D) UMUC which is located in Maryland is the largest public nontraditional university.

22.

A) Its too warm to wear a coat in this spring weather.
B) It s too warm to wear a coat in this spring weather
C) It s too warm to wear a coat in this spring weather.
D) Its too warm to wear a coat in this spring weather.

23.

A) There is one goal that Traci put before all others: graduating by December.
B) My Mother and Father are hoping that I will move out by next year.
C) Visiting the eiffel tower was an unforgettable experience.
D) Jordan is studying Psychology with a minor in Anthropology.

24.

A) We plan to visit a Theme Park during our next weekend trip.
B) Driving East in the morning can irritate one s eyes because of the sun.
C) The Presidents Day picnic will be held at Fairview Park.
D) The President of our Book Club will preside over the monthly meeting.

25. The aquarium had not been cleaned in months, algae was building up on the glass. And was starting to obscure the view of the fish.

26. John s computer got the virus but didn t crash mine did.

27. Their dog needs to go to obedience classes he s always jumping on people at the door.

28. Online classes offer many conveniences, on the other hand there are some unique challenges faced by online students.

29. There are many issues that parents of teenagers need to be aware of. Such as peer pressure to use drugs.

30. If a new employee wants to make a good impression. Make sure to arrive on time, also dress appropriately for the job.

31. I work much better when the boss doesn t hover over you with instructions on what to do.

32. My older brother is an electrician, but I m not interested in it.

33. I discovered when I went to sell my old textbooks that they ve put out new editions, and nobody wants to buy them.

34. If the team leader wants to hold a meeting, then they should choose a time that is convenient for everyone.

35. When an athlete is getting ready for competition, you have to be mentally and physically prepared.

Questions 36-40
Each passage contains one or more shifts in tense. Revise each passage so that it maintains consistent tense.

36. A deer makes its way cautiously out of the woods and steps into the meadow, but when a flock of geese flies noisily overhead, the deer ran back to the shelter of the trees.

37. As I look through the file folder, I wonder if I might have thrown away this month s bank statement by accident. Then I remembered that I brought it to work and never brought it home.

38. Martin stayed home from work when his son had the flu, and he discovered just how busy a day at home can be. His son was constantly asking for drinks and wants to be entertained.

39. When we decided to throw a surprise party, we had no idea it would be so surprising for everyone. We were waiting for the guest of honor to show up at the front door when suddenly he sneaks in from the back door and yells Surprise!

40. When the kids arrived at the field, their coach was waiting for them. To their surprise, he says, Come on! We ve been waiting for you.

41. Do you ever wonder about the future of the Internet asked George What will be the browser of the future

42. Sally told me that my socks were dirty my shoes were unpolished and my shirt was wrinkled but I didn t pay any attention to her because I was in a hurry

43. Weve decided that the groups presentation will be on conserving water

44. The passengers hurried toward the trains platform as the conductor shouted All aboard

45. Saving money staying healthy and spending time with family are three reasons to eat more meals at home

46. When looking at a web page ask yourself whether the information comes from a reliable source

47. Following are a topic sentence and a concluding sentence. Use these sentences and additional sentences with supporting details to write a well-developed paragraph of approximately 150 words.

48. The following paragraph is not unified. Please re-write the paragraph to improve its unity by removing any sentences that do not focus on the paragraph s main topic.

49. The following paragraph is not coherent. The ideas do not flow logically from one sentence to the next. Please re-write the paragraph to improve its coherence. You will want to consider adding transitional expressions to the paragraph as you rewrite the paragraph. In addition, you will want to consider the logical order of the sentences as you rewrite the paragraph.

You need to use all sentences in the paragraph. In other words, do not eliminate any sentences when you rewrite the paragraph.

Section IV: Essay
The essay is worth 20 points.

50. In a five-paragraph essay of at least 450 words, explain three ways that people can help improve their communities. Your essay will be graded based on the effectiveness of the introduction (including thesis statement) and conclusion; the unity, coherence, and support in the body paragraphs; and mechanical correctness.

edison stagg and thornton have the following financial information at the close of b 496966

ACC205 WEEK 5

1.Liquidity ratios.Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:

dison

Stagg

Thornton

Cash

$4,000

$2,500

$1,000

Short-term investments

3,000

2,500

2,000

Accounts receivable

2,000

2,500

3,000

Inventory

1,000

2,500

4,000

Prepaid expenses

800

800

800

Accounts payable

200

200

200

Notes payable: short-term

3,100

3,100

3,100

Accrued payables

300

300

300

Long-term liabilities

3,800

3,800

3,800

Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?

2.Computation and evaluation of activity ratios.The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:

Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 19X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.

3.Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 19X7:

  1. Compute the gross profit margin ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
  2. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.

4. Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

5. Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.

Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:

a. Quick ratio

b. Current ratio

c. Inventory-turnover ratio

d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio

e. Return-on-assets ratio

f. Net-profit-margin ratio

g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity

h. Debt-to-total assets

i. Number of times that interest is earned

j. Dividend payout rate

7. Profit Margin.Below is a comparative income statement for Cecil, Inc. for the years 2010, 2011, and 2012. Calculate the profit margin for each of these years. Comment on the profit margin trend. What changes would you recommend to improve the net margin of the company?

8. Reflect for a moment on the ratios (working capital, current ratio, quick ratio, debt to asset, debt to equity, times interest earned, gross margin and net margin) presented above. If you were considering investing in a company what ratio would be the most important to you? Formulate and argument to defend your position.

elias corporation has the following cost records for february 2013 496969

Elias Corporation has the following cost records for February 2013.

Indirect factory labor

$ 4,612

Factory utilities

$ 401

Direct materials used

22,361

Depreciation, factory equipment

1,585

Work in process, 6/1/12

2,769

Direct labor

31,084

Work in process, 6/30/12

3,633

Maintenance, factory equipment

1,792

Finished goods, 6/1/12

4,609

Indirect materials

2,268

Finished goods, 6/30/12

7,429

Factory manager’s salary

3,315

Instructions: Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule for February 2013.

the encore video store co is owned and operated by sergio alonzo the following is an 496973

The Encore Video Store Co. is owned and operated by Sergio Alonzo. The following is an excerpt from a conversation between Sergio Alonzo and Suzie Engel, the chief accountant for The EncoreVideo Store:

Sergio: Suzie, I ve got a question about this recent balance sheet.

Suzie: Sure, what s your question?

Sergio: Well, as you know, I m applying for a bank loan to finance our new store in Cherokee, and I noticed that the accounts payable are listed as $120,000.

Suzie: That s right. Approximately $100,000 of that represents amounts due our suppliers, and the remainder is miscellaneous payables to creditors for utilities, office equipment, supplies, etc.

Sergio: That s what I thought. But as you know, we normally receive a 2% discount from our suppliers for earlier payment, and we always try to take the discount.

Suzie: That s right. I can t remember the last time we missed a discount.

Sergio: Well, in that case, it seems to me the accounts payable should be listed minus the 2% discount. Let s list the accounts payable due suppliers as $98,000, rather than $100,000. Every little bit helps. You never know. It might make the difference between getting the loan and not.

How would you respond to Sergio Alonzo s request?

at the end of may the first month of operations the following selected data were tak 496978

At the end of May, the first month of operations, the following selected data were taken from the financial statements of Julie Mortenson, Attorney at Law, P.C.

Net Income for May $127,500

Total assets for May 31 $480,000

Total liabilities for May 31 $150,000

Total Stockholders’ Equity for May 31 $330,000

In preparing the financial statements, adjustments for the following data were overlooked:

A. Unbilled fees earned at May 31, $9,700

B. Depreciation of equipment for May $8,000

C. Accrued wages at May 31, $1,150

D. Supplies used during May, $975

Instructions:

Determine the correct amount of net income for May and the total assets, liabilities, and stockholders equity at May 31. In addition to indicating the corrected amounts, indicate the effectr of each omitted adjustment by setting up and completing a columnar table similar to the one shown below. Adjustments (a) is presented as an example.

Net Income Total Assets = Total Liabilities + Total Stockholders’ Equity

Reported Amounts $127,500 $480,000 $150,000 $330,000

Corrections:

Adjustment A +9,700 +9,700 0 +9,700

Adjustment B

Adjustment C

Adjustment D

Corrected Amounts:

entire course acc 220 496980

ACC 220 CheckPoint Budgets Matrix.docx

ACC 220 CheckPoint Career Opportunities.docx

ACC 220 CheckPoint Cash Management Matrix.docx

ACC 220 CheckPoint Classified Balance Sheets.docx

ACC 220 CheckPoint Cost Volume and Profit Questions.docx

ACC 220 CheckPoint Flexible Budgets.docx

ACC 220 CheckPoint Proprietorships Partnerships Corporations.docx

ACC 220 Final Project Business Plan.docx

ACC 220 WEEK 3 DISCUSSION QUESTIONS.docx

ACC 220 WEEK 5 DISCUSSION QUESTIONS.docx

ACC 220 WEEK 7 DISCUSSION QUESTIONS.docx

ACC 220 Week 8 Assignment Responsibility Center Presentation.ppt

ACC 220-WEEK-1-ONE-DISCUSSION-QUESTIONS.docx

ACC 220 Assignment Cost Volume and Profit Formulas.docx

ACC 220 Assignment Financial Statements.docx

ACC 220 Assignment Internal Cash Control.docx

ACC 220 Check Point A New Company.docx

entire course aed 201 496990

AED 201 CheckPoint Technology Use Timeline.doc

AED 201 Exercise Case Study The Roles of a Teacher.doc

AED 201 Exercise Characteristics of Effective Classrooms.doc

AED 201 Exercise Teacher Liability.pdf

AED 201 Final Project Professional Development Plan.doc

AED 201 WEEK 1 DISCUSSION QUESTIONS.doc

AED 201 WEEK 3 DISCUSSION QUESTIONS.doc

AED 201 Week 4 CheckPoint Socioeconomic Status and Student Achievement.doc

AED 201 WEEK 5 DISCUSSION QUESTIONS.doc

AED 201 WEEK 7 SEVEN DISCUSSION QUESTIONS.doc

AED 201 Assignment Characteristics of At Risk Students.doc

AED 201 Assignment Interview with a Teaching Professional.doc

AED 201 Assignment Mentoring vs Induction Programs.doc

AED 201 Assignment Rights Responsibilities of Educators Students.doc

AED 201 Capstone Discussion Question.doc

AED 201 CheckPoint Governance and Effecting Change in Schools.doc

AED 201 CheckPoint History of American Education.doc

AED 201 CheckPoint Learning Needs of Diverse Students.doc

AED 201 CheckPoint Managing a Daily Teaching Schedule.doc

AED 201 CheckPoint Teaching as a Professional Career.doc

entire course cmc 210 497000

CMC 210 CheckPoint The Effect of Mass Production of Books.doc

CMC 210 DQ 1 Week 5.doc

CMC 210 DQ1 Week 1.doc

CMC 210 DQ1 Week 3.doc

CMC 210 DQ2 WeeK 1.doc

CMC 210 DQ2 Week 3.doc

CMC 210 DQ2 Week 5.doc

CMC 210 Exercise Media Adaptation and Convergence.doc

CMC 210 Final Project Overview of Your Media Specialty8.doc

CMC 210 Week 7 DQ 1.doc

CMC 210 Week 7 DQ 2.doc

CMC 210 Assignment Government Fostered Ownership.doc

CMC 210 Assignment Information Control.doc

CMC 210 Capstone.doc

CMC 210 Checkpoint Advertising Manipulation.doc

CMC 210 Checkpoint Advertising or Public Relations.doc

CMC 210 Checkpoint Cable and Broadcast Television.doc

CMC 210 Checkpoint Cultural Periods.doc

CMC 210 CheckPoint Effects of Internet Convergence.doc

CMC 210 CheckPoint Patterns of Specialization Advertising and Ownership.doc

entire course cmc 230 497001

CMC 230 Assignment Persuasive Design.doc

CMC 230 Checkpoint Appearance and Nonverbal Behavior.doc

CMC 230 CheckPoint Conflict Management.doc

CMC 230 Checkpoint Cultural Elements of Public Outcry.doc

CMC 230 CheckPoint Theories of Mass Communication.doc

CMC 230 Checkpoint Types of Propositions.doc

CMC 230 Exercise Mass Communication and Consumerism.doc

CMC 230 Exercise Nonverbal Behavior.doc

CMC 230 Final.doc

CMC 230 Week 1 DQ1.doc

CMC 230 Week 1 DQ2.doc

CMC 230 Week 3 DQ1.doc

CMC 230 Week 3 DQ2.doc

CMC 230 Week 5 DQ1.doc

CMC 230 Week 5 DQ2.doc

CMC 230 Week 7 DQ1.doc

CMC 230 Week 7 DQ2.doc

CMC 230 Week 9 capstone.doc

CMC 230 Assignment Nine Factors of Communication Processing.doc

entire course com 200 497003

COM 200 ppt

COM 200 CHECKPOINT WEEK 6.doc

COM 200 CHECKPOINT WEEK 7.doc

COM 200 CHECKPOINT WEEK 8.doc

COM 200 CHECKPOINT WEEK 1.doc

COM 200 MANAGING RELATIONSHIPS.doc

COM 200 NONVERBAL COMMUNICATION.doc

COM 200 PART 1 USING LANGUAGE EFFECTIVELY WKSHT.doc

COM 200 PART 2 USING LANGUAGE PAPER.doc

COM 200 PEER PERCEPTION.doc

COM 200 WEEK 1 DQS.doc

COM 200 WEEK 2 DQS.doc

COM 200 WEEK 3 DQS.doc

COM 200 WEEK 4 DQS.doc

COM 200 WEEK 5 DQS.doc

COM 200 APPENDIX D WEEK 6.doc

COM 200 APPENDIX E WEEK 6.doc

COM 200 ASSIGNMENT LISTENING WEEK 2.doc

COM 200 ASSIGNMENT WEEK 4.doc

COM 200 ASSIGNMENT WEEK 6.doc

COM 200 CAPSTONE WEEK 9.doc

COM 200 CHECKPOINT WEEK 2.doc

COM 200 CHECKPOINT WEEK 3.doc

COM 200 CHECKPOINT WEEK 4.doc

entire course it 210 497009

IT 210-CheckPoint-Final-Paper-Rough-Draft-2-of-2.doc

IT 210-Final-Paper-Outline.doc

IT 210-Final-Project-Comparative-Literature-Paper.doc

IT 210-Week-2-CheckPoint-Young-Goodman-Brown-Matrix.doc

IT 210-Week-3-Assignment-Comparative-Character-Matrix-and-Newspaper-Ads-Appendix-D.doc

IT 210-Week-3-CheckPoint-Analytical-Essay.doc

IT 210-Week-4-DQs.doc

IT 210-Week-5-Assignment-Oedipus-Rex-and-A-Raisin-in-the-Sun-Essay.doc

IT 210-Week-5-CheckPoint-Comparative-Drama-Matrix.doc

IT 210-Week-6-Checkpoint-Word-Order-Activity.doc

IT 210-Week-6-DQs.doc

IT 210-Week-7-Assignment-Comparative-Poetry-Matrix-Appendix-h.doc

IT 210-Week-8-Checkpoint-Analyzing-the-Essay.doc

IT 210-Week-8-DQs.doc

IT 2100-Week-2-DQs.doc

IT 210 Capstone-Checkpoint.doc

IT 210 CheckPoint-1-Literary-Canon-Response.doc

IT 210 CheckPoint-2-Writing-About-Literature-Response.doc

IT 210-210-CheckPoint-Newspaper-Ads-for-Dramatic-Characters.doc

IT 210-Assignment-Literary-Definitions-Activity.doc

IT 210-CheckPoint-Final-Paper-Rough-Draft-1-of-2.doc

entries into t accounts and trial balance leila durkin an architect opened an office 497015

Entries into T Accounts and Trial Balance Leila Durkin, an architect, opened an office on May 1, 2012. During the month, she completed the following transactions connected with her professional practice: Transferred cash from a personal bank account to an account to be used for the business, $30,000. Paid May rent for office and workroom, $3,500. Purchased used automobile for $25,000, paying $5,000 cash and giving a note payable for the remainder. Purchased office and computer equipment on account, $9,000. Paid cash for supplies, $1,200. Paid cash for annual insurance policies, $2,400. Received cash from client for plans delivered, $8,150. Paid cash for miscellaneous expenses, $300. Paid cash to creditors on account, $2,500. Paid installment due on note payable, $400. Received invoice for blueprint service, due in June, $1,200. Recorded fee earned on plans delivered, payment to be received in June, $12,900. Paid salary of assistant, $1,800. Paid gas, oil, and repairs on automobile for May, $600. 1. Record the above transactions directly into the T accounts. To the left of the amount entered in the accounts, place the appropriate letter to identify the transaction. 2. Determine the balances of the T accounts. Hint(s) Cash Bal.

Accounts Receivable

Supplies

Prepaid Insurance

Automobiles

Equipment

Notes Payable Bal.

Accounts Payable Bal.

Leila Durkin, Capital

Professional Fees Bal.

Rent Expense

Salary Expense

Blueprint Expense

Automobile Expense

Miscellaneous Expense

Hide Feedback Partially Correct Check My Work Feedback 1, 2. First, identify what account is used and then what type of account is used. Every account is either an asset, liability, capital, withdrawal, revenue, or expense account. Every transaction involves at least two accounts. Then determine whether the account increases or decreases. Each increase or decrease is recorded as a debit or credit in the T-accounts, following the rules of debit and credit (See Exhibit 3). Net debits against credits to determine the balance and double-check to see if it is a normal balance for that account classification. Hint(s) Hide 3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for Leila Durkin, Architect, as of May 31, 2012. For those boxes in which no entry is required, leave the box blank.

Leila Durkin, Architect Unadjusted Trial Balance May 31, 2012 Debit Balances Credit Balances

Hide Feedback Partially Correct Check My Work Feedback 3. The trial balance lists the ending balance of each account in a corresponding Debit or Credit column. The trial balance column totals should be equal. 4. Determine the net income or net loss for May. $

the entry to record a purchase of merchandise on credit includes a 497016

1) The entry to record a purchase of merchandise on credit includes a:

A. debit to Purchases and a credit to Accounts Receivable.

B. credit to Purchases and a credit to Accounts Payable.

C. debit to Accounts Payable and a credit to Purchases.

D. debit to Purchases and a credit to Accounts Payable.

2) Freight charges on merchandise purchases should be debited to the:

A. Purchases account.

B. Accounts Payable account.

C. Freight In account.

D. creditor’s account in the subsidiary ledger.

3) The Purchases account is a __________ account.

A. permanent

B. temporary

C. subsidiary

D. liability

4) Purchases of merchandise on credit should be recorded in the __________ journal.

A. purchases

B. general

C. cash payments

D. sales

5) Credit terms of 1/10, n/30 mean that:

A. payment in full is due 10 days after date of the invoice.

B. payment in full is due 30 days after date of the invoice.

C. if the invoice is paid within 10 days of its date, a 1% discount may be taken; otherwise the total amount is due in 20 days.

D. if the invoice is paid within 10 days of its date, a 1% discount may be taken; otherwise the total amount is due in 30 days.

6) Postings to the accounts payable ledger from the purchases journal should be made:

A. daily.

B. weekly.

C. monthly.

D. at the end of the fiscal period.

7)A creditor’s account in the accounts payable ledger has a $1,600 beginning balance. After a transaction for $700 is posted from the purchases journal, the balance of the creditor’s account is:

A. $2,300 debit.

B. $900 credit.

C. $2,300 credit.

D. $900 debit.

8) To record a return of merchandise purchased on credit, the accountant would debit __________ and credit __________.

A. Purchases Returns and Allowances; Accounts Receivable

B. Purchases Returns and Allowances; Purchases

C. Accounts Payable; Purchases Returns and Allowances

D. Purchases; Purchases Returns and Allowances

9) The total of the balances in the creditor’s accounts should agree with the balance of the __________ account in the general ledger.

A. Purchases

B. Accounts Receivable

C. Accounts Payable

D. Sales

10) The amount of the purchases for a period is presented in the:

A. Liabilities section of the balance sheet.

B. Revenue section of the income statement.

C. Cost of Goods Sold section of the income statement.

D. Expenses section of the income statement.

11) A firm had purchases of $16,200, freight charges of $300, and purchases returns and allowances of $1,100 during one month. Its net delivered cost of purchases was:

A. $14,800.

B. $17,600.

C. $16,200.

D. $15,400.

12) In a firm that uses special journals, the return of damaged merchandise to a supplier and receipt of a credit memorandum is recorded in the __________ journal.

A. cash payments

B. cash receipts

C. purchases

D. general

13) When the sales department needs goods, it sends the purchasing department a form called a:

A. purchase invoice.

B. purchase order.

C. purchase requisition.

D. sales invoice.

14) Credit purchases of supplies that are to be used in the business are entered in the __________ journal.

A. purchases

B. general

C. cash payments

D. cash receipts

15) After a supplier of merchandise is selected, the purchasing department issues a form called a:

A. purchase invoice.

B. purchase order.

C. sale invoice.

D. purchase requisition.

16) Which of the following statements is correct?

A. Freight In is subtracted from Purchases to arrive at delivered cost of purchases.
B. Another name that may be used for the Freight In account is “Transportation In.”
C. Freight charges that are listed on the invoice received from a supplier are not part of the total credit to Accounts Payable to record the credit purchase.
D. None of these statements is correct

17) Which of the following accounts is a contra cost of goods sold account?

A. Accounts Payable

B. Cash

C. Purchases

D. Purchases returns and allowances

18) The account of a creditor in the accounts payable ledger had a balance at the beginning of the month of $3,000. During the month total postings to the account from the purchases journal were $500. Also, there was a posting of $300 to the account from the general journal for a purchase return. The balance of the creditor account at the end of the month would be:

A. $2,200.

B. $2,800.

C. $3,000.

D. $3,200.

19) Which of the following represents a bill received for goods purchased?

A. Purchase invoice

B. Purchase order

C. Purchase requisition

D. Purchases journal

20) Which of the following credit terms is offering the customer a 3% cash discount if payment is made within 5 days of the invoice date?

A. 1/5, n/30

B. 5/3, n/EOM

C. 3/5, n/45

D. 5/1, n/3

e19 1 remmers corporation 496924

The following information is available for Remmers corporation for 2010. a. Depreciation reported on the tax return exceeded depreciation reported on the income statement by 120,000. This difference will reverse in equal amounts of 30,000 over the years 2011-2014. B. Interest received on municipal bonds was 10,000. C. Rent collected in advance on Jan 1 2010 totaled 60,000 for a 3 year period. Of this amount 40,000 was reported as unearned at Dec 31 for book purposes. D. The tax rates are 40% for 2010 and 35% for 2011 and subsequent years. E. Income taxes of 320,000 are due per the tax return for 2010. F. No deferred taxes existed at the beginning of 2010. 1. Compute taxable income for 2010 2. Compute pretax financial income for 2010 3. Prepare the journal entries to record income tax expense deferred income taxes and income taxes payable for 2010 and 2011. Assume taxable income was 980,000 in 2011. $. Prepare the income tax expense section of the income statement for 2010 beginning with “income before income taxes.”

e19 19 dependable drivers driving school charges 250 per student to prepare and admi 496925

Dependable Drivers Driving School charges $250 per student to prepare and administer written and driving tests. Variable costs of $100 per student include trainers wages, study materials, and gasoline. Annual fixed costs of $75,000 include the training facility and fleet of cars.

Requirements

1. For each of the following independent situations, calculate the contribution margin per unit and the breakeven point in units by first referring to the original data provided:

a. Breakeven point with no change in information.

b. Decrease sales price to $220 per student.

c. Decrease variable costs to $50 per student.

d. Decrease fixed costs to $60,000.

2. Compare the impact of changes in the sales price, variable costs, and fixed costs on the contribution margin per unit and the breakeven point in units.

e2 2 the qualitative characteristics that make accounting information useful for dec 496926

E2-2 (Qualitative Characteristics)

The qualitative characteristics that make accounting information useful for decision-making purposes are as follows.

Relevance Timeliness Representational faithfulness

Reliability Verifiability Comparability

Predictive value Neutrality Consistency

Feedback value

Instructions

Identify the appropriate qualitative characteristic(s) to be used given the information provided below.

(a) Qualitative characteristic being employed when companies in the same industry are using the same accounting principles.

(b) Quality of information that confirms users’ earlier expectations.

(c) Imperative for providing comparisons of a company from period to period.

(d) Ignores the economic consequences of a standard or rule.

(e) Requires a high degree of consensus among individuals on a given measurement.

(f) Predictive value is an ingredient of this primary quality of information.

(g) Two qualitative characteristics that are related to both relevance and reliability.

(h) Neutrality is an ingredient of this primary quality of accounting information.

(i) Two primary qualities that make accounting information useful for decision-making purposes.

(j) Issuance of interim reports is an example of what primary ingredient of relevance

e2 4 presented below are the assumptions principles and constraints used 496927

E2-4 (Assumptions, Principles, and Constraints)

Presented below are the assumptions, principles, and constraints used in this chapter.

1. Economic entity assumption

2. Going concern assumption

3. Monetary unit assumption

4. Periodicity assumption

5. Historical cost principle

6. Fair value principle

7. Expense recognition principle

8. Full disclosure principle

9. Cost-benefit relationship

10. Materiality

11. Industry practices

12. Conservatism

Instructions

Identify by number the accounting assumption, principle, or constraint that describes each situation on the next page. Do not use a number more than once.

(a) Allocates expenses to revenues in the proper period.

(b) Indicates that fair value changes subsequent to purchase are not recorded in the accounts. (Do not use revenue recognition principle.)

(c) Ensures that all relevant financial information is reported.

(d) Rationale why plant assets are not reported at liquidation value. (Do not use historical cost principle.)

(e) Anticipates all losses, but reports no gains.

(f) Indicates that personal and business record keeping should be separately maintained.

(g) Separates financial information into time periods for reporting purposes.

(h) Permits the use of fair value valuation in certain industries. (Do not use fair value principle.)

(i) Requires that information significant enough to affect the decision of reasonably informed users should be disclosed. (Do not use full disclosure principle.)

(j) Assumes that the dollar is the measuring stick used to report on financial performance

e2 7 accounting principles comprehensive problem 496928

E2-7
(Accounting Principles Comprehensive) Presented below are a number of business transactions that occurred during the current year for Gonzales, Inc.

Instructions
In each of the situations, discuss the appropriateness of the journal entries in terms of generally accepted accounting principles.

The president of Gonzales, Inc. used his expense account to purchase a new Suburban solely for personal use. The following journal entry was made.

Miscellaneous Expense 29,000
Cash 29,000

Merchandise inventory that cost $620,000 is reported on the balance sheet at $690,000, the expected selling price less estimated selling costs. The following entry was made to record this increase in value.

Merchandise Inventory 70,000
Revenue 70,000

The company is being sued for $500,000 by a customer who claims damages for personal injury apparently caused by a defective product. Company attorneys feel extremely confident that the company will have no liability for damages resulting from the situation. Nevertheless, the company decides to make the following entry.

Loss from Lawsuit 500,000
Liability for Lawsuit 500,000

Because the general level of prices increased during the current year, Gonzales, Inc. determined that there was a $16,000 understatement of depreciation expense on its equipment and decided to record it in its accounts. The following entry was made.

Depreciation Expense 16,000
Accumulated Depreciation 16,000

Gonzales, Inc. has been concerned about whether intangible assets could generate cash in case of liquidation. As a consequence, goodwill arising from a purchase transaction during the current year and recorded at $800,000 was written off as follows.

Retained Earnings 800,000
Goodwill 800,000

Because of a fire sale, equipment obviously worth $200,000 was acquired at a cost of $155,000. The following entry was made.

Equipment 200,000
Cash 155,000
Revenue 45,000

e23 7 chenowith co and edgebrook company 496929

Presented below are two independent situations.

Situation A:
Chenowith Co. reports revenues of $200,000 and operating expenses of $110,000 in its first year of operations, 2010. Accounts receivable and accounts payable at year-end were $71,000 and $39,000, respectively. Assume that the accounts payable related to operating expenses. Ignore income taxes.

Instructions(Enter amounts as positive numbers.)

Using the direct method, compute net cash provided (used) by operating activities.

$ providedused

Situation B:
The income statement for Edgebrook Company shows cost of goods sold $310,000 and operating expenses (exclusive of depreciation) $230,000. The comparative balance sheet for the year shows that inventory increased $21,000, prepaid expenses decreased $8,000, accounts payable (related to merchandise) decreased $17,000, and accrued expenses payable increased $11,000.

Instructions(Enter amounts as positive numbers.)

Compute:

(a) cash payments to suppliers $

(b) cash payments for operating expenses $

e3 9 the trial balance for pioneer advertising agency shows the following pioneer ad 496930

E3-9

The trial balance for Pioneer Advertising Agency shows the following:

PIONEER ADVERTISING AGENCY Trial Balance October 31, 2012 Debit Credit Cash $15,200 Advertising Supplies 2,500 Prepaid Insurance 600 Office Equipment 5,000 Notes Payable $5,000 Accounts Payable 2,500 Unearned Revenue 1,200 C.R. Byrd, Capital 10,000 C.R. Byrd, Drawing 500 Service Revenue 10,000 Salaries Expense 4,000 Rent Expense 900 $28,700

$28,700

Assume the following adjustment data.

Advertising supplies on hand at October 31 total $500. Expired insurance for the month is $100. Depreciation for the month is $50. Unearned revenue earned in October totals $600. Services provided but not recorded at October 31 are $300. Interest accrued at October 31 is $70. Accrued salaries at October 31 are $1,500. Instructions

Prepare the adjusting entries for the items above.

e4 11 sorce instrument inc 496931

E4-11Sorce Instrument, Inc. manufactures two products: missile range instruments and space pressure gauges. During April, 50 range instruments and 300 pressure gauges were produced, and overhead costs of $89,500 were estimated. An analysis of estimated overhead costs reveals the following activities.

Activities Cost Drivers Total Cost

1. Materials handling Number of requisitions $35,000

2. Machine setups Number of setups 27,500

3. Quality inspections Number of inspections 27,000

The cost driver volume for each product was as follows.

Cost Drivers Instruments Gauges Total

Number of requisitions 400 600 1,000

Number of setups 200 300 500

Number of inspections 200 400 600

Instructions

(a) Determine the overhead rate for each activity.

b) Assign the manufacturing overhead costs for April to the two products using activity based costing.

e5 16 an analysis of the accounts of chamberlin manufacturing reveals the following 496933

An analysis of the accounts of Chamberlin Manufacturing reveals the following manufacturing cost data for the month ended June 30, 2008.

Inventories Beginning Ending

Raw materials $9,000 $13,100

Work in process 5,000 7,000

Finished goods 9,000 6,000

Costs incurred: Raw materials purchases $54,000, direct labor $57,000, manufacturing overhead $19,900. The specific overhead costs were: indirect labor $5,500, factory insurance $4,000, machinery depreciation $4,000, machinery repairs $1,800, factory utilities $3,100, miscellaneous factory costs $1,500. Assume that all raw materials used were direct materials.

Instructions:

(a) Prepare the cost of goods manufactured schedule for the month ended June 30, 2008.

(b) Show the presentation of the ending inventories on the June 30, 2008, balance sheet.

e6 10 mega electronix sells television sets and dvd players the business is divided 496935

E6-10

Mega Electronix sells television sets and DVD players. The business is divided into two divisions along product lines. CVP income statements for a recent quarter s activity are presented below.

TV Division DVD Division Total

Sales $600,000 $400,000 $1,000,000

Variable costs 450,000 240,000 690,000

Contribution margin $150,000 $160,000 310,000

Fixed costs 124,000

Net income $ 186,000

Instructions:

(a) Determine sales mix percentage and contribution margin ratio for each division.

(b) Calculate the company s weighted-average contribution margin ratio.

(c) Calculate the company s break-even point in dollars.

(d) Determine the sales level in dollars for each division at the break-even point.

e6 5 hall company had sales in 2014 of 1 560 000 on 60 000 units variable costs tota 496938

Hall Company had sales in 2014 of $1,560,000 on 60,000 units. Variable costs totaled $720,000, and fixed costs totaled $500,000. A new raw material is available that will decrease the variable costs per unit by 25% (or $3.00). However, to process the new raw material, fixed operating costs will increase by $150,000. Management feels that one-half of the declines in the variable costs per unit should be passed on to customers in in the form of a sales price reduction. The marketing department expects that this sales price reduction will result in a 5% increase in the number of units sold.

Instructions:

Prepare a projected CVP income statement for 2014 :

(a) assuming the changes have not been made, and

(b) assuming that changes are made as described.

e7 2 supply the missing dollars amounts for the income statements of lewis retailers 496940

Supply the missing dollars amounts for the income statements of lewis retailers for each of the following independent cases:

Cases

Sales Revenue

Beginning Inventory Purchases Cost of Goods Available for Sale Cost of Goods Sold Cost of Ending Inventory Gross Profit
A $ 700 $ 100 $ 800 $ 900 $ 300 $ 600 $
B $ 900 $ 200 $ 800 $ 1,000 $ $ 150 $
C $ $ 100 $ $ 500 $ 200 $ 300 $ 400
D $ 800 $ $ 600 $ 900 $ 650 $ 250 $
E $ 1,000 $ 50 $ 900 $ 950 $ $ 450 $ 500

e7 3 supply the missing dollars amounts for the income statement of clarks retailers 496941

Supply the missing dollars amounts for the income statement of clarks retailers for each of the following independent cases:

E7-3 CLARKS RETAILERS

Inferring Missing Amounts Based on Income Statement Relationships
Sales Beginning Ending Cost of Selling and Income from
Cases Revenue Inventory Purchases Total Available Inventory Goods Sold Gross Profit General expenses Operations
A $800 $100 $700 $500 $200.00
B $900 $200 $700 $150.00
C $150 $200 $200 $400 $150.00
D $800 $600 $300 $250.00 $100.00

e7 9 this information relates to the cash account in the ledger of hawkins company 496943

This information relates to the Cash account in the ledger of Hawkins Company.

Balance September 1 $16,400; Cash deposited $64,000

Balance September 30 $17,600; Checks written $62,800

The September bank statement shows a balance of $16,500 at September 30 and the following memoranda.

Credits Debits

Collection of $1,800 note plus interest $30 $1,830 NSF check: H. Juno $560

Interest earned on checking account 45 Safety deposit box rent 60

At September 30, deposits in transit were $4,738 and outstanding checks totaled $2,383.

Instructions:

(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation at September 30, 2012.

(b) Prepare the adjusting entries at September 30, assuming

(1) the NSF check was from a customer on account, and

(2) no interest had been accrued on the note.

e8 5 hachey company 496945

E8-5 Hachey Company has accounts receivable of $95,100 at March 31, 2007. An analysis
of the accounts shows these amounts.

Balance, March 31
Month of Sale 2007 2006
March $65,000 $75,000
February 12,600 8,000
December and January 10,100 2,400
November and October 7,400 1,100
$95,100 $86,500
Credit terms are 2/10, n/30. At March 31, 2007, there is a $2,200 credit balance in Allowance
for Doubtful Accounts prior to adjustment. The company uses the percentage of
receivables basis for estimating uncollectible accounts. The company s estimates of bad
debts are as shown on page 402.

Reporting and Analyzing Receivables
Estimated Percentage
Age of Accounts Uncollectible
Current 2%
1 30 days past due 7
31 90 days past due 30
Over 90 days 50

Instructions
(a) Determine the total estimated uncollectibles.
(b) Prepare the adjusting entry at March 31, 2007, to record bad debts expense.
(c) Discuss the implications of the changes in the aging schedule from 2006 to 2007.

e9 24 miracle printers mp manufactures printers assume that mp recently paid 600 000 496947

E9-24

Miracle Printers (MP) manufactures printers. Assume that MP recently paid $600,000 for a patent on a new laser printer. Although it gives legal protection for 20 years, the patent is expected to provide a competitive advantage for only eight years.

Requirements

1. Assuming the straight-line method of amortization, make journal entries to record (a) the purchase of the patent and (b) amortization for year 1.

2. After using the patent for four years, MP learns at an industry trade show that another company is designing a more efficient printer. On the basis of this new information, MP decides, starting with year 5, to amortize the remaining cost of the patent over two remaining years, giving the patent a total useful life of six years. Record amortization for year 5.

each year ace engines surveys 7 600 former and prospective customers regarding satis 496948

Each year, ACE Engines surveys 7,600 former and prospective customers regarding satisfaction and brand awareness. For the current year, the company is considering outsourcing the survey to RBG Associates, who have offered to conduct the survey and summarize results for $50,000. Robert Ace, the president of ACE Engines, believes that RBG will do a higher-quality job than his company has been doing, but is unwilling to spend more than $12,000 above current costs. The head of bookkeeping for ACE has prepared the following summary of costs related to the survey in the prior year.

Mailing

$27,000

Printing (done by Lester Print Shop)

9,000

Salary of Pat Fisher, part-time employee who stuffedenvelopes and summarized data when surveyswere returned (130 x $16)

2,080

Share of depreciation of computer and software usedto track survey responses and summarize results

1,200

Share of electricity/phone/etc. based on square feetof space occupied by Pat Fisher vs. entire company

600

Total

$39,880

Prepare an incremental analysis in good form to determine the impact on profit of going outside versus conducting the survey as in the past. Will ACE accept the RBG offer? Why or why not?

earrings unlimited 496949

You have just been hired as a new management trainee by Earrings Unlimited, a distributor of earrings to various retail outlets located in shopping malls across the country. In the past, the company has done very little in the way of budgeting and at certain times of the year has experienced a shortage of cash.

Since you are well trained in budgeting, you have decided to prepare comprehensive budgets for the upcoming second quarter in order to show management the benefits that can be gained from an integrated budgeting program. To this end, you have worked with accounting and other areas to gather the information assembled below.

The company sells many styles of earrings, but all are sold for the same price $10 per pair. Actual sales of earrings for the last three months and budgeted sales for the next six months follow (in pairs of earrings):

The concentration of sales before and during May is due to Mother’s Day. Sufficient inventory should be on hand at the end of each month to supply 40% of the earrings sold in the following month.

Suppliers are paid $4 for a pair of earrings. One-half of a month’s purchases is paid for in the month of purchase; the other half is paid for in the following month. All sales are on credit, with no discount, and payable within 15 days. The company has found, however, that only 20% of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale. An additional 70% is collected in the following month, and the remaining 10% is collected in the second month following sale. Bad debts have been negligible.

Monthly operating expenses for the company are given below:

Insurance is paid on an annual basis, in November of each year.

The company plans to purchase $16,000 in new equipment during May and $40,000 in new equipment during June; both purchases will be for cash. The company declares dividends of $15,000 each quarter, payable in the first month of the following quarter.

A listing of the company’s ledger accounts as of March 31 is given below:

The company maintains a minimum cash balance of $50,000. All borrowing is done at the beginning of a month; any repayments are made at the end of a month.

The company has an agreement with a bank that allows the company to borrow in increments of $1,000 at the beginning of each month. The interest rate on these loans is 1% per month and for simplicity we will assume that interest is not compounded. At the end of the quarter, the company would pay the bank all of the accumulated interest on the loan and as much of the loan as possible (in increments of $1,000), while still retaining at least $50,000 in cash.

Required:

Prepare a master budget for the three-month period ending June 30. Include the following detailed budgets:

1.

oa. A sales budget, by month and in total.

ob. A schedule of expected cash collections from sales, by month and in total.

oc. A merchandise purchases budget in units and in dollars. Show the budget by month and in total.You have just been hired as a new management trainee by Earrings Unlimited, a distributor of earrings to various retail outlets located in shopping malls across the country. In the past, the company has done very little in the way of budgeting and at certain times of the year has experienced a shortage of cash.

Since you are well trained in budgeting, you have decided to prepare comprehensive budgets for the upcoming second quarter in order to show management the benefits that can be gained from an integrated budgeting program. To this end, you have worked with accounting and other areas to gather the information assembled below.

The company sells many styles of earrings, but all are sold for the same price $10 per pair. Actual sales of earrings for the last three months and budgeted sales for the next six months follow (in pairs of earrings):

The concentration of sales before and during May is due to Mother’s Day. Sufficient inventory should be on hand at the end of each month to supply 40% of the earrings sold in the following month.

Suppliers are paid $4 for a pair of earrings. One-half of a month’s purchases is paid for in the month of purchase; the other half is paid for in the following month. All sales are on credit, with no discount, and payable within 15 days. The company has found, however, that only 20% of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale. An additional 70% is collected in the following month, and the remaining 10% is collected in the second month following sale. Bad debts have been negligible.

Monthly operating expenses for the company are given below:

Insurance is paid on an annual basis, in November of each year.

The company plans to purchase $16,000 in new equipment during May and $40,000 in new equipment during June; both purchases will be for cash. The company declares dividends of $15,000 each quarter, payable in the first month of the following quarter.

A listing of the company’s ledger accounts as of March 31 is given below:

The company maintains a minimum cash balance of $50,000. All borrowing is done at the beginning of a month; any repayments are made at the end of a month.

The company has an agreement with a bank that allows the company to borrow in increments of $1,000 at the beginning of each month. The interest rate on these loans is 1% per month and for simplicity we will assume that interest is not compounded. At the end of the quarter, the company would pay the bank all of the accumulated interest on the loan and as much of the loan as possible (in increments of $1,000), while still retaining at least $50,000 in cash.

Required:

Prepare a master budget for the three-month period ending June 30. Include the following detailed budgets:

1.

oa. A sales budget, by month and in total.

ob. A schedule of expected cash collections from sales, by month and in total.

oc. A merchandise purchases budget in units and in dollars. Show the budget by month and in total.

od. A schedule of expected cash disbursements for merchandise purchases, by month and in total.

2. A cash budget. Show the budget by month and in total. Determine any borrowing that would be needed to maintain the minimum cash balance of $50,000.

3. A budgeted income statement for the three-month period ending June 30. Use the contribution approach.

4. A budgeted balance sheet as of June 3

od. A schedule of expected cash disbursements for merchandise purchases, by month and in total.

2. A cash budget. Show the budget by month and in total. Determine any borrowing that would be needed to maintain the minimum cash balance of $50,000.

3. A budgeted income statement for the three-month period ending June 30. Use the contribution approach.

4. A budgeted balance sheet as of June 3

eastern technology company master budget 496950

The Eastern Technology Company
Background and Assumptions for Preparation of 2014 Master Budget

Sales Revenue:

The Eastern Technology Company manufactures Weather Radios for sale to retailers such as Wal-Mart, Target, etc.

The 2014 quarterly unit sales estimates and projected sales prices per unit are as follows:

Quarter1 Quarter2 Quarter3 Quarter4
Sales Units 9,300 9,500 9,700 9,900
Price per Unit $125.00 $127.00 $128.00 $130.00

Also, note that that projected sales for Quarter 1 of 2015 is 10,000 units.

Product Cost Assumptions:

The company s product requires two raw materials, resistors and switches. Cost parameters are as follows:

Number of Components/Unit

Switches @ $4/switch 3
Resistors @ $6/resistor 2

Number of minutes required to complete finished unit:

Direct labor minutes per unit 30
Machine minutes per unit 12

Hour rates used:
Direct labor rate = $10/hour

Manufacturing overhead rates (i.e., the PDOHRs to use to apply overhead):
Labor-related = $25/hour
Machine-related = $40/hour

Eastern applies manufacturing overhead using two cost drivers: direct-labor hours and machine hours.

Ending Inventories:

The desired ending inventories for each of the two direct materials is 10% of the next quarter s respective amount of direct materials needed for production. The desired finished goods ending inventory is 5% of the next quarter s budgeted sales units. Beginning inventory for direct materials and finished goods are assumed to be zero as of 1/1/2014.

Non-Product Cost Assumptions (i.e., Selling, General, and Administrative Expenses):

Sales are made by brokers who charge a sales commission. The sales commission rate is $0.50 per unit sold.

Shipping costs are $3 per unit sold.

The administrative office building historical cost was $1,600,000 and is being depreciated over 20 years. The administrative computer facility historical cost was $900,000 and is being depreciated over 10 years. Both assets are depreciated on a straight-line basis with no salvage value.

Eastern also has office equipment and computers that are leased with a quarterly operating lease payment of $32,000.

All other selling, general, and administrative expenses are fixed and are $225,000 for each quarter.

Estimated income taxes are based on absorption costing operating income. A tax rate of 40% is expected.

Cash Disbursements:

Direct materials are all purchased on account with no available discounts; 30% are paid for in the quarter of purchase and 70% are paid for in the following quarter. Also note that the direct materials purchased during the 4th quarter of 2013 (the prior year) are estimated at $220,000, of which 30% will be paid during the 1st quarter of 2014.

All direct labor and manufacturing overhead costs are paid in the quarter incurred, with the remaining balance paid in the subsequent quarter. Also, Wages Payable is expected to be $13,000 as of December 31, 2013 to be paid in the first quarter of 2014.

Estimated income taxes are paid in the quarter following the calculation of these taxes and are budgeted in this manner. The company will not have any taxes due during the 1st quarter given that it will record a slight net loss in 2013.

All other non-product costs are paid in the quarter incurred.

Cash Collections:

Eastern makes all sales on account with no discounts available. Payments are received 70% in the quarter of sale, 27% in the following quarter, and the remaining 3% is never collected. Uncollectible accounts expense of 3% of sales is recognized in the quarter of sale. Also note that the sales of account during the 4th quarter of 2013 (the prior year) are estimated at $1,100,000, of which 27% will be paid during the 1st quarter of 2014

ebit and earnings after interest 496953

Firm A has $10,000 in assets entirely financed with equity. Firm B also has $10,000 in assets, but these assets are financed by $5,000 in debt (with a 10 percent rate of interest) and $5,000 in equity. Both firms sell 10,000 units of output at $2.50 per unit. The variable costs of production are $1, and fixed production costs are $12,000. (To ease the calculation, assume no income tax.)

a. What is the operating income (EBIT) for both firms?

b. What are the earnings after interest?

c. If sales increase by 10 percent to 11,000 units, by what percentage will each firm s earnings after interest increase? To answer the question, determine the earnings after taxes and compute the percentage increase in these earnings from the answers you derived in part b.

d. Why are the percentage changes different?

dq2 496877

We ve all experienced (or heard about) the challenges that the airlines have been facing. Read the Zacks Investment Research article, Airline Industry Stock Outlook August 2012 Identify three factors that are affecting airline company s ability to break even. For each of your factors, discuss how these have an impact on the breakeven (contribution margin, fixed costs, variable costs, a combination, etc.), and what happens if these factors increase or decrease.

Airline Industry Stock Outlook – August 2012

by Zacks Equity Research Published on August 16, 2012 |

DAL UAL LUV JBLU BA

This page is temporarily not available. Please check later as it should be available shortly. If you have any questions, please email customer support at support@zacks.com or call 800-767-3771 ext. 9339.

The global airline industry continues to face challenges from the deepening of the European debt crisis that is wiping out the positive impacts of lower fuel prices, increasing air traffic and improved freight market. The scenario is unlikely to change for the remainder of the year.

The International Air Transport Association (IATA) still projects overall airline profits of $3.0 billion for 2012 with net profit margin of 0.5% on the back of healthy growth in North and South America. The profit outlook is less than $7.9 billion earned in 2011 and $16 billion earned in 2010. This steep decline in the industry s profitability is a function of the overall unfavorable macro backdrop in which the industry has to operate this year.

Regional Forecast

North America:North American airlines are seeing improving growth prospects as the year progresses thanks to tight capacity, rising travel demand and a number of new and enhanced ancillary revenues. The carriers are performing at record levels when it comes to customer service including on-time arrivals, baggage handling, fewer customer complaints, lower cancellations and lower overbooked flights. As a result, these carriers are expected to generate $1.4 billion in profits this year, up from the previous expectation of $900 million.

Asia-Pacific:These carriers are expected to record a profit of $2.0 billion in 2012, down from the previous forecast of $2.3 billion. IATA made the downward revision on the heels of weak cargo performance and the slowdowns in Chinese and Indian economic growth. Notably, this is the highest profit-producing region in the industry outside the home market.

Middle East & Latin America: Per IATA, profits from the Middle East carriers are expected to grow to $400 million, down from the previous expectation of $500 million. Profit projection for Latin American carriers increased to $400 million from $100 million forecasted previously.

Africa:African air carriers are expected to incur a loss of $100 million due to weaker yields after touching the break-even point in 2011.

Europe: As for the European airlines, the IATA expects this year s loss to widen to $1.1 billion given intensifying Eurozone woes, continued weakness in cargo and passenger businesses and higher taxes. The forecast is almost double the previous expectation of $600 million.

Underlying Factors for 2012 Profits

In the base-case scenario, there are several factors that will drive overall airline profits in 2012:

Cargo & Freight

Passenger markets are growing at a slower pace while freight has also been modestly weak since the beginning of the year. The cargo market has bottomed out, following a sharp fall in 2011 and we expect it to remain stable in the second half.

While the economic slowdown in several countries like Europe and U.S. will keep travel growth trends at check, markets in Asia, Latin America and the Middle East would continue to boost growth in the second half of the year. The IATA projects global airline passenger growth of 4.6% in 2012 versus 4.2% forecasted previously.

Coming to demand-supply balances, demand (measured in traffic) will outpace capacity (combined passenger and cargo) as the year advances. Capacity is expected to show an increase of 3.3% while air travel demand is expected to see a 4.8% pickup.

Fuel Price Rise: Boon or Bane?

The airline profit outlook depends on fuel prices, the major variable component in the industry.

Crude oil price has dropped about 15% in the recently concluded second quarter. Lower fuel price no doubt cuts airline operating expenses, but it also indicates a slowing economy and the consequent fall in global air travel demand. However, if pricing remains stable despite the questionable macroeconomic outlook, the carriers should experience better profitability solely on the back of falling fuel costs.

Even with the falling fuel prices, the Association projects fuel to account for 33% of the overall operating costs, which is at similar levels when oil prices spiked in 2008 but 13 14% higher than a decade ago.

High crude oil prices, largely a function of geostrategic forces, are beyond the control of the airlines. However, using Brent crude oil as the basis, IATA expects crude oil price will hover around $110 per barrel this year. We expect crude oil and jet fuel prices to increase further this year because of the political tension in the Persian Gulf, but forecasting this key variable with any level of accuracy has always been extremely challenging.

Given the weak macroeconomic data points, we believe the carriers are ready to accept the burden of rising fuel prices as they are well positioned to endure the current crisis. Successfully passing on the increased cost to customers in the form of fare hikes and efficient use of fuel-hedging strategies are helping them to combat the rising fuel prices (hedging strategies discussed below).

Getting Rid of Unprofitable Jets

Most of the air carriers are scrapping or cutting flights in many small airports that are unprofitable in order to reduce their fuel cost burden. North American carriers lead the way in capacity discipline.

Over the last two years, Delta Air Lines Inc. ([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/dal]DAL[/url]), United Continental Holdings Inc. ([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/ual]UAL[/url]), US Airways Group Inc.([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/lcc]LCC[/url]) and American Airlines, a subsidiary of AMR Corp.([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/aamrq]AAMRQ[/url]) slashed their capacity by about 16.6%, 16.3%, 14.3% and 8.4%, respectively as per the Center for Aviation (CAPA).

Other international airlines like Air Canada, Air France ([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/aflyy]AFLYY[/url]), Qantas Airways, Korean Airlines and All Nippon Airways also reduced their capacities over the past two years.

Hedging Strategies

Hedging strategies provide a cushion to the rising fuel prices and are being used extensively. The carriers use a combination of calls, swaps and collars at varying WTI crude-equivalent price levels to hedge.

Rightsizing

Passengers are demanding high quality services with proper security. Airlines are using obsolete, old and less-fuel efficient aircraft, flying which are no longer feasible in a fuel-expensive environment. Hence, air carriers are also focusing on fleet rightsizing.

Though initially expensive, the new aircraft are more fuel efficient than the existing ones and have helped in lowering operating and maintenance costs. Global airlines are expected to invest $3.5 trillion to buy 27,800 new airplanes, having seating capacity of more than 100, over the next 2 decades (2011 2030). New airlines business, advanced technology and dynamic growth of air travel in emerging markets throughout the world are boosting demand for these airplanes.

About one-third of the demand is expected to come from Asia, which currently accounts for 28% of global air passengers. The demand in Europe and the U.S. is expected to fall to 23% and 20% by 2030, respectively, from the current 27% that each enjoy.

Airbus, the world’s leading aircraft manufacturer, will deliver the largest number of aircraft to the airline companies, followed by The Boeing Co. ([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/ba]BA[/url]). The U.S. air carriers have started buying new planes from these manufacturers in order to provide good customer service. The progress thus attained would help these companies to regain their lost profits.

U.S. Airlines: 20-Year Projection

The U.S. airline industry is expected to remain profitable over the next two decades given the improving worldwide trends in air travel. However, growth may be held back until 2015 due to increases in fuel costs and the ongoing economic difficulties in the U.S. and Europe.

Although U.S. airlines will likely see a small dip this year, the demand for air travel will double over the next 20 years, as predicted by the U.S. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). Passenger demand is expected to grow 2% to $746 million in 2013 and about 3% in subsequent years, reaching $1 billion by 2024 and $1.2 billion by 2032.

The FAA projects air traffic, customarily measured in billions of revenue passenger miles — a unit of one mile flown by one passenger — to grow by more than 90% over the same period. Revenue passenger miles would jump from 815 billion reported last year to 1.57 trillion by 2032 at an average annual rate of 3.2%.

International traffic is expected to grow 4.2% per year, in contrast to domestic travel that will growth at a more modest clip of 2.7% annually through 2032. This projection assumes a steady economic recovery with no major calamities like a large rise in oil price, swings in macroeconomic policy or financial meltdowns. Further, major North American airlines would raise capacity (available seat miles) at an annual rate of 3.1%, reaching 1.89 trillion by 2032.

The 20-year trajectory is expected to stem from the implementation of NextGen, the satellite-based navigation system that aims to make air travel more efficient. The carriers are taking numerous steps to improve their profitability as described in the above sections.

Moreover, the growing demand for air travel and a relatively lesser number of planes will make future fare hikes possible over the next two decades. Airline mergers and consolidation will bring down the number of flights and reduce the number of cities served.

OPPORTUNITIES

We believe industry consolidation and various ancillary revenues will boost profitability and cost performance of most air carriers going forward. This is an opportune moment for companies to consolidate in order to regain their lost profits and operational efficiency.

Ancillary Revenue:A number of supplementary revenue streams helped the airline industry gain ground in 2010 and 2011 after two years of drought. Ancillary revenues shot up 66% over two years to $22.6 billion in 2011. Air carriers are adding novel features to their services and expanding new products to improve passenger satisfaction and experience. The IATA projects total revenue of $631 billion for 2012, down slightly from $633 million projected in March.

Carriers are going wireless with in-flight entertainment systems such as American Airlines’ Gogo “Vision” wireless video-on-demand, Delta Air Lines’ “Delta Connect,” Lufthansa’s “BoardConnect,” Emirates ice OnDemand and Southwest s Live TV. Other carriers such as Virgin America, Qantas and Virgin Australia will soon launch their in-flight entertainment systems.

Cathay Pacific, Malaysia Airlines, KLM, Delta, Qantas and British Airways have also made Apple Inc.’s ([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/aapl]AAPL[/url]) iPad available to passengers in their lounges, rent them out in the air as well as use them as a self-service kiosk, customer survey tool and food ordering tool.

Further, major U.S. carriers remain focused on expanding their product and service offerings on board and on the ground for higher ancillary revenues. Delta Air Lines and United Continental are installing winglets, WiFi and flat-bed seats apart from expanding Economy Comfort or Economy Plus seats to their fleet. United Continental is also introducing streaming wireless video in its aircraft.

Southwest Airlines Co. ([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/luv]LUV[/url]) is benefiting from EarlyBird check-in, unaccompanied minor travel and pet fees. The company is renovating in-flight cabins and redesigning interiors, and has labeled the new appearance as Evolve: the New Southwest Experience. These fleet modernization plans and the All-New Rapid Rewards program is contributing to revenue growth.

JetBlue Airways Corp. ([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/jblu]JBLU[/url]) is experiencing solid growth given continued success in the Getaway Vacations Division, as well as the Even More Space product.

Consolidation:Airline companies consolidate in order to restore lost profits. This is evident from the past three mega-mergers: Northwest Airlines and Delta Air Lines in 2008, United Airlines and Continental Airlines in 2010, and AirTran Holdings and Southwest Airlines in 2011. All the three companies — Delta, United and Southwest — are the long-term beneficiaries on both capacity and cost fronts.

Again, the airline industry is awaiting another major consolidation. The rumors about American Airlines merging with another airline have been heating up since the company filed for bankruptcy protection in November last year. American Airlines is evaluating its merger proposal with US Airways, JetBlue, Alaska Air Group ([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/alk]ALK[/url]), Frontier Airlines, a subsidiary of Republic Airways Holdings ([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/rjet]RJET[/url]) and Virgin America.

We see American Airlines-US Airways as the hottest pair in the industry. Three months ago, the three labor unions of American Airlines supported a merger with US Airways. The combination would create an airline on par with the largest U.S. air carrier, United Continental, in terms of revenue and traffic, and bigger than the current second-largest airline, Delta. As a result, American Airlines should emerge as a successful candidate by balancing its debt level and lowering costs.

The consolidation of American Airlines, if successful, would be the fourth in the last three years. Nevertheless, any potential merger with AMR will take several months or a year to materialize, as American Airlines has yet to complete its court restructuring process and will undergo antitrust scrutiny.

Expansion: North American carriers are making continuous efforts to increase their domestic and international flights. Delta Air Lines is focusing on adding flights in New York, Latin America, Mexico and Brazil. Delta Air Lines is progressing well on the $1.2 billion expansion at New York-JFK, scheduled to open in 2013. Internationally, Delta’s deal with a Chinese international airline, China Eastern, should prove profitable.

Southwest started new services in Atlanta and will introduce services to new and unexplored domestic markets including New York LaGuardia, Boston Logan, Milwaukee and Baltimore/Washington as well as many smaller domestic cities. Further, Southwest is looking to tap the opportunity in the international market with its debut in the Caribbean, Central America, Latin America and Mexican markets by 2015.

United Continental is benefiting and enhancing its access from each other’s hubs and networks. JetBlue continues to successfully expand its network in two major growth regions: Boston to New York and the Caribbean.

Technology Upgrades: Air carriers are involved in numerous technology upgrades and system automation for various activities such as airline reservation system, flight operations system, website maintenance and in-flight entertainment systems. These upgrades enable companies to perform better, lower costs and enhance customer service.

The major outperformer is expected to be Republic Airways, which has a Zacks #1 (Strong Buy) Rank for the short term (1 3 months). We also recommend Spirit Airlines Inc. ([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/save]SAVE[/url]), Allegiant Travel Company ([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/algt]ALGT[/url]), Hawaiian Holdings Inc. ([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/ha]HA[/url]), Skywest Inc. ([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/skyw]SKYW[/url]), U.S. Airways and Air France that have a Zacks #2 (Buy) Rank.

We also like a few Zacks #3 (Hold) Rank stocks such as Alaska Air Group, AMR Corp., Delta, JetBlue, Southwest, United Continental and GOL Linhas ([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/gol]GOL[/url]).

WEAKNESSES

Of the many challenges facing the industry, the most important ones include volatile fuel prices, economic weakness, natural calamities, government regulation, unionization, airport infrastructure constraints and safety concerns.

Oil Price Volatility:Fuel price volatility continues to be one of the significant challenges, as the cost of fuel is largely unpredictable. Fuel prices remain well below the 2008 level of over $140 per barrel that had ravaged the airlines industry. The company’s ability to pass along the increased costs of fuel to its customers is limited by the competitive nature of the airline industry. Thus, even a small change in fuel prices can significantly affect profitability.

Unionization: The airline business is labor-intensive. Most of the employees are unionized and depend on various U.S. labor organizations. The relation between airlines and labor unions are governed by the Railway Labor Act, which states that a collective bargaining agreement between an airline and a labor union does not expire. Instead it becomes amendable as of a stated date. Failure to amend terms and conditions suitably may lead to work stoppages or strikes, and thereby hamper operations.

Federal Regulations:The airline industry is highly regulated, in particular by the federal government. All companies engaged in air transportation in the U.S. are subject to the regulations implemented by the Department of Transportation (DOT). The DOT recently laid new pricing rules for air carriers, effective January 26, 2012. As per the new rules, airline companies have to include all taxes and fees while advertising fares for their flights. As passengers are switching to low fares, the new rules might weaken travel demand, thereby leading to lower profits for the industry.

Further, airlines are also regulated by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), a division of the DOT, primarily in areas of flight operations, maintenance and other safety and technical matters.

Capacity Creep: The airline industry has a poor record of capacity discipline, though it has largely been mindful of this issue in this cycle. It remains to be seen how long the current trends remain in place before old habits return.

Large Investments: The air carriers are investing a lot of money to enhance their products and services in order to make them competitive. The proper returns from these investments are uncertain or the timings are unknown. The carriers might also lose money invested in the business for the new developments.

We expect Ryanair Holdings plc ([url=http://www.zacks.com/stock/quote/ryaay]RYAAY[/url]), which has a Zacks #4 (Sell) Rank, to underperform the broader

dq 2 496881

Year Ending December 2012

Year Ending December 2011

Year Ending December 2010

Revenues

40,000

35,000

33,000

Operating Expenses

Salaries

15,000

10,000

9,000

Maintenance and Repairs

6,000

9,000

10,000

Rental Expense

2,500

2,500

2,500

Depreciation

2,000

2,000

2,000

Fuel

4,000

3,500

2,500

Total Operating Expenses

29,500

27,000

26,000

Operating Income

10,500

8,000

7,000

Sales and Administrative Expenses

6,000

4,000

3,000

Interest Expense

2,500

2,000

1,000

Net Income

2,000

2,000

3,000

Above is a comparative income statement for Cecil, Inc. for the years 2010, 2011, and 2012. Calculate the profit margin for each of these years. Comment on the profit margin trend.

dr dolittle had a veterinary clinic financial statements 496882

Dr. Dolittle had a veterinary clinic. The following accounts and balances appeared on the books as of April 30, 2013:

Cash $22,000 Notes Payable $10,000

Accounts Receivable 8,000 Accounts Payable 7,000

Office Supplies 2,000 Contributed Capital 70,000

Land ` 40,000 Retained Earnings 33,000

Building 35,000 Veterinary Service Revenue 70,000

Office Fixtures and Equipment 27,000 Advertising Expense 10,000

Medical Instruments 18,000 Salary Expense 28,000

The business transactions for May are shown below:

MAY

1 Dr. Dolittle invested $400,000 cash in the business in exchange for

5,000 shares of stock.

4 Additional land and a buildings were purchased for $150,000. Of this amount,

$70,000 applied to the land, and $80,000 to the building. A cash payment of

$90,000 was made at the time of the purchase, and a note payable was issued for

the remaining balance.

9 Medical instruments were purchased for $130,000 cash.

16 Office fixtures and equipment were purchased for $50,000. Dr. Dolittle paid

$20,000 at the time of purchase and agreed to pay the entire remaining balance in

15 days (account payable).

21 Office supplies expected to last several months were purchased for $5,000 cash.

24 Dr. Dolittle billed clients $9,200 for services rendered. Of this amount, $7,900

was received in cash, and the balance was billed on account (due in 30 days).

27 A $800 invoice was received for several radio advertisements aired in May.

The entire amount is due to be paid on June 5. (Use accounts payable)

28 Received $6,500 from account receivable collected

29 Paid $5,500 of accounts payable that had become due.

31 Paid employees $4,200 for salaries earned by them in May.

See next page for instructions

INSTRUCTIONS:

A. Make up a T account for each account and put in the beginning balances as given

above.

B. Prepare journal entries for each transaction (list date, then the accounts and amounts

debited and credited- in good form) For example, May 1

May

1 Cash (+A) 400,000

Capital Stock (+SE) 400,000

4

C. Analyze the effects that each of these transactions will have on the following six

components of the company s financial statements for the month of May.

Organize your answer in tabular from, using the column headings shown below. Use

I for increase, D for decrease, and NE for no effect. The May 1 transaction

would be as follows:

Income Statement Balance Sheet

Transaction Revenue – Expense = NI Assets = Liabilities + Owners Equity

May 1 NE NE NE I NE I

4

etc.

D. Post each transaction from (B) to the appropriate T account.

E. Prepare a trial balance dated May 31, 2013. A trial balance lists all accounts in a column, then all debit balances opposite those with debit, all credit balances opposite those accounts with credit balances, and proves that total debits equal total credits.

F. Using figures from the trial balance prepared in part E, compute total assets, total

liabilities, and owners equity.

G. Did May appear to be a profitable month (support your answer)

due before 11pm tomorrow 496889

Accounting Framework and Governing Boards

Write a three to four (3-4) page paper in which you:

  1. Create an argument in agreement or disagreement of the premise that domestic and / or international governing boards are effective in setting and enforcing standards. Provide support for your position.
  2. Choose a key area of disagreement between GAAP and IFRS, and positions held by the FASB, IASB, and the SEC on the identified area. Evaluate the positions of each party on the issue in question. Propose a new strategy that would better accommodate all of the parties involved.
  3. Choose a recently proposed accounting regulation. Evaluate how and where the proposed regulation would impact financial statements. Provide feedback as to all or part of the proposed regulation with which you either agree or disagree.
  4. Predict at least one (1) area of accounting regulation that may be changed, or where a new regulation could be generated. Assess how and where that potential change might impact financial statements or financial reporting.
  5. Use at least three (3) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.

Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

  • Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
  • Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length

due before 11pm tomorrow 496890

Accounting Framework and Governing Boards

Write a three to four (3-4) page paper in which you:

  1. Create an argument in agreement or disagreement of the premise that domestic and / or international governing boards are effective in setting and enforcing standards. Provide support for your position.
  2. Choose a key area of disagreement between GAAP and IFRS, and positions held by the FASB, IASB, and the SEC on the identified area. Evaluate the positions of each party on the issue in question. Propose a new strategy that would better accommodate all of the parties involved.
  3. Choose a recently proposed accounting regulation. Evaluate how and where the proposed regulation would impact financial statements. Provide feedback as to all or part of the proposed regulation with which you either agree or disagree.
  4. Predict at least one (1) area of accounting regulation that may be changed, or where a new regulation could be generated. Assess how and where that potential change might impact financial statements or financial reporting.
  5. Use at least three (3) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.

Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

  • Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
  • Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length

due before 11pm tomorrow 496891

Accounting Framework and Governing Boards

Write a three to four (3-4) page paper in which you:

  1. Create an argument in agreement or disagreement of the premise that domestic and / or international governing boards are effective in setting and enforcing standards. Provide support for your position.
  2. Choose a key area of disagreement between GAAP and IFRS, and positions held by the FASB, IASB, and the SEC on the identified area. Evaluate the positions of each party on the issue in question. Propose a new strategy that would better accommodate all of the parties involved.
  3. Choose a recently proposed accounting regulation. Evaluate how and where the proposed regulation would impact financial statements. Provide feedback as to all or part of the proposed regulation with which you either agree or disagree.
  4. Predict at least one (1) area of accounting regulation that may be changed, or where a new regulation could be generated. Assess how and where that potential change might impact financial statements or financial reporting.
  5. Use at least three (3) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.

Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

  • Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
  • Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length

due before 11pm tomorrow 496892

Accounting Framework and Governing Boards

Write a three to four (3-4) page paper in which you:

  1. Create an argument in agreement or disagreement of the premise that domestic and / or international governing boards are effective in setting and enforcing standards. Provide support for your position.
  2. Choose a key area of disagreement between GAAP and IFRS, and positions held by the FASB, IASB, and the SEC on the identified area. Evaluate the positions of each party on the issue in question. Propose a new strategy that would better accommodate all of the parties involved.
  3. Choose a recently proposed accounting regulation. Evaluate how and where the proposed regulation would impact financial statements. Provide feedback as to all or part of the proposed regulation with which you either agree or disagree.
  4. Predict at least one (1) area of accounting regulation that may be changed, or where a new regulation could be generated. Assess how and where that potential change might impact financial statements or financial reporting.
  5. Use at least three (3) quality by Text-Enhance” href=”http://www.homeworkmarket.com/content/due-11pm-tomorrow-1#”>academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.

Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

  • Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
  • Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length

due in 30 mins 496895

utdoor Furniture Company has inventory balances at the end of August as follows:

Materials inventory

$21,360

Work-in-Process inventory

15,112

Finished goods inventory

17,120

Job order cost cards for jobs in process at the company as of the end of September were as follows:

Job Number

Direct Materials

Direct Labor

Mfg Overhead

48A

$1,596

$1,290

$1,677

48B

$1,492

$1,380

$1,794

48C

$1,984

$1,760

$2,288

48D

$1,608

$1,540

$2,002

Materials purchased and received in September:

September 4

$33,120

September 16

$28,600

September 22

$31,920

Direct labor costs for September:

September 15 payroll

$23,680

September 29 payroll

$25,960

Predetermined overhead rate:

130% of direct labor costs

Direct material transferred to production during September:

September 6

$37,240

September 23

$38,960

Finished goods with a 75% markup over cost were sold during September for $230,000.

a. Compute the cost of units completed during the month.

b. What was the total cost of units sold during the month?

c. What are ending inventory balances?

due assignment can you do this 496896

Learn IOS App, please click “View in Browser.”
Click the link above to submit your assignment.

Students, please view the “Submit a Clickable Rubric Assignment” in the Student Center.
Instructors, training on how to grade is within the Instructor Center.

Assignment 2: You Are an Entrepreneur!
Due Week 6 and worth 280 points

Student life does not generally afford a great deal of free time to pursue your personal interests; however, at one point, you may have considered turning a personal interest or hobby into an official enterprise. Today, you have finally decided to turn that hobby into a business but have realized that you need start-up capital from a lender or investor.

To obtain funding, you need to convince a lender / investor that your business is more than a hobby. You need to demonstrate that you have a firm grasp of your business, the accounting practices that impact your business, the controls needed to safeguard assets, and which accounting system will produce accurate and relevant financial information.

Write a six to eight (6-8) page business plan in which you:

  1. Describe the type of business you have created including:
    a. The product or service, and general staffing plan. Provide a rationale for your plan.
    b. The form of your business and the benefits it offers your particular business,
    c. A chart of accounts specific to your business, including a rationale as to the selection of each account. (Note: The chart of accounts is a blueprint of your business for the lender/investor. It should report the expected resources that you will consume in your business (assets), the sources of those resources (liabilities and equity), the sources of revenue, and expenditures that you expect to incur to earn those revenues. You may build a detailed chart that includes business units, divisions, product lines, etc.)
  2. Based on the form of your business, analyze whether or not you will be required to use Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) or International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) accounting methods and how the IFRS / GAAP convergence will impact your business. Suggest how you will incorporate any changes into your books and records. (Note: You need to demonstrate to the lender/investor that you have recognized possible changes to GAAP that may impact the accounting and reporting of your accounting events.)
  3. Prepare a pro forma balance sheet and income statement providing the assumptions made and support the valuations assigned.
  4. Considering the value of assets (assigned per your balance sheet) used within your business, recommend two (2) specific internal controls that you will implement to protect your company s assets and resources, justifying how each will provide assurances to management. (NOTE: Safeguarding assets and protecting personal data are paramount to ensuring the viability of a business. Demonstrate to the lender/investor that your assets will be safeguarded and customer information (if applicable) will be protected.)
  5. Based on the internal control recommendations that you made, suggest how you will implement each within your business environment, indicating how challenges or resistances will be overcome.
  6. Evaluate the impact of the regulatory environment, including the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and other regulatory requirements, on your business venture, giving considering to how you intend to comply with the requirements and the general impact to decision making within your business.
  7. Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.

Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

  • Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
  • Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.

The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:

  • Examine accounting principles and concepts used in businesses.
  • Assess appropriate internal controls, regulatory requirements according to the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, and fraud prevention and detection.
  • Use technology and information resources to research issues in financial accounting.
  • Write clearly and concisely about financial accounting using proper writing mechanics.

Click here to view the grading rubric for this assignment.

due assignment can you do this 496897

Learn IOS App, please click “View in Browser.”
Click the link above to submit your assignment.

Students, please view the “Submit a Clickable Rubric Assignment” in the Student Center.
Instructors, training on how to grade is within the Instructor Center.

Assignment 2: You Are an Entrepreneur!
Due Week 6 and worth 280 points

Student life does not generally afford a great deal of free time to pursue your personal interests; however, at one point, you may have considered turning a personal interest or hobby into an official enterprise. Today, you have finally decided to turn that hobby into a business but have realized that you need start-up capital from a lender or investor.

To obtain funding, you need to convince a lender / investor that your business is more than a hobby. You need to demonstrate that you have a firm grasp of your business, the accounting practices that impact your business, the controls needed to safeguard assets, and which accounting system will produce accurate and relevant financial information.

Write a six to eight (6-8) page business plan in which you:

  1. Describe the type of business you have created including:
    a. The product or service, and general staffing plan. Provide a rationale for your plan.
    b. The form of your business and the benefits it offers your particular business,
    c. A chart of accounts specific to your business, including a rationale as to the selection of each account. (Note: The chart of accounts is a blueprint of your business for the lender/investor. It should report the expected resources that you will consume in your business (assets), the sources of those resources (liabilities and equity), the sources of revenue, and expenditures that you expect to incur to earn those revenues. You may build a detailed chart that includes business units, divisions, product lines, etc.)
  2. Based on the form of your business, analyze whether or not you will be required to use Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) or International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) accounting methods and how the IFRS / GAAP convergence will impact your business. Suggest how you will incorporate any changes into your books and records. (Note: You need to demonstrate to the lender/investor that you have recognized possible changes to GAAP that may impact the accounting and reporting of your accounting events.)
  3. Prepare a pro forma balance sheet and income statement providing the assumptions made and support the valuations assigned.
  4. Considering the value of assets (assigned per your balance sheet) used within your business, recommend two (2) specific internal controls that you will implement to protect your company s assets and resources, justifying how each will provide assurances to management. (NOTE: Safeguarding assets and protecting personal data are paramount to ensuring the viability of a business. Demonstrate to the lender/investor that your assets will be safeguarded and customer information (if applicable) will be protected.)
  5. Based on the internal control recommendations that you made, suggest how you will implement each within your business environment, indicating how challenges or resistances will be overcome.
  6. Evaluate the impact of the regulatory environment, including the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and other regulatory requirements, on your business venture, giving considering to how you intend to comply with the requirements and the general impact to decision making within your business.
  7. Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.

Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

  • Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
  • Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.

The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:

  • Examine accounting principles and concepts used in businesses.
  • Assess appropriate internal controls, regulatory requirements according to the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, and fraud prevention and detection.
  • Use technology and information resources to research issues in financial accounting.
  • Write clearly and concisely about financial accounting using proper writing mechanics.

Click here to view the grading rubric for this assignment.

due date saturday july 20 2013 financial statement cvp analysis use the financial st 496898

Due Date Saturday, July 20, 2013

Financial Statement: CVP Analysis

Use the financial statements provided in the sidebar to compute the percentages for all items included in the income statement sheet as a percent of revenue. Remember that total revenue is always 100 percent. Be sure to use the formula function in Microsoft Excel to show the formulas for each of the percentage you compute. After completion, compute the following: CVP analysis with the following assumptions: Contribution margin Contribution margin ratio Current variable costs Fixed costs BEP

In addition, analyze and compute the sales figure forecast in case the owner of The Green Restaurant wants to generate a 15 percent increase in net income before taxes are deducted for the same period next year. Income Statement The Green Restaurant December 31, 20XX Food Revenue $47,500 Expenses Cost of Food Sales $16,415 Wages Expense $11,885 Supplies Expense $350 Utilities $1,200 Advertising $300 Depreciation Expense $160 Rent Expense $775 Interest Expense $120 Laundry Expense $560 Kitchen Fuel $150 Radio Advertising $1,200 Administrative Expense $2,200 Repairs and Maintenance $600 Total Expenses $35,915 Net Income $11,585

duif company 039 s absorption costing income statement for the last year of operatio 496899

Duif Company’s absorption costing income statement for the last year of operations is presented below.

Sales…………………………………………………$70,000
Less cost of goods sold:
Beginning inventory………………………………………. 0
Add cost of goods manufactured………………48,000
Goods available for sale………………………….48,000
Less ending inventory………………………………6,000
Cost of goods sold………………………………..42,000
Gross margin……………………………………….28,000
Less selling and admin. expenses……………..25,000
Net operating income…………………………..$ 3,000
Data on units produced and sold for the year are given below.
Units in beginning inventory……………………………..0
Units produced……………………………………….8,000
Units sold………………………………………………7,000

Fixed factory overhead totaled $16,000 for the year. This overhead was applied to products at a rate of $2 per unit. Variable selling and administrative expenses were $3 per unit sold.

Required:

Prepare a new income statement for the year using variable costing. Comment on the differences between the absorption costing and the variable costing income statements.

during the first month of operations ended may 31 2013 t shirt express company pro d 496901

During the first month of operations ended May 31, 2013, T-Shirt Express Company pro-
duced 37,000 designer T-Shirts, of which 34,300 were sold. Operating data for the month
are summarized as follows:
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $343,000
Manufacturing costs:
Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $210,900
Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57,350
Variable manufacturing cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26,640
Fixed manufacturing cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,420 319,310
Selling and administrative expenses:
Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 16,464
Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,005 28,469
During June, T-Shirt Express Company produced 31,600 designer T-shirts and sold
34,300 T-shirts. Operating data for June are summarized as follows:
Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $343,000
Manufacturing costs:
Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $180,120
Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48,980
Variable manufacturing cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22,752
Fixed manufacturing cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,420 276,272
Selling and administrative expenses:
Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 16,464
Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,005 28,469
Instructions
1. Using the absorption costing concept, prepare income statements for (a) May and
(b) June.
2. Using the variable costing concept, prepare income statements for (a) May and
(b) June.
3. a. Explain the reason for the differences in the amount of income from
operations in (1) and (2) for May.
b. Explain the reason for the differences in the amount of income from
operations in (1) and (2) for June.
4. Based on your answers to (1) and (2), did T-Shirt Express Company operate more
profitably in May or in June? Explain.

during the fiscal year ended december 31 swanson corporation engaged in the followin 496902

During the fiscal year ended December 31, Swanson Corporation engaged in the following transactions involving notes payable:

Aug 6 Borrowed $12,000 from Maple Grove Bank, signing a 45-day, 12 percent note payable.

Sep 16 Purchased office equipment from Seawald Equipment. The invoice amount was $ 18,000, and Seawald agreed to accept, as full payment, a 10 percent, three month note for the invoice amount.

Sept 20 Paid Maple Gove Bank the note plus accrued interest.

Nov 1 Borrowed $250,000 form Mike Swanson, a major corporate stockholder. The corporation issued Swanson a $250,000, 15 percent, 90 day note payable.

Dec 1 Purchased merchandise inventory in the amount of $5,000 from Gathman corporation. Gathman accepted a 90 day, 14 percent note as full settlement of the purchase. Swanson corporation uses a perpetual inventory system.

Dec. 16 The $18,000 note payable to Seawald Equipment matured today. Swanson paid accrued interest on this note and issued a new 30 day, 16 percent note payable in the amount of $18,000 to replace the note that matured.

Instructions:

a) Prepared jounal entries( in general journal form)to record the above transactions. use a 360 year in making the interest calculations.

b) Prepae the adjustin entries needed at December 31, prior to closing the accounts. Use one entry for all three notes(round to the nearest dollar)

c) Provide a possible explanation why the new 30 day note payable to Seawald Equipment pays 16 percent interest instead of the 10 percent rate charged on the September 16 note.

dustin larkin quixote consulting unit 2 and unit 3 for the past several years dustin 496904

Unit 2 Assignment

For the past several years, Dustin Larkin has operated a part-time consulting business from his home. As of June 1, 2010, Dustin decided to move to rented quarters and to operate the business, which was to be known as Quixote Consulting, on a full-time basis. Quixote Consulting entered into the following transactions during June:

June 1. The following assets were received from Dustin Larkin: cash, $10,000; accounts receivable, $1,500; supplies, $1,250; and office equipment, $7,500. There were no liabilities received.

June 1. Paid three months’ rent on a lease rental contract, $4,500.

June 2. Paid the premiums on property and casualty insurance policies, $1,800.

June 4. Received cash from clients as an advance payment for services to be provided and recorded it as unearned fees, $3,000.

June 5. Purchased additional office equipment on account from Crawford Company, $1,800.

June 6. Received cash from clients on account, $800.

June 10. Paid cash for a newspaper advertisement, $120.

June 12. Paid Crawford Company for part of the debt incurred on June 5, $800.

June 12. Recorded services provided on account for the period June 1-12, $2,250.

June 14. Paid part-time receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $400.

June 17. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned during the period June 1-16, $3,175.

June 18. Paid cash for supplies, $750.

June 20. Recorded services provided on account for the period June 13-20, $1,100.

June 24. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period June 17 24, $1,850.

June 26. Received cash from clients on account, $1,600.

June 27. Paid part-time receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $400.

June 29. Paid telephone bill for June, $130.

June 30. Paid electricity bill for June, $200.

June 30. Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period June 25-30, $2,050.

June 30. Recorded services provided on account for the remainder of June, $1,000.

June 30. Dustin withdrew $4,500 for personal use.

Requirements:

1. Journalize each transaction in a two-column journal, referring to the following chart of accounts in selecting the accounts to be debited and credited.

11 Cash
12 Accounts Receivable
14 Supplies
15 Prepaid Rent
16 Prepaid Insurance
18 Office Equipment
19 Accumulated Depreciation
21 Accounts Payable
22 Salaries Payable
23 Unearned Fees
31 Dustin Larkin, Capital
32 Dustin Larkin, Drawing
41 Fees Earned
51 Salary Expense
52 Rent Expense
53 Supplies Expense
54 Depreciation Expense
55 Insurance Expense
59 Miscellaneous Expense

2. Post the journal to a ledger of four-column accounts.

3. Prepare a trial balance as of June 30, 2010.

Unit 3 Assignment

Continue with the Assignment from Unit 2, using the same Excel Template complete the following steps:
1. Prepare the Adjusting entries A-F.

a. Insurance expired during June is $150.
b. Supplies on hand on June 30 are $1,020.
c. Depreciation of office equipment for June is $500.
d. Accrued receptionist salary on June 30 is $120.
e. Rent expired during June is $1,500.
f. Unearned fees on June 30 are $2,000.

2. Prepare an income statement, a statement of owner’s equity, and a balance sheet.

3. Journalize and Post the adjusting entries.

4. Journalize and post the closing entries. (Income Summary is account #33 in the chart of accounts.)

5. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

e1 1 reporting amounts on the four basic financial statements lo2 using the followin 496905

E1-1 Reporting Amounts on the Four Basic Financial Statements [LO2] Using the following table and the equations underlying each of the four basic financial statements, show (a) that the balance sheet is in balance, (b) that net income is properly calculated, (c) what caused changes in the retained earnings account, and (d) what caused changes in the cash account. (Negative amounts should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Assets $ 19,260 Liabilities 14,540 Stockholders’ Equity 4,720 Revenue 10,530 Expenses 9,280 Net income 1,250 Dividends 680 Beginning Retained Earnings 3,620 Ending Retained Earnings 4,190 Cash Flows from Operating Activities 1,670 Cash Flows from Investing Activities (1,460 ) Cash Flows from Financing Activities (870 ) Beginning Cash 1,170 Ending Cash 510 Required: a. Assets = + = $ + $ Assets reported = $ b. Net income = = $ $ Net income reported = $

c. Ending Retained Earnings = + = $ + $ $ = $

d. Ending Cash = + + + = $ + $ + $ + $ = $

e11 14 kaiser company s partial amortization schedule follows 496910

Kaiser Company s partial amortization schedule follows:

Payment NumberDatePaymentInterest Expense (Principal X 6% X 1/12)PrincipalMortgage Balance

Loan1/1/2013 $500,000.00

11/31/2013 3,597.30 2,500.00 1,097.30 498,902.70

22/28/2013 3,597.30 2,494.51 1,102.79 497,799.91

33/31/2013 3,597.30 2,489.00 1,108.30 496,691.61

44/30/2013 3,597.30 2,483.46 1,113.84 495,577.77

55/31/2013 3,597.30 2,477.89 1,119.41 494,458.36

66/30/2013 3,597.30 2,472.29 1,125.01 493,333.35

77/31/2013 3,597.30 2,466.67 1,130.63 492,202.72

88/31/2013 3,597.30 2,461.01 1,136.29 491,066.43

99/30/2013 3,597.30 2,455.33 1,141.97 489,924.46

1010/31/2013 3,597.30 2,449.62 1,147.68 488,776.78

1111/30/2013 3,597.30 2,443.88 1,153.42 487,623.36

1212/31/2013 3,597.30 2,438.12 1,159.18 486,464.18

2013 totals 43,167.60 29,631.78 13,535.82

Requirements

1. Journalize the note issuance and the reclassification of the current portion on January 1, 2013 (explanations are not required).

2. What is the balance in Estimated warranty payable?

3. Journalize the second payment on February 28, 2013 (do not round).

e12 17 the charter for kcas tv inc authorizes the company to issue 100 000 shares of 496915

The charter for KCAS-TV, Inc., authorizes the company to issue 100,000 shares of $4, no-par preferred stock and 500,000 shares of common stock with $1 par value. During its start-up phase, KCAS completed the following transactions:

Sept 6 Issued 275 shares of common stock to the promoters who organized the corporation, receiving cash of $8,250.

12 Issued 400 shares of preferred stock for cash of $20,000.

14 Issued 1,600 shares of common stock in exchange for land valued at $18,000.

30 Closed net income of $32,000 into Retained earnings.

Requirements:

1. Record the transactions in the general journal.

2. Prepare the stockholders equity section of the KCAS-TV balance sheet at September 30, 2012.

e15 18 large land photo shop has asked you to determine whether the company 039 s ab 496920

E15-18

Large Land Photo Shop has asked you to determine whether the company’s ability to pay current liabilities and total liabilities improved or deteriorated during 2012. To answer this question, you gather the following data:

2012 2011

Cash

$ 58,000

$ 57,000

Short-term investments

31,000

Net receivables

110,000

132,000

Inventory

247,000

297,000

Total assets

585,000

535,000

Total current liabilities

255,000

222,000

Long-term note payable

46,000

48,000

Income from operations

180,000

153,000

Interest expense

52,000

39,000

Requirement

  • 1.Compute the following ratios for 2012 and 2011:
    • a.Current ratio
    • b.Acid-test ratio
    • c.Debt ratio
    • d.Debt to equity ratio

e16 20 eps simple capital structure amp p16 7 computation of basic and diluted eps 496923

E16.20. (eps: Simple Capital Structure)
6. On January 1, 2012, Bailey Industries had stock outstanding as follows.
6% Cumulative preferred stock, $100 par value, issued and outstanding 10,000 shares $1,000,000
Common stock, $10 par value, issued and outstanding 200,000 shares 2,000,000

To acquire the net assets of three smaller companies, Bailey authorized the issuance of an additional 170,000 common shares. The acquisitions took place as shown below.
Date of Acquisition Shares Issued
Company A April 1, 2012 60,000
Company B July 1, 2012 80,000
Company C October 1, 2012 30,000

On May 14, 2012, Bailey realized a $90,000 (before taxes) insurance gain on the expropriation of investments originally purchased in 2000.
On December 31, 2012, Bailey recorded net income of $300,000 before tax and exclusive of the gain.
Instructions
Assuming a 40% tax rate, compute the earnings per share data that should appear on the financial statements of Bailey Industries as of December 31, 2012. Assume that the expropriation is extraordinary.

P16.7. (computation of Basic and Diluted Eps)
7 Charles Austin of the controller’s office of Thompson Corporation was given the assignment of determining the basic and diluted earnings per share values for the year ending December 31, 2013. Austin has compiled the information listed below.

1. The company is authorized to issue 8,000,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. As of December 31, 2012, 2,000,000 shares had been issued and were outstanding.
2. The per share market prices of the common stock on selected dates were as follows.
Price per Share
July 1, 2012 $20.00
January 1, 2013 21.00
April 1, 2013 25.00
July 1, 2013 11.00
August 1, 2013 10.50
November 1, 2013 9.00
December 31, 2013 10.00

3. A total of 700,000 shares of an authorized 1,200,000 shares of convertible preferred stock had been issued on July 1, 2012. The stock was issued at its par value of $25, and it has a cumulative dividend of $3 per share. The stock is convertible into common stock at the rate of one share of convertible preferred for one share of common. The rate of conversion is to be automatically adjusted for stock splits and stock dividends. Dividends are paid quarterly on September 30, December 31, March 31, and June 30.
4. Thompson Corporation is subject to a 40% income tax rate.
5. The after-tax net income for the year ended December 31, 2013, was $11,550,000.

The following specific activities took place during 2013.

1. January 1 A 5% common stock dividend was issued. The dividend had been declared on December 1, 2012, to all stockholders of record on December 29, 2012.
2. April 1 A total of 400,000 shares of the $3 convertible preferred stock was converted into common stock. The company issued new common stock and retired the preferred stock. This was the only conversion of the preferred stock during 2013.
3. July 1 A 2-for-1 split of the common stock became effective on this date. The board of directors had authorized the split on June 1.
4. August 1 A total of 300,000 shares of common stock were issued to acquire a factory building.
5. November 1 A total of 24,000 shares of common stock were purchased on the open market at $9 per share. These shares were to be held as treasury stock and were still in the treasury as of December 31, 2013.
6. Common stock cash dividends Cash dividends to common stockholders were declared and paid as follows.

April 15 $0.30 per share
October 15 $0.20 per share

7. Preferred stock cash dividends Cash dividends to preferred stockholders were declared and paid as scheduled.

Instructions
(a) Determine the number of shares used to compute basic earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.
(b) Determine the number of shares used to compute diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.
(c) Compute the adjusted net income to be used as the numerator in the basic earnings per share calculation for the year ended December 31, 2013.

discussion question 496841

Week 2 DQs

DQ 1


Voice over the Internet Protocol (VoIP). What is VoIP and how is it different from the Plain Old Telephone Service (POTS) What are some issues an organization (not individuals) should analyze when evaluating the move from a traditional phone system to VoIP Explain the impact (positive and negative) on an organization when moving to and using VoIP.

NOTE: this is covered outside the assigned reading for this week.

Chapter 11, Business Data Networks and Telecommunications

Chapter 9, Telecommunications Essentials

Additional material on the topic can be found in the library of on the internet.

What is VoIP and how is it different from the Plain Old Telephone Service (POTS)?

What are some issues an organization (not individuals) should analyze when evaluating the move from a traditional phone system to VoIP Explain the impact (positive and negative) on an organization when moving to and using VoIP.

Week 2 DQ 2

Respond by Day 5

Write a 200- to 300-word response to the following:

What is the nature of digital signals, binary, and other multilevel signal types?
What are the advantages of digital signals over analog signals? Cover noise suppression in your explanation.

Week 2 DQ 3

Write a 200- to 300-word response to the following:

Explain digital multiplexing, the digital T(X), and SONET hierarchy. Explain the differences between the American and European systems.

Explain digital services such as Integrated Services Digital Network, Switched Multimegabit Data System, and Switch 56.

discussion question 496842

Week 3 DQs

DQ 1

Write a 200 word response to the following questions:

What is a packet What is packet switching?

How would you explain the concept of packet switching

What are the advantages and disadvantages of packet switching over circuit switching?

Week 3 DQ 2

How would you describe “what is the internet?” How does it works What makes the internet the same/different (technology wise) from other packet networks (You may need to do additional research on different WAN technologies)

Week 3 DQ 3

Access this week s Electronic Reserve Readings and select a peer-reviewed article on basic network topologies. You may supplement with material from other sources, but you must have at least one peer-reviewed article. Remember to cite your sources.

Write a 200 word response to the following questions:

Select one of the types of network processors such as hubs, switches, routers, and gateways?

What are the advantages and disadvantages of your selection?

What type of media is typically used for connectivity?

What are the performance specs in terms of reliability, speed capabilities, and nominal distance for reliable spans with the typical media?

Provide an example of how the selected network processor is used in the network.

discussion questions 496845

Answer in 200 words + reference

Please format with the following: question, answer, reference. Question, answer, reference.

1). Please differentiate between an operating budget and a financial budget. Differentiate between sales forecast and a sales budget.

2). Budgeting for a manufacturing company is completely different from budgeting for a retail company. Do you agree? Please explain.

3). The Markov technique involves forecasting sales by examining consumer behavior. True or False. Please explain.

4). Pro forma statements are those statements prepared in conjunction with continuous budgets. Do you agree? Please explain. How do strategic planning, long-range planning, and budgeting differ

discussion questions 496846

Week 2

DQ 1

The Bloom Design Group, similarly to other company which uses computer systems in day to day functions, would significantly take advantage of a TCB.

How could a trusted computing base (TCB) function in that company s information system?

Describe briefly the kind of hardware, software, and firmware that might be used within the TCB.

How is the concept of a TCB illustrated by the ring of trust model?
DQ 2

The normal Criteria was instituted to bring together the different safety assessment systems available in the world. By evaluating the ITSEC, TCSEC, as well as other assessment systems, resemblances were mapped one to the other and a general system was created.

discussion questions week three acc 291 496848

Discussion Questions: Week Three

1. Why does a company choose to form as a corporation? What are the steps required to become a corporation? What are the advantages and disadvantages of the corporate form of doing business?

2. Why is preferred stock referred to as preferred? What are some of the features added to preferred stock that make it more attractive to investors? Would you select preferred stock or common stock as an investment? Why?

3. What are the different types of dividends corporations may issue? When should a corporation pay dividends? Do you prefer a stock dividend or a cash dividend? Why

4. Why do corporations buy back their own stock? What does it tell you about the corporation? What effect does the purchase have on the price of a company s stock?

5. Chen, Inc. purchases 1,000 shares of its own previously issued $5 per common stock for $12,000. Assuming the shares are held in the treasury, what effect does this transaction have on (a) net income, (b) total assets, (c) total paid-in capital, and (d) total stockholders equity? Chen, Inc s treasure stock is resold for $15,000. What effect does this transaction have on (a) net income, (b) total assets, (c) total paid-in capital, and (d) total stockholders equity?

disscussion question 496851

Assignment 1: Stolen Credit Card

Lori received a credit card in the mail from a company that had taken her name and address from a white pages directory without her knowledge. Upset about the unauthorized use of her name, Lori planned to contact the company to lodge a complaint. Before she could do that, her roommate stole the card and charged thousands of dollars’ worth of merchandise to it without Lori’s knowledge.

The card issuer claimed that Lori was fully responsible for the purchases, while Lori claimed that she should have no liability whatsoever for the purchases.

Research government agencies that provide consumer credit protection or that regulate credit card companies, using your textbook, the Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet. Based on the facts of the case and research, respond to the following questions:

  • If the card issuer sues Lori, who might the court rule in favor of and why?
  • Does the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) offer any protection to Lori?
  • What ethical issues are raised by the card issuer’s conduct?
  • What can you do to protect yourself from something like this happening to you?

disscussion question 496852

Assignment 2: What Went Wrong?

Friend’s Bank is seeking to hire a new teller. Darrell has applied for the position. His application states that five years ago, he was convicted for embezzlement as a teller. In the interview, Darrell reveals he spent three years in prison and is now on probation for three years. He claims that he turned his life around, became a Christian, and is a law-abiding citizen.

Darrell is invited for a second interview. The first interviewer does not share the information about the embezzlement with the second interviewer. The second interview goes well with no mention about the embezzlement. The second interviewer subsequently hires Darrell. Within three weeks, Darrell starts to flirt with a younger female teller, and on one occasion, actually grabs her behind.

The teller complains to the bank. Darrell’s file is revisited and he is terminated the next day. Darrell contends the termination was because of his race.

Research employee discrimination, using your textbook, the Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet. Based on the facts of the case and research, respond to the following questions:

  • Was the bank justified in terminating Darrell on the grounds of his prior embezzlement conviction? Explain.
  • Would the bank have grounds to terminate Darrell even if he had not been convicted of embezzlement? Explain.
  • Does Darrell’s behavior with the female teller constitute sexual harassment, and if yes, what type?
  • Were there any ethical problems with the way the bank handled the initial and subsequent interviews? Explain

dividendsdividends have been declared at year end for each independent case below de 496853

Dividends

Dividends have been declared at year-end. For each independent case below, determine the total amount of dividends that each class of stock will receive. For all cases assume there are 8,000 shares outstanding of $10 par value common stock and 2,000 shares outstanding of 10%, $100 par value preferred stock. Show your calculations.

Case

Total Dividends Declared

Preferred Stock Cumulative

Preferred Dividends in Arrears

Total Amount to Preferred

Total Amount to Common

A

$40,000

No

No

$

$

B

100,000

No

No

$

$

C

75,000

Yes

1 year

$

$

D

85,000

Yes

3 years

$

$

E

15,000

Yes

No

$

$

Stock Splits, Dividends and Restrictions on Retained Earnings

Match each item/event pair below with the indicated change in the item. An individual classification may be used more than once, or not at all. For each dividend, assume that both declaration and payment or distribution has occurred.

Classifications

A. Item increases

B. Item decreases

C. Item is unchanged

D. Direction of change cannot be determined

Classification

Item

Event

1.

Book value per share

Stock dividend

2.

Par value per common share

Cash dividend

3.

Total retained earnings

Stock split

4.

Earnings per common share

Restriction of retained earnings

5.

Number of common shares outstanding

Stock dividend

6.

Total retained earnings

Cash dividend

7.

Total paid in capital

Stock dividend

8.

Par value per common share

Stock dividend

in divisional income statements prepared for franklin electrical company the payroll 496854

In divisional income statements prepared for Franklin Electrical Company, the Payroll Department costs are charged back to user divisions on the basis of the number of payroll checks, and the Purchasing Department costs are charged back on the basis of the number of purchase requisitions. The Payroll Department had expenses of 44,000 and the Purchasing Department had expenses of 18,720 for the year. The following annual data for Residential, Commercial, and Government Contract Divisions were obtained from corporate records:

Residential Commercial Goverment

Sales 420,000 500,000 1,800,000

Number of employees

Weekley payroll(52 wks per yr) 144 72 108

Monthly payroll 25 20 18

Number of purchase requisition per yr 1,800 1,530 1,350

A. Determine the total amount of payroll checks and purchase requisitions processed per year by each division.

B. Using the activity base information in a, determine the annual amount of payroll and purchasing costs charged back to the residential, commercial, and Government contract divisions from payroll and purchasing services.

C. Why does the residential division have a larger service department charge than the other two divisions, even though its sales are lower?

do not understand 496855

You ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities.

As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more time-intensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide.

In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six- to eight-page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations.

Final Paper Spreadsheet

I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.

II. Current company cash flow

a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method.

b. Once you ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions:

i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company funds?

ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow?

iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not?

iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why?

III. Product cost: ABC Company believes that it has an additional 5,000 machine hours available in the current facility before it would need to expand. ABC Company uses machine hours to allocate the fixed factory overhead, and units sold to allocate the fixed sales expenses. Based on current research, ABC Company expects that it will take twice as long to produce the expansion product as it currently takes to produce its existing product.

a. What is the product cost for the expansion product under absorption and variable costing?

b. By adding this new expansion product, it helps to absorb the fixed factory and sales expenses. How much cheaper does this expansion make the existing product?

c. Assuming ABC Company wants a 40% gross margin for the new product, what selling price should it set for the expansion product?

d. Assuming the same sales mix of these two products, what are the contribution margins and break-even points by product?

IV. Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:

Year 1, $15,000
Year 2, $13,000
Year 3, $10,000
Year 4, $10,000
Year 5, $6,000

ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.

a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment (ignore income taxes and depreciation)?

b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?

c. Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not?

V. Conclusion:

a. What are the major risk factors that you see in this project?

b. As the controller and a management accountant, what is your responsibility to this project?

c. What do you recommend the CEO do?

Writing the Final Paper

1. Must be six to eight double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

2. Must include a title page with the following:

a. Title of paper

b. Student s name

c. Course name and number

d. Instructor s name

e. Date submitted

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document at least three, but no more than five sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center

does somebody can help me with this problem 496857

2. The partnership of Douglas, Krismerry, and Frank has the following trial balance on December 31, 2013:

Debit Credit

Cash 25,000

Accounts Receivable (net) 35,000

Inventory 40,000

Plant and Equipment (net) 220,000

Accounts Payable 45,000

Douglas, Capital 125,000

Krismerry, Capital l95,000

Frank, Capital l55,000

320,000 320,000

The partners share profits and losses as follows: Douglas, 50 percent; Krismerry, 30 percent; and Frank, 20 percent. The partners have decided to liquidate their partnership by installments. Cash is distributed to the partners at the end of each month. A summary of the liquidation transactions follows:

January

a. $30,000 is collected on accounts receivable; balance is uncollectible.

b. $25,000 received for the entire inventory.

c. $1,500 liquidation expense paid.

d. $45,000 paid to creditors.

e. $10,000 cash retained in the business at the end of the month.

February

f. $2,000 in liquidation expenses paid.

g. As part payment of his capital, Frank accepted an item of special equipment that he developed, which had a book value of $10,000. The partners agreed that a value of $14,000 should be placed on this item for liquidation purposes.

h. $5,000 cash retained in the business at the end of the month.

March

i. $155,000 received on sale of remaining plant and equipment.

j. $1,000 liquidation expenses paid. No cash retained in the business.

Required:Prepare a statement of partnership realization and liquidation with supporting schedules of safe payments to partners.

the doley company budgets 496858

The Doley Company has planned the following sales for the next three months:

January

February

March

Budgeted Sales

$40,000

$50,000

$70,000

Sales are made 20% for cash and 80% on account. From experience, the company has learned that a month’s sales on account are collected according to the following pattern:

Month of sale

60%

First month following sale

30%

Second month following sale

8%

Uncollectible

2%

The company requires a minimum cash balance of $5,000 to start a month. The beginning cash balance in March is budgeted to be $6,000.

Required

a) Compute the budgeted cash receipts for March. Rember to think in terms of when actual cash is planned to be received. If you are not going to receive the cash it is not part of the budget. Also pay close attention to cash vs credit sales

b) The following additional information has been provided for March:

Inventory purchases (all paid in cash in March)

$28,000

Operating Expenses (all paid in cash in March)

$40,000

Depreciation expense for March

$5,000

Dividends paid in March

$4,000

Prepare a cash budget in good form for the month of March, using this information and the budgeted cash receipts you computed for part a) above. The company can borrow in any dollar amount and will not pay interest until April.

the domestic and international financial marketplace 496859

8. a.) National Telephone and Telegraph (NTT) Company common stock currently sells for $60 per share. NTT is expected to pay a $4 dividend during the coming year, and the price of the stock is expected to increase to $65 a year from now.

Determine the expected (ex ante) percentage holding period return on NTT common stock.

b.) Suppose that one year later, NTT s common stock is selling for $75 per share. During the one-year period, NTT paid a $4 common stock dividend. Determine the realized (ex post) percentage holding period return on NTT common stock.

c.) Repeat Part b given thatNTT s common stock is selling for $58 one year later.

d.) Repeat Part b given that NTT s common stock is selling for $50 one year later.

donald ruddy company adjusted account balances for the year ended december 31 20xx 496860

DONALD RUDDY COMPANY Adjusted Account Balances For the Year Ended December 31, 20XX

Accounts Payable $ 5,060

Accounts Receivable 5,340

Accumulated Depreciation Office Equipment 400

Advertising Expense 210

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 300

Cash 7,170

Depreciation Expense Office Equipment 200

Insurance Expense 140

Merchandise Inventory, January 1, 20XX 5,000

Notes Payable 1,000

Office Equipment 2,000

Office Supplies 90

Office Supplies Expense 210

Prepaid Insurance 190

Purchases 40,000

Purchase Discounts 170

Purchase Returns and Allowances 500

Rent Expense 1,500

Ruddy, Capital 4,100

Ruddy, Drawing 250

Salaries Expense 8,055

Salaries Payable 550

Sales 60,380

Sales Discounts 200

Sales Returns and Allowances 350

Taxes Payable 420

Transportation-in 250

Utilities Expense 385

Vehicle 1,340

Note: The ending merchandise inventory on December 31, 20XX, was $3,000.

1. The cost of goods sold is A. $44,580. C. $38,580. B. $41,580. D. $33,580.

2. The net cost of purchases are A. $39,080. C. $39,750. B. $39,580. D. $39,830.

3. The cost of goods available for sale is A. $39,080. C. $41,580. B. $39,330. D. $44,580.

4. Net sales for the period amount to A. $59,830. C. $60,380. B. $60,180. D. $60,930.

5. What are the total operating expenses? A. $10,105 C. $10,700 B. $10,490 D. $11,000

doncorporation costofgoodsmanufacturedschedule 496861

. DonCorporationincurredthe followingcostswhilemanufacturingitsproduct.

Materialsused inproduct

130,000

Advertisingexpense

49,000

Depreciationonplant

65,000

Propertytaxesonplant

16,000

Propertytaxeson administrativebuilding

7,700

Deliveryexpense

20,000

Laborcosts ofassembly-lineworkers

112,000

Salescommissions

31,000

Factorysuppliesused

24,000

Salariespaidtosalesclerks

58,000

Work-in-processinventorywas$23,000 atJanuary1 and$15,800 atDecember31.Finishedgoods inventorywas$67,000 atJanuary1 and$52,600 atDecember31.

Instructions

Prepareacostofgoodsmanufacturedscheduleanddeterminetheamountofcostofgoodssold.

done quickly 496862

Project Descriptions

Research Paper

MNC Paper

Additionally, you are to select a multinational company (MNC) and present the name of the company to your professor for approval (post in the conference). Your company must have segments, inventory, and accounts receivable.

The approved multinational company will serve as an example for discussion throughout the semester as well as an actual case study where you will relate the concepts of IFRS and international accounting issues, including transfer pricing and taxation, creating a 7 10 page, double spaced, deliverable. APA format is required as explained by your professor.

Power Point Presentation

For the final week of class students will present and comment on a Power Point file presentation based on the research paper. This presentation will occur in the conference discussion. The Power Point file must also be submitted in the assignment folder, along with the research paper, prior to the due date assigned by your professor.

The Power Point presentation should be brief (no more than 7 slides) with one slide for the Research Paper IFRS topic and 6 slides for the MNC Paper. Use bullets on your Power Point presentation. Do not copy and paste paragraphs from your papers. The title page and works cited page are not counted in the 7 slide maximum.

You must post comments on the work of at least one other student, in the conferences, so all students receive at least one set of comments. Post your Power Point presentation early so students have a chance to view it and make comments. This is our constructive criticism assignment.

My MNC is BMW

iTS AN INTERNATIONAL ACCOUNTING CLASS,

several discussin we have had in class, were

World accounting diversity

international harmonization of financial reporting

International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)

Comparative Accounting

Foreign Currency Transactions and Hedging Foreign Risk

Translation of Foreign Currency Financial Statements

Additional Financial Reporting Issues

Analysis of Foreign Financial Statements

International Taxation

International Transfer Pricing

the doodad firm can produce either widgets or gadgets 496864

You deposit $15,000 at the end of each year in an IRA. The bank pays 2% APR, compounded daily. How much will be in the account when you retire in 35 years?

You need to borrow $65,000 for a new car. The annual interest rate is 12%, compounded quarterly. You will be making quarterly payments for three years.

1. What is your quarterly payment?
2. How much will you owe on the loan after you make the first payment?
3. How much will you owe on the loan after you make the 2nd payment?

The Doodad firm can produce either widgets or gadgets.
Widgets sell for $5.00. Widgets have a fixed cost of $15,000 and a per unit variable cost of $4.
Gadgets sell for $5.00. Gadgets have a fixed cost of $40,000 and a per unit variable cost of $1.00.
Calculate the breakeven point for Widgets and calculate the breakeven point for gadgets.

The Doodad firm can produce either widgets or gadgets.
Widgets sell for $5.00. Widgets have a fixed cost of $15,000 and a per unit variable cost of $3.00.
Gadgets sell for $5.00. Gadgets have a fixed cost of $35,000 and a per unit variable cost of $1.00.
Calculate the indifference point for widgets and gadgets AND interpret the results.

Gadget Incorporated expects total sales of $10,000.
The selling price per unit is $20.
The ordering cost is $5 per order and the inventory cost is $2 per unit.
Please answer all of the following questions:
A. What is the EOQ?
B. How many orders will be placed per year?
C. What is the total carrying cost?
D. What is the total ordering cost?

the download instructions for acct 504 case study 2 internal control case study 2 in 496866

Case Study 2 Internal Control

Due by Sunday of Week 5,

LJB Company, a local distributor, has asked your accounting firm to evaluate their system of internal controls because they are planning to go public in the future. The president wants to be aware of any new regulations required of his company if they go public, so he met with a colleague of yours at a local restaurant. The president of the company explained the current system of internal controls to your colleague. Your colleague has since been promoted to a tax position so she has passed on the information below so you can generate recommendations for the partner at your accounting firm to share with the president of LJB Company.

Since LJB Company is a relatively lean organization, they have a lot of faith in their long-term employees. They have one accountant who serves as treasurer and controller, which streamlines many of their processes. In this dual role, he purchases all of the supplies and pays for these purchases. He also receives the checks and completes the monthly bank reconciliation. The accountant is so busy that the company handles petty cash a bit differently. All employees have access to the petty cash in a desk drawer and are asked to only place a note if they use any of the cash.

The accountant has recently started using pre-numbered invoices and wants to buy an indelible ink machine to print their checks. The president is waiting to hear from you if this is a necessary purchase before authorizing.

On payday, the checks are picked up by the accountant and left in his office for pick-up. Before he leaves for the weekend, he will move the checks into a safe in his office.

The president is still quite embarrassed because he had to fire one of his employees for viewing pornography on a company computer. He later found out this individual was a convicted felon who served time for molesting children. The company had a hard time getting the employee to admit it was him because the company does not assign individual passwords. The president expressed his frustration because both he and the accountant both interview and approve all of the new hires.

Required:

Based on the above information, prepare a Word document to address the following.

1. Inform the president of any new internal control requirements if the company decides to go public. (7 points)

2. Advise the president of what the company is doing right (they are doing some things well), and also recommend to the president whether or not they should buy the indelible ink machine. When you advise the president, please be sure to reference the applicable internal-control principle that applies. (13 points)

3. Advise the president of what the company is doing wrong (they are definitely doing some things poorly). Please be sure to include the internal-control principle that is being violated along with a recommendation for improvement. (20 points)

You must prepare a formal report for the partner to distribute to the president, so no abbreviations or short-hand answers. You also must cite your references. At a minimum, your textbook should be cited.

Below is a grading rubric for this assignment.

Category

Points

Description

Understanding

10

Demonstrate a strong grasp of the problem at hand. Demonstrate understanding of how the course concepts apply to the problem.

Analysis

30

Apply original thought to solving the business problem. Apply concepts from the course material correctly toward solving the business problem.

Execution

10

Write your answer clearly and succinctly using strong organization and proper grammar. Use citations correctly.

Total

50

A quality paper will meet or exceed all of the above requirements.

Best Practices

The following are best practices in preparing this paper.

  • Cover page: Include whom you prepared the paper for, who prepared it, and the date.
  • Table of contents: List the main ideas and sections of the paper and the pages where they are located. Illustrations should be included separately.
  • Introduction:Use a header on your paper. This will indicate that you are introducing the paper.

    The purpose of an introduction or opening is to

1. introduce the subject and why the subject is important;

2. preview the main ideas and the order in which they will be covered; and

3. Establish the tone of the document.

Include in the introduction a reason for the audience to read the paper. Also include an overview of what you will cover and the importance of the material. (This should include or introduce the questions you are asked to answer in each assignment.)

  • Body of the report: Use a header with the name of the case study. An example is, “The Development of Hotel X: A World Class Resort.” Proceed to break out the main ideas: State the main ideas, the major points of each idea, and provide evidence. Show some type of division, such as separate, labeled sections; separate groups of paragraphs; or headers. Include the information you found during your research and investigation.
  • Summary and conclusion: Summarizing is similar to paraphrasing but presents the gist of the material in fewer words than the original. An effective summary identifies the main ideas and the major support points from the body of the report; minor details are left out. Summarize the benefits of the ideas and how they affect the subject.
  • Work cited: Use the citation format specified in the Syllabus.

dq assignment acc 205 ashford 496867

  1. Accounting Cycle

    Financial statements are a product of the accounting cycle. Think about two different companies: a manufacturing company, and a retail company. Why would different companies have different accounting cycles? Would you expect the steps of the accounting cycle to be the same for each company? Why or why not?

    Guided Response:
    Review several of your peers posts and identify what steps of the accounting cycle that you feel are the most critical. Respond to at least two of your peers and provide recommendations to extend their thinking. Challenge your peers by asking a question that may cause them to reevaluate their position on the accounting cycle.

  2. Bank Reconciliation

    What is the purpose of a bank reconciliation? What are the reasons for differences between the cash reported in the accounting records and the cash balance in the bank statements?

    Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know what happens to the discrepancies between the book balance and the bank balance. Could these differences just be written off?

dq1 and qd2 496875

DQ1 week 2

In looking at your business, when and why would you want to use a one-sample mean test (either z or t) or a two-sample t-test Create a null and alternate hypothesis for one of these issues. How would you use the results?

DQ2 week 2

Variation exists in virtually all parts of our lives. We often see variation in results in what we spend (utility costs each month, food costs, business supplies, etc.). Consider the measures and data you use (in either your personal or job activities). When are differences (between one time period and another, between different production lines, etc.) between average or actual results important How can you or your department decide whether or not the variation is important How could using a mean difference test help?

devry acct 305 week 1 quiz 496789

1.

Question :

(TCO 1) The capitalized cost of equipment excludes:

Student Answer:

Maintenance.

Sales tax.

Shipping.

Installation.

2.

Question :

(TCO 1) Simpson and Homer Corporation acquired an office building on three acres of land for a lump-sum price of $2,400,000. The building was completely furnished. According to independent appraisals, the fair values were $1,300,000, $780,000, and $520,000 for the building, land, and furniture and fixtures, respectively. The initial values of the building, land, and furniture and fixtures would be:

Student Answer:

Option a

Option b

Option c

Option d

3.

Question :

(TCO 3) In a nonmonetary exchange of equipment, if the exchange has commercial substance, a gain is recognized if:

Student Answer:

The fair value of the equipment received exceeds the book value of the equipment received.

The book value of the equipment received exceeds the fair value of the equipment given up.

The fair value of the equipment surrendered exceeds the book value of the equipment given up.

None of the above is correct.

4.

Question :

(TCO 1) Interest is eligible to be capitalized as part of an asset’s cost, rather than being expensed immediately, when:

Student Answer:

The interest is incurred during the construction period of the asset.

The asset is a discrete construction project for sale or lease.

The asset is self-constructed, rather than acquired.

All of the above are correct.

5.

Question :

(TCO 3) Alamos Co. exchanged equipment and $18,000 cash for similar equipment. The book value and the fair value of the old equipment were $82,000 and $90,000, respectively.

Assuming that the exchange has commercial substance, Alamos would record a gain/(loss) of:

Student Answer:

$26,000.

$8,000.

$(8,000).

$0.

devry acct 305 week 3 quiz 496792

1.

Question :

(TCO 4)In the first year of an asset’s life, which of the following methods has the largest depreciation?

Student Answer:

Straight-line.

Double-Declining balance.

Sum-of-the-years’ digits.

Composite or group.

2.

Question :

(TCO 4)Amortization refers to the cost allocation for:

Student Answer:

A patent.

A building.

Land.

A silver mine.

3.

Question :

(TCO 4)The depreciable base for an asset is:

Student Answer:

Its service life.

The excess of its cost over residual value.

The difference between its replacement value and cost.

The amount allowable under MACRS.

4.

Question :

(TCO 4)Cutter Enterprises purchased equipment for $72,000 on January 1, 2011. The equipment is expected to have a five-year life and a residual value of $6,000.
Using the straight-line method, depreciation for 2011 would be:

Student Answer:

$13,200.

$14,400.

$72,000.

None of the above is correct.

5.

Question :

(TCO 4)A change in the estimated useful life and residual value of machinery in the current year is handled as:

Student Answer:

A retrospective change back to the date of acquisition as though the current estimated life and residual value had been used all along.

A prospective change from the current year through the remainder of its useful life, using the new estimates.

A cumulative adjustment to income in the current year for the difference in depreciation under the new vs. old estimates.

None of the above is correct.

devry acct 305 week 4 midterm 496794

1.

Question :

(TCO 1) The acquisition costs of property, plant, and equipment do not include:

Student Answer:

The ordinary and necessary costs to bring the asset to its desired condition and location for use.

The net invoice price.

Legal fees, delivery charges, installation, and any applicable sales tax.

Maintenance costs during the first 30 days of use.

2.

Question :

(TCO 3) Below are data relative to an exchange of similar assets by Grand Forks Corp. Assume the exchange has commercial substance.

In Case A, Grand Forks would record the new equipment at:

3.

Question :

(TCO 2) The exclusive right to benefit from a creative work, such as a film, is a:

4.

Question :

(TCO 4) Assuming an asset is used evenly over a four-year service life, which method of depreciation will always result in the largest amount of depreciation in the first year?

5.

Question :

(TCO 4) On September 30, 2011, Bricker Enterprises purchased a machine for $200,000. The estimated service life is 10 years with a $20,000 residual value. Bricker records partial-year depreciation based on the number of months in service. Depreciation for 2011, using double-declining balance, would be:

6.

Question :

(TCO 4) Accounting for a change in the estimated service life of equipment:

7.

Question :

(TCO 5) The investment category for which the investor’s “positive intent and ability to hold” is important is:

8.

Question :

(TCO 5) Consolidated financial statements are prepared when one company has:

.

9.

Question :

(TCO 4) Interest may be capitalized:

rred.

10.

Question :

(TCO 2) Software development costs are capitalized if they are incurred:

11.

Question :

(TCO 4) The factors that need to be determined to compute depreciation are an asset’s:

12.

Question :

(TCO 5) Which of the following types of securities only includes debt securities?

13.

Question :

(TCO 1) The capitalized cost of land excludes:

14.

Question :

(TCO 3) When selling property, plant, and equipment for cash:

15.

Question :

(TCO 2) Research and development (R&D) costs:

16.

Question :

(TCO 4) The depreciable base for an asset is:

17.

Question :

(TCO 5) Trading securities are most commonly found in the books of:

19.

Question :

(TCO 5) When using the equity method to account for an investment, cash dividends received by the investor from the investee should be recorded:

1.

Question :

(TCO 2) Briefly explain the differences between U.S. GAAP and International Financial Reporting Standards in accounting for research and development expenditures other than software development costs.

2.

Question :

(TCO 5) Discuss the following questions.

What securities must be classified within one of the three categories of held-to-maturity, available-for-sale, and trading? (Do not describe how to determine how securities are classified among these three categories.) Identify the four primary recording activities related to investments in securities.

3.

Question :

(TCO 1) Please distinguish between tangible operational assets and intangible assets. Provide three examples of each.

4.

Question :

(TCO 4) Briefly differentiate between activity-based and time-based allocation methods.

devry acct 424 week 8 final exam 496796

1.(TCO 1) Hunter and Warren form Tan Corporation. Hunter transfers equipment (basis of $210,000 and fair market value of $180,000), and Warren transfers land (basis of $15,000 and fair market value of $150,000) and $30,000 cash. Each receives 50% of Tan’s stock. Which happens as a result of these transfers (Points : 5)

Hunter has a recognized loss of $30,000; Warren has a recognized gain of $135,000.

Neither Hunter nor Warren has any recognized gain or loss.

Hunter has no recognized loss; Warren has a recognized gain of $30,000.

Tan Corporation has a basis in the land of $45,000.

None of the above

2.(TCO 1) Samantha transferred land worth $200,000 (basis of $40,000) to Lava Corporation, an existing entity, for 300 shares of its stock. Lava Corporation has two other shareholders, Timothy and Brett, each of whom holds 50 shares. Which happens with respect to the transfer (Points : 5)

Samantha has no recognized gain.

Lava Corporation has a basis of $200,000 in the land.

Samantha has a basis of $200,000 in her 300 shares in Lava Corporation.

Both B and C

None of the above

3.(TCO 2) Pelican Inc., a closely held corporation (not a PSC), has a $350,000 loss from a passive activity, $135,000 of active income, and $160,000 of portfolio income. How much is Pelican’s taxable income (Points : 5)

($55,000)

$0

$135,000

$295,000

$160,000

4.(TCO 2) Silver Corporation has average gross receipts of $5.7 million, $4.6 million, and $4.8 million for the last three years, respectively. Silver is _____. (Points : 5)

not subject to the corporate income tax

a small corporation with respect to the AMT

not subject to the AMT

not a small corporation with respect to the AMT

None of the above

5.(TCO 3) As of January 1, Everest Corporation has a deficit in accumulated E & P of $75,000. For tax year, current E & P (all of which accrued ratably) is $40,000 (prior to any distribution). On July 1, Everest Corporation distributes $60,000 to its sole, noncorporate shareholder. Which is the amount of the distribution that is a dividend (Points : 5)

$0

$40,000

$60,000

$75,000

None of the above

6.(TCO 3) Parrot Corporation has accumulated E & P of $40,000 on January 1, 20×1. In 20×1, Parrot has current E & P of $45,000 (before any distribution). On December 31, 20×1, the corporation distributes $120,000 to its sole shareholder, Michael (an individual). Which is Parrot Corporation’s E & P as of January 1, 20×2 (Points : 5)

$0

($35,000)

$40,000

$85,000

None of the above

7.(TCO 4) Cardinal Corporation has 1,000 shares of common stock outstanding. John owns 300 of the shares, John’s grandfather owns 200 shares, John’s daughter owns 300 shares, and Redbird Corporation owns 200 shares. John owns 60% of the stock in Redbird Corporation. How many shares is John deemed to own in Cardinal Corporation under the attribution rules of 318 (Points : 5)

300

600

720

800

None of the above

8.(TCO 5) Francis exchanges her 20% interest in Beryl Corporation for 10,000 shares of Pyrite Corporation (value $200,000) and $40,000 cash. Francis’s basis in her Beryl stock is $95,000. The accumulated earnings of Beryl are $325,000, and the accumulated earnings of Pyrite are $225,000 at the time of the reorganization. How does Francis treat this transaction for tax purposes (Points : 5)

No gain is recognized by Francis in this reorganization.

Francis reports a $40,000 recognized dividend

Francis reports a $40,000 recognized capital gain.

Francis reports a $35,000 recognized dividend and a $5,000 capital gain.

None of the above

9.(TCO 6) How are the members of a consolidated group affected by computations related to E & P (Points : 5)

E & P is computed solely on a consolidated basis.

Consolidated E & P is computed as the sum of the E & P balances of each of the group members.

Members E & P balances are frozen as long as the consolidation election is in place.

Each member keeps its own E & P account.

None of the above

10.(TCO 11) Which statement, if any, does not reflect the rules governing the negligence accuracy-related penalty?(Points : 5)

The penalty rate is 20%.

The penalty is imposed only on the part of the deficiency attributable to negligence.

The penalty applies to all federal taxes, except when fraud is involved.

The penalty is waived if the taxpayer uses Form 8275 to disclose a return position that is reasonable, though contrary, to the IRS position.

None of the above

1.(TCO 7) On January 1 of the current year, Rachel and Julio form an equal partnership. Rachel makes a cash contribution of $80,000 and a property contribution (adjusted basis of $110,000, fair market value of $80,000) in exchange for her interest in the partnership. Julio contributes property (adjusted basis of $120,000, fair market value of $160,000) in exchange for his partnership interest. Which statement is true concerning the income tax results of this partnership formation (Points : 5)

Rachel has a $160,000 tax basis for her partnership interest.

The partnership has an $80,000 adjusted basis in the property contributed by Rachel.

Rachel recognizes a $30,000 loss on her property transfer.

Julio has a $120,000 tax basis for his partnership interest.

None of the above

2.(TCO 7) Samantha and Rebecca are equal partners in the S&R Partnership. On January 1 of the current year, each partner’s adjusted basis in S&R was $240,000. During the current year, S&R borrowed $180,000 for which Samantha and Rebecca are personally liable. S&R sustained a net operating loss of $30,000 in the current year ended December 31. If liabilities are shared equally by the partners, which is each partner’s basis in her interest in S&R on January 1 of the next year (Points : 5)

$135,000

$225,000

$240,000

$315,000

None of the above

3.(TCO 7) Naomi contributed property ($80,000 basis and fair market value of $120,000) to the ABC Partnership in exchange for a 50% interest in partnership capital and profits. During the first year of partnership operations, ABC had net taxable income of $60,000 and tax-exempt income of $56,000. The partnership distributed $24,000 cash to Naomi. Her share of partnership recourse liabilities on the last day of the partnership year was $32,000. Which is Naomi’s adjusted basis (outside basis) for her partnership interest at year-end (Points : 5)

$110,000

$146,000

$144,000

$196,000

None of the above

4.(TCO 8) During 20×2, Houston Nutt, the sole shareholder of a calendar-year S corporation, received a distribution of $16,000. On December 31, 20×1, his stock basis was $4,000. The corporation earned $11,000 ordinary income during the year. It has no accumulated E & P. Which statement is correct (Points : 5)

Nutt recognizes a $1,000 LTCG.

Nutt’s stock basis will be $2,000.

Nutt’s ordinary income is $15,000.

Nutt’s return of capital is $11,000.

None of the above

5.(TCO 8) Which statement is correct with respect to an S corporation (Points : 5)

There is no advantage also to elect 1244 stock.

An S corporation can own 85% of an insurance company.

An estate may be a shareholder.

A voting trust arrangement is not available.

None of the above

6.(TCO 9) Which reduces a shareholder’s S corporation stock basis (Points : 5)

Depletion in excess of basis of property

Illegal kickbacks

Nontaxable income

Sales

None of the above

7.(TCO 9) Matt and Hillary are husband and wife, and live in Pennsylvania. Using joint funds, in 1990 they purchase an insurance policy on Matt’s life and designate their daughter, Sandra, as the beneficiary. The policy has a maturity value of $2,000,000. Matt dies first and the insurance proceeds are paid to Sandra. As to the proceeds, (Points : 5)

8.(TCO 10) The trustee of the Washington Trust is not required to distribute all of the current-year annual accounting income of the trust to its sole beneficiary, Betty. Which is the trust’s personal exemption (Points : 5

9.(TCO 10) The Jain Trust is required to pay its entire annual accounting income to the Daytona Museum, a qualifying charity. Which is the trust’s personal exemption (Points : 5)

10.(TCO 10) Pam makes a gift of land (basis of $313,000; fair market value of $913,000) to her granddaughter, Tracy. As a result of the transfer, Pam paid a gift tax of $45,000. Which is Tracy’s income tax basis in the land (Points : 5)

devry acct 434 week 4 midterm 496797

1.

Question :

(TCO 1) Which of the following is a sign that an ABC system may be useful?

Student Answer:

Operations staff agrees with accountants about the costs of manufacturing and marketing products and services.

There are small amounts of indirect costs.

Products make diverse demands on resources because of differences in volume, process steps, batch size, or complexity.

Products a company is less suited to produce and sell show small profits.

Question 2.

Question :

(TCO 1) Merriamn Company provides the following ABC costing information:

Activities

Total Costs

Activity-cost drivers

Account inquiry hours

$400,000

10,000 hours

Account billing lines

$280,000

4,000,000 lines

Account verification accounts

$150,000

40,000 accounts

Correspondence letters

$ 50,000

4,000 letters

Total costs

$880,000

The above activities are used by Department A and B as follows:

Department A

Department B

Account inquiry hours

2,000 hours

4,000 hours

Account billing lines

400,000 lines

200,000 lines

Account verification accounts

10,000 accounts

8,000 accounts

Correspondence letters

1,000 letters

1,600 letters

How much of the inquiry cost will be assigned to Department A?

Student Answer:

$80,000

$400,000

$160,000

None of the above

Question 3.

Question :

(TCO 2) Budgeting provides all of the following EXCEPT

Question 4.

Question :

(TCO 2) White planned to use $82 of material per unit but actually used $80 of material per unit, and planned to make 1,200 units but actually made 1,000 units. The flexible-budget variance is

Question 5.

Question :

(TCO 3) Which of the following does NOT represent a cause-and-effect relationship?

Student Answer:

It makes sense that if a complex product has a large number of parts, it will take longer to assemble than a simple product with fewer parts.

Material costs increase as the number of units produced increases.

A company is charged 40 cents for each brochure printed and mailed.

Utility costs increase at the same time that insurance costs increase.

Question 6.

Question :

(TCO 4) Relevant costs in a make-or-buy decision of a part include

Student Answer:

setup overhead for the manufacture of the product using the outsourced part.

currently used manufacturing capacity that has alternative uses.

annual plant insurance that will remain the same.

corporate office costs that will be allocated differently.

Question 7.

Question :

(TCO 5) The theory of constraints is used for cost analysis when

Question 8.

Question :

(TCO 5) Jensen Company has relevant costs of $80 per unit to manufacture Part A. A current supplier offers to make Part A for $70 per unit. If capacity is constrained, the opportunity cost of buying Part A from the supplier is

Comments:

Question 9.

Question :

(TCO 3)For January, the cost components of a picture frame include $0.35 for the glass, $0.65 for the wooden frame, and $0.80 for assembly. The assembly desk and tools cost $400. A total of 1,000 frames is expected to be produced in the coming year. What cost function best represents these costs?

Question 10.

Question :

(TCO 4)Sunk costs

1.

Question :

(TCO 1) For each of the following activities, identify an appropriate activity-cost driver.

a. machine maintenance

b. machine setup

c. quality control

d. material ordering

e. production scheduling

f. warehouse expense

g. engineering design

Question 2.

Question :

(TCO 2) Lubriderm Corporation has the following budgeted sales for the next six-month period

Month Unit Sales

June 90,000

July 120,000

August 210,000

September 150,000

October 180,000

November 120,000

There were 30,000 units of finished goods in inventory at the beginning of June. Plans are to have an inventory of finished products that equal 20% of the unit sales for the next month.

Five pounds of materials are required for each unit produced. Each pound of material costs $8. Inventory levels for materials are equal to 30% of the needs for the next month. Materials inventory on June 1 was 15,000 pounds.

Prepare a purchases budget in pounds for July, August, and September, and give total purchases in both pounds and dollars for each month.

Question 3.

Question :

(TCO 3) The Wildcat Company has provided the following information:

Units of Output30,000 Units42,000 Units

Direct materials $180,000 $252,000

Workers’ wages 1,080,000 1,512,000

Supervisors’ salaries 312,000 312,000

Equipment depreciation 151,200 151,200

Maintenance 81,600 110,400

Utilities384,000 528,000

Total $2,188,800 $2,865,600

Using the high-low method and the information provided above, identify the linear cost function equation.

Question 4.

Question :

(TCO 5) Kirkland Company manufactures a part for use in its production of hats. When 10,000 items are produced, the costs per unit are:

Direct materials $0.60

Direct manufacturing labor 3.00

Variable manufacturing overhead 1.20

Fixed manufacturing overhead 1.60

Total$6.40

Mike Company has offered to sell to Kirkland Company 10,000 units of the part for $6.00 per unit. The plant facilities could be used to manufacture another item at a savings of $9,000 ifKirklandaccepts the offer. In addition, $1.00 per unit of fixed manufacturing overhead on the original item would be eliminated.

a. What is the relevant per unit cost for the original part?

b. Which alternative is best for Kirkland Company By how much?

devry acct 504 week 4 midterm 496798

1.(TCOs A, B, and C) Which type of corporate information is not available to investors?(Points : 3)

Dividend history
Forecast of cash needs for the upcoming year
Cash provided by investing activities
Beginning cash balance

2.(TCO C) Debt securities sold to investors that must be repaid at a particular date some years in the future are called(Points : 3)

accounts payable.
notes receivable.
taxes payable.
bonds payable.

3.(TCO C) Which activities involve putting the resources of the business into action to generate a profit?(Points : 3)

Delivering
Financing
Investing
Operating

4.(TCO A) The cost of assets consumed or services used is also known as(Points : 3)

a revenue.
an expense.
a liability.
an asset.

5.(TCO C) Edwards Company recorded the following cash transactions for the year.

Paid $45,000 for salaries
Paid $20,000 to purchase office equipment
Paid $5,000 for utilities
Paid $2,000 in dividends
Collected $75,000 from customers

What was Edwards’ net cash provided by operating activities?(Points : 3)

$25,000
$5,000
$30,000
$23,000

6.(TCO A) A current asset is(Points : 3)

the last asset purchased by a business.
an asset which is currently being used to produce a product or service.
usually found as a separate classification in the income statement.
expected to be converted to cash or used in the business within a relatively short period of time.

7.(TCO A) An intangible asset(Points : 3)

may have the capacity to earn revenue for its owner.
is worthless because it has no physical substance.
is converted into a tangible asset during the operating cycle.
cannot be reported on the balance sheet because it lacks physical substance.

8.(TCO A) The following are selected account balances on December 31, 2010.

-Land (location of the corporation’s office building): $50,000
-Land (held for future use): 75,000
-Corporate Office Building: 300,000
-Inventory: 100,000
-Equipment: 225,000
-Office Furniture: 50,000
-Accumulated Depreciation: 150,000

What is the total NET amount of property, plant, and equipment that will appear on the balance sheet?(Points : 3)

$650,000
$550,000
$475,000
$800,000

9.(TCO B) For 2010, Mossland Corporation reported net income of $28,000; net sales $400,000; and average share outstanding 6,000. There were no preferred stock dividends. What was the 2010 earnings per share?(Points : 3)

$4.67
$0.25
$66.67
$14.86

10.(TCO B) Morten Corporation had beginning retained earnings of $764,000 and ending retained earnings of $833,000. During the year they issued common stock totaling $47,000. There were no dividends issued. What was their net income for the year?(Points : 3)

$69,000
$22,000
$116,000
$91,000

11.(TCO D) On March 1, 2010, Dillon Company hires a new employee who will start the work on March 6. The employee will be paid on the last day of each month. Should a journal entry be made on March 6? Why, or why not?(Points : 3)

12.(TCO D) The left side of an account is(Points : 3)

13.(TCO D) The classification and normal balance of the dividend account is(Points : 3)

14.(TCO D) A debit is not the normal balance for which account listed below?(Points : 3)

15.(TCO D) Which pair of accounts follows the rules of debit and credit in relation to increases and decreases in the same manner?(Points : 3)

16.(TCO E) An accounting time period that is 1 year in length is called(Points : 3)

17.(TCO E) In a service-type business, revenue is considered earned(Points : 3)

18.(TCO E) Expenses sometimes make their contribution to revenue in a different period than when the expense is paid. When wages are incurred in one period and paid in the next period, this often leads to which account appearing on the balance sheet at the end of the first period?(Points : 3)

19.(TCO E) The following is selected information from J Corporation for the fiscal year ending October 31, 2010.

-Cash received from customers: $75,000
-Revenue earned: 87,500
-Cash paid for expenses: 42,500
-Expenses incurred: 50,000

Based on the accrual basis of accounting, what is J Corporation’s net income for the year ending October 31, 2007?(Points : 3)

20.(TCO E) Adjusting entries are made to ensure that(Points : 3)

21.(TCOs A and B) A perpetual inventory system would most likely be used by a(n)(Points : 3)

22.(TCO B) Hunter Company purchased merchandise inventory with an invoice price of $3,000 and credit terms of 2/10, n/30. What is the net cost of the goods if Hunter Company pays within the discount period?(Points : 3)

23.(TCOs A and B) Jake’s Market recorded the following events involving a recent purchase of merchandise.

-Received goods for $20,000, terms 2/10, n/30.
-Returned $400 of the shipment for credit.
-Paid $100 freight on the shipment.
-Paid the invoice within the discount period.

As a result of these events, the company’s merchandise inventory(Points : 3)

24.(TCO A) If goods in transit are shipped FOB destination(Points : 3)

25.(TCO A) When a perpetual inventory system is used, which of the following is a purpose of taking a physical inventory?(Points : 3)

26.(TCO A) Of the following companies, which one would not likely employ the specific identification method for inventory costing?(Points : 3)

27.(TCO A) Which of the following statements is true regarding inventory cost flow assumptions?(Points : 3)

28.(TCO A) In a period of rising prices, which of the following inventory methods generally results in the lowest net income figure?(Points : 3)

29.(TCO B) The figure for which of the following items is determined at a different time under the perpetual inventory method than under the periodic method?(Points : 3)

30.(TCO B) The primary source of revenue for a retailer is(Points : 3)

31.(TCO D) Describe the process of preparing a trial balance. What is the purpose of preparing a trial balance? If a trial balance does not balance, identify what might be the reasons why it does not balance. If

GERTZ COMPANY

Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31, 2007

Sales ………………………………………………………….. $575,000

Less: Sales Returns and Allowances …………………………. $ 50,000

Sales Discounts …………………………………………….. 9,500 59,500

Net Sales ………………………………………………………….. 515,500

Cost of Goods Sold……………………………………………………. 347,000

Gross Profit …………………………………………………………. 168,500

Operating Expenses

Store Salaries Expense…………………………………………. $ 74,000

Utilities Expense ………………………………………………….. 18,000

Advertising Expense …………………………………………….. 15,000

Depreciation Expense ………………………………………….. 3,500

Freight-out ………………………………………………………….. 2,000

Total Operating Expenses………………………………… 112,500

Income from Operations ………………………………. 56,000

Other Revenues and Gains

Interest Revenue………………………………………………….. 25,000

Other Expenses and Losses

Interest Expense……………………………………….. 19,000 6,000

Net Income ……………………………………………….,,,, $ 62,000

2.

devry bsop 326 week 2 checkpoint 496799

1.(TCO 4) Which of the following represents a point of disagreement between Deming and Juran? (Points : 2)

Upper management requires training and experience in managing for quality.
Change can be accomplished within the organization’s existing structure.
Commitment by top management is a necessity.
Employees need to know who uses their products.

Question 2.2.(TCO 4) Which of the following is the primary reason for Deming’s position that slogans should be eliminated? (Points : 2)

Most problems depend on the system and cannot be controlled by workers.
Slogans benefit customers more than workers.
Not all workers can read the slogans.
Slogans are costly to maintain and periodically update.

Question 3.3.(TCO 4) Which of the following is not a part of the Profound Knowledge system? (Points : 2)

Psychology
Appreciation for a system
Management by objectives
Understanding of variation

Question 4.4.(TCO 4) The author of Quality is Free is which of the following individuals? (Points : 2)

Joseph M. Juran
Frederick Taylor
Armand Feigenbaum
Philip B. Crosby

Question 5.5.(TCO 4) Unlike Deming and Juran, _____ approach was primarily behavioral. (Points : 2)

Taguchi’s
Crosby’s
Ishikawa’s
Shewhart’s

Question 6.6.(TCO 3) ISO 9001 provides specific requirements for _____. (Points : 2)

terms and definitions used
a quality management system
improving quality
outgoing quality levels

Question 7.7.(TCO 3) The framework for companywide quality control (CWQC) in Japan is provided by _____. (Points : 2)

the Shewhart Award
the Grant Award
the Deming Prize
the Baldrige Award

Question 8.8.(TCO 3) The Malcolm Baldrige National Quality Award serves several purposes, except _____. (Points : 2)

to recognize the achievements of high-quality companies
to establish guidelines and criteria for evaluation of quality-improvement efforts
to provide detailed information on how award-winning enterprises achieved success
to encourage the use of quantitative analysis to improve quality

Question 9.9.(TCO 3) Over the years, the Malcolm Baldrige National Quality Award criteria have been improved to include all of the following shifts in emphasis, except _____. (Points : 2)

from quality assurance and strategic quality planning to broad focus on process management
from a focus on current customers to a focus on current and future customers and markets built on long-term relationships
from human-resource administration to high-performance work systems
from intraindustry rivalries to intraindustry alliances

Question 10.10.(TCO 3) Which of the following is not an objective of state-sponsored quality awards? (Points : 2)

Providing a forum for information exchange
Winning a state award as a prerequisite to apply for the Baldrige Award
Encouraging firms to adopt quality-and productivity-improvement approaches
Promoting awareness of productivity and quality

1.(TCO 4) Match the following:
(Points : 10)

Potential Matches:

1 :Juran

2 :Cannot be tested or validated

3 :Lack of leadership

4 :Deming

5 :Acknowledges the presences of defects

Answer

:Experience

:Inspection

Biggest impediment to improvement

Believes fear needs to be driven out

Delieves fear is not always bad

Question 2.2.(TCO 3) The aligned approach of the Baldrige Award is designed to achieve what results in what three areas?(Points : 5)

Question 3.3.(TCO 4) What are two of Deming’s 14 points?(Points : 5)

Question 4.4.(TCO 3) List four of the eight quality management principles of ISO 9000.(Points : 5)

Question 5.5.(TCO 3) What categories are available under the Deming Prize?(Points : 5)

Question 6.6.(TCO 4) Deming’s Point 3 is: Understand inspection. Briefly explain what Deming means.(Points : 5)

Question 7.7.(TCO 4) What are Feigenbaum’s three steps to quality?(Points : 5)

devry busn 278 week 4 midterm exam 496800

1.

Question :

(TCO 1) The type of budget that is updated on a regular basis is known as a________________

Student Answer:

continuous budget.

revised budget.

updated budget.

flexible budget.

2.

Question :

(TCO 2) The quantitative forecasting method that uses actual sales from recent time periods to predict future sales assuming that the closest time period is a more accurate predictor of future sales is:

3.

Question :

(TCO 3) The regression statistic that measures how many standard errors the coefficient is from zero is the________________

Student Answer:

correlation coefficient.

coefficient of determination.

standard error of the estimate.

t-statistic.

4.

Question :

(TCO 4) Capital expenditures are incurred for all of the following reasons except:

Student Answer:

As preventive maintenance

To counteract competition

Decreased production

Improvement in product quality

5.

Question :

(TCO 5) Which of the following isnottrue when ranking proposals using zero-base budgeting?

Student Answer:

Due to changing circumstances, a low-priority item may later become a high-priority item.

Decision packages are ranked in order of increasing benefit.

Divisional and departmental managers submit initial recommendations, with top management making the final ranking.

Nonfunded packages should also be ranked.

6.

Question :

(TCO 6) Which of the following ignores the time value of money?

Student Answer:

Internal rate of return

Profitability index

Net present value

Payback period

7.

Question :

(TCO 1) There are several approaches that may be used to develop the budget. Managers typically prefer an approach known as participative budgeting. Discuss this form of budgeting and identify its advantages and disadvantages.

8.

Question :

(TCO 2) There are a variety of forecasting techniques that a company may use. Identify and discuss the three main quantitative approaches used for time series forecasting models.

9.

Question :

(TCO 2) The Federal Election Commission maintains data showing the voting age population, the number of registered voters, and the turnout for federal elections. The following table shows the national voter turnout as a percentage of the voting age population from 1972 to 1996 (The Wall Street Journal Almanac; 1998):

Voter Turnout

Year

% Turnout

Year

% Turnout

1972

55

1986

36

1974

38

1988

50

1976

54

1990

37

1978

37

1992

55

1980

53

1994

39

1982

40

1996

49

1984

53

Part (a) Use exponential smoothing to forecast this time series. Consider smoothing constants of a = 0.1 and 0.2. What is the forecast of the percentage of turnout in 1998?
Part (b) Use the mean absolute deviation (MAD) to determine which smoothing constant provides the best forecast of voter turnout.

10.

Question :

(TCO 3) Use the table Food and Beverage Sales for Paul s Pizzeria to answer the questions below.

Food and Beverage Sales for Paul s Pizzeria Restaurant

($000s)

Month

First Year

Second Year

January

55

60

February

53

54

March

53

56

April

63

44

May

64

44

June

54

34

July

33

36

August

35

37

September

25

28

October

30

30

November

35

38

December

54

52

Part (a) Calculate the regression line and forecast sales for March of Year 3.
Part (b) Calculate the seasonal forecast of sales for March of Year 3.
Part (c) Which forecast do you think is most accurate and why?

11.

Question :

(TCO 6) Jackson Company is considering two capital investment proposals. Estimates regarding each project are provided below:

Project Nuts

Project Bolts

Initial Investment

$175,000

$100,000

Annual Net Income

$30,000

52,000

Annual Cash Inflow

$70,000

$45,000

Salvage Value

$0

$0

Estimated Useful Life

3 years

3 years

The company requires a 9% rate of return on all new investments.

Part (a) Calculate the payback period for each project.
Part (b) Calculate the net present value for each project.
Part (c) Which project should Jackson Company accept and why?

12.

Question :

(TCO 6) Top Growth Farms, a farming cooperative, is considering purchasing a tractor for $468,000. The machine has a 10-year life and an estimated salvage value of $32,000. Top Growth uses straight-line depreciation. Top Growth estimates that the annual cash flow will be $78,000. The required rate of return is 9%.

Part (a) Calculate the payback period.
Part (b) Calculate the net present value.
Part (c) Calculate the accounting rate of return.

dewitt industries has adopted the following production budget for the first 4 months 496803

Dewitt Industries has adopted the following production budget for the first 4 months of 2012.

Month / Units

January 11,200

February 7,900

March 5,400

April 3,600

Each unit requires 5 pounds of raw materials costing $2 per pound. On December 31, 2011, the ending raw materials inventory was 17,360 pounds. Management wants to have a raw materials inventory at the end of the month equal to 31% of next month’s production requirements. Complete a direct materials purchases budget by month for the first quarter. (Enter all amounts as positive amounts and subtract where necessary.)

January February March

Units to be produced

Direct Materials per Unit

Total Pounds Needed for Production

Add: Desired Ending Direct Material (pounds)

Total Material Required

Less: Beginning Direct Material (pounds)

Direct Materials Purchases

Cost per Pounds

TOTAL COST OF DIRECT MATERIAL PURCHASES

the diamond glitter company 496806

The Diamond Glitter Company is in the process of preparing its financial statements for 2012. Assume that no entries for depreciation have been recorded in 2012. The following information related to depreciation of fixed assets is provided to you.

1. The company purchased equipment on January 2, 2009, for $165,000. At that time, the equipment had an estimated useful life of 7 years with a $25,000 salvage value. The equipment is depreciated on a straight-line basis. On January 2, 2012, as a result of additional information, the company determined that the equipment has a remaining useful life of 3 years with a $15,000 salvage value.

2. During 2012, the company changed from the double-declining-balance method for its building to the straight-line method. The building originally cost $625,000. It had a useful life of 10 years and a salvage value of $50,000. The following computations present depreciation on both bases for 2010 and 2011.
2011 2010
Straight-line $ 57,500 $ 57,500
Declining-balance $ 92,000 $ 115,000

3. The company purchased a machine on July 1, 2010, at a cost of $450,000. The machine has a salvage value of $25,000 and a useful life of 10 years. The company’s bookkeeper recorded straight-line depreciation in 2010 and 2011 but failed to consider the salvage value. Ignore Tax effect.

4. The company has failed to accrue sales commissions payable at the end of each of the last 2 years, as follows.
December 31, 2011 $ 5,400
December 31, 2012 $ 4,600

5. In reviewing the December 31, 2011, inventory, the company discovered errors in its inventory-taking procedures that have caused inventories for the last 3 years to be incorrect, as follows. The company has already made an entry that established the incorrect December 31, 2012, inventory amount.
December 31, 2010 Understated $ 32,000
December 31, 2011 Understated $ 51,000
December 31, 2012 Overstated $ 9,500

6. At December 31, 2012, the company decided to change to the straight -line method depreciation method on its retail display equipment from double-declining-balance. The equipment had an original cost of $250000 when purchased on January 1, 2011. It has a salvage value of 0 and a 8-year useful life. Depreciation expense recorded prior to 2012 under the double-declining-balance method was $62500. The company has already recorded 2012 depreciation expense of $46875 using the double-declining-balance method.

7. Before the current year, the company accounted for its income from long-term construction contracts on the completed-contract basis. Early this year, the company changed to the percentage-of-completion basis for accounting purposes but continues to use the completed-contract method for tax purposes. Income for the current year has been recorded using the new method. Prior year tax effects must be considered. The following information is available.
Pretax Income
Percentage-of-Completion Completed-Contract
Prior to 2012 $320,000 $180,000
2012 $140,000 $120,000

Required:
Prepare the journal entries necessary at December 31, 2012, to record the corrections and changes made to date related to the information provided. The books are still open for 2012. The income tax rate is 35%. The company has not yet recorded its 2012 income tax expense and payable amounts so current-year tax effects may be ignored.

diego company manufactures one product that is sold for 80 per unit in two geographi 496808

Diego Company manufactures one product that is sold for $80 per unit in two geographic regions-the East and West regions. The following information pertains to the company’s first year of operations in which it produced 40,000 units and sold 35,000 units.

Variable costs per unit

Manufacturing:

Direct Materials $24.00

Direct Labor $14.00

Variable manufacturing overhead $2.00

Variable selling and administrative $4.00

Fixed costs per year

Fixed manufacturing overhead $800,000.00

Fixed selling and administrative expenses $496,000.00

The company sold 25,000 units in the East region and 10,000 units in the West region. It determined that $250,000 of its fixed selling and administrative expenses is traceable to the West region, $150,000 is traceable to the East region, and the remaining $96,000 is a common fixed cost. The company will continue to incur the total amount of its fixed manufacturing overhead costs as long as it continues to produce any amount of its only product.

Required: Answer each question independently based on the original data unless instructed otherwise. You do not need to prepare a segmented income statement until question 13.

1. What is the unit product cost under variable costing?

2. What is the unit product cost under absorption costing?

3. What is the company’s total contribution margin under variable costing?

4. What is the company’s net operating income under variable costing?

5. What is the company’s total gross margin under absorption costing?

6. What is the company’s net operating income under absorption costing?

7. What is the amount of the difference between the variable costing and absorption costing net operating incomes? What is the cause of this difference?

8. What is the company’s break even point in unit sales? Is it above or below the actual sales volume? Compare the break even sales volume to your answer for question 6 and comment.

9. If sales volumes in the East and West regions had been reversed, what would be the company’s overall break even point in unit sales?

10. What would have been the company’s variable costing net operating income if it had produced and sold 35,000 units? You do not need to perform any calculations to answer this question.

11. What would have been the company’s absorption costing net operating income if it had produced and sold 35,000 units? You do not need to perform any calculations to answer this question.

12. If the company produces 5,000 fewer units than it sells in its second year of operations, will absorption costing net operating income be higher or lower than variable costing net operating income in Year 2? Why? No calculations are necessary.

13. Prepare a contribution format segmented income statement that includes a Total column and columns for the East and West regions.

14. Diego is considering eliminating the West region because an internally generated report suggests the region’s total gross margin in the first year of operations was $50,000 less than its traceable fixed selling and administrative expenses. Diego believes that if it drops the West region, the East region’s sales will grow by 5% in Year 2. Using the contribution approach for analyzing segment profitability and assuming all else remains constant in Year 2, what would be the profit impact of dropping the West region in Year 2?

15. Assume the West region invests $30,000 in a new advertising campaign in Year 2 that increases its unit sales by 20%. If all else remains constant, what would be the profit impact of pursuing the advertising campaign?

discussion 496812

ACTIVE Participation – Module 2 “Real-World” Discussion forum:

NOTE: This discussion forum counts towards your grade. It will NOT be accessible after the due date for your Module 2 assignments.

Find an annual report for a comany of interest. You are welcome to choose the same company as you used in our forum for previous module. Publicly held company annual reports (10K) can be located via a search link at http://www.sec.gov/edgar/searchedgar/webusers.htm

NOTE: To perform the search in the Edgar Archives the best way is to enter the “ticker symbol” for the company. In Yahoo finance (MSN, or other investment websites) enter the company’s name next to the icon “Get Quotes”. For example, Tech Data Corp’s ticker symbol is “TECD” and Bloomin’ Brands ticker symbol is “BLMN”. If you need assistance, please e-mail me.

Click on the link to “Interactive Data” and then the link to the “Financial Statements”. Select 3 ratios that were discussed in Chapter 15. (NOTE: A complete listing of the ratios is on pages 745-6 which includes the formulas and purpose of each ratio. Calculate these ratios for each of the years provided in the comparative financial statements (usually 2-3 years of information is provided). Share your calculations and any insights/thoughts from your analysis of these ratios including trends (i.e., is the company performing better or worse relative to the previous year).

discussion 496813

ACTIVE Participation – Module 2 “Real-World” Discussion forum:

NOTE: This discussion forum counts towards your grade. It will NOT be accessible after the due date for your Module 2 assignments.

Find an annual report for a comany of interest. You are welcome to choose the same company as you used in our forum for previous module. Publicly held company annual reports (10K) can be located via a search link at http://www.sec.gov/edgar/searchedgar/webusers.htm

NOTE: To perform the search in the Edgar Archives the best way is to enter the “ticker symbol” for the company. In Yahoo finance (MSN, or other investment websites) enter the company’s name next to the icon “Get Quotes”. For example, Tech Data Corp’s ticker symbol is “TECD” and Bloomin’ Brands ticker symbol is “BLMN”. If you need assistance, please e-mail me.

Click on the link to “Interactive Data” and then the link to the “Financial Statements”. Select 3 ratios that were discussed in Chapter 15. (NOTE: A complete listing of the ratios is on pages 745-6 which includes the formulas and purpose of each ratio. Calculate these ratios for each of the years provided in the comparative financial statements (usually 2-3 years of information is provided). Share your calculations and any insights/thoughts from your analysis of these ratios including trends (i.e., is the company performing better or worse relative to the previous year).

discussion memorandum 1 net operating losses the dam tubing company has been in busi 496816

Discussion Memorandum #1 Net Operating Losses

The Dam Tubing Company has been in business for approximately 15 years operating a tubing business along the Guadalupe River near a local dam. By 2009, the business had been growing steadily was generating approximately $1,200,000 in sales and $180,000 of taxable income each year. The pattern changed in 2010 when, due to a two year drought, the company saw its taxable income reduced and then turn into a taxable loss in 2011. In 2012, because there was more rainfall, the company experienced something of a recovery resulting in taxable income for 2012. Unfortunately calendar year 2013 was another record dry year and the company experienced a large taxable loss due to the severity of the drought and to incurring certain extra drought-related safety measures the company implemented in that year. The pattern of taxable income and loss since prior to 2010 is shown below:

Year Taxable Income (Loss) Years Prior to 2010 $180,000 a year 2010 $ 90,000 2011 ($150,000) 2012 $100,000 2013 ($294,000)

As company controller, you have already explained to Mr. Rite, the company s owner and CEO, that the company will likely choose to carryback part of the 2013 loss to prior years to obtain a quick recovery of taxes previously paid the IRS. Besides any receivable from the IRS that may be recorded, Mr. Rite would like see no allowance recorded on any deferred tax asset that may be recognized related to any unused 2013 net operating loss (NOL) that is carried forward. He wants to see an improvement in the company s financial position in preparation for borrowing funds to do additional maintenance on the tubing facilities due to damage caused by the rains in 2012 followed by drought in 2013. Mr. Rite has informed you that in his opinion it is not only probable but highly likely that the company will return to profitability soon allowing the company to fully use the NOL carryforward, especially since the weather forecasters are predicting El Ni o conditions that are expected to result in periodic heavy rains for 2014.

The company has some excess property located near its tubing business currently used for storage that could be sold to generate approximately $40,000 of net gains. Assume the company would be able to treat the gains as ordinary income taxable at 30% for tax purposes should the property be sold. Although the company does not want to sell the property because it may need it to expand the business, the company would sell the property, if necessary, to avoid losing a tax benefit from the NOL s.

The owner has asked you as the controller for The Dam Tubing Company, if you could do some research on whether the company will be able to show a tax benefit from the NOLs generated in 2013, either by routine loss carrybacks or carryforwards or through other means, if necessary. For the purposes of the analysis, at the end of 2013 the company has $15,000 of deferred tax liabilities (related to depreciation) classified as noncurrent liabilities and the currently enacted tax rate is 30% and is the same for all past and future years.

In preparation for further discussion of this issue, you should prepare a memo that: (a) Explains the facts, i.e., describes the circumstances in which The Dam Tubing Company finds itself regarding the NOL. (b) Explains the accounting guidance that applies to this situation. You should cite the appropriate paragraphs of the codification in your memo and include the text of such paragraphs in the memo near where you are discussing how the guidance would be applied. Only include the relevant paragraphs, i.e., the codification guidance included should be relatively short. YOU MUST DISCUSS HOW THE CODIFICATION GUIDANCE SHOULD BE APPLIED TO THIS SITUATION TO RECEIVE FULL CREDIT. (c) Provides your conclusion on whether and how much of a tax benefit the company will be able to recognize in 2013 from the NOL arising in 2013. The discussion should include all possible sources of taxable income that could be used to recognize a tax benefit from the NOL (taxable income in carryback years, future taxable income, etc., and discuss whether any valuation allowance is necessary for any deferred tax asset that may be recorded with respect to any NOL carryforward. (d) In regard to (c) above please provide your estimate of the amount of any receivable due from the IRS arising from the loss in 2013 and the amount of any deferred tax asset that will be recorded in 2013 related to any unused operating loss carryforward and then give your estimate of the amount of the valuation allowance, if any, that will be required on that deferred tax asset based on the guidance in the FASB s Accounting Standards Codification. (e) Discuss whether Mr. Rite s belief that it is likely that the company will soon return to profitability is sufficient to avoid setting up an allowance on a deferred tax asset related to NOL carryforwards or other tax-book differences?

The memo should be in plain English to the extent possible (except for quotes from the codification) since as company controller you will have to explain the situation and conclusions in the memo to the company s owner and ultimately to the audit committee. The discussion memo should be from 2-5 pages long, exclusive of the citations from the FASB Accounting Standards Codification. You should be sure to give the section numbers for the Codification and to the extent you utilize other sources you should include footnotes referencing such sources, whether you use a direct quote or paraphrase. PLEASE DRAFT THIS AS A MEMO AND NOT AS RESPONSES TO ITEMS A-E ABOVE.

For academic access to the FASB Codification database through the American Accounting Association, you may log in at the following website: http://aaahq.org/ascLogin.cfm using the following login information: STUDENTS:

discussion question 496817

Week 1 DQ s

DQ1: Log into http://www.charitynavigator.org/. Choose a good charity and a bad charity and explain why you feel they should labeled good or bad.

DQ2: What is fund accounting? How does it compare to proprietary accounting? Why is fund accounting necessary? What are the major fund types?

DQ3: What are some examples of government and not-for-profit organizations? How do proprietary businesses measure achievement? How do government organizations measure success?

DQ4: What is the purpose of CAFR? What are the components of CAFR? Why is the Federal Government not subject to GASB 34? How do government-wide financial statements add information not available in fund financial statements?

discussion question 496818

Week 1 DQs

Week 1 DQ 1

How would you define globalization (you are encouraged to reference outside sources for a definition, but please be sure and put it into your own words with critical analysis)?

What are the primary reasons a domestic company might find for going global

Week 1 DQ 2

In discussing the globalization of business, one cannot ignore the connection between government agencies, politics, and private enterprise. What are some examples of the interconnection between a national government and a global business that is headquartered in that country?

What factors contributed to this interconnectedness?

How did these factors contribute to this interconnectedness?

What are the implications for business strategies as companies plan to adapt to the global market situation?

discussion question 496821

Week 2 DQs

DQ1

What is meant by an in-substance defeasance, and how can a government use it to lower its interest costs?

How must it recognize a gain or loss on defeasance if it accounts for the debt in a proprietary fund?

How do the GASB standards pertaining to in-substance defeasances differ from those of the FASB?

DQ2

What is an encumbrance? How does an encumbrance affect expenses and expenditures?

What is the impact of encumbrance accounting on a governmental budget? Explain.

DQ3

What are the basic principles of fund accounting?

When do governmental entities recognize revenue? Why is timing important in recognizing revenue?

DQ4

What is the purpose of the capital projects fund?

What is the purpose of the debt service fund?

What is inter-period equity? How does inter-period equity affect capital project and debt services funds?

discussion question 496830

To save on gasoline expenses, Edith and Mathew agreed to carpool together for traveling to and from work. Edith preferred to travel on I-20 highway as it was usually the fastest, taking 25 minutes in the absence of traffic delays. Mathew pointed out that traffic jams on the highway can lead to long delays making the trip 45 minutes. He preferred to travel along Shea Boulevard, which was longer (35 minutes), but rarely had traffic jams. Edith agreed that in case of traffic jams, Shea Boulevard was a reasonable alternative. Neither of them knows the state of the highway ahead of time. After driving to work on the I-20 highway for 1 month (20 workdays), they found the highway to be jammed 3 times. Assuming that this month is a good representation of all months ahead, should Edith and Mathew continue to use the highway for traveling to work? How would you conclusion change for the winter months, if bad weather makes it likely for traffic jams on the highway to increase to 6 days per month? How would your conclusion change if Mathew purchased a new smart-phone app that could show the status of the highway traffic prior to their drive each morning, thus reducing the probability of them getting into a jam down to only 1day per month (where on this day, the app showed no traffic jam, but a jam developed in the meantime as they were driving along the highway). Guided Response: In 300 words or more, please, provide your response to the above discussion question. Please, show all your calculations and explain your answers. Further, comment on how the conclusions of this problem will change if there was no uncertainty and the highway always had traffic jams, whereas Shea Blvd was always traffic jam free? Is this scenario realistic and why? Respond substantively to at least two of your classmates postings.

discussion question 496833

IT 205 Week 5 DQ 1 answer:

Organizations must ensure the security and control of systems and transactions with clients and vendors. What security breaches may cause harm to an organization or its clients?

Why is it important to ensure a proper level of security?

What tools are available to prevent breaches?

With any new technology, it takes time for ethical, social, and political issues to be resolved. One example of a new technology used in business today for storing and sharing knowledge and insights is a wiki.

What are the ethical, social, and political issues that might arise through using a wiki?

What policies would you put in place at your organization to address these issues?

discussion question 496838

Week 1 DQs

DQ 1

Do some research on the history of the telephone, telephony, and voice telecommunications. The ERR this week have some interesting articles….

Week 1 DQ 2

Answer this DQ by Day 5.

Standards are important in any industry. Discuss the various standards organizations utilized in this industry. Do they have conflicting charters or have they worked in different areas to form a coordinated industry overview?

DQ 3 Answer this DQ by Day 6

What are the advantages and disadvantages of the various modulation techniques of analog signals?

delvin corporation incurred the following costs while manufacturing its product 496758

Delvin Corporation incurred the following costs while manufacturing its product.

Materials used in product 130,000 Advertising expense 49,000

Depreciation on plant 65,000 Property taxes on plant 16,000

Property taxes on administrative building 7,700 Delivery expense 20,000

Labor costs of assembly-line workers 112,000 Sales commissions 31,000

Factory supplies used 24,000 Salaries paid to sales clerks 58,000

Work-in-process inventory was $23,000 at January 1 and $15,800 at December 31. Finished goods inventory was $67,000 at January 1 and $52,600 at December 31.

Instructions

Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule and determine the amount of cost of goods sold.

depreciation 496761

E 11-5 Depreciation methods; solving for unknowns
For each of the following depreciable assets, determine the missing amount (?). Abbreviations for depreciation methods are SL for straight line, SYD for sum-of-the-years digits, and DDB for double-declining balance. Please show necessary steps to attain outcome.
Assets Cost Residual Value Service Life (years) Depreciation Method Depreciation (Year 2)
A ? 20,000 5 DDB 24,000
B 40,000 ? 8 SYD 7,000
C 65,000 5,000 ? SL 6,000
D 230,000 10,000 10 ? 22,000
E 200,000 20,000 8 150%DB ?

E 11-10 Double-declining-balance method; switch to straight line
On January 2, 2011, the Jackson Company purchased equipment to be used in its manufacturing process. The equipment has an estimated life of eight years and an estimated residual value of $30,625. The expenditures made to acquire the asset were as follows
Purchase price $154,000
Freight charges 2,000
Installation charges 4,000
Jackson s policy is to use the double-declining-balance (DD) method of depreciation in the early years of the equipment s life and then switch to straight line halfway through the equipment s life.
Required:
1. Calculate depreciation for each year of the asset s eight-year life.
2. Discuss the accounting treatment of the depreciation on the equipment

dermaplus biomed s 496762

Harry the CEO is asking you to complete a time sensitive project that another person, Selwyn, had started working on before he retired. Harry explains that BioMed has a manufacturing plant that produces a prescription topical cream called DermaPlus , which is used for treating certain skin conditions. Hospitals and pharmacies are the main buyers of DermaPlus . A number of other firms produce creams that are almost identical to DermaPlus and the market for these creams is extremely competitive. In fact, BioMed s current share of the market for this type of topical cream is small, so it has no ability to influence the market price. On the other hand, because Biomed is relatively small compared to the size of the market, it can sell as much of the cream as it likes at the prevailing market price. The plant producing DermaPlus has been operating for a little over three years with the same manufacturing equipment. Currently there are no plans for upgrading or adding to this equipment. Over the last three years, the price of DermaPlus and related creams has been quite volatile and BioMed has tried to react to the changing price by varying its output level to constantly maximize its monthly profit. To date, BioMed has been able to vary monthly production quite easily by taking advantage of a flexible, non union workforce with a large number of part time workers. However, the workforce at the DermaPlus plant is just about to be unionized. Once that happens, it will become much more difficult to vary the amount of labour used in the short run and therefore much more difficult to vary the monthly production of DermaPlus . Before he left, Selwyn had been asked to estimate the short run cost functions for the DermaPlus manufacturing plant. The goal was to use this information to determine the profit maximizing output level and use that information to estimate the optimal size for the new unionized workforce. Harry tells you that DermaPlus and related products are just about to come under the umbrella of a new reference based pricing scheme. Under the new scheme, the government will set the price of DermaPlus and competing creams, and review that price every two years. Once the price has been set, BioMed and other manufacturers simply have to decide how much of the cream, if any, they want to produce and sell. Unfortunately, although the workforce will be unionized in just over a week, the referenced based price for DermaPlus will not be announced for another two months. Consequently, BioMed has to choose the size of its workforce (and therefore its production capacity) before it knows the price it will get for its product. To reduce the uncertainty about this decision, Harry recently hired a consultant with expertise in the pharmaceutical industry and reference based pricing to estimate the price that will be announced for DermaPlus . The consultant estimates that there is a 5% chance that the price will be $50 per unit, a 20% chance that the price will be $100 per unit, and a 75% chance that the price will be $150 per unit. This is the best estimate the consultant can provide given the lack of information coming from the government about the issue. After giving you this background information, Harry asks you to complete the following tasks: 1. Determine the profit maximizing average monthly production capacity for DermaPlus for each of the possible reference based prices identified by the consultant. Estimate the expected monthly profit in each case. 2. Recommend an average daily production capacity for the next 12 months given the uncertainty about the price of DermaPlus . Your recommendation will be used to set the size of the manufacturing plant s unionized workforce. (Note: You simply have to determine the best daily production capacity for the next 12 months, not the number of workers required.) 3. Write a short report summarizing the results of your analysis and any recommendations. Harry makes it clear to you that he is a risk neutral person. You only have a week to complete the analysis, interpret the results, and summarize your findings and recommendations in a brief report. When Harry makes his recommendations about the structure and format of the report you realize that they are much the same for Assignment 1 that you completed at another company. Finally, Harry gives you a copy of one of Selwyn s spreadsheets. This one contains data that Selwyn collected on the variables he thought would be needed to estimate the short run cost functions for DermaPlus and the firm s profit maximizing output level. Harry makes it clear that he has complete confidence in Selwyn s technical abilities and professional judgment and tells you to take the information in Selwyn s spreadsheet at face value and to use it as a starting point for your analysis.

designer fads company journal to balance sheet 496766

Designer Fads Company, a local retail clothing store, was established April 1, 2013. The company issued 8,500 shares of $10 par value common stock (30,000 shares authorizes); acquired inventory, supplies, and fixtures; borrowed $ 25,000 on a five year 10 percent note ( interest payable each March 31); secured a one-year property insurance policy; and rented its store space for one year. The accountant for Designer Fads the complied the following trial balance as of April 1, 2013:

Designer Fads Company
Trial Balance
April 1, 2013
Cash—— $ 48,000
Inventory—-42,000
supplies ——2,800
Prepaid rent-13,200
fixtures ——-71,000
Accounts payable————————-31,750
note payable——————————-25,000
common stock —————————–85,000
contributed capital in excess of par 38,250
Insurance exp 3000
—— ———–
$180,000 $180,000

During the next three months, the accountants assembled the following data concerning Designer Fad’s activities during the quarter. ( Note: Whereas most data represent single transactions, some data have been accumulated).

Apr. 11 Paid salaries to salesclerks, $500.
Apr. 30 sold clothing totaling $27,000 ( $14,000 cash sales plus $13,000 on credit).
May 10 paid $20,000 of accounts payable balance
May 13 paid salaries to salesclerks $18000
May 20 purchased additional clothing on account from Shirts to Skirts, Inc $27,000 ( debit purchases account.)
May 21 collected $4800 of credit sales from customers.
May 25 returned goods to Shirts to Skirts Inc because of poor quality and received credit for the goods $1000.
May 31 sold merchandise totaling $30,000 ($13,000 cash sales plus $17,000 credit sales).
June 2 paid utility bills for April and May totaling $700
June 3 paid balance due shirts and skirts Inc.
June 10 purchased clothing on account from stitches co. $30,340
June 10 paid freight charges on clothing from stitches co. $200.
June 10 paid salaries to salesclerks $1900.
June 15 paid $8,840 toward amount owed Stitches Co.
June 18 issued 1,500 additional shares of common stock for $16 per share.
June 20 collected $13,000 on account from customers.
June 28 received a letter from a creditor requesting payment for $6,000 balance due since Apr 1, 2013.
June 28 paid balance due Stitches Co.
June 30 sold merchandise totaling $38,000 ( $25,000 cash sales plus $13,000 credit sales).
June 30 declared a quarterly dividend of $.50 per share on stock outstanding on June 30, 2013.

Additional data gathered that are pertinent to adjusting entries for the quarter are:
a. Accrued salaries for salesclerks $1,300.
b. Depreciation on fixtures $2,500.
c. Uncollected accounts are estimated to be 3 percent of credit sales.
d. $1,800 of the cash sales recorded on June 30 were gift certificated redeemable between July 1 and August 15, 2013.
e. utility bills for services during June $300
f. Supplies on hand June 30, 2013, $740
g. Income tax rate is 40 percent.
Note: Inventory on hand June 30, 2013, totaled $45,000

Required: On the basis of the data for Designer Fads Company:
a. Prepare entries in general journal form to record the transactions for the quarter ended June 30, 2013.
b. Set up T-accounts, and post the entries to the T-accounts. Indicate that an account has been posted by placing a check mark in the reference, or folio, column of the journal.
c. Prepare a trial balance, and enter it on a 10-column worksheet with columns for a trial balance, adjustments, and adjusted trial balance, an income statement, and a balance sheet.
d. complete the worksheet.
e. Prepare a quarterly income statement, a statement of retained earnings, and a balance sheet.
f. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. In the ledger accounts ( T-accounts), indicate the adjusting entries with an A.
g. Journalize and post the closing entries. In the ledger accounts ( T-accounts), indicate the closing entries with a C.
h. prepare a postclosing trial balance.

determine abbott and abbott s pension expense 496767

Abbott and Abbott has a noncontributory, defined benefit pension plan. At December 31, 2011, Abbott and Abbott received the following information:

($in millions)

Projected Benefit Obligation

Balance, January 1

$120

Service cost

20

Interest cost

12

Benefits paid

(9)

Balance, December 31

$143

Plant Assets

Balance, January 1

$80

Actual return on plan assets

9

Contribution 2011

20

Benefits paid

(9)

Balance, December 31

$100

The expected long-term rate of return on plan assets was 10%. There was no prior service cost and a negligible net loss AOCI on January 1, 2011.

Required:

1.Determine Abbott and Abbott s pension expense for 2011.

2.Prepare the journal entries to record Abbott and Abbott s pension expense, funding, and payment for 2011.

determine the car payment and mortgage payment with the following conditions your mo 496768

The case is designed to determine and evaluate the payment amount of a car

loan and a mortgage, based on your income. If you prefer, you may assume that
your household income is $48,000 per year or $4,000 per month. Based on your
income, you may spend 28 percent of your monthly income on housing and 10
percent on a car loan. You are to put a 3 percent down payment on the house and
a 10 percent down payment on the car. These will make the loan to value of your
loans to less than one: 97 percent on the house and 90 percent on the car.

  1. Determine the car payment and mortgage payment with the following
    conditions: your monthly household income, 10 percent for the car payment, and
    28 percent for the mortgage payment. Also, assume a 10 percent down payment on
    the car and a 3 percent down payment on the house.
  2. Create an amortization schedule, and graph the components over time:
    interest, principal, and balance.
  3. Discuss the distributions of principal, interest, and the balance over the
    life of the loan.

Quantitative Assignment 3

determine property plant and equipment costs 496769

Determine property,plant,and equipment costs

Trudy Company incurred the following costs.

Assignment E9-2

Trudy Company incurred the following costs.

1. Sales tax on factory machinery purchased $ 5,000

2. Painting of and lettering on truck immediately upon purchase 700

3. Installation and testing of factory machinery 2,000

4. Real estate broker s commission on land purchased 3,500

5. Insurance premium paid for first year s insurance on new truck 880

6. Cost of landscaping on property purchased 7,200

7. Cost of paving parking lot for new building constructed 17,900

8. Cost of clearing, draining, and filling land 13,300

9. Architect s fees on self-constructed building 10,000

Instructions

Indicate to which account Trudy would debit each of the costs.

determine the total of each production cost incurred for april direct labor direct m 496770

Winfrey Co.s March 31 inventory of raw materials is $150,000. Raw materials purchases in April are $400,000, and factory payroll cost in April is $220,000. Overhead costs incurred in April are: indirect materials, $30,000; indirect labor, $14,000; factory rent, $20,000; factory utilities, $12,000; and factory equipment depreciation, $30,000. The predetermined overhead rate is 50% of direct labor cost. Job 306 is sold for $380,000 cash in April. Costs of the three jobs worked on in April follow.

 

Job 306

Job 307

Job 308

Balances on March 31

Direct materials

$ 14,000

$ 18,000

 

Direct labor

18,000

16,000

 

Applied overhead

9,000

8,000

 

Costs during April

Direct materials

100,000

170,000

S 80.000

Direct labor

30,000

56,000

120,000

Applied overhead

?

?

?

Status on April 30

Finished (sold)Finished (unsold)In process

 

Required

1.Determine the total of each production cost incurred for April (direct labor, direct materials, and applied overhead), and the total cost assigned to each job (including the balances from March 31).

2.Prepare journal entries for the month of April to record the following.

a.Materials purchases (on credit), factory payroll (paid in cash), and actual overhead costs including indirect materials and indirect labor. (Factory rent and utilities are paid in cash.)

b.Assignment of direct materials, direct labor, and applied overhead costs to the Goods in Process Inventory.

c.Transfer of Jobs 306 and 307 to the Finished Goods Inventory.

d.Cost of goods sold for Job 306.

e.Revenue from the sale of Job 306.

f.Assignment of any underapplied or overapplied overhead to the Cost of Goods Sold account. (The amount is not material.)

3.Prepare a manufacturing statement for April (use a single line presentation for direct materials and show the details of overhead cost).

4.Compute gross profit for April. Show how to present the inventories on the April 30 balance sheet.

5. The over- or underapplied overhead is closed to Cost of Goods Sold. Discuss how this adjustment impacts business decision making regarding individual jobs or batches of jobs.

 

 

develop a report about starbucks americas region that include the following company 496773

Develop a report about Starbucks Americas region that include the following;

Company Research and analysis

  • environmental factors
  • market size
  • competitive analysis
  • target market segmemntation

Financial Statements

  • Pro Forma Income statement- bymonth for Y1- reflect seasonality sales, by years for Y2,Y3 – indicate growth
  • Cash Flow Forecast- note debt payment/ additional capital expenditure/possible dividend payments,etc.; by Month for Year1,; by Years for Years 2-3
  • Discussion of Financial Statements- should include longer term (Years 2-5) revenue growth rates, gross profits,debt payments,capital expenditures,etc.

Internal Processes and Personnel

  • Operational Issues such as staff work schedule/labour costs/facilities/raw materials/processing requirements/training.

Balanced Scorecard

  • Flows logically from the above analysis.

the devlin corporation a diversified distribution company purchases cartons of canne 496775

The Devlin Corporation, a diversified distribution company, purchases cartons of canned tennis balls from the Questor Company and markets the balls under the Devlin brand name. Purchases and sales data for Devlin’s first two quarters of business are shown below:

Quarter 1
Sales 20,000 cartons at $52 per carton

Purchases

January 6,400 cartons at $25
February 10,100 cartons at $30
March 8,400 cartons at $34

Quarter 2
Sales 30,000 cartons at $60 per carton

Purchases

April 9,000 cartons at $35
May 10,400 cartons at $40
June 6,800 cartons at $45

Problems
1.Calculate the Quarter 2 ending inventories (in dollars) using the LIFO inventory valuation method.
2.Calculate Quarter 2 GROSS PROFIT using the LIFO inventory valuation method.
3.Calculate the Quarter 2 ending inventories (in dollars) using the FIFO inventory valuation method.
4.Calculate Quarter 2 GROSS PROFIT using the FIFO inventory valuation method.

devry acct 212 week 1 dqs 496776

DQ-1)

I suspect that most of us can view and appreciate most sports such as baseball, football, and basketball. What if you were to view a Cricket World Cup game? If you didn’t know the rules you probably would not have much fun. The same happens in business if you don’t understand its language – Accounting. What rules impact a business’ Accounting Information System? What types of compliance is required?

DQ-2)

in this graded discussion, we will be examining the operation of the Accounting Information System (AIS) with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 1. Let’s start with Exercise 1-17A. Read about Hombran Doughnuts and select one of the four requirements to answer.

Hombran Doughnuts has current assets of $290 million; property, plant, and equipment of $490 million; and other assets totaling $150 million. Current liabilities are $150 million and long-term liabilities total $310 million.

1. Use these data to write Hombran Doughnuts accounting equation.

devry acct 212 week 2 dqs 496777

DQ-1)

Last week, we discussed “The Language of Business” and why the accounting information system is important in business. This week, we are going to look at the mechanics of how it all works. It might be a bit easier if we started with an example which would be the ShineBrite Car Wash, Inc. in Chapter 2 of your textbook. Pick a transaction from ShineBrite and let us know how it impacts the accounting equation. Make sure to identify the two accounts impacted. Why is it important to record your selected transaction?

The business buys supplieson account, agreeing to pay $3,700 within 30 days.This transaction increases both the assets and the liabilities of the business (pg. 68).

DQ-2)In this graded discussion, we will be examining the operation of the Accounting Information System (AIS) with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 1. As you complete the requirements of Week 2 you should review the Course Project tab in Course Home as you could start work on Project 1. The template for Course Project 1 Parts A & B is located in Doc Sharing.

Let’s start with Exercise 2-16A. Select one of the nine financial transactions of the medical practice of Harry Samson, P.C. Develop a journal entry with date and explanation. Post it in this discussion and then conduct peer reviews of your classmates. The next requirement is to select one of the five questions (a-e) and post an answer. Do show your computations.

devry acct 212 week 2 quiz 496778

1.

Question :

(TCO 2) An exclusive 20-year right to manufacture a product or use a process is a:

Student Answer:

Patent

Copyright

Trademark

Franchise

2.

Question :

(TCO 2) Lake Incorporated purchased all of the outstanding stock of Huron Company paying $950,000 cash. Lake assumed all of the liabilities of Huron. Book values and fair values of acquired assets and liabilities were:

The journal entry to record this acquisition would include a:

Student Answer:

Debit to Cash in the amount of $875,000

Credit to Cash in the amount of $950,000

Debit to Goodwill in the amount of $350,000

Debit to liabilities in the amount of $175,000

Instructor Explanation:

Incorporated paid $950,000 in cash for the acquisition of Huron. Therefore the journal entry will include a credit to cash in the amount of $950,000.

3.

Question :

(TCO 2) Software development costs are capitalized if they are incurred:

Student Answer:

Prior to the point at which technological feasibility has been established.

After commercial production has begun.

After technological feasibility has been established but prior to the product availability date.

None of the above is correct.

4.

Question :

(TCO 2) Under U.S. GAAP, research expenditures are:

Student Answer:

Expensed in the period incurred.

Expensed in the period they are determined to be unsuccessful.

Capitalized if certain criteria are met.

Expensed if unsuccessful, capitalized if successful.

5.

Question :

(TCO 2) Goodwill has:

Student Answer:

A life of seventy years.

An indefinite life.

A life of twenty years.

A life of forty years.

devry acct 212 week 3 dqs 496779

DQ-1) Unfortunately, a quick scan of the business news will normally result in reports of unethical business behavior. To prove this point, let’s start with a review of the news for stories about fraud and other unethical behavior in business. You can use the University Library to start your search. Once you have located an article share it with the class by developing a summary of the important information. Make sure that you give credit to your source.

DQ-2)Go to Course Home and review the Course Project tab. Then download the Course Project template from Doc Sharing. In this graded discussion, we will be examining the operation of the Accounting Information System (AIS) with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 1.

Let’s start with a review of the three requirements of Part A of the Course Project. Explain why it is important to analyze each financial transaction of a business and to report it in the Accounting Information System. Suggestion: Revisit and review the Lecture tab in Weeks 1 and 2.

devry acct 212 week 4 dqs 496780

DQ-1)

A review of the balance sheet of a retailer, such as Wal-Mart, will disclose that in current assets the majority investment is in inventory. With manufacturers, such as Ford, the inventory is spread between three different categories. Let’s start our discussion with some basic inventory questions. How is inventory valued? Which inventory valuation method is most popular and why? What impact on the financial reports can the selection of an inventory valuation method have?

DQ-2)Go to Course Home and review the Course Project tab. Continue to use the Course Project template from Doc Sharing. In this graded discussion, we will be examining the operation of the Accounting Information System (AIS) with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 1 – Part B.

Let’s start with Exercise 3-22A and practice developing journal entries to make adjustments. Select one of the six transactions and develop the adjusting journal entry. If you are using an example found in the textbook do mention the page number.

devry acct 212 week 5 course project 1 part a amp b 496782

You ve just secured a new client in your accounting practice, the Rawls Repair Corporation, (RRC) a brand new small business specializing in bicycle repair. The owner, Rob Rawls, is a terrific cyclist and bike repair specialist, but definitely not an accountant. Your job is to help Rob put his affairs in order. Luckily Rob has only been in operation for a month and things have not gotten too out of hand yet! Rob has to submit his financial statements to his investors and doesn t know where to begin. It s your job to go through the complete Accounting cycle to prepare the financial statements for the RRC. For Part A: Complete Requirements 1-3 on the Journal Entries, General Ledger, and Trial Balance worksheets. Type your work directly into the worksheets. Save your workbook as CourseProject1A_ ACCT212_YourLastName . Submit the workbook to the DropBox under Course Project 1-Part A by the end of Week 3. For Part B: Using feedback from your instructor and Part A, complete Requirements 4-10. Type your work directly into the worksheets. Save your workbook as CourseProject1B_ACCT212_YourLastName . Submit the workbook to the DropBox under Course Project 1-Part B by the end of Week 5.

devry acct 212 week 5 dqs 496783

DQ-1) In the spotlight about FedEx Corporation, you get a feel for the amount of investment in assets and the resulting liabilities that are required to operate a competitive corporation. Even small businesses require plant, property and equipment to compete and normally rely on some form of debt to finance itself. Let’s start up a company that sells auto parts like Napa or Auto Zone. What assets would we require? How might we finance them?

DQ-2)Go to Course Home and review the Course Project tab. Continue to use the Course Project template from Doc Sharing. In this graded discussion, we will be examining the operation of the Accounting Information System (AIS) with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 1 – Part B.

Let’s start with Exercise 3-31A. For the Draper Production Company select one adjusting and one closing entry requirement. Develop the journal entry for review by your peers. Make sure to reference any page numbers of examples you are using. Hint: Revisit the Week 2 Lecture.

devry acct 212 week 6 dqs 496784

DQ-1) When forming a company, the options are sole proprietor, partnership, and corporation. Most choose incorporation. Why is the corporate form seen to be best? What rights do the stockholders have?

DQ-2)Go to Course Home and review the Course Project tab. In this graded discussion, we will be examining the process of evaluating the financial performance and health of a company with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 2.

Let’s start with gaining an understanding of the Statement of Cash Flows. From Exercise 12-17A select one of the journal entries and explain how the accounts in the journal entry impact the statement of cash flows.

devry acct 212 week 7 dqs 496786

DQ-1) If you were to get a physical from your Doctor and they only took your blood pressure prior to stating that you are in good health, would you be concerned? If you have noticed in your readings starting in Chapter 3 that there has been explanation of the methods by which you could determine the financial health of a company. Name one and explain how it is computed? Which financial statement(s) does the input come from? Most importantly, what does it tell you about the financial performance or health?

DQ-2)Go to Course Home and review the Course Project tab. In this graded discussion, we will be examining the process of evaluating the financial performance and health of a company with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 2.

Let’s start with Exercise 13-19A by preparing a common-size income statement for the Sensible Music Co. Do this in excel. Do not post your spreadsheet in the discussion but rather place a screen shot of it. How did you format the cells? Any suggestions where to obtain assistance building the spreadsheet?

devry acct 212 week 8 final exam 496787

1.(TCO 3) At the end of the period it is necessary to close all temporary accounts. (1) Explain why this process is required (10 points) and (2) provide an example of the closing of an expense account, Supplies Expense in the form of a journal entry. (10 points)(Points : 20)

2.(TCO 2) As required to complete Course Project 1, one must follow the cycle that includes 10 steps to complete the accounting cycle. (1) Explain how to construct an Unadjusted Trial Balance (10 points) and (2) provide an example of the application of the debit/credit rules in the development of the trial balance. (10 points)(Points : 20)

3.(TCO 5) Internal Control Procedures are required to safeguard company assets and to ensure ethical operation of the business. (1) Explain how limited access can satisfy the purpose of internal control (10 points) and (2) provide an example of how this control could be implemented. (10 points)(Points : 20)

4.(TCO 4) Inventory valuation methods determine the cost of goods sold and the inventory balance. (1) Explain how the Last in First out (LIFO) method is applied (10 points) and (2) provide an example of the impact that this method of inventory valuation will have on Gross Profit. (10 points)(Points : 20)

5.(TCO 1) To evaluate the financial operation and health of a business ratio analysis is used. (1) Provide the formula for the Acid-test (or Quick) Ratio and explain how it is computed (10 points) and (2) provide an example of how this ratio can be used in decision-making in business. (10 points)(Points : 20)

1.(TCO 6) BagODonuts Company bought a used delivery truck on January 1, 2010, for $19,200. The van was expected to remain in service 4 years (30,000 miles). BagODonuts accountant estimated that the truck s residual value would be $2,400 at the end of its useful life. The truck traveled 8,000 miles the first year, 8,500 miles the second year, 5,500 miles the third year, and 8,000 miles in the fourth year.

2.(TCO 7) ABC Inc. was incorporated on 1/15/12. Their corporate charter authorized the following capital stock:
Preferred Stock: 7%, par value $100 per share, 100,000 shares.
Common Stock: $1 par value, 500,000 shares.

The following transactions occurred during the year:

1/19/12 Issued 100,000 shares of common stock for $17 cash per share.
1/31/12 Issued 3,000 shares of preferred stock for $115 cash per share.
11/1/12 Repurchased 30,000 shares of common stock for $22 cash per share.
12/1/12 Declared and paid a total dividend of $95,000.

Required:
1. Prepare the journal entry for each transaction listed above.
2. In your own words, explain the main differences between common and preferred stock.
(Points : 25)

3.(TCO 5) Fraud is an intentional misrepresentation of facts, made for the purpose of persuading another party to act in a way that causes injury or damage to that party. In our readings and discussions we have seen several examples of fraud in business. Using that experience (1) provide an example of a common fraudulent practice in business with an explanation of how the practice works and (2) name and describe each of the elements of the Fraud Triangle.
(Points : 25)

4.(TCO 5) Internal Control Procedures are in place to protect the assets of every business as mentioned in the textbook and our discussions. Of the seven internal control procedures, list five of these controls and describe how each procedure is implemented. (5 points each with 2 points for listing and 3 points for a description)(Points : 25)

5.(TCO 2) Below are the accounts of Super Pool Service, Inc. The accounts have normal balances on June 30, 2012. The accounts are listed in no particular order.

Account Balance
Common stock $5,100
Accounts payable $4,400
Service revenue $17,100
Land $28,800
Note payable $9,500
Cash $5,200
Dividends $6,100
Utilities expense $2,100
Accounts receivable $10,600
Delivery expense $700
Retained earnings $25,600
Salary expense $8,200

Prepare the company s trial balance as of June 30, 2012, listing accounts in proper sequence, as illustrated in the chapter. For example, Accounts Receivable comes before Land. List the expense with the largest balance first, the expense with the next largest balance second, and so on.

(Points : 25)

(TCO4) Linda s Lampshades started business on Jan. 1, 2001. They had the following inventory transactions:

Journals – Jan. 2001

current liabilities entries and disclosure the first city bank 496722

Current liabilities: entries and disclosure. A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:

1-Dec: Borrowed $30,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3-month, 15% note payable.
Interest and principal are due at maturity.
10-Dec: Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to
total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates
that 3% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit (parts only).
22-Dec: Purchased $20,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
26-Dec: Borrowed $7,000 from First City Bank; signed a 15% note payable due in 60 days. (Assume 360 day year for interest)
31-Dec: Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162
31-Dec: Accrued three days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.

Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest for each of the notes payable.

Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
2-Aug: Borrowed $60,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 90-day, 12% note.
20-Aug: Issued a $55,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $55,000 delivery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest r ate.
10-Sep: Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued
a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
11-Sep: Issued a $55,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account
payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and carries a 14% interest rate.
10-Oct: The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
11-Oct: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
30-Oct: Paid note to Bank of Kingsville.

Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest. (Daily interest is calculated utilizing the 360 day method).
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.

the current sections of leach inc 039 s balance sheets at december 31 2010 and 2011 496723

The current sections of Leach Inc.’s balance sheets at December 31, 2010 and 2011, are presented here.

Leach’s net income for 2011 was $152,990. Depreciation expense was $24,030.

2011

2010

Current assets

Cash

$104,980

$99,290

Accounts receivable

109,930

88,630

Inventory

157,840

172,260

Prepaid expenses

27,250

21,740

Total current assets

$400,000

$381,920

Current liabilities

Accrued expenses payable

$14,910

$5,140

Accounts payable

85,320

92,490

Total current liabilities

$100,230

$97,630

Prepare the net cash provided by operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2011, using the indirect method.

cyrus brown manufacturing 496727

To avoid any uncertainty regarding his business’ financing needs at the time when such needs may arise, Cyrus Brown wants to develop a cash budget for his latest venture: Cyrus Brown Manufacturing (CBM). He has estimated the following sales forecast for CBM over the next 9 months:

March $100,000
April $275,000
May $320,000
June $450,000
July $700,000
August $700,000
September $825,000
October $500,000
November $115,000
He has also gathered the following collection estimates regarding the forecast sales:

Payment collection within the month of sale = 25%
Payment collection the month following sales = 55%
Payment collection the second month following sales = 20%
Payments for direct manufacturing costs like raw materials and labor are made during the month that follows the one in which such costs have been incurred. These costs are estimated as follows:

March $187,500
April $206,250
May $375,000
June $337,500
July $431,250
August $640,000
September $395,000
October $425,000
Additional financial information is as follows:

Administrative salaries will approximately amount to $35,000 a month.
Lease payments around $15,000 a month.
Depreciation charges, $15,000 a month.
A one-time new plant investment in the amount of $95,000 is expected to be incurred and paid in June.
Income tax payments estimated to be around $55,000 will be due in both June and September.
And finally, miscellaneous costs are estimated to be around $10,000 a month.
Cash on hand on March 1 will be around $50,000, and a minimum cash balance of $50,000 shall be on hand at all times.
To receive full credit on this assignment, please show all work, including formulas and calculations used to arrive at the financial values.

Group Project Guidelines:

As a group, prepare a monthly cash budget for Cyrus Brown Manufacturing for the 9-month period of March through November.
Use Microsoft Excel to prepare the monthly cash budget.
Based on your cash budget findings, answer the following questions:
Will the company need any outside financing?
What is the minimum line of credit that CBM will need?
What do you think of CBM’s cash position during the budget period? Do you see any concerns for the company in this regard?
If you were a bank manager, would you want CBM as your client? Why or why not?
It is up to the members of the group to divide the assignment tasks evenly. You will be graded on group participation
Your submitted Group Project (200 points) must include the following:

100 Points. A Microsoft Excel spreadsheet that contains your group’s monthly cash budget for Cyrus Brown Manufacturing.
100 Points. A double-spaced Word document of 1 2 pages that contains your answers to the questions listed in the Assignment Guidelines.

cyrus brown manufacturing cbm 496728

Please read the relevant parts of your textbook, which refer to cash flow and financial planning.

To avoid any uncertainty regarding his business’ financing needs at the time when such needs may arise, Cyrus Brown wants to develop a cash budget for his latest venture: Cyrus Brown Manufacturing (CBM). He has estimated the following sales forecast for CBM over the next 9 months:

March $100,000
April $275,000
May $320,000
June $450,000
July $700,000
August $700,000
September $825,000
October $500,000
November $115,000
He has also gathered the following collection estimates regarding the forecast sales:

Payment collection within the month of sale = 25%
Payment collection the month following sales = 55%
Payment collection the second month following sales = 20%
Payments for direct manufacturing costs like raw materials and labor are made during the month that follows the one in which such costs have been incurred. These costs are estimated as follows:

March $187,500
April $206,250
May $375,000
June $337,500
July $431,250
August $640,000
September $395,000
October $425,000
Additional financial information is as follows:

Administrative salaries will approximately amount to $35,000 a month.
Lease payments around $15,000 a month.
Depreciation charges, $15,000 a month.
A one-time new plant investment in the amount of $95,000 is expected to be incurred and paid in June.
Income tax payments estimated to be around $55,000 will be due in both June and September.
And finally, miscellaneous costs are estimated to be around $10,000 a month.
Cash on hand on March 1 will be around $50,000, and a minimum cash balance of $50,000 shall be on hand at all times.
To receive full credit on this assignment, please show all work, including formulas and calculations used to arrive at the financial values.

Group Project Guidelines:

As a group, prepare a monthly cash budget for Cyrus Brown Manufacturing for the 9-month period of March through November.
Use Microsoft Excel to prepare the monthly cash budget.
Based on your cash budget findings, answer the following questions:
Will the company need any outside financing?
What is the minimum line of credit that CBM will need?
What do you think of CBM’s cash position during the budget period? Do you see any concerns for the company in this regard?
If you were a bank manager, would you want CBM as your client? Why or why not?
It is up to the members of the group to divide the assignment tasks evenly. You will be graded on group participation
Your submitted Group Project (200 points) must include the following:

100 Points. A Microsoft Excel spreadsheet that contains your group’s monthly cash budget for Cyrus Brown Manufacturing.
100 Points. A double-spaced Word document of 1 2 pages that contains your answers to the questions listed in the Assignment Guidelines.

cyrus brown manufacturing cbm case 496729

To avoid any uncertainty regarding his business’ financing needs at the time when such needs may arise, Cyrus Brown wants to develop a cash budget for his latest venture: Cyrus Brown Manufacturing (CBM). He has estimated the following sales forecast for CBM over the next 9 months:
March $100,000
April $275,000
May $320,000
June $450,000
July $700,000
August $700,000
September $825,000
October $500,000
November $115,000

He has also gathered the following collection estimates regarding the forecast sales:
Payment collection within the month of sale = 25%
Payment collection the month following sales = 55%
Payment collection the second month following sales = 20%
Payments for direct manufacturing costs like raw materials and labor are made during the month that follows the one in which such costs have been incurred. These costs are estimated as follows:
March $187,500
April $206,250
May $375,000
June $337,500
July $431,250
August $640,000
September $395,000
October $425,000
Additional financial information is as follows:
Administrative salaries will approximately amount to $35,000 a month.
Lease payments around $15,000 a month.
Depreciation charges, $15,000 a month.
A one-time new plant investment in the amount of $95,000 is expected to be incurred and paid in June.
Income tax payments estimated to be around

cyrus brown manufacturing cbm problem 496730

To avoid any uncertainty regarding his business’ financing needs at the time when such needs may arise, Cyrus Brown wants to develop a cash budget for his latest venture: Cyrus Brown Manufacturing (CBM). He has estimated the following sales forecast for CBM over the next 9 months:

March $100,000
April $275,000
May $320,000
June $450,000
July $700,000
August $700,000
September $825,000
October $500,000
November $115,000

He has also gathered the following collection estimates regarding the forecast sales:
Payment collection within the month of sale = 25%
Payment collection the month following sales = 55%
Payment collection the second month following sales = 20%

Payments for direct manufacturing costs like raw materials and labor are made during the month that follows the one in which such costs have been incurred. These costs are estimated as follows:

March $187,500
April $206,250
May $375,000
June $337,500
July $431,250
August $640,000
September $395,000
October $425,000

Additional financial information is as follows:
Administrative salaries will approximately amount to $35,000 a month.
Lease payments around $15,000 a month.
Depreciation charges, $15,000 a month.
A one-time new plant investment in the amount of $95,000 is expected to be incurred and paid in June.
Income tax payments estimated to be around $55,000 will be due in both June and September.
And finally, miscellaneous costs are estimated to be around $10,000 a month.
Cash on hand on March 1 will be around $50,000, and a minimum cash balance of $50,000 shall be on hand at all times.

To receive full credit on this assignment, please show all work, including formulas and calculations used to arrive at the financial values.

Group Project Guidelines:
As a group, prepare a monthly cash budget for Cyrus Brown Manufacturing for the 9-month period of March through November. Use Microsoft Excel to prepare the monthly cash budget.

Based on your cash budget findings, answer the following questions: Will the company need any outside financing?
What is the minimum line of credit that CBM will need?
What do you think of CBM’s cash position during the budget period? Do you see any concerns for the company in this regard?
If you were a bank manager, would you want CBM as your client? Why or why not?

dana la fontsee opened pro window washing inc on july 1 2012 during julythe followin 496735

Dana La Fontsee opened Pro Window Washing Inc. on July 1, 2012. During July

the following transactions were completed.

July 1 Issued 12,000 shares of common stock for $12,000 cash.

1 Purchased used truck for $8,000, paying $2,000 cash and the balance on

account.

3 Purchased cleaning supplies for $900 on account.

5 Paid $1,800 cash on 1-year insurance policy effective July 1.

12 Billed customers $3,700 for cleaning services.

18 Paid $1,000 cash on amount owed on truck and $500 on amount owed on

cleaning supplies.

20 Paid $2,000 cash for employee salaries.

21 Collected $1,600 cash from customers billed on July 12.

25 Billed customers $2,500 for cleaning services.

31 Paid $290 for maintenance of the truck during month.

31 Declared and paid $600 cash dividend.

The chart of accounts for Pro Window Washing contains the following accounts: Cash,

Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Prepaid Insurance, Equipment, Accumulated Depreciation

Equipment, Accounts Payable, Salaries and Wages Payable, Common Stock, Retained

Earnings, Dividends, Income Summary, Service Revenue, Maintenance and Repairs Expense,

Supplies Expense, Depreciation Expense, Insurance Expense, Salaries and Wages

Expense.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the July transactions.

(b) Post to the ledger accounts. (Use T accounts.)

(c) Prepare a trial balance at July 31.

(d) Journalize the following adjustments.

(1) Services provided but unbilled and uncollected at July 31 were $1,700.

(2) Depreciation on equipment for the month was $180.

(3) One-twelfth of the insurance expired.

(4) An inventory count shows $320 of cleaning supplies on hand at July 31.

(5) Accrued but unpaid employee salaries were $400.

(e) Post adjusting entries to the T accounts.

(f ) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

(g) Prepare the income statement and a retained earnings statement for July and a classified

balance sheet at July 31.

(h) Journalize and post closing entries and complete the closing process.

(i) Prepare a post-closing trial balance at July 31.

danner farm supply company manufactures and sells a pesticide called snare the follo 496737

P7-1A:

Danner Farm Supply Company manufactures and sells a pesticide called Snare. The following data are available for preparing budgets for Snare for the first 2 quarters of 2009.

Prepare budgeted income statement and supporting budgets.

1. Sales: Quarter 1, 28,000 bags; quarter 2, 42,000 bags. Selling price is $60 per bag.

2. Direct materials: Each bag of Snare requires 4 pounds of Gumm at a cost of $4 per pound and 6 pounds of Tarr at $1.50 per pound.

3. Desired inventory levels:

Type of Inventory

January 1

April 1

July 1

Snare (bags)

8,000

12,000

18,000

Gumm (pounds)

9,000

10,000

13,000

Tarr (pounds)

14,000

20,000

25,000

4. Direct labor: Direct labor time is 15 minutes per bag at an hourly rate of $14 per hour.

5. Selling and administrative expenses are expected to be 15% of sales plus $175,000 per quarter.

6. Income taxes are expected to be 30% of income from operations.

Your assistant has prepared two budgets: (1) The manufacturing overhead budget shows expected costs to be 150% of direct labor cost. (2) The direct materials budget for Tarr shows the cost of Tarr purchases to be $297,000 in quarter 1 and $439,500 in quarter 2.

Instructions

Prepare the budgeted income statement for the first 6 months and all required operating budgets by quarters. (Note: Use variable and fixed in the selling and administrative expense budget). Do not prepare the manufacturing overhead budget or the direct materials budget for Tarr.

data are gathered regarding the length of tenure top executives have at a major corp 496738

Data are gathered regarding the length of tenure top executives have at a major corporation and whether those executives have been divorced. The Human Resources department is evaluating this data to drive decision-making in regard to their hiring process. The data for eight executives is as follows: Tenure Divorce 1. 9.0 No 2. 9.5 No 3. 11.0 Yes 4. 11.5 Yes 5. 10.0 Yes 6. 9.75 No 7. 10.0 No 8. 10.25 Yes.

1. What s the most appropriate procedure for evaluating the relationship between tenure and divorce? 2. What is the correlation and how can it be interpreted in terms of magnitude, direction and practical importance?

3. How much of whether executives have been divorced can be accounted for by their length of tenure with the organization? How much of tenure can be explained by whether there has been a divorce?

david s entertainment is a merchandising business their account balances as of novem 496740

David s Entertainment is a merchandising business. Their account balances as of November 30, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows:

110 Cash $ 73,920

112 Accounts Receivable 34,250

113 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 11,000

115 Merchandise Inventory 123,900

116 Prepaid Insurance 3,750

117 Store Supplies 2,850

123 Store Equipment 100,800

124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 20,160

210 Accounts Payable 21,450

211 Salaries Payable 0

218 Interest Payable 0

220 Note Payable (Due 2017) 15,000

310 D. Williams, Capital (January 1, 2012) 73,260

311 D. Williams, Drawing 50,000

312 Income Summary 0

410 Sales 853,445

411 Sales Returns and Allowances 20,020

412 Sales Discounts 13,200

510 Cost of Merchandise Sold 414,575

520 Sales Salaries Expense 74,400

521 Advertising Expense 18,000

522 Depreciation Expense 0

523 Store Supplies Expense 0

529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 2,800

530 Office Salaries Expense 40,500

531 Rent Expense 18,600

532 Insurance Expense 0

533 Bad Debt Expense 0

539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650

550 Interest Expense 1,100

David s Entertainment uses the perpetual inventory system and the First-in, First-out costing method. Transportation-in and purchase discounts should be added to the Inventory Control Sheet, but since this will complicate the computation of the First-in, First-out costing method, please ignore this step in the process. They also use the Allowance Method for bad debt.

The Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledgers along with the Inventory Control Sheet should be updated as each transaction affects them (daily).

David s Entertainment sells four types of television entertainment units.

The sale prices of each are:

TV A: $3,500

TV B: $5,250

TV C: $6,125

PS D: $9,000

During December, the last month of the accounting year, the following transactions were completed:

Dec. 1. Issued check number 2632 for the December rent, $2,600.

3. Purchased three TV C units on account from Prince Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $11,100.

4. Issued check number 2633 to pay the transportation changes on purchase of December 3, $400. (NOTE: Do not include shipping and purchase discounts to the Inventory Control sheet for this project.)

6. Sold four TV A and four TV B on account to Albert Co., invoice 891, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.

10. Sold two projector systems for cash.

11. Purchased store supplies on account from Matt Co., terms n/30, $580.

13. Issued check to Prince Co. number 2634 for the full amount due, less discount allowed.

14. Issued credit memo for one TV A unit returned on sale of December 6.

15. Issued check number 2635 for advertising expense for last half of December, $1,500.

16. Received cash from Albert Co. for the full amount due (less return of December 14 and discount).

19. Issued check number 2636 to buy two TV C units, $7,600.

19. Issued check number 2637 for $6,100 to Joseph Co. on account.

20. Sold five TV C units on account to Cameron Co., invoice number

892, terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.

20. For the convenience of the customer, issued check number 2638 for shipping charges on sale of December 20, $700.

21. Received $12,250 cash from McKenzie Co. on account, no discount.

21. Purchased three projector systems on account from Elisha Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, $15,600.

24. Received notification that Marie Co. has been granted bankruptcy with no

amount of recovery. We are to write-off her amount due. (Note: See page

402 for entry required.)

25. Issued a debit memo for return of $5,200 because of a damaged projection

system purchased on December 21, receiving credit from the seller.

26.Issued check number 2639 for refund of cash on sales made for cash, $600. (Customer was going to return goods until an allowance was arranged.)

27. Issued check number 2640 for sales salaries of $1,750 and office

salaries of $950.

28.Purchased store equipment on account from Matt Co., terms n/30, FOB

destination, $1,200.

29.Issued check number 2641 for store supplies, $470.

30.Sold four TV C units on account to Randall Co., invoice number 893,

terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.

30.Received cash from sale of December 20, less discount, plus transportation

paid on December 20. (Round calculations to the nearest dollar.)

30.Issued check number 2642 for purchase of December 21, less return

of December 25 and discount.

30.Issued a debit memo for $300 of the purchase returned from

December 28.

Instructions:

1. Enter the balances of each of the accounts in the appropriate balance column of a four-column account (General Ledger). Write Balance in the item section, and place a check mark (x) in the Post Reference column.

2. Journalize the transactions in a sales journal, purchases journal, cash receipts journal, cash payments journal, or general journal as illustrated in chapter 7. Also post to the Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary ledgers and Inventory Control Sheet as needed.

3. Total each column on the special journals and prove the journal.

4. Post the totals of the account named columns and individually post the other columns as well to the General Ledger.

5. Prepare the Schedule of Accounts Receivable and the Schedule of Accounts Payable (their total amount must equal the amount in their controlling general ledger account).

6. Prepare the unadjusted trial balance on the worksheet.

7. Complete the worksheet for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the following adjustment data:

a. Merchandise inventory on December 31 $90,800

b. Insurance expired during the year 1,250

c. Store supplies on hand on December 31 975

d. Depreciation for the current year needs to be calculated. The business uses

the Straight-line method, the store equipment has a useful life of 10 years

with no salvage value. (NOTE: the purchase and return will not be included

as the dates of the transactions were after the 15th of the month).

e. Accrued salaries on December 31:

Sales salaries $1,400

Office salaries 760 2,160

f. The note payable terms are at 8%, payment is not being made until Jan. 3, 2013. Interest must be recognized for one month.

g. Net realizable value of Accounts Receivable is determined to be $27,950.

8. Prepare a multiple-step income statement, a statement of owner s equity, and a

classified balance sheet in good form. (Recommend review of Current Liabilities on pages 166 & 167 and Current Maturities of Long-term Debt on page 480.)

9. Journalize and post the adjusting entries.

10. Journalize and post the closing entries. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line

in both balance columns opposite the closing entry.

11. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

davis corp s 496741

Davis Corp s comparative balance sheet and income statement for the last year appear below:
Balance Sheet
For the Year Ended December 31
2009 2008
Assets Cash 57,000 23,000
Accounts receivable 90,000 69,000
Inventory 30,000 49,000
Prepaid expenses 9,000 15,000
Long-term investments 270,000 190,000
Plant and equipment 450,000 450,000
Less accumulated depreciation 273,000 231,000
Total assets 633,000 565,000
Liabilities Accounts Payable 22,000 45,000
Accrued liabilities 31,000 24,000
Taxes payable 18,000 25,000
Bonds payable 60,000 100,000
Deferred taxes 39,000 24,000
Owners Equity Common stock 140,000 110,000
Retained earnings 323,000 237,000
Total liabilities and owners equity 633,000 565,000
Income Statement
For the year 2009
Sales 850,000
Cost of goods sold 410,000
Gross margin 440,000
Selling & admin expenses 280,000
Net operating income 160,000
Income taxes 48,000
Net income 112,000
Davis declared and paid a cash dividend of $26,000 during 2009, and has another cash dividend planned for 2010 in the amount of $40,000. Davis has also planned to spend $150,000 in new capital equipment in 2010.
Required:
Prepare a statement of cash flows for Davis Corp. for the year ended December 31, 2009. Use the indirect method.

davis corp s comparative balance sheet and income statement for the last year appear 496742

Davis Corp s comparative balance sheet and income statement for the last year appear below:

Balance Sheet

For the Year Ended

December 31

2009 2008

Assets

Cash 57,000 23,000

Accounts receivable 90,000 69,000

Inventory 30,000 49,000

Prepaid expenses 9,000 15,000

Long-term investments 270,000 190,000

Plant and equipment 450,000 450,000

Less accumulated depreciation 273,000 231,000

Total assets 633,000 565,000

Liabilities

Accounts Payable 22,000 45,000

Accrued liabilities 31,000 24,000

Taxes payable 18,000 25,000

Bonds payable 60,000 100,000

Deferred taxes 39,000 24,000

Owners Equity

Common stock 140,000 110,000

Retained earnings 323,000 237,000

Total liabilities and owners equity 633,000 565,000

Income Statement

For the year 2009

Sales 850,000

Cost of goods sold 410,000

Gross margin 440,000

Selling & admin expenses 280,000

Net operating income 160,000

Income taxes 48,000

Net income 112,000

Davis declared and paid a cash dividend of $26,000 during 2009, and has another cash dividend planned for 2010 in the amount of $40,000. Davis has also planned to spend $150,000 in new capital equipment in 2010.

Required:

Prepare a statement of cash flows for Davis Corp. for the year ended December 31, 2009. Use the indirect method.

davis corp cash flows 496743

Davis Corp s comparative balance sheet and income statement for the last year appear below:

Balance Sheet
For the Year Ended December 31
2009 2008
Assets Cash 57,000 23,000
Accounts receivable 90,000 69,000
Inventory 30,000 49,000
Prepaid expenses 9,000 15,000
Long-term investments 270,000 190,000
Plant and equipment 450,000 450,000
Less accumulated depreciation 273,000 231,000
Total assets 633,000 565,000

Liabilities Accounts Payable 22,000 45,000
Accrued liabilities 31,000 24,000
Taxes payable 18,000 25,000
Bonds payable 60,000 100,000
Deferred taxes 39,000 24,000
Owners Equity Common stock 140,000 110,000
Retained earnings 323,000 237,000
Total liabilities and owners equity 633,000 565,000

Income Statement
For the year 2009

Sales 850,000
Cost of goods sold 410,000
Gross margin 440,000
Selling & admin expenses 280,000
Net operating income 160,000
Income taxes 48,000
Net income 112,000

Davis declared and paid a cash dividend of $26,000 during 2009, and has another cash dividend planned for 2010 in the amount of $40,000. Davis has also planned to spend $150,000 in new capital equipment in 2010.

Required:
Prepare a statement of cash flows for Davis Corp. for the year ended December 31, 2009. Use the indirect method.

db 496744

A friend of yours works at a large corporation and listens to the stock reports regularly. Your friend asks you, “I always hear about the SEC, but I don’t really know what it does or what it regulates. Can you explain it to me?”

Explain to your friend the following:

  • What are companies registered with the Securities & Exchange Commission (SEC) required to include with their financial reports?
  • What are SEC financials required to adhere to?
  • What additional information is required of SEC registrants that is not required of nonregistrants?
  • After visiting the SEC’s Web site (www.sec.gov) and reviewing a few financial statements submitted by an SEC registrant, list the types of information you found that are required of registrants by the SEC.

db5 496745

For many global companies, China represents a very attractive market in terms of size and growth rate. Yet, it ranks lower in terms of economic freedom and higher in political risk than other countries’ markets because it has a communist government. Despite these risks, many popular and reputable companies have established manufacturing operations in China.

This is largely because the Chinese government makes sales in China contingent on a company’s willingness to locate production there. The government wants Chinese companies to learn modern management skills from other international companies and acquire technology. Some observers believe that when Western companies agree to such conditions, they are bargaining away important industry knowledge in exchange for short-term sales.

Answer the following questions based on the situation described:

  • Should companies comply with China’s terms?
  • Should they risk losing sales by refusing to transfer technology?

(REFERENCE REQUIERES)

deer valley 496753

Deer Valley Lodge, a ski resort in the Wasatch Mountains of Utah, has plans to eventually add five new chairlifts. Suppose that one lift costs $2 million, and preparing the slope and installing the lift costs another $1.3 million. The lift will allow 300 additional skiers on the slopes, but there are only 40 days a year when the extra capacity will be needed. (Assume that Deer park will sell all 300 lift tickets on those 40 days.) Running the new lift will cost $500 a day for the entire 200 days the lodge is open. Assume that the lift tickets at Deer Valley cost $55 a day. The new lift has an economic life of 20 years.
1. Assume that the before-tax required rate of return for Deer Valley is 14%. Compute the before-tax NPV of the new lift and advise the managers of Deer Valley about whether adding the lift will be a profitable investment. Show calculations to support your answer.
2. Assume that the after-tax required rate of return for Deer Valley is 8%, the income tax rate is 40%, and the MACRS recovery period is 10 years. Compute the after-tax NPV of the new lift and advise the managers of Deer Valley about whether adding the lift will be a profitable investment. Show calculations to support your answer.
3. What subjective factors would affect the investment decision?
The amount of the investment-
The gross sales of tickets-
The Total expenses-
The yearly net income from investments

deer valley lodge 496754

Accounting 5

Consider the following scenario:

Deer Valley Lodge, a ski resort in the Wasatch Mountains of Utah, has plans to eventually add five new chairlifts. Suppose that one lift costs $2 million, and preparing the slope and installing the lift costs another $1.3 million. The lift will allow 300 additional skiers on the slopes, but there are only 40 days a year when the extra capacity will be needed. (Assume that Deer Valley Lodge will sell all 300 lift tickets on those 40 days.) Running the new lift will cost $500 a day for the entire 200 days the lodge is open. Assume that the lift tickets at Deer Valley cost $55 a day. The new lift has an economic life of 20 years.

  1. Assume that the before-tax required rate of return for Deer Valley is 14%. Compute the before-tax NPV of the new lift and advise the managers of Deer Valley about whether adding the lift will be a profitable investment. Show calculations to support your answer.
  2. Assume that the after-tax required rate of return for Deer Valley is 8%, the income tax rate is 40%, and the MACRS recovery period is 10 years. Compute the after-tax NPV of the new lift and advise the managers of Deer Valley about whether adding the lift will be a profitable investment. Show calculations to support your answer.
  3. What subjective factors would affect the investment decision?

You can view a present value table here.

Grading Criteria

Percentage

Compute the before-tax NPV of the new lift and advise the managers of Deer Valley about whether adding the lift will be a profitable investment.

30%

Compute the after-tax NPV of the new lift and advise the managers of Deer Valley about whether adding the lift will be a profitable investment.

30%

What subjective factors would affect the investment decision?Supporting research/arguments made

40%

deer valley lodge a ski resort 100 correct solution acct 310 496755

Accounting 5

Consider the following scenario:

Deer Valley Lodge, a ski resort in the Wasatch Mountains of Utah, has plans to eventually add five new chairlifts. Suppose that one lift costs $2 million, and preparing the slope and installing the lift costs another $1.3 million. The lift will allow 300 additional skiers on the slopes, but there are only 40 days a year when the extra capacity will be needed. (Assume that Deer Valley Lodge will sell all 300 lift tickets on those 40 days.) Running the new lift will cost $500 a day for the entire 200 days the lodge is open. Assume that the lift tickets at Deer Valley cost $55 a day. The new lift has an economic life of 20 years.

  1. Assume that the before-tax required rate of return for Deer Valley is 14%. Compute the before-tax NPV of the new lift and advise the managers of Deer Valley about whether adding the lift will be a profitable investment. Show calculations to support your answer.
  2. Assume that the after-tax required rate of return for Deer Valley is 8%, the income tax rate is 40%, and the MACRS recovery period is 10 years. Compute the after-tax NPV of the new lift and advise the managers of Deer Valley about whether adding the lift will be a profitable investment. Show calculations to support your answer.
  3. What subjective factors would affect the investment decision?

deer valley lodge a ski resort in the wasatch mountains of utah has plans to eventua 496756

Deer Valley Lodge, a ski resort in the Wasatch Mountains of Utah, has plans to eventually add five new chairlifts. Suppose that one lift costs $2 million, and preparing the slope and installing the lift costs another $1.3 million. The lift will allow 300 additional skiers on the slopes, but there are only 40 days a year when the extra capacity will be needed. (Assume that Deer park will sell all 300 lift tickets on those 40 days.) Running the new lift will cost $500 a day for the entire 200 days the lodge is open. Assume that the lift tickets at Deer Valley cost $55 a day. The new lift has an economic life of 20 years.

1)

Assume that the before-tax required rate of return for Deer Valley is 14%. Compute the before-tax NPV of the new lift and advise the managers of Deer Valley about whether adding the lift will be a profitable investment. Show calculations to support your answer.

2)

Assume that the after-tax required rate of return for Deer Valley is 8%, the income tax rate is 40%, and the MACRS recovery period is 10 years. Compute the after-tax NPV of the new lift and advise the managers of Deer Valley about whether adding the lift will be a profitable investment. Show calculations to support your answer.

3)

What subjective factors would affect the investment decision

deferred rental agreement questions 496757

You will prepare three years of financial statements for the XXX Company, to include:

  • Two-Statement Format of Comprehensive Income; See Illustration 4-19 in the textbook
  • Balance Sheet
  • Statement of Owners’ Equity

You will do this twice, each time using a different set of accounting rules. Recall that items of Other Comprehensive Income are reported net of taxes, in the same manner as Extraordinary Items are reported; See Illustration 4-17 in the textbook for how Extraordinary Items are reported. Do not call the company XXX, but instead give it your name (e.g. Lisa Smith Company, Dalai Lama Company, Jorge Martinez Company).

Problem Data: Deferred Revenue Recognition on a Rental Agreement

On September 30 20×1, XXX Company rented to a tenant a small office space in its Dilapitated Visions Complex.

The tenant is not obligated to continue the lease beyond Summer 20×2, but pays $25,000 cash upfront towards the $1,000 monthly rent (25 months’ rent received in advance).

This is not a capital lease.

Excluding income taxes and the income effects of this rental, XXX Company has (GAAP and Tax) income of $111,111 in 20×1, $222,222 in 20×2, and $333,333 in 20×3.

The IRS requires rent to be included in taxable income in the year received

The income tax rate is a flat 10% for all relevant years.

At January 1, 20×1, the balance sheet showed Common Stock of $444,444, Retained Earnings of $555,555, and zero Accumulated OCI.

The only change to Common Stock during these three years was an issuance of $88,888 of stock at par value in 20×2.

Report Using Current US-GAAP

Under current US-GAAP, the cash receipt is recorded as a liability (e.g. Unearned Revenue) and amortized to income at a rate of $1,000 per month. Prepare the statements, clearly labeling them as current GAAP.

Reporting Using “FASB Fantasy GAAP”

Suppose the FASB changed the appropriate accounting for the prepayment. The new rule says to recognize the cash receipt immediately in comprehensive income, and include it in Net Income only as earned (again, at $1,000 per month). Prepare the statements, clearly labeling them as FASB Fantasy GAAP.

cost of debt and equity 496692

Cost of Debt and Equity

The manager of Sensible Essentials conducted an excellent seminar explaining debt and equity financing and how firms should analyze their cost of capital. Nevertheless, the guidelines failed to fully demonstrate the essence of the cost of debt and equity, which is the required rate of return expected by suppliers of funds.

You are the Genesis accountant and have taken a class recently in financing. You agree to prepare a PowerPoint presentation of approximately 6 8 minutes using the examples and information below:

  1. Debt: Jones Industries borrows $600,000 for 10 years with an annual payment of $100,000. What is the expected interest rate (cost of debt)?
  2. Internal common stock: Jones Industries has a beta of 1.39. The risk-free rate as measured by the rate on short-term US Treasury bill is 3 percent, and the expected return on the overall market is 12 percent. Determine the expected rate of return on Jones s stock (cost of equity). Here are the details:

Jones Total Assets

$2,000,000

Long- & short-term debt

$600,000

Common internal stock equity

$400,000

New common stock equity

$1,000,000

Total liabilities & equity

$2,000,000

Develop a 10 12-slide presentation in PowerPoint format. Perform your calculations in an Excel spreadsheet. Cut and paste the calculation into your presentation. Include speaker s notes to explain each point in detail. Apply APA standards to citation of sources

cost of debt and equity 496693

Cost of Debt and Equity

The manager of Sensible Essentials conducted an excellent seminar explaining debt and equity financing and how firms should analyze their cost of capital. Nevertheless, the guidelines failed to fully demonstrate the essence of the cost of debt and equity, which is the required rate of return expected by suppliers of funds.

You are the Genesis accountant and have taken a class recently in financing. You agree to prepare a PowerPoint presentation of approximately 6 8 minutes using the examples and information below:

  1. Debt: Jones Industries borrows $600,000 for 10 years with an annual payment of $100,000. What is the expected interest rate (cost of debt)?
  2. Internal common stock: Jones Industries has a beta of 1.39. The risk-free rate as measured by the rate on short-term US Treasury bill is 3 percent, and the expected return on the overall market is 12 percent. Determine the expected rate of return on Jones s stock (cost of equity). Here are the details:
    Jones Total Assets

    $2,000,000

    Long- & short-term debt $600,000
    Common internal stock equity $400,000
    New common stock equity $1,000,000
    Total liabilities & equity $2,000,000

Develop a 10 12-slide presentation in PowerPoint format. Perform your calculations in an Excel spreadsheet. Cut and paste the calculation into your presentation. Include speaker s notes to explain each point in detail. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M4_A2.ppt.

the cost of goods sold computations for silver company and gold company are shown be 496694

The cost of goods sold computations for Silver Company and Gold Company are shown below.
Silver Company Gold Company
Beginning inventory $47,000 $71,000
Cost of goods purchased 200,000 290,000
Cost of goods available for sale 247,000 361,000
Ending inventory 55,000 69,000
Cost of goods sold $192,000 $292,000
Compute inventory turnover for each company. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25.)

cost acct questions 16 sept 496698

1.

Westan Corporation uses a predetermined overhead rate of $23.10 per direct labor-hour. This predetermined rate was based on a cost formula that estimated $277,200 of total manufacturing overhead for an estimated activity level of 12,000 direct labor-hours.

The company incurred actual total manufacturing overhead costs of $266,000 and 12,600 total direct labor-hours during the period.

Required:

Determine the amount of manufacturing overhead that would have been applied to all jobs during the period.

2.

Kirkaid Company recorded the following transactions for the just completed month:

a.

$84,000 in raw materials were requisitioned for use in production. Of this amount, $72,000 was for direct materials and the remainder was for indirect materials.

b.

Total labor wages of $108,000 were incurred. Of this amount, $105,000 was for direct labor and the remainder was for indirect labor.

c.

Additional actual manufacturing overhead costs of $197,000 were incurred.

d.

A total of $218,000 in manufacturing overhead was applied to jobs.

Required:

3.

A company assigns overhead cost to completed jobs on the basis of 120% of direct labor cost. The job cost sheet for Job 413 shows that $12,000 in direct materials has been used on the job and that $8,000 in direct labor cost has been incurred. A total of 200 units were produced in Job 413.

Required:

a.

What is the total manufacturing cost assigned to Job 413?

b.

What is the unit product cost for Job 413?

costello corporation manufactures a single product the standard cost per unit of pro 496699

Costello Corporation manufactures a single product. The standard cost per unit of product is shown below.

Direct materials 2 pound plastic at $7.46 per pound $ 14.92 Direct labor 1.50 hours at $11.00 per hour 16.50 Variable manufacturing overhead 9.75 Fixed manufacturing overhead 11.25 Total standard cost per unit $52.42

The predetermined manufacturing overhead rate is $14 per direct labor hour ($21.00 1.50). It was computed from a master manufacturing overhead budget based on normal production of 9,000 direct labor hours (6,000 units) for the month. The master budget showed total variable costs of $58,500 ($6.50 per hour) and total fixed overhead costs of $67,500 ($7.50 per hour). Actual costs for October in producing 4,600 units were as follows.

Direct materials (9,340 pounds) $ 72,292 Direct labor (6,730 hours) 75,645 Variable overhead 67,811 Fixed overhead 30,919 Total manufacturing costs $246,667

The purchasing department buys the quantities of raw materials that are expected to be used in production each month. Raw materials inventories, therefore, can be ignored.

(a) Compute all of the materials and labor variances.

costing 496701

Deliverable Length:Word document, 1,000 words; may include some calculations embedded from Excel NEEDS APA FORMAT!

Develop a company and determine what it will produce and sell. The requirement for this company is that it be a high-end, special-order type of manufactured product. Complete the following in a Word document of 1,000 words:

Develop a list of inputs along with their associated costs, such as labor, materials, and overhead. You can research this information, make it up, or do a combination of both. Be specific as to costs.

You are to determine the selling price. Show your calculations, and discuss why you have determined this to be a good sale price.

How many items of your product will you need to produce to meet this sale price? How did you calculate this?

Determine which of the costing systems discussed in this class will work best for your company. Explain why.

Explain why those not chosen were not a good fit for your company.

You must explain “why not chosen” for a minimum of 3 costing methods.

Please devote at least 1 paragraph to the ethical considerations of costing methods.

Outline how you would implement capital budgeting in your company.

Prepare an example of a decision that you would make using either the IRR or Payback method of analysis. Why would you use this for your business?

NEEDS APA FORMAT!

costing question 496702

Problem 1 – Aunt Ethel’s Fancy Cookie Company manufactures and sells three flavors of cookies: macaroon, sugar, and buttercream. The batch size for the cookies is limited to 1,000 cookies based on the size of the ovens and cookie molds owned by the company. Based on budgetary projections, the information listed below is available:

Buttercream Macaroon Sugar

Projected sales in units 500,000 800,000 600,000

PER UNIT data:

Selling price $0.80 $0.75 $0.60

Direct materials $0.20 $0.15 $0.14

Direct labor $0.04 $0.02 $0.02

Hours per 1,000-unit batch:

Direct labor hours 2 1 1

Oven hours 1 1 1

Packaging hours 0.5 0.5 0.5

Total overhead costs and activity levels for the year are estimated as follows:

Activity Overhead costs Activity levels

Direct labor 2,400 hours

Oven $120,000 1,900 hours

Packaging $150,000 950 hours

Total $270,000

Questions:

1. Determine the activity-cost-driver rate for packaging costs (three points).

2. Using the ABC system, for the sugar cookie, compute the estimated overhead costs per 1,000 cookies (three points).

3. Using the ABC system, for the sugar cookie, compute the estimated operating profit per 1,000 cookies (three points).

4. Using a traditional system (with direct labor hours as the overhead allocation base) for the sugar cookie, compute the estimated overhead costs per 1,000 cookies (three points).

5. Using a traditional system (with direct labor hours as the overhead allocation base) for the sugar cookie, compute the estimated operating profit per 1,000 cookies (3 points).

6. Explain the difference between the profits obtained from the traditional system and the ABC system. Which system provides a better estimate of profitability? Why (three points).

Problem 2: What is activity-based management and how can it be used to improve the profitability of a company (12 points)

costing questions problem 1 handy man services and gavin and alex baseball consultan 496703

Problem 1– Handy-Man Services is a repair-service company specializing in small household jobs. Each client pays a fixed monthly service fee based on the number of rooms in the house. Records are kept on the time and material costs used for each repair. The following profitability data apply to five customers.

Customer Revenues Customer Costs

Marveline Burnett $300 $225

J Jackson 200 305

Roger Jones 80 75

Paul Saas 75 110

Becky Stephan 350 220

Question 1: Compute the operating income for each of the five customers. (five points)

Question 2: What options should Handy-Man Services consider in light of the customer-profitability results (five points)

Question 3: What problems might Handy-Man Services encounter in accurately estimating the operating costs of each customer (five points)

Problem 2 – Gavin and Alex, baseball consultants, are in need of a microcomputer network for their staff. They have received three proposals, with related facts as follows:

Proposal A

Proposal B

Proposal C

Initial investment in equipment

$90,000

$90,000

$90,000

Annual cash increase in operations:

Year 1

80,000

45,000

90,000

Year 2

10,000

45,000

0

Year 3

45,000

45,000

0

Salvage value

0

0

0

Estimated life

3 yrs

3 yrs

1 yr

The company uses straight-line depreciation for all capital assets.

Question 1: Compute the payback period, net present value, and accrual accounting rate of return with initial investment, for each proposal. Use a required rate of return of 14%. (10 points)

Question 2: Rank each proposal 1, 2, and 3 using each method separately. Which proposal is best? Why (five points)

could you help me fill these in 496704

On November 1, 2012, Aviation Training Corp. borrows $50,000 cash from Community Savings and Loan. Aviation Training signs a three-month, 6% note payable. Interest is payable at maturity. Aviation s year-end is December 31.

references

Section Break Difficulty: Medium
Exercise 8-2 Record notes payable [LO2] Learning Objective: 08-02 Account for notes payable and interest expense.

1. value:
1.00 points

Exercise 8-2 Part 1

Required:
1. Record the note payable by Aviation Training.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Date General Journal Debit Credit
Nov. 1 (Click to select)Interest payableInterest expenseInterest receivableInterest revenueCashNotes payableSalaries expenseNotes receivable
(Click to select)Salaries expenseNotes payableInterest payableCashInterest revenueSalesNotes receivableInterest receivable

check my workeBook Link references

Worksheet Difficulty: Medium
Exercise 8-2 Part 1 Learning Objective: 08-02 Account for notes payable and interest expense.

2. value:
1.00 points

Exercise 8-2 Part 2

2. Record the appropriate adjusting entry for the note by Aviation Training on December 31, 2012.(Do not round intermediate calculation. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Date General Journal Debit Credit
Dec. 31 (Click to select)Notes receivableInterest expenseNotes payableSalaries expenseInterest payableInterest revenueInterest receivableCash
(Click to select)Interest receivableInterest payableCashNotes receivableNotes payableInterest revenueSalaries expenseInterest expense

check my workeBook Link references

Worksheet Difficulty: Medium
Exercise 8-2 Part 2 Learning Objective: 08-02 Account for notes payable and interest expense.

3. value:
2.00 points

Exercise 8-2 Part 3

3.

Record the payment of the note at maturity. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Date General Journal Debit Credit
Jan. 31 (Click to select)Salaries expenseInterest receivableNotes payableCashInterest expenseInterest payableInterest revenueNotes receivable
(Click to select)Interest revenueInterest payableNotes payableCashNotes receivableSalaries expenseInterest receivableInterest expense
(Click to select)CashNotes receivableInterest revenueInterest payableSalaries expenseNotes payableInterest expenseInterest receivable
(Click to select)Notes payableInterest expenseCashInterest payableSalaries expenseInterest revenueInterest receivableNotes receivable

check my workeBook Link references

Exercise 8-4 Record notes receivable [LO2]

[The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

On August 1, 2012, Trico Technologies, an aeronautic electronics company, borrows $20 million cash to expand operations. The loan is made by FirstBanc Corp. under a short-term line of credit arrangement. Trico signs a six-month, 8% promissory note. Interest is payable at maturity. FirstBanc Corp. s year-end is December 31.

references

Section Break Difficulty: Medium
Exercise 8-4 Record notes receivable [LO2] Learning Objective: 08-02 Account for notes payable and interest expense.

4. value:

1.00 points

Exercise 8-4 Part 1

Required:
1.

Record the acceptance of the note by FirstBanc Corp. (Enter your answers in dollars not in millions. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Date General Journal Debit Credit
Aug. 1 (Click to select)CashInterest receivableInterest payableSales revenueInterest expenseNotes payableNotes receivableInterest revenue
(Click to select)Interest receivableSalaries receivableCashInterest expenseNotes receivableInterest payableNotes payableSalaries expense

check my workeBook Link references

Worksheet Difficulty: Medium
Exercise 8-4 Part 1 Learning Objective: 08-02 Account for notes payable and interest expense.

5. value:
1.00 points

Exercise 8-4 Part 2

2.

Record the appropriate adjusting entry for the note by FirstBanc Corp., on December 31, 2012.(Enter your answers in dollars not in millions. Do not round intermediate calculation. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Date General Journal Debit Credit
Dec. 31 (Click to select)Notes payableInterest payableInterest revenueNotes receivableSales revenueUnearned revenueSalaries expenseInterest receivable
(Click to select)Salaries expenseInterest expenseInterest receivableInterest payableInterest revenueSales revenueNotes receivableNotes payable

check my workeBook Link references

Worksheet Difficulty: Medium
Exercise 8-4 Part 2 Learning Objective: 08-02 Account for notes payable and interest expense.

6. value:
1.00 points

Exercise 8-4 Part 3

3.

Record the receipt of cash by FirstBanc Corp. at maturity. (Enter your answers in dollars not in millions. Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Date General Journal Debit Credit
Jan. 31 (Click to select)Interest payableSalaries receivableSales revenueCashNotes receivableInterest receivableInterest expenseNotes payable
(Click to select)Interest expenseInterest payableNotes receivableNotes payableSalaries expenseInterest revenueUnearned revenueInterest receivable
(Click to select)Notes payableSalaries expenseNotes receivableUnearned revenueInterest payableInterest receivableInterest revenueInterest expense
(Click to select)Interest receivableInterest expenseNotes payableUnearned revenueInterest revenueSalaries expenseNotes receivableInterest payable

check my workeBook Link references

Exercise 8-5 Determine interest expense [LO2]

OS Environmental provides cost-effective solutions for managing regulatory requirements and environmental needs specific to the airline industry. Assume that on July 1, 2012, the company issues a one-year note for the amount of $5 million. Interest is payable at maturity.

Required:

Determine the amount of interest expense that should be recorded in a year-end adjusting entry under each of the following independent assumptions (Do not round intermediate calculations. Enter your answers in dollars not in millions. Omit the “$” sign in your response):

Interest Rate Fiscal Year-End
1. 12 % December 31
2. 10 % September 30
3. 9 % October 31
4. 6 % January 31

Interest Expense
1. $
2.
3.
4.

check my workeBook Link references

Exercise 8-10 Analyze and record unearned revenues [LO4]

[The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

Apple Inc. is the number one online music retailer through its iTunes music store. Apple sells iTunes gift cards in $15, $25, and $50 increments. Assume Apple sells $20 million in iTunes gift cards in December, and customers redeem $13 million of the gift cards.

references

Section Break Difficulty: Medium
Exercise 8-10 Analyze and record unearned revenues [LO4] Learning Objective: 08-04 Demonstrate the accounting for other current liabilities.

8. value:

1.00 points

Exercise 8-10 Part 1

Required:
1.

Record the advance collection of $20 million for iTunes gift cards. (Enter your answers in dollars not in millions. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

General Journal Debit Credit
(Click to select)Interest receivableAccounts payableCashUnearned revenueSales revenueAccounts receivableSalaries payableInterest payable
(Click to select)Interest payableInterest revenueCashAccounts payableSalaries payableUnearned revenueInterest receivableSales revenue

check my workeBook Link references

Worksheet Difficulty: Medium
Exercise 8-10 Part 1 Learning Objective: 08-04 Demonstrate the accounting for other current liabilities.

9. value:
1.00 points

Exercise 8-10 Part 2

2.

Record the revenue earned when $13 million in gift cards is redeemed. (Enter your answers in dollars not in millions. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

General Journal Debit Credit
(Click to select)Interest receivableAccounts receivableSales revenueAccounts payableSalaries payableCashUnearned revenueInterest payable
(Click to select)Interest expenseInterest receivableCashSales revenueNotes payableUnearned revenueInterest payableAccounts receivable

check my workeBook Link references

Worksheet Difficulty: Medium
Exercise 8-10 Part 2 Learning Objective: 08-04 Demonstrate the accounting for other current liabilities.

countywide cable services inc is organized with three segments metro suburban and ou 496705

Countywide Cable Services, Inc. is organized with three segments: Metro, Suburban, and Outlying.

Data for these segments for the year just ended follow.

Metro Suburban Outlying

Service revenue ……………………………………………………………….. $1,000,000 $800,000 $400,000

Variable expenses …………………………………………………………….. 200,000 150,000 100,000

Controllable fixed expenses ………………………………………………… 400,000 320,000 150,000

Fixed expenses controllable by others …………………………………… 230,000 200,000 90,000

In addition to the expenses listed above, the company has $95,000 of common fixed expenses.

Income-tax expense for the year is $145,000.

Required:

1. Prepare a segmented income statement for Countywide Cable Services, Inc. Use the contribution format.

countywide cable services inc is organized with three segments metro suburban and ou 496706

Countywide Cable Services, Inc. is organized with three segments: Metro, Suburban, and Outlying.

Data for these segments for the year just ended follow.

Metro Suburban Outlying

Service revenue ………………………………………… $1,000,000 $800,000 $400,000

Variable expenses ………………………………………. 200,000 150,000 100,000

Controllable fixed expenses …………………………. 400,000 320,000 150,000

Fixed expenses controllable by others …………… 230,000 200,000 90,000

In addition to the expenses listed above, the company has $95,000 of common fixed expenses.

Income-tax expense for the year is $145,000.

Required:

Prepare a segmented income statement for Countywide Cable Services, Inc. Use the contribution

format.

course project a instructions you have just been hired as a new management trainee b 496707

COURSE PROJECT A INSTRUCTIONS

You have just been hired as a new management trainee by Earrings Unlimited, a distributor of earrings to various retail outlets located in shopping malls across the country. In the past, the company has done very little in the way of budgeting and at certain times of the year has experienced a shortage of cash.

Since you are well trained in budgeting, you have decided to prepare comprehensive budgets for the upcoming second quarter in order to show management the benefits that can be gained from an integrated budgeting program. To this end, you have worked with accounting and other areas to gather the information assembled below.

The company sells many styles of earrings, but all are sold for the same price $10 per pair. Actual sales of earrings for the last three months and budgeted sales for the next six months follow (in pairs of earrings):

The concentration of sales before and during May is due to Mother’s Day. Sufficient inventory should be on hand at the end of each month to supply 40% of the earrings sold in the following month.

Suppliers are paid $4 for a pair of earrings. One-half of a month’s purchases is paid for in the month of purchase; the other half is paid for in the following month. All sales are on credit, with no discount, and payable within 15 days. The company has found, however, that only 20% of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale. An additional 70% is collected in the following month, and the remaining 10% is collected in the second month following sale. Bad debts have been negligible.

Monthly operating expenses for the company are given below:

Insurance is paid on an annual basis, in November of each year.

The company plans to purchase $16,000 in new equipment during May and $40,000 in new equipment during June; both purchases will be for cash. The company declares dividends of $15,000 each quarter, payable in the first month of the following quarter.

A listing of the company’s ledger accounts as of March 31 is given below:

The company maintains a minimum cash balance of $50,000. All borrowing is done at the beginning of a month; any repayments are made at the end of a month.

The company has an agreement with a bank that allows the company to borrow in increments of $1,000 at the beginning of each month. The interest rate on these loans is 1% per month and for simplicity we will assume that interest is not compounded. At the end of the quarter, the company would pay the bank all of the accumulated interest on the loan and as much of the loan as possible (in increments of $1,000), while still retaining at least $50,000 in cash.

Required:

Prepare a master budget for the three-month period ending June 30. Include the following detailed budgets:

1.

o a. A sales budget, by month and in total.

o b. A schedule of expected cash collections from sales, by month and in total.

o c. A merchandise purchases budget in units and in dollars. Show the budget by month and in total.

o d. A schedule of expected cash disbursements for merchandise purchases, by month and in total.

2. A cash budget. Show the budget by month and in total. Determine any borrowing that would be needed to maintain the minimum cash balance of $50,000.

3. A budgeted income statement for the three-month period ending June 30. Use the contribution approach.

4. A budgeted balance sheet as of June 30.

courtney contractors completed the following transactions and events involving the p 496708

Courtney Contractors completed the following transactions and events involving the purchase and operation of equipment in its business:

2007

Jan. 1 Paid $127,400 cash plus $6,370 in sales tax and $1,800 in transportation (FOB shipping point) for a new crane. The crane is estimated to have a five-year life and a $15,570 salvage value. Crane costs are recorded in the Equipment account.

Jan. 3 Paid $5,600 to paint the company logo and install air conditioning in the crane. This increased the estimated salvage value of the crane by another $600.

Dec. 31 Recorded annual straight-line depreciation on the crane.

2008

Jan. 1 Paid $10,000 to overhaul the crane s boom, which increased the crane s estimated useful life by one year.

Feb. 17 Paid $3,200 to repair the crane after the crane operator damaged it while in use.

Dec. 31 Recorded annual straight-line depreciation on the crane.

Required:

Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events.

cp9 pinkerton corporation 039 s trial balance 496710

CP9 Pinkerton Corporation’s trial balance at December 31, 2010, is presented below. All 2010 transactions have been recorded except for the items described after the trial balance.

Debit Credit
Cash $ 28,000
Accounts Receivable 36,800
Notes Receivable 10,000
Interest Receivable 0
Merchandise Inventory 36,200
Prepaid Insurance 3,600
Land 20,000
Building 150,000
Equipment 60,000
Patent 9,000
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $ 500
Accumulated Depreciation Building 50,000
Accumulated Depreciation Equipment 24,000
Accounts Payable 27,300
Salaries Payable 0
Unearned Rent 6,000
Notes Payable (short-term) 11,000
Interest Payable 0
Notes Payable (long-term) 35,000
Common Stock 50,000
Retained Earnings 63,600
Dividends 12,000
Sales 900,000
Interest Revenue 0
Rent Revenue 0
Gain on Disposal 0
Bad Debts Expense 0
Cost of Goods Sold 630,000
Depreciation Expense Buildings 0
Depreciation Expense Equipment 0
Insurance Expense 0
Interest Expense 0
Other Operating Expenses 61,800
Amortization Expense Patents 0
Salaries Expense 110,000
Total $1,167,400 $1,167,400

Unrecorded transactions
1. On May 1, 2010, Pinkerton purchased equipment for $16,000 plus sales taxes of $800 (all paid in cash).

2. On July 1, 2010, Pinkerton sold for $3,500 equipment which originally cost $5,000. Accumulated depreciation on this equipment at January 1, 2010, was $1,800; 2010 depreciation prior to the sale of equipment was $450.

3. On December 31, 2010, Pinkerton sold for $5,000 on account inventory that cost $3,500.

4. Pinkerton estimates that uncollectible accounts receivable at year-end are $4,000.

5. The note receivable is a one-year, 8% note dated April 1, 2010. No interest has been recorded.

6. The balance in prepaid insurance represents payment of a $3,600, 6-month premium on September 1, 2010.

7. The building is being depreciated using the straight-line method over 30 years. The salvage value is $30,000.

8. The equipment owned prior to this year is being depreciated using the straight-line method over 5 years. The salvage value is 10% of cost.

9. The equipment purchased on May 1, 2010, is being depreciated using the straight-line method over 5 years, with a salvage value of $1,800.

10. The patent was acquired on January 1, 2010, and has a useful life of 9 years from that date.

11. Unpaid salaries at December 31, 2010, total $2,200.

12. The unearned rent of $6,000 was received on December 1, 2010, for 3 months rent.

13. Both the short-term and long-term notes payable are dated January 1, 2010, and carry a 10% interest rate. All interest is payable in the next 12 months.

14. Income tax expense was $15,000. It was unpaid at December 31.

Instructions
(a) Prepare journal entries for the transactions listed above.

(b) Prepare an updated December 31, 2010, trial balance.
Totals $1,213,150

(c) Prepare a 2010 income statement and a 2010 retained earnings statement.
Net income $58,000

(d) Prepare a December 31, 2010, balance sheet.
Total assets $258,700

cpm network 496711

1. Three activities are candidates for crashing on a CPM network. Activity details are in the table below.
. Activity . Normal Time . Normal Cost . Crash Duration . Crash Cost

. A . 9 days . $8,000 . 7 days . $12,000 .
B . 5 days . $2,000 . 3 days . $10,000
. C . 12 days . $9,000 . 11 days . $12,000

a. What is the crash cost per unit time for activity A?
b. What is the crash cost per unit time for activity B?
c. Which activity should be crashed first to cut one day from the project’s duration; how much is added to project cost?
d. Which activity should be the next activity crashed to cut a second day from the project’s duration; how much is added to project cost?
e. Assuming no other paths become critical, how much can this project be shortened at what total added cost?

2. Martin Manufacturing has implemented several programs to improve its productivity. They have asked you to evaluate the firm’s productivity by comparing this year’s performance with last year’s. The following data are available:
Has Martin Manufacturing improved its productivity during the past year?
. . Last Year . This Year
. Output . 10,500 units . 12,100 units
. Labor Hours . 12,000 . 13,200
. Utilities . $7,600 . $8,250
. Capital . $83,000 . $88,000
Has Martin Manufacturing improved its productivity during the past year?

crave co 496714

1. Crave Co. uses departmental predetermined overhead rates for allocating overhead to jobs. The rates are based on machine hours for the Machining department and on direct labor cost for the Assembly department. The company estimated the following for 2009:

Machining Assembly

Manufacturing overhead cost $277,800 $103,200

Machine hours 69,450 hrs 10,150 hrs

Direct labor hours 3,000 hrs 15,000 hrs

Direct labor cost $36,000 $206,400

During the month of June, the cost record for Job 125 shows:

Machining Assembly

Direct materials $12,000 $15,000

Direct labor cost $6,000 $18,000

Machine hours 1,200 550

Direct labor hours 500 1,300

Required:

a) Assuming the Job 125 manufactured 5,000 units of product, what is the product cost of one unit of Job 125?

create an ms powerpoint presentation 496715

Create an MS PowerPoint Presentation in which you describe the current state of your selected company’s supply chain and an identified process.

Required Elements:
Describe the company’s supply chain
Identify a process internal to the company that you wish to analyze.
Describe the process internal to the company that you wish to analyze.
Identify an appropriate design approach for the process you have chosen.
Create a high-level AS IS process flow chart using an appropriate tool.
Identify at least one metric to measure the process and its application (how, what, when, and who).
Use an appropriate tool to collect data for each step of the process.
Evaluate the efficiency and effectiveness of the process
Determine areas for improvement
Design an improved process flow chart using an appropriate tool.
Summarize two items from this improved process.
Include an explanation of how these items could be used in your personal or professional life to improve a process.
Thanks

cruz company deposits all cash receipts on the day when they are received and it mak 496719

Cruz Company deposits all cash receipts on the day when they are received and it makes all cash payments by check. At the close of business on June 30, 2011, its Cash account shows an $11,352 debit balance. Cruz s June 30 bank statement shows $10,332 on deposit in the bank.

a. Outstanding checks as of June 30 total $1,713.

b. The June 30 bank statement included a $23 debit memorandum for bank services; Cruz has not yet recorded the cost of these services.

c. In reviewing the bank statement, a $90 check written by Cruz Company was mistakenly recorded in Cruz Company s books at $99.

d. June 30 cash receipts of $2,724 were placed in the bank s night depository after banking hours and were not recorded on the June 30 bank statement.

e. The bank statement included a $5 credit for interest earned on the cash in the bank.

Prepare a bank reconciliation for Cruz Company using the above information.

crypton electronics and other problems 496720

1. (WACC) Crypton Electronics has a capital structure consisting of 40% common stock and 60% debt. A debt issue of $1000 par value, 50% bonds that mature in 15 years and pay annual interest will sell for $975. Common Stock of the firm is currently selling for $30.83 per share and the firm expects to pay a $2.28 dividend next year. Dividends have grown at the rate of 4.7% per year and are expected to continue to do so for the foreseeable future. What is Crypton’s cost of capital where the the firm’s tax rate is 30% bond rate is 5.9%
Crpton’s cost of capital is _______%. (round to three decimal places.)

2. (WACC) The target capital sturctue for Jowers Manufacturing is 45% common stock, 11% preferred stock, and 44% debt. If the cost of common equity for the firm is 19.5%, the cost of preferred stock is 11.9%, and the beforetax cost of debt is 10.4%, what is Jowers’ cost of capital? The firm’s tax rate is 34%.

Jowers’ WACC is ______%. (Round to three decimal places.)

3. (WACC) As a member of the Finance Department of Ranch Manufacturing, your supervisor has asked you to compute the appropriate disxount rate to use when evaluating the purchase of new packaging equipment for the plant. Under the assumption that the firm’s present capital structure reflects the appropriate mix of capital sources for the firm, you have determined the market value of the firm’s capital structure as follws:
Source of Capital Market Values
Bonds $4,500,000
Preferred stock $2,100,000
Common Stock $6,200,000

#3. To finance the purchase, Ranch Manufacturing will sell 10-year bonds paying 7.1% per year at the market price of $1,062. Preferred stock paying a $1.98 dividend can be sold for $25.86. Common stock for Ranch Manufacturing is currently selling for $55.33 per share and the firm paid a $2.99 dividend last year. Dividends are expected to continue growing at a rate of 4.5% per year into the indefinite future. If the firm’s tax rate is #0%, what discount rate should you use to evaluate the equipment purchase? Ranch manufacturing’s WACC is _______%. (round to three decimal places.

4. (EBIT-EPS analysis) Abe Forrester and three of his friends from college have interested a group of venture capitalists in backing their business idea. The proposed operation would consist of a series of retail otlets to distribute and service a full line of vacuum cleaners and accessories. Theese stores would be located in Dallas, Houston, and San Antonio. To finace the new venture two plans have been propsed:
-plan A is an all-common-equity strucre in which $2.1 million dollars would be raised by selling 82,000 shares of common stock.
-Plan B would nvolve issuing $1.4 million dollars in long-term bonds wit an effective interest rate of 12.4% plus $0.7 million wold be raised by selling 41,000 shares of common stock. The debt fnds raised under Plan B have no fixed maturity date, in that this amount of financial leverage is considered a permanent part of the firm’s capital structure.
Abe and his partners plan to use a 38% tax rate in their analysis, and they have hired you on a consulting basis to do the following:
A. Find the EBIT indifference level associated with the two financing plans.
B. Prepare a pro forma income statement for the EBIT level solved for in Part a. that shows that EPS will be the same regardless whether Plan A or B is chosen.
a. Find the EBIT indifference level associated with the two financing plans is $________. (round to the nearest dollar.)

b. Prepare a pro forma income statement for the EBIT level solved for in part a. that shows that EPS will be the same regardless whether Plan A or B is chosen.

Complete the segment of the income statement for Plan A below: (round income statement amounts to the nearest dollar except the EPS to the nearest cent.)

Stock Plan
EBIT $____________
Less: Interest expense ____________
Earnings before taxes ______________
Less: Taxes at 38% _____________
Net Income ____________
Number of Common Shares ____________
EPS ____________

Complete the segment of the income statement for Plan B below: (round income statement amounts to the nearest dollar except the EPS to the nearest cent.)

Bond/Stock Plan
EBIT $____________
Less: Interest Expense ____________
Earnings Before Taxes ____________
Less: Taxes at 38% ____________
Net Income ____________
Number of common shares ____________
EPS _____________

cumberland industries 496721

a. Cumberland Industries’ most recent sales were $455,000,000; operating costs (excluding depreciation) were equal to 85% of sales; net fixed assets were $67,000,000; depreciation amounted to 10% of net fixed assets; interest expenses were $8,550,000; the state-plus-federal corporate tax rate was 40% and Cumberland paid 25% of its net income out in dividends. Given this information, construct Cumberland’s income statement. Also calculate total dividends and the addition to retained earnings.

b. Cumberland Industries’ partial balance sheets are shown below. Cumberland issued $10,000,000 of new common stock in the most recent year. Using this information and the results from part a, fill in the missing values for common stock, retained earnings, total common equity, and total liabilities and equity.

c. Construct the statement of cash flows for the most recent year.

contribution margin income statement 496664

Problem I 15 Points

Aldo’s T-shirt Shop only has three costs: T-shirt cost, rent cost on the shop, and utilities cost.

Aldo’s sells the T-shirt for $14.50 each. Management has prepared the following estimated cost information for next month:

At 8,000

At 10,000

T-shirts

T-shirts

T-shirt cost…………………….

$48,000

$60,000

Rent cost………………………

$3,600

$3,600

Utilities cost………………….

$6,800

$8,300

Assume that all of the activity levels mentioned in this problem are within the relevant range.

Required:

A. Calculate what Aldo’s should expect for total variable cost if 9,000 T-shirts are sold next month.

B. Prepare Aldo’s contribution approach income statement for a monthly sales volume level of 10,000 T-shirts.

controlled 496665

C:3-52 Controlled Groups. Which of the following groups constitute controlled groups? (Any stock not listed below is held by unrelated individuals each owning less than 1% of the outstanding stock.) For brother-sister corporations, which definition applies?

a. Judy owns 90% of the single classes of stock of Hot and Ice Corporations.

b. Jones and Kane Corporations each have only a single class of stock outstanding. The two controlling individual shareholders own the stock as follows:

Stock Ownership Percentages

Shareholder Jones Corp. Kane Corp.

Tom 60% 80%

Mary 30% 0%

c. Link, Model, and Name Corporations each have a single class of stock outstanding.

The stock is owned as follows:

Stock Ownership Percentages

Shareholder Model Corp. Name Corp.

Link Corp. 80% 50%

Model Corp. 40%

Link Corporation s stock is widely held by over 1,000 shareholders, none of whom owns directly or indirectly more than 1% of Link s stock.

d. Oat, Peach, Rye, and Seed Corporations each have a single class of stock outstanding.

The stock is owned as follows:

Stock Ownership Percentages

Shareholder Oat Corp. Peach Corp. Rye Corp. Seed Corp.

Bob 100% 90%

Oat Corp. 80% 30%

Rye Corp. 60% Read Less

the convention of consistency refers to consistent use of accounting principles 496666

1. The convention of consistency refers to consistent use of accounting principles:

among firms
within industries
among accounting periods
throughout the accounting period

2. Jayadev Athreya has started his first job. He will invest $5,000 at the end of each year for the next 45 years in a fund that will earn a return of 10 percent. How much will Jayadev have at the end of 45 years?

$2,667,904
$3,594,524
$1,745,600
$5,233,442

3. Variance reports are:

SEC financial reports
internal reports for management
external financial reports
all of these

4. Horizontal analysis is also known as:

linear analysis
vertical analysis
common size analysis
trend analysis

5. Turnbull Corp. had an EBIT of $247 million in the last fiscal year. Its depreciation and amortization expenses amounted to $84 million. The firm has 135 million shares outstanding and a share price of $12.80. A competing firm that is very similar to Turnbull has an enterprise value/EBITDA multiple of 5.40.

What is the enterprise value of Turnbull Corp.? Round to the nearest million dollars.

$1,787 million
$1,344 million
$1,315 million
$453.6 million

6. Regatta, Inc., has six-year bonds outstanding that pay a 8.25 percent coupon rate. Investors buying the bond today can expect to earn a yield to maturity of 6.875 percent. What should the company s bonds be priced at today? Assume annual coupon payments. (Round to the nearest dollar.)

$1,066
$923
$1014
$972

7. How firms estimate their cost of capital: The WACC for a firm is 13.00 percent. You know that the firm s cost of debt capital is 10 percent and the cost of equity capital is 20% What proportion of the firm is financed with debt?

33%
50%
70%
30%

8. The cash conversion cycle?

estimates how long it takes on average for the firm to collect its outstanding accounts receivables balance.

begins when the firm uses its cash to purchase raw materials and ends when the firm collects cash payments on its credit sales.

begins when the firm invests cash to purchase the raw materials that would be used to produce the goods that the firm manufactures.

shows how long the firm keeps its inventory before selling it.

9. The accumulation of accounting data on the basis of the individual manager who has the authority to make day-to-day decisions about activities in an area is called:

responsibility accounting
flexible accounting
master budgeting
static reporting

10. Which of the following financial statements is concerned with the company at a point in time?

balance sheet
statement of cash flows
income statement
retained earnings statement

11. The major element in budgetary control is:

the approval of the budget by the stockholders
the comparison of actual results with planned objectives.
the preparation of long-term plans
the valuation of inventories

12. The group of users of accounting information charged with achieving the goals of the business is its:

creditors
investors
managers
auditors

13. Which of the following is an advantage of corporations relative to partnerships and sole proprietorships?

most common form of organization
reduced legal liability for investors
lower taxes
harder to transfer ownership

14. Teakap, Inc. has current assets of $1,456,312 and total assets of $4,812,369 for the year ending September 30, 2006. It also has current liabilities of $1,041,012, common equity of $1,500,000 and retained earnings of $1,468,347. How much long-term debt does the firm have?

$1,844,022
$803,010
$2,303,010
$2,123,612

15. Gateway, Corp. has an inventory turnover of 5.6. What is the firm s days s sales in inventory?

65.2
57.9
61.7
64.3

16. An activity that has a direct cause-effect relationship with the resources consumed is a(n):

product activity
cost driver

cost pool
overhead rate

17. The process of evaluating financial data that change under alternative courses of action is called:

cost-benefit analysis
double entry analysis
contribution margin analysis
incremental analysis

18. An unrealistic budget is more likely to result when it:

is developed with performance appraisal usages in mind.
has been developed in a top down fashion.
has been developed by all levels of management.
has been developed in a bottom up fashion.

19. Serox stock was selling for $20 two years ago. The stock sold for $25 one year ago, and it is currently selling for $28. Serox pays a $1.10 dividend per year. What was the rate of return for owning Serox in the most recent year? (Round to the nearest percent.)

12%
40%
32%
16%

20. Which of the following is considered a hybrid organizational form?

partnership
sole proprietorship
limited liability partnership
corporation

21. A cost which remains constant per unit at various levels of activity is a:

manufacturing cost
mixed cost
fixed cost
variable cost

cook co reports the following information for 2011 496668

Cook Co. reports the following information for 2011.

Sandpaper

$10,000

Direct labor

$680,000

Small tools

100,000

Materials inventory, Jan 1

120,000

Coolants & lubricants

7,000

Materials inventory, Dec 31

86,000

Machine helpers’ salaries

86,000

Materials purchased

980,000

Finished goods, Jan 1

10,000

Sales

4,000,000

Finished goods, Dec 31

400,000

Work-in-process, Jan 1

30,000

Leasing costs, plant

120,000

Work-in-process, Dec 31

20,000

Depreciation, plant

70,000

Sales Commissions

200,000

Property taxes, equipment

10,000

Insurance, factory equipment

5,000

Sales salaries

180,000

Advertising costs

150,000

Office administration costs

250,000

Units completed

82,000

Determine the following for Cook Co. for 2011:

Cost of Goods Manufactured

Cost of Goods Sold

Unit Cost

Net Income (Loss)(assuming a 30% tax bracket).

cookie amp coffee creations inc presentation 496669

Create a PowerPoint presentation with at least 10 slides, chronicling your experience performing the accounting for Cookie Creations throughout the Cookie Chronicles continuing problem.Your PowerPoint should include the following:

A summary of major business developments affecting Cookie Creations’ accounting books.
An evaluation of Cookie Creations’ statement of cash flows for the year, ending October 31, 2012 (indirect method). This requires that CCC12 be complete. You may work with your CLC team on completing the requirements for CCC12 in preparation for your presentation. Include in your evaluation the following key figures from the statement of cash flows:

Net income
Net cash provided by operating activities
Net cash used by investing activities
Net cash used by financing activities
Net increase in cash
Cash as of October 31
An analysis of Cookie Creations overall financial health. You must include the calculations for at least three ratios.

Also include slides in which you discuss successes and challenges you experienced working for Natalie and with your CLC team and identify three of most important concepts you learned about accounting. Explain why you feel these concepts are significant to your success in accounting or business in general.

While APA format is not required for the body of this assignment, solid academic writing is expected and in-text citations and references should be presented using APA documentation guidelines, which can be found in the APA Style Guide, located in the Student Success Center.

coopertown suppliers inc perfect answer guaranteed a 496670

Prepare Financial Statements from Adjusted Trial Balance Worksheet

The 2012 year-end adjusted balances taken from the general ledger of Cooperstown Services, Inc. are listed below in general ledger order.

Coopertown Suppliers, Inc.

DR

CR

Cash

$12,950

Accounts receivable

28,150

Supplies

8,400

Prepaid insurance

9,500

Land

115,000

Buildings

360,000

Equipment

260,000

Accumulated depreciation

$239,900

Accounts payable

35,300

Salaries payable

7,300

Taxes payable

Common stock

5,200

31,500

Additional paid-in capital Common

Retained earnings

15,400

427,600

Dividends

25,400

Service revenue

475,000

Salaries expense

335,600

Depreciation expense

25,100

Supplies expense

12,950

Insurance expense

8,200

Miscellaneous expense

30,850

Utilities expense

5,100

Total

$1,237,200

$1,237,200

Transfer these accounts and balances to a spreadsheet worksheet and prepare an Income statement, a Classified Balance Sheet, and a Statement of Retained Earnings all in good form using proper headings for each statement. Note that Cooperstown is a service company so there is no cost of goods sold in its chart of accounts. Also, assume that all the liabilities are current liabilities. Keep in mind that you should not report any accounts without balances in your statements.

a copier company home improvement lucky 039 s long hancock hoodies calibri company 496671

1. A copier company has been using the same Copier A for 5 years. This copier can copy approximately 50 sheets a minute. The company has an opportunity to purchase a new Copier B that can process approximately 60 sheets a minute. The old machine will continue to be used for jobs that aren t rush jobs. The new machine will create a need for additional fixed selling expenses, an additional supervisor, and the two employees to use the machine. No other fixed costs will change.

Please list out whether each of these costs are relevant ( R) or not relevant ( NR). Format your answer as follows: a) R, b) R, and so forth.

a. Copier revenue

b. Book value-Copier A

c. Disposal value-Copier A

d. Variable selling expenses

e. Fixed selling expenses

f. Depreciation of Copier A

g. General and administrative overhead fixed

h. Direct labor

i. Indirect labor

j. Market value of Copier B

2. Home Improvement Company, a retail home store, has two major divisions-outdoors and indoors. Here is the data on their income and expenses:

Total Indoor Outdoor

Sales $85,000 $50,000 $35,000

Variable expenses 35,000 15,000 20,000

Contribution margin 50,000 35,000 15,000

Fixed expenses:

Advertising 5,000 2,000 3,000

Supervisor salaries 19,000 10,000 9,000

Store insurance 2,000 1,000 1,000

General administrative 11,000 8,000 3,000

overhead

Total fixed expenses 37,000 21,000 16,000

Net operating income (loss) $13,000 $14,000 (1,000)

Due to the loss, the general manager is considering closing the outdoor division and just focusing on the indoor division. If the division were closed, the supervisor salary and the advertising costs could be eliminated. Should the division be closed? Please show your computations to support your answer.

3. Lucky s Long board Park manufactures its own long boards to use at their national long board skiing park. An outside supplier has offered to sell long boards to Lucky s for $100 per unit. To evaluate this offer, Lucky s has gathered the following information relating to its own cost of producing a long board internally:

Per Unit Total for 1,000 units

Direct materials $70 $70,000

Direct labor $22 $22,000

Variable manufacturing overhead $5 $5,000

Supervisors salaries $10 $10,000

Depreciation of machinery to make $8 $8,000

long boards

Fixed manufacturing overhead, $20 $20,000

common, allocated

Total cost $135 $135,000

Should the outside supplier s offer be accepted? Show all computations.

4. Hancock Hoodies is considering a special order for 100 Hoodies for a local company party. The normal selling price of a hoodie is $30 and its unit product cost is $16 as shown below:

Direct materials $6

Direct labor $3

Manufacturing overhead $7

Unit Product cost $16

Most of the manufacturing overhead is fixed and unaffected by variations in how many hoodies are produced in a given period. However, $2 of the overhead is variable with respect to the number of hoodies produced. The customer who is interested in the special hoodies order would like a special silkscreen put onto the hoodies. This silkscreen would require additional materials costing $4 per hoodie and would require ordering of the design costing $100 that would have no other use once the special order is completed. This order would have no effect on the company s regular sales, and the order could be fulfilled using the company s existing capacity without affecting any other order.

What effect would accepting this order have on the company s net operating income if a special price of $17 is offered per hoodie for this order? Should the company accept the order? Show computations.

5. Calibri Company produces three products: F, G, and H. The selling price, variable costs, and contribution margin for one unit of each product follow:

Product

F G H

Selling price $40 $110 $50

Variable costs:

Direct materials $16 $25 $20

Direct labor $11 $20 $12

Variable manufacturing $10 $10 $8

overhead

Total variable costs $37 $55 $40

Contribution margin $3 $55 $10

Contribution margin ratio 7.5% 50% 20%

One of two major machines used to produce these products has broken down and a new one is on backorder, so the company is down to one machine. Product F takes 0.20 machine hours to produce one unit, Product G takes 11 machine hours to produce one unit, and Product H takes 2.5 machine hours. There are 1,000 machine hours available on the new machine.

a. What is the amount of contribution margin that will be obtained per machine hour on each product?

b. Which product would you recommend that the company work on next week the orders for product F, product G or product H? Show your computations.

corporate finance 496672

prepare a three-page analysis of the corporate financial decision-making process at your selected organization. Include the following in your analysis:

    1. Capital structure analysis which examines the various debt and equity instruments used by the organization, as well as the impact on EPS, PE ratios, and price per share
    1. Evaluation of long-term financing instruments and strategies for the selected organization
    1. Recommend an optimal capital structure for the selected organization in view of current business, economic, and industry trends
    1. Estimate of the firm’s cost of capital, price per share, and market value based on the optimal capital structure that you have devised
  1. Analysis of current dividend policies and examination of the factors that affect the selected organization’s choice of dividend policies

corporate finance assignment 8 problems 496673

Assignment 8

Problem 1

Lowell Inc. has no debt and its financial position is given by the

following data:

Assets (book = market) $3,000,000

EBIT $500,000

Cost of equity (Ks) 10%

Stock price (P0) $15

Shares outstanding n0 200,000

Tax rate T 40%

The firm is considering selling bonds and simultaneously

repurchasing some of its stock. It if moves to capital structure

with 30 percent debt based on market values, its cost of equity,

Ks, will increase to 11 percent to reflect the increased risk.

Bonds can be sold at a cost (Kd) of 7 percent. Lowell Inc. is a

no-growth firm. Hence, all its earnings are paid out as

dividends, and earnings are exceptionally constant over time.

a.

A. What would be the new WACC?

B. What effect would this use of leverage have on the value of thefirm (Va)?

C.What would be Lowell Inc. s stock price?

D.What happens to the firm s earnings per share after therecapitalization?

Problem 2

Mass Inc. is trying to estimate its optimal capital

structure. Right now, Mass Inc. has a capital structure

that consists of 50 percent debt and 50 percent equity,

based on market values. (Its D/S ratio is 1.00) The riskfree

rate is 6 percent and the market risk premium, K

M

K

RF, is 5 percent. Currently the company s cost of equity,

which is based on the CAPM, is 12 percent and its tax rate

is 40 percent. What would be Mass Inc. s estimated cost of

equity if it were to change its capital structure to 60 percent debt and 40 percent equity?

Problem 3

23,104 32,562

Cost of goods sold

8,195 14,176

BALANCE SHEET COCA-COLA PEPSI

Assets

Cash and Cash Equivalents 4,701 1,716

Short-term Investments 66 3,166

Accounts Receivables 2,281 3,261

Inventory 1,424 1,693

Other Current Assets 1,778 618

Total Current Assets

10,250 10,454

Total Assets

29,427 31,727

Financed by: COCA-COLA PEPSI

Accounts Payable 5,290 5,357

Short-term debt 4,546 2,889

Other Current Liabilities 0 1,160

Total Current Liabilities

9,836 9,406

Problem 4

In-tech Corporation s sales and purchases for the last three

months are as following:

Sales ($) Purchases ($)

October 100,000 80,000

November 90,000 100,000

December 120,000 75,000

For the next three months, it estimates sales and purchases

to be as following:

Sales ($) Purchases ($)

January 90,000 70,000

February 80,000 70,000

March 80,000 70,000

It pays 40 percent of purchases in cash and gets a 4

percent discount. Another 40 percent of purchases are paid

the next month, and the final 20 percent of purchases are

paid in the second month after the purchase (for example,

40 percent of October purchases are paid in October, 40

percent October purchases are paid in November, and 20

percent October purchases are paid in December). Half of

the sales are made in cash, and the balance is collected

the next month. Cash sales are given a two percent

discount, and five percent of credit sales end up as bad

debt. The monthly operating expenses for In-tech

Corporation s are $10,000. In-tech expects to sell one of

its machinery in March for $25,000. It will buy the

replacement in April for $50,000. The cash balance as on

December 31 was $50,000. In-tech has a target cash balance

of $50,000. Prepare a monthly cash budget for the next

three months.

corporate tax assignment 496674

1. Dedria Corporation changed its name to Lenise Corporation. This is example of what type of tax-free reorganization?

X reorganization

F reorganization

Y reorganization

Z reorganization

2. Earnings accumulated for self-insurance purposes are considered to be for the reasonable needs of the business for purposes of the accumulated earnings tax (section 531).

True

False

3. Once a Corporation is determined to be a personal holding company, it will always be a personal holding company for the remainder of its existence for purposes of the personal holding company tax (section 541).

true

false

4. The IRS may impose both the accumulated earnings tax (section 531) and the personal holding company tax (section 541) on a Corporation in the same tax year.

true

false

5. Earnings accumulated for purposes of making loans to suppliers are considered to be for the reasonable needs of the business.

true

false

6. Corporations are not required to make estimated tax payments for any alternative minimum tax liability.

true

false

7. Voting stock only may be used by the acquiring corporation in a type B reorganization without causing the reorganization to be taxable.

true

false

8. In a type C reorganization, the acquiring corporation must assume all of the liabilities of the acquired (target) Corporation

true

false

9. Nonvoting stock may be used in a type a reorganization without causing the reorganization to be taxable

true

fasle

10. In regards to the personal holding company tax (section 541), under which of the following circumstances will the Corporation not pass the 50% tax?

The Corporation has 10 unequal unrelated shareholders

the Corporation has 10 equal unrelated shareholders

the Corporation has nine equal unrelated shareholders

the Corporation has nine unrelated shareholders

11. Which of the following types of income is not considered to be personal holding company income for purposes of the personal holding company tax (section 541)?

Dividends

interests

sales

royalties

12. Maggiore corporations total reasonable business needs for 2013 was $220,000. Majority corporations accumulated earnings and profit at the beginning of 2013 was 20 $40,000 (including consideration for the dividends listed below). Majority Corporation also the following information for 2013: taxable income-$350,000; federal income tax-hundred $19,000; dividends received (less than 20% owned domestic corporation)-hundred thousand dollars; cash dividends paid in 2013-$4000; dividends paid January 31, 2014-$20,000; consent dividends-$10,000; access travel contributions-$16,000; net capital loss adjustment-$8000. The accumulated earnings credit for purposes of the accumulated earnings tax for Maggiore Corporation for the year of 2013 is:

$10,000

$110000

$80,000

$100,000

13. Which of the following will not reduce the amount of acutely taxable income?

A non-taxable dividend paid during the tax year.

A property dividend paid during the tax year.

A cash dividend paid within two and one-half months after the close of the tax year.

It can set dividend paid within two and one-half months after the close of the tax year.

14. Four 2013, Prada Corporation had the following transactions: regular taxable income- $1,440,000; a salary depreciation on real estate in excess of straight-line (placed in service in 2010)-$560,000; and workstation of certified pollution control facilities- $160,000; tax-exempt interest on lamentable bonds not use for a central government purposes-$280,000; untaxed appreciation on property donated to a qualified charity-hundred and $20,000; percentage depletion in excess of operatives adjusted basis-$180,000. The regular federal income tax liability for Prada Corporation for 2013 was $489,600. The alternative minimum tax (line 16) four Prada Corporation for tax year 2013 is:

$0

$58,400

$548,000

$489,600

15. Majority corporations total reasonable business needs for 2013 was $320,000. Majority corporations accumulated earnings and profit at the beginning of 2013 was $210,000 (including consideration for dividends listed below ). Majority Corporation also have the following information for 2013: taxable income-$350,000; federal income tax-$119,000; dividends received (less than 20%) domestic corporation)-$100,000; cash dividends paid in 2013-$40,000; dividends paid January 31, 2014-$20,000; consent dividends-$10,000; access charitable contributions-$16,000; net capital loss adjustment-$8000. The dividends paid deduction for purposes of the accumulated earnings tax for majority Corporation for the year 2013 is:

$100,000

$70,000

$60,000

$40,000

16. Majority corporations total reasonable business needs for 2013 was $320,000. Majority corporations acutely earning a profit at the beginning of 2013 was $210,000 (including consideration for dividends listed below) majority Corporation also the following information for 2013: taxable income-$250,000; federal income tax $119,000; dividends received (less than 20% own domestic corporation)-$100,000; cash dividends paid in 2013-$40,000; dividends paid January 31, 2014-$20,000; consent dividends-$10,000; excess charitable contributions-$16,000; net capital loss adjustment-$8000. The cumulative earning credit for purposes of the accumulated earnings tax for majority Corporation for the year 2013 is:

$60,000

$100,000

$110,000

$40,000

17. In a complete liquidation of the Corporation, under no circumstances may the liquidating Corporation have a recognize loss as a result of liquidation.

True

false

18. It is possible (i.e. could happen) for a liquidating Corporation to recognize a gain or loss on the distribution of disqualified property.

True

false

19. Michelle and her daughter, Gloria, or the sole shareholders of Zoe Corporation. Gloria terminates her entire stock ownership and Zoe Corporation by selling all for stock back to the Corporation. One year later, Gloria buys the stock of Michelle in Zoe Corporation. Despite this, Gloria is complete termination of her interest can still be treated as a qualified stock redemption

true

false

20. As a result of a redemption, a shareholder s direct and indirect (i.e. stock attribution rules effect) ownership in a corporation decreased from 60% to 40%. Under these circumstances, the redemption qualifies for sale (redemption) treatment

true

false

21. A split-off his exchange of the Parent Corporation stock by shareholders of the Parent Corporation in exchange for stock in a Subsidiary of the Parent Corporation.

True

false

22. A split-off is where a parent corporation give stock of its subsidiaries to its shareholders and the shareholders give up nothing in return.

True

false

23. A spin-off is where a shareholder of a parent Corporation receives stock in the subsidiary corporation of the parent corporation and the shareholders returned stock of the parent Corporation back to the parent Corporation.

True

False

24. In 2006, Roma carried out successful section 302 (B) (3) (complete termination of shareholders interests) redemption as to stock in Trieste Corporation. In 2013, Roma inherits stock in Trieste they Corporation from her father. Roma has not violated the 10 year rule concerning stock redemption under section 302 (B) (3).

True

False

25. It is not possible (i.e. could not happen) for illiquid incorporation to recognize a gain or loss on the dissipation of disqualified property.

true

false

26. Losses to the disturbing Corporation in a corporate liquidation are disallowed in a related-arty situations only if the property distributed to the shareholder is a non-pro-rata distribution.

true

false

27. At the time of her death in 2013-Gloria owned 19% of the stock in gene Corporation and 18% of the stock in June Corporation for purposes of satisfying the more than 35% test requirement of section 303 of the IRS code, the value of the stocks may be combined.

True

False

28. A spin-off is where a parent Corporation gives stock of its subsidiaries to its shareholders and the shareholders give up nothing in return.

true

false

29. Avian died in 2013 with an adjusted gross estate of $1,200,000. Avian s gross estate included 80% of the stock of Poordone Corporation valued at $4000. Avian have purchased the stock in 1993 for $80,000. The death taxes and funeral and administrative expenses for Avian s estate totaled $125,000. The executor of Avian s estate redeemed $20,000 of the stock Avian owned in Poordone Corporation. As a result of this transaction, Avian s estate has a taxable divert income of: (assume that Avian s as they does not qualify for any redemption under section 302 (B) and Poordone Corporation has substantial E&P.

$125,000

$75,000

$0

$200,000

the corporate treasurer of gator electronics corporation 496675

1. The corporate treasurer of Gator Electronics Corporation expects the company to grow at 4% in the future, and assumes debt securities at 6% interest (tax rate = 30%) to be a cheaper option to finance the growth. The current market price per share of its common stock is $39, and the expected dividend in one year is $1.50 per share. Calculate the cost of the company’s retained earnings and check if the treasurer’s assumption is correct. 2. The risk-free rate on 10-year U.S. Treasury bills is 3% and the expected rate of return on the overall stock market is 11%. If Gator Electrics has a beta of 1.6. What is the cost of equity? 3. A company has a capital structure as follows: Total Assets $600,000 Debt $300,000 Preferred Stock $100,000 Common Equity $200,000 What would be the minimum expected return from a new capital investment project to satisfy the suppliers of the capital? Assume the applicable tax rate is 40%, interest on debt is 11%, flotation cost per share of preferred stock is $0.75, and flotation cost per share of common stock is $4. The preferred and common stocks are selling in the market for $26 and $143 a share respectively, and they are expected to pay a dividend of $2 and $7, respectively, in one year. The company’s dividends are expected to grow at 13% per year. The firm would like to maintain the existing capital structure to finance the new project. Answer: The minimum expected return from a new capital investment project is the WACC plus any additional risk premium. Since no additional risk is mentioned, we will use the WACC.

4. Ajax Manufacturing dividend is $8 per share of common stock in one year. The dividend growth rate is 3%. Required rate of return is 14%. a) What is the current market price per share? b) What is the annual rate of return if you purchase the stock at $65?

correct answers 496677

Question 1.1.(TCO A) A corporation has which of the following sets of characteristics?(Points : 5)

Shared control, tax advantages, increased skills, and resources
Simple to set up and maintains control with the founder
Easier to transfer ownership and raise funds, no personal liability for stockholders
Harder to raise funds and gives owner control

Question 2.2.(TCO A) The Dividends account _____.(Points : 5)

appears on the income statement along with the expenses of the business
must show transactions every accounting period
is increased with debits and decreased with credits
is considered a long-term asset of the firm

Question 3.3.(TCOs A, B) Below is a partial list of account balances for Denton Company:

Cash $7,000
Prepaid insurance 700
Accounts receivable 3,500
Accounts payable 2,800
Notes payable 4,200
Common stock 1,400
Dividends 700
Revenues 21,000
Expenses 17,500

What did Denton Company show as total credits?(Points : 5)

$30,100
$29,400
$28,700
$30,800

Question 4.4.(TCOs B, E) Under the accrual basis of accounting, _____.(Points : 5)

cash must be received before revenue is recognized
net income is calculated by matching cash outflows against cash inflows
events that change a company’s financial statements are recognized in the period they occur rather than in the period in which cash is paid or received
the ledger accounts must be adjusted to reflect a cash basis of accounting before financial statements are prepared under generally accepted accounting principles

Question 5.5.(TCO D) Three companies report the same cost of goods available for sale, but each employs a different inventory costing method. If the price of goods has increased during the period, then the company using _____.(Points : 5)

LIFO will have the highest ending inventory
FIFO will have the highest cost of goods sold
All three companies will have the same value for ending inventory.
average cost will have an ending inventory value that falls between FIFO and LIFO

Question 6.6.(TCOs A, E) Equipment with a cost of $192,000 has an estimated salvage value of $18,000 and an estimated life of 4 years or 12,000 hours. It is to be depreciated by the straight-line method. What is the amount of depreciation for the first full year, during which the equipment was used 3,300 hours?(Points : 5)

$48,000
$52,500
$49,500
$43,500

Question 7.7.(TCOs D, G) Mendez Corporation issues 2,000 ten-year, 8%, $1,000 bonds dated January 1, 2007, at 103. The journal entry to record the issuance will show a _____.(Points : 5)

debit to Cash of $2,000,000
debit to Premium on Bonds Payable for $60,000
credit to Bonds Payable for $2,000,000
credit to Cash for $2,060,000

Question 8.8.(TCO C) Accounts receivable arising from sales to customers amounted to $80,000 and $70,000 at the beginning and end of the year, respectively. Income reported on the income statement for the year was $240,000. Exclusive of the effect of other adjustments, the cash flows from operating activities to be reported on the statement of cash flows is _____.(Points : 5)

$240,000
$250,000
$310,000
$230,000

Question 9.9.(TCO F) One variation of the horizontal analysis is known as _____.(Points : 5)

nonlinear analysis
vertical analysis
trend analysis
common-size analysis

Question 10.10.(TCO F) In a common-size balance sheet, the 100% figure is _____.(Points : 5)

total current assets
total property, plant, and equipment
total liabilities
total assets

Question 11.11.(TCO F) In vertical analysis, the base amount for studying salary and wages expense is generally _____.(Points : 5)

net sales
salary and wages expense in a previous year
gross profit
net income

Question 12.12.(TCO F) Short-term creditors are usually most interested in assessing _____.(Points : 5)

solvency
liquidity
marketability
profitability

Question 13.13.(TCO F) Return on common stockholder’s equity ratio is affected by _____.(Points : 5)

net income
dividend paid to preferred stock, if any
leverage (debt-to-assets ratio)
All of the above

Question 14.14.(TCO G) To calculate the market value of a bond, we need to use the time-value-of-money concept called _____.(Points : 5)

compounding
extrapolation
discounting
None of the above

correct answers fast 496678

1.(TCO A) Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report:

Income Taxes Payable

$471

Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities

8,109

Cash

8,442

Other non-current Liabilities

10,449

Common Stock

1,760

Receivables

4,812

Other Current Assets

2,973

Long-term Investments

10,448

Other Non-current Assets

3,585

Property, Plant and Equipment

23,486

Trademarks

6,527

Other Intangible Assets

20,810

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

53

Accumulated Depreciation

9,010

Accounts Payable

8,680

Short Term Notes Payable

17,874

Prepaid Expenses

2,781

Other Current Liabilities

796

Long-Term Liabilities

14,736

Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value

11,379

Retained Earnings

55,038

Inventories

3,264

Treasury Stock

35,009

Other information taken from the Annual Report:

Sales Revenue for 2012

$48,017

Cost of Goods Sold for 2012

19,053

Net Income for 2012

9,019

Inventory Balance on 12/31/11

3,092

Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11

4,920

Total Assets on 12/31/11

79,974

Equity Balance on 12/31/11

31,921

Required:
1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.
2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above, calculatetheCurrent Ratioand Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work).

(Points : 36)

Question 2.2.

(TCO B) The following selected data was retrieved from the Wal-Mart, Inc. financial statements for the year ending January 31, 2013:

Accounts Payable

$38,080

Accounts Receivable

6,768

Cash

7,781

Common Stock

3,952

Cost of Goods Sold

352,488

Income Tax Expense

7,981

Interest Expenses

2,064

Membership Revenues

3,048

Net Sales

466,114

Operating, Selling and Administrative Expenses

88,873

Retained Earnings

72,978

Required:

Using the information provided above:
1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement
2. Calculate the Profit Margin, and Gross profit rate for the company. Be sure to provide the formula you are using, show your calculations, and discuss your findings/results.

(Points : 36)

Question 3.3.(TCO C) Please review the following real-world Hewlett Packard Statement of Cash flows and address the 2 questions below:

Cash flow from operating activities

In millions

In millions

For the year ended 2012

For the year ended 2011

Net (loss) earnings

$(12,650)

$7,074

Depreciation and amortization

5,095

4,984

Impairment of goodwill and purchased intangible assets

18,035

885

Stock-based compensation expense

635

685

Provision for doubtful accounts

142

81

Provision for inventory

277

217

Restructuring charges

2,266

645

Deferred taxes on earnings

(711)

166

Excess tax benefit from stock-based competition

(12)

(163)

Other, net

265

(46)

Accounts and financing receivables

1,269

(227)

Inventory

890

(1,252)

Accounts payable

(1,414)

275

Taxes on earnings

(320)

610

Restructuring

(840)

(1,002)

Other assets and liabilities

(2,356)

(293)

Net cash provided by operating activities

10,571

12,639

Cash flows from investing activities:

Investment in property, plant, and equipment

(3,706)

(4,539)

Proceeds from sale of property, plant, and equipment

617

999

Purchases of available-for-sale securities and other investments

(972)

(96)

Maturities and sales of available-for-sale securities and other investment

662

68

Payments in connection with business acquisitions, net of cash acquired

(141)

(10,480)

Proceeds from business divestiture, net

87

89

Net cash used in investing activities

(3,453)

(13,959)

Cash flow from financing activities:

(Payments) issuance of commercial paper and notes payable, net

(2,775)

(1,270)

Issuance of debt

5,154

11,942

Payment of debt

(4,333)

(2,336)

Issuance of common stock under employee stock plans

716

896

Repurchase of common stock

(1,619)

(10,117)

Excess tax benefit from stock-based compensation

12

163

Cash dividends paid

(1,015)

(844)

Net cash used in financing activities

(3,860)

(1,566)

Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

3,258

(2,886)

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

8,043

10,929

Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

$11,301

$8,043

Required:

1) Please calculate the percentage increase or decrease in cash for the total line of the operating, investing, and financing sections bolded aboveand explain the major reasons for the increase or decrease for each of these sections.

2) Please calculate the free cash flow for 2012 and explain the meaning of this ratio.

(Points : 36)

Question 4.4.(TCO D) You are CFO of Goforit, Inc., a wholesale distribution company specializing in emerging technologies. Your CEO is a brilliant marketer, but relies on you to explain issues and choices in accounting and finance. She has heard from other members of a CEO organization to which she belongs that a company s net income can vary widely depending on which accounting choices are made from the GAAP menu.

Assuming the goal is tomaximizenet income, choose an accounting treatment from each of the following scenarios, and explain to your CEO why the choice will produce the desired effect on reported Net Income for the current year. Include in your answer the effect of the choice on both the income statement and balance sheet.

Required:

a. Goforit carries significant electronics inventory in a competitive environment where prices are actually falling. Which inventory valuation method would you choose LIFO, FIFO, or average cost Assume that unit purchases exceed unit sales.

b. Goforit has a large investment in warehouse equipment including conveyor belts, forklifts, and automated packaging systems. Which depreciation method would you choose: Straight line (SL) or double declining balance (DDB)?

(Points : 36)

Question 5.5.(TCO F) Please review the following real-world ratios for Johnson & Johnson and Pfizer for the year ended 2012 and address the 2 questions below.

Ratio Name

Johnson & Johnson

Pfizer

Profit margin

16.1%

24.7%

Inventory turnover ratio

3.1

1.7

Average collection period

59.4 days

69.1 days

Cash debt coverage ratio

.27

.16

Debt to Total assets

46.6%

127.5%

Required:

1) Please explain the meaning of each of the Pfizer ratios above.

2) Please state which company performed better for each ratio.

(Points : 36)

corrs company began operations in 2013 and determined its ending inventory at cost a 496679

Corrs Company began operations in 2013 and determined its ending inventory at cost and at lower-of-cost-or-market at December 31, 2013, and December 31, 2014. This information is presented below.

Cost Lower-of-Cost-or-Market
12/31/13 $365,410 $337,500
12/31/14 444,440 424,110

(a)Prepare the journal entries required at December 31, 2013, and December 31, 2014, assuming that the inventory is recorded at market, and a perpetual inventory system (direct method) is used.(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

Date Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit
12/31/13
12/31/14

(b) Prepare journal entries required at December 31, 2013, and December 31, 2014, assuming that the inventory is recorded at cost and an allowance account is adjusted at each year-end under a perpetual system.(Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

Date Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit
12/31/13
12/31/14

(c) Which of the two methods above provides the higher net income in each year?

Both methods have the same effectCost-of-goods-sold method with no allowance usedLoss method with an allowance used

cosc acc 101 coscacc101sp13 496680

Walker Company had total revenue and expense numbers of $1,500,000 and $1,200,000, respectively, in the current year. In addition, the company had a gain of $230,000 that resulted from the passage of new legislation, which is considered unusual and infrequent for financial reporting purposes. The gain is expected to be subject to a 35 percent income tax rate.

Prepare an abbreviated income statement for Walker for the year. (Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

WALKER COMPANY
Income Statement
For year ended _____.
(Click to select)Interest receivableOffice equipmentRevenuesSalaries payableDepreciation expenses $
(Click to select)ExpensesOffice equipmentSales revenueDepreciation expensesSupplies expense

(Click to select)Income before extraordinary itemAccounts payableDepreciaton expensesDeferred revenueDepreciation expenses $
(Click to select)Sales revenueExtraordinary lossExtraordinary gainInterest receivableSalaries payable

(Click to select)Net incomeNet loss $



Messer Company had retained earnings at the beginning of the current year of $590,000. During the year, the following activities occurred:

Net income of $88,000 was earned.

A cash dividend of $1.20 per share was declared and distributed on the 50,000 shares of common stock outstanding.

Prepare a statement of retained earnings for the year. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

MESSER COMPANY
Statement of Retained Earnings
For year ended _____.
(Click to select)Depreciaton expensesSupplies expenseOffice equipmentRetained earnings, beginning of yearRetained earnings, end of year $
(Click to select)Less: Net lossAdd: Net income

$
(Click to select)Deduct: Cash dividend on common stockSupplies expenseFuel expensesSalaries payableAdd: Cash dividend on common stock

(Click to select)Retained earnings, beginning of yearDepreciaton expensesSalaries payableOffice equipmentRetained earnings, end of year $



cost accounting exercise 496682

1) Mayberry Company had the following journal entries recorded for the end of June. Unfortunately, the company’s only accountant quit on July 10 and the president is at a loss as to the company’s performance for the month of June.

Materials Control 150,000

Direct Materials Price Variance 5,000

Accounts Payable Control 145,000

Work-in-Process Control 60,000

Direct Materials Efficiency Variance 4,000

Materials Control 64,000

Work-in-Process Control 425,000

Direct Manufacturing Labor Price Variance 7,500

Direct Manufacturing Labor Efficiency Variance 9,000

Wages Payable Control 423,500

Required:

a. What kind of performance did the company have for June? Explain each variance.

b. Why is Direct Materials given in two entries?

2) Quiett Truck manufactures part WB23 used in several of its truck models. 10,000 units are produced each year with production costs as follows:

Direct materials $ 45,000

Direct manufacturing labor 15,000

Variable support costs 35,000

Fixed support costs 25,000

Total costs $120,000

Quiett Truck has the option of purchasing part WB23 from an outside supplier at $11.20 per unit. If WB23 is outsourced, 40% of the fixed costs cannot be immediately converted to other uses.

a. Describe avoidable costs. What amount of the WB23 production costs is avoidable?

b. Should Quiett Truck outsource WB23? Why or why not?

c. What other items should Quiett Truck consider before outsourcing any of the parts it currently manufactures?

3) Collier Bicycles has been manufacturing its own wheels for its bikes. The company is currently operating at 100% capacity, and variable manufacturing overhead is charged to production at the rate of 30% of direct labor cost. The direct materials and direct labor cost per unit to make the wheels are $1.50 and $1.80, respectively. Normal production is 200,000 wheels per year.

A supplier offers to make the wheels at a price of $4 each. If the bicycle company accepts this offer, all variable manufacturing costs will be eliminated, but the $42,000 of fixed manufacturing overhead currently being charged to the wheels will have to be absorbed by other products.

Required:

a. Prepare an incremental analysis for the decision to make or buy the wheels.

b. Should Collier Bicycles buy the wheels from the outside supplier? Justify your answer.

4)Today, Turbo Ovens Manufacturing announced the availability of a new convection oven that cooks more quickly with lower operating expenses. Pat is considering the purchase of this faster, lower-operating cost convection oven to replace the existing one they recently purchased. Selected information about the two ovens is given below:

Existing New Turbo Oven

Original cost $60,000 $50,000

Accumulated depreciation $ 5,000

Current salvage value $40,000

Remaining life 5 years 5 years

Annual operating expenses $10,000 $ 7,500

Disposal value in 5 years $ 0 $ 0

Required:

a. What costs are sunk?

b. What costs are relevant?

c. What are the net cash flows over the next 5 years assuming the Pizzeria purchases the new convection oven?

d. What other items should Pat, as manager of the Pizzeria, consider when making this decision?

5) Buck Corporation plans to grow by offering a computer monitor, the CM3000 that is superior and unique from the competition. Buck believes that putting additional resources into R&D and staying ahead of the competition with technological innovations are critical to implementing its strategy.

Required:

a. Is Buck’s strategy one of product differentiation or cost leadership? Explain briefly.

Identify at least one key element that you would expect to see included in the balanced scorecard

b. for the financial perspective.

c. for the customer perspective.

d. for the internal business process perspective.

e. for the learning and growth perspective.

6) Heather’s Pillow Company manufactures pillows. The 20X5 operating budget is based on production of 20,000 pillows with 0.5 machine-hour allowed per pillow. Variable manufacturing overhead is anticipated to be $220,000.

Actual production for 20X5 was 18,000 pillows using 9,500 machine-hours. Actual variable costs were $20 per machine-hour.

Required:

Calculate the variable overhead spending and efficiency variances.

7) Everjoice Company makes clocks. The fixed overhead costs for 20X5 total $720,000. The company uses direct labor-hours for fixed overhead allocation and anticipates 240,000 hours during the year for 480,000 units. An equal number of units are budgeted for each month.

During June, 42,000 clocks were produced and $63,000 were spent on fixed overhead.

Required:

a. Determine the fixed overhead rate for 20X5 based on units of input.

b. Determine the fixed overhead static-budget variance for June.

c. Determine the production-volume overhead variance for June.

8) Silver Lake Cabinets is approached by Ms. Jenny Zhang, a new customer, to fulfill a large one-time-only special order for a product similar to one offered to regular customers. The following per unit data apply for sales to regular customers:

Direct materials $100

Direct labor 125

Variable manufacturing support 60

Fixed manufacturing support 75

Total manufacturing costs 360

Markup (60%) 216

Targeted selling price $576

Silver Lake Cabinets has excess capacity. Ms. Zhang wants the cabinets in cherry rather than oak, so direct material costs will increase by $30 per unit.

Required:

a. For Silver Lake Cabinets, what is the minimum acceptable price of this one-time-only special order?

b. Other than price, what other items should Silver Lake Cabinets consider before accepting this one-time-only special order?

c. How would the analysis differ if there was limited capacity?

cost accounting three questions 496683

Problem 1

Mariya Company uses a job-order costing system and applies manufacturing overhead cost to jobs on the basis of the cost of direct materials used in production. Its predetermined overhead rate was based on a cost formula that estimated $221,200 of manufacturing overhead for an estimated allocation base of $158,000 direct material dollars. The following transactions took place during the year (all purchases and services were acquired on account):

a. Raw materials purchased, $145,000.

b. Raw materials requisitioned for use in production (all direct materials), $141,000.

c. Utility bills incurred in the factory, $24,000.

d. Costs for salaries and wages were incurred as follows:

Direct labor

$223,000

Indirect labor

$61,700

Selling and administrative salaries

$143,000

e. Maintenance costs incurred in the factory, $17,000.

f. Advertising costs incurred, $128,000.

g. Depreciation recorded for the year, $43,000 (70% relates to factory assets, and the remainder relates to selling and administrative assets).

h. Rental cost incurred on buildings, $85,000 (80% of the space is occupied by the factory, and 20% is occupied by sales and administration).

i. Miscellaneous selling and administrative costs incurred, $11,000.

j. Manufacturing overhead cost was applied to jobs, $ ?

k. Cost of goods manufactured for the year, $555,000.

l. Sales for the year (all on account) totaled $1,100,000. These goods cost $530,000 according to their job cost sheets.

The balances in the inventory accounts at the beginning of the year were as follows:

Raw materials

$23,000

Work in process

$24,000

Finished Goods

$34,000

Required:

a. Using the above data, prepare the following eight journal entries:

1. To record the purchase of raw materials

2. To transfer cost of raw materials to production, record direct labor costs, and apply overhead to work in process inventory

3. To transfer cost of completed units to finished goods inventoryj

4. To record sales

5. To transfer cost of finished goods to cost of goods sold

6. To record factory overhead costs

7. To transfer over- or underapplied overhead to cost of goods sold

8. To record selling and administrative expenses

As these are summary journal entries for an entire accounting period, no dates are given. Use the number of the journal entry in place of a date on the general journal page. All of the information needed to correctly record the entries is provided. However, you may find it useful to prepare t-accounts on scratch paper to help you determine the correct debits and credits for some entries.

b. Job 521 was one of the many jobs started and completed during the year. The job required $3,900 in direct materials and 400 hours of direct labor time at a rate of $14 per hour. If the job contained 540 units and the company billed at 65% above the unit product cost on the job cost sheet, what price per unit would have been charged to the customer?

Problem 2

Broucek Inc. makes baby furniture from fine hardwoods. The company uses a job-order costing

system and predetermined overhead rates to apply manufacturing overhead cost to jobs. The

predetermined overhead rate in the Preparation Department is based on machine hours, and

the rate in the Fabrication Department is based on direct labor-hours. At the beginning of the

year, the company s management prepared the following information for the year. All figures

are estimates, except the fixed overhead and variable overhead rates, which are actual figures

from last year and remain the same this year. In other words, it is machine-hours and direct

labor-hours that are estimated and used with fixed overhead and variable overhead per

machine-hour and per direct labor-hour in order to calculate rates for applying overhead.

Department

Preparation

Fabrication

Machine-hours

83,000

32,000

Direct labor-hours

33,000

57,000

Direct materials cost

$194,000

$204,000

Direct labor cost

$280,000

$521,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead cost

$207,500

$518,700

Variable manufacturing overhead per machine-hour

$3.00

Variable manufacturing overhead per direct labor-hour

$5.00

Job 135 was started on April 1 and completed on May 12. The company’s cost records show the following information concerning the job:

Department

Preparation

Fabrication

Machine-hours

360

67

Direct labor-hours

80

133

Direct materials cost

$940

$1,120

Direct labor cost

$690

$970

Required:

a. Compute the predetermined overhead rate used during the year in the Preparation Department. Compute the rate used in the Fabrication Department.

b. Compute the total overhead cost applied to Job 135.

c. What would be the total cost recorded for Job 135? If the job contained 29 units, what would be the unit product cost?

d. At the end of the year, the records of Broucek Inc. revealed the following actual cost and operating data for all jobs worked on during the year:

Department

Preparation

Fabrication

Machine-hours

82,700

24,800

Direct labor-hours

28,000

53,000

Direct materials cost

$165,800

$412,000

Direct labor cost

$464,550

$711,400

What was the amount of underapplied or overapplied overhead in each department at the end of the year?

Problem 3

VitalVitamin is produced in a three-step process consisting of mixing, shaping, and packaging. Direct materials like tars, acids, and inert ingredients are all introduced at the beginning of the mixing cycle, at a per unit cost of $0.30. Direct labor and factory overhead are incurred uniformly throughout each stage of production, and in equal proportion (i.e., $1 of overhead for each $1 of labor). Costs are very stable, and there have been no changes in per unit costs for any element of production over the past several months. Information for the Mixing Department for the month of April, 2011, follows.

Beginning of April: 100,000 units in process (40% complete at a total cost of $50,000)

During April: 800,000 units put into production; additional costs into production

total $652,500

End of April: 70,000 units in process (50% complete).

Required:

a. Prepare a cost of production report for the Mixing Department for April. Use the weighted-average costing method.

b. Prepare April s journal entries that affect the Mixing Department s Work in Process account (two entries).

cost accounting week 4 quiz 496684

1.(TCO 1) Troy Company derived the following costs relationship from a regression analysis of its monthly manufacturing overhead cost.
Y = $80,000 + $12X
where: Y = monthly manufacturing overhead cost
and X = machine hours.
The standard time required to manufacture one 6-unit case of Troy s single product is 4 machine hours. Troy applies manufacturing overhead to production on the basis of machine-hours, and its normal annual production is 50,000 cases.
Troy s estimated variable manufacturing overhead cost for a month in which scheduled production is 10,000 cases would be(Points : 6)

$80,000.
$480,000.
$160,000.
$320,000.

2.(TCO 1) Three criteria to use in identifying cost drivers from the potentially large set of independent variables that can be included in a regression model are(Points : 6)

goodness of fit, size of the intercept term, and specification analysis.
independence between independent variables, economic plausibility, and specification analysis.
economic plausibility, goodness of fit, and significance of independent variable.
spurious correlation, expense of gathering data, and multicollinearity.

3.(TCO 3) The best opportunity for cost reduction is(Points : 6)

during the manufacturing phase of the value chain.
during the product/process design phase of the value chain.
during the marketing phase of the value chain.
during the distribution phase of the value chain.

4.(TCO 3) Each month, Haddock Company has $275,000 total manufacturing costs (20% fixed) and $125,000 distribution and marketing costs (36% fixed). Haddock s monthly sales are $500,000. The markup percentage on variable costs to arrive at the existing (target) selling price is(Points : 6)

20%.
40%.
80%.

66.666%.

5.(TCO 3) Which of these do antitrust laws on pricing notcover?(Points : 6)

Collusive pricing
Dumping
Peak-load pricing
Predatory pricing

cost and decision making analysis 2 496687

Cost and Decision-Making Analysis

Cheryl Montoya picked up the phone and called her boss, Wes Chan, Vice President of Marketing at Piedmont Fasteners Corporation.

Cheryl: Wes, I’m not sure how to go about answering the questions that came up at the meeting with the President yesterday.

Wes: What’s the problem .

Cheryl: The president wanted to know the break-even point for each of the company’s products, but I am having trouble figuring them out.

Wes: I’m sure you can handle it, Cheryl. And, by the way, I need your analysis on my desk tomorrow morning at 8:00 sharp in time for the follow-up meeting at 9:00.

Piedmont Fasteners Corporation makes three different clothing fasteners at its manufacturing facility in North Carolina. Data concerning these products appear below:

Velcro Metal Nylon
Normal annual sales volume 100,000 units 200,000 units 400,000 units
Unit selling price $1.65 $1.50 $0.85
Variable cost per unit $1.25 $0.70 $0.25

Total fixed expenses are $400,000 per year.

All three products are sold in highly competitive markets, so the company is unable to raise its prices without losing unacceptably large numbers of customers.

The company has a very effective lean production system, so there is no beginning or ending work in process or finished-goods inventories.

Using the module readings, the Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet, research break-even point and costing systems. Analyze the case based on your research and what you have learned so far in the course.

Respond to the following:

  • Calculate the company’s overall break-even point in total sales dollars. Explain your methodology (approximately 2 pages).
  • Of the total fixed costs of $400,000: $20,000 could be avoided if the Velcro product were dropped, $80,000 if the Metal product were dropped, and $60,000 if the Nylon product were dropped. The remaining fixed costs of $240,000 consist of common fixed costs such as administrative salaries and rent on the factory building that could be avoided only by going out of business entirely (approximately 2 pages):
    • Calculate the break-even point in units for each product. Explain your methodology.
    • Determine the overall profit of the company if the company sells exactly the break-even quantity of each product. Present your results.
  • Evaluate costing systems for this company. Explain if this company should be using a job-order or process-costing system to accumulate costs (1 page).

Be sure to include your calculations in Microsoft Excel format.

Write a 5 6-page report in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M3_A2.doc

cost calculation 496689

Ontario, Inc. manufactures two products, Standard and Enhanced, and applies overhead on the basis of direct-labor hours. Anticipated overhead and direct-labor time for the upcoming accounting period is $800,000 and 25,000 hours, respectively. Information about the company’s products follows.

Standard: Enhanced:

Estimated production volume

3,000 units 4,000 units

Direct-material cost

$25 per unit $40 per unit

Direct labor per unit

3 hours at $12 per hour 4 hours at $12 per hour

Ontario’s overhead of $800,000 can be identified with three major activities: order processing ($150,000), machine processing ($560,000), and product inspection ($90,000). These activities are driven by number of orders processed, machine hours worked, and inspection hours, respectively.

Data relevant to these activities follow:

Orders Processed Machine Hours Worked Inspection Hours

Standard

300 18,000 2,000

Enhanced

200 22,000 8,000

Total

500 40,000 10,000

Top management is very concerned about declining profitability despite a healthy increase in sales volume. The decrease in income is especially puzzling because the company recently undertook a massive plant renovation during which new, highly automated machinery was installed machinery that was expected to produce significant operating efficiencies.

Using a Microsoft Excel format for calculations, complete the following:

  • Assuming use of direct-labor hours to apply overhead to production, calculate the unit manufacturing costs of the standard and enhanced products if the expected manufacturing volume is attained.
  • Assuming the use of activity-based costing, calculate the unit manufacturing cost of the standard and enhanced products if the expected manufacturing volume is attained.
  • Ontario s selling price is based heavily on cost:
    • Calculate which product is over cost and which is under cost by using direct-labor hours as an application base.
    • Explain if it is possible that this over costing and under costing is responsible for the profit issues the company is facing.
  • Illustrate how the solution will change if the following data changes:
    • The overhead associated with order processing is $300,000 and the overhead associated with product inspection is $270,000.

Present your work in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M5_A2.xls.

computer applications in accounting 496639

1. Menu choices that are followed by an ellipsis (…) are associated with

A. the Sales/Invoicing window.

B. shortcuts.

C. dialog boxes.

D. text fields.

2. In Peachtree, the employee deductions display as negative amounts on the Payroll Entry window because

A. the employer always pays deductions from the paycheck.

B. they’re deducted from the employee’s gross pay.

C. they’re not used to compute the paycheck.

D. they’re added to the paycheck amount.

3. To set up specific guidelines for individual employees, make the following selections.

A. Employees & Payroll Navigation Center > Employees > View and Edit Employees

B. Tasks > Select for Payment > select employee

C. Maintain > Default Information > Employees

D. Employee tasks > Employees > Employee Maintenance > make appropriate selection

4. If an inventory item is damaged, which of the following selections would you make from Peachtree’s Navigation Bar to record the damage?

A. Inventory & Services Navigation Center > Track Packages

B. Inventory & Services Navigation Center > Inventory Count

C. Inventory & Services Navigation Center > Prices

D. Inventory & Services Navigation Center > Inventory Adjustments

5. In Peachtree, the Vendor Ledgers Report is another name for the

A. Accounts Receivable subsidiary ledger.

B. Accounts Payable open items report.

C. Accounts Payable subsidiary ledger.

D. Inventory subsidiary ledger.

6. When you purchase inventory stock items, the journal entry is

A. Dr. the Accounts Receivable/Customer account; Cr. the Sales account.

B. Dr. the Accounts Payable/Vendor account; Cr. the Inventory account.

C. Dr. the Cash account; Cr. the Revenue account.

D. Dr. the Inventory account; Cr. the Accounts Payable/Vendor account.

7. To display the size of your backup file, you can use the Windows program called

A. Defrag.

B. Windows Accessories.

C. Windows Explorer.

D. Scan disk.

8. On the Employee Defaults window, the Company Fields tab is for

A. liability accounts that are related to employee deductions.

B. assets accounts that are related to employee deductions.

C. expense and liability accounts that are related to employee deductions.

D. liability and expense accounts related to employer deductions.

9. In Peachtree, the price of each inventory item is stored in the

A. Maintain Purchase Items file.

B. Tasks; Purchase orders.

C. Maintain Inventory Items file.

D. Tasks; Inventory items.

10. To transfer money to the Money Market Fund, make the following type of entry.

A. Receipts

B. General Journal

C. Tasks

D. Payments

11. The Income Statement’s net income or (net loss) is also shown on the

A. departmental gross profit totals.

B. income statement’s revenue section.

C. balance sheet’s capital section.

D. cash balance at the end of the period.

12. Peachtree’s accounts receivable system includes the

A. sales/invoicing window.

B. accounts payable subsidiary system.

C. customer ledgers.

D. controlling account in the general ledger.

13. Commands that Peachtree automatically selects are called

A. shortcuts.

B. dialog boxes.

C. objects.

D. defaults.

14. One way to display the balance sheet is to use which of the following menu bar selections?

A. Reports & Forms > Financial Statements > Standard Balance Sheet > OK

B. Reports & Forms > Financial Statements > Standard Financial Statements > Display

C. Reports & Forms > Financial Statements > Inventory > Options

D. Reports & Forms > Financial Statements > Print

15. Expenses and revenues over a period of time are shown on the

A. balance sheet.

B. departmental gross profit report.

C. statement of cash flow.

D. income statement.

16. On the Navigation Bar, make the following selections to enter a sales invoice.

A. Customers & Sales Navigation Center > Sales Invoices > New Sales Invoice

B. Customers & Sales Navigation Center > Sales Invoices > Set Up Invoice Defaults

C. Customers & Sales Navigation Center > Customers > View and Edit Customers

D. Tasks > Purchases/Receive Inventory

17. The income statement is a summary of

A. cash receipts and where they came from.

B. cash payments and what they were used for.

C. revenues and expenses over a period of time.

D. the overall change in cash.

18. Which of the following would you select to look at an employee’s record in Peachtree?

A. The Payroll Entry window

B. Tasks > Employees

C. Shortcut > General Journal entry

D. Employees & Payroll Navigation Center > Employees > View and Edit Employees

19. The following accounts are debited and credited when you purchase inventory on account.

A. Dr. Inventory account, credit Account Receivable/Vendor

B. Dr. Accounts Receivable/Customer; Cr. Sales account

C. Dr. Inventory account; Cr. Accounts Payable/Vendor

D. Dr. Accounts Payable/Vendor; Cr. Expense account

20. The file extension for Peachtree backup files is

A. .ptb

B. .pdf

C. .pbcx

D. .pbb

computer applications in accounting 496640

1. On the Navigation Bar, make the following selections to record a payment on account:

A. On the Customers & Sales Navigation Center, click on the Bank Deposits icon and select New Bank Deposit.

B. Maintain; Receipts, record the cash sale.

C. On the Bank Navigation Center, click on the Enter Bills icon and select New Bills.

D. On the Customers & Sales Navigation Center, click on the Receive Money icon and select Receive Money From Customer, Apply to Invoices tab

2. Sam is using an Excel worksheet to manage his expenses. The output in cell F18 looks incorrect to Sam.

To check the formula in cell F18, Sam should first select the cell and look at the _______ to see if the formula is correct.

A. function tab

B. name box and current cell address

C. range

D. formula bar

3. The account credited on the Receipts window

A. is Account No. 1020, Checking Account.

B. is Account No. 1040, IRA Savings.

C. is the GL Account selected.

D. irrelevant because the Receipts window doesn’t need to have an account credited.

4. For the appropriate two decimal places to show on task windows, you need to

A. display the beginning balances.

B. select global settings for two decimal places.

C. select Maintain > Company Info.

D. select Company > Restore.

5. Saving Peachtree data to the hard drive or external media is called

A. restoring data.

B. data mining.

C. exporting to Excel.

D. backing up.

6. The shortened company name that Peachtree assigns to new companies is made up of the

A. entire company name.

B. last word within the company name.

C. first word only.

D. first three letters of the first word, the first three letters of the second word, and first two letters of the third word.

7. Which of the following is a true statement about the chart of accounts?

A. The chart of accounts is a list of accounts in the general ledger.

B. The chart of accounts is the accounts shown on the balance sheet.

C. The chart of accounts is a list of accounts in the general journal.

D. The chart of accounts is the accounts shown on the income statement.

8. The amount of money the business owes to suppliers or vendors is called

A. accounts receivable.

B. contracts payable.

C. accounts payable.

D. prepaid expense.

9. Accountants recommend that you use FIFO when you desire to Accountants recommend that you use FIFO when you desire to

A. get the highest net income.

B. charge the most recent inventory costs against revenue.

C. charge costs against revenue in the order in which costs are incurred.

D. get the lowest net income.

10. To change an entry on the Write Checks window or Receipts window,

A. add a transaction line.

B. delete the record.

C. edit the record.

D. make a completely new entry.

11. The Write Checks window automatically debits which of the following accounts?

A. Account No. 1040, IRA Savings

B. The account credited not debited

C. The Expense account selected

D. Account No. 1020 Checking Account

12. On the Navigation Bar, make the following selections to enter employee maintenance information.

A. Tasks, then Payroll Entry

B. Employees & Payroll Navigation Center, click on the Employees icon, and select View and Edit Employees

C. Employees & Payroll Navigation Center, click on the Pay Employees icon, and select Set Up Payroll Service

D. Employees & Payroll Navigation Center, click on the Employees icon, and select Write Letters to Employees

13. Ralph has been assigned by his boss a project to create budgeting formulas for the company’s payroll expense reports using Excel. What should Ralph consider when creating the formulas?

A. Excel has third-party formulas you can purchase from Microsoft.

B. Excel has limited capabilities, so it would be easier to use payroll software for this application.

C. Excel performs formulas based on order of precedence.

D. Excel has predefined formulas, so you don’t have to create any formulas from scratch.

14. When you want to create an invoice in Peachtree without inventory items, you need to use which of the following forms?

A. Sales order

B. Purchase invoice

C. Sales invoice

D. Service invoice

15. You enter all checks, cash, and credit card slips in the _______ window.

A. General Journal entry

B. Receipts

C. Sales Receipts

D. Payments

16. Peachtree’s _______ is the complete collection of accounts of a company, transactions associated with these accounts, and account balances for a specified period of time.

A. data file statistic

B. general ledger system

C. maintenance system

D. default

17. In Peachtree, there are two ways to record entries from the transaction register: from the

A. System Page and Analysis Tools.

B. System page, link to synchronize Peachtree.

C. Banking tasks and view reports selections.

D. Menu bar or the Navigation Bar.

18. To complete account reconciliation, checks and deposits need to be

A. set up in account reconciliation maintenance.

B. selected by clicking Tasks; Change Accounting Periods.

C. recorded.

D. journalized and posted.

19. In Excel, the order of precedence determines

A. which cells are to be printed.

B. the order in which calculations are performed.

C. which figures are multiplied or divided.

D. the format of the cell reference.

20. The Inventory Profitability Report shows

A. gross profit percentage.

B. net loss.

C. net income.

D. reorder amount

computer applications in accounting 2 20q 496641

1. Menu choices that are followed by an ellipsis (…) are associated with

A. the Sales/Invoicing window.

B. shortcuts.

C. dialog boxes.

D. text fields.

2. In Peachtree, the employee deductions display as negative amounts on the Payroll Entry window because

A. the employer always pays deductions from the paycheck.

B. they’re deducted from the employee’s gross pay.

C. they’re not used to compute the paycheck.

D. they’re added to the paycheck amount.

3. To set up specific guidelines for individual employees, make the following selections.

A. Employees & Payroll Navigation Center > Employees > View and Edit Employees

B. Tasks > Select for Payment > select employee

C. Maintain > Default Information > Employees

D. Employee tasks > Employees > Employee Maintenance > make appropriate selection

4. If an inventory item is damaged, which of the following selections would you make from Peachtree’s Navigation Bar to record the damage?

A. Inventory & Services Navigation Center > Track Packages

B. Inventory & Services Navigation Center > Inventory Count

C. Inventory & Services Navigation Center > Prices

D. Inventory & Services Navigation Center > Inventory Adjustments

5. In Peachtree, the Vendor Ledgers Report is another name for the

A. Accounts Receivable subsidiary ledger.

B. Accounts Payable open items report.

C. Accounts Payable subsidiary ledger.

D. Inventory subsidiary ledger.

6. When you purchase inventory stock items, the journal entry is

A. Dr. the Accounts Receivable/Customer account; Cr. the Sales account.

B. Dr. the Accounts Payable/Vendor account; Cr. the Inventory account.

C. Dr. the Cash account; Cr. the Revenue account.

D. Dr. the Inventory account; Cr. the Accounts Payable/Vendor account.

7. To display the size of your backup file, you can use the Windows program called

A. Defrag.

B. Windows Accessories.

C. Windows Explorer.

D. Scan disk.

8. On the Employee Defaults window, the Company Fields tab is for

A. liability accounts that are related to employee deductions.

B. assets accounts that are related to employee deductions.

C. expense and liability accounts that are related to employee deductions.

D. liability and expense accounts related to employer deductions.

9. In Peachtree, the price of each inventory item is stored in the

A. Maintain Purchase Items file.

B. Tasks; Purchase orders.

C. Maintain Inventory Items file.

D. Tasks; Inventory items.

10. To transfer money to the Money Market Fund, make the following type of entry.

A. Receipts

B. General Journal

C. Tasks

D. Payments

11. The Income Statement’s net income or (net loss) is also shown on the

A. departmental gross profit totals.

B. income statement’s revenue section.

C. balance sheet’s capital section.

D. cash balance at the end of the period.

12. Peachtree’s accounts receivable system includes the

A. sales/invoicing window.

B. accounts payable subsidiary system.

C. customer ledgers.

D. controlling account in the general ledger.

13. Commands that Peachtree automatically selects are called

A. shortcuts.

B. dialog boxes.

C. objects.

D. defaults.

14. One way to display the balance sheet is to use which of the following menu bar selections?

A. Reports & Forms > Financial Statements > Standard Balance Sheet > OK

B. Reports & Forms > Financial Statements > Standard Financial Statements > Display

C. Reports & Forms > Financial Statements > Inventory > Options

D. Reports & Forms > Financial Statements > Print

15. Expenses and revenues over a period of time are shown on the

A. balance sheet.

B. departmental gross profit report.

C. statement of cash flow.

D. income statement.

16. On the Navigation Bar, make the following selections to enter a sales invoice.

A. Customers & Sales Navigation Center > Sales Invoices > New Sales Invoice

B. Customers & Sales Navigation Center > Sales Invoices > Set Up Invoice Defaults

C. Customers & Sales Navigation Center > Customers > View and Edit Customers

D. Tasks > Purchases/Receive Inventory

17. The income statement is a summary of

A. cash receipts and where they came from.

B. cash payments and what they were used for.

C. revenues and expenses over a period of time.

D. the overall change in cash.

18. Which of the following would you select to look at an employee’s record in Peachtree?

A. The Payroll Entry window

B. Tasks > Employees

C. Shortcut > General Journal entry

D. Employees & Payroll Navigation Center > Employees > View and Edit Employees

19. The following accounts are debited and credited when you purchase inventory on account.

A. Dr. Inventory account, credit Account Receivable/Vendor

B. Dr. Accounts Receivable/Customer; Cr. Sales account

C. Dr. Inventory account; Cr. Accounts Payable/Vendor

D. Dr. Accounts Payable/Vendor; Cr. Expense account

20. The file extension for Peachtree backup files is

A. .ptb

B. .pdf

C. .pbcx

D. .pbb

computer applications in accounting mcqs 496642

1. On the Navigation Bar, make the following selections to record a payment on account:

A. On the Customers & Sales Navigation Center, click on the Bank Deposits icon and select New Bank Deposit.

B. Maintain; Receipts, record the cash sale.

C. On the Bank Navigation Center, click on the Enter Bills icon and select New Bills.

D. On the Customers & Sales Navigation Center, click on the Receive Money icon and select Receive Money From Customer, Apply to Invoices tab

2. Sam is using an Excel worksheet to manage his expenses. The output in cell F18 looks incorrect to Sam.

To check the formula in cell F18, Sam should first select the cell and look at the _______ to see if the

formula is correct.

A. function tab

B. name box and current cell address

C. range

D. formula bar

3. The account credited on the Receipts window

A. is Account No. 1020, Checking Account.

B. is Account No. 1040, IRA Savings.

C. is the GL Account selected.

D. irrelevant because the Receipts window doesn’t need to have an account credited.

4. For the appropriate two decimal places to show on task windows, you need to

A. display the beginning balances.

B. select global settings for two decimal places.

C. select Maintain > Company Info.

D. select Company > Restore.

5. Saving Peachtree data to the hard drive or external media is called

A. restoring data.

B. data mining.

C. exporting to Excel.

D. backing up.

6. The shortened company name that Peachtree assigns to new companies is made up of the

A. entire company name.

B. last word within the company name.

C. first word only.

D. first three letters of the first word, the first three letters of the second word, and first two letters of the third word.

7. Which of the following is a true statement about the chart of accounts?

A. The chart of accounts is a list of accounts in the general ledger.

B. The chart of accounts is the accounts shown on the balance sheet.

C. The chart of accounts is a list of accounts in the general journal.

D. The chart of accounts is the accounts shown on the income statement.

8. The amount of money the business owes to suppliers or vendors is called

A. accounts receivable.

B. contracts payable.

C. accounts payable.

D. prepaid expense.

9. Accountants recommend that you use FIFO when you desire to Accountants recommend that you use FIFO when you desire to

A. get the highest net income.

B. charge the most recent inventory costs against revenue.

C. charge costs against revenue in the order in which costs are incurred.

D. get the lowest net income.

10. To change an entry on the Write Checks window or Receipts window,

A. add a transaction line.

B. delete the record.

C. edit the record.

D. make a completely new entry.

11. The Write Checks window automatically debits which of the following accounts?

A. Account No. 1040, IRA Savings

B. The account credited not debited

C. The Expense account selected

D. Account No. 1020 Checking Account

12. On the Navigation Bar, make the following selections to enter employee maintenance information.

A. Tasks, then Payroll Entry

B. Employees & Payroll Navigation Center, click on the Employees icon, and select View and Edit Employees

C. Employees & Payroll Navigation Center, click on the Pay Employees icon, and select Set Up Payroll Service

D. Employees & Payroll Navigation Center, click on the Employees icon, and select Write Letters to Employees

13. Ralph has been assigned by his boss a project to create budgeting formulas for the company’s payroll

expense reports using Excel. What should Ralph consider when creating the formulas?

A. Excel has third-party formulas you can purchase from Microsoft.

B. Excel has limited capabilities, so it would be easier to use payroll software for this application.

C. Excel performs formulas based on order of precedence.

D. Excel has predefined formulas, so you don’t have to create any formulas from scratch.

14. When you want to create an invoice in Peachtree without inventory items, you need to use which of

the following forms?

A. Sales order

B. Purchase invoice

C. Sales invoice

D. Service invoice

15. You enter all checks, cash, and credit card slips in the _______ window.

A. General Journal entry

B. Receipts

C. Sales Receipts

D. Payments

16. Peachtree’s _______ is the complete collection of accounts of a company, transactions associated with
these accounts, and account balances for a specified period of time.

A. data file statistic

B. general ledger system

C. maintenance system

D. default

17. In Peachtree, there are two ways to record entries from the transaction register: from the

A. System Page and Analysis Tools.

B. System page, link to synchronize Peachtree.

C. Banking tasks and view reports selections.

D. Menu bar or the Navigation Bar.

18. To complete account reconciliation, checks and deposits need to be

A. set up in account reconciliation maintenance.

B. selected by clicking Tasks; Change Accounting Periods.

C. recorded.

D. journalized and posted.

19. In Excel, the order of precedence determines

A. which cells are to be printed.

B. the order in which calculations are performed.

C. which figures are multiplied or divided.

D. the format of the cell reference.

20. The Inventory Profitability Report shows

A. gross profit percentage.

B. net loss.

C. net income.

D. reorder amount

concepts in healthcare organizations 496643

Step 1: Put the following steps in the order of a routine patient care flow, from the beginning through to the end of the patient encounter flow.

  • New patient paperwork is signed and returned to front desk with insurance information for verification of benefits
  • Patient pays standard co-pay if applicable
  • Hard copy record is pulled, or made if new patient
  • Patient called to back office
  • Height, weight, and blood pressure taken by CNA or CMA
  • CMS 1500 form is coded and sent to insurance for reimbursement
  • Signs in at reception desk
  • Patient released from exam room
  • Call in to schedule appointment
  • Doctor, NP, or Physician s Assistant examines patient
  • Shown to patient care room
  • Reason for visit reviewed with patient by CNA, CMA, or NP
  • Any refunds due to patient or insurance sent out
  • Collections efforts initiated if patient’s charges not paid, and any insurance appeals are processed
  • Patient checks out and pays any deductible verified
  • Explanation of benefits returns with breakdown of payments
  • Height, weight, and blood pressure taken by CNA or CMA
  • Practice manager applies payments, writes off amounts required by contract with insurance companies, adjusts patient s account records, and initiates billing to patient that indicates insurance has processed charges

Step 2: Write an essay of 1 2 pages explaining how a new office would be set up or organized. Some of the elements included could be:

  • The physical appearance of the office
  • The types of personnel that would be needed
  • The types of activities, policies, or procedures that would be put into place to mentor employees and promote teamwork
  • Create and describe the demographics of the patients that would receive care at this facility.
    • Remember that demographics include any and all of the following: type of population (rural, suburban, urban); male or female; adult or child; type of insurance, public assistance, or no insurance; emergency care needed or preventative care; and many others.
  • Describe the specialized training that you, the office manager, need to help this particular facility accomplish its mission of efficient integrated medical care to its patient population.

condensed balance sheet and income statement data for fellenz corporation are presen 496644

Condensed balance sheet and income statement data for Fellenz Corporation are presented below.
FELLENZ CORPORATION Balance Sheets December 31
Assets 2012 2011
Cash $ 40,000 $ 24,000
Receivables (net) 90,000 55,000
Other current assets 74,000 73,000
Long-term investments 78,000 60,000
Plant and equipment (net) 520,000 407,000
Total assets $802,000 $619,000
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity 2012 2011
Current liabilities $ 88,000 $ 65,000
Long-term debt 90,000 70,000
Common stock 370,000 320,000
Retained earnings 254,000 164,000
Total liabilities and stockholders equity $802,000 $619,000

FELLENZ CORPORATION Income Statements For the Years Ended December 31
2012 2011
Sales $770,000 $800,000
Cost of goods sold 420,000 400,000
Operating expenses (including income taxes) 200,000 237,000
Net income $150,000 $163,000
Cash from operating activities $165,000 $178,000
Cash used for capital expenditures 85,000 45,000
Dividends paid 50,000 43,000
Average number of shares outstanding 370,000 320,000

Instructions
Compute the following values and ratios for 2011 and 2012.
a. Earnings per share.
b. Working capital.
c. Current ratio.
d. Debt to total assets ratio.
e. Free cash flow.
f. Based on the ratios calculated, discuss briefly the improvement or lack thereof in the financial position and operating results of Fellenz from 2011 to 2012.

condensed financial data of arma inc follow 496646

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31

Assets 2010 2009

Cash $80,800 $ 48,400

Accounts receivable 87,800 33,000

Inventories 112,500 102,850

Prepaid expenses 28,400 26,000

Investments 138,000 114,000

Plant assets 285,000 242,500

Accumulated depreciation (50,000) (52,000)

Total $682,500 $514,750

Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

Accounts payable $102,000 $ 67,300

Accrued expenses payable 16,500 17,000

Bonds payable 110,000 150,000

Common stock 220,000 175,000

Retained earnings 234,000 105,450

Total $682,500 $514,750

Income Statement Data

For the Year Ended December 31, 2010

Sales $392,780

Less:

Cost of goods sold $135,460

Operating expenses, excluding

depreciation 12,410

Depreciation expense 46,500

Income taxes 27,280

Interest expense 4,730

Loss on sale of plant assets 7,500 233,880

Net income $158,900

Additional information:

1. New plant assets costing $100,000 were purchased for cash during the year.

2. Old plant assets having an original cost of $57,500 were sold for $1,500 cash.

3. Bonds matured and were paid off at face value for cash.

4. A cash dividend of $30,350 was declared and paid during the year.

Prepare a statement of cash flows using the direct method.

congress recently enacted an non refundable credit based on the cost of the qualifyi 496647

Congress recently enacted an non refundable credit based on the cost of the qualifying alcohol and drug abuse counseling programs provided by and corporate employer to its employees . The credit is limited to 50 % of the total cost of the program .if a corporation elects the credit, none of the program costs are allowed as a deduction. Any credit in excess of current year tax may not be carried back to forward to another year.

A. TMM Corporation spent $ 80,000 for a qualifying counseling program this year .if TMM has $ 500,000 taxable income before considering this expense .should it elect the credit or deduct the program’s cost as an ordinary business expense?

B. Would your answer change if TMM had only $ 70,000 taxable income before consideration of the expense?

connelly inc a manufacturer of quality electric ice cream makers has experienced a s 496648

Connelly Inc., a manufacturer of quality electric ice cream makers, has experienced a steady growth in sales over the past few years. Since her business has grown, Jan Delany, the president, believes she needs an aggressive advertising campaign next year to maintain the company s growth. To prepare for the growth, the accountant prepared the following data for the current year:

Variable costs per ice cream maker :

Direct labor $13.50

Direct materials $14.50

Variable overhead $6.00

Total variable costs $34.00

Fixed costs:

Manufacturing $67,000.00

Selling $42,000.00

Administrative $356,000.00

Total fixed costs $480,500.00

Selling price per unit $65.00

Expected sales (units) 30,000

1. If the costs and sales price remain the same, what is the projected operating profit for the coming year

2. What is the breakeven point in units for the coming year

3. Jan has set the sales target for 35,000 ice cream makers which she thinks she can achieve by an additional fixed selling expense of $200,000 for advertising. All other costs remain as in requirement 1. What will be the operating profit if the additional $200,000 is spent on advertising and sales rise to 35,000 units

4.What will be the new breakeven point if the additional $200,000 is spent on advertising

5.If the additional $200,000 is spent for advertising in the next year, what is the required sales level in units to equal the current year s income at 30,000 units?

consider an economy that produces only two goods 496649

1. Consider an economy that produces only two goods: fresh apricots and dried apricots. In this economy, the technology of producing dried apricots is to place fresh apricots on special racks and allow them to dry in the sun. Fannie s Farms is the only company that grows fresh apricots, while Darryl s Dried Victuals is the only producer of dried apricots. Fannie s sells some of its apricots directly to consumers for consumption. The relevant revenue and cost information for each of the two firms in the economy is given below:

Darryl s

Revenue from selling dried apricots: $2,300,000 Cost of buying fresh apricots from Fannie s: 1,200,000 Interest on funds borrowed to buy drying racks: 250,000 Wages paid to employees 600,000 Taxes 100,000

Fannie s

Revenue from selling fresh apricots: $2,000,000 Rent on land (including apricot trees) 300,000 Wages to employees 1,200,000 Taxes 200,000

Calculate nominal GDP using (a) the expenditure approach (b) the production (value added) approach, and (c) the income approach and show that all three give the same answer.

2. The following data are given for a country in 2005. (All numbers are in billions of current dollars.) GDP = $1,400 C = $1,100 NX = $300 G = $500 T = $400 TR = $200 INT = $100 NFP = $50

a.) Calculate the level of investment (I) for this economy.

b.) Calculate the government s budget deficit ( Sgovt) for this economy..

c.) Calculate private saving (Spvt) for this economy.

d.) Calculate national saving (S) for this economy

3. Suppose that you buy a one-year government bond on January 1, 2004 for $1,000. You receive principal plus interest totaling $1,070 on January 1, 2005. The CPI was 150 on January 1 2005. Imagine that you expected that the CPI would be 156 on January 1, 2005. However, it turned out that the CPI was 159 on January 1, 2005.

a) Find the nominal interest rate, the inflation rate, and the real interest rate (the actual, ex-post real interest rate).

b) What was your expected real rate of interest? Why did your expected real rate of interest differ from the actual real rate of interest? Explain.

4. Consider Country T whose economy produces only three items, Tomatos, Tofu, and Tacos. The base year is arbitrarily chosen as 2004

2004 2005 Good Quantity Price Quantity Price Tomatoes 1000 $1.00 1200 $1.50 Tofu Tacos 2000 600 $3.00 $5.00 1800 500 $4.00 $6.00

a. Find nominal GDP in the current year (2005) and in the base year. What is the percentage increase since the base year?

b. Find real GDP in the current year (2005) and in the base year. By what percentage does real GDP increase from the base year to the current year (2005)?

c. Find the GDP deflator for the current year (2005) and the base year. By what percentage does the price level change from the base year to the current year (2005)?

d. Would you say that the percentage increase in nominal GDP in this economy since the base year is due more to increases in prices or increases in the physical volume of output?

consider a firm with a daily demand of 100 units a production rate per day of 500 un 496650

MAN 6501 Operations Management Mid Term Examination

Q 1: Consider a firm with a daily demand of 100 units, a production rate per day of 500 units, a setup cost of $200, and an annual holding cost per unit of $10. Suppose that the firm operates 300 days per year. How many units of inventory must their storage area be able to hold?

a) close to 975

b) close to 980

c) close to 1095

d) close to 1224

e) close to 1225

Q 2: If annual demand is 24,000 units, orders are placed every 0.5 months, and the cost to place an order is $50, what is the annual ordering cost?

a) 50

b) 600

c) 1200

d) 2400

e) Can not be determined

Q 3: If the Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) is ordered, which of the following is true?

a) Annual ordering cost exceeds annual holding cost.

b) Annual holding cost exceeds annual ordering cost.

c) Annual ordering cost is equal to annual holding cost.

d) The sum of annual ordering cost plus annual holding cost is maximized.

e) The annual holding cost curve is decreasing.

Q 4: The basic Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) model can be considered a special case of the

Economic Production Quantity (EPQ) model under which of the following condition?

a) The demand per day is greater than production per day.

b) The production rate per day approaches 0.

c) The production rate per day approaches infinity.

d) The back order cost approaches infinity.

e) d/p = 1, where d is the demand per day and p Is the production per day.

Q 5: If the Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) model is used to order material, which of the following

represents the total annual cost of ordering and holding?

Please note the following symbols.

D: Annual Demand, S: Ordering Cost/Order and H: Inventory holding cost per unit per year.

a) 2DS H

b) 2DH S

c) 2DSH

d) DSH

e) 2H SD

Q 6: A.K. Plywood Products offers the following all-units quantity discount schedule for its 4 feet

by 8 feet sheets of quality plywood.

Order Size Price

1-9 sheets $25

10-49 sheets $23

50-99 sheets $21

100 sheets or more $18

Miami Home Furnishings (MHF) orders plywood from A.K. Plywood Products. MHF s accounting

department determines an ordering cost of $50 per order and an annual inventory holding cost

percentage of 20% of the price of the item. The annual demand is 250 sheets. What should the

order size be every time that an order is placed to minimize total annual cost?

Q 7: Consider the data given in the following table and identify the appropriate category for item

Stock Number D in an ABC classification.

Item

Stcok

Number

Annual

Volume

(Units)

Unit Cost

A 1250 $92.00

B 335 $0.64

C 1970 $18.75

D 2430 $62.35

E 990 $13.80

F 680 $89.40

G 2150 $0.98

H 210 $9.80

I 1250 $0.52

J 970 $16.80

ABC Analysis

a) A

b) B

c) C

Q 8: A company is using the Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) model to manage its inventories.

Suppose its inventory holding cost per unit per year doubles while the annual demand and the

ordering cost per order do not change. What will happen to the EOQ?

a) It doubles.

b) It increases by 41.42%.

c) It remains the same.

d) The EOQ reduces by about 30%.

e) It quadruples (increases by 400%).

Q 9: The annual demand for an item is 2400 units. The inventory holding cost is $ 6.00 per

unit per year. The demand is continuous and constant, that is, 200 units/month. The item is

purchased in two lots. The size of the first lot is 1600 units and the size of the second lot is

800 units. Find the total annual cost of holding inventory.

a) 7200

b) 4000

c) 2400

d) 1200

e) 600

Q 10: A manufacturing company sells its products directly to customers and operates 5 days a week, 52 weeks a year. The production department of this company can produce at the rate of 60 units per day. The setup cost for a production run is $ 125.00. The cost of holding is $ 4.00 per unit per year. The demand for the item is continuous and constant and is 3,900 units per year. (Note: The demand occurs only when the company is operating, that is, 5 days a week for 52 weeks). Find the optimum number of units to be produced in one batch (economic production quantity). Round the number to nearest integer.

a) 3900 b) 570 c) 494 d) 300 e) 60

consider the following costs that were incurred during the current year 1 tire costs 496652

Consider the following costs that were incurred during the current year:

1. Tire costs incurred by Ford Motor Company. 2. Sales commissions paid to the sales force of Dell Inc. 3. Wood glue consumed in the manufacture of Thomasville Furniture. 4. Hourly wages of refinery security guards employed by ExxonMobil Corporation 5. The salary of financial vice president of Hewlett Packard. 6. Advertising costs of Coca-Cola 7. Straight-line depreciation on factory machinery of Boeing Corporation 8. Wages of assembly-line personnel of Whirlpool Corporation. 9. Delivery costs on customer shipments of Ben & Jerrys’ ice cream 10. Newsprint consumed in printing The New York Times. 11. Plan insurance costs of Texas Instruments. 12. Glass costs incurred in light-bulb manufacturing of General Electric.

Required: Evaluate each of the preceding and determine whether the cost is (a) a product cost or a period cost, (b) variable or fixed in terms of behavior, and for the product costs only, whether the cost is properly classified as direct material, direct labor, or manufacturing overhead. Item 1 is done as an example: Tire costs: Product cost, variable, direct material

construct a pro forma income statement for the first year 496654

1. Construct a pro forma income statement for the first year and second year for the following assumptions:

Units of Sales in Year 1: 110,000

Price per Unit: $11

Variable cost per unit: 30%

Fixed Costs: $125,000

Income taxes: 15%

Interest Expense: $200,000

In year 2, Price per unit increases to $11.50, and unit of sales increases by 5%, all other assumptions remain the same.

2. Calculate a table of interest rates for 5 years based on the following information:

The pure interest rate is 2%

Inflation expectations for year 1 = 3%, year 2 =4%, years 3-5 =5%

The default risk is .1% for year one and increases by .1% over each year

Liquidity premium is 0 for year 1 and increases by .2% each year

Maturity risk premium is 0 for years 1 and 2 and .3% for years 3-5

3. Calculate the sustainable growth based on the following information:

* earning after taxes = $35,000
* equity = $100,000
* d=22.4%

4. Future value of single sum problem

You put $2,000 in an investment account today which will earn 8% over the next 14 years, what is the future value?

5. Future value of annuity problem

You deposit $10,000 into a retirement account at the end of the next 10 years earning 9% interest, what is the future value of your retirement after 10 years?

continental industries is a diversified manufacturing company with a decentralized m 496657

Continental Industries is a diversified manufacturing company with a decentralized management structure. Each major division is treated as a profit center. One of the divisions is Westco, a chemical plant that produces a single product, P7. In recent years, the entire annual output of 400,000 tons of P7 has been sold to another division, Acme Chemical, which uses it as an ingredient in a variety of products. The transfer price is currently $2,100/ton. Variable cost to produce P7 is $600/ton. Westco s fixed costs are $540 million per year, resulting in a total cost of $1,950/ton. Of the fixed cost, 30% is depreciation on plant and equipment, and 25% is allocated corporate-level costs. Acme has found an outside supplier for P7 at a price of $1,550/ton. The president of Westco refuses to meet this price, as it is below cost. The president of Acme says she will purchase externally if Westco refuses to meet the market price. As CEO of Continental, discuss the factors that should be considered in resolving this dispute.

continuing cookie chronicle ccc4 496659

Continuing Cookie Chronicle

CCC4

Cookie Creations is gearing up for the winter holiday season. During the monthof December 2011, the following transactions occur.

1 Natalie hires an assistant at an hourly wage of $8 to help with cookie makingand some administrative duties.

5 Natalie teaches the class that was booked on November 25. The balance outstandingis received.

8 Cookie Creations receives a check for the amount due from the neighborhoodschool for the class given on November 30.

9 Cookie Creations receives $750 in advance from the local school board for fiveclasses that the company will give during December and January.

15 Pays the cell phone invoice outstanding at November 30.

16 Issues a check to Natalie s brother for the amount owed for the design of thewebsite.

19 Receives a deposit of $60 on a cookie class scheduled for early January.

23 Additional revenue earned during the month for cookie-making classes amountsto $4,000. (Natalie has not had time to account for each class individually.) $3,000 in cash has been collected and $1,000 is still outstanding. (This is in additionto the December 5 and December 9 transactions.)

23 Additional baking supplies purchased during the month for sugar, flour, and

chocolate chips amount to $1,250 cash.

23 Issues a check to Natalie s assistant for $800. Her assistant worked approximately

100 hours from the time in which she was hired until December 23.

28 Pays a dividend of $500 to the common shareholder (Natalie).

Instructions

(a) Journalize the December transactions above.

(b) Post the December transactions to the general ledger. (Add new general ledger accounts as needed.)

(c) Prepare a trial balance as of December 31, 2011.

As of December 31, Cookie Creations year-end, the following adjusting entry data are available.

1. A count reveals that $45 of brochures and posters were used.

2. Depreciation is recorded on the baking equipment purchased in November. The baking

equipment has a useful life of 5 years. Assume that 2 months worth of depreciation

is required.

3. Amortization (which is similar to depreciation) is recorded on the website. (Credit

the Website account directly for the amount of the amortization.) The website is

amortized over a useful life of 2 years and was available for use on December 1.

4. Interest on the note payable is accrued. (Assume that 1.5 months of interest accrued

during November and December.) Round to nearest dollar.

5. One month s worth of insurance has expired.

6. Natalie is unexpectedly telephoned on December 28 to give a cookie class at the neighborhood community center on December 31. In early January Cookie Creations sends an invoice for $450 to the community center.

7. A count reveals that $1,025 of baking supplies were used.

8. A cell phone invoice is received for $75. The invoice is for services provided during

the month of December and is due on January 15.

9. Because the cookie-making class occurred unexpectedly on December 28 and is for

such a large group of children, Natalie s assistant helps out. Her assistant worked 7

hours at a rate of $8 per hour.

10. An analysis of the unearned revenue account reveals that two of the five classes paid for

by the local school board on December 9 still have not been taught by the end of December. The $60 deposit received on December 19 for another class also remains unearned.

Instructions

(d) Prepare and post adjusting journal entries for December 31.

(e) Prepare an adjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2011.

(f ) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the 2-month period

ending December 31, 2011, and a classified balance sheet as of December 31, 2011.

(g) Prepare and post closing entries as of December 31, 2011.

(h) Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

continuing cookie chronicle ccc3 496661

Continuing Cookie Chronicle

(Note: This is a continuation of the Cookie Chronicle from Chapters 1 and 2.)

CCC3In November 2014, after having incorporated Cookie Creations Inc., Natalie begins operations. She has decided not to pursue the offer to supply cookies to Biscuits. Instead, she will focus on offering cooking classes. The following events occur.

Nov. 8 Natalie cashes in her U.S. Savings Bonds and receives $520, which she deposits in her personal bank account.

8 Natalie opens a bank account for Cookie Creations Inc.

8 Natalie purchases $500 of Cookie Creations common stock.

11 Cookie Creations purchases paper and other office supplies for $95. (Use Supplies.)

14 Cookie Creations pays $125 to purchase baking supplies, such as flour, sugar, butter, and chocolate chips. (Use Supplies.)

15 Natalie starts to gather some baking equipment to take with her when teaching the cookie classes. She has an excellent top-of-the-line food processor and mixer that originally cost her $550. Natalie decides to start using it only in her new business. She estimates that the equipment is currently worth $300, and she transfers the equipment into the business in exchange for additional common stock.

16 The company needs more cash to sustain its operations. Natalie s grandmother lends the company $2,000 cash, in exchange for a two-year, 9% note payable. Interest and the principal are repayable at maturity.

17 Cookie Creations pays $900 for additional baking equipment.

18 Natalie schedules her first class for November 29. She will receive $100 on the date of the class.

25 Natalie books a second class for December 5 for $150. She receives a $60 cash down payment, in advance.

29 Natalie teaches her first class, booked on November 18, and collects the $100 cash.

30 Natalie s brother develops a website for Cookie Creations Inc. that the company will use for advertising. He charges the company $600 for his work, payable at the end of December. (Because the website is expected to have a useful life of two years before upgrades are needed, it should be treated as an asset called Website.)

30 Cookie Creations pays $1,200 for a one-year insurance policy.

30 Natalie teaches a group of elementary school students how to make Santa Claus cookies. At the end of the class, Natalie leaves an invoice for $300 with the school principal. The principal says that he will pass it along to the business office and it will be paid some time in December.

30 Natalie receives a $50 invoice for use of her cell phone. She uses the cell phone exclusively for Cookie Creations Inc. business. The invoice is for services provided in November, and payment is due on December 15.


Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries to record the November transactions.

(b) Post the journal entries to the general ledger accounts.

(c) Prepare a trial balance at November 30, 2014.

continuing cookie chronicle ccc4 496662

Continuing Cookie Chronicle

(Note:This is a continuation of the Cookie Chronicle from Chapters 1 through 3.)

CCC4Cookie Creations is gearing up for the winter holiday season. During the month of December 2014, the following transactions occur.

Dec. 1 Natalie hires an assistant at an hourly wage of $8 to help with cookie making and some administrative duties.

5 Natalie teaches the class that was booked on November 25. The balance outstanding is received.

8 Cookie Creations receives a check for the amount due from the neighborhood school for the class given on November 30.

9 Cookie Creations receives $750 in advance from the local school board for five classes that the company will give during December and January.

15 Pays the cell phone invoice outstanding at November 30.

16 Issues a check to Natalie s brother for the amount owed for the design of the website.

19 Receives a deposit of $60 on a cookie class scheduled for early January.

23 Additional revenue during the month for cookie-making classes amounts to $4,000. (Natalie has not had time to account for each class individually.) $3,000 in cash has been collected and $1,000 is still outstanding. (This is in addition to the December 5 and December 9 transactions.)

23 Additional baking supplies purchased during the month for sugar, flour, and chocolate chips amount to $1,250 cash.

23 Issues a check to Natalie s assistant for $800. Her assistant worked approximately 100 hours from the time in which she was hired until December 23.

28 Pays a dividend of $500 to the common shareholder (Natalie).

As of December 31, Cookie Creations year-end, the following adjusting entry data are provided.

1. A count reveals that $45 of brochures and posters were used.

2. Depreciation is recorded on the baking equipment purchased in November. The baking equipment has a useful life of 5 years. Assume that 2 months worth of depreciation is required.

3. Amortization (which is similar to depreciation) is recorded on the website. (Credit the Website account directly for the amount of the amortization.) The website is amortized over a useful life of 2 years and was available for use on December 1.

4. Interest on the note payable is accrued. (Assume that 1.5 months of interest accrued during November and December.) Round to nearest dollar.

5. One month s worth of insurance has expired.

6. Natalie is unexpectedly telephoned on December 28 to give a cookie class at the neighborhood community center on December 31. In early January Cookie Creations sends an invoice for $450 to the community center.

7. A count reveals that $1,025 of baking supplies were used.

8. A cell phone invoice is received for $75. The invoice is for services provided during the month of December and is due on January 15.

9. Because the cookie-making class occurred unexpectedly on December 31 and is for such a large group of children, Natalie s assistant helps out. Her assistant worked 7 hours at a rate of $8 per hour.

10. An analysis of the unearned revenue account reveals that two of the five classes paid for by the local school board on December 9 still have not been taught by the end of December. The $60 deposit received on December 19 for another class also remains unearned.

Instructions

Using the information that you have gathered and the general ledger accounts that you have prepared through Chapter 3, plus the new information above, do the following.

(a) Journalize the above transactions.

(b) Post the December transactions. (Use the general ledger accounts prepared in Chapter 3.)

(c) Prepare a trial balance at December 31, 2014.

(c) Totals $8,160

(d) Prepare and post adjusting journal entries for the month of December.

(e) Prepare an adjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2014.

(f ) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the 2-month period ending December 31, 2014, and a classified balance sheet as of December 31, 2014.

(g) Prepare and post closing entries as of December 31, 2014.

(h) Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

(c) Totals $8,160

(e) Totals $8,804

(f) Net income $3,211

(h) Totals $6,065

continuing cookie chronicle ccc5 496663

Continuing Cookie Chronicle1

Continuing Cookie Chronicle

(Note:This is a continuation of the Cookie Chronicle from Chapters 1 through 4.)

CCC5Because Natalie has had such a successful first few months, she is considering other opportunities to develop her business. One opportunity is to become the exclusive distributor of a line of fine European mixers. The current cost of a mixer is approximately $550, and Natalie would sell each one for $1,100. Natalie comes to you for advice on how to account for these mixers. Each appliance has a serial number and can be easily identified.

Natalie asks you the following questions.

1. Would you consider these mixers to be inventory? Or, should they be classified as supplies or equipment

2. I ve learned a little about keeping track of inventory using both the perpetual and the periodic systems of accounting for inventory. Which system do you think is better? Which one would you recommend for the type of inventory that I want to sell

3. How often do I need to count inventory if I maintain it using the perpetual system? Do I need to count inventory at all

In the end, Natalie decides to use the perpetual method of accounting for inventory, and the following transactions happen during the month of January.

Jan. 4 She buys five deluxe mixers on account from Kzinski Supply Co. for $2,750, terms n/30.

6 She pays $100 freight on the January 4 purchase.

7 Natalie returns one of the mixers to Kzinski because it was damaged during shipping. Kzinski issues Cookie Creations credit for the cost of the mixer plus $20 for the cost of freight that was paid on January 6 for one mixer.

8 She collects the amount due from the neighborhood community center that was accrued at the end of December 2014.

12 She sells three deluxe mixers on account for $3,300, FOB destination, terms n/30. The mixers cost $570 each (including freight).

13 Natalie pays her cell phone bill previously accrued in the December adjusting journal entries.

14 She pays $75 of delivery charges for the three mixers that were sold on January 12.

14 She buys four deluxe mixers on account from Kzinski Supply Co. for $2,200, terms n/30.

17 Natalie is concerned that there is not enough cash available to pay for all of the mixers purchased. She issues additional common stock for $1,000.

18 She pays $80 freight on the January 14 purchase.

20 She sells two deluxe mixers for $2,200 cash.

28 Natalie issues a check to her assistant. Her assistant worked 20 hours in January and is also paid for amounts owing at December 31, 2014. Recall that Natalie s assistant earns $8 an hour.

28 Natalie collects amounts due from customers in the January 12 transaction.

31 She pays Kzinski all amounts due.

31 Cash dividends of $750 are paid.

As of January 31, the following adjusting entry data are available.

1. A count of brochures and posters reveals that none were used in January.

2. A count of baking supplies reveals that none were used in January.

3. Another month s worth of depreciation needs to be recorded on the baking equipment bought in November. (Recall that the baking equipment has a useful life of 5 years or60 months.)

4. One month s worth of amortization (write-off) needs to be recorded on the website. (Recall that the website has a useful life of 2 years or 24 months.)

5. An additional month s worth of interest on her grandmother s loan needs to be accrued. (The interest rate is 9%.)

6. One month s worth of insurance has expired.

7. Natalie receives her cell phone bill, $75. The bill is for services provided in January and is due February 15. (Recall that the cell phone is used only for business purposes.)

8. An analysis of the unearned revenue account reveals that Natalie has not had time to teach any of these lessons this month because she has been so busy selling mixers. As a result there is no change to the unearned revenue account. Natalie hopes to book the outstanding lessons in February.

9. An inventory count of mixers at the end of January reveals that Natalie has three mixers remaining.

Instructions

Using the information that you have gathered and the general ledger accounts that you have prepared through Chapter 4, plus the new information above, do the following.

(a) Answer Natalie s questions.

(b) Prepare and post the January 2015 transactions.

(c) Prepare a trial balance.

(d) Prepare and post the adjusting journal entries required.

(e) Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

(f) Prepare a multiple-step income statement and retained earnings statement for the month ended January 31, 2015.

(g) Prepare a classified balance sheet as of January 31, 2015.

(c) Totals 12,434

(f) Net income 2,180

(g) Total assets 8,414

computer accounting with peachtree by sage complete accounting mcqs 496637

1. Menu choices that are followed by an ellipsis (…) are associated with

A. the Sales/Invoicing window.

B. shortcuts.

C. dialog boxes.

D. text fields.

2. In Peachtree, the employee deductions display as negative amounts on the Payroll Entry window because

A. the employer always pays deductions from the paycheck.

B. they’re deducted from the employee’s gross pay.

C. they’re not used to compute the paycheck.

D. they’re added to the paycheck amount.

3. To set up specific guidelines for individual employees, make the following selections.

A. Employees & Payroll Navigation Center > Employees > View and Edit Employees

B. Tasks > Select for Payment > select employee

C. Maintain > Default Information > Employees

D. Employee tasks > Employees > Employee Maintenance > make appropriate selection

4. If an inventory item is damaged, which of the following selections would you make from Peachtree’s Navigation Bar to record the damage?

A. Inventory & Services Navigation Center > Track Packages

B. Inventory & Services Navigation Center > Inventory Count

C. Inventory & Services Navigation Center > Prices

D. Inventory & Services Navigation Center > Inventory Adjustments

5. In Peachtree, the Vendor Ledgers Report is another name for the

A. Accounts Receivable subsidiary ledger.

B. Accounts Payable open items report.

C. Accounts Payable subsidiary ledger.

D. Inventory subsidiary ledger.

6. When you purchase inventory stock items, the journal entry is

A. Dr. the Accounts Receivable/Customer account; Cr. the Sales account.

B. Dr. the Accounts Payable/Vendor account; Cr. the Inventory account.

C. Dr. the Cash account; Cr. the Revenue account.

D. Dr. the Inventory account; Cr. the Accounts Payable/Vendor account.

7. To display the size of your backup file, you can use the Windows program called

A. Defrag.

B. Windows Accessories.

C. Windows Explorer.

D. Scan disk.

8. On the Employee Defaults window, the Company Fields tab is for

A. liability accounts that are related to employee deductions.

B. assets accounts that are related to employee deductions.

C. expense and liability accounts that are related to employee deductions.

D. liability and expense accounts related to employer deductions.

9. In Peachtree, the price of each inventory item is stored in the

A. Maintain Purchase Items file.

B. Tasks; Purchase orders.

C. Maintain Inventory Items file.

D. Tasks; Inventory items.

10. To transfer money to the Money Market Fund, make the following type of entry.

A. Receipts

B. General Journal

C. Tasks

D. Payments

11. The Income Statement’s net income or (net loss) is also shown on the

A. departmental gross profit totals.

B. income statement’s revenue section.

C. balance sheet’s capital section.

D. cash balance at the end of the period.

12. Peachtree’s accounts receivable system includes the

A. sales/invoicing window.

B. accounts payable subsidiary system.

C. customer ledgers.

D. controlling account in the general ledger.

13. Commands that Peachtree automatically selects are called

A. shortcuts.

B. dialog boxes.

C. objects.

D. defaults.

14. One way to display the balance sheet is to use which of the following menu bar selections?

A. Reports & Forms > Financial Statements > Standard Balance Sheet > OK

B. Reports & Forms > Financial Statements > Standard Financial Statements > Display

C. Reports & Forms > Financial Statements > Inventory > Options

D. Reports & Forms > Financial Statements > Print

15. Expenses and revenues over a period of time are shown on the

A. balance sheet.

B. departmental gross profit report.

C. statement of cash flow.

D. income statement.

16. On the Navigation Bar, make the following selections to enter a sales invoice.

A. Customers & Sales Navigation Center > Sales Invoices > New Sales Invoice

B. Customers & Sales Navigation Center > Sales Invoices > Set Up Invoice Defaults

C. Customers & Sales Navigation Center > Customers > View and Edit Customers

D. Tasks > Purchases/Receive Inventory

17. The income statement is a summary of

A. cash receipts and where they came from.

B. cash payments and what they were used for.

C. revenues and expenses over a period of time.

D. the overall change in cash.

18. Which of the following would you select to look at an employee’s record in Peachtree?

A. The Payroll Entry window

B. Tasks > Employees

C. Shortcut > General Journal entry

D. Employees & Payroll Navigation Center > Employees > View and Edit Employees

19. The following accounts are debited and credited when you purchase inventory on account.

A. Dr. Inventory account, credit Account Receivable/Vendor

B. Dr. Accounts Receivable/Customer; Cr. Sales account

C. Dr. Inventory account; Cr. Accounts Payable/Vendor

D. Dr. Accounts Payable/Vendor; Cr. Expense account

20. The file extension for Peachtree backup files is

A. .ptb

B. .pdf

C. .pbcx

D. .pbb

computer applications in accounting 496638

1. On the Navigation Bar, make the following selections to record a payment on account:

A. On the Customers & Sales Navigation Center, click on the Bank Deposits icon and select New Bank Deposit.

B. Maintain; Receipts, record the cash sale.

C. On the Bank Navigation Center, click on the Enter Bills icon and select New Bills.

D. On the Customers & Sales Navigation Center, click on the Receive Money icon and select Receive Money From Customer, Apply to Invoices tab

2. Sam is using an Excel worksheet to manage his expenses. The output in cell F18 looks incorrect to Sam.

To check the formula in cell F18, Sam should first select the cell and look at the _______ to see if the

formula is correct.

A. function tab

B. name box and current cell address

C. range

D. formula bar

3. The account credited on the Receipts window

A. is Account No. 1020, Checking Account.

B. is Account No. 1040, IRA Savings.

C. is the GL Account selected.

D. irrelevant because the Receipts window doesn’t need to have an account credited.

4. For the appropriate two decimal places to show on task windows, you need to

A. display the beginning balances.

B. select global settings for two decimal places.

C. select Maintain > Company Info.

D. select Company > Restore.

5. Saving Peachtree data to the hard drive or external media is called

A. restoring data.

B. data mining.

C. exporting to Excel.

D. backing up.

6. The shortened company name that Peachtree assigns to new companies is made up of the

A. entire company name.

B. last word within the company name.

C. first word only.

D. first three letters of the first word, the first three letters of the second word, and first two letters of the third word.

7. Which of the following is a true statement about the chart of accounts?

A. The chart of accounts is a list of accounts in the general ledger.

B. The chart of accounts is the accounts shown on the balance sheet.

C. The chart of accounts is a list of accounts in the general journal.

D. The chart of accounts is the accounts shown on the income statement.

8. The amount of money the business owes to suppliers or vendors is called

A. accounts receivable.

B. contracts payable.

C. accounts payable.

D. prepaid expense.

9. Accountants recommend that you use FIFO when you desire to Accountants recommend that you use FIFO when you desire to

A. get the highest net income.

B. charge the most recent inventory costs against revenue.

C. charge costs against revenue in the order in which costs are incurred.

D. get the lowest net income.

10. To change an entry on the Write Checks window or Receipts window,

A. add a transaction line.

B. delete the record.

C. edit the record.

D. make a completely new entry.

11. The Write Checks window automatically debits which of the following accounts?

A. Account No. 1040, IRA Savings

B. The account credited not debited

C. The Expense account selected

D. Account No. 1020 Checking Account

12. On the Navigation Bar, make the following selections to enter employee maintenance information.

A. Tasks, then Payroll Entry

B. Employees & Payroll Navigation Center, click on the Employees icon, and select View and Edit Employees

C. Employees & Payroll Navigation Center, click on the Pay Employees icon, and select Set Up Payroll Service

D. Employees & Payroll Navigation Center, click on the Employees icon, and select Write Letters to Employees

13. Ralph has been assigned by his boss a project to create budgeting formulas for the company’s payroll

expense reports using Excel. What should Ralph consider when creating the formulas?

A. Excel has third-party formulas you can purchase from Microsoft.

B. Excel has limited capabilities, so it would be easier to use payroll software for this application.

C. Excel performs formulas based on order of precedence.

D. Excel has predefined formulas, so you don’t have to create any formulas from scratch.

14. When you want to create an invoice in Peachtree without inventory items, you need to use which of

the following forms?

A. Sales order

B. Purchase invoice

C. Sales invoice

D. Service invoice

15. You enter all checks, cash, and credit card slips in the _______ window.

A. General Journal entry

B. Receipts

C. Sales Receipts

D. Payments

16. Peachtree’s _______ is the complete collection of accounts of a company, transactions associated with

these accounts, and account balances for a specified period of time.

A. data file statistic

B. general ledger system

C. maintenance system

D. default

17. In Peachtree, there are two ways to record entries from the transaction register: from the

A. System Page and Analysis Tools.

B. System page, link to synchronize Peachtree.

C. Banking tasks and view reports selections.

D. Menu bar or the Navigation Bar.

18. To complete account reconciliation, checks and deposits need to be

A. set up in account reconciliation maintenance.

B. selected by clicking Tasks; Change Accounting Periods.

C. recorded.

D. journalized and posted.

19. In Excel, the order of precedence determines

A. which cells are to be printed.

B. the order in which calculations are performed.

C. which figures are multiplied or divided.

D. the format of the cell reference.

20. The Inventory Profitability Report shows

A. gross profit percentage.

B. net loss.

C. net income.

D. reorder amount

college level accountant or cpa certified person 496593

I am looking for someone who is experienced in the accounting field and has a good general knowledge of the accounting practices and has a solid understanding of all key terms used in accounting.

I am currently enrolled in an online Accounting 201 class and need someone to take a quiz for me once a week. The quizzes are only 10 minutes long/10 questions and if you are at all experienced in accounting it should be a breeze. It is mostly dealing with ledgers, equity, liabilities, and assets. Very simple stuff if you have taken any university/community college level accounting courses.

If you or someone you know would be interested in doing these weekely quizzed for me please contact me via PM.

Payment: $10 upfront and $15 after as long as the scores are above 80%

columbia enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally c 496596

Chapter 8 Exercise 1:

1. Basic present value calculations

Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar:

  1. A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at a 12% rate of return.
  2. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at a 14% rate of return.
  3. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 10% rate of return.
  4. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has a 16% rate of return.

Chapter 8 Exercise 4:

4. Cash flow calculationsand net present value

On January 2, 20X1, Bruce Greene invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 20X1 and 20X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 20X3. On December 31, 20X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments.

  1. Prepare a chronological list of the investment s cash flows. Note:Greene is entitled to the 20X3 dividend.
  2. Compute the investment s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.
  3. Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.

Chapter 8 exercise 5:

5. Straightforwardnet present value and internal rate of return

The City of Bedford is studying a 600-acre site on Route 356 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:

Purchase cost: $450 per acre

Site preparation: $175,000

The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Bedford, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.

  1. Should the landfill be acquired if Bedford desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net-present-value method to determine your answer.

Chapter 8 Problem 1:

1. Straightforward net-present-value and payback computations

STL Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight-seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:

Cost of boat $500,000
Service life 10 summer seasons
Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons $100,000
Capacity per trip 300 passengers
Fixed operating costs per season (including straight-line depreciation) $160,000
Variable operating costs per trip $1,000
Ticket price $5 per passenger

All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 120,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.

Instructions:

By using the net-present-value method, determine whether STL Entertainment should acquire the boat. Assume a 14% desired return on all investments- round calculations to the nearest dollar.

Chapter 8 Problem 4:

4. Equipment replacement decision

Columbia Enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally cost $74,000. The equipment is expected to provide six more years of service if $8,700 of major repairs are performed in two years. Annual cash operating costs total $27,200. Columbia can sell the equipment now for $36,000; the estimated residual value in six years is $5,000.

New equipment is available that will reduce annual cash operating costs to $21,000. The equipment costs $103,000, has a service life of six years, and has an estimated residual value of $13,000. Company sales will total $430,000 per year with either the existing or the new equipment. Columbia has a minimum desired return of 12% and depreciates all equipment by the straight-line method.

Instructions:

  1. By using the net-present-value method, determine whether Columbia should keep its present equipment or acquire the new equipment. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar, and ignore income taxes.
  2. Columbia s management feels that the time value of money should be considered in all long-term decisions. Briefly discuss the rationale that underlies management s belief.

com 285 final exam final exam 100 correct answers 496598

COM 285 Final Exam Final Exam / 100% correct answers

1) Susan Rojas is applying for a position in the marketing department of a local corporation. Although Greg Ellis is the director of this department, Susan has been instructed to send her resume and other documents to Jeff Cohen, manager of the human resources department. Jeff screens all applications before sending those of qualified candidates on to appropriate department heads. Jeff is
A. the primary audience
B. a gatekeeper
C. a watchdog
D. an auxiliary audience

2) An oral message is preferable to a written one when you want to:
A. present many specific details
B. minimize undesirable emotions
C. resolve conflicts and build consensus
D. present extensive and complex data

3) A written business request is answered positively and promptly on the first try. This is an example of a high level of
A. goodwill
B. image
C. clarity
D. effectiveness

4) For which of the following business messages would it be appropriate to approach the subject indirectly by leading up to the main point rather than presenting it first?
A. You are e-mailing a copy of a sales report to a colleague who had asked for it
B. You are asking a subordinate to complete an entry that he had overlooked on his expense report
C. You are complying with an information request sent to you by the county business license department
D. You are letting your staff know that there will be significant downsizing in your department in the upcoming year

5) A subordinate comes to you because he is upset with the way he is treated by coworkers. A good first response would be to
A. Tell him to solve his own problems
B. Tell him about your problems with the same people
C. Acknowledge his feelings
D. Give him some advice on how to handle the situation

6) Which of the following would be the BEST way to refuse a customer’s request?
A. “Though your warranty expired in June, as a Dave’s Club Card customer you are eligible for a 10% discount on all repairs.”
B. “If it were up to me I’d repair your washing machine free since your warranty expired just last month, but my boss won’t allow it.”
C. “Please understand that it is impossible for us to do free repairs for all customers.”
D. “You claim that your washing machine is under warranty, but our records show that it expired last month.”

7) Crystal agreed to serve on a company s advisory board and now has to contact them to say she cannot attend a scheduled meeting where she was to be one of several key speakers. What should she do?
A. Let the company know she cannot not attend and that they will have to make arrangements for another speaker
B. Ask the company to cancel the meeting
C. Offer to send a knowledgeable colleague in her place
D. Resign from the advisory board before the meeting date

8) When you are writing subject lines for negative messages to peers and subordinates,
A. put the topic, but not your action on it, in the subject line.
B. put the topic, including your action on it, in the subject line
C. do not include the topic in the subject line
D. describe how the problem happened

9) Which of the following is a negative subject line?
A. Reduction of Travel Benefits
B. Change in Personal Leave Policy
C. Improving On-Time Performance
D. Results of Customer Service Survey

10) You are a technical writer in a large company who is working on a training manual to help new users learn the company’s computer system. Employees will use your manual in training seminars taught by your company’s trainers. The manual will also serve as an on-the-job reference later. Both of the system analysts who designed the computer system and the trainers will comment on your draft. The trainers would be classified as what kind of audience for your manual?
A. Watchdog
B. Gatekeeper
C. Primary
D. Secondary

11) Which audience has political, social, or economic power; pays close attention to the transaction between you and the primary audience; and may base future actions on its evaluation of your message?
A. Auxiliary audience
B. Watchdog audience
C. Gatekeeper
D. Secondary audience

12) Which of the following groups would be considered an internal audience for a company?
A. Managers in the company s Human Resources Department
B. Stockholders who have invested in the company
C. State and local agencies that conduct annual health and safety inspections at the company
D. Three large customers that represent 85% of the company s annual sales

13) If you are speaking with someone who nods while you are speaking and then brings up points of disagreement when you are finished, it is likely that your listener
A. nods for no reason at all
B. wants to mislead you
C. agreed with you until the last point you made in the argument
D. was nodding to show that he or she was listening, but was not necessarily agreeing

14) Which of the following audiences would receive an internal document?
A. Your best customers
B. The human resources director
C. The job candidate you wish to hire
D. The CPA who is auditing your company’s books

15) Business communication practices in the United States place importance on the written word, and this indicates that our culture
A. has low-context preferences
B. has high-context preferences
C. is polychromic
D. is monochromic

16) It can be helpful for managers working overseas to have a basic understanding of the religion observed by workers in that company because
A. then the manager knows when to buy gifts for his or her employees
B. a superior should always seem knowledgeable to his or her employee
C. an ordinary business day in the United States may be a holiday in another country
D. most international companies insist that managers adopt all the customs of the host country

17) The informational dimension of group interaction looks at
A. who will do what
B. the problem, data, and possible solutions
C. promoting friendliness
D. establishing group loyalty

18) The interpersonal dimension of group interaction focuses on:
A. content
B. method
C. process
D. people

19) Positive roles and actions of individuals that help the group achieve its task goals include
A. recognizing the contributions of members
B. disagreeing with everything that is proposed
C. restating major points, pulling ideas together, and summarizing decisions
D. showing group members that they have been heard and that their ideas are being taken seriously

20) Which of the following will help make your business writing easy to read?
A. business jargon
B. parallel structure
C. wordiness
D. consistent sentence length for all sentences

21) Which of the following sentences that begin a letter is appropriate for contemporary business communication?
A. Enclosed please find the application forms you requested.
B. Pursuant to you request, we are forwarding you the application forms you requested.
C. Here are the application forms you requested.
D. Your application forms have been enclosed herewith.

22) Lauren has confirmed flight information, printed directions from the Internet, and spoken with the human resources department to clarify specific details. She will include this information in a letter to a job candidate she is inviting for an interview. What part of the writing process does this activity represent?
A. Writing
B. Gathering
C. Revising
D. Editing

23) Ben chooses a pattern of organization before he begins a letter. What part of the writing process does this activity represent?
A. Planning
B. Getting feedback
C. Brainstorming
D. Editing

24) A sales brochure includes photos and clipart that is strategically placed within the marketing piece. This is an example of which level of communications professor Charles Kostelnick s levels of communication design?
A. Intra
B. Inter
C. Extra
D. Supra

25) Which of the following would be the BEST place to put your most important visual in a newsletter?
A. In the center of the page to indicate that the image is central to the newsletter
B. In the bottom left of the page to emphasize material that appears in the top half
C. Parallel to two or more smaller visuals to create balance
D. In the top left of the page because the top is a position of emphasis

26) Which of the following would be considered illegal if done by an employer?
A. Monitor employee s telephone calls
B. Monitor employee s internet activities done on company time
C. Monitor communications using company-issued devices such as cell phones
D. Prohibiting an employee from blogging about the company via his or her own computer at home

27) In a bad-news message to subordinates, why is it a good idea to ask readers to suggest solutions to the problem?
A. So you will have someone to share the blame with if you are unable to solve the problem
B. So your subordinates will not blame you for the problem
C. To stall for time, so you can think of a solution on your own
D. Because workers who help make a decision are more likely to accept the consequences

28) In a bad-news message to a superior, you should describe what led to the problem
A. so your superior can see that the problem is not your fault
B. to show that the problem is really your boss’s fault because you have not been given adequate resources
C. so he or she will have adequate information to determine if the solution you are going to propose is appropriate
D. to pad the message so it does not upset the superior too much

29) You must explain to a group of employees the different pension funds they can now choose. You expect the group to have many questions because many of them will be retiring within 10 years and want to maximize their retirement income. You should probably
A. send them each a written package of material and ask them to call if they have questions
B. give an oral presentation with lots of visuals
C. send them a package of self-explanatory written material and cover different material at the presentation
D. give them written material to look at ahead of time and go over that material as part of your presentation

30) Which of the following purposes of an oral presentation is specific in its purpose?
A. This presentation will cover budget issues.
B. This presentation will show that some departments are not managing their budgets properly.
C. This presentation will explain how to forecast materials needs, estimate costs, and prepare a comprehensive cost budget.
D. This presentation will explain the budgeting process since it is so important to the success of the company.

com285 entire course final exam 496599

Preview
1.W1/
2.W1/COM 285 Week 1.zip
3.W1/COM 285 Week 1 Assignment Business Communication Trends.doc
4.W1/COM 285 Week 1 Discussion Questions.doc
5.W1/COM 285 WEEK 1.doc
6.W2/
7.W2/COM 285 Week 2 Assignment Audience Analysis Paper.doc
8.W2/COM 285 Week 2 Discussion Questions.doc
9.W2/COM 285 WEEK 2.doc
10.W2/COM 285 Week 2.zip
11.W3/
12.W3/COM 285 Week 3 Assignment Learning Team Charter Analysis.doc
13.W3/COM 285 Week 3 Discussion Questions.doc
14.W3/COM 285 Week 3 Individual Assignment Cross-Cultural Communication Matrix.doc
15.W3/COM 285 WEEK 3.doc
16.W3/COM 285 Week 3.zip
17.W4/
18.W4/COM 285 Week 4 Discussion Questions.doc
19.W4/COM 285 Week 4 Individual Assignment Business Writing Portfolio.doc
20.W4/COM 285 WEEK 4.doc
21.W4/COM 285 Week 4.zip
22.W5/
23.W5/COM 285 Final Exam.doc
24.W5/COM 285 Week 5 Discussion Questions.doc
25.W5/COM 285 Week 5 Individual Assignment Employee Privacy Report.doc
26.W5/COM 285 Week 5 Learning Team Assignment Oral PowerPoint Presentation.pptx
27.W5/COM 285 WEEK 5.doc
28.W5/COM 285 Week 5.zip

a company has 56 000 in cash 12 000 in accounts receivable 496608

1. A company has $56,000 in cash; $12,000 in accounts receivable; $25,000 in short-term investments; and $100,000 in merchandise inventory. The company also has $60,000 in current liabilities. The company’s quick ratio is
A. 3.217.
B. 1.550.
C. 0.933.
D. 1.133.
2. Patty’s Baker has cost of goods sold for the years 2011, 2010, and 2009, respectively, of $28,600, $26,900, and $25,600. If 2009 is the base year, the trend percentage for 2011 is
A. 11.72%.
B. 111.72%.
C. 5.08%.
D. 105.08%.
3. If total assets are $6,000, what is the common-size figure of cash, assuming that cash has a balance of $2,400?
A. 100.0%
B. 40.0%
C. 120.0%
D. 60.0%
4. Operating cash flows affect
A. current assets and current liabilities.
B. equity accounts.
C. long-term liability accounts.
D. long-term asset accounts.
5. If current assets were $100,000 in 2009 and $88,000 in 2010, what was the amount of increase or decrease in percentage terms from 2009 to 2010? (Round to the nearest percent.)
A. Increase of 14%
B. Increase of 12%
C. Decrease of 12%
D. Decrease of 14%
6. Casey Company has an accounts receivable turnover of 36 days, an inventory turnover of 77 days, and an accounts payable turnover of 40 days. Casey’s cash conversion cycle is _______ day(s).
A. 81
B. 1
C. 73
D. 153
7. Casey Company has 5,000 shares of treasury cost that it purchased for $13 per share. It later resold 2,000 of those shares for $17 per share. The amount to be credited to Paid-in Capital Treasury Stock is
A. $30,000.
B. $8,000.
C. $34,000.
D. $26,000.
8. Isaiah Corporation’s Accounts Receivable increased by $35,000, and its Accounts Payable decreased by $18,000. What is the net effect on cash from operations under the indirect method?
A. $18,000
B. $53,000
C. +$17,000
D. +$35,000
9. Operating expenses other than depreciation for the year were $335,000. Prepaid expenses decreased by $7,000. Cash payments for operating expenses to be reported on the cash flow statement using the direct method would be
A. $342,000.
B. $328,000.
C. $7,000.
D. $335,000.
10. For vertical analysis purposes, the base item on the income statement is
A. net income.
B. total expenses.
C. gross profit.
D. net sales.
11. Casey Company has a $2,400 credit balance in Paid-In Capital Treasury Stock. It sells 500 shares of treasury stock that the company reacquired at $21/share, for $18/share. After the transaction, what will the balance be in the Paid-In Capital in Excess of Par Treasury account?
A. $900 credit B. $3,900 credit C. $900 debit D. $1,500 debit
12. Ryan Industries has an inventory turnover of 112 days, an accounts payable turnover of 73 days, and an accounts receivable turnover of 82 days. Ryan’s cash conversion cycle is _______ days.
A. 43
B. 121
C. 9
D. 103
13. The Isaiah Corporation Stockholders’ Equity section includes the following information:
Preferred Stock
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Preferred Common Stock
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Common Retained Earnings
$22,000 2,980 48,000 3,400 7,350
Total par value of the preferred and common stock is
A. $70,000.
B. $83,730.
C. $77,350.
D. $76,380.
14. Earnings that a stockholder receives from a corporation are an example of which stockholder right? A. Preemption
B. Liquidation
C. Dividends
D. Vote
15. Tammy Corporation has 350,000 shares of $3 par common stock outstanding. It has declared a 5% stock dividend. The current market price of the common stock is $7.50/share. The amount that will be debited to retained earnings on the date of declaration is
A. $78,750.
B. $131,250.
C. $52,500.
D. $183,750.
16. Accounts receivable amounted to $215,000 at the beginning of the year and $245,000 at the end of the year. Income reported on the income statement for the year was $300,000. The cash flow from operating activities on the cash flow statement using the indirect method is
A. $315,000.
B. $300,000.
C. $270,000.
D. $330,000.
17. What are the rate of return on stockholders’ equity and the rate of return on common stockholders’ equity (rounded to the nearest one-tenth of a percent) given the following information:
Net Income
Preferred Dividends
Common Stock
Common Stockholders Equity 1/1/2011 4,400,000 Total Stockholders Equity 1/1/2011 5,300,000 Total Stockholders Equity 12/31/2011 5,500,000
A. Return on Stockholders’ Equity: 6.5 %; Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity: 7.6%
B. Return on Stockholders’ Equity: 7.8 %; Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity: 8.9%
C. Return on Stockholders’ Equity: 5.6 %; Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity: 6.7% D. Return on Stockholders’ Equity: 8.1 %; Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity: 9.2%
18. What is the rate of return on common stockholders’ equity if sales are $100,000, net income is $22,700, and average common stockholders’ equity is $86,000?
A. The rate of return can’t be determined from the information given.
B. 26.4%
C. 22.7%
D. 86.0%
19. If you own 500 shares (2% of a corporation’s stock) and the corporation issues 15,000 new shares, how many of the new shares can you purchase under preemptive right?
A. 0
B. 300
C. 500
D. 800
20. Which activities are computed differently using the two methods of formatting a statement of cash flows?

A. Operating activities
B. Both operating activities and investing activities
C. Investing activities
D. Financing activities

a company has 56 000 in cash 12 000 in accounts receivable 496609

1. A company has $56,000 in cash; $12,000 in accounts receivable; $25,000 in short-term investments; and $100,000 in merchandise inventory. The company also has $60,000 in current liabilities. The company’s quick ratio is
A. 3.217.
B. 1.550.
C. 0.933.
D. 1.133.
2. Patty’s Baker has cost of goods sold for the years 2011, 2010, and 2009, respectively, of $28,600, $26,900, and $25,600. If 2009 is the base year, the trend percentage for 2011 is
A. 11.72%.
B. 111.72%.
C. 5.08%.
D. 105.08%.
3. If total assets are $6,000, what is the common-size figure of cash, assuming that cash has a balance of $2,400?
A. 100.0%
B. 40.0%
C. 120.0%
D. 60.0%
4. Operating cash flows affect
A. current assets and current liabilities.
B. equity accounts.
C. long-term liability accounts.
D. long-term asset accounts.
5. If current assets were $100,000 in 2009 and $88,000 in 2010, what was the amount of increase or decrease in percentage terms from 2009 to 2010? (Round to the nearest percent.)
A. Increase of 14%
B. Increase of 12%
C. Decrease of 12%
D. Decrease of 14%
6. Casey Company has an accounts receivable turnover of 36 days, an inventory turnover of 77 days, and an accounts payable turnover of 40 days. Casey’s cash conversion cycle is _______ day(s).
A. 81
B. 1
C. 73
D. 153
7. Casey Company has 5,000 shares of treasury cost that it purchased for $13 per share. It later resold 2,000 of those shares for $17 per share. The amount to be credited to Paid-in Capital Treasury Stock is
A. $30,000.
B. $8,000.
C. $34,000.
D. $26,000.
8. Isaiah Corporation’s Accounts Receivable increased by $35,000, and its Accounts Payable decreased by $18,000. What is the net effect on cash from operations under the indirect method?
A. $18,000
B. $53,000
C. +$17,000
D. +$35,000
9. Operating expenses other than depreciation for the year were $335,000. Prepaid expenses decreased by $7,000. Cash payments for operating expenses to be reported on the cash flow statement using the direct method would be
A. $342,000.
B. $328,000.
C. $7,000.
D. $335,000.
10. For vertical analysis purposes, the base item on the income statement is
A. net income.
B. total expenses.
C. gross profit.
D. net sales.
11. Casey Company has a $2,400 credit balance in Paid-In Capital Treasury Stock. It sells 500 shares of treasury stock that the company reacquired at $21/share, for $18/share. After the transaction, what will the balance be in the Paid-In Capital in Excess of Par Treasury account?
A. $900 credit B. $3,900 credit C. $900 debit D. $1,500 debit
12. Ryan Industries has an inventory turnover of 112 days, an accounts payable turnover of 73 days, and an accounts receivable turnover of 82 days. Ryan’s cash conversion cycle is _______ days.
A. 43
B. 121
C. 9
D. 103
13. The Isaiah Corporation Stockholders’ Equity section includes the following information:
Preferred Stock
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Preferred Common Stock
Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Common Retained Earnings
$22,000 2,980 48,000 3,400 7,350
Total par value of the preferred and common stock is
A. $70,000.
B. $83,730.
C. $77,350.
D. $76,380.
14. Earnings that a stockholder receives from a corporation are an example of which stockholder right? A. Preemption
B. Liquidation
C. Dividends
D. Vote
15. Tammy Corporation has 350,000 shares of $3 par common stock outstanding. It has declared a 5% stock dividend. The current market price of the common stock is $7.50/share. The amount that will be debited to retained earnings on the date of declaration is
A. $78,750.
B. $131,250.
C. $52,500.
D. $183,750.
16. Accounts receivable amounted to $215,000 at the beginning of the year and $245,000 at the end of the year. Income reported on the income statement for the year was $300,000. The cash flow from operating activities on the cash flow statement using the indirect method is
A. $315,000.
B. $300,000.
C. $270,000.
D. $330,000.
17. What are the rate of return on stockholders’ equity and the rate of return on common stockholders’ equity (rounded to the nearest one-tenth of a percent) given the following information:
Net Income
Preferred Dividends
Common Stock
Common Stockholders Equity 1/1/2011 4,400,000 Total Stockholders Equity 1/1/2011 5,300,000 Total Stockholders Equity 12/31/2011 5,500,000
A. Return on Stockholders’ Equity: 6.5 %; Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity: 7.6%
B. Return on Stockholders’ Equity: 7.8 %; Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity: 8.9%
C. Return on Stockholders’ Equity: 5.6 %; Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity: 6.7% D. Return on Stockholders’ Equity: 8.1 %; Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity: 9.2%
18. What is the rate of return on common stockholders’ equity if sales are $100,000, net income is $22,700, and average common stockholders’ equity is $86,000?
A. The rate of return can’t be determined from the information given.
B. 26.4%
C. 22.7%
D. 86.0%
19. If you own 500 shares (2% of a corporation’s stock) and the corporation issues 15,000 new shares, how many of the new shares can you purchase under preemptive right?
A. 0
B. 300
C. 500
D. 800
20. Which activities are computed differently using the two methods of formatting a statement of cash flows?

A. Operating activities
B. Both operating activities and investing activities
C. Investing activities
D. Financing activities

the company sells a large variety of tee shirts and sweatshirts the owner is thinkin 496616

The company sells a large variety of tee shirts and sweatshirts. The owner, is thinking of expanding his sales by hiring local high school students, on a commission basis, to sell sweatshirts bearing the name and mascot of the local high school.

These sweatshirts would have to be ordered from the manufacturer six weeks in advance, and they could not be returned because of the unique printing required. The sweatshirts would cost He owner $10 each with a minimum order of 80 sweatshirts. Any additional sweatshirts would have to be ordered in increments of 80.

Since the owner s plan would not require any additional facilities, the only costs associated with the project would be the costs of the sweatshirts and the costs of the sales commissions. The selling price of the sweatshirts would be $15.00each. The owner would pay the students a commission of $2.00 for each shirt sold.

Assume left over shirts have no value.

Required:

A. Assume that the venture is undertaken and an order is placed for 80 sweat shirts (at a cost of $10 per shirt). What would be he owner s break-even point in units and in sales dollars? Show computations and explain the reasoning behind your answer.

B. What level of sales in units and in dollars would be required to reach the target net income of $1,200? Show all computations.

C. Assume that the purchase cost of each sweatshirt increases to $11.00 while other conditions remain the same. What level of sales in units and in dollars would now be required to reach a target net income of $1,200? Show all computations.

company shares accounting 496617

Stockholders Equity ( December 31, 2011)

Common stock $ 4 par value, 50,000 shares
authorized, 20,000 shares issued and outstanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 80,000
Paid- in capital in excess of par value, common stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,000
Retained earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,000
Total stockholders equity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 300,000

Stockholders Equity ( December 31, 2012)

Common stock $ 4 par value, 50,000 shares
authorized, 23,700 shares issued, 1,500 shares in treasury . . . . . . . . . $ 94,800
Paid- in capital in excess of par value, common stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,600
Retained earnings ($ 15,000 restricted by treasury stock) . . . . . . . . . . . 200,000
384,400
Less cost of treasury stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .( 15,000)
Total stockholders equity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 369,400

The following transactions and events affected its equity during year 2012.

Jan. 5 Declared a $ 0.50 per share cash dividend, date of record January 10.
Mar. 20 Purchased treasury stock for cash.
Apr. 5 Declared a $ 0.50 per share cash dividend, date of record April 10.
July 5 Declared a $ 0.50 per share cash dividend, date of record July 10.
July 31 Declared a 20% stock dividend when the stock s market value is $ 12 per share.
Aug. 14 Issued the stock dividend that was declared on July 31.
Oct. 5 Declared a $ 0.50 per share cash dividend, date of record October 10.

Required

1. How many common shares are outstanding on each cash dividend date?
2. What is the total dollar amount for each of the four cash dividends
3. What is the amount of the capitalization of retained earnings for the stock dividend?
4. What is the per share cost of the treasury stock purchased
5. How much net income did the company earn during year 2012?

the comparative balance sheet of flack inc for december 31 2013 and 2012 is shown as 496619

The comparative balance sheet of Flack Inc. for December 31, 2013 and 2012 is shown as follows:

Assets:

Dec 31st, 2013 Dec 2012

Cash $234,660 $219,720

Accounts receivables 85,440 78,360

Inventories 240,660 231,420

Investements 0 90,000

Land 123,000 0

Equipment 264,420 207,420

Accumulated Depreciation-Equipment (62,400) (55,500)

885,780 771,420

Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

Accounts payable (merchandise Creditor) 159,180 151,860

Accrued expensies payable (operations expenses) 15,840 19,740

Dividends payable 9,000 7,200

Common stock $1par 48,000 36,000

Paid in capital excess of par -common stock 180,000 105,000

Retained earnings 473,760 451,620

885,780 771,420

The following additional information was taken from the records:

  1. The investments were sold for $105,000 cash
  2. Equipment and land were acquired for cash
  3. There were no disposals of equipment during the year
  4. Common stock was issued for cash
  5. There was a $ 58,140 credit to retained earnings for net income
  6. There was a $ 36,000 debit to retained earnings for cash dividends declared.

Required:

Prepare a statement of cash flows using the INDIRECT and DIRECT methods of presenting cash flows from operating activities

the comparative balance sheet of mavenir technologies inc for december 31 2010 and 2 496620

The comparative balance sheet of Mavenir Technologies Inc. for December 31, 2010 and 2009, is shown as follows:

Dec. 31, 2010 Dec. 31, 2009
Assets
Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 312,880 $ 292,960
Accounts receivable (net) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113,920 104,480
Inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . 320,880 308,560
Investments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 120,000
Land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,000 0
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 352,560 276,560
Accumulated depreciation equipment . . .. __(83,200) __(74,000)
$1,181,040 $1,028,560
Liabilities and Stockholders Equity
Accounts payable (merchandise creditors) .. $ 214,240 $ 202,480
Accrued expenses payable (operating expenses) . . . 21,120 26,320
Dividends payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,000 9,600
Common stock, $10 par. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,000 48,000
Paid-in capital in excess of par common stock . .240,000 140,000
Retained earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ___629,680 602,160
$1,181,040 $1,028,560

The following additional information was taken from the records:

a. The investments were sold for $140,000 cash.
b. Equipment and land were acquired for cash.
c. There were no disposals of equipment during the year.
d. The common stock was issued for cash.
e. There was a $75,520 credit to Retained Earnings for net income.
f. There was a $48,000 debit to Retained Earnings for cash dividends declared.

Instructions:

Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the indirect method of presenting cash flows from operating activities.

a comparative balance sheet for richardson lau corporation is presented below 496621

A comparative balance sheet for Richardson-Lau Corporation is presented below:

RICHARDSON-LAU CORPORATION

Comparative Balance Sheet

2014 2013

Assets

Cash $ 36,000 $ 31,000

Accounts receivable (net) 70,000 60,000

Prepaid insurance 25,000 17,000

Land 18,000 40,000

Equipment 70,000 60,000

Accumulated depreciation (20,000) (13,000)

Total Assets $199,000 $195,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable $ 11,000 $ 6,000

Bonds payable 27,000 19,000

Common stock 140,000 115,000

Retained earnings 21,000 55,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $199,000 $195,000

Additional information:

1. Net loss for 2014 is $20,000.

2. Cash dividends of $14,000 were declared and paid in 2014.

3. Land was sold for cash at a loss of $4,000. This was the only land transaction during the year.

4. Equipment with a cost of $15,000 and accumulated depreciation of $10,000 was sold for $5,000 cash.

5. $22,000 of bonds were retired during the year at carrying (book) value.

6. Equipment was acquired for common stock. The fair value of the stock at the time of the exchange was $25,000.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended 2014, using the indirect method.

the comparative balance sheets for drake company appear below 496622

The comparative balance sheets for Drake Company appear below:

Drake, Inc.

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31

Assets 2014 2013

Cash 41,000 35,000

Accounts Receivable 75,000 53,000

Inventories 120,000 132,000

Prepaid Expenses 19,000 25,000

Investments 100,000 75,000

Plant assets 325,000 250,000

Accumulated Depreciation (65,000) (60,000)

Total Assets 615,000 510,000

Liabilities & Equity

Accounts Payable 93,000 75,000

Accrued Expenses 29,000 24,000

Bonds Payable 120,000 160,000

Common Stock 275,000 170,000

Retained Earnings 98,000 81,000

Total Liabilities & Equity 615,000 510,000

Drake, Inc.

Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31, 2014

Sales 450,000

Cost of Goods Sold 300,000

Gross Margin 150,000

Less:

Operating Expenses 60,000

Depreciation Expense 17,000

Income Taxes 20,000

Interest Expense 18,000

Loss on sale of plant assets 3,000 118,000

Net Income 32,000

Additional information

1. New plant assets costing $100,000 were purchased with cash.

2. Investments were purchased with cash.

3. Old plant assets costing $25,000 and with a book value of $13,000 were sold for $10,000 cash.

4. Bonds with a face value of $40,000 were converted into $40,000 par value of common stock.

5. Common stock was issued for cash.

6. A cash dividend of $15,000 was declared and paid during the year.

Required

Prepare a statement of cash ows for the year using the indirect method.

the comparative statements of villa tool company are presented below 496625

The comparative statements of Villa Tool Company are presented below.

VILLA TOOL COMPANY

Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31

2012 2011

Net sales $1,818,500 $1,750,500

Cost of goods sold 1,011,500 996,000

Gross profit 807,000 754,500

Selling and administrative expense 516,000 479,000

Income from operations 291,000 275,500

Other expenses and losses

Interest expense 18,000 14,000

Income before income taxes 273,000 261,500

Income tax expense 81,000 77,000

Net income $ 192,000 $ 184,500

VILLA TOOL COMPANY

Balance Sheets

December 31

Assets 2012 2011

Current assets

Cash $ 60,100 $ 64,200

Short-term investments 69,000 50,000

Accounts receivable (net) 117,800 102,800

Inventory 123,000 115,500

Total current assets 369,900 332,500

Plant assets (net) 600,300 520,300

Total assets $970,200 $852,800

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current liabilities

Accounts payable $160,000 $145,400

Income taxes payable 43,500 42,000

Total current liabilities 203,500 187,400

Bonds payable 200,000 200,000

Total liabilities 403,500 387,400

Stockholders’ equity Common stock ($5 par) 280,000 300,000

Retained earnings 286,700 165,400

Total stockholders’ equity 566,700 465,400

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $970,200 $852,800

Instructions:

Compute the following ratios for 2012. (Weighted average common shares in 2012 were 57,000, and all sales were on account)

(a) Earnings per share.

(b) Return on common stockholders’ equity.

(c) Return on assets.

(d) Current.

(e) Acid-test.

(f) Receivables turnover.

(g) Inventory turnover.

(h) Times interest earned.

(i) Asset turnover.

(j) Debt to total assets.

(Round earnings per share, current ratio and acid-test ratio to 2 decimal places, e.g. 10.50. Round other answers to 1 decimal place, e.g. 10.5.)

the comparative year end balance sheets of sign graphics inc revealed 496627

Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods
The comparative year-end balance sheets of Sign Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts:

20X5

20X4

Increase / Decrease)

Current assets

Cash

$55,400

$35,200

$20,200

Accounts receivable (net)

83,800

88,000

-4,200

Inventory

243,400

233,800

9,600

Prepaid expenses

25,400

24,200

1,200

Current liabilities

Accounts payable

$123,600

$140,600

($17,000)

Taxes payable

43,600

49,200

-5,600

Interest payable

9,000

6,400

2,600

Accrued liabilities

38,800

60,400

-21,600

Note payable

44,000

44,000

The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows.

SIGN GRAPHICS INC.

Income Statement

for the Year Ended December 31, 20×5

Sales

$713,800

Less: Cost of goods sold

323,000

Gross profit

$390,800

Less: Selling & administrative expenses

$186,000

Depreciation expense

17,000

Interest expense

27,000

230,000

Add: gain on sale of land

$160,800

21,800

Income before taxes

$182,600

Income taxes

36,800

Net income

$145,800

Other data:

  1. Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $74,600.
  2. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $76,200.
  3. Store equipment of $44,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $150,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock.
  4. A long-term note of $49,400 was repaid.
  5. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share.
  6. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $128,600.

Instructions:

1. Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of:

The direct method.

The indirect method

2. Prepare the investing and financing activities sections of the statement of cash flows.

comprehensive accounting project 496630

Comprehensive Accounting Project
Question Detail:

KENDALL SCHOOL OF BUSINESS

ACC272 B1 – Fall 2013

Comprehensive Accounting Project

Four students from Kendall Hospitality program, decide to start a business and open an icecream shop in the month of June.

The students names are: Victoria, Matt, Jean & Tracy.

They form a company (partnership) and name it “Chicago Summers”. They decide to use the same name for the ice cream shop.

The students divide the duties – Matt and Victoria will make the purchases needed to produce the Ice Creams. They will hire

two helpers to be at the ice cream shop during business hours, prepare and sell the ice cream. Jean will supervise the employees

She also will be in charge of counting the materials at the end of each business day and communicate to Victoria and Matt how

much more they need to purchase. Tracy is in charge of keeping the accounting records of the company as well as preparing the financial

statements for each month

Here are the transactions Chicago Summers company incurs during the month of June & July 2010:

June Transactions

Setting up the shop

6/1

Each of the students/owners invests $15,000 of cash in the Chicago Summer Company.

The students open a business checking account with City Bank and deposit their initial investments.

6/1

They sign a 2-year lease to rent a space on Michigan Avenue for the Chicago Summers Ice cream shop.

Monthly rent of the space is $2000, payable on the first day of each month.

6/2

They purchase Ice cream Equipments, on account for 12,600, payable in three equal installments, in the next three months

The first installment is due for payment in July 2nd. It is estimated that the equipment has a life of 7 years with no

salvage value.

6/2

They purchase Furniture for the Ice Cream Shop on account for 10,000 on account, payable in 45 days.

It is estimated that the furniture will be used for 5 years, with no salvage value.

6/2

They purchase a laptop for $1200 on account to be used exclusively in keeping track of the accounting records.

Payment for the computer is due in 45 days. Estimated life of the laptop is 3 years with no salvage value.

6/2

They purchase a QuickBooks software, to be used in Accounting, for $1500 on account – payable in 45 days.

It is estimated that the software will be used for 10 years.

6/5

They call a technician to install the Ice Cream equipment. Estimated bill of the technician is $700. At the end of the

month, the company has not yet received the bill, however, the technician completed in full his installation work.

6/5

They hire two employees. Total salary cost for the two employees is $1500 a month, payable at the end of

the month.

Starting the Operations

6/5

Victoria & Matt are in charge of purchasing the key materials to make the ice cream. At the beginning of the month

they purchase the following:

Description

Quantity in LB

Price

Total Cost

Milk

200

$ 1.25

$ 250.00

Sugar

200

$ 0.75

$ 150.00

Vanilla

1

$ 500.00

$ 500.00

Cacao

200

$ 3.00

$ 600.00

Butter

200

$ 2.00

$ 400.00

########

6/5

They incur freight costs of $50, which they pay in full

6/15

Victoria and Matt purchase additional materials. Because of market changes, they realize that prices for their key

ingredients have gone up.

Description

Quantity in LB

Price

Total Cost

Milk

200

$ 1.35

$ 270.00

Sugar

200

$ 0.90

$ 180.00

Butter

100

$ 2.20

$ 220.00

$ 670.00

6/30

Throughout the month, the Chicago Summers ice cream shop is able to generate a total of $6,000 in cash sales.

Inventory

6/30

Jean is in charge of keeping track of key material quantities. She knows that most of the materials purchased

during the month have been used in making ice cream. However some quantities still are left unused. These will be

used in the next month’s production of ice cream. At the end of the month, Jean performs a physical count of the

materials left. Below is the result of the count.

Description

Quantity in LB

Milk

50

Sugar

70

Vanilla

0.5

Cacao

50

Butter

90

June’s financial statement

6/30

Tracy is in charge of keeping the accounting records. She records all the economic events presented above by doing the following:

Preparing the journal entries,

Posting the appropriate journal entries in the T accounts

Preparing the Trial balance for the month of June

Completing the Balance Sheet and Income Statement for the month of June

July Transactions

7/1

The company paid the monthly rent

‘7/1

Paid on account for an ad in the local radio station for $700

7/2

Paid the first installment due for the purchase of the Ice Cream Equipment (total $4200)

7/5

Purchased the following inventory items:

Description

Quantity in LB

Price

Total Cost

Milk

200

$ 1.30

$ 260.00

Sugar

200

$ 0.90

$ 180.00

Cacao

100

$ 2.80

$ 280.00

Butter

100

$ 1.90

$ 190.00

$ 910.00

7/5

Incurred $50 of freight cost, which they paid in cash

All the inventory left over from June and purchased July was fully utilized in making the ice creams in July

7/15

Paid in full the Furniture purchased on account in June.

7/15

Paid in full the cost of the laptop

7/15

Paid in full the cost of the QuickBooks software

7/30

Paid the salaries of the two employees

7/30

Collected $7,000 in cash sales

Instructions

I June Financial Statements

Assume you are doing Tracy’s job:

Analyze each of June’s transactions and prepare the journal entries

Calculate the depreciation and amortization expenses for the month of June for the tangible and intangible assets

Calculate Cost of Goods Sold assuming the company uses a periodic inventory system and FIFO for cost method

Post the appropriate journal entries in T accounts

Prepare a trial balance

Prepare the Balance Sheet and Income Statement for the month of June.

II July Financial Statements

Repeat the steps above for July:

Analyze each of July’s transactions and prepare the journal entries

Calculate the depreciation and amortization expenses for the month of July for the tangible and intangible assets

Calculate Cost of Goods Sold assuming the company uses a periodic inventory system and FIFO for cost method

Post the appropriate journal entries in T accounts

Prepare a trial balance

Prepare the Balance Sheet and Income Statement for the month of July

III Analysis of Accounting Records

Prepare a horizontal analysis by comparing June and July balance sheets

Calculate the following ratios:

1

Current ratio (Liquidity)

2

Return on Assets (Profitability)

3

Debt to Total Assets ratio (Solvency)

Assume you are reviewing the Financial Statements and the analysis together with Victoria, Matt and Jean

What are some of the conclusions? What should the company do to stay in business?

sales are made for cash and on credit the following collection pattern is used to es 496631

Comprehensive master budget in a retail setting (LO 3, 4, 5) Joseph A. Knab distributes men’s suits in
the Southwest. The following information was gathered to prepare the budget for the third quarter of
2011.
Suits are budgeted to sell for an average price of $225. Unit sales are expected to be as follows:
June 4,000 suits
July 4,500 suits
August 4,700 suits
September 4,600 suits
October 4,600 suits
Sales are made for cash and on credit. The following collection pattern is used to estimate monthly
cash collections:
Cash sales 41%
Credit sales month of sale 35
Credit sales month after sale 20
Uncollectible 4
Total 100%
The company tries to maintain an inventory of 25 percent of the following month’s sales. The
company expects to have 1,125 suits on hand on June 30, 2011. Knab pays an average of $146 per
suit.
The company pays for 70 percent of its purchases in the month of purchase and the remaining 30
percent in the month after purchase.
The following monthly selling and administrative expenses are planned for the quarter, though
advertising will have a one time $30,000 increase in August.
Fixed Overhead Variable Cost/Unit
Depreciation $ 9,000
Rent 40,000
Advertising 84,000
Salaries 150,000
Bad debts $9.00
On September 30, the company plans to purchase $45,000 of new office equipment. However, no
additional depreciation will be recorded in the third quarter.
Knab wants to maintain a minimum cash balance of $20,000. An open line of credit at a local
bank allows the company to borrow up to $100,000 per quarter in $1,000 increments.
All borrowing is done at the beginning of the month, and all repayments are made at the end of a
month in $1,000 increments. Accrued interest is paid only when principal is repaid. The interest
rate is 12 percent per year.
Accrued expenses from the second quarter will be paid in July.
Knab’s tax rate is 30 percent.
The June 30, 2011 balance sheet is budgeted as follows:
June 30
Cash $ 21,000
Accounts receivable 180,000
Inventory 164,250
Plant & equipment 540,000
Accumulated depreciation (135,000)
Total assets $770,250
Accounts payable $175,000
Accrued expenses 75,000
Common stock 300,000
Retained earnings 220,250
Total liabilities and equities $770,250
Required
a. Prepare all components of Knab’s master budget for the third quarter of 2011.
b. Prepare a pro forma income statement for the third quarter of 2011.
c. Prepare a pro forma balance sheet as of September 30, 2011.

comprehensive problem 1 the accounting cycle 496632

Bob Night opened The General Favorite Fishing Hole. The fishing camp is open from April through September and attracts many famous college basketball coaches during the off season. Guests typically register for one week, arriving on Sunday afternoon and returning home the following Saturday afternoon. The registration fee includes room and board, the use of fishing boats, and professional instruction in fishing techniques. The chart of accounts for the camping operations is provided below.

The General’s Favorite Fishing Holes

Charts of Accounts

Assets

101 Cash

142 Office supplies

144 food supplies

145 preparid insurance

181 fishing boats

181.2 accum. depr. fishing boats

Liabilities

202 accounts payable

219 wages payable

owner’s equity
311 bob night, capital

312 bob night, drawing

313 income summary

revenues

401 registration fees

expenses

511 wages expense

521 rent expense

523 office supplies expense

524 food supplies expense

525 telephone expense

533 utilities expense

535 insurance expense

536 postage expense

542 depr. exp. fishing boats

The following transactions took place during April 20—-

Apr 1 night invested cash in business, 90,000

Apr 1 paid insurance premium for camping season, 9,000

Apr 2 paid rent for lodge and campgrounds forthemonth of apr 40,000

Apr 2 deposited registration fees, 35,000

Apr 2 purchased ten fishing boats on account for 60,000. The boats have estimated useful lives of five years, at which time they will be donated to a local day camp. arrangement were made to pay for the boats in July.

Apr 3 purhcased food supplies from acme super market on acount, 7,000

Apr 5 purchase office supplies from gordon office supplies on account, 500

Apr 7 deposited registration fees, 38,600

Apr 10 purchase food supplies from acme super market on account, 8,200

Apr 10 paid wages to fishing guides, 10,000

Apr 14 deposited registration fees, 30,050

Apr 16 purchased food supplies from acme super market on account, 9,000

Apr 17 paid wages to fishing guides, 10,000

Apr 18 paid postage 150

Apr 21 deposited registration fees, 35,600

Apr 24 purchased food supplies from acme super market on acct, 8,500

Apr 24 paid wages to fishing gudies, 10,000

Apr 28 deposited registration fees, 32,000

Apr 9 paid wages to fishing guides, 10,000

Apr 30 purchased food supplies from a acme super market on account, 6,000

Apr 30 paid acme super market on account, 32,700

Apr 30 paid utilities bill, 2,000

Apr 30 paid telephone bill, 1,200

Apr 30 Bob night withdrew cash for personal use, 6,000

Adjustment information for the end of April is provided below

a. office supplies remaining on hand, 100

b. food supplies remaining on hand, 8,000

c. insurance expired during the month of April, 1,500

d. depreciation on the fishing boats for the month of April, 1,000
e. wages earned, but not ye paid, at the end of april, 500.
Required:

1. enter above transactions in a general journal. enter transactions from April 1-5 on page 1, April 7-18 on page 2, April 21-29 and the first two entries for April 30 on page 3, and the remaining entires for April 30 on page 4.

2. post the entries to the general ledger. (if you are not using the working papers that accompany this text, you will need to enter the account titles and account number in the general ledger accounts.

3. prepare a trial balance on a work sheet

4. complete the work sheet.

5. prepare the income statement.

6. prepare the statement of owner’s equity.

7. prepare the balance sheet.

8. journalize the adjusting entries (page5)

9. post the adjusting entries to the general ledger.

10. journalize the closing entries (pages 5 and 6).

11. post the closing entries to the general ledger.

12. prepare a cost closing trail balance.

comprehensive problem 3 general weapons 496633

General Weapons, Inc. (Comprehensive time value of money)Mr. Rambo, President of General Weapons, Inc., was pleased to hear that he had three offers from major defense companies for his latest missile firing automatic ejector. He will use a discount rate of 10 percent to evaluate each offer.

OfferI

$1,600,000 now plus $825,000 from the end of years 6 through 15. Also if the product goes over $60 million in cumulative sales by the end of year 15, he will receive an additional $3,000,000. Rambo thought there was an 80 percent probability this would happen.

Offer II

Thirty percent of the buyer s gross margin for the next four years. The buyer in this case is Air Defense, Inc. (ADI). Its gross margin is 70 percent. Sales for year 1 are projected to be $3.75 million and then grow by 35 percent per year. This amount is paid today and is not discounted.

Offer III

A trust fund would be set up for the next four years. At the end of that period, Rambo would receive the proceeds (and discount them back to the present at
10 percent). The trust fund called for semiannual payments for the next four years of $150,000 (a total of $300,000 per year). The payments would start immediately. Since the payments are coming at the beginning of each period instead of the end, this is an annuity due. To look up the future value of the annuity due in the tables, add 1 to n, where n is the number of periods, and subtract 1 from the value in the table. Assume the annual interest rate on this annuity is 10 percent annually (5 percent semiannually). Determine the present value of the trust fund s final value.

Required: Find the present value of each of the three offers and then indicate which one has the highest present value.

comprehensive problem 3 general weapons inc 496634

COMPREHENSIVE PROBLEM 3 GENERAL WEAPONS, INC.

COMPREHENSIVE PROBLEM 3 GENERAL WEAPONS, INC.

General Weapons, Inc. (Comprehensive time value of money) Mr. Rambo, President of General Weapons, Inc., was pleased to hear that he had three offers from major defense companies for his latest missile firing automatic ejector. He will use a discount rate of 10 percent to evaluate each offer.

Offer I $1,200,000 now plus $625,000 from the end of years 6 through 15. Also if the product goes over $60 million in cumulative sales by the end of year 15, he will receive an additional $3,000,000. Rambo thought there was an 80 percent probability this would happen.
Offer II Thirty percent of the buyer s gross margin for the next four years. The buyer in this case is Air Defense, Inc. (ADI). Its gross margin is 60 percent. Sales for year 1 are projected to be $3.5 million and then grow by 35 percent per year. This amount is paid today and is not discounted.
Offer III A trust fund would be set up for the next four years. At the end of that period, Rambo would receive the proceeds (and discount them back to the present at
10 percent). The trust fund called for semiannual payments for the next four years of $110,000 (a total of $220,000 per year). The payments would start immediately. Since the payments are coming at the beginning of each period instead of the end, this is an annuity due. To look up the future value of the annuity due in the tables, add 1 to n (16 + 1) and subtract 1 from the value in the table. Assume the annual interest rate on this annuity is 10 percent annually (5 percent semiannually). Determine the present value of the trust fund s final value.

Required: Find the present value of each of the three offers and then indicate which one has the highest present value.

comprehensive problem heintz and parry 496635

Comprehensive Problem. Heintz and Parry. College Accounting 19th Edition.

PERIOD 1

The Account Cycle
Bob night opened “The general’s favorite Fishing Hole” The fishing camp is open from April through September and attracts many famous college basketball coaches during the off-season. Guests typically register for one week, arriving on Sunday afternoon and returning home the following Saturday afternoon. The registration fee includes room and board, the use of fishing boats, and professional instruction in fishing techniques. The chart of accounts for the camping operations is provided below.

The General’s Favorite Fishing Hole Chart of Account.

Assets Revenues
101 cash 401 Registration fees
142 Office Supplies
144 Food Supplies Expenses
145 Prepaid Insurance 511 Wages Expense
181 Fishing Boat 521 Rent Expense
181.1 Accum. Depr-Fishing Boats 523 Office Supplice Expense
524 Food Supplice Expense
Liabilities 525 Telephone Expense
202 Account Payable 533 utilities Expense
219 Wages Payable 535 Insurance Expense
536 pastage Expense
Owner’s Equuity 542 Depr. Exp-Fishing Boats
311 Bob Night Payable
312 Bob Night Drawing
313 Income Summary

The following transactions took place during April 20–
April
1 Night invested cash in the business $90,000.
1 Paid insurance premium for camping season, 9,000.
2 Paid rent for lodge and campgrounds for the month of April, $40,000.
2 Deposited registration fee, $35,000
2 Purchase ten fishing boats on account for $60,000. The boats have estimated useful
lives of five years, at which time they will be donated to a local day camp. Arrangement
were made to pay for the boats in July.
3 Purchase food supplies from Acme Super Market on account, $7,000.
5 Purchase office supplies from Gordon Office Supplies on account, $500.
7 Deposited registration fee, $38,600.
10 Purchased food supplies from Acme Super Market on account, $8,200
10 Paid wages to fishing guides, $10,000
14 Deposited registration fees, $30,500
16 Purchased food supplies from Acme Super Market on account, $9,000
17 Paid wages to fishing guides, $10,000
18 Paid postage , $150.
21 Deposited registration fees, $35,600
24 Purchased food supplies from Acme Super Market on account, $8,500
24 Paid wages to fishing guides, $10,000
28 Deposited registration fees, $32,000.
29 Paid wages to fishing guides, $10,000
30 Purchased food supplies from Acme Super Market on account, $6,000.
30 Paid Acme Super market on account ,$32,700.
30 Paid utilities bill, $2,000.
30 Paid telephone bill, $1,200.
30 Bob Night withdrew cash for personal use, $6,000

Adjustment information for the end of April is provided below.
a Office supplies remaining on hand, $100.
b Food supplies remaining on hand, $8,000.
c Insurance expired during the month of April, $1,500.
d Depreciation on the fishing boatsfor the month of April, $1,000.
e Wages earned , but not yet paid, at the end of April, $500.

Required:
1 Enter the above transactions in a general journal. Enter transactions from April 1-5 on pages 1, April 7-8 on page 2, April 21-29 and the first two entries for April 30 on page 3, and the remain entries for April 30 on page 4.

2 Post the entries to the general ledger.(if you are not using the working papers that accompany this text, you will need to enter the account titles and account numbers in the general leger accounts).

3 Prepare a trial balance on a work sheet.

4 Complete the work sheet.

5 Prepare the income statement.

6 Prepare the statement of owner’s equity

7 Prepare the balance sheet.

8 Journalise the adjusting entries (page 5)

9 Post the adjusting entries to the general ledger.

10 Journalise the closing entries (page 5 and 6)

11 Post the closing entries to the general ledger.

12 Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

Comprehensive Problem. Heintz and Parry. College Accounting 19th Edition

charles austin of the controller 039 s office of thompson corporation 496553

Charles Austin of the controller’s office of Thompson Corporation was given the assignment of determining the basic and diluted earnings per share values for the year ending December 31, 2013. Austin has compiled the information listed below.

1. The company is authorized to issue 8,000,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. As of December 31, 2012, 2,000,000 shares had been issued and were outstanding.
2. The per share market prices of the common stock on selected dates were as follows.
Price per Share
July 1, 2012 $20.00
January 1, 2013 21.00
April 1, 2013 25.00
July 1, 2013 11.00
August 1, 2013 10.50
November 1, 2013 9.00
December 31, 2013 10.00

3. A total of 700,000 shares of an authorized 1,200,000 shares of convertible preferred stock had been issued on July 1, 2012. The stock was issued at its par value of $25, and it has a cumulative dividend of $3 per share. The stock is convertible into common stock at the rate of one share of convertible preferred for one share of common. The rate of conversion is to be automatically adjusted for stock splits and stock dividends. Dividends are paid quarterly on September 30, December 31, March 31, and June 30.
4. Thompson Corporation is subject to a 40% income tax rate.
5. The after-tax net income for the year ended December 31, 2013, was $11,550,000.

The following specific activities took place during 2013.

1. January 1 A 5% common stock dividend was issued. The dividend had been declared on December 1, 2012, to all stockholders of record on December 29, 2012.

2. April 1 A total of 400,000 shares of the $3 convertible preferred stock was converted into common stock. The company issued new common stock and retired the preferred stock. This was the only conversion of the preferred stock during 2013.

3. July 1 A 2-for-1 split of the common stock became effective on this date. The board of directors had authorized the split on June 1.

4. August 1 A total of 300,000 shares of common stock were issued to acquire a factory building.

5. November 1 A total of 24,000 shares of common stock were purchased on the open market at $9 per share. These shares were to be held as treasury stock and were still in the treasury as of December 31, 2013.

6. Common stock cash dividends Cash dividends to common stockholders were declared and paid as follows.

April 15 $0.30 per share
October 15 $0.20 per share

7. Preferred stock cash dividends Cash dividends to preferred stockholders were declared and paid as scheduled.

Instructions
(a) Determine the number of shares used to compute basic earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.
(b) Determine the number of shares used to compute diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.
(c) Compute the adjusted net income to be used as the numerator in the basic earnings per share calculation for the year ended December 31, 2013.

charles austin thompson corporation eps diluted eps 496554

Charles Austin of the controller s office of Thompson Corporation was given the assignment of determining the basic and diluted earnings per share values for the year ending December 31, 2013. Austin has compiled the information listed below.

1.

The company is authorized to issue 8,400,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. As of December 31, 2012, 2,100,000 shares had been issued and were outstanding.

2.

The per share market prices of the common stock on selected dates were as follows.

Price per Share

July 1, 2012

$20

January 1, 2013

21

April 1, 2013

25

July 1, 2013

11

August 1, 2013

10.5

November 1, 2013

9

December 31, 2013

10

3.

A total of 728,400 shares of an authorized 1,353,600 shares of convertible preferred stock had been issued on July 1, 2012. The stock was issued at its par value of $25, and it has a cumulative dividend of $3 per share. The stock is convertible into common stock at the rate of one share of convertible preferred for one share of common. The rate of conversion is to be automatically adjusted for stock splits and stock dividends. Dividends are paid quarterly on September 30, December 31, March 31, and June 30.

4.

Thompson Corporation is subject to a 40% income tax rate.

5.

The after-tax net income for the year ended December 31, 2013, was $11,640,000.

The following specific activities took place during 2013.

1.

January 1 A 5% common stock dividend was issued. The dividend had been declared on December 1, 2012, to all stockholders of record on December 29, 2012.

2.

April 1 A total of 391,200 shares of the $3 convertible preferred stock was converted into common stock. The company issued new common stock and retired the preferred stock. This was the only conversion of the preferred stock during 2013.

3.

July 1 A 2-for-1 split of the common stock became effective on this date. The board of directors had authorized the split on June 1.

4.

August 1 A total of 312,000 shares of common stock were issued to acquire a factory building.

5.

November 1 A total of 33,900 shares of common stock were purchased on the open market at $9 per share. These shares were to be held as treasury stock and were still in the treasury as of December 31, 2013.

6.

Common stock cash dividends Cash dividends to common stockholders were declared and paid as follows.

April 15 $0.30 per share

October 15 $0.20 per share

7.

Preferred stock cash dividends Cash dividends to preferred stockholders were declared and paid as scheduled.

(a) Determine the number of shares used to compute basic earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.(Round answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 1,500.)

Number of shares to compute basic earnings per share

(b)Determine the number of shares used to compute diluted earnings per share for the year ended December 31, 2013.(Round answer to 0 decimal places, e.g. 1,500.)

Number of shares to compute diluted earnings per share

(c)Compute the adjusted net income to be used as the numerator in the basic earnings per share calculation for the year ended December 31, 2013.

Adjusted net income

$

charter airline operating decision 496556

FIRM-SPECIFIC DEMAND IN THE SCHEDULED AIRLINE INDUSTRY IS SEGMENTED BY CUSTOMER CLASS AND IS HIGHLY UNCERTAIN SO THAT IN ORDER MAY NOT LEAD TO REALIZED REVENUE AND A UNIT SALE. AIRLINE RESPONSE TO THIS DYNAMIC, HIGHLY COMPETETIVE ENVIRONMENT BY TRACKING RESERVATIONS AT PREANNOUNCED FARES AND REASSIGNING CAPASITY TO THE VARIOUS MARKET SEGMENTS (“BUCKETS”) AS BUSINESS TRAVELERS, VACATIONERS, AND CONVENTION GROUPS BOOK THE FLIGHTS ABOVE OR BELOW EXPECTED LEVELS SEVERAL DAYS AND EVEN WEEKS BEFORE SCHEDULED DEPARTURE. THIS SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT PROCESS COMBINING MARKETING, OPERATIONS AND FINANCE IS REFERRED TO AS REVENUE MANAGEMENT OR YEILD MANAGEMENT AND IS DISCUSSED IN CHAPTER 14. THE CHARTER AIRLINE BUSINESS, ON THE OTHER HAND, IS MUCH LESS COMPLICATED BECAUSE CAPACITY REQUIREMENTS ARE KNOWN SO FAR IN ADVANCE, ALL CONFIRMED ORDERS LEAD TO REALIZED REVENUE. WE CONSIDER THE LAST THREE DECISIONS FOR CHARTER AIRLINE: (1) THE ENTRY/EXIT BREAK-EVEN DECISION, (2) THE OPERATE/SHUT DOWN DECISION TO FLY/NOT FLY A CHARTER THAT HAS BEEN PROPOSED, AND (3) THE OUTPUT DECISION AS TO HOW MANY INCREMENTAL SEAT TO SELL IF THE AIRLINE DECIDES TO OPERATE THE CHARTER FLIGHT. SUPPOSE THE FOLLOWING COSTS FOR A 10-HOURS ROUND-TRIP FLIGHT APPLY TO THE TIME FRAME AND EXPENSES OF AN UNSCHEDULED 5-HOUR CHARTER FLIGHT FROM BALTIMORE TO LAS VEGAS (AND RETURN THE NEXT DAY) ON SEVEN-YEAR-OLD BOEING 737-800 WITH 120 OCCUPIED SEATS. SOME COST LISTED IN THE TABLE HAVE BEEN AGGREGATED UP TO THE FLIGHT LEVEL FROM A SEAT-LEVEL DECISION WHERE THEY ARE INCURERRED. OTHERS HAVE BEEN ALLOCATED DOWN TO FLIGHT LEVEL FROM AN ENTRY/EXIT OR MAINTAIN OWNERSHIP COMPANY-LEVEL DECISION. STILL OTHER COST VARY WITH THE GO/NO GO FLIGHT-LEVEL DECISION ITSELF. YOUR JOB IS TO ANALYZE EACH COST ITEM AND FIGURE OUT THE “BEHAVIOR OF COST” – THAT IS, WITH WHICH DECISION EACH COST VARIES. FUEL AND LANDING FEES $5,200 QUARTERLY AIRFRAME MAINTAENANCE RE: FAA CERTIFICATE $1,000 UNSCHEDULED ENGINE MAINTENANCE PER 10 FLIGHT HOURS $1,200 PRO RATE TIME DEPRECIATION FOR 7TH YEAR OF AIR FRAME $7,200 FLIGHT PAY FOR THE PILOTS PER ROUND-TRIP FLIGHT $4,200 LONG TERM HANGAR FACILITY LEASE $6,600 ANNUAL AIRCRAFT ENGINE OPERATING LEASE BASE SALARIES OF HEADQUARTERS PERSONNEL $2,000 FOOD SERVICE WITH SEAT-BY-SEAT PERCHASE AND JIT DELIVERY AT EACH DEPARTURE $2,400 AIRPORT GROUND CREW BAGGAGE HANDLING FOR TWO FLIGHT ARRIVALS $450

Fuel and landing fees $5,200
Quarterly airframe maintenance re: FAA certificate $1,000
Unscheduled engine maintenance per 10 flight hours $1,200
Pro rate time depreciation for 7th year of air frame $7,200
Flight pay for pilots per round trip flight $4,200
Long term hangar facility lease $6,600
Annual aircraft engine operating lease $7,100
Base salaries of headquarters personnel $2,000
Food service with seat purchase and JIT delivery at each departure $2,400
Airport ground crew baggage handling for two flight arrivals $450

QUESTIONS:

1. WHAT ARE THE VARIABLE COSTS FOR THE DECISION TO SEND ONE MORE PERSON ABOARD A CHARTER FLIGHT THAT IS ALREADY 80% BOOKED?

2. IN MAKING AN ENTRY/EXIT DECISION, IF COMPETITIVE PRESSURE IS PROJECTED TO FORCE THE PRICE DOWN TO $300, WHAT IS THE BREAK EVEN UNIT SALES VOLUME THIS COMPANY SHOULD HAVE PROJECTED AS PART OF ITS BUSINESS PLAN BEFORE ENTERING THIS MARKET AND SHOULD RECONSIDER EACH TIME IT CONSIDERS LEAVING (EXITING) THIS BUSINESS ALTOGETHER?

3. IDENTIFY THE INDIRECT FIXED COSTS OF THE CHARTER SERVICE FOR A PARTICULAR ONE OF MANY SUCH CHARTERS THIS MONTH.

4. IF ONE WERE TRYING TO DECIDE WHETHER TO OPERATE (FLY) OR NOT TO FLY AN UNSCHEDULED ROUND-TRIP CHARTER FLIGHT, WHAT WOULD BE THE TOTAL DIRECT FIXED COSTS AND VARIABLE COSTS OF THE FLIGHT?

5. CHARTER CONTRACT ARE NEGOTIABLE, AND CHARTER CARRIERS RECEIVE MANY CONTRACT OFFERS THAT DO NOT PROMISE $300 PRICES OR 80-PERCENT-FULL PLANES. SHOULD THE AIRLINE ACCEPT A CHARTER FLIGHT PROPOSAL FROM A GROUP THAT OFFERS TO GUARANTEE THE SALE OF 90 SEATS AT $250? WHY OR WHY NOT?

6. WHAT ARE THE TOTAL CONTRIBUTIONS OF THE CHARTER FLIGT WITH 90 SEATS AT $250 PER SEAT?

7. WHAT ARE THE NET INCOME LOSSES FOR THIS TWO-DAY PERIOD IF THE AIRLINE REFUSES THE 90-SEAT CHARTER, STAYS IN BUSINESS, BUT TEMPORARILY SHUTS DOWN? WHAT ARE THE NET INCOME LOSSES IF IT DECIDES TO OPERATE AND FLY THE CHARTER THAT HAS BEEN PROPOSED?

8. WHAT IS THE SEGMENT -LEVEL CONTRIBUTION OF A SEPARATE GROUP THAT IS WILLING TO JOIN THE 90-SEAT-AT$250-PER-SEAT CHARTER ON THE SAME DEPARTURE, BUT ONLY WISHES TO PAY $50 PER SEAT AT 10 SEATS?

9. SHOULD YOU ACCEPT THEIR OFFER? WHAT PROBLEMS DO YOU ANTICIPATE IF BOTH CHARTER GROUPS ARE PLACED ON 737?

chatter corporation operates in an industry that has a high rate of bad debts before 496557

Chatter Corporation operates in an industry that has a high rate of bad debts. Before any year-end adjustments, the balance in Chatter s Accounts Receivable account was $389,000 and the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts had a debit balance of $5,000. The year-end balance reported in the balance sheet for the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts will be based on the aging schedule shown below:

Days Account Outstanding Amount Probability of Collection

Less than 16 days $293,000 .97

Between 16 and 30 days $102,000 .89

Between 31 and 45 days $ 70,000 .83

Between 46 and 60 days $ 55,000 .76

Between 61 and 75 days $ 28,000 .60

Over 75 days $ 8,000 .30

1. What is the appropriate balance for the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at year-end

2. Show how accounts receivable would be presented on the balance sheet.

3. What is the dollar effect of the year-end bad debt adjustment on the before-tax income?

checkpoint reflection 496560

Write a 350- to 500-word summary explaining the differences between revenue expenditures and capital expenditures during a useful life and identifying any similarities. Briefly explain the entries of revenue expenditures and capital expenditures.

Formatyour summary consistent with APA guidelines.

DUE 6/5/2013

Reflection Checkpoint

Content and Development
20 Points

Points Earned

XX/20

Additional Comments:

All key elements of the assignment are covered in a substantive way.

The summary is 350 to 500 words in length and addresses the following:

oDifferences between revenue expenditures and capital expenditures during a useful life

oSimilarities between revenue expenditures and capital expenditures during a useful life

oEntries of revenue expenditures and capital expenditures

The content is comprehensive, accurate, and persuasive.

The paper develops a central theme or idea directed toward the appropriate audience.

The paper links theory to relevant examples and uses the vocabulary of the theory correctly.

Major points are stated clearly; are supported by specific details, examples, or analysis; and are organized logically.

The introduction provides sufficient background on the topic and previews major points.

The conclusion is logical, flows from the body of the paper, and reviews the major points.

china manufacturing 496565

1. You manufacture hunting pack systems in China for 80 dollars each, including shipping. The manufacturing costs only include variable costs. Variable costs are not calculated as a percentage of sales in this case. Sales are a function of the number of packs sold and the price per pack. Likewise, variable costs are a function of the number of packs sold and the cost to produce each pack. You sell these packs to retailers for 200 dollars each. In the current year you will sell 100,000 packs. Your fixed costs including such items as insurance, marketing, travel, shows, office supplies, warehouse rentals etc. totals 5 million dollars this year and are not part of the 80 dollars per pack manufacturing cost. The federal income tax rate for your company is 40 percent. Your company is publicly traded on the NASDAQ with 1,000,000 shares outstanding.

2. Create a two-year forecast of the income statement from the information provided in problem number one. Please create three columns of data: current year, year 2, and year

3. Assume that sales increase ten percent per year for year s two and three. Please show the earnings per share for each of the three years.

3. Please estimate the stock price for year s two and three, assuming that the current PE multiple remains constant for each of the two forecasted years.

cis 319 complete 496566

Preview
1.CIS 319 complete/CIS 319 FINAL Riordan Manufacturing Service Request.doc
2.CIS 319 complete/CIS 319 FINAL Riordan Manufacturing Service Request.ppt
3.CIS 319 complete/CIS 319 Riordan Manufacturing Service Request SR-rm-001 – IT System Upgrade Recommendation.ppt
4.CIS 319 complete/CIS 319 Riordan Manufacturing Service Request SR-rm-001.doc
5.CIS 319 complete/CIS 319 Week 1 – SDLC Methodology.doc
6.CIS 319 complete/CIS 319 Week 1 SDLC.doc
7.CIS 319 complete/CIS 319 Week 2 Individual Assignment – Computer Data Storage paper.doc
8.CIS 319 complete/CIS 319 Week 2 Riordan Manufacturing Service Request Process Evaluation.doc
9.CIS 319 complete/CIS 319 Week 2 Riordan Manufacturing Service Request Process Evaluation.ppt
10.CIS 319 complete/CIS 319 Week 4 Individual Assignment – Memorandum.doc
11.CIS 319 complete/CIS 319 Week 5 Brick and Mortar Memo.doc
12.CIS 319 complete/CIS 319.zip
13.CIS 319 complete/CIS319 Course Syllabus.docx
14.CIS 319 complete/CIS319 Week 3 Individual Assignment – Office Automation Memo.doc
15.CIS 319 complete/Thumbs.db

city administration acct problem 496567

City administration is considering refurbishing the lighting system of its administration building.
After initial investigation, the city procument office has narrowed down the choices into the following two options:

Option 1 is a Urgolight system, which costs $500,000 to purchase and instrall.
Option 2 is a convention system, which costs $100,000 to purchase and instrall.
The system is expected to last for 20 years
The energe and maintenance cost for Option 1 is $20,000 and $2,000.
The energe and maintenance cost for Option 1 is $50,000 and $10,000.
Assume all gas costs paid at end of year.
Real discount rate: 4%

Which lighting system should the city selected based on financial consideration.
Note: please use LCC analysis to facilitate the decision-making.

city of hartsville 496568

1) During the fiscal year ended 6/30/07, the City of Hartsville engaged in the following transactions.

REQUIRED: Assuming the city maintains its books and records in the manner that facilitates the preparation if its governmental fund financial statements, prepare all necessary journal entries that the city should make for each transaction. Clearly indicate in which fund the entry is being made. If no entry is being made. If no entry in required, write no entry required .
a) In July 2006, the City issued $20 million in 6% general obligation term bonds to finance construction of a new building to house City offices. The bonds were issued at a premium of $200,000.
b) In September 2006, the City transferred $1 million from the general fund to cover the $.6 million principal and $.4 million interest payments due that month on debt issued in previous years.
c) In September 2006, the City paid the principal and interest due from (b).
d) In June 2007, the City transferred $2 million from the General Fund to cover the $1.2 million interest payment and the $.8 million principal payment due in July 2007 on the bonds issued in (a).

2) Benton County voted to establish an internal service fund to account for printing and copying for all its departments and agencies. The County engaged in the following activities related to the new fund. REQUIRED: Prepare transactions to record these events in internal service fund. If no entry is required, write No entry required .
a) The Country Commission voted to transfer $200,000 from the General Fund to the internal service fund to establish the new fund.
b) The fund entered into a capital lease for equipment used in printing activities. The total present value of the lease obligation is $600,000.
c) Issued $1 million in general obligation bonds at 101. The bonds were issued to acquire additional equipment. The bonds are to be serviced from the internal service fund.
d) Purchased equipment at a cost of $980,000. The equipment has an estimated useful life of nine years and an estimated salvage value of $80,000.
e) Billed the General Fund for copying and printing charges, $70,000.
f) Paid salaries to printing employees, $50,000.

3) The voters of Salt Lake City authorized the construction of a new north-south expressway for a total cost of no more that $75 million. The voters also approved the issuance of $50 million of 5% general obligation bonds. The balance necessary funds will come from the following sources: $15 million from a federal grant and $10 million from a state grant. The City controls expenditures capital project funds through project management. The City does not formally incorporate budgetary entries in the capital projects fund but it does use encumbrance accounting for control purposes. REQUIRED: Assuming the City maintains its books and records in a manner that facilitates the preparation of the fund financial statements, prepare journal entries, in the Capital Projects Fund, for the following transactions.
a) The City issued $50 million of 5% general obligation bonds at 101.
b) The City transferred the premium to the appropriate fund.
c) The City incurred bid-related expenditures of $1,000.
d) The City signed a contract with the lowest competent bidder for $48 million.
e) The City received notice from the State that the grant had been approved and the proceeds will be forwarded to the City in the State s current fiscal year.
f) The City received the federal grant in full.
g) The City received a progress billing from the contractor for $10 million. The City pays the billing.

cja 474 entire course 496573

CJA 474 Week 3 Individual Assignment Bullying Bosses Paper.doc

CJA 474 Week 3 Learning Team Assignment Wellness Strategy Survey and Recommendations.doc

CJA 474 Week 4 DQs.doc

CJA 474 Week 4 Indivdual Assignment Mergers Dont Always Lead to Culture Clashes Paper.doc

CJA 474 Week 4 Learning Team Assignment Problem Solving Action Form.doc

CJA 474 Week 5 DQs.doc

CJA 474 Week 5 Individual Assignment Ethical Dilemma Executive Summary.doc

CJA 474 Week 5 Learning Team Assignment Discussion Question.doc

CJA 474 Week 1 DQs.doc

CJA 474 Week 1 Indivdual Assignment A Diamond Personality Paper.doc

CJA 474 Week 2 DQs.doc

CJA 474 Week 2 Individual Assignment Motivation and Control Thanks for Nothing Paper.doc

CJA 474 Week 2 Learning Team Assignment Work Perspectives Paper and Outline PAPER.doc

CJA 474 Week 2 Learning Team Assignment Work Perspectives Paper and Outline.doc

CJA 474 Week 3 DQs.doc

clark company 496576

Homework 8

1. The actual results and static budget are given below for Clark Company.

a) Create a flexible budget for Clark Company

Actual

Flexible Budget

Static Budget

Sales Volume (units)

8,000

9,000

Variable overhead

Cleaning supplies

6,400

7,200

Electricity

3,000

2,700

Maintenance

1,200

1,800

Total variable overhead

Fixed overhead

Supervisor salary

9,000

9,000

Depreciation

6,000

6,000

Rent

7,500

8,000

Total fixed overhead

Total overhead

b) How much of the difference between actual and the static budget is due to cost control and how much is due to activity? Provide numbers and direction.

2. Huron Company produces a commercial cleaning compound called Zoom. The direct material standards for one unit of Zoom are given below:

Standard Quantity Standard Price Standard Cost per Unit

Direct material 4.6 pounds $2.50 per pound $11.50

During the most recent month, the following activity was recorded:

o Twenty thousand pounds of material were purchased at a cost of $2.35 per pound.

o All of the material purchased was used to produce 4,000 units of Zoom.

a) Compute the material cost variances. Indicate whether they are favorable or unfavorable.

3. The following information is provided by the Atlantic Company:

Actual direct material cost

$24,000

Standard direct material cost

$20,000

Direct material usage variance

$3,000 unfavorable

a) What is the direct material price variance (indicate whether it is favorable or unfavorable)?

clark paints 496577

Clark Paints: The Production Department has been investigating possible ways to trim total production costs. One possibility currently being examined is to make the paint cans instead of purchasing them. The equipment needed would cost $200,000, with a disposal value of $40,000, and it would be able to produce 5,500,000 cans over the life of the machinery. The Production Department estimates that approximately 1,100,000 cans would be needed for each of the next five years.

The company would hire three new employees. These three individuals would be full-time employees, working 2,000 hours per year and earning $12.00 per hour. They would also receive the same benefits as other production employees, 18% of wages, in addition to $2,500 of health benefits.

It is estimated that the raw materials will cost 25 per can and that other variable costs would be 5 per can. Since there is currently unused space in the factory, no additional fixed costs would be incurred if this proposal is accepted.

It is expected that cans would cost 45 each if purchased from the current supplier. The company’s minimum rate of return (hurdle rate) has been determined to be 12% for all new projects, and the current tax rate of 35% is anticipated to remain unchanged. The pricing for a gallon of paint, as well as the number of units sold, will not be affected by this decision. The unit-of-production depreciation method would be used if the new equipment is purchased.

Required:
1. Based on the above information and using Excel, calculate the following items for this proposed equipment purchase:

  • Annual cash flows over the expected life of the equipment;
  • Payback period;
  • Annual rate of return;
  • Net present value; and
  • Internal rate of return.

2. Would you recommend the acceptance of this proposal? Why or why not? Prepare a short, double-spaced Word paper elaborating and supporting your answer

class assignment 1 designer software inc is a designer manufacturer and distributor 496578

Class Assignment 1 Designer Software Inc. is a designer, manufacturer, and distributor of software for microcomputers. A new product, Design 2012, was released for production and distribution in early 2012. In January, $1,250,000 was spent on developing marketing and advertising materials. For the first six months of 2012, the company spent $1,200,000 promoting Design 2012 in trade magazines. The product was ready for manufacture on January 21, 2012. Designer Software uses a job order cost system to accumulate costs associated with each software title. Direct materials unit costs are as follows: Blank CD $0.60 Packaging $1.00 Manual $6.40 The actual production process for the software product is fairly straightforward. First, blank CDs are brought to a CD copying machine. The copying machine requires one hour per 2,500 CDs. After the program is copied onto the CD, the CD is brought to assembly, where assembly personnel pack the CD and manual for shipping. The direct labor cost for this work is $0.60 per unit. The complete packages are then sold to retail outlets through a sales force. The sales force is compensated by a 20% commission on the wholesale price for all sales. Total completed production was 250,000 units during the year. Other information is as follows: Number of software units sold in 2012 200,000 Wholesale price per unit $50 Factory overhead cost is applied to jobs at the rate of $3,000 per copy machine hour after the program is copied to the CDs. There were an additional 10,000 copied CDs which already had the manual and packaging (in other words, all materials were used) but were waiting to actually be packaged as of December 31, 2012. (a) Prepare the annual income statement for Design 2012 product, including supporting calculations, given the information above. (b) Determine the balances in the finished goods and work in process inventory for the Design 2012 product on December 31, 2012.

classic irons inc smith steakhouse staffing company food to go 496579

1. Classic Irons, Inc. purchased manufacturing equipment with an expected useful life of five years or 5000 hours of usage. The equipment was purchased on January 1, 2008 for $460,000. It is expected to have a salvage value of $60,000 at the end of five years. During 2008, the equipment was used for 1200 hours. Assume that usage for the next four years will be 1100 hours, 900 hours, 1300 hours and 500 hours, respectively.

a) What is the amount of depreciation expense for each of the five years using the straight line method?

b) What is the amount of depreciation expense for each of the five years using the double declining balance method?

c) What is the amount of depreciation expense for each of the five years using the units of production method?

2. Smith Steakhouse is a restaurant catering to a variety of customers. They purchased a new high-power oven at a cost of $100,000 on January 1, 2006. The oven has an expected useful like of four years and an estimated salvage value of $10,000. Smith Steakhouse uses straight-line depreciation for all of its depreciable assets.

On May 1, 2008, the owner of the restaurant was persuaded to purchase a new oven that operated more efficiently. The old oven was sold at the time for $15,000.

a) What is the amount of depreciation expense recorded on the old machine for each year of use? Show computations.

b) What is the amount of gain or lost on the disposal of the old machine? Show computations.

3. Staffing Company purchased the net assets (i.e., assets minus liabilities) of Time Management, Inc. for $390,000. Time Management, Inc. is a retailer of software, books, seminars and related items. Its net assets have been carried on its own books at a total of $183,000. An appraisal of all of Time Managements assets and liabilities revealed a net fair market value of $229,000. Staffing Company is willing to pay extra because of Time Managements very loyal retail customers, most of whom have dealt exclusively with the company for many years and also their loyal employees who have also been with the company for many years. What is the amount of goodwill that Staffing Company should record at acquisition of Time Management, Inc.?

4. Food to Go Delivery Service disposed of one of their delivery cars after using it for two years. The records of the company provide the following information:

Delivery car cost: $30,000

Accumulated depreciation: $10,000

Calculate the gain or loss on the disposal of the car for each of the following independent situations:

a) Food to Go sold the car to another company for $22,000.

b) Food to Go sold the car to another company for $17,000.

c) The car was stolen from the parking lot and no insurance was carried on it for theft.

classification shambu shoes ds company statues inc valentino company 5 questions 496580

1. The following is a list of activities that occur for a company that sells many different types of products. Please classify each as either unit-level (U), batch level (B), product level (P), or organization sustaining activity (O).
a. Packing labor wages
b. Materials-handling labor wages
c. Part administrators salaries
d. Plant management salaries
e. Production scheduling staff salaries
f. Cost of serving production equipment, based on hours used
g. Property taxes of a plant site
h. Production expediters salaries
i. Insurancefor plant facility
j. Plant security
k. Production workers training
l. Cost of electricity to run production equipment

2. Shambu Shoes is in the business of manufacturing basketball shoes. Accordingly the company uses the six activity cost pools listed below:
Activity Cost Pool Activity Measure
Maintenance Machine Hours
Setups Setup Hours
Cutting Supervision Setup Hours
Cutting Depreciation Machine Hours
Assembly supervision Direct Labor hours
Assembly Depreciation Machine Hours
The company has already carried out its first stage allocations of costs. The company s annual costs and activities are summarized as follows:
Activity Cost Pool Estimated Overhead Cost Expected Activity
Maintenance $150,000 50,000 Machine hours
Setups $450,000 300 setup hours
Cutting Supervision $270,000 300 setup hours
Cutting Depreciation $160,000 80,000 Machine Hours
Assembly Supervision $160,000 32,000 Direct Labor hrs
Assembly Depreciation $20,000 80,000 Machine Hours
Compute the activity rate for each of the activity cost pools: Show computations
a. Maintenance
b. Setups
c. Cutting supervision
d. Cutting depreciation
e. Assembly supervision
f. Assembly depreciation

3. DS Company has identified the following cost pools and activity rates
Activity Cost Pool Activity Rate
Supporting direct labor $4 per direct labor hour
Machine processing $3 per machine hour
Machine setups $30 per setup
Production orders $11 per order
Shipments $98 per shipment
Product sustaining $750 per product

Activity data have been supplied for the following products:
Total Expected Activity
D130 S150
Direct labor hours 2,500 300
Machine hours 4,300 250
Machine Setups 7 2
Production orders 3 2
Shipments 9 4
Products sustaining 2 1

Determine the total overhead cost that would be assigned to each of the products listed above in the activity based costing system: show computations and details

a. D130
b. S150

4. Statues Inc. has the following sales budget for the second of the current year:
April May June Total
Budgeted sales $250,000 $340,000 $590,000 $1,180,000
From past experience the company has learned that 10% of a month s sales are collected in the month of sale, another 60% are collected in the month following sale, and the remaining 30% are collected in the second month following sale. Bad debts are negligible and can be ignored. February sales totaled $150,000 and March Sales totaled $220,000.
For each of the following months, calculate the amount of projected cash collections: Show solutions and related details.
A. April
B. May
C. June

5. Valentino Company had the following budgeted sales over the last 4 months of the year:
Sales in Units
October 10,000
November 25,000
December 35,000
January 46,000
The company is now in the process of preparing a production budget for the forth quarter. Past experience has shown that end of the month inventories of finished good must equal 20% of the next month s sales.
The inventory at the end of September is 2,000 units
For each of the following months calculate the number of units that need to be produced: show computations and related details
a. October
b. November
c. December

clinical laboratory activity based accounting 496582

6.7.

Consider the following data for a clinical laboratory:

Activity Data

Activity Annual Costs Cost Driver Test A Test B Test C Test D

Receive specimen $ 10,000 Number of tests 2,000 1,500 1,000 500

Equipment set up 25,000 Number of minutes per test 5 5 10 10

Run test 100,000 Number of minutes per test 1 5 10 20

Record results 10,000 Number of minutes per test 2 2 2 4

Transmit results 5,000 Number of minutes per test 3 3 3 3

Total costs $150,000

a. Using ABC techniques, determine the allocation rate for each activity.

b. Now, using this allocation rate, estimate the total cost of performing each test.

c. Verify that the total annual costs aggregated from individual test costs equal the total annual costs of the laboratory given in the table above.

coal oil and timber are a amortized b depleted c depreciated d expensed 496585

Coal, oil, and timber are:

a. amortized.

b. depleted.

c. depreciated.

d. expensed.

Assets that cannot be seen, touched, or held are called:

a. intangible assets.

b. natural resources.

c. plant assets.

d. tangible assets.

Which of the following would be considered part of land improvements?

a. Removal of unwanted building on the land

b. Title transfer fees

c. Paving of the parking lot

d. Surveying fees

If an asset produces more revenue in its early years, the depreciation method best suited for this asset would be the:

a. expense method.

b. units-of-production method.

c. double-declining balance method.

d. straight-line method.

A company purchased a van at a cost of $42,000 and expects its salvage value to be $6,000 after 120,000 miles of service. Using the units-of-production method, what is the first year s depreciation if the van is driven 24,000 miles?

a. $ 1,200

b. $ 4,200

c. $ 7,200

d. $12,000

Which accounting principal dictates whether the cost of a repair should be expensed?

a. Conservatism

b. Entity

c. Objectivity

d. Matching

If an asset is being sold or exchanged, the gain or loss is always computed by comparing the:

a. market value and book value.

b. market value and salvage value.

c. book value and salvage value.

d. market value and cost.

Research and development costs (R&D) are generally:

a. expensed and become part of the income statement.

b. listed as other intangibles on the balance sheet.

c. listed as current assets on the balance sheet.

d. listed as long-term assets on the balance sheet.

Cost divided by the total amount of the natural resource to be removed yields:

a. depletion expense for the period.

b. depletion rate per unit for the period.

c. accumulated rate for the period.

d. depreciation rate per unit for the period.

Securities that are actively managed in order to maximize profit as a result of short-term changes in price are:

a. trading securities.

b. available-for sale securities.

c. held-to-maturity securities.

d. trading and held-to-maturity securities

cody macedo established an insurance agency on january 1 of the current year and com 496587

Cody Macedo established an insurance agency on January 1 of the current year and completed the following transactions during January:

(a) Opened a business bank account with a deposit of $75,000 in exchange for capital stock.

(b) Purchased supplies on account, $3,000.

(c) Paid creditors for account, $1,000.

(d) Received cash from fees earned on insurance commissions, $11,800.

(e) Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $4,000.

(f) Paid automobile expenses for month, $600, and miscellaneous expenses, $200.

(g) Paid office salaries, $2,500.

(h) Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $1,900; therefore, the cost of supplies used during the month was $1,100.

(i) Billed insurance companies for sales commissions earned, $12,500.

(j) Paid dividends, $5,000.

To Do:

1. In tabular form, indicate the effect each transaction has on the accounts. Calculate the balance of each account after all the transactions have been entered.

2. Using the account balances at the end of the month, prove the accounting equation is in balance.

colelege accounting the author of the book is mc graw hill 496589

COLELEGE ACCOUNTING THE AUTHOR OF THE BOOK IS: Mc GRAW-HILL

The questions are from quiz nr.3
Question 1 of 20 5.0/ 5.0 Points

The Accounts Payable account is:
A. an expense, and it has a normal credit balance.
B. a liability, and it has a normal debit balance.
C. a revenue, and it has a normal debit balance.
D. a liability, and it has a normal credit balance

Question 2 of 20 0.0/ 5.0 Points
The business provided services to a cash customer. To record this:
A. an expense is debited and Capital is credited.
B. an asset is debited and a revenue is credited.
C. an asset is debited and a liability is credited.
D. None of these are correct

Question 3 of 20 5.0/ 5.0 Points
The beginning balance in the Computers account was $2,000. The company purchased an additional $1000 worth of computers. The balance in the account is:
A. credit of $2,000.
B. debit of $2,000.
C. debit of $3,000.
D. credit of $3,000

Question 4 of 20 5.0/ 5.0 Points
A compound entry is:
A. found on the income statement.
B. a transaction involving more than one debit and/or credit.
C. the same as the chart of accounts.
D. used to prepare the trial balance

Question 5 of 20 0.0/ 5.0 Points
Carrie flew to San Francisco on a business trip. The purchase price of the ticket was $422 and it was bought on account. The entry to record the transaction is:
A. debit Travel Expense, $422; credit Cash, $422.
B. debit Capital, $422; credit Accounts Payable, $422.
C. debit Accounts Payable, $422; credit Travel Expense, $422.
D. debit Travel Expense, $422; credit Accounts Payable, $422
Question 6 of 20 0.0/ 5.0 Points
A credit may signify a(n):
A. increase in capital.
B. increase in withdrawals.
C. increase in assets.
D. decrease in liabilities

Question 7 of 20 5.0/ 5.0 Points
A credit to an asset account was posted to the Capital account. This error would cause:
A. liabilities to be overstated.
B. assets to be overstated.
C. Capital to be understated.
D. Both A and C are correct

Question 8 of 20 0.0/ 5.0 Points
Accounts Receivable has a normal balance of $1,100. After collecting $800, the balance in the account is:
A. credit $1,900.
B. credit $300.
C. debit $1,900.
D. debit $300

Question 9 of 20 0.0/ 5.0 Points
A debit to an asset account was posted to a liability account. This error would cause:
A. capital to be overstated.
B. assets to be understated.
C. liabilities to be overstated.
D. None of the above are correct

Question 10 of 20 0.0/ 5.0 Points
Which of the following types of accounts has a normal debit balance?
A. Assets
B. Expenses
C. Withdrawals
D. All of these answers are correct

colin company 496590

The following account balances were taken from the records of Colin Company at the beginning of 2011:

Cash $2,500

Common stock $2,250

Retained earnings $950

Raw materials inventory $300

Work in process inventory $220

Finished good inventory (50 units @ $3.60/unit) $180

The following transactions occurred during 2011:

1. Purchased $750 of raw materials with cash

2. Transferred $500 of raw materials to the production department.

3. Incurred and paid cash for 80 hours of direct labor at $7.50 per hour.

4. Applied overhead using a predetermined overhead rate of $8.00 per direct labor hour.

5. Incurred actual overhead costs of $650 cash.

6. Completed work on 300 units for $3.40 per unit.

7. Paid $200 in selling and administrative expenses in cash.

8. Sold 200 units for $1,500 cash. Assume FIFO inventory or the first units completed are the first units sold to customers.

Required:

  1. Trace the flow of inventory for these transactions using Row Material, Work in Process, Finished Goods, COGS and Manufacturing OH T accounts. Exclude the cash account.
  2. Prepare an income statement for 2011.

ccc5 because natalie has had such a successful first few months she is considering o 496523

CCC5 Because Natalie has had such a successful first few months, she is considering other opportunities to develop her business. One opportunity is to become the exclusive distributor of a line of fine European mixers. The current cost of a mixer is approximately $550, and Natalie would sell each one for $1,100. Natalie comes to you for advice on how to account for these mixers. Each appliance has a serial number and can be easily identified. Natalie asks you the following questions. 1. Would you consider these mixers to be inventory? Or, should they be classified as supplies or equipment 2. I ve learned a little about keeping track of inventory using both the perpetual and the periodic systems of accounting for inventory. Which system do you think is better? Which one would you recommend for the type of inventory that I want to sell 3. How often do I need to count inventory if I maintain it using the perpetual system? Do I need to count inventory at all In the end, Natalie decides to use the perpetual method of accounting for inventory, and the following transactions happen during the month of January. Jan. 4 She buys five deluxe mixers on account from Kzinski Supply Co. for $2,750, terms n/30. 6 She pays $100 freight on the January 4 purchase. 7 Natalie returns one of the mixers to Kzinski because it was damaged during shipping. Kzinski issues Cookie Creations credit for the cost of the mixer plus $20 for the cost of freight that was paid on January 6 for one mixer. 8 She collects the amount due from the neighborhood community center that was accrued at the end of December 2011. 12 She sells three deluxe mixers on account for $3,300, FOB destination, terms n/30. The mixers cost $570 each (including freight). 13 Natalie pays her cell phone bill previously accrued in the December adjusting journal entries. 14 She pays $75 of delivery charges for the three mixers that were sold on January 12. 14 She buys four deluxe mixers on account from Kzinski Supply Co. for $2,200, terms n/30. 17 Natalie is concerned that there is not enough cash available to pay for all of the mixers purchased. She issues additional common stock for $1,000. 18 She pays $80 freight on the January 14 purchase. 20 She sells two deluxe mixers for $2,200 cash. 28 Natalie issues a check to her assistant. Her assistant worked 20 hours in January and is also paid for amounts owing at December 31, 2011. Recall that Natalie s assistant earns $8 an hour. 28 Natalie collects amounts due from customers in the January 12 transaction. 31 She pays Kzinski all amounts due. 31 Cash dividends of $750 are paid. As of January 31, the following adjusting entry data are available. 1. A count of brochures and posters reveals that none were used in January. 2. A count of baking supplies reveals that none were used in January. 3. Another month s worth of depreciation needs to be recorded on the baking equipment bought in November. (Recall that the baking equipment has a useful life of 5 years or 60 months.) 4. One month s worth of amortization (write-off) needs to be recorded on the website. (Recall that the website has a useful life of 2 years or 24 months.) 5. An additional month s worth of interest on her grandmother s loan needs to be accrued. (The interest rate is 9%.) 6. One month s worth of insurance has expired. 7. Natalie receives her cell phone bill, $75. The bill is for services provided in January and is due February 15. (Recall that the cell phone is used only for business purposes.) 2 chapter 5 Merchandising Operations and the Multiple-Step Income Statement 8. An analysis of the unearned revenue account reveals that Natalie has not had time to teach any of these lessons this month because she has been so busy selling mixers. As a result there is no change to the unearned revenue account. Natalie hopes to book the outstanding lessons in February. 9. An inventory count of mixers at the end of January reveals that Natalie has three mixers remaining. Instructions Using the information that you have gathered and the general ledger accounts that you have prepared through Chapter 4, plus the new information above, do the following. (a) Answer Natalie s questions. (b) Prepare and post the January 2012 transactions. (c) Prepare a trial balance. (d) Prepare and post the adjusting journal entries required. (e) Prepare an adjusted trial balance. (f) Prepare a multiple-step income statement and retained earnings statement for the month ended January 31, 2012. (g) Prepare a classified balance sheet as of January 31, 2012.

cephalexin drug no perscription cod delivery cephalexin order cephalexin without pre 496526

In case you acquire guidance about cephalexin generously go to Pharmacy Lookup.

Limited data suggest that furosemide and possibly other loop diuretics may potentiate the nephrotoxicity of some cephalosporins. There was not much more you’ll be able to do for nerve damage. A blood test may also be required to reject other possible culprits. As humans age we sometimes encounter the frustrations of arthritis. No one ever wants their beloved pet to fall ill, however the good news is actually your pooch does withdraw, there’s medicine to aid him or her feel good.

Antibiotics would be the common medication associated with preference, dependant on your veterinarian for bladder infections. So whether it happened that you’re in need of antibiotics treatment in pregnancy, it is important to choose the right medication for the case. Before this ordeal happened to me, I was a dynamic person coupled with a successful job. Middle ear infection occurs with greater frequency in children attending daycare centers. Patients must not take cephalexin if they may be allergic to any of the following: Ceclor, Ceftin, Cefzil, Duricef, Fortaz, Omnicef, Spectracef, or Suprax. buy cephalexin xr 30 mg.

But over another six months – to really make it short – we discovered precisely how neglectful the prior owners were. My foot is always cold, very sensitive to touch, try to has to be propped up. Just like humans, sometimes your pooch needs antibiotics to help you him battle a poor sickness. buy generic cephalexin no prescription cheap cephalexin without rx. More information about this topic could be found with the veterinary webinar Why the dog can be a pyoderma waiting to happen. I love to use liquid vitamin E in my sac as it stretching and expanding.

The essential thing to remember is which it happens. Although there is no direct proof why these antibiotics cause birth defects, additional principals are needed. But, if you need to have an old amalgam filling replaced while breast-feeding, when you worry. Sinusitis could be the fifth most popular diagnosis for antibiotic prescriptions. However, due to its mildness, it’s not used in hospitals, Ether and Chloroform based chemicals being preferred method of anesthetic. Propoxyphene and cephalexin. cephalexin 2mg online without prescription no prescripton cephalexin in AL buy cephalexin in Kingston. cephalexin non prescription fedex overnight.

Other antibiotics require a ten day span of antibiotics. Because staph infection is easily transmitted derived from one of member of your household to others, towels, washcloths, and bedding used by someone using a staph infection must not be utilised by anyone else. These are simply some with the challenges awaiting dog owners who statically have about a one inch four change of coming face to face which has a canine bladder infection (cystitis). In such cases the medication should be safely discarded. 025% CRE 80 ANTIBIOTIC CIPROFLOXACN 250MG TAB ANTI INFLAMMATORY TRIAMCINOLON 0.

Tags:
buy cephalexin generic
cephalexin overnight delivery only
Buy cephalexin next day overnight fedex delivery Order cephalexin cod
buy cephalexin with overnight delivery
cephalexin hcl 20 mg
buy cephalexin prescription online
buy cephalexin cheap online ordering cephalexin
buy cephalexin online without a dr approval
cephalexin generic CheaPest get cephalexin
cephalexin cod saturday delivery fedex
how to get cephalexin prescription
cheap online cephalexin
cephalexin without a persription
is flexeril stronger than cephalexin
buy cephalexin prescriptions
Taking cephalexin while pregnant
us cephalexin fedex
cephalexin doctor consult
cephalexin cod pharmacy
cod cephalexin NO RX
cephalexin no physician approval
Buy cephalexin same day shipping
order cephalexin cod
What should cephalexin pills look like
Your buy cephalexin is astounding
U.S. pharmacies for cephalexin without a r x
buy cephalexin 2 mg without a perscription
cephalexin cheapest
cod cephalexin overnight saturday delivery
buy cephalexin no r x cheap
cephalexin allery cold directions
cephalexin without persription
cephalexin cod next day
codest cephalexin
buy cephalexin overnight visa
buy cephalexin er
buy cephalexin online without a perscription
legit buy cephalexin online
cephalexin orders cod
overnight buy cephalexin cheap cephalexin without a prescription
buy cephalexin online cod overnight
online cephalexin cod
buy cephalexin online yahoo answers
cephalexin no prescripti8on
cephalexin delivery to US Florida
cephalexin drug no perscription
cephalexin generic codest
buy cephalexin in Switzerland
how to Buy cephalexin Online without rescription
buy cephalexin online overnight cod
where to buy cephalexin xr
buy cephalexin in Israel at Alabama
cf buy cephalexin
cephalexin for sale cod
buy cephalexin and pay by cod Buy cephalexin Online consultation us
cephalexin fast delivery no doctors Buy cephalexin Online
buy cephalexin uk
cephalexin q buy cephalexin
cephalexin shipped fedex
buy cephalexin xr 0.5mg
cephalexin free consultation u.s
how to buy cephalexin online without a prescription
Propoxyphene and cephalexin
where can i buy cephalexin no dr
buying cephalexin online without a perscription
cephalexin child reaction to
how to buy cephalexin on the street
buy cephalexin american express
buy cephalexin with out prescription
cephalexin sulphate inhaler
cephalexin how much can you take
buy cephalexin us pharmacy
online us pharmacy cephalexin buy cephalexin no prescription needed
cephalexin 1mg no script
cephalexin 2 business days delivery
cephalexin pharmacy online sale
how to get cephalexin perscription
cephalexin generic CheaPest buy cheap cephalexin no prescription
cephalexin cod overnight cephalexin without prescription shipped overnight
buy cephalexin online without membership
order cephalexin cod cephalexin overnight delivery no rx
cephalexin no rx cod
Buying cephalexin without a script cephalexin without rx
cod cephalexin overnight
Online cephalexin COD pharmacy
buy cephalexin online now
canadian cephalexin without prescription cephalexin no prior script
cephalexin on line no prescription
cf buy cephalexin online
buy cephalexin in uk
cephalexin without prescription mexico
cephalexin drug no prescription cephalexin without prescription
buy cephalexin shipped ups
buy cheap cephalexin no Prescription cheap cephalexin sales
buy cephalexin overnight free delivery
purchase cephalexin online
how to get cephalexin
buy cephalexin 0.25 mg
cephalexin non prescription fedex overnight
cf cephalexin
cephalexin overnight fed ex no prescriptin
Where can i buy cephalexin. Buy cephalexin online cod no prescription
cephalexin from regular tylenol
where buy cephalexin
Expired cephalexin
cephalexin buy no prepaid
cheap cephalexin by fedex cod
cephalexin no prescriptin next day delivery
Overnight delivery cephalexin US no prescription next day shipping
fedex cephalexin online cod
where to order cephalexin
cephalexin effects
buy generic cephalexin with your mastercard now in Alabama
How much cephalexin for a cat
no prescripton cephalexin in AL
Buying cephalexin without a script cephalexin fed ex cheap
buy cephalexin miami
cephalexin on sale CheaP Online
buy cephalexin without prescription pay cod
can you legally buy cephalexin online
cephalexin perscription on line
buy cephalexin online hong kong
Alternate ibuprofen and cephalexin for fever
Find cephalexin online purchase
buy cephalexin health solutions
buy cephalexin online
buy cephalexin online australia
Buy cephalexin in El Paso
buy cephalexin 30mg online
how to buy cephalexin online safely
not expensive cephalexin overnight delivery
Order Online cephalexin cephalexin online no script
buy cephalexin on line no prescriptin
buy generic cephalexin no prescription cheap cephalexin without rx
discount cephalexin buy discrete in AL
cephalexin no dr cephalexin saturday delivery cod
buy cephalexin in Atlanta
ONLINE CONSULT FOR cephalexin
how to get on cephalexin
cephalexin next day delivery cod
buy cephalexin in Kingston
reliable site buy cephalexin
nextday cephalexin cash on deliver cod
cephalexin no doctor
where can i buy cephalexin or ritalin
Buy cephalexin Online – cephalexin Overnight No Prescription No RX
how do i buy cephalexin
Cod cephalexin
cephalexin and overnight generic
buy cephalexin online no prescription
buy cephalexin 30mg
100 mg cephalexin
meatholes featuring cephalexin and
cephalexin from canada
Where to Buy cephalexin our pharmacy new price
order cephalexin next day
can you buy cephalexin cash on delivery
cephalexin prescription from doctors online
buy cephalexin online canada
cephalexin overnight no script at Alabama
cheap cephalexin next day delivery
order prescription free cephalexin buy cephalexin no script
cephalexin Overnight fed ex Buy cephalexin overnight shipping
cod delivery cephalexin order cephalexin without prescription
non generic cephalexin no prescription buy cephalexin online no prescription
where to buy cephalexin online canada
cephalexin without a rx
cephalexin cod saturday delivery fedex cephalexin Online No Prescription Fedex
buy cephalexin xr 30 mg
cephalexin sale
cod cephalexin
can you buy cephalexin vietnam
Is overdose on cephalexin possible
doctor shopping for cephalexin prescription
buy cheap cephalexin online
where to buy cheap cephalexin no prescriptin
medicine online cephalexin
cephalexin without a perscription overnight shipping
cephalexin singular
Find cheap cephalexin no prescription
cephalexin no prescription worldwide
cephalexin 2mg online without prescription
buy cephalexin online cash on delivery
buy cephalexin online no membership
Buy cephalexin with no prescription

ch1 p7a holden graham accounting question 496527

Question:

Holden Graham started The Graham Co., a new business that began operations on May 1. Graham Co.

completed the following transactions during that first month.

May 1H. Graham invested $40,000 cash in the business.

1Rented a furnished office and paid $2,200 cash for May s rent.

3Purchased $1,890 of office equipment on credit.

5Paid $750 cash for this month s cleaning services.

8Provided consulting services for a client and immediately collected $5,400 cash.

12Provided $2,500 of consulting services for a client on credit.

15Paid $750 cash for an assistant s salary for the first half of this month.

20Received $2,500 cash payment for the services provided on May 12.

22Provided $3,200 of consulting services on credit.

25Received $3,200 cash payment for the services provided on May 22.

26Paid $1,890 cash for the office equipment purchased on May 3.

27Purchased $80 of advertising in this month s (May) local paper on credit.

28Paid $750 cash for an assistant s salary for the second half of this month.

30Paid $300 cash for this month s telephone bill.

30Paid $280 cash for this month s utilities.

31Graham withdrew $1,400 cash for personal use.

Required

1. Arrange the following asset, liability, and equity titles in a table like Exhibit 2.1: Cash; Accounts

Receivable; Office Equipment; Accounts Payable; H. Graham, Capital; H. Graham, Withdrawals;

Revenues; and Expenses.

2. Show effects of the transactions on the accounts of the accounting equation by recording increases and

decreases in the appropriate columns. Do not determine new account balances after each transaction.

Determine the final total for each account and verify that the equation is in balance.

3. Prepare an income statement for May, a statement of owner s equity for May, and a May 31 balance

sheet.

chamberlin manufacturing bjerg company black brothers and utech company 496528

E5-16

An analysis of the accounts of Chamberlin Manufacturing reveals the following manufacturing cost data for the month ended June 30, 2008.

Inventories Beginning Ending

Raw materials $9,000 $13,100

Work in process 5,000 7,000

Finished goods 9,000 6,000

Costs incurred: Raw materials purchases $54,000, direct labor $57,000, manufacturing overhead $19,900. The specific overhead costs were: indirect labor $5,500, factory insurance $4,000, machinery depreciation $4,000, machinery repairs $1,800, factory utilities $3,100, miscellaneous factory costs $1,500. Assume that all raw materials used were direct materials.

Instructions:

(a) Prepare the cost of goods manufactured schedule for the month ended June 30, 2008.

(b) Show the presentation of the ending inventories on the June 30, 2008, balance sheet.

P5-1A

Bjerg Company specializes in manufacturing a unique model of bicycle helmet. The model is well accepted by consumers, and the company has enough orders to keep the factory production at 10,000 helmets per month (80% of its full capacity). Bjerg s monthly manufacturing cost and other expense data are as follows.

Rent on factory equipment $ 7,000

Insurance on factory building 1,500

Raw materials (plastics, polystyrene, etc.) 75,000

Utility costs for factory 900

Supplies for general office 300

Wages for assembly line workers 43,000

Depreciation on office equipment 800

Miscellaneous materials (glue, thread, etc.) 1,100

Factory manager s salary 5,700

Property taxes on factory building 400

Advertising for helmets 14,000

Sales commissions 7,000

Depreciation on factory building 1,500

E6-4

Black Brothers Furniture Corporation incurred the following costs. Classify variable, fixed, and mixed costs.

1. Wood used in the production of furniture.

2. Fuel used in delivery trucks.

3. Straight-line depreciation on factory building.

4. Screws used in the production of furniture.

5. Sales staff salaries.

6. Sales commissions.

7. Property taxes.

8. Insurance on buildings.

9. Hourly wages of furniture craftsmen.

10. Salaries of factory supervisors.

11. Utilities expense.

12. Telephone bill.

Instructions:

Identify the costs above as variable, fixed, or mixed.

P6-2A

Utech Company bottles and distributes Livit, a diet soft drink. The beverage is sold for 50 cents per 16-ounce bottle to retailers, who charge customers 75 cents per bottle. For the year 2008, management estimates the following revenues and costs.

Prepare a CVP income statement, compute break-even point, contribution margin ratio, margin of safety ratio, and sales for target net income.

Net sales $1,800,000

Direct materials 430,000

Direct labor 352,000

Manufacturing overhead variable 316,000

Manufacturing overhead fixed 283,000

Selling expenses variable $70,000

Selling expenses fixed 65,000

Administrative expenses variable 20,000

Administrative expenses fixed 60,000

Instructions:

(a) Prepare a CVP income statement for 2008 based on management s estimates.

(b) Compute the break-even point in (1) units and (2) dollars.

(c) Compute the contribution margin ratio and the margin of safety ratio. (Round to full percents.)

(d) Determine the sales dollars required to earn net income of $238,000.

champs inc manufactures women 039 s boating shoes 496529

(1)Champs, Inc., manufactures women’s boating shoes. Manufacturing overhead is assigned to production on a machine-hour basis. For 2010, it was estimated that manufacturing overhead would total $366,960 and that 27,110 machine hours would be used.

(a)
Calculate the predetermined overhead application rate that will be used for absorption costing purposes during 2010. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Predetermined overhead application rate?

(b)
During May, 4,000 pairs of shoes were made. Raw materials costing $6,990 were used, and direct labor costs totaled $9,740. A total of 730 machine hours were worked during the month of May. Calculate the cost per pair of shoes made during May. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Cost per pair of shoes?

(c)
At the end of May, 1,040 pairs of shoes were in ending inventory. Calculate the cost of the ending inventory and the cost of the shoes sold during May. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Cost of shoes in inventory?
Cost of shoes sold?

(2)
Galvaset Indutries manufactures and sells custom-made windows. Its job costing system was designed using an activity-based costing approach. Direct materials and direct labor costs are accumulated separately, along with information concerning three manufacturing overhead cost drivers (activities). Assume that the direct labor rate is $11 per hour and that there were no beginning inventories. The following information was available for 2010, based on an expected production level of 48,600 units for the year, which will require 231,000 direct labor hours:

Activity
(Cost Driver) Budgeted
Costs for 2010 Cost Driver Used
as Allocation Base Cost
Allocation Rate
Materials handling $ 277,200 Number of parts used $ 0.28 per part
Cutting and lathe work 2,494,800 Number of parts used 1.45 per part
Assembly and inspection 4,158,000 Direct labor hours 18.00 per hour

The following production, costs, and activities occurred during the month of March:

Units
Produced Direct
Materials Costs Number
of Parts Used Direct
Labor Hours
3,050 $102,300 49,930 13,100

(a)
Calculate the total manufacturing costs and the cost per unit of the windows produced during the month of March (using the activity-based costing approach).

Total manufacturing cost ?
Cost per unit produced ?

(b)
Assume instead that Galvaset Industries applies manufacturing overhead on a direct labor hours basis (rather than using the activity-based costing system previously described). Calculate the total manufacturing cost and the cost per unit of the windows produced during the month of March. (Hint: You will need to calculate the predetermined overhead application rate using the total budgeted overhead costs for 2010.)
Total manufacturing cost?
Cost per unit produced?

(c)
Which approach do you think provides better information for manufacturing managers?
(4)Conolly, Inc., manufactures pocket calculators. Costs incurred in making 9,340 calculators in April included $29,400 of fixed manufacturing overhead. The total absorption cost per calculator was $10.3.

Required:
(a)
Calculate the variable cost per calculator.
Variable cost per calculator?

(b)
The ending inventory of pocket calculators was 840 units higher at the end of the month than at the beginning of the month. By how much and in what direction (higher or lower) would operating income for the month of April be different under variable costing than under absorption costing?
Operating income under variable costing will be $___________ , __________ than
under absorption costing.

(c)
Express the pocket calculator cost in a cost formula.
Total cost = $ ___________+___________ ($__________ / calculator number of calculators)

chancellor canoe company manufactures aluminum canoes 496530

Chancellor Canoe Company manufactures aluminum canoes. The following are some costs incurred in the manufacturing process in 2008:

Material Costs
Aluminum $391,000
Oil and grease for equipment 7,250
Chrome rivets to assemble canoes 3,700
Wooden ribbing and braces 18,500

Labour Costs
Equipment operators $125,000
Equipment mechanics 60,000
Manufacturing supervisors 28,000

a. What is the direct material cost for 2008?
$

b. What is the direct labour cost for 2008?
$

c. What are the indirect labour costs for 2008?
$

d. What are the indirect materials costs for 2008?
$

chapman company a major retailer of bicycles and accessories 496531

Chapman Company, a major retailer of bicycles and accessories, operates several stores and is a publicly traded company. The comparative balance sheet and income statement for Chapman as of May 31, 2012, are shown. The company is preparing its statement of cash flows.

CHAPMAN COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheet

As of May 31 2012 2011

Current assets

Cash $ 28,250 $ 20,000

Accounts receivable 75,000 58,000

Inventory 220,000 250,000

Prepaid expenses 9,000 7,000

Total current assets 332,250 335,000

Plant assets

Plant assets 600,000 502,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation plant assets 150,000 125,000

Net plant assets 450,000 377,000

Total assets $782,250 $712,000

Current liabilities

Accounts payable $123,000 $115,000

Salaries and wages payable 47,250 72,000

Interest payable 27,000 25,000

Total current liabilities 197,250 212,000

Long-term debt

Bonds payable 70,000 100,000

Total liabilities 267,250 312,000

Stockholders’ equity

Common stock, $10 par 370,000 280,000

Retained earnings 145,000 120,000

Total stockholders’ equity 515,000 400,000

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $782,250 $712,000

CHAPMAN COMPANY

Income Statement

For the Year Ended May 31, 2012

Sales $1,255,250

Cost of goods sold 722,000

Gross profit 533,250

Expenses

Salaries and wages expense 252,100

Interest expense 75,000

Depreciation expense 25,000

Other expenses 8,150

Total expenses 360,250

Operating income 173,000

Income tax expense 43,000

Net income $ 130,000

The following is additional information concerning Chapman’s transactions during the year ended May 31, 2012.

1. All sales during the year were made on account.

2. All merchandise was purchased on account, comprising the total accounts payable account.

3. Plant assets costing $98,000 were purchased by paying $28,000 in cash and issuing 7,000 shares of stock.

4. The other expenses are related to prepaid items.

5. All income taxes incurred during the year were paid during the year.

6. In order to supplement its cash, Chapman issued 2,000 shares of common stock at par value.

7. Cash dividends of $105,000 were declared and paid at the end of the fiscal year.

Instructions

(a) Compare and contrast the direct method and the indirect method for reporting cash flows from operating activities.

(b) Prepare a statement of cash flows for Chapman Company for the year ended May 31, 2012, using the direct method. Be sure to support the statement with appropriate calculations. (A reconciliation of net income to net cash provided is not required.)

(c) Using the indirect method, calculate only the net cash flow from operating activities for Chapman Company for the year ended May 31, 2012.

chapter 07 case study principles of finance 496534

You ve collected the following information from your favorite financial website.
52-Week Price


Stock (Div) Div
Yld %
PE
Ratio
Close
Price
Net
Chg
Hi Lo
77.40 10.43 Palm Coal 0.36 2.6 6 13.90 0.24
56.06 33.67 Lake Lead Grp 1.79 4.4 10 40.68 0.01
130.93 69.50 SIR 2.00 2.2 10 88.97 3.07
50.24 13.95 DR Dime 0.80 5.2 6 15.43 0.26
35.00 20.74 Candy Galore 0.32 1.5 28 0.18

Find the quote for the Lake Lead Group. Assume that the dividend is constant.
Requirement 1:

What was the highest dividend yield over the past year (Do not round intermediate calculations.Round your answer to 2 decimal places (e.g., 32.16).)

Requirement 2:

What was the lowest dividend yield over the past year (Do not round intermediate calculations.Round your answer to 2 decimal places (e.g., 32.16).)

You ve collected the following information from your favorite financial website.
52-Week Price


Stock (Div) Div
Yld %
PE
Ratio
Close
Price
Net
Chg
Hi Lo
77.40 10.43 Palm Coal 0.36 2.6 6 13.90 0.24
55.81 33.42 Lake Lead Grp 1.54 3.8 10 40.43 0.01
130.95 69.60 SIR 2.10 2.4 10 88.99 3.07
50.24 13.95 DR Dime 0.80 5.2 6 15.43 0.26
35.00 20.74 Candy Galore 0.32 1.5 28 0.18

According to your research, the growth rate in dividends for SIR for the next five years is expected to be 20.5 percent. Suppose SIR meets this growth rate in dividends for the next five years and then the dividend growth rate falls to 5.5 percent indefinitely. Assume investors require a return of 13 percent on SIR stock.

Requirement 1:

According to the dividend growth model, what should the stock price be today (Do not round intermediate calculations.Round your answer to 2 decimal places (e.g., 32.16).)

Requirement 2:

Based on these assumptions, is the stock currently overvalued, undervalued, or correctly valued?

You ve collected the following information from your favorite financial website.
52-Week Price


Stock (Div) Div
Yld %
PE
Ratio
Close
Price
Net
Chg
Hi Lo
78.5 10.54 Palm Coal 0.47 3.1 6 15.00 0.24
55.81 33.42 Lake Lead Grp 1.54 3.8 10 40.43 0.01
130.93 69.50 SIR 2.00 2.2 10 88.97 3.07
50.24 13.95 DR Dime 0.80 5.2 6 15.43 0.26
35.00 20.74 Candy Galore 0.32 1.5 28 0.18

According to your research, the growth rate in dividends for Palm Coal for the previous 10 years has been 4.25 percent.

Required:

If investors feel this growth rate will continue, what is the required return for Palm Coal stock (Do not round intermediate calculations.Round your answer to 2 decimal places (e.g., 32.16).)

You ve collected the following information from your favorite financial website.
52-Week Price


Stock (Div) Div
Yld %
PE
Ratio
Close
Price
Net
Chg
Hi Lo
77.40 10.43 Palm Coal 0.36 2.6 6 13.90 0.24
55.81 33.42 Lake Lead Grp 1.54 3.8 10 40.43 0.01
130.93 69.50 SIR 2.00 2.2 10 88.97 3.07
50.33 14.04 DR Dime .89 5.7 6 15.52 0.26
35.00 20.74 Candy Galore 0.32 1.5 28 0.18

According to your research, the growth rate in dividends for DR Dime for the previous 10 years has been 14 percent.

Required:

If investors feel this growth rate will continue, what is the required return for DR Dime stock (Do not round intermediate calculations.Negative amount should be indicated by a minussign.Round your answer to 2 decimal places (e.g., 32.16).)

You ve collected the following information from your favorite financial website.
52-Week Price


Stock (Div) Div
Yld %
PE
Ratio
Close
Price
Net
Chg
Hi Lo
77.40 10.43 Palm Coal .36 2.6 6 13.90 0.24
55.81 33.42 Lake Lead Grp 1.54 3.8 10 40.43 0.01
130.93 69.50 SIR 2.00 2.2 10 88.97 3.07
50.24 13.95 DR Dime .80 5.2 6 15.43 0.26
36.60 20.90 Candy Galore 0.48 1.5 28 0.18

Requirement 1:

Using the dividend yield, calculate the closing price for Candy Galore on this day. (Do not round intermediate calculations.Round your answer to 2 decimal places (e.g., 32.16).)

Requirement 2:

Assume the actual closing price for Candy Galore was $31.69. Your research projects a 4.25 percent dividend growth rate for Candy Galore. What is the required return for the stock using the dividend discount model and the actual stock price (Do not round intermediate calculations.Round your answer to 2 decimal places (e.g., 32.16).)

chapter 11 cost of capital block 496536

Chapter 11 Cost Of Capital (Block)

1. Capital structure is a firm s mix of

a. Short-term financing
b. Long-term financing
c. Neither (a) or (b)

2. Which form of capital finance is considered less expensive because of the tax effect?

a. Equity financing
b. Debt financing
c. Personal financing

3. The after-tax cost of debt where the yield is 14.0 percent and the corporate tax rate is 35 percent is

a. 4.9%
b. 9.10%
c. 14.0%

4. United Business Forms capital structure is as follows:

Debt 65%
Preferred stock 5%
Common equity 30%

Under this debt-oriented arrangement, the after-tax cost of debt is 9.8 percent; the cost of preferred stock is 12 percent; and the cost of common equity (in the form of retained earnings) is 15.5 percent. The weighted average cost of capital is

a. 4.65%
b. 6.37%
c. 11.62% ;

5. The overall weighted average cost of capital is used instead of costs for specific sources of funds because

a. Use of the cost for specific sources of capital would make investment decisions inconsistent.
b. A project with the highest return would always be accepted under the specific cost criteria.
c. Investments funded by low cost debt would have an advantage over other investments.
d. Both a and c are correct.

6. Debreu Beverages has an optimal capital structure that is 50% common equity, 40% debt, and 10% preferred stock. Debreu’s pretax cost of equity is 12%. Its pretax cost of preferred equity is 7%, and its pretax cost of debt is also 7%. If the corporate tax rate is 35%, what is the weighted average cost of capital?

a. Between 7% and 8%
b. Between 8% and 9%
c. Between 9% and 10%
d. Between 10% and 12%

7. For a firm paying 7% for new debt, the higher the firm’s tax rate
a. The higher the after-tax cost of debt.
b. The lower the after-tax cost of debt.
c. After-tax cost is unchanged.
d. Not enough information to judge.

8. A firm is paying an annual dividend of $3.63 for its preferred stock which is selling for $62.70. There is a selling cost of $3.30. What is the after-tax cost of preferred stock if the firm’s tax rate is 33%?
a. 2.02%
b. 4.09%
c. 5.79%
d. 6.11%

9. The cost of equity capital in the form of new common stock will be higher than the cost of retained earnings because of
a. The existence of taxes.
b. The existence of flotation costs.
c. Investors’ unwillingness to purchase additional shares of common stock.
d. The existence of financial leverage.

10. Within the capital asset pricing model
a. The risk-free rate is usually higher than the return in the market.
b. The higher the beta the lower the required rate of return.
c. Beta measures the volatility of an individual stock relative to a stock market index.
d. Two of the above are true.

Chapter 12 – The Capital Budgeting Decision (Block)

11. A capital investment evaluation method designed to measure the length of time required to recoup an initial investment.

a. Payback period&nbs p;
b. Net present value
c. Accounting rate of return

12. A capital investment evaluation method that discounts future cash flows to their present value; the present value of all the future cash flows is compared with the amount of the proposed expenditure to determine if the investment should be made.

a. Payback period
b. Net present value ;
c. Accounting rate of return
d. Discounted payback period

Use information given below to complete the following two (2) questions:
Recycle Paper Company utilizes the payback method to evaluate investment proposals. It is presently considering two investment opportunities as indicated below. The cost of capital for Recycle Paper Company is 14%.

Investment A Investment B
Net Investment = $100,000 Net Investment = $500,000
Expected Expected
Year Cash Inflows Year Cash Inflows
1 $25,000 1 $125,000
2 $25,000 2 $250,000
3 $25,000 3 $300,000
4 $25,000 4 $225,000
5 $25,000 5 $100,000

13. Compute the payback period for Investment A (round to 1 decimal place if needed).

a. 2.4 years
b. 3.5 years
c. 4.0 years

14. Compute the net present value for Investment A.

a. -$14,175
b. $14,175
c. -$26,275
d. $26,275

15. In most capital budgeting decisions the emphasis is on

a. Accounting net income
b. Operating net income
c. Cash flow
d. Accrual income

16. Which capital investment evaluation method does not require the use of time value of money technique?

a. Payback period
b. Net present value
c. Internal rate of return

17. Cash flow can be said to equal

a. Operating income less taxes plus depreciation.
b. Operating income less taxes.
c. Operating income before depreciation and taxes plus depreciation.
d. Operating income after taxes minus depreciation.

18. Assuming that a firm has no capital rationing constraint and that a firm’s investment alternatives are not mutually exclusive, the firm should accept all investment proposals

a. For which it can obtain financing.
b. That have a positive net present value.
c. That have positive cash flows.
d. That provide returns greater than the after-tax cost of debt.

19. The Net Present Value Method is a more conservative technique for selecting investment projects than the Internal Rate of Return method because the NPV method

a. Assumes that cash flows are reinvested at the project’s internal rate of return.
b. Concentrates on the liquidity aspects of investment projects.
c. Assumes that cash flows are reinvested at the firm’s weighted average cost of capital.
d. None of these.

20. Capital rationing assumes:

a. A limited amount of capital is available.
b. A limited amount of investments are available.
c. Maximum profitability will be obtained.
d. B and C.

Chapter 14 (Capital Markets)

21. The major supplier of funds for investment in the whole economy is

a. Businesses
b. Households
c. Government
d. Financial institutions

22. The difference between brokers and dealers is that

a. Brokers can trade only on organized exchanges and dealers can trade only over-the-counter
b. Dealers own the securities they trade and brokers act as agent for buyer and seller
c. Brokers own the securities they trade and dealers act as agent for buyer and seller
d. There is no difference

23. Corporations prefer bonds over preferred stock for financing their operations because

a. Preferred stocks required a dividend
b. Bond interest rates change with the economy while stock dividends remain constant
c. The after-tax cost of debt is less than the cost of preferred stock
d. None of the above

24. A firm that buys an issue of securities from a company and resells it to the public is called

a. Initial public offering firm
b. Venture capitalist
c. Underwriter &n bsp;

25. Which of the following will be less expensive to raise when a company requires funds?

a. External Funds
b. Government Funds
c. Internal Funds

26. Transactions in currently outstanding securities are traded in

a. Primary markets
b. Secondary markets
c. Overseas markets

27. Corporations prefer bonds over preferred stock for financing their operations because

a. Preferred stocks require a dividend.
b. Bond interest rates change with the economy while stock dividends remain constant.
c. The after-tax cost of debt is less than the cost of preferred stock.
d. None of these.

28. Which of the following is an internal source of funds?

a. Cash flow from depreciation (tax shield)
b. Net loss
c. Repurchase of debt securities
d. Bank loan

29. Which of the following are benefits of financial intermediaries?

a. Increase market liquidity
b. Provide a direct market for investors
c. Act as agents of the government
d. Only a and b

30. The Securities Act of 1933 is primarily concerned with

a. Original issues of securities.
b. Secondary trading of securities.
c. National securities market.
d. Protecting customers of bankrupt securities firms.

31. The Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is primarily concerned with
a. A central market system.
b. Regulation of organized exchanges.
c. Protecting customers of bankrupt securities firms.
d. Original issues of securities.

Chapter 15 (Investment Banking: Public and Private Placement)

32. Which of the following is considered an advantage (for the corporation) of going public?

a. The president becomes a public relations person
b. Extensive and time-consuming reporting requirements
c. Increased liquidity for the corporation s shareholders
d. The cost of flotation

33. Publicly-traded companies generally have

a. More pressure for short-term performance
b. Less pressure for short-term performance
c. Very strong stock market performance
d. Low distribution costs in selling securities

34. Which of the following is a characteristic of leveraged buyouts?

a. Buyouts are usually financed by debt
b. Some corporate assets are often sold after the buy-out is completed
c. Funds for the buy-out are raised through securities markets
d. All of the above are characteristics

35. Publicly-traded companies generally have

a. More pressure for short-term performance
b. Less pressure for short-term performance
c. Very strong stock market performance
d. Low distribution costs in selling securities

36. Which of the following is a characteristic of leveraged buyouts?

a. Buyouts are usually financed by debt
b. Some corporate assets are often sold after the buy-out is completed
c. Funds for the buy-out are raised through securities markets
d. All of the above are characteristics

37. When an investment banker acts as an “underwriter” he

a. Gives a “firm commitment” to purchase the securities from the corporation at a set price.
b. The company suffers a decline in earnings after taxes.
c. May sell as many securities as possible and return the rest unsold.
d. May give advice to management.

38. In issuing stock, the term “spread” refers to

a. The profit the managing investment banker gets for an issue of stock.
b. The disparity between the initial asking price and the average price for the stock issued some months
later.
c. The difference between what the corporation gets for new issues of stock and what the public pays for
the stock.
d. The total cost to the corporation for issuing new stock.

39. Generally, the total cost to issue securities (as a percent of total proceeds)

a. Is greater for common stock than for debt and increases as the size of the issue increases.
b. Is greater for debt than for common stock and decreases as the size of the issue increases.
c. Is greater for debt than for common stock and increases as the size of the issue increases.
d. Is greater for common stock than for debt and decreases as the size of the issue increases.

40. Which of the following is considered an advantage (for the corporation) of going public?

a. The president becomes a public relations man.
b. Extensive and time-consuming reporting requirements.
c. Increased liquidity for the corporation’s shareholders.
d. The cost of flotation.

chapter 11 problem 1 7 9 496537

Chapter 11- Problem 1, 7, 9
Page 370

1) Calculating Costs and Break-Even

Night Shades, Inc. (NSI) manufactures biotech sunglasses. The variable materials cost is $10.48 per unit, and the variable labor cost is $6.89 per unit.

a) What is the variable cost per unit?
b) Suppose NSI incurs fixed costs of $870,000 during a year in which total production is 280,000 units. What re the total costs for the year?
c) If the selling price is $49.99 per unit, does NSI break even on a cash basis? If depreciation is $490,000 per year, what is the accounting break-even point?

7) Calculating Break-Even

In each of the following cases, calculate the accounting break-even and the cash break-even points. Ignore any tax effects in calculating the cash break-even

Unit Price Unit Variable Cost Fixed Cost Depreciation
$3,020 $2,275 $9,000,000 $3,100,000
46 41 73,000 150,000
11 4 1,700 930

9) Calculating Break-Even

A project has the following estimated data: price = $62 per unite; variable cots = $41 per unit; fixed costs = $15,500; required return = 12 percent: initial investment = $24,000; life= four years. Ignoring the effect of taxes, what is the accounting break-even quantity? The cash break-even quantity? The financial break-even quantity? What is the degree of operating leverage at the financial break-even level of output?

Chapter 12- Problem 1, 4
Page 407

1) Calculating Returns
Suppose a stock had an initial price of $72 per share, paid a dividend of $1.20 per share during the year, and had an ending share price of $79. Compute the percentage total return.

4) Calculating Returns
Suppose you bought a 6 percent coupon bond on e year ago to $920. The bond sells the $940 today.
a) Assuming a $1,000 face value, what was your total dollar return on this investment over the past year?
b) What was your total nominal rate of return on this investment over the past year?
c) If the inflation rate last year was 3 percent, what was your total real rate of return on this investment?

Chapter 13- Problem 11, 14
Page 445

11) Calculating Portfolio Betas
You own a stock portfolio invested 35 percent in Stock Q, 25 percent in Stock R, 30 percent in Stock S, and 10 percent in Stock T. The betas for these four stocks are .84, 1.17, 1.11, and 1.36, respectively. What is the portfolio beta?

14) Using CAPM
A stock has an expected return of 10.2 percent, the risk-free rate is 4.5 percent, and the market risk premium is 7.5 percent. What must the beta of this stock be?

Chapter 14- Problem 1, 9, 10
Page 477

1) Calculating Cost of Equity
The Muse Co. just issued a dividend of $2.75 per share on its common stock. The company is expected to maintain a constant 5.8 percent growth rate in its dividends indefinitely. If the stock sells for $59 a share, what is the company s cost of equity?

9) Calculating WACC

Mullineaux Corporation has a target capital structure of 60 percent common stock, 5 percent preferred stock, and 35 percent debt. Its cost of equity is 12 percent, the cost of preferred stock is 5 percent, and the pretax cost of debt is 7 percent. The relevant tax rate is 35 percent.
a) What is Mullineaux s WACC?
b) The company president has approached you about Mullineaux s capital structure. He wants to know why the company doesn t use more preferred stock financing because its costs less than debt. What would you tell the president?

10) Taxes and WACC
Sixx AM Manufacturing has a target debt-equity ratio of .45. Its cost of equity is 13 percent, and its cost of debt is 6 percent. If the tax rate is 35 percent, what is the company s WACC.

Chapter 15- Problem 2, 12

2) Rights Offerings

The Clifford Corporation has announced a rights offer to raise $30 million for a new journal, the Journal of Financial Excess. The journal will review potential articles after the author pays a nonrefundable-reviewing fee of $5,000 per page. The stock currently sells for $48 per share, and there are 3.9 million shares outstanding.
a) What is the maximum possible subscription price? What is the minimum?
b) If the subscription price is set at $43 per share, how many shares must be s sold? How many rights will it take to buy one share?
c) What is the ex-rights price? What is the value of a right?
d) Show how a shareholder with 1,000 shares before the offering and no desire (or money) to buy additional shares is not harmed by the rights offer.

12) Rights

Keira Mfg. is considering rights offer. The company has determined hat the ex-rights price would be $83. The current price is $89 per share, and there are 24 million shares outstanding. The rights offer would raise a total of $50 million. What is the subscription price?

chapter 14 cost planning 496538

Multiple Choice Questions

1. An example of a committed cost is:
A. employee training.
B. manufacturing supplies.
C. real estate taxes.
D. charitable contributions.

2. Which of the following is not a strong reason for budgeting
A. Budgets provide a benchmark for judging performance.
B. Budgeting requires little effort by non-accounting managers.
C. Budgeting requires management to plan.
D. Budgeting requires coordination among the functional areas of the firm.

3. The budgeting process that most likely creates an attitude supportive of achieving organization goals is:
A. top-down approach.
B. zero based approach.
C. proportionate increase approach.
D. participative approach.

4. A budgeting approach that implies little or no input from lower levels of management is known as the:
A. top-down approach.
B. zero based approach.
C. proportionate increase approach.
D. participative approach.

5. Budget slack is:
A. sometimes called padding or cushion.
B. the result of budget estimates submitted that are slightly higher than what the costs are really expected to be.
C. an allowance for contingencies built into a budget.
D. all of the above.

6. Zero-based budgeting forces managers to:
A. identify and prioritize the activities that are carried out in their departments.
B. justify all of their expenditures for each budget period.
C. both A and B.
D. none of the above.

7. A budget that is prepared for several periods in the future, then revised several times prior to the budget period is called a:
A. rolling budget.
B. zero-based budget.
C. discretionary budget.
D. single-period budget.

8. A budget that has been prepared only once prior to the budget period is called a:
A. continuous budget.
B. zero-based budget.
C. discretionary budget.
D. single-period budget.

9. A budgeting process that involves justifying resource requirements based on an analysis and prioritization of organizational objectives is called:
A. continuous budgeting.
B. zero-based budgeting.
C. discretionary budgeting.
D. single-period budgeting.

10. ___________ budgets are generally more expensive to maintain than single-period budgets because more time and effort is required in their preparation.
A. Zero-based
B. Continuous
C. Discretionary
D. Production

11. The key data element on which the entire budget is based is the:
A. sales/revenue forecast.
B. income statement budget.
C. cash budget.
D. balance sheet forecast.

12. The operating budget depends on key information developed in the:
A. cash forecast.
B. sales forecast.
C. labor forecast.
D. operating forecast.

13. The production budget uses all of the following except:
A. the sales forecast.
B. the inventory policy.
C. the cash receipts budget.
D. the beginning inventory quantity.

14. A materials purchases budget must be completed immediately after the preparation of the:
A. direct labor budget.
B. operating expense budget.
C. cash budget.
D. production budget.

15. Operating expenses are best budgeted on the basis of knowledge about:
A. cost behavior patterns.
B. relevant range.
C. prior period actual expenses.
D. current period budget amounts.

16. The cash budget is especially important to a firm when:
A. there is not a lot of confidence in the sales forecast.
B. it has a relatively large amount of operating cash.
C. the P/E ratio has been trending downwards.
D. it may have to negotiate a short-term bank loan.

17. Which of the following costs are included in the cost classification that is based on the relationship between total cost and volume of activity
A. Variable cost and fixed cost.
B. Direct cost and indirect cost.
C. Product cost and period cost.
D. Committed cost and discretionary cost.

18. Which of the following costs are included in the cost classification that is based on the time frame perspective
A. Variable cost and fixed cost.
B. Direct cost and indirect cost.
C. Product cost and period cost.
D. Committed cost and discretionary cost.

19. A cost that is incurred because of a long-range policy decision is known as a:
A. discretionary cost.
B. committed cost.
C. continuous cost.
D. standard cost.

20. Which of the following is not an important factor to consider when preparing a sales forecast
A. The state of the economy.
B. Seasonal demand variations.
C. A change in the management team.
D. Competitors’ actions.

21. Which of the following is a plan for acquiring the resources needed to complete the manufacturing activities that will satisfy the organization’s sales forecast
A. Sales budget
B. Raw materials budget
C. Production budget
D. Direct labor budget

22. Which of the following lists the components of the master budget in correct chronological order
A. Direct labor budget, production budget, cost of goods sold budget.
B. Sales budget, production budget, cash budget.
C. Sales budget, raw materials budget, production budget.
D. Cash budget, production budget, manufacturing overhead budget.

23. The raw materials budgeted to be purchased for the period is equal to:
A. ending inventory + raw material used – beginning inventory.
B. ending inventory + ending inventory – raw material used.
C. beginning inventory – ending inventory + raw material used.
D. beginning inventory + raw material used – ending inventory.

24. The operating expense budget is based on the:
A. sales budget.
B. production budget.
C. manufacturing overhead budget.
D. cash budget.

25. Depreciation on the office equipment would appear in which of the following budgets
A. Production budget.
B. Manufacturing overhead budget.
C. Operating expense budget.
D. Cash budget.

26. Which of the following items would be included in the operating expense budget
A. Sales commissions.
B. Raw material purchases.
C. Cash receipts.
D. Cost of goods sold.

27. Which of the following would not appear in the operating expense budget
A. Sales commissions.
B. Delivery expense.
C. Advertising.
D. Depreciation on the production equipment.

28. What is the “key” to the entire operating budget
A. The forecast of operating activity.
B. The budgeted income statement.
C. The budgeted balance sheet.
D. The production/purchases budget.

29. Which of the following is the last budgeted financial statement to be prepared
A. Budgeted income statement.
B. Budgeted balance sheet.
C. Cash budget.
D. It doesn’t matter which one is prepared last.

30. Which of the following lists the components of the master budget in correct chronological order
A. Cash budget, budgeted income statement, budgeted balance sheet.
B. Budgeted balance sheet, cash budget, budgeted income statement.
C. Budgeted income statement, cash budget, budgeted balance sheet.
D. It doesn’t matter in which order they are prepared.

31. A cash budget would not include:
A. sale of common stock.
B. payment of dividends.
C. payment of property taxes.
D. plant and building depreciation.

32. A key to estimating an accurate amount of cash to be collected from sales is:
A. the accuracy of the sales forecast.
B. the accuracy of the estimated collection patterns for sales.
C. both A and B are keys.
D. neither A nor B are keys.

33. An important reason for imposing a minimum cash balance in the cash budget is:
A. it provides a cushion that can absorb forecast errors.
B. it provides extra funds for managers to spend.
C. it makes the balance sheet look better.
D. all of the above.

34. The development of the operating budget is complete when:
A. the sales forecast for next year is complete.
B. the budgeted cash flow statement is complete.
C. the budgeted income statement is complete.
D. the budgeted balance sheet is complete.

35. A standard cost or production standard that is achievable under actual operating conditions is called a(n):
A. attainable standard.
B. ideal standard.
C. past experience standard.
D. average standard.

36. Standard costs are comprised of two elements:
A. the quantity of input and the cost per unit of input.
B. the quality of input and the cost per unit of input.
C. the quantity of input and the cost per unit of output.
D. the quality of input and the cost per unit of output.

37. ______________ standards allow inefficiencies from prior years to be incorporated into the budget, thus providing little incentive for improvement.
A. Ideal
B. Engineered
C. Attainable
D. Past experience

38. A standard cost or production standard that assumes maximum operating conditions and 100% efficiency at all times is called a(n):
A. attainable standard.
B. ideal standard.
C. past experience standard.
D. average standard.

39. Standard costs are used in which of the following phases of the management process
A. Planning
B. Control
C. Organizing
D. Both A and B

40. Fixed costs classified according to the time frame perspective are known as:
A. direct cost and indirect cost.
B. constant and inconsistent cost.
C. committed cost and discretionary cost.
D. product cost and period cost.

41. The concept of a standard used for planning and control purposes is most like a:
A. measure of ideal performance.
B. unit budget.
C. measure of maximum efficiency.
D. measure of historical performance.

42. Standards are most appropriately used to:
A. reward workers and managers who meet them.
B. penalize workers and managers who do not meet them.
C. calculate the unit cost of a product or service.
D. support the planning and control processes of the firm.

43. Standards are likely to be most useful when expressed in:
A. dollars per unit of input to the manufacturing process.
B. quantities per unit of output from the process being evaluated.
C. total costs for the accounting period for the department being evaluated.
D. terms easily related to by the individual whose performance is being evaluated.

44. Developing a standard cost for a product or service will usually involve:
A. efforts of cost accounting personnel only.
B. focusing only on variable costs.
C. the same kind of communication involved in the overall budgeting process.
D. concentrating on historical costs and performance levels.

45. Once standard costs for products or services have been developed:
A. they must be updated monthly to be useful.
B. they can be used for more than planning and control purposes.
C. they need not be revised unless the product or service is modified.
D. performance reports must be issued if the standards are to be useful.

46. The kind of standard that is most useful for planning and control is:
A. an attainable standard.
B. an ideal, or engineered, standard.
C. a negotiated standard.
D. a past experience standard.

47. Standard costing is developed and used for:
A. planning purposes.
B. control purposes.
C. product costing purposes.
D. all of the above.

Essay Questions

48. Breaded Oak, Inc. has a policy that requires 20 percent of the expected sales of its product to be on hand at the end of the prior month. Forecasted sales, in units, for the months of January through April are as follows:

(a.) Calculate the number of units planned for ending inventory for January, February, and March.
(b.) Calculate the number of units budgeted to be produced in January, February, and March.

49. Brenda, Inc. makes wooden tables. Each table requires 28 pounds of lumber to produce. The sales forecast for March is 1,600 tables. Estimated beginning and desired ending inventories for March are the following:

(a.) Calculate the number of tables to be produced in March.
(b.) Calculate the number of pounds of lumber to be purchased in March.

50. Aborkian Co. is forecasting sales of 75,000 units of product for November. To make one unit of finished product, seven pounds of raw materials are required. Actual beginning and desired ending inventories of raw materials and finished goods are:

(a.) Calculate the number of units of product to be produced during November.
(b.) Calculate the number of pounds of raw materials to be purchased during November.

51. Pacesetters, Inc., has actual sales for July and August and forecasted sales for September, October, November, and December as follows:

(a.) The firm’s policy is to have finished goods inventory on hand at the end of the month that is equal to 70 percent of the next month’s sales. It is currently estimated that there will be 4,200 units on hand at the end of August. Calculate the number of units to be produced in each of the months of September, October, and November.
(b.) Each unit of finished product requires 6.5 pounds of raw materials. The firm’s policy is to have raw material inventory on hand at the end of each month that is equal to 60 percent of the next month’s estimated usage. It is currently estimated that 26,000 pounds of raw materials will be on hand at the end of August. Calculate the number of pounds of raw materials to be purchased in each of the months of September and October.

52. Avery’s Bicycle Shop, a retail store, has an average gross profit ratio of 28 percent. The sales forecast for the next four months follows:

Management’s inventory policy is to have ending inventory equal to 1.4 times the cost of sales for the subsequent month, although it is estimated that the cost of inventory at March 31 will be $170,000.
Calculate the purchases budget, in dollars, for the months of April, May, and June.

53. Danzi, Inc., has budgeted sales for the month of July and estimated cost behavior patterns for a number of its expense items listed below. From this information prepare an operating expense budget for the month of July.

54. Remote Center’s sales are all made on account. The firm’s collection experience has been that 20 percent of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale, 60 percent are collected in the month following the sale, and 18 percent are collected in the second month following the sale. The sales forecast for the months of August through November is:

Calculate the cash collections that would be included in the cash budgets for October and November.

55. Dominic’s, Inc. had actual sales for January and February and forecasted sales for March, April, May and June as follows:

Based on company experience, it is estimated that 35 percent of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale, 48 percent in the month following the sale, and 16 percent in the second month following the sale.
Calculate the estimated cash collections for March, April, and May.

56. The following information for the month of May has been provided for the Bowser Company:

(a.) Prepare a cash budget for May.

57. Peachtree’s Siding and Window Co. is a custom home improvement company. All sales are made on account; 30 percent of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale, 60 percent are collected in the month following the sale, and 8 percent are collected in the second month following the sale. Cash on hand on October 1 is estimated to be $32,000.
Merchandise purchases and operating expenses are paid as follows:

Peachtree’s Siding and Window Co.’s income statement budget for each of the next three months is as follows:

Prepare a cash budget for the month of October.

58. The monthly cash budgets for the first quarter of 2009 are shown below ($000 omitted) for XYZ Company. A minimum cash balance of $40,000 is required. A line of credit has been established with ABC’s bank at a 7.5% interest rate. Calculate the missing amounts:

59. XYZ Company produces high quality widgets. Three raw materials are converted into the finished product by two labor groups. Manufacturing overhead is applied to finished units based on direct labor hours. The following standards have been established for each widget produced:

Manufacturing overhead $20.00/dhr
a) Calculate the standard cost of producing 400 high quality widgets.

chapter 15 working capital management 496539

Langley Clinics, Inc. buys $400,000 in medical supplies a year (at gross prices) from its major supplier,Consolidated Services, which offers Langley terms of 2.5/10, net 45. Currently, Langley is paying the supplier the full amount due on Day 45, but it is considering taking the discount, paying on Day 10, and replacing the trade credit with a bank loan that has a 10 percent annual cost.a. What is the amount of free trade credit that Langley obtains from Consolidated Services? (Assume 360 days per year throughout this problem.)

b. What is the amount of costly trade credit?

c. What is the approximate annual percentage cost of the costly trade credit?

d. Should Langley replace its trade credit with the bank loan? Explain your answer.

e. If the bank loan is used, how much of the trade credit should be replaced?

chapter 21 ex 21 2 496541

Tempo Company’s fixed budget for the first quarter of calendar year 2013 reveals the following.

Sales (14,000 units) $ 2,842,000
Cost of goods sold
Direct materials $ 328,160
Direct labor 590,520
Production supplies 391,160
Plant manager salary 128,160 1,438,000




Gross profit 1,404,000
Selling expenses
Sales commissions 100,100
Packaging 220,080
Advertising 100,000 420,180


Administrative expenses
Administrative salaries 178,160
Depreciation office equip. 148,160
Insurance 118,160
Office rent 128,160 572,640




Income from operations $ 411,180





Prepare flexible budgets that show variable costs per unit, fixed costs, and three different flexible budgets for sales volumes of 12,000, 14,000, and 16,000 units. (Round cost per unit to 2 decimal places.)

chapter 22 quiz multiple choices acct 2302 managerial accounting 496542

1)

A single cost incurred in producing or purchasing two or more essentially different products is a(n):

Product cost.
Incremental cost.
Differential cost.
Joint cost.
Fixed cost.

2)

Which of the following is an example of a financial performance measure that would be found in a balanced scorecard?

Percentage of sales from new customers.
Money spent on employee training programs.
Product costs.
Return on investment.
Money spent on research and development.

MC Qu. 85 Ice House Industries, Inc. has three …

Ice House Industries, Inc. has three operating departments: Cooking, Churning, and Freezing. Indirect factory costs for the current period were Administrative $560,000 and Maintenance $98,000. Administrative costs are allocated to operating departments based on the number of workers and maintenance costs are allocated to operating departments based on square footage occupied.

Based on the above data, determine the maintenance cost allocated to each operating department of Ice House Industries, Inc.

Option A
Option B
Option C
Option D
Option E

4)

Bevo Beef Company uses the relative market value method of allocating joint costs in their production of beef products. Relevant information for the current period follows:

The total joint cost for the current period was $43,000. How much of this cost should Bevo Beef allocate to sirloin?

$0
$5,909
$8,600
$10,750
$43,000

A department that incurs costs without directly generating revenues is a:

Service center.
Production center.
Profit center.
Cost center.
Performance center.

Fred Smith and Joe Barney are managers of two product lines for Quarry Company. One of them is a candidate for promotion based on performance. Using the data above, which of the following is a true statement?

Smith is outperforming Barney as measured by return on investment center assets.
Barney is outperforming Smith as measured by return on investment center assets.
The return in investment center assets is the same for both.
If target performance is a 7% return on assets, both investment centers are performing above the target level.
If target performance is a 7% return on assets, the residual income for both centers is positive.

Joint products A and B are produced in a single operation from Material M. Three hundred gallons of Material M, costing $450, produced 200 gallons of Product A, selling for $2 per gallon, and 100 gallons of Product B, selling for $6 per gallon.

If the $450 cost of the 300 gallons of Material M were to be allocated to the joint products in proportion to the number of gallons of each product produced, Product A’s share would be:

$0
$180
$225
$300
$450

An accounting system that provides information that management can use to evaluate the performance of a department’s manager is called a:

Cost accounting system.
Managerial accounting system.
Responsibility accounting system.
Financial accounting system.
Activity-based accounting system.

A company has two departments, Aa and Bb, that incur delivery expenses. An analysis of the total delivery expense of $9,000 indicates that Dept. Aa had a direct expense of $1,000 for deliveries. None of the $9,000 is a direct expense to Dept. Bb. The analysis also indicates that 60% of regular delivery requests originate in Dept. Aa and 40% in Dept. Bb. The delivery expenses that should be charged to Dept. Aa and Dept. Bb, respectively, are:

Option A
Option B
Option C
Option D
Option E

Which of the following is most likely to be considered a profit center?

An individual retail store in a large chain.
The grocery department of a Walmart Supercenter or Target Superstore.
The maintenance department of a large retail operation.
The personnel office of a business.
A stand-alone eye clinic.

chapter 3 and chapter 4 homework principles of accounting ii 496543

Chapter 3

1.Rustafson Corporation is a diversified manufacturer of consumer goods. The company’s activity-based costing system has the following seven activity cost pools:

Activity Cost Pool Estimated
Overhead Cost
Expected Activity
Labor-related $ 51,000 8,000 direct labor-hours
Machine-related $ 14,900 20,525 machine-hours
Machine setups $ 44,000 500 setups
Production orders $ 18,000 400 orders
Product testing $ 50,000 1,700 tests
Packaging $ 67,125 5,200 packages
General factory $101,125 8,000 direct labor-hours

Required:
1. Compute the activity rate for each activity cost pool. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places.)

General factory $ per DLH

2.

2. Compute the company’s predetermined overhead rate, assuming that the company uses a single plantwide predetermined overhead rate based on direct labor-hours. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)

Predetermined overhead rate $ per DLH

3.

Sultan Company uses an activity-based costing system.
At the beginning of the year, the company made the following estimates of cost and activity for its five activity cost pools:

Activity Cost Pool
Activity Measure Estimated
Overhead Cost Expected
Activity
Labor-related Direct labor-hours $ 280,000 40,000 DLHs
Purchase orders Number of orders $ 90,000 1,500 orders
Parts management Number of part types $ 120,000 400 part types
Board etching Number of boards $ 360,000 2,000 boards
General factory Machine-hours $ 400,000 80,000 MHs

Required:
1. Compute the activity rate for each of the activity cost pools.

General factory $ per MH

2. The expected activity for the year was distributed among the company s four products as follows:

Expected Activity

Activity Cost Pool Product A Product B Product C Product D
Labor-related (DLHs) 5,800 7,900 3,700 5,400
Purchase orders (orders) 55 30 20 87
Parts management (part types) 35 28 36 19
Board etching (boards) 410 907 412 0
General factory (MHs) 2,600 8,100 4,800 5,500

Using the ABC data, determine the total amount of overhead cost assigned to each product. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required.)

Labor-related (DLHs) $

General factory (MHs)

Total $

Rusties Company recently implemented an activity-based costing system. At the beginning of the year, management made the following estimates of cost and activity in the company s five activity cost pools:

Activity Cost Pool

Activity Measure Expected
Overhead
Cost

Expected Activity
Labor-related Direct labor-hours $ 272,000 30,000 DLHs
Purchase orders Number of orders $ 63,000 750 orders
Product testing Number of tests $ 182,000 1,200 tests
Template etching Number of templates $ 320,000 8,000 templates
General factory Machine-hours $ 837,000 60,000 MHs

4.

Required:
1. Compute the activity rate for each of the activity cost pools. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places.)

General factory $ per MH

5.

2. The expected activity for the year was distributed among the company s four products as follows:
Expected Activity

Activity Cost Pool Product A Product B Product C Product D
Labor-related (DLHs) 7,600 11,200 3,800 9,400
Purchase orders (orders) 160 190 110 240
Product testing (tests) 105 535 260 400
Template etching (templates) 2,400 0 5,500 0
General factory (MHs) 12,500 16,500 13,200 18,800

Using the ABC data, determine the total amount of overhead cost assigned to each product. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount.)

Total
Overhead Cost
Product A $

Product B $

Product C $

Product D $

6.

Gino s Restaurant is a popular restaurant of Boston, Massachusetts. The owner of the restaurant has been trying to better understand costs at the restaurant and has hired a student intern to conduct an activity-based costing study. The intern, in consultation with the owner, identified the following major activities:

Activity Cost Pool Activity Measure Serving a party of diners Number of parties served Serving a diner Number of diners served Serving drinks Number of drinks ordered

A group of diners who ask to sit at the same table is counted as a party. Some costs, such as the costs of cleaning linen, are the same whether one person is at a table or the table is full. Other costs, such as washing dishes, depend on the number of diners served.

Data concerning these activities are shown below.

Serving a Party Serving a Dinner Serving Drinks Total
Total cost $ 31,000 $ 214,000 $ 67,000 $ 312,000
Total activity 6,000 parties 15,000 diners 10,000 drinks

Prior to the activity-based costing study, the owner knew very little about the costs of the restaurant. She knew that the total cost for the month was $312,000 and that 15,000 diners had been served. Therefore, the average cost per diner was $20.80 ($312,000 15,000 diners = $20.80 per diner).

Required:
1. Compute the activity rates for each of the three activities.(Round your answers to 2 decimal places.)

Serving Drinks $ per drink

2. According to the activity-based costing system, what is the total cost of serving each of the following parties of diners? (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your final answers to 2 decimal places.)

a. A party of four diners who order three drinks in total.
b. A party of two diners who do not order any drinks.
c. A lone diner who orders two drinks.

Party of one diner who orders two drinks $

3. Convert the total costs you computed in Requirement 2 above to costs per diner. In other words, what is the average cost per diner for serving each of the following parties? (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your final answers to 2 decimal places.)

a. A party of four diners who order three drinks in total.
b. A party of two diners who do not order any drinks.
c. A lone diner who orders two drinks.

Party of one diner who orders two drinks $ per diner

7.

Adria Company recently implemented an activity-based costing system. At the beginning of the year, management made the following estimates of cost and activity in the company s five activity cost pools:

Activity Cost Pool
Activity
Measure Expected
Overhead
Cost
Expected
Activity
Labor-related Direct labor-hours $206,500 35,000 DLHs
Purchase orders Number of orders $ 68,040 900 orders
Material receipts Number of receipts $160,860 1,400 receipts
Relay assembly Number of relays $302,400 10,500 relays
General factory Machine-hours $805,000 70,000 MHs

Required:
1. Compute the activity rate for each of the activity cost pools.(Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)

General factory $ per MH

8.

2. The expected activity for the year was distributed among the company’s four products as follows:

Expected Activity

Activity Cost Pool Product A Product B Product C Product D
Labor-related (DLHs) 5,600 7,600 9,900 8,900
Production orders (orders) 135 300 80 435
Material receipts (receipts) 360 175 220 545
Relay assembly (relay) 0 4,550 0 6,950
General factory (MHs) 10,300 20,700 16,500 20,500

Using the ABC data, determine the total amount of overhead cost assigned to each product. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount.)

Product A $

Product B $

Product C $

Product D $

Chapter 4

1.

The PVC Company manufactures a high-quality plastic pipe that goes through three processing stages prior to completion.

Information on work in the first department, Cooking, is given below for May:

Production data:
Pounds in process, May 1: materials 100%
complete; conversion 90% complete 81,000
Pounds started into production during May 460,000
Pounds completed and transferred to
the next department ? Pounds in process, May 31:
materials 80% complete; conversion 20% complete 55,000
Cost data:
Work in process inventory, May 1:
Materials cost $ 158,200
Conversion cost $ 50,500
Cost added during May:
Materials cost $ 822,300
Conversion cost $ 277,520

The company uses the weighted-average method.

Required:
1. Compute the equivalent units of production.

Equivalent units of production

2. Compute the costs per equivalent unit for the month. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places.)

Cost per equivalent unit $

3. Determine the cost of ending work in process inventory and of the units transferred out to the next department. (Round your intermediate calculation to 2 decimal places and final answers to the nearest whole dollar amount.)

Materials Conversion Total
Cost of ending work in process inventory $
$
$

Cost of units completed and transferred out $
$
$

4. Prepare a cost reconciliation report for the month. (Round your intermediate calculation to 2 decimal places and final answers to the nearest whole dollar amount.)

Costs to be accounted for:

Cost Reconciliation

Total cost to be accounted for $

Costs accounted for as follows:

Total cost accounted for $

2.

Brady Products manufactures a silicone paste wax that goes through three processing departments Cracking, Blending, and Packing. All raw materials are introduced at the start of work in the Cracking Department. The Work in Process T-account for the Cracking Department for a recent month is given below:

Work in Process Cracking Department

Inventory, May 1 228,200 Completed and transferred to
the Blending Department ?
Materials 757,990
Conversion 403,410

Inventory, May 31

The May 1 work in process inventory consisted of 70,000 pounds with $142,100 in materials cost and $86,100 in conversion cost. The May 1 work in process inventory was 100% complete with respect to materials and 80% complete with respect to conversion. During May, 341,000 pounds were started into production. The May 31 inventory consisted of 121,000 pounds that were 100% complete with respect to materials and 60% complete with respect to conversion. The company uses the weighted-average method to account for units and costs.

Required:
1. Determine the equivalent units of production for May.

Equivalent units of production

2. Determine the costs per equivalent unit for May. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places.)

Cost per equivalent unit $

3. Determine the cost of the units completed and transferred to the Blending Department during May. (Round your intermediate calculation to 2 decimal places. Round your final answers to nearest whole dollar amount.)

Cost of units completed and transferred out

3.

Materials Conversion Total
Nature s Way, Inc., keeps one of its production facilities busy making a perfume called Essence de la Vache. The perfume goes through two processing departments: Blending and Bottling.

The following incomplete Work in Process account is provided for the Blending Department for March:

Work in Process Blending

March 1 balance 32,800 Completed and transferred
to Bottling (760,000 ounces) ?
Materials 153,600
Direct labor 71,200
Overhead 489,000

March 31 balance

The $32,800 beginning inventory in the Blending Department consisted of the following elements: materials,
$7,900; direct labor, $3,600; and overhead applied, $21,300.
Costs incurred during March in the Bottling Department were: materials used, $45,000; direct labor, $17,600;
and overhead cost applied to production, $106,000.

Required:
1. Prepare journal entries to record the costs incurred in both the Blending Department and Bottling Department during March.

a. Raw materials were issued for use in production.
b. Direct labor costs were incurred.
c. Manufacturing overhead costs for the entire factory were incurred, $636,000. (Credit Accounts Payable and use
a single Manufacturing Overhead control account for the entire factory.)
d. Manufacturing overhead was applied to production using a predetermined overhead rate.
e. Units that were complete with respect to processing in the Blending Department were transferred to the Bottling
Department, $662,000.
f. Units that were complete with respect to processing in the Bottling Department were transferred to Finished
Goods, $790,000.
g. Completed units were sold on account for $1,320,000. The cost of goods sold was $680,000.

Items General Journal Debit Credit a. (Click to select)

(Click to select)

(Click to select)

b. (Click to select)

(Click to select)

(Click to select)

c. (Click to select)

(Click to select)

d. (Click to select)

(Click to select)

(Click to select)

e. (Click to select)

(Click to select)

f. (Click to select)

(Click to select)

g. (Click to select)

(Click to select)

(Click to select)

(Click to select)

2. Post the journal entries from (1) above to T-accounts. The following account balances existed at the beginning of March. (The beginning balance in the Blending Department s Work in Process account is given above.) (Record the transactions in the given order.)

Raw materials $ 208,600
Work in process-Bottling department $ 52,000
Finished goods $ 16,000

After posting the entries to the T-accounts, find the ending balances in the inventory accounts and the manufacturing overhead account.
Accounts Receivable

(Click to select)

Raw Materials

Bal. (Click to select)

Bal.

Work in Process – Blending Department

Bal. (Click to select)

(Click to select)

(Click to select)

(Click to select)

Bal.

Work in Process – Bottling Department

Bal. (Click to select)

(Click to select)

(Click to select)

(Click to select)

(Click to select)

Bal.

Finished Goods

Bal. (Click to select)

(Click to select)
Bal.

Manufacturing Overhead

(Click to select) (Click to select)

Bal.

Accounts Payable

(Click to select)

Salaries and Wages Payable

(Click to select)

Sales

(Click to select)

Cost of Goods Sold

(Click to select)

4.

The following information pertains to Yap Company’s Grinding Department for the month of April:

Units Materials
Costs
Beginning work in process 50,000 $13,200
Started in April 96,000 $118,800
Units completed and transferred out 112,500
Ending work in process 33,500

All materials are added at the beginning of the process. Using the weighted-average method, the cost per equivalent unit for materials is closest to:

$1.38

$1.02

$0.90

5.

Jaderston Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Beginning work in process inventory:
Units in beginning work in process inventory 200
Materials costs $2,500
Conversion costs $2,800
Percent complete with respect to materials 60%
Percent complete with respect to conversion 35%
Units started into production during the month 6,900
Units transferred to the next department during the month 6,400
Materials costs added during the month $136,300
Conversion costs added during the month $243,400
Ending work in process inventory:
Units in ending work in process inventory 700
Percent complete with respect to materials 55%
Percent complete with respect to conversion 50%

Note: Your answers may differ from those offered below due to rounding error. In all cases, select the answer that is the closest to the answer you computed. To reduce rounding error, carry out all computations to at least two decimal places.

The cost per equivalent unit for materials for the month in the first processing department is closest to:

$19.55

$20.12

$20.46

$19.05

6.

In January, one of the processing departments at Seidl Corporation had ending work in process inventory of
$43,000. During the month, $133,000 of costs were added to production and the cost of units transferred out from the department was $104,000.

In the department’s cost reconciliation report for January, the cost of beginning work in process inventory for the department would be:

$61,000

$14,000

$90,000

chapter 4 amp 5 accounting problems 496544

Chapter 4 and 5 Problems

Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.

Chapter 4 Exercise 3

3. Cost flows and overhead application

Cleveland Metals uses a job cost system and applies factory overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 180% of direct labor cost. Data pertaining to recent operations follow.

Job no. 636 was the only job in process on January 1 of the current year. The Work in Process account contained a $24,600 balance on this date.

Jobs no. 637, 638, and 639 were started during January.

Total direct material requisitions and direct labor incurred during January amounted to $89,200 and $114,500, respectively.

The only job that remained in process on January 31 was job no. 638, with costs of $15,000 for direct materials and $20,000 for direct labor.

a. Compute the total cost of the work in process inventory on January 31.

Chapter 4 Exercise 7

7. Overhead application: Working backward

The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:

Division A

Division B

Actual machine hours

22,500

?

Estimated machine hours

20,000

?

Overhead application rate

$4.50

$5.00

Actual overhead

$110,000

?

Estimated overhead

?

$90,000

Applied overhead

?

$86,000

Over- (under-) applied overhead

?

$6,500

Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.

Chapter 4 Problem 2

2. Computationsusing a job order system

General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;

Work in process $ 35,200

Finished goods 86,900

Cost of goods sold 128,700

Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:

Direct Materials

Direct Labor

Job No.

Amount

Job No.

Amount

101

$5,000

101

$7,800

115

19,500

103

20,800

116

36,200

115

42,000

Other

35,800

116

18,000

$96,500

Other

25,900

$114,500

Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.

General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.

Instructions:

a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.

b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.

c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.

d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.

Chapter 5 Exercise 1

1. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X6 operations of Heritage Products:

Quarter 1

Quarter 2

Quarter 3

Quarter 4

Shipping costs

$58,200

$58,620

$60,125

$59,400

Orders shipped

120

140

175

150

The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.

a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.

b. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders.

Chapter 5 Exercise 2
The treasurer anticipates the following costs for the event, which will be held at the Regency Hotel:
Room rental $300
Dinner cost (per person) 25
Chartered buses 500
Favors and souvenirs (per person) 5
Band 900

Each person would pay $40 to attend; 200 attendees are expected.

a. Will the event be profitable for the sorority? Show computations.

b. How many people must attend for the sorority to break even?

c. Suppose the sorority encouraged its members to drive to the hotel and did not charter the buses. Further, a planned menu change will reduce the cost per meal by $2. If each member will still be charged $40, compute the contribution margin per person.

Chapter 5 Exercise 3

3. Break-even and other CVP relationships

Cedars Hospital has average revenue of $180 per patient day. Variable costs are $45 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,320,000 per year.

a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?

b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $540,000?

c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?

Chapter 5 Problem 6

6. Direct and absorption costing

The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 20X6.

Inventory, 1/1/X6

24,000 units

Units manufactured

80,000

Units sold

82,000

Inventory, 12/31/X6

? units

Manufacturing costs:

Direct materials

$3 per unit

Direct labor

$5 per unit

Variable factory overhead

$9 per unit

Fixed factory overhead

$280,000

Selling & administrative expenses:

Variable

$2 per unit

Fixed

$136,000

The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.

Instructions:

a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.

b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:

1. Direct costing.

2. Absorption costing.

c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using absorption costing.

chapter 4 exercise 3 3 cost flows and overhead application cleveland metals uses a j 496545

Chapter 4 Exercise 3 3. Cost flows and overhead application Cleveland Metals uses a job cost system and applies factory overhead to production at a predetermined rate of 180% of direct labor cost. Data pertaining to recent operations follow. Job no. 636 was the only job in process on January 1 of the current year. The Work in Process account contained a $24,600 balance on this date. Jobs no. 637, 638, and 639 were started during January. Total direct material requisitions and direct labor incurred during January amounted to $89,200 and $114,500, respectively. The only job that remained in process on January 31 was job no. 638, with costs of $15,000 for direct materials and $20,000 for direct labor.

a. Compute the total cost of the work in process inventory on January 31. b. Compute the cost of jobs completed during January, and present the proper journal entry to reflect job completion.

chapter 7 homework 496547

Finer Company uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of May.

May. 2 Sold merchandise costing $370 to B. Facer for $555 cash, invoice no. 5703.
5 Purchased $2,300 of merchandise on credit from Marchant Corp.
7 Sold merchandise costing $999 to J. Dryer for $1,449, terms 1/10, n/30, invoice no. 5704.
8 Borrowed $8,000 cash by signing a note payable to the bank.
12 Sold merchandise costing $250 to R. Lamb for $400, terms n/30, invoice no. 5705.
16 Received $1,435 cash from J. Dryer to pay for the purchase of May 7.
19 Sold used store equipment for $900 cash to Golf, Inc.
25 Sold merchandise costing $420 to T. Taylor for $659, terms n/30, invoice no. 5706.

Journalize the May transactions that should be recorded in the sales journal assuming the perpetual inventory system is used.

Ali Co. uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of November.

Nov. 3 The company purchased $3,000 of merchandise on credit from Hart Co., terms n/20.
7

The company sold merchandise costing $792 on credit to J. Than for $870, subject to an $17 sales discount if paid by the end of the month.

9

The company borrowed $3,225 cash by signing a note payable to the bank.

13

J. Ali, the owner, contributed $4,525 cash to the company.

18

The company sold merchandise costing $126 to B. Cox for $224 cash.

22

The company paid Hart Co. $3,000 cash for the merchandise purchased on November 3.

27

The company received $853 cash from J. Than in payment of the November 7 purchase.

30 The company paid salaries of $1,500 in cash.

Journalize the November transactions that should be recorded in the cash receipts journal assuming the perpetual inventory system is used.

Marx Supply uses a sales journal, a purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash disbursements journal, and a general journal. The following transactions occur in the month of April.

April 3 Purchased merchandise for $2,400 on credit from Seth, Inc., terms 3/10, n/30.
9 Issued check no. 210 to Kitt Corp. to buy store supplies for $384.
12 Sold merchandise costing $434 on credit to C. Myrs for $729, terms n/30.
17 Issued check no. 211 for $1,500 to pay off a note payable to City Bank.
20 Purchased merchandise for $3,000 on credit from Lite, terms 3/10, n/30.
28

Issued check no. 212 to Lite to pay the amount due for the purchase of April 20, less the discount.

29 Paid salary of $1,350 to B. Dock by issuing check no. 213.
30 Issued check no. 214 to Seth, Inc., to pay the amount due for the purchase of April 3.

Journalize the April transactions that should be recorded in the cash disbursements journal assuming the perpetual inventory system is used.

At the end of May, the sales journal of Mountain View appears as follows.

Date Account
Debited
Invoice Number PR Accounts Receivable Dr.
Sales Cr.
Cost of Goods Sold Dr.
Inventory Cr.
May 6 Aaron Reckers 190 4,320 3,283
10 Sara Reed 191 3,380 2,789
17 Anna Page 192 1,504 884
25 Sara Reed 193 602 354


31 Totals 9,806 7,310





Mountain View also recorded the return of defective merchandise with the following entry.

Date General Journal Debit Credit
May 20 Sales Returns and Allowances 250
Accounts Receivable Anna Page 250
Customer returned (worthless) merchandise.

4.award:

10 out of

10.00 points

Required:
1.

Post to the customer accounts the entries in the sales journal and any portion of the general journal entry that affects a customer’s account.

2.

Post the sales journal amounts first and then any portion of the general journal entry that affects these accounts. Dates may not be chronological in the general ledger accounts.

Prepare a schedule of accounts receivable.

Wiset Company completes these transactions during April of the current year (the terms of all its credit sales are 2/10, n/30).

Apr. 2

Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on credit from Noth Company, invoice dated April 2, terms 2/10, n/60.

3 Sold merchandise on credit to Page Alistair, Invoice No. 760, for $4,800 (cost is $2,900).
3

Purchased $1,450 of office supplies on credit from Custer, Inc. Invoice dated April 2, terms n/10 EOM.

4 Issued Check No. 587 to World View for advertising expense, $906.
5 Sold merchandise on credit to Paula Kohr, Invoice No. 761, for $9,500 (cost is $6,700).
6

Received an $95 credit memorandum from Custer, Inc., for the return of some of the office supplies received on April 3.

9

Purchased $12,545 of store equipment on credit from Hal s Supply, invoice dated April 9, terms n/10 EOM.

11 Sold merchandise on credit to Nic Nelson, Invoice No. 762, for $11,900 (cost is $7,700).
12 Issued Check No. 588 to Noth Company in payment of its April 2 invoice, less the discount.
13 Received payment from Page Alistair for the April 3 sale, less the discount.
13 Sold $10,900 of merchandise on credit to Page Alistair (cost is $3,000), Invoice No. 763.
14 Received payment from Paula Kohr for the April 5 sale, less the discount.
16

Issued Check No. 589, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the first half of the month, $9,850. Cashed the check and paid employees.

16

Cash sales for the first half of the month are $59,410 (cost is $44,300). (Cash sales are recorded daily from cash register data but are recorded only twice in this problem to reduce repetitive entries.)

17

Purchased $11,900 of merchandise on credit from Grant Company, invoice dated April 17, terms 2/10, n/30.

18 Borrowed $67,000 cash from First State Bank by signing a long-term note payable.
20 Received payment from Nic Nelson for the April 11 sale, less the discount.
20

Purchased $980 of store supplies on credit from Hal s Supply, invoice dated April 19, terms n/10 EOM.

23

Received a $1,200 credit memorandum from Grant Company for the return of defective merchandise received on April 17.

23

Received payment from Page Alistair for the April 13 sale, less the discount.

25

Purchased $11,650 of merchandise on credit from Noth Company, invoice dated April 24, terms 2/10, n/60.

26

Issued Check No. 590 to Grant Company in payment of its April 17 invoice, less the return and the discount.

27 Sold $3,140 of merchandise on credit to Paula Kohr, Invoice No. 764 (cost is $2,620).
27 Sold $6,800 of merchandise on credit to Nic Nelson, Invoice No. 765 (cost is $4,940).
30

Issued Check No. 591, payable to Payroll, in payment of the sales salaries expense for the last half of the month, $9,850.

30 Cash sales for the last half of the month are $73,500 (cost is $62,400).

Assume that Wiset Co. uses the perpetual inventory system.

Required:
1.1

Review the transactions of Wiset Company and enter those that should be journalized in the sales journal.

2.

Enter the March 31 balances for Cash ($91,000), Inventory ($151,000), Long-Term Notes Payable ($142,000), and B. Wiset, Capital ($100,000). Post the total amounts from the journal in the following general ledger accounts and in the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger accounts for Paula Kohr, Page Alistair, and Nic Nelson.

Prepare a trial balance.

Wiset Company completes these transactions during April of the current year (the terms of all its credit sales are 2/10, n/30).

Apr. 2

Purchased $14,600 of merchandise on credit from Noth Company, invoice dated April 2, terms 2/10, n/60.

3 Sold merchandise on credit to Brooke Page Alistair, Invoice No. 760, for $5,500 (cost is $3,800).
3

Purchased $1,570 of office supplies on credit from Custer, Inc. Invoice dated April 2, terms n/10 EOM.

4 Issued Check No. 587 to World View for advertising expense, $893.
5 Sold merchandise on credit to Paula Kohr, Invoice No. 761, for $8,900 (cost is $6,500).
6

Received an $90 credit memorandum from Custer, Inc., for the return of some of the office supplies received on April 3.

9

Purchased $12,725 of store equipment on credit from Hal s Supply, invoice dated April 9, terms n/10 EOM.

11 Sold merchandise on credit to Nic Nelson, Invoice No. 762, for $12,700 (cost is $6,100).
12 Issued Check No. 588 to Noth Company in payment of its April 2 invoice, less the discount.
13 Received payment from Page Alistair for the April 3 sale, less the discount.
13 Sold $7,300 of merchandise on credit to Page Alistair (cost is $4,400), Invoice No. 763.
14 Received payment from Paula Kohr for the April 5 sale, less the discount.
16

Issued Check No. 589, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the first half of the month, $11,450. Cashed the check and paid employees.

16

Cash sales for the first half of the month are $59,710 (cost is $42,800). (Cash sales are recorded daily from cash register data but are recorded only twice in this problem to reduce repetitive entries.)

17

Purchased $11,200 of merchandise on credit from Grant Company, invoice dated April 17, terms 2/10, n/30.

18 Borrowed $63,000 cash from First State Bank by signing a long-term note payable.
20 Received payment from Nic Nelson for the April 11 sale, less the discount.
20

Purchased $980 of store supplies on credit from Hal s Supply, invoice dated April 19, terms n/10 EOM.

23

Received a $1,000 credit memorandum from Grant Company for the return of defective merchandise received on April 17.

23

Received payment from Page Alistair for the April 13 sale, less the discount.

25

Purchased $11,145 of merchandise on credit from Noth Company, invoice dated April 24, terms 2/10, n/60.

26

Issued Check No. 590 to Grant Company in payment of its April 17 invoice, less the return and the discount.

27 Sold $3,190 of merchandise on credit to Paula Kohr, Invoice No. 764 (cost is $2,410).
27 Sold $9,900 of merchandise on credit to Nic Nelson, Invoice No. 765 (cost is $5,475).
30

Issued Check No. 591, payable to Payroll, in payment of the sales salaries expense for the last half of the month, $11,450.

30 Cash sales for the last half of the month are $73,900 (cost is $58,800).

Assume that Wiset Co. uses the perpetual inventory system.

Required:
1.1

Review the April transactions of Wiset Company and enter those transactions that should be journalized in the purchases journal.

Review the April transactions of Wiset Company and enter those transactions that should be journalized in the cash disbursements journal.

Prepare a general journal. Review the April transactions of Wiset Company and enter those transactions that should be journalized in the general journal.

Enter the March 31 balances of Cash ($99,000), Inventory ($148,000), Long-Term Notes Payable ($147,000), and B. Wiset, Capital ($100,000). Post the total amounts from the journal in the following general ledger accounts and in the accounts payable subsidiary ledger accounts for Hal s Supply, Noth Company, Grant Company and Custer, Inc.

Prepare a trial balance.

Prepare a schedule of accounts payable.

chapter 8 1 what items other than coins or currency might be included in the balance 496549

Chapter 8 1. What items other than coins or currency might be included in the balance sheet account cash?

2. What is the account classification (i.e., asset, liability, ect.) of the account Cash Short and Over? How is it deposited of at the end of the fiscal period?

3. What kinds of transactions require additions to book balance? Subtractions for book balances? Subtractions from bank balances?

4. How does the net method of recording purchases differ from the gross method? How would firms that use each method make journal entries for a $1,000 invoice with a 2 percent discount?

Problem 1:

Using the following information, calculate the amount that would be included in Cash and Cash Equivalents on the Way west Hotel balance sheet at December 31, 20×4.

Signed credit card slips diners club $250 Time deposits $3,256 Money orders $350 Receivable from Bob Golden $200 Petty Cash $100 Signed credit card slips visa $480 Shares of stock in Motors International $1,000 Certificates of deposits $2,000

Problem 2:

Explain the mechanics of the voucher system and include explanations of the following terms: Voucher: Voucher Register: Check Register: Vouchers payable: Tickler file:

Chapter 9 1. What is the ledger account classification for Allowance for Doubtful Accounts? What is its normal balance? 2. If the allowance method of accounting for bad debts indicates a debit balance at the end of the year, were bad debts underestimated or overestimated for the year?

3. What accounts are debited and credited when a specific account is written off during the year under the allowance method of accounting for bad debts?

Problem 1:

On June 15, the Pines Restaurant decided to write of the account of Thomas Sunbart in the amount of $350. The restaurant uses the direct write off method of accounting for bad debts.

Required: 1. Make the necessary journal entry for June 15

2. On November 15, Debra Threloff paid firesun resort $500. Make the necessary journal entry or entries to reinstate Debra s account and record the collection

Problem 2:

The FireSun Resort decided to write off the account of Debra Threloff for $500 on Aug 3 FireSun uses the direct write off method of accounting for bad debts

Required: 1. Make the necessary journal entry for Aug 3

2. On November 15, Debra Threloff paid FireSun Resort $500. Make the necessary journal entry or entries to reinstate Debra s account and record the collection

Chapter 10 1. Does an overstatement of ending inventory overstate or understate cost of goods sold for the period? What is the effect of the error on net income for the goods?

2. How do the terms under which a supplier ships goods affect inventory valuation and accounting for inventory?

Problem 1:

Based on the following transactions and shipping terms between Coldpac Distributors and Marco s Pizzeria, determine who should include the inventory in question on their 12/31/20×8 1. Marco s received a $4,000 worth of inventory on January 3 that was shipped FOB destination by Coldpac on Dec 28

2. Marco s received $5,000 worth of inventory on January 2 that was shipped FOB shipping point on Dec 24

Problem 2:

Only July 6, 20×3, the ProShop at the Hilton Lagoons Hotel ordered golf clubs an clothing that together cost $8,000, which managers charged to the hotel s account. On July 15 20×3, the shop sold $2,500 worth of merchandise, which cost $1,400.

Required:

Journalize the entries for July 6 and July 15 assuming:

1. The Pro Shop uses the periodic inventory system

2. The Pro Shop uses the perpetual inventory system

Chapter 11 1. How is the gain or loss on the sale of property and equipment asset calculated?

Problem 1:

For each of the following purchases, does the purchase represent a capital or a revenue expenditure?

a. Complete remodeling of a restaurant dining room at a cost of $80,000 b. Repainting the exterior of a delivery truck at a cost of $500 c. Purchase of a pizza oven at a cost of $18,000 d. Purchase of a dozen pencil sharpeners with a life of ten years at a total cost of $65 e. Overhaul of the engine on a tour bus at a cost of $5,000 extending the life of the bus by five years f. Purchase of a computer system at a cost of $35,000

Problem 2: Indicate whether the assets below should be listed on the balance sheet under current assets or property and equipment:

Inventory Land Accounts receivable Leaseholds Construction in Progress Prepaid expenses Notes receivables Furnishings and equipment Building Short term investments

Chapter 12 Problem 1:

Longview Hotels operates ten properties in the Midwest. The company employs the following procedures to control payroll:

a. Tom Johnson, the human resources manager, carefully interviews all prospective employees, authorizes their hiring, perpetrates the payroll and distributes the checks b. Donna Miller, the front desk manager, deletes individuals from her department s labor force and provides payroll employees with front desk employees wage rates c. At the end of each shift, hotel dining room employees write down their hours on a blank sheet of paper and place it on the desk of the food and beverage manager d. All employees are paid by checks draw on the general bank account of the company e. All individual paychecks are kept in the respective departments until they are claimed by employees

Required: Draft a memo suggesting changes that the operation should make to do better control payroll

Problem 2:

Indicate weather the following statements are true or false and explain why: a. If a company is a mom and pop operation, it would be acceptable under current tax laws to pay employees in cash with no withholding b. An employee s immediate supervisor should hold a check for the employee if he or she is taking a leave of absence c. Duties regarding the payroll process should be segregated to ensure that proper payroll procedures are followed d. The labor force master list should be under the control of the human resources department e. Time clocks are great way to ensure the proper recording of time worked f. Employees wages are provided to payroll by the marketing department

chapter 9 496551

9.1 Find the following values for a lump sum assuming annual compounding:
a. The future value of $500 invested at 8 percent for one year
b. The future value of $500 invested at 8 percent for ve years
c. The present value of $500 to be received in one year when the op-
portunity cost rate is 8 percent
d. The present value of $500 to be received in five years when the op-
portunity cost rate is 8 percent
9.2 Repeat Problem 9.1 above, but assume the following compounding
conditions:

9.7 Consider another uneven cash ow stream:
Year Cash Flow
0 $2,000
1 2,000
2 0
3 1,500
4 2,500
5 4,000
a. What is the present (Year 0) value of the cash flow stream if the op-
portunity cost rate is 10 percent?
b. What is the future (Year 5) value of the cash flow stream if the cash
flows are invested in an account that pays 10 percent annually?
c. What cash flow today (Year 0), in lieu of the $2,000 cash flow, would
be needed to accumulate $20,000 at the end of Year 5? (Assume that
the cash flows for Years 1 through 5 remain the same.)
d. Time value analysis involves either discounting or compounding
cash flows. Many healthcare financial management decisions such
as bond refunding, capital investment, and lease versus buy involvediscounting projected future cash flows. What factors must execu-
tives consider when choosing a discount rate to apply to forecasted
cash flows?9.11 Consider the following investment cash flows:
Year Cash Flow
0 ($1,000)
1 250
2 400
3 500
4 600
5 600
a. What is the return expected on this investment measured in dollar
terms if the opportunity cost rate is 10 percent?
b. Provide an explanation, in economic terms, of your answer.
c. What is the return on this investment measured in percentage terms?
d. Should this investment be made? Explain your answer.a. Semiannual
b. Quarterly

carrie a morgan age 45 is single and lives with her dependent mother at 426 allentow 496496

Carrie A. Morgan, age 45, is single and lives with her dependent mother at 426 Allentown, PA 18105. Her social security number is XXXXX

1. Carrie is a licensed hairstylist and operates her own business. Located at 480 Allentown, PA 18105, the business is conducted under the name of Carrie’s Coiffures. Carrie’s business activity code is 812112. In addition to 10 workstations (i.e., stylist chairs) and a small reception area, the shop has display and storage areas for the products Carrie sells (see item 2 below). During the year, Carrie leased nine of the stations to other hairstylists. As is common practice in similar businesses in the area, the other stylists are considered to be self-employed. In fact, the IRS sanctioned the self-employment classification for the stylists in an audit of one of Carrie’s prior tax returns. Each stylist pays Carrie a fixed rent for the use of a workstation, resulting in $68,000 of rents received during 2012. From her own station, Carrie earned $44,000 (including tips of $12,000) for the styling services she provided to her own clients.

2. Carrie’s Coiffures is the local distributor for several beauty products (e.g., conditioners, shampoos) that cannot be purchased anywhere else. Carrie buys these items from the manufacturers and sells them to regular patrons, walk-in customers, and other beauticians (including those who lease chairs from her). Carrie’s Coiffures is also known for the selection and quality of its hairpieces (i.e., wigs, toupees). Through the shop, Carrie made the following sales during the year:
Hairpieces and wigs $69,000
Beauty products 48,000

3. Although Carrie operates her business on a cash basis, she maintains inventory accounts for the items she sells as required by law. Relevant information about the inventories (based on lower of cost or market) is summarized below.
4. 12/31/11 12/31/12
Hairpieces and wigs $10,700 $12,600
Beauty products 11,400 9,900

5. Carrie’s purchases for 2012 were $30,500 of hairpieces and wigs and $26,100 of beauty products.

6. Carrie’s Coiffures had the following operating expenses for 2012:

Utilities (i.e., gas, electric, telephone) $12,900
Ad valorem property taxes:
On realty (e.g., shop building and land) $4,200
On personalty (e.g., equipment, inventory) 1,800 6,000
Styling supplies (e.g., rinses, dyes, gels, hair spray) 5,700
Fire and casualty insurance 4,100
Liability insurance 4,000
Accounting services 3,800
Janitorial services 2,400
Sewer service, garbage pickup $ 2,300
Water 2,200
Occupation licenses (city and state) 1,500
Waiting room supplies (e.g., magazines, coffee) 1,300
7. As Carrie prefers to avoid employer-employee arrangements and the payroll tax complexities, she retains outside agencies to handle her accounting and janitorial needs.

8. In early 2012, Carrie decided to renovate the waiting room. On May 10, she spent $10,400 for new chairs, a sofa, various lamps, coffee bar, and other furnishings. Carrie follows a policy of claiming as much depreciation as soon as possible. The old furnishings were thrown away or given to customers. For tax purposes, the old furnishings had a zero basis.

9. Carrie’s Coiffures is located in a building Carrie had constructed atXXXXXin March 1998. The shop was built for a cost of $300,000 on a lot she purchased earlier for $35,000. Except for a down payment from savings, the cost was financed by a 20-year mortgage. For tax purposes, MACRS depreciation is claimed on the building. During 2012, the following expenses were attributable to the property:

Repainting (both exterior and interior) $8,000
Repairs (plumbing and electrical) 1,900

10. In May (after her accident settlement discussed in item 11 below), Carrie paid the balance due on the business mortgage. To do so, she incurred a prepayment penalty of $4,400. Prior to paying it off, she paid regular interest on the mortgage in 2012 of $6,000.

11. In February 2012, Carrie’s Coiffures was cited by the city for improper disposal of certain waste chemicals. Carrie questioned the propriety of the proposed fine of $2,000 and retained an attorney to represent her at the hearing. By pleading nolo contendere, the attorney was able to get the fine reduced to $500. Carrie paid both the fine of $500 and the attorney’s fee of $600 in 2012.

12. In August 2012, Carrie saw an ad in a trade publication that attracted her attention. The owner of a well-respected styling salon in Reading (PA) had died, and his estate was offering the business for sale. Carrie traveled to Reading, spent several days looking over the business (including books and financial results), and met with the executor. Carried treated the executor to dinner and a music concert. Immediately after the concert, Carrie made an offer for the business, but the executor rejected it. Her expenses in connection with this trip were as follows:

Car rental $140
Entertainment of executor 280
Motel (August 6-7) 220
Meals 110

13. In March 2011, Joan Myers, one of Carrie’s best stylists, left town to get away from a troublesome ex-husband. In order to help Joan establish a business elsewhere, Carrie loaned her $7,000. Joan signed a note dated March 3, 2011, that was payable in one year with 6% interest. On December 30, 2012, Carrie learned that Joan had declared bankruptcy and was awaiting trial on felony theft charges. Carrie never received payment from Joan, nor did she receive any interest on the loan.

14. At Christmas, Carrie gave each of her 35 best customers a large bottle of body lotion. Each bottle had a wholesale cost to Carrie of $12 but a retail price of $24. Carrie also spent $3 to have each bottle gift wrapped. (Note: The lotion was special order merchandise and was not part of the business’s inventory or purchases for the year see item 2 above.) She also gave each of the nine stylists who leased chairs from her a basket of fruit that cost $30 (not including $5 delivery cost).

15. In March 2012, the Pennsylvania Department of Revenue audited Carrie’s state income tax returns for 2009 and 2010. She was assessed additional state income tax of $340 for these years. Surprisingly, no interest was included in the assessment. Carrie paid the back taxes promptly.

16. On a morning walk in November 2011, Carrie was injured when she was sideswiped by a delivery truck. Carrie was hospitalized for several days, and the driver of the truck was ticketed and charged with DUI. The owner of the truck, a national parcel delivery service, was concerned that further adverse publicity might result if the matter went to court. Consequently, the owner offered Carrie a settlement if she would sign a release. Under the settlement, her medical expenses were paid and she would receive a cash award of $200,000. The award specified that the entire amount was for physical pain and suffering. Because she suffered no permanent injury as a result of the mishap, she signed the release in April 2012 and received the $200,000 settlement.

17. In January 2012, Carrie was contacted by the state of Pennsylvania regarding a tract of land she owned in York County. The state intended to convert the property into a district headquarters, barracks, and training center for its highway patrol. Carrie had inherited the property from her father when he died on August 11, 2011. The property had a value of $140,000 on that date and had been purchased by her father on March 3, 1980, for $30,000. On July 25, 2012, after considerable negotiation and after the state threatened to initiate condemnation proceedings, she sold the tract to the state for $158,000. Since Carrie is not comfortable with real estate investments, she does not plan to reinvest any of the proceeds received in another piece of realty.

18. When her father died in 2011, Carrie did not know that he had an insurance policy on his life (maturity value of $50,000) in which she was named as the beneficiary. When her mother told her about the policy in July 2012, Carrie filed a claim with the carrier, Falcon Life Insurance Company. In August 2012, she received a check from Falcon for $51,500 (including $1,500 interest).

19. Upon the advice of a client who is a respected broker, Carrie purchased 1,000 shares of common stock in Grosbeak Exploration for $40,000 on March 4, 2012. In the months following her purchase, the share value of Grosbeak plummeted. Disgusted with the unexpected erosion in the value of her investment, Carrie sold the stock for $28,000 on December 23, 2012.

20. While on her way to work in 2011, Carrie was rear-ended by a hit-and-run driver. The damage to her Lexus was covered by her insurance company, General Casualty, except for the $1,000 deductible she was required to pay. In 2012, the insurance company located the driver who caused the accident and was reimbursed by his insurer. Consequently, Carrie received a $1,000 refund check from General Casualty in May 2012 to reimburse her for her $1,000 deductible.

21. After her father’s death, Carrie’s mother (Mildred Morgan, Social Security number NNN-NN-NNNN moved in with her. Mildred’s persistent back trouble made it difficult for her to climb the stairs to the second-floor bedrooms in Carrie’s house. So Carrie had an elevator installed in her personal residence at a cost of $12,000 in January 2012. A qualified appraiser determined that the elevator increased the value of the personal residence by $7,000. The appraisal cost $400. The operation of the elevator during 2012 increased Carrie’s electric bill by $300.

22. As a favor to a long-time client who is a drama professor at a local state university, Carrie spent a weekend as a stylist preparing hairdos for the key actresses in the annual Theater Department fund-raising event. The drama professor supplied all of the resources that Carrie needed to provide her services. Carrie estimates that she would have charged $800 for the services she donated to this charitable event.

23. In addition to the items already mentioned, Carrie had the following receipts during 2012:

Interest income
CD at Scranton First National Bank $900
City of Lancaster general purpose bonds 490
Money market account at Allentown State Bank 340 $1,730
Qualified dividends on stock investments
General Motors $470
AT&T common 380 850
Federal income tax refund (for tax year 2011) 791
Pennsylvania state income tax refund (for tax year 2011) 205

24. Expenditures for 2012, not previously noted, are summarized below.
Contribution to pension plan $10,000
Medical
Premiums on medical insurance $4,800
Dental bills 1,400 6,200
Property taxes on personal residence 3,800
Interest on home mortgage 3,200
Professional expenses
Subscriptions to trade journals $ 180
Dues to beautician groups 140 320

25. The $10,000 contribution to the pension plan is to a 401(k) type of plan she established in 2011. Previously, she had contributed to an H.R. 10 (Keogh) plan but found that the 401(k) retirement arrangement provides more flexibility and is less complex. The medical insurance policy covers Carrie and her dependents and was issued in the name of the business (i.e., Carrie’s Coiffures ). It does not cover dental work or capital modifications to a residence (see item 16 above).

26. During 2012, Carrie made the following total estimated tax payments with respect to her 2012 tax returns:

Federal estimated income tax payments $20,800
Pennsylvania estimated income tax payments 2,400
Allentown City estimated income tax payments 800

Requirements

Prepare an income tax return (with appropriate schedules) for Carrie for 2012. In doing this, use the following guidelines:
1) Make necessary assumptions for information not given in the problem.
2) Carrie has itemized deductions ever since she became a homeowner many years ago.
3) The sales tax option was not chosen in 2011, and Carrie had no major purchases that qualify for the sales tax deduction in 2012.
4) Carrie has substantiation (e.g., records, receipts) to support the transactions involved.
5) If a refund results, Carrie wants it sent to her.
6) Carrie is preparing her own return (i.e., no preparer is involved).
7) Carrie does not wish to contribute to the Presidential Election Campaign Fund.

case 1 sophia wise computer sales is a merchandiser and purchases its products direc 496497

CASE #1: Sophia Wise Computer Sales is a merchandiser and purchases its products directly from manufacturers. In turn, it sells those products to its various customers. One of its customers is Hillary Zabkar Electronics. The following transactions took place between Sophia Wise (seller) and its customer, Hillary Zabkar Electronics during the month of December:

Dec 1Sold merchandise to Hillary Zabkar on credit for $5,000, terms 3/10, n/30. The items sold had a cost of $3,500

Dec 3Purchased merchandise from a manufacturer for cash, $720.

Dec 4Purchased merchandise from a manufacturer on credit for $2,600, terms 1/20, n/30.

Dec 5Issued a credit memorandum for $300 to its customer Hillary Zabkar Electronics who returned merchandise purchased Nov 29th. The returned items had a cost of $210

Dec 11Received payment for merchandise sold Dec 1

Dec 15Received a credit memorandum from a manufacturer for the return of faulty merchandise purchased on Dec 4 for $600.

Dec 18Paid freight charges of $200 for merchandise ordered last month (FOB shipping point)

Dec 23Paid for the merchandise purchased Dec 4 less the portion that was returned

Dec 24Sold merchandise to Hillary Zabkar on credit for $7,000, terms 2/10, n/30. The items had a cost of $4,900

Dec 31Received payment for merchandise sold on Dec 24

Problem #1 Assuming a perpetual inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Sophia Wise Computer Sales must make to record these transactions:

Problem #2 Assuming a periodic inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Sophia Wise Computer Sales must make to record these transactions:

Problem #3 Assuming a perpetual inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Hillary Zabkar Electronics must make to record these transactions:

Problem #4 Assuming a periodic inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Hillary Zabkar Electronics must make to record these transactions:

case 2 2 ysl marketing research 496498

CASE: 2-2 YSL MARKETING RESEARCH

YSL Marketing Research is a small firm located in Seattle, Washington. On behalf of its clients, the firm conducts focus group meetings, telephone and mail opinion surveys, and evaluations of marketing strategies. The firm has three partners and six nonpartner professionals. At the start of the year, the company estimated total professional compensation (for the three partners and six nonpartner professionals) to be $1,600,000.

To evaluate the profitability of its engagements, the firm traces actual professional compensation to each engagement along with so-called direct charges. Direct charges consist of travel costs and costs of conducting surveys (e.g., paper and postage). In addition, each engagement receives an allocation of overhead based on professional compensation charges. Overhead consists of all support costs including rent, utilities, and depreciation of office equipment. At the start of the year, these costs were estimated to be $496,000.

Recently, Connie Bachmann, a YSL partner, was asked to conduct a survey for Surenex, a new high-tech company. Connie is excited about this opportunity since she expects that this hot small company will, in three to five years, become a hot big company with premium billing opportunities. At this point, however, Connie wants to quote a low fee since Surenex has cash-flow problems and is clearly unwilling to pay YSL s normal rates. On most jobs, YSL s fee is 1.5 times professional compensation. In addition, the company is reimbursed for all out-of-pocket costs related to travel and paper and postage costs for surveys. YSL is in high demand, and if it undertakes the Surenex job, it will have to turn down another potential client.

Connie estimates that the Surenex engagement will require the following costs in addition to overhead support costs:

Connie Bachmann (partner), 40 hours at a salary averaging $120 per hour = $4,800.

Ambrose Bundy (professional staff), 100 hours at a salary of $40 per hour = $4,000.

Direct charges for actual travel, mailing, and postage = $3,000.

Total of above = $11,800.

Required

a. Calculate the expected full cost of the Surenex engagement, including an allocation of overhead. Round answer to nearest dollar and predetermined overhead rate to two decimal places.

b. What is the lowest amount that Connie can bill on this engagement without hurting company profit?

c. In deciding on a price for the engagement, what should Connie consider in addition to the amount calculated in (b)? (Jiambalvo 82-83)

case 2 sarah perreault corp sold 6 400 units of its product at 45 per unit in year 2 496499

CASE #2: Sarah Perreault Corp. sold 6,400 units of its product at $45 per unit in year 2013 and incurred operating expenses of $6 per unit in selling them. It began the year with 600 units in inventory and the following transactions took place during the fiscal year:

DATEACTIVITYUNITSPRICE

Jan 1 Beginning inventory600$18 per unit

Feb 20Purchase1,500$19 per unit

May 16Purchase700$20 per unit

Oct 3Purchase400$21 per unit

Dec 11Purchase3,300$22 per unit

Feb 22Sale750$45 per unit

May 15Sale890$45 per unit

Sep 11Sale775$45 per unit

Dec 28Sale3,985$45 per unit

Problem #1 Prepare comparative income statements similar to the ones found in your text at Exhibit 6.8 for the three inventory cost flow methods of FIFO, LIFO and weighted average. The company uses a perpetual inventory system and its income tax rate is 30%.

In calculating cost of sales, be sure to demonstrate the flow of inventory during the year and prove your ending inventory amount by using the inventory cost formula (BI + Purchases = GA EI = CGS).

Problem #2 Discuss in 500 words or less how the financial results from using the three alternative methods would change if Sarah Perreault had been experiencing declining costs in its purchases of inventory?

Problem #3 What advantages and disadvantages are offered by using LIFO and FIFO? Assume the continuing trend of increasing costs.

case 6b chester amp wayne 496502

Case: Chester & Wayne

Chester & Wayne is a regional food distribution company. Mr. Chester, CEO, has asked your assistance in preparing cash-flow information for the last three months of this year. Selected accounts from an interim balance sheet dated September 30, have the following balances:

Cash $142,100 Accounts payable $354,155
Marketable securities 200,000 Other payables 53,200
Accounts receivable 1,012,500
Inventories 150,388

Mr. Wayne, CFO, provides you with the following information based on experience and management policy. All sales are credit sales and are billed the last day of the month of sale. Customers paying within 10 days of the billing date may take a 2 percent cash discount. Forty percent of the sales is paid within the discount period in the month following billing. An additional 25 percent pays in the same month but does not receive the cash discount. Thirty percent is collected in the second month after billing; the remainder is uncollectible. Additional cash of $24,000 is expected in October from renting unused warehouse space.

Sixty percent of all purchases, selling and administrative expenses, and advertising expenses is paid in the month incurred. The remainder is paid in the following month. Ending inventory is set at 25 percent of the next month’s budgeted cost of goods sold. The company’s gross profit averages 30 percent of sales for the month. Selling and administrative expenses follow the formula of 5 percent of the current month’s sales plus $75,000, which includes depreciation of $5,000. Advertising expenses are budgeted at 3 percent of sales.

Actual and budgeted sales information is as follows:

Actual: Budgeted:
August $750,000 October $826,800
September 787,500 November 868,200
December 911,600
January 930,000

The company will acquire equipment costing $250,000 cash in November. Dividends of $45,000 will be paid in December.

The company would like to maintain a minimum cash balance at the end of each month of $120,000. Any excess amounts go first to repayment of short-term borrowings and then to investment in marketable securities. When cash is needed to reach the minimum balance, the company policy is to sell marketable securities before borrowing.

Questions (use of spreadsheet software is recommended):

    1. Prepare a cash budget for each month of the fourth quarter and for the quarter in total. Prepare supporting schedules as needed. (Round all budget schedule amounts to the nearest dollar.)
    1. You meet with Mr. Chester and Mr. Wayne to present your findings and happen to bring along your PC with the budget model software. They are worried about your findings in Part 1. They have obviously been arguing over certain assumptions you were given.
        1. Mr. Wayne thinks that the gross margin may shrink to 27.5 percent because of higher purchase prices. He is concerned about what impact this will have on borrowings. Comment.

        1. Mr. Chester thinks that “stock outs” occur too frequently and wants to see the impact of increasing inventory levels to 30 and 40 percent of next quarter’s sales on their total investment. Comment on these changes.

        1. Mr. Wayne wants to discontinue the cash discount for prompt payment. He thinks that maybe collections of an additional 20 percent of sales will be delayed from the month of billing to the next month. Mr. Chester says “That’s ridiculous! We should increase the discount to 3 percent. Twenty percent more would be collected in the current month to get the higher discount.” Comment on the cash-flow impacts.

case 8 31 lucknow lighting ltd correct answers w solutions 496503

Lucknow Lighting Ltd.. manufactures blackboard chalk for educational uses. The company’s product is sold by the box at $50 per

unit………. and SO ON…

Required: Lucknow Lighting Ltd. had no beginning or ending work-in-process inventories for either year.

1) Prepare operating income statements for both years based on absorption costing.

2) Prepare operating income statements for both year baed on variable costing.

3) Prepare a numerical reconciliation of the difference in income reported under the 2 costing methods used in

requirements 1) and 2)

Check figures:

1. Operating income year 1: $ 27,500

2. Operating income year 2: $ 20,500

case chester amp wayne 496504

Case: Chester & Wayne
Chester & Wayne is a regional food distribution company. Mr. Chester, CEO, has asked your assistance in preparing cash flow information for the last three months of this year. Selected accounts from an interim balance sheet dated September 30,have the following balances:
Cash $142,100 Accounts payable $354,155
Marketable securities 200,000 Other payables 53,200
Accounts receivable 1,012,500
Inventories 150,388
Mr. Wayne, CFO, provides you with the following information based on experience and management policy. All sales are credit sales and are billed the last day of the month of sale. Customers paying within 10 days of the billing date may take a 2percent cash discount. Forty percent of the sales is paid within the discount period in the month following billing. An additional 25 percent pays in the same month but does not receive the cash discount. Thirty percent is collected in the second month after billing; the remainder is uncollectible. Additional cash of $24,000 is expected in October from renting unused warehouse space.
Sixty percent of all purchases, selling and administrative expenses, and advertising expenses is paid in the month incurred. The remainder is paid in the following month. Ending inventory is set at 25 percent of the next month’s budgeted cost of goods sold. The company’s gross profit averages 30 percent of sales for the month. Selling and administrative expenses follow the formula of 5 percent of the current month’s sales plus $75,000, which includes depreciation of $5,000. Advertising expenses are budgeted at 3 percent of sales.
Actual and budgeted sales information is as follows:
Actual: Budgeted:
August $750,000 October $826,800
September 787,500 November 868,200
December 911,600
January 930,000
The company will acquire equipment costing $250,000 cash in November. Dividends of $45,000 will be paid in December.
The company would like to maintain a minimum cash balance at the end of each month of $120,000. Any excess amounts go first to repayment of short-term borrowings and then to investment in marketable securities. When cash is needed to reach the minimum balance, the company policy is to sell marketable securities before borrowing.
Questions (use of spreadsheet software is recommended):
1. Prepare a cash budget for each month of the fourth quarter and for the quarter in total. Prepare supporting schedules as needed. (Round all budget schedule amounts to the nearest dollar.)

case problem 1 planning an advertising campaign 496505

The Flamingo Grill is an upscale restaurant located in St. Petersburg, Florida. To help plan an advertising campaign for the coming season, Flamingo’s management team hired the advertising firm of Haskell and Johnson (HJ). The management team requested HJ’s recommendation concerning how the advertising budget should be distributed across television, radio, and newspaper advertisements. The budget has been set at $279,000.

In a meeting with Flamingo’s management team, HJ consultants provided the following information about the industry exposure effectiveness rating per ad, their estimate of the number of potential new customers reached per ad, and the cost for each ad:

Advertising Media Exposure Rating per Ad New Customers per Ad Cost per Ad
Television 90 4000 $10,000
Radio 25 2000 $ 3000
Newspaper 10 1000 $ 1000

The exposure rating is viewed as a measure of the value of the ad to both existing customers and potential new customers. It is a function of such things as image, message recall, visual and audio appeal, and so on. As expected, the more expensive television advertisement has the highest exposure effectiveness rating along with the greatest potential for reaching new customers.

At this point, the HJ consultants pointed out that the data concerning exposure and reach were only applicable to the first few ads in each medium. For television, HJ stated that the exposure rating of 90 and the 4000 new customers reached per ad were reliable for the first 10 television ads. After 10 ads, the benefit is expected to decline. For planning purposes, HJ recommended reducing the exposure rating to 55 and the estimate of the potential new customers reached to 1500 for any television ads beyond 10. For radio ads, the preceding data are reliable up to a maximum of 15 ads. Beyond 15 ads, the exposure rating declines to 20 and the number of new customers reached declines to 1200 per ad. Similarly, for newspaper ads, the preceding data are reliable up to a maximum of 20; the exposure rating declines to 5 and the potential number of new customers reached declines to 800 for additional ads.

Flamingo’s management team accepted maximizing the total exposure rating across all media as the objective of the advertising campaign. Because of management’s concern with attracting new customers, management stated that the advertising campaign must reach at least 100,000 new customers. To balance the advertising campaign and make use of all advertising media, Flamingo’s management team also adopted the following guidelines:
Use at least twice as many radio advertisements as television advertisements.
Use no more than 20 television advertisements.
The television budget should be at least $140,000.
The radio advertising budget is restricted to a maximum of $99,000.
The newspaper budget is to be at least $30,000.
HJ agreed to work with these guidelines and provide a recommendation as to how the $279,000 advertising budget should be allocated among television, radio, and newspaper advertising.

Managerial Report

Develop a model that can be used to determine the advertising budget allocation for the Flamingo Grill. Include a discussion of the following items in your report:

1. A schedule showing the recommended number of television, radio, and newspaper advertisements and the budget allocation for each medium. Show the total exposure and indicate the total number of potential new customers reached.
2. A discussion of how the total exposure would change if an additional $10,000 were added to the advertising budget.
3. A discussion of the ranges for the objective function coefficients. What do the ranges indicate about how sensitive the recommended solution is to HJ’s exposure rating coefficients?
4. The resulting media schedule if the objective of the advertising campaign was to maximize the number of potential new customers reached instead of maximizing the total exposure rating.
5. A comparison of the two media schedules resulting from items 1 and 4, respectively. What is your recommendation for the Flamingo Grill’s advertising campaign?

case sophia wise computer sales 496506

Sophia Wise Computer Sales is a merchandiser and purchases its products directly from manufacturers. In turn, it sells those products to its various customers. One of its customers is Hillary Zabkar Electronics. The following transactions took place between Sophia Wise (seller) and its customer, Hillary Zabkar Electronics during the month of December:

Dec 1 Sold merchandise to Hillary Zabkar on credit for $5,000, terms 3/10, n/30. The items sold had a cost of $3,500
Dec 3 Purchased merchandise from a manufacturer for cash, $720.
Dec 4 Purchased merchandise from a manufacturer on credit for $2,600, terms 1/20, n/30.
Dec 5 Issued a credit memorandum for $300 to its customer Hillary Zabkar Electronics who returned merchandise purchased Nov 29th. The returned items had a cost of $210
Dec 11 Received payment for merchandise sold Dec 1
Dec 15 Received a credit memorandum from a manufacturer for the return of faulty merchandise purchased on Dec 4 for $600.
Dec 18 Paid freight charges of $200 for merchandise ordered last month (FOB shipping point)
Dec 23 Paid for the merchandise purchased Dec 4 less the portion that was returned
Dec 24 Sold merchandise to Hillary Zabkar on credit for $7,000, terms 2/10, n/30. The items had a cost of $4,900
Dec 31 Received payment for merchandise sold on Dec 24

Problem #1

Assuming a perpetual inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Sophia Wise Computer Sales must make to record these transactions:

Problem #2

Assuming a periodic inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Sophia Wise Computer Sales must make to record these transactions:

Problem #3

Assuming a perpetual inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Hillary Zabkar Electronics must make to record these transactions:

Problem #4

Assuming a periodic inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Hillary Zabkar Electronics must make to record these transactions:

case study 1 acc505 internal control 496507

Case Study 2 -Internal Control

Due by Sunday of week 5, 11:59PM, Mountain Time

LJB Company, a local distributor, has asked your accounting firm to evaluate their system of internal controls because they are planning to go public in the future. The President wants to be aware of any new regulations required of his company if they go public so he met with a colleague of yours at a local restaurant. The President of the company explained the current system of internal controls to your colleague. Your colleague has since been promoted to a tax position so she has passed on the information below so you can generate recommendations for the partner at your accounting firm to share with the President of LJB Company.

Since LJB Company is a relatively lean organization, they have a lot of faith in their long-term employees. They have one accountant who serves as Treasurer and Controller which streamlines many of their processes. In this dual role, he purchases all of the supplies and pays for these purchases. He also receives the checks and completes the monthly bank reconciliation. The accountant is so busy that the company handles petty cash a bit differently. All employees have access to the petty cash in a desk drawer and are asked to only place a note if they use any of the cash.

The accountant has recently started using pre-numbered invoices and wants to buy an indelible ink machine to print their checks. The President is waiting to hear from you if this is a necessary purchase before authorizing.

On payday, the checks are picked up by the accountant and left in his office for pick-up. Before he leaves for the weekend, he will move the checks into a safe in his office.

The President is still quite embarrassed because he had to fire one of his employees for viewing pornography on a company computer. He later found out this individual was a convicted felon who served time for molesting children. The company had a hard time getting the employee to admit it was him because the company does not assign individual passwords. The President expressed his frustration because both he and the accountant both interview and approve all of the new hires.

Required:

Based on the above information, prepare a Word documentto address the following:

  1. Inform the President of any new internal control requirements if the company decides to go public. (7 points)

  1. Advise the President of what the company is doing right (they are doing some things well) and also recommend to the President whether or not they should buy the indelible ink machine. When you advise the President, please be sure to reference the applicable internal control principle that applies. (13 points)

  1. Advise the President of what the company is doing wrong (they are definitely doing some things poorly). Please be sure to include the internal control principle that is being violated along with a recommendation for improvement. (20 points)

You must prepare a formal report for the partner to distribute to the President so no abbreviations or short-hand answers. You also must cite your references. At a minimum, your textbook should be cited.

Below is a grading rubric for this assignment.

Category

Points

Description

Understanding

10

Demonstrate a strong grasp of the problem at hand. Demonstrate understanding of how the course concepts apply to the problem.

Analysis

30

Apply original thought to solving the business problem. Apply concepts from the course material correctly toward solving the business problem.

Execution

10

Write your answer clearly and succinctly using strong organization and proper grammar. Use citations correctly.

Total

50

A quality paper will meet or exceed all of the above requirements.

Best Practices

The following are best practices in preparing this paper.

  • Cover Page: Include whom you prepared the paper for, who prepared it, and the date.
  • Table of Contents: List the main ideas and sections of the paper and the pages where they are located. Illustrations should be included separately.
  • Introduction:Use a header on your paper. This will indicate that you are introducing the paper.

    The purpose of an introduction or opening is to

  1. introduce the subject and why the subject is important;
  2. preview the main ideas and the order in which they will be covered; and
  3. establish the tone of the document.

Include in the introduction a reason for the audience to read the paper. Also include an overview of what you will cover and the importance of the material. (This should include or introduce the questions you are asked to answer in each assignment.)

  • Body of the Report: Use a header with the name of the case study. An example is, “The Development of Hotel X: A World Class Resort.” Proceed to break out the main ideas: State the main ideas, the major points of each idea, and provide evidence. Show some type of division, such as separate, labeled sections; separate groups of paragraphs; or headers. Include the information you found during your research and investigation.
  • Summary and Conclusion: Summarizing is similar to paraphrasing but presents the gist of the material in fewer words than the original. An effective summary identifies the main ideas and the major support points from the body of the report; minor details are left out. Summarize the benefits of the ideas and how they effect the subject.
  • Work Cited: Use the citation format specified in the Syllabus.

case study 2 496508

A. What is the break-even point in passengers and revenues per month?

B. What is the break-even point in number of passenger train cars per month?

C. If Springfield Express raises its average passenger fare to $ 190, it is estimated that the average load factor will decrease to 60 percent. What will be the monthly break-even point in number of passenger cars?

D. (Refer to original data.) Fuel cost is a significant variable cost to any railway. If crude oil increases by $ 20 per barrel, it is estimated that variable cost per passenger will rise to $ 90. What will be the new break-even point in passengers and in number of passenger train cars?

E. Springfield Express has experienced an increase in variable cost per passenger to $ 85 and an increase in total fixed cost to $ 3,600,000. The company has decided to raise the average fare to $ 205. If the tax rate is 30 percent, how many passengers per month are needed to generate an after-tax profit of $ 750,000?

F. (Use original data). Springfield Express is considering offering a discounted fare of $ 120, which the company believes would increase the load factor to 80 percent. Only the additional seats would be sold at the discounted fare. Additional monthly advertising cost would be $ 180,000. How much pre-tax income would the discounted fare provide Springfield Express if the company has 50 passenger train cars per day, 30 days per month?

G. Springfield Express has an opportunity to obtain a new route that would be traveled 20 times per month. The company believes it can sell seats at $ 175 on the route, but the load factor would be only 60 percent. Fixed cost would increase by $ 250,000 per month for additional personnel, additional passenger train cars, maintenance, and so on. Variable cost per passenger would remain at $ 70.

1. Should the company obtain the route?

2. How many passenger train cars must Springfield Express operate to earn pre-tax income of $ 120,000 per month on this route?

3. If the load factor could be increased to 75 percent, how many passenger train cars must be operated to earn pre-tax income of $ 120,000 per month on this route?

4. What qualitative factors should be considered by Springfield Express in making its decision about acquiring this route

case study 21 1 charles royston amp case study 21 2 jessica and david 496510

Case Study 21-1

Charles Royston was checking the year-end balances for his wood furniture manufacturing and retail
business and was concerned about the numbers. From what he remembered, his debts and accounts
receivable were higher than the previous year. Rather than get worked up over nothing, he
decided he would gather the information and make a comparison. For December 31, 2011, the business
had current assets of: $1,844 cash, $11,807 accounts receivable, and $9,628 inventory. Plant
and equipment totaled $158,700. Current liabilities were: accounts payable $13,446; wages payable
$650; and property and taxes payable $4,124. Long-term debt totaled $92,800 and owner’s equity
$70,959. By comparison, for December 31, 2010, the business had current assets of: $3,278 cash;
$6,954 accounts receivable; $17,417 inventory. Plant and equipment totaled $144,500. Current liabilities
were: accounts payable $9,250; wages payable $1,110; property and taxes payable $3,650.
Long-term debt totaled $75,800; and owner’s equity $82,339.

1. Construct a comparative balance sheet for Contemporary Wood Furniture for year-end 2010
and 2011, including a vertical and horizontal analysis of the comparative balance sheet.
Express percents to the nearest tenth of a percent.

2. Calculate the current ratio and the total debt to total assets ratio for 2010 and 2011.

3. Overall, what does your analysis mean? Is Charles correct to be concerned about these numbers? Explain.

Case Study 21-2

Jessica and David are student interns at Balanced Books Bookkeeping. They have taken several
business math and accounting classes and are now applying what they have learned to real-life situations.
They enjoy their internship, but they are sometimes surprised by the assignments they are
given. Luckily, they work together, so they share the assignments and learn from each other. Their
most recent assignment is to take a listing of accounts provided by one of Balanced Books’ clients
and turn them into a balance sheet and income statement. David suggests that their client might appreciate
it if they also performed a vertical analysis of each statement. Jessica suggests that they
should also compute the current ratio and the acid-test ratio.
1. Create the financial statements for December 31, 2011, depict them in vertical format, and
compute the current and acid test ratios.

Account title Amount Account title Amount
Cash $4,000 Accounts payable $3,500
Depreciation 2,000 Merchandise inventory 15,000
Carlton, equity 34,500 Accounts receivable 6,000
Cogs 85,000 Net sales 120,000
Rent expense 15,000 Insurance payable 500
Wages payable 1,500 Equipment 15,000
Utilities 6,500 Wages 8,000
Miscellaneous 1,500

Cogs = Cost of Goods Sold
Miscellaneous = Miscellaneous Expense

case study the department of motor vehicles budget 496512

Case Study: The Department of Motor Vehicles Budget
3 Pages Assignment

The Division of Motor Vehicles (DMV) is part of the State Department of Transportation (DOT). The purpose of that department is to ensure the safety and free flow of people and goods throughout the State by ensuring that there is a reliable system of transportation and motor vehicle services. This mission is accomplished by funding the maintenance of the existing transportation infrastructure, by adding to and improving the infrastructure, and by otherwise operating a transportation system that minimizes congestion and promotes safety and the economic growth of the State.

Among the key functions served by the DOT are:
driver licensing and insurance
vehicle inspection
bridge and highway construction and maintenance
public transit

The current year budget for the DOT is $874 million. Of that amount, $100 million is budgeted to be spent on the DMV, which has the following objectives:
to provide customer- friendly, efficient motor vehicle services;
to regulate drivers and motor vehicles to deter unlawful acts and protect the public safety;
to further protect public safety by identifying vehicle safety problems; and
to further protect the public by ensuring that all drivers carry insurance.
The state is currently preparing its budget for the new fiscal year, which runs from September 1, 2013, through August 31, 2014.

As the Director of the DMV, you are responsible for three major areas:
1. licensing, registration, and inspection of motor vehicles;
2. driver licensing; and
3. compulsory insurance.

A major issue for the coming year will be the overhaul of the driver s license program to include the latest enhanced digitized security technology. To cover this increased cost, the DMV is planning to charge $5 more for new drivers licenses and license renewals. This charge is not enough to fully cover the cost of the new licenses, but raising fees was a political hot potato during the last session of the state assembly, and the Governor would be reluctant to propose any further increase to that fee.

Another major initiative being planned for the DMV for the coming year is a centralized computer system to verify that all registered vehicles are insured. Once the system is in place, the DMV will be able to check insurance coverage not only when a vehicle is registered, but also when law enforcement officers stop a vehicle, when the vehicle has its biannual safety inspection, and at other times. The system will require an initial capital investment of $3 million, and operating costs of $1.50 per inquiry. It is expected that there will be 1.1 million uses of the system spread evenly during the coming year. None of the capital investment cost should be included as part of the operating budget for the coming year.

To comply with the state s 2011 Clean Air Act, the auto inspection program must be modified. The DMV has estimated that it will cost $7.2 million to equip the state vehicle testing centers with the necessary equipment for the new, stricter test. None of this cost will be part of the operating budget for the DMV.

During the coming year, the DMV expects to issue more licenses per month early in the year, as drivers try to avoid the extra cost and documentation requirements associated with the new higher security licenses. The DMV expects to issue 932,565 licenses using the old technology spread evenly throughout the first four months of the year, and 834,230 licenses using the new digitized technology spread evenly throughout the last eight months of the year.

There are expected to be 324,875 vision tests, 874,925 written driving tests, and 492,225 road tests in total for the year. These tests are expected to occur in the same proportion as the number of licenses issued each month. It is expected that there will be 926,600 vehicle registrations and 1,160,554 annual vehicle inspections, and these will occur evenly throughout the year. Note that the vehicle inspection number includes re-inspections for 185,320 vehicles that the DMV projects will fail their initial inspection.

The sources of revenue for the DMV are as follows:
auto license fees: $30 for the old style license and $35 for the new improved digitized license with all security features;
vehicle registration fees: $55 per vehicle registered, on average;
vehicle inspection fees: $50 for failing the inspection otherwise no fee. It is expected that 20 percent of the total number of vehicle registrations will result in inspection failures and re- inspections;
state appropriation for any balance not funded by fees (reimbursed in the next fiscal year, not the year for which you are preparing the budget); and
transportation trust fund for capital acquisitions.

The costs of running your department consist of personnel expenses, materials and supplies, and a variety of purchased services. Personnel costs have a fixed administrative component of $6.75 million per year that is not affected by the DMV s service volume. Administrators are paid evenly throughout the year. Other personnel costs average $2.25 per transaction, regardless of transaction type, including issuance of an auto license, vehicle registration, vehicle inspection, and administration of any type of test. Materials and supplies cost 35 cents ($.35) per transaction. These costs are incurred each month in direct relation to the number of transactions for the month. The $2.25 personnel and $.35 materials and supplies cost per transaction are not required for insurance inquiries. Other departmental overhead costs include heat, electricity, and rent. Those costs are fixed at $7.8 million, and are paid evenly throughout the year.

Additionally, the DMV contracts out for some of its services and pays outside contractors on the following fee schedule:
$17 per vehicle inspected
$2 per vision test
$5 per written test
$25 per license plate (only 30 percent of all vehicle registrations require new license plates)
$15 per driver s license (old style) and $42 per license (new digitized licenses)

The Director of the DOT is hoping the DOT s financial situation will allow for expanded subsidies of public transportation. As such, she is hoping that each division of the DOT will at least break even, if not show a profit. Although you realize that the DMV will receive a State subsidy to operate if needed, you know that your boss would be unhappy if such a subsidy is needed for your division.

Using a computer spreadsheet, prepare a budget for the DMV for the coming year, based on the information you currently have. Since you will have to undoubtedly make some adjustments in your budget, use formulas for your calculations. That way you will be able to make changes in your worksheet and easily calculate updated results. Specifically,

1. Prepare a monthly operating budget with full year totals for the DMV for the fiscal year ending August 31, 2014. Determine the operating surplus and deficit for each month and for the year as a whole. Use one page or worksheet in your spreadsheet to list all of the base information, another to calculate the number of transactions each month, and finally another for the operating budget.

2. To what do you attribute any changing surplus/deficit pattern during the year

3. What would happen to the overall deficit or surplus if the number of vehicles failing inspections increased from 20 percent to 25 percent? Keep in mind that vehicles must be re-inspected, so this would also increase the total number of inspections. Does this give the DMV a reason to make its standards tougher? Is this good policy

4. Going back to the baseline budget you prepared in response to Question #1 above, suppose the DMV can choose when to implement the new digitized licensing system.

a. What would happen to the finances of the DMV if the new licenses are implemented at the beginning of the year and issued throughout the year

b. What would happen if the new licenses are not implemented at all during the coming year? In either case, assume the total number of licenses issued for any month does not change. By the way, is the assumption that the total licenses issued will not change realistic? Why or why not? Describe how changing when the new licenses are implemented affects your baseline budget results

5. What two (2) other programmatic changes (besides changing when the new licenses are implemented, keeping the old licenses, and failing more vehicles during inspections) would you suggest that might help the DMV s budget situation? What are the advantages and disadvantages of the changes that you suggest? Create a worksheet showing the resulting budget if your recommended changes were adopted.

6. While the capital costs for various equipment were not required to be included in the operating budget that you prepared, you think that it is important for the Director to not lose sight of the capital expenditures associated with the DMV s various enhancements. You remember Professor mentioning that more information is better. Therefore, you have prepared and included a capital budget describing the capital assets that will be acquired as well as the financing sources available to pay for those assets.

the cash account for bravo bike co at may 1 2012 indicated a balance of 15 085 durin 496513

The cash account for Bravo Bike Co. at May 1, 2012, indicated a balance of $15,085. During May, the total cash deposited was $75,100 and checks written totaled $69,750. The bank statement indicated a balance of $25,460 on May 31. Comparing the bank statement, the canceled checks, and the accompanying memos with the records revealed the following reconciling items:

a. Checks outstanding totaled $11,360.

b. A deposit of $9,200, representing receipts of May 31, had been made too late to appear on the bank statement.

c. The bank had collected for Bravo Bike Co. $4,725 on a note left for collection. The face of the note was $4,500.

d. A check for $490 returned with the statement had been incorrectly charged by the bank as $940.

e. A check for $410 returned with the statement had been recorded by Bravo Bike Co. as $140. The check was for the payment of an obligation to Portage Co. on account.

f. Bank service charges for July amounted to $40.

g. A check for $1,100 from Elkhart Co. was returned by the bank because of insufficient funds.

Requirements:

1. Prepare a bank reconciliation as of May 31.

2. Journalize the necessary entries. The accounts have not been closed.

3. If a balance sheet were prepared for Bravo Bike Co. on May 31, 2012, what amount should be reported as cash?

cash budget 496514

Spears Limited is engaged in manufacturing of special component (KWQ 12) be used in for calculators. As a step towards reducing uncertainty over the financeneeds of the new business, the finance manager has asked you to prepare a cashbudget for Spears Ltd for the nine (9) months period from 1 January 2014 till 30September 2014.

You have collected some raw data from the concerned department heads and tabulated them as follows:

a) The following are sales for the nine month period are as follows:
Sales Forecast
Month Estimated Sales Units
January 250,000 February 255,000 March 264,000
April 290,000 May 315,000 June 340,000
July 365,000 August 270,000 September 257,000
The estimated selling price per special component is $5.00.

The collections for the above sales forecast are as follows:
i. Collection from customers within the month of sale = 10% ( deemed to becash sales)
ii. Collection from customers following the month of sale = 50%
iii. Collection from customers following the second month of sales = 30%
iv. 10% of the sales are estimated to become irrecoverable.

b) Direct materials are acquired one month prior to production and are paid thefollowing month of purchase. One special component (KWQ 12) uses 2 units ofdirect materials. The company keeps stock of 25% of the next monthsestimated sales.

Balance of direct materials as at 31 December 2013 amounts to 140,000 unitsof direct material at $0.25 per unit. There is no change in the cost directmaterial.

2

c) The Direct Labour cost is paid in the month when such costs are incurred.The number of hours estimated are as follows:

January February March April May June July August September
120,000 125,000 130,000 128,000 142,000 154,000 165,000 178,000 190,000
The company pays $1.50 per direct labour hour.

d) Operating Expenses are estimated to be $332,000 per month and this is paidend of the month in which it is incurred. Included in the operating expenses aredepreciation charges worth $15,000.

e) Income tax payments of $ 60,000 are due both in March and June 2014.

f) Spears Ltd s Cash on Hand on 31 December 2013 was $500,000

To receive full credit on this assignment, please show all workings, including

formulas and calculations used to arrive at the financial values.

Required:

Prepare the following budgets:

1) Sales [4.5 marks]

2) Direct Materials Purchase Budget [9 marks]

3) Direct Labour Budget [4.5 marks]

4) Prepare a monthly cash budget for Spears Ltd for the 9-month period ofJanuary to 30 September 2014. [20 marks]

cash distributions amp capital structure mcqs 496515

1. If investors prefer firms that retain most of their earnings, then a firm that wants to maximize its stock price should set a low payout ratio. A) True B) False

2. If a firm adopts a residual distribution policy, distributions are determined as a residual after funding the capital budget. Therefore, the better the firm’s investment opportunities, the lower its payout ratio should be. A) True B) False

3. Stock dividends and stock splits should, at least conceptually, have the same effect on shareholders wealth. A) True B) False

4. Blease Inc. has a capital budget of $625,000, and it wants to maintain a target capital structure of 60% debt and 40% equity. The company forecasts a net income of $475,000. If it follows the residual dividend policy, what is its forecasted dividend payout ratio? A) 40.61% B) 42.75% C) 45.00% D) 47.37% E) 49.74%

5. Becker Financial recently completed a 7-for-2 stock split. Prior to the split, its stock sold for $90 per share. If the total market value was unchanged by the split, what was the price of the stock following the split? A) $23.21 B) $24.43 C) $25.71 D) $27.00 E) $28.35

6. Different borrowers have different risks of bankruptcy, and bankruptcy is costly to lenders. Therefore, lenders charge higher rates to borrowers judged to be more at risk of going bankrupt. A) True B) False

7. A firm’s business risk is largely determined by the financial characteristics of its industry, especially by the amount of debt the average firm in the industry uses. A) True B) False

8. The trade-off theory states that the capital structure decision involves a tradeoff between the costs and benefits of debt financing. A) True B) False

9. Elephant Books sells paperback books for $7 each. The variable cost per book is $5. At current annual sales of 200,000 books, the publisher is just breaking even. It is estimated that if the authors’ royalties are reduced, the variable cost per book will drop by $1. Assume authors’ royalties are reduced and sales remain constant; how much more money can the publisher put into advertising (a fixed cost) and still break even? A) $600,000 B) $466,667 C) $333,333 D) $200,000 E) None of the above

10. Vu Enterprises expects to have the following data during the coming year. What is Vu’s expected ROE? Assets $200,000 Interest rate 8%D/A 65% Tax rate 40%EBIT $25,000 A) 12.51% B) 13.14% C) 13.80% D) 14.49% E) 15.21%

cash receipt and disbursements budget 496518

The Red Midget Company processes and distributes beans. The beans are packed in 1-pound plastic bags and sold to grocery chains for $0.50 each in boxes of 100 bags. Sales in February were 14,000 boxes and the firm anticipates selling 16,000 boxes during March. Typically 80% of the firms customers pay within the month of sale, 18% pay the month after and 2% are never collected.

The firm buys beans from local farmers. The farmers are paid $0.20 per pound, cash. Most of the processing is done automatically. Consequently, most ($80,000) of the firms facotry overhead is depreciation expense.

The firm advertises heavily and will publish $75,000 worth of advertisements in popular magazines during March. This is up frm Ferbuary s $60,000 for advertisements. The firm pays for 10% of its advertising in the month the advertisments are run and 90% the next month. Following are March’s budgeted Income Statement and Statement of Costs of Goods Manufactured and Sold. All costs and expenses are paid for an incurred unless specifically indicated otherwise above. The firm will begin March with a cash balance of $25,000 and pays a monthly dividend of $15,000 to the owners.

Budgeted Income Statement

Sales $800,000

Cost of Goods Sold $540,000

Gross Margin $260,000

Administrative Salaries $80,000

Sales Commissions $69,000

Advertising $75,000

Bad debt Expense $16,000

Operating Income $20,000

Budgeted Statement of Cost of Goods Manufactured and Sold

Beginning balance direct materials $20,000

Direct materials purchased $330,000

Materials Available for use $350,000

Ending Balance direct Materials $30,000

Direct materials used $320,000

Labor costs incurred $90,000

Overhead costs $115,000

Cost of goods manufactured $525,000

Beginning finished goods balance $45,000

Goods available for sale $570,000

Ending finished goods balance $30,000

Cost of goods sold $540,000

From the information provided, prepare a cash receipt and disbursements budget for March.

cash vs accrual financial statements 496520

Vera F. Lexible is interested in buying Donna s Aerobic Dance Studio (DADS). She has come to you for an explanation of the financial statements and to seek your advice about purchasing the business.

DADS has been operating for one year. The business is a sole proprietorship owned by Donna Prince. The business rents the building in which it operates, as well as the exercise equipment. As virtually all of the business transactions are in cash payments, Donna has maintained the accounting records on a cash basis. She prepared the following income statement and balance sheet from these cash records at year end, which she gave to Vera.
Statement of Receipts and Payments Revenue
Membership Fees $150,000
Membership Dues 60,000
$210,000
Expenses
Rent 18,000
Wages 57,000
Advertising 20,000
Miscellaneous 15,000 110,000
Net Income $100,000
Statement of Financial Position
Assets
Cash $25,000
Liabilities and Owner’s Equity
Donna Prince, Capital $25,000

Donna is offering to sell the business for the balance in her capital account, which she has calculated as $25,000. Vera is very enthusiastic and states, “How can I go wrong? I’ll be paying $25,000 to buy $25,000 cash, and I’ll be getting a very profitable business which generates large amounts of cash in the deal.”
In a meeting with you and Vera, Donna makes the following statement: “This business has been very good to me. In my first year of operations, I’ve been able to withdraw $75,000 in cash. Yet the business is still quite solvent – it has lots of cash and no debts”.
You ask Donna to explain the difference between membership fees and membership dues. She responds, “Donna s is an exclusive club. We cater only to members who join up for five years. This year, we sold 500 memberships as soon as we opened for business. Each membership requires the customer to pay a $300 fee (in cash) in advance and to pay membership dues of $10 per month for five years. I credited the advance payments to the Membership Fees revenue account and the $10 monthly payments to Membership Dues revenue. Note that all the revenue is hard cash – no `paper profits’ like you see in so many businesses. No members have dropped out, so Donna s should continue receiving dues from these people for another four years, thus assuring future profitability. Another beneficial factor is that the company hasn’t sold any new memberships in the last several months. Therefore, I think that the company could discontinue its advertising and further increase future profitability”.
Required:
Donna s financial statements were prepared on a cash basis, not an accrual accounting basis. Prepare an Income Statement and a Balance Sheet applying the concepts of accrual accounting.

castle company produces throw blankets that are popular holiday gifts standard varia 496521

Castle Company produces throw blankets that are popular holiday gifts. Standard variable costs relating to a single blanket are given below

Standard Quantity or Hours

Standard Price or Rate

Standard Cost

Direct materials

2.62 yards

$5 per yard

$?

Direct labor

1.35 DLH

$6.80 per DLH

$?

Variable manufacturing overhead

1.35 DLH

$2 per direct labor-hour

$?

Total standard cost

$?

Overhead is applied to production on the basis of direct labor hours. During March, 924 blankets were manufactured and sold.

Selected information related to the month s production is given below:

Materials Used

Direct Labor

Variable Manufacturing Overhead

Actual costs incurred

$11,500

$8,408

$3,100

Direct materials price variance

?

Actual

2,620 yards

1400 hours

Direct materials quantity variance

$1,000 U

Direct labor rate variance

?

Direct labor efficiency variance

?

Variable overhead rate variance

?

Variable overhead efficiency variance

?

*For this month s production of 924 blankets

Submit an Excel document with each tab labeled by item number in good form that demonstrates the following through your calculations:

1.What is the standard cost of a single blanket?

2.What was the actual cost per blanket produced during March?

3.What was the direct materials price variance for March?

4.What was the direct labor rate variance for March The direct labor efficiency variance?

5.What was the variable overhead rate variance for March The variable overhead efficiency variance?

castle company standard costing 496522

  • Castle Company

Castle Company produces throw blankets that are popular holiday gifts. Standard variable costs relating to a single blanket are given below:

Standard Quantity of Hours

Standard Price or Rate

Standard Cost

Direct materials

?

$5 per yard

$?

Direct labor

?

?

$?

Variable manufacturing overhead

?

$2 per direct labor-hour

$?

Total standard cost

$?

Overhead is applied to production on the basis of direct labor hours. During March, 924 blankets were manufactured and sold. Difference between standard and actual cost per blanket produced during March: $0.10 F.

Selected information related to the month s production is given below:

Materials Used

Direct Labor

Variable Manufacturing Overhead

Total standard cost allowed*

$12,100

$8,500

$2,500

Actual costs incurred

$11,500

?

$3,100

Direct materials price variance

?

Actual

?

1400 hours

Direct materials quantity variance

$1,000 U

Direct labor rate variance

?

Direct labor efficiency variance

?

Variable overhead rate variance

?

Variable overhead efficiency variance

?

*For this month s production of 924 blankets

Submit an Excel document with each tab labeled by item number in good form that demonstrates the following through your calculations:

  1. What is the standard cost of a single blanket?
  2. What was the actual cost per blanket produced during March?
  3. How many standard yards of material are required per blanket?
  4. What was the direct materials price variance for March?
  5. What is the standard direct labor rate per hour?
  6. What was the direct labor rate variance for March The direct labor efficiency variance?
  7. What was the variable overhead rate variance for March The variable overhead efficiency variance?
  8. Prepare a standard cost card for one blanket.

can you help me with this question with apa format and reference 496471

TYou are the manager of an accounting department and would like to hire another managerial accountant to focus on internal accounting. The CEO is not convinced that a managing accountant position is needed. Prepare a 1 2 page memo for the CEO on the following:

  • Explain the objectives and characteristics of an internal accounting system.
  • Include an explanation of the importance of this information to the company.
  • Include an explanation of ethics in business and the managerial accountant s role in upholding the code of ethics.

Grading Criteria

Percentage

Objectives and characteristics of an internal accounting system

35%

Importance of internal accounting information to the company

35%

Ethics in business and the managing accountant s role

30%

Please submit your assignment.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

can you help me with this question with apa format and reference 496472

There is a high school accounting intern working in your office for the summer. In the lunchroom, she overhears people talking about financial reporting and GAAP. She doesn’t really know what they are, so she asks you to explain them to her.

  • Explain what accountants are generally referring to when they talk about “financial reporting.”
  • Explain the generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP).
  • Explain the sources of GAAP.

Please submit your assignment.

The following grading criteria will apply to this assignment:

Grading Criteria

30%

Explain what is included in financial reporting.

40%

Explain the generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP).

30%

Explain the sources of GAAP.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

can you help me with this question with apa format and reference and in text citatio 496473

The owner of the company where you work finds out that you are majoring in accounting and she wants you to explain the corporate structure to her. She also wants to see why someone would want to invest in a corporation. She wants to better understand stock transactions that the corporation would engage in.

She wants you to:

  • Explain the corporate structure.
  • Select two companies in the same industry and find their financial statements for the last two years. Provide citations for all statements.
  • Compare the stockholder s equity between these two company’s financial statements.
  • Explain what kinds of stock transactions have taken place in the last two years.

Grading Criteria

15%

Explain the corporate structure.

15%

Select two companies in the same industry and find their financial statements for the last two years. Provide citations for all statements.

15%

Compare the stockholder s equity between these two company’s financial statements.

15%

Explain what kinds of stock transactions have taken place in the last two years.

20%

Additional research supporting the initial answer to the IP

20%

Justified ideas and responses by using appropriate examples or personal experience.

Please submit your assignment.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Course Materials

can you help me with this question with apa format and reference and in text citatio 496474

Consider the following scenario:

Andre has asked you to evaluate his business, Andre s Hair Styling. Andre has five barbers working for him. (Andre is not one of them.) Each barber is paid $9.90 per hour and works a 40-hour week and a 50-week year, regardless of the number of haircuts. Rent and other fixed expenses are $1,750 per month. Hair shampoo used on all clients is .40 per client. Assume that the only service performed is the giving of haircuts (including shampoo), the unit price of which is $12. Andre has asked you to find the following information.

1. Find the contribution margin per haircut. Assume that the barbers’ compensation is a fixed cost. Show calculations to support your answer.

2. Determine the annual break-even point, in number of haircuts. Support your answer with an appropriate explanation. Show calculations to support your answer.

3. What will be the operating income if 20,000 haircuts are performed? Show calculations to support your answer.

4. Suppose Andre revises the compensation method. The barbers will receive $4 per hour plus $6 for each haircut. What is the new contribution margin per haircut? What is the annual break-even point (in number of haircuts)? Show calculations to support your answer.

Grading Criteria

Percentage

Find the contribution margin per haircut.

25%

Determine the annual break-even point, in number of haircuts.

25%

What will be the operating income if 20,000 haircuts are performed?

25%

Suppose Andre revises the compensation method. The barbers will receive $4 per hour plus $6 for each haircut. What is the new contribution margin per haircut? What is the annual break-even point (in number of haircuts)?

25%

Please submit your assignment.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

can you help me with this question with apa format and reference and in text citatio 496475

Michelle Carroll is a coworker of yours and she overheard a conversation at work about changes that her boss wants to make in accounting for uncollectible accounts receivable. She does not know a lot about accounting and wants to understand about what she overheard.

In an email, she asks you to explain the following:

  • The three different methods that can be used to account for uncollectible accounts receivable, specifically:
    • percentage of receivables
    • percentage of sales
    • the direct write-off methods

Reply to her email about these differences.

Grading Criteria

25%

Explaining the percentage of receivables

25%

Explaining the percentage of sales

25%

Explaining the direct write-off method

15%

Additional research supporting the initial answer to the IP

10%

Justified ideas and responses by using appropriate examples or personal experience.

Please submit your assignment.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Course Materials

can you help me with this question with apa format and reference and in text citatio 496476

You are making a detailed analysis of the financial statements and accounting records of two companies: Adams Company and Bar Company. They are in the same industry, and price levels have been rising steadily for several years. In the course of your investigation, you observe that the inventory value shown on the Adams company balance sheet is quite close to the current replacement cost of the merchandise on hand. However, for Bar Company, the carrying value of the inventory is far below current replacement cost.

  • Discuss what method of inventory valuation is probably used by each company.
  • If we assume that the two companies are identical, except for the inventory valuation method used, Discuss which company has probably been reporting higher net income in recent years and how would you know.

Grading Rubric

50%

Basic response to the DB question

30%

Additional research supporting the initial answer to the DB question

20%

Comments which serve to further the discussion, apply real world example or lend to enhancing the clarity of the concepts

In your own words, please post a response to the Discussion Board and comment on at least two other postings. You will be graded on the quality of your postings.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Course Materials

can you help me with this question with apa format and reference and in text citatio 496477

You are making a detailed analysis of the financial statements and accounting records of two companies: Adams Company and Bar Company. They are in the same industry, and price levels have been rising steadily for several years. In the course of your investigation, you observe that the inventory value shown on the Adams company balance sheet is quite close to the current replacement cost of the merchandise on hand. However, for Bar Company, the carrying value of the inventory is far below current replacement cost.

  • Discuss what method of inventory valuation is probably used by each company.
  • If we assume that the two companies are identical, except for the inventory valuation method used, Discuss which company has probably been reporting higher net income in recent years and how would you know.

Grading Rubric

50%

Basic response to the DB question

30%

Additional research supporting the initial answer to the DB question

20%

Comments which serve to further the discussion, apply real world example or lend to enhancing the clarity of the concepts

In your own words, please post a response to the Discussion Board and comment on at least two other postings. You will be graded on the quality of your postings.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Course Materials

the canadian instruments company cic 496478

The Canadian Instruments Company (CIC) uses a decentralized form of organizational structure and considers each of its divisions as an investment center. The Toronto Division (TD) is currently selling 15,000 air filters annually, although it has sufficient productive capacity to produce 21,000 units per year. Variable manufacturing costs amount to $21 per unit, while the total fixed costs are $90,000. The 15,000 air filters are sold to outside customers at $40 per unit.

The Montreal Division (MD), also a part of CIC, has indicated that it would like to buy 1,500 air filters from TD, but only at a price of $37, since this is the price MD is currently paying to an outside supplier for a similar air filter. The company has a cost of capital of 7%.

Required:

a. What is the unit contribution margin for TD s sales to outsiders? What is the break-even point in units and sales dollars?
b. Will the new order push TD outside its relevant range? Why or why not?
c. What is the pre-tax effect on CIC s income if MD buys the 1,500 air filters internally from TD?
d. What is the minimum price that TD should be willing to accept for these 1,500 air filters?
e. What is the maximum price that MD should be willing to pay for these 1,500 air filters?
f. What qualitative factors should be considered in this type of decision, above and beyond any transfer price considerations?
g. Suppose that TD is currently producing and selling 21,000 air filters annually to outside customers. What would be the effect on overall CIC income if TD was required by executive management to sell 1,500 air filters to MD at the $37 per unit price?
h. For this part only, assume that TD is currently earning annual operating income of $36,000, and TD s average invested capital is $300,000. The division manager has an opportunity to invest in a proposal that will require an additional investment of $20,000 and will increase annual operating income by $2,000. What is the impact of this project on TD s overall ROI?

candy cain s candy company 496479

On January1, 2013, Candy Cain s Candy Company, a company that produces candy for specific events and holidays for large corporations, is solely owned by Candace Cain had the following account balances in their general ledger (see attached page of T-accounts):

During the month of January, the company engaged in the following transactions:

Jan 2 Received $3,600 cash from customers as payment on account.

Paid $5,000 towards a new vehicle that costs $30,000. The remainder was borrowed from the bank.

5 Candace deposited a dividend check of $500 into her personal account.

9 Payday—employees are paid a total of $3,200 for a two-week, 8 hours a day, 5 days a week work schedule; some of which is for work performed in December. (HINT: Look in the General Ledger)

12 Candy Cain s Candy Company received $12,000 cash from customers for services to be rendered in April.

13 Paid $600 for six months of ads in the Candytime a magazine for candy makers, with ads to be run monthly, starting this month

14 Purchased an insurance policy that covered the company for two years, $7,200.

15 Purchased supplies on account, $3,000.

16 Recorded serviced rendered on account of $15,000.

20 Received $6,000 from Mardi Gras Parties, Inc. for services rendered.

21 Paid for 80% of the CURRENT balance in Accounts Payable.

22 Received $10,000 from customers on account.

23 Payday employees are paid a total of $3,200.

28 Paid $300 utility bill for January; Paid landlord, who raised the rent starting February 1 to $750.

29 A new employee was hired to help with the marketing of products. She starts on February 1st, she will be making $1,500 per week working Monday through Friday

31 Candace received $5,000 from the company as a dividend in lieu of salary.

Step-by-step through the accounting cycle:

Write journal entries for each transaction listed above on notebook paper: This is your General Journal.

Post each transaction to the ledger, checking off each entry as you enter it into the ledger

After all entries are posted, then strike a balance in each account. Each one should have its normal balance.

Prepare an unadjusted trial balance on the worksheet provided to test DR = CR (follow model in Chapter 4 or in lecture notes) recording only the DR or CR balances for each account. If DR don t = CR, find your errors. This should total $128,153 and the Cash balance should be $5,103.

Prepare adjusting entries in the General Journal at the end of January. Note that the problem is based on the actual calendar for January 2009. Some useful information follows:

1) Depreciation is for the month is $433.

2) Unearned Fees at January 31 are $10,000.

3) Supplies on hand at the end of January total $2,200.

4) Prepaid Insurance balance includes a policy that expires $400 per month.

5) Record accrued salaries for one last week of January 31.

6) Record the expiration of one month of insurance on the new policy.

7) Accrue interest on the note payable of $250.

8) Adjust for expired rent

9) Adjust for advertising services received.

Be sure to SHOW CALCULATIONS for these!!! Round to nearest dollar!

Record the adjusting entries in the adjustments columns on the worksheet and also post them to the General Ledger. Strike new balances in the accounts in the GL.

Then add/subtract the adjustments as appropriate from the unadjusted trial balance to the adjusted trial balance (are these amounts the same as the balances you found in the ledger in part f.?) Follow model provided in the text.

Test to see if DR = CR in the Adjusted Trial Balance columns on the worksheet. If not, find your errors.

Sort amounts out from the adjusted TB to appropriate columns (Income Statement and Balance Sheet) on the worksheet. Find balances in each column. Do DR = CR here? And why not However, is the difference between the two sets of columns the same? (It should be equal to $9,717)

Prepare three financial statements: Income, Statement of Owner s Equity, and Balance Sheet in GOOD FORM. Use examples in the textbook.

Now write all necessary closing entries in your General Journal and post them to the General Ledger

Finally prepare a Post-Closing Trial Balance (see Blackboard Course Materials for an example) to test the accuracy of the journalizing/posting of the closing entries.

canyon drilling inc 496480

Canyon Drilling, Inc. has just come under new management. One of the first things the new management wants to accomplish is to identify its capital structure and the cost of additional funding, if needed.

According to the accounting department, the current balance sheet is accurate and reflects the financial structure of the company. They have also calculated the marginal tax rate to be 40%. The company s beta is currently 1.15.

Your Chief Financial Officer, Marge, has also provided you the following information about the market and the company s financials:

Company Specifics

Debt:

3,600 par value ($1,000) bonds outstanding. All have a 7% coupon, and will mature in 20 years. Market value is currently $1,050 and interest is paid once a year.

Equity:

Common Stock

The company has 40,000 shares of common stock outstanding, and has a market price of $50 per share. The stock last paid a dividend of $1.40 and had a constant growth of 5% per year.

Preferred Stock

The company has 7,500 shares of 5% preferred stock outstanding. All have $100 par value and are selling for $80 per share.

Floatation costs: Debt = 4%, Equity = 5%

Market Specifics

Market risk premium = 7%

Risk free rate = 4%
Return on the average stock = 11%

Required:
Assuming the same capital structure is to be maintained, what is the optimal capital structure for Canyon Drilling?
What is the component cost of capital for the firm?
Calculate Canyon Drilling s after tax weighted average cost of capital, using the information above.

Deliverables:
In an executive summary of 3 to 5 pages, submit your findings from the above-noted requirements in a Microsoft Word or Excel document to the W2: Assignment 2 Dropbox, by Tuesday, November 5, 2013. Use an MS Excel document to illustrate your calculations.

cap inc solution 496481

Cap Inc. acquired 100% of the voting common stock of Decker Inc. on January 1, year 1. The book value and fair value of Decker’s land account on that date (prior to creating the combination) follow, along with the book value of Cap’s land accounts:
Cap’s book value $280,000
Decker’s book value $220,000
Decker’s fair value $240,000
Assume that Cap issued 12,000 shares of common stock with a $5 par value and a $42 fair value for all of the outstanding stock of Decker. What is the consolidated balance for Land as a result of this acquisition transaction?
520,000 OR 280,000 OR 0, Or 500,000

Dividends received are reported as revenue under the investment account when using the equity method.
TRUE OR FALSE
Cap Co. paid cash for all of the voting common stock of Decker Corp. Decker will continue to exist as a separate corporation. Entries for the consolidation of Cap and Decker would be recorded in
Decker’s general journal
Cap’s general journal
the worksheet
Both Cap’s and Decker’s general journal
A partnership is insolvent and will be unable to pay $30,000 in liabilities currently due. The partnership’s creditors may seek remuneration from any partner they choose.
TRUE OR FALSE
The Schedule of Liquidation provides a listing of transactions to date, current cash, and capital balances.
TRUE OR FALSE
Under the current rate method, common stock would be translated at what rate?
Average rate OR HISTORICAL RATE OR CURRENT RATE OR Beginning of the year rate
In translating a foreign subsidiary’s financial statements, which exchange rate does the current method require for the subsidiary’s assets and liabilities?
the exchange rate in effect as of the balance sheet date
the exchange rate in effect when each asset or liability was acquired
the exchange rate in effect at the start of the current year
the average exchange rate for the current year
The dissolution of a partnership occurs when there is any change in the individuals who make up the partnership
TRUE OR FALSE
In accounting, the term translation refers to
the procedure required to identify a company’s functional currency
a procedure to prepare a foreign subsidiary’s financial statements for consolidation
the calculation of gains or losses from hedging transactions
the calculation of exchange rate gains or losses on individual transactions in foreign currencies
What is a company’s functional currency?
THEe currency of the primary economic environment in which it operates
the currency of the country where it has its headquarters
the currency in which it prepares its financial statements
the currency it chooses to designate as such

capabilities of the internet that have made it more difficult for companies to captu 496482

1) Capabilities of the Internet that have made it more difficult for companies to capture profits

include all of the following except:

a. the Internet makes information widely available.

b. the Internet reduces the difficulty of purchasing, marketing, and distribution.

c. the Internet allows buyers and sellers to find and transact business with one another

more easily.

d. the Internet makes it easier to make secure payments.

2) All of the following are situations when a business plan should be done except:

a. when an existing business is deploying a CRM system.

b. when a new business is seeking start-up funds and other resources.

c. when an existing company is planning to create a separate division.

d. when an existing company is planning to launch the company in a new direction.

3) The most efficient way to expand an organization s scope is _____________.

a. to introduce new products or services into new or existing markets without increasing

production facilities or staff.

b. by increasing the size or scale of the business.

c. by expanding the firm s appeal to a new set of customers.

d. to buy a company with complementary products or services.

4) _____________ are the hottest applications in today s business environment.

a. Virtual worlds

b. Rich media

c. Social networking technologies

d. Online brands

5) All of the following determine the degree of collaboration between offline and online activities in a business except:

a. corporate culture.

b. the ability of top management to introduce change properly.

c. the pricing strategy.

d. the use of innovative processes that support collaboration.

6) The ____________ pricing strategy means adding up all the costs involved, such as material,

labor, rent, overhead, and so forth and adding a percentage mark-up as profit.

a. cost-plus

b. competitor model

c. revenue markup

d. price percentage

7) Implementing EC often requires significant investments in infrastructure. Therefore, a good way to start is to undertake ____________.

a. a large, non-trivial EC project

b. one or a few small EC pilot projects

c. a multi-divisional EC project

d. a single division EC project

8) A ________ is a form of business alliance composed of several business partners that share the costs and resources for the development or production of a product or service.

a. temporary corporation

b. supply chain

c. virtual corporation

d. co-opetition

9) With the balanced scorecard approach, the term balance arises because the combined set of

measures is supposed to encompass indicators that are all of the following except:

a. core and non-core.

b. financial and nonfinancial.

c. leading and lagging.

d. quantitative and qualitative.

10) The relationship between EC investment and organizational performance is _____________.

a. direct

b. indirect

c. shared with other investments

d. not measurable

11) The New York Metropolitan Transit Authority (MTA) did not need to open another airport for

almost two decades, even though air traffic had tripled because of productivity gains derived

from improved IT systems. IT systems added by the MTA played critical roles in ticket

reservations, passenger and luggage check-in, crew assignment and scheduling, runway

maintenance and management, and gate assignments. This case illustrates that ___________.

a. intangible benefits can be complex, yet substantial

b. tangible benefits can be complex, yet substantial

c. tangible costs can be high, yet payoffs can be achieved quickly

d. intangible costs can be high, yet payoffs can be achieved quickly

12) Justifying information security projects _____________.

a. is not needed because it is well-known that preventing network security problems is less

labor intensive than cleaning up virus infections.

b. is not done because ROI calculators are not available.

c. should focus on defending against external threats such as hackers and malware.

d. should be done because employee security training is usually poorly done.

13) The average-cost curves (AVC) of physical products and digital products are ____________.

a. different because the AVC of digital products declines as quantity increases forming

L-shape, while the AVC of physical products is U-shaped.

b. both U-shaped.

c. both L-shaped.

d. different because the AVC of physical products declines as quantity increases

forming an L-shape, while the AVC of digital products is U-shaped.

14) All of the following apply to EC in developing economies except:

a. developing economies often face power blackouts and unreliable infrastructure and

delivery mechanisms creating limitations that make it difficult for firms to predict

whether EC investments will pay off and when.

b. developing economies, such as China and India, represent a significant opportunity for

EC to connect businesses to customers, as well as other businesses.

c. developing economies struggle with various issues that create too many business and

technology risks to justify investment in those economies at this time.

d. the potential volume of transactions in developed countries can make EC investments

more attractive for established firms than new firms because established firms have

already recovered the costs of their IT infrastructures.

15) As a company moves to incorporate an online presence with its traditional brick-and-mortar

operation, it adds the costs related to training for all personnel in the capabilities of the EC

system and a new advertising campaign to announce its new site to the costs directly

associated with building the new Web presence. In this case, training and advertising are

examples of ____________.

a. transaction costs

b. complementary investments

c. direct costs

d. indirect costs

16) The greatest difficulty in dealing with venture capital is _____________.

a. the loss of control a venture capitalist demands.

b. finding a willing venture capitalist.

c. finding the money a venture capitalist will require.

d. relocating the business to an incubator.

17) The concept of consistency in Website design includes making sure that _____________.

a. webpages look the same no matter which browser a customer is using.

b. all visitors consistently find what they are looking for.

c. the messages sent to customers who contact the company are consistent.

d. customers are treated consistently when they contact customer service.

18) One of the first decisions to be made in building a Website is _____________.

a. the domain name.

b. whether to provide personalized content.

c. how to protect the Website from hackers.

d. who will host it.

19) Banks are more selective about who gets an account for accepting credit cards online because

______________.

a. dot com failures have made banks less willing to work with online companies

b. CNP transactions are less secure and riskier

c. fees are higher for online processing

d. online transactions do not produce much revenue for banks

20) Before choosing the appropriate Website development option, you need to consider all of the

following issues in order to generate a list of requirements and capabilities except:

a. Who are the target customers?

b. What kinds of products or services will the business sell online?

c. Can customers place orders online?

d. What might be the reaction of competitors?

21) Having control over the collection, storage, and dissemination of personal information is

included in the category of _____________.

a. property

b. rights

c. duties

d. privacy

22) A music company can file a _____________ against YouTube and MySpace for any interference with the ability to profit from its IP or for profiting from the recording industry s property without authorization and compensation.

a. criminal charge

b. negligence charge

c. nuisance charge

d. lawsuit or civil charge

23) Section 5 of the FTC Act does each of the following except:

a. prohibits unfair or deceptive EC practices.

b. gives the FTC authority to take action against companies whose lax security practices

could expose customers financial information to theft or loss.

c. protects privacy.

d. requires monitoring of employees e-mail.

24) Companies can improve their responsibility as custodians of customers personal data by

implementing _____________.

a. opt-in and opt-out information practices

b. AUP

c. e-mail monitoring

d. firewalls

25) The _____________ gives law enforcement agencies broader range in their efforts to protect the public.

a. American Civil Liberties Union (ACLU)

b. Electronic Freedom Foundation (EFF)

c. U.S. Department of Justice (DOJ)

d. USA PATRIOT Act

the capital asset pricing model 496483

The Capital Asset Pricing Model


1. For each of the scenarios below, explain whether or not it represents a diversifiable or an undiversifiable risk. Please consider the issues from the viewpoint of investors. Explain your reasoning

a. A large fire severely damages three major U.S. cities.

b. A substantial unexpected rise in the price of oil.

c. A major lawsuit is filed against one large publicly traded corporation.

2. Use the CAPM to answer the following questions:

a. Find the Expected Rate of Return on the Market Portfolio given that the Expected Rate of Return on Asset “i” is 10%, the Risk-Free Rate is 3%, and the Beta (b) for Asset “i” is 1.5.

b. Find the Risk-Free Rate given that the Expected Rate of Return on Asset “j” is 14%, the Expected Return on the Market Portfolio is 12%, and the Beta (b) for Asset “j” is 1.5.

c. What do you think the Beta ( ) of your portfolio would be if you owned half of all the stocks traded on the major exchanges Explain.

3. In one page explain what you think is the main ‘message’ of the Capital Asset Pricing Model to corporations and what is the main message of the CAPM to investors?

two-page report. Please show your work for quantitative questions and references

capital budgeting case 496484

Your company is thinking about acquiring another corporation. You have two choices the cost of each choice is $250,000. You cannot spend more than that, so acquiring both corporations is not an option. The following are your critical data:

Corporation A

Revenues = $100,000 in year one, increasing by 10% each year

Expenses = $20,000 in year one, increasing by 15% each year

Depreciation expense = $5,000 each year

Tax rate = 25%

Discount rate = 10%

Corporation B

Revenues = $150,000 in year one, increasing by 8% each year

Expenses = $60,000 in year one, increasing by 10% each year

Depreciation expense = $10,000 each year

Tax rate = 25%

Discount rate = 11%

Compute and analyze items (a) through (d) using a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. Make sure all calculations can be seen in the background of the applicable spreadsheet cells. In other words, leave an audit trail so others can see how you arrived at your calculations and analysis. Items (a) through (d) should be submitted in Microsoft Excel ; indicate your recommendation (e) in the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet; the paper stated in item (f) should be submitted consistent with APA guidelines.

a.A 5-year projected income statement

b.A 5-year projected cash flow

c.Net present value (NPV)

d.Internal rate of return (IRR)

e.Based on items (a) through (d), which company would you recommend acquiring?

capital project case study 496487

Assignment, read the Capital Project Case Study: Part 1. Then, use the data provided in the Capital Project Case Study: Part 2 to perform an analysis of a capital investment project.

Capital Project Case Study, Part 1

This case study considers the expected costs and benefits to a managed care organization resulting from a decision to design a centralized nurse triage line. This triage line would assist routine primary care patients to provide self-care and/or seek urgent care in lieu of seeking more expensive care after-hours in the emergency room.

Summary
Jiranna Healthcare owns and operates a 268-bed hospital in the San Jose area. The hospital is Jiranna Healthcare s main facility and is home to more than 80 on-site specialty and surgery clinics, employing over 5,000 staff. In addition to the main hospital, Jiranna Healthcare has 18 satellite clinics, containing primary care services such as pediatrics, family medicine, and geriatric health. These facilities (hospital plus outlying clinics) serve a total enrollee population of 97,000.

Currently, Jiranna Healthcare s centralized call center schedules primary care appointments and handles an average of 1,500 to 2,000 calls daily with a staff of 20. Patients routinely have difficulty obtaining access to urgent or acute care (primary care) in a timely fashion. Additionally, the majority of Jiranna Healthcare s primary care centers are unable to meet access standards in three out of four cases. These access issues have a secondary effect on the call center, which experiences a much higher call rate because members have to call back multiple times to find available appointments. The existing process leads to overutilization of emergency departments for urgent care and primary care concerns. In addition, patient satisfaction has steadily declined as a result of the continued lack of appointment availability.
To address this problem, there is a proposal to implement a centralized nurse triage line, an off-site phone center that would be staffed by registered nurses with a multitude of specialties (including ER nurses, critical care, surgical, and even some nurse practitioners). These nurses are able to offer callers medical advice encompassing the treatment of fevers, wound care, and emergent conditions such as chest pain. The nurses are trained to triage conditions to the appropriate level of care be that at home, at an urgent care center, or at an emergency department.
The major cost impact is the increased salary requirement for the phone center staff, which will entail approximately 33 multi-discipline employees, based on workload and enrollment data. Additional elements of the proposal include hiring an IT specialist to manage the triage line s computer system, and facility renovations. The main benefit of this proposal is projected cost reductions in patient care as a result of moving primary care out of the expensive emergency-room setting.

Assignment
The Capital Project Case Study, Part 2 spreadsheet provides cash flow data (costs and benefits) for the proposal. Download and save this Excel spreadsheet, and use the information provided to complete the following:

1. Determine the cash inflows and outflows for each year.
2. Evaluate the capital project by calculating the following metrics:
a. net present value (NPV)
b. internal rate of return (IRR)
c. modified internal rate of return (MIRR)
d. payback period
e. discounted payback period
3. Indicate whether the project is acceptable, assuming Jiranna has a corporate policy of not accepting projects that take more than 3.5 years to pay for themselves, and assuming an 11% cost of capital.

Capital Project Case Study: Part 2

Year 0 Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5
Nurse Triage Salaries $ 523,800 $ 549,990 $ 577,490 $ 606,364 $ 636,682 $ 668,516
Forecasted ER aCost Reductions $ 400,000 $ 800,000 $ 848,000 $ 900,577 $ 955,512 $ 1,013,798
New IT Specialist’s Salary
$ 150,000 $ 154,500 $ 159,135 $ 163,909 $ 168,826 $ 173,891
Costs of Facility Renovations $ 30,000 $ – $ – $ – $ – $ –
Necessary Capital Equipment Purchases $ 117,000 $ 3,510 $ 3,510 $ 3,510 $ 3,510 $ 3,510
Net Cash Flow:
Present Values of Net Cash Flows:
Net Present Value:
IRR:
MIRR:
Payback Period (# XXXXX):
Discounted Payback Period (# XXXXX):

carlos company purchases 30 000 of equipment on january 1 2011 the equipment is expe 496491

Carlos Company purchases $30,000 of equipment on January 1, 2011. The equipment is expected to last five years and be worth $5,000 at the end of that time. Prepare the entry to record one year s depreciation expense of $5,000 for the equipment as of December 31, 2011.

  • To record depreciation expense for the year.
Event General Journal Debit Credit
a.

carmack company has credit sales of 2 6 million for the year 2011 on december 31 201 496492

Carmack Company has credit sales of 2.6 million for the year 2011. On December 31, 2011, the company’s Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has an unadjusted credit balance of $13,400. Carmack prepares a schedule of it’s December 31, 2011, accounts receivable by age. On the basis of past experience, it estimates the percent of receivables in each age category that will become uncollectible. This information is summarized here.

December 31, 2011 Age of Accounts Receivable Expected Percent Uncollectible

$730,000 Not yet due 1.25%

354,000 1 to 30 days past due 2.00

76,000 31 to 60 days past due 6.50

48,000 61-90 days past due 32.75

12,000 Over 90 days past due 68.00

Required

1. Estimate the required balance of the allowance for doubtful accounts at December 31, 2011, using the ading of accounts receivable method.

2. Prepare the adjusting entry to record bad debts expenses at December 31, 2011

ANALYSIS COMPONET

3. On June 30, 2012 Carmack Company concludes that a customer’s $3,750 receivable (created in 2011) is uncollectable and that the account should be written off. What effect will this action have on Carmack’s 2012 net income? Explain

CHECK (2) Dr. Bad Debts Expense $31,625

carmen s household appliances carries an inventory of clocks and other household ite 496493

Carmen s Household Appliances carries an inventory of clocks and other household

items. The business began the second quarter of 2013 with 15 clocks (Lomani Quartz Brand)

at a total cost of $36,000. The following transactions, relating to the clocks (Lomani Quartz

Brand), took place during the quarter:

April 5 Purchased 30 clocks at a cost of $2,490 each.

April 30 The sales for April were 18 clocks which yielded total sales revenue of

$81,000.

May 1 A new batch of 15 clocks was purchased on account at a cost of $2,250 each.

These units attracted an additional shipping cost of $350 on each clock. It is

customary for Carmen s Household Appliances to include freight-in as part

of the cost of the units in their inventory record.

May 16 Upon inspection, five (5) of the clocks purchased on May 1 were found to be

badly soiled and were returned to the supplier.

May 30 During the month 20 clocks were sold at a price of $5,000 each.

June 2 Ariana Stone, a customer to whom 5 clocks were sold at the close of business

on May 30th, returned 2 of the clocks, as she had purchased an incorrect

quantity.

June 12 To meet the increased demand for the commodity, a further 14 clocks were

purchased at a cost of $3,000 each, however a trade discount of 5% was

received on each clock.

June 30 22 clocks were sold during June at a unit selling price of $5,300.

June 30 A physical count of inventory was carried out at the close of business, which

revealed that there were only 8 clocks on hand.

All purchases were received on the dates stated and Carmen s Household Appliances uses the

FIFO method to account for inventory.

Required:

i) Prepare a perpetual inventory ledger card for clocks (Lomani Quartz Brand),

clearly showing the value of ending inventory at June 30th, 2013, and the total amount

to be assigned to cost of goods sold for the period. (20 marks)

ii) Given that marketing & selling and administrative costs for the quarter were $16,550

and $23,710 respectively, prepare an income statement for Carmen s Household

Appliances for the period, to determine the profit earned on the Lomani Quartz

clocks. (6 marks)

iii) You are told that 8 of the clocks sold on May 30th, 2013 were on account. State the

journal entries necessary to record the transactions on May 1

st and May 30th , assuming

the company uses a:- Periodic inventory system

– Perpetual inventory system (8 marks)

iv) Assuming that the business used the average cost method, what would be the value of

the units sold on April 30? (Show all workings to explain your answer) (3 marks)

v) Briefly explain the impact of inflation on ending inventory, cost of goods sold and gross

profit under both the FIFO and LIFO methods of inventory valuation. (3 marks)

carpet company accounting problem 496494

Fill in the Excel spreadsheet provided via the link below to provide your answers to parts a, and b. Then paste the Excel data into a Word document on which you can also write the answer to part c.

cash_flows.xlsx

Label each exercise or problem clearly. Use APA formatting and citation if needed.

The Carpet Company’s 2009 and 2010 balance sheets included the following items:
December 31
2010 2009
Debits
Cash………………………………………………………………………………… $10,500 $ 4,000
Accounts receivable……………………………………………………………….. 8,000 9,000
Merchandise inventory……………………….. …………………………………. 21,000 18,000
Equipment……………………………………………………………………………. 18,000 15,000
Totals………………………………………………………………………… $57,500 $46,000

Credits
Accumulated depreciation, equipment………………………………………. $ 4,000 $ 3,000
Accounts payable…………………………………………………………………… 7,000 5,000
Taxes payable……………………………………………………………………….. 1,000 2,000
Dividends payable………………………………………………………………….. 1,500 0
Common stock, $10 par value…………………………………………………… 27,000 25,000
Contributed capital in excess of par, common stock………………………. 6,000 5,000
Retained earnings………………………………………………………………….. 11,000 6,000
Totals………………………………………………………………………… $57,500 $46,000
The Carpet Company’s income statement was as follows:

CARPET COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010
Sales………………………………………………………………………………… $61,000
Cost of goods sold………………………………………………………………….. $40,000
Wages and other operating expenses………………………………………… 6,300
Income taxes expense……………………………………………………………. 4,200
Depreciation expense…………………………………………………………….. 1,500 52,000
Net income…………………………………………………………………………… $ 9,000
Required:

Additional information includes the following:

Equipment costing $3,500 was purchased during the year.
Fully depreciated equipment that cost $500 was discarded and its cost and accumulated depreciation were removed from the accounts.
Two hundred shares of stock were sold and issued at $15 per share.
The company declared $4,000 of cash dividends and paid $2,500.
Required:

Prepare the statement of cash flow under the direct method for the year ended December 31, 2010.
Prepare the statement of cash flow under the indirect method for the year ended December 31, 2010.
Provide a statement between 200 and 300 words in length for senior management. The topic is the status of the company based on cash flow.

the carpet company 039 s 496495

The Carpet Company’s 2009 and 2010 balance sheets included the following items:
December 31
2010 2009
Debits
Cash………………………………………………………………………………… $10,500 $ 4,000
Accounts receivable……………………………………………………………….. 8,000 9,000
Merchandise inventory……………………….. …………………………………. 21,000 18,000
Equipment……………………………………………………………………………. 18,000 15,000
Totals………………………………………………………………………… $57,500 $46,000

Credits
Accumulated depreciation, equipment………………………………………. $ 4,000 $ 3,000
Accounts payable…………………………………………………………………… 7,000 5,000
Taxes payable……………………………………………………………………….. 1,000 2,000
Dividends payable………………………………………………………………….. 1,500 0
Common stock, $10 par value…………………………………………………… 27,000 25,000
Contributed capital in excess of par, common stock………………………. 6,000 5,000
Retained earnings………………………………………………………………….. 11,000 6,000
Totals………………………………………………………………………… $57,500 $46,000
The Carpet Company’s income statement was as follows:

CARPET COMPANY
Income Statement
For the Year Ended December 31, 2010
Sales………………………………………………………………………………… $61,000
Cost of goods sold………………………………………………………………….. $40,000
Wages and other operating expenses………………………………………… 6,300
Income taxes expense……………………………………………………………. 4,200
Depreciation expense…………………………………………………………….. 1,500 52,000
Net income…………………………………………………………………………… $ 9,000
Required:

Additional information includes the following:

Equipment costing $3,500 was purchased during the year.
Fully depreciated equipment that cost $500 was discarded and its cost and accumulated depreciation were removed from the accounts.
Two hundred shares of stock were sold and issued at $15 per share.
The company declared $4,000 of cash dividends and paid $2,500.
Required:

Prepare the statement of cash flow under the direct method for the year ended December 31, 2010.
Prepare the statement of cash flow under the indirect method for the year ended December 31, 2010.
Provide a statement between 200 and 300 words in length for senior management. The topic is the status of the company based on cash flow.

calculate the finished goods inventory for the 12 31 01 balance sheet calculate the 496444

Finlon Upholstery Inc. uses a job-order costing system to accumulate manufacturing costs. The company’s work-in-process on December 31, 2001, consisted of one job (no. 2077), which was carried on the year-end balance sheet at $156,800. There was no finished-goods inventory on this date.

Finlon applies manufacturing overhead to production on the basis of direct-labor cost. (The budgeted direct-labor cost is the company’s practical capacity, in terms of direct-labor hours multiplied by the budgeted direct-labor rate.) Budgeted totals for 2002 for direct labor and manufacturing overhead are $4,200,000 and $5,460,000, respectively. Actual results for the year are as follows:

Actual Results
Direct Materials Used $5,600,000.00
Direct Labor $4,350,000.00
Indirect Material Used $65,000.00
Indirect Labor $2,860,000.00
Factory Depreciation $1,740,000.00
Factory Insurance $59,000.00
Factory Utilities $830,000.00
Selling and Administrative Expenses $2,160,000.00
Total $17,664,000.00

Job No. 2077 was completed in January 2002 and there was no work in process at year-end. All jobs produced during 2002 were sold with the exception of Job No. 2143, which contained direct-material costs of $156,000 and direct-labor charges of $85,000. The company charges any under- or over-applied overhead to the cost of goods sold category.

Using the above information, do the following:

  • Calculate the company s predetermined overhead application rate.
  • Calculate the additions to the work-in-process inventory account for the direct material used, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.
  • Calculate the finished-goods inventory for the 12/31/01 balance sheet.
  • Calculate the over-applied or under-applied overhead at year end.
  • Explain if it is appropriate to include selling and administrative expenses in the cost of goods sold category.

calculating cost 496446

Assignment 2: Calculating Cost

Ontario, Inc. manufactures two products, Standard and Enhanced, and applies overhead on the basis of direct-labor hours. Anticipated overhead and direct-labor time for the upcoming accounting period is $800,000 and 25,000 hours, respectively. Information about the company’s products follows.

Standard: Enhanced:

Estimated production volume

3,000 units 4,000 units

Direct-material cost

$25 per unit $40 per unit

Direct labor per unit

3 hours at $12 per hour 4 hours at $12 per hour

Ontario’s overhead of $800,000 can be identified with three major activities: order processing ($150,000), machine processing ($560,000), and product inspection ($90,000). These activities are driven by number of orders processed, machine hours worked, and inspection hours, respectively.

Data relevant to these activities follow:

Orders Processed Machine Hours Worked Inspection Hours

Standard

300 18,000 2,000

Enhanced

200 22,000 8,000

Total

500 40,000 10,000

Top management is very concerned about declining profitability despite a healthy increase in sales volume. The decrease in income is especially puzzling because the company recently undertook a massive plant renovation during which new, highly automated machinery was installed machinery that was expected to produce significant operating efficiencies.

Using a Microsoft Excel format for calculations, complete the following:

  • Assuming use of direct-labor hours to apply overhead to production, calculate the unit manufacturing costs of the standard and enhanced products if the expected manufacturing volume is attained.
  • Assuming the use of activity-based costing, calculate the unit manufacturing cost of the standard and enhanced products if the expected manufacturing volume is attained.
  • Ontario s selling price is based heavily on cost:
    • Calculate which product is over cost and which is under cost by using direct-labor hours as an application base.
    • Explain if it is possible that this over costing and under costing is responsible for the profit issues the company is facing.
  • Illustrate how the solution will change if the following data changes:
    • The overhead associated with order processing is $300,000 and the overhead associated with product inspection is $270,000.

calculating cost 496447

Assignment 2: Calculating Cost

Ontario, Inc. manufactures two products, Standard and Enhanced, and applies overhead on the basis of direct-labor hours. Anticipated overhead and direct-labor time for the upcoming accounting period is $800,000 and 25,000 hours, respectively. Information about the company’s products follows.

Standard: Enhanced:

Estimated production volume

3,000 units 4,000 units

Direct-material cost

$25 per unit $40 per unit

Direct labor per unit

3 hours at $12 per hour 4 hours at $12 per hour

Ontario’s overhead of $800,000 can be identified with three major activities: order processing ($150,000), machine processing ($560,000), and product inspection ($90,000). These activities are driven by number of orders processed, machine hours worked, and inspection hours, respectively.

Data relevant to these activities follow:

Orders Processed Machine Hours Worked Inspection Hours

Standard

300 18,000 2,000

Enhanced

200 22,000 8,000

Total

500 40,000 10,000

Top management is very concerned about declining profitability despite a healthy increase in sales volume. The decrease in income is especially puzzling because the company recently undertook a massive plant renovation during which new, highly automated machinery was installed machinery that was expected to produce significant operating efficiencies.

Using a Microsoft Excel format for calculations, complete the following:

  • Assuming use of direct-labor hours to apply overhead to production, calculate the unit manufacturing costs of the standard and enhanced products if the expected manufacturing volume is attained.
  • Assuming the use of activity-based costing, calculate the unit manufacturing cost of the standard and enhanced products if the expected manufacturing volume is attained.
  • Ontario s selling price is based heavily on cost:
    • Calculate which product is over cost and which is under cost by using direct-labor hours as an application base.
    • Explain if it is possible that this over costing and under costing is responsible for the profit issues the company is facing.
  • Illustrate how the solution will change if the following data changes:
    • The overhead associated with order processing is $300,000 and the overhead associated with product inspection is $270,000.

Present your work in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M5_A2.xls.

By Thursday, November 21, 2013, deliver your assignment to the M5: Assignment 2 Dropbox.

Assignment 2 Grading Criteria Maximum Points
Assuming the use of direct labor hours to apply overhead to production, calculated the unit manufacturing costs of the standard and enhanced products if the expected manufacturing volume is attained. 16
Assuming the use of activity-based costing, calculated the unit manufacturing cost of the standard and enhanced products if the expected manufacturing volume is attained. 16
Calculated which product is over cost and which is under cost by using direct-labor hours as an application base. 16
Explained if it is possible that this over costing and under costing is responsible for the profit issues the company is facing. 16
Illustrated how the solution will change if the following data changes in the described example. 12
Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. 4
Total: 80

calculating inventory 496448

Finlon Upholstery Inc. uses a job-order costing system to accumulate manufacturing costs. The company’s work-in-process on December 31, 2001, consisted of one job (no. 2077), which was carried on the year-end balance sheet at $156,800. There was no finished-goods inventory on this date.

Finlon applies manufacturing overhead to production on the basis of direct-labor cost. (The budgeted direct-labor cost is the company’s practical capacity, in terms of direct-labor hours multiplied by the budgeted direct-labor rate.) Budgeted totals for 2002 for direct labor and manufacturing overhead are $4,200,000 and $5,460,000, respectively. Actual results for the year are as follows:

Actual Results
Direct Materials Used $5,600,000.00
Direct Labor $4,350,000.00
Indirect Material Used $65,000.00
Indirect Labor $2,860,000.00
Factory Depreciation $1,740,000.00
Factory Insurance $59,000.00
Factory Utilities $830,000.00
Selling and Administrative Expenses $2,160,000.00
Total $17,664,000.00

Job no. 2077 was completed in January 2002, and there was no work in process at year-end. All jobs produced during 2002 were sold with the exception of Job no. 2143, which contained direct-material costs of $156,000 and direct-labor charges of $85,000. The company charges any under- or over-applied overhead to the cost of goods sold category.

Using the above information, do the following:

  • Calculate the company s predetermined overhead application rate.
  • Calculate the additions to the work-in-process inventory account for the direct material used, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.
  • Calculate the finished-goods inventory for the 12/31/01 balance sheet.
  • Calculate the over-applied or under-applied overhead at year-end.
  • Explain if it is appropriate to include selling and administrative expenses in the cost of goods sold category.

Perform your calculations in an Excel spreadsheet and copy the calculations into a Word document.

Write a 1-page paper in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M1_A3.doc. For example, if your name is John Smith, your document will be named SmithJ_M1_A3.doc.

deliver your assignment to the M1: Assignment 3 Dropbox.

Assignment 3 Grading Criteria Maximum Points
Calculated the company s predetermined overhead application rate. 24
Calculated the additions to the work-in-process inventory account for the direct material used, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead. 16
Calculated the finished-goods inventory for the balance sheet dated 12/31/02. 20
Calculated the over-applied or under-applied overhead at year-end. 20
Explained if it is appropriate to include the selling and administrative expenses in the cost of goods sold category. 12
Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. 8
Total: 100

calcyulating inventory 496450

Assignment 2: Calculating Inventory

Finlon Upholstery Inc. uses a job-order costing system to accumulate manufacturing costs. The company’s work-in-process on December 31, 2001, consisted of one job (no. 2077), which was carried on the year-end balance sheet at $156,800. There was no finished-goods inventory on this date.

Finlon applies manufacturing overhead to production on the basis of direct-labor cost. (The budgeted direct-labor cost is the company’s practical capacity, in terms of direct-labor hours multiplied by the budgeted direct-labor rate.) Budgeted totals for 2002 for direct labor and manufacturing overhead are $4,200,000 and $5,460,000, respectively. Actual results for the year are as follows:

Actual Results
Direct Materials Used $5,600,000.00
Direct Labor $4,350,000.00
Indirect Material Used $65,000.00
Indirect Labor $2,860,000.00
Factory Depreciation $1,740,000.00
Factory Insurance $59,000.00
Factory Utilities $830,000.00
Selling and Administrative Expenses $2,160,000.00
Total $17,664,000.00

Job No. 2077 was completed in January 2002 and there was no work in process at year-end. All jobs produced during 2002 were sold with the exception of Job No. 2143, which contained direct-material costs of $156,000 and direct-labor charges of $85,000. The company charges any under- or over-applied overhead to the cost of goods sold category.

Using the above information, do the following:

  • Calculate the company s predetermined overhead application rate.
  • Calculate the additions to the work-in-process inventory account for the direct material used, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.
  • Calculate the finished-goods inventory for the 12/31/01 balance sheet.
  • Calculate the over-applied or under-applied overhead at year end.
  • Explain if it is appropriate to include selling and administrative expenses in the cost of goods sold category.

Perform your calculations in an Excel spreadsheet and copy the calculations into a Word document.

Write a 1-page paper in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M2_A2.doc.

By Sunday, November 3, 2013, deliver your assignment and calculations to the M2: Assignment 2 Dropbox.

Assignment 2 Grading Criteria Maximum Points

Calculated the company s predetermined overhead application rate.

20

Calculated the additions to the work-in-process inventory account for the direct material used, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.

12

Calculated the finished-goods inventory for the balance sheet dated 12/31/02.

16

Calculated the over-applied or under-applied overhead at year end.

16

Explained if it is appropriate to include the selling and administrative expenses in the cost of goods sold category.

8

Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation.

8
Total: 80

caledonia 496451

We are considering the introduction of a new product. Currently we are in the 34 percent marginal tax bracket with a 15 percent required rate of return or cost of capital. This project is expected to last 5 years and then, because this is somewhat of a fad product, be terminated. The following information describes the new project: Cost of new plant and equipment $7,900,000 Shipping and installation costs $ 100,000 Unit sales YEAR UNITS SOLD 1 70,000 2 120,000 3 140,000 4 80,000 5 60,000 Sales price per unit $300/unit in years 1 through 4, $260/unit in year 5 Variable cost per unit $180/unit Annual fixed costs $200,000 Working-capital requirements There will be an initial working-capital requirement of $100,000 just to get production started. For each year, the total investment in net working capital will be equal to 10 percent of the dollar value of sales for that year. Thus, the investment in working capital will increase during years 1 through 3, then decrease in year 4. Finally, all working capital is liquidated at the termination of the project at the end of year 5. The depreciation method Use the simplified straight-line method over 5 years. Assume that the plant and equipment will have no salvage value after 5 years. a. Should Caledonia focus on cash flows or accounting profits in making its capital-budgeting decisions? Should the company be interested in incremental cash flows, incremental profits, total free cash flows, or total profits? b. How does depreciation affect free cash flows? c. How do sunk costs affect the determination of cash flows? d. What is the project s initial outlay? e. What are the differential cash flows over the project s life? f. What is the terminal cash flow? g. Draw a cash flow diagram for this project. h. What is its net present value? i. What is its internal rate of return? j. Should the project be accepted? Why or why not? k. In capital budgeting, risk can be measured from three perspectives. What are those three measures of a project s risk? l. According to the CAPM, which measurement of a project s risk is relevant? What complications does reality introduce into the CAPM view of risk, and what does that mean for our view of the relevant measure of a project s risk? m. Explain how simulation works. What is the value in using a simulation approach? n. What is sensitivity analysis and what is its purpose? (Keown. Foundations of Finance: The Logic and Practice of Financial Management, 6th Edition. Pearson Learning Solutions 14.15).

california surplus problem 1 496454

Problem #1

California Surplus, Inc. qualifies to use the Installment-Sales Method for tax purposes and sold an investment on an installment basis. The total gain of $75,000 was reported for financial reporting purposes in the period of sale. The Installment period is 3 years; one-third of the sale price is collected in 2012 and the rest in 2013 & 2014. The tax rate was 35% in 2012, and 30% in 2013 and 30% in 2014. The accounting & tax data is shown below.

Financial Accounting Tax Return

2012 (35% tax rate)

Income before temporary difference $175,000 $175,000

Temporary Difference $75,000 $25,000

Income $250,000 $200,000

2013 (30% tax rate)

Income before temporary difference $200,000 $200,000

Temporary Difference – $25,000

Income $200,000 $225,000

2014 (30% tax rate)

Income before temporary difference $180,000 $180,000

Temporary Difference – $25,000

Income $180,000 $205,000

Required:

1) Prepare the Journal Entries to record the Income Tax Expense, Deferred Income Tax, and the Income Tax Payable for 2012, 2013, and 2014. No deferred income tax existed at the beginning of 2012.

2) Explain how the deferred taxes will appear on the Balance Sheet at the end of each year. (Assume Installment Accounts Receivable is classified as a current asset.)

3) Show the Income Tax Expense Section of the Income Statement for each year, beginning with Income before Income Taxes.

can do this assignment if so how long or when can u have it done 496455

Submission

If you are using the Blackboard Mobile Learn IOS App, please click “View in Browser.”

Click the link above to submit your assignment.

Students, please view the “Submit a Clickable Rubric Assignment” in the Student Center.

Instructors, training on how to grade is within the Instructor Center.

Assignment 2: You Are an Entrepreneur!

Due Week 6 and worth 280 points

Student life does not generally afford a great deal of free time to pursue your personal interests; however, at one point, you may have considered turning a personal interest or hobby into an official enterprise. Today, you have finally decided to turn that hobby into a business but have realized that you need start-up capital from a lender or investor.

To obtain funding, you need to convince a lender / investor that your business is more than a hobby. You need to demonstrate that you have a firm grasp of your business, the accounting practices that impact your business, the controls needed to safeguard assets, and which accounting system will produce accurate and relevant financial information.

Write a six to eight (6-8) page business plan in which you:

  1. Describe the type of business you have created including:
    a. The product or service, and general staffing plan. Provide a rationale for your plan.
    b. The form of your business and the benefits it offers your particular business,
    c. A chart of accounts specific to your business, including a rationale as to the selection of each account. (Note: The chart of accounts is a blueprint of your business for the lender/investor. It should report the expected resources that you will consume in your business (assets), the sources of those resources (liabilities and equity), the sources of revenue, and expenditures that you expect to incur to earn those revenues. You may build a detailed chart that includes business units, divisions, product lines, etc.)
  2. Based on the form of your business, analyze whether or not you will be required to use Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) or International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) accounting methods and how the IFRS / GAAP convergence will impact your business. Suggest how you will incorporate any changes into your books and records. (Note: You need to demonstrate to the lender/investor that you have recognized possible changes to GAAP that may impact the accounting and reporting of your accounting events.)
  3. Prepare a pro forma balance sheet and income statement providing the assumptions made and support the valuations assigned.
  4. Considering the value of assets (assigned per your balance sheet) used within your business, recommend two (2) specific internal controls that you will implement to protect your company s assets and resources, justifying how each will provide assurances to management. (NOTE: Safeguarding assets and protecting personal data are paramount to ensuring the viability of a business. Demonstrate to the lender/investor that your assets will be safeguarded and customer information (if applicable) will be protected.)
  5. Based on the internal control recommendations that you made, suggest how you will implement each within your business environment, indicating how challenges or resistances will be overcome.
  6. Evaluate the impact of the regulatory environment, including the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and other regulatory requirements, on your business venture, giving considering to how you intend to comply with the requirements and the general impact to decision making within your business.
  7. Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.

Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

  • Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
  • Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.

The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:

  • Examine accounting principles and concepts used in businesses.
  • Assess appropriate internal controls, regulatory requirements according to the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, and fraud prevention and detection.
  • Use technology and information resources to research issues in financial accounting.
  • Write clearly and concisely about financial accounting using proper writing mechanics.

Click here to view the grading rubric for this assignment.

can someone help with this please 496458

Jamie is here again to describe a situation to you. Watch the video. To read a text version of her message, click read script.Discuss whether Esteban is performing in a professional manner. If you were a manager, what would you do differently in order to make sure your employees are not using the company s assets for their own benefit

Research and analyze the ethical and legal issues involving the use of a company s assets by employees. Employees should know that the use of a company s assets is unethical, but many employees do it anyway. Why

Does Esteban s position with the company and his use of the company phone and assets expose the company to potential liability? Why or why not?

Special instructions for this Discussion Board: Use a minimum of two outside sources and cite references. Your initial post must be a minimum of 250 words in length to adequately discuss this situation.

can we do this 496459

Assignment 3 Submission

If you are using the Blackboard Mobile Learn IOS App, please click “View in Browser.”

Click the link above to submit your assignment.

Students, please view the “Submit a Clickable Rubric Assignment” in the Student Center.

Instructors, training on how to grade is within the Instructor Center.

Assignment 3: You Are an Investment Analyst

Due Week 10 and worth 320 points

As the representative from your accounting firm or practice, you are in charge of stock market analysis that will be presented to clients as part of professional consultation process. One of your high-profile clients is trying to determine the possible investment potential between two companies. However, before you can recommend investments to clients, you need to familiarize yourself with the background of the companies, analyze stock trends, research current events, and analyze financial statements. Select one (1) pair of these companies and conduct your analysis.

  • Pepsi versus Coca Cola, or
  • Amazon versus eBay

Write an eight to ten (8-10) page paper in which you:

  1. Analyze each company s history, product / services, major customers, major suppliers, and leadership and provide a synopsis of each company.
  2. Based on the stock price for the timeline listed below, present a graph that illustrates the stock price of each company. Indicate conclusions that can be drawn based on the trend:
    a. The day of its initial public offering
    b. January 1, 2012
    c. January 1, 2011
    d. January 1, 2010
  3. Research and summarize at least two (2) news events (this may include mergers, acquisitions, or political issues) that occurred from 2010 to the present day and the potential impact on the stock price of each company. Indicate how this influences your investment decision related to the company.
  4. Provide an overall financial analysis for each company that highlights the key characteristics for investment and how this may impact an investor s decision.
  5. Based on your review of the financial data for each company, indicate the accuracy and reliability of the data for making investment decision. Provide support for your conclusion.
  6. Recommend which company you consider as the better investment for your client and how you will present your recommendation. Support your recommendation with data from your analysis.
  7. Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.

Your assignment must follow these

can you also do this 496460

Blackboard Mobile Learn IOS App, please click “View in Browser.”
Click the link above to submit your assignment.

Students, please view the “Submit a Clickable Rubric Assignment” in the Student Center.
Instructors, training on how to grade is within the Instructor Center.

Assignment 1: Review of Accounting Ethics
Due Week 3 and worth 200 points

Many organizations have been in the news over the past few years due to accounting ethical breaches that have affected their customers, employees, or the general public. Search the Internet or the Strayer Library to locate a story in the news that depicts an accounting ethical breach. You may select from any type of organization about which you have information or a curiosity.

Write a four to five (4-5) page paper in which you:

  1. Given the corporate ethical breaches in recent times, assess whether or not you believe that the current business and regulatory environment is more conducive to ethical behavior. Provide support for your answer.
  2. Based on your research, describe the organization, the accounting ethical breach and the impact to the organization related to ethical breach.
  3. Determine how the organizational ethical issue was detected and how management failed to create an ethical environment.
  4. Analyze the accounts impacted and / or accounting guidelines violated and the resulting impact to the business operation.
  5. As a CFO, recommend which measures could have been taken to prevent this ethical breach and how each measure should be implemented in the future.
  6. Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.

Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

  • Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
  • Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.

The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:

  • Examine accounting principles and concepts used in businesses.
  • Prepare and record financial transactions in the accounting cycle according to GAAP and IFRS accounting methodology.
  • Use technology and information resources to research issues in financial accounting.
  • Write clearly and concisely about financial accounting using proper writing mechanics.

Click hereto view the grading rubric for this assignment.

can you assist 496461

You are making a detailed analysis of the financial statements and accounting records of two companies: Adams Company and Bar Company. They are in the same industry, and price levels have been rising steadily for several years. In the course of your investigation, you observe that the inventory value shown on the Adams company balance sheet is quite close to the current replacement cost of the merchandise on hand. However, for Bar Company, the carrying value of the inventory is far below current replacement cost.

  • Discuss what method of inventory valuation is probably used by each company.
  • If we assume that the two companies are identical, except for the inventory valuation method used, Discuss which company has probably been reporting higher net income in recent years and how would you know.

Grading Rubric

50%

Basic response to the DB question

30%

Additional research supporting the initial answer to the DB question

20%

Comments which serve to further the discussion, apply real world example or lend to enhancing the clarity of the concepts

In your own words, please post a response to the Discussion Board and comment on at least two other postings. You will be graded on the quality of your postings.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Course Materials

can you assist 496462

The CEO of the company where you work has just come back from a workshop about depreciation and he is having a hard time understanding the concept. He has asked you to explain the concept of depreciation at the next manager s meeting.

He wants to you:

  • Briefly define depreciation.
  • Briefly explain the different methods that a company can use to recognize depreciation expense.
  • Is acceptable for a company to use one method of depreciation for book purposes and another method for tax purposes?
  • Why would it be beneficial for a company to do this?

Grading Rubric

50%

Basic response to the DB question

30%

Additional research supporting the initial answer to the DB question

20%

Comments which serve to further the discussion, apply real world example or lend to enhancing the clarity of the concepts

In your own words, please post a response to the Discussion Board and comment on at least two other postings. You will be graded on the quality of your postings.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Course Materials

can you do this 496464

Search:Show AllInstitution OnlyCourses Only-ACC557080MN096-1138-001 (Financial Accounting)-ONL101 (Online 101)Organizations Only Go
  • Assignment 1 & “Instructor Insights” Postings

    Posted on: Wednesday, October 23, 2013

    Class,

    Listed below are some popular accounting frauds to consider for your Assignment 1 paper, which is due 10/29 before class. If you have any questions, please ask me earlier than later!

    Furthermore, I’ve posted the Chapter 2 & 3 games in the Week 2 Instructor Insights Section. I’ve also posted the Chapter 4 material in the Week 3 Instructor Insights Section.

    1. ZZZZ Best (1986) – Fraud involved a Ponzi scheme
    2. Waste Management Inc (1999) – Fraud involved Financial Mistatements
    3. Xerox (2000) – Fraud involved falsifying financial results
    4. Enron (2001) – Fraud involved failed disclosure of off-balance sheet transactions
    5. AOL (2002) – Fraud involved inflated sales
    6. Fredie Mac (2002) – Fraud involved understated earnings
    7. Tyco International (2002) – Fraud involved improper accounting
    8. WorldCom (2002) – Fraud involved overstated cash flows
    9. Bernard Madoff Investment Securities (2008) – Fraud involved a Ponzi scheme
    10. Lehman Brothers (2010) – Fraud Invovled failed disclosure of certain transactions
    11. Autonomy Corporation (2012) – Fraud involved accounting misrepresentations

can you do this assignment 496465

Assignment 2: LASA 2: Company Assessment

Directions:

Conduct an interview with an employee (preferably a supervisor or manager) at your current job or a previous job. If you have no prior work experience, you may interview a family member or friend who is currently employed. You have just been promoted to the manager of your department and have been asked to review the following:

  • Value of a team environment: Is the company operating with a team structure How effective is the team structure How could the company improve the effectiveness of the team environment If there is no team structure currently in place, how should one be implemented
  • Job satisfaction of the employees: Are the employees satisfied or is there a lot of complaining, absenteeism, and turnover What could the company be doing to improve job satisfaction?
  • How does the company currently communicate with their employees regarding company changes? Do they rely on technology for their announcements Is this an effective method of communication?
  • Efforts made to motivate your employees: What is being done to motivate the employees? Do employees get regular pay raises Is there a rewards program Are they being recognized for their accomplishments Name at least three things the company could be doing to motivate their employees.
  • Assistance offered in helping your employees to deal with stress management: Are the employees given any tools to deal with stress management Does the company have access to mental health counselors Are employees given permission to take any mental health days What could the company be doing to help employees deal with their employees stress?

Prepare a 4-6 page report that includes an overall assessment of how each of the above is currently being handled and how you would change the system. Be sure to provide examples and be specific in your reasoning behind your suggested changes. Utilize at least three scholarly resources in your report (one of which may be your text book). This report must include:

    • Executive Summary
    • Analyze and explain what is being done in the five areas described above (team, job satisfaction, communication, motivation, and stress management) in the company.
    • Write recommendations for what they could be doing better in all five areas
    • Conclusion
    • Appendix: List of questions asked in interview

The paper must be well organized using headings and subheadings.

The written report must be in APA format, have proper punctuation and grammar, as well as free of typographical error.

All materials used much be cited correctly and listed on a reference page

can you help me figure out how to compute starting at question 2 selected account ba 496466

Can you help me figure out how to compute starting at question 2/

Selected account balances from the adjusted trial balance for Olinda Corporation as of its calendar year end December 31, 2013, follow.

Debit Credit
a. Interest revenue $ 15,700
b. Depreciation expense Equipment. $ 35,700
c. Loss on sale of equipment 27,550
d. Accounts payable 45,700
e. Other operating expenses 108,100
f. Accumulated depreciation Equipment 73,300
g. Gain from settlement of lawsuit 45,700
h. Accumulated depreciation Buildings 177,900
i. Loss from operating a discontinued segment (pretax) 19,950
j. Gain on insurance recovery of tornado damage (pretax and extraordinary) 30,820
k. Net sales 1,015,500
l. Depreciation expense Buildings 53,700
m. Correction of overstatement of prior year s sales (pretax) 17,700
n. Gain on sale of discontinued segment s assets (pretax) 42,500
o. Loss from settlement of lawsuit 25,450
p. Income taxes expense
q. Cost of goods sold 499,500

references

Section Break Problem 13-6AA Income statement computations and format LO A2

1.

Problem 13-6AA Part 1

Required:
1.

Assume that the company s income tax rate is 40% for all items. Compute the tax effects and after-tax amounts of the four items labeled pretax. (Loss amounts should be indicated with a minus sign.)

e}ru:tn”ioatidaleVblTartta”se,ru:td”rewenssA”i”,:”n”ioptriscdeb_ta,”{}”:62″_],[0″:67″_l,ul:n1″_5,”}}seal:fy”icol”p”,%20Z%20-%20At:or”s”:errdtOor”s],s”seenxp%20engtirape%20oerth”O”,esal%20set”N”,ntmeipqu%20eofe%20al%20sons%20os”L”,itsuaw%20loft%20enemtlet%20somfrs%20os”L”,ntmeeg%20sednutionscdia%20g%20inateropm%20ro%20fssLo,”e”nuveret%20esernt”I”,seenxp%20eesax%20tmecoIn,”s”etss%20a%E2%80%99sntmeeg%20sednutionscdif%20%20olesan%20%20oinGa,”e”agam%20ddonaor%20tofy%20erovec%20rceanurns%20ionn%20ai”G”,itsuaw%20loft%20enemtlet%20somfrn%20ai”G”,ntmeipqu%E2%80%94Eseenxp%20eontiiaecprDe,”s”ngdiilBue%E2%80%94nspeexn%20ioatcireep”D”,ldsos%20odgof%20%20ostCo,”s”lesas%20r%E2%80%99ea%20yorri%20poft%20enematsterovf%20%20oontiecrrCo,”t”enpmuiEqn%E2%80%94ioatcireep%20dedatulumcc”A”,gsinldui%E2%80%94Bontiiaecprded%20telamucuAc,”e”blyapas%20ntoucc”A:[t”is”l”,t1is”l”:meNawnDoopdr,”:05″_2{“”:”0:{6″_2,”{}”:32″_e,lsfa”:42″_1,:-0″_5,”:04″_2,”-1″:31″_0,”:_5,”:04″”_e,lsfa”:48″_},:{7″_3,”}]33:67″_7,”82:14″_3{“:[3″_2,”uetr”:45″_”,e1tlTiw%20Ne:”e”am”n],e}ru:t7″_4,”12″:54″_],:[3″_3,””}00″1″:c3,”0″10:”2″”c”,00″1″:c1,”1″29:”0″”c:{9″_1,””}23:”5″,”3″”2″:”4″,23:”3″,”3″”2″:”2″,24:”1″,”7″”2″:”0:{9″_5,”]]}}%3B”px96%204t:ef%20lx%3B7p11:%20op%20tx%3B1p%202t:ghei%20hx%3B8p%209h:dtwi:”8″”_”,seonsprer%20beumeNylst:”7″”_},t”ghri:”8″_6,”uetr”:43″_”,ONTILUSO:”6″_7{“”:55″_},”}”%24″:81″_2,”:53″_e,ru:t3″_6,”uetr”:80″_:{5″_5,”Y”NCREUR”C”:73″_:{9″_2,”}}”””:79″_”,0055″2″:75″_:{0″”_},”””:79″_”,)~29a(“~”:75″_:{6″_5,””}:”9″_7,””””:75″_:{0″_3{“”:_2{“”:20″_,{}}%3B”px96%203t:ef%20lx%3B7p11:%20op%20tx%3B1p%202t:ghei%20hx%3B8p%209h:dtwi:”8″”_”,seonsprer%20beumeNylst:”7″”_},t”ghri:”8″_6,”uetr”:43″_”,ONTILUSO:”6″_7{“”:55″_},e}ru:t1″”_”,”%24″:81″_2,”:53″_e,ru:t3″_6,”uetr”:80″_:{5″_5,”Y”NCREUR”C”:73″_:{9″_2,”}}”””:79″_”,0070″1″:75″_:{0″”_},”””:79″_”,)~28a(“~”:75″_:{6″_5,””}:”9″_7,””””:75″_:{0″_3{“”:_2{“”:20″_,{}}%3B”px96%202t:ef%20lx%3B7p11:%20op%20tx%3B1p%202t:ghei%20hx%3B8p%209h:dtwi:”8″”_”,seonsprer%20beumeNylst:”7″”_},t”ghri:”8″_6,”uetr”:43″_”,ONTILUSO:”6″_7{“”:55″_},”}”%24″:81″_2,”:53″_e,ru:t3″_6,”uetr”:80″_:{5″_5,”Y”NCREUR”C”:73″_:{9″_2,”}}”””:79″_”,0025″4″:75″_:{0″”_},”””:79″_”,)~27a(“~”:75″_:{6″_5,””}:”9″_7,””””:75″_:{0″_3{“”:_2{“”:20″_,{}}%3B”px%205t:ef%20lx%3B7p11:%20op%20tx%3B1p%202t:ghei%20hx%3B0p29:%20thid”w”:_8,”5″_rc0l_el_ce0blta0_:”8″_3,””}ONTIESQU:”6″_7{“”:55″_},”}:”9″_7,”s”etss%20a%E2%80%99sntmeeg%20sednutionscdif%20%20olesan%20%20oinGa:”5″_7{“”:30″_:{2″”_:{0″_2{“,[}]”}x%3B6p49:%20ftle%3B%20px94:%20op%20tx%3B1p%202t:ghei%20hx%3B8p%209h:dtwi:”8″”_”,seonsprer%20beumeNylst:”7″”_},t”ghri:”8″_6,”uetr”:43″_”,ONTILUSO:”6″_7{“”:55″_},e}ru:t1″”_”,”%24″:81″_2,”:53″_e,ru:t3″_6,”uetr”:80″_:{5″_5,”Y”NCREUR”C”:73″_:{9″_2,”}}”””:79″_”,2006″1″:75″_:{0″”_},”””:79″_”,)~26a(“~”:75″_:{6″_5,””}:”9″_7,””””:75″_:{0″_3{“”:_2{“”:20″_,{}}%3B”px96%203t:ef%20lx%3B4p%209p:to%3B%20px21:%20htighe%3B%20px98:%20thid”w”:_8,”e”nspoes%20rermbNulety”s”:_7,””}htig”r”:68″_e,ru:t3″_4,”N”IOUTOL”S”:76″_:{5″_5,”}}uetr”:_1,”%24″:”1″_8,”:23″_5,”uetr”:63″_e,ru:t0″_8{“”:55″_”,CYENRRCU:”3″_7{“”:29″_},”}:”9″_7,”0″08″7″:75″_:{0″”_},”””:79″_”,)~25a(“~”:75″_:{6″_5,””}:”9″_7,””””:75″_:{0″_3{“”:_2{“”:20″_,{}}%3B”px96%202t:ef%20lx%3B4p%209p:to%3B%20px21:%20htighe%3B%20px98:%20thid”w”:_8,”e”nspoes%20rermbNulety”s”:_7,””}htig”r”:68″_e,ru:t3″_4,”N”IOUTOL”S”:76″_:{5″_5,”}}uetr”:_1,”%24″:”1″_8,”:23″_5,”uetr”:63″_e,ru:t0″_8{“”:55″_”,CYENRRCU:”3″_7{“”:29″_},”}:”9″_7,”0″7017:”5″_7{“”:_0,””}:”9″_7,”~”4)(2~a:”5″_7{“”:56″_},”””:79″_”,:”5″_7{“”:30″_:{2″”_:{0″_2{“},”}x%3B5p:%20ftle%3B%20px94:%20op%20tx%3B1p%202t:ghei%20hx%3B0p29:%20thid”w”:_8,”4″_rc0l_el_ce0blta0_:”8″_3,””}ONTIESQU:”6″_7{“”:55″_},”}:”9″_7,”s”lesas%20r%E2%80%99ea%20yorri%20poft%20enematsterovf%20%20oontiecrrCo:”5″_7{“”:30″_:{2″”_:{0″_2{“,[}]”}x%3B6p49:%20ftle%3B%20px71:%20op%20tx%3B1p%202t:ghei%20hx%3B8p%209h:dtwi:”8″”_”,seonsprer%20beumeNylst:”7″”_},t”ghri:”8″_6,”uetr”:43″_”,ONTILUSO:”6″_7{“”:55″_},”}”%24″:81″_2,”:53″_e,ru:t3″_6,”uetr”:80″_:{5″_5,”Y”NCREUR”C”:73″_:{9″_2,”}}”””:79″_”,9284″1″:75″_:{0″”_},”””:79″_”,)~23a(“~”:75″_:{6″_5,””}:”9″_7,””””:75″_:{0″_3{“”:_2{“”:20″_,{}}%3B”px96%203t:ef%20lx%3B1p%207p:to%3B%20px21:%20htighe%3B%20px98:%20thid”w”:_8,”e”nspoes%20rermbNulety”s”:_7,””}htig”r”:68″_e,ru:t3″_4,”N”IOUTOL”S”:76″_:{5″_5,”}}uetr”:_1,”%24″:”1″_8,”:23″_5,”uetr”:63″_e,ru:t0″_8{“”:55″_”,CYENRRCU:”3″_7{“”:29″_},”}:”9″_7,”8″3212:”5″_7{“”:_0,””}:”9″_7,”~”2)(2~a:”5″_7{“”:56″_},”””:79″_”,:”5″_7{“”:30″_:{2″”_:{0″_2{“},”}x%3B6p29:%20ftle%3B%20px71:%20op%20tx%3B1p%202t:ghei%20hx%3B8p%209h:dtwi:”8″”_”,seonsprer%20beumeNylst:”7″”_},t”ghri:”8″_6,”uetr”:43″_”,ONTILUSO:”6″_7{“”:55″_},”}”%24″:81″_2,”:53″_e,ru:t3″_6,”uetr”:80″_:{5″_5,”Y”NCREUR”C”:73″_:{9″_2,”}}”””:79″_”,2008″3″:75″_:{0″”_},”””:79″_”,)~21a(“~”:75″_:{6″_5,””}:”9″_7,””””:75″_:{0″_3{“”:_2{“”:20″_,{}}%3B”px%205t:ef%20lx%3B1p%207p:to%3B%20px21:%20htighe%3B%20px90%202h:dtwi:”8″”_”,r30__cllce0_leab_t”0″:38″_},N”IOSTUE”Q”:76″_:{5″_5,”}}”””:79″_”,gemadao%20adrntof%20%20oryvecoree%20ncrasuinn%20%20oinGa:”5″_7{“”:30″_:{2″”_:{0″_2{“,[}]”}x%3B6p49:%20ftle%3B%20px48:%20op%20tx%3B1p%202t:ghei%20hx%3B8p%209h:dtwi:”8″”_”,seonsprer%20beumeNylst:”7″”_},t”ghri:”8″_6,”uetr”:43″_”,ONTILUSO:”6″_7{“”:55″_},e}ru:t1″”_”,”%24″:81″_2,”:53″_e,ru:t3″_6,”uetr”:80″_:{5″_5,”Y”NCREUR”C”:73″_:{9″_2,”}}”””:79″_”,7019″1″:75″_:{0″”_},”””:79″_”,)~20a(“~”:75″_:{6″_5,””}:”9″_7,””””:75″_:{0″_3{“”:_2{“”:20″_,{}}%3B”px96%203t:ef%20lx%3B8p%204p:to%3B%20px21:%20htighe%3B%20px98:%20thid”w”:_8,”e”nspoes%20rermbNulety”s”:_7,””}htig”r”:68″_e,ru:t3″_4,”N”IOUTOL”S”:76″_:{5″_5,”}}uetr”:_1,”%24″:”1″_8,”:23″_5,”uetr”:63″_e,ru:t0″_8{“”:55″_”,CYENRRCU:”3″_7{“”:29″_},”}:”9″_7,”0″98″7″:75″_:{0″”_},”””:79″_”,)~19a(“~”:75″_:{6″_5,””}:”9″_7,””””:75″_:{0″_3{“”:_2{“”:20″_,{}}%3B”px96%202t:ef%20lx%3B8p%204p:to%3B%20px21:%20htighe%3B%20px98:%20thid”w”:_8,”e”nspoes%20rermbNulety”s”:_7,””}htig”r”:68″_e,ru:t3″_4,”N”IOUTOL”S”:76″_:{5″_5,”}}uetr”:_1,”%24″:”1″_8,”:23″_5,”uetr”:63″_e,ru:t0″_8{“”:55″_”,CYENRRCU:”3″_7{“”:29″_},”}:”9″_7,”0″9519:”5″_7{“”:_0,””}:”9″_7,”~”8)(1~a:”5″_7{“”:56″_},”””:79″_”,:”5″_7{“”:30″_:{2″”_:{0″_2{“},”}x%3B5p:%20ftle%3B%20px48:%20op%20tx%3B1p%202t:ghei%20hx%3B0p29:%20thid”w”:_8,””}ONTIESQU:”6″_7{“”:55″_},”}:”9″_7,”t”engmsed%20ueinntcois%20d%20angtirape%20oomfrs%20os”L”:75″_:{0″_3{“”:_2{“”:20″_[{],}}%3B”px%200t:ennd-ixtte%3B%201)21,%2063%2017,13b(rg:%20orol-cndougrckba:”8″”_”,erntCelety%20sldBolety”s”:_7,””}erntce:”8″_6,”uetr”:10″_”,1)21,%2063%2017,13b(rg:”9″”_”,ONTIESQU:”6″_7{“”:55″_},”}:”9″_7,”x”Tar-teAf:”5″_7{“”:30″_:{2″”_:{0″_2{“},”}x%3B0p:%20ntdeint-ex%20t)%3B11%2023,16,%2037(1gb%20rr:locod-unrokgac”b”:_8,”r”teeneCylstd%20oleBylst:”7″”_},r”teen”c”:68″_e,ru:t0″_1,”)”11%2023,16,%2037(1gb”r”:_9,”N”IOSTUE”Q”:76″_:{5″_5,”}}”””:79″_”,ctfeEf:”5″_7{“”:30″_:{2″”_:{0″_2{“},”}x%3B0p:%20ntdeint-ex%20t)%3B11%2023,16,%2037(1gb%20rr:locod-unrokgac”b”:_8,”r”teeneCylstd%20oleBylst:”7″”_},r”teen”c”:68″_e,ru:t0″_1,”)”11%2023,16,%2037(1gb”r”:_9,”N”IOSTUE”Q”:76″_:{5″_5,”}}”””:79″_”,axetPr:”5″_7{“”:30″_:{2″”_:{0″_2{“},”})%3B11%2023,16,%2037(1gb%20rr:locod-unrokgac”b”:_8,””}1)21,%2063%2017,13b(rg:”9″”_”,ONTIESQU:”6″_7{“”:55″_},”}:”9″_7,””””:75″_:{0″_3{“”:_2{“”:20″_[{],}}%3B”1)21,%2063%2017,13b(rg:%20orol-cndougrckba%3B%20px%200t:ennd-ixtte%3B%20neno:%20ayplis”d”:_8,”r”teeneCylstd%20oleBylst:”7″”_},)”11%2023,16,%2037(1gb”r”:_9,”uetr”:10″_”,erntce:”8″_6,”2″0_:”8″_7,”N”IOSTUE”Q”:76″_:{5″_5,”}}”””:79″_”,:”5″_7{“”:30″_:{2″”_:{0″_2{“},”})%3B11%2023,16,%2037(1gb%20rr:locod-unrokgac%20bx%3B0p:%20ntdeint-ex%20te%3Bon%20ny:laspdi:”8″”_”,erntCelety%20sldBolety”s”:_7,””}1)21,%2063%2017,13b(rg:”9″”_e,ru:t0″_1,”r”teen”c”:68″_”,_1″0″:78″_”,ONTIESQU:”6″_7{“”:55″_},”}:”9″_7,””””:75″_:{0″_3{“”:_2{“”:20″_,{}}%3B”1)21,%2063%2017,13b(rg:%20orol-cndougrckba%3B%20px%200t:ennd-ixtte:”8″”_”,erntCelety%20sldBolety”s”:_7,”:36″_1,””}1)21,%2063%2017,13b(rg:”9″”_e,ru:t0″_1,”r”teen”c”:68″_”,_0″0″:78″_”,ONTIESQU:”6″_7{“”:55″_},”}:”9″_7,”x”Ta%25%20)~17a(“~”:75″_:{0″_3{“”:_2{“”:20″_,{}}%3B”1)21,%2063%2017,13b(rg:%20orol-cndougrckba:”8″”_},)”11%2023,16,%2037(1gb”r”:_9,”N”IOSTUE”Q”:76″_:{5″_5,”}}”””:79″_”,:”5″_7{“”:30″_:{2″”_:{0″_2{“[[“:13″_e,lsfa”:41″_},n”owpDro”d”:27″_1,:-5″_2,”{}”:75″_e,lsfa”:82″_:{8″_2,””””:22″_e,lsfa”:35″_e,ru:t6″_3,”{}”:55″_”,leab%20TedtltiUn:”9″_6,”:47″_1,”:68″_5{“:[5″_6{”

eBook: Appendix 13A: Sustainable Income
Worksheet Difficulty: Hard
Problem 13-6AA Part 1 Learning Objective: 13-A2 Appendix 13A Explain the form and assess the content of a complete income statement.

2.

Problem 13-6AA Part 2

2.1

What is the amount of income from continuing operations before income taxes?

}uetr”:ontidaliValeabtTarst,”uetr”:ederswAnis,””””:ontiipcres_dab”t},:{2″_6,”0]:[7″_6,”llnu”:51″_l,ul:n6″_2,”{}”:32″_e,lsfa”:42″_1,:-0″_5,”-1″:24″_1,:-1″_3,”:05″”_0,”:_4,”seal:f8″_4,”{}”:37″_],3}40″:77″_2,:64″_3{“:[3″_2,”uetr”:45″_”,e1tlTiw%20Ne:”e”am”n],e}ru:t7″_4,”:14″_5,”[]”:33″_},5″”7″:c1,”6″28:”0″”c:{9″_1,””}24:”0″{“”:59″_],}]”}ermbNulety%20sseonspre:”7″”_},t”ghri:”8″_6,”uetr”:43″_”,ONTILUSO:”6″_7{“”:55″_},e}ru:t1″”_”,”%24″:81″_2,”:53″_e,ru:t3″_6{“”:55″_”,CYENRRCU:”3″_7{“”:29″_},”}:”9″_7,”0″2511″3″:75″_:{0″”_},”””:79″_”,)~41a(“~”:75″_:{6″_5,””}:”9″_7,””””:75″_:{0″_3{“”:_2{“”:20″_,{}}%3B”1)21,%2063%2017,13b(rg:%20orol-cndougrckba:”8″”_},)”11%2023,16,%2037(1gb”r”:_9,”N”IOSTUE”Q”:76″_:{5″_5,”}}”””:79″_”,esax%20trefobes%20ontirape%20onguiinntcom%20ro%20fmecoIn:”5″_7{“”:30″_:{2″”_:{0″_2{“[[“:13″_e,lsfa”:41″_},n”owpDro”d”:27″_1,:-5″_2,”{}”:75″_e,lsfa”:82″_:{8″_2,””””:22″_e,lsfa”:35″_e,ru:t6″_3,”{}”:55″_”,leab%20TedtltiUn:”9″_6,”:27″_1,”:18″_5{“:[5″_6{”

2.2

What is the amount of the income taxes expense?

}uetr”:ontidaliValeabtTarst,”uetr”:ederswAnis,””””:ontiipcres_dab”t},:{2″_6,”0]:[7″_6,”llnu”:51″_l,ul:n6″_2,”{}”:32″_e,lsfa”:42″_1,:-0″_5,”-1″:24″_1,:-1″_3,”:05″”_0,”:_4,”seal:f8″_4,”{}”:37″_],8}27″:77″_2,:64″_3{“:[3″_2,”uetr”:45″_”,e1tlTiw%20Ne:”e”am”n],e}ru:t7″_4,”:14″_5,”[]”:33″_},6″”7″:c1,”0″16:”0″”c:{9″_1,””}24:”0″{“”:59″_],}]”}seonsprer%20beumeNylst:”7″”_},t”ghri:”8″_6,”uetr”:43″_”,ONTILUSO:”6″_7{“”:55″_},e}ru:t1″”_”,”%24″:81″_2,”:53″_e,ru:t3″_6{“”:55″_”,CYENRRCU:”3″_7{“”:29″_},”}:”9″_7,”0″5024″1″:75″_:{0″”_},”””:79″_”,)~42a(“~”:75″_:{6″_5,””}:”9″_7,””””:75″_:{0″_3{“”:_2{“”:20″_,{}}%3B”1)21,%2063%2017,13b(rg:%20orol-cndougrckba:”8″”_},)”11%2023,16,%2037(1gb”r”:_9,”N”IOSTUE”Q”:76″_:{5″_5,”}}”””:79″_”,seenxp%20eesax%20tmecoIn:”5″_7{“”:30″_:{2″”_:{0″_2{“[[“:13″_e,lsfa”:41″_},n”owpDro”d”:27″_1,:-5″_2,”{}”:75″_e,lsfa”:82″_:{8″_2,””””:22″_e,lsfa”:35″_e,ru:t6″_3,”{}”:55″_”,leab%20TedtltiUn:”9″_6,”:27″_1,”:18″_5{“:[5″_6{”

2.3

What is the amount of income from continuing operations?

eBook: Appendix 13A: Sustainable Income
Worksheet Difficulty: Hard
Problem 13-6AA Part 2 Learning Objective: 13-A2 Appendix 13A Explain the form and assess the content of a complete income statement.

3.

Problem 13-6AA Part 3

3.

What is the total amount of after-tax income (loss) associated with the discontinued segment?

4. What is the amount of income (loss) before the extraordnary items?

5.What is the amount of net incme?

eBook: Appendix 13A: Sustainable Income

Worksheet Difficulty: Hard
Problem 13-6AA Part 3 Learning Objective: 13-A2 Appendix 13A Explain the form and assess the content of a complete income statement.

4.

Problem 13-6AA Part 4

4. What is the amount of income (loss) before the extraordinary items?

}uetr”:ontidaliValeabtTarst,”uetr”:ederswAnis,””””:ontiipcres_dab”t},:{2″_6,”0]:[7″_6,”llnu”:51″_l,ul:n6″_2,”{}”:32″_e,lsfa”:42″_1,:-0″_5,”-1″:24″_1,:-1″_3,”:05″”_0,”:_4,”seal:f8″_4,”{}”:37″_],9}36″:77″_2,:64″_3{“:[3″_2,”uetr”:45″_”,e1tlTiw%20Ne:”e”am”n],e}ru:t7″_4,”:14″_5,”[]”:33″_},6″”6″:c1,”1″26:”0″”c:{9″_1,””}24:”0″{“”:59″_],}]”}x%3B7p21:%20ftle%3B%20px%202p:to%3B%20px21:%20htighe%3B%20px64:%20thid”w”:_8,”e”nspoes%20rermbNulety”s”:_7,””}htig”r”:68″_e,ru:t3″_4,”N”IOUTOL”S”:76″_:{5″_5,”}}%24″:”1″_8,”:23″_5,”uetr”:63″_:{5″_5,”Y”NCREUR”C”:73″_:{9″_2,”}}”””:79″_”,809214:”5″_7{“”:_0,””}:”9″_7,”~”9)(4~a:”5″_7{“”:56″_},”””:79″_”,:”5″_7{“”:30″_:{2″”_:{0″_2{“},”})%3B11%2023,16,%2037(1gb%20rr:locod-unrokgac”b”:_8,””}1)21,%2063%2017,13b(rg:”9″”_”,ONTIESQU:”6″_7{“”:55″_},”}:”9″_7,”s”emity%20arinrdaotrexe%20oref%20bmecoIn:”5″_7{“”:30″_:{2″”_:{0″_2{“[[“:13″_e,lsfa”:41″_},n”owpDro”d”:27″_1,:-5″_2,”{}”:75″_e,lsfa”:82″_:{8″_2,””””:22″_e,lsfa”:35″_e,ru:t6″_3,”{}”:55″_”,leab%20TedtltiUn:”9″_6,”:27″_1,”:18″_5{“:[5″_6{“check my workreferencesebook & resources

eBook: Appendix 13A: Sustainable Income

previous attempt

Worksheet Difficulty: Hard
Problem 13-6AA Part 4 Learning Objective: 13-A2 Appendix 13A Explain the form and assess the content of a complete income statement.

5.value:

5.00 points

You did not receive credit for this question in a previous attempt

Problem 13-6AA Part 5

5. What is the amount of net income for the year?

}uetr”:ontidaliValeabtTarst,”uetr”:ederswAnis,””””:ontiipcres_dab”t},:{2″_6,”0]:[7″_6,”llnu”:51″_l,ul:n6″_2,”{}”:32″_e,lsfa”:42″_1,:-0″_5,”-1″:24″_1,:-1″_3,”:05″”_0,”:_4,”seal:f8″_4,”{}”:37″_],8}23″:77″_2,:64″_3{“:[3″_2,”uetr”:45″_”,e1tlTiw%20Ne:”e”am”n],e}ru:t7″_4,”:14″_5,”[]”:33″_},6″”8″:c1,”0″11:”0″”c:{9″_1,””}24:”0″{“”:59″_],}]”}x%3B5p10:%20ftle%3B%20px%202p:to%3B%20px21:%20htighe%3B%20px63:%20thid”w”:_8,”e”nspoes%20rermbNulety”s”:_7,””}htig”r”:68″_e,ru:t3″_4,”N”IOUTOL”S”:76″_:{5″_5,”}}%24″:”1″_8,”:23″_5,”uetr”:63″_:{5″_5,”Y”NCREUR”C”:73″_:{9″_2,”}}”””:79″_”,1879″8″:75″_:{0″”_},”””:79″_”,)~52a(“~”:75″_:{6″_5,””}:”9″_7,””””:75″_:{0″_3{“”:_2{“”:20″_,{}}%3B”1)21,%2063%2017,13b(rg:%20orol-cndougrckba:”8″”_},)”11%2023,16,%2037(1gb”r”:_9,”N”IOSTUE”Q”:76″_:{5″_5,”}}”””:79″_”,mecoint%20Ne:”5″_7{“”:30″_:{2″”_:{0″_2{“[[“:13″_e,lsfa”:41″_},n”owpDro”d”:27″_1,:-5″_2,”{}”:75″_e,lsfa”:82″_:{8″_2,””””:22″_e,lsfa”:35″_e,ru:t6″_3,”{}”:55″_”,leab%20TedtltiUn:”9″_6,”:27″_1,”:18″_5{“:[5″_6{“check my workreferencesebook & resources

eBook: Appendix 13A: Sustainable Income

previous attempt

Worksheet Difficulty: Hard
Problem 13-6AA Part 5 Learning Objective: 13-A2 Appendix 13A Explain the form and assess the content of a complete income statement.

can you help me with this question with apa format and reference 496467

Your friend, Tom Smith is the owner-president of a consulting company. He recently completed his third year of business and received the annual financial statements from his accountants. He finds the income statement and balance sheet informative, but does not understand the statement of cash flows. He said the section of operating activities is really confusing. He says this first section consists of a lot of additions and subtractions which did not make any sense.

Write memo to Tom including the following:

  • Explaining the purpose of the statement of cash flows.
  • Explaining the form and content of the statement of cash flows.
  • The advantages and disadvantages of the direct and indirect methods of preparing this financial statement.
  • Which method is preferred by the FASB?
  • Which method is more popular to use?

Grading Rubric

50%

Basic response to the DB question

30%

Additional research supporting the initial answer to the DB question

20%

Comments which serve to further the discussion, apply real world example or lend to enhancing the clarity of the concepts

In your own words, please post a response to the Discussion Board and comment on at least two other postings. You will be graded on the quality of your postings.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Course Materials

can you help me with this question with apa format and reference 496468

The owner of the company where you work finds out that you are majoring in accounting and she wants you to explain the corporate structure to her. She also wants to see why someone would want to invest in a corporation. She wants to better understand stock transactions that the corporation would engage in.

She wants you to:

  • Explain the corporate structure.
  • Select two companies in the same industry and find their financial statements for the last two years. Provide citations for all statements.
  • Compare the stockholder s equity between these two company’s financial statements.
  • Explain what kinds of stock transactions have taken place in the last two years.

Grading Criteria

15%

Explain the corporate structure.

15%

Select two companies in the same industry and find their financial statements for the last two years. Provide citations for all statements.

15%

Compare the stockholder s equity between these two company’s financial statements.

15%

Explain what kinds of stock transactions have taken place in the last two years.

20%

Additional research supporting the initial answer to the IP

20%

Justified ideas and responses by using appropriate examples or personal experience.

Please submit your assignment.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Course Materials

can you help me with this question with apa format and reference 496469

The Chief Operating Officer where you work does not understand why the company should waste their time in preparing the statement of cash flows. He wants to have a better understanding of this financial statement and asks you to do the following:

  • Select two companies in the same industry, and use the Internet to find their current statement of cash flows; provide citations for both.
  • For each company, answer the following questions:
    • Which method do they each use when calculating the net cash provided by operating activities?
    • What was the most significant item reported by each company in their investing section and in their financing section?
    • What were the companies trends in net cash provided by operating activities during this period of time?

Grading Criteria

15%

Select two companies in the same industry, and use the Internet to find their current statement of cash flows; provide citations for both.

15%

Which method does each company use when calculating the net cash provided by operating activities?

15%

What was the most significant item reported by each company in their investing section and in their financing section?

15%

What were each companies trends in net cash provided by operating activities during this period of time?

20%

Additional research supporting the initial answer to the IP by using references which are cited in the IP

20%

Justified ideas and responses by using appropriate examples or personal experience.

This assignment will be assessed using additional criteria providedhere.

Please submit your assignment.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Course Materials

can you help me with this question with apa format and reference 496470

The Chief Operating Officer where you work does not understand why the company should waste their time in preparing the statement of cash flows. He wants to have a better understanding of this financial statement and asks you to do the following:

  • Select two companies in the same industry, and use the Internet to find their current statement of cash flows; provide citations for both.
  • For each company, answer the following questions:
    • Which method do they each use when calculating the net cash provided by operating activities?
    • What was the most significant item reported by each company in their investing section and in their financing section?
    • What were the companies trends in net cash provided by operating activities during this period of time?

Grading Criteria

15%

Select two companies in the same industry, and use the Internet to find their current statement of cash flows; provide citations for both.

15%

Which method does each company use when calculating the net cash provided by operating activities?

15%

What was the most significant item reported by each company in their investing section and in their financing section?

15%

What were each companies trends in net cash provided by operating activities during this period of time?

20%

Additional research supporting the initial answer to the IP by using references which are cited in the IP

20%

Justified ideas and responses by using appropriate examples or personal experience.

This assignment will be assessed using additional criteria providedhere.

Please submit your assignment.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Course Materials

busn300 496414

ANYONE HAVE THIS ASSIGNMENT ASAP IN 3HRS

Your manager believes in learning from other companies’ success stories as well as stories of failure. In particular, she likes to apply various management theories when possible, rather than starting from the beginning every time a decision has to be made. She asks you to write a memo to her addressing the following:

From any recent or current event in the news, discuss and explain the use of these two specific theories that the firms you researched believed in

  • In the human resource area, moving toward an employee empowerment culture
  • In the marketing area, the theory of penetration pricing

For each of these two, explain the following:

  • The issue being addressed that gave rise to employing these theories
  • How the theory being followed leads to specific actions on the part of the company
  • Results achieved
  • If you had been the senior manager in these situations, at those companies, how might you have addressed the situation any differently? What other theory could have been the basis for the decision.

Please submit your assignment.

busn300 496415

You are the general manager of a large construction project. The contract has both financial incentives for finishing on time or early as well as large penalties if the project is completed late. You know that to get it done on time or early, project planning using a formal time line is essential.

Address the following questions:

  1. In terms of creating a timeline, what is meant by the critical path of a PERT chart?
  2. As a project manager you know that the fastest possible time a project can be completed is known as the critical path. This implies that any delay in any step of a projects critical path, will therefore delay the overall project. On a particular project, step B is part of the critical path; step C and D both are not. Assume that all of these steps, B, C, and D are at risk of being delayed due to some issue (could be lack of people, lack of materials, equipment downtime it makes no difference).
    • How would the manager go about prioritizing correction of the problem existing in B, C, or D
    • Should the manager address the issue in step B first, step C first, or step D first; why?
  3. Once repair is completed in step #2, how would go you about prioritizing repairs at the other two steps?

In your own words, please post a response to the Discussion Board and comment on other postings. You will be graded on the quality of your postings.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

busn300 496416

You are the general manager of a large construction project. The contract has both financial incentives for finishing on time or early as well as large penalties if the project is completed late. You know that to get it done on time or early, project planning using a formal time line is essential.

Address the following questions:

  1. In terms of creating a timeline, what is meant by the critical path of a PERT chart?
  2. As a project manager you know that the fastest possible time a project can be completed is known as the critical path. This implies that any delay in any step of a projects critical path, will therefore delay the overall project. On a particular project, step B is part of the critical path; step C and D both are not. Assume that all of these steps, B, C, and D are at risk of being delayed due to some issue (could be lack of people, lack of materials, equipment downtime it makes no difference).
    • How would the manager go about prioritizing correction of the problem existing in B, C, or D
    • Should the manager address the issue in step B first, step C first, or step D first; why?
  3. Once repair is completed in step #2, how would go you about prioritizing repairs at the other two steps?

In your own words, please post a response to the Discussion Board and comment on other postings. You will be graded on the quality of your postings.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

busn300 496417

You are the general manager of a large construction project. The contract has both financial incentives for finishing on time or early as well as large penalties if the project is completed late. You know that to get it done on time or early, project planning using a formal time line is essential.

Address the following questions:

  1. In terms of creating a timeline, what is meant by the critical path of a PERT chart?
  2. As a project manager you know that the fastest possible time a project can be completed is known as the critical path. This implies that any delay in any step of a projects critical path, will therefore delay the overall project. On a particular project, step B is part of the critical path; step C and D both are not. Assume that all of these steps, B, C, and D are at risk of being delayed due to some issue (could be lack of people, lack of materials, equipment downtime it makes no difference).
    • How would the manager go about prioritizing correction of the problem existing in B, C, or D
    • Should the manager address the issue in step B first, step C first, or step D first; why?
  3. Once repair is completed in step #2, how would go you about prioritizing repairs at the other two steps?

In your own words, please post a response to the Discussion Board and comment on other postings. You will be graded on the quality of your postings.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

busn300 496419

Using your current work organization (or an organization of interest) as the subject matter, research the elements of business and prepare an APA formatted paper that:

  • Analyzes the organization s basic legal, social, and economic environments
  • Analyzes the organization s managerial, operational, and financial issues including:
    • Project Management
    • Project Timelines
    • Critical Paths and Contingency Planning
    • Implementation Plan Contingencies
    • Staffing Needs and Tools
    • One Gantt Chart Example
    • One PERT Chart Example
  • Analyzes the impact of potential change factors and the impact on the functions of management

This assignment will be assessed using additional criteria providedhere.

Please submit your assignment.

busn300 496420

You are the newly appointed President of the local Chamber of Commerce. You are making your first presentation to the Chamber and want to make a good first impression.

Your presentation will be based on the following topic, purpose, and audience.

  • Topic: Expected U.S. GDP growth rate going forward
  • Audience: Local chamber of commerce
  • Purpose: To give business leaders an idea of what the economy may look like based on recent history and expected future conditions

Part I

Write a 600-750 word research paper given the topic, purpose, and audience information above. In addressing GDP, consider the following:

  • Trends, forecasts, and statistics
  • How GDP is determined
  • Interpreting GDP

Part II

Prepare a PowerPoint presentation, consisting of at least 15 slides, to supplement your research paper and be presented to the Chamber of Commerce of an area of your choice. As with any effective presentation, the PowerPoint should be in color, have at least one chart, and clip art on other slides.

PowerPoint – Presentation Guidelines

The following guidelines for your PowerPoint presentation will be used to grade your work as well:

  • Limit the number of words on slides. Slides are designed to supplement your presentation not to be your presentation (in this assignment, it is to supplement your research paper).
    • Avoid paragraphs
    • Use bullet points
    • Use succinct phrases instead of sentences
  • Limit each slide to 6 bullet points
  • Simple fonts
    • Fonts “with feet” are easier to read (in a paragraph)
    • Fonts “without feet” make nice titles
  • Choose color combinations that make your presentation easy to read.
  • Limit graphics to 1-3 per page. Too many graphics can be distracting.
  • Bells and whistles tend to be distracting for the viewer. Make sure that special effects have a purpose. Proofread and spell check.

Please submit your assignment.

busn300 496421

ou are a marketing manager interviewing for a new job at several different firms simultaneously. You expect to be asked the same questions in each interview dealing with what you think are some good new marketing opportunities for each firm to pursue. You know that being well prepared for an interview gives you a better chance of being offered the job, so you decided to study each company where you are interviewing.

Pick any 3 firms to research. Based on Internet research on these companies, write a 500 750-word research paper proposing at least 3 marketing opportunities that you would strongly suggest that each firm pursue. In your arguments, include the following:

  • Describe your reasoning for identifying them as worthy of pursuing.
  • Categorize each marketing opportunity as low-hanging fruit, home runs, or singles, and discuss why (see definitions in course materials).
  • Discuss the risk in pursuing each opportunity.
  • Without actually trying to determine each project’s ROE, which would you most strongly recommend implementing, and why?
  • Explain how the marketing opportunity would reflect upon the firm. Would it have a positive or negative public relations effect on the firm? Would it result in great financial improvements, or only a minor improvement

Please submit your assignment.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

busn300 496422

ou are a marketing manager interviewing for a new job at several different firms simultaneously. You expect to be asked the same questions in each interview dealing with what you think are some good new marketing opportunities for each firm to pursue. You know that being well prepared for an interview gives you a better chance of being offered the job, so you decided to study each company where you are interviewing.

Pick any 3 firms to research. Based on Internet research on these companies, write a 500 750-word research paper proposing at least 3 marketing opportunities that you would strongly suggest that each firm pursue. In your arguments, include the following:

  • Describe your reasoning for identifying them as worthy of pursuing.
  • Categorize each marketing opportunity as low-hanging fruit, home runs, or singles, and discuss why (see definitions in course materials).
  • Discuss the risk in pursuing each opportunity.
  • Without actually trying to determine each project’s ROE, which would you most strongly recommend implementing, and why?
  • Explain how the marketing opportunity would reflect upon the firm. Would it have a positive or negative public relations effect on the firm? Would it result in great financial improvements, or only a minor improvement

Please submit your assignment.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

busn300 496423

art I

Write a 600-750 word research paper given the topic, purpose, and audience information above. In addressing GDP, consider the following:

  • Trends, forecasts, and statistics
  • How GDP is determined
  • Interpreting GDP

Part II

Prepare a PowerPoint presentation, consisting of at least 15 slides, to supplement your research paper and be presented to the Chamber of Commerce of an area of your choice. As with any effective presentation, the PowerPoint should be in color, have at least one chart, and clip art on other slides.

PowerPoint – Presentation Guidelines

The following guidelines for your PowerPoint presentation will be used to grade your work as well:

  • Limit the number of words on slides. Slides are designed to supplement your presentation not to be your presentation (in this assignment, it is to supplement your research paper).
    • Avoid paragraphs
    • Use bullet points
    • Use succinct phrases instead of sentences
  • Limit each slide to 6 bullet points
  • Simple fonts
    • Fonts “with feet” are easier to read (in a paragraph)
    • Fonts “without feet” make nice titles
  • Choose color combinations that make your presentation easy to read.
  • Limit graphics to 1-3 per page. Too many graphics can be distracting.
  • Bells and whistles tend to be distracting for the viewer. Make sure that special effects have a purpose. Proofread and spell check.

Please submit your assignment.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

busn300 496424

NEED THIS ASSIGNMENT IN 3 HRS ANY MIRACLE TEACHERS OUT THERE?

You are the newly appointed President of the local Chamber of Commerce. You are making your first presentation to the Chamber and want to make a good first impression.

Your presentation will be based on the following topic, purpose, and audience.

  • Topic: Expected U.S. GDP growth rate going forward
  • Audience: Local chamber of commerce
  • Purpose: To give business leaders an idea of what the economy may look like based on recent history and expected future conditions

Part I

Write a 600-750 word research paper given the topic, purpose, and audience information above. In addressing GDP, consider the following:

  • Trends, forecasts, and statistics
  • How GDP is determined
  • Interpreting GDP

Part II

Prepare a PowerPoint presentation, consisting of at least 15 slides, to supplement your research paper and be presented to the Chamber of Commerce of an area of your choice. As with any effective presentation, the PowerPoint should be in color, have at least one chart, and clip art on other slides.

PowerPoint – Presentation Guidelines

The following guidelines for your PowerPoint presentation will be used to grade your work as well:

  • Limit the number of words on slides. Slides are designed to supplement your presentation not to be your presentation (in this assignment, it is to supplement your research paper).
    • Avoid paragraphs
    • Use bullet points
    • Use succinct phrases instead of sentences
  • Limit each slide to 6 bullet points
  • Simple fonts
    • Fonts “with feet” are easier to read (in a paragraph)
    • Fonts “without feet” make nice titles
  • Choose color combinations that make your presentation easy to read.
  • Limit graphics to 1-3 per page. Too many graphics can be distracting.
  • Bells and whistles tend to be distracting for the viewer. Make sure that special effects have a purpose. Proofread and spell check.

Please submit your assignment.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

busn300 496425

As the fund manager for a large mutual fund, you are preparing for a conference call with all your major investors. You plan to e-mail everyone with an attachment that will serve as a guide for the upcoming call. You know investors’ time is limited, so you want to be focused in your brief report. Because there are numerous figures to discuss, you will be including 1 or more charts all in the same document.

For each of the following points, prepare both a paragraph of commentary and an appropriate chart to support it.

  • Find the last 4 years’ sales and profit or net income data for a major retail corporation.
  • Calculate profit as a percentage of sales; be careful to place the decimal point correctly.
  • Prepare a paragraph of explanation/interpretation of the data as if this were a small part of a lengthy report to potential investors.
  • Prepare a chart to display all the information in a meaningful way.

Suggestions for Responding to Peer Posts

Review your peer’s chart and commentary, and consider the following questions:

  • Is their commentary sufficient support for the chart and enough information to supply potential investors with?
  • Is the chart understandable or confusing?
  • What do you think about the chart design?
  • Were the sales, net income, and percentage of sales calculated correctly? If not, explain what went wrong and provide the correct calculations.

In your own words, please post a response to the Discussion Board and comment on other postings. You will be graded on the quality of your postings.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

busn300 496426

As the fund manager for a large mutual fund, you are preparing for a conference call with all your major investors. You plan to e-mail everyone with an attachment that will serve as a guide for the upcoming call. You know investors’ time is limited, so you want to be focused in your brief report. Because there are numerous figures to discuss, you will be including 1 or more charts all in the same document.

For each of the following points, prepare both a paragraph of commentary and an appropriate chart to support it.

  • Find the last 4 years’ sales and profit or net income data for a major retail corporation.
  • Calculate profit as a percentage of sales; be careful to place the decimal point correctly.
  • Prepare a paragraph of explanation/interpretation of the data as if this were a small part of a lengthy report to potential investors.
  • Prepare a chart to display all the information in a meaningful way.

Suggestions for Responding to Peer Posts

Review your peer’s chart and commentary, and consider the following questions:

  • Is their commentary sufficient support for the chart and enough information to supply potential investors with?
  • Is the chart understandable or confusing?
  • What do you think about the chart design?
  • Were the sales, net income, and percentage of sales calculated correctly? If not, explain what went wrong and provide the correct calculations.

In your own words, please post a response to the Discussion Board and comment on other postings. You will be graded on the quality of your postings.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

busn311 496427

In each of the assignments in this course, you will be dealing with the following scenario: American Intellectual Union (AIU) has assembled a team of researchers in the United States and around the world to study job satisfaction. Congratulations, you have been selected to participate in this massive global undertaking.

The study will require that you examine data, analyze the results, and share the results with groups of other researchers. Job satisfaction is important to companies large and small, and understanding it provides managers with insights into human behavior that can be used to strengthen the company’s bottom line.

The data set for the study is a sample of a survey conducted on the population of the American Intellectual Union (AIU). This session’s unique data set may be found in the LEARNING MATERIALS and it contains the following nine sections of data that will be used throughout our course:

    • Gender
    • Age
    • Department
    • Position
    • Tenure
    • Overall Job Satisfaction
    • Intrinsic Job Satisfaction Satisfaction with the actual performance of the job
    • Extrinsic Job Satisfaction external to the job, for example, office location, your work colleagues, your own office (cubicle/hard walled office, etc),
    • Benefits Health insurance, pension plan, vacation, sick days, etc.

In the first assignment you are to complete the following:

  • You will need to examine two of the nine sections of data:
    • one section of qualitative data (choose either Gender or Position)
    • one section of quantitative data (choose either Intrinsic or Extrinsic)
  • Each section should include all data points listed in the column for the variable. The requirements include:
    1. Identify the data you selected.
    2. Explain why the data was selected.
    3. Explain what was learned by examining these sets of data.
    4. Your analysis should include using Microsoft Excel to obtain information about the data through the use of three measures of central tendency (mean, median, mode).
    5. Your analysis should also include the use of two measures of variability (standard deviation and variance). Some measures are appropriate for qualitative data, and some are appropriate for quantitative data.
    6. If a measure is not applicable, then explain why.
    7. You will have to also provide one chart/graph for each of the results of the two processed sections of data (2 total), such as a pie or bar chart or a histogram. (A table is not a chart/graph.) Ensure that you label the chart/graph clearly.
    8. You will then need to discuss what you additionally learned from the results of this process.
    9. Explain why charts/graphs are important in conveying information in a visual format and why standard deviation and variation are important.

You will need to combine all of the items above into one comprehensive report. This report must be completed in Microsoft Word and should contain:

buy actos without prescriptin needed actos online with no prescription or membership 496429

In case you be given guidance concerning actos generously pay a visit to Pharmacy Lookup.

Stop by Alison Wilson’s site to purchase out exactly about

From time it opens to some time it closes, a pharmacy team is busy. When you are at the pharmacy counter, whether it’s to go away or grab put your phone down. During christmas, Meadow’s stocks a range of beautiful holiday ornaments and home decor. buy actos for cash on delivery. buy actos next day delivery. Vitamin c actos pseudo ephedrine.

Generally, an internet drug store that is known for quite a while must get yourself a better rating. You should enhance your written and verbal communication skills. Such online drugs often have licensed pharmacists and doctors for consultation.

Pharmacy technicians also do not provide advice to patients about medication options, negative effects, or any other drug information. Ask the managers in the places that you enjoy shopping if they feature these types of programs, in the event you aren’t already frequenting CVS and Winn-Dixie. According to the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS), pharmacists perform a lot more than provide prescriptions to patients.

All this, however comes in an exceeding boost in cost; the next phase now is not simply to modify GPS technology but to restore affordable in the same time. cheap actos by fedex cod. Luckily, you’ll find Rx discount cards, coupons, and savings programs which could save you quite a lot of money, and quite a few are easy to find and manage. actos updrafts actos without prescription cod actos dosage for children. Success is not only just good luck: it can be a combination of efforts, good credit standing, opportunity, readiness and timing.

Tags:
actos without prescription overnight shipping
online us pharmacy actos buy actos no prescription needed
Prescription pain meds actos
actos with no presciption
buy actos prescription online
buy actos no rx
buy actos tablets without prescription buy actos cheap cod no rx
actos buy in UK
buy actos usa no prescription
buy actos no rx needed
actos dosage for children
actos with free dr consultation
actos percocet
Buy actos USA Online. Order actos Overnight Delivery
cheap actos for sale with no perscription required
buy actos
actos free consultation us pharmacy
actos fedex
actos non prescription fedex overnight free buy actos overnight fedex
actos without prescription or membership order actos online without prescription
actos on sale cheap online
buy actos no prescription cod
actos morphine equivalency
Buy actos Without Perscription actos online purchase
actos tanning bed
actos no rx saturday delivery
Ptu and actos for hyperthyroid
actos ups delivery
buy cheap discount online actos
actos free overnight fedex delivery
buy actos and pay by cod
actos mdi hfa
actos buy fedex
buy actos usa cod
discount actos without prescription
actos delivered Overnight order actos online without prescription
Pharmacy actos No Prescrption
buy actos without prescriptin needed
actos with saturday delivery
actos online saturday delivery
actos and ovulation
actos buy cod buy actos online without a prescription
avandia actos risks
cheap actos no rx
actos no doctors consult
Side effects of actos 20 mg
Manufacturers of actos injectable raw material
actos with doctor consult
how to buy actos online without prescription
avandia actos senate report 6000 deaths
actos order online no membership overnight actos without prescription cheap
Major route of metabolism of actos
cheap actos for sale online no prescription required actos xr buy online cheap
actos ppd
Hep c and actos
cod shipped actos
actos neb hyperkalemia treatment
buy actos without doctor rx
actos legal FDA DEA approved
Maximum residue level actos
actos in mexico without prescription
Propoxyphene and actos
actos hcl 20 mg
buy actos no prescriptin needed
buy actos without a prescription or membership
actos for cats without prescription
actos shipped on saturday
cheap actos sales
cheap actos by money order
cheap actos without prescription overnight delivery
Cheap actos overnight
Urinary tract infection actos
buy actos on line without a prescription
actos ecoli
actos cash on delivery overnight
buy actos cod
actos CheaP no membership
actos updrafts
online pharmacy cod actos
buy actos no doctor
actos diarrhea
where to buy generic actos online without a prescriptin
actos online no prescription fedex
Develop tolerance to actos
actos overnight no prescription
buy actos for cash on delivery
no prescription next day delivery actos
actos next day
buy actos us pharmacy
Buy actos in Idaho actos Overnight delivery
actos allery cold directions
cheap actos on line
online us pharmacy actos
actos order online no membership overnight buy actos overnight fedex
Could actos cause hives
Does actos treat pneumonia
Ativan haldol actos regland cream
Vicodin actos flexaril
order actos overnight
fedex actos online cod
no prescription actos with fedex
actos and overnight cheap actos no prescription next day delivery
cheap actos for sale with no prescriptin required
actos same day delivery buy actos online
Does actos expire
no prescription needed actos
50mg actos baby overdose
actos online overnight delivery cod
Taking actos while pregnant
actos rx
actos cod shipping how to get actos prescription
no prescripton actos
Diarrhea with actos
overnight buy actos actos c.o.d
buy actos with credit card
cheap actos saturday delivery
actos cod orders
actos cats side effects
no rx actos
how to get a doctor to prescript actos Online doctor consultation for actos
cheap actos overnight
order actos online from mexico buy actos cheap cod no rx
actos online with no prescription or membership
actos and yellow cube
order genuine cheap actos online
Interaction actos selamectin
actos alcohol high blood pressure
actos xr online overnight actos ups cod
online pharmacy actos no prescription
2275 93 actos
order actos online without a perscription
buy actos pay pal without prescription
actos without a prescription
purchase actos uk delivery
overnight actos cod
us actos fedex
next Day Shipping Buy actos USA Online
actos without prescription cash on delivery
Alternative to actos
Valtrex vs actos for cold sores
Wholesale actos
actos allergy extra strength dosage
What should actos pills look like
actos online with no prescription or membership actos prescriptions
prescription actos
buy actos order cod
actos cash on delivery
actos orders cod
order actos with no prescription
how to buy actos on line
actos and elderly
actos non prescription
actos online order
cheap actos by fedex cod
actos cod
actos free shipping buy actos no rx cheap
non generic actos no prescription actos online no perscription
actos fedex without prescription
actos shipped overnight no prescription
actos cheap actos overnight delivery no rx
actos cod actos cheap no rx required canada
Extracting actos from oxycodone
buy actos usa cod actos on sale cheap online
actos no script needed cod Overnight buy actos and pay by cod
cod actos no prescription
actos cod no prescription required
actos no prescrption
actos and overnight
actos ordering without dr
actos shipped with no prescription
actos 12.5
actos msds
actos related to cocaine use
buy actos and pay by cod fedex
Purchase actos with no prescription
Pediatric actos dosing
actos and pneumonia in toddler
actos without prescription cod
buy actos 30mg online
online doctor consultation for actos actos overnight delivery no rx
actos overnight fed ex buy actos cheap cod no rx
cheap actos fedEx
order actos next day
how to buy actos online without prescription prescription actos cod
non prescriptin cheap actos
actos cheap actos Online Overnight delivery cod
actos ONLINE FEDEX COD FREE CONSULT
buy actos next day delivery
Vitamin c actos pseudo ephedrine
actos xr Buy Online CheaP
order actos cod buy cheap actos pills
buy actos online overnight
actos for bronchitis
how to Buy actos Online without rescription
actos with no r x and free shipping

buy lexapro pakistan buy lexapro prescriptions 496430

If you would like to obtain more info relating to lexapro please visit Pharmacy Lookup.

Now enter your shipping address (when you have just created your bank account) and give the amount due. Questions about the prescriptions are referred for the pharmacist, nevertheless the pharmacy technician handles other duties such as filling the prescriptions, stocking the shelves, cashiering, delivering medical devices, reviewing information to avoid drug interactions and verifying received prescriptions. There are a few websites that supply toll free number whereby you can contact in the case of any query or further verification.

As these drugs online are developing daily almost all sorts of medicines that exist in medical stores can be found there. When you are at the pharmacy counter, whether it be to go away or pick up put your phone down. lexapro zebutal. lexapro next day delivery cod. buy lexapro from canada. Cu transformed an easy data entry company into becoming one of the country’s largest outsourcing service providers. buy cheap lexapro no perscription.

They usually work a similar hours as the pharmacist, because the pharmacy technician works under close supervision from the pharmacist. There are extremely a number of good pharmacy tech schools, each for the internet and at campuses, that can give you the instruction you’ll need inside a short amount of time, typically from four months to 2 many years. These online drug dealers bypass government safeguards which need uniformity of quality, a prescription from the licensed doctor saying the drug is intended particularly to suit your needs, and the drug just isn’t counterfeit, meets manufacturing standards which is safe and effective for that prescribed use.

If you’re disabled in accordance with federal government standards, and receive government disability payments, then you definitely generally will surely have your student loans discharged. As a smaller entrepreneur, when was it time to boost prices like Netflix. how to buy lexapro in the uk Ed and lexapro cheap lexapro without prescription no prescription required for lexapro. The respiratory therapist’s tasks include providing the precise measurements of oxygen or other varieties of gas concentrations inside patient’s blood in addition to measuring blood alkalinity or acidity levels.

I have an even deeper reply to this newest pharmacy tragedy. Progression and cancer risk factors can therefore be safely assumed for similar conditions existing in NSCLC. Homeopathy medicine may be around for a lot of years.

Tags:
lexapro ONLINE FEDEX COD FREE CONSULT
lexapro non prescription fedex overnight free order lexapro overnight cod
buy lexapro pakistan
Purchase lexapro with no prescription
can we buy lexapro online
online pharmacy lexapro no prescription
order lexapro online without a perscription
buy lexapro no creditcard
lexapro without prescription cheap
buy lexapro ativan
money order lexapro
Buy lexapro Online without dr approval
lexapro saturday
lexapro online next day
lexapro to buy
2275 93 lexapro
non prescription cheap lexapro
buy lexapro pets
buy lexapro no prior script overnight
buy lexapro ir
lexapro Buy Online No Prescription
lexapro xr buy online cheap lexapro no prescription next day delivery
buy lexapro order cod
lexapro 0.5
How to get a lexapro without rx
lexapro lawsuit
how to get a doctor to prescript lexapro lexapro cash on delivery
buy perscription lexapro online
lexapro without perscription lexapro no prior script
lexapro without prescriptin overnight shipping
lexapro in mexico without prescriptin
lexapro no physician approval
buy lexapro tablets without prescription lexapro without a rx
Your buy lexapro is astounding
buy lexapro in the uk
lexapro lexapro
buy cheap lexapro no perscription
buy lexapro no prescription needed
lexapro from mexico without a perscription
lexapro 2mg s bars
lexapro 2mg fedex
buy lexapro online canadian no script
lexapro cod saturday delivery fedex
buy lexapro prescriptions
buy lexapro fedex
lexapro for sell no prescription
buy lexapro next day cod
lexapro online order codest
order lexapro online from mexico buy lexapro cheap cod no rx
buying lexapro on line
Hidos lexapro
lexapro drug no perscription
cheap lexapro no prescription
online us lexapro
buy lexapro nz
overnight delivery lexapro
lexapro bars
lexapro capsule 500mg 93 3109
should i buy lexapro online
free prescription lexapro
How much lexapro for a cat
lexapro with no prescriptions
cheap lexapro for sale with no prescriptin required
lexapro and insomnia
generic lexapro online lexapro pharmacy cod saturday delivery
lexapro prescription C O D
how to buy lexapro in the uk
online purchase lexapro
buy lexapro with no prescription
lexapro cheap cod
cheap saturday delivery lexapro
cheap lexapro for sale with no perscription required
cod lexapro overnight delivery
lexapro 2mg no rx
where to buy generic lexapro online without a perscription
buy lexapro placebo
buy generic lexapro no prescriptin
Buy lexapro Online by cod lexapro fed ex
buy lexapro.com
fedex overnight lexapro
lexapro no prescription next day delivery
buy lexapro medication online
cod lexapro no prescription next day delivery
lexapro discount card
buy lexapro online without a script
how to buy lexapro cr
overnight delivery on lexapro
lexapro tablet side effects
canadian lexapro without prescription lexapro overnight fed ex no prescription
buy lexapro 30mg
lexapro overnight
lexapro.buy-cheap-meds.com
cheap lexapro without prescription no prescription required for lexapro
buy lexapro in mexico
buy lexapro xr australia
no prescription cod lexapro lexapro no rx Overnight
buy lexapro amex
lexapro online saturday delivery
buy lexapro using paypal
lexapro no rx fed ex lexapro from mexico without prescription
no perscription required lexapro
lexapro zebutal
cheap lexapro no rx
lexapro cheap online
order lexapro online without prescription
lexapro cheap low price lexapro without prescription
online lexapro cod pharmacy
lexapro picture of pill
lexapro without a perscription cheap
lexapro pill
buy lexapro in illinois
lexapro overnight delivery no r x
Cash on delivery lexapro overnight
buy lexapro in Louisiana lexapro online prescription
lexapro online without a prescription
lexapro next day no prescription
buy lexapro amazon
Insomnia and lexapro
where to buy lexapro online uk
lexapro overnight delivery fed ex
lexapro 50 mg
can you buy lexapro over the counter in the uk
lexapro online delivery
lexapro next day no perscription
lexapro order
lexapro msds
lexapro without persription
online doctor consultation for lexapro
lexapro fluoxetina
lexapro free saturday delivery
lexapro overnight online
lexapro same day delivery non prescription cheap lexapro
cod lexapro
buy lexapro online without a perscription and no membership
Bad lexapro ativan and dexamethasone
help paying for lexapro prescription
lexapro no physicisn consult
Will lexapro affect sex
lexapro COD next day
cheap lexapro next day delivery
buy lexapro from canada
legit places to buy lexapro
buy lexapro us pharmacy online
no prescripton lexapro
lexapro no script needed cod Overnight buy lexapro and pay by cod
Alternative to lexapro
where to buy discount lexapro without a prescription online
Ed and lexapro
buy lexapro online discreet
5 mg lexapro
buy lexapro sun pharmacy
buy lexapro overnight delivery
lexapro 12.5
buy generic lexapro no perscription
buy cheap lexapro no Prescription lexapro online prescription
no prior prescription lexapro online without dr
where to Buy lexapro no prescription no fees
lexapro overnight without rx
lexapro overnight no script
lexapro same day
no prescription saturday delivery lexapro
lexapro prescriptions
cod lexapro cod saturday delivery
lexapro without prescriptin or membership
lexapro free consultation
Tadalafil taken with lexapro
lexapro cod overnight lexapro and overnight
what does lexapro look like
lexapro Cash Delivery Cod
lexapro dosage for children
lexapro without persription online ordering lexapro
cf lexapro online pharmacy
lexapro next day delivery cod
no prescriptin required lexapro
buy lexapro ir online
lexapro no rx
buy lexapro online ireland
lexapro online overnight delivery cod
buy lexapro health solutions
lexapro fedex without a perscription
order lexapro without prescription from us pharmacy
buy lexapro without credit card or check
2mg lexapro bars
free shipping lexapro
lexapro with same day delivery
good place to buy lexapro
buy cheap lexapro without a perscription
doctor shopping for lexapro prescription

buyco holds 25 percent of the outstanding shares of marqueen and appropriately appli 496431

BuyCo holds 25 percent of the outstanding shares of Marqueen and appropriately applies the equity method of accounting. Excess cost amortization (related to a patent) associated with this investment amounts to $10,000 per year. For 2012, Marqueen reported earnings of $100,000 and pays cash dividends of $30,000. During that year, Marqueen acquired inventory for $50,000, which it then sold to BuyCo for $80,000. At the end of 2012, BuyCo continued to hold merchandise with a transfer price of $32,000.

a.

What Equity in Investee Income should BuyCo report for 2012?

Equity in Investee Income

$

b.

How will the intra-entity transfer affect BuyCo s reporting in 2013?

Equity accrual for 2013 will (Click to select)increasedecreaseby $ .

c.

If BuyCo had sold the inventory to Marqueen, whether the answers to (a) and (b) would change?

byp17 2 managerial analysis ideal manufacturing company 496432

Ideal Manufacturing Company of Sycamore, Illinois, has supported a research and development (R&D) department that has for many years been the sole contributor to the company’s new farm machinery products. The R&D activity is an overhead cost center that provides services only to in-house manufacturing departments (four different product lines), all of which produce agricultural/farm/ranch related machinery products.
The department has never sold its services outside, but because of its long history of success, larger manufacturers of agricultural products have approached Ideal to hire its R&D department for special projects. Because the costs of operating the R&D department have been spiraling uncontrollably, Ideal’s management is considering entertaining these outside approaches to absorb the increasing costs. But, (1) management doesn’t have any cost basis for charging R&D services to outsiders, and (2) it needs to gain control of its R&D costs. Management decides to implement an activity-based costing system in order to determine the charges for both outsiders and the in-house users of the department’s services.
R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs.
Market analysis $1,050,000
Product design 2,350,000
Product development 3,600,000
Prototype testing 1,400,000
Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities are:
Activities Cost Drivers Total Estimated Drivers
Market analysis Hours of analysis 15,000 hours
Product design Number of designs 2,500 designs
Product development Number of products 90 products
Prototype testing Number of tests 500 tests
Instructions
(a)
Compute the activity-based overhead rate for each activity cost pool.
(b)
How much cost would be charged to an in-house manufacturing department that consumed 1,800 hours of market analysis time, was provided 280 designs relating to 10 products, and requested 92 engineering tests?
(c)
How much cost would serve as the basis for pricing an R&D bid with an outside company on a contract that would consume 800 hours of analysis time, require 178 designs relating to 3 products, and result in 70 engineering tests?
(d)
What is the benefit to Ideal Manufacturing of applying activity-based costing to its R&D activity for both in-house and outside charging purposes?

byp17 2 managerial analysis ideal manufacturing company 496433

BYP17-2
MANAGERIAL ANALYSIS
Ideal Manufacturing Company of Sycamore, Illinois, has supported a research and development (R&D) department that has for many years been the sole contributor to the company’s new farm machinery products. The R&D activity is an overhead cost center that provides services only to in-house manufacturing departments (four different product lines), all of which produce agricultural/farm/ranch related machinery products.
The department has never sold its services outside, but because of its long history of success, larger manufacturers of agricultural products have approached Ideal to hire its R&D department for special projects. Because the costs of operating the R&D department have been spiraling uncontrollably, Ideal’s management is considering entertaining these outside approaches to absorb the increasing costs. But, (1) management doesn’t have any cost basis for charging R&D services to outsiders, and (2) it needs to gain control of its R&D costs. Management decides to implement an activity-based costing system in order to determine the charges for both outsiders and the in-house users of the department’s services.
R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs.
Market analysis $1,050,000
Product design 2,350,000
Product development 3,600,000
Prototype testing 1,400,000
Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities are:
Activities Cost Drivers Total Estimated Drivers
Market analysis Hours of analysis 15,000 hours
Product design Number of designs 2,500 designs
Product development Number of products 90 products
Prototype testing Number of tests 500 tests

Instructions
(a)Compute the activity-based overhead rate for each activity cost pool.
(b)How much cost would be charged to an in-house manufacturing department that consumed 1,800 hours of market analysis time, was provided 280 designs relating to 10 products, and requested 92 engineering tests?
(c)How much cost would serve as the basis for pricing an R&D bid with an outside company on a contract that would consume 800 hours of analysis time, require 178 designs relating to 3 products, and result in 70 engineering tests?
(d)What is the benefit to Ideal Manufacturing of applying activity-based costing to its R&D activity for both in-house and outside charging purposes?

byp18 1 decision making across the organization 496434

Martinez Company has decided to introduce a new product. The new product can be manufactured by either a capital-intensive method or a labor-intensive method. The manufacturing method will not affect the quality of the product. The estimated manufacturing costs by the two methods are as follows.
Capital-Intensive Labor-Intensive
Direct materials $5 per unit $5.50 per unit
Direct labor $6 per unit $8.00 per unit
Variable overhead $3 per unit $4.50 per unit
Fixed manufacturing costs $2,508,000 $1,538,000

Martinez’s market research department has recommended an introductory unit sales price of $30. The incremental selling expenses are estimated to be $502,000 annually plus $2 for each unit sold, regardless of manufacturing method.
Instructions
With the class divided into groups, answer the following.
(a) Calculate the estimated break-even point in annual unit sales of the new product if Martinez Company uses the:

1. Capital-intensive manufacturing method.
2. Labor-intensive manufacturing method.

(b) Determine the annual unit sales volume at which Martinez Company would be indifferent between the two manufacturing methods.
(c) Explain the circumstance under which Martinez should employ each of the two manufacturing methods.
(CMA adapted)

Additional: Please show graph in excel with calculations

ca16 4 stock compensation plans 496437

The following two items appeared on the Internet concerning the GAAP requirement to expense stock options.

WASHINGTON, D.C. February 17, 2005 Congressman David Dreier (R CA), Chairman of the House Rules Committee, and Congresswoman Anna Eshoo (D CA) reintroduced legislation today that will preserve broad-based employee stock option plans and give investors critical information they need to understand how employee stock options impact the value of their shares.

Last year, the U.S. House of Representatives overwhelmingly voted for legislation that would have ensured the continued ability of innovative companies to offer stock options to rank-and-file employees, Dreier stated. Both the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) continue to ignore our calls to address legitimate concerns about the impact of FASB’s new standard on workers’ ability to have an ownership stake in the New Economy, and its failure to address the real need of shareholders: accurate and meaningful information about a company’s use of stock options.

In December 2004, FASB issued a stock option expensing standard that will render a huge blow to the 21st century economy, Dreier said. Their action and the SEC’s apparent lack of concern for protecting shareholders, requires us to once again take a firm stand on the side of investors and economic growth. Giving investors the ability to understand how stock options impact the value of their shares is critical. And equally important is preserving the ability of companies to use this innovative tool to attract talented employees.

Here We Go Again! by Jack Ciesielski (2/21/2005, http://www.accountingobserver.com/blog/2005/02/here-we-go-again) On February 17, Congressman David Dreier (R CA), and Congresswoman Anna Eshoo (D CA), officially entered Silicon Valley’s bid to gum up the launch of honest reporting of stock option compensation: They co-sponsored a bill to preserve broad-based employee stock option plans and give investors critical information they need to understand how employee stock options impact the value of their shares. You know what critical information they mean: stuff like the stock compensation for the top five officers in a company, with a rigged value set as close to zero as possible. Investors crave this kind of information. Other ways the good Congresspersons want to help investors: The bill also requires the SEC to study the effectiveness of those disclosures over three years, during which time, no new accounting standard related to the treatment of stock options could be recognized. Finally, the bill requires the Secretary of Commerce to conduct a study and report to Congress on the impact of broad-based employee stock option plans on expanding employee corporate ownership, skilled worker recruitment and retention, research and innovation, economic growth, and international competitiveness.

It’s the old four corners basketball strategy: stall, stall, stall. In the meantime, hope for regime change at your opponent, the FASB.

Instructions

(a)

What are the major recommendations of the stock-based compensation pronouncement?

(b)

How do the provisions of GAAP in this area differ from the bill introduced by members of Congress (Dreier and Eshoo), which would require expensing for options issued to only the top five officers in a company? Which approach do you think would result in more useful information? (Focus on comparability.)

bus308 statistics for managers 496390

This assignment is due ASAP.

Problem 1

The performances of a group of interns are evaluated by their supervisors at the end of their internships.

Their scores are: 55, 47, 62, 27, 50, 49, 66, 53, 50, 44, 63, 59.

Complete the calculations below using this data. Show all of your work and clearly label each of your calculations.

the mean

the median

the range

the standard deviation

the variance

Problem 2

The Anxiety General Stress Test (ANGST) has been designed to gauge the level of psychological stress management trainees experience when they are under pressure.

For a random sample of trainees the scores are as follows: 47, 49, 53, 53, 54, 58, 61, 64, 75, 81.

Complete the calculations below using this data. Show all of your work and clearly label each of your calculations.

What is the z score equivalent of ANGST = 81?

What is the probability that someone selected at random will score 81 or lower?

What percentage of all trainees will score between 60 and 75?

bus308 statistics for managers 496391

Suppose that an automotive parts and accessories chain is experimenting with a new sales promotion. Two similar stores are selected for the experiment. For Store 1, nothing changes. This store constitutes the control group. For Store 2, the treatment group, the promotion is implemented.

Sales in hundreds of dollars over a five-day period are as follows:

Control: 6, 6, 7, 10, 12, 9, 6, 5, 5, 7

Treatment: 2, 5, 2, 4, 7, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

The expectation that sales will be higher in the treatment group makes this a one-tailed test; the alternate hypothesis is m1

Show all of your work and clearly label each of your calculations. Share your calculations and your interpretations of your findings in your Word document.

Problem Two.

Suppose that a home builder is approached by a customer who wants to move in as soon as possible. The customer chooses three home designs that she likes and asks the home builder which one could be completed the fastest. To compare the three designs on speed of completion, the builder randomly selects 10 homes that he built in the past based on each of the three designs.

Use the Excel Analysis ToolPak to run an ANOVA test in order to determine which design would be best for the customer. Show all of your work and clearly label each of your calculations. Make sure to also clearly describe the respective data and your conclusions.

The data for the number of days to build each home are as follows:

Design A: 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31, 33

Design B: 29, 34, 39, 44, 49, 54, 59, 64, 69, 74

Design C: 22, 24, 25, 27, 28, 28, 29, 31, 33, 34

For more information on conducting an ANOVA test in Excel reference the Week Two Recommended Resources.

Problem Three

An insurance company is reviewing its current policy rates. When originally setting the rates they believed that the average claim amount was $1,800. Now there are concerns that if the true mean is actually higher than this they could potentially lose a lot of money. They randomly select 40 claims, and calculate a sample mean of $1,950. Assuming that the standard deviation of claims is $500, and set significance level = :05, test to see if the insurance company should be concerned.

Show all of your work and clearly label each of your calculations. Share your calculations from Excel and your interpretations of your findings in your Word document.

busi 320 corporate finance 2013 fall b assignment 4 496393

1. Problem 8-1 Cash discount [LO1]

Compute the cost of not taking the following cash discounts.

(a)

3/14, net 55. (Use 360 days in a year. Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places . Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Cost of lost discount

%

(b)

2/18, net 55. (Use 360 days in a year. Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Cost of lost discount

%

(c)

3/19, net 55. (Use 360 days in a year. Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Cost of lost discount

%

(d)

4/15, net 150. (Use 360 days in a year. Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Cost of lost discount

%

2.Problem 8-2 Cash discount decision [LO1]

Regis Clothiers can borrow from its bank at 17 percent to take a cash discount. The terms of the cash discount are 3/19, net 45.

(a)

Compute the cost of not taking the cash discount. (Use 360 days in a year. Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Cost of not taking a cash discount

(b)

Should the firm borrow the funds?

3.Problem 8-5 Effective rate of interest [LO2]

A pawn shop will lend $111 for 11 days at a cost of $13 interest.

What is the effective rate of interest (Use 360 days in a year. Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Effective rate

4.Problem 8-7 Effective rate on discounted loan [LO2]

Mary Ott is going to borrow $9,800 for 75 days and pay $171 interest.

What is the effective rate of interest if the loan is discounted? (Use 360 days in a year. Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Effective rate on discounted loan

5.Problem 8-8 Prime vs. LIBOR [LO2]

Dr. Ruth is going to borrow $1,800 to help write a book. The loan is for one year and the money can either be borrowed at the prime rate or the LIBOR rate. Assume the prime rate is 8 percent and LIBOR 2.5 percent less. Also assume there will be a $55 transaction fee with LIBOR (this amount must be added to the interest cost with LIBOR).

Which loan has the lower effective interest cost (Use 360 days in a year.)

6.Problem 8-9 Foreign borrowing [LO2]

Gulliver Travel Agencies thinks interest rates in Europe are low. The firm borrows euros at 9 percent for one year. During this time period the dollar falls 16 percent against the euro.

What is the effective interest rate on the loan for one year (Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Effective interest rate

%

7.Problem 8-10 Dollar cost of a loan [LO2]

Talmud Book Company borrows $19,900 for 45 days at 10 percent interest.

What is the dollar cost of the loan (Use 360 days in a year. Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Cost of loan

$

8.Problem 8-11 Net credit position [LO1]

McGriff Dog Food Company normally takes 23 days to pay for average daily credit purchases of $9,380. Its average daily sales are $10,070, and it collects accounts in 30 days.

(a)

What is its net credit position (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Net credit position

$

(b-1)

If the firm extends its average payment period from 23 days to 35 days (and all else remains the same), what is the firm’s new net credit position (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Net credit position

$

(b-2)

Has it improved its cash flow?

9.Problem 8-13 Compensating balances [LO2]

Computer Graphics Company needs $288,960 in funds for a project.

(a)

With a compensating balance requirement of 16 percent, how much will the firm need to borrow (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Amount to be borrowed

$

(b)

Given your answer to part a and a stated interest rate of 10 percent on the total amount borrowed, what is the effective rate on the $288,960 actually being used (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Effective rate

10.Problem 8-14 Compensating balances and installment loans [LO2]

The Dade Company is borrowing $395,000 for one year and paying $32,200 in interest to Miami National Bank. The bank requires a 22 percent compensating balance. The principal refers to funds the firm can effectively utilize (Amount borrowed Compensating balance).

(a)

What is the effective rate of interest (Use 360 days in a year. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Effective rate

%

(b)

What would be the effective rate if the company were required to make 12 monthly payments to retire the loan (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Effective rate

%

busi 320 corporate finance 2013 fall b exam 2 496394

BUSI-320 Corporate Finance-2013 Fall-B (Moten)

Exam 2

  1. Problem 6-4 External financing [LO1]

Antivirus, Inc., expects its sales next year to be $4,400,000. Inventory and accounts receivable will increase by $670,000 to accommodate this sales level. The company has a steady profit margin of 20 percent with a 40 percent dividend payout.

How much external financing will the firm have to seek? Assume there is no increase in liabilities other than that which will occur with the external financing. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

External funds needed

$

5.Problem 6-10 Optimal policy mix [LO5]

Assume that Hogan Surgical Instruments Co. has $3,000,000 in assets. If it goes with a low-liquidity plan for the assets, it can earn a return of 18 percent, but with a high-liquidity plan, the return will be 14 percent. If the firm goes with a short-term financing plan, the financing costs on the $3,000,000 will be 10 percent, and with a long-term financing plan, the financing costs on the $3,000,000 will be 12 percent.

a. Compute the anticipated return after financing costs with the most aggressive asset-financing mix.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Anticipated return

b. Compute the anticipated return after financing costs with the most conservative asset-financing mix.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Anticipated return

c. Compute the anticipated return after financing costs with the two moderate approaches to the asset-financing mix. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Anticipated return

Low liquidity

High liquidity

  1. Problem 6-14 Conservative versus aggressive financing [LO5]

Collins Systems, Inc., is trying to develop an asset-financing plan. The firm has $550,000 in temporary current assets and $450,000 in permanent current assets. Collins also has $650,000 in fixed assets.

a. Construct two alternative financing plans for the firm. One of the plans should be conservative, with 90 percent of assets financed by long-term sources and the rest financed by short-term sources. The other plan should be aggressive, with only 10 percent of assets financed by long-term sources and the remaining assets financed by short-term sources. The current interest rate is 10 percent on long-term funds and 5 percent on short-term financing. Compute the annual interest payments under each plan.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Total interest

Conservative

$

Aggressive

$

b. Given that Collins s earnings before interest and taxes are $430,000, calculate earnings after taxes for each of your alternatives. Assume a tax rate of 30 percent. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Earning
after taxes

Conservative

$

Aggressive

$

rev: 09_29_2011

  1. Problem 6-16 Expectations hypothesis and interest rates [LO4]

Using the expectations hypothesis theory for the term structure of interest rates, determine the expected return for securities with maturities of two, three, and four years based on the following data. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

1-year T-bill at beginning of year 1

1-year T-bill at beginning of year 2

1-year T-bill at beginning of year 3

1-year T-bill at beginning of year 4

Expected return

2 year security

3 year security

4 year security

  1. Problem 6-18 Interest costs under alternative plans [LO3]

Carmen s Beauty Salon has estimated monthly financing requirements for the next six months as follows:

January

$

8,400

April

$

8,400

February

2,400

May

9,400

March

3,400

June

4,400

Short-term financing will be utilized for the next six months. Projected annual interest rates are:

January

8.0

%

April

15.0

%

February

9.0

May

12.0

March

12.0

June

12.0

a. Compute total dollar interest payments for the six months. (Round your intermediate and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Total dollar interest payments

$

(b-1)

Compute the total dollar interest payments if long-term financing at 12 percent had been utilized throughout the six months (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Total dollar interest payments

$

(b-2)

If long-term financing at 12 percent had been utilized throughout the six months, would the total dollar interest payments be larger or smaller?

rev: 12_14_2012

  1. Problem 6-13 Impact of term structure of interest rates on financing plan [LO4]

Winfrey Diet Food Corp. has $5,050,000 in assets.

Temporary current assets

$

2,100,000

Permanent current assets

1,555,000

Fixed assets

1,395,000

Total assets

$

5,050,000

Short-term rates are 14 percent. Long-term rates are 12 percent. Earnings before interest and taxes are $1,070,000. The tax rate is 30 percent.

What will earnings after taxes be (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Earnings after taxes

$

rev: 03-18-2011, 04-18-2012, 06_23_2012
15.Problem 7-2 Cost-benefit analysis of cash management [LO2]

Neon Light Company of Kansas City ships lamps and lighting appliances throughout the country. Ms. Neon has determined that through the establishment of local collection centers around the country, she can speed up the collection of payments by two days. Furthermore, the cash management department of her bank has indicated to her that she can defer her payments on her accounts by one-half day without offending suppliers. The bank has a remote disbursement center in Florida.

a. If Neon Light Company has $2.65 million per day in collections and $1.13 million per day in disbursements, how many dollars will the cash management system free up (Enter your answer in dollars not in millions. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Freed-up funds

$

b. If Neon Light Company can earn 9 percent per annum on freed-up funds, how much will the income be?(Enter your answer in dollars not in millions. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Interest on freed-up cash

$

c. If the total cost of the new system is $440,000, should it be implemented?

  1. Problem 7-10 Determination of credit sales [LO4]

Mervyn s Fine Fashions has an average collection period of 50 days. The accounts receivable balance is $87,500. What is the value of its credit sales (Use 360 days in a year. Omit the “$” sign in your response)

Credit sales

$

18. Problem 7-11 Aging of accounts receivable [LO4]

Route Canal Shipping Company has the following schedule for aging of accounts receivable:

Age of receivables
April 30, 2010

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Month of
sales

Age of
account

Amounts

Percent of
amount due

April

0 30

$

156,240

_______

March

31 60

78,120

_______

February

61 90

117,180

_______

January

91 120

39,060

_______

Total receivables

$

390,600

100%

a. Calculate the percentage of amount due for each month. (Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Month of sales

Percent of
amount due

April

March

February

January

Total receivables

b. If the firm had $1,512,000 in credit sales over the four-month period, compute the average collection period. Average daily sales should be based on a 120-day period.

Average collection period

c. If the firm likes to see its bills collected in 36 days, should it be satisfied with the average collection period?

d. Disregarding your answer to part c and considering the aging schedule for accounts receivable, should the company be satisfied?

  1. Problem 7-15 Economic ordering quantity with safety stock [LO5]

Diagnostic Supplies has expected sales of 120,000 units per year, a carrying cost of $6 per unit, and an ordering cost of $9 per order.

a. What is the economic order quantity?

Economic order quantity

b-1. What is average inventory?

Average inventory

b-2. What is the total carrying cost (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Total carrying cost

Assume an additional 90 units of inventory will be required as safety stock.

c-1. What will the new average inventory be?

Average inventory

c-2. What will the new total carrying cost be (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Total carrying cost

  1. Problem 7-22 Credit policy and return on investment [LO4]

Global Services is considering a promotional campaign that will increase annual credit sales by $560,000. The company will require investments in accounts receivable, inventory, and plant and equipment. The turnover for each is as follows:

Accounts receivable

4x

Inventory

2x

Plant and equipment

4x

All $560,000 of the sales will be collectible. However, collection costs will be 2 percent of sales, and production and selling costs will be 76 percent of sales. The cost to carry inventory will be 5 percent of inventory. Depreciation expense on plant and equipment will be 5 percent of plant and equipment. The tax rate is 35 percent.

a. What is the value for inventory investment (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Inventory investment

$

b-1. Compute the total investment. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Total investment

$

b-2. Compute the cost of carrying inventory. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Cost of carrying inventory

$

b-3. Compute income after taxes. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Income after taxes

$

b-4. What would be the return on investment (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Return on investment

%

b-5. If the required rate of return is 12 percent, should the campaign be undertaken?

  1. Problem 8-2 Cash discount decision [LO1]

Regis Clothiers can borrow from its bank at 17 percent to take a cash discount. The terms of the cash discount are 3/19, net 45.

a. Compute the cost of not taking the cash discount. (Use 360 days in a year. Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Cost of not taking a cash discount

(b)

Should the firm borrow the funds?

  1. Problem 8-7 Effective rate on discounted loan [LO2]

Mary Ott is going to borrow $7,300 for 90 days and pay $221 interest.

What is the effective rate of interest if the loan is discounted? (Use 360 days in a year. Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Effective rate on discounted loan

%

33.Problem 8-10 Dollar cost of a loan [LO2]

Talmud Book Company borrows $18,100 for 45 days at 11 percent interest.

What is the dollar cost of the loan (Use 360 days in a year. Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Cost of loan

$

  1. Problem 8-18 Effective rate under different terms [LO2]

If you borrow $3,500 at $590 interest for one year, what is your effective interest rate for the following payment plans (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Effective rate

(a) Annual payment

%

(b) Semiannual payments

%

(c) Quarterly payments

%

(d) Monthly payments

%

40.Problem 8-21 Cash discount under special circumstance [LO2]

Mr. Hugh Warner is a very cautious businessman. His supplier offers trade credit terms of 3/14, net 70. Mr. Warner never takes the discount offered, but he pays his suppliers in 60 days rather than the 70 days allowed so he is sure the payments are never late.

What is Mr. Warner”s cost of not taking the cash discount? (Use 360 days in a year. Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Cost of not taking a cash discount

  1. Problem 8-27 Accounts receivable financing [LO1]

Charmin Paper Company sells to the 12 accounts listed below.

Account

Receivable
balance outstanding

Average age of
the account
over the last year

A

$

63,700

20

B

197,000

44

C

74,400

16

D

23,600

61

E

59,600

43

F

318,000

39

G

33,300

17

H

309,000

67

I

46,600

33

J

90,300

52

K

277,000

15

L

65,900

39

Capital Financial Corporation will lend 90 percent against account balances that have averaged 30 days or less; 80 percent for account balances between 31 and 40 days; and 70 percent for account balances between 41 and 45 days. Customers that take over 45 days to pay their bills are not considered acceptable accounts for a loan.

The current prime rate is 16.50 percent, and Capital charges 3.50 percent over prime to Charmin as its annual loan rate.

a. Determine the maximum loan for which Charmin Paper Company could qualify. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Maximum loan amount

$

b. Determine how much one month s interest expense would be on the loan balance determined in part a.(Round your final answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Interest expense

$

rev: 10_26_2012

  1. Problem 8-8 Prime vs. LIBOR [LO2]

Dr. Ruth is going to borrow $8,200 to help write a book. The loan is for one year and the money can either be borrowed at the prime rate or the LIBOR rate. Assume the prime rate is 9 percent and LIBOR 2.5 percent less. Also assume there will be a $50 transaction fee with LIBOR (this amount must be added to the interest cost with LIBOR).

Which loan has the lower effective interest cost (Use 360 days in a year.)


Problem 9-2 Present value [LO3]

What is the present value of:

a. $8,400 in 12 years at 11 percent (Round “PV Factor” to 3 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.

Present value

$

b. $17,200 in 6 years at 9 percent (Round “PV Factor” to 3 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Present value

$

c. $26,800 in 18 years at 10 percent (Round “PV Factor” to 3 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Present value

$

  1. Problem 9-4 Present value [LO4]

You will receive $9,000 three years from now. The discount rate is 13 percent.

a. What is the value of your investment two years from now? Multiply $9,000 .885 (one year s discount rate at 13 percent). (Round “PV Factor” to 3 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Value of investment

$

b. What is the value of your investment one year from now? Multiply your answer to part a by .885 (one year s discount rate at 13 percent). (Round “PV Factor” to 3 decimal places and final answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Value of investment

$

c. What is the value of your investment today? Multiply your answer to part b by .885 (one year s discount rate at 13 percent). (Round “PV Factor” to 3 decimal places and final answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Value of investment

$

d. Calculate the present value by going to Appendix B (present value of $1) for n = 3 and i = 13%. Multiply this tabular value by $9,000 and compare your answer to the answer in part c. There may be a slight difference due to rounding. (Round “PV Factor” to 3 decimal places and final answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Present value

$

  1. Problem 9-7 Present value [LO3]

Your uncle offers you the choice of $115,000 in 10 years or $54,000 today. Use Appendix B.

a. Calculate the present value of $115,000, if the money is discounted at 11 percent (Round “PV Factor” to 3 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Present value

(b)

Which choice should you choose?

  1. Problem 9-8 Present value [LO3]

Your uncle offers you the choice of $107,000 in 10 years or $40,000 today. Use Appendix B.

a. Calculate the present value of $107,000, if the money is discounted at 8 percent (Round “PV Factor” to 3 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Present value

$

(b)

Which choice should you choose?

(c)

Calculate the present value, if you had to wait until 12 years to get the $107,000. (Round “PV Factor” to 3 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Present value

$

(d)

Now, which choice should you choose?

54. Problem 9-25 Quarterly compounding [LO5]

Cousin Bertha invested $116,000 10 years ago at 8 percent, compounded quarterly. How much has she accumulated? Use Appendix A. (Round “FV Factor” to 3 decimal places and final answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Future value

$

  1. Problem 9-26 Special compounding [LO5]

Determine the amount of money in a savings account at the end of one year, given an initial deposit of $12,000 and an 4 percent annual interest rate when interest is compounded (a) annually, (b) semiannually, and (c) quarterly. Use Appendix A. (Round “FV Factor” to 3 decimal places and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Future value

(a) Annually

$

(b) Semiannually

$

(c) Quarterly

$

  1. Problem 9-38 Deferred annuity [LO3]

Rusty Steele will receive the following payments at the end of the next three years: $23,000, $26,000, and $28,000. Then from the end of the fourth year through the end of the tenth year, he will receive an annuity of $29,000.

At a discount rate of 16 percent, what is the present value of all future benefits? Use Appendix B and Appendix D. (Round “PV Factor” to 3 decimal places, intermediate and final answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Present value of all future benefits

$

business 496395

Antitrust laws were essentially created to stop businesses that got too large from blocking competition and abusing their power. Mergers and monopolies can limit the choices offered to consumers because smaller businesses are not usually able to compete. Although free and open competition ensures lower prices and new and better products, it has the potential to significantly limit market diversity.

Look at the 2 examples below of how mergers and acquisitions have affected the way in which companies do business.

Read each of the 2 examples below. Prepare a APA formatted research paper that responds to the aligned questions. Specifically, your paper must:

  • Identify the two firms with similar problems from different countries
  • Conduct a comparative analysis of the firms
  • Analyze political, social, ethical and legal differences and their impact on management decision making
  • Provide substantive conclusion and recommendations

Submitting your assignment in APA format means, at a minimum, you will need the following:

  1. TITLE PAGE. Remember the Running head: AND TITLE IN ALL CAPITALS
  2. ABSTRACT. A summary of your paper not an introduction. Begin writing in third person voice.
  3. BODY. The body of your paper begins on the page following the title page and abstract page and must be double-spaced (be careful not to triple- or quadruple-space between paragraphs). The type face should be 12-pt. Times Roman or 12-pt. Courier in regular black type. Do not use color, bold type, or italics except as required for APA level headings and references. The deliverable length of the body of your paper for this assignment is 4-5 pages. In-body academic citations to support your decisions and analysis are required. A variety of academic sources is encouraged.
  4. REFERENCE PAGE. References that align with your in-body academic sources are listed on the final page of your paper. The references must be in APA format using appropriate spacing, hang indention, italics, and upper and lower case usage as appropriate for the type of resource used. Remember, the Reference Page is not a bibliography but a further listing of the abbreviated in-body citations used in the paper. Every referenced item must have a corresponding in-body citation.

Example 1

Federal antitrust enforcers are investigating whether a multinational pharmaceutical company has attempted to minimize the impact of generic competition to one of its most profitable prescription drugs. This anti-depressant drug is the company’s best seller, with sales last year of $2.11 billion, representing a 22% increase from the year before.

The Federal Trade Commission (FTC) is conducting an investigation to determine whether the company has engaged in activities to prevent generic alternatives to the prescription drug from entering the market. Specifically, the FTC is challenging a practice among brand-name and generic-drug manufacturers to agree to delay the introduction of the lower priced generic drugs to the market.

Answer the following questions:

  • Why would the drug maker want to stymie generic competition? Explain.
  • What types of legal barriers to market entry exist
  • What are the possible ethical dilemmas present in this example

Example 2

The boards of 2 major telecommunications companies recently agreed to a $16 billion-dollar merger that would create the world’s largest telecommunications company in the world. Although some agree that the synergy between these companies could be dynamic, others feel consumers could ultimately pay the price for the merger depending on which company becomes dominant in the various service areas.

Answer the following questions:

  • Why do you think consumer advocates have expressed concern over such merger possibilities?
  • Other than pricing, what are some pitfalls that consumers might have to deal with when 2 major companies merge?
  • What are the possible ethical dilemmas present in this example

business accounting mcqs 496396

1. On the trial balance, which of the following should have the balances listed in the debit column?
A. Assets, dividends, and expenses
B. Liabilities, revenues, and common stock
C. Liabilities, revenues, and dividends
D. Assets, revenues, and dividends

2. The unadjusted trial balance for depreciation expense shows a $780 balance. The expense was adjusted
by $235. The adjusted trial balance figure for depreciation expense is now a
A. $545 debit.
B. $1,015 debit.
C. $1,015 credit.
D. $545 credit.

3. The balance sheet is used to report

A. the financial position on a specific date.
B. results of operations for a specific period.
C. results of operations for a specific date.
D. the financial position for a specific period.

4. Which business form is similar to a corporation in regard to owner liability?
A. Sole proprietorship
B. Limited liability company
C. Partnership
D. Limited liability corporation

5. A T-account has a $509 debit balance. This account is most likely not
A. advertising expense.
B. land.
C. common stock.
D. dividends.

6. A T-account has which major parts?
A. A title, a debit side, and a credit side
B. A debit side, a credit side, and a balance
C. A debit side, a credit side, and a total column
D. A title, a current date, and a balance

7. By definition, which type of organization has stockholders?
A. Sole proprietorships
B. Corporations
C. Limited liability companies
D. Partnerships

8. Supplies on hand were $900 at the start of the year. At the end of the year, it was determined that $350 of supplies had been used. What is the adjusting entry for supplies?

A. Debit supplies, $350; credit supplies expense, $350.
B. Debit supplies expense, $550; credit supplies, $550.
C. Debit supplies, $550; credit supplies expense, $550.
D. Debit supplies expense, $350; credit supplies, $350.

9. Beginning retained earnings are $31,000; sales are $46,800; expenses are $43,500; and dividends paid are $2,800. How much is the net income or loss for the company?

A. ($3,300)
B. $3,300
C. $500
D. $34,300

10. The closing entries show a debit to retained earnings of $350 and a credit to retained earnings of $750. There was also a credit to dividends payable of $100. This company had a

A. net income of $400.
B. net loss of $400.
C. net income of $500.
D. net loss of $500

11. The account “Cash” had the following changes: increase of $250, decrease of $75, increase of $113,
and decrease of $35. The final balance is a

A. debit balance of $363.
B. debit balance of $253.
C. credit balance of $110.
D. credit balance of $253.

12. The matching principle in accounting requires the matching of revenue earned with the

A. expenses incurred to produce the revenue.
B. liabilities used to produce the revenue.
C. assets used less the liabilities incurred.
D. assets used to produce the revenue.

13. Which financial statement illustrates the accounting equation?

A. Statement of cash flows
B. Balance sheet
C. Income statement
D. Statement of retained earnings

14. Beginning retained earnings are $65,000; sales are $29,500; expenses are $33,000; and dividends paid are $3,500. How much is the net income or loss for the company?

A. ($3,500)
B. ($7,000)
C. $26,000
D. $0

15. Rick owns a sporting goods store. In his initial accounting records, he included his personal computer and all of his personal sporting gear. Rick is violating which principle of accounting?

A. Reliability
B. Entity
C. Going concern
D. Cost

16. Which of the following is a disadvantage of the corporate form of business?
A. Ease of raising capital
B. Double taxation
C. Limited liability
D. Limited resources

17. Dividends are paid with cash to shareholders. Dividends are in which category of the chart of accounts?
A. Liabilities
B. Stockholders’ equity
C. Assets
D. Revenue

18. Collecting rent from a client three months in advance would be an example of a/an
A. accrued revenue.
B. accrued expense.
C. deferred expense.
D. deferred revenue.

19. The income statement is used to report
A. the financial position on a specific date.
B. results of operations for a specific period.
C. results of operations for a specific date.
D. the financial position for a specific period.

20. Office equipment was purchased for $2,400 on account to Business Furniture Company. The journal entry would include a

A. debit to Office Equipment and a credit to Accounts Payable.
B. credit to Cash and a debit to Office Equipment Expense.
C. debit to Office Equipment and a credit to Cash.
D. debit to Accounts Payable and a credit to Cash.

business analysis questions 496397

BUSINESS ANALYSIS

1. You’re the newly hired CFO of a small construction company. The privately held firm is capitalized with $2 million in owner’s equity and $3 million in variable rate bank loans. The construction business is quite risky, so returns of 20% to 25% are normally demanded on equity investments. The bank is currently charging 14% on the firm’s loans, but interest rates are expected to rise in the near future. Your boss, the owner, started his career as a carpenter and has an excellent grasp of day-to-day operations. However, he knows little about finance. Business has been good lately, and several expansion projects are under consideration. A cash flow projection has been made for each. You’re satisfied that these estimates are reasonable.

The owner has called you in and confessed to being confused about the projects. He instinctively feels that some are financially marginal and may not be beneficial to the company, but he doesn’t know how to demonstrate this or to choose among the projects that are financially viable.

Assuming the owner understands the concept of return on investment, write a brief memo explaining the ideas of IRR and cost of capital and how they can solve his problem. Don’t get into the detailed mechanics of the calculations, but do use the figures given above to make a rough estimate of the company’s cost of capital, and use the result in your memo.

2. You’re the CFO of a small company that is considering a new venture. The president and several other members of management are very excited about the idea for reasons related to engineering and marketing rather than profitability. You’ve analyzed the proposal by using capital budgeting techniques, and found that it fails both IRR and NPV tests using a cost of capital based on market returns. The problem is that interest rates have risen steeply in the last year, so the cost of capital seems unusually high.

You’ve presented your results to the management team, who are very disappointed. In fact, they’d like to find a way to discredit your analysis, so they can justify going ahead with the project. You’ve explained your analysis, and everything seems well understood except for one point. The group insists that the use of returns currently available to investors as a basis for the cost of capital components doesn’t make sense. The vice president of marketing put his objection as follows. “Two years ago we borrowed $1 million at 10%. We haven’t paid it back, and we’re still making interest payments of $100,000 every year. Clearly, our cost of debt is 10% and not the 14% you want to use. If you’d use

our “real” cost of debt, as well as of equity and preferred stock, the project would easily qualify financially.” How do you respond

(The appropriate response is relatively short. It’s worth noting that this kind of thing happens all the time in corporations. Marketing and engineering people often get carried away with “neat” projects that don’t make sense financially. The CFO has to watch the bottom line and it’s not unusual to be seen as a wet blanket who wants to spoil the others’ fun!)

3. The engineering department at Digitech Inc. wants to buy a new, state-of-the-art computer. The proposed machine is faster than the one now being used, but whether the extra speed is worth the expense is questionable, given the nature of the firm’s applications. The Chief Engineer (who has an MBA and a reasonable understanding of financial principles) has put together an enormously detailed capital budgeting proposal for the acquisition of the new machine. The proposal concludes that it’s a great deal.

You’re a financial analyst for the firm, and have been assigned to review the engineering proposal. Your review has highlighted two problems. First, the cost savings projected as a result of using the new machine seem rather optimistic. Second, the analysis uses an unrealistically low cost of capital.

With respect to the second point, the engineering proposal contains the following exhibit documenting the development of the cost of capital used:

Digitech’s capital structure is 60% debt and 40% equity

The manufacturer is offering financing at 8% as a sales incentive

Cost of capital = 8% .6 = 4.8%

After tax this is 4.8% (1T) = 4.8%(.6) = 2.9%

You’ve checked the market and found that Digitech’s bonds are currently selling to yield 14% and the stock is returning about 20%. How would you proceed That is, explain the chief engineer’s error(s) and indicate the correct calculations.

4. Whitefish Inc. operates a fleet of 15 fishing boats in the North Atlantic Ocean. Fishing has been good in the last few years, as has the market for product, so the firm can sell all the fish it can catch. Charlie Bass, the vice president for operations, has worked up a capital budgeting proposal for the acquisition of new boats. Each boat is viewed as an individual project identical to the others, and shows an IRR of 22%. The firm’s cost of capital has been correctly calculated at 14% before the retained earnings break and 15% after that point. Charlie argues that the capital budgeting figures show that the firm should acquire as many new boats as it possibly can, financing them with whatever means it finds available. You are Whitefish’s CFO. Support or criticize Charlie’s position. How should the appropriate number of new boats be determined Does acquiring a large number of new boats present any problems or risks that aren t immediately apparent from the financial figures?

business db 496398

Many organizations have established policies to remedy discrimination when hiring women and minorities. Discuss whether you feel that affirmative action programs, reverse discrimination, and criteria of comparable worth are appropriate forms of remedy.

You should conduct research on this topic before making your posts.

Using the textbook, course materials, and Web resources, research affirmative action, reverse discrimination, and comparable worth and answer the following questions:

  • Do you feel that these concepts are appropriate forms of remedy in the workplace? Explain.
  • What else do you think could be done to eliminate discrimination in the workplace?

You must use at least one credible source from either the Library’s full-text database or the Web. Include your reference(s) that you used in APA format with your Discussion Board post. Post a new topic to the Discussion Board that contains your answers to the questions, and respond to 2 other students’ posts on the Discussion Board. Be sure to explain to them why you agree or disagree with their arguments.

Your submitted assignment (60 points) should include the following:

  • 40 Points Your Discussion Board topic containing your responses to the questions and your listed reference(s) in APA format
  • 20 Points Your responses to two other students’ Discussion Board posts

business law 496399

Business Law
Question Detail:

1. Carlton executed and delivered to Raymond a $1,000 negotiable note payable to Raymond or bearer. Raymond then negotiated it to Fred and endorsed it on the back by merely signing his name. Which of the following is a true statement?

a. The instrument is bearer paper, and Fred can convert it to order paper by writing pay to the order of Fred above Raymond s signature.

b. Raymond s endorsement was a special endorsement.

c. The instrument was initially bearer paper and cannot be converted to order paper.

d. Raymond s endorsement was necessary to Fred s qualification as a holder.

2. Under the Secured Transactions Article of the UCC, which of the following remedies is available to a secured creditor when a debtor fails to make a payment when due?

Proceed Obtain a General

against the Judgment against

Collateral__ the Debtor_

a. Yes Yes

b. Yes No

c. No No

d. No Yes

3. On July 27, 2011 Summerson sent Fallson a letter offering to sell Fallson a vacation home for $150,000. On August 2, 2011 Fallson replied by mail agreeing to buy the home for $145,000. Summerson did not reply to Fallson. Do Summerson and Fallson have a binding contract?

a. Yes, because Summerson s silence is an implied acceptance of Fallson s letter.

b. No, because Fallson failed to sign the letter that was sent by Fallson.

c. No, because Fallson s letter was a counteroffer.

d. Yes, because Summerson s offer was validly accepted.

4. Cindy, Odsen Corp. s agent, needs a written agency agreement to

a. Hire an attorney to collect a business debt owed Odsen.

b. Purchased an interest in undeveloped land for Odsen.

c. Retain an independent general contractor to renovate Odsen s office building.

d. Enter into a series of sales contracts on Odsen s behalf.

5. A party who filed a financing statement covering inventory on April 1, 2010 would have a superior interest to which of the following parties?

a. A holder of a mechanic s lien whose lien was filed on March 15, 2010.

b. A judgment lien creditor who filed its judgment on April 15, 2010.

c. A holder of a purchase money security interest in after-acquired inventory filed on March 20, 2010.

d. A purchaser in the ordinary course of business who purchased on April 10, 2010.

6. In determining whether the consideration requirement to form a contract has been satisfied, the consideration exchanged by the parties to the contract must be

a. Fair and reasonable under the circumstances.

b. Legally sufficient.

c. Exchanged simultaneously by the parties.

d. Of approximately equal value.

7. Pavers Roadway, Inc., contracts with Best Building Corporation to repave Best Building Corporation’s parking lot. The elements of a contract do not include

a. consideration.

b. contractual capacity.

c. legality.

d. practicality.

8. Holly writes a check on her account at Investment Bank to Jerry to pay a debt. Jerry negotiates the check by indorsement to Kelly, who negotiates the check by indorsement to Lisa, who presents it for payment to Interstate Bank. Holly is

not liable for payment under any circumstances.

primarily liable.

secondarily liable.

simultaneously liable.

9. Holly writes a check on her account at Investment Bank to Jerry to pay a debt. Jerry negotiates the check by indorsement to Kelly, who negotiates the check by indorsement to Lisa, who presents it for payment to Interstate Bank. If Investment Bank dishonors the check, Lisa can obtain payment from Jerry

if Lisa timely notifies Jerry.

only if Holly refuses to pay the check.

only if Holly and Kelly refuse to pay the check.

under no circumstances.

10. Nora enters into a contract with Owen’s Transport Company for the delivery of a shipment of fresh produce. If ambiguities appear in the contract, they will be construed against

a. the party who drafted the contract.

b. the party with the greater bargaining power.

c. the promisor.

d. the promisee.

11. On November 1, 2013, Ted sent by overnight mail a letter to Zena in which Ted offered to sell a rare vase. The offer requested that Zena s respond by telegram and that the response be sent on or before 5:00 p.m. on November 2, 2013. On November 2, 2013 at 3:00 p.m., Zena sent an acceptance by overnight mail. It did not reach Ted until November 5, 2013. Ted refused to complete the sale to Zena. Is there an enforceable contract?

a. No, because Zena did not accept by telegram.

b. No, because the offer required receipt of the acceptance within the time specified.

c. Yes, because the acceptance was effective when sent.

d. Yes, because the acceptance was made within the time specified.

12. Mary promises to pay her assistant Ned $10,000 in consideration of the services he provided over the years. Mary never pays Ned. Mary is

a. liable for payment of the $10,000.

b. liable only if Ned still works for Mary.

c. not liable, because the consideration is in the past.

d. not liable, because the consideration was unintentional.

13. Collection of EZ Sales Company’s debt to First Storage Corporation is barred by a statute of limitations. A new promise by EZ to pay the debt

a. may become enforceable if payments are made.

b. must be in writing.

c. requires consideration.

d. will not revive the obligation.

14. Auto Body Repair Shop (ABRS) promises to pay Ben $1,000 a week to work for ABRS. Ben accepts and quits his job with Car Care Service. ABRS fails to provide a job for Ben. Ben has a cause of action based on

a. an illusory promise.

b. a release.

c. past consideration.

d. promissory estoppel.

15. Pat, a world famous musician and composer, agrees to give ten piano lessons to Quinn in exchange for $1,000. Pat’s attempt to delegate his contract to Ruth, an inexperienced pianist, will probably be

a. permitted because contracts may be freely delegated.

b. permitted because the contract is concerned with music lessons.

c. prohibited because contracts may not be freely delegated.

d. prohibited because Pat and Ruth have very different skill levels.

16. Jill and Karl contract for the sale of Jill’s horse for $1,000. Unknown to either party, the horse has died. Karl is

a. entitled to another horse of equivalent value.

b. not required to pay due to the mutual mistake.

c. not required to pay due to the unilateral mistake.

d. required to pay because he assumed the risk the horse might die.

17. Alpha Company offers to sell Beta, Inc., 1,000 computers for a $1 million, states that the offer will be open for six days, and asks for a response by fax. On the fourth day, Beta sends an acceptance to Alpha via the mail, which is received on the sixth day. In this deal

a. a contract is formed.

b. no contract is formed, because Alpha asked for a response by fax.

c. no contract is formed, because Alpha received the acceptance late.

d. no contract is formed, because Beta sent the acceptance late.

18. Holly writes a check on her account at Investment Bank to Jerry to pay a debt. Jerry negotiates the check by indorsement to Kelly, who negotiates the check by indorsement to Lisa, who presents it for payment to Interstate Bank. If Investment Bank dishonors the check, Lisa can obtain payment from Kelly

if Lisa timely notifies Kelly.

only if Holly refuses to pay the check.

only if Holly and Jerry refuse to pay the check.

under no circumstances.

19. Furnishings, Inc., agrees to lease a desk to Better Resources, Inc. (BRI), which requests that the desk be left outside City Warehouse for BRI to pick up. Before BRI retrieves the desk, it is stolen. The loss is suffered by

a. A-1 Furnishings and BRI, but not City Warehouse.

b. A-1 Furnishings, BRI, and City Warehouse.

c. A-1 Furnishings only.

d. BRI only.

20. John, the secured party, perfects its security interest by filing a financing statement. What is the effect of perfection of John s security interest?

a. The secured party has priority in the collateral over most creditors who acquire a security interest in the same collateral after the filing.

b. The security interest becomes enforceable against the debtor.

c. The debtor is protected against all other parties who acquire an interest in the collateral after the filing.

d. None of the above.

21. Ample Country Stables contracts to buy 1,000 horseshoes from Blacksmith, Inc., for $1 per shoe. When the market price decreases to 50 cents per shoe, Ample refuses to go through with the deal. Blacksmith can recover

a. $1,500.

b. $1,000.

c. $500.

d. 0.

22. Farm Equipment, Inc., makes farming machinery. Gail discovers that her Farm Equipment tractor is defective and sues the maker for product liability based on negligence. To win, Gail must show that

a. Farm Equipment sold the tractor to Gail.

b. Gail knew and appreciated the risk caused by the defect.

c. Gail suffered an injury caused by the defect.

d. the “defect” was a commonly known danger.

23. Ida signs a check payable to Jane and gives it to her. Jane indorses the back, and transfers the check to Kyle. To negotiate the check to Leo, Kyle must

a. indorse “Kyle” on the back and deliver the check to Leo.

b. indorse “pay to the order of Leo [signed] Kyle” on the back and deliver the check to Leo.

c. only deliver the check to Leo.

d. transfer the check through the drawee bank.

24. Local Appliance Store, the secured party, sells a refrigerator to John, a consumer, for the use of John s family. John signs a sales agreement, a loan note, and a security agreement. Local Appliance Store fails to file either the security agreement or a financing statement with the secretary of state. Which of the following statements is accurate?

a. The secured party has priority in the collateral over most creditors who subsequently acquire a security interest in the same collateral.

b. The security interest is not enforceable against the debtor.

c. The security interest is not enforceable against subsequent creditors.

d. The assets subject to the security interest cannot become part of the bankruptcy estate in the event the creditor files an involuntary petition against the debtor.

25. Ruth, a minor, charges groceries at Sam’s Mini-Mart. Two days later, Ruth disaffirms the purchase. Ruth owes Sam’s Mini Mart

the reasonable value of the groceries.

the retail value of the groceries.

the wholesale value of the groceries.

26. With regard to a prior perfected security interest in goods for which a financing statement has been filed, which of the following parties is most likely to have a superior interest in the same collateral?

a. The trustee in bankruptcy of the debtor.

b. Lien creditors of the debtor.

c. A buyer of goods in the ordinary course of business.

d. A subsequent buyer of consumer goods who purchased the goods from another consumer.

27. Beth is convicted of arson for burning down her warehouse.. On an application for insurance from Cover-All Insurance Company on a new building, in answer to a question about prior convictions, Beth does not disclose her conviction. This makes the contract

binding because the omission is immaterial to Cover-All’s decision to issue coverage.

binding due to Cover-All’s failure to discover Beth’s conviction.

voidable by Beth because the omission is immaterial to Cover-All’s decision to issue coverage.

voidable by Cover-All because the omission is material to its decision to issue coverage.

Fact Pattern for Question 28

Fred enters into a contract under Gene’s threats. Later, Fred refuses to perform, claiming that he acted under duress.

28. Refer to Fact Pattern B. Gene sues to enforce the contract. In order for Fred to establish duress, Gene must have threatened

a. a civil suit.

b. a lost opportunity.

c. a social snubbing.

d. a wrongful act.

e. none of the above.

29. Century Properties. Inc., and Dandy Capital Corporation enter into a contract for a sale of land. To be enforceable, the contract must be in writing

Only if the land is valued at $50 or more.

Only if the land is valued at $500 or more.

Only if the land is valued at $5,000 or more.

In any case.

30. Timber Trees, Inc., and Land Corporation enter into an oral contract for Timber Trees, Inc. to sell its lumber mill to Land Corporation . Before Land Corporation takes possession, this contract is enforceable by

either party.

neither party.

Timber Trees only.

Land Corporation only because only the buyer can get specific performance.

31. Lola agrees to pay Mira’s debt to New Sales Corporation if Mira does not pay it. Lola does not get any personal benefit for or from the agreement. To be enforceable against Lola, the promise must be in writing

if the debt is paid by Mira.

if the debt is for at least $50.

if the debt is for at least $500.

in any case.

Fact Pattern for Question 32

Macro Marketing, Inc. (Macro), and National Food Corporation (NFC) discuss the terms of a contract under which NFC is to provide personal services to Macro. The next day, Macro faxes NFC a memo on Macro’s letterhead that summarizes the items on which they agreed, including a two-year term. NFC immediately begins to perform, but Macro refuses to pay. NFC promptly institutes a law suit seeking damages.

32. Refer to Fact Pattern for question 32. The contract between Macro and NFC is

subject to the Statute of Frauds collateral-promise provision, and is probably unenforceable.

subject to the Statute of Frauds services rule, and is probably enforceable.

barred by the statute of limitations, and is therefore probably unenforceable.

subject to the Statute of Frauds one-year rule, and is probably unenforceable.

Fact Pattern for Question 33

Jeff and Kris sign a written contract for the sale of Jeff’s Koffee Kiosk to Kris. The parties intend their written contract to be a final statement of the terms of their agreement.

33. Refer to Fact Pattern for question 33. Kris later disputes some of the provisions of the deal with Jeff. The dispute results in litigation, and the court finds the terms of the agreement are ambiguous. The court will most likely

exclude evidence that buttresses the written terms.

exclude evidence that contradicts the written terms.

allow evidence that explains the terms.

dismiss the action because there was a lack of mutual asset and no contract was formed.

34. Tom dies owning stock as joint tenant with right of survivorship with his son, having bank accounts in his name in trust for his daughter, and owning real estate as tenants by the entirety with his wife. The trustee of Tom s revocable trust holds title the rest of his assets. Under the terms of the revocable trust, all assets of the trust will be distributed to Tom s son and daughter on Tom s death. Tom s wife, son and daughter survive him. Under the terms of Tom s will, Tom leaves all of his property to his mother, who also survived him. Tom died

a. intestate.

b. without any probate assets.

c. with a last will that will controls the disposition of his assets.

d. None of the above.

35. Manny, as buyer, wants to transfer his rights under a written real estate contract with Nila, as seller, to Opie. To ensure that the transfer of rights is valid, Manny must

have this right expressly stated in the contract.

file a notice of assignment in the public records.

have the contract recorded in the public records.

none of the choices.

36. Rural Development Corporation (RDC) and Sid enter into a contract for the clear-cutting of RDC’s fifty-acre tract for which RDC agrees to pay Sid. Sid is the owner of Timber Logging Company. Sid transfers his duty to log the tract under the contract to Timber Logging Company. Timber Logging Company is

a delegatee and is subject to the terms of the agreement between RDC and Sid.

a delagetee and is not entitled to collect under the contract from RDC for services provided by Timber.

an obligee and is not required to perform under the contract.

a prohibitee.

37. Mke, a physician, renders aid to Nancy, who is injured and unconscious after an avalanche. Mike can recover the cost of the aid from Nancy

even if Nancy was not aware of the aid when it was given.

only if Nancy recovers because of the aid.

only if Noel was aware of the aid at the time it was given.

under no circumstances.

38. Pat, a world famous musician, agrees to give ten piano lessons to Quinn in exchange for $1,000. Pat’s attempt to transfer his contract duties to Ruth, an inexperienced pianist, will probably be

permitted because contracts may be freely delegated.

prohibited in this case unless the contract expressly permits delegation.

permitted if the contract is silent on the issue.

prohibited in any case.

39. Chaz and Dolly enter into a five year contract under which Chaz agrees to provide maintenance services for Dolly’s Ski Resort. Chaz transfers his rights and obligations under the contract to Mark. Mark

performs

under the contract, and Dolly is aware of the Mark s performance of the contract. However, Dolly refuses to pay Mark. Assuming Mark s services are properly performed and Mark sues Dolly, Mark

a. will be successful in enforcing the contract if performance depends on the personal skills or talents of the obligor.

b. will probably not be able to recover under the express terms of the contract.

.

c. may be able to recover the value of his services.

d. may not recover.

40. On August 1, 2010 Delia and Edwin entered into an agreement for Edwin to lease Delia s country home for two months during the following summer for $1000 per month. Delia promised to vacate the property for Edwin by July 1, 2011 with the lease to begin on July 1, 2011. If these promises are not in writing, they are most likely

none of the above.

41. To avoid liability for intentional injuries, Power Corporation includes in its contracts an exculpatory clause. This is

enforceable if the other parties are protected from liability.

enforceable if the other parties sign the contract.

enforceable if the other parties have equal bargaining power.

not enforceable.

42. MicroCorp hires Nick to work for one month at a weekly salary of $400. A MicroCorp representative orally agrees two weeks later to double Nick’s salary. This agreement is

enforceable because an employment contract is an adhesion contract.

enforceable because the parties have executed an accord and satisfaction.

unenforceable because Nick has incurred no additional detriment in exchange for MicroCorp’s promise.

unenforceable because Nick’s performance is uncertain.

43. Karen writes on a piece of paper, “I owe you $600,” signs it, and gives it to Lou. This instrument is

nonnegotiable, because it does not recite any consideration.

nonnegotiable, because it does not state any conditions to payment.

d. none of the above.

44. Pam signs an instrument payable to the order of Quick Credit, Inc., that allows a holder to demand payment of the entire amount due, with interest, if Pam fails to make a payment. This instrument is

nonnegotiable, because a holder can move up the payment date.

nonnegotiable, because moving up the payment date is conditional.

nonnegotiable, because the exact payment date cannot be determined from the face of the instrument.

45. Wyatt inherits a promissory note from Xena, his aunt. Wyatt has no notice that the note has been dishonored or is overdue. Wyatt has the rights of

a holder and an HDC.

a holder only.

an HDC only.

neither a holder nor an HDC.

46. Kettlecorn Investment Bank, Inc., and Lone Bank are secured parties with security interests in property owned by Metal Fabrication Corporation. Priority between these security interests is generally determined by

the amount of the claim.

the custom in the trade.

the time of perfection.

the date of the loan.

47. General Leasing Company (GLC) buys equipment for use as inventory, borrowing $1,000,000 from Helpful Finance Corporation (Helpful), with Helpful taking back a security interest in the equipment. The next day, GLC borrows $500,000 from Interstate Bank (Interstate), which loan is also secured by a security interest in the equipment. GLC defaults on both loans. Suppose that two weeks after GLC takes possession of the equipment, Helpful and Interstate file financing statements, with Interstate filing first. In that circumstance, the party with priority to the equipment is

Helpful and Interstate proportionately.

Helpful only.

Interstate Bank only

48. Which is not allowed as a federal exemption under the Federal Bankruptcy Code?

  1. A specified amount of equity in one motor vehicle.
  2. Unemployment compensation.
  3. A specified amount of value in books and tools of one s trade.
  4. All of the above are allowed.

49. Under the liquidation provisions of Chapter 7 of the Federal Bankruptcy Code, a debtor will be denied a discharge in bankruptcy if the debtor

  1. Fails to list a creditor.
  2. Owes alimony or child support.
  3. Cannot pay administration expenses.
  4. Refuses to satisfactorily explain a loss of assets.

50. Which of the following transfers by a debtor, within 90 days prior to the filing for bankruptcy, could be set aside as a preferential payment?

  1. Making a gift to charity.
  2. Paying a business utility bill.
  3. Borrowing money from a bank secured by a mortgage on the debtor s business property.
  4. Prepaying an installment loan on inventory.

business problem and excel solution 496402

Top managers of McDonough Products, Inc., have asked for your help in comparing the company s profit performance and financial position with the average for the industry. The accountant has given you the company s income statement and balance sheet and also the following data for the industry:

McDonough Products, Inc.

Income Statement Compared with Industry Average

Year Ended December 31, 2010

McDonough “Industry

Average”

Net sales……………………………………………………………………. $700,000 100.0%

Cost of goods sold…………………………………………………….. 490,000 57.3

Gross profit……………………………………………………………….. 210,000 42.7

Operating expenses ………………………………………………….. 175,000 29.4

Operating income………………………………………………………. 35,000 13.3

Other expenses………………………………………………………….. 7,000 2.5

Net income ……………………………………………………………….. $28,000 10.8%

McDonough Products, Inc.

Balance Sheet Compared with Industry Average

December 31, 2010

McDonough “Industry

Average”

Current assets……………………………………………………………. $471,200 72.1%

Fixed assets, net ……………………………………………………….. 114,700 19.0

Intangible assets, net …………………………………………………. 21,080 4.8

Other assets………………………………………………………………. 13,020 4.1

Total …………………………………………………………………………. 620,000 1.0

Current liabilities ……………………………………………………….. 240,560 0.5

Long-term liabilities …………………………………………………… 135,160 21.0

Stockholders equity…………………………………………………… 244,280 31.8

Total …………………………………………………………………………. $620,000 100.0%

Requirements

1. Prepare a common-size income statement and balance sheet for McDonough Products. The first column of each statement should present McDonough Products common-size statement, and the second column should show the industry averages.

2. For the profitability analysis, compute McDonough Products (a) ratio of gross profit to net sales (b) ratio of operating income to net sales, and (c) ratio of net income to net sales. Compare these figures with the industry averages. Is McDonough Products profit performance better or worse than the average for the industry?

3. For the analysis of financial position, compute McDonough Products (a) ratios of current assets and current liabilities to total assets and (b) ratio of stockholders equity to total assets. Compare these ratios with the industry averages. Is McDonough Products financial position better or worse than the average for the industry?

business problem tessmer manufacturing company and louder company manufactures 496403

Tessmer Manufacturing Company produces inventory in a highly automated assembly plant in Olathe, Kansas. The automated system is in its first year of operation and management is still unsure of the best way to estimate the overhead costs of operations for budgetary purposes. For the first six months of operations, the following data were collected:

Observation Machine-hours Kilowatt-hours Total Overhead Costs

January 3,800 4,520,000 $138,000

February 3,650 4,340,000 136,800

March 3,900 4,500,000 139,200

April 3,300 4,290,000 136,800

May 3,250 4,200,000 126,000

June 3,100 4,120,000 120,000

Required:

  1. Use the high-low method to determine the estimating cost function with machine-hours as the cost driver.
  2. Use the high-low method to determine the estimating cost function with kilowatt-hours as the cost driver.
  3. For July, the company ran the machines for 3,000 hours and used 4,000,000 kilowatt-hours of power. The overhead costs totaled $114,000. Which cost driver was the best predictor for July? Louder Company manufactures part MNO used in several of its truck models. 10,000 units are produced each year with production costs as follows: Direct materials $ 45,000 Direct manufacturing labor 15,000 Variable support costs 35,000 Fixed support costs 25,000 Total costs $120,000 Louder Company has the option of purchasing part MNO from an outside supplier at $11.20 per unit. If MNO is outsourced, 40% of the fixed costs cannot be immediately converted to other uses.
  4. Question 1: What amount of the MNO production costs is avoidable? Question 2: Should the company outsource MNO? Why or why not? Question 3: What other items should the company consider before outsourcing any of the parts it currently manufactures?

busn 379 course project part i airjet best parts inc 496404

Introduction
The Course Project is an opportunity for you to apply concepts learned to a real-life simulation experience. Throughout the Course Project, you will assume that you work as a financial analyst for AirJet Best Parts, Inc. The Course Project is provided in two parts as follows:
Part I In Part I, you work with AirJet Best Parts, Inc. staff to identify the best loan options, as well as to valuate stocks and bonds.
Part II In Part II, you will provide the company with a recommendation for purchasing a new machine. You will base your recommendation on the Net Present Value (NPV) of the capital investment project using the cost of capital (WACC) as your discount rate.
About AirJet Best Parts, Inc.
AirJet Best Parts, Inc. is a company dedicated to the design and manufacturing of aviation and airplane technologies and parts. The company has commercial and military clients worldwide.
Task 1: Assessing loan options for AirJet Best Parts, Inc.
The company needs to finance $8,000,000 for a new factory in Mexico. The funds will be obtained through a commercial loan and by issuing corporate bonds. Here is some of the information regarding the APRs offered by two well-known commercial banks.
Bank APR Number of Times Compounded
National First Prime Rate + 6.75% Semiannually
Regions Best 13.17 Monthly

1. Assuming that AirJet Parts, Inc. is considering loans from National First and Regions Best, XXXXX XXXXX the EARs for these two banks? Hint for National Bank: Go to the St. Louis Federal Reserve Board s website (http://research.stlouisfed.org/fred2/). Select Interest Rates and then Prime Bank Loan Rate . Use the latest MPRIME. Show your calculations. (15 pts)

2. Based on your calculations above, which of the two banks would you recommend and why? Explain your rationale. (15 pts)

3. AirJet Best Parts, Inc. has decided to take a $6,950,000 loan being offered by Regions Best at 8.6% APR for 5 years. What is the monthly payment amount on this loan? Do you agree with this decision? Explain your rationale. (20 pts)
Task 2: Evaluating Competitor s Stock
AirJet Best Parts, Inc. is concerned regarding recent changes in its stock prices for the company and would like to determine the stock prices for key competitors. Key competitors include Raytheon, Boeing, Lockheed Martin, and the Northrop Grumman Corporation.
1. Using the dividend growth model and assuming a dividend growth rate of 5%, what is the rate of return for one of three key competitors? Use Yahoo Finance to obtain the latest dividend amount and price for one selected company. (15 pts)

2. Using the rate of return above, what should be the current share price of AirJet Best Parts, Inc. if the company maintains a constant 1% growth rate in dividends and the most recent dividend per share paid on the stock was $1.50? Show your calculations. (10 pts)

3. Assume AirJet Best Parts has also a preferred stock issue. The most recent dividend per share paid on the stock was also $1.50, the same as the common stock. Which one would you think has a higher price, the preferred stock or the current stock? Explain your rationale. (5 pts)

4. What would happen with the price you computed above if AirJet Best Parts, Inc. announces that dividends at the end of the year will increase? What if the required rate of return increases? What changes in dividends will affect the stock price and how? (10 pts)
Task 3: Bond Evaluation
AirJet Best Parts, Inc. would like to issue 20-year bonds to obtain remaining funds for the new Mexico plant. The company currently has 7.5% semiannual coupon bonds in the market that sell for $1,062 and mature in 20 years.
1. What coupon rate should AirJet Best Parts set on its new bonds to sell them at par value? (10 pts)

2. What is the difference between the coupon rate and the YTM of bonds? (10 pts)

3. What factors will contribute to the riskiness of these bonds? Explain in detail your rationale. (20 pts)

4. What type of positive and negative covenants may AirJet Best Parts, Inc. use in future bond issues? (10 pts)

busn 379 week 6 project part ii jet best parts inc 496405

You will assume that you still work as a financial analyst for AirJet Best Parts, Inc. The company is considering a capital investment in a new machine and you are in charge of making a recommendation on the purchase based on (1) a given rate of return of 15% (Task 4) and (2) the firm s cost of capital (Task 5).
Task 4. Capital Budgeting for a New Machine
A few months have now passed and AirJet Best Parts, Inc. is considering the purchase on a new machine that will increase the production of a special component significantly. The anticipated cash flows for the project are as follows:
Year 1 $1,100,000
Year 2 $1,450,000
Year 3 $1,300,000
Year 4 $950,000
You have now been tasked with providing a recommendation for the project based on the results of a Net Present Value Analysis. Assuming that the required rate of return is 15% and the initial cost of the machine is $3,000,000.
1. What is the project s IRR? (10 pts)

2. What is the project s NPV? (15 pts)

3. Should the company accept this project and why (or why not)? (5 pts)

4. Explain how depreciation will affect the present value of the project. (10 pts)

5. Provide examples of at least one of the following as it relates to the project: (5 pts each)
a. Sunk Cost
b. Opportunity cost
c. Erosion

6. Explain how you would conduct a scenario and sensitivity analysis of the project. What would be some project-specific risks and market risks related to this project? (20 pts)
Task 5: Cost of Capital
AirJet Best Parts Inc. is now considering that the appropriatediscount rate for the new machine should be the cost of capital and would like to determine it. You will assist in the process of obtaining this rate.
1. Compute the cost of debt. Assume AirJet Best Parts Inc. is considering issuing new bonds. Select current bonds from one of the main competitors as a benchmark. Key competitors include Raytheon, Boeing, Lockheed Martin, and the Northrop Grumman Corporation.

a. What is the YTM of the competitor s bond? You may use a number of sources, but we recommend Morningstar. Find the YTM of one 15 or 20 year bond with the highest possible creditworthiness. You may assume that new bonds issued by AirJet Best Parts, Inc. are of similar risk and will require the same return. (5 pts)

b. What is the after-tax cost of debt if the tax rate is 34%? (5 pts)

c. Explain what other methods you could have used to find the cost of debt for AirJet Best Parts Inc.(10 pts)

d. Explain why you should use the YTM and not thecoupon rate as the required return for debt. (5 pts)

2. Compute the cost of common equity using the CAPM model. For beta, use the average beta of three selected competitors. You may obtain the betas from Yahoo Finance. Assume the risk free rate to be 3% and the market risk premium to be 4%.

a. What is the cost of common equity? (5 pts)

BExplain the advantages and disadvantages to use the CAPM model as the method to compute the cost of common equity. Compare and contrast this method with the dividend growth model approach. (10 pts)

busn 460 financial analysis project 496406

Financial Ratio Analysis Refresher

As you complete your studies, the BUSN460 capstone course requires that you pull together all of your learning experiences to complete a business case. A part of that case requires you to review and analyze financial reports. The purpose of this refresher is to take you back to the basics and, within one hour, get you on the road to successfully completing the financial part of the case.

Instructions: In the following narrative we have embedded tutorials and videos for you to view. You need only read the narrative and click on the hyperlink, and you will be on your way. Make sure your speakers are on. If you feel uncomfortable with a given topic, feel free to revisit this refresher and watch the appropriate video.

There are six videos available to help you get up to speed on conducting a financial analysis:
1.) Introduction to Accounting
2.) Interrelationship of Financial Statements
3.) Current Ratio
4.) Inventory Turnover
5.) Debt Ratio
6.) Profitability

To start this activity, please view theIntroduction To Accounting tutorial. It will help to answer the questions what is accounting, who developed it, how does it work, how does it fit into the business model, what are the rules and who generates them. You will learn about the basic accounting equation and some necessary terms. The financial reports that you will find in the case are also explained. (Transcript)

Now we move to theInterrelationships of Financial Statements tutorial to explore the Balance Sheet, Income Statement, and Statement of Cash Flows. These reports provide information about the financial position or health of the business, the success of business operations, and explains where the cash came in and where the cash went. Though this is a very basic look at the financial reports, it is a good starting place. To go beyond this tutorial, one could review the Annual Report of a business such as Wal-Mart available at the company s web site and also download a copy of Wal-Mart s 10k Report from the Securities & Exchange Commission as an exercise. The comparison of the two would provide an excellent view of the financial operation of the retail industry giant. (Transcript)

Prior to starting our videos on ratio analysis there are a few terms that one needs to know:

– Liquidity is the ability of the company to meet its current debt obligations.
– Solvency is the ability of the business to remain in business over a long period of time in terms of its ability to pay its long-term debts.
– Profitability is the company s ability to generate a profit.

TheCurrent Ratio tutorial includes the explanation of three ratios. TheCurrent Ratio,Working Capital computation and the execution of theQuick Ratio are demonstrated. These areLiquidity ratios. (Transcript)

Next, we will review theInventory Turnover In this tutorial,Inventory Turnover Ratio andAccounts Receivable Turnover are demonstrated. These areLiquidity ratios. (Transcript)

In theDebt Ratio tutorial, thisSolvencyratio is demonstrated. (Transcript)

Moving on to theProfitability tutorial,Return on Net Sales andReturn on Assets are demonstrated. These areProfitability ratios. (Transcript)

Hopefully you have found this one hour investment to be profitable!

IMPORTANT: Some ratios call for averages, (e.g. inventory turnover). Since CanGo has only one balance sheet available, you will not use an average, you will use the appropriate number from the most recent year s financial statement. Also assume that there is no interest expense. Good luck!

busn 5600 week 5 6 and 7 graded a work 496407

E7.6 Notes payable discount basis On August 1, 2013, Colombo Co. s treasurer signed a note promising to pay $120,000 on December 31, 2013. The proceeds of the note were $114,000.

Required:

a. Calculate the discount rate used by the lender.

b. Calculate the effective interest rate (APR) on the loan.

c. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to show the effects of

1. Signing the note and the receipt of the cash proceeds on August 1, 2013.

2. Recording interest expense for the month of September.

3. Repaying the note on December 31, 2013.

E7.12 Unearned revenues ticket sales Kirkland Theater sells season tickets for six events at a price of $378. For the 2013 season, 1,200 season tickets were sold.

Required:

a. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to show the effect of the sale of the season tickets.

b. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to show the effect of presenting an event.

c. Where on the balance sheet would the account balance representing funds received for performances not yet presented be classified?

E7.18 Bonds payable various issues Atom Endeavour Co. issued $500 million face amount of 9% bonds when market interest rates were 9.14% for bonds of similar risk and other characteristics.

Required:

a. How much interest will be paid annually on these bonds?

b. Were the bonds issued at a premium or discount? Explain your answer.

c. Will the annual interest expense on these bonds be more than, equal to, or less than the amount of interest paid each year? Explain your answer.

P7.28 Other accrued liabilities payroll and payroll taxes. The following summary data for the payroll period ended December 27, 2012, are available for Cayman Coating Co.:

Gross pay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 86,000

FICA tax withholdings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ?

Income tax withholdings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10,320

Group hospitalization insurance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,270

Employee contributions to pension plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ?

Total deductions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,825

Net pay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ?

Additional information

For employees, FICA tax rates for 2012 were 5.65% on the first $110,100 of each employee s annual earnings and 1.45% on any earnings in excess of $110,100. However, no employees had accumulated earnings for the year in excess of the $110,100 limit.

For employers, FICA tax rates for 2012 were 7.65% on the first $110,100 of each employee s annual earnings and 1.45% on any earnings in excess of $110,100.

The federal and state unemployment compensation tax rates are 0.6% and 5.4%, respectively. These rates are levied against the employer for the first $7,000 of each employee s annual earnings. Only $9,000 of the gross pay amount for the December 27, 2012, pay period was owed to employees who were still under the annual limit.

Required:

Assuming that Cayman Coating Co. s payroll for the last week of the year is to be paid on January 3, 2013, use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to record the effects of the December 27, 2012, entries for

a. Accrued payroll.

b. Accrued payroll taxes.

P7.32 Bonds payable calculate issue price and amortize premium On January 1, 2013, Learned, Inc., issued $90 million face amount of 20-year, 14% stated rate bonds when market interest rates were 16%. The bonds pay interest semiannually each June 30 and December 31 and mature on December 31, 2032.

Required:

a. Using the present value tables in Chapter 6, calculate the proceeds (issue price) of Learned, Inc. s, bonds on January 1, 2013, assuming that the bonds were sold to provide a market rate of return to the investor.

b. Assume instead that the proceeds were $93,000,000. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to record the payment of semiannual interest and the related premium amortization on June 30, 2013, assuming that the premium of $3,000,000 is amortized on a straight-line basis.

c. If the premium in part b were amortized using the compound interest method, would interest expense for the year ended December 31, 2013, be more than, less than, or equal to the interest expense reported using the straight-line method of premium amortization? Explain.

d. In reality, the difference between the stated interest rate and the market rate would be substantially less than 2%. The dramatic difference in this problem was designed so that you could use present value tables to answer part a. What causes the stated rate to be different from the market rate, and why is the difference likely to be much less than depicted in this problem?

——————————————————————————————————————————————

E8.20 Calculate stock dividend shares and cash dividend amounts Assume that you own 4,000 shares of Blueco, Inc. s, common stock and that you currently receive cash dividends of $0.84 per share per year.

Required:

a. If Blueco, Inc., declared a 5% stock dividend, how many shares of common stock would you receive as a dividend?

b. Calculate the cash dividend per share amount to be paid after the stock dividend that would result in the same total cash dividend (as was received before the stock dividend).

c. If the cash dividend remained at $0.84 per share after the stock dividend, what per share cash dividend amount without a stock dividend would have accomplished the same total cash dividend?

d. Why would a company have a dividend policy of paying a $0.10 per share cash dividend and issuing a 5% stock dividend every year?

P8.24 Common and preferred stock issuances and dividends Permabilt Corp. was incorporated on January 1, 2013, and issued the following stock for cash:

4,000,000 shares of no-par common stock were authorized; 1,250,000 shares were issued on January 1, 2013, at $35 per share.

1,500,000 shares of $100 par value, 8.5% cumulative, preferred stock were authorized, and 640,000 shares were issued on January 1, 2013, at $105 per share.

Net income for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2014, and 2015, was $18,400,000, $24,600,000, and $28,750,000, respectively.

No dividends were declared or paid during 2013 or 2014. However, on December 17, 2015, the board of directors of Permabilt Corp. declared dividends of $42,300,000, payable on February 9, 2016, to holders of record as of January 4, 2016.

Required:

a. Use the horizontal model (or write the entry) to show the effects of

1. The issuance of common stock and preferred stock on January 1, 2013.

2. The declaration of dividends on December 17, 2015.

3. The payment of dividends on February 9, 2016.

b. Of the total amount of dividends declared during 2015, how much will be received by preferred shareholders?

P8.26 Treasury stock transactions On January 1, 2013, Metco, Inc., reported 622,100 shares of $3 par value common stock as being issued and outstanding. On March 15, 2013, Metco, Inc., purchased for its treasury 5,200 shares of its common stock at a price of $64 per share. On August 10, 2013, 1,900 of these treasury shares were sold for $76 per share. Metco s directors declared cash dividends of $2.10 per share during the second quarter and again during the fourth quarter, payable on June 30, 2013, and December 31, 2013, respectively. A 3% stock dividend was issued at the end of the year. There were no other transactions affecting common stock during the year.

Required:

a. Use the horizontal model (or write the entry) to show the effect of the treasury stock purchase on March 15, 2013.

b. Calculate the total amount of the cash dividends paid in the second quarter.

c. Use the horizontal model (or write the entry) to show the effect of the sale of the treasury stock on August 10, 2013.

d. Calculate the total amount of cash dividends paid in the fourth quarter.

e. Calculate the number of shares of stock issued in the stock dividend.

P8.28 Transaction analysis various accounts Enter the following column headings across the top of a sheet of paper:

Transaction

Cash

Other Assets

Liabilities

Paid-in Capital

Retained Earnings

Treasury Stock

Net Income

Enter the transaction letter in the first column and show the effect (if any) of each of the following transactions on each financial statement category by entering a plus (+) or minus ( ) sign and the amount in the appropriate column. Do not show items that affect net income in the retained earnings column. You may also write the entries to record these transactions. You should assume that the transactions occurred in the same chronological sequence as listed here:

a. Sold 1,700 shares of $50 par value preferred stock at $52.50 per share.

b. Declared the annual cash dividend of $4.10 per share on common stock. There were 9,300 shares of $1 par value common stock issued and outstanding throughout the year.

c. Issued 2,500 shares of $50 par value preferred stock in exchange for a building when the market price of preferred stock was $54 per share.

d. Purchased 700 shares of preferred stock for the treasury at a price of $56 per share.

e. Sold 250 shares of the preferred stock held in treasury (see d ) for $57 per share.

f. Declared and issued a 15% stock dividend on the $1 par value common stock when the market price per share was $36.

P8.30 Transaction analysis various accounts Enter the following column headings across the top of a sheet of paper:

Transaction

Cash

Other Assets

Liabilities

Paid-in Capital

Retained Earnings

Treasury Stock

Net Income

Enter the transaction letter in the first column and show the effect (if any) of each of the following transactions on each financial statement category by entering a plus (1) or minus ( ) sign and the amount in the appropriate column. Do not show items that affect net income in the retained earnings column. You may also write the entries to record these transactions. You should assume that the transactions occurred in the listed chronological sequence and that no stock had been previously issued. (Hint: Remember to consider appropriate effects of previous transactions.)

a. Issued 3,000 shares of $100 par value preferred stock at par.

b. Issued 4,800 shares of $100 par value preferred stock in exchange for land that had an appraised value of $612,000.

c. Issued 34,000 shares of $5 par value common stock for $24 per share.

d. Purchased 14,000 shares of common stock for the treasury at $27 per share.

e. Sold 9,000 shares of the treasury stock purchased in transaction d for $29 per share.

f. Declared a cash dividend of $3.50 per share on the preferred stock outstanding, to be paid early next year.

g. Declared and issued a 12% stock dividend on the common stock when the market price per share of common stock was $30.

P8.34 Analytical case (part 1) calculate missing stockholders equity amounts for 2013 (Note: The information presented in this case is also used for Case 8.35. For now you can ignore the 2014 column in the balance sheet; all disclosures presented here relate to the June 30, 2013, balance sheet.) DeZurik Corp. had the following stockholders equity section in its June 30, 2013, balance sheet (in thousands, except share and per share amounts):

June 30 (in thousands)

2014

2013

Paid-in capital:

$4.50 Preferred stock, $ ____ par value, cumulative,
200,000 shares authorized, 96,000 shares issued
and outstanding

_______________

$5,760

Common stock, $5 par value, 4,000,000 shares authorized,
3,280,000 shares issued, 3,000,000 shares outstanding

_______________

_______________

Additional paid-in capital on common stock

_______________

22,960

Retained earnings

_______________

_______________

Less: Treasury common stock, at cost, __?__ shares

_______________

_______________

Total stockholders equity

$66,168

$60,000

Required:

a. Calculate the par value per share of preferred stock and determine the preferred stock dividend percentage.

b. Calculate the amount that should be shown on the balance sheet for common stock at June 30, 2013.

c. What was the average issue price of common stock shown on the June 30, 2013, balance sheet?

d. How many shares of treasury stock does DeZurik Corp. own at June 30, 2013?

e. Assume that the treasury shares were purchased for $18 per share. Calculate the amount that should be shown on the balance sheet for treasury stock at June 30, 2013.

f. Calculate the retained earnings balance at June 30, 2013, after you have completed parts a e . (Hint: Keep in mind that Treasury Stock is a contra account.)

g. (Optional) Review the solutions to parts a f of this case on the website for this book at www.mhhe.com/marshall10e. Assume that the Retained Earnings balance on July 1, 2012, was $19,200 (in thousands) and that net income for the year ended June 30, 2013, was $1,152 (in thousands). The 2013 preferred dividends were paid in full, and no other dividend transactions were recorded during the year. Verify that the amount shown in the solution to part f is correct. (Hint: Prepare a statement of retained earnings or do a T-account analysis to determine the June 30, 2013, balance.)

——————————————————————————————————————————————

Berry7.1 Crow, Inc., had net income of $516,050 for its fiscal year ended September 30, 2014. During the year, the company had outstanding 24,000 shares of 8%, $50 par value preferred stock, and 135,500 shares of common stock.

Required:

Calculate the basic earnings per share of common stock for the 2014 fiscal year.

Berry7.2 Wood s Cabinets, Inc., had net income of $424,800 for its fiscal year ended October 31, 2014. During the year, the company had outstanding 53,000 shares of 9%, $60 par value preferred stock, and 36,960 shares of common stock.

Required:

Calculate the Basic Earnings per share of common stock for the 2014 fiscal year.

Berry7.3 Blue Glass, Inc. had cash dividends of $3.96 per share of common stock for calendar 2013. In 2014, the stock was split 3-for-1, and in 2015 a 10% stock dividend was issued.

Required:

Calculate the Dividends per share to be reported in the firm’s annual report for 2014, and 2015.

Berry7.4 Silver Co. had cash dividends reported for 2013 of $3.64 per share of common stock. During 2014, the firm had a 4% common stock dividend.

Required:

Calculate the 2013 earnings per share to be reported in the annual report for 2014.

P9.22 Use gross profit ratio to calculate inventory loss On April 8, 2013, a flood destroyed the warehouse of Stuco Distributing Co. From the waterlogged records of the company, management was able to determine that the firm s gross profit ratio had averaged 40% for the past several years and that the inventory at the beginning of the year was $314,200. It also was determined that during the year until the date of the flood, sales had totaled $638,400 and purchases totaled $355,140.

Required:

Calculate the amount of inventory loss from the flood.

P9.24 Prepare a statement of cash flows indirect method The financial statements of Pouchie Co. included the following information for the year ended December 31, 2013 (amounts in millions):

Depreciation and amortization expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 260
Cash dividends declared and paid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Purchase of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Beginning cash balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Proceeds of common stock issued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Proceeds from sale of building (at book value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Accounts receivable increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Ending cash balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Inventory decrease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Accounts payable increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Required:

Complete the following statement of cash flows, using the indirect method:

POUCHIE CO.
Statement of Cash Flows
For the Year Ended December 31, 2013

Cash Flows from Operating Activities:

Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 384

Add (deduct) items not affecting cash:

____________________________________. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

____________________________________. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

____________________________________. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

____________________________________. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________

Net cash provided (used) by operating activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ __________

Cash Flows from Investing Activities:

____________________________________. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

____________________________________. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________

Net cash provided (used) by investing activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ __________

Cash Flows from Financing Activities:

____________________________________. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

____________________________________. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . __________

Net cash provided (used) by financing activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ __________

Net increase (decrease) in cash for the year. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ __________

Cash balance, January 1, 2013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Cash balance, December 31, 2013 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 40

P9.28 Complete balance sheet and prepare a statement of changes in retained earnings Following is a statement of cash flows (indirect method) for Hartford, Inc., for the year ended December 31, 2014. Also shown is a partially completed comparative balance sheet as of December 31, 2014 and 2013:

HARTFORD, INC.
Statement of Cash Flows
For the Year Ended December 31, 2014

Cash Flows from Operating Activities:

Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 27,000

Add (deduct) items not affecting cash:

Depreciation expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,000

Decrease in accounts receivable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69,000

Increase in inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (21,000)

Increase in notes payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36,000

Decrease in accounts payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (18,000)

Net cash provided by operating activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 228,000

Cash Flows from Investing Activities:

Purchase of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (150,000)

Purchase of buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (144,000)

Net cash used by investing activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (294,000)

Cash Flows from Financing Activities:

Proceeds from short-term debt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 15,000

Cash used for retirement of long-term debt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (75,000)

Proceeds from issuance of common stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,000

Payment of cash dividends on common stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (9,000)

Net cash used by financing activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (39,000)

Net decrease in cash for the year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ (105,000 )

HARTFORD, INC.
Comparative Balance Sheets
At December 31, 2014 and 2013

2014

2013

ASSETS

Current Assets:
Cash

Accounts Receivable
Inventory
Total Current Assets
Land

Buildings and equipment
Less: Accumulated depreciation

Total land, buildings, and equipment

Total Assets

$

168,000
$ ________
$

780,000

___________
$ _________
$ _________

$264,000
219,000

_________
$ ________

$ 120,000

(369,000)

$ _________
$ _________

LIABILIITIES
Current Liabilities:
Accounts payable
Short-term debt
Notes payable
Total current liabilities

Long-term debt

$
96,000
___________
$ __________

$ _255,000

$ 87,000

108,000

$_______

$ _______

STOCKHOLDERS EQUITY

Common stock

Retained earnings

Total Stockholders equity

Total liabilities and stockholders equity


$ 120,000

__________

$ ________
$ ________

$
_________

$ ________

$ ________

Required:

a. Complete the December 31, 2014 and 2013, balance sheets.

b. Prepare a statement of changes in retained earnings for the year ended December 31, 2014.

E10.8 Calculate EPS and effect of stock split on EPS During the year ended December 31, 2014, Gluco, Inc., split its stock on a 3-for-1 basis. In its annual report for 2013, the firm reported net income of $7,407,840 for 2013, with an average 1,073,600 shares of common stock outstanding for that year. There was no preferred stock.

Required:

a. What amount of net income for 2013 will be reported in Gluco s 2014 annual report?

b. Calculate Gluco s earnings per share for 2013 that would have been reported in the 2013 annual report.

c. Calculate Gluco s earnings per share for 2013 that will be reported in the 2014 annual report for comparative purposes.

E10.10 Calculate EPS and dividends per share before stock split For several years Orbon, Inc., has followed a policy of paying a cash dividend of $0.75 per share and having a 10% stock dividend. In the 2014 annual report, Orbon reported restated earnings per share for 2012 of $3.60.

Required:

a. Calculate the originally reported earnings per share for 2012. Round your answer to two decimal places.

b. Calculate the restated cash dividend per share for 2012 reported in the 2014 annual report for comparative purposes. Round your answer to two decimal places.

E10.12 Understanding note disclosures and financial summary data This problem is based on the 2011 annual report of Campbell Soup Company in the appendix. Find in the Selected Financial Data (also known as the Five-Year Review), or calculate, the following data:

a. Dividends per share declared in 2011.
b. Capital expenditures in 2010.
c. Year in which total equity grew by the greatest amount over the previous year.
d. Change in total debt from 2007 to 2011.

Find the following data for 2011 in the Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements:

e. Amount of finished products inventory.
f. The company s effective income tax rate.
g. Total assets of the Global Baking and Snacking segment.
h. Market price range of common stock for the fourth quarter of 2011.

busn300 496409

A. Questions for weekly discussions and conversations (not part of the required Discussion Board assignment)

These questions can serve as the starting point for your discussions during the week. They are thought starters, so that you can explore some ideas associated with the discussion board and unit topics. Answers are not required, and should not be submitted with your required assignment. Answers are not graded.

  1. Let’s take a look at social class from a different perspective. What does your Toyota Corolla say about your social class? What about a Hummer? What about a Corvette? What about a Cadillac? What other cars can you think of that say something specific about your social class?
  2. The impact of Hurricane Katrina raised our awareness of the level of poverty in New Orleans. Were you aware of the poverty and social class issues in this city prior to Katrina? What does it say about our culture that most of us were not aware of the extreme poverty in a city such as New Orleans until the news about Hurricane Katrina brought these issues to light?

B. Required Discussion Board assignment.

Assignment Description:

Imagine you were trying to assess a person’s social class. Answer the following four questions:

  • Based solely on his or her appearance, what physical traits would you look for?
  • If you were only able to see the person and ask him or her just one question, what question would you ask?
  • Why would you ask that particular question?
  • Are there any other observations that you could make from an individual’s appearance that can provide you with evidence of an individual’s social class?

busn300 496410

  • Find an example of a recent major decision (whether in business, politics, etc.) that was made based on assumptions that turned out to be incorrect.
  • Explain why at least 2 assumptions for this decision were incorrect, and explain what led to their use as a basis for the decision.
  • What would you have done to test the validity of the assumptions? What specific kinds of research, testing, or surveying might you have performed if you were the decision maker in a similar situation in the future? What, if anything, would you do differently about the assumptions being made?

In your own words, please post a response to the Discussion Board and comment on other postings. You will be graded on the quality of your postings.

busn300 496411

Your manager believes in learning from other companies’ success stories as well as stories of failure. In particular, she likes to apply various management theories when possible, rather than starting from the beginning every time a decision has to be made. She asks you to write a memo to her addressing the following:

From any recent or current event in the news, discuss and explain the use of these two specific theories that the firms you researched believed in

  • In the human resource area, moving toward an employee empowerment culture
  • In the marketing area, the theory of penetration pricing

For each of these two, explain the following:

  • The issue being addressed that gave rise to employing these theories
  • How the theory being followed leads to specific actions on the part of the company
  • Results achieved
  • If you had been the senior manager in these situations, at those companies, how might you have addressed the situation any differently? What other theory could have been the basis for the decision.

Please submit your assignment.

busn300 496412

ou are the general manager of a large construction project. The contract has both financial incentives for finishing on time or early as well as large penalties if the project is completed late. You know that to get it done on time or early, project planning using a formal time line is essential.

Address the following questions:

  1. In terms of creating a timeline, what is meant by the critical path of a PERT chart?
  2. As a project manager you know that the fastest possible time a project can be completed is known as the critical path. This implies that any delay in any step of a projects critical path, will therefore delay the overall project. On a particular project, step B is part of the critical path; step C and D both are not. Assume that all of these steps, B, C, and D are at risk of being delayed due to some issue (could be lack of people, lack of materials, equipment downtime it makes no difference).
    • How would the manager go about prioritizing correction of the problem existing in B, C, or D
    • Should the manager address the issue in step B first, step C first, or step D first; why?
  3. Once repair is completed in step #2, how would go you about prioritizing repairs at the other two steps?

In your own words, please post a response to the Discussion Board and comment on other postings. You will be graded on the quality of your postings.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

busn300 496413

Using your current work organization (or an organization of interest) as the subject matter, research the elements of business and prepare an APA formatted paper that:

  • Analyzes the organization s basic legal, social, and economic environments
  • Analyzes the organization s managerial, operational, and financial issues including:
    • Project Management
    • Project Timelines
    • Critical Paths and Contingency Planning
    • Implementation Plan Contingencies
    • Staffing Needs and Tools
    • One Gantt Chart Example
    • One PERT Chart Example
  • Analyzes the impact of potential change factors and the impact on the functions of management

This assignment will be assessed using additional criteria providedhere.

Please submit your assignment.

bus 630 week 1 assignment due today 496366

Mendel Paper Company

Complete Case 2B (Mendel Paper Company) in Chapter 2.

In this case, you are provided information regarding selling prices and costs of several products offered by Mendel Paper Company. In addition, management has concerns about sales mix and rising costs. Address the questions (1-5) at the end of the case. Based on the case questions, you are required to provide a three to five double-spaced written report addressing management s concerns. The written report should be properly formatted according to APA guidelines and demonstrate research and critical thinking skills. Conclusions and recommendations should be supported by at least 2 scholarly sources from the Ashford Library or other external sources, excluding the textbook.

For Questions 1 through 4, you will need to complete several calculations be sure to label and clearly identify your work to demonstrate your understanding of the concept even if you arrive at the incorrect answer. The calculations should be included as part of your analysis and written report required for submission.

For Question 5, fully address management s concerns as part of your written analysis using the new or the previous calculations to support your recommendation/explanation. As part of your written analysis, include how management might use these calculations to make decisions. The written analysis should be supported by at least 2 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

Week 1 Written Assignment should:

  • Demonstrate graduate level work including appropriate research and critical thinking skills.
  • Be presented as a written analysis (not a question/answer format)
  • Incorporate case questions into the overall analysis.
  • Follow APA formatting guidelines including title page, reference page and in-text citations
  • Consists of three to five double-spaced pages of content
  • Provide at least 2 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

bus 630 week 4 assignment chester amp wayne 496367

Case: Chester & Wayne

Chester & Wayne is a regional food distribution company. Mr. Chester, CEO, has asked your assistance in preparing cash-flow information for the last three months of this year. Selected accounts from an interim balance sheet dated September 30, have the following balances:

Cash

$142,100

Accounts payable

$354,155

Marketable securities

200,000

Other payables

53,200

Accounts receivable

1,012,500

Inventories

150,388

Mr. Wayne, CFO, provides you with the following information based on experience and management policy. All sales are credit sales and are billed the last day of the month of sale. Customers paying within 10 days of the billing date may take a 2 percent cash discount. Forty percent of the sales is paid within the discount period in the month following billing. An additional 25 percent pays in the same month but does not receive the cash discount. Thirty percent is collected in the second month after billing; the remainder is uncollectible. Additional cash of $24,000 is expected in October from renting unused warehouse space.

Sixty percent of all purchases, selling and administrative expenses, and advertising expenses is paid in the month incurred. The remainder is paid in the following month. Ending inventory is set at 25 percent of the next month’s budgeted cost of goods sold. The company’s gross profit averages 30 percent of sales for the month. Selling and administrative expenses follow the formula of 5 percent of the current month’s sales plus $75,000, which includes depreciation of $5,000. Advertising expenses are budgeted at 3 percent of sales.

Actual and budgeted sales information is as follows:

Actual:

Budgeted:

August

$750,000

October

$826,800

September

787,500

November

868,200

December

911,600

January

930,000

The company will acquire equipment costing $250,000 cash in November. Dividends of $45,000 will be paid in December.

The company would like to maintain a minimum cash balance at the end of each month of $120,000. Any excess amounts go first to repayment of short-term borrowings and then to investment in marketable securities. When cash is needed to reach the minimum balance, the company policy is to sell marketable securities before borrowing.

Questions (use of spreadsheet software is recommended):

1. Prepare a cash budget for each month of the fourth quarter and for the quarter in total. Prepare supporting schedules as needed. (Round all budget schedule amounts to the nearest dollar.)

2. You meet with Mr. Chester and Mr. Wayne to present your findings and happen to bring along your PC with the budget model software. They are worried about your findings in Part 1. They have obviously been arguing over certain assumptions you were given.

1. Mr. Wayne thinks that the gross margin may shrink to 27.5 percent because of higher purchase prices. He is concerned about what impact this will have on borrowings. Comment.

2. Mr. Chester thinks that “stock outs” occur too frequently and wants to see the impact of increasing inventory levels to 30 and 40 percent of next quarter’s sales on their total investment. Comment on these changes.

3. Mr. Wayne wants to discontinue the cash discount for prompt payment. He thinks that maybe collections of an additional 20 percent of sales will be delayed from the month of billing to the next month. Mr. Chester says “That’s ridiculous! We should increase the discount to 3 percent. Twenty percent more would be collected in the current month to get the higher discount.” Comment on the cash-flow impacts.

bus 630 week 6 final 496368

Decision Making with Managerial Accounting

Focus of the Final Paper

Due to varying business characteristics, the managerial accounting techniques applied in each business may differ. For example, a business in the start-up phase may rely heavily upon budgeting and capital investment techniques; whereas, a business in the mature/maintaining phase may rely heavily upon cost management and quality control. Ultimately, the techniques used by management should assist the business in achieving its short-term and long-term goals through effective decision-making.

For your Final Paper, you will analyze the role of managerial accounting in two parts. Part I will provide a general overview of managerial accounting. Part II will provide examples of how managerial accounting theories and principles are applied in the business world. You may find it helpful to reflect upon your own professional experiences for examples.

Part I (Three to four double-spaced pages)

Present the following:

  • Definition of managerial accounting
  • Role of managerial accounting and the management accountant in a business or organization
  • Ethical issues/concerns for the management accountant
  • General description of at least three managerial accounting techniques available and their application within a business or organization

Part II (Four to six double-spaced pages)

Select at least three of the five topics identified below:

  • Cost Management Techniques
  • Costing Methods
  • Capital Investment Decision Techniques
  • Budgeting
  • Quality Control

For each topic selected present real world examples of the application of managerial accounting techniques within a business or organization. Examples may be gathered from your own professional experiences or from case studies obtained from credible sources (excluding textbook examples explored in previous weeks). Presentation of each example should include how a managerial accounting technique was applied in the business or organization s decision-making model. Be sure to support your example with calculations when applicable.

bus 640 final paper 496369

Research a specific company of your choice and identify some of the managerial decisions that were made over time and in response to changes in its market or competitive environment. Use Ashford University Online library and web-based resources for your research. At least 3 external resources must be used. Address all of the following areas:

Focus of the Final Paper

Describe the company and provide a brief history of its operations. Find or use graphs to illustrate its financial performance over the years.
Identify any sources of risk or uncertainty in its operations. Do the financial reports indicate risky or uncertain activities or changes to the economic environment that ultimately appear to have affected the company s financial outcomes? Be specific.
Are there any government regulations that have affected this company s operations domestically or abroad? Explain.
Describe the inputs that are used in this company s production function and identify any challenges to securing these inputs.
Determine if the company has introduced new products in existing markets or created new markets over time. What is the impact on its finances?
Determine if the price of its products increased or declined over time and analyze the reasons for price fluctuations. Study the demand elasticity for its products and discuss the availability of close substitutes for its products. How does that affect pricing decisions?
Analyze the company s profitability. Identify the economy or industry influences on its costs, operations, and profitability.
Describe the competitive environment in which the firm operates, the distribution of market power, and the strategic behavior of the firm and its competitors. Apply your knowledge of the theory of this company s market structure. How does the company make pricing and production decisions? Is your observation supported by the theoretical models? Refer to the financial reports for illustration.
Identify any non-price competitive strategies that the company might be engaging in? Provide specific examples.
Evaluate if the company made any mistakes in its decisions over time, and recommend any changes or improvements for the future operations. Refer to the financial reports when making specific observations or recommendations.
Use economic language and demonstrate your understanding of the concepts and theories of this course.

bus 640 managerial economics week 1 assignment 496370

Economics of Risk and Uncertainty Applied Problems

Please, complete the following two applied problems in a Word or Excel document. Show all your calculations and explain your results. Submit your assignment in the drop box by using the Assignment Submission button.

Week 1 Assignment Study Guide

1. A generous university benefactor has agreed to donate a large amount of money for student scholarships. The money can be provided in one lump-sum of $10mln, or in parts, where $5.5mln can be provided in year 1, and another $5.5mln can be provided in year 2. Assuming the opportunity interest rate is 6%, what is the present value of the second alternative? Which of the two alternatives should be chosen and why? How would your decision change if the opportunity interest rate was 12%? Please, show all your calculations.

2. An angel investor is considering investing in one of two start-up businesses and is evaluating the expected returns along with the risk of each option in order to choose the better alternative.

  • Business 1 is an innovative protein energy drink, which has ENPV of $100,000 with a standard deviation of $40,000.
  • Business 2 is a unique chicken wings dipping sauce with an ENPV of $60,000 and a standard deviation of $25,000.

a) Apply the coefficient-of-variation decision criterion to these alternatives to find out which is preferred by the angel investor, assuming that he/she is risk-averse.

b) Apply the maximin criterion, assuming that the worst outcome in Business 1 is to lose $5,000, whereas the worst outcome in Business 2 is to make only $5,000 in profit.

c) If you were the angel investor, what is your certainty equivalent for these two projects? Are you risk-averse, risk-neutral, or risk-lover?

bus 650 comparing capital expenditures 496371

Comparing Capital Expenditures. Access the annual reports for your selected company for the past three years. Next, select a company that is a direct competitor and download the previous three years annual reports.

Research Tip: The Mergent database in the Ashford Library contains company profiles and financial information for publicly traded companies and their competitors. To access this database enter the Ashford Library and select Find Articles and More in the top menu panel. Next, select Databases A-Z and go to section M for Mergent . For help with using Mergent use Mergent Online Quick Tips.

Tip: For help with reading an annual report access this handy guide from Money Chimp (http://www.moneychimp.com/articles/financials/fundamentals.htm)

Using the annual reports of both companies complete the following:

For each company report the amount of capital spending for the past three years. Quantitatively determine whether the amount of capital spending has been consistent or if it has fluctuated. Be sure to provide the calculations used to determine your answer. Describe the capital expenditures of each firm and the factors that impacted the companies debt capacity and capital structure.

Next, compare the level of capital spending across the two firms. Point out how the spending was similar and/or different and speculate why the similarities or differences might exist. Support your analysis with evidence from the text, external sources, and articles/reports from the Mergent database in the Ashford Library.

Summarize your findings in a three to five page paper excluding title page and reference page(s). Format the paper according to the APA 6th edition style guide as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. Be sure to properly cite your resources using APA style.

bus 650 journal and assignment 496372

Journal

Capital Budgeting

Critically reflect on the importance of capital budgeting. Why is this such a heated subject in many boardrooms? How does capital budgeting promote the financial health of an organization? How will you use the financial techniques you have learned this week to promote the financial health of your organization?

Write one to two pages.

Assignment

Management of Working Capital Case Study: “George’s Trains”.

View the following Video:

Click Here

It appears that George is running a profitable business. George is aware you are in an MBA Managerial Finance class and comes to you for advice on his working capital practices. More specifically George asks:

  • How you would describe my working capital practices, including my methods of capital budgeting analysis techniques?
  • What are potential pitfalls in my Capital Budgeting practices that I should be aware of?
  • Develop a simple Statement of Cash Flows for George s Trains using any information gleaned from the video. What areas of improvement do you recommend? Provide at least three references from the Ashford Library or other scholarly sources to support your recommendations.

In a three to five page paper respond to George s request for advice and answer each question in detail. The Written Paper should be properly formatted in alignment with APA 6th edition formatting.

bus 650 week 2 return on investment education funding solution 496373

Return

Develop a three to five page analysis on the projected return on investment for your college education and projected future employment. This analysis will consist of two parts.

Part 1: Describe how and why you made the decision to pursue a MBA. Include in that explanation calculations of expenses and opportunity costs related to that decision.

Part 2: Conduct research on your desired occupation and how much compensation (return) you expect to earn. How long will it take to pay back the return on this investment Be sure to use the financial formulas (Net Present Value (NPV), Internal Rate of Return (IRR) and Payback) provided in Chapters 3 and 4 of your text.

**Occupation of your choice**

bus115 496376

Complete the following assignment and submit to the Dropbox by the scheduled due date. Following the methodology given in the case below complete Steps 1 through 4 and then the follow-up questions. Be sure to include a discussion of the stock price of your chosen company and include the stock prices.

The information you need to complete this assignment can easily be found on the Internet at various financial and trading websites.

IMPORTANT: In addition to Steps 1 through 4, please consider this assignment in light of the very fluctuating market we are currently experiencing and the wild fluctuations of the market. Please comment on this in your paper.

Market Ups and Downs:

Goal:

To encourage you to understand the forces that affect fluctuations in stock prices.

Background Information:

Investing in stocks requires an understanding of the various factors that affect stock prices. These factors may be intrinsic to the company itself or part of the external environment.

  • Internal factors relate to the company itself, such as an announcement of poor or favorable earnings, earnings that are more or less than expected, major layoffs, labor problems, new products, management issues, and mergers.
  • External factors relate to world or national events, such as the war in Iraq, the Asian currency crisis, weather conditions that affect sales, the Fed’s adjustments of interest rates, and employment figures that were higher or lower than expected.

By analyzing these factors, you will often learn a lot about why a stock did well or why it did poorly. Being aware of these influences will help you anticipate future stock movements.

Method:

  1. Step 1 – Choose a common stock that has experienced considerable price fluctuations in the past few years. Here are several examples (but there are many others): IBM, J.P. Morgan Chase, AT&T, Amazon.com, Oxford Health Care, and Apple Computer. Find the symbol for the stock (for example, J.P. Morgan Chase is JPM) and the exchange on which it is traded (JPM is traded on the NYSE).
  2. Step 2 – Find the historical ups and down of your chosen stock going back no more than ten years. You can find this information at a number of well known sites on the web. Do a little research to find these site.
  3. Step 3 – Find a period of several months or even a year when there have been major price fluctuations in the stock. Research what happened during that time period that might have contributed to the fluctuation. A place to begin is with the Wall Street Journal or on the business pages of a national newspaper, such as the New York Times or the Washington Post. Perhaps a “this day in history” web page woud provide some information.
  4. Step 4 – Write a short analysis that links changes in stock price to internal and external factors. As you analyze the data, be aware that it is sometimes difficult to know why a stock price fluctuates. Give me you best analysis.

Follow-Up Questions (please respond to these as well):

  1. Do you see any similarities in the movement of the various stocks during the same period? For example, did the stocks move up or down at about the same time? If so, do you think the stocks were affected by the same factors? Explain your thinking.
  2. Based on your analysis, did internal or external factors have the greater impact on stock price? Which factors had the more long-lasting effect? Which factors had the shorter effect?
  3. Why do you think it is so hard to predict changes in stock price on a day-to-day basis?

NOTE: This is the Unit Five Assignment that you turn into me.

bus3061 accounting quiz 496377

1. Which of the following statements about users of accounting information is incorrect?

2. Net income will result during a time period when:

3. Which of the following events is not recorded in the accounting records?

4. Which financial statement reports assets, liabilities, and equities?

5. Debits:

6. The purchase of supplies on account should result in:

7. The cash flow statement classifies cash receipts and payments by these activities:

8. Cash dividends paid to stockholders are classified on the statement of cash flows as:

9. Which of the following is an example of a cash flow from an investing activity?

10. Which of the following transactions is an example of a cash flow from an operating activity?

11. Which of the following items is an example of a current liability?

12. Which of the following items is not considered a long-term asset?

13. All of the following items are examples of temporary accounts except:

14. Which of these ratios is used to calculate a firm’s solvency?

15. What is the term for the ratio of cash dividends divided by net income?

16. Which of the following measures is an evaluation of a firm’s ability to pay current liabilities?

17. Which of these ratios measures the profitability of assets before the impact of borrowing?

18. Which of the following actions does not represent an excellent internal control or procedure to ensure integrity?

19. What is the term for the accounting convention that specifies that expenses should be recognized to match the time when associated revenues are recognized?

20. Which of the following items is an example of a deferrable expense?

bus3061 assignment u02a4 496379

Balance sheets do not always balance once they are prepared, and income statements do not always contain correct account data. This can cause havoc across the accounting department and requires the accountant to locate the missing or incorrect data. Financial statement preparation will be an important skill during this process, as you will discover when you determine the missing amounts in the statement in this assignment.

Instructions

For this assignment, use the BUS3061 Assignment u02a4 Template (listed under Resources).

In each of the two sets of organization financial statement information, two items have been omitted. Determine the missing amounts and fill them in on the template to complete the financial statement information.

bus3061 classify each of the following cash inflows and outflows as operating invest 496381

Classify each of the following cash inflows and outflows as operating, investing, or financing activities:

Column A Inflow Outflow Operating Investing Financing

1. Sale of a piece of company equipment.

2. Sale of common stock.

3. Payment to suppliers for merchandise purchased.

4. Payment to lenders for interest on note payable.

5. Sale of investments in other companies.

6. Purchase of land to expand plant size.

7. Payment to stockholders as cash dividends.

8. Sale of goods or services.

9. Payment to employees for wages and salaries.

10. Lending of money to other business entities.

11. Payment to government for property and income taxes.

12. Collection of principal on loans to other entities.

13. Interest and dividends received.

14. Issue of bonds to support company growth.

15. Purchase of investments in debt or equity of other entities.

16. Payment to other entities to cover expenses incurred.

17. Buyback of company stock from investors.

bus3061 imagine you are an accountant for j malone 039 s law firm inc the accounts a 496382

BUS3061 Assignment

Imagine you are an accountant for J. Malone’s Law Firm, Inc. The accounts and transactions of the firm are listed below. Analyze each transaction. Identify the account or accounts to be debited and credited and prepare a journal entry for each in the proper format.

Here is an example to record the owner’s investment to start the business:

Cash: $54,000. Common stock: $54,000. Use the following account titles for this scenario:

Assets

Cash. Accounts receivable. Prepaid rent. Office equipment. Automobiles.

Liabilities

Accounts payable. Interest payable. Note payable.

Owner’s Equity

Common stock.

Expenses

Automobile expense. Rent expense. Utilities expense. Salaries expense. Interest expense. Telephone expense.

Revenues

Service revenue.

Transactions

Justin Malone:

1. Invested $54,000 in cash to start the business.

2. Paid $3,000 for 3 month’s rent.

3. Bought a used automobile for the firm for $16,000 in cash.

4. Performed services for $3,000 in cash.

5. Paid $400 for automobile repairs.

6. Performed legal services for $3,750 on credit.

7. Borrowed $25,000 from the local bank to help expand his business.

8. Purchased office chairs for $2,100 on credit.

9. Received $1,800 from credit clients.

10. Paid $1,000 on account to reduce the amount owed for the office chairs (purchased in item 8).

11. Issued a check for $560 to pay the monthly utility bill. Purchased office equipment for $8,400.

12. Paid half in cash; the remainder to be paid in 30 days.

13. Issued a check for $5,680 to pay salaries.

14. Performed legal services for $1,850 in cash.

15. Performed legal services for $2,600 on credit.

16. Collected $1,600 on accounts receivable from charge clients.

17. One month’s worth of rent (paid in item 2) has expired.

18. One month’s interest $145 accrued on the note payable (from item 7).

Required: Journal entries

bus3061 prepare journal entries 496383

Instructions

Accounts to be used:

Cash.

Prepaid insurance.

Land.

Buildings.

Equipment.

Accounts payable.

Unearned service revenue.

Owner’s capital.

Owner’s drawings.

Service revenue.

Advertising expense.

Salaries and wages expense.

Leave a space between each dated transaction.

May 1 Invested $20,000 cash in the golf course business.

May 3 Purchased Hampstead Golf Land for $15,000 cash. The price includes land $12,000, shed $2,000, and equipment $1,000.

May 5 Paid advertising expenses of $700.

May 6 Paid cash $600 for a one-year insurance policy.

May 10 Purchased golf discs and other equipment for $1,050 from Discs Are Us payable in 30 days.

May 18 Received $1,100 in cash for golf fees earned (service revenue).

May 19 Sold 150 coupon books for $10 each. Each book contains four coupons that enable the holder to play one round of disc golf.

May 25 Withdrew $800 cash for personal use.

May 30 Pay $250 as salaries for part-time employees.

May 30 Paid Discs Are Us the full amount due.

May 31 Received $2,100 cash for fees earned.

bus3061 prepare statement of cash flows using indirect method for skylar enterprises 496384

Skylar Enterprises, Inc.

Comparative Balance Sheets

Assets 1/1/2012 12/31/2012 Difference

Cash 73,000 22,000 51,000

Accounts Receivable 85,000 76,000 9,000

Inventory 170,000 189,000 19,000

Land 75,000 100,000 25,000

Equipment 260,000 200,000 60,000

Accumulated depn-equipment -66,000 -32,000 34,000

Total 597,000 555,000

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts payable 39,000 47,000 8,000

Bonds Payable 150,000 200,000 50,000

Common stock 216,000 174,000 42,000

Retained earnings 192,000 134,000 58,000

Total 597,000 555,000

Additional information:

1. Net Income for 2012 was $103,000

2. Cash dividends of $45,000 was paid

3. Bonds payable of $55,000 were redeemed

4. Common stock was issued for $42,000 cash

5. No equipment was sold during 2012

6. Land was sold at cost during 2012

bus3061 quiz 496385

1. u05q1 Question 1

Which of the following statements about users of accounting information is incorrect?

a. Management is an internal user.

b. Taxing authorities are external users.

c. Present creditors are external users.

d. Regulatory authorities are internal users.

2. u05q1 Question 2

Net income will result during a time period when:

a. Assets exceed liabilities.

b. Revenues exceed expenses.

c. Assets exceed revenues.

d. Expenses exceed revenues.

3. u05q1 Question 3

Which of the following events is not recorded in the accounting records?

a. Equipment is purchased on account.

b. An employee is terminated.

c. A cash investment is made into the business.

d. The owner withdraws cash for personal use.

4. u05q1 Question 4

Which financial statement reports assets, liabilities, and equities?

a. Statement of cash flows.

b. Income statement.

c. Balance sheet.

d. Owner’s equity statement.

5. u05q1 Question 5

Debits:

a. Increase both assets and liabilities.

b. Decrease both assets and liabilities.

c. Decrease assets and increase liabilities.

d. Increase assets and decrease liabilities.

6. u05q1 Question 6

The purchase of supplies on account should result in:

a. A debit to Supplies and a credit to Accounts Payable.

b. A debit to Supplies Expense and a credit to Cash.

c. A debit to Supplies Expense and a credit to Accounts Payable.

d. A debit to Supplies and a credit to Accounts Receivable.

7. u05q1 Question 7

The cash flow statement classifies cash receipts and payments by these activities:

a. Operating and non-operating.

b. Investing, financing, and operating.

c. Financing, operating, and non-operating.

d. Investing, financing, and non-operating.

8. u05q1 Question 8

Cash dividends paid to stockholders are classified on the statement of cash flows as:

a. Operating activities.

b. Investing activities.

c. Financing activities.

d. Non-operating activities.

9. u05q1 Question 9

Which of the following is an example of a cash flow from an investing activity?

a. Receipt of cash from the issuance of bonds payable.

b. Payment of cash to repurchase outstanding common stock.

c. Receipt of cash from the sale of unneeded business equipment.

d. Payment of cash to suppliers for inventory.

10. u05q1 Question 10

Which of the following transactions is an example of a cash flow from an operating activity?

a. Payment of cash to lenders for loan interest.

b. Receipt of cash from the sale of common stock.

c. Payment of cash dividends to the company’s stockholders.

d. Issuance of debt for cash.

11. u05q1 Question 11

Which of the following items is an example of a current liability?

a. Bonds payable.

b. Capital leases.

c. Pension obligations.

d. Income tax payable.

12. u05q1 Question 12

Which of the following items is not considered a long-term asset?

a. Patent.

b.Land improvements.

c. Inventory.

d. Goodwill.

13. u05q1 Question 13

All of the following items are examples of temporary accounts except:

a. Interest income.

b. Retained earnings.

c. Cost of goods sold.

d. Sales.

14. u05q1 Question 14

Which of these ratios is used to calculate a firm’s solvency?

a. Return on equity.

b. Quick ratio.

c. Asset turnover.

d. Times interest earned.

15. u05q1 Question 15

What is the term for the ratio of cash dividends divided by net income?

a. Dividend yield.

b. Payout ratio.

c. Book value.

d. Earnings per share.

16. u05q1 Question 16

Which of the following measures is an evaluation of a firm’s ability to pay current liabilities?

a. Current ratio.

b.Profit margin.

c. Return on assets.

d. Accounts receivable turnover.

17. u05q1 Question 17

Which of these ratios measures the profitability of assets before the impact of borrowing?

a. Asset turnover.

b. Debt ratio.

c. Return on assets.

d. Return on equity.

18. u05q1 Question 18

Which of the following actions does not represent an excellent internal control or procedure to ensure integrity?

a. Creating an audit trail.

b. Using a manual accounting system.

c. Using an automated accounting system.

d. Using independent auditors.

19. u05q1 Question 19

What is the term for the accounting convention that specifies that expenses should be recognized to match the time when associated revenues are recognized?

a. Going-concern value.

b. Matching.

c. Conservatism.

d. Full disclosure.

20. u05q1 Question 20

Which of the following items is an example of a deferrable expense?

a. Professional retainer.

b. Depreciation.

c. Lawsuit liability.

d. Salaries and wages.

bus3061 quiz solutions guide accounting 496386

1. u05q1 Question 1

Which of the following statements about users of accounting information is incorrect?
a. Management is an internal user.
b. Taxing authorities are external users.
c. Present creditors are external users.
d. Regulatory authorities are internal users.

2. u05q1 Question 2

Net income will result during a time period when:
a. Assets exceed liabilities.
b. Revenues exceed expenses.
c. Assets exceed revenues.
d. Expenses exceed revenues.

3. u05q1 Question 3

Which of the following events is not recorded in the accounting records?
a. Equipment is purchased on account.
b. An employee is terminated.
c. A cash investment is made into the business.
d. The owner withdraws cash for personal use.

4. u05q1 Question 4

Which financial statement reports assets, liabilities, and equities?
a. Statement of cash flows.
b. Income statement.
c. Balance sheet.
d. Owner’s equity statement.

5. u05q1 Question 5

Debits:

a. Increase both assets and liabilities.
b. Decrease both assets and liabilities.
c. Decrease assets and increase liabilities.
d. Increase assets and decrease liabilities.

6. u05q1 Question 6

The purchase of supplies on account should result in:

a. A debit to Supplies and a credit to Accounts Payable.
b. A debit to Supplies Expense and a credit to Cash.
c. A debit to Supplies Expense and a credit to Accounts Payable.
d. A debit to Supplies and a credit to Accounts Receivable.

7. u05q1 Question 7

The cash flow statement classifies cash receipts and payments by these activities:
a. Operating and non-operating.
b. Investing, financing, and operating.
c. Financing, operating, and non-operating.
d. Investing, financing, and non-operating.

8. u05q1 Question 8

Cash dividends paid to stockholders are classified on the statement of cash flows as:
a. Operating activities.
b. Investing activities.
c. Financing activities.
d. Non-operating activities.

9. u05q1 Question 9

Which of the following is an example of a cash flow from an investing activity?
a. Receipt of cash from the issuance of bonds payable.
b. Payment of cash to repurchase outstanding common stock.
c. Receipt of cash from the sale of unneeded business equipment.
d. Payment of cash to suppliers for inventory.

10. u05q1 Question 10

Which of the following transactions is an example of a cash flow from an operating activity?

a. Payment of cash to lenders for loan interest.
b. Receipt of cash from the sale of common stock.
c. Payment of cash dividends to the company’s stockholders.
d. Issuance of debt for cash.

11. u05q1 Question 11

Which of the following items is an example of a current liability?
a. Bonds payable.
b. Capital leases.
c. Pension obligations.
d. Income tax payable.

12. u05q1 Question 12

Which of the following items is not considered a long-term asset?

a. Patent.

b.Land improvements.
c. Inventory.

d. Goodwill.

13. u05q1 Question 13

All of the following items are examples of temporary accounts except:

a. Interest income.
b. Retained earnings.
c. Cost of goods sold.
d. Sales.

14. u05q1 Question 14

Which of these ratios is used to calculate a firm’s solvency?

a. Return on equity.

b. Quick ratio.
c. Asset turnover.
d. Times interest earned.

15. u05q1 Question 15

What is the term for the ratio of cash dividends divided by net income?
a. Dividend yield.
b. Payout ratio.
c. Book value.
d. Earnings per share.

16. u05q1 Question 16

Which of the following measures is an evaluation of a firm’s ability to pay current liabilities?

a. Current ratio.
b.Profit margin.

c. Return on assets.
d. Accounts receivable turnover.

17. u05q1 Question 17

Which of these ratios measures the profitability of assets before the impact of borrowing?

a. Asset turnover.

b. Debt ratio.
c. Return on assets.
d. Return on equity.

18. u05q1 Question 18

Which of the following actions does not represent an excellent internal control or procedure to ensure integrity?
a. Creating an audit trail.
b. Using a manual accounting system.
c. Using an automated accounting system.
d. Using independent auditors.

19. u05q1 Question 19

What is the term for the accounting convention that specifies that expenses should be recognized to match the time when associated revenues are recognized?

a. Going-concern value.
b. Matching.
c. Conservatism.
d. Full disclosure.

20. u05q1 Question 20

Which of the following items is an example of a deferrable expense?

a. Professional retainer.
b. Depreciation.
c. Lawsuit liability.
d. Salaries and wages.

bus3061 skylark enterprise cash flow statement indirect method 496387

Skylar Enterprises, Inc.

Comparative Balance Sheets

Assets 1/1/2012 12/31/2012 Difference

Cash 73,000 22,000 51,000

Accounts Receivable 85,000 76,000 9,000

Inventory 170,000 189,000 19,000

Land 75,000 100,000 25,000

Equipment 260,000 200,000 60,000

Accumulated depn-equipment -66,000 -32,000 34,000

Total 597,000 555,000

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts payable 39,000 47,000 8,000

Bonds Payable 150,000 200,000 50,000

Common stock 216,000 174,000 42,000

Retained earnings 192,000 134,000 58,000

Total 597,000 555,000

Additional information:

1. Net Income for 2012 was $103,000

2. Cash dividends of $45,000 was paid

3. Bonds payable of $55,000 were redeemed

4. Common stock was issued for $42,000 cash

5. No equipment was sold during 2012

6. Land was sold at cost during 2012

Required: Cash flow statement – indirect method

bus3061 southwest business school income statement 496388

As you have learned, generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) require organizations to prepare both an income statement and a balance sheet. Before the balance sheet can be prepared, the organization’s net income must be determined. This requires the accountant to pull together data from numerous system accounts and other sources of information. In this assignment, you will demonstrate your skill in putting together the necessary account data and preparing an income statement in good form.

Instructions

For this assignment, use the BUS3061 Assignment u02a3 Template to prepare an income statement

Southwest Business School

Adjusted Trial Balance

December 31 20XX

Debit ($)Credit ($)

Cash26,000

Accounts receivable7,500

Teaching supplies2,600

Prepaid insurance12,000

Prepaid rent0

Professional library30,000

Accumulated depreciation Professional library15,000

Equipment70,000

Accumulated depreciation Equipment28,000

Accounts payable36,000

Salaries payable400

Unearned training fees6,600

Common stock10,000

Retained earnings53,600

Dividends40,000

Tuition fees earned1,09,500

Training fees earned42,400

Depreciation expense Professional library6,000

Depreciation expense Equipment12,000

Salaries expense48,400

Insurance expense3,000

Rent expense24,000

Teaching supplies expense7,400

Advertising expense7,000

Utilities expense 5,600 _______

Totals $3,01,500$3,01,500

bus3061 unit 5 orange company ratios 2013 496389

Orange Company

Income Statement

For the Years Ended December 31

2013 2012

Net sales (all on account) $600,000 $520,000

Expenses:

Cost of Goods Sold $415,000 $354,000

Selling and administrative $120,800 $114,600

Interest Expense $7,800 $6,000

Income Tax Expense $18,000 $14,000

Total expenses $561,600 $488,600

Net Income $38,400 $31,400

Additional Data:

1. The common stock recently sold at $19.50 per share.

2. Cash dividends in the amount of $15,400 were paid-out in 2013.

Orange Company

Balance Sheets

December 31

2013 2012

Assets

Current Assets

Cash $21,000 $18,000

Short-term investments $18,000 $15,000

Accounts Receivable $86,000 $74,000

Inventory $90,000 $70,000

Total Current Assets $215,000 $177,000

Plant Assets $423,000 $383,000

Total Assets $638,000 $560,000

Liabilities and Stockholder’s Equity

Current Liabilities

Accounts Payable $122,000 $110,000

Income Taxes Payable $23,000 $20,000

Total Curent Liabilities $145,000 $130,000

Long-term Liabilities Bonds Payable $120,000 $80,000

Total Liabilities $265,000 $210,000

Stockholder’s Equity

Common Stock ($5 par value) $150,000 $150,000

Retained Earnings $223,000 $200,000

Total Stockholder’s Equity $373,000 $350,000

Total Liabilities and Stockholder’s Equity $638,000 $560,000

Compute the following for 2013:

2013 Calculations 2013 Answers

Current ratio

Quick ratio

Receivables turnover

Inventory turnover

Profit margin

Asset turnover

Return on assets

Return on equity

Earnings per share

Price-earnings

Cash Dividend payout

Debt ratio

Debt-to-Equity

Times interest earned

bus 308 week 5 dq 496340

BUS 308 Week 5 DQ 1 Correlation

At times we can generate a regression equation to explain outcomes. For example, an employee s salary can often be explained by their pay grade, appraisal rating, education level, etc. What variables might explain or predict an outcome in your department or life? If you generated a regression equation, how would you interpret it and the residuals from it

BUS 308 Week 5 DQ 2 Regression

At times we can generate a regression equation to explain outcomes. For example, an employee s salary can often be explained by their pay grade, appraisal rating, education level, etc. What variables might explain or predict an outcome in your department or life? If you generated a regression equation, how would you interpret it and the residuals from it?

bus 401 week 1 individual assignment salco inc 496345

The annual sales for Salco Inc. were $4.5 million last year. The firm s end-of-year balance sheet was as follows: Current assets $ 500,000 Liabilities $1,000,000 Net fixed assets 1,500,000 Owners equity 1,000,000 $2,000,000 $2,000,000 The firm s income statement for the year was as follows: Sales $ 4,500,000 Less cost of goods sold (3,500,000) Gross profit $ 1,000,000 Less operating expenses (500,000) Operating income $ 500,000 Less interest expense (100,000) Earnings before taxes $ 400,000 Less taxes (50%) (200,000) Net income $ 200,000 a. Calculate Salco s total asset turnover, operating profit margin, and operating return on assets. b. Salco plans to renovate one of its plants, which will require an added investment in plant and equipment of $1 million. The firm will maintain its present debt ratio of .5 when financing the new investment and expects sales to remain constant. The operating profit margin will rise to 13 percent. What will be the new operating return on assets for Salco after the plant s renovation? c. Given that the plant renovation in part b occurs and Salco s interest expense rises by $50,000 per year, what will be the return earned on the common stockholders investment? Compare this rate of return with that earned before the renovation.

bus 401 week 3 assignment chapter 9 mini case 496346

Mini Case Study Week 3; Assignment One Data: In parts “a” and “b” clearly label the calculation of the required ratios and solve using Excel. Use formulas to calculate the ratios and format the cells to insert a comma if there is more than three numbers. Round to two decimal places. No narrative analysis is called for, so clearly label the calculations

The balance sheet that follows indicates the capital structure for Nealon Inc. Flotation costs are (a) 15 percent of market value for a new bond issue, and (b) $2.01 per share for preferred stock. The dividends for common stock were $2.50 last year and are projected to have an annual growth rate of 6 percent. The firm is in a 34 percent tax bracket. What is the weighted average cost of capital if the firm s finances are in the following proportions?

Type of Financing Percentage of future financing Bonds (8%, $1,000 par value, 16 year maturity) 38% Preferred stock (5,000 shares outstanding, $50 par, $1.50 dividend) 15% Common Equity 47% Total 100%

a. Market prices are $1,035 for bonds, $19 for preferred stock, and $35 for common stock. There will be sufficient internal common equity funding (ie., retained earnings) available such that the firm does not plan to issue new common stock.

Calculate the firm s weighted average cost of capital.

b. In part (a) we assumed that the Nealon would have sufficient retained earnings such that it would not need to sell additional common stock to finance its new investments. Consider the situation now, when Nealon s retained earnings anticipated for the coming year are expected to fall short of the equity requirement of 47 percent of new capital raised. Consequently the firm foresees the possibility that new common shares will have to be issued. To facilitate the sale of shares, Nealon s investment banker has advised management that they should expect a price discount of approximately 7 percent., or $2.45 per share. Under these terms, the new shares should provide net proceeds of about $32.55. What is Nealon s cost of equity capital when new shares are sold, and what is the weighted average cost of the added funds involved in the issuance of new shares?

bus 415 final exam 100 correct answers 496347

BUS 415 Final Exam

1) The form of alternative dispute resolution wherein the parties hire someone to review the evidence and make a decision that is binding upon the parties is called
A. negotiation
B. settlement conference
C. conciliation
D. arbitration

2) The Federal Trade Commission is an example of
A. a federal agency created by the federal government
B. a corporation subsidized by the federal government
C. a branch of the U.S. Supreme Court
D. a temporary commission created by executive order that has become permanent

3) A corporation is considered a citizen of what state?
A. The state where the majority of the employees live
B. It is not a citizen because it is a business
C. The state where it filed its Articles of Incorporation
D. The state where the president of the corporation lives

4) The Federal False Claims Act is also known as
A. the Sarbanes-Oxley Act
B. the Whistleblower Statute
C. the Statute of Frauds
D. the Statute of Limitations

5) Utilitarianism is a moral theory, which states
A. ethics requires a decision-maker to take actions which result in the greatest good to society
B. ethics requires following the Golden Rule (do unto others as you would have them do unto you)
C. ethics requires actions which use the most efficient tools
D. ethics requires acting according to the Bible or some outside source

6) Which of the following statements is true?
A. If something is legal, it is always ethical
B. Practices that are legal in the United States are legal everywhere in the world
C. Practices that are ethical in the United States are considered ethical everywhere else in the world
D. A course of action can be legal but not ethical

7) If a defendant files a motion for summary judgment in a civil case, what is the defendant saying?
A. That the plaintiff s claims are false
B. That the court has no jurisdiction to decide the case
C. That the case is ready to go to the jury
D. That even if what the plaintiff says is true, there is no basis for judgment against the defendant

8) A defendant fails to answer a civil lawsuit, what is likely to happen
A. A court will contact the defendant and ask him to answer the lawsuit
B. The court will grant a default judgment against the defendant
C. The case will be appealed before the court makes a ruling
D. The court will order that the defendant go to jail until he or she agrees to answer

9) The legal authority of a court to make orders that are binding upon the parties is called
A. in rem jurisdiction
B. personal jurisdiction
C. quasi in rem jurisdiction
D. enumerated jurisdiction

10) Harry Hoosier, an Indiana resident, drives his family to Florida for spring vacation. When he is at a red light, Freddie Floridian, a Florida resident, is unable to stop in time and his vehicle impacts Harry s car from the rear. No one is hurt and Harry s vehicle suffers approximately $10,000 in damages. Which is correct?
A. Harry can sue Freddie in federal court in Florida but not in Indiana
B. Harry can sue Freddie in state court in Florida or Indiana
C. Harry can sue Freddie in state court but not federal court in Florida but not in Indiana
D. Harry can sue Freddie in state court but not federal court in Florida or Indiana

11) Monica owed Bob $500 for a business investment, which was more than a year overdue. Bob got drunk at a party and told everyone that Monica had owed him $500 for over a year. Can Monica recover from Bob for defamation?
A. Yes, because Bob abused his conditional privilege.
B. No, because Bob was telling the truth.
C. Yes, because Bob communicated the statement to third persons.
D. No, because Bob had been drinking.

12) What is the definition of a tort?
A. Any violation of an ethical duty
B. Any crime or misdemeanor
C. Any action done in violation of a prior agreement, which allows the victim to recover damages
D. Any civil wrong that allows the injured person to recover damages

13) Pete and Vicky make the following agreement: Pete promises he will go into a store, buy something for $5, and pay for it with a $100 bill on which he has written Happy Birthday Vicky! Vicky promises that after Pete collects his change and leaves the store, she will go into the same store, buy something that costs $5, and pay with a $10 bill. When the clerk attempts to give her change for $10, Vicky will claim that the $100 bill that is in the cash register was money she just received for her birthday, and will demand change from a $100 bill. Then Pete and Vicky will split the extra money they think Vicky will receive in change. Is this a valid contract?

A. This is a valid contract. There was a promise in exchange for a promise, and both parties got what they wanted.
B. This is a void contract, because the parties agreed to commit fraud.
C. This is a voidable contract because Vicky can change her mind.
D. This is not an enforceable contract because the agreement is not in writing.

14) An easement can be defined as
A. a limited right to use another person s land for a specified purpose
B. a relaxation of the borderlines between two parcels of land
C. a life estate in the property of another
D. an option to purchase the land of another

15) Huey, Dewey, and Louie own a building as tenants in common. Huey lives in the building. Without consulting the other two owners, Dewey deeds his interest in the building to Joe. What will be the outcome of this situation?
A. Huey, Louie, and now Joe will own the property as tenants in common.
B. Huey and Louie will still own the property as tenants in common, but Joe will have a reversionary interest.
C. The transfer of the interest to Joe will be ineffective because the other two did not consent.
D. Joe will make Huey pay rent.

16) Which of the following best describes the benefits of a limited liability company (LLC)?
A. LLC managers are not personally liable for debts, obligations, and liabilities of the LLC.
B. LLCs have limited duration.
C. Documents do not have to be filed with the state to create an LLC.
D. LLCs are automatically taxed like corporations.

17) Which of the following is true when a general partnership is converted to an LLC?
A. The property must be sold to a third party who then immediately sells it to the LLC.
B. The conversion can be made retroactive for up to 2 years.
C. The profit and loss sharing terms must remain the same as they were in the partnership.
D. The general partners will retain unlimited personal liability for obligations incurred while the business was a partnership.

18) In the Northeast Ethanol, LLC case, the court pierced the defendant’s corporate veil after determining that
A. the plaintiffs could not find financing to build the ethanol plant
B. the defendant’s shareholder used the corporation to perpetrate fraud
C. the ethanol plant was an unwise investment, against the best interest of the parties
D. the plaintiff’s corporate directors were engaging in ultra vires activities

19) Which comment best describes the alter-ego doctrine in corporate law?
A. A corporation automatically becomes the alter ego of its shareholders
B. The president is the sole decision maker of a corporation
C. The board of directors is the alter ego of a corporation
D. Protection from personal shareholder liability can be forfeited if corporate formalities are not observed

20) If a corporation is properly incorporated in one state and wants authority to do business in second state, the corporation typically must
A. re-incorporate in the second state
B. do nothing because being incorporated in one state automatically entitles the corporation to do business in all states
C. register with the Interstate Commerce Commission as an alien corporation
D. obtain a certificate of authority from the second state

21) The DEF Corporation is incorporated in Texas. It wishes to do business in Oklahoma. Before DEF can legally do businesses in Oklahoma, which of the following must it do?
A. Nothing; DEF automatically has constitutional rights to do business in Oklahoma.
B. DEF must incorporate in Oklahoma.
C. DEF must qualify (register) to do business in Oklahoma.
D. DEF must domicile itself in Oklahoma.

22) What types of business can be converted to an LLC?
A. General partnerships only
B. General partnerships and limited partnerships only
C. Corporations and limited partnerships only
D. Corporations, general partnerships, and limited partnerships

23) Which of the following best describes the status of the employment at-will doctrine in the United States today?
A. It applies in most states to most employment relationships, but there are many exceptions that limit its application.
B. It applies more today than in the last century, and the quantity of corporate layoffs is evidence of this.
C. It today applies only to the employer, although in the past it applied to both the employee and employer.
D. It still applies today, but only to employees who are expressly told that they are an at-will employee when they are hired.

24) Which of the following rejected applicants may have a valid claim for discriminatory hiring practices?
A. A public health service did not hire a registered nurse because his shaking hands prevented him from administering injections.
B. A Catholic school did not hire a teacher because he was not Catholic.
C. A trucking company did not hire a truck driver because she was pregnant.
D. A university did not hire a 22-year-old woman to be a director of faculty because she was too young.

25) Which of the following people is protected from employment discrimination on the basis of age?
A. A 90-year-old person who wants a job as an airline pilot
B. A 50-year-old person who wants a job as an accountant
C. A 30-year-old person who wants a job as a waitress
D. A 10-year-old person who wants a job as a bartender

26) Marie works as a receptionist for a plumbing company. She works from 9 a.m. to 6 p.m. Monday through Friday. She earns $12 per hour, and is told how to do her job and what she should be working on at any particular time. Her boss does not withhold any taxes from her paycheck. Which of the following is true?
A. Marie would be treated as an employee because she is paid for the work that she does.
B. Marie would be treated as an employee because of the control exercised by the plumbing company over her work.
C. Marie would be treated as an independent contractor because she is paid hourly.
D. Marie would be treated as an independent contractor because the employer doesn t take any taxes out of her check.

27) Company employee handbooks have been found in some cases to amount to a(n) ______________ exception to the employment at will doctrine.
A. apparent
B. tort
C. public policy
D. implied contract

28) Which of the following is a correct statement of the requirements for a Bona Fide Occupational Qualification (BFOQ)?
A. The occupational qualification is job-related and cost-effective.
B. The occupational qualification is job-related and nondiscriminatory.
C. The occupational qualification is job-related and is a business necessity.
D. The occupational qualification is rationally based and evenly applied.

29) What federal legal protection is there with respect to trade secrets?
A. Trade secrets are protected under the federal patent laws.
B. Trade secrets are protected under the federal copyright laws.
C. Trade secrets are protected under the Trade Secret Protection Act of 1952.
D. Trade secrets are protected under the Economic Espionage Act of 1996.

30) Which of the following is true about misappropriation of trade secrets?
A. Although it is not necessary that the trade secret be patented, the secret must be such that it could be patented.
B. Trade secrets are always protected regardless of the actions of the trade secret owner.
C. The plaintiff can recover damages from theft of a trade secret only if the defendant acquired the trade secret through unlawful means.
D. Injunctions are generally not available to protect trade secrets.

bus 475 final exam 496349

“Generally accepted” in the phrase generally accepted accounting principles means that the principles

A. have been approved for use by the managements of business firms

B. have been approved by the Internal Revenue Service

C. have substantial authoritative support

D. are proven theories of accounting

Hess, Inc. sells a single product with a contribution margin of $12 per unit and fixed costs of $74,400 and sales for the current year of $100,000. How much is Hess s break even point?

A. 2,133 units

B. 4,600 units

C. 6,200 units

D. $25,600

As Plant Controller, you are trying to determine which costs over which you have the most control on a day to day basis. Your goal is to achieve better profitability. The Plant Operations Manager suggests that overhead is the easiest area to directly reduce costs. Which of the following items would be classified as manufacturing overhead?

A. The western division s vice president s salary

B. Factory janitor

C. Cost of landscaping the corporate office

D. General corporate liability insurance

The cost of an asset and its fair market value are __________.

A. the same on the date of acquisition

B. never the same

C. the same when the asset is sold

D. irrelevant when the asset is used by the business in its operations

One of Astro Company’s activity cost pools is machine setups, with estimated overhead of $150,000. Astro produces sparklers (400 setups) and lighters (600 setups). How much of the machine setup cost pool should be assigned to sparklers?

A. $90,000

B. $150,000

C. $60,000

D. $75,000

To move the allocation of resources closer to the social optimum, policymakers should typically try to induce firms in an oligopoly to __________.

A. cooperate rather than compete with each other

B. collude with each other

C. form various degrees of cartels

D. compete rather than cooperate with each other

The term used to refer to all kinds of differences including religious affiliation, age, disability status, economic class and lifestyle in addition to gender, race, ethnicity and nationality is:

A. Managerial ethics

B. Recruiting

C. Employment

D. Diversity

E. Selection

Sam’s Used Cars uses the specific identification method of costing inventory. During March, Sam purchased three cars for $6,000, $7,500, and $9,750, respectively. During March, two cars are sold for $9,000 each. Sam determines that at March 31, the $9,750 car is still on hand. What is Sam s gross profit for March?

A. $4,500

B. $8,250

C. $5,250

D. $750

Which one of the following items is not generally used in preparing a statement of cash flows?

A. Additional information

B. Comparative balance sheets

C. Current income statement

D. Adjusted trial balance

Which list below best describes the major services performed by public accountants?

A. Cost accounting, production scheduling, recruiting

B. Auditing, taxation, management consulting

C. Employee training, auditing, bookkeeping

D. Bookkeeping, mergers, budgets

In the market for foreign-currency exchange in the open economy macroeconomic model, the amount of net capital outflow represents the quantity of dollars __________.

A. supplied for the purpose of buying assets abroad

B. supplied for the purpose of selling assets domestically

C. demanded for the purpose of buying U.S. net exports of goods and services

D. demanded for the purpose of importing foreign goods and services

The primary purpose of the statement of cash flows is to __________.

A. facilitate banking relationships

B. provide information about the investing and financing activities during a period

C. prove that revenues exceed expenses if there is a net income

D. provide information about the cash receipts and cash payments during a period

bus 630 496351

Part I (Three to four double-spaced pages)

Present the following:

  • Definition of managerial accounting
  • Role of managerial accounting and the management accountant in a business or organization
  • Ethical issues/concerns for the management accountant
  • General description of at least three managerial accounting techniques available and their application within a business or organization

Part II (Four to six double-spaced pages)

Select at least three of the five topics identified below:

  • Cost Management Techniques
  • Costing Methods
  • Capital Investment Decision Techniques
  • Budgeting
  • Quality Control

For each topic selected present real world examples of the application of managerial accounting techniques within a business or organization. Examples may be gathered from your own professional experiences or from case studies obtained from credible sources (excluding textbook examples explored in previous weeks). Presentation of each example should include how a managerial accounting technique was applied in the business or organization s decision-making model. Be sure to support your example with calculations when applicable.

bus 630 496352

Part I (Three to four double-spaced pages)

Present the following:

  • Definition of managerial accounting
  • Role of managerial accounting and the management accountant in a business or organization
  • Ethical issues/concerns for the management accountant
  • General description of at least three managerial accounting techniques available and their application within a business or organization

Part II (Four to six double-spaced pages)

Select at least three of the five topics identified below:

  • Cost Management Techniques
  • Costing Methods
  • Capital Investment Decision Techniques
  • Budgeting
  • Quality Control

For each topic selected present real world examples of the application of managerial accounting techniques within a business or organization. Examples may be gathered from your own professional experiences or from case studies obtained from credible sources (excluding textbook examples explored in previous weeks). Presentation of each example should include how a managerial accounting technique was applied in the business or organization s decision-making model. Be sure to support your example with calculations when applicable.

Writing the Final Paper

The Final Paper:

1. Must be eight to ten double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:

a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must use at least five scholarly sources.
7. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
8. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

bus 630 entire course a work 496353

BUS 630 week 1:theory of Constraints,

Kranbrack Corporation

BUS 630Week 2

:Downsizing and fixed cost,

Direct Labor: variable or fixed

BUS 630Week 3:

Fixed labor

BUS 630Week 4:

Behavioral aspects of budgeting

BUS 630Week 5:

Variance analysis


BUS 630 Week 6:

Make or buy

and all individual papers included

bus 630 managerial accounting complete course 2013 syllabus ashford university bus63 496354

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 1 DQ 1 Ethics in Cost Control

Ethics in Cost Control. (Exercise 1-9) Zoya Arbiser, regional manager of Gold Medal Sports Shops, is reviewing the results of 15 stores in her region. Store managers are moved annually. Each store manager’s income is very dependent on the direct contribution margin of that store. For the past year, Store 9 has been managed by a person who has operated several other profitable stores in recent years and is about to be promoted to a larger store. Zoya notices several items that bother her.

Store 9 has almost no personnel training expenses relative to other stores.

Store 9 has stopped participating in numerous community events that gave the store significant visibility but did incur substantial expenses.

Store 6, where this store manager worked the prior year, has had a severe drop in profits due to higher operating expenses.

The advertising budget was spent almost entirely in the first four months of the year, with almost nothing spent in the last several months.

Discuss a possible negative managerial scenario that the regional manager may be sensing. Might the manager of Store 9 be an exceptional manager? What are the ethical implications of the scenario? What is the regional manager s ethical responsibility in this scenario? Explain and support your position with evidence from the text. Your initial post should be 200 to 250 words.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 1 DQ 2 Fixed and Variable Costs

Fixed and Variable Costs. (Chapter 1 Discussion Question 9(a)) Controller, Judy Koch, in a recent speech said, “I rarely see a real variable cost or a truly fixed cost.” What did she mean? Include in your response an explanation of the difference in behavior of variable and fixed cost, including an example to illustrate your explanation. Your initial post should be 200 to 250 words.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 2 DQ 1 Product Costs

Product Costs. In Chapter 3, you were introduced to three types of costs associated with a manufactured product direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead. Explain how these costs are associated with the manufactured product. Why are some of these costs allocated to the product through costing methods such as job order costing or process costing?

As part of your response, be sure to provide a specific example of a company s manufacturing costs. Your initial post should be 200-250 words and your example should be properly cited according to APA as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 2 DQ 2 Job Order Costing vs. Proess Costing

Job Order Costing vs. Process Costing. Explain the similarities and differences between job order costing and process costing. In your explanation, provide examples of when job order costing and process costing would be most appropriate. Your initial post should be 200 to 250 words.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 2 Assignment Auerbach Enterprises

Auerbach Enterprises. Complete Case 3A (Auerbach Enterprises) in Chapter 3.

Auerbach Enterprises manufactures air conditioners for automobiles and trucks manufactured throughout

North America. The company designs its products with flexibility to accommodate many makes and models of

automobiles and trucks. The company s two main products are MaxiFlow and Alaska. MaxiFlow uses a few

complex fabricated parts, but these have been found easy to assemble and test. On the other hand, Alaska uses

many standard parts but has a complex assembly and testing process. MaxiFlow requires direct materials costs

which total $135 per unit, while Alaska s direct materials requirements total $110 per unit. Direct labor costs per

unit are $75 for MaxiFlow and $95 for Alaska.

Auerbach Enterprises uses machine hours as the cost driver to assign overhead costs to the air conditioners.

The company has used a company-wide predetermined overhead rate in past years, but the new controller,

Bennie Leon, is considering the use of departmental overhead rates beginning with the next year.

The following planning information is available for the next year for each the four manufacturing departments

within the company:

Overhead Machine

Costs Hours

Radiator parts fabrication………….. $ 80,000 10,000

Radiator assembly, weld, and test…. 100,000 20,000

Compressor parts fabrication………. 120,000 5,000

Compressor assembly and test…….. 180,000 45,000

Total $480,000 80,000

Normally, the air conditioners are produced in batch sizes of 20 at a time. A production batch of 20 units requires

the following number of hours in each department:

MaxiFlow Alaska

Radiator parts fabrication……….. 28 16

Radiator assembly, weld, and test……. 30 74

Compressor parts fabrication……… 32 8

Compressor assembly and test……… 26 66

Total 116 164

Required:

1. Compute the departmental overhead rates using machine hours as the cost driver.

2. Compute a company-wide overhead rate using machine hours as the cost driver.

3. Compute the overhead costs per batch of MaxiFlow and Alaska assuming:

(a) The company-wide rate.

(b) The departmental rates.

4. Compute the total costs per unit of MaxiFlow and Alaska assuming:

(a) The company-wide rate.

(b) The departmental rates.

5. Is one product affected more than the other by use of departmental rates rather than a company-wide rate?

Why or why not?

In this case, you are provided the overhead cost data for the Auerbach Enterprises. Management needs advice in determining how to allocate these costs utilizing a job order costing system either department-wide or company-wide. Address Questions 1through 5 located at the end of the case. Based on the case questions, you are required to provide a three to five double-spaced written report addressing management s concerns and providing recommendations. The written report should be properly formatted according to APA guidelines and demonstrate research and critical thinking skills. Conclusions and recommendations should be supported by at least 2 scholarly sources from the Ashford Library or other external sources, excluding the textbook. For Questions 1 through 4, you will need to complete several calculations. Be sure to label and clearly identify your work to demonstrate your understanding of the concept even if you arrive at the incorrect answer. The calculations should be included as part of your analysis and written recommendations required for submission.

For Question 5, fully address management s concerns as part of your written analysis and recommendation using the new or the previous calculations to support your recommendation/explanation. The written analysis should be supported by at least 2 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

Week 2 Written Assignment should:

Demonstrate graduate level work including appropriate research and critical thinking skills.

Be presented as a written analysis (not a question/answer format).

Incorporate case questions into the overall analysis.

Follow APA formatting guidelines including title page, reference page and in-text citations.

Consists of three to five double-spaced pages of content.

Provide at least 2 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 3 DQ 1 Allocating Joint Costs

Allocating Joint Costs. Describe the three methods used to allocate joint costs. What are the advantages/disadvantages of each allocation method? Which method would you recommend? Why? Support your position with evidence from the text or external sources. Your initial post should be 200-250 words

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 3 DQ 2 Variable Absorption Costing

Variable/Absorption Costing. As you read in Chapter 8, there are arguments (for and against) variable costing and absorption costing. Select one of these costing methods and explore the various arguments. Determine whether you are for or against this selected method. Provide evidence from the text to support your position. Your initial post should be 200-250 words.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 3 Assignment Glaser Health Products

Glaser Health Products. Complete Case 5A (Glaser Health Products) in Chapter 5. Glaser Health Products of Ranier Falls, Georgia, is organized functionally into three divisions: Operations, Sales, and Administrative. Purchasing, receiving, materials and production control, manufacturing, factory personnel, inventory stores, and shipping activities are under the control of the vice-president for operations, George Gottlieb. Advertising, market research, and sales are the responsibility of the vice-president for sales, Jake Bogan. Accounting, budgeting, the firm’s computer center, and general office management are delegated to the corporate controller (Administrative), Charlie Kaplan. The following cost categories are found in the company as a whole:

(a) Depreciation on factory equipment.

(b) Depreciation on office equipment.

(c) Depreciation on factory building.

(d) Advertising manager’s salary.

(e) Assembly foreman’s salary.

(f) Salespersons’ salaries.

(g) Salespersons’ travel expenses.

(h) Supplies for the Machining Department.

(i) Advertising supplies used.

(j) Electricity for the Assembly Department.

(k) Lost materials (scrap) in a Machining Department.

(l) Direct labor in the Assembly Department.

(m) Supplies for the sales office.

(n) Sales commissions.

(o) Packing supplies.

(p) Cost of hiring new employees.

(q) Payroll fringe benefits for workers in the Shipping Department.

(r) Supplies for Production Scheduling.

(s) Cost of repairing parts improperly manufactured in the Machining Department.

(t) Paint for the Assembly Department.

(u) Heat, light, and power for the factory.

(v) Leasing of computer equipment for the Accounting Department.

Required:

1. Identify each of the costs with the appropriate division: Operations, Sales, Administrative.

2. Identify each of the costs with one of the following:

(a) Unit-level activities. (c) Product-level activities.

(b) Batch-level activities. (d) Facility-level activities.

Organize these classifications by division: Operations, Sales, Administrative.

3. Specify an appropriate cost driver for tracing costs associated with the various levels of activities to

the next cost objective or products, whichever is appropriate.

4. Glaser Health Products is interested in using activity-based costing to identify as many costs as possible

with the products. These costs will be used for planning and control decisions rather than for inventory

valuation. The controller decided that all operation costs will be related to products but only those sales and

administrative costs that are classified as unit-level, batch-level, or product-level costs should be related to

products. Using preliminary stage cost drivers, explain how individual items of costs will be traced to activity

groupings.

5. Using primary stage cost drivers, show how the costs should be related to products.

6. Explain why it is necessary to use preliminary stage and primary stage cost drivers.

In this case, management needs assistance in evaluating and classifying costs identified within Glaser Health Products in order to implement an activity-based costing system. Please address Questions 1 through 6 at the end of the case. Based on the case questions, you are required to provide a two to four double-spaced written report providing management with the necessary guidance in implementing an activity-based costing system. The written report should be properly formatted according to APA guidelines and demonstrate research and critical thinking skills. Explanations and recommendations should be supported by at least 3 scholarly sources from the Ashford Library or other external sources, excluding the textbook.

For Questions 1 through 3, create a chart to classify and identify a cost driver for each of the costs provided in the text. The chart should be included as an appendix to the written report. Explanations of the classifications and identifications within the chart should be included within the written report, supported by references to the appendix.

Questions 4 through 6 should be addressed in fully developed explanations/instructions as part of your written report. The written analysis should be supported by at least 3 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

Week 3 Written Assignment should:

Demonstrate graduate level work including appropriate research and critical thinking skills.

Be presented as a written analysis (not a question/answer format).

Incorporate case questions into the overall analysis.

Follow APA formatting guidelines including title page, reference page and in-text citations.

Consists of two to four double-spaced pages of content.

Provide at least 3 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 4 DQ 1 Budgeting Comments

Budgeting Comments. (Exercise 6-13 Revised) Select one of the following quotes from the text to discuss. Clearly state whether you either agree or disagree with the comment and support your opinion with at least one scholarly resource. Include in your response an explanation of the major purposes of budgeting. Your initial post should be 200-250 words.

“One major criticism of budgeting is that it is used as a cost reduction tool rather than a cost control tool. The objective of the budget is to control costs at an efficient level of operation.”

“There are generally three benefits from allowing employees to participate in developing the budget: (1) Employees tend to accept the budget as their own plan of action. (2) Participation tends to increase morale among employees and toward management. (3) Employee cohesiveness is increased, and productivity will also increase if dictated by the group norm.”

“Even though budgets are quantitative tools, considerable emotion is connected to budgeting. The individual in control often sees the budget as a means of getting things done. People being controlled often have feelings of anxiety because their success and promotion are tied directly to the budget.”

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 4 DQ 2 Standard Cost System

Standard Cost System. Using Chapter 7 of your text as a reference, define a standard cost and explain what constitutes the components of a standard cost. Describe the advantages and disadvantages of a standard cost system and explain under what circumstances a standard cost system is most effective. Your initial post should be 200-250 words.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 4 Assignment Chester & Wayne

Chester & Wayne. Complete Case 6B (Chester &Wayne) in Chapter 6 of your text.

In this case, you have been provided financial information about the company in order to create a cash budget. Management is seeking advice or clarification on three main assumptions the company has been operating. Address Questions 1 and 2 at the end of the case. Based on the case questions, you are required to provide a two to four double-spaced written report providing the necessary advice and explanations to management. The written report should be properly formatted according to APA guidelines and demonstrate research and critical thinking skills. Conclusions and recommendations should be supported by at least 2 scholarly sources from the Ashford Library or other external sources, excluding the textbook.

Address Question 1 by using a spreadsheet to prepare the case budget for the fourth quarter. The cash budget should be included as an appendix to the written report and should be referenced in the written report.

Address Question 2 in a fully developed explanation of two to four double spaced pages to present the findings and explain or validate the assumptions stated in item (a) through (c). In addressing Question 2, be sure to use the cash budget prepared in Question 1 as support for your explanation. The written analysis should be supported by at least 2 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

Week 4 Written Assignment should:

Demonstrate graduate level work including appropriate research and critical thinking skills.

Be presented as a written analysis (not a question/answer format).

Incorporate case questions into the overall analysis.

Follow APA formatting guidelines including title page, reference page and in-text citations.

Consists of two to four double-spaced pages of content.

Provide at least 2 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 5 DQ 1 Capital Investment Evaluation

Capital Investment Evaluation. Select one of the capital investment evaluation methods described in Chapter 10 of your text. Fully explain the capital evaluation method s strengths and weaknesses. Take a position and defend the use of your selected method. Be sure to use at least two scholarly sources to support your position. Your initial post should be 200-250 words.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 5 DQ 2 Ranking Investment Alternatives

Ranking Investment Alternatives. (Problem 10-41) Grosvenor Industries has designated $1.2 million for capital investment expenditures during the upcoming year. Its cost of capital is 14 percent. Any unused funds will earn the cost of capital rate. The following investment opportunities along with their required investment and estimated net present values have been identified:

Project Net Investment NPV Project Net Investment NPV

A $200,000 $22,000 F $250,000 $30,000

B 275,000 21,000 G 100,000 7,000

C 150,000 6,000 H 200,000 18,000

D 190,000 (19,000) I 210,000 4,000

E 500,000 40,000 J 250,000 35,000

In your response, complete the following:

1. Rank the projects using the profitability index. Considering the limit on funds available, which projects should be accepted?

2. Using the NPV, which projects should be accepted, considering the limit on funds available?

3. If the available investment funds are reduced to only $1,000,000:

(a) Does the list of accepted projects change from Part 2?

(b) What is the opportunity cost of the eliminated $200,000?

Guided Response:

Review several of your classmates postings. Respond to at least two of your classmates by commenting on common responses in the ranking of the projects and by posing a question to challenge their rankings.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 5 Middlehurst House

Middlehurst House. Complete Case 9A (Middlehurst House) in Chapter 9.

In this case, management is presented with several decision options. For this assignment, you are required to provide a three to five double-spaced written memo evaluating options and providing recommendations. The written memo should be properly formatted according to APA guidelines and demonstrate research and critical thinking skills. Evaluations and recommendations should be supported by at least 4 scholarly sources from the Ashford Library or other external sources, excluding the textbook. In Question 1, evaluate each decision separately in full detail including calculations, as necessary. The evaluation should be included as part of the memo discussion, not a separate component. Evaluations can be included as appendices, exhibits or figures; however must be properly referenced within the written content.

In Question 2, prepare a comprehensive business memo addressing each decision and your recommendation. The memo should be properly formatted as a business memo and formatted according to APA guidelines.

An example of a properly formatted business memo can be found at this link http://owl.english.purdue.edu/owl/resource/590/04/ .

Week 5 Written Assignment should:

Demonstrate graduate level work including appropriate research and critical thinking skills.

Be presented as a business memo (not a question/answer format).

Incorporate case questions into the overall analysis.

Follow APA formatting guidelines including title page, reference page and in-text citations.

Consists of three to five double-spaced pages of content.

Provide at least 4 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 6 DQ 1 Evaluating Performance

Evaluating Performance. When comparing various divisions within a company, describe what problems can arise from evaluating divisions that have different accounting methods, as described in Chapter 11 of your text. Cite three examples of accounting methods that could cause divisions’ profits to differ. Your initial post should be 200-250 words.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 6 DQ 2 Nonvalue- Added Costs in a Doctor’s Office

Non value-Added Costs in a Doctor s Office. (Exercise 12-12) Dr. Steve Rosenthal has his own medical practice. He specializes in the treatment of diabetics. His staff consists of a receptionist, two nurses, a lab technician, and a dietitian. As patients enter the outer office, they check in with the receptionist. The patient then waits until called by a nurse. When called, the patient moves from the waiting room to the inner offices. The patient must weigh in and is then assigned a room. The nurse assigning the patient to a room gathers all the personal data for updating the medical records, such as insulin dosage, medication, illnesses since last visit, etc. The nurse also takes an initial blood sample for blood sugar testing and performs a blood pressure test. The patient then waits until the doctor comes in. After the doctor’s conference, the nurse returns to take more blood samples, depending on what is ordered by the doctor. The patient then waits until the dietitian comes to review eating habits and talk about how to improve meal planning and weight control. The patient returns to the receptionist to pay for the office visit and to schedule the next visit.

In your response include the following:

1. Identify the activities in the doctor’s office that fall into process time, inspection time, move time, wait time, and storage time.

2. List the activities in the doctor’s office that are candidates for non value-added activities. Explain why you classify them as non value-added activities.

Guided Response:

Review several of your classmates postings and identify some common non value-added activities. Respond to at least two of your classmates and provide recommendations that extend their thinking and inspire reconsideration of the activities listed in the posting.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 6 Final Paper

Focus of the Final Paper

Due to varying business characteristics, the managerial accounting techniques applied in each business may differ. For example, a business in the start-up phase may rely heavily upon budgeting and capital investment techniques; whereas, a business in the mature/maintaining phase may rely heavily upon cost management and quality control. Ultimately, the techniques used by management should assist the business in achieving its short-term and long-term goals through effective decision-making.

For your Final Paper, you will analyze the role of managerial accounting in two parts. Part I will provide a general overview of managerial accounting. Part II will provide examples of how managerial accounting theories and principles are applied in the business world. You may find it helpful to reflect upon your own professional experiences for examples.

Part I (Three to four double-spaced pages)

Present the following:

Definition of managerial accounting

Role of managerial accounting and the management accountant in a business or organization

Ethical issues/concerns for the management accountant

General description of at least three managerial accounting techniques available and their application within a business or organization

Part II (Four to six double-spaced pages)

Select at least three of the five topics identified below:

Cost Management Techniques

Costing Methods

Capital Investment Decision Techniques

Budgeting

Quality Control

For each topic selected present real world examples of the application of managerial accounting techniques within a business or organization. Examples may be gathered from your own professional experiences or from case studies obtained from credible sources (excluding textbook examples explored in previous weeks). Presentation of each example should include how a managerial accounting technique was applied in the business or organization s decision-making model. Be sure to support your example with calculations when applicable.

bus 630 managerial accounting week 1 discussions 496355

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 1 DQ 1 Ethics in Cost Control

Ethics in Cost Control. (Exercise 1-9) Zoya Arbiser, regional manager of Gold Medal Sports Shops, is reviewing the results of 15 stores in her region. Store managers are moved annually. Each store manager’s income is very dependent on the direct contribution margin of that store. For the past year, Store 9 has been managed by a person who has operated several other profitable stores in recent years and is about to be promoted to a larger store. Zoya notices several items that bother her.

Store 9 has almost no personnel training expenses relative to other stores.

Store 9 has stopped participating in numerous community events that gave the store significant visibility but did incur substantial expenses.

Store 6, where this store manager worked the prior year, has had a severe drop in profits due to higher operating expenses.

The advertising budget was spent almost entirely in the first four months of the year, with almost nothing spent in the last several months.

Discuss a possible negative managerial scenario that the regional manager may be sensing. Might the manager of Store 9 be an exceptional manager? What are the ethical implications of the scenario? What is the regional manager s ethical responsibility in this scenario? Explain and support your position with evidence from the text. Your initial post should be 200 to 250 words.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 1 DQ 2 Fixed and Variable Costs

Fixed and Variable Costs. (Chapter 1 Discussion Question 9(a)) Controller, Judy Koch, in a recent speech said, “I rarely see a real variable cost or a truly fixed cost.” What did she mean? Include in your response an explanation of the difference in behavior of variable and fixed cost, including an example to illustrate your explanation. Your initial post should be 200 to 250 words.

bus 630 managerial accounting week 2 assignment auerbach enterprises 496356

ASHFORD BUS630 Week 2 Assignment Auerbach Enterprises

Auerbach Enterprises. Complete Case 3A (Auerbach Enterprises) in Chapter 3.

Auerbach Enterprises manufactures air conditioners for automobiles and trucks manufactured throughout

North America. The company designs its products with flexibility to accommodate many makes and models of

automobiles and trucks. The company s two main products are MaxiFlow and Alaska. MaxiFlow uses a few

complex fabricated parts, but these have been found easy to assemble and test. On the other hand, Alaska uses

many standard parts but has a complex assembly and testing process. MaxiFlow requires direct materials costs

which total $135 per unit, while Alaska s direct materials requirements total $110 per unit. Direct labor costs per

unit are $75 for MaxiFlow and $95 for Alaska.

Auerbach Enterprises uses machine hours as the cost driver to assign overhead costs to the air conditioners.

The company has used a company-wide predetermined overhead rate in past years, but the new controller,

Bennie Leon, is considering the use of departmental overhead rates beginning with the next year.

The following planning information is available for the next year for each the four manufacturing departments

within the company:

Overhead Machine

Costs Hours

Radiator parts fabrication………….. $ 80,000 10,000

Radiator assembly, weld, and test…. 100,000 20,000

Compressor parts fabrication………. 120,000 5,000

Compressor assembly and test…….. 180,000 45,000

Total $480,000 80,000

Normally, the air conditioners are produced in batch sizes of 20 at a time. A production batch of 20 units requires

the following number of hours in each department:

MaxiFlow Alaska

Radiator parts fabrication……….. 28 16

Radiator assembly, weld, and test……. 30 74

Compressor parts fabrication……… 32 8

Compressor assembly and test……… 26 66

Total 116 164

Required:

1. Compute the departmental overhead rates using machine hours as the cost driver.

2. Compute a company-wide overhead rate using machine hours as the cost driver.

3. Compute the overhead costs per batch of MaxiFlow and Alaska assuming:

(a) The company-wide rate.

(b) The departmental rates.

4. Compute the total costs per unit of MaxiFlow and Alaska assuming:

(a) The company-wide rate.

(b) The departmental rates.

5. Is one product affected more than the other by use of departmental rates rather than a company-wide rate?

Why or why not?

In this case, you are provided the overhead cost data for the Auerbach Enterprises. Management needs advice in determining how to allocate these costs utilizing a job order costing system either department-wide or company-wide. Address Questions 1through 5 located at the end of the case. Based on the case questions, you are required to provide a three to five double-spaced written report addressing management s concerns and providing recommendations. The written report should be properly formatted according to APA guidelines and demonstrate research and critical thinking skills. Conclusions and recommendations should be supported by at least 2 scholarly sources from the Ashford Library or other external sources, excluding the textbook. For Questions 1 through 4, you will need to complete several calculations. Be sure to label and clearly identify your work to demonstrate your understanding of the concept even if you arrive at the incorrect answer. The calculations should be included as part of your analysis and written recommendations required for submission.

For Question 5, fully address management s concerns as part of your written analysis and recommendation using the new or the previous calculations to support your recommendation/explanation. The written analysis should be supported by at least 2 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

Week 2 Written Assignment should:

Demonstrate graduate level work including appropriate research and critical thinking skills.

Be presented as a written analysis (not a question/answer format).

Incorporate case questions into the overall analysis.

Follow APA formatting guidelines including title page, reference page and in-text citations.

Consists of three to five double-spaced pages of content.

Provide at least 2 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

bus 630 managerial accounting week 2 discussions 496357

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 2 DQ 1 Product Costs

Product Costs. In Chapter 3, you were introduced to three types of costs associated with a manufactured product direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead. Explain how these costs are associated with the manufactured product. Why are some of these costs allocated to the product through costing methods such as job order costing or process costing?

As part of your response, be sure to provide a specific example of a company s manufacturing costs. Your initial post should be 200-250 words and your example should be properly cited according to APA as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 2 DQ 2 Job Order Costing vs. Proess Costing

Job Order Costing vs. Process Costing. Explain the similarities and differences between job order costing and process costing. In your explanation, provide examples of when job order costing and process costing would be most appropriate. Your initial post should be 200 to 250 words.

bus 630 managerial accounting week 3 assignment glaser health products 496358

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 3 Assignment Glaser Health Products

Glaser Health Products. Complete Case 5A (Glaser Health Products) in Chapter 5. Glaser Health Products of Ranier Falls, Georgia, is organized functionally into three divisions: Operations, Sales, and Administrative. Purchasing, receiving, materials and production control, manufacturing, factory personnel, inventory stores, and shipping activities are under the control of the vice-president for operations, George Gottlieb. Advertising, market research, and sales are the responsibility of the vice-president for sales, Jake Bogan. Accounting, budgeting, the firm’s computer center, and general office management are delegated to the corporate controller (Administrative), Charlie Kaplan. The following cost categories are found in the company as a whole:

(a) Depreciation on factory equipment.

(b) Depreciation on office equipment.

(c) Depreciation on factory building.

(d) Advertising manager’s salary.

(e) Assembly foreman’s salary.

(f) Salespersons’ salaries.

(g) Salespersons’ travel expenses.

(h) Supplies for the Machining Department.

(i) Advertising supplies used.

(j) Electricity for the Assembly Department.

(k) Lost materials (scrap) in a Machining Department.

(l) Direct labor in the Assembly Department.

(m) Supplies for the sales office.

(n) Sales commissions.

(o) Packing supplies.

(p) Cost of hiring new employees.

(q) Payroll fringe benefits for workers in the Shipping Department.

(r) Supplies for Production Scheduling.

(s) Cost of repairing parts improperly manufactured in the Machining Department.

(t) Paint for the Assembly Department.

(u) Heat, light, and power for the factory.

(v) Leasing of computer equipment for the Accounting Department.

Required:

1. Identify each of the costs with the appropriate division: Operations, Sales, Administrative.

2. Identify each of the costs with one of the following:

(a) Unit-level activities. (c) Product-level activities.

(b) Batch-level activities. (d) Facility-level activities.

Organize these classifications by division: Operations, Sales, Administrative.

3. Specify an appropriate cost driver for tracing costs associated with the various levels of activities to

the next cost objective or products, whichever is appropriate.

4. Glaser Health Products is interested in using activity-based costing to identify as many costs as possible

with the products. These costs will be used for planning and control decisions rather than for inventory

valuation. The controller decided that all operation costs will be related to products but only those sales and

administrative costs that are classified as unit-level, batch-level, or product-level costs should be related to

products. Using preliminary stage cost drivers, explain how individual items of costs will be traced to activity

groupings.

5. Using primary stage cost drivers, show how the costs should be related to products.

6. Explain why it is necessary to use preliminary stage and primary stage cost drivers.

In this case, management needs assistance in evaluating and classifying costs identified within Glaser Health Products in order to implement an activity-based costing system. Please address Questions 1 through 6 at the end of the case. Based on the case questions, you are required to provide a two to four double-spaced written report providing management with the necessary guidance in implementing an activity-based costing system. The written report should be properly formatted according to APA guidelines and demonstrate research and critical thinking skills. Explanations and recommendations should be supported by at least 3 scholarly sources from the Ashford Library or other external sources, excluding the textbook.

For Questions 1 through 3, create a chart to classify and identify a cost driver for each of the costs provided in the text. The chart should be included as an appendix to the written report. Explanations of the classifications and identifications within the chart should be included within the written report, supported by references to the appendix.

Questions 4 through 6 should be addressed in fully developed explanations/instructions as part of your written report. The written analysis should be supported by at least 3 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

Week 3 Written Assignment should:

Demonstrate graduate level work including appropriate research and critical thinking skills.

Be presented as a written analysis (not a question/answer format).

Incorporate case questions into the overall analysis.

Follow APA formatting guidelines including title page, reference page and in-text citations.

Consists of two to four double-spaced pages of content.

Provide at least 3 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

bus 630 managerial accounting week 3 discussions 496359

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 3 DQ 1 Allocating Joint Costs

Allocating Joint Costs. Describe the three methods used to allocate joint costs. What are the advantages/disadvantages of each allocation method? Which method would you recommend? Why? Support your position with evidence from the text or external sources. Your initial post should be 200-250 words

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 3 DQ 2 Variable Absorption Costing

Variable/Absorption Costing. As you read in Chapter 8, there are arguments (for and against) variable costing and absorption costing. Select one of these costing methods and explore the various arguments. Determine whether you are for or against this selected method. Provide evidence from the text to support your position. Your initial post should be 200-250 words.

bus 630 managerial accounting week 4 assignment chester amp wayne 496360

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 4 Assignment Chester & Wayne

Chester & Wayne. Complete Case 6B (Chester &Wayne) in Chapter 6 of your text.

In this case, you have been provided financial information about the company in order to create a cash budget. Management is seeking advice or clarification on three main assumptions the company has been operating. Address Questions 1 and 2 at the end of the case. Based on the case questions, you are required to provide a two to four double-spaced written report providing the necessary advice and explanations to management. The written report should be properly formatted according to APA guidelines and demonstrate research and critical thinking skills. Conclusions and recommendations should be supported by at least 2 scholarly sources from the Ashford Library or other external sources, excluding the textbook.

Address Question 1 by using a spreadsheet to prepare the case budget for the fourth quarter. The cash budget should be included as an appendix to the written report and should be referenced in the written report.

Address Question 2 in a fully developed explanation of two to four double spaced pages to present the findings and explain or validate the assumptions stated in item (a) through (c). In addressing Question 2, be sure to use the cash budget prepared in Question 1 as support for your explanation. The written analysis should be supported by at least 2 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

Week 4 Written Assignment should:

Demonstrate graduate level work including appropriate research and critical thinking skills.

Be presented as a written analysis (not a question/answer format).

Incorporate case questions into the overall analysis.

Follow APA formatting guidelines including title page, reference page and in-text citations.

Consists of two to four double-spaced pages of content.

Provide at least 2 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

bus 630 managerial accounting week 4 discussions 496361

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 4 DQ 1 Budgeting Comments

Budgeting Comments. (Exercise 6-13 Revised) Select one of the following quotes from the text to discuss. Clearly state whether you either agree or disagree with the comment and support your opinion with at least one scholarly resource. Include in your response an explanation of the major purposes of budgeting. Your initial post should be 200-250 words.

“One major criticism of budgeting is that it is used as a cost reduction tool rather than a cost control tool. The objective of the budget is to control costs at an efficient level of operation.”

“There are generally three benefits from allowing employees to participate in developing the budget: (1) Employees tend to accept the budget as their own plan of action. (2) Participation tends to increase morale among employees and toward management. (3) Employee cohesiveness is increased, and productivity will also increase if dictated by the group norm.”

“Even though budgets are quantitative tools, considerable emotion is connected to budgeting. The individual in control often sees the budget as a means of getting things done. People being controlled often have feelings of anxiety because their success and promotion are tied directly to the budget.”

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 4 DQ 2 Standard Cost System

Standard Cost System. Using Chapter 7 of your text as a reference, define a standard cost and explain what constitutes the components of a standard cost. Describe the advantages and disadvantages of a standard cost system and explain under what circumstances a standard cost system is most effective. Your initial post should be 200-250 words.

bus 630 managerial accounting week 5 assignment middlehurst house 496362

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 5 Middlehurst House

Middlehurst House. Complete Case 9A (Middlehurst House) in Chapter 9.

In this case, management is presented with several decision options. For this assignment, you are required to provide a three to five double-spaced written memo evaluating options and providing recommendations. The written memo should be properly formatted according to APA guidelines and demonstrate research and critical thinking skills. Evaluations and recommendations should be supported by at least 4 scholarly sources from the Ashford Library or other external sources, excluding the textbook. In Question 1, evaluate each decision separately in full detail including calculations, as necessary. The evaluation should be included as part of the memo discussion, not a separate component. Evaluations can be included as appendices, exhibits or figures; however must be properly referenced within the written content.

In Question 2, prepare a comprehensive business memo addressing each decision and your recommendation. The memo should be properly formatted as a business memo and formatted according to APA guidelines.

An example of a properly formatted business memo can be found at this link http://owl.english.purdue.edu/owl/resource/590/04/ .

Week 5 Written Assignment should:

Demonstrate graduate level work including appropriate research and critical thinking skills.

Be presented as a business memo (not a question/answer format).

Incorporate case questions into the overall analysis.

Follow APA formatting guidelines including title page, reference page and in-text citations.

Consists of three to five double-spaced pages of content.

Provide at least 4 scholarly sources, excluding the textbook.

bus 630 managerial accounting week 5 discussions 496363

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 5 DQ 1 Capital Investment Evaluation

Capital Investment Evaluation. Select one of the capital investment evaluation methods described in Chapter 10 of your text. Fully explain the capital evaluation method s strengths and weaknesses. Take a position and defend the use of your selected method. Be sure to use at least two scholarly sources to support your position. Your initial post should be 200-250 words.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 5 DQ 2 Ranking Investment Alternatives

Ranking Investment Alternatives. (Problem 10-41) Grosvenor Industries has designated $1.2 million for capital investment expenditures during the upcoming year. Its cost of capital is 14 percent. Any unused funds will earn the cost of capital rate. The following investment opportunities along with their required investment and estimated net present values have been identified:

Project Net Investment NPV Project Net Investment NPV

A $200,000 $22,000 F $250,000 $30,000

B 275,000 21,000 G 100,000 7,000

C 150,000 6,000 H 200,000 18,000

D 190,000 (19,000) I 210,000 4,000

E 500,000 40,000 J 250,000 35,000

In your response, complete the following:

1. Rank the projects using the profitability index. Considering the limit on funds available, which projects should be accepted?

2. Using the NPV, which projects should be accepted, considering the limit on funds available?

3. If the available investment funds are reduced to only $1,000,000:

(a) Does the list of accepted projects change from Part 2?

(b) What is the opportunity cost of the eliminated $200,000?

Guided Response:

Review several of your classmates postings. Respond to at least two of your classmates by commenting on common responses in the ranking of the projects and by posing a question to challenge their rankings.

bus 630 managerial accounting week 6 discussions 496364

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 6 DQ 1 Evaluating Performance

Evaluating Performance. When comparing various divisions within a company, describe what problems can arise from evaluating divisions that have different accounting methods, as described in Chapter 11 of your text. Cite three examples of accounting methods that could cause divisions’ profits to differ. Your initial post should be 200-250 words.

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 6 DQ 2 Nonvalue- Added Costs in a Doctor’s Office

Non value-Added Costs in a Doctor s Office. (Exercise 12-12) Dr. Steve Rosenthal has his own medical practice. He specializes in the treatment of diabetics. His staff consists of a receptionist, two nurses, a lab technician, and a dietitian. As patients enter the outer office, they check in with the receptionist. The patient then waits until called by a nurse. When called, the patient moves from the waiting room to the inner offices. The patient must weigh in and is then assigned a room. The nurse assigning the patient to a room gathers all the personal data for updating the medical records, such as insulin dosage, medication, illnesses since last visit, etc. The nurse also takes an initial blood sample for blood sugar testing and performs a blood pressure test. The patient then waits until the doctor comes in. After the doctor’s conference, the nurse returns to take more blood samples, depending on what is ordered by the doctor. The patient then waits until the dietitian comes to review eating habits and talk about how to improve meal planning and weight control. The patient returns to the receptionist to pay for the office visit and to schedule the next visit.

In your response include the following:

1. Identify the activities in the doctor’s office that fall into process time, inspection time, move time, wait time, and storage time.

2. List the activities in the doctor’s office that are candidates for non value-added activities. Explain why you classify them as non value-added activities.

Guided Response:

Review several of your classmates postings and identify some common non value-added activities. Respond to at least two of your classmates and provide recommendations that extend their thinking and inspire reconsideration of the activities listed in the posting.

bus 630 managerial accounting week 6 final paper 496365

ASHFORD BUS 630 Week 6 Final Paper

Focus of the Final Paper

Due to varying business characteristics, the managerial accounting techniques applied in each business may differ. For example, a business in the start-up phase may rely heavily upon budgeting and capital investment techniques; whereas, a business in the mature/maintaining phase may rely heavily upon cost management and quality control. Ultimately, the techniques used by management should assist the business in achieving its short-term and long-term goals through effective decision-making.

For your Final Paper, you will analyze the role of managerial accounting in two parts. Part I will provide a general overview of managerial accounting. Part II will provide examples of how managerial accounting theories and principles are applied in the business world. You may find it helpful to reflect upon your own professional experiences for examples.

Part I (Three to four double-spaced pages)

Present the following:

Definition of managerial accounting

Role of managerial accounting and the management accountant in a business or organization

Ethical issues/concerns for the management accountant

General description of at least three managerial accounting techniques available and their application within a business or organization

Part II (Four to six double-spaced pages)

Select at least three of the five topics identified below:

Cost Management Techniques

Costing Methods

Capital Investment Decision Techniques

Budgeting

Quality Control

For each topic selected present real world examples of the application of managerial accounting techniques within a business or organization. Examples may be gathered from your own professional experiences or from case studies obtained from credible sources (excluding textbook examples explored in previous weeks). Presentation of each example should include how a managerial accounting technique was applied in the business or organization s decision-making model. Be sure to support your example with calculations when applicable.

brian invests 10 000 cash to begin an accounting service 496290

part A (30 points)

Record the following transactions in the basic accounting equation:

a.Brian invests $10,000 cash to begin an accounting service.
b.The company buys office furniture for cash, $600.
c.The company buys additional office furniture on account, $300.
d.The company makes a payment on the office furniture, $200.

Brian’s Accounting Service

ASSETS = LIABILITIES + OWNER’S EQUITY
Cash + Office Furniture = Accounts Payable + Brian’s Capital

Part B (40 points)
The following is a list of accounts and their balances for Benson Company for the month ended June 30, 20xx. Prepare a trial balance in good form.
Cash $1,370
Accounts Payable 770
Office Equipment 900
Benson, Capital 1,500
Benson, Withdrawals 500
Accounts Receivable 1,600
Service Fees 2,730
Salaries Expense 630

Part C (30 points)

The following transactions occurred during June for Campus Cycle Shop. Record the transactions below in the T accounts. Place the letter of the transaction next to the entry. Foot and calculate the ending balances of the T accounts where appropriate.

a.Tyler invested $6,500 in the bike service from his personal savings account.
b.Bought office equipment for cash, $900.
c.Performed bike service for a customer on account, $1,000.
d.Company cell phone bill received, but not paid, $80.
e.Collected $500 from customer in transaction c.
f.Tyler withdrew $300 for personal use.

Part D (20 points)
Prepare in proper form journal entries for the following transactions. Omit explanations.

October
2 Owner made a cash investment into the company $5,000
8 Bought supplies on account $100.
10 Paid salaries, $700
15 Paid for supplies purchased on October 8
21 Received company telephone bill, to be paid later, $30

Part E (5 points each for a possible total of 50 points)
Record the following selected transactions for January in a two-column journal, identifying each entry by letter:
a.Earned $7,000 fees; customer will pay later.
b.Purchased equipment for $45,000, paying $20,000 in cash and the remainder on credit
c.Paid $3,000 for rent for January.
d.Purchased $2,500 of supplies on account.
e.A. Allen $1,000 investment in the company.
f.Received $7,000 in cash for fees earned previously.
g.Paid $1,200 to creditors on account.
h.Paid wages of $6,250.
i.Received $7,150 from customers on account.
j.A. Allen withdrawal of $1,750.

Part F
1.(10 points) From the following items in the income statement columns of the worksheet of Friend’s Tutoring at December 31, prepare the closing entries without explanation, assuming that a $1,000 withdrawal was made during the period.

Income Statement
Account Debit Credit
Tutoring Fees 3,450
Wages Expense 700
Rent Expense 600
Supplies Expense 450
Insurance Expense 250
2,000 3,450
Net Income 1,450
$3,450 $3,450

2.(5 points each for a possible total of 20 points) A summary of selected ledger accounts appear below for S. Ball for the current calendar year.
Answer the following questions.

a.What was the total amount of withdrawals for the year?
b.What was the net income?
c.What was the total revenue?
d.What were the total expenses?

british productions cvp analysis 496293

British Productions performs London shows. The average show sells 900 tickets at $65 per ticket. There are 155 shows a year. No additional shows can be held as the theater is also used by other production companies. The average show has a cast of 55, each earning a net average of $330 per show. The cast is paid after each show. The other variable cost is program-printing cost of $9 per guest. Annual fixed costs total $580,500.

Requirements

1. Compute revenue and variable costs for each show.

2. Use the income statement and equation approach to compute the number of shows British Productions must perform each year to break even.

3. Use the contribution margin approach to compute the number of shows needed each year to earn a profit of $4,128,000. Is this profit goal realistic? Give your reasoning.

4. Prepare British Productions contribution margin income statement for 155 shows performed in 2012. Report only two categories of costs: variable and fixed.

brookhaven publishing accounting problem 496295

1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:

Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned
Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned
Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings
Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned
Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned

The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
Social Security taxes
Medicare taxes
Federal income taxes withheld
State income taxes
Insurance withholdings
b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
Matching Social Security taxes
Matching Medicare taxes
State unemployment taxes
Federal unemployment taxes

browse the internet to acquire a copy of the most recent annual report for a publicl 496297

Browse the Internet to acquire a copy of the most recent annual report for a publicly traded company.

Analyze the information contained in the company s balance sheet and income statement to answer the following questions:

What are the company s total assets at the end of its most recent annual reporting period? Why is this important?

What are the total assets at the end of the previous annual reporting period?

How much cash and cash equivalents did the company have at the end of its most recent annual reporting period?

What amount of accounts payable did the company have at the end of its most recent annual reporting period?

What amount of accounts payable did the company have at the end of the previous annual reporting period?

What are the company s net revenues for the last three annual reporting periods?

What is the change in dollars in the company s net income from its most recent annual reporting period to the previous annual reporting period?

What are the company s total current assets at the end of its most recent annual reporting period?

What are the total current assets at the end of the previous annual reporting period?

What in the information above would be important to a potential investor, employee, and so on?

Summarizethe analysis in a 700- to 1,050-word paper in a Microsoft Word document.

Presentall the financial information in some sort of chart (you can put it into Excel and then copy and paste that over to Word). Avoid writing out all these results in text doing so make it very difficult for your reader to follow.

Include a copy of the company s balance sheet and income statement.

Format your paper consistent with APA guidelines. . Please use Times New Roman or Courier New. Do not use Arial.

brussels chocolates of belgium uses standard costs and a flexible budget to control 496300

Brussels Chocolates of Belgium uses standard costs and a flexible budget to control its manufacture of its chocolates. Operating data for the last week have been summarized. A total of 4,000 boxes of chocolates were produced. A total of 4,300 pounds of chocolate costing 15.5 (Euros) were purchased and used. The standard, or forecast, price was 16.0. One pound of chocolate is the standard allowed quantity per box of chocolate made. Direct labor actually cost 195,200, based on 6,400 actual hours at a rate of 30.50 per hour, compared to the standard rate of 30.00 per direct labor hour. The labor standard is 1.50 direct labor hours per box. Variable manufacturing overhead cost 69,500. The flexible budget is based on 10.00 per standard direct labor hour.

Required: You are to compute the following variances:

a. Materials price.
b. Materials quantity (usage).
c. Direct labor rate.
d. Direct labor efficiency (usage).
e. Variable overhead spending.
f. Variable overhead efficiency (usage).

bshs 342 entire course 496303

BSHS 342 WEEK 2 Learning Team Assignment Hot Topic.doc

BSHS 342 Week 3 dqs and summary.doc

BSHS 342 WEEK 3 Individual Assignment Rite of Passage Paper.doc

BSHS 342 Week 4 dqs and summary.doc

BSHS 342 WEEK 4 Individual Assignment Adulthood Paper Popular Movie My Girl.doc

BSHS 342 Week 5 dqs and summary.doc

BSHS 342 WEEK 5 Issues Affecting the Aged.doc

BSHS 342 WEEK 5 Learning Team Assignment Life Stages Interview Questions.doc

BSHS 342 WEEK 5 Team Assignment Life Stages.doc

BSHS 342 QUIZ WEEK 1.doc

BSHS 342 week 1 dqs and summary.doc

BSHS 342 WEEK 2 5 Observation Journal Assignment.doc

BSHS 342 WEEK 2 Individual Assignment Jeopardy Game.doc

BSHS 342 Week 2 dqs and summary.doc

bshs 441 entire course 496305

BSHS 441 Week 1 Individual Assignment Paper on a Specific Population and the Advocate Role 1.doc

BSHS 441 Week 2 DQ 1 1.doc

BSHS 441 Week 2 DQ 2 1.doc

BSHS 441 Week 2 Individual Assignment Literature Review of Mediation and Advocacy 1.doc

BSHS 441 Week 2 Team Assignment Interview of a Social Service Agency Using Advocates2.doc

BSHS 441 Week 3 DQ 1 1.doc

BSHS 441 Week 3 DQ 2 1.doc

BSHS 441 Week 3 Individual Assignment Paper on the Challenges.doc

BSHS 441 Week 3 Team Assignment Interview of a Social Service Agency on Their Use of Mediation 1.doc

BSHS 441 Week 4 DQ 1.doc

BSHS 441 Week 4 DQ 2 1.doc

BSHS 441 Week 4 Individual Assignment Paper Based on Literature Review 1.doc

BSHS 441 Week 4 Team Assignment Interview With a Social Services Lobbyist 1 1.doc

BSHS 441 Week 5 DQ 1 1.doc

BSHS 441 Week 5 DQ 2 1.doc

BSHS 441 Week 5 Team Assignment Presentation on the Use of Mediation within an Agency Setting 1.pptx

BSHS 441 Week 1 DQ 1-1.doc

BSHS 441 Week 1 DQ 2 1.doc

buckhorn matuseski bella lugosi mcmullen topple maroon corporation correct w solutio 496313

1. Buckhorn Corporation bases its predetermined overhead rate on the estimated machine hours for the upcoming year. Data for the upcoming year appear below.

Estimated Machine hours: 85,000

Estimated variable manufacturing overhead: 5.55 per machine hour

Estimated total fixed manufacturing overhead: 951,888

Compute the company s predetermined overhead rate

2. Matuseki Corporation is preparing its cash budget for October. The budgeted beginning cash balance is 17,000. Budgeted cash receipts totals 187,000 and budgeted cash disbursements totals 177,000. The desired ending cash balance is 40,000. The company can borrow up to 120,000 at any time from the local bank, with interest not due until the following month.

Prepare the company s cash budget for October in good form

3. Bella Lugosi holdings, INC has collected the following operating information below for its current month s activity. Using the information, prepare a flexible budget analysis to determine how well BLH performed in terms of cost control.

Actual cost incurred Static Budget

Activity level (in units) 5,250 5,178

Variable cost:

Indirect material 24,182 23,476

Utilities 22,356 22,674

Fixed Cost:

Administration 63,450 65,500

Rent 65,317 63,904

4. McMullen Co. manufactures automatic door openers. The company uses 15,000 electronic hinges per year as a component in the assembly of the openers. You have been engaged by the McMullen to assist with an evaluation of whether the company should continue producing the hinges or purchase them from an outside vendor.

The accounting Department provided the following detail regarding the annual cost to produce electronic hinges.

Direct material: 54,000

Direct labor: 60,000

Variable manufacturing overhead: 36,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead: 90,000

Total cost: 240,000

The procurement department provided the following supplier pricing:

Supplier A price per hinge: 11.00

Supplier B price per hinge: 10.75

Supplier C price per hinge: 10.50

The supplier pricing was obtained in response to a formal request for proposal (RFP). Procurement has determined these suppliers meet McMullens technical specifications and quality requirements. If McMullen stops producing the part internally, 10% of the manufacturing overhead would be eliminated.

Prepare a make or buy analysis showing the annual advantage or disadvantage of accepting an outside supplier s offer

5. Topple company produces a singe product. Operating data for the company and its absorption costing income statement for the last year is presented below:

Units in beginning Inventory: 0

Units produced: 9,000

Units sold: 7,000

Sales: 100,000

Less cost of goods sold

Beginning inventory: 0

Add cost of goods manufactured: 54,000

Goods available for sale: 54,000

Less ending inventory: 12,000

Cost of goods sold: 42,000

Gross margin: 58,000

Less selling and admin expenses: 28,000

Net operating income: 30,000

Variable manufacturing cost are 4$ per unit. Fixed factory overhead totals 18,000 for the year. This overhead was applied at a rate of 2$ per unit. Variable selling and administrative expenses were 1$ per until sold.

Prepare a new income statement for the year using variable costing. Comment on the differences between the absorption costing and the variable costing income statements.

6. The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of the Maroon Corporation for the just-completed year:

Sales: 1,150

Raw Material inventory, beginning: 15

Raw material inventory ending: 40

Purchased of raw material: 150

Direct labor: 250

Manufacturing overhead: 300

Admin expenses: 500

Selling expenses: 300

Work in process inventory, beginning: 100

Work in process inventory, ending: 150

Finished goods Inventory, beginning: 80

Finished goods inventory, ending: 120

Use the above data to prepare (in thousands of dollars) a schedule of cost of goods manufactured and schedule of cost of goods sold for the year. In addition, what is the impact on the financial statements if the ending finished goods inventory is overstated or understated?

budget 496316

Candy Company sells lollipops.

Last year the company sold 10,000,000 lollipops for $1,000,000.

The Variable Costs were $350,000 and the Net Profits were $100,000

Administration has directed management to double profits in the next year.

Part 1: Determine the Number of lollipops that must be sold to reach this target.

Part 2: Determine the DL and DM budget needed to reach this target.

DM: Cost $1 per pound

Each unit requires 1/50 of a pound

DL: Labor costs are $10 per hour

Each unit requires .0015 labor hours

Part 3: Determine the DL and DM variances and provide explanations to the Board of Directors.

DM: Cost $1.50 per pound , 220,000 pounds used

DL: Cost $12 per hour, 16000 labor hours used

budget 496317

Project 4 is due by Tuesday, October 22nd. Send via the assignment area and make sure you save your file with first initial of first name and last name.
You will be graded on the accuracy of your answer and usage of cell referencing in the DATA area.
This project covers material in chapter 9 and I have extensive budget demonstrations in the chapter 9 course documents folder.
I have a template set up on the solution worksheet that you should use to complete the required budgets that are stated on the solution worksheet tab along with a what if question and article questions.
You need to use cell references in the development of your budgets. You must use this worksheet to reference the data that is being inputted onto the budgets on the solution worksheet.
Grading Rubric for Project 4
Possible points
1. Prepare a sales budget for November 0.5
2. Prepare a production budget for November. 1
3. Prepare a supporting schedule to determine required material for production and a direct materials purchase budget for November 0.5
4. Prepare a direct labor cost budget for November. 2
5. Prepare a factory overhead cost budget for November 2
6. Prepare a cost of goods sold budget for November. 2
7. Prepare a selling and administrative budget for November, set up based on categorization of expenses into selling and administrative costs. 1
8. Prepare a budgeted income statement for November. 2
9. What if the company decides to start a new advertising campaign 1
10. Article answers-.75 each 3
Total 15
If you type in any numbers in the solution, I will take off 5 pts., since we use Excel so that we can update budgets or do what if analysis without retyping numbers.
The budget director for Bird House Unlimited, Inc., has gathered the following data for use in developing the budgeted income statement for November 20XX.
Estimated sales for November
Bird House 29,000 units at $33 per unit
Bird Feeder 25,000 units at $37 per unit
Direct materials
Estimated inventories at November 1(beginning)
Wood 2600 feet
Plastic 3200 pounds
Estimated inventories at November 30th(ending)
Wood 3500 feet
Plastic 2800 pounds
Direct materials used in production:
In the manufacture of a Bird House:
Wood 0.80 feet per unit of product
Plastic 0.50 pounds per unit of product
In the manufacture of a Bird Feeder:
Wood 1.20 feet per unit of product
Plastic 0.75 pounds per unit of product
Estimated cost of direct materials
Wood $6.00 per feet
Plastic $0.90 per pound
Work in process-given in total of the 2 products
Estimated inventories at November 1(beginning) $2,000
Estimated inventories at November 30th(ending) $3,000
Finished Goods
Estimated inventories at November 1(beginning)
Bird House 4,000 units at $13 per unit
Bird Feeder 2,500 units at $14 per unit
Estimated inventories at November 30th(ending)
Bird House 5,000 units at $13 per unit
Bird Feeder 2,000 units at $14 per unit
Direct Labor Requirements:
Bird House
Fabrication Department 0.25 hour at $15
Assembly Department 0.3 hour at $12
Bird Feeder
Fabrication Department 0.45 hour at $15
Assembly Department 0.35 hour at $12
Estimated Manufacturing Overhead Costs for November
Indirect Factory Wages $2,000
Depreciation of Plant and Equipment 1,000
Power and Light 4,000
Insurance and property tax 3,000
Estimated operating expenses for November
Sales salaries expense $2,000
Advertising expense 10,000
Office salaries expense 5,000
Depreciation expense-office equipment 4,000
Telephone expense-selling 5,000
Telephone expense-administrative 2,000
Travel expense-selling 2,000
Office supplies expense 3,000
Miscellaneous Administrative expense 6,000
Estimated other income and expense for November
Interest Revenue $14,000
Interest Expense 10,000

Estimated tax rate

Required: Prepare the following budgets using cell references and formulas in the shaded cells below. You
should not have any numbers typed into the budgets below, since you will be performing what if analysis.
I know that my budget format for November is different than the textbook, but conceptually it is the same.
1. Prepare a sales budget for November.
2. Prepare a production budget for November.
3. Prepare a supporting schedule to determine required material for production and a direct materials purchase budget for November.
4. Prepare a direct labor cost budget for November.
5. Prepare a factory overhead cost budget for November.
6. Prepare a cost of goods sold budget for November.
7. Prepare a selling and administrative budget for November, set up based on categorization of expenses into selling and administrative costs.
8. Prepare a budgeted income statement for November.
9. What if the company decides to start a new advertising campaign
that will increase the total advertising expense to a total of $12,000 and the estimated sales
of bird house would increase to 30,000 units and Bird Feeders would increase to 26,000 units.
Make these changes on the data sheet and if you have linked your data correctly to these budgets the
budgets should update immediately. What budgets changed What would be the new budgeted income?
Would you recommend this advertising campaign Why?
10. Read the following article: Armato, Neil (October 2013). Forward Roll: How Companies Can Move Beyond Traditional Budgeting.
http://www.journalofaccountancy.com/Issues/2013/Oct/20137811.htm
Answer the following questions:
a. How has a rolling forecast helped the company referenced in the article?
b. What are the 3 stages a company needs to convert to a rolling forecast?
c. What are the 4 ways to embrace rolling forecasts?
d. How many days can a company save in their budgeting process based on research by the American Productivity & Quality Center?
30%

the budget director of hi performance athletic co with the assistance of the control 496318

The budget director of Hi Performance Athletic Co., with the assistance of the controller, treasurer, production manger, and sales manager, has gathered the following data for use in developing the budgeted income statement for January 2012.

a. Estimated sales for January Batting helmets 305 unites @$70 per unit Football helmet 630 units @$135 per unit

b. Estimated inventories at January Direct materials: Finished products: Plastic 80-lbs Batting helmet 35 units @$40 per unit Foam lining 60-lbs Football helmet 40 units @$60 per unit

c. Desired Inventories at January 31: Direct materials: Finished products: Plastic 90-lbs Batting helmet 30 units @40 per unit Foam lining 55-lbs Football helmet 50 units @$58 per unit

d. Direct materials used in production: In manufacturing of batting helmet: Plastic 1.20-lbs. per unit of product Foam lining 0.50-lb. per unit of product In manufacturing of football helmet Plastic 2.80-lbs. per unit of product Foam lining 1.40-lbs. per unit of product

e. Anticipated cost of purchases and beginning and ending inventory of direct material: Plastic $5.50 per lb. Foam lining $4.00 per lb.

f. Direct labor requirements: Batting helmet: Molding department 0.20 hr. @$15 per hr. Assembly department 0.50 hr. @$13 per hr. Football helmet Molding department 0.30 hr. @$15 per hr. Assembly department 0.65 hr. @$13 per hr.

g. Estimated factory overhead costs for January: Indirect factory wages $14,500; Power and light $2,000 Depreciation of plant & equipment $4,200 Insurance &property tax $1,700

h. Estimated operating expenses for January: Sales salary expense $15,400 Advertising expense $8,500 Office salaries expense $11,500 Depreciation expense – office equipment $3,200 Telephone expense – selling $950 Telephone expense – administrative $600 Travel expense – selling $2,300 Office supplies expense $550 Miscellaneous administrative expense $00

i. Estimated other income and expense fro January: Interest revenue $140 Interest expense $172

j. Estimated tax rate: 30%

Instructions: using Excel with the appropriate formulas do the following using one sheet for each. 1 Prepare a sales budget for January 2 Prepare a production budget for January 3 Prepare a direct materials purchases budget fro January 4 Prepare a direct labor cost budget for January 5 Prepare a factory overhead cost budget for January 6 Prepare a cost of goods sold budget for January. Work-in process at the beginning of January is estimated at $12,500, and work in process at the end of January is desired to be $13,500. 7 Prepare a selling and administrative expense budget for January 8 Prepare a budgeted income statement for January

budget management analysis 496319

Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.

Zero-Based Budgeting

Read the Zero-Based Budgeting article. The Board of Directors of Windsor Memorial Hospital has hired you to be their zero-based budget consultant. Specify how Windsor Memorial Hospital can implement a zero-based budget and provide your recommendations to the Board of Directors of the Hospital. Explain the benefits of implementing your recommendations and justify why you are making these specific recommendations.

Your paper must include an introduction, thesis, and conclusion and be four to five page double-spaced (excluding title and reference pages) and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. Utilize a minimum of three- to- five scholarly and/or peer-reviewed sources (excluding the course text) that were published within the last five years, in APA format.

bunyan lumber case solution xls file attached 496323

Bunyan Lumber, LLC, harvests timber and delivers logs to timber mills for sale. The company was founded 70 years ago by Pete Bunyan. The current CEO is Paula Bunyan, the granddaughter of the founder. The company is currently evaluating a 7,500 acre forest it owns in Oregon. Paula has asked Steve Boles, the company’s finance officer, to evaluate the project. Paula’s concern is when the company should harvest the timber.

Lumber is sold by the company for its “pond value”. Pond value is the amount a mill will pay for a log delivered to the mill location. The price paid for logs delivered to a mill is quoted in dollars per thousands of board feet (MBF), and the price depends on the grade of the logs. The forest Bunyan Lumber is evaluating was planted by the company 20 years ago and is made up entirely of Douglas fir trees. The table below shows the current price per MBF for the three grades of timber the company feels will come from the stand:

Timber Grade Price Per MBF
1P $1, 150
2P 990
3P 840

Steve believes that the pond value of lumber will increase at the inflation rate. The company is planning to thin the forest today, and it expects to realize a positive cash flow of $1,200 per acre from thinning. The thinning is done to increase the growth rate of the remaining trees, and it is always done 20 years following a planting.

The major decision the company faces is when to log the forest. When the company logs the forest, it will immediately replant saplings, which will allow for a future harvest. The longer the forest is allowed to grow, the larger the harvest becomes per acre. Additionally, an older forest has a higher grade of timber. Steve has compiled the following table with the expected harvest per acre in thousands of board feet, along with the breakdown of the timber grade:

Years from today Harvest (MBF) Timber Grade
to begin harvest per acre 1P 2P 3P

20 6 10% 40% 50%
25 8.2 13 46 41
30 9.4 17 48 35
35 10.5 19 51 30

The company expects to lose 5% of the timber it cuts due to defects and breakage.

The forest will be clear-cut when the company harvests the timber. This method of harvesting allows for faster growth of replanted trees. All of the harvesting, processing, replanting, and transportation are to be handled by subcontractors hired by Bunyan Lumber. The cost of the logging is expected to be $160 per MBF. A road system has to be constructed and is expected to cost $60 per MBF on average. Sales preparation and administrative costs, excluding office overhead costs, are expected to be $21 per MBF.

As soon as the harvesting is complete, the company will reforest the land. Reforesting costs include the following:

Per Acre Cost
Excavator piling $160
Broadcast burning 305
Site preparation 155
Planting costs 240

All costs are expected to increase at the inflation rate.

Assume all cash flows occur at the year of harvest. For example, if the company begins harvesting the timber 20 years from today, the cash flow from the harvest will be received 20 years from today. When the company logs the land, it will immediately replant the land with new saplings. The return is 10% and the inflation rate is expected to be 3.7% per year. Bunyan Lumber has a 35% tax rate.

Clear cutting is a controversial method of forest management. To obtain the necessary permits, Bunyan Lumber has agreed to contribute to a conservation fund every time it harvests the lumber. If the company harvested the forest today, the required contribution would be $250,000. The company has agreed that the required contribution will grow by 3.2% per year. When should the company harvest the forest?

burke corporation was organized on january 1 2014 it is authorized to issue 10 600 s 496324

Burke Corporation was organized on January 1, 2014. It is authorized to issue 10,600 shares of 8%, $101 par value preferred stock, and 468,100 shares of no-par common stock with a stated value of $3 per share. The following stock transactions were completed during the first year.

Jan. 10 Issued 98,500 shares of common stock for cash at $8 per share.
Mar. 1 Issued 4,600 shares of preferred stock for cash at $106 per share.
Apr. 1 Issued 18,500 shares of common stock for land. The asking price of the land was $102,000. The fair value of the land was $90,300.
May 1 Issued 84,400 shares of common stock for cash at $6.50 per share.
Aug. 1 Issued 10,300 shares of common stock to attorneys in payment of their bill of $38,300 for services provided in helping the company organize.
Sept. 1 Issued 10,100 shares of common stock for cash at $8 per share.
Nov. 1 Issued 1,440 shares of preferred stock for cash at $115 per share.

burleson corporation s projected benefit obligation was 30 496325

1. On January 1, 2013, Burleson Corporation s projected benefit obligation was $30 million. During 2013 pension benefits paid by the trustee were $4 million. Service cost for 2013 is $12 million. Pension plan assets (at fair value) increased during 2013 by $6 million as expected. At the end of 2013, there was no prior service cost and a negligible balance in net loss AOCI. The actuary s discount rate was 10%.

Required:

Determine the amount of the projected benefit obligation at December 31, 2013. (Enter your answer in millions.)

2. Pension data for Sterling Properties include the following:

Required:

Service cost, 2013 $112

Projected benefit obligation, January 1, 2013 850

Plan assets (fair value), January 1, 2013 900

Prior service cost AOCI (2013 amortization, $8) 80

Net loss AOCI (2013 amortization, $1) 101

Interest rate, 6%

Expected return on plan assets, 10%

Actual return on plan assets, 11%

Required

Determine pension expense for 2013.

3. Pension data for Millington Enterprises include the following:

Discount rate, 10%

Projected benefit obligation, January 1 $ 360

Projected benefit obligation, December 31 465

Accumulated benefit obligation, January 1 300

Accumulated benefit obligation, December 31 415

Cash contributions to pension fund, December 31 150

Benefit payments to retirees, December 31 54

Required:

Assuming no change in actuarial assumptions and estimates, determine the service cost component of pension expense for the year ended December 31. (Enter your answer in millions.)

4. Abbott and Abbott has a noncontributory, defined benefit pension plan. At December 31, 2013, Abbott and Abbott received the following information:

($in millions)

Projected Benefit Obligation

Balance, January 1 $120

Service cost 20

Interest cost 12

Benefits paid (9)

Balance, December 31 $143

Plant Assets

Balance, January 1 $80

Actual return on plan assets 9

Contribution 2011 20

Benefits paid (9)

Balance, December 31 $100

The expected long-term rate of return on plan assets was 10%. There was no prior service cost and a negligible net loss AOCI on January 1, 2013.

Required:

a. Determine Abbott and Abbott s pension expense for 2013.

b. Prepare the journal entries to record Abbott and Abbott s pension expense, funding, and payment for 2013.

bus 250 week 5 research paper case analysis paper corporate and social responsibilit 496326

BUS 250 WEEK 5

The Final Case Analysis Paper should demonstrate understanding of the reading as well as the implications of new knowledge. The eight-page paper should integrate readings and class discussions into work and life experiences. It may include explanation and examples from previous experiences as well as implications for future applications.

The purpose of the Final Case Analysis Paper is for you to culminate the learning achieved in the course by describing your understanding and application of knowledge in the field.

Focus of the Final Case Analysis Paper:

The Final Case Analysis Paper should focus on real life, real time application of topics covered in this course; the uses you have seen and the uses you can envision. The paper must be submitted to your instructor no later than 11:59 pm of the time zone in which you reside on the last day of class.

Read Mattel and Toy Safety, which is Case Eight in the Cases in Business and Society section at the end of the book. This case describes the 2007 Mattel toy recalls, which were in response to findings that several children s toys were coated in lead-based paint.

Write an eight to ten page paper that addresses the following questions. Support your opinions with scholarly research.

  1. Do you believe that Mattel acted in a socially responsible and ethical manner with regard to the safety of its toys? Why or why not? What should or could Mattel have done differently, if anything? Be sure to support your answer using your research findings.
  2. Who or what do you believe was responsible for the fact that children were exposed to potentially dangerous toys? Why do you think so? Be sure to support your answer using your research findings.
  3. What is the best way to ensure the safety of children s toys? In responding, please consider how the following groups would answer this question: government regulators (in theU.S.andChina); consumer advocates, the toy industry, children s product retailers; and standard-setting organizations. What might explain the differences in their point of view? Be sure to support your answer using your research findings.
  4. What do you think is the best way for society to protect children from harmful toys? Specifically, what are the appropriate roles for various stakeholders in this process? Be sure to support your answer using your research findings.

bus 308 week 1 dqs 496329

BUS 308 Week 1 DQ 1 Language

Numbers and measurements are the language of business.. Organizations look at results, expenses, quality levels, efficiencies, time, costs, etc. What measures does your department keep track of ? How are the measures collected, and how are they summarized/described? How are they used in making decisions? (Note: If you do not have a job where measures are available to you, ask someone you know for some examples or conduct outside research on an interest of yours.)

BUS 308 Week 1 DQ 2 Levels

Managers and professionals often pay more attention to the levels of their measures (means, sums, etc.) than to the variation in the data (the dispersion or the probability patterns/distributions that describe the data). For the measures you identified in Discussion 1, why must dispersion be considered to truly understand what the data is telling us about what we measure/track? How can we make decisions about outcomes and results if we do not understand the consistency (variation) of the data? Does looking at the variation in the data give us a different understanding of results?

bus 308 week 1 problem set week one 496330

Problem Set Week One. All statistical calculations will use the Employee Salary Data set (in Appendix section).

Using the Excel Analysis ToolPak function Descriptive Statistics, generate descriptive statistics for the salary data. Which variables does this function not work properly for, even though we have some generated results?

Sort the data by either the variable G or GEN1 (into males and females) and find the mean and standard deviation for each gender for the following variables: SAL, COMPA, AGE, SR, and RAISE. Use Descriptive for one gender and the fx functions (AVERAGE and STDEV) for the other.

What is the probability distribution table for:

A randomly selected person being a male in a specific grade?

A randomly selected person being in a specific grade?

Find:

The z score for each male salary, based on the male salary distribution.

The z score for each female salary, based on the female salary distribution.

Repeat question 4 for COMPA for each gender.

What conclusions can you make about the issue of male and female pay equality? Are all of the results

consistent? If not, why not?

For additional assistance with these calculations reference the Recommended Resources for Week One.

bus 308 week 4 assignment 496336

**THIS ASSIGNMENT IS DUE BEFORE 12Midnight TONIGHT**

The manager of a catering company is using the number of people in the party to predict the cost of the drinks that are required for the event. The following are the data for 12 recently catered events:

Event

Number of People

Cost of Drinks

1

12

24

2

14

30

3

15

36

4

18

38

5

20

65

6

16

44

7

14

36

8

13

30

9

18

39

10

19

76

11

20

80

12

22

85

Complete the calculations below using this data. Show all of your work and clearly label each of your calculations.

a.Provide a scatterplot

b.Calculate a linear regression

c.Calculate the residuals

d.Calculate the correlation between the two variables

e.Calculate the mean, median, and standard deviation of the number of people and cost of drinks

For additional assistance with these calculations reference the Recommended Materials for Week Four.

2.Problem Two

You are a real estate agent and you are trying to predict home prices for your clients that want to list their house for sale. You have a very small city without much data. You will need to use the data that you have available for the past year on homes that have been sold.

  1. Bedrooms

    Square Footage

    Bathrooms

    Price

    1

    1500

    2

    125,000

    3

    1800

    4

    148,000

    5

    4000

    5

    250,000

    3

    2100

    3

    160,000

    4

    2300

    5

    240,000

    5

    3800

    4

    245,000

    2

    1900

    1

    155,000

Complete the calculations below using this data. Show all of your work and clearly label each of your calculations.

Conduct a multiple regression analysis to predict home prices. In your analysis complete the following:

a.Calculate the multiple regression analysis and report your data.

b.Determine the list price for your client s home if it has three bedrooms, three bathrooms, and 1900 square footage. Provide your analysis and show all of your calculations.

bus 308 week 4 problem set 496339

Problem Set Week Four. Let s look at some other factors that might influence pay. Complete the problems below and submit your work in an Excel document. Be sure to show all of your work and clearly label all calculations. All statistical calculations will use the Employee Salary Data set (in Appendix section).

Is the probability of having a graduate degree independent of the grade the employee is in?

Construct a 95% confidence interval on the mean service for each gender. Do they intersect?

Are males and females distributed across grades in a similar pattern?

Do 95% confidence intervals on the mean length of service for each gender intersect?

How do you interpret these results in light of our equity question?

bettybaskets budget question 496253

Betty s Beautiful Baskets

Betty s Beautiful Baskets, a manufacturing business that sells baskets, wants a master budget prepared for the first three months of this year (January, February and March).

The managers of the different departments have provided the following information:

The Sales Manager has projected the following sales:

o January 5,000 units

o February 4,000 units

o March 6,000 units

o April 5,000 units

o May 11,250 units

o Projected selling price is $35.00/unit

Your Production Manager gave the following information:

o Ending Inventory is to be 20% of next month s production needs

o April s Projected Sales 5,000 units

o December 20X5 Ending Inventory was 1,000 units and December unit cost was $23.50.

The Manufacturing Manager has estimated the following:

o Each unit will require 4 grams of material

o Material in Ending Inventory is 20% of next month s needs

o December s Ending Material Inventory was 4,800 g

o Projected cost of material: $2.50/gram

The Personnel Manager has estimated that Direct Labor will be projected at:

o 0.75 hours of Direct Labor per unit

o Direct Labor Cost: $8.50/hour

The Facilities Manager has estimated that the Manufacturing Overhead will be projected at:

o Variable Overhead Rate to be $8 per Direct Labor hours

o Fixed Overhead Rate to be $3,000 per month

The Accounting Department Manager has provided the following information:

Selling and Administrative Expenses are projected to be a monthly cost of:

o Salaries $6,000

o Rent $1,500

o Advertising $1,100

o Telephone $300

o Other $500

Betty s Beautiful Baskets Page 2

Cash Receivable:

o December s Sales were $150,000

o 80% of sales is collected in the month in which they were made

o 20% of sales collected in the following month in which they were made

o Bad Debts is negligible

Accounts Payable:

o 80% of Payables is paid for in the current month

o 20% of Payables is paid for in the following month

o December s purchases were $50,000

Federal Income Tax is estimated at 22% average.

Betty s Beautiful Baskets

o has a $20,000 cash balance for the beginning of January

o pays Dividends of $8,000 to be paid in March

o pays projected Federal Income tax in March

o depreciation on the building is $150 per month

o does not carry any WIP inventory

o uses FIFO inventory costing

From the beginning Balance Sheet:

o Land = $150,000

o Building = $45,000

o Depreciation (Building) = $11,250

o Retained Earnings = $58,780

o Capital Stock = $200,470

For the Master Budget, you are expected to prepare the following:

Sales budget plus schedule of accounts receivable collections

Production budget

Direct materials budget and schedule of cash payments for purchases

Direct labor budget

Manufacturing overhead budget

Cost of Goods Sold Budget

Selling & Administrative Expenses Budget

Budgeted income statements

Cash budget

Budgeted balance sheet for each month plus a beginning balance sheet

When you prepare the cost of goods sold budget, you must calculate a unit cost for each month. You must also calculate cost of goods manufactured. Remember, there is no Work in Process inventory but you must calculate direct materials used.

biello co manufactures and sells medals for winners of athletic and other events its 496254

Biello Co. manufactures and sells medals for winners of athletic and other events. Its manufacturing plant has the capacity to produce 15,000 medals each month; current monthly production is 14,250 medals. The company normally charges $115 per medal. Cost data for the current level of production are shown below.

Variable Costs

Direct Materials

$969,000

Direct Labor

$270,750

Selling and Administrative

$270,075

Fixed Costs

Manufacturing

$370,550

Selling and Administrative

$89,775

The company has just received a special one-time order for 600 medals at $102 each. For this particular order, no variable selling and administrative costs would be incurred. This order would also have no effect on fixed costs.

Required:
Should the company accept this special order? Why?

bimbo financial analysis 496257

Bimbo is selling a limited number of shares to the public. A group of friends is thinking on invest their savings and buy some shares.

In order to take a decision about the risk of this operation, they need to analyze their last balance sheet (below) and answer the following question considering this information.

What is the value of the assets of Bimbo and how these assets are distributed?

What is the level of internal and external financing of Bimbo?

What would happen with the financial structure of Bimbo if they decide to get more equipment?

In what way does the balance sheet show the financial situation of the company?

ConsolidatedBalance sheet

Bimbo Group, S. A. de C. V. and subsidiaries

To December 31st of 2012

(Million of pesos of purchasing power on the 31st of December of 2012)

Assets

Current assets:

Cash $4,110

Receivable documents and accounts 3,467

Inventory 1,401

Advance payments 237

Total current assets: $9.215

Buildings, machinery and equipment $18,469

Investment in shares in associates 685

Financial instruments 12

Deferred income taxes 1,443

Trademarks and right of use 3,000

Commercial credit 3,717

Intangible asset for labor obligations to the retirement 407

Other assets 82

Non-Current Assets 27,815

Total Assets 37,030

Liabilities and stockholders’equity

Current liabilities

Loans from financial institutions and

current portion of long-term debt: $247

Accounts payable to supplier: 3,019

Other accounts payable and accrued liabilities: 2,335

Accounts payable to related parts: 367

Participation of workers in utilities: 413

Total of current liabilities: 6,381

Long-term debt $8,092

Financial instruments 107

Labor obligations to the retirement and social welfare 1,214

Participation of workers in deferred earnings 58

Deferred income tax 1,324

Non-Current Liabilities 10,795

Total liabilities 17,176

Stockholders’equity

Social capital $ 7,415

Reserve for repurchase of shares 703

Retained earnings 19,208

Other concepts of the accumulated integral result (5,665)

Accumulated effect of deferred income tax (2,203)

Financial instruments (68)

Majority stockholder s equity 19,390

Minority interest in consolidated subsidiaries 464

Stockholder s equity total !9,854

Total Liabilities and share holer s equity 37,030

bingham corporation uses the weighted average method in its process costing system 496259

1. Bingham Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below.

Work in process, beginning:

Units in beginning work-in-process inventory

400

Materials costs

$6,900

Conversion costs

$2,500

Percentage complete for materials

80%

Percentage complete for conversion

15%

Units started into production during the month

6,000

Units transferred to the next department during the month

5,000

Materials costs added during the month

$112,500

Conversion costs added during the month

$210,300

Ending work in process:

Units in ending work-in-process inventory

1,200

Percentage complete for materials

60%

Percentage complete for conversion

30%

Calculate the equivalent units for materials (using the weighted-average method) for the month in the first processing department.

2. (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Five years ago, the City of Paranoya spent $30,000 to purchase a computerized radar system called W.A.S.T.E. (Watching Aliens Sent To Earth). Recently, a sales rep from W.A.S.T.E. Radar Company told the city manager about a new and improved radar system that can be purchased for $50,000. The rep also told the manager that the company would give the city $10,000 in trade on the old system. The new system will last 10 years. The old system will also last that long but only if a $4,000 upgrade is done in 5 years. The manager assembled the following information to use in the decision regarding which system is more desirable:

Old System

New System

Cost of radar system

$30,000

$50,000

Current salvage value

$10,000

Salvage value in 10 years

$5,000

$8,000

Annual operating costs

$34,000

$29,000

Upgrade required in 5 years

$4,000

Discount rate

14%

14%

(a) What is the City of Paranoya’s net present value for the decision described above? Use the total cost approach.

(b) Should the City of Paranoya purchase the new system or keep the old system?

1. Topple Company produces a single product. Operating data for the company and its absorption costing income statement for the last year is presented below:

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

9,000

Units sold

7,000

Sales

$100,000

Less cost of goods sold:

Beginning inventory

0

Add cost of goods manufactured

54,000

Goods available for sale

54,000

Less ending inventory

12,000

Cost of goods sold

42,000

Gross margin

58,000

Less selling and admin. expenses

28,000

Net operating income

$30,000

Variable manufacturing costs are $4 per unit. Fixed factory overhead totals $18,000 for the year. This overhead was applied at a rate of $2 per unit. Variable selling and administrative expenses were $1 per unit sold.

Prepare a new income statement for the year using variable costing. Comment on the differences between the absorption costing and the variable costing income statements.

bird house unlimited inc budgets 496260

The budget director for Bird House Unlimited, Inc., has gathered the following data for use in developing the budgeted income statement for November 20XX.
Estimated sales for November
Bird House 29,000 units at $33 per unit
Bird Feeder 25,000 units at $37 per unit
Direct materials
Estimated inventories at November 1(beginning)
Wood 2600 feet
Plastic 3200 pounds
Estimated inventories at November 30th(ending)
Wood 3500 feet
Plastic 2800 pounds
Direct materials used in production:
In the manufacture of a Bird House:
Wood 0.80 feet per unit of product
Plastic 0.50 pounds per unit of product
In the manufacture of a Bird Feeder:
Wood 1.20 feet per unit of product
Plastic 0.75 pounds per unit of product
Estimated cost of direct materials
Wood $6.00 per feet
Plastic $0.90 per pound
Work in process-given in total of the 2 products
Estimated inventories at November 1(beginning) $2,000
Estimated inventories at November 30th(ending) $3,000
Finished Goods
Estimated inventories at November 1(beginning)
Bird House 4,000 units at $13 per unit
Bird Feeder 2,500 units at $14 per unit
Estimated inventories at November 30th(ending)
Bird House 5,000 units at $13 per unit
Bird Feeder 2,000 units at $14 per unit
Direct Labor Requirements:
Bird House
Fabrication Department 0.25 hour at $15 per hour
Assembly Department 0.3 hour at $12 per hour
Bird Feeder
Fabrication Department 0.45 hour at $15 per hour
Assembly Department 0.35 hour at $12 per hour
Estimated Manufacturing Overhead Costs for November
Indirect Factory Wages $2,000
Depreciation of Plant and Equipment 1,000
Power and Light 4,000
Insurance and property tax 3,000
Estimated operating expenses for November
Sales salaries expense $2,000
Advertising expense 10,000
Office salaries expense 5,000
Depreciation expense-office equipment 4,000
Telephone expense-selling 5,000
Telephone expense-administrative 2,000
Travel expense-selling 2,000
Office supplies expense 3,000
Miscellaneous Administrative expense 6,000
Estimated other income and expense for November
Interest Revenue $14,000
Interest Expense 10,000
Estimated tax rate 30%

bis 219 entire course final exam five different 496261

Preview
1.Final BIS219/
2.Final BIS219/BIS 219 Final Exam (Five Different Exam).zip
3.Final BIS219/BIS219 Final Exam 1.doc
4.Final BIS219/BIS219 Final Exam 2.doc
5.Final BIS219/BIS219 Final Exam 3.doc
6.Final BIS219/BIS219 Final Exam 4.doc
7.Final BIS219/BIS219 Final Exam 5.doc
8.Week 1/
9.Week 1/BIS 219 Week 1 DQ.zip
10.Week 1/BIS 219 Week 1.zip
11.Week 1/BIS219 Week 1 Discussion Question 1.docx
12.Week 1/BIS219 Week 1 Discussion Question 2.docx
13.Week 1/BIS219 Week 1 Discussion Question 3.docx
14.Week 1/BIS219 Week 1 Individual Assignment Information Systems and Software Applications.docx
15.Week 2/
16.Week 2/BIS 219 Week 2 DQ.zip
17.Week 2/BIS 219 Week 2.zip
18.Week 2/BIS219 Week 2 Discussion Question 1.docx
19.Week 2/BIS219 Week 2 Discussion Question 2.docx
20.Week 2/BIS219 Week 2 Discussion Question 3.docx
21.Week 2/BIS219 Week 2 Individual Assignment Club IT, Part One.docx
22.Week 2/BIS219 Week 2 Learning Team Instructions Amazon.com Evolution.doc
23.Week 3/
24.Week 3/BIS 219 Week 3 DQ.zip
25.Week 3/BIS 219 Week 3.zip
26.Week 3/BIS219 Week 3 Discussion Question 1.docx
27.Week 3/BIS219 Week 3 Discussion Question 2.docx
28.Week 3/BIS219 Week 3 Discussion Question 3.docx
29.Week 3/BIS219 Week 3 Learning Team Assignment Amazon.com Evolution.docx
30.Week 4/
31.Week 4/BIS 219 Week 4 DQ.zip
32.Week 4/BIS 219 Week 4.zip
33.Week 4/BIS219 Week 4 Discussion Question 1.docx
34.Week 4/BIS219 Week 4 Discussion Question 2.docx
35.Week 4/BIS219 Week 4 Discussion Question 3.docx
36.Week 4/BIS219 Week 4 Individual Assignment Club IT, Part Two.docx
37.Week 4/BIS219 Week 4 Learning Team Instructions Where Did You Find that Book.ppt
38.Week 5/
39.Week 5/BIS 219 Week 5 DQ.zip
40.Week 5/BIS 219 Week 5.zip
41.Week 5/BIS219 Week 5 Discussion Question 1.docx
42.Week 5/BIS219 Week 5 Discussion Question 2.docx
43.Week 5/BIS219 Week 5 Discussion Question 3.docx
44.Week 5/BIS219 Week 5 Discussion Question 4.docx
45.Week 5/BIS219 Week 5 Individual Assignment Club IT, Part Three.ppt
46.Week 5/BIS219 Week 5 Learning Team Assignment Where Did You Find that Book.ppt

bishop company completes these transactions and events during march of the current y 496263

Bishop Company completes these transactions and events during March of the current year (terms for all its credit sales are 2/10, n30):

Mar. 1 Purchased $42,600 of merchandise from Soy Industries, invoice dated March 1, terms 2/15,

n30.

2 Sold merchandise on credit to Min Cho, Invoice No. 854, for $15,800 (cost is $7,900).

3 Purchased $1,120 of office supplies on credit from Stacy Company, invoice dated March

3, terms n/10 EOM.

3 Sold merchandise on credit to Lance Snow, Invoice No. 855, for $9,200 (cost is $4,600).

6 Borrowed $72,000 cash from Federal Bank by signing a long-term note payable.

9 Purchased $20,850 of office equipment on credit from Tells Supply, invoice dated March

9, terms n/10 EOM.

10 Sold merchandise on credit to Taylor Few, Invoice No. 856, for $4,600 (cost is $2,300).

12 Received payment from Min Cho for the March 2 sale less the discount.

13 Sent Soy Industries Check No. 416 in payment of the March 1 invoice less the discount.

13 Received payment from Lance Snow for the March 3 sale less the discount.

14 Purchased $31,625 of merchandise from the JW Company, invoice dated March 13, terms

210, n30.

15 Issued Check No. 417, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the first

half of the month, $15,900. Cashed the check and paid the employees.

15 Cash sales for the first half of the month are $164,680 (cost is $138,000). (Cash sales are

recorded daily, but are recorded only twice here to reduce repetitive entries.)

16 Purchased $1,670 of store supplies on credit from Stacy Company, invoice dated March 16,

terms n/10 EOM.

17 Received a $2,425 credit memorandum from JW Company for the return of unsatisfactory

merchandise purchased on March 14.

19 Received a $630 credit memorandum from Tells Supply for office equipment received on

March 9 and returned for credit.

20 Received payment from Taylor Few for the sale of March 10 less the discount.

23 Issued Check No. 418 to JW Company in payment of the invoice of March 13 less the return

and the discount.

27 Sold merchandise on credit to Taylor Few, Invoice No. 857, for $13,910 (cost is $6,220).

28 Sold merchandise on credit to Lance Snow, Invoice No. 858, for $5,315 (cost is $2,280).

31 Issued Check No. 419, payable to Payroll, in payment of sales salaries expense for the last

half of the month, $15,900. Cashed the check and paid the employees.

31 Cash sales for the last half of the month are $174,590 (cost is $143,000).

31 Verify that amounts impacting customer and creditor accounts were posted and that any

amounts that should have been posted as individual amounts to the general ledger accounts

were posted. Foot and crossfoot the journals and make the month-end postings.

Required:

1. Open the following general ledger accounts: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Inventory (March 1 beg.

bal. is $300,000); Office Supplies; Store Supplies; Office Equipment; Accounts Payable; Long-

Term Notes Payable; M. Bishop, Capital (March 1 beg. bal. is $300,000); Sales; Sales Discounts;

Cost of Goods Sold; and Sales Salaries Expense. Open the following accounts receivable subsidiary

ledger accounts: Taylor Few, Min Cho, and Lance Snow. Open the following accounts payable subsidiary

ledger accounts: Stacy Company, Soy Industries, Tells Supply, and JW Company.

2. Enter these transactions in a sales journal like Exhibit 7.5, a purchases journal like Exhibit 7.9, a

cash receipts journal like Exhibit 7.7, a cash disbursements journal like Exhibit 7.11, or a general

journal. Number all journal pages as page 2.

3. Prepare a trial balance of the general ledger and prove the accuracy of the subsidiary ledgers by

preparing schedules of both accounts receivable and accounts payable.

4. Prepare the sales journal, purchase journal, cash reciepts journal, cash disbursement journal, general journal, general ledger, accounts recievable ledger, accounts payable, trial blance, schedule of accounts recievable, schedule of accounts payable.

the blending department of peacock company has the following cost and production dat 496266

The Blending Department of Peacock Company has the following cost and production data for the month of April. Costs: Work in process, April 1 Direct materials: 100% complete $106,540 Conversion costs: 20% complete 71,600

Cost of work in process, April 1 $178,140

Costs incurred during production in April Direct materials $881,297 Conversion costs 311,080

Costs incurred in April $1,192,377

Units transferred out totaled 15,413. Ending work in process was 1,330 units that are 100% complete as to materials and 40% complete as to conversion costs.

Compute the equivalent units of production for (1) materials and (2) conversion costs for the month of April. material? conversion cost?

Compute the unit costs for the month. unit cost-materials? unit cost-conversion cost?

Determine the costs to be assigned to the units transferred out and in ending work in process. Transferred out $______ Work in process Materials $________ Conversion costs ________ _________

Total costs $___________

bo vonderweidt the production manager for sportway corporation had requested to have 496267

Bo Vonderweidt, the production manager for Sportway Corporation, had requested to have lunch with the company president. Vonderweidt wanted to put forward his suggestion to add a new product line. As they finished lunch, Meg Thomas, the company president, said, I ll give your proposal some serious thought, Bo. I think you re right about the increasing demand for skateboards. What I m not sure about is whether the skateboard line will be better for us than our tackle boxes. Those have been our bread and butter the past few years.
Vonderweidt responded with, Let me get together with one of the controller s people. We ll run a few numbers on this skateboard idea that I think will demonstrate the line s potential.
Sportway is a wholesale distributor supplying a wide range of moderately priced sports equipment to large chain stores. About 60 percent of Sportway s products are purchased from other companies while the remainder of the products is manufactured by Sportway. The company has a Plastics Department that is currently manufacturing molded fishing tackle boxes. Sportway is able to manufacture and sell 8,000 tackle boxes annually, making full use of its direct-labor capacity at available work stations. The selling price and costs associated with Sportway s tackle boxes are as follows:
Selling price per boor $86.00
Costs per box:
Molded plastic . $ 8.00
Hinges, latches, handle 9.00
Direct labor ($15.00 per hour) . 18.75
Manufacturing overhead . 12.50
Selling and administrative cost 17.00

Profit per box .. $20.75
Because Sportway s sales manager believes the firm could sell 12,000 tackle boxes if it had sufficient manufacturing capacity, the company has looked into the possibility of purchasing the tackle boxes for distribution. Maple Products, a steady supplier of quality products, would be able to provide up to 9,000 tackle boxes per year at a price of $68.00 per box delivered to Sportway s facility.
Bo Vonderweidt, Sportway s production manager, has come to the conclusion that the company could make better use of its Plastics Department by manufacturing skateboards. Vonderweidt has a market study that indicates an expanding market for skateboards and a need for additional suppliers. Vonderweidt believes that Sportway could expect to sell 17,500 skateboards annually at a price of $45.00 per skateboard.
After his lunch with the company president, Vonderweidt worked out the following estimates with the assistant controller.
Selling price per skateboard .. $45.00
Costs per skateboard:
Molded plastic $5.50
Wheels, hardware 7.00
Direct labor ($15.00 per hour) 7.50
Manufacturing overhead . 5.00
Selling and administrative cost 9.00 34.00
Profit p& skateboard . .. $11.00
In the Plastics Department, Sportway uses direct-labor hours as the application base for manufacturing overhead. Included in the manufacturing overhead for the current year is $50,000 of factory wide, fixed manufacturing overhead that has been allocated to the Plastics Department. For each unit of product that Sportway sells. regardless of whether the product has been purchased or is manufactured by Sportway, there is an allocated $6.00 fixed overhead cost per unit lot distribution that is included in the selling and administrative cost for all products. Total selling and administrative costs for the purchased tackle boxes would be $10.00 per unit.
Required:
In order to maximize the company s profitability, prepare an analysis that will show which product or products Sportway Corporation should manufacture or purchase.
1. First determine which of Sportway s options makes the best use of its scarce resources. How many skateboards and tackle boxes should be manufactured? How many tackle boxes should be purchased?
2. Calculate the improvement in Sportway s total contribution margin if it adopts the optimal strategy rather than continuing with the status quo.

bob lutz opened a secretarial school called best secretarial training 496268

Bob Lutz opened a secretarial school called Best Secretarial Training.

a. Lutz contributed the following assets to the business:

Cash $5,700

Computers 4,300

Office Equipment 3,600

b. Found a location for his business and paid the first month s rent, $260.

c. Paid for an advertisement announcing the opening of the school, $190.

d. Received applications from three students for a four-week secretarial

program and two students for a ten-day keyboarding course. The students will be

billed a total of $1,300.

e. Purchased supplies on credit, $330.

f. Billed the enrolled students, $1,740.

g. Purchased a second-hand computer, $480, and office equipment, $380, on credit.

h. Paid for the supplies purchased on credit in e, $330.

i. Paid cash to repair a broken computer, $40.

j. Received partial payment from students previously billed, $1,080.

k. Paid the utility bill for the current month, $90.

l. Paid an assistant one week s salary, $440.

m. Made a cash withdrawal of $300.

Required

1. Set up the following T accounts: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Supplies; Computers; Office

Equipment; Accounts Payable; B. Lutz, Capital; B. Lutz, Withdrawals; Tuition Revenue; Salaries Expense; Utilities Expense; Rent Expense; Repair Expense; and Advertising Expense.

2. Record the transactions directly in the T accounts, using the transaction letter to identify each debit and credit.

3. Prepare a trial balance using today s date.

4. Examine transactions f and j. What were the revenues and how much cash was received from the revenues? What business issues might you see arising from the differences in these numbers?

bodyfat weight data 496269

Parts I II: Review and revise your individual project from last week. You must include parts I and II from Individual Project #4 as they will be graded again. Then, add the following responses to your document: Part III: Regression and Correlation Based on what you have learned from your research on regression analysis and correlation, answer the following questions about the Body Fat Versus Weight data set: When performing a regression analysis, it is important to first identify your independent/predictor variable versus your dependent/response variable, or simply put, your x versus y variables. How do you decide which variable is your predictor variable and which is your response variable? Based on the Body Fat Versus Weight data set, which variable is the predictor variable? Which variable is the response variable? Explain. Using Excel, construct a scatter plot of your data. Using the graph and intuition, determine whether there is a positive correlation, a negative correlation, or no correlation. How did you come to this conclusion? Calculate the correlation coefficient, r, and verify your conclusion with your scatter plot. What does the correlation coefficient determine? Discuss the strength of the correlation coefficient calculated, and if the correlation is positive or negative. Add a regression line to your scatter plot, and obtain the regression equation. Does the line appear to be a good fit for the data? Why or why not? Regression equations help you make predictions. Using your regression equation, discuss what the slope means, and determine the predicted value of body fat x = 0. Interpret the meaning of this equation. Part IV: Putting it Together Your analysis is now complete, and you are ready to report your findings to your boss. In one paragraph, summarize your results by explaining your findings from the statistical measures, hypothesis test, and regression analysis of body fat and weight for the 252 men attending Silver s Gym

boleyn company operating at full capacity sold 120 000 units at a price of 140 per u 496270

Boleyn Company, operating at full capacity, sold 120,000 units at a price of $140 per unit during 2014. Its income statement for 2014 is as follows:

Sales 16,800,000

Cost of goods sold 6,200,000

Gross Profit 10,600,000

Expenses:

Selling Expenses 3,400,000

Administrative Expenses 1,550,000

Total Expenses 4,950,000

Income from Operations 5,650,000

The division of costs between variable and fixed is as follows:

Variable Fixed

Cost of Goods Sold 60% 40%

Selling Expenses 75% 25%

Administrative Expenses 60% 40%

Management is considering a plant expansion program that will permit an increase of $2,800,000 in yearly sales. The expansion will increase fixed costs by $1,250,000, but will not affect the relationship between sales and variable costs.

Required:

1. Determine the total fixed costs and the total variable costs for 2014.

Total variable costs$

Total fixed costs$

2. Determine for 2014 (a) the unit variable cost and (b) the unit contribution margin.

Unit variable cost$

Unit contribution margin$

3. Compute the break-even sales (units) for 2014.

units

4. Compute the break-even sales (units) under the proposed program.

units

5. Determine the amount of sales (units) that would be necessary under the proposed program to realize the $5,650,000 of income from operations that was earned in 2014.

units

6. Determine the maximum income from operations possible with the expanded plant.

$

7. If the proposal is accepted and sales remain at the 2014 level, what will the income or loss from operations be for 2015

$

8. Based on the data given, would you recommend accepting the proposal?

a.In favor of the proposal because of the reduction in break-even point.

b.In favor of the proposal because of the possibility of increasing income from operations.

c.In favor of the proposal because of the increase in break-even point.

d.Reject the proposal because if future sales remain at the 2014 level, the income from operations of will increase.

e.Reject the proposal because the sales necessary to maintain the current income from operations would be below 2014 sales.

bond terminology p 2 listed below are common terms associated with bonds a bond cert 496275

Bond Terminology P 2. Listed below are common terms associated with bonds: a. Bond certificate b. Bond issue c. Bond indenture d. Unsecured bonds e. Debenture bonds f. Secured bonds g. Term bonds h. Serial bonds i. Registered bonds Required 1. For each of the following statements, identify the category above with which it is associated. (If two statements apply, choose the category with which it is most closely associated.) 1. Occurs when bonds are sold at more than face value 2. Rate of interest that will vary depending on economic conditions 3. Bonds that may be exchanged for common stock 4. Bonds that are not registered 5. A bond issue in which all bonds are due on the same date 6. Occurs when bonds are sold at less than face value 7. Rate of interest that will be paid regardless of market conditions 8. Bonds that may be retired at management s option 9. A document that is evidence of a company s debt 10. Same as market rate of interest 11. Bonds for which the company knows who owns them 12. A bond issue for which bonds are due at different dates 13. The total value of bonds issued at one time 14. Bonds whose payment involves a pledge of certain assets 15. Same as debenture bonds 16. Contains the terms of the bond issue 17. Bonds issued on the general credit of the company 2. What effect will a decrease in interest rates below the face interest rate and before a bond is issued have on the cash received from the bond issue? What effect will the decrease have on interest expense? What effect will the decrease have on the amount of cash paid for interest? Straight-Line MethodE 9. DNA Corporation issued $4,000,000 in 8 percent, 10-year bonds onFebruary 1, 2010, at 115. Semiannual interest payment dates are January 31 andJuly 31. Use the straight-line method and ignore year-end accruals.1. With regard to the bond issue on February 1, 2010:a. How much cash is received?b. How much is Bonds Payable?c. What is the difference between a and b called and how much is it?2. With regard to the bond interest payment on July 31, 2010:a. How much cash is paid in interest?b. How much is the amortization?c. How much is interest expense?3. With regard to the bond interest payment on January 31, 2011:a. How much cash is paid in interest?b. How much is the amortization?c. How much is interest expense?

bonds payable issue at premiun interest payment redemption 496277

Following is an amortization table for an issue of three-year bonds on January 1, 2011:
Effective Contractual Carrying
Carrying Value at Interest Interest Amortization Value End
Year Beginning of Year Incurred to be Paid of Principal Of Year
2011 $105,154 $8,412 $10,000 $1,588 $103,566
2012 $103,566 $8,285 $10,000 $1,715 $101,851
2013 $101,851 $8,148 $10,000 $1,852 $100,000
Total $24,845 $30,000 $5,155
Required: Place you answer in the shaded boxes below with any computations to the right
A. How much were the bonds sold for?
B. What is the stated (contractual) rate of interest?
C. What is the effective rate of interest?
D. Record the entries necessary over the life of the bonds for the issuance, retirement and yearly interest accrual.
You do not need to record the payment of interest.
Date Account Title Debit Credit
1/1/11 Cash The accounts for the first entry have been entered
Premium on Bonds Payable enter the amounts and record the remaining entries.
Bonds Payable Start each entry opposite the date
12/31/11
12/31/12
12/31/13
12/31/13

books and brew bb is a large city bookstore that sells books and music cd 039 s and 496280

Books and Brew (BB) is a large city bookstore that sells books and music CD’s, and also has a cafe. Currently, BB uses a single-driver system to allocate its operating costs to each of its three product lines, using the the number of items sold as the single cost driver. But BB’s management is concerned that this allocation system may not be providing the best information for making a variety of pricing decisions. BB’s operating costs for 2012 were as follows:

Purchasing department$460,000

Receiving department $437,000

Shelf-stocking employee salaries $476,000

Cashiers and floor employee salaries $144,000

2012 information about BB’s product lines is also available:

Books CD’s Cafe
Revenue $3,690,000 $2,185,000 $788,000
Cost of merchandise $2,609,000 $1,505,000 $525,000
Number of purchase orders placed 2,730 2,460 1,830
Number of deliveries received 1,380 1,770 1,540
Hours of shelf stocking time 14,700 14,500 10,400
Number of items sold 115,000 111,000

362,000

Using BB’s single-driver system to allocate its operating costs, how much was allocated to Books in 2012?

If BB had used an activity-based costing system to allocate its opearting costs in 2012, how much would have been allocated to CD’s? For cashiers and employee salaries, use number of items sold as the cost driver. For all other costs, the appropriate drivers should be clear.

the boston trading company whose accounting year ends on december 31 had the followi 496283

The Boston Trading Company, whose accounting year ends on December 31, had the following normal balances in its general ledger at December 31.

Cash $19,500
Accounts Receivable 84,900
Inventory 109,500
Prepaid Insurance 9,000
Office Supplies 6,300
Furniture & Fixtures 31,500
Accumulated Depreciation – Furn. & Fixtures 7,500
Delivery Equipment 126,000
Accumulated Depreciation – Delivery Equipment 18,000
Accounts Payable 61,500
Long-term Notes Payable 45,000
Common Stock 112,500
Retained Earnings 77,100
Sales Revenue 945,000
Cost of Goods Sold 606,000
Utilities Expense 7,200
Salaries Expense 207,000
Delivery Expense 16,200
Advertising Expense 8,400
Rent Expense 21,600
Income Tax Expense 13,500

During the year, the accounting department prepared monthly statements but no adjusting entries were made in the journals and ledgers. Data for the year-end procedures are as follows:

Prepaid insurance, December 31 $1,200
Depreciation Expense on furniture and fixures for year 1,800
Depreciation Expense on delivery equip. for the year 14,000
Salaries Payable, December 31 3,000
Unused office supplies on December 31 1,000

What are the total operating expenses for the year ended December 31st?

break even accounting 496285

1. Determine the missing amounts in the following table:

Unit Sales Price Unit Variable Costs Unit Contribution Margin Contribution Margin Ratio

22.00 $10 $____________________ _______________

____________ $10 24.00 __________________

50.00 _________________ ______________________ 25%

2. Calculating Contribution Margin and Contribution Margin Ratio

Juniper Enterprises sells handmade clocks. Its variable cost per clock is $6, and each clock sells for $24. Calculate Junipers contribution margin per unit and contribution margin ratio. If the companys fixed costs total 6,660, detemine how many clocks juniper must sell to break even

3. How many units must Juniper sell to earn a profit of atleast 5,400

4. Suppose Juniper raises its price by 20 percent, but costs do not change. What is its new break even point?

5. Laguna Print makes advertising hangers that are placed on doorknobs. It charges 0.04 and estimates its variable cost to be 0.01 per hanger. Lagunas total fixed cost is $4,500 per month, which consists primarily of printer depreciation and rent. Calculate the number of advertising hangers that Laguna must sell in order to break even.

6. Jasper Company has sales of $185,000 and a break even sales point of 120,000. Compute Jaspers margin of safety and its margin of safety ratio

7. Heather Hudson makes stuffed teddy bears. Recent information for her business follows.

selling price per bear =35

total fixed cost per month=1,500

variable cost per bear = 24

If heather wants to earn 1,250 in profit next month, how many bears will she have to sell

8.If she sells 275 bears next month, determine the margin of safety units, sales dollars, and as a percentage of sales.

9. Seascape Company has two products: Product a has a contribution margin per unit of $4 and Product B has a contribution of $6 per unit. Calculate the weighted average unit contribution margin if Seascape has a 25/75 product mix. Explain how a shift in the product mix would affect Seascapes weighted average contirbution margin and its break even point

break even point and effects on operating leverage on profitablity 496286

Inman Manufacturing Company makes a product that it sells for $60 per unit. The company incurs

variable manufacturing costs of $24 per unit. Variable Selling expenses are $12 per unit, annual fixed

manufacturing costs are $189,000, and fixed selling and administrative costs are $141,000 per year.

Determine the break-even point in units and dollars using the following approaches.

a. Equation method

b. Contribution margin per unit

c. Contribution margin ratio

d. Confirm your results by preparing a contribution margin income statement for the break-even

sales volume.

Then the next problem I have is this.

Webster Training Services (WTS) provides instruction on the use of computer software for the

employees of its corporate clients. It offers courses in the clients offices on the clients equipment. The

only major expense WTS incurs is instructor salaries; it pays instructors $5,000 per course taught. WTS

recently agreed to offer a course of instruction to the employees of Chambers Incorporated at a price of

$400 per student. Chambers estimated that 20 students would attend the course.

Base your answer on the preceding information:

a. Relative to the number of students in a single course, is the cost of instruction a fixed or variable

cost? Pretty sure this is variable

b. Determine the profit, assuming 20 students attend the course.

c. Determine the profit, assuming a 10 percent increase in enrollment (i.e., enrollment increases to

22 students). What is the percentage change in profitability

d. Determine the profit, assuming a 10 percent decrease in enrollment (i.e., enrollment decreases

to 18 students). What is the percentage change in profitability

e. Explain why a 10 percent shift in enrollment produces more than a 10 percent shift in

profitability. Use the term that identifies this phenomenon.

breakeven point amp margin of safety 496287

1.

Last month when Harrison Creations, Inc., sold 40,000 units, total sales were $300,000, total variable expenses were $240,000, and fixed expenses were $45,000.

Required:

a.

What is the company s contribution margin (CM) ratio?

b.

Estimate the change in the company s net operating income if it were to increase its total sales by $1,500.

2.

[The following information applies to the questions displayed below.]

Maxson Products distributes a single product, a woven basket whose selling price is $8 and whose variable cost is $6 per unit. The company s monthly fixed expense is $5,500.

Required:

a.

Compute for the company s break-even point in unit sales using the equation method.

b.Compute for the company s break-even point in sales dollars using the equation method and the CM ratio.(Do not round intermediate calculations.Round your CM ratio to 2 decimal places.)

CM ratio______________________

Break-even point in dollar sales________________________________

4.

Mohan Corporation is a distributor of a sun umbrella used at resort hotels. Data concerning next month s budget appear below:

Selling price

$25

per unit

Variable expenses

$15

per unit

Fixed expenses

$8,500

per month

Unit sales

1,000

units per month


Required:

a.

Compute the company s margin of safety.

b. Compute the company s margin of safety as a percentage of its sales. (%)

breakfasttime cereal company manufactures two breakfast cereals in a joint process c 496288

Breakfasttime Cereal Company manufactures two breakfast cereals in a joint process. Cost and quantity information is as follows:

Joint Cost Cereal Quantity at Split-Off Point Sales Price per Kilogram

$30,000 Yummies ………………… 12,000 kilograms ………………………………. $2.00

Crummies ……………….. 8,000 kilograms ………………………………. 2.50

Required:Use the physical-units method to allocate the company s joint production cost between Yummies and Crummies.

Refer to the data given in the preceding exercise.

Required:Use the relative-sales-value method to allocate Breakfasttime Cereal Company s joint production cost between Yummies and Crummies.

Refer to the data given in Exercise 17 20 . Breakfasttime Cereal Company has an opportunity to process its Crummies further into a mulch for ornamental shrubs. The additional processing operation costs $.50 per kilogram, and the mulch will sell for $3.50 per kilogram.

Required:

1.Should Breakfasttime s management decide to process Crummies into the mulch? Why?

2.Suppose the company does process Crummies into the mulch. Use the net-realizable-value method to allocate the joint production cost between the mulch and the Yummies.

based on the following information what would be the total on the credit side of a p 496226

Based on the following information, what would be the total on the Credit side of a post- closing trial balance, assuming all accounts have a normal balance?

Cash $6,874 Dividends $3,200
Accounts receivable 14,933 Consulting fees earned 14,918
Office supplies 2,745 Rent expense 3,793
Land 38,353 Salaries expense 6,762
Office equipment 15,735 Telephone expense 680
Accounts payable 6,583 Miscellaneous expense 400
Common stock 55,690 Retained Earnings ?
$85,223
$77,191
$93,475
$78,640
$62,356

based on the information provided below prepare the statement of cash flows for the 496227

Based on the information provided below, prepare the statement of cash flows for the Gulp-it-Down Coffee Co.

Gulp-it-Down Coffee Co.

Comparative Balance Sheet

For the Year Ended December 31, 2012

2012

2011

Assets

Cash

140,000

160,000

Accounts Receivables

400,000

380,000

Inventory

480,000

420,000

Fixed Assets (net of accumulated Depreciation)

1,860,000

1,720,000

Less: Accumulated Depreciation

(1,000,000)

(900,000)

Total

1,880,000

1,780,000

Liabilities & Owner s Equity

Accounts Payable

240,000

260,000

Accrued expense

120,000

100,000

Bonds Payable

780,000

720,000

Capital Stock

420,000

420,000

Retained Earnings

320,000

280,000

Total

1,880,000

1,780,000

Additional Information:

(1.) Net income for the year amounted to $60,000, and cash dividends were declared and paid in the amount of $20,000.

(2.) Gulp-it-Down Coffee Co.’s only noncash expense was depreciation Expense which totaled $100,000.

(3.) The company purchased plant assets for $140,000.

(4.) Bonds payable in the amount of $60,000 were issued during the year.

on the basis of the following data for the lwb corporation for the current year and 496229

On the basis of the following data for the LWB Corporation for the current year and the preceding year ended December 31, prepare a statement of cash flows, using the indirect method of presenting cash flows from operating activities.

December 31, 2009 December 31, 2008

Cash $75,700 $64,200

Accounts Receivable (net) 70,500 79,350

Inventories 99,500 87,500

Equipment 390,000 350,000

Accumulated Depreciation (150,000) (160,000)

TOTAL= 485,700 421,050

Accounts Payable – Trade 52,750 47,750

Cash Dividends Payable 10,000 12,500

Common Stock, $5 par 225,000 200,000

Premium on common stock 120,000 100,000

retained earnings 77,950 60,800

TOTAL= 485,700 421,050

The following additional data was obtained from the accounting records:

1. Equipment costing $90,000 was purchased for cash

2. Equipment costing $50,000 with accumulated depreciation of $35,000 was sold for $10,000

3. common stock was issued for cash

4. there was a $47,150 credit to retained earnings for net income.

5. there was a $30,000 debit to retained earnings for cash dividends declared.

batista company production budget 496232

On January 1, 2013 the Batista Company budget committee has reached agreement on the following data for the 6 months ending June 30, 2013.
Sales units: First quarter 5,000; second quarter 6,000; third quarter 7,000
Ending raw materials inventory: 50% of the next quarter’s production requirements
Ending finished goods inventory: 30% of the next quarter’s expected sales units
Third-quarter production: 7,250 units
The ending raw materials and finished goods inventories at December 31, 2012, follow the same percentage relationships to production and sales that occur in 2013. Three pounds of raw materials are required to make each unit of finished goods. Raw materials purchased are expected to cost $4 per pound.

Complete the production budget by quarters for the 6-month period ended June 30, 2013.
BATISTA COMPANY
Production Budget
For the Six Months Ending June 30, 2013

Quarter Six
1 2 Months
Add:
Total required units
Less:
Required production units

bb115005s introduction to accounting and finance new footwear product 496233

Assignment Brief Semester 1 2011/12

NEW FOOTWEAR PRODUCT

SCENARIO:

Youhave developed a footwear product, which you believe could revolutionize the footwear market.

Following on from the Dragon s Den success of Levi Root s Reggae Reggae Sauce (search the internet if you are unfamiliar with this story), you have decided to make a pitch to a small group of potential investors.

You know that any potential investor will expect you to have a good knowledge of how much your product will cost to produce and also of the expected level of sales and profit your product is predicted to make.

REQUIRED:

  1. Provide a list of the assumptions upon which you are basing your revenue and cost figures. 5 marks
  2. Prepare a marginal costing cost statement for your product on a per unit and 12 months sales/production basis. 10 marks
  3. Produce a break-even analysis (table and graph) for your product based on 12 months activity 15 marks
  4. Produce the following financial documents for the first 12 months of trading:
    1. Cash Budget 20 marks
    2. Forecast Income Statement 10 marks
    3. Forecast Balance Sheet 10 marks
  5. Write a 1,000 word pitch explaining the costing and financial data from tasks 1-4 above, to your potential investors. 30 marks

Total 100 marks

2744 Words

10 Sources

Fully Referenced

bcom 275 complete course material all class assignments and dqs 496234

BCOM 275 All Class Assignments and DQs A Graded Material

BCOM 275 Week 1 Individual Exercise 1.1

Completeexercise 1.1 from Ch. 1 of Communicating in the Workplace.

Choosetwo misunderstandings you experienced and fill out the chart for these.

Respondto questions 1 and 2 shown under the chart for each example of a misunderstanding. In your response, include the following:

  • Cite a meaningful misunderstanding rather than a general or less material misunderstanding.
  • Use business- or work-related examples rather than personal ones.

Identify the roles of the sender and receiver, such as manager, peer, subordinate, client, vendor, and so forth.

BCOM 275 week 2 Individual Assignment Demonstrative Communication Paper

Writea 700- to 1,050-word paper describing demonstrative communication. Demonstrative communication includes nonverbal and unwritten communication and involves such things as facial expressions, tone of voice, body language, and so forth. Include the following elements in your paper:

  • Provide examples showing how demonstrative communication can be effective and ineffective, positive and negative, for the sender and receiver.
  • Explain how demonstrative communication involves listening and responding.

Formatyour paper consistent with APA guidelines.

BCOM 275 week 3 Individual Assignment Article Rebuttal

Locatean article on a controversial subject where the author makes an argument you do not agree with.

Writea 350- to 700-word rebuttal to the article using valid arguments and supporting data. In the rebuttal, offer an analysis in which you do the following:

  • Analyze the reliability, credibility, and validity of the data used by the author.
  • Identify any logical fallacies in the argument.

Formatyour rebuttal consistent with APA guidelines.

BCOM 275 week 3 Team Assignment Learning Team Debate Paper Outline

Resources:Debate Paper assignment requirements located in Week Five.

Createan outline for the Debate Paper that will be used to write the paper. Include all references to be used in the paper.

Resource: Over 30 Workers Trapped After Chilean Copper Mine Collapse article found in the Electronic Reserve Readings.

Researchadditional articles and information about the Chilean mine collapse.

BCOM 275 week 4 Individual Assignment Knowing Your Audience Paper and Communication Release

Writea 700- to 1,050-word paper using this and other articles as a resource. Because communications must be designed with the audience in mind, answer the following questions:

  • What are some considerations to remember given the different roles and people in the audience?
  • What would be the potential needs of the families of the miners in receiving a message about this incident?
  • What would be the potential needs of the company s employees when receiving a message about this incident?
  • What actions must you take before and after the message is delivered to ensure that it was received as intended?

Format the paper consistent with APA guidelines.

Drafttwo communications from the mining company announcing the accident, using what you have learned about the audience and effective messages. One communication should be directed to the families of the trapped miners and the other as an internal news release to employees in the company. For both, identify the most appropriate channel face-to-face, e-mail, video, memo, and so on.

BCOM 275 Week 5 Learning Team Debate Paper, Should Children Be Exposed to Social Media?

Resource:Learning Team Debate Paper Outline

Writea 1,750- to 2,100-word debate paper in which the team creates a debate of a current event or other controversial topic and provides an analysis of arguments presented for both sides. Complete the following in the paper:

  • Introduction: Introduce the issue that is the subject of the debate
  • Body
  • Include a minimum of two but no more than four arguments for the pro and con sides of the debate.
  • Evaluate any potential ethical, moral, or legal issues.
  • Conclusion
  • Identify the team s determination of the more persuasive argument.
  • Reflect on the arguments presented and reveal the team s consensus.
  • Base the conclusion solely on the pro and con arguments.
  • Include a rebuttal of weaker arguments.
  • Explain why the selected arguments were more persuasive.

Formatthe paper consistent with APA guidelines.

Citeat least three sources.

Selectone of the following countries:

  • India
  • Japan
  • Brazil

Createa 350- to 500-word cultural evaluation in which you identify the ways that arguments or presentation of the arguments would need to be changed as the result of cultural differences in the country.

Formatthe evaluation consistent with APA guidelines.

be17 1 be17 2 garfield company purchased as a held to maturity investment 496235

BE17-1

Garfield Company purchased, as a held-to-maturity investment, $80,000 of the 9%, 5-year bonds of Chester Corporation for $74,086, which provides an 11% return. Prepare Garfield’s journal entries for (a) the purchase of the investment and (b) the receipt of annual interest and discount amortization. Assume effective interest amortization is used. (Round answers to zero decimal places, e.g. 25,000. List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)

BE17-2

Garfield Company purchased, as an available-for-sale securities, $80,000 of the 9%, 5-year bonds of Chester Corporation for $74,086, which provides an 11% return. Prepare Garfield’s journal entries for (a) the purchase of the investment, (b) the receipt of annual interest and discount amortization, and (c) the year-end fair value adjustment. The bonds have a year-end fair value of $75,500. Assume effective interest amortization is used. (Round answers to zero decimal places, e.g. 12,510. List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)

below are the accounts of super pool service inc the accounts have normal balances o 496244

Below are the accounts of Super Pool Service, Inc. The accounts have normal balances on June 30, 2012. The accounts are listed in no particular order.

Account Balance

Common stock $5,100

Accounts payable $4,400

Service revenue $17,100

Land $28,800

Note payable $9,500

Cash $5,200

Dividends $6,100

Utilities expense $2,100

Accounts receivable $10,600

Delivery expense $700

Retained earnings $25,600

Salary expense $8,200

Prepare the company s trial balance as of June 30, 2012, listing accounts in proper sequence, as illustrated in the chapter. For example, Accounts Receivable comes before Land. List the expense with the largest balance first, the expense with the next largest balance second, and so on.

below are the accounts of super pool service inc the accounts have normal balances o 496245

Below are the accounts of Super Pool Service, Inc. The accounts have normal balances on June 30, 2012. The accounts are listed in no particular order.

Account Balance
Common stock $5,100
Accounts payable $4,400
Service revenue $17,100
Land $28,800
Note payable $9,500
Cash $5,200
Dividends $6,100
Utilities expense $2,100
Accounts receivable $10,600
Delivery expense $700
Retained earnings $25,600
Salary expense $8,200

Prepare the company s trial balance as of June 30, 2012, listing accounts in proper sequence, as illustrated in the chapter. For example, Accounts Receivable comes before Land. List the expense with the largest balance first, the expense with the next largest balance second, and so on.

below find the trial balance for nybrostrand company prepare an income statement and 496246

Below find the trial balance for Nybrostrand Company. Prepare an income statement and balance sheet in good format. After you have completed the two statements comment on the success of the company. Support your answer with information from the financial statements you just prepared.

Nybrostrand Company

31-Dec-13

Trial Balance (accounts in alphabetical order)

Debit

Credit

Accounts payable

$ 78,000

Accounts receivable

$ 36,500

Cash

30,000

Common stock

10,000

Depreciation expense

24,350

Cost of goods sold

307,000

Equipment (net of depreciation)

415,000

Insurance

1,400

Inventory

34,000

Long-term debt

127,000

Marketing

4,500

Paid-in capital

50,000

Property taxes

16,900

Rent

28,000

Retained earnings

Revenues

586,000

Salaries

50,000

Utilities

6,700

Total

954,350

851,000

the bennett company uses standard costing the company makes and sells a single produ 496247

The Bennett Company uses standard costing. The company makes and sells a single products called “The Hopper”. The following data are for the month of October. Note: all materials purchased was used in production. There were no beginning or ending raw materials inventories.

Actual cost of direct labor $65,975 Labor rate variance 2,275 U Total labor variance 7,175 U Standard cost per direct labor hour $7 Standard cost per pound of material $6 Actual pounds of material used 11,200 Material price variance $2,800 F Standard pounds of material per unit 2.5 Total materials variance $1,400 U

1.) The total number of units of “The Hopper” produced during October was A.)9,100 B.)4,480 C.)8,400 D.)4,200

2.) The standard direct labor hours allowed to produce one unit of “The Hopper” was A.)2 hours B.)3 hours C.)1.75 hours D.)2.17 hours

3.) The actual labor cost per hour was A.)$7.00 B.)$7.85 C.)$7.25 D.)$8.00

4.) The actual material cost per pound was A.)$6.40 B.)$5.75 C.)$5.40 D.)$6.25

berry 039 s bug blasters 496250

Calculate the following for Berry’s Bug Blasters

Liquidity ratios

o Current ratio

o Acid-test, or quick, ratio

o Receivables turnover

o Inventory turnover

Profitability ratios

o Asset turnover

o Profit margin

o Return on assets

o Return on common stockholders equity

Solvency ratios

o Debt to total assets

o Times interest earned

Show your calculations for each ratio.

Create a horizontal and vertical analysis for the balance sheet and the income statement.

Write a 350- to 700-word memo to the CEO of your selected organization in which you discuss your findings from your ratio calculations and your horizontal and vertical analysis. In your memo, address the following questions:

What do the liquidity, profitability, and solvency ratios reveal about the financial position of the company?

Which users may be interested in each type of ratio?

What does the collected data reveal about the performance and position of the company?

Formatyour memo consistent with APA guidelines.

best of best only 496251

audting discussions

“Unbiased Reporting” Please respond to the following:

  • Analyze the need for unbiased financial reporting. Based on your analysis, determine at least two (2) drivers that may cause financial reporting to be biased. Provide a rationale to support your response.
  • Analyze the audit opinion formulation process and suggest at least one (1) improvement to the process to strengthen audit opinions. Provide a rationale to support your suggestion.

Topic of Discussion” Please respond to the following:

  • Analyze the changes made to corporate governance rules since the implementation of the Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002. Based on your analysis, formulate an opinion on whether or not these changes are sufficient in preventing financial fraud. Provide a rationale for your response.
  • Debate it! Audit committees are an effective tool for detecting and preventing fraud. Provide a rationale for your response.

better food company recently acquired an olive oil processing company 496252

Better Food Company recently acquired an olive oil processing company
that has an annual capacity of 2,000,000 liters, and that processed and sold
1,400,000 liters last year at a price of $4 per liter. The purpose of the
acquisition was to furnish oil for the Cooking Division. The Cooking
Division needs 800,000 liters of oil per year. It has been purchasing oil
from supplies at the market price. Production costs at capacity of the olive
oil company, now a division, are as follows:
Direct materials per liter $ 1.00
Direct processing labor $ 0.50
Variable processing overhead $ 0.24
Fixed processing overhead $ 0.40
Total $ 2.14
Management is trying to decide what transfer price to use for sales from
the newly acquired company to the Cooking Division. The manager of the
Olive Oil Division argues that $4, the market price, is appropriate. The
manager of the Cooking Division argues that the cost of $2.14 should be
used, or perhaps a lower price, since fixed overhead cost should be
recomputed with the larger volume. Any output of the Olive Oil Division not
sold to the Cooking Division can be sold to outsiders for $4 per liter.
Required:
a Compute the operating income for the Olive Oil Division using a
transfer price of $4.
b Compute the operating income for the Olive Oil Division using a
transfer price of $2.14.
c What transfer price(s) do you recommend? Compute the operating
income for the Olive Oil Division using your recommendation.

baker amp baker chapters 9 12 healthcare finance hlth420 1304a 01 496217

Healthcare Finance: HLTH420 – 1304A 01

Unit3 – Individual Project

500-700 words

Your facility has the following payer mix:

40% commercial insurances = 800

25% Medicare insurance = 500

15% Medicaid insurance = 300

15% liability insurance = 300

5% all others including self-pay = 100

Assume that for the time in question you have 2000 cases in the proportions above. (what are the proportions of the total cases for each payer?)

(Calculated above )

The average Medicare rate for each case is $6200- use this as the baseline. Commercial insurances average 110% of Medicare, Medicaid averages 65% of Medicare, Liability insurers average 200% of Medicare and the others average 100% of Medicare rates. (what are the individual reimbursement rates for all 5 payers?)

Calculating Individual Reimbursement Rates for the 5 Payers (Commercial Medicare Medicaid Liability Self pay / Other

Medicare Rate (Baseline) $6200

Commercial Insurance 110%

Medicaid 65% of Medicare

Liability Insurers 200% of Medicare

Others Average 100% of Medicare Rates

1. What are the expected rates of reimbursement for this time frame for each payer? What is your expected A/R?

2. What rate should you charge for these services (assuming one charge rate for all payers)?(this gives you your total A/R.) Calculate the total charges for all cases based on this rate.

3. What is the difference between the two A/R rates above? Can you collect it from the patient? What happens to the difference?

Rate to be charged for Services $12,400 *125% Total= $15,500 2000 *$15,500= 31,00,000.00You may not collect over R/C contracted fees if you are a Participating Provider. However you would be able to collect on a self-pay patient.Differences would need to be a write-off. Cost Fixed Variable Direct IndirectMaterials/Supplies Variable Direct Wages Fixed Direct Utility/Building Variable Indirect Medications Variable Direct Licensing of Facility Fixed Indirect Insurances Fixed Indirect PerDiem Staff Variable Direct Materials/Supplies $ 2,270.00 Wages $ 2,000.00 Utility/Building 1,125.00 Insurances $ 175.00 TFC/TVC $2,175.00 $3,395.00 Contribution Margin $14,105,XXX-XX-XXXX000 $5,565,000.00 CM per case (NNN) NNN-NNNN2000 $2,782.50 BREAK EVEN $2600000/$2782.5 934.41 $150,000 PROFIT 150,000=2782.50V -(NNN) NNN-NNNN P=(V x AR) – TFC V= (NNN) NNN-NNNN The only payers possible to use for an NIC

4. Which of these costs are fixed (does not change z)? Which are variable(changes)? Direct or indirect? Your costs can be either direct or indirect, which is a description of how they are associated with production. (Direct costs are associated with specific units while indirect costs are a lump sum that goes into doing business in general and cannot be easily measured with the production of a specific thing).

o materials/supplies (gowns, drapes, bedsheets) variable indirect

o Wages (nurses, technicians) fixed indirect

o Utility, building, usage exp (lights, heat, technology) fixed indirect

o Medications fixed direct

o

o Licensing of facility fixed indirect

o Per diem staff fixed indirect

o Insurances (malpractice, business etc.) fixed direct

5. Calculate the contribution margin for one case (in $) with the following costs for this period, per case: a. materials/supplies: $2270 b. Wages: $2000 c. Utility, building, usage exp: $1125 d. Insurances (malpractice, business etc.): $175

6. Using the above information, determine which is fixed (remains the same ) and which cost is variable (changes). Then calculate the breakeven volume of cases in units for this period.

7. Suppose you want to make $150,000 profit between this period and next period to fund an expansion to the NICU, how many cases would you have to see? At what payer mix would this

the balance sheet that follows indicates the capital structure for nealon inc flotat 496219

The balance sheet that follows indicates the capital structure for Nealon Inc. Flotation costs are (a) 15 percent of market value for a new bond issue, and (b) $2.01 per share for preferred stock. The dividends for common stock were $2.50 last year and are projected to have an annual growth rate of 6 percent. The firm is in a 34 percent tax bracket. What is the weighted average cost of capital if the firm s finances are in the following proportions? type of financing percentage of future financing Bonds (8%, $1,000 par, 16-year maturity) 38% Preferred stock (5,000 shares outstanding, $50 par, $1.50 dividend) 15% Common equity 47% Total 100% a. Market prices are $1,035 for bonds, $19 for preferred stock, and $35 for common stock. There will be sufficient internal common equity funding (i.e., retained earnings) available such that the firm does not plan to issue new common stock. Calculate the firm s weighted average cost of capital. b. In part a we assumed that Nealon would have sufficient retained earnings such that it would not need to sell additional common stock to finance its new investments. Consider the situation now, when Nealon s retained earnings anticipated for the coming year are expected to fall short of the equity requirement of 47 percent of new capital raised. Consequently, the firm foresees the possibility that new common shares will have to be issued. To facilitate the sale of shares, Nealon s investment banker has advised management that they should expect a price discount of approximately 7 percent, or $2.45 per share. Under these terms, the new shares should provide net proceeds of about $32.55. What is Nealon s cost of equity capital when new shares are sold, and what is the weighted average cost of the added funds involved in the issuance of new shares?

the balance sheet of williams company as of december 31 20×8 follows 496220

Week Four Assignment

1. Comprehensive budgeting

The balance sheet of Williams Company as of December 31, 20X8, follows.

WILLIAMS COMPANY

Balance Sheet

December 31, 12X8

Assets

Cash

$4,595

Accounts receivable

10,000

Finished goods (575 units x $7.00)

4,025

Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50)

1,380

Plant & equipment

$50,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

10,000

40,000

Total assets

$60,000

Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity

Accounts payable to suppliers

$14,000

Common stock

$25,000

Retained earnings

21,000

46,000

Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity

$60,000

The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records:

  1. All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 20X9 are: January, 1,600 units,- February, 1,700 units; March, 1,900 units; April, 2,100 units; May, 2,200 units.
  2. Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales.
  3. Williams uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs.
  4. Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month.
  5. Williams product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs $9.

Instructions:

A. Rounding computations to the nearest dollar, prepare the following for January through March:

1) Sales budget

2) Schedule of cash collections

3) Production budget

4) Direct material purchases budget

5) Schedule of cash disbursements for material purchases

6) Direct labor budget

B. Determine the balances in the following accounts as of March 31:

1) Accounts Receivable

2) Direct Materials

3) Accounts Payable

2. Basic flexible budgeting

Sydney, Inc., has the following budgeted production costs:

Direct materials

$0.45 per unit

Direct labor

1.80 per unit

Variable factory overhead

2.30 per unit

Fixed factory overhead

Supervision

$26,000

Maintenance

18,000

Other

12,000

The company normally manufactures between 20,000 and 25,000 units each quarter. Should output exceed 25,000 units, maintenance and other fixed costs are expected to increase by $6,000 and $4,500, respectively.

During the recent quarter ended March 31, Sydney produced 25,500 units and incurred the following costs:

Direct Materials

$11,710

Direct Labor

47,175

Variable factory overhead

53,940

Fixed factory overhead

Supervision

24,500

Maintenance

23,700

Other

16,800

Total production costs

$177,825

Instructions:

a. Prepare a flexible budget for 21,000, 23,000, and 24,500 units of activity.

b. Was Sydney s experience in the quarter cited better or worse than anticipated? Prepare an appropriate performance report and explain your answer.

c. Explain the benefit of using flexible budgets (as opposed to static budgets) in the measurement of performance.

3. Straightforward variance analysis

Andy Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 551 follows.

Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50

$26.00

Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50

68.00

Variable factory overhead: 8 hours

@ $7.00

56.00

Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours

@ 2.5

20.00

Total standard cost per unit

$170.00

The following information pertains to activity for December:

  1. Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit. All materials were consumed in operations.
  2. Andy incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity.
  3. Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year.
  4. Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units.

Instructions:

a. Compute Andy s direct material variances.

b. Compute Andy’s direct labor variances.

c. Compute Andy’s variances for factory overhead.

baneer inc bank reconciliation solution 496222

The cash transactions and cash balances of Banner, Inc. for July were as follows:

  1. The ledger account for Cash showed a balance at July 31 of $125,568.
  2. The July bank statement showed a closing balance of $114,828.
  3. The cash received on July 31 amounted to $16,000. It was left at the bank in the night depository chute after banking hours on July 31 and therefore was not recorded by the bank on the July statement.
  4. Also included with the July bank statement was a debit memorandum from the bank for $50 representing service charges for July.
  5. A credit memorandum enclosed with the July bank statement indicated that a non-interest bearing note receivable for $4,000 from Rene Manes, left with the bank for collection, had been collected and the proceeds credited to the account of Banner, Inc.
  6. Comparison of the paid checks returned by the bank with the entries in the accounting records revealed that check no. 821 for $519, issued July 15 in payment for office equipment, had been erroneously entered in Banner s records as $915.
  7. Examination of the paid checks also revealed that three checks, all issued in July, had not yet been paid by the bank: no. 811 for $314; no.814 for $625; no. 823 for $175.
  8. Included with the July bank statement was a $200 check drawn by Howard Williams, a customer of Banner, Inc. This check was marked NSF . It had been included in the deposit of July 27 but had been charged back against the company s account on July 31.

Instructions:

    1. Prepare a bank reconciliation for Banner, Inc. at July 31.
    2. Prepare journal entries (in general journal form) to adjust the accounts at July 31. Assume that the accounts have not been closed.
    3. State the amount of cash that should be included in the balance sheet at July 31.
    4. Explain why the balance per the company s bank statement is often larger than the balance shown in it s accounting records.

barton company uses the indirect method of preparing the statement of cash flows and 496224

Barton Company uses the indirect method of preparing the Statement of Cash Flows and reports the following comparative balance sheet information. As customary, the most recent data is in the first column.

Balance Sheets 12-31-2012 12-31-2011

Cash $ 70,000 $ 80,000

Inventory 135,000 155,000

Equipment 255,000 205,000

Accumulated depreciation (40,000) (25,000)

420,000 415,000

Accounts Payable $ 87,000 $ 110,000

Bonds Payable 73,000 80,000

Common Stock 120,000 110,000

Retained Earnings 140,000 115,000

420,000 415,000

Additional Information:
Net income for 2012 was $30,000.
No equipment was disposed of during 2012.

Required:

Prepare a Cash Flow Statement using the indirect method.

based on the following data would you recommend buying or renting 496225

1. Given the following information, calculate the net asset value for the Chapter 7

1. Based on the following data, would you recommend buying or renting? Rental Costs Annual rent, $7,380 Insurance, $145 Security deposit, $650 Insurance/maintenance, $1,050 Buying Costs Annual mortgage payments, $9,800 (9,575 is interest), property taxes, $1,780, down payment/closing costs, $4,500 Growth in equity, $225 Estitmated annual appreciation, $1,700 Assume an after-tax savings interst rate of 6 percent and a tax rate of 28 percent.

2. Many locations require a monthly fee for various services. At $160 a month, how much would a homeowner pay over a 10-year period for living in this housing facility?

Jaime and Peter Dawson own 250 shares of IBM common stock. IBM’s quarterly dividend is $0.30 per share. What is the amount of the dividend check the Dawson couple will receive for this quarter?

3. Jim Johansen noticed that corporation he is considering investing in is about to pay a quarterly dividend. The record date is March 15. In order to receive this quarterly dividend what is the last date that he could purchase stock in this corporation and receive this quarter’s dividend payment.

4.Janine is 25 and has a good job at biotechnology company. She currently has $5,000 in an IRA, an important part of her retirement nest egg. She believes her IRA will grow at an annual rate of 8 percent, and she plans to leave it untouched until she retires at age 65. Janine estimates that she will need $875,000 in her total retirement nest egg by the time she is 65 in order to have retirement income of $20,000 a year (she expects that Social Security will pay her an additional $15,000 a year).

a. How much will Janine’s IRA be worth when she needs to start withdrawing money from it when she retires?

b. How much money will she have to accumulate in her company’s 401k plan over the next 40 years in order to reach her retirement income goal?

5. Assume your gross pay per pay period is $2,000 and you are in the 33 percent tax bracket. Calculate your net pay and spendable income in the following situations.

a. You save $200 per pay period after paying income tax on $2,000.

b.You save $200 per pay period in a tax-sheltered annuity.

6. Jan Throng invested $15,000 in the AIM Charter Fund. The fund charges a 5.50ercent commission when shares are purchased. Calculate the amount of commission Jan must pay.

assistance needed 496172

M1A2: Discussion Cost Accumulation System

When companies accumulate costs, they generally use either a job-order or a process costing system. The type of system used often varies based on the type of product or service provided.

Using the module readings, Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet, locate an article on how a company utilized a cost accumulation system.

Respond to the following:

  • Identify and describe the type of cost accumulation system that was used.
  • Explain how the system was used and, specifically, how overhead was allocated.
  • Discuss how the use of cost accumulation enhanced the company s operations.

Support your responses with reasons and examples. Examples and reasoning must be included to demonstrate your understanding.

Write your initial response in 3 4 paragraphs. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.

review and comment on at least two peers responses.

Do the following when responding to your peers:

  • Read all posts from your peers.
  • Explain how their experiences differ from yours.
  • Provide substantive comments by contributing new, relevant information or quotes from course readings, Web sites, or other sources; building on the remarks or questions of others; or sharing practical examples of key concepts from your experiences, professional or personal.
Assignment 2 Grading Criteria Maximum Points

Initial response:

  • Was insightful, original, accurate, and timely.
  • Was substantive and demonstrated advanced understanding of concepts.
  • Compiled/synthesized theories and concepts drawn from a variety of sources to support statements and conclusions.
16

Discussion response and participation:

  • Responded to a minimum of two peers in a timely manner.
  • Offered points of view supported by research.
  • Asked challenging questions that promoted the discussion.
  • Drew relationships between one or more points in the discussion.
16

Writing:

  • Wrote in a clear, concise, formal, and organized manner.
  • Responses were error free.
  • Information from sources, where applicable, was paraphrased appropriately and accurately cited.
8
Total: 40

assorted questions solution 4 5 6 7 496173

Question 4
Trigen Corp. management will invest cash flows of $905,963, $529,350, $1,038,985, $818,400, $1,239,644, and $1,617,848 in research and development over the next six years. If the appropriate interest rate is 5.46 percent, what is the future value of these investment cash flows six years from today? (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 15.25.)
Future value $

Question 5
You wrote a piece of software that does a better job of allowing computers to network than any other program designed for this purpose. A large networking company wants to incorporate your software into their systems and is offering to pay you $466,000 today, plus $466,000 at the end of each of the following six years for permission to do this. If the appropriate interest rate is 7 percent, what is the present value of the cash flow stream that the company is offering you? (Round answer to the nearest whole dollar, e.g. 5,275.)
Present value $

Question 6
Barbara is considering investing in a stock and is aware that the return on that investment is particularly sensitive to how the economy is performing. Her analysis suggests that four states of the economy can affect the return on the investment. Using the table of returns and probabilities below, find
Probability Return
________________________________________
Boom 0.4 25.00%
Good 0.4 15.00%
Level 0.1 10.00%
Slump 0.1 -5.00%
________________________________________
What is the expected return on Barbara s investment? (Round answer to 3 decimal places, e.g. 0.076.)
Expected return

What is the standard deviation of the return on Barbara’s investment? (Round intermediate calculations and answer to 5 decimal places, e.g. 0.07680.)
Standard deviation

Question 7
Trevor Price bought 10-year bonds issued by Harvest Foods five years ago for $968.88. The bonds make semiannual coupon payments at a rate of 8.4 percent. If the current price of the bonds is $1,072.74, what is the yield that Trevor would earn by selling the bonds today? (Round intermediate calculations to 4 decimal places, e.g. 1.2514 and final answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 15.25%.)
Effective annual yield

assume fisher food products is thinking about three different size offerings 496176

Diana
Solution problem 8
Show all calculations in excel file
Question: Assume Fisher Food Products is thinking about three different size offerings for the issuance of additional shares.

Size of Order Public Price Net to Corporation
a. $ 1.6 million . $40 $36.70
b. $ 6.0 million $40 $37.28
c. $25.0 million .. $40 $38.12

What is the percentage underwriting spread for each size offer What principle does this demonstrate

Solution Problem 14
Show all calculations in excel file

Question: Winston Sporting Goods is considering a public offering of common stock. Its investment banker has informed the company that the retail price will be $18per share for 600,000 shares. The company will receive $16.50 per share and will incur $150,000 in regristration

a. What is the spread on this issue in percentage terms What are the total expenses of the issue as a percentage of total value (at retail) b. If the firm wanted to net $18 million from this issue, how many shares must be sold

Solution problem 22 Show all calculations in excel file
Question: The management of Mitchell Labs decided to go private in 2002 by buying in all 3 million of its outstanding shares at $19.50 per share. By 2006, management had restructured the company by selling of the petroleum research division for #13

Because these divisions had been only marginally profitable, Mitchell Labs is a stronger company after the restructuring. Mitchell is now able to concentrate exclusively on contract research and will generate earnings nper
a. What was the initial cost of Mitchell Labs to go private
b. What is the total value of the company from (1) the proceeds of the divisions that were sold, as well as (2) the current value of the 3 million shares(based on current earningsand a
c. What is the percentage return to the management of Mitchell Labs from the restructuring Use answers from parts a and b to determine this value.

assume that the following predictions were made for 2012 for one of the plants of mi 496177

I need answers to the below problems: M17-15, a-c & E17-21, a-d. Please provide the workup for the problems.

M17-15. Developing and Using a Predetermined Overhead Rate
Assume that the following predictions were made for 2012 for one of the plants of Milliken & Company:
– Total manufacturing overhead for the year $40,000,000
– Total machine hours for the year 2,000,000

Actual results for February 2012 were as follows:
– Manufacturing overhead . $5,520,000
– Machine hours . 310,000

Required
a. Determine the 2012 predetermined overhead rate per machine hour
b. Using the predetermined overhead rate per machine hour, determine the manufacturing overhead applied to Work-in-Process during February.
c. As of February 1, actual overhead was underapplied by $400,000. Determine the cumulative amount of any overapplied or underapplied overhead at the end of February.

E17.21. Analyzing Activity in Inventory Accounts
Select data concerning operations of Cascade Manufacturing Company for the past fiscal year follow:
Raw materials used .. $300,000
Total manufacturing costs charged to production during the year (includes raw materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead applied at a rate of 60 percent of direct labor costs 680,000
Cost of goods available for sale 826,000
Selling and general expenses .. 30,000
Inventories
Beginning Ending
Raw materials $70,000 $80,000
Work in process $85,000 30,000
Finished goods . $90,000 110,000
Required
Determine each of the following:
a. Cost of raw materials purchased
b. Direct labor costs charged to production
c. Cost of goods manufactured
d. Cost of goods sold

assume you work as an assistant accountant in the head office of a national movie re 496187

Assume you work as an assistant accountant in the head office of a national movie rental business, a la Blockbuster Inc. With the increasing popularity of online movie rental operations, your company has struggled to meet its earnings targets for the year. It is important for the company to meet its earnings targets this year because the company is renegotiating a bank loan next month, and the terms of that loan are likely to depend on the company’s reported financial success. Also, the company plans to issue more stock to the public in the upcoming year, to obtain funds for establishing its own presence in the online movie rental business. The chief financial officer ( CFO) has approached you with a solution to the earnings dilemma. She proposes that the depreciation period for the stock of reusable DVDs be extended from 3 months to 15 months. She explains that by lengthening the depreciation period, a smaller amount of depreciation expense will be recorded in the current year, resulting in a higher net income. She claims that generally accepted accounting principles require estimates like this, so it would not involve doing anything wrong.

Required: Discuss the CFOs proposed solution. In your discussion, consider the following questions. Will the change in depreciation affect net income in the current year in the way that the CFO described? How will it affect net income in the following year? Is the CFO correct when she claims that the change in estimated depreciation is allowed by GAAP? Who relies on the video company’s financial statements when making decisions? Why might their decisions be affected by the CFOs proposed solution? Is it possible that their decisions would not be affected? What should you do?

assuming use of direct labor hours to apply overhead to production calculate the uni 496190

Ontario, Inc. manufactures two products, Standard and Enhanced, and applies overhead on the basis of direct-labor hours. Anticipated overhead and direct-labor time for the upcoming accounting period is $800,000 and 25,000 hours, respectively. Information about the company’s products follows.

Standard: Enhanced:

Estimated production volume

3,000 units 4,000 units

Direct-material cost

$25 per unit $40 per unit

Direct labor per unit

3 hours at $12 per hour 4 hours at $12 per hour

Ontario’s overhead of $800,000 can be identified with three major activities: order processing ($150,000), machine processing ($560,000), and product inspection ($90,000). These activities are driven by number of orders processed, machine hours worked, and inspection hours, respectively.

Data relevant to these activities follow:

Orders Processed Machine Hours Worked Inspection Hours

Standard

300 18,000 2,000

Enhanced

200 22,000 8,000

Total

500 40,000 10,000

Top management is very concerned about declining profitability despite a healthy increase in sales volume. The decrease in income is especially puzzling because the company recently undertook a massive plant renovation during which new, highly automated machinery was installed machinery that was expected to produce significant operating efficiencies.

Using a Microsoft Excel format for calculations, complete the following:

  • Assuming use of direct-labor hours to apply overhead to production, calculate the unit manufacturing costs of the standard and enhanced products if the expected manufacturing volume is attained.
  • Assuming the use of activity-based costing, calculate the unit manufacturing cost of the standard and enhanced products if the expected manufacturing volume is attained.
  • Ontario s selling price is based heavily on cost:
    • Calculate which product is over cost and which is under cost by using direct-labor hours as an application base.
    • Explain if it is possible that this over costing and under costing is responsible for the profit issues the company is facing.
  • Illustrate how the solution will change if the following data changes:
    • The overhead associated with order processing is $300,000 and the overhead associated with product inspection is $270,000.

astrologer help 496192

1.

Liquidity ratios.Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:

Edison

Stagg

Thornton

Cash

$4,000

$2,500

$1,000

Short-term investments

3,000

2,500

2,000

Accounts receivable

2,000

2,500

3,000

Inventory

1,000

2,500

4,000

Prepaid expenses

800

800

800

Accounts payable

200

200

200

Notes payable: short-term

3,100

3,100

3,100

Accrued payables

300

300

300

Long-term liabilities

3,800

3,800

3,800

  1. Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?

2.

Computation and evaluation of activity ratios.The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:

20X5

20X4

Net credit sales

$832,000

$760,000

Cost of goods sold

440,000

350,000

Cash, Dec. 31

125,000

110,000

Average Accounts receivable

180,000

140,000

Average Inventory

70,000

50,000

Accounts payable, Dec. 31

115,000

108,000

  1. Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.

3.

Profitability ratios, trading on the equity.Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 20X7:

Net sales

$1,500,000

Interest expense

$120,000

Income tax expense

$80,000

Preferred dividends

$25,000

Net income

$130,000

Average assets

$1,100,000

Average common stockholders’ equity

$400,000

  1. Compute the profit margin ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
  2. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.

4.

Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

20X2

20X1

Current Assets

$76,000

$80,000

Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

99,000

90,000

Intangibles

25,000

50,000

Current Liabilities

40,800

48,000

Long-Term Liabilities

143,000

160,000

Stockholders Equity

16,200

12,000

Net Sales

500,000

500,000

Cost of Goods Sold

332,500

350,000

Operating Expenses

93,500

85,000

Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

5.

Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

20X2

20X1

Current Assets

$ 76,000

$ 80,000

Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

99,000

90,000

Intangibles

25,000

50,000

Current Liabilities

40,800

48,000

Long-Term Liabilities

143,000

160,000

Stockholders Equity

16,200

12,000

Net Sales

500,000

500,000

Cost of Goods Sold

332,500

350,000

Operating Expenses

93,500

85,000

Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.

LONE PINE COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)

20X2

20X1

Assets

Current Assets

Cash and Short-Term Investments

$ 400

$ 600

Accounts Receivable (net)

3,000

2,400

Inventories

2,000

2,200

Total Current Assets

$5,400

$5,200

Property, Plant, and Equipment

Land

$1,700

$ 600

Buildings and Equipment (net)

1,500

1,000

Total Property, Plant, and Equipment

$3,200

$1,600

Total Assets

$8,600

$6,800

Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

Current Liabilities

Accounts Payable

$1,800

$1,700

Notes Payable

1,100

1,900

Total Current Liabilities

$2,900

$3,600

Long-Term Liabilities

Bonds Payable

4,100

2,100

Total Liabilities

$7,000

$5,700

Stockholders Equity

Common Stock

$ 200

$ 200

Retained Earnings

1,400

900

Total Stockholders Equity

$1,600

$1,100

Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

$8,600

$6,800

LONE PINE COMPANY

Statement of Income and Retained Earnings

For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)

Net Sales*

$36,000

Less: Cost of Goods Sold

$20,000

Selling Expense

6,000

Administrative Expense

4,000

Interest Expense

400

Income Tax Expense

2,000

32,400

Net Income

$ 3,600

Retained Earnings, Jan. 1

900

$ 4,500

Cash Dividends Declared and Paid

3,100

Retained Earnings, Dec. 31

$ 1,400

*All sales are on account.

Instructions

Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:

a. Quick ratio

b. Current ratio

c. Inventory-turnover ratio

d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio

e. Return-on-assets ratio

f. Net-profit-margin ratio

g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity

h. Debt-to-total assets

i. Number of times that interest is earned

for astrologer only 496194

Kimm Company has gathered the following information about its product.

Direct materials: Each unit of product contains 3.10 pounds of materials. The average waste and spoilage per unit produced under normal conditions is 0.50 pounds. Materials cost $3 per pound, but Kimm always takes the 4.94% cash discount all of its suppliers offer. Freight costs average $0.40 per pound.

Direct labor. Each unit requires 1.40 hours of labor. Setup, cleanup, and downtime average 0.23 hours per unit. The average hourly pay rate of Kimm s employees is $10.40. Payroll taxes and fringe benefits are an additional $3.30 per hour.

Manufacturing overhead. Overhead is applied at a rate of $5.30 per direct labor hour.

Compute Kimm s total standard cost per unit.(Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25.)

Total standard cost per unit $

Lewis Company s standard labor cost of producing one unit of Product DD is 4.00 hours at the rate of $11.00 per hour. During August, 40,800 hours of labor are incurred at a cost of $11.20 per hour to produce 10,000 units of Product DD.

(a)Compute the total labor variance.

Total labor variance $ FavorableUnfavorableNeither favorable nor unfavorable

(b)Compute the labor price and quantity variances.

Labor price variance $ FavorableUnfavorableNeither favorable nor unfavorable
Labor quantity variance $ UnfavorableFavorableNeither favorable nor unfavorable

(c)Compute the labor price and quantity variances, assuming the standard is 4.35 hours of direct labor at $11.39 per hour.

Labor price variance $ FavorableNeither favorable nor unfavorableUnfavorable
Labor quantity variance $ FavorableUnfavorableNeither favorable nor unfavorable

Costello Corporation manufactures a single product. The standard cost per unit of product is shown below.

Direct materials 3 pound plastic at $6.78 per pound $ 20.34
Direct labor 1.00 hours at $11.00 per hour 11.00
Variable manufacturing overhead 5.50
Fixed manufacturing overhead 6.50
Total standard cost per unit $43.34

The predetermined manufacturing overhead rate is $12 per direct labor hour ($12.00 1.00). It was computed from a master manufacturing overhead budget based on normal production of 5,900 direct labor hours (5,900 units) for the month. The master budget showed total variable costs of $32,450 ($5.50 per hour) and total fixed overhead costs of $38,350 ($6.50 per hour). Actual costs for October in producing 4,200 units were as follows.

Direct materials (12,740 pounds) $ 89,307
Direct labor (4,030 hours) 45,297
Variable overhead 35,429
Fixed overhead 16,971
Total manufacturing costs $187,004

The purchasing department buys the quantities of raw materials that are expected to be used in production each month. Raw materials inventories, therefore, can be ignored.

(a) Compute all of the materials and labor variances. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)

Total materials variance $ Neither favorable nor unfavorableUnfavorableFavorable
Materials price variance $ Neither favorable nor unfavorableFavorableUnfavorable
Materials quantity variance $ Neither favorable nor unfavorableUnfavorableFavorable
Total labor variance $ UnfavorableNeither favorable nor unfavorableFavorable
Labor price variance $ UnfavorableFavorableNeither favorable nor unfavorable
Labor quantity variance $ Neither favorable nor unfavorableFavorableUnfavorable

(b) Compute the total overhead variance.

Total overhead variance $ Neither favorable nor unfavorableUnfavorableFavorable

atlas products inc 496198

Prepare a cash budget for Atlas Products, Inc for the first quarter of 2008, based on the following information.
The budgeting section of the corporate finance department of Atlas Products has received the following sales estimates from the marketing department:
Total Sales Credit Sales
December 2007 825,000 770,000
January 2008 730,000 690,000
February 2008 840,000 780,000
March 2008 920,000 855,000
The company has found that on average, about 25 percent of its credit sales are collected during the month when the sale is made, and the remaining 75 percent of credit sales are collected during the month following the sale. As a result, the company uses these figures for budgeting.
The company estimates its purchases at 60 percent of next month s sales, and payments for those purchases are budgeted to lag the purchases by one month.
Various disbursements have been estimated as follows:
Jan FEB MAR
Wages and salaries 250,000 290,000 290,000
Rent &n bsp; 27,000 27,000 27,000
Other expenses 10,000 12,000 14,000
In addition, a tax payment of $105,000 is due on January 15, and $40,000 in dividends will be declared in January and paid in March. Also, the company has ordered a $75,000 piece of equipment. Delivery is scheduled for early January, and payment will be due in February. The company s projected cash balance at the beginning of January is $100,000, and the company desires to maintain a balance of $100,000 at the end of each month.

auditing 496200

When an auditor increases the risk of material misstatement because certain control procedures were determined to be ineffective, the auditor would most likely increase the

Answer

Extent of tests of details.

Levels of inherent risk.

Extent of tests of controls.

Level of detection risk.

In the consideration of internal control, the auditor is basically concerned that internal control provides reasonable assurance that

Answer

Controls have not been circumvented by collusion.

Misstatements have been prevented or detected.

Operational efficiency has been achieved in accordance with management plans.

Management cannot override controls.

Which of the following statements concerning audit evidence is true?

Answer

A client s accounting data can be sufficient audit evidence to support the financial statements.

To be competent, audit evidence should be either persuasive or relevant, but it need not be both

The measure of the validity of audit evidence lies in the auditor s judgment.

The difficulty and expense of obtaining audit evidence concerning an account balance is a valid basis for omitting the test

Which of the following is not an objective of a well-designed system of internal control?

Answer

Accurate reliable financial statements

Safeguarding of assets.

Adherence with applicable laws and regulations.

Maintaining proper segregation of duties

The ultimate purpose of assessing control risk is to contribute to the auditor s evaluation of the risk that

Answer

Entity policies may be inappropriately overridden by senior management.

Specified controls requiring segregation of duties may be circumvented by collusion.

Tests of controls may fail to identify procedures relevant to assertions.

Material misstatements may exist in the financial statements

Although the quantity and content of audit working papers vary with each particular engagement, an auditor’s permanent files most likely include

Answer

Schedules that support the current year s adjusting entries.

Prior years accounts receivable confirmations that were classified as exceptions.

Documentation indicating that the audit work was adequately planned and supervised.

Analyses of capital stock and other owners equity accounts.

Although the quantity and content of audit working papers vary with each particular engagement, an auditor’s permanent files most likely include

Answer

Schedules that support the current year s adjusting entries.

Prior years accounts receivable confirmations that were classified as exceptions.

Documentation indicating that the audit work was adequately planned and supervised.

Analyses of capital stock and other owners equity accounts.

Although the quantity and content of audit working papers vary with each particular engagement, an auditor’s permanent files most likely include

Answer

Schedules that support the current year s adjusting entries.

Prior years accounts receivable confirmations that were classified as exceptions.

Documentation indicating that the audit work was adequately planned and supervised.

Analyses of capital stock and other owners equity accounts.

Which of the following procedures is least likely to be performed as a part of obtaining an understanding during an audit engagement of a new audit client previously audited by another CPA?

Answer

Communication with the predecessor auditor.

Performing analytical procedures.

Obtaining confirmation of cash balances.

Considering internal control.

An auditor traced a sample of purchase orders and the related receiving reports to the purchases journal and the cash disbursements journal. The purpose of this substantive audit procedure most likely was to

Answer

Verify that cash disbursements were for goods actually received.

Test whether payments were for goods actually ordered.

Determine that purchases were properly recorded.

Identify unusually large purchases that should be investigated further

Which audit assertion ensures that all recorded sales are valid?

Answer

Documentation.

Vouching.

Existence or occurrence.

Valuation or allocation

Which of the following did not have substantive changes under the new clarification standards?

Answer

evidence

internal control

reporting

related parties

During the process of confirming receivables as of December 31, 2007, a positive confirmation was returned indicating the “balance owed as of December 31 was paid on January 9, 2008.” The auditor would most likely

Answer

Determine whether there were any changes in the account between January 1 and January 9, 2008

Determine whether a customary trade discount was taken by the customer.

Reconfirm the zero balance as of January 10, 2008.

Verify that the amount was received.

Which of the following has the lowest authoritative status but may be useful in assisting the auditor in applying the SASs?

Answer

Statements on Auditing Standards

Auditing Statements of Position.

Journal of Accountancy articles.

Auditing Interpretations

When auditing related party transactions, an auditor places primary emphasis on

Answer

Ascertaining the rights and obligations of the related parties.

Evaluating the disclosure of the related party transactions.

Verifying the valuation of the related party transactions.

Confirming the existence of the related parties

Which of the following is true?

Answer

the auditor must document the reasons for assessing control risk at the maximum

detection risk is equal to audit risk divided by the product of inherent risk and control risk

the auditor has no control over detection risk, control risk or inherent risk

the auditor should not accept an engagement when inherent risk is set at maximum

Which of the following controls would an auditor be least likely to review

Answer

Segregation of the asset-handling and recordkeeping functions.

Company policy regarding credit and collection efforts.

Cost records classified by date of product introduction

Authorization of additions to plant and equipment

When tests of controls reveal that controls are not operating as anticipated, it is most likely that the assessed level of the risk of material misstatement will

Answer

Be less than the planned level.

Equal the planned level.

Be greater than the planned level.

Be less than the actual level.

Which of the following gives, as Dr.

described, a “warm and fuzzy feeling” when an auditor determines that the client has

Answer

a requirement that two signatures are required on checks

a budget and variance analysis system

an annual quality control review

an internal audit staff

Of the following, which is the least persuasive type of audit evidence?

Answer

Documents mailed by outsiders to the auditor.

Correspondence between auditor and vendors.

Copies of sales invoices inspected by the auditor.

Computations made by the auditor

A weakness in internal control over recording retirements of equipment may cause an auditor to

Answer

Review the subsidiary ledger to ascertain whether depreciation was taken on each item of equipment during the year.

Select certain items of equipment from the accounting records and locate them in the plant.

Inspect certain items of equipment in the plant and trace those items to the accounting records.

Trace additions to the other assets account to search for equipment that is still on hand but no longer being used

If internal control is properly designed, the same employee should not be permitted to

Answer

Sign checks and cancel supporting documents.

Receive merchandise and prepare a receiving report.

Prepare disbursement vouchers and sign checks.

Initiate a request to order merchandise and approve merchandise received.

When a CPA is approached to perform an audit for the first time, the CPA should make inquiries of the predecessor auditor. This is a necessary procedure because the predecessor may be able to provide the successor with information that will assist the successor in determining

Answer

Whether the predecessor s work should be utilized.

Whether the company follows the policy of rotating its auditors.

Whether in the predecessor s opinion internal control of the company has been satisfactory.

Whether the engagement should be accepted.

Which of the following is least likely to be a procedure used for planning/acceptance of an engagement?

Answer

Contacting the predecessor auditor

communicating with the client’s attorney and other third parties

review financial statements

determine internal control risk

Which of the following is not an interrelated component of internal control?

Answer

Control activities

Risk assessment

Monitoring

Management integrity

An auditor’s decision either to apply analytical procedures as substantive procedures or to perform tests of transactions and account balances usually is determined by the

Answer

Availability of data aggregated at a high level.

Relative effectiveness and efficiency of the tests.

Timing of tests performed after the balance sheet date.

Auditor s familiarity with industry trends

Factors or components of the control environment include all except

Answer

Organizational structure

Human resources

Integrity and ethical values

All of the above are factors

Which of the following is not a typical analytical procedure?

Answer

Study of relationships of the financial information with relevant nonfinancial information.

Comparison of the financial information with similar information regarding the industry in which the entity operates.

Comparison of recorded amounts of major disbursements with appropriate invoices.

Comparison of current year’s financial statement with last years

Failure to detect material dollar misstatements in the financial statements is a risk which the auditor primarily mitigates by

Answer

Performing substantive procedures.

Performing tests of controls.

Assessing internal control.

Obtaining a client representation letter.

auditing and assurance 433a 496201

Question 1. 1.
The Securities Exchange Commission (SEC) has oversight authority over the PCAOB. Which of the following is not within the SEC’s oversight authority?

The SEC approves the PCAOB’s rules
The members of the PCAOB are appointed by the SEC
The SEC approves the PCAOB’s budget
The SEC determines which audit firms will be inspected by the PCAOB

Question 2. 2.
Before the creation of the PCAOB, the auditing standards of the Auditing Standards Board were used to audit all companies. Which statement best describes the PCAOB and auditing standards?

In 2003, the PCAOB adopted certain auditing standards of the ASB as interim standards
In 2003, the PCAOB developed over 100 new auditing standards
In 2003, the PCAOB developed audit standards to audit all companies, private and public
In 2003, the PCAOB adopted all the standards of the AICPA to save time in the development of new standards

Question 3. 3.Corresponds to CLO 1(c)
Which of the following is correct about the PCAOB?

The PCAOB receives its authority from the SEC
Auditing standards issued by the PCAOB must be approved by the SEC
Anyone who wants to purchase stock on a U.S. stock exchange must follow the rules of the SEC
All audit firms performing audits of public companies are registered with and agree to comply with the auditing procedures established by the PCAOB

Question 4. 4. Corresponds to CLO 1(d)
Which of the following is correct about the PCAOB? (Points : 6)

The PCAOB receives its authority from the SEC
Auditing standards issued by the PCAOB must be approved by the U.S. Congress
Anyone who wants to purchase stock on a U.S. stock exchange must follow the rules of the SEC
All audit firms performing audits of public companies are registered with and agree to comply with the auditing standards established by the PCAOB

Question 5. 5.Corresponds to CLO 2(a)
When management presents the financial statements to the auditor, management makes several assertions about the financial statements. Which of the following is not one of these assertions?

residence
valuation and allocation
accuracy
classification

Question 6. 6.Corresponds to CLO 2(b)
When management presents the financial statements to the auditor, management makes several assertions about the financial statements. Which of the following is not one of these assertions?

existence or occurrence
valuation and allocation
accuracy
categorization

Question 7. 7.Corresponds to CLO 2(c)
Which of the following are assertions about the revenue process?

existence or occurrence – for both classes of transactions and account balances
completeness – account balances
valuation and allocation – for account balances
rights and obligations – for classes of transactions and account balances
accuracy – for classes of transactions and account balances
both A and C
both B and D

Question 8. 8.Corresponds to CLO 2(d)
Which of the following are assertions about the revenue process? )

existence or occurrence – for both classes of transactions and account balances
completeness – for both classes of transactions and account balances
valuation and allocation – for classes of transactions and account balances
rights and obligations – for classes of transactions and account balances
accuracy – for classes of transactions and account balances
both A and B
both C and D
both D and E

Question 9. 9.Corresponds to CLO 3(a)
In planning the audit, the auditor makes decisions about the size of misstatements that will be considered material. These decisions allow the auditor to

determine the nature, timing, and extent of inherent risk assessment procedures
identify and assess the risk of misstatement
determine the nature, timing, and extent of audit procedures
establish an amount below which misstatements will always be evaluated as immaterial
C and D

Question 10. 10.Corresponds to CLO 3(b)
In planning the audit, the auditor makes decisions about the size of misstatements that will be considered material. These decisions allow the auditor to

determine the nature, timing, and extent of inherent risk assessment procedures
identify and assess the risk of material misstatement
determine the nature, timing, and extent of internal control procedures
establish an amount below which misstatements will always be evaluated as immaterial

Question 11. 11.Corresponds to CLO 3(c)
In the planning process, the auditor assesses the risk that misstatements have occurred in the financial statements. The source of misstatements includes (

inaccuracies in gathering or processing data used to audit the financial statements
the use of auditing standards that may be unreasonable or inappropriate
differences between the amount or classification of a financial statement item and what should have been reported under generally accepted auditing standards
omissions of financial statement explanations
financial statement disclosures that are not in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles

Question 12. 12.Corresponds to CLO 3(d)
In the planning process, the auditor assesses the risk that misstatements have occurred in the financial statements. The source of misstatements includes ()

the use of auditing standards that the auditor may consider unreasonable or inappropriate
inaccuracies in gathering or processing data used to audit the financial statements
differences between the amount or classification of a financial statement item and what should have been reported under generally accepted accounting principles
omissions of financial statement explanations
financial statement disclosures that are not in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards

Question 13. 13.Corresponds to CLO 4 (a)
Which of the following is a correct statement about internal controls? ()

The internal control function in a company is a process designed by management and others charged with governance to provide reasonable assurance that the financial statements are prepared in accordance with the COSO financial reporting framework.
Management develops internal controls to prevent or detect misstatements in the financial statements.
The auditor reviews the internal controls developed by management to assess whether the internal controls are effective in detecting misstatements.
The auditing standards define internal controls over financial statements as processes designed by management and others charged with governance to provide assurance that company responsibilities are met.

Question 14. 14.Corresponds to CLO 4 (b)
The internal control deficiencies identified in a financial statement audit may be reported in which of the following ways? (

Significant deficiencies are reported in a management letter.
Material weaknesses are verbally reported to the audit committee.
Deficiencies that fail to reach the level of significant deficiencies or material weaknesses are reported in a management letter.
Significant deficiencies and material weaknesses may be verbally reported to both management and the audit committee.

Question 15. 15.A significant deficiency is: ()

a control deficiency or a combination of control deficiencies that adversely affects the company’s ability to initiate, authorize, record, process, or report internal financial data reliably in accordance with an applicable financial reporting framework
a control deficiency or a combination of control deficiencies that adversely affects the company’s ability to initiate, authorize, record, process, or report external financial data reliably in accordance with an applicable financial reporting framework
a control deficiency or combination of control deficiencies that result in more than a remote likelihood that a material misstatement in the financial statements would not be prevented or detected
a control deficiency or combination of control deficiencies that results in a remote likelihood that a material misstatement in the financial statements would not be prevented or detected

Question 16. 16.Corresponds to CLO 4 (d)
The auditor must communicate in writing all significant deficiencies and material weaknesses to management and the audit committee. The written communication from the auditor should include:

a definition of a significant deficiency and a material weakness
a statement that the objective of the audit is to report on the financial statements and to provide assurance on internal controls
a statement that the communication is intended solely for the use of stockholders, the board of directors, the audit committee, and management
a statement that there is no such thing as absolute assurance

Question 17. 17.Corresponds to CLO 5 (a)
In the revenue business process, the auditor might perform the following analytical procedures:

Compare sales revenue, accounts receivable, sales returns and allowance, bad debt expense, and allowance for uncollectible accounts for the current year to the prior year. Investigate changes from the auditor’s expectations that appear to be unreasonable.
Compare sales revenue, accounts payable, sales returns and allowance, bad debt expense, and allowance for uncollectible accounts for the current year to the prior year. Investigate changes from the auditor’s expectations that appear to be unreasonable.
Calculate the accounts receivable turnover ratio and the number of days outstanding in accounts receivable for the current and prior years. Investigate a change from the auditor’s expectations if it appears to be unreasonable.
Calculate the accounts receivable turnover ratio and the number of days outstanding in accounts payable for the current and prior years. Investigate a change from the auditor’s expectations if it appears to be unreasonable.
Consider the number of vendor accounts for the current year and the prior year and new accounts added and lost in each year.
both A and C
both B and E

Question 18. 18.Corresponds to CLO 5 (b)
For an auditor to make the decision about whether a change noted in analytical procedures is unreasonable he needs

knowledge of the client’s industry
knowledge of current political conditions
knowledge of prior economic conditions
an understanding of the client’s competitors
an understanding of the business under audit
both A and E
both B and C

Question 19. 19.Corresponds to CLO 5 (c)
In sales cut-off testing, the auditor uses the inspection procedure of vouching and tracing to gather evidence about which assertion(s)?

existence and occurrence
accuracy
valuation or allocation
completeness
presentation and disclosure
both A and B
both A and D

Question 20. 20.Corresponds to CLO 5 (d)
The auditing standards presume that the auditor will request confirmation of the accounts receivable balances unless

the balance in accounts receivable is immaterial
the use of confirmations would be effective if the amounts were significant
the auditor can reduce the risk of issuing an audit opinion to an acceptable low level without confirming accounts receivable
the client believes that confirmations are not necessary

Question 21. 21.Corresponds to CLO 6 (a)
The auditor’s responsibility for fraud detection is to:

plan the audit so sufficient appropriate evidence is gathered to determine whether the auditor has reasonable assurance that the financial statements are free of material misstatement from fraud or error
plan the audit so sufficient appropriate evidence is gathered to determine whether the financial statements are free of misstatement
plan the audit so sufficient appropriate evidence is gathered to determine whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement from fraud or error
plan the audit so sufficient evidence is gathered to determine whether the financial statements are free of misstatement

Question 22. 22.Corresponds to CLO 6 (b)
Three conditions are present in a company when fraud occurs. They are )

revenge, opportunity, and rationalization
pressure, revenge, and rationalization
pressure, opportunity, and rationalization
pressure, opportunity, and revenge

Question 23. 23.Corresponds to CLO 6(c)
The condition, opportunity to commit fraud, is present when)

An individual believes that he is underpaid
An individual believes that the company has plenty of money
An individual believes that the company does not deal with customers fairly
An individual believes that internal controls can be overridden

Question 24. 24.Corresponds to CLO 6 (d)
Management can override controls by )

suggesting fictitious journal entries (particularly at year end)
inappropriately changing assumptions and methods used to estimate account balances
omitting, advancing, or delaying modification of events that occurred during the reporting period
failing to disclose facts that could affect the amounts recorded in the financial statements
engaging in complex transactions designed to represent the financial condition of the company
both A and C
both B and D
both C and E

Question 25. 25.Corresponds to CLO 7 (a)
Substantive audit tests for the acquisition and expenditure process are

inspection of computer logs
internal controls
questioning
inquiry
recalculation of the assessed risk

Question 26. 26.Corresponds to CLO 7 (b)
In the acquisition and expenditure process, the auditor might perform the following analytical procedures

Compare accounts payable, accrued liabilities, cost of goods sold, and the balance in all the expense accounts for the current year to the prior year. Investigate changes from the auditor’s expectations that appear to be unreasonable.
Calculate the vendor margin percentage for the current and prior years. Investigate any changes from the auditor’s expectations that appear to be unreasonable.
Consider the number of vendor accounts for the current year and the prior year and the new vendors added or lost in each year.
Compare accounts payable, accrued liabilities, cost of goods available for sale, and the balance in all the expense accounts for the current year to the prior year. Investigate changes from the auditor’s expectations that appear to be unreasonable.
Calculate the merchandize inventory percentage for the current and prior years. Investigate any changes from the auditor’s expectations that appear to be unreasonable.
both A and C
both B and D

Question 27. 27.The auditor uses substantive tests of transactions to gather evidence for

balance sheet transactions in a business process
income statement transactions in a business process
income statement accounts in a business process
policies and procedures in a business process

Question 28. 28.Corresponds to CLO 7 (d)
An effective way to identify liabilities that were unrecorded at year-end is)

reviewing liabilities recorded after year-end
reviewing journal entries after year-end
reviewing account closings after year-end
reviewing the bills paid after year-end

Question 29. 29.Corresponds to CLO 8 (a)
In the inventory process, the auditor might perform the following analytical procedures

Compare inventory balances by category – raw material, work-in-process, and finished goods – for the current year with the prior year.
Compare inventory purchases by category – raw material, work-in-process, and finished goods – for the current year with the prior year.
Compute material margin with the current year with the prior year. Investigate any unexpected changes in the ratio.
Compute cost of goods sold with the current year with the prior year. Investigate any unexpected changes in the ratio.
Compute inventory turnover. Compare the current year’s turnover to the prior year. Investigate any differences.
both A and C
both B and D
both A and E

Question 30. 30.Corresponds to CLO 8 (b)
IT technology related to inventory can be very useful in maintaining accurate records for inventory balances if

the internal controls for the technology are effectively designed to prevent or detect misstatements of purchases
the internal controls for the technology are effectively designed to prevent or detect misstatements in the financial statements
the internal controls for the technology are effectively designed to prevent or detect misstatements of inventory
the internal controls for the technology are effectively designed to prevent or detect misstatements of costs of goods sold

Question 31. 31.Corresponds to CLO 8 (c)
The transactions audited in the inventory process include

determining the correct quality of the inventory
internal controls relevant to transactions
pricing the inventory according to accounting standards
internal controls relevant to balances
valuing the year-end inventory transactions

Question 32. 32.Corresponds to CLO 8 (d)
Substantive audit procedures in the inventory process are

inspection of records, documents, or tangible assets
monitoring
inquiry
risk assessment
reviewing policies and procedures
both A and C
both B and D
both D and E

Bottom of Form

auditing question 496203

Question 1 (19 marks)

The Carmichael Museum operates a not-for-profit museum for the benefit of the community. During the hours when the museum is open to the public, a clerk is positioned at the main entrance to sell $5.00 admission tickets. The two-part tickets are pre-printed and pre-numbered. Upon payment of the admission fee, the patron is allowed to pass through a turnstile that is equipped with a counter.

There is a separate turnstile (also equipped with a counter) set up for members of the museum that is operational only when the bar-coded membership card is scanned. Members of the museum are permitted to enter free of charge by scanning their membership card. Based on frequency of usage, a members list is prepared for use by the museum as a source of target lists for special campaigns and volunteering opportunities.

Each member is asked to prepare a contribution pledge card on an annual basis (at the beginning of the year) to keep their membership active. The pledge is regarded as a commitment by the member to contribute the amount pledged by December of that year. Contributions are sent by members in the mail or in a drop box located on-site. Upon request, based on the amounts shown on the pledge cards, the treasurer prepares tax receipts for members to support the contribution amounts.

At the end of the day, the clerk counts the cash received and prepares a two-part daily receipts reconciliation that reconciles the amount received to the number of tickets sold and the turnstile counter. All discrepancies are explained by the clerk and the form is signed and dated. A common discrepancy would occur if a ticket were voided. For example, on one day there were 50 tickets used but cash receipts for only 49 tickets. The clerk attached the voided ticket to the reconciliation as an explanation for the discrepancy. Any contributions received for pledges are also recorded at this time. The original is placed with the cash in an unlocked filing cabinet in the office overnight, while part two is sent to the treasurer s home.

Every morning, the treasurer an unpaid volunteer and board member visits the museum, obtains the cash receipts from the cabinet, counts the cash received and compares it to his copies of the receipt forms. He then compares the number of tickets sold to ticket batch and to the turnstile counter. He prepares the bank deposit daily. The clerk is responsible for maintaining the cash receipts journal, which is basically a record of the bank deposits.

All disbursements are made by cheques and require the signature of the treasurer and the president. The treasurer is responsible for maintaining the disbursements journal (cheque register). The treasurer also prepares the monthly bank reconciliation. The president reviews the bank reconciliation monthly.

You are a member of the board of directors of the museum, and at a recent meeting several board members expressed interest in learning about the museum s internal control procedures. They asked that you, as a CGA, perform an audit of the museum s financial statements, to identify any strengths and weaknesses in the internal control system and make suggestions to improve controls.

Required

    1. Provide the board of directors with a brief description of the objective of a financial statement audit. Will a financial statement audit fulfill the board s expectation of gaining an understanding of the strengths and weaknesses of the company s system of internal control? (2 marks)
    2. Indicate and describe any threats to the auditor s independence. Should the auditor accept this engagement? (2 marks)
    1. List three weaknesses in the existing system of internal control. For each weakness, state the risk to the museum if the control is not improved, and recommend improvements. Format your answer as follows: (9 marks)
Weakness Risk Recommended Improvement
  1. List three strengths in the existing system of internal control and, for each strength, indicate an audit procedure that could be used to determine if the control is operating effectively. (6 marks)

auto lavage flexible budget 496207

Auto Lavage is a Canadian company that owns and operates a large automatic carwash facility near Quebec. The following table provides data concerning the company s costs:

Fixed Cost
per Month

Cost per
Car Washed

Cleaning supplies

$

0.40

Electricity

$

1,400

$

0.05

Maintenance

$

0.10

Wages and salaries

$

4,500

$

0.20

Depreciation

$

8,300

Rent

$

2,000

Administrative expenses

$

1,700

$

0.01


For example, electricity costs are $1,400 per month plus $0.05 per car washed. The company actually washed 8,400 cars in October and to collect an average of $6.80 per car washed.

Required:

Complete the company s flexible budget for October.(Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

b com 230 entire course 496209

B COM 230 SUMMARY WeeK 2.doc

B COM 230 SUMMARY WeeK 3.doc

B COM 230 SUMMARY WeeK 4.doc

B COM 230 WeeK 1 DQ 1.doc

B COM 230 WeeK 1 DQ 2.doc

B COM 230 WeeK 2 DQ 1.doc

B COM 230 WeeK 2 DQ 2.doc

B COM 230 WeeK 2 DQ TEAM.doc

B COM 230 WeeK 3 DQ 1.doc

B COM 230 WeeK 3 DQ 2.doc

B COM 230 WeeK 3 DQ TEAM.doc

B COM 230 WeeK 4 DQ 1.doc

B COM 230 WeeK 4 DQ 2.doc

B COM 230 WeeK 4 DQ TEAM.doc

B COM 230 ASSIGNMENT WeeK 3.doc

B COM 230 FINAL PAPER WeeK 5.doc

B COM 230 INDIVIDUAL ASSIGNMENT WeeK 1.doc

B COM 230 INDIVIDUAL ASSIGNMENT WeeK 2.doc

B COM 230 INDIVIDUAL ASSIGNMENT WeeK 4.doc

B COM 230 INDIVIDUAL ASSIGNMENT WeeK 5.doc

B COM 230 LEARNING TEAM ASSIGNMENT WeeK 3.doc

B COM 230 LEARNING TEAM ASSIGNMENT WeeK 4.doc

b16 b18 and b20 496210

B16. (Interest-rate risk) Philadelphia Electric has many bonds trading on the New York Stock Exchange. Suppose PhilEl s bonds have identical coupon rates of 9.125% but that one issue matures in 1 year, one in 7 years, and the third in 15 years. Assume that a coupon payment was made yesterday. a. If the yield to maturity for all three bonds is 8%, what is the fair price of each bond? b. Suppose that the yield to maturity for all of these bonds changed instantaneously to 7%. What is the fair price of each bond now? c. Suppose that the yield to maturity for all of these bonds changed instantaneously again, this time to 9%. Now what is the fair price of each bond? d. Based on the fair prices at the various yields to maturity, is interest-rate risk the same, higher, or lower for longer- versus shorter-maturity bonds?

B18. (Default risk) You buy a very risky bond that promises a 9.5% coupon and return of the $1,000 principal in 10 years. You pay only $500 for the bond. a. You receive the coupon payments for three years and the bond defaults. After liquidating the firm, the bondholders receive a distribution of $150 per bond at the end of 3.5 years. What is the realized return on your investment? b. The firm does far better than expected and bondholders receive all of the promised interest and principal payments. What is the realized return on your investment?

B20. (Constant growth model) Medtrans is a profitable firm that is not paying a dividend on its common stock. James Weber, an analyst for A. G. Edwards, believes that Medtrans will begin paying a $1.00 per share dividend in two years and that the dividend will increase 6% annually thereafter. Bret Kimes, one of James colleagues at the same firm, is less optimistic. Bret thinks that Medtrans will begin paying a dividend in four years, that the dividend will be $1.00, and that it will grow at 4% annually. James and Bret agree that the required return for Medtrans is 13%. a. What value would James estimate for this firm? b. What value would Bret assign to the Medtrans stock

background performance drinks llc is owned by dave n port performance drinks produce 496212

Background:
Performance Drinks, LLC is owned by Dave N. Port. Performance Drinks produces a variety of sports centered drinks. They began operations in 1993 shortly after Mr. Port graduated with his M.B.A. from Davenport University. The company saw early success as sports and fitness nutritional products gained new popularity in the 1990’s. Financially the company is sound and has been wise in controlling their growth over the years. However, within the last 18 months Mr. Port has noticed a drop in overall company profitability. This is especially troubling considering that the company has continued to experience top-line growth. Mr. Port and his management team have been considering developing a new product line. However, those plans have been put on hold until they can figure out why their profits are shrinking.
Performance Drinks makes four different kinds of sports drinks. Those drinks are as follows:
Basic
Hydration
Intensity
Post-Workout
Each of these drinks contains a slightly different nutritional profile and is targeted for different users and uses. The Basic drink has the least nutritional benefit and is targeted for general consumption. The Hydration product targets endurance athletes and specializes in hydration replacement. The Intensity product was designed with energy enhancement in mind. It serves the needs of extreme athletes who need long durations of sustained energy. Lastly, the Post-Workout product is a nutritional replacement product that is generally used following exertion.
You are the Controller for Performance Drinks. You feel as though you have a good handle on the financial reporting and the overall company performance. However, admittedly, your accounting information system has been designed to serve the needs of external users from an aggregate perspective. To that end you utilize absorption costing exclusively within the organization. You recall studying the concept of Activity Based Management (ABM) and Activity Based Costing (ABC) while taking a managerial accounting course. You wonder if applying those ideas to your business would help to uncover the mystery of the disappearing profits.
You recall from your Management Accounting class that product costs are comprised of:
Direct Materials
Direct Labor
Manufacturing Overhead
You don’t suspect that anything strange is going with your direct costs. You do wonder, however, if a more thorough understanding of your indirect costs may be in order. Over a series of weeks you talk with a variety of employees, representing a multitude of functional areas, from within the company. During those conversations you take careful note on what activities might be consuming resources and how those activities might be measured. You sharpen your pencil and begin to unpack what you’ve learned. You start with reviewing last month’s Product-Level Profit Report. That report is following:

PERFORMANCE DRINKS – MONTHLY PROFIT REPORT
Basic Hydration Intensity Post Workout Total
REVENUE
Sales $ 125,000 $ 120,000 $ 74,250 $ 93,000 $ 412,250
COSTS
Direct Materials $ 40,000 $ 50,000 $ 31,000 $ 33,000 $ 154,000
Direct Labor $ 25,000 $ 20,000 $ 10,000 $ 18,000 $ 73,000
Fringe Benefits on Direct Labor $ 11,250.00 $ 9,000.00 $ 4,500.00 $ 8,100.00 $ 32,850.00
Manufacturing Overhead $ 43,750.00 $ 35,000.00 $ 17,500.00 $ 31,500.00 $ 127,750.00
TOTAL COST $ 120,000.00 $ 114,000.00 $ 63,000.00 $ 90,600.00 $ 387,600.00
GROSS MARGIN $ 5,000.00 $ 6,000.00 $ 11,250.00 $ 2,400.00 $ 24,650.00
GROSS MARGIN RATIO 4.00% 5.00% 15.15% 2.58% 5.98%

Annual Volume: 100,000 80,000 45,000 60,000 285,000
Unit Price: $ 1.25 $ 1.50 $ 1.65 $ 1.55 $ 1.45
Unit Cost: $ 1.200 $ 1.425 $ 1.400 $ 1.510 $ 1.360

Since your primary area of focus is on the indirect costs you compile the following report which further details your overhead charges:

PERFORMANCE DRINKS – MONTHLY MFG OHD COST REPORT
Monthly Charge
Indirect Labor $ 55,000.00
Fringe Benefits on Indirect Labor $ 24,750.00
Utilities $ 5,000.00
Processing Equipment – Depreciation $ 10,000.00
Preventative Maintenance $ 10,000.00
Information Technology $ 23,000.00
Total $ 127,750.00

Overhead Activities:
Using traditional costing methods, which support your absorption costing system, you base overhead allocation on direct labor cost. Furthermore, “fringe benefits” are a function of direct labor cost.
As a result of your many meetings to discuss company overhead you determine that the majority of your indirect costs are related to four primary activities. Those activities are equipment set-ups, production runs, production management and machine-hour capacity. “Production Management” refers to a number of items that are correlated to the number of products the company produces. Ultimately you determine that your key activities have the following usage patterns, as they pertain to the monthly overhead costs:

Upon reviewing budget data from the last budget cycle you discover that the monthly number of set-ups was estimated to be 85. The number of production runs was estimated to be 250. That monthly machine-hour capacity is presently at 20,000 machine-hours. Lastly, Performance Drinks produces a total of four products.
After talking with the Plant Manger you create the following usage data relative to products and activities:

Requirements:
1. Based on all of the date provided, compute the cost driver rates for each of the four activities.
2. Compute the per unit product costs for each of the four products. Compute this cost using ABC allocation for overhead. Show the computation for each per unit product cost in detail.
3. Prepare a “Monthly Profit Report”, like the one provided on page 3 of this packet. Create this report using the results of your ABC overhead allocation.
4. Prepare a written “Management Report” that explains to the management team what Activity Based Costing is, how it was used to generate the Monthly Profit Report (from requirement #3). Explain why the profit for each product is different when comparing the Traditional report with the ABC report. Explain what the company might consider doing, based on all of this information, to stop the erosion of company profits. Defend your recommendations with data.
Additional Consideration:
Mr. Port wonders what would happen to costs if plant capacity was shifted from 20,000 machine-hours a month to 40,000 machine-hours per month.
Requirements:
5. Compute the new cost per unit for each of the products considering the increase in capacity. Show the computation for each per unit product cost in detail.
6. What is the cost of the unused capacity if it is assumed that the company has 40,000 machine-hours of capacity but it using 20,000 machine-hours? Amend your “Management Report” to include a discussion on how to best use the additional capacity.
Clarification on format and data:

You will create one professional report. In that report you should clearly label all of your answers. Make your answers easy to read and find. As it pertains to requirement #4, include the “Management Report” inside your overall report. You will then have one Word document as your final product. You will also have one Excel file.

badm 482 discussion question 496213

1) Identify a well known company (this may include Dell, Nike, United Airlines, eBay, Southwest Airlines, or another firm) and describe its business-level (competitive) strategy. Why does this strategy fit the firm s external environment?

2) Identify one company and describe its experiences with mergers/acquisitions. Did these combinations create or destroy value? Why For this exercise use Dell, Nike, United Airlines, eBay, Southwest Airlines, Blockbuster, Apple or another company.

3)Identify at least one company that has faced scandal in the past decade. Did this/these companies suffer from corporate governance failures, from internal control failures, or a combination of both

bagodonuts company bought a used delivery truck on january 1 2010 for 19 200 496214

BagODonuts Company bought a used delivery truck on January 1, 2010, for$19,200. The van was expected to remain in service 4 years (30,000 miles). BagODonuts accountant estimated that the truck s residual value would be $2,400 at the end of its useful life. The truck traveled 8,000 miles the first year, 8,500 miles the second year, 5,500 miles the third year, and 8,000 miles in the fourth year.

1. Calculate depreciation expense for the truck for each year (2010-2013) using the:

a. Straight-line method.

b. Double-declining balance method.

c. Units of Production method.

(For units-of-production and double-declining balance, round to the nearest two decimals after each step of the calculation.)

2. Which method best tracks the wear and tear on the van?

3. Which method would BagODonuts prefer to use for income tax purposes? Explain in detail why BagODonuts prefers this method.

bailey industries earnings per share 496215

On January 1, 2012, Bailey Industries had stock outstanding as follows.

6% Cumulative preferred stock, $119 par value,
issued and outstanding 10,800 shares

$1,285,200

Common stock, $10 par value, issued and
outstanding 241,200 shares

2,412,000

To acquire the net assets of three smaller companies, Bailey authorized the issuance of an additional 176,400 common shares. The acquisitions took place as shown below.

Date of Acquisition

Shares Issued

Company A April 1, 2012

63,600

Company B July 1, 2012

85,200

Company C October 1, 2012

27,600

On May 14, 2012, Bailey realized a $106,800 (before taxes) insurance gain on the expropriation of investments originally purchased in 2000.

On December 31, 2012, Bailey recorded net income of $321,600 before tax and exclusive of the gain.

Assuming a 43% tax rate, compute the earnings per share data that should appear on the financial statements of Bailey Industries as of December 31, 2012. Assume that the expropriation is extraordinary. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. $2.55.)

baker amp baker chapters 9 12 healthcare finance hlth420 1304a 01 496216

Healthcare Finance: HLTH420 – 1304A 01
Unit3 – Individual Project
500-700 words
Your facility has the following payer mix:

40% commercial insurances = 800
25% Medicare insurance = 500
15% Medicaid insurance = 300
15% liability insurance = 300
5% all others including self-pay = 100

Assume that for the time in question you have 2000 cases in the proportions above. (what are the proportions of the total cases for each payer?)
(Calculated above )
The average Medicare rate for each case is $6200- use this as the baseline. Commercial insurances average 110% of Medicare, Medicaid averages 65% of Medicare, Liability insurers average 200% of Medicare and the others average 100% of Medicare rates. (what are the individual reimbursement rates for all 5 payers?)

Calculating Individual Reimbursement Rates for the 5 Payers (Commercial Medicare Medicaid Liability Self pay / Other
Medicare Rate (Baseline) $6200
Commercial Insurance 110%
Medicaid 65% of Medicare
Liability Insurers 200% of Medicare
Others Average 100% of Medicare Rates
1. What are the expected rates of reimbursement for this time frame for each payer? What is your expected A/R?
2. What rate should you charge for these services (assuming one charge rate for all payers)?(this gives you your total A/R.) Calculate the total charges for all cases based on this rate.
3. What is the difference between the two A/R rates above? Can you collect it from the patient? What happens to the difference?
Rate to be charged for Services $12,400 *125% Total= $15,500 2000 *$15,500= 31,00,000.00You may not collect over R/C contracted fees if you are a Participating Provider. However you would be able to collect on a self-pay patient.Differences would need to be a write-off. Cost Fixed Variable Direct IndirectMaterials/Supplies Variable Direct Wages Fixed Direct Utility/Building Variable Indirect Medications Variable Direct Licensing of Facility Fixed Indirect Insurances Fixed Indirect PerDiem Staff Variable Direct Materials/Supplies $ 2,270.00 Wages $ 2,000.00 Utility/Building 1,125.00 Insurances $ 175.00 TFC/TVC $2,175.00 $3,395.00 Contribution Margin $14,105,XXX-XX-XXXX000 $5,565,000.00 CM per case (NNN) NNN-NNNN2000 $2,782.50 BREAK EVEN $2600000/$2782.5 934.41 $150,000 PROFIT 150,000=2782.50V -(NNN) NNN-NNNN P=(V x AR) – TFC V= (NNN) NNN-NNNN The only payers possible to use for an NIC
4. Which of these costs are fixed (does not change z)? Which are variable(changes)? Direct or indirect? Your costs can be either direct or indirect, which is a description of how they are associated with production. (Direct costs are associated with specific units while indirect costs are a lump sum that goes into doing business in general and cannot be easily measured with the production of a specific thing).
o materials/supplies (gowns, drapes, bedsheets) variable indirect
o Wages (nurses, technicians) fixed indirect
o Utility, building, usage exp (lights, heat, technology) fixed indirect
o Medications fixed direct
o
o Licensing of facility fixed indirect
o Per diem staff fixed indirect
o Insurances (malpractice, business etc.) fixed direct
5. Calculate the contribution margin for one case (in $) with the following costs for this period, per case: a. materials/supplies: $2270 b. Wages: $2000 c. Utility, building, usage exp: $1125 d. Insurances (malpractice, business etc.): $175
6. Using the above information, determine which is fixed (remains the same ) and which cost is variable (changes). Then calculate the breakeven volume of cases in units for this period.
7. Suppose you want to make $150,000 profit between this period and next period to fund an expansion to the NICU, how many cases would you have to see? At what payer mix would this

assignment 2 496138

Assignment 2: Manufacturing Overhead

Borealis Manufacturing has just completed a major change in its quality control (QC) process. Previously, products had been reviewed by QC inspectors at the end of each major process, and the company’s 10 QC inspectors were charged to the operation or job as direct labor. In an effort to improve efficiency and quality, a computerized video QC system was purchased for $250,000. The system consists of a minicomputer, fifteen video cameras, and other peripheral hardware and software. The new system uses cameras stationed by QC engineers at key points in the production process. Each time an operation changes or there is a new operation, the cameras are moved, and a new master picture is loaded into the computer by a QC engineer. The camera takes pictures of the units in process, and the computer compares them to the picture of a good unit. Any differences are sent to a QC engineer, who removes the bad units and discusses the flaws with the production supervisors. The new system has replaced the 10 QC inspectors with two QC engineers.

The operating costs of the new QC system, including the salaries of the QC engineers, have been included as factory overhead in calculating the company’s plant-wide manufacturing-overhead rate, which is based on direct-labor dollars. The company’s president is confused. His vice president of production has told him how efficient the new system is. Yet there is a large increase in the overhead rate. The computation of the rate before and after automation is as follows:

Before After

Budgeted Manufacturing Overhead

1,900,000 2,100,000

Budgeted Direct Labor Cost

1,000,000 700,000

Budgeted Overhead Rate

190% 300%

Three hundred percent, lamented the president. How can we compete with such a high overhead rate

Using the module readings and the Argosy University online library resources research manufacturing overhead.

Review the situation. Complete the following:

  • Define manufacturing overhead, and:
    • Cite three examples of typical costs that would be included in manufacturing overhead.
    • Explain why companies develop predetermined overhead rates.
  • Explain why the increase in the overhead rate should not have a negative financial impact on Borealis Manufacturing.
  • Explain how Borealis Manufacturing could change its overhead application system to eliminate confusion over product costs.
  • Describe how an activity-based costing system might benefit Borealis Manufacturing.

Write a 3 4-pages paper in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M4_A2.doc.

assignment 2 do civil rights apply to u s companies 496140

Assignment 2: Do Civil Rights Apply to U.S. Companies?

You are a business consultant to the National Minority Supplier Development Council. An international petroleum products distribution company, based in the U.S., consults with you on cultural diversity matters. It faces some complex choices at its overseas locations. While equal opportunity, affirmative action, and individual civil rights are the law of the land in the U.S., this frequently is not the case in other countries. Therefore when moral and legal issues run counter to host-country customs, problems are bound to arise.

Prepare an executive summary, briefly discussing the following specific topics:

  • Should U.S. civil rights laws apply to U.S. companies foreign operations? Express your opinion on this issue.
  • Describe a cultural diversity policy for the firm expanding overseas operations. Highlight any differences that might arise in some Middle Eastern countries where a distribution center is currently being built.
  • Explain the value of understanding the importance of, and complying with, the other country s legal system while operating in a foreign country.
  • Americans tend to believe that the U.S. legal system is better than that of most other countries. Discuss the ramifications of this belief in an overseas, culturally diverse operation.

Create a two-page executive summary in Word. Use at least three resources to justify your responses. Apply current APA standards for writing style to your work. Include a title page and reference page(s) in addition to the summary. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M3_A2.doc

http://www.diversityinc.com/public/department289.cfm

assignment 2 johnson controls capital investments acc560 quot managerial accounting 496142

Assignment 2: Johnson Controls Capital Investments

Due Week 9 and worth 450 points

Visit the Website of Johnson Controls Inc., located at http://www.johnsoncontrols.com, and review its 2012 financial forecasts. According to the forecasts, Johnson Controls will increase capital investments to approximately $1.7 billion. More than 70% of the company’s capital expenditures in 2012 are associated with growth and margin expansion opportunities.

Write a five to six (5-6) page paper in which you:

1. Suggest a methodology to supplement the traditional methods for evaluating the capital investments of Johnson Controls in the emerging markets to reduce risk providing a rationale of how risk will be reduced.

2. Assess the potential impact of inflation on planned capital investments in China and examine approaches for an accurate evaluation of the investments. Suggest how this knowledge may impact management s decisions.

3. Contrast the modifications you would make in evaluating the projects to increase internal capacity in North America to evaluating expansion projects in the global market and how this information will impact the decisions made related to expansion.

4. Examine the benefits of using sensitivity analysis in evaluating the projects for Johnson Controls and how this approach can provide a competitive advantage for the company.

5. Use at least three (3) quality academic resources in this assignment.

Note:Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources.

Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.

Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.

The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:

Plan and evaluate capital investments.

Use technology and information resources to research issues in managerial accounting.

Write clearly and concisely about managerial accounting using proper writing mechanics.

Grading for this assignment will be based on answer quality, logic/organization of the paper, and language and writing skills, using the following rubric.

assignment 2 lasa 1 cost and decision making analysis 496143

Assignment 2: LASA 1 Cost and Decision-Making Analysis

Cheryl Montoya picked up the phone and called her boss, Wes Chan, Vice President of Marketing at Piedmont Fasteners Corporation.

Cheryl: Wes, I’m not sure how to go about answering the questions that came up at the meeting with the President yesterday.

Wes: What’s the problem

Cheryl: The president wanted to know the break-even point for each of the company’s products, but I am having trouble figuring them out.

Wes: I’m sure you can handle it, Cheryl. And, by the way, I need your analysis on my desk tomorrow morning at 8:00 sharp in time for the follow-up meeting at 9:00.

Piedmont Fasteners Corporation makes three different clothing fasteners at its manufacturing facility in North Carolina. Data concerning these products appear below:

Velcro Metal Nylon

Normal annual sales volume

100,000 units 200,000 units 400,000 units
Unit selling price $1.65 $1.50 $0.85
Variable cost per unit $1.25 $0.70 $0.25

Total fixed expenses are $400,000 per year.

All three products are sold in highly competitive markets, so the company is unable to raise its prices without losing unacceptably large numbers of customers.

The company has a very effective lean production system, so there is no beginning or ending work in process or finished-goods inventories.

Using the module readings, the Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet, research break-even point and costing systems. Analyze the case based on your research and what you have learned so far in the course.

Respond to the following:

  • Calculate the company’s overall break-even point in total sales dollars. Explain your methodology (approximately 2 pages).
  • Of the total fixed costs of $400,000: $20,000 could be avoided if the Velcro product were dropped, $80,000 if the Metal product were dropped, and $60,000 if the Nylon product were dropped. The remaining fixed costs of $240,000 consist of common fixed costs such as administrative salaries and rent on the factory building that could be avoided only by going out of business entirely (approximately 2 pages):
    1. Calculate the break-even point in units for each product. Explain your methodology.
    2. Determine the overall profit of the company if the company sells exactly the break-even quantity of each product. Present your results.
  • Evaluate costing systems for this company. Explain if this company should be using a job order or process-costing system to accumulate costs (1 page).

Be sure to include your calculations in Microsoft Excel format.

Write a 5 6-page report in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M3_A2.doc.

By Sunday, November 10, 2013, deliver your report and calculations to the M3: Assignment 2 Dropbox.

This assignment is worth 200 points and will be graded using a rubric. Download and read the rubric to understand the expectations.

Assignment 2 Grading Criteria Maximum Points

Calculate the company’s overall break-even point in total sales dollars.

Explain your methodology.

30

Calculate the break-even point in units for each product in the scenario.

Explain your methodology.

52
Explain if the company sells exactly the break-even quantity of each product, what will be the overall profit of the company and show your results. 16
Compare and explain if this company should be using a job order or process-costing system to accumulate costs. 82
Write in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrate ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and display accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. 20
Total: 200

assignment 2 unhealthy lunches 496146

Assignment 2: Unhealthy Lunches

Drive-In Don s fast food restaurant sells the most delicious burgers in town at the most affordable price. Elementary and high schools in the vicinity have contracted with the restaurant to serve burgers during lunch hour. However, the county health department s one-year study shows that children from these schools have the highest cholesterol, are the most obese, and are the least active.

George and Mary s son, Randall, 12, attends one of the schools where Drive-In Don s foods are served. He suffers from extreme obesity and high cholesterol and runs the risk of diabetes.

George and Mary have sued Drive-In Don s and the school, alleging that Drive-In Don s is engaging in illegal deceptive advertising of its foods and is not truthful to customers. Further, the lawsuit states that the restaurant purposely fails to provide consumers details of the ingredients of its food products.

Research consumer protection laws and regulations, using your textbook, the Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet. Based on the facts of the case and research, write an analytical paper (approximately 4-5 pages). In the paper, respond to the following questions:

  • Do George and Mary have a case? What are their strongest legal arguments? Explain.
  • What defense(s), if any, do the school and the restaurant have? Explain.
  • Can the government agencies, such as the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) help the plaintiffs in any way? Explain.

Write a 4-5-page paper in Word format. Apply APA standards for writing style to your work.

assignment 2 venture capital 496147

Assignment 2: Venture Capital

A new Internet company anticipates that it will need $30 million in venture capital in order to obtain a $1 billion terminal value in seven years.

    1. Assuming that this company is a seed-stage company with no prior investors, what annualized return are investors anticipating?
    1. Next, assume that the founder wants a venture capitalist to invest $30 million of venture capital in three rounds of $10 million at Time 0, Time 1, and Time 2, and with a Time 7 exit value of $1 billion. The founder anticipates returns of 85%, 60%, and 40% for rounds 1, 2, and 3, respectively. What percentage of ownership is sold during each of the three rounds? What’s the founder ownership percentage at Time 7?
  1. Assuming that the founder has 25,000 shares, how many shares should be issued in the first three rounds?

Present your work as a three-page report, showing all calculations and formatted in the APA style. Submit the report to the appropriate W3: Assignment 2 Dropbox by Sunday, September 29, 2013.

assignment 3 analyze the cash flow of a venture abc computers sells computer printer 496148

Assignment 3: Analyze the Cash Flow of a Venture

ABC Computers sells computer printers. Its forecasted sales over the last three months of the third quarter of 2007 are as follows:

Month Sales Forecast
July $1,200,000
August $1,500,000
September $2,000,000

At the end of June 2007, ABC Computers’s balance sheet was as follows:

ABC Computers
Balance Sheet as of June 30, 2007
Cash $ 100,000 Accounts Payable $0
Accounts Receivable 900,000 Notes Payable 900,000
Inventories 900,000 Long-term debt 500,000
Net fixed assets 100,000 Total Liabilities 1,400,000
Equity 600,000
Total Assets 2,000,000 Total 2,000,000

The sales are made on credit terms of net 30 days and are collected the following month. No bad debts are expected. The inventories in the balance sheet are the minimum level that the company wants to maintain. Inventory is bought in the month of sale and paid for in cash.

    • The cost of goods sold averages 72% of revenues.
    • Additional cash expenses average 4% of revenues.
    • Depreciation is $7,000 each month.
    • Taxes are paid monthly and the effective income tax rate is 35%.
    • The annual interest rate on long-term debt is 11%.
    • The annual interest rate on bank loans is 13%.

ABC Computers doesn’t plan any capital expenditures during the time period analyzed and no dividends will be paid. ABC Computers’ desired end-of-month cash balance is $110,000. ABC Computers’ CFO anticipates that if there are any cash shortages during the period, he will increase the firm’s notes payable to the bank (13% interest rate). Here is your task:

    1. Create monthly pro forma income statements for July 2007, August 2007, September 2007, and for the quarter ending September 30, 2007.
    1. Create monthly pro forma balance sheets at the end of July 2007, August 2007, and September 2007.
    1. Create a cash budget for July 2007, August 2007, and September 2007.
    1. Create pro forma cash flow statements for July 2007, August 2007, and September 2007.
  1. Calculate the maximum amount of money ABC Computers will need to borrow.

assignment 3 application of international law 496149

Assignment 3: Application of International Law

Monarch Associates, a U.S. computer parts manufacturer, entered into a joint venture with a Russian computer technology company, Vladir Unlimited. The joint venture agreement was signed by both parties but created by Vladir and had an arbitration clause that called for all legal and nonlegal disputes, to be arbitrated in Russia. Vladir could also choose arbitrators from a panel maintained by the Russia Arbitration Institution. The panel members live in Russia.

Monarch now contends that a legal dispute with Vladir should be handled in the United States. Vladir insists that the dispute should be handled in Russia.

Using your textbook, the Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet, research international law and its application to companies such as these. Write a five-page paper in Word format. Apply APA standards for writing style to your work.

Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M1_A3.doc.

Respond to the following questions in your essay:

  • What laws govern arbitration in the U.S. In Russia?
  • In your opinion, in which country should the dispute be handled?
  • What are the advantages and disadvantages for Monarch Associates under the arbitration arrangement?
  • If you were Monarch Associates in-house counsel, what advice would you give them on negotiating future joint ventures with Russian businesses?
  • What other considerations should Monarch Associates keep in mind in the formation of any future contracts with foreign companies?

assignment 3 application of international law 496150

Assignment 3: Application of International Law

Monarch Associates, a U.S. computer parts manufacturer, entered into a joint venture with a Russian computer technology company, Vladir Unlimited. The joint venture agreement was signed by both parties but created by Vladir and had an arbitration clause that called for all legal and nonlegal disputes, to be arbitrated in Russia. Vladir could also choose arbitrators from a panel maintained by the Russia Arbitration Institution. The panel members live in Russia.

Monarch now contends that a legal dispute with Vladir should be handled in the United States. Vladir insists that the dispute should be handled in Russia.

Using your textbook, the Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet, research international law and its application to companies such as these. Write a five-page paper in Word format. Apply APA standards for writing style to your work.

Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M1_A3.doc.

Respond to the following questions in your essay:

  • What laws govern arbitration in the U.S. In Russia?
  • In your opinion, in which country should the dispute be handled?
  • What are the advantages and disadvantages for Monarch Associates under the arbitration arrangement?
  • If you were Monarch Associates in-house counsel, what advice would you give them on negotiating future joint ventures with Russian businesses?
  • What other considerations should Monarch Associates keep in mind in the formation of any future contracts with foreign companies?

assignment 3 end of the week assignment course project task exit strategies 496151

Assignment 3: End of the Week Assignment: Course Project Task Exit Strategies

This week, research exit strategies for ventures using the following questions to guide you:

  • What are the most common reasons for financial distress in ventures in your selected industry? What are some turnaround strategies for ventures in distress?
  • What exit strategies are used by successful and unsuccessful ventures in this industry?
  • What are the typical fees that a bankruptcy attorney charges?
  • Compare and contrast Chapter 7, Chapter 11, and Chapter 13 bankruptcies. Give an example of each.

Present the information and your analysis as a four-page report formatted in the APA style. Include your Excel worksheets Submit your final report to the W5: Assignment 3 Dropbox by Tuesday, October 13, 2013.

Grading Criteria Maximum Points
Summarized common reasons. 5
Summarized important strategies. 15
Compare and contrast types of bankruptcies. 20
Analyzed information to draw conclusions about important features of venture financing. 10
Presented a structured document free of spelling and grammatical errors. 5
Properly cited sources using APA format. 5
Total: 60

assignment 3 end of the week assignment course project task financial structures 496152

Assignment 3: End of the Week Assignment: Course Project Task Financial Structures

This week, research financial structures of ventures, using the following questions to guide you:

  • What is the typical financial structure of ventures in the industry you have selected?
  • What are the financial alternatives available to ventures in this industry? What are the advantages and disadvantages of these alternatives?
  • Do many of the firms have preferred stock in their capital structure?
  • Do any of the firms have convertible preferred stock in their capital structure? Are you surprised by your findings?

Present the information and your analysis as a three-page report formatted in the APA style. Submit your report to the W4: Assignment 3 Dropbox by Tuesday, October 8, 2013. Include your Excel worksheets.

Grading Criteria Maximum Points
Analyzed existing capital structure of industry chosen. 25
Analyzed information to draw conclusions about important features of venture financing. 25
Presented a structured document free of spelling and grammatical errors. 5
Properly cited sources using APA format. 5
Total: 60

assignment 3 reorganizations and consolidated tax returns 496155

Assignment 3: Reorganizations and Consolidated Tax Returns

Due Week 7 and worth 250 points

Suppose you are a CPA, and you have a corporate client that has been operating for several years. The company is considering expansion through reorganizations. The company currently has two (2) subsidiaries acquired through Type B reorganizations. The client has asked you for tax advice on the benefit of a Type A, C, or D reorganization over a Type B reorganization. Additional facts regarding the issues are reflected below.

The company currently files a consolidated income tax return with the two (2) subsidiaries acquired through a Type B reorganization.

ABC Corporation, a subsidiary targeted by the client for takeover, has substantial net operating losses.

XYZ Corporation and BB Corporation will be acquired as subsidiaries in the next six (6) months.

Use the Internet and Strayer databases to research the rules and income tax laws regarding Types A, B, C, and D reorganizations and consolidated tax returns. Be sure to use the six (6) step tax research process in Chapter 1 and demonstrated in Appendix A of your textbook as a guide for your written response.

Write a four to six (4-6) page paper in which you:

4. Compare the long-term tax benefits and advantages of each type of reorganization, and recommend the type of reorganization that will be most beneficial to the client.

5. Suggest the type of reorganization the client should use for the ABC Corporation based on your research. Justify the response.

6. Propose a taxable acquisition structure for the client s planned acquisitions over a nontaxable reorganization. Assess the value of a taxable transaction over a nontaxable reorganization for the client.

7. Examine the value and limitations of including the ABC Corporation if acquired as a wholly owned subsidiary in the consolidated return, and provide a recommendation to your client. Support the recommendation with applicable research.

8. Create a scenario that will allow the client to reduce any disadvantages from filing a consolidated return as a member of a controlled group.

9. Use the six (6) step tax research process, located in Chapter 1 and demonstrated in Appendix A of the textbook, to record your research for communications to the client.

Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.

Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.

The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:

Prepare client, internal, and administrative documents that appropriately convey the results of tax research and planning.

Evaluate tax-planning strategies related to liquidating distributions, acquisitions, and reorganizations.

Create an approach to tax research that results in credible and current resources.

Research and analyze tax issues regarding consolidated tax returns.

Use technology and information resources to research issues in organizational tax research and planning.

Write clearly and concisely about organizational tax research and planning using proper writing mechanics.

Grading for this assignment will be based on answer quality, logic / organization of the paper, and language and writing skills, using the following rubric found here.

  1. Establish the Facts.
  2. Identify the Issues.
  3. Locate the Authority.
  4. Evaluate the Authority.
  5. Develop Conclusions and Recommendations.
  6. Communicate the Recommendations.

assignment 4 research application 496157

In this assignment, you will use the Internet and other sources to gather and interpret information related to service and manufacturing organizations.

Select either a service or a manufacturing organization of interest to you. Research the organization using the Argosy University online library and the Internet. Based on your research, do the following:

  • Identify and classify the types of expenses associated with the operation of the selected organization.
  • Review the income statement and balance sheet of the selected organization. What is your overall initial impression of the company based on the financial data you reviewed?

Write a 2- to 3-page report detailing your findings in MS Word format. Apply current APA standards for writing style to your work.

assignment 496159

Complete the following assignment:

This week you will be working on a three (3) part essay assignment. As you work through this

assignment, please read each part carefully, work through the calculations, and then answer the

question at the end of each part in an MS Word document or wordpad.

Part #1

Dr. Jones is interested in expanding his practice by adding a piece of radiology equipment. The basic

cost of the equipment would be $79,000 for the first year. The monthly loan cost for this equipment

is $1,564.29 for five years. Additionally Dr. Jones will have to factor in the cost to hire a radiology tech

with a predicted $39,600 annual salary (this includes all taxes and fringe benefits). The office already

has a radiology room so there is no fixed costs associated with this purchase.

You help Dr. Jones determine that the office will do 1100 studies per year with an average

reimbursement of $51.63. The variable cost per study is $3.24.

Using the standard pro forma sheet, is this a good purchase

Part #2

Dr. Jones office has purchased the above equipment. It is now Year #2 and there is a $7,000 annual

maintenance fee that needs to be added to the costs of the equipment. The variable cost is now

$3.37 per study but Dr. Jones office is planning on doing 1675 studies because there has been an

addition of two new managed contracts and there has been a reimbursement increase to $53.16

What is the profit or loss this year? Looking at the two years together, was this a good purchase

Part #3

Using the information in Part #1 and #2, calculate the standard pro forma sheet years #3 through year

#6.

The changes to be considered in your calculations are the following:

Year #3 Variable Costs $3.43

Staff Costs $ 40,500

# of Estimated Studies 1750

Reimbursement $54.26

Year #4 Variable Costs $3.68

Staff Costs $ 40,500

# of Estimated Studies 1800

Reimbursement $54.99

Year #5 Variable Costs $3.83

Staff Costs $ 41,500

# of Estimated Studies 1850

Reimbursement $55.33

Year #6 Variable Costs $3.97

Staff Costs $42,000

# of Estimated Studies 1900

Reimbursement $56.06

assignment 5 capstone project sony corporation 496160

Due Week 10 and worth 480 points

Search the Strayer Library or the Internet for information on a MNC, publicly-traded company. Download the annual report for the most recent year reported; review the information contained on the company Website and proxy statement for use in this assignment. Review and analyze the annual report and other pertinent information.

1. Write a twelve to fifteen (12-15) page paper in which you create an executive summary of the company that discusses the company, industry, products and services, and competitive advantages in the marketplace.

2. Evaluate the financial condition of the company and its ability to achieve the strategic objectives as discussed in the annual report.

3. Analyze the company s profitability trends and recommend strategies for management to improve or capitalize on these trends.

4. Evaluate the company s cash position. Articulate its ability to invest in capital projects in future years.

5. Analyze the effectiveness of the company s inventory or service costing methods. Make a recommendation for improvement in this area.

6. Evaluate the adequacy or risks of the internal control environment noted in the annual report by management, and internal and external auditors.

7. Assess the risk to the company related to foreign currency translations, foreign economic events, and international financial reporting standard requirements in order to summarize the risk tolerance level for the company.

8. From reading the annual report and reviewing the Website, determine where the company appears vulnerable for displaying unethical behavior.

9. From the research conducted in this paper, predict where this company will be financially in five (5) years. Thoroughly provide your rationale for your prediction.

10. Use seven (7) external sources as part of your assignment.

Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.

Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required page length.

The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:

Analyze financial reports, prepare analysis, and draw conclusions based on the financial analysis.

Calculate and interpret various financial and operating ratios used in business.

Apply activity-based costing and other managerial accounting concepts to various business situations.

Evaluate capital budgeting situations by calculating financial returns and drawing appropriate conclusions.

Evaluate internal controls within an organization and create a risk assessment.

Analyze ethical theories to evaluate a decision-making process to determine compliance with professional codes of ethics.

Evaluate the health of organizations to assess the level of risk in an audit engagement.

Use technology and information resources to research issues in accounting management.

Write clearly and concisely about accounting management using proper writing mechanics

3035 Words

10 Sources

APA Format

assignment 6 2 case study lasting impressions company chapter 12 496161

Assignment 6.2: Case Study, Lasting Impressions Company, Chapter 12

Lasting Impressions Company: Lasting Impressions (LI) Company is a medium-sized commercial printer of promotional advertising brochures, booklets, and other direct-mail pieces. The firm’s major clients are ad agencies based in New York and Chicago. The typical job is characterized by high quality and production runs of more than 50,000 units. LI has not been able to compete effectively with larger printers because of its existing older, inefficient presses. The firm is currently having problems cost-effectively meeting run length requirements as well as meeting quality standards.
The general manager has proposed the purchase of one of two large, six-color presses designed for long, high-quality runs. The purchase of a new press would enable LI to reduce its cost of labor and therefore the price to the client, putting the firm in a more competitive position. The keyfinancialcharacteristics of the old press and of the two proposed presses are summarized in what follows.
Old press: Originally purchased 3 years ago at an installed cost of $400,000, it is being depreciated under MACRS using a 5-year recovery period. The old press has a remainingeconomiclife of 5 years. It can be sold today to net $420,000 before taxes; if it is retained, it can be sold to net $150,000 before taxes at the end of 5 years.
Press A: This highly automated press can be purchased for $830,000 and will require $40,000 in installation costs. It will be depreciated under MACRS using a 5-year recovery period. At the end of the 5 years, the machine could be sold to net $400,000 before taxes. If this machine is acquired, it is anticipated that thecurrent accountchanges shown in the following table would result.
Cash+$25,400
Accounts receivable +120,000
Inventories -20,000
Accounts payable +35,000
Press B: This press is not as sophisticated as press A. It costs $640,000 and requires $20,000 in installation costs. It will be depreciated under MACRS using a 5-year recovery period. At the end of 5 years, it can be sold to net $330,000 before taxes. Acquisition of this press will have no effect on the firm’s net working capitalinvestment.
The firm estimates that itsearningsbefore depreciation, interest, and taxes with the old press and with press A or press B for each of the 5 years would be as shown in Table 1 (see page 504). The firm is subject to a 40% tax rate. The firm’s cost of capital, r, applicable to the proposed replacement is 14%.
Earnings before Depreciation, Interest, and Taxes
for Lasting Impressions Company’s Presses
Year Old press Press A Press B
1 $120,000 $250,000 $210,000
2 120,000 270,000 210,000
3 120,000 300,000 210,000
4 120,000 330,000 210,000
5 120,000 370,000 210,000

TO DO
a. For each of the two proposed replacement presses, determine:
(1) Initial investment.
(2) Operating cash inflows. (Note: Be sure to consider the depreciation in year 6.)
(3) Terminalcash flow. (Note: This is at the end of year 5.)
b. Using the data developed in part a, find and depict on a time line the relevant cash flow stream associated with each of the two proposed replacement presses, assuming that each is terminated at the end of 5 years.
c. Using the data developed in part b, apply each of the following decision techniques:
(1) Payback period. (Note: For year 5, use only the operating cash inflows that
is, exclude terminal cash flow when making this calculation.)
(2) Net present value (NPV).
(3) Internalrate of return(IRR).
d. Draw net present value profiles for the two replacement presses on the same set of axes, and discuss conflicting rankings of the two presses, if any, resulting from use of NPV and IRR decision techniques.
e. Recommend which, if either, of the presses the firm should acquire if the firm has (1) unlimitedfundsor (2) capital rationing.
f. What is the impact on your recommendation of the fact that the operating cash inflows associated with press A are characterized as very risky in contrast to the low-risk operating cash inflows of press B?

assignment 6 2 case study lasting impressions company chapter 12 496162

Assignment 6.2: Case Study, Lasting Impressions Company, Chapter 12

Lasting Impressions Company: Lasting Impressions (LI) Company is a medium-sized commercial printer of promotional advertising brochures, booklets, and other direct-mail pieces. The firm’s major clients are ad agencies based in New York and Chicago. The typical job is characterized by high quality and production runs of more than 50,000 units. LI has not been able to compete effectively with larger printers because of its existing older, inefficient presses. The firm is currently having problems cost-effectively meeting run length requirements as well as meeting quality standards.
The general manager has proposed the purchase of one of two large, six-color presses designed for long, high-quality runs. The purchase of a new press would enable LI to reduce its cost of labor and therefore the price to the client, putting the firm in a more competitive position. The keyfinancialcharacteristics of the old press and of the two proposed presses are summarized in what follows.
Old press: Originally purchased 3 years ago at an installed cost of $400,000, it is being depreciated under MACRS using a 5-year recovery period. The old press has a remainingeconomiclife of 5 years. It can be sold today to net $420,000 before taxes; if it is retained, it can be sold to net $150,000 before taxes at the end of 5 years.
Press A: This highly automated press can be purchased for $830,000 and will require $40,000 in installation costs. It will be depreciated under MACRS using a 5-year recovery period. At the end of the 5 years, the machine could be sold to net $400,000 before taxes. If this machine is acquired, it is anticipated that thecurrent accountchanges shown in the following table would result.
Cash+$25,400
Accounts receivable +120,000
Inventories -20,000
Accounts payable +35,000
Press B: This press is not as sophisticated as press A. It costs $640,000 and requires $20,000 in installation costs. It will be depreciated under MACRS using a 5-year recovery period. At the end of 5 years, it can be sold to net $330,000 before taxes. Acquisition of this press will have no effect on the firm’s net working capitalinvestment.
The firm estimates that itsearningsbefore depreciation, interest, and taxes with the old press and with press A or press B for each of the 5 years would be as shown in Table 1 (see page 504). The firm is subject to a 40% tax rate. The firm’s cost of capital, r, applicable to the proposed replacement is 14%.
Earnings before Depreciation, Interest, and Taxes
for Lasting Impressions Company’s Presses
Year Old press Press A Press B
1 $120,000 $250,000 $210,000
2 120,000 270,000 210,000
3 120,000 300,000 210,000
4 120,000 330,000 210,000
5 120,000 370,000 210,000

TO DO
a. For each of the two proposed replacement presses, determine:
(1) Initial investment.
(2) Operating cash inflows. (Note: Be sure to consider the depreciation in year 6.)
(3) Terminalcash flow. (Note: This is at the end of year 5.)
b. Using the data developed in part a, find and depict on a time line the relevant cash flow stream associated with each of the two proposed replacement presses, assuming that each is terminated at the end of 5 years.
c. Using the data developed in part b, apply each of the following decision techniques:
(1) Payback period. (Note: For year 5, use only the operating cash inflows that
is, exclude terminal cash flow when making this calculation.)
(2) Net present value (NPV).
(3) Internalrate of return(IRR).
d. Draw net present value profiles for the two replacement presses on the same set of axes, and discuss conflicting rankings of the two presses, if any, resulting from use of NPV and IRR decision techniques.
e. Recommend which, if either, of the presses the firm should acquire if the firm has (1) unlimitedfundsor (2) capital rationing.
f. What is the impact on your recommendation of the fact that the operating cash inflows associated with press A are characterized as very risky in contrast to the low-risk operating cash inflows of press B?

assignment 6 2 case study lasting impressions company chapter 12 496163

Lasting Impressions Company: Lasting Impressions (LI) Company is a medium-sized commercial printer of promotional advertising brochures, booklets, and other direct-mail pieces. The firm’s major clients are ad agencies based in New York and Chicago. The typical job is characterized by high quality and production runs of more than 50,000 units. LI has not been able to compete effectively with larger printers because of its existing older, inefficient presses. The firm is currently having problems cost-effectively meeting run length requirements as well as meeting quality standards.
The general manager has proposed the purchase of one of two large, six-color presses designed for long, high-quality runs. The purchase of a new press would enable LI to reduce its cost of labor and therefore the price to the client, putting the firm in a more competitive position. The key financialcharacteristics of the old press and of the two proposed presses are summarized in what follows.
Old press: Originally purchased 3 years ago at an installed cost of $400,000, it is being depreciated under MACRS using a 5-year recovery period. The old press has a remaining economic life of 5 years. It can be sold today to net $420,000 before taxes; if it is retained, it can be sold to net $150,000 before taxes at the end of 5 years.
Press A: This highly automated press can be purchased for $830,000 and will require $40,000 in installation costs. It will be depreciated under MACRS using a 5-year recovery period. At the end of the 5 years, the machine could be sold to net $400,000 before taxes. If this machine is acquired, it is anticipated that the current account changes shown in the following table would result.
Cash +$25,400
Accounts receivable +120,000
Inventories -20,000
Accounts payable +35,000
Press B: This press is not as sophisticated as press A. It costs $640,000 and requires $20,000 in installation costs. It will be depreciated under MACRS using a 5-year recovery period. At the end of 5 years, it can be sold to net $330,000 before taxes. Acquisition of this press will have no effect on the firm’s net working capital investment.
The firm estimates that its earnings before depreciation, interest, and taxes with the old press and with press A or press B for each of the 5 years would be as shown in Table 1 (see page 504). The firm is subject to a 40% tax rate. The firm’s cost of capital, r, applicable to the proposed replacement is 14%.
Earnings before Depreciation, Interest, and Taxes
for Lasting Impressions Company’s Presses
Year Old press Press A Press B
1 $120,000 $250,000 $210,000
2 120,000 270,000 210,000
3 120,000 300,000 210,000
4 120,000 330,000 210,000
5 120,000 370,000 210,000

TO DO
a. For each of the two proposed replacement presses, determine:
(1) Initial investment.
(2) Operating cash inflows. (Note: Be sure to consider the depreciation in year 6.)
(3) Terminal cash flow. (Note: This is at the end of year 5.)
b. Using the data developed in part a, find and depict on a time line the relevant cash flow stream associated with each of the two proposed replacement presses, assuming that each is terminated at the end of 5 years.
c. Using the data developed in part b, apply each of the following decision techniques:
(1) Payback period. (Note: For year 5, use only the operating cash inflows that
is, exclude terminal cash flow when making this calculation.)
(2) Net present value (NPV).
(3) Internal rate of return (IRR).
d. Draw net present value profiles for the two replacement presses on the same set of axes, and discuss conflicting rankings of the two presses, if any, resulting from use of NPV and IRR decision techniques.
e. Recommend which, if either, of the presses the firm should acquire if the firm has (1) unlimited funds or (2) capital rationing.
f. What is the impact on your recommendation of the fact that the operating cash inflows associated with press A are characterized as very risky in contrast to the low-risk operating cash inflows of press B?

assignment intermediate accounting week 1 496164

1 Calculating ratios: solve the unknown
The current asset section of the Excalibur Tire Company s balance sheet consists of cash, marketable securities, accounts receivable, and inventories. The December 31, 2011 balance sheet revealed the following:
Inventories 840,000
Total Assets 2,800,000
Current ratio 2.25
Acid test ratio 1.2
Debt to equity 1.8

Required:
Determine the following 2011 balance sheet items:
1. Current assets
2. Shareholder s equity
3. Noncurrent assets
4. Long-term liabilities

2 Effect of management decisions on ratios
Most decisions made by management impact the ratios analysts use to evaluate performance. Indicate (by letter) whether each of the actions listed below will immediately increase (I), decrease (D), or have no effect (N) on the ratios shown. Assume each ratio is less than 1.0 before the action is taken.

3 Balance Sheet Errors
You recently joined the internal auditing department of Marcus Clothing Corporation. As one of your firs assignments you are examining a balance sheet prepared by a staff account.

In the course of your examination you uncover the following information pertaining to the balance sheet:
1. The company rents it facilities. The land that appears in the statement is being held for future sale.
2. The note receivable is due in 2013. The balance of 53,000 includes 3,000 of accrued interest. The next interest payment is due in July 2012.
3. The note payable is due in installments of 20,000 per year. Interest on both the notes and bonds is payable annually.
4. The company s investments consist of marketable equity securities of other corporations. Management does not intend to liquidate any investments in the coming year.
Required:
Identify and explain the deficiencies in the statement prepared by the company s accountant. Include in your answer items that require additional disclosure, either on the face of the statement or in a note.

assignment of service marketing answer the following questions 496169

Answer the following questions:

1. Explain any four types of perceived risk a customer is taking when using a service like women s only Gym, What can this company do to reduce this type of risk?

2. (SERVICE RECOVERY STRATEGY)

– Discuss service recovery strategy when company can use when there is service failure. Give two examples of any two companies, which use to reduce service recovery strategy?

3. Service Escape

– Discuss Service Escape Strategy by any service organization. Commonwealth Bank

4. List four characteristics of services and discuss how each would impact marketing of childcare Centre.

5. What do you understand by term Yield management and what are the implication of this to a company like Singapore Airlines?

6.Discuss the role of Supplementary services. Give two any examples of supplementary services used by the University in Australia.

Discuss the role of three extended aspects of services marketing. Give two examples of companies using this

ashford acc 205 week 5 final paper 496114

Final Paper

Focus of the Final Paper

Write a five to seven page financial statement analysis of a public company, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions.

Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:

Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?

Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet

Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.

Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.

Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.

Writing the Final Paper

1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:

a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

Carefully review the Grading Rubric for the criteria that will be used to evaluate your assignment.

ashford dq acc205 principles of accounting i for martin only 496116

Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.

  1. Ratios

    Ratios provide the users of financial statements with a great deal of information about the entity. Do ratios tell the whole story How could liquidity ratios be used by investors to determine whether or not to invest in a company

    Guided Response:
    Let at least two of your peers know how debt service ratios can be used by a lender in determining whether or not to lend money to a company.

  2. Profit Margin

    Year Ending December 2012

    Year Ending December 2011

    Year Ending December 2010

    Revenues

    40,000

    35,000

    33,000

    Operating Expenses

    Salaries

    15,000

    10,000

    9,000

    Maintenance and Repairs

    6,000

    9,000

    10,000

    Rental Expense

    2,500

    2,500

    2,500

    Depreciation

    2,000

    2,000

    2,000

    Fuel

    4,000

    3,500

    2,500

    Total Operating Expenses

    29,500

    27,000

    26,000

    Operating Income

    10,500

    8,000

    7,000

    Sales and Administrative Expenses

    6,000

    4,000

    3,000

    Interest Expense

    2,500

    2,000

    1,000

    Net Income

    2,000

    2,000

    3,000

Above is a comparative income statement for Cecil, Inc. for the years 2010, 2011, and 2012. Calculate the profit margin for each of these years. Comment on the profit margin trend.

Guided Response:

Let at least two of your peers posts know what you changes you would recommend to improve the net margin of the company.


ashford final paper 496117

Final Paper

Focus of the Final Paper

Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.

Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:

Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?

Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet

Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.

Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.

Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.

Writing the Final Paper

1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:

a. Title of paper

b. Student s name

c. Course name and number

d. Instructor s name

e. Date submitted

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

ashford final paper acc 205 25 496118

Final Paper

Focus of the Final Paper

Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.

Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:

Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?

Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet

Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.

Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.

Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.

Writing the Final Paper

1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:

a. Title of paper

b. Student s name

c. Course name and number

d. Instructor s name

e. Date submitted

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

fi

ashford final paper acc 205 for martin 496119

Final Paper

Focus of the Final Paper

Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.

Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:

Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?

Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet

Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.

Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.

Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.

Writing the Final Paper

1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:

a. Title of paper

b. Student s name

c. Course name and number

d. Instructor s name

e. Date submitted

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

ashford final paper week 5 for martin only 496120

Final Paper

Focus of the Final Paper

Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.

Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:

Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?

Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet

Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.

Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.

Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.

Writing the Final Paper

1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:

a. Title of paper

b. Student s name

c. Course name and number

d. Instructor s name

e. Date submitted

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

ashford university assignment chapters 7 amp 8 496121

1. Payroll accounting.

Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
Social Security taxes: 4% on the first $55,000 earned per employee
Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned per employee
Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
State income taxes: 4% of gross earnings
Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned per employee
Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned per employee

The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end and no wages have been paid during the month.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
Social Security taxes
Medicare taxes
Federal income taxes withheld
State income taxes
Insurance withholdings

b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
Matching Social Security taxes
Matching Medicare taxes
State unemployment taxes
Federal unemployment taxes

2. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure. A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:

1-Dec: Borrowed $10,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3-month, 15% note payable.
Interest and principal are due at maturity.
10-Dec: Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to
total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates
that 3% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit (parts only).
22-Dec: Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
26-Dec: Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a 15% note payable due in 60 days. (Assume 360 day year for interest)
31-Dec: Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162
31-Dec: Accrued three days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.

Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest.
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.

3. Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
2-Aug: Borrowed $55,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 90-day, 12% note.
20-Aug: Issued a $50,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $50,000 delivery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest r ate.
10-Sep: Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued
a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
11-Sep: Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account
payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and carries a 14% interest rate.
10-Oct: The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.
11-Oct: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
30-Oct: Paid note to Bank of Kingsville.

Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest. (Daily interest is calculated utilizing the 360 day method).
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.

ashford university bus372 quiz 496122

Ashford University, BUS372: Employee & Labor Relations, Week 3 quiz, Please help: Here are the questions and choices: When past practice and clear-cut contractual language conflict: (Points : 1) past practice supersedes language. language supersedes past practice. the merits of the case become paramount. a compromise is desirable.

2. In addition to being orderly and efficient, the grievance procedure can be regarded as a means for: (Points : 1) producing labor/management conflict. defeating one side or the other. obtaining a better climate for labor relations. establishing a collective bargaining agreement.

3. When hearing a group of grievances together, the arbitrator: (Points : 1) should strive for fairness to both parties by splitting his or her decisions equally. should consider the group as a whole and reach a single decision. should decide each case on its own merits. None of the above.

4. Employers may not hold a meeting with employees on company time: (Points : 1) within 24 hours of a representation election. in a right-to-work law state. if they have committed an unfair labor practice. if a national emergency strike is involved.

5. Which of the following is not considered a union unfair labor practice? (Points : 1) Telling an anti-union employee that he will lose his job if the union gains recognition Union picketline violence Under a valid union-shop agreement, demanding the discharge of an employee who fails to pay his union dues Issuing patently false statements during a representation election campaign

6. The Trilogy cases, as a unit, served mainly to establish the: (Points : 1) power of the courts in labor relations. nonarbitrability of certain labor issues. role of private arbitration in unfair labor practice issues. full integrity of the arbitration process.

7. Which of the following was not a motivation for passage of the Norris-LaGuardia Act of 1932? (Points : 1) Wildcat strikes Widespread unemployment Recognition of the need for collective bargaining Virtual unlimited use of the injunction by management

8. The day-to-day job in labor relations is to: (Points : 1) apply the principles of the contract. look for violations of the contract. find ways around the contract. look for weaknesses in the contract that may be corrected during the next round of contract negotiations.

9. Grievance mediation differs from arbitration in that: (Points : 1) grievance mediation does not use the services of an arbitrator. the results are not final and binding. witnesses are not allowed to testify. the labor agreement may be ignored if both parties agree.

10. The first major union to be touched by the threat of multi-nationals was the: (Points : 1) UAW. Steelworkers. Newspaper Guild. Machinists.

11. At present, mandatory subjects of bargaining include: (Points : 1) subcontracting. moving allowances. investment counseling. foreign operations.

12. In discharge cases, the interests of the parties and the grievant may be best served by a decision rendered in about _15 days_____________. (Points : 1) 30 days 60 days 15 days 6 weeks

ashford week five exercise assignment for martin only acc205 principles of accountin 496123

Ashford Week Five Exercise Assignment for Martin only!!! ACC205: Principles of Accounting I
Question Detail:

Week Five Exercise Assignment

Financial Ratios

ACC205: Principles of Accounting I 
ACC205: Principles of Accounting I

 

1. Liquidity ratios. Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:

 

 

Edison

Stagg

Thornton

Cash

$6,000

$5,000

$4,000

Short-term investments

3,000

2,500

2,000

Accounts receivable

2,000

2,500

3,000

Inventory

1,000

2,500

4,000

Prepaid expenses

800

800

800

Accounts payable

200

200

200

Notes payable: short-term

3,100

3,100

3,100

Accrued payables

300

300

300

Long-term liabilities

3,800

3,800

3,800

 

 

a. Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid Why?

 

2. Computation and evaluation of activity ratios. The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:

         
 

20X5

20X4

Net credit sales

$832,000

$760,000

 

Cost of goods sold

530,000

400,000

 

Cash, Dec. 31

125,000

110,000

 

Average Accounts receivable

205,000

156,000

 

Average Inventory

70,000

50,000

 

Accounts payable, Dec. 31

115,000

108,000

 

 

 

Instructions

a. Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.

       
         

 

3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity. Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The company reported the following information for 20X7:

 

   

Net sales

$1,750,000

Interest expense

120,000

Income tax expense

80,000

Preferred dividends

25,000

Net income

130,000

Average assets

1,200,000

Average common stockholders’ equity

500,000

   
   

a. Compute the profit margin on sales ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.

b. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage Briefly explain.

 

4. Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

       

20X2

20X1

Current Assets

$86,000

$80,000

Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

99,000

90,000

Intangibles

25,000

50,000

Current Liabilities

40,800

48,000

Long-Term Liabilities

153,000

160,000

Stockholders Equity

16,200

12,000

Net Sales

500,000

500,000

Cost of Goods Sold

322,500

350,000

Operating Expenses

93,500

85,000

       

 

a. Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

 

 

5.Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

 

20X2

20X1

Current Assets

$86,000

$80,000

Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

99,000

80,000

Intangibles

25,000

50,000

Current Liabilities

40,800

48,000

Long-Term Liabilities

153,000

150,000

Stockholders Equity

16,200

12,000

Net Sales

500,000

500,000

Cost of Goods Sold

322,500

350,000

Operating Expenses

93,500

85,000

 

a. Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

 

6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.

       

LONE PINE COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)

20X2

20X1

Assets

Current Assets

Cash and Short-Term Investments

$400

 

$600

Accounts Receivable (net)

3,000

 

2,400

Inventories

3,000

 

2,300

Total Current Assets

$6,400

 

$5,300

Property, Plant, and Equipment

Land

$1,700

 

$500

Buildings and Equipment (net)

1,500

 

1,000

Total Property, Plant, and Equipment

$3,200

 

$1,500

Total Assets

$9,600

 

$6,800

Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

Current Liabilities

Accounts Payable

$2,800

 

$1,700

Notes Payable

1,100

 

1,900

Total Current Liabilities

$3,900

 

$3,600

Long-Term Liabilities

Bonds Payable

4,100

 

2,100

Total Liabilities

$8,000

 

$5,700

Stockholders Equity

Common Stock

$200

 

$200

Retained Earnings

1,400

 

900

Total Stockholders Equity

$1,600

 

$1,100

Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

$9,600

 

$6,800

       
       

LONE PINE COMPANY

Statement of Income and Retained Earnings

For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)

Net Sales*

 

$36,000

 

Less: Cost of Goods Sold

$20,000

   

Selling Expense

6,000

   

Administrative Expense

4,000

   

Interest Expense

400

   

Income Tax Expense

2,000

32,400

 

Net Income

 

$3,600

 

Retained Earnings, Jan. 1

 

900

 

Ending Retained Earnings

 

$4,500

 

Cash Dividends Declared and Paid

 

3,100

 

Retained Earnings, Dec. 31

 

$1,400

 

*All sales are on account.

 

Instructions

Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calculations to two decimal places when necessary:

a. Quick ratio

b. Current ratio

c. Inventory-turnover ratio

d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio

e. Return-on-assets ratio

f. Net-profit-margin ratio

g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity

h. Debt-to-total assets

i. Number of times that interest is earned

 

   

ashley is planning to attend college when she graduates from high school 7 years fro 496124

3. Ashley is planning to attend college when she graduates from high school 7 years from now. She anticipates that she will need $10,000 at the beginning of each college year to pay for tuition and fees, and have some spending money. Ashley has made an arrangement with her father to do the household chores if her dad deposits $3,500 at the end of each year for the next 7 years in a bank account paying 8 percent interest. Will there be enough money in the account for Ashley to pay for her college expenses on the day she starts College? Assume the rate of interest stays at 8 percent during the college years.
No, she needs additional $1,891.46
No, she needs additional $2,043.77
No, she needs additional $4,541.16
No, she needs additional $8,770.19
Yes, she has sufficient funds to cover her expenses.
4. Today is Jan. 1, 2012. Starting today you plan to invest $2000 every year, first deposit today and last deposit on Jan. 1, 2032. After that, you plan to leave the money in the same account until Jan. 1, 2040. However, the interest rate is 6% compounded quarterly until your last deposit and only 9% compounded annually after that. How much money will you have in your account on Jan. 1, 2040?
$83,687.63
$150,714.94
$161,875.93
$165,575.63
None of the above
5. You are saving for the college education of your two children. They are three years apart in age; one will begin college in 7 years, and another in 10 years. You estimate your first child’s college expenses to be $30,000 per year, paid at the beginning of each college year (first payment is at year 7 and so on). You estimate your second child’s college expenses to be $50,000 per year, paid at the beginning of each college year (first payment at year 10 and so on). The annual interest rate is 8 percent. How much money must you deposit in an account each year to fund your children’s education? You will begin payments one year from today. You will make your last deposit when your oldest child enters college. Also assume that each child will take 4 years to graduate from college.
$45,714.29
$35,863.17
$25,869.35
$27,938.94
None of the above

6. Ken borrows $15,000 from a bank at 10 percent annually compounded interest to be repaid in six equal installments. Calculate the interest paid in the second year.
$3,444.32
$1,944.32
$2,138.82
$1,305.57
None of the above

7. Elizabeth has $35,000 in an investment account. Her goal is to have the account grow to $100,000 in 10 years without having to make any additional contributions to the account. What effective annual rate of interest would she need to earn on the account in order to meet her goal?
9.03%
11.07%
10.23%
8.65%
12.32%
8. You are currently investing your money in a bank account that has a nominal annual rate of 7 percent, compounded monthly. How many years will it take for you to double your money?
8.67
9.15
9.50
9.93
10.25

9. Today, Bruce and Brenda each have $150,000 in an investment account. No other contributions will be made to their investment accounts. Both have the same goal: They each want their account to reach $1 million, at which time each will retire. Bruce has his money invested in risk-free securities with an expected annual return of 5 percent. Brenda has her money invested in a stock fund with an expected annual return of 10 percent. How many years after Brenda retires will Bruce retire? Pick the closest answer.
12.6
19.0
19.9
29.4
38.9
10. Today is your 20th birthday. Your parents just gave you $5,000 that you plan to use to open a stock brokerage account. Your plan is to add $3,000 on your 21st birthday, followed by $4,000 on your 22nd birthday, and $5,000 on your 23rd birthday. How much money do you anticipate that you will have in the account on your 25th birthday, if your account earns 12% interest compounded monthly?
$25,423.98
$25,991.91
$28,474.86
$22,699.98
None of the above

11. You have $2,000 invested in a bank account that pays a 4 percent nominal annual interest with daily compounding. How much money will you have in the account at the end of July (in 132 days)? (Assume there are 365 days in each year.)
$2,029.14
$2,028.93
$2,040.00
$2,023.44
$2,023.99
16. You want to buy a new sports car 3 years from now, and you plan to save $4,200 per year, beginning one year from today. You will deposit your savings in an account that pays 5.2% interest. How much will you have just after you make the 3rd deposit, 3 years from now?
$11,973
$12,603
$13,267
$13,930
$14,626
17. What’s the present value of a 4-year ordinary annuity of $2,250 per year plus an additional $3,000 at the end of Year 4 if the interest rate is 5%?
$8,509
$8,957
$9,428
$9,924
$10,446

18. Your grandmother just died and left you $100,000 in a trust fund that pays 6.5% interest. You must spend the money on your college education, and you must withdraw the money in 4 equal installments, beginning immediately. How much could you withdraw today and at the beginning of each of the next 3 years and end up with zero in the account?
$24,736
$26,038
$27,409
$28,779
$30,218

19. Ms. Day needs $20,000 to buy her dream car. In her search for the best (low cost) loan, she has gathered the following information from three local banks. Which bank would you recommend Ms. Day borrow from?
Bank Annual Payment Term (Years)
A $8,326.40 3
B $6,309.15 4
C $5,411.25 5

Bank A
Bank B
Bank C
Either Bank B and C since their loan rates are the same
Either Bank A and C since their loan rates are the same

20. Your aunt has $500,000 invested at 5.4%, and she now wants to retire. She wants to withdraw $45,000 at the beginning of each year, beginning immediately. She also wants to have $50,000 left to give you when she ceases to withdraw funds from the account. What is the maximum number of $45,000 withdrawals that she can make and still have at least $50,000 left in the account, right after the last withdrawal? (Hint: If your solution for N is not an integer, round down to the nearest whole number.)
13
14
15
16
17
21. A wealthy art collector has decided to endow her favorite art museum by establishing funds for an endowment which would provide the museum with $1,000,000 per year for acquisitions into perpetuity. The art collector will give the endowment upon her 50th with the first payment on that birthday. She plans to accumulate the endowment by making annual equal deposits into an account from her 40th birthday until her 49th birthday. The rate of interest is expected to be 6 percent in all future periods. How much must the art collector deposit each year to accumulate to the required amount?
$1,575,333
$ 736,000
$1,264,446
$ 943,396

22. Otto is planning for his son’s college education to begin ten years from today. He estimates the yearly tuition, books, and living expenses to be $10,000 per year for a four-year degree. How much must Otto deposit today, at an interest rate of 12 percent, for his son to be able to withdraw $10,000 per year for four years of college? Assume first withdrawal on the first day of College (beginning of the year)
$12,880
$ 9,780
$10,953
$40,000
$18,950
23. A ski chalet at Peak n’ Peak now costs $250,000. Inflation is expected to cause this price to increase at 5 percent per year over the next 10 years before Chris and Julie retire from successful investment banking careers. How large an equal annual end-of-year deposit must be made into an account paying an annual rate of interest of 13 percent in order to buy the ski chalet upon retirement?
$ 8,333
$13,572
$25,005
$22,108
None of the above
24. Last Christmas, Danny received an annual bonus of $1,500. These annual bonuses are expected to grow by 5 percent for the next 5 years. How much will Danny have at the end of the fifth year if he invests his Christmas bonuses (including the most recent bonus) in a project paying 8 percent per year?
$10,134.94
$12,338.93
$11,114.09
$10,984.04
None of the above.

25. Your child’s orthodontist offers you two alternative payment plans. The first plan requires a $4,000 immediate up-front payment. The second plan requires you to make monthly payments of $137.41, payable at the end of each month for 3 years. What nominal annual interest rate is built into the monthly payment plan?
12.31%
12.96%
13.64%
14.36%
15.08%
26. The Bad Guys Company is notoriously known as a slow-payer. It currently needs to borrow $25,000 and only one company will even deal with Bad Guys. The terms of the loan call for daily payments of $30.76. The first payment is due today. The interest rate is 21% compounded daily. What is the time period of this loan?
2.88 years
2.94 years
3.00 years
3.13 years
3.25 years

27. You agree to make 24 deposits of $500 at the beginning of each month into a bank account. At the end of the 24th month, you will have $13,000 in your account. If the bank compounds interest monthly, what nominal annual interest rate will you be earning?
7.62%
8.00%
8.40%
8.82%
9.26%

40. Appalachian Airlines began operating in 2006. The company lost money the first year but has been profitable ever since. The company’s taxable income (EBT) for its first five years is listed below. Each year the company’s corporate tax rate has been 40 percent.
Year Taxable Income
2006 -$4 million
2007 1 million
2008 2 million
2009 3 million
2010 5 million
Assume that the company has taken full advantage of the Tax Code’s carry-back, carry-forward provisions and that the current provisions were applicable in 2010. How much did the company pay in taxes in 2009?
$120,000
$400,000
$800,000
$1,200,000
$1,800,000

41. Scuba, Inc. is concerned about the taxes paid by the company in 2010. In addition to $5 million of taxable income, the firm received $80,000 of interest on state-issued bonds and $500,000 of dividends on common stock it owns in Boating Adventures, Inc. What is Scuba’s tax liability, average tax rate, and marginal tax rate, respectively using the table below?
Taxable Income Tax on Base of Bracket Percentage on Excess above Base
$0-$50,000 $ 0 15%
$50,000-$75,000 7,500 25
$75,000-$100,000 13,750 34
$100,000-$335,000 22,250 39
$335,000-$10,000,000 113,900 34
$10,000,000-$15,000,000 3,400,000 35
$15,000,000-$18,333,333 5,150,000 38
Over $18,333,333 6,416,667 35

(NOT SURE ABOUT THIS)
$1,637,100, 31.788%, 34%
$1,751,000, 34%, 34%
$1,778,200, 34%, 34%
$1,870,000, 34%, 34%
$1,983,900, 36.07%, 34%

42. A 5-year corporate bond yields 9 percent. A 5-year municipal bond of equal risk yields 6.5 percent. Assume that the state tax rate is zero. At what federal tax rate are you indifferent between the two bonds? [Set your calculator to at least four decimal places]
27.78%
33.33%
41.22%
54.33%
72.22%
48. Salinger Software was founded in 2009. The company lost money each of its first three years, but was able to turn a profit in 2012. Salinger’s operating income (EBIT) for its first four years of operations is reported below.

Year EBIT
2009 -$ 50,000
2010 -$150,000
2011 -$100,000
2012 $700,000

The company has no debt, so operating income equals earnings before taxes. The corporate tax rate has remained constant at 35%. Assume that the company took full advantage of the carry-back, and carry-forward provisions in the Tax Code, and assume that the current provisions were applicable in 2009. How much tax did the company pay in 2012? Note: Use our criteria for carry back years and forward (what we discussed in our lecture)
$157,500
$140,000
$126,350
$120,000
$0

ask 496125

Hello. I’m looking for resolutions to these questions. It seems as if you have solved this problem before in a timely fashion and come highly recommended. Answers are due today Sunday (11/24/13). I will need to upload the data set if you can help. FINAL EXAM PUBH 6125/8125 BiostatisticsAnswer the following Resolved Question: I. Descriptive Statistics: (20 pts) Download the data set Final_1.sav. Complete the following: 1) List the level of measurement for the variables, AGE, SEX, AGEGRP, SBP1 in the data set and describe the appropriate numerical and descriptive statistics based on these. 4 pts Record Number AGE 1 3 2 11 3 15 4 46 5 14 6 35 7 46 8 35 9 40 10 29 11 22 12 16 2) Calculate (by hand) the mean and standard deviation for the first 12 records for age in the data set. 4 pts 3) Generate numerical and graphical descriptive statistics for each of the variables, namely, AGE, SEX, AGEGRP and SBP1. 8 pts 4) Interpret the output you generated in part 3 for each of the variables in the data set. 4 pts I. Paired and Independent t tests: (20 pts) Download the data set Final_2.sav and use SPSS to complete the following calculations: 1) Use the 5-step approach to hypothesis testing and the calculation of the 95% confidence intervals to answer the following research question: Was a significant difference in Systolic Blood Pressure (SBP) observed over the course of the study? (10 pts) 2) Use the 5-step approach to hypothesis testing and the calculation of the 95% confidence intervals to answer the following research question: Is there a difference in SBP1 based on HIV status? (10 pts) (Hint: Assign Y as group 1 and N as group 2) III. Cross-Tabulation: (20pts) Download the data set Final_3.sav and use SPSS to complete the following calculations. 1) Use the 5-step approach to hypothesis testing to answer the following research question: In the sample provided in Final_3.sav, are the variables income and Bladder Cancer independent of each other? (Note: The question could also be asked: Is there an association between the variables because the lack of independence implies an association)? (10 pts) 2) Answer the following based on the cross-tabulation of alcohol consumption and Bladder Cancer: (10 pts) Alcohol consumption * Bladder Cancer Crosstabulation Count Bladder Cancer Total No Yes Alcohol consumption “Less than 1 drink per week” 30 54 84 4 or more drinks per month 22 115 137 Total 52 169 221 Calculate the odds ratio. 4 pts Describe how the odds ratio differs from the relative risk or risk ratio and why you would chose it here. 2 pts Interpret the odds ratio and how it might impact the practice of public health practitioners. 2 pts If you wanted to know whether this relationship was statistically significant what test(s) could you use? 2 pts IV. ANOVA: 20pts Download the data set Final_4.sav and use SPSS to complete the following calculations. 1) Produce box plots of income for each region of the US in the data set and interpret them. Based on the box plots do you expect to find a difference between any of the groups? 4 pts 2) Create descriptive statistics for each region, using the variable income. 4 pts Include skewness and kurtosis in the output. 2 pts Create a histogram for each group. 2 pts 3) Run the ANOVA for income based on region. Include the ANOVA table and the test for Homogeneity of Variance. Interpret the results. 6 pts 4) Conduct post hoc analysis using Bonferroni and LSD methods to control for multiple testing. 6 pts Provide the output. 2 pts Interpret your results. 3 pts Why do you need to use methods like Bonferroni and LSD with the ANOVA? 1 pt V. Regression: 20pts Download the data set Final_5.sav and use SPSS to complete the following calculations. 1) Use an independent t test and simple linear regression to identify whether a relationship exists between gender and BMI. (10 pts) Run the appropriate t test in SPSS, report the significance of the difference in means and the confidence interval, and interpret the results. 4 pts Run the simple linear regression in SPSS, report the significance of the variable gender and the overall fit of the model (using r2). Interpret the results. 4 pts How are these two approaches different? 1 pt Are your conclusions the same using both tests? 1 pt 2) Answer the questions using the provided output: 10 pts Multiple Linear Regression 5 pts Researchers looked at the Emergency Department Records of 60 adults ages 22 to 46 years who arrived in the ED complaining of chest pain during a 6 month period of time. They did not use a random sample as they wanted 30 males and 30 females in the study. They collected information on BMI (a measure of overweight/obesity), Age, SBP (Systolic Blood Pressure) and the diagnosis of Diabetes. Their first hypothesis (alternative) was that the dependent variable SBP is associated with BMI, Age, Diabetes, and Gender. They conducted a multiple linear regression to test their

assignment 08 a03 principles of accounting ii 496129

ASSIGNMENT 08

A03 Principles of Accounting II

Part A (5 points each for a possible total of 15 points)

The following information is given for Tripp Company, which uses the indirect method.

Net income $20,000

Depreciation expense 3,000

Increase in accounts receivable 2,000

Payment of dividends 2,000

Proceeds from sale of equipment 6,000

Increase in accounts payable 4,000

Decrease in inventory 3,000

From the information provided, answer the following questions:

(1) The cash flow from operating activities is ________.

(2) The cash flow from investing activities is ________.

(3) The cash flow from financing activities is ________.

Part B (5 points each for a possible total of 25 points)

Selected data for Stick’s Design are given as of December 31, Year 1 and Year 2 (rounded to the nearest hundredth).

Year 2 Year 1

Net Credit Sales $25,000 $30,000

Cost of Goods Sold 16,000 18,000

Net Income 2,000 2,800

Cash 5,000 900

Accounts Receivable 3,000 2,000

Inventory 2,000 3,600

Current Liabilities 6,000 5,000

Compute the following:

(1) Current ratio for Year 2.

(2) Acid-test ratio for Year 2.

(3) Accounts receivable turnover for Year 2.

(4) Average collection period for Year 2.

(5) Inventory turnover for Year 2.

Part C (30 points)

Prepare an income statement showing departmental contribution margin based on the following:

Dept. X Dept. Y Rent Expense

Space (square feet) 17,500 35,000

Net Sales $60,000 $40,000

Cost of Goods Sold 18,000 16,000

Rent Expense (allocated based on square feet) $2,700

Part D (5 points each for a possible total of 30 points)

From the following transactions, prepare the appropriate general journal entries for the month of April.

(1) Raw materials costing $60,000 were issued from the storeroom.

(2) Direct labor of $53,000 was charged to production.

(3) Indirect labor costs of $17,000 were incurred.

(4) Overhead was applied at the rate of 40% of direct labor dollars.

(5) Completed products costing $42,000 were transferred to finished goods.

(6) Products costing $32,000 were sold.

assignment 08 a03 principles of accounting ii 496130

A03 Principles of Accounting II

Part A (5 points each for a possible total of 15 points)
The following information is given for Tripp Company, which uses the indirect method.
Net income $20,000
Depreciation expense 3,000
Increase in accounts receivable 2,000
Payment of dividends 2,000
Proceeds from sale of equipment 6,000
Increase in accounts payable 4,000
Decrease in inventory 3,000

From the information provided, answer the following questions:

(1) The cash flow from operating activities is ________.
(2) The cash flow from investing activities is ________.
(3) The cash flow from financing activities is ________.

Part B (5 points each for a possible total of 25 points)
Selected data for Stick’s Design are given as of December 31, Year 1 and Year 2 (rounded to the nearest hundredth).
Year 2 Year 1
Net Credit Sales $25,000 $30,000
Cost of Goods Sold 16,000 18,000
Net Income 2,000 2,800
Cash 5,000 900
Accounts Receivable 3,000 2,000
Inventory 2,000 3,600
Current Liabilities 6,000 5,000

Compute the following:

(1) Current ratio for Year 2.
(2) Acid-test ratio for Year 2.
(3) Accounts receivable turnover for Year 2.
(4) Average collection period for Year 2.
(5) Inventory turnover for Year 2.

Part C (30 points)
Prepare an income statement showing departmental contribution margin based on the following:
Dept. X Dept. Y Rent Expense

Space (square feet) 17,500 35,000

Net Sales $60,000 $40,000

Cost of Goods Sold 18,000 16,000

Rent Expense (allocated based on square feet) $2,700

Part D (5 points each for a possible total of 30 points)

From the following transactions, prepare the appropriate general journal entries for the month of April.
(1) Raw materials costing $60,000 were issued from the storeroom.
(2) Direct labor of $53,000 was charged to production.
(3) Indirect labor costs of $17,000 were incurred.
(4) Overhead was applied at the rate of 40% of direct labor dollars.
(5) Completed products costing $42,000 were transferred to finished goods.

(6) Products costing $32,000 were sold.

assignment 1 auditing 300 496131

You have just been employed as a junior auditor at the chartered accountant firm of PMG.

Upon joining the firm, the partners request that you review the firm s audit clients to ensure

that the independence requirements of APES 110 are being met. Your review has revealed

the following:

(a) Paul Smith, the current senior manager on the audit of John Deer (JD) Ltd which

specialises in the production in mining equipment, has just entered into a business

venture (PJ Motors) with the CFO of JD Ltd, whereby they are both equal partners in

a business retailing motor vehicles. Paul has informed you that this is not a problem

since the 2 entities (JD Ltd and PJ Motors) are in different non-competing industries.

(b) PMG has recently accepted an engagement to provide audit services to Stocky Ltd.

Upon discussion with the manager of the Audit Team for Stocky Ltd, you were

informed that one of PMG s partner, Jeff Bates daughter currently works at Stocky

Ltd. You later found out that Jeff s daughter is the Financial Accountant at Stocky

Ltd. Jeff Bates is not on the Audit Team of Stocky Ltd.

(c) PMG s secretarial services division has a pool of experienced and qualified company

secretaries. These qualified company secretaries are either outsourced full time or

part time to listed entities in Australia. Due to cost effective quality services, this

division has a high growth in the last three years. Treck Manufacturing Ltd and

Platinum Fabricators Ltd are two listed companies to whom secretarial services have

been outsourced and assurance services provided.

(d) Audrey Jones, a senior auditor at PMG, has been on the audit team of Barminco Ltd

for a number of years. The account clerk of Barminco resigned 9 months ago, and

Barminco has yet to replace him. As a result, Barminco is significantly behind in their

bookkeeping. The financial controller of Barminco recently asked one of PMG s

partners to allow Audrey to join Barminco s accounting team for a period of up to 6

months in order to bring their bookkeeping up-to-date and ready for the year end

audit.

(e) While discussing with one of your colleagues, Shelly McDonald, she told you that she

had a great weekend attending a musical show at the theatre. She further let out that

the tickets to the show were gifted to her by the CFO of Macmahon Ltd at the

completion of this year s review because he was so please with the speed and

efficiency to which the audit was completed.

Required

For each of the independent situations above, and using the conceptual framework in

APES 110, answer the following questions.

1. Identify potential threats to independence & recommend safeguards to reduce

the independence threat (5 marks)

2. Provide an objective assessment of whether audit independence can be

achieved

assignment 1 auditing 300 semester 2 2013 496132

You have just been employed as a junior auditor at the chartered accountant firm of PMG.
Upon joining the firm, the partners request that you review the firm s audit clients to ensure
that the independence requirements of APES 110 are being met. Your review has revealed
the following:
(a) Paul Smith, the current senior manager on the audit of John Deer (JD) Ltd which
specialises in the production in mining equipment, has just entered into a business
venture (PJ Motors) with the CFO of JD Ltd, whereby they are both equal partners in
a business retailing motor vehicles. Paul has informed you that this is not a problem
since the 2 entities (JD Ltd and PJ Motors) are in different non-competing industries.
(b) PMG has recently accepted an engagement to provide audit services to Stocky Ltd.
Upon discussion with the manager of the Audit Team for Stocky Ltd, you were
informed that one of PMG s partner, Jeff Bates daughter currently works at Stocky
Ltd. You later found out that Jeff s daughter is the Fina ncial Accountant at Stocky
Ltd. Jeff Bates is not on the Audit Team of Stocky Ltd.
(c) PMG s secretarial services division has a pool of experienced and qualified company
secretaries. These qualified company secretaries are either outsourced full time or
part time to listed entities in Australia. Due to cost effective quality services, this
division has a high growth in the last three years. Treck Manufacturing Ltd and
Platinum Fabricators Ltd are two listed companies to whom secretarial services have
been ou tsourced and assurance services provided.
(d) Audrey Jones, a senior auditor at PMG, has been on the audit team of Barminco Ltd
for a number of years. The account clerk of Barminco resigned 9 months ago, and
Barminco has yet to replace him. As a result, Barminco is significantly behind in their
bookkeeping. The financial controller of Barminco recently asked one of PMG s
partners to allow Audrey to join Barminco s accounting team for a period of up to 6
months in order to bring their bookkeeping up-to -date and ready for the year end
audit.
(e) While discussing with one of your colleagues, Shelly McDonald, she told you that she
had a great weekend attending a musical show at the theatre. She further let out that
the tickets to the show were gifted to her by the CFO of Macmahon Ltd at the
completion of this year s review because he was so please with the speed and
efficiency to which the audit was completed.
Required
For each of the independent situations above, and using the conceptual framework in
APES 110, answer the following questions.
1. Identify potential threats to independence & recommend safeguards to reduce
the independence threat
(5 marks)
2. Provide an objective assessment of whether aud it independence can be
achieved
(5 marks)
(Total 10 Marks)

assignment 1 for aifarooq 496133

Question 2 (18 marks)

Prem has $2,000 that he wishes to invest for one year. He has narrowed his choices down to one of the following two actions:

i: Buy bonds of X Ltd., a company that has a very high debt-to-equity ratio. These bonds pay 8% interest, unless X defaults, in which case Prem will receive no interest but will recover his principal. (a1)

ii: Buy Canada Savings Bonds, paying 3% interest. (a2)

Prem assesses the prior probability of X Ltd. defaulting as 0.40. His utility for money is given by the square root of the amount of his net payoff. That is, if he buys the Canada Savings Bonds, his net payoff is $60, yielding utility of 60 = 7.75, and so on. Prem is a rational decision maker.

Required

    1. (4 marks)

      Based on his prior probability calculations, which action should Prem take? Show your calculations.

    2. (9 marks)

      Before making a final decision, Prem decides he needs more information. He obtains X Ltd. s current financial statements and examines its times-interest-earned ratio. This ratio can be either high or low. Upon calculating the ratio, Prem observes that it is low. On the basis of his prior experience in bond investments, Prem knows the following conditional probabilities:

Debt-to-Equity Ratio
Future State Low High
ND (no default) 0.50 0.50
D (default) 0.05 0.95

Which action should Prem take based on this new information? Show your calculations; take each step to two decimal places.

  1. (5 marks)

    An accounting standard (IAS 16) allows X Ltd. to value its property, plant, and equipment at fair value. The company plans to adopt this option, since it will reduce its debt-to-equity ratio.

    Evaluate (in words no calculations required) the likely impact of this adoption on the main diagonal probabilities of the information system in part (b).

Question 3 (15 marks)

Efficient securities market theory has long been under attack from behavioural finance, which draws on behavioural theories of investor behaviour to explain why security prices do not always behave as the economic theories of rational investing and market efficiency predict. These attacks have increased since the 2007-2008 security market meltdowns.

Required

  1. (4 marks)

    Explain why prospect theory predicts that security prices will differ from their prices under efficient security markets theory.

  2. (4 marks)

    Describe two accounting-related efficient securities market anomalies and, for each, explain why it is an anomaly.

  3. (3 marks)

    The efficient securities market anomalies suggest that investors underreact to the full information content of financial statements. Choose one behavioural theory that predicts this underreaction and explain why it predicts underreaction.

  4. (4 marks)

    Should accountants be concerned that the importance of financial reporting may decline if behaviourally biased investors do not use all the information in the financial statements? Explain.

50

assignment 1 lasa 2 developing and managing multi cultural teams 496134

Assignment 1: LASA 2 – Developing and Managing Multi-Cultural Teams

As the diversity manager of a global company, you have developed a deep appreciation for the importance of understanding multi-cultural teams in the workplace. However, you know that some of the managers struggle with developing and managing multicultural teams in your company. There seems to be a need for company-wide information and training on the topic of Developing and Managing Multi-Cultural Teams.

You decide to prepare a training handout for the next managers’ meeting, that emphasizes the following points:

  • Dimensions of a multi-cultural team
  • Discrimination laws and their impact on managing a multi-cultural team
  • Affirmative action programs and their impact on managing a multi-cultural team
  • Building an inclusive culture within the team
  • Challenges of managing a multi-cultural team
  • Recommendations for improving communications within a multi-cultural team
  • Modeling and leading diversity acceptance and change

Prepare a six to eight-page Word document as a training handout for managers, addressing each of the points listed. Include an executive summary and conclude by summarizing your handout by describing three important concepts you learned while researching this topic.

Use at least three resources in addition to your textbook to justify your responses. Apply current APA standards for writing style to your work.

assignment 1 lasa 2 inappropriate behavior 496135

Assignment 1: LASA 2: Inappropriate Behavior

Marwan has worked at Studio Five Theme Park as a character actor portraying a swash-buckling pirate. He does not have an employment contract. He loves his job because of his seniority with the company and all the attention he receives from the guests in the park. Unknown to anyone, his prosthetic leg has no noticeable impact on Marwan’s success in this position.

Marwan has become an accomplished flirt with all this attention, and now goes to the extent of placing his hands on the female guests’ behinds when posing for pictures. The women he has encountered so far have not complained, didn’t seem to mind, or they were taken by such surprise they were not sure how to respond.

One day, Marwan grabbed the breast of one of his fellow female actors who had been recently hired. When she threatened to report him, Marwan told her that he could get her fired if she did not go on a date with him. The fellow employee reported the incident anyway and Marwan was terminated immediately. Marwan contends that he was terminated as a result of physical disability.

Directions:

Research employment law related to hiring/firing and discrimination, using your textbook, the Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet. Based on the facts of the case and research, write an analytical paper. In the paper, respond to the following questions:

  • What civil rights laws may prohibit Marwan s conduct with his fellow co-worker? Do those laws apply to his conduct toward the park guest Explain both answers.
  • Did Marwan commit sexual harassment? If so, what type? Explain your answers and the terms you use.
  • What is the legal nature of Marwan s employment Explain your answers and the terms you use.
  • What actions and steps should Studio Five take against Marwan? Explain what actions you considered and why you either recommend them or reject them.
  • Discuss Marwan s allegation that he is being discriminated against based on his disability and what response Studio Five may have to that allegation. What would each of them have to prove in court?
  • If the female employee sues Studio Five Theme Park, what defenses can Studio Five use Are they liable for Marwan s conduct even if they were unaware of and did not approve of Marwan’s actions? Explain your answers and the terms you use.
  • If Marwan was a member of a union that had a collective bargaining agreement with Studio Five, would that change any of your previous answers?
  • What types of company policies, procedures, and actions should businesses employ to avoid harassment of their employees?

Write a ten-page paper in Word format. Apply APA standards for writing style to your work.

assignment 1 three stages of production excel solution 496136

Assignment 1

Complete the table (Table 1) below, then draw the following curves:

  • Short-run average product (AP) curve;
  • Short-run marginal product (MP) curve.

Table showing the Average and Marginal product of labour for a hypothetical firm

Amount of labour( units)

Amount of capital(No. of machines)

Output of parts(Q, hundreds of parts)

Average product (Q/L)

Marginal product( Q/ L)

0

5

0

1

5

49

49

49

2

5

132

66

83

3

5

243

81

**

4

5

376

94

133

5

5

525

**

149

6

5

684

114

159

6.666

5

792.59

120.09

***

7

5

847

****

163

8

5

1008

126

161

9

5

1161

****

***

10

5

1300

130

139

11

5

1419

***

119

12

5

1512

126

93

13

5

1573

121

****

14

5

1596

****

23

15

5

1575

105

******

Use the information from the completed table and the graphs to identify thethree stages of production and explain why the firm s short run production has only one rational stage of production.

Assignment #1

assignment 1 bottling company case study 496137

Assignment 1: Bottling Company Case Study Imagine you are a manager at a major bottling company. Customers have begun to complain that the bottles of the brand of soda produced in your company contain less than the advertised sixteen (16) ounces of product. Your boss wants to solve the problem at hand and has asked you to investigate. You have your employees pull thirty (30) bottles off the line at random from all the shifts at the bottling plant. You ask your employees to measure the amount of soda there is in each bottle. Note: Use the data set provided by your instructor to complete this assignment. Bottle Number Ounces Bottle Number Ounces Bottle Number Ounces 1 14.5 11 15 21 14.1 2 14.6 12 15.1 22 14.2 3 14.7 13 15 23 14 4 14.8 14 14.4 24 14.9 5 14.9 15 15.8 25 14.7 6 15.3 16 14 26 14.5 7 14.9 17 16 27 14.6 8 15.5 18 16.1 28 14.8 9 14.8 19 15.8 29 14.8 10 15.2 20 14.5 30 14.6 Write a two to three (2-3) page report in which you: 1. Calculate the mean, median, and standard deviation for ounces in the bottles. 2. Construct a 95% Confidence Interval for the ounces in the bottles. 3. Conduct a hypothesis test to verify if the claim that a bottle contains less than sixteen (16) ounces is supported. Clearly state the logic of your test, the calculations, and the conclusion of your test. 4. Provide the following discussion based on the conclusion of your test: a. If you conclude that there are less than sixteen (16) ounces in a bottle of soda, speculate on three (3) possible causes. Next, suggest the strategies to avoid the deficit in the future. Or b. If you conclude that the claim of less soda per bottle is not supported or justified, provide a detailed explanation to your boss about the situation. Include your speculation on the reason(s) behind the claim, and recommend one (1) strategy geared toward mitigating this issue in the future. 5. Use at least two (2) quality resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and similar Websites do not qualify as quality resources. The body of the paper must have in-text citations that correspond to the references. Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements: Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions. Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length. Supplement:

Imagine you are a manager at a major bottling company. Customers have begun to complain that the bottles of the brand of soda produced in your company contain less than the advertised sixteen (16) ounces of product. Your boss wants to solve the problem at hand and has asked you to investigate. You have your employees pull thirty (30) bottles off the line at random from all the shifts at the bottling plant. You ask your employees to measure the amount of soda there is in each bottle. Note: Use the data set provided by your instructor to complete this assignment.

Bottle Number

Ounces

Bottle Number

Ounces

Bottle Number

Ounces

1

14.5

11

15

21

14.1

2

14.6

12

15.1

22

14.2

3

14.7

13

15

23

14

4

14.8

14

14.4

24

14.9

5

14.9

15

15.8

25

14.7

6

15.3

16

14

26

14.5

7

14.9

17

16

27

14.6

8

15.5

18

16.1

28

14.8

9

14.8

19

15.8

29

14.8

10

15.2

20

14.5

30

14.6

Write a two to three (2-3) page report in which you:

1. Calculate the mean, median, and standard deviation for ounces in the bottles.

2. Construct a 95% Confidence Interval for the ounces in the bottles.

3. Conduct a hypothesis test to verify if the claim that a bottle contains less than sixteen (16) ounces is supported. Clearly state the logic of your test, the calculations, and the conclusion of your test.

4. Provide the following discussion based on the conclusion of your test:

a. If you conclude that there are less than sixteen (16) ounces in a bottle of soda, speculate on three (3) possible causes. Next, suggest the strategies to avoid the deficit in the future.

Or

b. If you conclude that the claim of less soda per bottle is not supported or justified, provide a detailed explanation to your boss about the situation. Include your speculation on the reason(s) behind the claim, and recommend one (1) strategy geared toward mitigating this issue in the future.

5. Use at least two (2) quality resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and similar Websites do not qualify as quality resources. The body of the paper must have in-text citations that correspond to the references.

Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

  • Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.
  • Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length.

The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:

Calculate measurements of central tendency and dispersal.

Determine confidence intervals for data.

Describe the vocabulary and principles of hypothesis testing.

Discuss application of course content to professional contexts.

Use technological tools to solve problems in statistics.

Write clearly and concisely about statistics using proper writing mechanics.

answer accounting questions 496082

Chapter 5

1. When the beginning balance field on the Begin Reconciliation window doesn t match the beginning balance on the bank statement, you should:

A. call the bank

B. Change the amount in QuickBooks to match the bank s amount.

C. Click locate discrepancies in the begin reconciliation window. Click discrepancy report and / or previous reports to research what has been changed since the last reconciliation. Then fix the problem before reconciling.

D. Select the banking menu and then select enter statement charges.

2. Which statement is false?

A. You can enter bank service charges using enter statement charges.

B. You can enter bank service charges on the Begin Reconciliation window.

C. You can enter bank service charges using the splits button on a register transaction.

D. You can either enter bank service charges using write checks before you start your reconciliation.

3. When you find an erroneous amount on a transaction while reconciling, correct the amount by:

A. Selecting the Banking menu and then selecting correct error.

B. Double clicking on the entry and changing the amount on the transaction.

C. Selecting the entry in the Reconcile window, then clicking go to and changing the amount of either transaction.

D. Performing either b or c.

4. To properly record a voided check from a closed accounting period:

A. Delete the check in the register

B. Make a deposit in the current period and code it to the same account as the original check you want to void. Then delete both transactions in the Reconciliation window.

C. Find the check in the register, select the edit menu, and then select void check.

D. Change the amount of the check to zero.

5. Which of the following columns cannot be displayed in the checks and payments section of the Reconcile window:

A. Check #

B. Class

C. Date

D. Payee

Chapter 6 Review Questions

1. What are the two major types of reports in QuickBooks?

A. Register and list

B. Monthly and annual

C. Accounting and business management

D. Balance sheet and profit and loss

2. Use the customize report button on any report to:

A. Add or delete columns or changes the accounting basis of the report.

B. Change the Width of columns on the report

C. Print the report on blank paper

D. Memorize the report for future use

3. You cannot create a QuickReport for:

A. Customers

B. Vendors

C. Items

D. Incorrectly posted entries

4. To create a report that lists each of your vendors along with their address and telephone information:

A. Display the vendor contact list

B. Open the Search window and do a search for Vendors and the corresponding Address and Phone Numbers.

C. Customize the Vendors database

D. You must create a Modified report to see this information

5. In order to analyze if the company is profitable.

A. Only analyze if the company is profitable

B. Create a profit and loss report

C. Review all detailed transaction reports

D. Review the financial exceptions report

Chapter 7 review Questions

1. You can create custom fields for:

A. Customers

B. Templates

C. Vendors

D. Both a and c

2. The two types of preferences are:

A. User and Company preferences

B. User and accountant preferences

C. Favorite and general preferences

D. Income and expense preferences

3. If you don t see the favorites menu in your menu bar, you can turn it on in the:

A. Customize templates windows

B. Customize Icon bar window

C. View menu

D. Windows menu

4. Which of the following is not an available template type in QuickBooks?

A. Credit memo

B. Statement

C. Check

D. Sales receipt

5. If you pay sales tax to more than one agency, you should use which of the following item types?

A. Sales tax group

B. Group

C. Inventory assembly

D. subtotal

answer each of the following questions 496083

Part A

1. Considering the two dimensions of XXXXX XXXXX s model of personal conflict-management styles, explain in the simplest terms how compromising is different from collaborating.
2. Compare the population ecology perspective with the view that categorizes organizations as mechanistic or organic.
3. Explain the basic ideas of Fiedler s contingency model, and evaluate the conclusions drawn from Fiedler s research in comparison with the managerial grid.

Part B

1. Explain the following diagram and present an example of how it may be applied.
UCS – UR
UCS + CS – UR
CS – CR
2. Explain the difference between role conflict and role ambiguity.
3. Provide three examples each of programmed and nonprogrammed decisions. Do not use the examples given in the textbook.
4. The supervisor of Department A wants to change the procedure for packing completed units. He decides to have a department meeting and ask for suggestions and comments from his employees. What tactic is this supervisor using and why?
5. During a performance appraisal, an employee is told that his production is satisfactorily but that coworkers find him abrasive and unpleasant to be around. After the appraisal, the employee forgets about the criticism and ignores the supervisor s suggestions for improvement. What is this employee guilty of? Explain.
6. Explain the concept of a self-fulfilling prophecy. If you were a manager, how would you use this concept to your advantage?
7. Suppose you re in a meeting with your supervisor and your department coworkers. Your supervisor asks you to demonstrate how you perform a particularly difficult task in your job. How would you feel about this? Do you think you would do a good job of demonstrating the task? Does your answer agree with what the text has to say about the impact of group properties on performance?
8. How does the author of your textbook (Organizational Behavior: Core Concepts, Sixth Edition, by Robert P. Vecchio) answer the criticism that the principles of organizational behavior are fairly obvious and could be derived from common sense?
9. Explain the relationship of legitimacy to power and authority.
10. Which type of organization, tall or flat, would be more likely to have a decentralized structure? Why

answer these accounting questions 496084

1. Determine the missing amounts in the following table:

Unit Sales Price Unit Variable Costs Unit Contribution Margin Contribution Margin Ratio

22.00 $10 $____________________ _______________

____________ $10 24.00 __________________

50.00 _________________ ______________________ 25%

2. Calculating Contribution Margin and Contribution Margin Ratio

Juniper Enterprises sells handmade clocks. Its variable cost per clock is $6, and each clock sells for $24. Calculate Junipers contribution margin per unit and contribution margin ratio. If the companys fixed costs total 6,660, detemine how many clocks juniper must sell to break even

3. How many units must Juniper sell to earn a profit of atleast 5,400

4. Suppose Juniper raises its price by 20 percent, but costs do not change. What is its new break even point?

5. Laguna Print makes advertising hangers that are placed on doorknobs. It charges 0.04 and estimates its variable cost to be 0.01 per hanger. Lagunas total fixed cost is $4,500 per month, which consists primarily of printer depreciation and rent. Calculate the number of advertising hangers that Laguna must sell in order to break even.

6. Jasper Company has sales of $185,000 and a break even sales point of 120,000. Compute Jaspers margin of safety and its margin of safety ratio

7. Heather Hudson makes stuffed teddy bears. Recent information for her business follows.

selling price per bear =35

total fixed cost per month=1,500

variable cost per bear = 24

If heather wants to earn 1,250 in profit next month, how many bears will she have to sell

8.If she sells 275 bears next month, determine the margin of safety units, sales dollars, and as a percentage of sales.

9. Seascape Company has two products: Product a has a contribution margin per unit of $4 and Product B has a contribution of $6 per unit. Calculate the weighted average unit contribution margin if Seascape has a 25/75 product mix. Explain how a shift in the product mix would affect Seascapes weighted average contirbution margin and its break even point

a answers 496085

Question 1

Question marks and exclamation points go inside the quotation marks:

A. if they are not part of the direct words of the speaker.

B. if they are part of the direct words of the speaker.

C. always.

D. only in Great Britain.

Question 2

Use a __________ to separate the chapter and verse in a reference to the Bible or to separate the hour and minute.

A. semicolon

B. period

C. comma

D. colon

Question 3

The colon, parentheses, and the dash should be used:

A. frequently.

B. sparingly.

C. as much as possible.

D. all the time.

Question 4

To enclose a phrase or word that is not essential to the meaning of the sentence, use:

A. quotation marks.

B. dashes.

C. parentheses.

D. periods.

a answers 496086

1. Which South African city is a regional hub of commerce and has South Africa’s premier international airport?

A. Durban

B. Pretoria

C. Cape Town

D. Johannesburg

2. Slum areas called shantytowns occur in _________ major African cities, housing over _________ percent of urban populations.

A. some; 40

B. five major; 50

C. nearly all; 60

D. all; 70

3. The lowlands west of Australia’s eastern mountain range are drained by the Murray-Darling River system, with its main headwaters in the Great _______ Basin.

A. Barrier

B. Artesian

End of exam

C. Dividing

D. Darling

4. The Great _______ Range, running just inland along Australia’s eastern coast, is that continent’s only significant mountain chain.

A. Eastern

B. Dividing

C. Barrier

D. Australian

a answers 496087

Question 1

Disorders associated with __________ accounted for about 60 percent of all illnesses reported.

A. stressful working conditions

B. toxic chemicals

C. repeated trauma

D. biological hazards

Question 2

The third leading cause of work-related fatalities is:

A. falling.

B. highway accidents.

C. homicide.

D. poisoning.

Question 3

Exposure to cotton dust can result in:

A. liver damage.

B. sterility.

C. brown lung.

D. dermatitis.

Question 4

Exposure to microwave radiation can result in all of the following EXCEPT:

A. sterility.

B. harm to eyes.

C. increased risk of cataracts.

D. liver damage.

a answers 496088

1. The Helsinki Agreement of 1975 pledged its signers to recognize

A. democracy as the best political ideology.

B. capitalism as the best economic system.

C. the need for nuclear disarmament.

D. a respect for human rights.

2. During the nineteenth century, which of the following countries experienced a decrease in industrial production?

A. India

B. Japan

C. China

D. Britain

3. Most of those who fear globalization worry that it will lead to

A. Americanization.

B. a new Europeanization of the globe.

C. cultural diversity.

D. a plural world.

4. The San hunters of southern Africa weren’t overwhelmed during the nineteenth century because they

A. managed to effectively fight off Western colonists.

B. live in a harsh environment.

C. were protected by a treaty.

D. were moved to reservations where they could be protected.

answers to cash distributions amp capital structure 496089

1. If investors prefer firms that retain most of their earnings, then a firm that wants to maximize its stock price should set a low payout ratio. A) True B) False

2. If a firm adopts a residual distribution policy, distributions are determined as a residual after funding the capital budget. Therefore, the better the firm’s investment opportunities, the lower its payout ratio should be. A) True B) False

3. Stock dividends and stock splits should, at least conceptually, have the same effect on shareholders wealth. A) True B) False
X`
4. Blease Inc. has a capital budget of $625,000, and it wants to maintain a target capital structure of 60% debt and 40% equity. The company forecasts a net income of $475,000. If it follows the residual dividend policy, what is its forecasted dividend payout ratio? A) 40.61% B) 42.75% C) 45.00% D) 47.37% E) 49.74%

5. Becker Financial recently completed a 7-for-2 stock split. Prior to the split, its stock sold for $90 per share. If the total market value was unchanged by the split, what was the price of the stock following the split? A) $23.21 B) $24.43 C) $25.71 D) $27.00 E) $28.35

6. Different borrowers have different risks of bankruptcy, and bankruptcy is costly to lenders. Therefore, lenders charge higher rates to borrowers judged to be more at risk of going bankrupt. A) True B) False

7. A firm’s business risk is largely determined by the financial characteristics of its industry, especially by the amount of debt the average firm in the industry uses. A) True B) False

8. The trade-off theory states that the capital structure decision involves a tradeoff between the costs and benefits of debt financing. A) True B) False

9. Elephant Books sells paperback books for $7 each. The variable cost per book is $5. At current annual sales of 200,000 books, the publisher is just breaking even. It is estimated that if the authors’ royalties are reduced, the variable cost per book will drop by $1. Assume authors’ royalties are reduced and sales remain constant; how much more money can the publisher put into advertising (a fixed cost) and still break even? A) $600,000 B) $466,667 C) $333,333 D) $200,000 E) None of the above

10. Vu Enterprises expects to have the following data during the coming year. What is Vu’s expected ROE? Assets $200,000 Interest rate 8%D/A 65% Tax rate 40%EBIT $25,000 A) 12.51% B) 13.14% C) 13.80% D) 14.49% E) 15.21%

anthony company uses a perpetual inventory system it entered into the following purc 496090

Anthony Company uses a perpetual inventory system. It entered into the following purchases and sales transactions for March.

Date Activities Units Acquired at Cost Units Sold at Retail
Mar. 1 Beginning inventory 50 units @ $50/unit
Mar. 5 Purchase 200 units @ $55/unit
Mar. 9 Sales 210 units @ $85/unit
Mar. 18 Purchase 60 units @ $60/unit
Mar. 25 Purchase 100 units @ $62/unit
Mar. 29 Sales 80 units @ $95/unit
Totals 410 units 290 units
Information given:

Compute the cost assigned to ending inventory using (a) FIFO, (b) LIFO, (c) weighted average, and (d) specific identification. For specific identification, the March 9 sale consisted of 40 units from beginning inventory and 170 units from the March 5 purchase; the March 29 sale consisted of 20 units from the March 18 purchase and 60 units from the March 25 purchase. (Due to rounding, the sum of Cost of Goods Sold and Ending inventory may not equal the Cost of Good available for sales. Round your per unit costs to 3 decimal places and inventory balances to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Ending
Inventory
(a) FIFO $ 7400
(b) LIFO $ 6840
(c) Weighted average $ 7176
(d) Specific identification $ 7030

anthony gray has been interested in music since he was old enough to sit at the pian 496091

Anthony Gray has been interested in music since he was old enough to sit at the piano. He grew up with music and used his talent to earn his way through college. Anthony has now grown tired of his job at a large music house in Houston and is seriously considering moving back to his hometown in Massachusetts to open a small music shop. In researching this venture, Anthony notices that he must include a projected income statement in his loan application.

Using Anthony’s target income of $23,000 and the following statistics from Robert Morris Associates’ Annual Statement Studies, construct a pro forma income statement for Anthony’s proposed music shop.

Net sales 100.0%

Cost of sales 59.9%

Gross profit 40.1%

Operating expenses 31.2%

Net profit (before taxes) 8.9%

anyone able to do this 496092

Time Value of Money

When the Genesis and Sensible Essential teams held their weekly meeting, the time value of money and its applicability yielded an extremely stimulating discussion. However, most of the team members from Genesis were very perplexed. Sensible Essentials decided the most expedient way to demonstrate how interest rates as well as time impact the value of money was to use examples. You have been asked to prepare a report analyzing your findings of the three example calculations listed below.

In this assignment, you will do the following:

  1. Calculate the future value of $100,000 ten years from now based on the following annual interest rates:
    1. 2%
    2. 5%
    3. 8%
    4. 10%
  2. Calculate the present value of a stream of cash flows based on a discount rate of 8%. Annual cash flow is as follows:
    1. Year 1 = $100,000
    2. Year 2 = $150,000
    3. Year 3 = $200,000
    4. Year 4 = $200,000
    5. Year 5 = $150,000
    6. Years 6-10 = $100,000
  3. Calculate the present value of the cash flow stream in problem 2 with the following interest rates:
    1. Year 1 = 8%
    2. Year 2 = 6%
    3. Year 3 = 10%
    4. Year 4 = 4%
    5. Year 5 = 6%
    6. Years 6-10 = 4

Perform your calculations in an Excel spreadsheet. Copy the calculations in a Word document. In addition, write a 2- to 3-page executive summary in Word format. Your summary should reflect a proper analysis of your findings, including a comparison and contrast of data.

applying balanced scorecard 496095

In many cases, managers end up in trouble as they direct their focus exclusively on cost savings. Cost cutting is always emphasized, but other impacts, such as decreased quality, can be overlooked. These overlooked impacts can have a significant effect on the revenue and profitability of an organization. The balanced scorecard is a measure to assure that management is not exclusively driven by cost, but balanced with other measures that also can significantly influence the performance of an organization.

Using the module readings and the Argosy University online library resources, research balanced scorecard and its application.

Select a service industry organization of your choice. Complete the following for the selected organization:

  • Recommend at least two performance measures in each of the balanced scorecard categories.
  • Explain each of your recommendations.
  • Using these measures as examples, explain how use of the balanced scorecard can increase the economic value added within the organization.

Write your initial response in 4 5 paragraphs. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.

applying decision making skills 496097

Paper due by 10am Monday, please only respond if you can produce by that deadline.

Must be 100% origanial. It gets checked by TURN IT In system. Rubric is below.

As a manager, part of your role is to develop strategy, and share this strategy with various stakeholders within the organization. This assignment will allow you to take your findings as a manager and communicate these findings to those who are affected.

Your company has been presented with a decision on replacing a piece of equipment for a new computerized version that promotes efficiency for the upcoming year. As manager you will need to decide whether or not the purchase of the new equipment is a worthwhile investment and to communicate your recommendations to Executive Management for a final decision. To be convincing, sufficient support for your recommendations must be provided in order to be considered valid and accepted.

Existing Equipment
Original Cost 60,000
Present Book Value 30,000
Annual Cash Operating Costs 145,000
Current Market Value 15,000
Market Value in Ten Years 0
Remaining useful Life 10 years
Replacement Equipment
Cost 600,000
Annual Cash Operating Costs 50,000
Market Value in Ten Years 0
Useful Life 10 years
Other Information
Cost of Capital 10%
Payback requirement 6 years

In this assignment, use the information above to develop a comprehensive analysis using NPV, Payback Method, and IRR to develop a recommendation on replacing the existing equipment with a new computerized version. Develop an executive summary of your findings in a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation format to present to Executive Management.

Do the following in your presentation:

  • Include a statement of the problem or topic, a concise analysis of the findings, and a recapitulation of any main conclusions or recommendations.
  • Be sure to incorporate specific details to highlight or support the summary including calculations.
  • Using your knowledge of capital budgeting techniques, explain how principles of capital budgeting, such as the payback method, IRR, and NPV, can be used to assess the potential projects and assist in the decision-making process.
  • Develop a 10-12 slide presentation in PowerPoint format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.

Develop a 10-12 slide presentation in PowerPoint format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.

applying decision making skills 496098

Applying Decision-Making Skills

As a manager, part of your role is to develop strategy, and share this strategy with various stakeholders within the organization. This assignment will allow you to take your findings as a manager and communicate these findings to those who are affected.

Your company has been presented with a decision on replacing a piece of equipment for a new computerized version that promotes efficiency for the upcoming year. As manager you will need to decide whether or not the purchase of the new equipment is a worthwhile investment and to communicate your recommendations to Executive Management for a final decision. To be convincing, sufficient support for your recommendations must be provided in order to be considered valid and accepted.

Existing Equipment
Original Cost 60,000
Present Book Value 30,000
Annual Cash Operating Costs 145,000
Current Market Value 15,000
Market Value in Ten Years 0
Remaining useful Life 10 years
Replacement Equipment
Cost 600,000
Annual Cash Operating Costs 50,000
Market Value in Ten Years 0
Useful Life 10 years
Other Information
Cost of Capital 10%
Payback requirement 6 years

In this assignment, use the information above to develop a comprehensive analysis using NPV, Payback Method, and IRR to develop a recommendation on replacing the existing equipment with a new computerized version. Develop an executive summary of your findings in a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation format to present to Executive Management.

Do the following in your presentation:

  • Include a statement of the problem or topic, a concise analysis of the findings, and a recapitulation of any main conclusions or recommendations.
  • Be sure to incorporate specific details to highlight or support the summary including calculations.
  • Using your knowledge of capital budgeting techniques, explain how principles of capital budgeting, such as the payback method, IRR, and NPV, can be used to assess the potential projects and assist in the decision-making process.

Develop a 10-12 slide presentation in PowerPoint format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M4_A2.ppt

aq amp q has ebit of 2 million total assets of 10 million stock holder s equity of 4 496100

AQ&Q has EBIT of $2 million, total assets of $10 million, stock holder s equity of $4 million, and pretax interest expense of 10 percent.
a) What is AQ&Q s indifference level of EBIT?
b) Given its current situation, might it benefit from increasing or decreasing its use of debt? Explain.
c) Suppose we are to AQ&Q s average tax rate is 40 percent. How does this affect your answers to (A) and (B)?
4) Faulkner s Fine Fries, Inc. (FFF) is thinking about reducing its debt burden. Given the following capital structure information and an expected EBIT of $50 million (plus or minus 10 percent) next year, should FFF change their capital structure?

CURRENT PROPOSED
Total assets $750 million $750 million
Debt $450 million $300 million
Equity $300 million $450 million
Common stock price $30 $30
Number of shares 10,000,000 15,000,000
Interest rate 12% 12%

8) The Nutrex Corporation wants to calculate its weighted average cost of capital. Its target capital structure weights are 40 percent long-term debt and 60 percent common equity. The before-tax cost of debt is estimated to be 10 percent and the company is in the 40 percent tax bracket. The current risk-free interest rate is 8 percent on Treasury bills. The expected return on the market is 13 percent and the firm s stock beta is 1.8.
a. What is Nutrex s cost of debt?
b. Estimate Nutrex s expected return on common equity using the security market line.
c. Calculate the after-tax weight average cost of capital.

archer daniels midland company is considering 496103

Archer Daniels Midland Company is considering buying a new farm that it plans to operate for 10 years. The farm will require an initial investment of $11.90 million. This investment will consist of $2.10 million for land and $9.80 million for trucks and other equipment. The land, all trucks, and all other equipment is expected to be sold at the end of 10 years at a price of $5.09 million, $2.30 million above book value. The farm is expected to produce revenue of $2.03 million each year, and annual cash flow from operations equals $1.89 million. The marginal tax rate is 35 percent, and the appropriate discount rate is 10 percent. Calculate the NPV of this investment. (Round intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 15.25.)

Capital Co. has a capital structure, based on current market values, that consists of 25 percent debt, 13 percent preferred stock, and 62 percent common stock. If the returns required by investors are 10 percent, 10 percent, and 15 percent for the debt, preferred stock, and common stock, respectively, what is Capital s after-tax WACC? Assume that the firm s marginal tax rate is 40 percent. (Round intermediate calculations to 4 decimal places, e.g. 1.2514 and final answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 15.25%.)

argentina partners is concerned about the possible effects of inflation on its opera 496106

Argentina Partners is concerned about the possible effects of inflation on its operations. Presently, the company sells 60,000 units for $30 per unit. The variable production costs are $15, and fixed costs amount to $700,000. Production engineers have advised management that they expect unit labor costs to rise by 15 percent and unit materials costs to rise by 10 percent in the coming year. Of the $15 variable costs, 50 percent are from labor and 25 percent are from materials. Variable overhead costs are expected to increase by 20 percent. Sales prices cannot increase more than 10 percent. It is also expected that fixed costs will rise by 5 percent as a result of increased taxes and other miscellaneous fixed charges. The company wishes to maintain the same level of profit t in real dollar terms. It is expected that to accomplish these objective, profits must increase by 6 percent during the year.

Required:

a. Compute the volume in units and the dollar sales level necessary to maintain the present profit t level, assuming that the maximum price increase is implemented.

b. Compute the volume of sales and the dollar sales level necessary to provide the 6 percent increase in profits assuming that the maximum price increase is implemented.

c. If the volume of sales were to remain at 60,000 units, what price increase would be required to attain the 6 percent increase in profits?

arma inc indirect and direct method cash flow correct w solutions 496107

Condensed financial data of Arma Inc. follow.

ARMA INC.
Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31

Assets

2011

2010

Cash $90,800 $48,400
Accounts receivable 92,800 33,000
Inventories 112,500 102,850
Prepaid expenses 28,400 26,000
Investments 138,000 114,000
Plant assets 270,000 242,500
Accumulated depreciation

(50,000)

(52,000)

Total

$682,500

$514,750

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Accounts payable $112,000 $67,300
Accrued expenses payable 16,500 17,000
Bonds payable 110,000 150,000
Common stock 220,000 175,000
Retained earnings

224,000

105,450

Total

$682,500

$514,750

ARMA INC.
Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales $392,780
Less:
Cost of goods sold $135,460
Operating expenses, excluding depreciation 12,410
Depreciation expense 46,500
Income taxes 27,280
Interest expense 4,730
Loss on sale of plant assets

7,500

233,880

Net income

$158,900

Additional information:

  1. New plant assets costing $85,000 were purchased for cash during the year.
  2. Old plant assets having an original cost of $57,500 were sold for $1,500 cash.
  3. Bonds matured and were paid off at face value for cash.
  4. A cash dividend of $40,350 was declared and paid during the year.

Complete the statement of cash flows using the indirect method and direct method

arrow enterprises uses a standard costing system 496109

A. Arrow Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 549 follows.
Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50 $26.00
Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50 68
Variable factory overhead: 8 hours @ $7.00 56
Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours @ 2.5 20
Total standard cost per unit $170.00

The following information pertains to activity for December:
1. Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit. All materials were consumed in operations.
2. Arrow incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity.
3. Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year.
4. Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units.

B. Nova Manufacturing applies factory overhead to products on the basis of direct labor hours. At the beginning of the current year, the company’s accountant made the following estimates for the forthcoming period:
Estimated variable overhead: $500,000
Estimated fixed overhead: $400,000
Estimated direct labor hours: 40,000

It is now 12 months later. Actual total overhead incurred in the manufacture of 7,900 units amounted to $895,100. Actual labor hours totaled 39,800. Assuming a direct labor standard of five hours per finished unit, calculate the following:
a. Variable overhead efficiency variance
b. Fixed overhead volume variance
c. Overhead spending variance

C. Banner Company manufactures flags of various countries. Each flag has a standard of eight square feet of fabric and three hours of direct labor time. Information about recent production activity follows.

Actual cost of fabric: $4.50 per square foot
Fabric consumed: 32,080 square feet
Standard price per square foot of fabric: $4.25
Standard direct labor rate: $10.00 per hour
Actual direct labor rate: $10.20 per hour
Actual labor hours worked: 11,940
Actual production completed: 4,000 flags

a. Compute the materials price variance and the materials quantity variance.
b. Compute the labor rate variance and the labor efficiency variance.

D. An abbreviated cash budget for Big Chuck Enterprises follows.

July August September
Beginning cash balance $10,000 $ $ ?
Add: Cash receipts 50,000 63,000 71,000
Deduct: Cash payments -64,000 -58,000 -64,000
Cash excess (deficiency) before financing ($4,000) $ $ ?
Financing
Borrowing to maintain minimum balance ?
Principal repayment ?
Interest payment ?
Ending cash balance $ $ $ ?

Big Chuck wishes to maintain a $10,000 minimum cash balance at all times. Additional financing is available (and retired) in $1,000 multiples at a 12% interest rate. Assume that borrowings take place at the beginning of the month; retirements, in contrast, occur at the end of the month. Interest is paid at the time of repaying principal and computed on the portion of principal repaid.

a. Find the unknowns in Big Chuck’s abbreviated cash budget.
b. Determine the outstanding loan balance as of September 30, after any repayments have been made.

ashford 4 week 3 assignment 496113

Complete the problems below and submit your work in an Excel document. Be sure to show all of your work and clearly label all calculations. All statistical calculations will use the Employee Salary Data Set.

Is the average salary the same for each of the grade levels? (Assume equal variance, and use the Analysis ToolPak function ANOVA.) Set up the data input table/range to use as follows: Put all of the salary values for each grade under the appropriate grade label.

A B C D E F

The factorial ANOVA with only two variables can be done with the Analysis ToolPak function two-way ANOVA with replication. Set up a data input table like the following:

Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade
Gender A B C D E F
M

F

For each empty cell, randomly pick a male or female salary from each grade. Interpret the results. Are the average salaries for each gender (listed as sample) equal? Are the average salaries for each grade (listed as column) equal?

Repeat question 2 for the compa values.

Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade
Gender A B C D E F
M

F

Pick any other variable you are interested in and do a simple two-way ANOVA without replication. Why did you pick this variable, and what do the results show?

What are your conclusions about salary equity now?

airline borrowing case may 1985 496042

It is May 1985 and UAL, Inc., parent of United Airlines, needs to borrow $500 million to finance the purchase of Hertz. You are Assistant Treasurer and must make a recommendation about the choice between borrowing in the USA in U. S. Dollars or in Japan in Yen ( ). As background, UAL, Inc. owns United Airlines and Westin Hotels. It is buying Hertz from RCA. United Airlines will generate about 80% of the UAL revenue and the remainder will be evenly split between Hertz and Westin. United Airlines, Hertz, and Westin Hotels are worldwide service companies that generate revenue in many countries and currencies, mainly in the U.S., Canada, Latin America, and Europe. The Treasurer considers this to be a No Brainer or easy choice.

If the loan is in U. S. Dollars in the USA, company policy requires the use of a specific investment banker. This firm describes the terms of the USA loan as follows: An interest rate of 11% per year paid semi-annually in December and June for 10 years. The principal of $500 million would be repaid at the end of the 10-years. There would be a one-time underwriting fee of 0.5% to be paid when the loan funds are received.

A leading Japanese bank is offering a loan with the interest and principal denominated in Yen. The interest rate will be 5% and there are no upfront fees. Both loans require interest payments in December and in June. The entire principal is due in June 1995.

In May 1985, the exchange rate fluctuated between 250 and 252 yen to the dollar. For convenience, use 250 to the $ as the exchange rate in May 1985. Each student must (a) recommend one alternative and (b) discuss why your alternative is wise.

You can find historical currency rates at http://www.oanda.com/convert/fxhistory. This link is provided to allow the reader to check the exchange rates included in the case.

airmeals inc 496043

AirMeals, Inc., prepares in-flight meals for a number of major airlines. One of the company’s products is stuffed cannelloni with roasted pepper sauce, fresh baby corn, and spring salad. During the most recent week, the company prepared 6,000 of these meals using 1,150 direct labor-hours. The company paid these direct labor workers a total of $11,500 for this work, or $10 per hour.

According to the standard cost card for this meal, it should require 0.20 direct labor-hours at a cost of $9.50 per hour.

Required:

  1. According to the standards, what direct labor cost should have been incurred to prepare 6,000 meals? How much does this differ from the actual direct labor cost?
  2. Break down the difference computed in (1) above into a labor efficiency variance and a labor rate variance.

aiu bus311 unit 1 2 assignments 496044

UNit 1 assignment

In each of the assignments in this course, you will be dealing with the following scenario: American Intellectual Union (AIU) has assembled a team of researchers in the United States and around the world to study job satisfaction. Congratulations, you have been selected to participate in this massive global undertaking.

The study will require that you examine data, analyze the results, and share the results with groups of other researchers. Job satisfaction is important to companies large and small, and understanding it provides managers with insights into human behavior that can be used to strengthen the company’s bottom line.

The data set for the study is a sample of a survey conducted on the population of the American Intellectual Union (AIU). This session’s unique data set may be found in the LEARNING MATERIALS and it contains the following nine sections of data that will be used throughout our course:

  • Gender
  • Age
  • Department
  • Position
  • Tenure
  • Overall Job Satisfaction
  • Intrinsic Job Satisfaction Satisfaction with the actual performance of the job
  • Extrinsic Job Satisfaction external to the job, for example, office location, your work colleagues, your own office (cubicle/hard walled office, etc),
  • Benefits Health insurance, pension plan, vacation, sick days, etc.

In the first assignment you are to complete the following:

  • You will need to examine two of the nine sections of data:
    • one section of qualitative data (choose either Gender or Position)
    • one section of quantitative data (choose either Intrinsic or Extrinsic)
  • Each section should include all data points listed in the column for the variable. The requirements include:
    1. Identify the data you selected.
    2. Explain why the data was selected.
    3. Explain what was learned by examining these sets of data.
    4. Your analysis should include using Microsoft Excel to obtain information about the data through the use of three measures of central tendency (mean, median, mode).
    5. Your analysis should also include the use of two measures of variability (standard deviation and variance). Some measures are appropriate for qualitative data, and some are appropriate for quantitative data.
    6. If a measure is not applicable, then explain why.
    7. You will have to also provide one chart/graph for each of the results of the two processed sections of data (2 total), such as a pie or bar chart or a histogram. (A table is not a chart/graph.) Ensure that you label the chart/graph clearly.
    8. You will then need to discuss what you additionally learned from the results of this process.
    9. Explain why charts/graphs are important in conveying information in a visual format and why standard deviation and variation are important.

You will need to combine all of the items above into one comprehensive report. This report must be completed in Microsoft Word and should contain:

This assignment will be assessed using the rubric providedhere.

Load the Data Analysis Toolpak by followingthese instructions.

NEED HELP?

  • Check out the Free Tutoring Available for BUSN311 students. You will need to sign up for the tutoring. Your instructor has the session-specific information. Don t wait, tutoring appointments fill up quickly.
  • Beginning Statistics Lab. Presentations and Resources are Available 24/7. Synchronous Live Sessions and Office Hours are held during the session. Live Sessions are also recorded for viewing at your convenience. Your instructor has the session-specific information.
  • The tutors and the lab instructor are qualified faculty members.

Please submit your assignment as a Word document in APA format using the attachedTemplate. Do NOT change the font, page breaks or margins. Using the template without deleting the headings ensures that you cover each segment of the assignment.

**********A NEW SET OF DATA IS USED EACH SESSION**********

If you are taking this class for a second time, submission of past work involving the data sets will result in a zero for the assignment. Your answers will be wrong since you are working with adifferentset of numbers.

If you procure old assignments from students or websites and use the data for your assignment, you will receive a zero because it is considered an egregious violation of the University’s academic integrity policy. The case will be referred to the Office of Academic Affairs and become part of your collegiate record. In certain circumstances, you may be awarded an F for the course.

The only way to succeed in this course is to complete the assignments using the current, dataset accessible through the link in Unit 1 on the assignment list. If you have a question or need clarification, please contact your instructor.

Unit2 – Individual Project

In each of the assignments in this course, you will be dealing with the following scenario: American Intellectual Union (AIU) has assembled a team of researchers in the United States and around the world to study job satisfaction. Congratulations, you have been selected to participate in this massive global undertaking.

The study will require that you examine data, analyze the results, and share the results with groups of other researchers. Job satisfaction is important to companies large and small, and understanding it provides managers with insights into human behavior that can be used to strengthen the company’s bottom line.

The data set for the study is a sample of a survey conducted on the population of the American Intellectual Union (AIU). This session’s unique data set may be found in the LEARNING MATERIALS and it contains the following nine sections of data that will be used throughout our course:

  • Gender
  • Age
  • Department
  • Position
  • Tenure
  • Overall Job Satisfaction
  • Intrinsic Job Satisfaction Satisfaction with the actual performance of the job
  • Extrinsic Job Satisfaction external to the job, for example, office location, your work colleagues, your own office (cubicle/hard walled office, etc),
  • Benefits Health insurance, pension plan, vacation, sick days, etc.

In the first assignment you are to complete the following:

  • You will need to examine two of the nine sections of data:
    • one section of qualitative data (choose either Gender or Position)
    • one section of quantitative data (choose either Intrinsic or Extrinsic)
  • Each section should include all data points listed in the column for the variable. The requirements include:
    1. Identify the data you selected.
    2. Explain why the data was selected.
    3. Explain what was learned by examining these sets of data.
    4. Your analysis should include using Microsoft Excel to obtain information about the data through the use of three measures of central tendency (mean, median, mode).
    5. Your analysis should also include the use of two measures of variability (standard deviation and variance). Some measures are appropriate for qualitative data, and some are appropriate for quantitative data.
    6. If a measure is not applicable, then explain why.
    7. You will have to also provide one chart/graph for each of the results of the two processed sections of data (2 total), such as a pie or bar chart or a histogram. (A table is not a chart/graph.) Ensure that you label the chart/graph clearly.
    8. You will then need to discuss what you additionally learned from the results of this process.
    9. Explain why charts/graphs are important in conveying information in a visual format and why standard deviation and variation are important.

You will need to combine all of the items above into one comprehensive report. This report must be completed in Microsoft Word and should contain:

This assignment will be assessed using the rubric providedhere.

Load the Data Analysis Toolpak by followingthese instructions.

NEED HELP?

  • Check out the Free Tutoring Available for BUSN311 students. You will need to sign up for the tutoring. Your instructor has the session-specific information. Don t wait, tutoring appointments fill up quickly.
  • Beginning Statistics Lab. Presentations and Resources are Available 24/7. Synchronous Live Sessions and Office Hours are held during the session. Live Sessions are also recorded for viewing at your convenience. Your instructor has the session-specific information.
  • The tutors and the lab instructor are qualified faculty members.

Please submit your assignment as a Word document in APA format using the attachedTemplate. Do NOT change the font, page breaks or margins. Using the template without deleting the headings ensures that you cover each segment of the assignment.

Unit3 – Individual Project

How Many People to Survey?

Gallup poll results are prevalent in the media especially leading up to elections as are reports on surveys done by universities and research groups like the Pew Research Center.

The survey results of small groups of people are used to portray a general consensus about a population. Ever wonder how many people should be included in a survey to make it a meaningful reflection of a population? Now you will be able to answer your own question. Be warned; you will never feel the same about these polls and surveys again.

Using the following specific resources, create a lecture (with citations) which includes the following:

Part 1: Survey Analysis

Entertainment Survey
Using a newspaper article from AIU library s full-text database: National Newspapers (Proquest), create a lecture (with citations) which includes the following:

  • Describe an entertainment poll or survey. Analyze the number of people who participated in the sample compared to the number in the population. Most news articles will not provide information on the number of people surveyed. In this case critique the validity of the results. (Be sure to cite the article which must be from National Newspapers -ProQuest) Here is aResearch Guide.
  • Discuss how the results of the survey can be used to tell a story or support an idea of the sponsoring company or media group.

Political Survey
Using polls from one of the following sources:

Source 1

Source 2

  • Describe a political poll or survey. Analyze the number of people who participated in the sample compared to the number in the population.
  • Discuss how the results of the survey can be used to tell a story or support an idea of the sponsoring company or media group.

General Survey
Using polls from one of the following sources:

Source 1

Source 2

  • Describe a general opinion poll or survey. Analyze the number of people who participated in the sample compared to the number in the population.
  • Discuss how the results of the survey can be used to tell a story or support an idea of the sponsoring company or media group.

Overview

Consider the three surveys presented.

  • Using the knowledge you learned from the textbook, compare and contrast the sample sizes in each of the three surveys mentioned in the post and determine if the samples sizes are appropriate.
  • In your opinion, which appears to be the most valid? (Cite and reference the textbook)

This section of the paper will be 2-3 pages in length and each survey or poll described MUST come from AIU Library s National Newspapers- ProQuest Database and Pew Research Center or Gallup.

Please do not use quotes or copy definitions. You will not receive credit for understanding the materials if you use the words of others. Keep in mind that since you did research and you have citations in the body of the post, you must also place a reference list at the end containing the textbook and the articles cited.

Part 2: Application
Create your own 3 question Entertainment or using this General Opinion Survey or another free survey program or thislink. Secure a minimum of 20 responses. Your survey respondents may be friends, family or classmates. (NOTE: The small sample size was chosen for convenience and as you know is not a valid sample. The goal is for you to create, deploy and analyze a simple survey.)
Create Excel charts of your results and describe those charts in words. (You will receive no credit for charts that are copied from the survey software.)

  • Include a copy of your survey
  • Provide charts of your results and describe those charts in words
  • Explain how the results of your survey can be used by a media group or company

This section of the paper will contain 1 page of text and 3 charts.

NEED HELP?

  • Check out the Free Tutoring Available for BUSN311 students. You will need to sign up for the tutoring. Your instructor has the session-specific information. Don t wait, tutoring appointments fill up quickly.
  • Beginning Statistics Lab. Presentations and Resources are Available 24/7. Synchronous Live Sessions and Office Hours are held during the session. Live Sessions are also recorded for viewing at your convenience. Your instructor has the session-specific information.
  • The tutors and the lab instructor are qualified faculty members.

Unit4 – Individual Project

Using AIU s survey responses from the AIU data set, complete the following requirements in the form of a 2-page report:

TEST #1

Perform the following two-tailed hypothesis test, using a .05 significance level:

  • Intrinsic by Gender
  • State the null and an alternate statement for the test
  • Use Microsoft Excel (Data Analysis Tools) to process your data and run the appropriate test. Copy and paste the results of the output to your report in Microsoft Word.
  • Identify the significance level, the test statistic, and the critical value.
  • State whether you are rejecting or failing to reject the null hypothesis statement.
  • Explain how the results could be used by the manager of the company.

TEST #2

Perform the following two-tailed hypothesis test, using a .05 significance level:

  • Extrinsic variable by Position Type
  • State the null and an alternate statement for the test
  • Use Microsoft Excel (Data Analysis Tools) to process your data and run the appropriate test.
  • Copy and paste the results of the output to your report in Microsoft Word.
  • Identify the significance level, the test statistic, and the critical value.
  • State whether you are rejecting or failing to reject the null hypothesis statement.
  • Explain how the results could be used by the manager of the company.

GENERAL ANALYSIS (Research Required)

Using your textbook or other appropriate college-level resources:

  • Explain when to use a t-test and when to use a z-test. Explore the differences.
  • Discuss why samples are used instead of populations.

The report should be well written and should flow well with no grammatical errors. It should include proper citation in APA formatting in both the in-text and reference pages and include a title page, be double-spaced, and in Times New Roman, 12-point font. APA formatting is necessary to ensure academic honesty.

Be sure to provide references in APA format for any resource you may use to support your answers.

Unit 5- Assignment

Using AIU s survey responses from the AIU data set, complete the following requirements in the form of a 3-page report:

TEST #1: Regression Analysis- Benefits & Intrinsic

Perform the following Regression Analysis, using a .05 significance level

  • Run a regression analysis using the BENEFITS column of all data points in the AIU data set as the independent variable and the INTRINSIC job satisfaction column of all data points in the AIU data set as the dependent variable.
    • Copy and paste the results of the output to your report in Microsoft Word.
  • Create a graph with the trendline displayed the 3 regression.
    • Copy and paste the results of the output to your report in Microsoft Word.

TEST #2: Regression Analysis- Benefits & Extrinsic

Perform the following Regression Analysis, using a .05 significance level

  • Run a regression analysis using the BENEFITS column of all data points in the AIU data set as the independent variable and the EXTRINSIC job satisfaction column of all data points in the AIU data set as the dependent variable.
    • Copy and paste the results of the output to your report in Microsoft Word.
  • Create a graph with the trendline displayed for the regression.
    • Copy and paste the results of the output to your report in Microsoft Word.

TEST #3: Regression Analysis- Benefits & Overall Job Satisfaction

Perform the following Regression Analysis, using a .05 significance level

  • Run a regression analysis using the BENEFITS column of all data points in the AIU data set as the independent variable and the OVERALL job satisfaction column of all data points in the AIU data set as the dependent variable.
    • Copy and paste the results of the output to your report in Microsoft Word.
  • Create a graph with the trendline displayed for the regression.
    • Copy and paste the results of the output to your report in Microsoft Word.

Overview of the Regressions

Complete the table with the following information:

Dependent Variable

Slope

Y-intercept

Equation

Intrinsic

Extrinsic

Overall

  • State the slope and the y-intercept for the three regressions.
  • State the least squares regression line equations for the threes regressions.
  • State the R-squared value for each of the regressions.

Analysis of the Regressions

Make very specific comments and give reasons regarding any similarities or differences in the output results.

Which regression produces the strongest correlation coefficient result? Why? What does it mean to a manager?

The report should be well written and should flow well with no grammatical errors. It should include proper citation in APA formatting in both the in-text and reference pages and include a title page, be double-spaced, and in Times New Roman, 12-point font. APA formatting is necessary to ensure academic honesty.

albatross anchor unit 6 project questions original paper 496045

Unit six Project Questions

Identify at least three direct and specific long-term and three
direct and specific short-term operations changes that Albatross Anchor
must make to gain a clear and sustainable competitive advantage.

Provide supporting information to validate and substantiate each recommended
change (be detailed in your justification for each).

Question Two
From the list below, select four operational issues and for each issue
chosen explain how it will help Albatross Anchor to improve:
1) Job retention
2) Employee morale
3) Employee dedication
Your explanation for each of the four selected issues must cover all three of
the items listed above.
Listing of Operational issues
(a) Work design
(b) Cross training
(c) Gainsharing and profit sharing
(d) Job design
(e) Task analysis
(f) Worker analysis
(g) Environmental analysis
(h) Ergonomics
(i) Technology and automation
(j) Job analysis

Question One

Carefully review the assignment scenario/case study. From the limited information in the scenario/case study, along with your answers to the unit three written assignment, identify at least three direct and specific long-term and three direct and specific short term operations changes that Albatross Anchor must make to gain a clear and sustainable competitive advantage (provide detailed information to validate and support each recommended change)

Question Two

From the list of ten operational issues in the Unit 6 assignment instructions select four operational issues. For eachof the four operational issues explain in detail that operational issue will help Albatross Anchor improve; 1) job retention, 2) employee morale, and 3) employee dedication.

albatross anchor unit 8 sales and operations planning resource planning original pap 496046

Unit 8: Sales and Operations Planning; Resource Planning

As a representative and consultant for firm your task is to use your expertise in Operations Management to assist Albatross Anchor.

Albatross Anchor is a small family owned business that began in 1976 with
four family members. Albatross anchor has grown exponentially and now employs one hundred and thirty people. Their one location/facility is situated
on twelve acres of land located in a rural suburb of Smalltown, USA. The
manufacturing plant and the main office are located in the same building
with the manufacturing. The administrative offices are in the front of the
building and the manufacturing area is in the back of the building. The
manufacturing part of the building is antiquated, worn, dirty, technology
deprived and it no longer meets all US safety and environmental standards
and the administrative offices are shabby and inefficient.
The owners of this small business have added on various processes as
needed within the limited space provided within the plant. When Albatross
Anchor first opened its doors their expertise laid in the manufacture of the
bell/mushroom anchor (using a foundry process). Because of international
competition in 1989 the owners of Albatross Anchor made the decision to
expand their product line to include fabricated snag hook anchors.

Products

The bell anchor is used primarily by fresh water marine craft. They are
manufactured primarily through a foundry process in which ore is
transformed into a liquid state and poured into molds for production.
The snag hook anchor is used primarily for small to medium sized saltwater
marine craft. The snag hook anchor is fabricated through the bending and
welding of iron rods and flat iron into a hook design so that bedrock and
seaweed can be snagged to hold the marine craft at anchor.
Each anchor is produced in multiple sizes to accommodate the type of craft
requiring the anchor.

Manufacturing

Each anchor type requires its own unique equipment and manufacturing
process. Both manufacturing areas share the same shipping and receiving
area, the warehouse area and administration. The manufacturing area of the
plant has had to change to accommodate the manufacture of the two
separate types of anchors. As each anchor requires its own manufacturing
challenges the manufacturing line must be completely changed over each
time the anchor type is changed. The time to switch over from one
manufacturing process/operation to the other manufacturing
process/operation is 36 hours.

The plant space is at a premium and warehousing space for raw materials
and finished product is limited and located at the far south end of the building.
Plant antiquation and safety issues result in small batch production only. As
a result lead time for large bulk orders is three to four weeks.

Costs and shipping challenges

Current manufacturing costs are $12.00 per pound for mushroom/bell
anchors and $6.00 per pound for snag hook anchors. While Albatross Anchor
charges the same per unit as their competitors their profit margin is as much
as 30% less due to operations inefficiencies.
Product size, bulk and weight (either anchor) requires shipment by rail and
by specialized ground transportation (large trucks). Domestic orders are
shipped by truck and international orders are shipped by rail and then by
large freighter. These are the only two methods of shipment of product to
customer.

Receipt of raw materials is by rail. Prior to the sale of anchors into the
international market all shipments of finished product went out completely
by truck and therefore all shipping activities were limited to the east side of
the building. Now, because of the limitation of shipping product into the
international marketplace all product shipments for international delivery go
out of the receiving dock for shipment for transportation by rail and then by
large freighter. Whereas prior to expansion into the international
marketplace shipping had been limited to the shipping department and
receiving was limited to the receiving area, now the receiving area must do
double duty–shipping of international orders and receipt of all raw
materials.

alec bryce and connor form triplets corporation problem 496047

Problem 2-3 o On June 24th of year 1, Alec, Bryce, and Connor form Triplets Corporation. They transfer the following assets: Property Transferred Transferor Asset Basis to Transferor FMV Number of Common Shares Issued Alec Land $200,000.00 $50,000.00 500 Bryce Production Equipment – 25,000.00 250 Connor Accounting Services – 25,000.00 250 Alec purchased the land 5 years ago for $200,000. Bryce purchase the production equipment 3 years ago for $48,000 and it is fully depreciated. (a) Does the transaction meet the requirements of section 351? (b) What are the amounts of the gains or losses recognized by Alec, Bryce, Connor, and Triplets? (c) What is each shareholders basis in their stock? When does the holding period for the stock begin? (d) What is Triplets basis in each asset? When does the holding period begin for each asset?

Alec purchased the land (a capital asset) five years ago for $200,000. Bryce purchased the equipment three years ago for $68,000. The equipment has been fully depreciated.

a. Does the transaction meet the requirements of Sec. 351?

b. What are the amount and character of the gains or losses recognized by Alec, Bryce, Connor, and Triplet?

c. What is each shareholder s basis in his or her Triplet stock? When does the holding period for the stock begin?

d. What is Triplet s basis in the land, equipment, and services? When does the holding period for each property begin?

e. How might they restructure this transaction to make it more beneficial from a tax perspective?

the ali baba co is he only supplier of a particular type of oriental carpet 496048

The Ali Baba Co. is he only supplier of a particular type of Oriental carpet. The estimated demand for its carpets is Q=112,000-500P+5M where Q=number of carpets, P=price of carpets (dollars per unit), and M=consumers’ income per capita.

The estimated averabe variable cost function for Ali Baba’s carpet is AVC=200-0.012Q+0.000002

Q2 Consumers income per capita is expected to be $20,000 and total fixed cost is $100,000.

a. How many carpets should the firm produce in order to maximize profit

b. What is the profit-maximizing price of carpets

c. What is the maximum amount of profit that the firm can earn selling carpets

d. Answer parts a through c if consumers’ income per capita is expected to be $30,000 instead.

alliance company manufactures two products brushes and combs the overhead costs 496051

Alliance Company manufactures two products (brushes and combs). The overhead costs have been divided into four cost pools that use the following activity drivers.

# of Setups

# of Orders

Machine Hours

Packing Orders

Brushes

30

35

2,000

100

Combs

10

65

6,000

150

Cost per Pool

$20,000

$10,000

$280,000

$60,000

Required

  1. Compute the allocation rates for each of the activity drivers listed.
  2. Allocate the overhead costs to Products S and T using activity-based costing.
  3. Compute the overhead rate using machine hours under the functional-based costing system.
  4. Allocate the overhead costs to Products S and T using the functional-based costing system overhead rate calculated in part (c).

allied company s small motor division manufactures a number of small motors used in 496052

E11-11

Allied Company s Small Motor Division manufactures a number of small motors used in household and office appliances. The Household Division of Allied then assembles and packages such items as blenders and juicers. Both divisions are free to buy and sell any of their components internally or externally. The following costs relate to small motor LN233 on a per unit basis.

Fixed cost per unit $5

Variable cost per unit $8

Selling price per unit $30

Instructions:

(a) Assuming that the Small Motor Division has excess capacity, compute the minimum acceptable price for the transfer of small motor LN233 to the Household Division.

(b) Assuming that the Small Motor Division does not have excess capacity, compute the minimum acceptable price for the transfer of the small motor to the Household Division.

(c) Explain why the level of capacity in the Small Motor Division has an effect on the transfer price.

allison manufacturing produces a subassembly used in the production of jet aircraft 496053

Operating Budget, Comprehensive Analysis solution in excel

Allison Manufacturing produces a subassembly used in the production of jet aircraft engines. The assembly is sold to engine manufacturers and aircraft maintenance facilities. Projected sales in units for the coming ve months follow:

January 40,000 February 50,000 March 60,000 April 60,000 May 62,000

The following data pertain to production policies and manufacturing speci cations followed by Allison Manufacturing:

a. Finished goods inventory on January 1 is 32,000 units, each costing $166.06. The desired ending inventory for each month is 80 percent of the next month s sales.

b. The data on materials used are as follows:

Direct Material Per-Unit Usage Unit Cost ($)

Metal 10 lbs. 8

Components 6 5

Inventory policy dictates that suf cient materials be on hand at the end of the month to produce 50 percent of the next month s production needs. This is exactly the amount of material on hand on December 31 of the prior year.

c. The direct labor used per unit of output is three hours. The average direct labor cost per hour is $14.25.

d. Overhead each month is estimated using a exible budget formula. (Note: Activity is measured in direct labor hours.)

Fixed-Cost

Component ($)

Variable-Cost

Component ($)

Supplies 1.00

Power 0.50

Maintenance 30,000 0.40

Supervision 16,000

Depreciation 200,000

Taxes 12,000

Other 80,000 0.50

e. Monthly selling and administrative expenses are also estimated using a exible budgeting formula. (Note: Activity is measured in units sold.)

Fixed

Costs ($)

Variable

Costs ($)

Salaries 50,000

Commissions 2.00

Depreciation 40,000

Shipping 1.00

Other 20,000 0.60

f. The unit selling price of the subassembly is $205.

g. All sales and purchases are for cash. The cash balance on January 1 equals $400,000. The rm requires a minimum ending balance of $50,000. If the rm develops a cash shortage by the end of the month, suf cient cash is borrowed to cover the shortage. Any cash borrowed is repaid at the end of the quarter, as is the interest due (cash borrowed at the end of the quarter is repaid at the end of the following quarter). The interest rate is 12 percent per annum. No money is owed at the beginning of January.

Required:

Prepare a monthly operating budget for the rst quarter with the following schedules. (Note: Assume that there is no change in work-in-process inventories.)

a. Sales budget

b. Production budget

c. Direct materials purchases budget

d. Direct labor budget

e. Overhead budget

f. Selling and administrative expenses budget

g. Ending nished goods inventory budget

h. Cost of goods sold budget

i. Budgeted income statement

j. Cash budget

allocating specific limited resources to specific activities is called 496054

Question 1 of 20 5.0 Points
Allocating specific, limited resources to specific activities is called:

A. resource allocation.

B. resource leveling.

C. resource tracking.

D. expediting a project.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 2 of 20 5.0 Points
The primary cause of concern in resource allocation is:

A. labor cost.

B. resource scarcity.

C. lack of solution methodologies.

D. parallel activities.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 3 of 20 5.0 Points
A project that cannot go over budget is considered:

A. time constrained.

B. schedule constrained.

C. resource constrained.

D. performance constrained.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 4 of 20 5.0 Points
The task duration with standard-practice resource usage is referred to as the:

A. expected task duration.

B. nominal task duration.

C. crash duration.

D. normal task duration.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 5 of 20 5.0 Points
A task has a normal duration of 9 days and crash duration of 7 days. Its normal cost is $40 and its crash cost is $100. What is the crash cost per day?

A. $140

B. $70

C. $50

D. $30
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 6 of 20 5.0 Points
What is an expediting technique in which the design and planning phases of a project are not actually completed before the building phase is started?

A. resource loading

B. fast-tacking

C. crashing

D. critical path
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 7 of 20 5.0 Points
Resource __________ refers to the amounts of specific resources that are scheduled for use on specific activities or projects at specific times.

A. expediting

B. leveling

C. loading

D. allocation
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 8 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following priority rules makes resources available so that activities start on their LSTs whenever possible without increasing the project’s duration?

A. As soon as possible

B. As late as possible

C. Shortest task duration first

D. Minimum slack first
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 9 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following rules maximizes the number of tasks that can be completed by a system in a given period of time?

A. As soon as possible

B. As late as possible

C. Shortest task duration first

D. Minimum slack first
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 10 of 20 5.0 Points
Several projects can be linked together with:

A. virtual activities.

B. nominal activities.

C. pseudoactivities.

D. ER links.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 11 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following is NOT commonly used to help select a priority rule?

A. Schedule slippage

B. Resource utilization

C. In-process inventory

D. Cost overruns
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 12 of 20 5.0 Points
Which of the following is a measure of the amount by which a project is delayed by application of a leveling rule?

A. Schedule inflation

B. Schedule progression

C. Schedule efficacy

D. Schedule slippage
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 13 of 20 5.0 Points
According to research, the best overall priority rule is:

A. as soon as possible.

B. as late as possible.

C. shortest task duration first.

D. minimum slack first.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 14 of 20 5.0 Points
The practice of assigning project team members to multiple projects is called:

A. concurrent engineering.

B. parallel activities.

C. fast-tracking.

D. multitasking.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 15 of 20 5.0 Points
The safety time added to chains other than the critical chain is called the:

A. feeding buffer.

B. project buffer.

C. path buffer.

D. critical buffer.
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 16 of 20 5.0 Points
In traditional Critical Path Method, a second estimate, referred to as the __________ duration, is made based on the resources required to expedite the task.

A. normal task

B. assumed

C. crash

D. approximated
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 17 of 20 5.0 Points
When task durations are estimated, an assumption is made that task resources are set at __________ levels.

A. standard

B. normal

C. manageable

D. low
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 18 of 20 5.0 Points
Used primarily in the construction industry, the term __________ refers to a technique in which the design and planning phases of a project are not actually completed before the building phase is started.

A. “fast-tracked”

B. “expediting”

C. “crash”

D. “resource loading”
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 19 of 20 5.0 Points
Goldratt’s Theory of Constraints focuses on:

A. uncertainty

B. constrained resources

C. tight project schedules

D. managing conflicting priorities
Reset Selection

Mark for Review What’s This?

Question 20 of 20 5.0 Points
With the __________ priority rule, tasks are supplied with resources in inverse order of their slacks. This rule usually minimizes the number of late activities.

A. most successors

B. most resources first

C. as late as possible

D. minimum slack first
Reset Selection

allocation of costs i analyze the following scenario jump hospital currently allocat 496055

Allocation of Costs

I
Analyze the following scenario: Jump Hospital currently allocates all maintenance department costs based on departmental square feet. However, the manager of the pharmacy department has suggested that an ABC approach be used for the portion of the maintenance department costs that relate to repairing equipment. Her contention is that the pharmacy has relatively little equipment that breaks. However, it must subsidize many high-tech departments that require expensive equipment repairs. Using the tables below, calculate the maintenance cost assigned to the pharmacy using the existing method and using an ABC approach. Clearly label your calculations in your analysis..

Maintenance Costs

Routine Maintenance

Repairs

Total

Volume (Square Feet)

100,000

800

Labor Hours

10,000

4000

14,000

Labor Cost/Hour

$12.00

$18.00

$13.71

Supplies

$20,000

$80,000

$100,000

Administration

$15,000

Department Information

Pharmacy

All Other Departments

Total

Square Feet

2,000

98,000

100,000

Volume of Repairs

3

797

800

Hours of Repairs

6

3,994

4,000

Supplies Used for Repairs

$200

$79,800

$80,000

II

Analyze the following scenario: Duncombe Village Golf Course is considering the purchase of new equipment that will cost $1,200,000 if purchased today and will generate the following cash disbursements and receipts. Should Duncombe pursue the investment if the cost of capital is 8 percent Why Clearly label your calculations in your analysis. .

Year

Cash Receipts

Cash Disbursements

Net Cash Flow

1

1,000,000

500,000

500,000

2

925,000

475,000

450,000

3

800,000

450,000

350,000

4

750,000

430,000

320,000

analysis 496060

Budgeting is an important internal activity. Preparing budgets involve forecasting sales and estimating costs. For this assignment, you will prepare a flexible budget for next year for Starbucks. The budget needs to be realistic and based on corporate and economic trends.

Companies prepare budgets based on absorption and/or variable costing. Due to lack of information, we’re limiting our budgeting to the absorption approach. Don’t forget that the presentation of the information is important.

Set up the flexible budget showing three different growth rates. Use the financial statements and do research on the company of your choice to determine growth trends. Explain your estimates and prepare a flexible budget showing the low, the average, and the high revenues and adjust all other line items in the income statement to reflect the revised revenue assumptions.

  • What is the growth rate in sales for the past three years?
  • Are revenues and expenses growing at the same rate? What was the experience in the past few years?
  • What is the current growth rate in the economy?
  • How are the competitiors doing?
  • Current interest rates and tax burdens.

Discuss the implications of the information after you have completed the flexible budget.

  • How does the flexible budget differ from a static budget?
  • Budgets are used for planning and control. Discuss how you can use the information derived for these two purposes?
  • Comment on using this information for permormance evaluations

an analysis of the accounts of chamberlin manufacturing reveals the following manufa 496061

ACCT301 WEEK 3 E5-16, P5-1A, E6-4, P6-2A

E5-16

An analysis of the accounts of Chamberlin Manufacturing reveals the following manufacturing cost data for the month ended June 30, 2008.

P5-1A

Bjerg Company specializes in manufacturing a unique model of bicycle helmet. The model is well accepted by consumers, and the company has enough orders to keep the factory production at 10,000 helmets per month (80% of its full capacity). Bjerg s monthly manufacturing cost and other expense data are as follows.

E6-4

Black Brothers Furniture Corporation incurred the following costs.

P6-2A

Utech Company bottles and distributes Livit, a diet soft drink. The beverage is sold for 50 cents per 16-ounce bottle to retailers, who charge customers 75 cents per bottle. For the year 2008, management estimates the following revenues and costs.

an analysis of comparative balance sheets the current year 039 s income statement an 496062

An analysis of comparative balance sheets, the current year’s income statement, and the general ledger accounts of Conard Corp. uncovered the following items. Assume all items involve cash unless there is information to the contrary.

Indicate how each item should be classified in the statement of cash flows using these four major classifications: operating activity (indirect method), investing activity, financing activity and significant noncash investing and financing activity.

(a) Payment of interest on notes payable ____________

(b) Exchange of land patent _________

(c) Sale of building at book value __________

(d) Payment of dividends ____________

(e) Depreciation ____________

(f) Receipt of dividends on investment stock ____________

(g) Receipt of interest on receivable ____________

(h) Issuance of capital stock _____________

(i) Amortization of patent _____________

(j) Issuance of bonds for land __________

(k) Purchase of Land ____________

(l) Conversion of bonds into common stock __________

(m) Loss on sale of land ______________

(n) Retirement of bonds _____________

analyze a nonprofit organization of your choice original paper 496064

Paper should 5 7 pages in length, double spaced. The topic will be: Analyze a nonprofit organization of your choice (I recommend choosing a nonprofit you feel strongly about or can relate to) and provide the information listed below: 1. Provide a brief history of the nonprofit 2. List the nonprofits mission, goal, and objectives 3. Define the organizational structure on the nonprofit 4. Define the consumers and stakeholders of the nonprofit 5. Define who the nonprofit s competition is, do they have any? 6. Answer the question what challenges does this nonprofit face in terms of fundraising and volunteerism. 7. What is the marketing strategy of this nonprofit? 8. Provide your opinion Where is the nonprofit headed in the future? What can they do to ensure their continued success?

andre s hair styling 496067

Andre has asked you to evaluate his business, Andre s Hair Styling. Andre has five barbers working for him. (Andre is not one of them.) Each barber is paid $9.90 per hour and works a 40-hour week and a 50-week year, regardless of the number of haircuts. Rent and other fixed expenses are $1,750 per month. Hair shampoo used on all clients is .40 per client. Assume that the only service performed is the giving of haircuts (including shampoo), the unit price of which is $12. Andre has asked you to find the following information.

Find the contribution margin per haircut. Assume that the barbers’ compensation is a fixed cost. Show calculations to support your answer.
Determine the annual break-even point, in number of haircuts. Support your answer with an appropriate explanation. Show calculations to support your answer.
What will be the operating income if 20,000 haircuts are performed? Show calculations to support your answer.
Suppose Andre revises the compensation method. The barbers will receive $4 per hour plus $6 for each haircut. What is the new contribution margin per haircut? What is the annual break-even point (in number of haircuts)? Show calculations to support your answer.

andre has asked you to evaluate his business andre s hair styling andre has five bar 496069

Andre has asked you to evaluate his business, Andre s Hair Styling. Andre has five barbers working for him. (Andre is not one of them.) Each barber is paid $9.90 per hour and works a 40-hour week and a 50-week year, regardless of the number of haircuts. Rent and other fixed expenses are $1,750 per month. Hair shampoo used on all clients is .40 per client. Assume that the only service performed is the giving of haircuts (including shampoo), the unit price of which is $12. Andre has asked you to find the following information.

1. Find the contribution margin per haircut. Assume that the barbers’ compensation is a fixed cost. Show calculations to support your answer.

2. Determine the annual break-even point, in number of haircuts. Support your answer with an appropriate explanation. Show calculations to support your answer.

3. What will be the operating income if 20,000 haircuts are performed? Show calculations to support your answer.

4. Suppose Andre revises the compensation method. The barbers will receive $4 per hour plus $6 for each haircut. What is the new contribution margin per haircut? What is the annual break-even point (in number of haircuts)? Show calculations to support your answer.

andronache inc 496073

During the quarter, Andronache Inc. collected $100 of cash from customers, paid $60 of cash to suppliers, paid $30 of cash to employees and other creditors, and recorded a $5 loss on sale of equipment. There were no other cash flows related to operating activities.

What was Andronache s Cash Flow from Operations during the quarter?
$25
$15
$20
$5
$10
Question 2
Krishnamoorthy Ltd. had Revenue of $1000, Depreciation and Amortization Expense of $100, Interest Expense of $100, and Tax Expense of $50. All other Expenses were $400. What was Krishnamoorthy s EBITDA?
$1000
$250
$600
$500
$400
Question 3
Sankararaman Co. s Balance Sheet had the following line item:

12/31/2012 12/31/2011
Accounts Receivable, net of allowances of $500 and $450, respectively $9,200 $8,400

What percentage of gross accounts receivable does Sankararaman expect to be uncollectable as of 12/31/2012?
5.08%
5.01%
5.36%
5.15%
4.43%
Question 4
Charilaou Inc. s footnotes had the following line item:

12/31/2012 12/31/2011
Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $800 $650

Charilaou also disclosed that Bad Debt Expense was $1000 in 2012 and $890 in 2011. There were no recoveries of previously-written off accounts in either year. What were total write-offs of uncollectable accounts for the year ended 12/31/2012?
$110
$850
$150
$1,150
$800
Question 5
Kr ger Ltd. s Statement of Cash Flows had the following line items:

2012 2011
Bad Debt Expense, net $1,500 $350
Increase in Accts Receivable $(6,600) $(2,900)

Kr ger reported Sales of $150,000 during the year ended 12/31/2012. How much cash did Kr ger collect from customers during the year ended 12/31/2012?
$143,400
$141,900
$150,000
$148,500
$156,600
Question 6
A retail company, Lindley-Mart, had the following line item on its Balance Sheet:

12/31/2012 12/31/2011
Inventory $2,500 $2,200

Lindley-Mart s Income Statement had the following line item:

2012 2011
Cost of Goods Sold $65,000 $59,000

How much inventory did Lindley-Mart purchase during the year ended 12/31/2012?
$58,700
$64,700
$65,000
$59,300
$65,300
Question 7
Rizzello Co. incurred the following costs during the quarter:

Raw materials used in production $132,000
Marketing materials used by sales staff $114,000
Wages of factory workers $191,000
Salaries of sales staff $391,000
Depreciation on factory and production equipment $152,000
Depreciation on headquarters building $132,000
Manufacturing overhead $172,000

How much of these costs would have been recorded in Rizzello’s Work in Process Inventory account during the quarter?
$647,000
$1,252,000
$779,000
$488,000
$495,000
Question 8
A manufacturing company, Tsang Industries Ltd., had the following line items in a footnote:

12/31/2012 12/31/2011
Raw Materials $150 $140
Work in Process $215 $200
Finished Goods $250 $240
$615 $580
LIFO Reserve $(100) $(60)
Total Inventory $515 $520

Tsang Industries Income Statement had the following line item:

2012 2011
Cost of Goods Sold $1,850 $1,725

What would Tsang Industries s Cost of Goods Sold had been if they had used the FIFO inventory method for the year ended 12/31/2012?
$1,850
$1,750
$1,950
$1,890
$1,810

angler s dream company supplies flies and fishing gear to sporting goods stores and 496076

Angler s Dream Company supplies flies and fishing gear to sporting goods stores and outfitters throughout the western United States. The accounts receivable clerk for Angler s Dream prepared the following partially completed aging of receivables schedule as of the end of business on December 31, 2011:

And so on

The following accounts were unintentionally omitted from the aging schedule:

And so on

Angler s Dream has a past history of uncollectible accounts by age category, as follows:

Age Class Percent Uncollectible
Not past due .. 1%
1 30 days past due ….. 4
31 60 days past due .. 8
61 90 days past due . 25
91 120 days past due 45
Over 120 days past due . 80

Instructions:

1. Determine the number of days past due for each of the preceding accounts.

2. Complete the aging of receivables schedule by adding the omitted accounts to the bottom of the schedule and updating the totals.

3. Estimate the allowance for doubtful accounts, based on the aging of receivables schedule.

4. Assume that the allowance for doubtful accounts for Angler s Dream Company has a debit balance of $1,405 before adjustment on December 31, 2011. Journalize the adjusting entry for uncollectible accounts.

5. Assume that the adjusting entry in (4) was inadvertently omitted, how would the omission affect the balance sheet and incomestatement?

the adjusted trial balance of foxworthy corporation for the year ended december 31 2 496019

The adjusted trial balance of Foxworthy Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2011 reported the following: sales revenue, $22,300,000; cost of goods sold, $14,500,000; selling expenses, $2,300,000; general and administrative expenses, $1,200,000; dividend revenue from investments, $200,000; interest expense, $300,000.

Foxworthy s management has not yet accrued for income taxes. The company’s income tax rate is 40% on all items of income or loss.

Two million shares of common stock were outstanding throughout the year.

The company’s controller has provided the following information with respect to certain non-recurring transactions that also occurred during the year (all transactions are material in amount):

  • Investments classified as available for sale were sold during the year at a loss of $300,000.
  • One of the factories was closed during the year. Restructuring costs incurred were $2,000,000.
  • During the year, Foxworthy completed the sale of one of its operating divisions that qualifies as a component of the entity. The division had reported operating income of $800,000 in 2011 prior to the sale, and its assets were sold at a loss of $1,800,000.
  • In 2011, the company’s accountant discovered that depreciation expense in 2010 for the office building was overstated by $300,000.
  • One of Foxworthy’s manufacturing facilities located in a foreign country was expropriated. A loss of $800,000 was recognized. The event is considered to be unusual and infrequent.

Required:

Prepare a formal Income Statement in proper format, including basic earnings per share disclosure for Foxworthy Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2011.

the adjusted trial balance of sheila and the screamers as of december 31 2008 follow 496020

The adjusted trial balance of Sheila and the Screamers as of December 31, 2008 follows:

Sheila and The Screamers

Adjusted Trial Balance

December 31, 2008

No. Account Title Debit Credit

101 Cash $139,200

124 Office supplies 50,000

128 Prepaid Insurance 2,200

167 Equipment 75,000

168 Accumulated depreciation Equipment $ 34,000

201 Accounts payable 43,000

210 Wages payable 20,000

301 S. Sham, Capital 129,700

302 S. Sham, Withdrawals 5,000

401 Headbanging revenue 220,000

612 Depreciation expense Equipment 11,500

623 Wages expense 125,000

637 Insurance expense 600

640 Rent expense 14,800

650 Legal expense 21,400

690 Fines and damages expense 2,000

_________ _________

Totals $446,700 $446,700

Required

1. Prepare an income statement and a statement of owner s equity for the year 2008, and a classified balance sheet at December 31, 2008. There are no owner investments in 2008.

2. Enter the adjusted trial balance in the first two columns of a six-column table. Use columns three and four for closing entries and the last two columns for a post-closing trial balance. Insert an Income Summary account as the last item in the trial balance.

3. Enter closing entries in the six-column table and prepare journal entries for them.

4. Assume for this part only that:

a. None of the $600 Insurance expense had expired during the year. Instead, assume it is a prepayment of the next period s protection.

b. There are no earned and unpaid wages at the end of the year. (Hint: Reverse the $20,000 wages payable accrual.)

Describe the financial statement changes that would result from these assumptions.

adjusting enteries 496021

PE 3-3A Adjustment for prepaid expense

The supplies account had a beginning balance of $1,975 and was debited for $4,125 for supplies purchased during the year. Journalize the adjusting entry required at the end of the year, assuming the amount of supplies on hand is $1,850.

PE 3-3B Adjustment for prepaid expense
The prepaid insurance account had a beginning balance of $9,600 and was debited for $12,900 of premiums paid during the year. Journalize the adjusting entry required at the end of the year, assuming the amount of unexpired insurance related to future periods is $7,360.

PE 3-4A Adjustment for unearned revenue
The balance in the unearned fees account, before adjustment at the end of the year, is $78,500. Journalize the adjusting entry required, assuming the amount of unearned fees at the end of the year is $33,675.

PE 3-4B Adjustment for unearned revenue
On June 1, 2014, Herbal Co. received $18,900 for the rent of land for 12 months. Journalize the adjusting entry required for unearned rent on December 31, 2014.

PE 3-5A Adjustment for accrued revenues
At the end of the current year, $12,840 of fees have been earned but have not been billed to clients. Journalize the adjusting entry to record the accrued fees.

PE 3-5B Adjustment for accrued revenues
At the end of the current year, $17,555 of fees have been earned but have not been billed to clients. Journalize the adjusting entry to record the accrued fees.

PE 3-6A Adjustment for accrued expense
Connect Realty Co. pays weekly salaries of $16,250 on Friday for a five-day workweek ending on that day. Journalize the necessary adjusting entry at the end of the accounting period, assuming that the period ends on Wednesday.

PE 3-6B Adjustment for accrued expense
Prospect Realty Co. pays weekly salaries of $27,600 on Monday for a six-day workweek ending the preceding Saturday. Journalize the necessary adjusting entry at the end of the accounting period, assuming that the period ends on Friday.

PE 3-7A Adjustment for depreciation
The estimated amount of depreciation on equipment for the current year is $9,100. Journalize the adjusting entry to record the depreciation.

PE 3-7B Adjustment for depreciation
The estimated amount of depreciation on equipment for the current year is $7,700. Journalize the adjusting entry to record the depreciation.

GROUP 2 Problems (4 points each, total available 34 points)

EX 3-3 Adjusting entry for supplies
The balance in the supplies account, before adjustment at the end of the year, is $2,389. Journalize the adjusting entry required if the amount of supplies on hand at the end of the year is $830.

EX 3-6 Adjusting entries for prepaid insurance
The balance in the prepaid insurance account, before adjustment at the end of the year, is $21,700. Journalize the adjusting entry required under each of the following alternatives for determining the amount of the adjustment: (a) the amount of insurance expired during the year is $16,450; (b) the amount of unexpired insurance applicable to future periods is $5,250.

EX 3-8 Adjusting entries for unearned fees
The balance in the unearned fees account, before adjustment at the end of the year, is $37,500. Journalize the adjusting entry required if the amount of unearned fees at the end of the year is $12,300.

EX 3-10 Adjusting entry for accrued fees
At the end of the current year, $8,450 of fees have been earned but have not been billed to clients.
a. Journalize the adjusting entry to record the accrued fees.
b. If the cash basis rather than the accrual basis had been used, would an adjusting entry have been necessary? Explain.

EX 3-13 Adjusting entries for accrued salaries a. Amount of entry: $7,050
Ocular Realty Co. pays weekly salaries of $11,750 on Friday for a five-day workweek ending on that day. Journalize the necessary adjusting entry at the end of the accounting period, assuming that the period ends (a) on Wednesday and (b) on Thursday.

EX 3-18 Adjustment for depreciation
The estimated amount of depreciation on equipment for the current year is $6,760. Journalize the adjusting entry to record the depreciation.


PR 3-1A Adjusting entries (5 points)

On July 31, 2014, the following data were accumulated to assist the accountant in preparing the adjusting entries for Atrium Realty:

a.The supplies account balance on July 31 is $6,880. The supplies on hand on July 31 are $2,200.
b.The unearned rent account balance on July 31 is $9,200, representing the receipt of an advance payment on July 1 of four months rent from tenants.
c.Wages accrued but not paid at July 31 are $1,850.
d.Fees accrued but unbilled at July 31 are $11,700.
e.Depreciation of office equipment is $3,500.Journalize the adjusting entries required at May 31, 2014.

PR 3-1B Adjusting entries (5 points)

On May 31, 2014, the following data were accumulated to assist the accountant in preparing the adjusting entries for Oceanside Realty:

a.Fees accrued but unbilled at May 31 are $19,750.
b.The supplies account balance on May 31 is $12,300. The supplies on hand at May 31 are $4,150.
c.Wages accrued but not paid at May 31 are $2,700.
d.The unearned rent account balance at May 31 is $9,000, representing the receipt of an advance payment on May 1 of three months rent from tenants.
e.Depreciation of office equipment is $3,200

Journalize the adjusting entries required at May 31, 2014.

adjusting entries 496022

a.

Depreciation on the company’s equipment for 2011 is computed to be $15,000.

b.

The Prepaid Insurance account had a $7,000 debit balance at December 31, 2011, before adjusting for the costs of any expired coverage. An analysis of the company s insurance policies showed that $1,230 of unexpired insurance coverage remains.

c.

The Office Supplies account had a $360 debit balance on December 31, 2010; and $2,680 of office supplies were purchased during the year. The December 31, 2011, physical count showed $425 of supplies available.

d.

One-fourth of the work related to $11,000 of cash received in advance was performed this period.

e.

The Prepaid Insurance account had a $5,900 debit balance at December 31, 2011, before adjusting for the costs of any expired coverage. An analysis of insurance policies showed that $4,670 of coverage had expired.

f.

Wage expenses of $3,000 have been incurred but are not paid as of December 31, 2011.

Prepare adjusting journal entries for the year ended (date of) December 31, 2011, for each of the above separate situations. Assume that prepaid expenses are initially recorded in asset accounts. Also assume that fees collected in advance of work are initially recorded as liabilities.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

adjustment data for ms ellen s laundry inc for the year ended december 31 2013 are a 496025

Adjustment process and financial statements

Adjustment data for Ms. Ellen s Laundry Inc. for the year ended December 31, 2013, are as follows:

a. Wages accrued but not paid at December 31, $2,150

b. Depreciation of equipment during the year, $12,500

c. Laundry supplies on hand at December 31, $1,500

d. Insurance premiums expired, $4,600

Instructions

1. Using the following integrated financial statement framework, record each adjustment to the appropriate accounts, identifying each adjustment by its letter. After all adjustments are recorded, determine the balances.

2. Prepare an income statement and retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, 2013. The retained earnings balance as of January 1, 2013, was $101,500.

3. Prepare a classified balance sheet as of December 31, 2013.

4. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2013.

advance accounting 496026

As a student of accounting, it is important to know when to consolidate entities, and it is also important to know the GAAP regulations on consolidation. If the voting interest does not apply (greater than 50% ownership) the risk-and-reward model is used to see if the company stands to gain in the economies of another company. If the answer is yes, then it needs to consolidate. This introduced the notion of a variable-interest-entity (VIE). Answer the following:

  • What characteristics does an entity need to have to be classified as a VIE?
    • If it meets the characteristics of a VIE, what is the next step to determine if it should consolidate this entity?
  • Based on these characteristics, please discuss whether the companies in each one of the situations should consolidate or not:
    • ABC company sells its notes to another entity, XYZ. The assets of XYZ are financed by lenders (90%) and investors (10%).
    • If ABC does not guarantee the debt of XYZ, should it consolidate XYZ’s financial statements or not?

Grandeur, a utility company, has a contract to purchase all of the power generated by the local companies over its lifetime.

  • Based on the characteristics of VIE discussed above, should these entities be classified as VIE?
    • Why or why not?
    • How will this affect their decision to consolidate?

advance accounting 496027

You are an accounting student taking a class in accounting. Your professor has given you an assignment for the weekend. He wants you to look at each ethical scenario listed below and answer the questions related to that scenario.

  1. Mr. Right and Mr. Wrong own an antique store in a partnership. They share profits and losses equally and receive an annual salary of $50,000, as per the partnership agreement. Mr. Right travels the country buying antiques. Mr. Wrong manages the store. From time to time, they use some of the small items from the store merchandise for personal use. Mr. Wrong s daughter is getting married, and she loves an antique piece that costs $5,000. Mr. Wrong makes the following entry on the books to record the transaction:

Debit

Credit

Cost of goods sold

$5,000

Inventory

$5,000

  • How should Mr. Wrong have recorded the transaction?
  • What are the ethical aspects of Mr. Wrong s action?
  1. Mr. White (invested $20,000) and Mr. Black (invested $10,000) are in a partnership to run a marketing firm. They share profits and losses in the ratio of 2:1, which is also the ratio of their initial investment in the business. Mr. White manages the office but Mr. Black gets all of the contracts for the firm. It is his high profile that gets the contracts for the firm. At the end of the year, the firm has reported net income of $300,000, which was allocated in the ratio of 2:1, ($200,000 for Mr. White, and $100,000 for Mr. Black). On Dec 31, 20XX, Mr. White s capital balance was $150,000 and Mr. Black s capital balance was $100,000. Mr. White has withdrawn more cash from the business than his partner Mr. Black.
    • On Jan 15th, Mr. White discovered that the net income for the previous year was understated by $60,000. Mr. Black tells Mr. White that this net income of $60,000 should be shared in the proportion of their current capital balances. (Mr. White = 150,000/$250,000 = 60% = $36,000; Mr. Black = $100,000/$250,000 = 40% = $24,000). But Mr. White feels that the additional income should be shared in the ratio of 2:1 ($60,000 x 2/3 = $40,000 Mr. White; $60,000 x 1/3 = $20,000 Mr. Black). Who is correct? Why?
  1. GAAP rules are clear about when a company needs to consolidate or not, but companies tend to find loopholes to circumvent this rule. GAAP clearly indicates that consolidated financial statements are usually necessary for a fair presentation when one of the companies in the group directly or indirectly has a controlling financial interest in other companies: the usual condition for a controlling financial interest is ownership of a majority voting interest.

Controlling financial interest means to own more/greater than 50% of the voting stock of another company.

Because of this greater than 50% of the voting stock, some of the companies have taken advantage of the criterion, causing serious problems in the business world. Companies were destroyed and with it, employees lost their jobs, their pensions, and 401Ks. So FASB had to make changes to GAAP for consolidations and issued new guidelines.

  • As a student of accounting, you must know these rules. Please research and discuss the new guidelines issued by GAAP for consolidating entities.
  • Give an example of a company that was involved in this kind of unethical behavior.

write a memo to your manager giving your thoughts on how this should be handled by t 496028

You work in a CPA firm. Your manager walks into your cubicle and says, One of our clients is thinking about investing in a company. He wants to know how he should account for this investment. Be prepared to discuss it with the client tomorrow.

Write a memo to your manager giving your thoughts on how this should be handled by the client.

The situation is the following:

    • Company F purchased 40% of the outstanding stock of company K on June 30, 20XX.
    • Both of the companies have a December 31st, year end.
    • Company K is a publicly traded company and reports its net income to company F.
    • Company K also pays a hefty dividend to the shareholders of company F.
    • How should company F report the above facts on its December 31, 20XX balance sheet and income statement?
    • Support your answer

advance accounting 496029

You work in a CPA firm. Your manager walks into your cubicle and says, One of our clients is thinking about investing in a company. He wants to know what the difference is between the equity method and cost method of accounting.

  1. Prepare 4 5 slides in PowerPoint with speaker notes, and explain the following items:
    • What are the GAAP requirements for reporting an investment using the equity method of accounting?
    • Using the equity method of accounting, how would a company report the:
      • original investment
      • net income
      • dividends received from the invested company
    • Create a simple example, and show the journal entries for recording the:
      • investment in the books
      • net income
      • dividends issued by the company
  2. Prepare 4 5 slides in PowerPoint with speaker notes, and explain the following items:
    • What are the GAAP requirements for reporting an investment using the cost method of accounting?
    • Using the cost method of accounting, how would a company report the:
      • original investment
      • net income
      • dividends received from the invested company
    • Create a simple example, and show the journal entries for recording the:
      • investment in the books
      • net income
      • dividends issued by the company

advanced cost accounting 496030

Consider the following information:

Q1

Q2

Q3

Beginning inventory (units)

0

J

300

Actual units produced

4,700

5,200

5,100

Budgeted units to be produced

5,000

5,000

Q

Units sold

A

5,100

R

Variable manufacturing costs per unit produced

$150

$150

$150

Variable marketing costs per unit sold

$50

$50

$50

Fixed manufacturing costs

$800,000

$800,000

$800,000

Fixed marketing costs

$200,000

$200,000

$200,000

Selling price per unit

$500

$500

$500

Variable costing operating income

B

$530,000

S

Absorption costing operating income

C

K

$544,000

Variable costing beginning inventory

D

$30,000

T

Absorption costing beginning inventory

E

L

U

Variable costing ending inventory

F

M

$30,000

Absorption costing ending inventory

G

N

$62,000

PVV

H

O

V

Allocated fixed manufacturing costs

I

P

$816,000

There are no price, efficiency, or spending variances, and any production-volume variance is directly written off to cost of goods in the quarter in which it occurs.

Complete the missing figures from the above Table.

Q1

Q2

Q3

A

J

Q

B

K

R

C

L

S

D

M

T

E

N

U

F

O

V

G

P

H

I

advanced financial accounting 496031

ADVACED FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING

Q. What was the primary cause of the current financial crisis? Sub-prime mortgages, credit default swaps, or excessive debt? None of those , says Steve Forbes, chairman of Forbes Media and sometime political candidate. In his view, mark-to-market accounting was “the principal reason” that the U.S. financial system melted down in 2008.

Do accounting rules actually pack such a wallop? For readers not schooled in financial jargon, marking to market is the practice of revaluing an asset quarterly according to the price it would fetch if sold on the open market, regardless of what was actually paid for it. Because the practice allows for no outdated or wishful-thinking valuations, it is a key component of what is known as fair value accounting. And it is at the centre of the hottest accounting debate in decades.

Many bankers pilloried fair value accounting when the sudden seize-up of credit markets in the fall of 2008 drove the clearing prices for key assets held by their institutions to unprecedented lows. Economist Brian Wesbury represented the views of that group when he declared, “Mark-to-market accounting rules have turned a large problem into a humongous one. A vast majority of mortgages, corporate bonds, and structured debts are still performing. But because the market is frozen, the prices of these assets have fallen below their true value.” Pozen (2009, p 85)

Reference:

POZEN, R. C. (2009) Is It Fair to Blame Fair Value Accounting for the Financial Crisis? Harvard Business Review, 87, 84-92.

REQUIRED:

A.

Measurements by using fair value accounting have played an instrumental role in the creation of global financial crisis. Therefore, we should abandon the use of fair value accounting as a measurement tool.

Critically evaluate the above statement, by addressingstrengths and limitations of fair value accounting through the analysis of literature.

B.

Identify two companies listed on Australian Securities Exchange (ASX).

a.

Analyze the use of fair value measurement in their 2010-2011 financial year reports

b.

Analyze the use of other alternative measurement methods in their reports

C.

Based on your response to questions A and B, discuss the future development of fair value measurement in financial reporting.

D.

Marking guide

Assessment Structure

Excellent

Very Good

Good

Average

Marginal

Poor

Very Poor

1. Synopsis/abstract (5)

2.Introduction (5)

3. Part A (20)

4. Part B (30)

5. Part C (25)

6. Conclusion / recommendation (5)

7. Referencing and citations (5)

8. English expression, coherence, grammar and spelling (5)

Submission Requirements:-

A)

Harvard style referencing

B)

2500 words

C)

Plagiarism- 20%

ae11 15 a depreciation for fractional periods 496032

On March 10, 2014, No Doubt Company sells equipment that it purchased for $307,200 on August 20, 2007.

It was originally estimated that the equipment would have a life of 12 years and a salvage value of $26,880 at the end of that time, and depreciation has been computed on that basis. The company uses the straight-line method of depreciation.

Compute the depreciation charge on this equipment for 2007, for 2014, and the total charge for the period from 2008 to 2013, inclusive, under each of the six following assumptions with respect to partial periods. (Round all computations and final answers to 0 decimal places, i.e. 2,250. If answer is zero, please enter 0, do not leave any fields blank.)

Depreciation is computed for the exact period of time during which the asset is owned. (Use 365 days for base.)
Depreciation is computed for the full year on the January 1 balance in the asset account.
Depreciation is computed for the full year on the December 31 balance in the asset account.
Depreciation for one-half year is charged on plant assets acquired or disposed of during the year.
Depreciation is computed on additions from the beginning of the month following acquisition and on disposals to the beginning of the month following disposal.
Depreciation is computed for a full period on all assets in use for over one-half year, and no depreciation is charged on assets in use for less than one-half year. (Use 365 days for base.)

aed 204 entire course 496033

AED 204 CheckPoint Top 10 Characteristics of a Multicultural School Environment.doc

AED 204 Final Project Creating a Plan for a Culturally Diverse Classroom.doc

AED 204 WEEK 1 DISCUSSION QUESTIONS.doc

AED 204 WEEK 3 DISCUSSION QUESTIONS.doc

AED 204 Week 4 Assignment Debunking Gender Misconceptions.pptx

AED 204 WEEK 5 DISCUSSION QUESTIONS.doc

AED 204 WEEK 7 DISCUSSION QUESTIONS.doc

AED 204 Week 8 Assignment Creating an At Risk Program.pptx

AED 204 Assignment Educational Implications of Socioeconomic Status Matrix.doc

AED 204 Assignment Religious Impact Matrix.doc

AED 204 Capstone Discussion Question.doc

AED 204 CheckPoint Differences in Socioeconomic Status.doc

AED 204 CheckPoint Equal Inclusion Case Law.doc

AED 204 CheckPoint Identifying Signs of Abuse Drug Use and Suicidal Tendencies in Students.doc

AED 204 CheckPoint Legal and Ethical Issues Confronting the Education of English Language Learners.doc

AED 204 CheckPoint Personal Statement.doc

AED 204 CheckPoint Sexual Harassment Scenario.doc

AED 204 CheckPoint The First Amendment and its Impact on Education.doc

aed 205 entire course 496034

AED 205 Earth Day Poster Activity Checkpoint.doc

AED 205 Elements of Classroom Management Checkpoint.doc

AED 205 Engaging Disengaged Students.doc

AED 205 Inclusion Checkpoint.doc

AED 205 Meeting Students Special Needs Exercise.doc

AED 205 Minimizing Classroom Disruptions.doc

AED 205 Monitoring Student Progress Checkpoint.doc

AED 205 Panel Interview.doc

AED 205 Sample Activity.doc

AED 205 Week 2 DQs.doc

AED 205 Week 4 DQs.doc

AED 205 Week 5 Assignment Managing Independent.ppt

AED 205 Week 6 DQs.doc

AED 205 Week 8 CheckPoint Student Behavior Teacher Response Appendix E.doc

AED 205 Week 8 DQs.doc

AED 205 Career in Education.doc

AED 205 Challenges in the Classroom Checkpoint.doc

AED 205 Challenges of Independent Work Checkpoint.doc

AED 205 Classroom Management Goals Checkpoint.doc

AED 205 Delivering Lessons for All Students.doc

aegis inc is a home inspection firm based in the northern virginia area the presiden 496035

Aegis Inc. is a home inspection firm based in the Northern Virginia area. The President of the company, Ms. Rose Wilson, is concerned about the morale of the sales team. Ms. Wilson had contracted a local firm to survey the employees of Aegis Inc. and the results were delivered to her in an EXCEL spreadsheet. She has tasked her Vice President of Human Resources, Mark Wolfe, to analyse the results of the survey and to report the results to her. Ms. Wilson told Mark that she was concerned about the attitudes of the sales force. In addition to the questions that were asked some additional data were recorded: the most recent base annual salary, commission and total pay, the years of seniority, the sales region of the individual, the gender (0=male, 1=female) and the number of contracts written in the pay period.

The survey instructions indicated that the first 5 questions were measured using a 5-point scale using the following key: 1 = strongly disagree, 2 = disagree, 3 = neither agree nor disagree, 4 = agree, 5 = strongly agree. The questions were as follows:

Q1: Aegis Inc. has a good mentoring program

Q2: Aegis Inc. is committed to delivering good value to customers

Q3: Aegis Inc. has very traditional and conservative values

Q4: Aegis Inc. company practices favor men

Q5: Aegis Inc. has a lot of internal power politics.

The final question used a 1-10 scale:

Q6: On a numeric scale, where 0 means totally autocratic and 10 means totally democratic, how would you rate the management style at Aegis Inc.?

There are only 2 divisional managers for Aegis Inc. The geographic regions of the sales team are as follows:

Region Number Divisional

Manager

Area Size of Sales Force

1 A South East 60

2 A North East 93

3 A Midwest 59

4 B South West 49

5 B Mountain States 80

6 B West Coast 67

Total 408

Region 4 was only established eight months ago. Prior to that time, the branches were part of Regions 1, 5 and 6.

after creative design 039 s first month of operations your friend delivers jessi 039 496036

After Creative Design’s first month of operations your friend delivers to you a stack of invoices, check stubs, receipts and her first VISA-Business bill. You must decipher these in order to enter them into the accounts.

After sorting through the source documents you make a list of transactions for the first month, April:

1. Jessi invested her life savings in the company $10,000.

2. Jessi purchased from Best Buy a computer and printer/ fax/ copier and monitor and software for $3500. She got a 12 month no interest credit arrangement and will make monthly payments to Best Buy. You decide this will all be equipment.

3. Jessi set up a credit account with an office supply store for supplies, and purchased supplies including printer paper, CDs, and ink for the printer for $200. Jessi gave you the bill but she does not have to make a payment until month end.

4. Jessi purchased a comfortable desk chair from a department store for $250. You decide this will be equipment.

7. Jessi s CPA gave her some tax advice so she decided to develop a logo and other advertising materials for her car and customers. She had them printed and had her car painted with the new logo. This cost Jessi $500. You decide this will be expensed.

8. Jessi negotiated a business transaction with a local Mexican Restaurant just opening. She will work on a logo, menu, and flyers. The restaurant owner paid $200 down to be used against the first month s bill. Jessi will bill the customer monthly based on her hours worked on the account.

9. Jessi designed a flyer for a local bakery and was paid cash of $150.

12. Jessi designed a CD cover for a friend who is a drummer in a local band. She was paid $400 for her work.

14. Jessi designed some POS material for a local coop market. She billed them for $500 for her work.

22. Jessi set up accounts to purchase stock photos for artwork and subscriptions $200. This is a prepaid asset until Jessi uses the photos.

23. Jessi designed and set up a website, email account, etc for herself. She paid $240 to register everything and will expense $20 per month against this amount.

24. Jessi wrote a check to herself to cover her rent and car insurance. $1,200.

Enter the above transactions into the journal and post them to the T accounts. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

Month End Adjusting Entries

Jessi is anxious to find out if she has earned any profits the first month of her operations. You have to adjust the accoutns to bring them up to date before you can prepare the financial statements. Enter the following adjusting entries into a general journal. Post the adjustments to the T accounts and prepare an adjusted trial balance.

1. The depreciation on the equipment is $104.

2. The supplies on hand at the end of the month are $150.

3. The balance in the subscriptions web site is $175.

4. The monthly amount for the web site and email account must be expensed.

5. Jessi determined she performed $1,000 worth of work for the Mexican restaurant.

6. Jessi made her first monthly payment on the computer to Best Buy, $292.

7. Jessi made a payment for supplies to staples of $75.

8. Jessi received a check from the local coop market of $250.

9. Jessi worked on a business card and logo for a local quilting shop. She did not finished the work and there will be more work for this company so she billed them for 15 hours at $75 per hour.

Financial Statements and Closing Process

Now that the adjusting entries have been completed, posted, and an adjusted trial balance has been completed it is time to prepare the financial statements and go through the closing process.

1. From the adjusted trial balance, prepare the income statement, statement of retained earnings and balance sheet.

2. Prepare the closing entries. Post the closing entries to the T and prepare a post closing trial balance.

after graduation adrian moved across the country etc attachment 496037

  1. After graduation, Adrian moved across the country to Brownville and bought a small house for $208,000. Bill moved to Columbus and bought a house for $195,000. Four years later, they both sold their houses. Adrian netted $256,000 when she sold her house and Bill netted $168,000 on his. a. What annual rate of return did Adrian realize on her house? b. What annual rate of return did Bill realize on his house?
  1. Assume an ordinary annuity of $500 at the end of each of the next three years. a. What is the present value discounted at 10%? b. What is the future value at the end of year 3 if cash flows can be invested at 10%?

A1.(Bond valuation) A $1,000 face value bond has a remaining maturity of 10 years and a
required return of 9%. The bond s coupon rate is 7.4%. What is the fair value of this bond?

A10. .(Dividend discount model) Assume RHM is expected to pay a total cash dividend of $5.60 next year and its dividends are expected to grow at a rate of 6% per year forever. Assuming annual dividend payments, what is the current market value of a share of RHM stock if the required return on RHM common stock is 10%?

A12.(Required return for a preferred stock) James River $3.38 preferred is selling for $45.25. The preferred dividend is nongrowing. What is the required return on James River preferred stock?

A14. (Stock valuation) Suppose Toyota has nonmaturing (perpetual) preferred stock outstanding that pays a $1.00 quarterly dividend and has a required return of 12% APR (3% per quarter). What is the stock worth?

(Interest-rate risk) Philadelphia Electric has many bonds trading on the New York Stock
Exchange. Suppose PhilEl s bonds have identical coupon rates of 9.125% but that one issue matures in 1 year, one in 7 years, and the third in 15 years. Assume that a coupon payment was made yesterday.
a. If the yield to maturity for all three bonds is 8%, what is the fair price of each bond?
b. Suppose that the yield to maturity for all of these bonds changed instantaneously to 7%.
What is the fair price of each bond now?
c. Suppose that the yield to maturity for all of these bonds changed instantaneously again,
this time to 9%. Now what is the fair price of each bond?
d. Based on the fair prices at the various yields to maturity, is interest-rate risk the same,
higher, or lower for longer- versus shorter-maturity bonds?

B18. (Default risk) You buy a very risky bond that promises a 9.5% coupon and return of the $1,000 principal in 10 years. You pay only $500 for the bond.

a. You receive the coupon payments for three years and the bond defaults. After liquidating the firm, the bondholders receive a distribution of $150 per bond at the end of 3.5 years. What is the realized return on your investment?

b. The firm does far better than expected and bondholders receive all of the promised

interest and principal payments. What is the realized return on your investment?

B20. (Constant growth model) Medtrans is a profitable firm that is not paying a dividend on its common stock. James Weber, an analyst for A. G. Edwards, believes that Medtrans will begin paying a $1.00 per share dividend in two years and that the dividend will increase 6% annually thereafter. Bret Kimes, one of James colleagues at the same firm, is less optimistic. Bret thinks that Medtrans will begin paying a dividend in four years, that the dividend will be $1.00, and that it will grow at 4% annually. James and Bret agree that the required return for Medtrans is 13%.

a. What value would James estimate for this firm?

b. What value would Bret assign to the Medtrans stock?

C1. (Beta and required return) The riskless return is currently 6%, and Chicago Gear has estimated the contingent returns given here.

a. Calculate the expected returns on the stock market and on Chicago Gear stock.

b. What is Chicago Gear s beta?

c. What is Chicago Gear s required return according to the CAPM?

REALIZED RETURN

State of the Market Probability that State Occurs Stock Market Chicago Gear

Stagnant 0.20 (10%) (15%)

Slow growth 0.35 10 15

Average growth 0.30 15 25

Rapid growth 0.15 25 35

for aifarooq 496039

Task 5: Dollar-unit sampling Accounts receivable (24 marks)

    1. To test existence and help assess valuation of accounts receivable, you have used dollar-unit sampling to select a sample of account balances for confirmation. Total accounts receivable at year end amounted to 1,200 accounts, totalling $1,750,000. You used an ARIA of 5% and tolerable misstatement of $35,000, and estimated the likely misstatement in the population to be $4,375. What is the minimum sample size for this test? (Use Exhibit 6.5-1 in Topic 6.5.) (4 marks)
    2. You selected 200 balances for confirmation and found two errors in the customer responses. The first was an item with a recorded value of $260,000 and an audited value of $257,400; the second was an item with a recorded value of $95,000 and an audited value of $93,575. Determine the (unadjusted) upper error limit (upper bound) for the audit of accounts receivable, at 5% ARIA. (Use Exhibit 6.6-1 in Topic 6.6 to calculate the precision increment.) (8 marks)

Note: Round any dollar amounts to the nearest dollar.

  1. Determine the likely aggregate misstatement overstating accounts receivable and the associated sampling risk. (4 marks)
  2. What options are available to you if the upper error bound exceeds the tolerable error amount for the population? (8 marks)

Task 6: Attributes sampling Paid invoices (12 marks)

  1. You wish to test whether invoices for purchases are supported by receiving reports before payment using attribute sampling. The sample is to be drawn from paid invoices for inventory purchases. You have decided to use the following parameters for this test: ARO of 5%; TDR of 9% and an expected population deviation rate of 0.75%. Determine the minimum sample size for the test based on the assumptions provided. (Use Exhibit 6.5-1 in Topic 6.5.) (3 marks)
  2. You select a sample of 75 items and find four invoices which were paid, despite having no receiving report attached. Determine the computed upper deviation rate and state the audit conclusion based on your sample results. (Use Exhibit 6.6-1 in Topic 6.6.) (5 marks)
  3. Describe two options available to you if the upper deviation rate is greater than the tolerable deviation rate. (4 marks)

for aifarooq786 496040

Question 2 (10 marks)

Comfy Travel Inc. manufactures RVs and sells them all over North America. The RVs are sold directly to dealers, who typically finance the purchases of RVs with their banks. Comfy Travel manufactures the RVs (that is, orders the parts and assembles the RVs) only upon receiving the dealer s order. The dealers banks usually pay Comfy Travel Inc. within two weeks of shipment. In the past, the demand and margins earned on RV sales have remained relatively consistent. However, this year, the declining cost of air travel and the increasing cost of gasoline have caused a general decline in the demand for RVs. Comfy Travel Inc. s management responded to the declining demand by offering dealers increased incentives. For example, Comfy Travel offered a $1,000 rebate on each RV purchase.

It is now October 15, 2012, and you have been assigned as the senior in charge of the Comfy Travel Inc. audit for the year ended September 30, 2012. You obtained the following September 30 preliminary figures in millions of dollars:

2012 2011
(Audited)
2010
(Audited)
2009
(Audited)
2008
(Audited)
Industry
Average
2012
Industry
Average
2011
Inventory 4.8 3 2.95 3 3.1 5.3 4.8
Sales 28.8 27.4 27.5 28 28.2 38.6 38.6
Cost of goods sold 19.6 19 19.1 19.5 19.6 29 27.6

Required

    1. Based on the information provided, do you expect the gross margin as a percent of sales and inventory turnover to remain consistent with prior years, to increase, or to decrease? Explain your reasoning. (2 marks)
    2. Calculate the following ratios for each year and for the industry average, and indicate whether the results are consistent with your expectation. (5 marks)
      1. Gross margin as a percent of sales
      1. Inventory turnover
    1. Suggest two possible reasons for any unexpected results. (1 mark)
  1. Provide two examples of inquiries or subsequent changes to the planned substantive audit procedures that could be performed in response to the results of the analytical procedures performed. (2 marks)

Question 4 (6 marks)

Sunita Clone was a payroll manager at Blue Sky Manufacturing Inc. who embezzled approximately $190,000 in a one-year period. Sunita did this by reassigning her direct report, a payroll clerk, to a special project and assuming the clerk s role of processing terminated employees final paycheques. Sunita then processed two cheques in the final period the employee s regular automatically generated cheque and another cheque which was adjusted for the required last pay adjustments. Sunita distributed the adjusted paycheque to the employee and held and cashed the automatic cheque that had been inappropriately processed. Prior to Sunita assuming the clerk s role, the clerk would suspend the automatic cheque processed for terminated employees and only process the adjusted manual cheque. It was then Sunita s responsibility to distribute the cheques.

    1. What are the auditor s responsibilities in identifying this type of embezzlement? (2 marks)
    1. List two control procedures that would prevent or detect this type of fraud from occurring. (2 marks)
  1. List two substantive analytical procedures or test of details that the auditor could perform that would have identified the embezzlement. (2 marks)

for aifarooq786 assignment 2 496041

This assignment is based on Modules 1 through 7 and is due at the end of Module 7. It is worth 10% of your final course grade.

Refer to the general instructions in Assignment 1.

Question 1 (20 marks)

Empirical tests of the three hypotheses of positive accounting theory (PAT) are often based on the amount of discretionary accruals contained in net income.

Required

    1. (4 marks)

What are discretionary accruals? Why are they useful in testing the three PAT hypotheses?

    1. (5 marks)

The methodology designed by Jones (1991) (called the Jones Model) is usually used to estimate discretionary accruals. Outline in words how the Jones Model measures discretionary accruals.

    1. (4 marks)

For good corporate governance, contracts should be designed efficiently. A researcher finds, for a sample of firms, that the covenant slack in debt contracts (the difference between the critical value of a debt covenant ratio as specified in a debt contract and the value of that ratio on the borrower s books on the date of the contract) is greater on average with greater variability over time of the debt covenant ratios. Is this finding evidence of efficient or opportunistic contracting? Explain your answer.

    1. (7 marks)

Discretionary accruals can be used opportunistically or efficiently. Conservative accounting can be regarded as a form of discretionary accruals because the firm chooses to report (that is, accrue) lower asset values and/or higher liability values. A researcher finds that firms with income escalator clauses in their debt contracts (an escalator clause increases the covenant level of net worth the firm is required to maintain under the contract by a percentage of reported net income) tend to use more conservative accounting than similar firms with no escalator clauses in their debt contracts. Is this finding consistent with efficient or opportunistic contracting? Explain your answer.

Question 2 (20 marks)

Several accounting standards include ceiling tests (also called impairment tests).

Required

    1. (6 marks)

What is a ceiling test? Identify two IASB accounting standards that contain a ceiling test and describe the test.

    1. (6 marks)

Ceiling tests are usually regarded in this course as one-sided examples of the measurement approach. However, they can also be regarded as examples of conservative accounting, as assets are written down but not written up. Ceiling tests are an example of conservative accounting. Why do bondholders favour ceiling tests? How do bondholders reward the firm for conservative accounting such as ceiling tests?

    1. (4 marks)

Explain briefly why auditors favour ceiling tests.

    1. (4 marks)

Outline the accounting for research and development (R&D) under IASB standards. Is this accounting conservative? Why? Explain why accountants account for R&D as they do.

Question 3 (22 marks)

New Century Financial Corp., formed in 1995, was a large mortgage lender in the United States. Many of these mortgages were securitized and transferred to investors. New Century accounted for the proceeds of these securitizations as sales. However, New Century committed to buy back mortgages that became troubled within up to a year after transfer.

New Century would retain some mortgages for itself (called retained interests), from which it would receive future cash flows. Also, the transfer agreements included the right to service the mortgages, for which New Century charged a fee. New Century valued these retained interests and servicing rights at current value, based on their discounted expected future cash flows. Thus, revenue from retained interests was recognized at the time of retention, and servicing revenue was recognized at the time of mortgage transfer. These policies required numerous estimates, and contrasted with a more conservative policy of recognizing revenues as cash flows from retained interests were received and servicing responsibilities rendered.

The company s share price increased dramatically, to a high of US$64 in 2004. Its reported net income reached $1.4 billion in 2005.

However, New Century seriously underestimated the extent of its mortgage buybacks and resulting credit losses. Of $40 billion of mortgages granted in the first three quarters of 2006, it provided only $13.9 million for buybacks. Investor concerns about increasing buybacks rose in 2006 as the 2007-2008 market meltdowns approached. These buyback concerns added to concerns about early revenue recognition from retained interests and servicing. Also, the company failed to write down its retained interests as the current value of the underlying mortgages decreased.

New Century was soon unable to borrow money to finance mortgage buybacks. Its shares lost 90% of their value, and the company was delisted from the New York Stock Exchange. In April 2007, it filed for bankruptcy protection.

New Century s auditor (KPMG) was drawn into the lawsuits that followed. KPMG denied liability, claiming that the provisions for buybacks were deemed adequate at the time, and blaming New Century s failure on the market meltdowns of 2007-2008. In December 2009, the SEC filed civil fraud charges against three former executives of New Century, seeking damages and return of bonuses. Several other lawsuits followed. In November 2010, financial media reported final settlement of a class action lawsuit that included a payment of over $65 million by former company officers and directors, and a payment of $44.75 million by auditor KPMG.

Required

    1. (4 marks)

Use the concept of relevance to defend New Century s policy of recognizing revenue as it securitized and sold mortgages. What was the policy s major weakness?

    1. (4 marks)

Outline a more conservative accounting policy for New Century s mortgage sale transactions. Consider both statement of financial position and net income effects of your policy.

Hint: Read Theory in Practice 8.3, text page 314.

    1. (6 marks)

Use two characteristics of investor behaviour based on psychology to explain the rapid rise in New Century s share price. Be sure to identify the specific behavioural characteristics you draw on in your answer.

    1. (4 marks)

Despite your answer in part (c), is the rapid rise in New Century s share price necessarily inconsistent with (semi-strong) securities market efficiency? Explain.

    1. (4 marks)

Note that retained interests meet the definition of a financial instrument. How would these financial instruments be accounted for under IAS 39?

Question 4 (18 marks)

Paul owns and operates a small, fast-growing business. He decides to hire a full-time manager. He will then take a year off to travel, and on his return will concentrate on the technical aspects of the business.

Martha applies for the job. During her interview, Paul finds that Martha is risk averse, with utility for money equal to the square root of the dollar compensation received. She has reservation utility of 6 and is effort averse, with disutility of effort of 2 if she works hard (a1), and 1 if she does not work hard (a2).

Paul s business has, in previous years, earned net income before manager compensation of $800 75% of the time, and income of $0 25% of the time. Paul has taken courses in accounting and has always prepared the financial statements himself. Paul has always worked hard, and reckons that if he did not work hard net income would have been $800 only 20% of the time and $0 80% of the time. He expects this earnings pattern to continue into the future with a new manager. Paul realizes that he must motivate Martha to work hard, and offers her a one-year contract, with compensation based on a proportion of net income before manager compensation.

Note: Take all calculations to two decimal places.

Required

    1. (6 marks)

What proportion of net income must Paul offer Martha so that she will accept the position and work hard? Show calculations.

    1. (8 marks)

Assuming that Martha accepts Paul s offer from part (a), show calculations that verify she will in fact be motivated to work hard.

    1. (4 marks)

Paul realizes that he cannot observe his firm s unmanaged net income he can only observe the net income Martha reports. He is concerned that Martha will opportunistically manage earnings while he is away to report net income of $800 while not working hard. Suggest to Paul how he can reduce the likelihood that Martha will do this in a one-year contract.

Question 5 (20 marks)

Most firms hedge at least some of their risks. Hedging can take two basic forms, namely natural hedging and hedging by means of derivative instruments. The use of derivatives as hedges has expanded greatly in recent years.

Generally, under accounting standards (IAS 39 and related U.S. standards), derivative instruments are fair valued with any unrealized gain or loss included in net income. However, hedge accounting provides some exceptions to this rule.

Required

    1. (4 marks)

A firm has a large amount of long-term debt (valued on a cost basis), and decides to set up a natural hedge of this debt. However, a natural hedge can lead to excess net income volatility, that is, net income volatility greater than the actual volatility of the firm s operations. Explain how this can happen.

    1. (6 marks)

      Suggest two ways that the excess net income volatility arising in part (a) can be prevented.

    2. (6 marks)

IAS 39 identifies two basic types of hedge. Describe each type. For each type, explain how IAS 39 controls excess net income volatility arising from entering into the hedge.

    1. (4 marks)

Use the bonus plan hypothesis of positive accounting theory to explain why a firm manager dislikes excess net income volatility. Are the policies to control excess net income volatility you described in parts (a) and (b) unethical? Explain why or why not.

acct640 chapter 10 homework 495991

Gator Divers is a company that provides diving services such as underwater ship repairs to clients in the Tampa Bay area. The company s planning budget for March appears below:

Gator Divers
Planning Budget
For the Month Ended March 31
Budgeted diving-hours (q) 200
Revenue ($380.00q) $ 76,000


Expenses:
Wages and salaries ($12,000 + $130.00q) 38,000
Supplies ($5.00q) 1,000
Equipment rental ($2,500 + $26.00q) 7,700
Insurance ($4,200) 4,200
Miscellaneous ($540 + $1.50q) 840


Total expense 51,740


Net operating income $ 24,260





Required:

During March, the company s activity was actually 190 diving-hours. Complete the flexible budget for that level of activity.

acct640 chapter 10 homework 495992

Air Meals is a company that prepares in-flight meals for airlines in its kitchen located next to the local airport. The company s planning budget for December appears below:

Air Meals
Planning Budget
For the Month Ended December 31
Budgeted meals (q) 20,000
Revenue ($3.80q) $ 76,000


Expenses:
Raw materials ($2.30q) 46,000
Wages and salaries ($6,400 + $0.25q) 11,400
Utilities ($2,100 + $0.05q) 3,100
Facility rent ($3,800) 3,800
Insurance ($2,600) 2,600
Miscellaneous ($700 + $0.10q) 2,700


Total expense 69,600


Net operating income $ 6,400





In December, 21,000 meals were actually served. The company s flexible budget for this level of activity is as follows:

Air Meals
Flexible Budget
For the Month Ended December 31
Budgeted meals (q) 21,000
Revenue ($3.80q) $ 79,800


Expenses:
Raw materials ($2.30q) 48,300
Wages and salaries ($6,400 + $0.25q) 11,650
Utilities ($2,100 + $0.05q) 3,150
Facility rent ($3,800) 3,800
Insurance ($2,600) 2,600
Miscellaneous ($700 + $0.10q) 2,800


Total expense 72,300


Net operating income $ 7,500





Required:
1.

Compute the company s activity variances for December.

acct640 chapter 10 homework 495993

Auto Lavage is a Canadian company that owns and operates a large automatic carwash facility near Quebec. The following table provides data concerning the company s costs:

Fixed Cost
per Month
Cost per
Car Washed
Cleaning supplies $ 0.70
Electricity $ 1,400 $ 0.10
Maintenance $ 0.30
Wages and salaries $ 4,700 $ 0.40
Depreciation $ 8,300
Rent $ 2,100
Administrative expenses $ 1,800 $ 0.05

For example, electricity costs are $1,400 per month plus $0.10 per car washed. The company expects to wash 8,000 cars in October and to collect an average of $5.90 per car washed.

Required:

Complete the company s planning budget for October.

acct640 chapter 3 homework 495994

Last month when Harrison Creations, Inc., sold 40,000 units, total sales were $300,000, total variable expenses were $240,000, and fixed expenses were $45,000.
Required:
1.

What is the company s contribution margin (CM) ratio?

2.

Estimate the change in the company s net operating income if it were to increase its total sales by $1,500.

Maxson Products distributes a single product, a woven basket whose selling price is $8 and whose variable cost is $6 per unit. The company s monthly fixed expense is $5,500.

1.

Compute for the company s break-even point in unit sales using the equation method.

2.

Compute for the company s break-even point in sales dollars using the equation method and the CM ratio.

3.

Compute for the company s break-even point in unit sales using the formula method.

4.

Compute for the company s break-even point in sales dollars using formula method and the CM ratio

Mohan Corporation is a distributor of a sun umbrella used at resort hotels. Data concerning next month s budget appear below:

Selling price $25 per unit
Variable expenses $15 per unit
Fixed expenses $8,500 per month
Unit sales 1,000 units per month

Required:
1.

Compute the company s margin of safety.

2.

Compute the company s margin of safety as a percentage of its sales.

acct640 chapter 5 homework 495996

Michaels Company segments its income statement into its East and West Divisions. The company s overall sales, contribution margin ratio, and net operating income are $600,000, 50%, and $50,000, respectively. The West Division s contribution margin and contribution margin ratio are $150,000 and 75%, respectively. The East Division s segment margin is $70,000. The company has $60,000 of common fixed costs that cannot be traced to either division.

Required:

Prepare an income statement for Michaels Company that uses the contribution format and is segmented by divisions. (Round your percentage answers to 1 decimal place.)

acct640 chapter 5 homework 495997

CompuDesk, Inc., makes an oak desk specially designed for personal computers. The desk sells for $200. Data for last year s operations follow:

Units in beginning inventory 0
Units produced 10,000
Units sold 9,000
Units in ending inventory 1,000
Variable costs per unit:
Direct materials $ 60
Direct labor 30
Variable manufacturing overhead 10
Variable selling and administrative 20


Total variable cost per unit $ 120




Fixed costs:
Fixed manufacturing overhead $ 300,000
Fixed selling and administrative 450,000


Total fixed costs $ 750,000





Required:
1.

Assume that the company uses absorption costing. Compute the unit product cost for one computer desk.

2.

Assume that the company uses absorption costing. Prepare an income statement.

acctoing help 495999

Viking Voyager specializes in the design and production of replica Viking boats. On January 1, 2012, the company issues $2,000,000 of 8% bonds, due in 10 years, with interest payable semiannually on June 30 and December 31 each year.

REQUIRED…

If the market interest rate is 8%, the bonds will issue at $2,000,000. Record (journal entries) the bond issue on January 1, 2012, and the first two semiannual interest payments on June 30, 2012, and December 31, 2012

If the market interest rate is 9%, the bonds will issue at $1,869,921. Record(journal entries) the bond issue on January 1, 2012, and the first two semiannual interest payments on June 30, 2012, and December 31, 2012.

If the market interest rate is 7%, the bonds will issue at $2,142,124. Record(journal entries) the bond issue on January 1, 2012, and the first two semiannual interest payments on June 30, 2012, and December 31, 2012.

Please show work so i can understand how to do it thanks.

ace company job order costing 496000

Question

At the beginning of 2014, Ace Company estimated the following costs to produce one unit of product: 5 pounds of direct material costing $2 per pound; and, 1.5 hours of direct labor costing $12 per hour. Ace also estimated annual factory overhead totaling $400,000, and 10,000 direct labor hours to be worked during the year. Job lot #112, containing 400 identical units, was completed and sold during June of 2014. Job lot #112 required 2,050 pounds of direct material costing $4,050, and 620 hours of direct labor costing $7,800. At the end of 2014, Ace determined total factory overhead to have been $410,000, and direct labor hours worked to have been 9,800.

(a) What was the budgeted cost of job lot #112?

(b) What is the “normal” cost of job lot #112?

(c) What is the “prime” cost of job lot #112?

(d) What is the “actual” cost of job lot #112?

(e) Distinguish “normal” and “actual” cost?

(f) Prepare the adjusting entry needed to reconcile the difference between normal and actual cost related to job lot #112?

(g) Why was the adjusting entry needed?

acg 3113 practice set 2 496001

ACG 3113 Practice Set 2

The Gremlin Ice Cream Company started business July 1, 2000. Gremlin uses the perpetual inventory system.

Required: Using Excel, prepare general journal entries in good form for only the transactions listed below (Explanations are not necessary):

July 1 2000 Issued 5,000 shares of $1 par value common stock for $95,000 cash.

July 1 Rented building space, paying three month s rent of $24,000 in advance. (Use a real or permanent account for the building rent).

July 6 Rented equipment at a cost of $600 per month, paying $6,000 upon signing the rental agreement. (Use a nominal or temporary account for the equipment rental)

July 7 Purchased ice cream on account for $2,000.

July 8 Purchased supplies on account for $560. (Use a real or permanent account for the supplies)

July 12 Recorded cash sales in the amount of $2,500. The ice cream sold cost $800.

July 14 Paid wages of $1,800.

July 15 Paid two-year insurance premium of $2,900. (Use a real or permanent account for the insurance). The insurance is effective today.

July 16 Recorded sales on account of $2,600. The ice cream sold cost $675.

July 17 Paid for the ice cream purchased on the 7th and the supplies purchased on the 8th.

July 18 Purchased store equipment for $45,000. Paid $12,000 in cash and signed a 2-year 10% Note for the remainder.

July 21 Received an invoice for the month s utilities of $650. The bill is due on August 12th and will be paid then.

July 27 Received a cash payment of $2,600 for goods sold on account on July 16.

acg12 financial accounting i assignment 1 sp4 2013 496002

ACG12 Financial Accounting I Assignment 1, SP4 2013

DETAILS OF ASSESSMENT

Assignment 1 Due 29th December 2013 (11:00pm Adelaide time)

Compu-sell Enterprises are preparing their financial reports for the year ending 30th June

2013. Compu-sell specialises in selling new and used computers. The owner of Compu-sell

has prepared the financial reports himself. Unfortunately, the owner has not studied

accounting and believes he made a number of mistakes when preparing the end of year

financial reports. He has asked you for assistance in preparing the financial reports. You are

given all of the information used to prepare the financial reports for the year ending 30th

June 2013. The owner was not sure about adjusting entries and wants you to make sure they

have all been recorded correctly. He would like you to process any adjustments that are

deemed necessary. During your investigation you have identified the following issues

which may require further action:

(a) The telephone bill for the shop was still owing for the month ending 30th June

2013. The bill was received in the mail on the 21st of June but because everyone

was so busy, the bill was not paid or recorded in the financial reports for the year

ending 30th June. The amount shown on the bill was $315.

(b) All non-current assets purchased by the business are depreciated using straight

line depreciation as this is the only method the owner of Compu-sell has learnt.

(Show your depreciation journal entries in (b)).

(c) Allowance for doubtful debts has not been recorded for the year ending 30th June

2013. Credit sales for the year ending 30th June 2012 were $360,000 and

$410,000 for the year ending 3oth June 2013. The allowance for bad debts is

estimated as 2% of credit sales. Credit sales make up 70% of total sales.

(d) During the year, the owner took home some office supplies (which had

previously been recorded in the books as a current asset) for personal use (worth

$800). The owner recorded a debit to the Miscellaneous Expenses account and

a credit to Drawings .

(e) Office furniture was purchased by the business for $8,200 cash on the 1st of

March 2013. You have checked and the purchase was recorded correctly. It is

policy for the owner to replace office furniture every 3 years and give the old

furniture away to charity for free at the end of its useful life of three years. The

owner has not recorded anything else relating to this non-current asset for the year

ending 30th June 2013.

ACG12 Financial Accounting I Assignment 1, SP4 2013

(f) Compu-sell received $2,000 cash from a customer on the 15th of June 2012 as

part payment for a sale of a computer which the customer purchased from

Compu-sell and was recorded as a debit to Cash at Bank and a credit to Unearned

Income. The total sale price was $3,500 and the computer was delivered to the

customer on the 4th of July 2012. The customer paid the balance owing once the

computer was delivered. A review of the records shows that the payment by the

customer of $1,500 was not recorded. The $2,000 was also still showing as

unearned income of $2,000 in the trial balance as at 30th June 2013.

(g) Rent for the office (where the administrative staff work) for 6 months covering

March August was paid on the 1st of March 2013. The amount paid was $5,100.

The only reference to this payment is a Rent Expense account showing $5,100

(you can assume the cash was correctly credited for $5,100). No other entries can

be found associated with this rental payment at the 30th of June 2013.

(h) The records show that on the 1st of February 2013, the owner purchased a new

microwave oven for the staff to use in the staffroom. He purchased the microwave

from his own personal bank account and gave the microwave to the business. The

microwave will be used evenly for the remainder of its useful life (another 6

years). He recorded the contribution of the microwave to the business by the

owner as a debit to Miscellaneous Income and a credit to Capital . The

microwave was valued at $1,200. Nothing else has been recorded in relation to

this microwave in the year ending 30th June 2013.

(i) Staff employed by Compu-sell are paid using commission. Commission is

calculated as 8% of sales and is recorded at the end of the financial year (that is,

on the 30th of June). The owner has forgotten to record the commission on sales

for the year ending 30th June 2013.

(j) The monthly bank statement for the month of June shows that interest earned and

received on the bank account was $120 for the month of June. The bank statement

also indicates that bank fees paid for June were $85. Neither of these items has

been recorded by the owner of Compu-sell. The bank statement also shows that a

customer used direct deposit to pay for the amount owing for a credit sale made

by Compu-sell on the 10th of June 2013 (You can assume that the sale was

recorded correctly). The amount paid by the customer was $1,900 and was paid

using an electronic transfer by the customer directly into the bank account of

Compu-sell. Compu-sell has only just found out about receiving the cash when

they received the bank statement.

(k) Compu-sell hired a part time accountant at the beginning of June 2013. The

accountant is being paid $2,000 per month. No entry has been processed for the

salary of the accountant for June the accountant was paid on the 30th of June

2013.

Continued over the page

ACG12 Financial Accounting I Assignment 1, SP4 2013

(l) Rent for the shop (where the business operates and generates income) for 6

months covering April September was paid on the 1st of April 2013. The

amount paid was $9,600. A debit to Prepaid Rent and a credit to Cash at

Bank was recorded on the 1st of April 2013. On the 30th of June the owner of

Compu-sell found a new shop in a very popular shopping complex which was

offering a long term rental contract at a better price. Therefore, an agreement was

signed for the new shop to be rented for the 12 months from the 1st of July 2013

until the 30th of June 2014 payment was made on the 30th of June 2013 for 12

months. The inventory was moved out of the old shop on the 28th of June 2013

and the old shop would no longer be used for anything from the 1st of July 30th

of September. The old shop was left empty for the remainder of the life of the

rental agreement (ie July September 2013) and the shop would no longer be

used to help contribute any future income to the business. The new shop was

rented for $900 per month and nothing had been recorded yet for the payment of

the rent for the new shop.

(m) Compu-sell uses a periodic inventory system to record inventory. The accounting

records indicate that opening inventory for the year ending 30th June 2013 was

$80,900. A physical stocktake on the 30th June 2013 indicated that inventory on

hand was $80,100. The owner did not make any changes to the financial reports

because he was unsure what to do. He has made a note in the financial reports to

ask you whether he needs to account for the discrepancy between the inventory

figures.

(n) Office supplies used during the year amounted to $1,030. The only reference to

Office Supplies in the trial balance at the 30th of June is the Office Supplies

account which has a balance of $1,340.

(o) Compu-sell paid $1,200 for advertising on the local radio on the 1st of June 2013.

The advertising will occur on the 1st Tuesday of each month for June August

2013. The amount paid was recorded as a debit to Advertising Expense and a

credit to Cash at Bank for $1,200 on the 1st of June.

(p) Office furniture (a chair) was purchased by the business on the 30th of June 2013.

The value of the purchase was $100 cash. The $100 has been recorded as a debit

to the General Expense account and a credit to Cash at Bank because the

owner thought the amount was too small to record it as an asset. You have been

asked by the owner to provide a brief explanation as to why it is/is not appropriate

to record the $100 as a General Expense. You are encouraged to look at your

notes from ACG11 Accounting for Business in relation to the Conceptual

Framework, to answer this question.

Continued over the page

ACG12 Financial Accounting I Assignment 1, SP4 2013

(q) Unless otherwise stated, depreciation has already been recorded for all noncurrent

assets and you have checked the records and are satisfied that the

calculations for depreciation for the non-current assets are correct.

Additional Notes:

For the purposes of this assignment you are not required to account for

GST

No narrations are required for the General Journal Entries

If you believe that no entry is required for any of the items shown

above, please write No entry required as your answer

If in your opinion, no entry is required for any of the items above,

please provide a brief explanation using your knowledge of the

conceptual framework (eg definitions, recognition criteria,

assumptions etc)

No entries should be dated earlier than 30th of June. All of your

entries are occurring on balance date if you think something should

have been recorded at an earlier date and it hasn t been recorded,

the date you should use is still the 30th of June.

REQUIRED

Prepare the general journal entries to make (if) necessary,

adjustments/corrections for the information presented to you above.

HINT: If you believe an entry is not required (that is, the information has been

recorded correctly), please indicate in your answer why you think that an entry

is not required. You are encouraged to refer to your assumed knowledge from

ACG11 and the Conceptual Framework wherever possible.

Total Marks for Assignment 50 Marks

IMPORTANT: STUDENTS ARE ENCOURAGED TO READ THROUGH

ALL OF THE INFORMATION IN THE QUESTION ABOVE FIRST

BEFORE ANSWERING THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE QUESTION.

acnt 1347 1001 fall 2013 496005

Accumulated Earnings and Personal Holding Company Taxes
TRUE-FALSE QUESTIONS CHAPTER 18
1. The accumulated earnings tax may be imposed on the same corporation every taxable year.
2. The accumulated earnings credit is the lesser of $250,000 or accumulated earnings at the end of the previous year.
3. Net Section 1231 gains in excess of net short-term capital losses may be subject to the accumulated earnings tax.
4. Paying dividends every year does not guarantee that the accumulated earnings tax will not be imposed.
5. Tax-free municipal bond interest is disregarded when computing accumulated taxable income.
6. The personal holding company tax may be imposed on a corporation which has previously been subject to the accumulated earnings tax.
7. A corporation with 37 shareholders may be a personal holding company.
8. Capital gains have no impact on the 60 percent test.
9. Once the taxable year is ended, the personal holding company tax, if any, cannot be avoided.
10. Interest income is excluded from personal holding company income if paid on assets which are an integral part of the business.
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS CHAPTER 18
11. The accumulated earnings credit is equal to the following:
a. $250,000 plus the reasonable needs of the business
b. The greater of (1) the excess of $250,000 over accumulated earnings last year, or (2) the reasonable needs of the business this year, less last year’s accumulated earnings
c. The greater of $250,000 or the reasonable needs of the business
d. $250,000, less last year’s accumulated earnings, plus funds demonstrably needed in the business in the future
12. Which of the following does not qualify as accumulations for a reasonable need of a business?
a. Accumulations for potential product liability
b. Liquid funds kept in anticipation of a death tax redemption from a retired shareholder’s estate
c. Marketable securities to be sold to raise the down payment on a new plant
d. Tax-exempt municipal bonds purchased to reduce corporate taxes on its investment portfolio
13. To arrive at the accumulated taxable income, which of the following items does not represent a positive adjustment?
a. Dividends received deduction
b. Net operating loss deduction
c. Capital losses in excess of capital gains
d. Capital loss carryovers
14. The following statements are all true, except:
a. To arrive at accumulated taxable income, the excess of net long-term capital gains over net short-term capital losses, if any, less the tax attributable thereto, is subtracted.
b. Since capital losses reduce earnings and profits even though they have to be carried back or forward, a carryback against capital gains in a prior year will increase the tax base.
c. Capital losses in excess of capital gains for a given year reduce accumulated taxable income for such year, even though the excess is carried forward in search of capital gain.
d. Capital losses carried to a taxable year and offset against a net Section 1231 gain will increase accumulated taxable income only if it is a carryover, not if it is a carryback, since the latter would change the tax base retroactively.
15. The following statements about the use of consent dividends to reduce the accumulated earnings tax are all true, except:
a. No cash or property is transferred by the corporation to the shareholders.
b. The consent dividend reduces earnings and profits of the corporation, is includible in the shareholders’ gross income, and is added to the shareholders’ bases in their stock.
c. The consent dividend approach leaves the shareholders in the same position as if they had received a cash dividend, paid the tax, and reinvested the net amount in the corporation.
d. The corporation has no gross income from the constructive contribution to capital, but will simply debit retained earnings and credit paid-in capital.
16. Sunset Animal Clinic, Inc. had $220,000 in accumulated earnings last year. This year it has $100,000 of taxable income, paid $20,000 in taxes, and can demonstrate $210,000 of business needs. The accumulated earnings tax, if assessed, would be:
a. None
b. $12,000
c. $14,000
d. $28,000
17. The accumulated earnings tax does not apply to any of the following, except:
a. Personal holding companies
b. Publicly held corporations
c. S corporations
d. Newly formed corporations
18. The adjusted ordinary gross income includes none of the following items, except:
a. Short-term capital gains
b. Section 1231 gains
c. Net royalty income
d. Long-term capital gains
19. Personal service income may constitute personal holding company income if certain conditions exist, including the following, except:
a. The renderer of services owns at least 25 percent of the value of the stock at any time during the taxable year.
b. The person in question is highly paid and is a shareholder-employee.
c. Someone outside the corporation may decide who is to render the service.
d. Five or fewer individuals own more than half the value of the stock at any time during the last half of the taxable year.
20. The following statements about consent dividends are all false, except:
a. The consent dividend election is made by the corporation.
b. The shareholder’s stock basis is increased by the after-tax amount of the consent dividend included in gross income.
c. A consent dividend may be paid in cash or property, including an IOU signed by the corporation.
d. The consent dividend procedure may be used to negate the accumulated earnings tax one year and the personal holding company tax another year by the same corporation’s shareholders.
21. The existence of the personal holding company tax most likely has had the following effects, except:
a. Fewer incorporations have taken place.
b. Significantly higher tax revenues have been collected by the U.S. Treasury.
c. More dividends have been declared.
d. More work has been generated by accountants.
22. The following are similarities between the PHC tax and the accumulated earnings tax, except:
a. A dividend paid deduction may be available for a deficiency dividend.
b. Both taxes encourage the payment of dividends.
c. The same flat tax rate is applied to the tax base.
d. Neither tax is imposed directly on the shareholders.
23. Which of the following assets does not measure a corporation’s ability to pay a dividend?
a. Cash.
b. Fair market value of marketable securities.
c. Basis of accounts receivable.
d. Fair market value of minority interest in a subsidiary corporation.
24. In what year can the corporation be subject to the accumulated earnings tax?
a. The year the corporation is formed.
b. A year with no taxable income.
c. A year it pays dividends in excess of earnings.
d. Both a and b.
25. Which of the following businesses is subject to the personal holding company tax?
a. Small investment companies.
b. Not-for-profit university.
c. Sole proprietorship dealing in stocks.
d. C corporation.
26. What is the primary goal of the personal holding company tax?
a. Force dividends to be paid.
b. Provide more revenue.
c. Avoid the capital gains tax.
d. Lower the effective tax rates on businesses.

acnt 1347 1001 fall 2013 496006

Accumulated Earnings and Personal Holding Company Taxes
TRUE-FALSE QUESTIONS CHAPTER 18
1. The accumulated earnings tax may be imposed on the same corporation every taxable year.
2. The accumulated earnings credit is the lesser of $250,000 or accumulated earnings at the end of the previous year.
3. Net Section 1231 gains in excess of net short-term capital losses may be subject to the accumulated earnings tax.
4. Paying dividends every year does not guarantee that the accumulated earnings tax will not be imposed.
5. Tax-free municipal bond interest is disregarded when computing accumulated taxable income.
6. The personal holding company tax may be imposed on a corporation which has previously been subject to the accumulated earnings tax.
7. A corporation with 37 shareholders may be a personal holding company.
8. Capital gains have no impact on the 60 percent test.
9. Once the taxable year is ended, the personal holding company tax, if any, cannot be avoided.
10. Interest income is excluded from personal holding company income if paid on assets which are an integral part of the business.
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS CHAPTER 18
11. The accumulated earnings credit is equal to the following:
a. $250,000 plus the reasonable needs of the business
b. The greater of (1) the excess of $250,000 over accumulated earnings last year, or (2) the reasonable needs of the business this year, less last year’s accumulated earnings
c. The greater of $250,000 or the reasonable needs of the business
d. $250,000, less last year’s accumulated earnings, plus funds demonstrably needed in the business in the future
12. Which of the following does not qualify as accumulations for a reasonable need of a business?
a. Accumulations for potential product liability
b. Liquid funds kept in anticipation of a death tax redemption from a retired shareholder’s estate
c. Marketable securities to be sold to raise the down payment on a new plant
d. Tax-exempt municipal bonds purchased to reduce corporate taxes on its investment portfolio
13. To arrive at the accumulated taxable income, which of the following items does not represent a positive adjustment?
a. Dividends received deduction
b. Net operating loss deduction
c. Capital losses in excess of capital gains
d. Capital loss carryovers
14. The following statements are all true, except:
a. To arrive at accumulated taxable income, the excess of net long-term capital gains over net short-term capital losses, if any, less the tax attributable thereto, is subtracted.
b. Since capital losses reduce earnings and profits even though they have to be carried back or forward, a carryback against capital gains in a prior year will increase the tax base.
c. Capital losses in excess of capital gains for a given year reduce accumulated taxable income for such year, even though the excess is carried forward in search of capital gain.
d. Capital losses carried to a taxable year and offset against a net Section 1231 gain will increase accumulated taxable income only if it is a carryover, not if it is a carryback, since the latter would change the tax base retroactively.
15. The following statements about the use of consent dividends to reduce the accumulated earnings tax are all true, except:
a. No cash or property is transferred by the corporation to the shareholders.
b. The consent dividend reduces earnings and profits of the corporation, is includible in the shareholders’ gross income, and is added to the shareholders’ bases in their stock.
c. The consent dividend approach leaves the shareholders in the same position as if they had received a cash dividend, paid the tax, and reinvested the net amount in the corporation.
d. The corporation has no gross income from the constructive contribution to capital, but will simply debit retained earnings and credit paid-in capital.
16. Sunset Animal Clinic, Inc. had $220,000 in accumulated earnings last year. This year it has $100,000 of taxable income, paid $20,000 in taxes, and can demonstrate $210,000 of business needs. The accumulated earnings tax, if assessed, would be:
a. None
b. $12,000
c. $14,000
d. $28,000
17. The accumulated earnings tax does not apply to any of the following, except:
a. Personal holding companies
b. Publicly held corporations
c. S corporations
d. Newly formed corporations
18. The adjusted ordinary gross income includes none of the following items, except:
a. Short-term capital gains
b. Section 1231 gains
c. Net royalty income
d. Long-term capital gains
19. Personal service income may constitute personal holding company income if certain conditions exist, including the following, except:
a. The renderer of services owns at least 25 percent of the value of the stock at any time during the taxable year.
b. The person in question is highly paid and is a shareholder-employee.
c. Someone outside the corporation may decide who is to render the service.
d. Five or fewer individuals own more than half the value of the stock at any time during the last half of the taxable year.
20. The following statements about consent dividends are all false, except:
a. The consent dividend election is made by the corporation.
b. The shareholder’s stock basis is increased by the after-tax amount of the consent dividend included in gross income.
c. A consent dividend may be paid in cash or property, including an IOU signed by the corporation.
d. The consent dividend procedure may be used to negate the accumulated earnings tax one year and the personal holding company tax another year by the same corporation’s shareholders.
21. The existence of the personal holding company tax most likely has had the following effects, except:
a. Fewer incorporations have taken place.
b. Significantly higher tax revenues have been collected by the U.S. Treasury.
c. More dividends have been declared.
d. More work has been generated by accountants.
22. The following are similarities between the PHC tax and the accumulated earnings tax, except:
a. A dividend paid deduction may be available for a deficiency dividend.
b. Both taxes encourage the payment of dividends.
c. The same flat tax rate is applied to the tax base.
d. Neither tax is imposed directly on the shareholders.
23. Which of the following assets does not measure a corporation’s ability to pay a dividend?
a. Cash.
b. Fair market value of marketable securities.
c. Basis of accounts receivable.
d. Fair market value of minority interest in a subsidiary corporation.
24. In what year can the corporation be subject to the accumulated earnings tax?
a. The year the corporation is formed.
b. A year with no taxable income.
c. A year it pays dividends in excess of earnings.
d. Both a and b.
25. Which of the following businesses is subject to the personal holding company tax?
a. Small investment companies.
b. Not-for-profit university.
c. Sole proprietorship dealing in stocks.
d. C corporation.
26. What is the primary goal of the personal holding company tax?
a. Force dividends to be paid.
b. Provide more revenue.
c. Avoid the capital gains tax.
d. Lower the effective tax rates on businesses.

acounting question 496008

A company uses the percent of sales method to determine its bad debts expense. At the end of the current year, the company’s unadjusted trial balance reported the following selected amounts:

Accounts receivable $ 361,000 debit
Allowance for uncollectible accounts 560 credit
Net sales 806,000 credit

All sales are made on credit. Based on past experience, the company estimates 0.4% of credit sales to be uncollectible. What amount should be debited to Bad Debts Expense when the year-end adjusting entry is prepared?
$2,004
$3,784
$3,224
$884
$2,664

2.

On March 17, Grady Company agrees to accept a 60-day, 8%, $9,300 note from Alert Company to extend the due date on an overdue account. What is the journal entry needed to record the payment of the note by Alert Company on the maturity date?
Debit Notes Payable $9,300; debit Interest Expense $124; credit Cash $9,424.
Debit Cash $9,424; credit Interest Revenue $124; credit Notes Payable $9,300.
Debit Cash $9,424; credit Interest Revenue $124; credit Notes Receivable $9,300.
Debit Notes Payable $9,300; debit Interest Expense $186; credit Cash $9,486.
Debit Notes Payable $9,300; credit Interest Expense $124, credit Cash $9,176

act300 portfolio project kelly consulting 496010

ACT300 PORTFOLIO PROJECT: KELLY CONSULTING

Kelly Consulting Transactions for May 2008
May 3 Received cash from clients as an advance payment for services to be provided and recorded it as unearned fees, $1,550.
May 5 Received cash from clients on account, $1,750.
May 9 Paid cash for a newspaper advertisement, $100
May 13 Paid Office Station Co. for part of the debt incurred on April 5, $400
May 15 Recorded services provided on account for the period May 1-15, $5,100.
May 16 Paid part-time receptionist for two weeks’ salary including the amount owed on April 13, $750.
May 17 Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned during the period May 1-16, $7,380
May 20 Purchased supplies on account, $500.
May 21 Recorded services provided on account for the period May 16-20, $2,900.
May 25 Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period May 17-23, $4,200.
May 27 Received cash from clients on account, $6,600.
May 28 Paid part-time receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $750.
May 30 Paid telephone bill for May, $150.
May 31 Paid electricity bill for May, $225.
May 31 Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period May 25-31, $2,875.
May 31 Recorded services provided on account for the remainder of May, $2,200.
May 31 Kelly withdrew $7,500 for personal use.

Instructions are as follows:
1. Record the ending balances from the April 30 post closing trial balance into the ledger sheets or alternatively, you may create T-accounts on an excel spreadsheet.
2. Record journal entries for the May transactions on the journal sheets given or create a spreadsheet configured as a journal sheet.
3. Post the journal entries to the ledger sheets or if you created T-accounts post the entries to your T-accounts.
4. Enter the ending balances from the ledger or T-accounts on to the worksheet trial balance columns.
5. Enter the adjustments directly on to the worksheet.
6. Extend to the adjusted trial balance columns.
7. Extend to the financial statement columns.
8. Prepare the financial statements.
9. Enter the closing entries on to the worksheet.
10. Prepare the post closing trial balance for May.

act300 portfolio project kelly consulting practice set 496011

ACT300 Portfolio Project: Kelly Consulting Practice Set

You are given the following information:
1. Post closing trial balance for April 30, 2008
2. Transactions for the month of May 2008
3. Adjustments for May 31,2008
The following can be download from the Module 8 Assignment page or the Course Information page
4. Journal page to copy and use
5. Ledger page to copy and use
6. Portfolio Project Excel Spreadsheet template with accounts pre-entered
Kelly Consulting Transactions for May 2008
May 3 Received cash from clients as an advance payment for services to be provided and recorded it as unearned fees, $1,550.
May 5 Received cash from clients on account, $1,750.
May 9 Paid cash for a newspaper advertisement, $100
May 13 Paid Office Station Co. for part of the debt incurred on April 5, $400
May 15 Recorded services provided on account for the period May 1-15, $5,100.
May 16 Paid part-time receptionist for two weeks’ salary including the amount owed on April 13, $750.
May 17 Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned during the period May 1-16, $7,380
May 20 Purchased supplies on account, $500.
May 21 Recorded services provided on account for the period May 16-20, $2,900.
May 25 Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period May 17-23, $4,200.
May 27 Received cash from clients on account, $6,600.
May 28 Paid part-time receptionist for two weeks’ salary, $750.
May 30 Paid telephone bill for May, $150.
May 31 Paid electricity bill for May, $225.
May 31 Recorded cash from cash clients for fees earned for the period May 25-31, $2,875.
May 31 Recorded services provided on account for the remainder of May, $2,200.
May 31 Kelly withdrew $7,500 for personal use.
Instructions are as follows:
1. Record the ending balances from the April 30 post closing trial balance into the ledger sheets or alternatively, you may create T-accounts on an excel spreadsheet.
2. Record journal entries for the May transactions on the journal sheets given or create a spreadsheet configured as a journal sheet.
3. Post the journal entries to the ledger sheets or if you created T-accounts post the entries to your T-accounts.
4. Enter the ending balances from the ledger or T-accounts on to the worksheet trial balance columns.
5. Enter the adjustments directly on to the worksheet.
6. Extend to the adjusted trial balance columns.
7. Extend to the financial statement columns.
8. Prepare the financial statements.
9. Enter the closing entries on to the worksheet.
10. Prepare the post closing trial balance for May.

Submit your work in a Portfolio Project Excel worksheet that you can download from the Course Information page or the Module 8 Assignments page.
Make sure you include the following in your final Excel Workbook:
1. The completed Worksheet on the given downloadable spreadsheet.
2. Formal income statement, statement of owner’s equity, and balance sheet. These may be prepared on separate tabs on the Excel Workbook where the “Worksheet” is the first tab.
3. Post Closing Trial Balance for May 31.

activity based costing amp process costing 496012

Deliverable Length:Excel spreadsheet and 2-3 pages APA FORMAT W/REFERENCE PAGE

Consider the following scenario:

The Ski Pro Corporation, which produces and sells to wholesalers a highly successful line of water skis, has decided to diversify to stabilize sales throughout the year. The company is considering the production of cross-country skis.

After considerable research, a cross-country ski line has been developed. Because of the conservative nature of the company management, however, Minnetonka s president has decided to introduce only one type of the new ski for this coming winter. If the product is a success, further expansion in future years will be initiated.

The ski selected is a mass-market ski with a special binding. It will be sold to wholesalers for $80 per pair. Because of availability capacity, no additional fixed charges will be incurred to produce the skis. A $100,000 fixed charge will be absorbed by the skis, however, to allocate a fair share of the company s present fixed costs to the new product.

Using the estimated sales and production of 10,000 pairs of skis as the expected volume, the accounting department has developed the following cost per pair of skis and bindings:

Direct Labor: $35Direct Material: $30Total Overhead: $15Total: $80

Ski Pro has approached a subcontractor to discuss the possibility of purchasing the bindings. The purchase price of the bindings from the subcontractor would be $5.25 per binding, or $10.50 per pair. If the Ski Pro Corporation accepts the purchase proposal, it is predicted that direct-labor and variable-overhead costs would be reduced by 10% and direct-material costs would be reduced by 20%.

Write a 1 2 page paper, and create a spreadsheet that answers the following questions:

  1. Should the Ski Pro Corporation make or buy the bindings? Show calculations to support your answer.

  1. What would be the maximum purchase price acceptable to the Ski Pro Corporation for the bindings? Support your answer with an appropriate explanation.

  1. Instead of sales of 10,000 pairs of skis, revised estimates show sales volume at 12,500 pairs. At this new volume, additional equipment, at an annual rental of $10,000 must be acquired to manufacture the bindings. This incremental cost would be the only additional fixed cost required even if sales increased to 30,000 pairs. (This 30,000 level is the goal for the third year of production.) Under these circumstances, should the Ski Pro Corporation make or buy the bindings? Show calculations to support your answer.

  1. What qualitative factors (that is, issues with vendors, customers, or within the product itself) should the Ski Pro Corporation consider in determining whether they should make or buy the bindings?

Grading Criteria

Percentage

Should the Ski Pro Corporation make or buy the bindings?

25%

What would be the maximum purchase price acceptable to the Ski Pro
Corporation for the bindings?

20%

Under these circumstances, should the Ski Pro Corporation make or buy the
bindings?

25%

What qualitative factors should the Ski Pro Corporation consider in
determining whether they should make or buy the bindings?

activity based costing amp process costing 496013

Deliverable Length:Excel spreadsheet and 2-3 pages APA FORMAT W/REFERENCE PAGE

Consider the following scenario:

The Ski Pro Corporation, which produces and sells to wholesalers a highly
successful line of water skis, has decided to diversify to stabilize sales
throughout the year. The company is considering the production of cross-country
skis.

After considerable research, a cross-country ski line has been developed.
Because of the conservative nature of the company management, however,
Minnetonka s president has decided to introduce only one type of the new ski for
this coming winter. If the product is a success, further expansion in future
years will be initiated.

The ski selected is a mass-market ski with a special binding. It will be sold
to wholesalers for $80 per pair. Because of availability capacity, no additional
fixed charges will be incurred to produce the skis. A $100,000 fixed charge will
be absorbed by the skis, however, to allocate a fair share of the company s
present fixed costs to the new product.

Using the estimated sales and production of 10,000 pairs of skis as the
expected volume, the accounting department has developed the following cost per
pair of skis and bindings:

Direct Labor: $35
Direct Material: $30
Total Overhead:
$15
Total: $80

Ski Pro has approached a subcontractor to discuss the possibility of
purchasing the bindings. The purchase price of the bindings from the
subcontractor would be $5.25 per binding, or $10.50 per pair. If the Ski Pro
Corporation accepts the purchase proposal, it is predicted that direct-labor and
variable-overhead costs would be reduced by 10% and direct-material costs would
be reduced by 20%.

Write a 1 2 page paper, and create a spreadsheet that answers the
following questions:

  1. Should the Ski Pro Corporation make or buy the bindings? Show calculations
    to support your answer.

  1. What would be the maximum purchase price acceptable to the Ski Pro
    Corporation for the bindings? Support your answer with an appropriate
    explanation.

  1. Instead of sales of 10,000 pairs of skis, revised estimates show sales
    volume at 12,500 pairs. At this new volume, additional equipment, at an annual
    rental of $10,000 must be acquired to manufacture the bindings. This incremental
    cost would be the only additional fixed cost required even if sales increased to
    30,000 pairs. (This 30,000 level is the goal for the third year of production.)
    Under these circumstances, should the Ski Pro Corporation make or buy the
    bindings? Show calculations to support your answer.

  1. What qualitative factors (that is, issues with vendors, customers, or within
    the product itself) should the Ski Pro Corporation consider in determining
    whether they should make or buy the bindings?

Grading Criteria

Percentage

Should the Ski Pro Corporation make or buy the bindings?

25%

What would be the maximum purchase price acceptable to the Ski Pro
Corporation for the bindings?

20%

Under these circumstances, should the Ski Pro Corporation make or buy the
bindings?

25%

What qualitative factors should the Ski Pro Corporation consider in
determining whether they should make or buy the bindings?

Direct Labor: $35
Direct Material: $30
Total Overhead:
$15
Total: $80

Write a 1 2 page paper, and create a spreadsheet that answers the
following questions:

Should the Ski Pro Corporation make or buy the bindings? Show calculations
to support your answer.

What would be the maximum purchase price acceptable to the Ski Pro
Corporation for the bindings? Support your answer with an appropriate
explanation.

Instead of sales of 10,000 pairs of skis, revised estimates show sales
volume at 12,500 pairs. At this new volume, additional equipment, at an annual
rental of $10,000 must be acquired to manufacture the bindings. This incremental
cost would be the only additional fixed cost required even if sales increased to
30,000 pairs. (This 30,000 level is the goal for the third year of production.)
Under these circumstances, should the Ski Pro Corporation make or buy the
bindings? Show calculations to support your answer.

What qualitative factors (that is, issues with vendors, customers, or within
the product itself) should the Ski Pro Corporation consider in determining
whether they should make or buy the bindings?

with an adjustable rate mortgage you make monthly payments 496016

With an adjustable rate mortgage, you make monthly payments depending on the interest rate at the beginning of each year. You have borrowed $60,000 on a 30-year ARM. For the first year, monthly payments are based on the current annual T-Bill rate of 9 percent. In years 2-5, monthly payments will be based on the following annual T-Bill rates +2 percent. -year 1:10 percent -year 3:13 percent -year 4:15 percent -year 5:10 percent The catch is that the ARM contains a clause that ensures that monthly payments can increase a maximum of 7.5 percent from one year to the next. To compensate the lender for this provision, the borrower adjusts the ending balance of the loan at the end of each year based on the difference between what the borrower actually paid and what he should have paid. Determine monthly payments during years 1-5 of the loan.

the adjusted trial balance for anara co as of december 31 2013 follows 496017

The adjusted trial balance for Anara Co. as of December 31, 2013, follows.

ANARA COMPANY

Adjusted Trial Balance

December 31, 2013

No. Account Title Debit Credit

101 Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 7,400

104 Short-term investments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11,200

126 Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,600

128 Prepaid insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,000

167 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,000

168 Accumulated depreciation Equipment . . . . . . . . $ 4,000

173 Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,000

174 Accumulated depreciation Building . . . . . . . . . . 10,000

183 Land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,500

201 Accounts payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,500

(Cont…)

Additional Information

P. Anara invested $40,000 cash in the business during year 2013 (the December 31, 2012, credit balance of

the P. Anara, Capital account was $52,800). Anara Company is required to make a $8,400 payment on its

long-term notes payable during 2014.

Required: show in good form in Excel

1. Prepare the income statement and the statement of owner s equity for the calendar year 2011 and theclassified balance sheet at December 31, 2013.

2. Prepare the necessary closing entries at December 31, 2013.

3. Use the information in the financial statements to calculate these ratios: (a) return on assets (total assets at December 31, 2012, were $160,000), (b) debt ratio, (c) profit margin ratio (use total revenues as the denominator), and (d) current ratio.

the adjusted trial balance for audio concepts at december 31 2011 is as follows 496018

The adjusted trial balance for Audio Concepts at December 31, 2011 is as follows (amounts are presented at their normal balance):

Cash 15,000

Accounts Receivable 7,000

Inventory 19,000

Supplies 4,000

Prepaid Insurance 6,000

Audio Equipment 190,000

Accumulated Depreciation Audio Equipment 29,000

Accounts Payable 19,000

Note Payable 70,000

Salaries Payable 3,000

Common Stock 20,000

Retained Earnings 92,000

Dividends 14,000

Audio Revenue 122,000

Interest Revenue 1,000

Cost of Goods Sold 21,000

Depreciation Expense 12,000

Insurance Expense 3,000

Rent Expense 17,000

Salaries Expense 42,000

Supplies Expense 6,000

Required:

1. Create T-accounts for all accounts provided above. Prepare the closing journal entries required, post them to the T-accounts, and prepare a post-closing trial balance at December 31, 2011.

2. Prepare a Statement of Retained Earnings in proper format for Audio Concepts at December 31, 2011.

3. In a brief statement, correlate the results of the above two requirements.

acct420 1304b 01 government amp not for profit accounting 495971

The city in which you live provides its budget information in monthly budgetary control reports with each month representing 1/12th of the overall budget. You overhear several managers discussing the budget at a community meeting. You were surprised to hear that half of the managers liked this process and that the other half felt that it did not adequately match their expenses.

Discuss the issues regarding the preparation of the budgets and why half of the departments liked the process and why the other half did not like the process. Complete the following:

  • Give examples of 1 department on each side of this controversy.
  • Can the budgeting process be made more reflective of the work actually being completed?
  • Explain your answer

acct420 1304b 01 government amp not for profit accounting 495972

Part 1:Research the following statements and write a paper of 500 words on your findings:

  • What are the key differences between a governmental unit and a commercial company?
  • Discuss the following terms and how they are used during the budget process of a governmental unit:
    • Appropriations
    • Encumbrances
    • Expenditures
    • Budgetary fund balances
  • Give examples for each of the above terms.

Part 2:Given the following information, create the journal entries required for each of the situations described:

Estimated revenues

Property taxes

$1,250,000

Fines and forfeits

80,000

Intergovernmental

500,000

Total

$1,830,000

Appropriations

General

$300,000

Streets

50,000

Public safety

800,000

Total

$ 1,150,000

  1. Make the journal entry to record the adoption of the annual budget.
  2. Make the journal entries necessary to record the following cash revenues that were received:

Property taxes

$800,000

Fines and forfeits

73,000

Intergovernmental

300,000

Total

$1,173,000

  1. Purchase orders were issued for the following goods and services:

General

$285,000

Streets

50,000

Public safety

670,000

Total

$ 1,005,000

  1. Purchase orders were fulfilled based upon the following estimated and actual costs:

Estimated

Actual

General

$285,000

$280,000

Streets

50,000

50,000

Public safety

670,000

660,000

acct420 1304b 01 government amp not for profit accounting 495973

Key Assignment Draft

Review the Comprehensive Annual Financial Report (CARF) for 2009 from the city of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, and answer the following questions.

  • Explain how Cedar Rapids follows the Government Accounting Standards Board (GASB) Statement No. 34. Create a brief outline that showcases the flow.
  • Read the management discussion and analysis (MD&A) section and describe 2 or more significant areas that were addressed by management.
  • From the notes of the financial statements, describe which accounting policies are being utilized by the city.
  • What did you discover in the statistical section?
    • How is the city doing?
    • Provide an analysis.
    • Examine the funds listed under the budget on page 67 and discuss how they are being utilized by Cedar Rapids. Include some examples of items that would be included in these funds and any restrictions that might apply.

    • By looking at the 2012 budget that is located in the government index on the far left of the page, choose 2 different funds and discuss how they are being utilized by Cedar Rapids. Include some examples of items that would be included in these funds and any restrictions that might apply.

  • Define and give examples of the infrastructure assets that are held by Cedar Rapids.
  • Describe the circumstances, and provide the journal entries for the 2 entries that are going in to the general fund.
    • For example, 1 entry goes into the debt service fund and 1 goes into the capital projects fund.

Please submit your assignment.

Reference

Comprehensive annual financial report (CARF). (2010). Retrieved from http://www.cedar-rapids.org/government/departments/finance/finaccialreportinginformation/pages/fy10cafr.aspx

acct420 1304b 01 government amp not for profit accounting 495974

Your city has a voluntary health and welfare organization (VHWD) that provides musical opportunities for inner-city youth. It does not use fund accounting, but it does identify all revenues by their net asset class. The following transactions have occurred in the past year:

  • The VHWD received gift pledges from donors in the amount of $25,000, which were to be used however they were needed. History shows that 95% of the pledges were collected.
    • After 1 month, $24,000 of the pledges was collected. There was $1,000 written off as uncollectible.
  • The VHWD received a gift of 1,000 shares of stock. The donor of the gift of shares stated that the money was to be used to buy musical instruments for the program.
    • Fair value of the stock on the date of the gift was $15 per share.
    • Sale of the stock yielded $17,000.
  • The VHWD purchased 2 violins at the cost of $2,000 each, 2 cellos for $3,000 each, and a small harp for $5,000 for the program, using the proceeds from the stock sale.
  • The VHWD billed the city for $5,000 of contracted costs.
  • The VHWD spent $10,000 on the following:
Music lessons

$7,000

Instrument maintenance

2,000

Administrative expense

1,000

Total

$10,000

Please make a journal entry for each of the transactions. Remember that the revenues must be classified as unrestricted, temporarily restricted, or permanently restricted. The main areas for information on financial reporting for not-for-profit organizations (NFPOs) and VHWOs can be found in Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) statements 116 and 117. For your VHWO, you will have to make an additional report that is not required for NFPOs.

Provide examples of the types of information that would be included in this report. The deliverable length is all journal entries, plus 300 500 words.

acct420 cost accounting mid term examination review 495975

American InterContinental University
ACCT420-Cost Accounting
Mid-Term Examination Review

MULTIPLE CHOICE. Choose the one alternative that best completes the statement or answers the question.

Answer the following questions using the information below:

The Ranger Company uses the high-low method to estimate its cost function. The information for 2011 is provided below:

Machine-hours Costs

Highest observation of cost driver 2,000 $450,000

Lowest observation of cost driver 1,000 $ 250,000

1. What is the constant for the estimating cost equation?

2. Variable costs:

Answer the following questions using the information below:

Roiann and Dennett Law Office employs 12 full-time attorneys and 10 paraprofessionals. Direct and indirect costs are applied on a professional labor-hour basis that includes both attorney and paraprofessional hours. Following is information for 20X3:

Budget Actual

Indirect costs $270,000 $300,000

Annual salary of each attorney $100,000 $110,000

Annual salary of each paraprofessional $ 29,000 $ 30,000

Total professional labor-hours 50,000 dlh 60,000 dlh

3. How much should the client be billed in an actual costing system if 200 professional labor-hours are used?

Answer the following questions using the information below:

Nancy’s Niche sells a single product. 8,000 units were sold resulting in $80,000 of sales revenue, $20,000 of variable costs, and $10,000 of fixed costs.

4. The contribution margin percentage is:

5. If variable costs decrease by $1 per unit, the new breakeven point is:

6. If a change is made in one parameter of CVP analysis, it is an example of:

Answer the following questions using the information below:

Roosevelt Cabinetry, Inc., manufactures standard sized modular cabinet units for kitchens and other applications within the home. Its costing system utilizes two cost categories, direct materials and conversion costs. Each product must pass through the rough cut department and the finish department. Direct materials are added at the beginning of production. Conversion costs are allocated evenly throughout production.

Data for Finish Department for March 2012 are:

Work in process, beginning inventory, 25% converted 1,000 units

Units started during February 1,400 units

Work in process, ending inventory 300 units

Costs for Finish department for March 2012 are:

Work in process, beginning inventory:

Direct materials $300,000

Conversion costs $200,000

Direct materials costs added during February $420,000

Conversion costs added during February $1,600,000

7. What is the unit cost per equivalent unit of the beginning inventory in the Finishing Department?

A. $1,100.00 B. $500.00 C. $800.00 D. $300.00

8. If a company would like to increase its degree of operating leverage it should:

9. The focus of ABC systems is on:

A. long-term decisions B. short-term decisions

C. special-pricing decisions D. make-or-buy decisions

10. Which of the following is NOT a sign that a “smoothing out” costing system exists?

11. Standard costing is popular among companies that:

A. manufacture textiles or ceramics

B. produce a product that uses few direct materials items, and has relatively few operational activities

C. produce masses of similar or identical products

D. All of these answers are correct.

12. Using activity-cost rates rather than department indirect-cost rates to allocate costs results in different product costs when:

Answer the following questions using the information below:

Mertens Company provides the following ABC costing information:

Activities Total Costs Activity-cost drivers

The above activities are used by Departments A and B as follows:

Department A Department B

Account inquiry hours 2,000 hours 4,000 hours

Account billing lines 400,000 lines 200,000 lines

Account verification accounts 10,000 accounts 8,000 accounts

Correspondence letters 1,000 letters 1,600 letters

13. How much of the account inquiry cost will be assigned to Department A?

A. $80,000 B. $200,000

C. $40,000 D. None of these answers are correct.

Answer the following questions using the information below:

The Cuckoo Clock Shop manufactures clocks on a highly automated assembly line. Its costing system uses two cost categories, direct materials and conversion costs. Each product must pass through the Assembly Department and the Testing Department. Direct materials are added at the beginning of the production process. Conversion costs are allocated evenly throughout production. Cuckoo Clock Shop uses weighted-average costing.

Data for the Assembly Department for June 2013 are:

Work in process, beginning inventory 250 units

Direct materials (100% complete)

Conversion costs (50% complete)

Costs for June 2013:

Work in process, beginning inventory:

Direct materials $90,000

Conversion costs $135,000

Direct materials costs added during June $500,000

Conversion costs added during June $500,000

14. What amount of conversion costs are assigned to the ending Work-in-Process account for June?

A. $70,555.50 B. $63,225.25 C. $50,978.32 D. $90,074

Answer the following questions using the information below:

The Rest-a-Lot chair company manufacturers a standard recliner. During February, the firm’s Assembly Department started production of 75,000 chairs. During the month, the firm completed 80,000 chairs, and transferred them to the Finishing Department. The firm ended the month with 10,000 chairs in ending inventory. There were 15,000 chairs in beginning inventory. All direct materials costs are added at the beginning of the production cycle and conversion costs are added uniformly throughout the production process. The FIFO method of process costing is used by Rest-a-Lot. Beginning work in process was 30% complete as to conversion costs, while ending work in process was 80% complete as to conversion costs.

Beginning inventory:

Direct materials $24,000

Conversion costs $35,000

Manufacturing costs added during the accounting period:

Direct materials $168,000

Conversion costs $278,000

15. What were the equivalent units for conversion costs during February?

A. 79,500 B. 75,000 C. 83,500 D. 85,000

Answer the following questions using the information below:

The Morgan Models company manufactures replica plastic airplane and motorized vehicle models. During October, the firm’s Assembly Department started production of 60,000 models. During the month, the firm completed 66,000 models, and transferred them to the Finishing Department. The firm ended the month with 22,000 models in ending inventory. There were 28,000 models in beginning inventory. All direct materials costs are added at the beginning of the production cycle and conversion costs are added uniformly throughout the production process. The FIFO method of process costing is used by Morgan. Beginning work in process was 25% complete as to conversion costs, while ending work in process was 50% complete as to conversion costs.

Beginning inventory:

Direct materials costs $39,200

Conversion costs $30,800

Manufacturing costs added during the accounting period:

Direct materials costs $90,000

Conversion costs $280,000

16. What is the cost of the goods transferred out during October?

A. $375,000 B. $340,000 C. $363,000 D. $330,000

17. Luke employs 25 professional cleaners. Budgeted costs total $1,800,000 of which $1,050,000 is direct costs. Budgeted indirect costs are $750,000 and actual indirect costs were $793,800. Budgeted professional labor-hours are 1,000,000 and actual hours were 1,008,000. What is the budgeted direct cost-allocation rate?

A. $1.80 per hour B. $1.7857 per hour

C. $1.05 per hour D. $0.75 per hour

18. Annual cost rates are preferred over actual cost rates for all of the following reasons EXCEPT:

A. budgeted costs allow managers to have cost information on a timely basis

B. budgeted-cost rates can be used to allocate direct or indirect costs

C. budgeted costs may be subject to short-run fluctuations

D. budgeted indirect-cost rates are known prior to the inception of a new job

Answer the following questions using the information below:

Gibson Manufacturing is a small textile manufacturer using machine-hours as the single indirect-cost rate to allocate manufacturing overhead costs to the various jobs contracted during the year. The following estimates are provided for the coming year for the company and for the Winfield High School band jacket job.

Company Winfield High School Job

Direct materials $40,000 $1,000

Direct labor $10,000 $200

Manufacturing overhead costs $30,000

Machine-hours 100,000 mh 900mh

19. What is the bid price for the Winfield High School job if the company uses a 40% markup of total manufacturing costs?

A. $2,310 B. $2,058 C. $588 D. $1,680

20. What is the appropriate journal entry if $100,000 of materials were purchased on account for the month of August?

A. Materials Control 100,000

Accounts Payable Control 100,000

B. Manufacturing Allocated 100,000

Accounts Receivable Control 100,000

C. Manufacturing Overhead Control 100,000

Accounts Receivable Control 100,000

D. Work-in-Process Control 100,000

Accounts Payable Control 100,000

Answer the following questions using the information below:

Apple Valley Corporation uses a job cost system and has two production departments, A and B. Budgeted manufacturing costs for the year are:

Department A Department B

Direct materials $700,000 $100,000

Direct manufacturing labor $200,000 $800,000

Manufacturing overhead $600,000 $400,000

The actual material and labor costs charged to Job #432 were as follows:

Total

Direct materials: $25,000

Direct labor:

Department A $ 8,000

Department B $12,000

$20,000

Apple Valley applies manufacturing overhead costs to jobs on the basis of direct manufacturing labor cost using departmental rates determined at the beginning of the year.

21. For Department B, the manufacturing overhead allocation rate is:

A. 200% B. 50% C. 100% D. 300%

Answer the following questions using the information below:

Presented below are the production data for the first six months of the year for the mixed costs incurred by Gallup Company.

Month Cost Units

January $4,890 4,100

February 4,024 3,200

March 6,480 5,300

April 8,840 7,500

May 5,800 4,800

June 7,336 6,600

Gallup Company uses the high-low method to analyze mixed costs.

22. How would the cost function be stated?

A. y = $440 + $1.12X B. y = $7,850 + $0.132X

C. y = $3,562.30 + $0.144X D. y = $107.20 + $1.12

23. The cost function y = 150 + 10X: 46

A. has an intercept of 150 B. has a slope coefficient of 150

C. represents a fixed cost D. is a nonlinear

24. The cause and- effect relationship might arise as a result of which of the following:

A. knowledge of operations.

B. a contractual arrangement.

C. a physical relationship between the level of activity and costs.

D. All of the above.

25. The ideal database contains:

A. reliably measured observations

B. numerous cost driver observations

C. cost driver observations spanning a wide range

D. All of these answers are correct.

26. For a manufacturing-sector company, the cost of factory depreciation is classified as a:

A. period cost B. direct manufacturing labor cost

C. direct material cost D. manufacturing overhead cost

Answer the following questions using the information below:

For last year, Lewisburn Manufacturing reported the following:

Revenue

$420,000

Beginning inventory of direct materials, January 1

22,000

Purchases of direct materials

146,000

Ending inventory of direct materials, December 31

16,000

Direct manufacturing labor

18,000

Indirect manufacturing costs

40,000

Beginning inventory of finished goods, January 1

35,000

Cost of goods manufactured

104,000

Ending inventory of finished goods, December 31

36,000

Operating costs

140,000

27. How much of the above would be considered period costs for Lewisburn Manufacturing?

A. $390,000 B. $104,000 C. $246,000 D. $140,000

28. Cost accounting provides all of the following EXCEPT:

A. nonfinancial information regarding the cost of operational efficiencies

B. pricing information from marketing studies

C. financial information regarding the cost of acquiring resources

D. information for management accounting and financial accounting

29. Responsibilities of a CFO include all of the following EXCEPT:

A. preparing federal, state, and international tax returns

B. providing financial reports to shareholders

C. managing short-term and long-term financing

D. investing in new equipment

30. For manufacturing firms, inventoriable costs include:

A. plant supervisor salaries

B. costs of dealing with customers after the sale

C. distribution costs

D. research and development costs

31. Which of the following does NOT affect the direct/indirect classification of a cost?

A. the materiality of the cost in question

B. the level of budgeted profit for the next year

C. available technology to gather information about the cost

D. the design of the operation

32. Product costs used for external reporting generally include:

A. design costs plus manufacturing costs B. all costs incurred along the value chain

C. manufacturing costs only D. All of these answers are correct.

33. Which of the following is NOT one of the questions management accountants might attempt to help answer in the formulation of strategy?

A. Does the strategy comply with GAAP (Generally Accepted Accounting Principles)?

B. Will adequate cash be available to implement the strategy?

C. What substitute products exist in the marketplace?

D. Who are our most important customers?

TRUE/FALSE. Mark A on the Scantronif the statement is true and ‘B’ if the statement is false.

34. Financial accounting is broader in scope than management accounting.

35. Customers are demanding increased levels of performance in all aspects of the value chain and the supply chain.

36. The degree of operating leverage at a specific level of sales helps the managers calculate the effect that potential changes in sales will have on operating income.

37. To perform cost-volume-profit analysis, a company must be able to separate costs into fixed and variable components.

38. ABC systems always provide decision-making benefits that exceed implementation costs.

39. Estimating the degree of completion for the calculation of equivalent units is usually easier for conversion costs than it is for direct materials.

40. The weighted-average process costing method does NOT distinguish between units started in the previous period but completed during the current period and units started and completed during the current period.

41. If indirect-cost rates were based on actual short-term usage, periods of lower demand would result in lower costs per unit.

42. In some variations of normal costing, organizations use budgeted rates to assign direct costs as well as indirect costs to jobs.

43. A flat or slightly sloped regression line indicates a strong relationship.

44. Inventoriable costs are reported as an expense when incurred and expensed on the income statement when the product is sold.

45. Assigning direct costs poses more problems than assigning indirect costs.

acct504 495976

Question 1. 1. (TCOs A, B, and C) Which type of corporate information is not available to investors? (Points : 3)

Dividend history

Forecast of cash needs for the upcoming year

Cash provided by investing activities

Beginning cash balance

Question 2. 2. (TCO C) Debt securities sold to investors that must be repaid at a particular date some years in the future are called (Points : 3)

accounts payable.

notes receivable.

taxes payable.

bonds payable.

Question 3. 3. (TCO C) Buying and selling products are examples of (Points : 3)

operating activities.

investing activities.

financing activities.

delivering activities.

Question 4. 4. (TCO A) The cost of assets consumed or services used is also known as (Points : 3)

a revenue.

an expense.

a liability.

an asset.

Question 5. 5. (TCO C) Finley Company recorded the following cash transactions for the year.

Paid $90,000 for salaries

Paid $40,000 to purchase office equipment

Paid $10,000 for utilities

Paid $4,000 in dividends

Collected $150,000 from customers

What was Finley’s net cash provided by operating activities? (Points : 3)

$50,000

$10,000

$60,000

$46,000

Question 6. 6. (TCO A) On a classified balance sheet, prepaid insurance is classified as (Points : 3)

an intangible asset.

property, plant, and equipment.

a current asset.

a long-term investment.

Question 7. 7. (TCO A) An intangible asset (Points : 3)

may have the capacity to earn revenue for its owner.

is worthless because it has no physical substance.

is converted into a tangible asset during the operating cycle.

cannot be reported on the balance sheet because it lacks physical substance.

Question 8. 8. (TCO A) The following are selected account balances on December 31, 2010.

-Land (location of the corporation’s office building): $100,000

-Land (held for future use): 150,000

-Corporate Office Building: 600,000

-Inventory: 200,000

-Equipment: 450,000

-Office Furniture: 100,000

-Accumulated Depreciation: 300,000

What is the total NET amount of property, plant, and equipment that will appear on the balance sheet? (Points : 3)

$1,300,000

$1,100,000

$1,600,000

$950,000

Question 9. 9. (TCO B) For 2010, Landford Corporation reported net income of $30,000; net sales $400,000; and average share outstanding 6,000. There were no preferred stock dividends. What was the 2010 earnings per share? (Points : 3)

$4.66

$0.20

$66.67

$5.00

Question 10. 10. (TCO B) At December 31, 2010, Shorts Company had retained earnings of $2,184,000. During 2010 they issued stock for $98,000, and paid dividends of $34,000. Net income for 2010 was $402,000. The retained earnings balance at the beginning of 2010 was: (Points : 3)

$2,552,000

$1,816,000

$1,914,000

$2,454,000

Question 11. 11. (TCO D) Money collected from customers before the work is done is treated as (Points : 3)

prepaid expenses.

accrued revenues.

unearned revenues.

accrued expenses.

Question 12. 12. (TCO D) An account is a part of the financial information system and is described by all except which one of the following? (Points : 3)

An account has a debit and credit side.

An account has to be in paper form.

An account has a zero or nonzero balance.

An account has a title.

Question 13. 13. (TCO D) Which of the following describes the classification and normal balance of the retained earnings account? (Points : 3)

Asset, debit

Stockholders’ equity, credit

Revenues, credit

Expense, debit

Question 14. 14. (TCO D) In recording an accounting transaction in a double-entry system (Points : 3)

the number of debit accounts must equal the number of credit accounts.

there must always be entries made on both sides of the accounting equation.

the amount of the debits must equal the amount of the credits.

there must only be two accounts affected by any transaction.

Question 15. 15. (TCO D) Which of the following accounts follows the rules of debit and credit in relation to increases and decreases in the opposite manner? (Points : 3)

Prepaid insurance and dividends

Dividends and medical fees earned

Interest payable and common stock

Advertising expense and land

Question 16. 16. (TCO E) An accounting time period that is 1 year in length is called (Points : 3)

a fiscal year.

an interim period.

the time period assumption.

a reporting period.

Question 17. 17. (TCO E) In a service-type business, revenue is considered earned (Points : 3)

at the end of the month.

at the end of the year.

when the service is performed.

when cash is received.

Question 18. 18. (TCO E) Why do generally accepted accounting principles require the application of the revenue recognition principle? (Points : 3)

Failure to apply the revenue recognition principle could lead to an overstatement of revenue.

It is easy to apply the revenue recognition principle because revenue issues are always easy to identify and resolve.

Recording revenue when cash is received is an objective application of the revenue recognition principle.

Accounting software has made the revenue recognition easy to apply.

Question 19. 19. (TCO E) The following is selected information from G Corporation for the fiscal year ending October 31, 2010.

-Cash received from customers: $150,000

-Revenue earned: 175,000

-Cash paid for expenses: 85,000

-Expenses incurred: 100,000

Based on the accrual basis of accounting, what is G Corporation’s net income for the year ending October 31, 2010? (Points : 3)

$57,000

$75,000

$41,000

$85,000

Question 20. 20. (TCO E) Accounts often need to be adjusted because (Points : 3)

there are never enough accounts to record all the transactions.

many transactions affect more than one time period.

there are always errors made in recording transactions.

management can’t decide what they want to report.

Question 21. 21. (TCOs A and B) Which of the following expressions is incorrect? (Points : 3)

Gross profit – operating expenses = net income

Sales – cost of goods sold – operating expenses = net income

Net income + operating expenses = gross profit

Operating expenses – cost of goods sold = gross profit

Question 22. 22. (TCO B) Hunter Company purchased merchandise inventory with an invoice price of $12,000 and credit terms of 2/10, n/30. What is the net cost of the goods if Hunter Company pays within the discount period? (Points : 3)

$11,040

$10,800

$11,760

$12,000

Question 23. 23. (TCOs A and B) Jake’s Market recorded the following events involving a recent purchase of merchandise.

-Received goods for $20,000, terms 2/10, n/30.

-Returned $400 of the shipment for credit.

-Paid $100 freight on the shipment.

-Paid the invoice within the discount period.

As a result of these events, the company’s merchandise inventory (Points : 3)

increased by $19,208.

increased by $19,700.

increased by $19,306.

increased by $19,308.

Question 24. 24. (TCO A) If goods in transit are shipped FOB destination (Points : 3)

the seller has legal title to the goods until they are delivered.

the buyer has legal title to the goods until they are delivered.

the transportation company has legal title to the goods while the goods are in transit.

no one has legal title to the goods until they are delivered.

Question 25. 25. (TCO A) Which statement is false? (Points : 3)

Taking a physical inventory involves actually counting, weighing, or measuring each kind of inventory on hand.

No matter whether a periodic or perpetual inventory system is used, all companies need to determine inventory quantities at the end of each accounting period.

An inventory count is generally more accurate when goods are not being sold or received during the counting.

Companies that use a perpetual inventory system must take a physical inventory to determine inventory on hand on the balance-sheet date and to determine cost of goods sold for the accounting period.

Question 26. 26. (TCO A) Of the following companies, which one would not likely employ the specific identification method for inventory costing? (Points : 3)

Music store specializing in piano sales

Custom jewelry store

Antique shop

Hardware store

Question 27. 27. (TCO A) Which of the following statements is correct with respect to inventories? (Points : 3)

The FIFO method assumes that the costs of the earliest goods acquired are the last to be sold.

It is generally good business management to sell the most recently acquired goods first.

Under FIFO, the ending inventory is based on the latest units purchased.

FIFO seldom coincides with the actual physical flow of inventory.

Question 28. 28. (TCO A) In periods of rising prices, the inventory method which results in the inventory value on the balance sheet that is closest to current cost is the (Points : 3)

FIFO method.

LIFO method.

average cost method.

tax method.

Question 29. 29. (TCO B) In a perpetual inventory system, cost of goods sold is recorded (Points : 3)

on a daily basis.

on a monthly basis.

on an annual basis.

each time a sale occurs.

Question 30. 30. (TCO B) The primary source of revenue for a retailer is (Points : 3)

investment income.

service revenue.

the sale of merchandise.

the sale of plant assets the company owns.

Question 31. 31. (TCO D) An account is an important accounting record where financial information is stored until needed. Briefly explain (1) the nature of an account, (2) the different types of accounts, and (3) the manner in which an account is increased and decreased, and the normal balance of each type of accounts. (Points : 25)

Question 32. 32. (TCOs B and E) The adjusted trial balance of Gertz Company included the following selected accounts.

Debit Credit

Sales $575,000

Sales returns and allowances $ 50,000

Sales discounts 9,500

Cost of goods sold 347,000

Freight-out 2,000

Advertising expense 15,000

Interest expense 19,000

Store salaries expense 74,000

Utilities expense 18,000

Depreciation expense 3,500

Interest revenue 25,000

Instructions:

1.Use the above information to prepare a multiple-step income statement for the year ended December 31, 2010.

2.Calculate the profit margin ratio and gross profit rate. To qualify for full credit, you must state the formula you are using, show your computations, and explain your findings.

(Points : 35)

acct504 case study 3 495977

ACCT504 Case Study 3 on Cash Budgeting

The cash budget was covered during Week 4 when we covered TCO D and you read Chapter 7. There is also a practice case study to work on. Your professor will provide the solution to the practice case study at the end of Week 5. This case study should be uploaded by 11:59 p.m. mountain time on Sunday at the end of Week 6 to the Week 6 Assignment Dropbox. You are encouraged to use the Excel template file provided in Doc Sharing.

The LBJ Company has budgeted sales revenues as follows.

April May June

Credit sales $94,000 $89,500 $75,000

Cash sales 48,000 75,000 57,000

Total sales $142,000 $164,500 $132,000

Past experience indicates that 30% of the credit sales will be collected in the month of sale and the remaining 70% will be collected in the following month.

Purchases of inventory are all on credit and 40% is paid in the month of purchase and 60% in the month following purchase. Budgeted inventory purchases are $195,000 in April, $135,000 in May, and $63,000 in June.

Other budgeted cash receipts: (a) sale of plant assets for $33,000 in May, and (b) sale of new common stock for $50,000 in June. Other budgeted cash disbursements: (a) operating expenses of $15,000 each month, (b) selling and administrative expenses of $10,150 each month, (c) purchase of equipment for $35,000 cash in May, and (d) dividends of $20,000 will be paid in June.

The company has a cash balance of $20,000 at the beginning of May and wishes to maintain a minimum cash balance of $20,000 at the end of each month. An open line of credit is available at the bank and carries an annual interest rate of 10%. Assume that all borrowing is done on the first day of the month in which financing is needed and that all repayments are made on the last day of the month in which excess cash is available. Also assume that there is no outstanding financing as of May 1.

Requirements:

1. Use this information to prepare a cash budget for the months of May and June, using the template provided in Doc Sharing.

2. What are the three sections of a cash budget, and what is included in each section?

3. Why is a cash budget so vital to a company?

4. What are the five basic principles of cash management that a company can follow in order to improve its chances of having adequate cash?

Grading Rubric for Cash Budget Case Study

Category

Points

%

Description

Documentation
and Formatting

6

10%

Case Study worksheet will be done in Excel and will contain formulas to receive maximum credit.

Organization
and Cohesiveness

6

10%

A quality solution will include the content properly organized in accordance with the instructions provided. The cash budgets will be complete and the analysis will be consistent with the cash budgets presented.

Editing

6

10%

Quality work will be free of any mathematical, spelling, punctuation, or grammatical errors. Sentences and paragraphs (where appropriate) will be clear, concise, and factually correct.

Content

42

70%

A quality project will have all required work completed and will be correct.

Total

60

100%

A quality project will meet or exceed all of the requirements.

acct504 nova co sellmore enrique co jendusa corp 495978

E8-6: Nova Co.

On December 31, 2011, when its Allowance for Doubtful Accounts had a debit balance of $1,400, Nova Co. estimates that 9% of its accounts receivable balance of $90,000 will become uncollectible and records the necessary adjustment to the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts. On May 11, 2012, Nova Co. determined that J. Rast s account was uncollectible and wrote off $1,200. On June 12, 2012, Rast paid the amount previously written off.

Prepare entry for estimated uncollectibles, write-off, and recovery.

Instruction:

Prepare the journal entries on December 31, 2011, May 11, 2012, and June 12, 2012.

P8-1A: Sellmore

Sellmore.com uses the allowance method of accounting for bad debts. The company produced the following aging of the accounts receivable at year-end.

Journalize transactions related to bad debts.

Total

Number of Days Outstanding

0 30

31 60

61 90

91 120

Over 120

Accounts receivable

$377,000

$222,000

$90,000

$38,000

$15,000

$12,000

% uncollectible

1%

4%

5%

8%

10%

Estimated bad debts

Instructions

a) Calculate the total estimated bad debts based on the above information.

(a) Tot. est. bad debts $10,120

b) Prepare the year-end adjusting journal entry to record the bad debts using the aged uncollectible accounts receivable determined in (a). Assume the unadjusted balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is a $4,000 debit.

(c) Of the above accounts, $5,000 is determined to be specifically uncollectible. Prepare the journal entry to write off the uncollectible account.

E9-3: Enrique Company

On March 1, 2012, Enrique Company acquired real estate, on which it planned to construct a small office building, by paying $80,000 in cash. An old warehouse on the property was demolished at a cost of $8,200; the salvaged materials were sold for $1,700. Additional expenditures before construction began included $1,900 attorney s fee for work concerning the land purchase, $5,200 real estate broker s fee, $9,100 architect s fee, and $14,000 to put in driveways and a parking lot.

Determine acquisition costs of land.

(a) Determine the amount to be reported as the cost of the land.

(b) For each cost not used in part (a), indicate the account to be debited.

E9-13: Jendusa Corporation

These are selected 2012 transactions for Jendusa Corporation:

Prepare adjusting entries for amortization.

Jan.

1

Purchased a copyright for $120,000. The copyright has a useful life of 6 years and a remaining legal life of 30 years.

Mar.

1

Purchased a patent with an estimated useful life of 4 years and a legal life of 20 years for $54,000.

Sept.

1

Purchased a small company and recorded goodwill of $150,000. Its useful life is indefinite.

Instructions

Prepare all adjusting entries at December 31 to record amortization required by the events.

acct504 practice case study 3 on cash budgeting this is a practice case study to hel 495979

ACCT504 Practice Case Study 3 on Cash Budgeting

This is a practice case study to help you become familiar with how to create a comprehensive cash budget. The cash budget relates to TCO D and is discussed in Chapter 7. Your professor will provide the solution by the end of Week 5 in Doc Sharing.

The actual case study assignment should be uploaded by 11:59 p.m. mountain time on Sunday at the end of Week 6 to the Week 6 Assignment Dropbox. You are encouraged to use the Excel template file provided in Doc Sharing.

The Cambridge Company has budgeted sales revenues as follows.

Jan Feb Mar

Credit sales $45,000 $36,000 $27,000

Cash sales 27,000 76,500 58,500

Total sales $72,000 $112,500 $85,500

Past experience indicates that 60% of the credit sales will be collected in the month of sale and the remaining 40% will be collected in the following month.

Purchases of inventory are all on credit and 40% is paid in the month of purchase and 60% in the month following purchase. Budgeted inventory purchases are $97,500 in January, $67,500 in February, and $31,500 in March.

Other budgeted cash receipts: (a) sale of plant assets for $18,525 in February, and (b) sale of new common stock for $25,275 in March. Other budgeted cash disbursements: (a) operating expenses of $10,125 each month, (b) selling and administrative expenses of $18,750 each month, (c) dividends of $28,500 will be paid in February, and (d) purchase of equipment for $9,000 cash in March.

The company has a cash balance of $15,000 at the beginning of February and wishes to maintain a minimum cash balance of $15,000 at the end of each month. An open line of credit is available at the bank and carries an annual interest rate of 12%. Assume that all borrowing is done on the first day of the month in which financing is needed and that all repayments are made on the last day of the month in which excess cash is available. Also assume that there is no outstanding financing as of February 1.

Requirements:

1. Use this information to prepare a cash budget for the months of February and March, using the template provided in Doc Sharing.

Please note: This is not a graded assignment, but your instructor will share the solution for this practice exercise by the end of Week 5. It is highly recommended that you try to build the cash budget on your own first.

acct504 question 1 1 tcos a b and c which type of corporate information is not avail 495980

Question 1. 1. (TCOs A, B, and C) Which type of corporate information is not available to investors? (Points : 3)

Dividend history

Forecast of cash needs for the upcoming year

Cash provided by investing activities

Beginning cash balance

Question 2. 2. (TCO C) Debt securities sold to investors that must be repaid at a particular date some years in the future are called (Points : 3)

accounts payable.

notes receivable.

taxes payable.

bonds payable.

Question 3. 3. (TCO C) Buying and selling products are examples of (Points : 3)

operating activities.

investing activities.

financing activities.

delivering activities.

Question 4. 4. (TCO A) The cost of assets consumed or services used is also known as (Points : 3)

a revenue.

an expense.

a liability.

an asset.

Question 5. 5. (TCO C) Finley Company recorded the following cash transactions for the year.

Paid $90,000 for salaries

Paid $40,000 to purchase office equipment

Paid $10,000 for utilities

Paid $4,000 in dividends

Collected $150,000 from customers

What was Finley’s net cash provided by operating activities? (Points : 3)

$50,000

$10,000

$60,000

$46,000

Question 6. 6. (TCO A) On a classified balance sheet, prepaid insurance is classified as (Points : 3)

an intangible asset.

property, plant, and equipment.

a current asset.

a long-term investment.

Question 7. 7. (TCO A) An intangible asset (Points : 3)

may have the capacity to earn revenue for its owner.

is worthless because it has no physical substance.

is converted into a tangible asset during the operating cycle.

cannot be reported on the balance sheet because it lacks physical substance.

Question 8. 8. (TCO A) The following are selected account balances on December 31, 2010.

-Land (location of the corporation’s office building): $100,000

-Land (held for future use): 150,000

-Corporate Office Building: 600,000

-Inventory: 200,000

-Equipment: 450,000

-Office Furniture: 100,000

-Accumulated Depreciation: 300,000

What is the total NET amount of property, plant, and equipment that will appear on the balance sheet? (Points : 3)

$1,300,000

$1,100,000

$1,600,000

$950,000

Question 9. 9. (TCO B) For 2010, Landford Corporation reported net income of $30,000; net sales $400,000; and average share outstanding 6,000. There were no preferred stock dividends. What was the 2010 earnings per share? (Points : 3)

$4.66

$0.20

$66.67

$5.00

Question 10. 10. (TCO B) At December 31, 2010, Shorts Company had retained earnings of $2,184,000. During 2010 they issued stock for $98,000, and paid dividends of $34,000. Net income for 2010 was $402,000. The retained earnings balance at the beginning of 2010 was: (Points : 3)

$2,552,000

$1,816,000

$1,914,000

$2,454,000

Question 11. 11. (TCO D) Money collected from customers before the work is done is treated as (Points : 3)

prepaid expenses.

accrued revenues.

unearned revenues.

accrued expenses.

Question 12. 12. (TCO D) An account is a part of the financial information system and is described by all except which one of the following? (Points : 3)

An account has a debit and credit side.

An account has to be in paper form.

An account has a zero or nonzero balance.

An account has a title.

Question 13. 13. (TCO D) Which of the following describes the classification and normal balance of the retained earnings account? (Points : 3)

Asset, debit

Stockholders’ equity, credit

Revenues, credit

Expense, debit

Question 14. 14. (TCO D) In recording an accounting transaction in a double-entry system (Points : 3)

the number of debit accounts must equal the number of credit accounts.

there must always be entries made on both sides of the accounting equation.

the amount of the debits must equal the amount of the credits.

there must only be two accounts affected by any transaction.

Question 15. 15. (TCO D) Which of the following accounts follows the rules of debit and credit in relation to increases and decreases in the opposite manner? (Points : 3)

Prepaid insurance and dividends

Dividends and medical fees earned

Interest payable and common stock

Advertising expense and land

Question 16. 16. (TCO E) An accounting time period that is 1 year in length is called (Points : 3)

a fiscal year.

an interim period.

the time period assumption.

a reporting period.

Question 17. 17. (TCO E) In a service-type business, revenue is considered earned (Points : 3)

at the end of the month.

at the end of the year.

when the service is performed.

when cash is received.

Question 18. 18. (TCO E) Why do generally accepted accounting principles require the application of the revenue recognition principle? (Points : 3)

Failure to apply the revenue recognition principle could lead to an overstatement of revenue.

It is easy to apply the revenue recognition principle because revenue issues are always easy to identify and resolve.

Recording revenue when cash is received is an objective application of the revenue recognition principle.

Accounting software has made the revenue recognition easy to apply.

Question 19. 19. (TCO E) The following is selected information from G Corporation for the fiscal year ending October 31, 2010.

-Cash received from customers: $150,000

-Revenue earned: 175,000

-Cash paid for expenses: 85,000

-Expenses incurred: 100,000

Based on the accrual basis of accounting, what is G Corporation’s net income for the year ending October 31, 2010? (Points : 3)

$57,000

$75,000

$41,000

$85,000

Question 20. 20. (TCO E) Accounts often need to be adjusted because (Points : 3)

there are never enough accounts to record all the transactions.

many transactions affect more than one time period.

there are always errors made in recording transactions.

management can’t decide what they want to report.

Question 21. 21. (TCOs A and B) Which of the following expressions is incorrect? (Points : 3)

Gross profit – operating expenses = net income

Sales – cost of goods sold – operating expenses = net income

Net income + operating expenses = gross profit

Operating expenses – cost of goods sold = gross profit

Question 22. 22. (TCO B) Hunter Company purchased merchandise inventory with an invoice price of $12,000 and credit terms of 2/10, n/30. What is the net cost of the goods if Hunter Company pays within the discount period? (Points : 3)

$11,040

$10,800

$11,760

$12,000

Question 23. 23. (TCOs A and B) Jake’s Market recorded the following events involving a recent purchase of merchandise.

-Received goods for $20,000, terms 2/10, n/30.

-Returned $400 of the shipment for credit.

-Paid $100 freight on the shipment.

-Paid the invoice within the discount period.

As a result of these events, the company’s merchandise inventory (Points : 3)

increased by $19,208.

increased by $19,700.

increased by $19,306.

increased by $19,308.

Question 24. 24. (TCO A) If goods in transit are shipped FOB destination (Points : 3)

the seller has legal title to the goods until they are delivered.

the buyer has legal title to the goods until they are delivered.

the transportation company has legal title to the goods while the goods are in transit.

no one has legal title to the goods until they are delivered.

Question 25. 25. (TCO A) Which statement is false? (Points : 3)

Taking a physical inventory involves actually counting, weighing, or measuring each kind of inventory on hand.

No matter whether a periodic or perpetual inventory system is used, all companies need to determine inventory quantities at the end of each accounting period.

An inventory count is generally more accurate when goods are not being sold or received during the counting.

Companies that use a perpetual inventory system must take a physical inventory to determine inventory on hand on the balance-sheet date and to determine cost of goods sold for the accounting period.

Question 26. 26. (TCO A) Of the following companies, which one would not likely employ the specific identification method for inventory costing? (Points : 3)

Music store specializing in piano sales

Custom jewelry store

Antique shop

Hardware store

Question 27. 27. (TCO A) Which of the following statements is correct with respect to inventories? (Points : 3)

The FIFO method assumes that the costs of the earliest goods acquired are the last to be sold.

It is generally good business management to sell the most recently acquired goods first.

Under FIFO, the ending inventory is based on the latest units purchased.

FIFO seldom coincides with the actual physical flow of inventory.

Question 28. 28. (TCO A) In periods of rising prices, the inventory method which results in the inventory value on the balance sheet that is closest to current cost is the (Points : 3)

FIFO method.

LIFO method.

average cost method.

tax method.

Question 29. 29. (TCO B) In a perpetual inventory system, cost of goods sold is recorded (Points : 3)

on a daily basis.

on a monthly basis.

on an annual basis.

each time a sale occurs.

Question 30. 30. (TCO B) The primary source of revenue for a retailer is (Points : 3)

investment income.

service revenue.

the sale of merchandise.

the sale of plant assets the company owns.

Question 31. 31. (TCO D) An account is an important accounting record where financial information is stored until needed. Briefly explain (1) the nature of an account, (2) the different types of accounts, and (3) the manner in which an account is increased and decreased, and the normal balance of each type of accounts. (Points : 25)

Question 32. 32. (TCOs B and E) The adjusted trial balance of Gertz Company included the following selected accounts.

Debit Credit

Sales $575,000

Sales returns and allowances $ 50,000

Sales discounts 9,500

Cost of goods sold 347,000

Freight-out 2,000

Advertising expense 15,000

Interest expense 19,000

Store salaries expense 74,000

Utilities expense 18,000

Depreciation expense 3,500

Interest revenue 25,000

Instructions:

1.Use the above information to prepare a multiple-step income statement for the year ended December 31, 2010.

2.Calculate the profit margin ratio and gross profit rate. To qualify for full credit, you must state the formula you are using, show your computations, and explain your findings. (Points : 35)

acct504 week 8 quiz solutions guide correct answers 495981

1. (TCO A) Which of the following is an advantage of the sole proprietorship relative to the corporate form of business organization

Limited liability of investor

Transferability of ownership

Simple to establish

Unlimited life

2. (TCO A) The payment of cash dividends is recorded in the _____.

operating section of the statement of cash flows

investing section of the statement of cash flows

financing section of the statement of cash flows

noncash investing and financing section of the statement of cash flows

3. (TCOs A, B) Below is a partial list of account balances for Landon Company::

Cash $10,000

Prepaid insurance 700

Accounts receivable 3,500

Accounts payable 2,800

Notes payable 4,200

Common stock 1,400

Dividends 700

Revenues 21,000

Expenses 17,500

What did Landon Company show as total debits

$32,400

$29,400

$34,500

$35,200

4. (TCOs B, E) Under the accrual basis of accounting, revenues are recorded and reported _____.

when companies receive payments for jobs performed or products provided

when companies have provided products or performed services

when companies receive payments prior to providing products or performing services

when companies receive payments after providing products or performing services

5. (TCO D) Three companies report the same cost of goods available for sale, but each employs a different inventory costing method. If the price of goods has increased during the period, then the company using _____.

FIFO will have the highest income tax expense

average cost will have the income tax expense

LIFO will have the highest income tax expense

All three methods will result in the same income tax expense.

6. (TCOs A, E) Equipment with a cost of $212,000 has an estimated salvage value of $12,000 and an estimated life of 5 years or 15,000 hours. It is to be depreciated by the straight-line method. What is the amount of depreciation for the first full year, during which the equipment was used 6,000 hours?

$80,000

$84,800

$42,400

$40,000

7. (TCO D, G) Payne Corporation issues 100 twenty-year, 6%, $1,000 bonds dated July 1, 2010, at 105. The journal entry to record the issuance will show a _____.

debit to Discount on Bonds Payable of $5,000

debit to Premium on Bonds Payable of $5,000

credit to Discount on Bonds Payable of $5,000

credit to Premium on Bonds Payable of $5,000

8. (TCO C) Accounts receivable arising from sales to customers amounted to $80,000 and $120,000 at the beginning and end of the year, respectively. Income reported on the income statement for the year was $2,000,000. Exclusive of the effect of other adjustments, the cash flows from operating activities to be reported on the statement of cash flows is _____.

$2,040,000

$2,000,000

$1,200,000

$1,960,000

9. (TCO F) If you are making comparisons with other companies to provide insight into a company’s competitive position, you are performing what type of analysis

Common-size analysis

Intercompany analysis

Intracompany analysis

Industry average analysis

10. (TCO F) In a common size income statement, the 100% figure is _____.

Total Assets

Total Stockholders’ Equity

Net Sales

Net Income

11. (TCO F) Horizontal analysis of comparative financial statements includes the _____.

development of common-size statements

calculation of liquidity ratios

calculation of dollar amount changes and percentage changes from the previous year to the current year

evaluation of financial statement data that expresses each item in a financial statement as a percentage of a base amount

12. (TCO F) A common measure of solvency is the _____.

asset turnover

current cash debt coverage ratio

cash debt coverage ratio

current ratio

13. (TCO F) Short-term creditors would be most interested in which of the following ratios?

Average collection period

Times interest earned

Cash debt coverage

Free cash flow

14. (TCO G) To calculate the market value of a bond, we need to _____.

multiply the bond price times the interest rate

calculate the present value of the principal only

calculate the present value of the interest only

calculate the present value of both the principal and interest payments

1. (TCO A) The partial financial statement items below were taken from the financial statements of Calibar Company. This account information can be used to correctly solve each of the ratios below. The information is in alphabetical order.

Accounts payable $5,000 Net sales $100,000

Accounts receivable $18,000 Other current liabilities $4,000

Average common shares outstanding 5,000 Salaries payable $4,000

Cash $8,000 Stockholder’s equity $33,000

Gross profit $38,000 Total assets $66,000

Net income $10,000

Instructions: Compute the following.

a) Current ratio

b) Working capital

c) Earnings per share

d) Debt-to-total-assets ratio

To earn full credit, you must show the formula you are using, show your computations, and explain the meaning of each of your ratio results.

2. (TCO D) The Oxford Company has budgeted sales revenues as follows.

Oct Nov Dec

Credit sales $120,000 $96,000 $72,000

Cash sales 72,000 204,000 156,000

Total sales 192,000 300,000 228,000

Past experience indicates that 60% of the credit sales will be collected in the month of sale and the remaining 40% will be collected in the following month. Purchases of inventory are all on credit, with 60% paid in the month of purchase and 40% in the month following purchase. Budgeted inventory purchases are $260,000 in October, 180,000 in November, and $84,000 in December.

Other budgeted cash receipts include (a) the sale of plant assets for $49,400 in November and (b) the sale of new common stock for $67,400 in December. Other budgeted cash disbursements include (a) operating expenses of $27,000 each month, (b) selling and administrative expenses of $50,000 each month, (c) dividends of $76,000 to be paid in November, and (d) purchase of equipment for $24,000 cash in December.

The company has a cash balance of $40,000 at the beginning of December and wishes to maintain a minimum cash balance of $40,000 at the end of each month. An open line of credit is available at the bank and carries an annual interest rate of 12%. Assume that all borrowing is done on the first day of the month in which financing is needed and that all repayments are made on the last day of the month in which excess cash is available. Also assume that $14,000 of financing was obtained on November 1.

Requirements:

Use this information to prepare a schedule of expected cash payments for purchases of inventory for the months of November and December only.

3. (TCOs B, E) The following items are taken from the financial statements of LBJ Company for 2010.

Accounts payable $26,500

Accounts receivable 6,000

Accumulated depreciation 9,600

Bonds payable 28,000

Cash 44,000

Common stock 35,000

Cost of goods sold 19,000

Depreciation expense 4,800

Dividends 5,300

Equipment 58,000

Interest expense 3,500

Patents 9,500

Retained earnings, January 1 20,000

Salaries expense 7,200

Sales revenue 38,500

Supplies 5,500

Instructions: Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for LBJ Company.

4. (TCO D) Your friend Cynthia has hired you to evaluate the following internal control procedures.

a) Explain to your friend whether each of the numbered items below is an internal control strength or weakness. You must also state which principle relates to each of the internal controls.

b) For the weaknesses, you also need to state a recommendation for improvement.

1. All checks are printed using indelible ink.

2. Cash register tapes are used.

3. The company accountant handles deposits and reconciles the bank account.

4. All over-the-counter receipts are registered by two clerks who share a cash drawer.

5. The office manager is in charge of petty cash.

5. (TCOs D, E) Please prepare the following journal entries. Indicate which account should be debited with the abbreviation DR in front of the account name and which account should be credited with the abbreviation CR in front of the account name along with the dollar amount of the debit and credit.

a) Investors invested $150,000 in exchange for 10,000 shares of common stock.

b) Company made payment on account for $10,000

c) Company received $15,000 for services not yet performed

d) Company purchased $7,500 worth of equipment

e) Company billed $5,000 for services performed

6. (TCO C) Please indicate which section of the statement of cash flows should contain each of the following items and whether each item would result in an inflow or outflow of cash. The sections are Operating, Investing, and Financing.

a) Received bank loan

b) Sold equipment at book value

c) Increase in accounts receivable

d) Decrease in accounts payable

e) Amortization of a patent

acct505 495982

Page 2

1.(TCO D) Seebach Corporation has two major business segments Apparel and Accessories. Data concerning those segments for June appear below.

Sales revenues, Apparel

$700,000

Variable expenses, Apparel

$406,000

Traceable fixed expenses, Apparel

$98,000

Sales revenues, Accessories

$710,000

Variable expenses, Accessories

$312,000

Traceable fixed expenses, Accessories

$107,000

Common fixed expenses totaled $292,000 and were allocated as follows: $155,000 to the Apparel business segment and $137,000 to the Accessories business segment.

Required:

Prepare a segmented income statement in the contribution format for the company. Omit percentages; show only dollar amounts. (Points : 15)

2.(TCO D) Wryski Corporation had net operating income of $150,000 and average operating assets of $500,000. The company requires a return on investment of 19%.

Required:

i. Calculate the company’s current return on investment and residual income.

ii. The company is investigating an investment of $400,000 in a project that will generate annual net operating income of $78,000. What is the ROI of the project? What is the residual income of the project? Should the company invest in this project? (Points : 15)

3.(TCO D) Tjelmeland Corporation is considering dropping product S85U. Data from the company’s accounting system appear below.

Sales

$360,000

Variable Expenses

$158,000

Fixed Manufacturing Expenses

$119,000

Fixed Selling and Administrative Expenses

$94,000

All fixed expenses of the company are fully allocated to products in the company’s accounting system. Further investigation has revealed that $55,000 of the fixed manufacturing expenses and $71,000 of the fixed selling and administrative expenses are avoidable if product S85U is discontinued.

Required:

i. According to the company’s accounting system, what is the net operating income earned by product S85U? Show your work!

ii. What would be the effect on the company’s overall net operating income of dropping product S85U? Should the product be dropped? Show your work! (Points : 15)

4.(TCO D) Rosiek Corporation uses part A55 in one of its products. The company’s accounting department reports the following costs of producing the 4,000 units of the part that are needed every year.

Per Unit

Direct Materials

$2.80

Direct Labor

$6.30

Variable Overhead

$8.50

Supervisor’s Salary

$2.60

Depreciation of Special Equipment

$6.80

Allocated General Overhead

$6.10

An outside supplier has offered to make the part and sell it to the company for $32.30 each. If this offer is accepted, the supervisor’s salary and all of the variable costs, including direct labor, can be avoided. The special equipment used to make the part was purchased many years ago and has no salvage value or other use. The allocated general overhead represents fixed costs of the entire company. If the outside supplier’s offer were accepted, only $4,000 of these allocated general overhead costs would be avoided. In addition, the space used to produce part A55 could be used to make more of one of the company’s other products, generating an additional segment margin of $26,000 per year for that product.

Required:

i. Prepare a report that shows the effect on the company’s total net operating income of buying part A55 from the supplier rather than continuing to make it inside the company.

ii. Which alternative should the company choose? (Points : 15)

5.(TCO D) Manning Co. manufactures and sells trophies for winners of athletic and other events. Its manufacturing plant has the capacity to produce 18,000 trophies each month; current monthly production is 15,300 trophies. The company normally charges $141 per trophy. Cost data for the current level of production are shown below.

Variable Costs

Direct Materials

$948,600

Direct Labor

$290,700

Selling and Administrative

$41,300

Fixed Costs

Manufacturing

$579,870

Selling and Administrative

$134,640

The company has just received a special one-time order for 900 trophies at $73 each. For this particular order, no variable selling and administrative costs would be incurred. This order would also have no effect on fixed costs.

Required:

Should the company accept this special order? Why? (Points : 15)

acct505 495983

2.(TCO G) – (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Axillar Beauty Products Corporation is considering the production of a new conditioning shampoo that will require the purchase of new mixing machinery. The machinery will cost $375,000, is expected to have a useful life of 10 years, and is expected to have a salvage value of $50,000 at the end of 10 years. The machinery will also need a $35,000 overhaul at the end of Year 6. A $40,000 increase in working capital will be needed for this investment project. The working capital will be released at the end of the 10 years. The new shampoo is expected to generate net cash inflows of $85,000 per year for each of the 10 years. Axillar’s discount rate is 16%.

Required:
(a) What is the net present value of this investment opportunity?
(b) Based on your answer to (a) above, should Axillar go ahead with the new conditioning shampoo? (Points : 35)

1.(TCO C) Bella Lugosi Holdings, Inc. (BLH), has collected the following operating information below for its current month’s activity. Using this information, prepare a flexible budget analysis to determine how well BLH performed in terms of cost control.

Actual Costs Incurred

Static Budget

Activity level (in units)

5,250

5,178

Variable Costs:

Indirect materials

$24,182

$23,476

Utilities

$22,356

$22,674

Fixed Costs:

Administration

$63,450

$65,500

Rent

$65,317

$63,904

(Points : 30)

2

.(TCO B) Madlem, Inc., produces and sells a single product whose selling price is $240.00 per unit and whose variable expense is $86.40 per unit. The company’s fixed expense is $720,384 per month.

Required:

Determine the monthly break-even in either unit or total dollar sales. Show your work! (Points : 25)

1.(TCO F) Buckhorn Corporation bases its predetermined overhead rate on the estimated machine hours for the upcoming year. Data for the upcoming year appear below.

Estimated machine hours

85,000

Estimated variable manufacturing overhead

$5.55 per machine hour

Estimated total fixed manufacturing overhead

$951,888

acct505 earrings unlimited 100 rated correct answers 495984

You have been hired as a new management trainees by Earrings Unlimited, a distributor of earrings to various retail outlets located in shopping malls across the country. In the past, the company has done very little in the way of budgeting and at certain times of the year has experience a shortage of cash.

Sine you are well trained in budgeting, you have decided to prepare comprehensive budgets for the upcoming second quarter in order to show management the benefits that can be gained from an integrated budgeting program. To this end, you have worked with accounting and other areas to gather the information assembled below.

The company sells many styles of earrings, but all are sold for the same price-$10.00 per pair. Actual sales of earrings for the last three months and budgeted sales for the next six month follow (in pairs of earrings):

January (actual) 20,000 June (budget) 50,000

Febuary (actual) 26,000 July (budget) 30,000
March (actual) 40,000 August (budget) 28,000

April (budget) 65,000 September (budget) 25,000
May (budget) 100,000

The concentration of sales before and during May is due to Mother’s Day. Sufficient inventory should be on hand at the end of each month to supply 40% of the earrings sold in the following month. Suppliers are paid $4.00 for a pair of earrings. One-half of a month’s purchases in paid for in the month of the purchase; the other half is paid for in the following month. All sales are on credit, with no discount, and payable within 15 days. The company has found, however, that only 20 percent of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale. An additional 70 percent is collected in the following month, and the remaining 10 percent in the second month following sale. Bad debts have been negligible.

Monthly operation expenses for the company are given below:

Variable:
Sales Commission 4% of sales
Fixed:
Advertising 200,000
Rent 18,000
Salaries 106,000
Utilities 7,000
Insurance 3,000
Depreciation 14,000

Insurance is paid on an annual basis, in November of each year. The company plans to purchase 16,000 in new equipment during May and $40,000 in new equipment during June; both purchases will be for cash. The company declares dividends of $15,000 each quarter payable in the first month of the following quarter.

A listing of the company’s ledger accounts as of March 3 is given below:

Assets

Cash 74,000
Accounts receivalbe ($26,000 febuary sales;$320,00 March sale 346,000
Inventory 104,000
Prepaid Insurance 21,000
Property and equipment (net) 950,000

Total Assets 1,495,000

Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

Accounts payable 100,000
Dividends payable 15,000
capital stock 800,000
retained earnings 580,000

Total liabilities and Stockholders Equity 1,495,000

The company maintains a minimum cash balance of 50,000. All borrowing is done at the beginning of a month, and repayments are made at the end of a month. The annual interest rate is 12 percent. Interest is computed and paid at the end of each quarter on all loans outstanding during the quarter.

Required;

Prepare a master budget for the three-month period ending June 30. Include the following detailed budgets:

1.

a. A sales budget, by month and in total
b. A schedule of expected cash collections from sales, by month and in total
c. A merchandise purchaser budget in units and in dollars. Show the budget by month and in total.
d. A schedule of expected cash disbursements for merchandise purchases, by month and in total.

2. A cash budget. Show the budget by the month and in total. Determine any borrowing that would be needed to maintain the minimum cash balance of $50,000

3. A budgeted income statement for the three months period ending June 30. Use the contribution approach.

4. A budgeted balance sheet as of June 30.

acct505 final 495985

1.(TCO F) Willow Creek Corporation bases its predetermined overhead rate on the estimated labor hours for the upcoming year. At the beginning of the most recently completed year, the company estimated the labor hours for the upcoming year at 38,500 labor hours. The estimated variable manufacturing overhead was $7.37 per labor hour and the estimated total fixed manufacturing overhead was $601,328. The actual labor hours for the year turned out to be 41,721 labor hours.

Required:

Compute the company’s predetermined overhead rate for the recently completed year. (Points : 25)

2.(TCO F) Matuseski Corporation is preparing its cash budget for October. The budgeted beginning cash balance is $17,000. Budgeted cash receipts total $187,000 and budgeted cash disbursements total $177,000. The desired ending cash balance is $40,000. The company can borrow up to $120,000 at any time from a local bank, with interest not due until the following month.

Required:

Prepare the company’s cash budget for October in good form. (Points : 25)

Page 2

2.(TCO D) Lindon Company uses 4,500 units of Part X each year as a component in the assembly of one of its products. The company is presently producing Part X internally at a total cost of $69,000 as follows:

Direct materials

$16,000

Direct labor

18,000

Variable manufacturing overhead

10,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead

25,000

Total costs

$69,000

An outside supplier has offered to provide Part X at a price of $11 per unit. If Lindon stops producing the part internally, one third of the manufacturing overhead would be eliminated.

Required: Prepare a make-or-buy analysis showing the annual advantage or disadvantage of accepting the outside supplier’s offer. (Points : 30)

3.(TCO E) Topple Company produces a single product. Operating data for the company and its absorption costing income statement for the last year is presented below:

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

9,000

Units sold

7,000

Sales

$100,000

Less cost of goods sold:

Beginning inventory

0

Add cost of goods manufactured

54,000

Goods available for sale

54,000

Less ending inventory

12,000

Cost of goods sold

42,000

Gross margin

58,000

Less selling and admin. expenses

28,000

Net operating income

$30,000

Variable manufacturing costs are $4 per unit. Fixed factory overhead totals $18,000 for the year. This overhead was applied at a rate of $2 per unit. Variable selling and administrative expenses were $1 per unit sold.

Required: Prepare a new income statement for the year using variable costing. Comment on the differences between the absorption costing and the variable costing income statements. (Points : 30)

4.(TCO A) The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of the Maroon Corporation for the just-completed year.

Sales

1,150

Raw materials inventory, beginning

15

Raw materials inventory, ending

40

Purchases of raw materials

150

Direct labor

250

Manufacturing overhead

300

Administrative expenses

500

Selling expenses

300

Work in process inventory, beginning

100

Work in process inventory, ending

150

Finished goods inventory, beginning

80

Finished goods inventory, ending

120

Use the above data to prepare (in thousands of dollars) a schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured and a Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold for the year. In addition, what is the impact on the financial statements if the ending finished goods inventory is overstated or understated? (Points : 25)

1.(TCO F) Carter Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below.

Work in process, beginning:

Units in beginning work-in-process inventory

400

Materials costs

$6,900

Conversion costs

$2,500

Percentage complete for materials

80%

Percentage complete for conversion

15%

Units started into production during the month

6,000

Units transferred to the next department during the month

5,800

Materials costs added during the month

$112,500

Conversion costs added during the month

$210,300

Ending work in process:

Units in ending work-in-process inventory

1,400

Percentage complete for materials

70%

Percentage complete for conversion

40%

Required: Calculate the equivalent units for materials (using the weighted-average method) for the month in the first processing department. (Points : 25)

2.(TCO G) (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Five years ago, the City of Paranoya spent $30,000 to purchase a computerized radar system called W.A.S.T.E. (Watching Aliens Sent To Earth). Recently, a sales rep from W.A.S.T.E. Radar Company told the city manager about a new and improved radar system that can be purchased for $50,000. The rep also told the manager that the company would give the city $10,000 in trade on the old system. The new system will last 10 years. The old system will also last that long but only if a $4,000 upgrade is done in 5 years. The manager assembled the following information to use in the decision regarding which system is more desirable:

Old System

New System

Cost of radar system

$30,000

$50,000

Current salvage value

$10,000

Salvage value in 10 years

$5,000

$8,000

Annual operating costs

$34,000

$29,000

Upgrade required in 5 years

$4,000

Discount rate

14%

14%

Required:
(a) What is the City of Paranoya’s net present value for the decision described above? Use the total cost approach.
(b) Should the City of Paranoya purchase the new system or keep the old system? (Points : 35)

3.(TCO B) Aziz Corporation produces and sells a single product. Data concerning that product appear below.

Selling price per unit

$130.00

Variable expense per unit

$27.30

Fixed expense per month

$165,347

Required:

Determine the monthly break-even in either unit or total dollar sales. Show your work! (Points : 25)

acct505 final 29 june 495986

1.(TCO F) Willow Creek Corporation bases its predetermined overhead rate on the estimated labor hours for the upcoming year. At the beginning of the most recently completed year, the company estimated the labor hours for the upcoming year at 38,500 labor hours. The estimated variable manufacturing overhead was $7.37 per labor hour and the estimated total fixed manufacturing overhead was $601,328. The actual labor hours for the year turned out to be 41,721 labor hours.

Required:

Compute the company’s predetermined overhead rate for the recently completed year.(Points : 25)

2.(TCO F) Matuseski Corporation is preparing its cash budget for October. The budgeted beginning cash balance is $17,000. Budgeted cash receipts total $187,000 and budgeted cash disbursements total $177,000. The desired ending cash balance is $40,000. The company can borrow up to $120,000 at any time from a local bank, with interest not due until the following month.

Required:

Prepare the company’s cash budget for October in good form.(Points : 25)

Page 2

2.(TCO D) Lindon Company uses 4,500 units of Part X each year as a component in the assembly of one of its products. The company is presently producing Part X internally at a total cost of $69,000 as follows:

Direct materials

$16,000

Direct labor

18,000

Variable manufacturing overhead

10,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead

25,000

Total costs

$69,000

An outside supplier has offered to provide Part X at a price of $11 per unit. If Lindon stops producing the part internally, one third of the manufacturing overhead would be eliminated.

Required: Prepare a make-or-buy analysis showing the annual advantage or disadvantage of accepting the outside supplier’s offer.(Points : 30)

3.(TCO E) Topple Company produces a single product. Operating data for the company and its absorption costing income statement for the last year is presented below:

Units in beginning inventory

0

Units produced

9,000

Units sold

7,000

Sales

$100,000

Less cost of goods sold:

Beginning inventory

0

Add cost of goods manufactured

54,000

Goods available for sale

54,000

Less ending inventory

12,000

Cost of goods sold

42,000

Gross margin

58,000

Less selling and admin. expenses

28,000

Net operating income

$30,000

Variable manufacturing costs are $4 per unit. Fixed factory overhead totals $18,000 for the year. This overhead was applied at a rate of $2 per unit. Variable selling and administrative expenses were $1 per unit sold.

Required: Prepare a new income statement for the year using variable costing. Comment on the differences between the absorption costing and the variable costing income statements. (Points : 30)

4.(TCO A) The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of the Maroon Corporation for the just-completed year.

Sales

1,150

Raw materials inventory, beginning

15

Raw materials inventory, ending

40

Purchases of raw materials

150

Direct labor

250

Manufacturing overhead

300

Administrative expenses

500

Selling expenses

300

Work in process inventory, beginning

100

Work in process inventory, ending

150

Finished goods inventory, beginning

80

Finished goods inventory, ending

120

Use the above data to prepare (in thousands of dollars) a schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured and a Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold for the year. In addition, what is the impact on the financial statements if the ending finished goods inventory is overstated or understated?(Points : 25)

1.(TCO F) Carter Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below.

Work in process, beginning:

Units in beginning work-in-process inventory

400

Materials costs

$6,900

Conversion costs

$2,500

Percentage complete for materials

80%

Percentage complete for conversion

15%

Units started into production during the month

6,000

Units transferred to the next department during the month

5,800

Materials costs added during the month

$112,500

Conversion costs added during the month

$210,300

Ending work in process:

Units in ending work-in-process inventory

1,400

Percentage complete for materials

70%

Percentage complete for conversion

40%

Required: Calculate the equivalent units for materials (using the weighted-average method) for the month in the first processing department.(Points : 25)

2.(TCO G) (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Five years ago, the City of Paranoya spent $30,000 to purchase a computerized radar system called W.A.S.T.E. (Watching Aliens Sent To Earth). Recently, a sales rep from W.A.S.T.E. Radar Company told the city manager about a new and improved radar system that can be purchased for $50,000. The rep also told the manager that the company would give the city $10,000 in trade on the old system. The new system will last 10 years. The old system will also last that long but only if a $4,000 upgrade is done in 5 years. The manager assembled the following information to use in the decision regarding which system is more desirable:

Old System

New System

Cost of radar system

$30,000

$50,000

Current salvage value

$10,000

Salvage value in 10 years

$5,000

$8,000

Annual operating costs

$34,000

$29,000

Upgrade required in 5 years

$4,000

Discount rate

14%

14%

Required:
(a) What is the City of Paranoya’s net present value for the decision described above? Use the total cost approach.
(b) Should the City of Paranoya purchase the new system or keep the old system?(Points : 35)

3.(TCO B) Aziz Corporation produces and sells a single product. Data concerning that product appear below.

Selling price per unit

$130.00

Variable expense per unit

$27.30

Fixed expense per month

$165,347

Required:

Determine the monthly break-even in either unit or total dollar sales. Show your work!(Points : 25)

acct505 larop corporation the illinois company a tile manufacturer lehne company 495987

1. The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Larop Corporation for the just-completed year:

Sales……….. $910

Purchases of raw materials………$225

Direct labor…………….$245

Manufacturing overhead……….$265

Administrative expenses……….$150

Selling expenses……………..$140

Raw materials inventory, beginning……………..$15

Raw materials inventory, ending…………..$45

Work-in-process inventory, beginning…………….$20

Work-in-process inventory, ending…………………$55

Finished goods inventory, beginning…………………$100

Finished goods inventory, ending………….$135

Required: Prepare a Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured in the text box below.

2. The Illinois Company manufactures a product that goes through three processing departments. Information relating to activity in the first department during June is given below.

Percentage Completed

Units Materials Conversion

Work in process, June 1 150,000 75% 55%

Work in process, Jun 30 145,000 85% 75%

The department started 475,000 units into production during the month and transferred 480,000 completed units to the next department.

Required: Compute the equivalent units of production for the first department for June, assuming that the company uses the weighted-average method of accounting for units and costs.

3. A tile manufacturer has supplied the following data:

Boxes of tile produced and sold 625,000

Sales revenue $2,975,000

Variable manufacturing expense $1,720,000

Fixed manufacturing expense $790,000

Variable selling and admin expense $152,000

Fixed selling and admin expense $133,000

Net operating income $180,000

Required:

a. Calculate the company’s unit contribution margin.

b. Calculate the company’s unit contribution ratio.

c. If the company increases its unit sales volume by 5% without increasing its fixed expenses, what would the company’s net operating income be

4. Lehne Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling price $ 125

Units in beginning inventory 600

Units produced 3000

Units sold 3500

Units in ending inventory 100

Variable costs per unit:

Direct materials $ 15

Direct labor $ 50

Variable manufacturing overhead $ 8

Variable selling and admin $ 12

Fixed costs:

Fixed manufacturing overhead $ 75,000

Fixed selling and admin $ 20,000

The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units vary from month to month. The company’s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.

Required:

a. What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?

b. What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?

c. Prepare an income statement for the month using the variable costing method.

d. Prepare an income statement for the month using the absorption costing method.

acct505 multiple choice answers larden corporation the colorado company a cement man 495988

1.(TCO A) The variable portion of advertising costs is a (Points : 6)

Conversion YES… Period NO.

Conversion YES …. Period YES.

Conversion NO…. Period YES.

Conversion NO…. Period NO.

Question 2.2.(TCO A) Fixed costs expressed on a per-unit basis (Points : 6)

will increase with increases in activity.

will decrease with increases in activity.

are not affected by activity.

should be ignored in making decisions because they cannot change.

Question 3.3.(TCO A) The cost of lubricants used to grease a production machine in a manufacturing company is an example of a(n):(Points : 6)

period cost.

direct material cost.

indirect manufacturing cost.

direct labor cost.

None of the above

Question 4.4.(TCO A) Within the relevant range, variable costs can be expected to(Points : 6)

vary in total in direct proportion to changes in the activity level.

remain constant in total as the activity level changes.

increase on a per-unit basis as the activity level increases.

increase on a per-unit basis as the activity level decreases.

None of the above

Question 5.5.(TCO F) When manufacturing overhead is applied to production, it is added to (Points : 6)

the Cost of Goods Sold account.

the Raw Materials account.

the Direct Labor account.

None of the above

Question 6.6.(TCO F) Which of the following statements about the process-costing system is incorrect(Points : 6)

In a process-costing system, each processing department has a work-in-process account.

In a process-costing system, equivalent units are separately computed for materials and for conversion costs.

In a process-costing system, overhead can be under- or overapplied just as in job-order costing.

In a process-costing system, materials costs are traced to units of products.

Question 7.7.(TCO F) The FIFO method only provides a major advantage over the weighted-average method in that (Points : 6)

the calculation of equivalent units is less complex under the FIFO method.

the FIFO method treats units in the beginning inventory as if they were started and completed during the current period.

the FIFO method provides measurements of work done during the current period.

the weighted-average method ignores units in the beginning and ending work-in-process inventories.

Question 8.8.(TCO B) The contribution margin equals (Points : 6)

sales – expenses.

sales – cost of goods sold.

sales – variable costs.

sales – fixed costs.

Question 9.9.(TCO B) To obtain the break-even point in terms of dollar sales, total fixed expenses are divided by which of the following? (Points : 6)

Variable expense per unit

Variable expense per unit/Selling price per unit

Fixed expense per unit

(Selling price per unit – Variable expense per unit) /Selling price per unit.

Question 10.10.(TCO E) In an income statement prepared using the variable costing method, variable selling and administrative expenses would (Points : 6)

be used in the computation of the contribution margin.

be used in the computation of net operating income but not in the computation of the contribution margin.

be treated differently from variable manufacturing expenses.

not be used.

1.(TCO A) The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records ofLarden Corporation for the just-completed year.

Sales

$950

Purchases of raw materials

$170

Direct labor

$210

Manufacturing overhead

$220

Administrative expenses

$180

Selling expenses

$140

Raw materials inventory, beginning

$70

Raw materials inventory, ending

$80

Work-in-process inventory, beginning

$30

Work-in-process inventory, ending

$20

Finished goods inventory, beginning

$100

Finished goods inventory, ending

$70

Required:Prepare a Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured statement in the text box below.

(Points : 15)

Question 2.2.(TCO F) The Colorado Company manufactures a product that goes through three processing departments. Information relating to activity in the first department during June is given below.

Percentage Completed

Units Materials Conversion

Work in process, June 1 80,000 65% 45%

Work in process, Jun 30 65,000 75% 65%

The department started 325,000 units into production during the month and transferred 340,000 completed units to the next department.

Required: Compute the equivalent units of production for the first department for June, assuming that the company uses the weighted-average method of accounting for units and costs.

(Points : 20)

Question 3.3.(TCO B) A cement manufacturer has supplied the following data:

Tons of cement produced and sold 220,000

Sales revenue $924,000

Variable manufacturing expense $297,000

Fixed manufacturing expense $280,000

Variable selling and admin expense $165,000

Fixed selling and admin expense $82,000

Net operating income $100,000

Required:

a. Calculate the company’s unit contribution margin.

b. Calculate the company’s contribution margin ratio.

c. If the company increases its unit sales volume by 5% without increasing its fixed expenses, what would the company’s net operating income be?

(Points : 25)

Question 4.4.(TCO E) Maffei Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling price $ 175
Units in beginning inventory 0
Units produced 9,500
Units sold 8,000
Units in ending Inventory 1,500
Variable costs per unit:
Direct materials $ 55
Direct labor $ 38
Variable manufacturing overhead $ 2
Variable selling and admin $ 10
Fixed costs:
Fixed manufacturing overhead $ 300,000
Fixed selling and admin $ 125,000

Required:

a.What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?

b. What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?

c. Prepare an income statement for the month using the variable costing method.

d. Prepare an income statement for the month using the absorption costing method.

(Points : 30)

acct6111 fall 2013 assignment 2 case 1 budgeting muscat sandals company msc 495989

ACCT6111 Fall 2013 Assignment 2

Case 1: Budgeting

Muscat Sandals Company (MSC) makes a very popular cloth sandal in one style, but in Regular and Deluxe. The Regular sandals have cloth soles and the Deluxe sandals have cloth covered wooden soles. MSC is preparing its budget for January 2013, and has estimated sales based on past experience.

Other information for the month of January follows:

Input Prices

Direct materials

Cloth $3.50 per yard

Wood $5.00 per board foot

Direct manufacturing labor $10 per direct manufacturing labor-hour

Input Quantities per Unit of Output (per pair of sandals)

Regular Deluxe

Direct materials

Cloth 1.3 yards 1.5 yards

Wood 0 2 board feet

Direct manufacturing labor-hours (DMLH) 5 Hours 7 Hours

Setup-hours per batch 2 Hours 3 Hours

Inventory Information, Direct Materials

Cloth Wood

Beginning inventory 610 yards 800 b.f.

Target ending inventory 386 yards 295 b.f.

Cost of beginning inventory $2,146 $4,040

MSC accounts for direct materials using a FIFO cost flow assumption.

Sales and Inventory Information, Finished Goods

Regular Deluxe

Expected sales in units (pairs of sandals) 2,000 3,000

Selling price $80 $130

Target ending inventory in units 400 600

Beginning inventory in units 250 650

Beginning inventory in dollars $15,500 $61,750

MSC uses a FIFO cost flow assumption for finished goods inventory.

All the sandals are made in batches of 50 pairs of sandals. MSC incurs manufacturing overhead costs, marketing and general administration, and shipping costs. Besides materials and labor, manufacturing costs include setup, processing, and inspection costs. MSC ships 40 pairs of sandals per shipment. MSC uses activity-based costing and has classified all overhead costs for the month of January as shown in the following chart:

Cost type Denominator Activity Rate

Manufacturing:

Setup Setup-hours $12 per setup-hour

Processing Direct manufacturing labor-hours $1.20 per DMLH

Inspection Number of pairs of sandals $0.90 per pair

Nonmanufacturing:

Marketing and general administration Sales revenue 8%

Shipping Number of shipments $10 per shipment


Required:

1. Prepare each of the following for January:

a. Revenues budget

b. Production budget in units

c. Direct material usage budget and direct material purchases budget in both units and dollars; round to dollars

d. Direct manufacturing labor cost budget

e. Manufacturing overhead cost budgets for processing and setup activities

f. Budgeted unit cost of ending finished goods inventory and ending inventories budget

g. Cost of goods sold budget

h. Marketing and general administration costs budget

2. MSC’s balance sheet for December 31 follows. Use it and the following information to prepare a cash budget for MSC for January. Round to dollars.

All sales are on account; 60% are collected in the month of the sale, 38% are collected the following month, and 2% are never collected and written off as bad debts.

All purchases of materials are on account. MSC pays for 80% of purchases in the month of purchase and 20% in the following month.

All other costs are paid in the month incurred, including the declaration and payment of a $10,000 cash dividend in January.

MSC is making monthly interest payments of 0.5% (6% per year) on a $100,000 long term loan.

MSC plans to pay the $7,200 of taxes owed as of December 31 in the month of January. Income tax expense for January is zero.

30% of processing and setup costs, and 10% of marketing and general administration costs are depreciation.

Balance Sheet as of December 31

Assets

Cash

$ 6,290

Accounts receivable

$216,000

Less: Allowance for bad debts

10,800

205,200

Inventories

Direct materials

6,186

Finished goods

77,250

Fixed assets

$580,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

90,890

489,110

Total assets

$784,036

Liabilities and Equity

Accounts payable

$ 10,400

Taxes payable

7,200

Interest payable

500

Long-term debt

100,000

Common stock

200,000

Retained earnings

465,936

Total liabilities and equity

$784,036

Prepare a budgeted income statement for January and a budgeted balance sheet for MSC as of January 31.

acct6111 fall 2013 assignment 2 case 3 muscat company product cost flows 495990

ACCT6111 Fall 2013 Assignment 2

Case 3: Product Cost Flows

Selected T-accounts for Muscat Company are given below for the just completed year:

Raw Materials Manufacturing Overhead

Bal. 1/1 30,000 Credits Debits 385,000 Credits

Debits 420,000____________

Bal, 12/31 60,000

Work in Process Factory Wages Payable

Bal. 1/1 70,000 Credits 810.000 Debits 179,000 Bal, 1/1 10,000

Direct materials 320,000 Credits 175,000

Direct labor 110.000 Bal.12/31 6,000

Overhead 400,000________________

Bal. 12/31

Finished Goods Cost of Goods Sold

Bal. 1/1 40.000 Credits Debits

Debits________________________

Bal, 12/31 130.000

Required:

1. What was the cost of raw materials put into production during the year?

2. How much of the materials in (1) above consisted of indirect materials?

3. How much of the factory labor cost for the year consisted of indirect labor?

4. What was the cost of goods manufactured for the year?

5. What was the cost of goods sold for the year (before considering under-applied or over-applied overhead)?

6. If overhead is -applied to production on the basis of direct materials cost, what rate was in effect during the year?

7. Was manufacturing overhead under-applied or over-applied? By how much?

8. Compute the ending balance in the Work in Process inventory account. Assume that this balance consists entirely of goods started during the year. If $32,000 of this balance is direct materials cost, how much of it is direct labor cost? Manufacturing overhead cost?

acct301 e9 6 e9 11 p9 1a p9 5a 495949

Acct301

Chapter 9: E9-6, E9-11, P9-1A, P9-5A

E9-6

SY Telc has recently started the manufacture of RecRobo, a three-wheeled robot that can scan a home for fires and gas leaks and then transmit this information to a mobile phone. The cost structure to manufacture 20,000 RecRobo s is as follows.

Cost

Direct materials ($40 per robot)

$ 800,000

Direct labor ($30 per robot)

600,000

Variable overhead ($6 per robot)

120,000

Allocated fixed overhead ($25 per robot)

500,000

Total

$2,020,000

SY Telc is approached by Chen Inc. which offers to make RecRobo for $90 per unit or $1,800,000.

Instructions

(a) Using incremental analysis, determine whether SY Telc should accept this offer under each of the following independent assumptions.

(1) Assume that $300,000 of the fixed overhead cost can be reduced (avoided).

(2) Assume that none of the fixed overhead can be reduced (avoided). However, if the robots are purchased from Chen Inc., SY Telc can use the released productive resources to generate additional income of $300,000.

(b) Describe the qualitative factors that might affect the decision to purchase the robots from an outside supplier.

E9-11

Twyla Enterprises uses a computer to handle its sales invoices. Lately, business has been so good that it takes an extra 3 hours per night, plus every third Saturday, to keep up with the volume of sales invoices. Management is considering updating its computer with a faster model that would eliminate all of the overtime processing.

Current Machine

New Machine

Original purchase cost

$15,000

$25,000

Accumulated depreciation

$ 6,000

Estimated annual operating costs

$24,000

$18,000

Useful life

5 years

5 years

If sold now, the current machine would have a salvage value of $5,000. If operated for the remainder of its useful life, the current machine would have zero salvage value. The new machine is expected to have zero salvage value after five years.

Instructions

Should the current machine be replaced?

P9-1A

Pro Sports Inc. manufactures basketballs for the National Basketball Association (NBA). For the first 6 months of 2008, the company reported the following operating results while operating at 90% of plant capacity and producing 112,500 units.

Amount

Sales

$4,500,000

Cost of goods sold

3,600,000

Selling and administrative expenses

450,000

Net income

$ 450,000

Fixed costs for the period were: cost of goods sold $1,080,000, and selling and administrative expenses $225,000.

In July, normally a slack manufacturing month, Pro Sports receives a special order for 10,000 basketballs at $28 each from the Italian Basketball Association (IBA). Acceptance of the order would increase variable selling and administrative expenses $0.50 per unit because of shipping costs but would not increase fixed costs and expenses.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an incremental analysis for the special order.

(b) Should Pro Sports Inc. accept the special order? Explain your answer.

(c) What is the minimum selling price on the special order to produce net income of $4.10 per ball?

(d) What nonfinancial factors should management consider in making its decision?

P9-5A

Lewis Manufacturing Company has four operating divisions. During the first quarter of 2008, the company reported aggregate income from operations of $176,000 and the following divisional results.

Division


I

II

III

IV

Sales

$250,000

$200,000

$500,000

$400,000

Cost of goods sold

200,000

189,000

300,000

250,000

Selling and administrative expenses

65,000

60,000

60,000

50,000

Income (loss) from operations

$(15,000)

$(49,000)

$140,000

$100,000

Analysis reveals the following percentages of variable costs in each division.

I

II

III

IV

Cost of goods sold

70%

90%

80%

75%

Selling and administrative expenses

40

70

50

60

Discontinuance of any division would save 50% of the fixed costs and expenses for that division.

Top management is very concerned about the unprofitable divisions (I and II). Consensus is that one or both of the divisions should be discontinued.

Instructions

(a) Compute the contribution margin for Divisions I and II.

(b) Prepare an incremental analysis concerning the possible discontinuance of (1) Division I and (2) Division II. What course of action do you recommend for each division?

(c) Prepare a columnar condensed income statement for Lewis Manufacturing, assuming Division II is eliminated. Use the CVP format. Division II s unavoidable fixed costs are allocated equally to the continuing divisions.

(d) Reconcile the total income from operations ($176,000) with the total income from operations without Division II.

acct301 e9 6 sy telc e9 11 twyla enterprises p9 1a pro sports inc p9 5a lewis manufa 495950

E9-6

SY Telc has recently started the manufacture of RecRobo, a three-wheeled robot that can scan a home for fires and gas leaks and then transmit this information to a mobile phone. The cost structure to manufacture 20,000 RecRobo s is as follows.

Cost

Direct materials ($40 per robot)

$ 800,000

Direct labor ($30 per robot)

600,000

Variable overhead ($6 per robot)

120,000

Allocated fixed overhead ($25 per robot)

500,000

Total

$2,020,000

SY Telc is approached by Chen Inc. which offers to make RecRobo for $90 per unit or $1,800,000.

Instructions

(a) Using incremental analysis, determine whether SY Telc should accept this offer under each of the following independent assumptions.

(1) Assume that $300,000 of the fixed overhead cost can be reduced (avoided).

(2) Assume that none of the fixed overhead can be reduced (avoided). However, if the robots are purchased from Chen Inc., SY Telc can use the released productive resources to generate additional income of $300,000.

(b) Describe the qualitative factors that might affect the decision to purchase the robots from an outside supplier.

E9-11

Twyla Enterprises uses a computer to handle its sales invoices. Lately, business has been so good that it takes an extra 3 hours per night, plus every third Saturday, to keep up with the volume of sales invoices. Management is considering updating its computer with a faster model that would eliminate all of the overtime processing.

Current Machine

New Machine

Original purchase cost

$15,000

$25,000

Accumulated depreciation

$ 6,000

Estimated annual operating costs

$24,000

$18,000

Useful life

5 years

5 years

If sold now, the current machine would have a salvage value of $5,000. If operated for the remainder of its useful life, the current machine would have zero salvage value. The new machine is expected to have zero salvage value after five years.

Instructions

Should the current machine be replaced?

P9-1A

Pro Sports Inc. manufactures basketballs for the National Basketball Association (NBA). For the first 6 months of 2008, the company reported the following operating results while operating at 90% of plant capacity and producing 112,500 units.

Amount

Sales

$4,500,000

Cost of goods sold

3,600,000

Selling and administrative expenses

450,000

Net income

$ 450,000

Fixed costs for the period were: cost of goods sold $1,080,000, and selling and administrative expenses $225,000.

In July, normally a slack manufacturing month, Pro Sports receives a special order for 10,000 basketballs at $28 each from the Italian Basketball Association (IBA). Acceptance of the order would increase variable selling and administrative expenses $0.50 per unit because of shipping costs but would not increase fixed costs and expenses.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an incremental analysis for the special order.

(b) Should Pro Sports Inc. accept the special order? Explain your answer.

(c) What is the minimum selling price on the special order to produce net income of $4.10 per ball?

(d) What nonfinancial factors should management consider in making its decision?

P9-5A

Lewis Manufacturing Company has four operating divisions. During the first quarter of 2008, the company reported aggregate income from operations of $176,000 and the following divisional results.

Division


I

II

III

IV

Sales

$250,000

$200,000

$500,000

$400,000

Cost of goods sold

200,000

189,000

300,000

250,000

Selling and administrative expenses

65,000

60,000

60,000

50,000

Income (loss) from operations

$(15,000)

$(49,000)

$140,000

$100,000

Analysis reveals the following percentages of variable costs in each division.

I

II

III

IV

Cost of goods sold

70%

90%

80%

75%

Selling and administrative expenses

40

70

50

60

Discontinuance of any division would save 50% of the fixed costs and expenses for that division.

Top management is very concerned about the unprofitable divisions (I and II). Consensus is that one or both of the divisions should be discontinued.

Instructions

(a) Compute the contribution margin for Divisions I and II.

(b) Prepare an incremental analysis concerning the possible discontinuance of (1) Division I and (2) Division II. What course of action do you recommend for each division?

(c) Prepare a columnar condensed income statement for Lewis Manufacturing, assuming Division II is eliminated. Use the CVP format. Division II s unavoidable fixed costs are allocated equally to the continuing divisions.

(d) Reconcile the total income from operations ($176,000) with the total income from operations without Division II.

acct301 schedule of cost of goods manufactured and jz problems 1 and 2 w solutions 495951

Problem 1

Required: Use the following information to complete the below schedule of cost of goods manufactured.

Purchases of raw materials $120,000.00

Raw materials available for use $148,000.00

Cost of direct raw materials used $124,000.00

Manufacturing overhead $24,000.00

Total manufacturing costs $310,000.00

Ending work-in-process inventory $(46,000.00)

Cost of goods manufactured $306,000.00

Problem 2

Required: JZ is a musician who is considering whether to independently produce and sell a CD. JZ estimates fixed costs of $10,000 and variable costs of $4.00 per unit. The expected selling price is $12 per CD. What is JZ’s break-even point in units and dollars

acct301 week 1 problem 1 and problem 2 identify the financial statement 495952

Problem 1
Required: Identify the financial statement on which each of the following items appears by making an X in the appropriate column. The first one is done for you!

Income Balance Statement of

Item Statement Sheet Cash Flows

Accounts Payable x
Accounts Receivable
Advertising Expense
Common Stock
Dividends
Equipment
Financing Activities

Investing Activities
Land
Operating Activities
Rent Expense
Retained Earnings
Revenue
Salaries Payable
Utility Expense

Problem 2
Required: Identify the financial statement on which each of the following items appears by making an X in the appropriate column. The first one is done for you!

1 Sold $30,000 in merchandise for cash
2 Paid $5,000 for rent with cash
3 Paid $10,000 in salaries to employees with cash
4 Sold $25,000 in merchandise and customer paid on credit
5 Collected $10,000 cash for transaction #4
6 Purchased a building for $100,000 cash
7 Paid in advance for insurance

Balance Sheet Income Statement Owner’s Net

Event No. Assets = Liabilities + Equity Revenue – Expenses = Income
1 30,000 = + 30,000 30,000 – – = 30,000

2

3

4

5

6

7

acct301 week 2 homework 495953

ACCT301

do breif answer

1.In two to three paragraphs, describe the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and why it is important to the accounting profession.

2.Name and briefly describe the five components of COSO s internal control framework.

3.Describe the relationship between the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and COSO.

4.Tom Jackson is a CPA who really likes to go to Las Vegas, play poker, and bet on football games. Tom knows that the accounting profession disapproves of gambling, but because he spends a lot of time studying sports facts and how to win at poker, he feels that he is simply making educated decisions based on facts. He says that this is no different from using accounting information to buy stocks. Use the fraud triangle as a basis to comment on Tom s gambling activities.

do breif answer

1.In two to three paragraphs, describe the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and why it is important to the accounting profession.

2.Name and briefly describe the five components of COSO s internal control framework.

3.Describe the relationship between the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and COSO.

4.Tom Jackson is a CPA who really likes to go to Las Vegas, play poker, and bet on football games. Tom knows that the accounting profession disapproves of gambling, but because he spends a lot of time studying sports facts and how to win at poker, he feels that he is simply making educated decisions based on facts. He says that this is no different from using accounting information to buy stocks. Use the fraud triangle as a basis to comment on Tom s gambling activities.

acct301 week 3 problem 1 and problem 2 ratios analysis use it as a guide 495954

Problem 1
Required:Express each income statement component as a percentage of sales, and comment on the trends in each line from 2012 to 2013.
2013 % Sales 2012 % Sales Comments
Sales $ 1,000,000 $ 1,200,000
Cost of goods sold $ 450,000 $ 600,000
Gross margin $ 550,000 $ 600,000
Operating expenses $ 600,000 $ 450,000
Net income $(50,000) $ 150,000
Problem 2
Required:Compute (1) accounts receivable turnover for 2013, (2) the inventory turnover for 2013, and (3) the net margin for 2012.
Balance sheet items 2013 2012
Accounts receivable $ 380,000.00 $ 376,000.00
Allowance for doubtful accounts $ (20,000.00) $ (16,000.00)
Net accounts receivable $ 360,000.00 $ 360,000.00
Inventory $ 480,000.00 $ 440,000.00
Income statement items
Sales $ 3,400,000.00 $ 3,080,000.00
Cost of goods sold $ 1,600,000.00 $ 1,440,000.00
Operating expenses $ 780,000.00 $ 680,000.00

acct301 week 6 1 tco 9 which of the following is a major accounting contribution to 495955

1. (TCO 9) Which of the following is a major accounting contribution to the managerial decision-making process in evaluating possible courses of action? (Points : 4)

Determine who is responsible for the decision.

Prepare internal reports that review the actual impact of a decision made.

Calculate how much should be invested for each potential project.

Select possible actions that management should consider.

2. (TCO 9) Which one of the following is a true statement about incremental analysis? (Points : 4)

It is another name for capital budgeting.

It is the same as CVP analysis.

It is used primarily for long-term planning.

It focuses on decisions that involve a choice among alternative courses of action.

3. (TCO 9) What is the nature of an opportunity cost? (Points : 4)

It is always variable.

It is a potential benefit.

It is included as part of cost of goods sold.

It is a sunk cost.

4. (TCO 9) A company is deciding whether or not to replace some old equipment with new equipment. Which of the following is not considered in the incremental analysis? (Points : 4)

Annual operating cost of the new equipment

Annual operating cost of the old equipment

Net cost of the new equipment

Book value of the old equipment

5. (TCO 9) It costs Lannon Fields $14 of variable costs and $6 of allocated fixed costs to produce an industrial trash can that sells for $30. A buyer in Mexico offers to purchase 2,000 units at $18 each. Lannon has excess capacity and can handle the additional production. What effect will acceptance of the offer have on net income? (Points : 4)

decrease $4,000

increase $4,000

increase $36,000

increase $8,000

6. (TCO 9) Hungry Bites produces corn chips. The cost of one batch is below:

Direct Materials $14

Direct Labor 10

Variable Overhead 9

Fixed Overhead 10

An outside supplier has offered to produce the corn chips for $20 per batch. If all fixed costs can be eliminated, how much will Hungry Bites save if it accepts the offer? (Points : 4)

$10 per batch

$13 per batch

$23 per batch

$4 per batch

7. (TCO 9) All of the following are relevant to the sell or process-further decision, except for __________ (Points : 4)

costs incurred beyond the split-off point.

revenues at the split-off point.

costs incurred before the split-off point.

revenues beyond the split-off point.

8. (TCO 8) All of the following are involved in the capital budgeting evaluation process, except for a company’s __________ (Points : 4)

board of directors.

capital budgeting committee.

officers.

stockholders.

9. (TCO 8) Capital budgeting is the process __________ (Points : 4)

used in sell or process-further decisions.

of determining how much capital stock to issue.

of making capital-expenditure decisions.

of eliminating unprofitable product lines.

10. (TCO 8) If a payback period for a project is greater than its expected useful life, the __________ (Points : 4)

project will always be profitable.

entire initial investment will not be recovered.

project would only be acceptable if the company’s cost of capital was low.

project’s return will always exceed the company’s cost of capital.

11. (TCO 8) Intangible benefits in capital budgeting __________ (Points : 4)

should be ignored because they are difficult to determine.

include increased quality or employee loyalty.

are not considered because they are usually not relevant to the decision.

have a rate of return in excess of the company s cost of capital.

12. (TCO 8) The profitability index __________. (Points : 4)

does not take into account the discounted cash flows.

is calculated by dividing total cash flows by the initial investment.

allows comparison of the relative desirability of projects that require differing initial investments.

will never be greater than 1.

13. (TCO 8) A post audit should be performed using __________ (Points : 4)

a different evaluation technique than that used in making the original decision.

the same evaluation technique used in making the original decision.

estimated amounts instead of actual figures.

an independent CPA.

14. (TCO 8) A company has a minimum required rate of return of 9% and is considering investing in a project that costs $50,000 and is expected to generate cash inflows of $20,000 at the end of each year for 3 years. The profitability index for this project is __________ (Points : 4)

0.99.

1.00.

1.01.

1.20.

15. (TCO 8) The capital-budgeting technique that indicates the profitability of a capital expenditure is the __________ (Points : 4)

profitability index method.

net present value method.

internal rate of return method.

annual rate of return method.

acct310 495956

You are the manager of an accounting department and would like to hire another managerial accountant to focus on internal accounting. The CEO is not convinced that a managing accountant position is needed. Prepare a 1 2 page memo for the CEO on the following:

  • Explain the objectives and characteristics of an internal accounting system.
  • Include an explanation of the importance of this information to the company.
  • Include an explanation of ethics in business and the managerial accountant s role in upholding the code of ethics.

Grading Criteria

Percentage

Objectives and characteristics of an internal accounting system

35%

Importance of internal accounting information to the company

35%

Ethics in business and the managing accountant s role

30%

Please submit your assignment.

acct315 1 the following are the common classifications used in a balance sheet 495957

1. The following are the common classifications used in a balance sheet:

A.Current assetsF. Current liabilities

B.InvestmentsG. Long-term liabilities

C.Property, plant and equipmentH. Paid-in-capital

D.Intangible assetsI. Retained earnings

E.Other assets

Required:

For each of the following balance sheet items, use the letters above to indicate the appropriate classification category. If the item is a contra account or valuation account, place a minus sign before the chosen letter.

1.___ Note receivable (due in 2 years)

2.___ Accounts receivable

3.___ Accumulated depreciation

4.___Land, in use

5.___Note payable (due in 10 months)

6.___Interest payable

7.___ Note receivable (due in 6 months)

8.___Cash equivalents

9. ___ Investment in XYZ Corp ( long-term)

10.___ Inventories

11.___Goodwill

12.___Accrued salaries payable

13.___Accrued interest payable

14.___Prepaid insurance

15.___Common stock

16.___Equipment

17.___Unearned revenue

18.___Warranties payable

2. The following are common disclosures that would appear in the notes accompanying financial statements. For each of the items listed, indicate where the disclosure would likely appear.

Use A if the item would appear in summary of significant accounting policies notes

Use B if the item would appear in subsequent events notes

Use C if the item would appear in noteworthy events and transactions

1. Depreciation method _

2. Information on related party transactions

3. Method of accounting for acquisitions

4. Composition and details of long-term debt

5. Inventory method

6. Basis of revenue recognition

7. Major damage to a plant facility occurring after year-end

8. Composition of accrued liabilities

3. The December 31, 2013 post-closing trial balance for Tricam Engineering, an exploration company, is presented below.

Account TitleDebitsCredits

Cash 52,000

Accounts receivable 223,000

Allowance for uncollectible accounts 15,000

Inventories 200,000

Supplies 3,000

Investments 140,000

Land 100,000

Buildings 500,000

Accumulated depreciation – buildings 150,000

Machinery 250,000

Accumulated depreciation – machinery 80,000

Goodwill 36,000

Accounts payable 125,000

Bonds payable 500,000

Interest payable 40,000

Common stock 500,000

Retained earnings ______ 94,000

Totals 1,504,0001,504,000

Additional information provided is below:

1.Accounts receivable includes a $50,000 note receivable received from a customer that is due in 2015. Also included is interest on the note of $3,000 that is due in six months.

2.The land account includes land that cost $20,000 that the company has not used and is currently listed for sale.

3. The investment account includes a $10,000, 3-month certificate of deposit due in 40 days. The remaining investments will be sold within the next year.

4. The bonds payable account consists of the following:

a.a $200,000 issue due in six months.

b.a $300,000 issue due in six years.

5. The common stock account represents 500,000 shares of no par value common stock issued and outstanding. The corporation has 1,000,000 shares authorized.

Required:

Prepare a classified balance sheet for Tricam Engineering at December 31, 2013 using the post-closing trial balance and the additional information provided.

acct315 1 using the fasb codification login information provided research the follow 495958

1. Using the FASB Codification login information provided, research the following. For each, identify the topic, subtopic, and section number (as applicable) that provide guidance for each and write the appropriate citation. For example, the topic, subtopic, and section number for the subsequent measurement of asset retirement obligations are 410, 20, and 35 respectively. Therefore, the citation is:

FASB ASC 410 20 35: Asset Retirement and Environmental Obligations Asset Retirement Obligations Subsequent Measurement.

a.Fair value measurements and disclosures overall disclosures.

b.Business combinations.

c.Related party disclosures.

d.Internal- use software s initial measurement.

e.Recognition of stock compensation.

2.Martin & Mark operate the law office of M&M, PC. Transactions that took place in 2012 and 2013 are below:

20122013

Amounts billed to customers for law services $380,000 $440,000

Cash collected from customers 330,000 450,000

Cash disbursements for two years rent 60,000 0

Cash disbursements for salaries paid to employees 200,000 210,000

Cash disbursements for travel 50,000 60,000

Cash disbursements for travel utilities 30,000 50,000

Utility costs incurred in 2012 were $40,000. There were no liabilities at the end of 2013 and there were no anticipated bad debts on receivables.

Answer the following:

a.Calculate the net operating cash flow for 2012 and 2013. Hint: This is cash basis accounting.

b.Prepare income statement for years 2012 and 2013 using accrual basis accounting .

c.Determine the receivables from customers that the company would show on its 2012 and 2013 balance sheets prepared using accrual basis accounting.

acct315 caleb company s fiscal year runs from january through december its january 1 495959

Caleb Company s fiscal year runs from January through December. Its January 1, 2013 s trial balances are below:

Account Title Debits Credits

Cash $30,000

Accounts Receivable 15,000

Equipment 20,000

Accumulated Depreciation $ 6,000

Salaries Payable 9,000

Common Stock 40,500

Retained Earnings 9,500

Total $ 65,000 $ 65,000

Summary of transactions that occurred during the year are below:

a. Sales of services $100,000

Out of the sales, credit sales was 30,000

b. Accounts Receivable collected 27,300

c. Shares issued for cash 10,000

d. Salaries paid 50,000

Out of the salaries paid, Salaries Payable amount was 9,000

e. Miscellaneous Expense paid 24,000

f. Equipment Purchased 15,000

g. Cash Dividends paid 2,500

Other pertinent information:

Year-end accrued salaries $ 1,000

Equipment Depreciation

2,000

Required:

1.Set up the necessary T- accounts and enter the beginning balances from the trial balance provided.

2.Prepare a journal entry for each of the summary of transactions listed above.

3.Post the journal entries to the T-accounts.

4.Prepare an unadjusted trial balance.

5.Prepare and post adjusting journal entries. Enter the adjusting entries in the T-accounts as applicable. The two adjusting entries are the year-end accrued salaries and equipment depreciation provided in the question.

6.Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

7.Prepare an income statement for year ended 2013 and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2013.

8.Prepare and post closing entries.

9.Prepare a post- closing trial balance.

acct3220 group exercise 1 parts 1 2 3 accounting principle green fields amy boer use 495960

PART I

Select the assumption, principle, or constraint that most appropriately justifies these procedures and practices. (Do not use qualitative characteristics.)

(a) Fair value changes are not recognized in the accounting records.

(b) Lower of cost or market is used to value inventories.

(c) Financial information is presented so that investors will not be misled.

(d) Intangible assets are capitalized and amortized over periods benefited.

(e) Repair tools are expensed when purchased.

(f) Agricultural companies use fair value for purposes of valuing crops.

(g) Each enterprise is kept as a unit distinct from its owner or owners.

(h) All significant post-balance sheet events are reported.

(i) Revenue is recorded at point of sale.

(j) All important aspects of bond liabilities are presented in financial statements.

(k) Rationale for (example of) accrual accounting.

(l) The use of consolidated statements is justified.

(m) Reporting must be done at defined time intervals.

(n) An allowance for doubtful accounts is established.

(o) All payments out of petty cash are charged to Miscellaneous Expense.

(p) Goodwill is recorded only at time of purchase of substantially another company

(q) No profits are anticipated and all possible losses are recognized.

(r) A company charges its sales commission costs to expense.

PART II

Green Fields Miniature Golf and Driving Range Inc. was opened on March 1 by Mickey Fields. The following selected events and transactions occurred during March.

Mar. 1 Invested $60,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock.

3 Purchased Melissa Wie’s Golf Land for $38,000 cash. The price consists of land $10,000; building $22,000; and equipment $6,000. (Make one compound entry.)

5 Advertised the opening of the driving range and miniature golf course, paying advertising expenses of $1,600.

6 Paid cash $1,480 for a one-year insurance policy.

10 Purchased golf equipment for $2,500 from Young Company, payable in 30 days.

18 Received golf fees of $1,200 in cash.

25 Declared and paid a $1,000 cash dividend.

30 Paid wages of $900.

30 Paid Young Company in full.

31 Received $750 of fees in cash.

Instructions: Journalize the March transactions.

PART III

Presented below are the trial balance and the other information related to Amy Boer, a consulting engineer.

AMY BOER, CONSULTING ENGINEER

TRIAL BALANCE

DECEMBER 31, 2014

Debit Credit

Cash $ 29,500

Accounts Receivable 49,600

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $ 750

Engineering Supplies Inventory 1,960

Prepaid Insurance 1,100

Furniture and Equipment 25,000

Accumulated Depreciation Furniture and Equipment 6,250

Notes Payable 7,200

Amy Boer, Capital 35,010

Service Revenue 100,000

Rent Expense 9,750

Office Salaries Expense 30,500

Heat, Light, and Water Expense 1,080

Miscellaneous Office Expense 720

$149,210 $149,210

1. Fees received in advance from clients $6,000.

2. Services performed for clients that were not recorded by December 31, $4,900.

3. Bad debt expense for the year is $1,430.

4. Insurance expired during the year $480.

5. Furniture and equipment is being depreciated at 10% per year.

6. Amy Boer gave the bank a 90-day, 10% note for $7,200 on December 1, 2014.

7. Rent of the building is $750 per month. The rent for 2014 has been paid, as has that for January 2015.

8. Office salaries earned but unpaid December 31, 2014, $2,510.

Instructions:

(a) From the trial balance and other information given, prepare annual adjusting entries as of December 31, 2014. (Omit explanations.)

(b) Prepare an income statement for 2014 and a classified balance sheet.

acct3220 group exercise 1 parts 1 2 3 accounting principle green fields miniature go 495962

PART I

Select the assumption, principle, or constraint that most appropriately justifies these procedures and practices. (Do not use qualitative characteristics.)

(a) Fair value changes are not recognized in the accounting records.

(b) Lower of cost or market is used to value inventories.

(c) Financial information is presented so that investors will not be misled.

(d) Intangible assets are capitalized and amortized over periods benefited.

(e) Repair tools are expensed when purchased.

(f) Agricultural companies use fair value for purposes of valuing crops.

(g) Each enterprise is kept as a unit distinct from its owner or owners.

(h) All significant post-balance sheet events are reported.

(i) Revenue is recorded at point of sale.

(j) All important aspects of bond liabilities are presented in financial statements.

(k) Rationale for (example of) accrual accounting.

(l) The use of consolidated statements is justified.

(m) Reporting must be done at defined time intervals.

(n) An allowance for doubtful accounts is established.

(o) All payments out of petty cash are charged to Miscellaneous Expense.

(p) Goodwill is recorded only at time of purchase of substantially another company

(q) No profits are anticipated and all possible losses are recognized.

(r) A company charges its sales commission costs to expense.

PART II

Green Fields Miniature Golf and Driving Range Inc. was opened on March 1 by Mickey Fields. The following selected events and transactions occurred during March.

Mar. 1 Invested $60,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock.

3 Purchased Melissa Wie’s Golf Land for $38,000 cash. The price consists of land $10,000; building $22,000; and equipment $6,000. (Make one compound entry.)

5 Advertised the opening of the driving range and miniature golf course, paying advertising expenses of $1,600.

6 Paid cash $1,480 for a one-year insurance policy.

10 Purchased golf equipment for $2,500 from Young Company, payable in 30 days.

18 Received golf fees of $1,200 in cash.

25 Declared and paid a $1,000 cash dividend.

30 Paid wages of $900.

30 Paid Young Company in full.

31 Received $750 of fees in cash.

Instructions: Journalize the March transactions.

PART III

Presented below are the trial balance and the other information related to Amy Boer, a consulting engineer.

AMY BOER, CONSULTING ENGINEER

TRIAL BALANCE

DECEMBER 31, 2014

Debit Credit

Cash $ 29,500

Accounts Receivable 49,600

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $ 750

Engineering Supplies Inventory 1,960

Prepaid Insurance 1,100

Furniture and Equipment 25,000

Accumulated Depreciation Furniture and Equipment 6,250

Notes Payable 7,200

Amy Boer, Capital 35,010

Service Revenue 100,000

Rent Expense 9,750

Office Salaries Expense 30,500

Heat, Light, and Water Expense 1,080

Miscellaneous Office Expense 720

$149,210 $149,210

1. Fees received in advance from clients $6,000.

2. Services performed for clients that were not recorded by December 31, $4,900.

3. Bad debt expense for the year is $1,430.

4. Insurance expired during the year $480.

5. Furniture and equipment is being depreciated at 10% per year.

6. Amy Boer gave the bank a 90-day, 10% note for $7,200 on December 1, 2014.

7. Rent of the building is $750 per month. The rent for 2014 has been paid, as has that for January 2015.

8. Office salaries earned but unpaid December 31, 2014, $2,510.

Instructions:

(a) From the trial balance and other information given, prepare annual adjusting entries as of December 31, 2014. (Omit explanations.)

(b) Prepare an income statement for 2014 and a classified balance sheet.

acct323 connect quiz 3 495963

Quiz 3

1.

Kip started a wholesale store this year selling bulk peanut butter. In January of this year Kip purchased an initial five tubs of peanut butter for a total cost of $5,000. In July Kip purchased three tubs for a total cost of $6,000. Finally, in November Kip bought two tubs for a total cost of $1,000. Kip sold six tubs by year end. What is Kip’s ending inventory under the FIFO cost-flow method?

$12,000

$6,000

$5,000

$2,500

$1,000

2.

Paris operates a talent agency as a sole proprietorship, and this year she incurred the following expenses in operating her talent agency. What is the total deductible amount of these expenditures?

$1,000 dinner with a film producer where no business was discussed
$500 lunch with sister Nicky where no business was discussed
$700 business dinner with a client but Paris forgot to keep any records (oops!)
$900 tickets to the opera with a client following a business meeting

$450

$900

$1,100

$1,200

$800

3.

Which of the following is a true statement about travel that has both business and personal aspects?

Transportation costs are always fully deductible.

Meals are not deductible for this type of travel.

Only half of the cost of meals and transportation is deductible.

The cost of lodging, and incidental expenditures is limited to those incurred during the business portion of the travel.

None of these.

4.

Individual proprietors report their business income and deductions on:

Form 1065

Form 1120S

Schedule C

Schedule A

Form 1041

5.

Which of the following expenditures is most likely to be deductible for a construction business?

A fine for a zoning violation.

A tax underpayment penalty.

An “under the table” payment to a government representative to obtain a better price for raw materials.

A payment to a foreign official to expedite an application for a business permit.

An arm’s length payment to a related party for emergency repairs of a sewage line.

6.

Don operates a taxi business, and this year one of his taxis was damaged in a traffic accident. The taxi was originally purchased for $32,000 and the adjusted basis was $2,000 at the time of the accident. The taxi was repaired at a cost of $2,500 and insurance reimbursed Don $700 of this cost. What is the amount of Don’s casualty loss deduction?

$1,300.

$2,500.

$1,800.

$2,000.

Don is not eligible for a casualty loss deduction.

7.

Which of the following is a true statement about a request for a change in accounting method?

Some requests are automatically granted.

Most requests require the permission of the Commissioner.

Many requests require payment of a fee and a good business purpose for the change.

Form 3115 is required to be filed with a request for change in accounting method.

All of these are true.

8.

Jones operates an upscale restaurant and he pays experienced cooks $35,000 per year. This year he hired his son as an apprentice cook. Jones agreed to pay his son $40,000 per year. Which of the following is a true statement about this transaction?

Jones will be allowed to deduct $40,000 only if his son eventually develops into an expert cook.

Jones will be allowed to accrue $40,000 only if he pays his son in cash.

Jones will be allowed to deduct $35,000 as compensation and another $5,000 can be deducted as an employee gift.

Jones can only deduct $20,000 because an apprentice cook is only worth half as much as an experienced cook.

None of these-Jones can only deduct reasonable compensation.

9.

Which of the following is a true statement?

Interest expense is not deductible if the loan is used to purchase municipal bonds.

Insurance premiums are not deductible if paid for “key man” life insurance.

One half of the cost of business meals is not deductible.

All of these are true.

None of these is true.

10.

Which of the following would be considered an improvement rather than a routine maintenance?

Oil change

Engine overhaul

Wiper blade replacement

Air filter change

11.

Bonnie Jo purchased a used computer (5-year property) for use in her sole proprietorship. The basis of the computer was $2,400. Bonnie Jo used the computer in her business 60 percent of the time and used it for personal purposes the rest of the time during the first year. Calculate Bonnie Jo’s depreciation expense during the first year assuming the sole proprietorship had a loss during the year (Bonnie did not place the property in service in the last quarter):

$240

$288

$480

$2,400

None of these

12.

Suvi, Inc. purchased two assets during the current year. It placed in service computer equipment (5-year property) on August 10 with a basis of $20,000 and machinery (7-year property) on November 18 with a basis of $10,000. Calculate the maximum depreciation expense, rounded to a whole number (ignoring 179 and bonus depreciation):

$857

$3,357

$5,429

$6,000

None of these

3.

Daschle LLC completed some research and development during June of the current year. The related costs were $60,000. If Daschle wants to capitalize and amortize the costs as quickly as possible, what is the total amortization expense Daschle may deduct during the current year?

$0

$6,500

$7,000

$12,000

None of these

14.

Racine started a new business in the current year. She incurred $52,000 of start-up costs. If her business started on November 23rdof the current year, what is the total expense she may deduct with respect to the start-up costs for her initial year, rounded to the nearest whole number?

$2,555.

$3,544.

$5,522.

$52,000.

None of these.

Top of Form

15.

Which of the allowable methods allows the most accelerated depreciation?

150 percent declining balance

200 percent declining balance

Straight line

Sum of the years digits

None of these allow accelerated depreciation

16.

Assume that Brittany acquires a competitor’s assets on September 30thof the prior year. The purchase price was $350,000. Of that amount, $300,000 is allocated to tangible assets and $50,000 is allocated equally to two 197 intangible assets (goodwill and a 1-year non-compete agreement). Given, that the non-compete agreement expires on September 30thof year 2, what is Brittany’s amortization expense for the second year, rounded to the nearest whole number?

$0

$1,667

$2,917

$3,333

None of these

17.

The MACRS recovery period for automobiles and computers is:

3 years

5 years

7 years

10 years

None of these

17.

The MACRS recovery period for automobiles and computers is:

3 years

5 years

7 years

10 years

None of these

18.

Each of the following is true except for:

A direct involuntary conversion occurs when property taken under imminent domain is replaced with other property.

Qualified replacement property rules are more restrictive than the like-kind property rules.

An indirect involuntary conversion occurs when property is destroyed and insurance proceeds are used to purchase qualified replacement property.

Losses realized in involuntary conversions are deferred.

All of these are true.

19.

Which one of the following is not a requirement of a deferred like-kind exchange?

The like-kind property to be received must be identified within 45 days.

The exchange must be completed within the taxable year.

The like-kind property must be received within 180 days.

A third party intermediary is often used to facilitate the exchange.

All of these.

20.

What is the primary purpose of a third-party intermediary in a deferred like-kind exchange?

To facilitate finding replacement property.

To help acquire the replacement property.

To prevent the seller from receiving cash (boot) that will taint the transaction.

To certify the taxpayer’s Form 8824.

All of these.

21.

Which of the following sections recaptures or recharacterizes only corporate taxpayer’s gains?

291.

1239.

1245.

Unrecaptured 1250 gains.

None of these.

22.

Which of the following is not true regarding installment sales?

Only gains are eligible for installment sale reporting.

Depreciation recapture is deferred in an installment sale.

The gross profit percentage is needed to determine the annual gain recognized.

Stock sales are ineligible for installment sale treatment.

None of these.

23.

Brad sold a rental house that he owned for $250,000. Brad bought the rental house five years ago for $225,000 and has claimed $50,000 of depreciation expense. What is the amount and character of Brad’s gain or loss?

$25,000 ordinary and $50,000 unrecaptured 1250 gain.

$25,000 1231 gain and $50,000 unrecaptured 1250 gain.

$75,000 ordinary gain.

$75,000 capital gain.

None of these.

24.

Leesburg sold a machine for $2,200 on November 10thof the current year. The machine was purchased for $2,600. Leesburg had taken $1,200 of depreciation deductions. What is Leesburg’s gain or loss realized on the machine?

$800 gain.

$1,000 gain.

$1,200 loss.

$1,400 loss.

None of these.

25.

Which of the following is not used in the calculation of the amount realized:

Cash.

Adjusted basis.

Fair market value of other property received.

Buyer’s assumption of liabilities.

All of these.

Bottom of Form

acct323 homework 5 495964

ACCT323

1.

value:
15.00 points

Indicate the amount (if any) that Josh can deduct as ordinary and necessary business deductions in each of the following situations. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

a.

Josh borrowed $87,000 from the First State Bank using his business assets as collateral. He used the money to buy City of Blanksville bonds. Over the course of a year, Josh paid interest of $13,300 on the borrowed funds, but he received $12,000 of interest on the bonds.

Deductible amount

$

b.

Josh purchased a piece of land for $50,000 in order to get a location to expand his business. He also paid $5,400 to construct a new driveway for access to the property.

Deductible amount

$

c.

This year Josh paid $23,400 to employ the mayor s son in the business. Josh would typically pay an employee with these responsibilities about $19,200 but the mayor assured Josh that after his son was hired, some city business would be coming his way.

Deductible amount

$

d.

Josh paid his brother, a mechanic, $5,550 to install a robotic machine for Josh s business. The amount he paid to his brother is comparable to what he would have paid to an unrelated party to do the same work. Once the installation was completed by his brother, Josh began calibrating the machine for operation. However, by the end of the year, he had not started using the machine in his business.

Deductible amount

$

check my workreferencesebook & resources

2.

value:
15.00 points

Melissa recently paid $640 for round-trip airfare to San Francisco to attend a business conference for three days. Melissa also paid the following expenses:

$590 fee to register for the conference,

$255 per night for three night s lodging,

$170 for meals, and

$605 for cab fare.

(Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

a.

What amount of the travel costs can Melissa deduct as business expenses? (Round your answer to the nearest dollar amount.)

Deductible amount

$

b.

Suppose that while Melissa was on the coast, she also spent two days sightseeing the national parks in the area. To do the sightseeing, she paid $1,990 for transportation, $940 for lodging, and $295 for meals during this part of her trip, which she considers personal in nature. What amount of the travel costs can Melissa deduct as business expenses? (Round your answer to the nearest dollar amount.)

Deductible amount

$

c.

Suppose that Melissa made the trip to San Francisco primarily to visit the national parks and only attended the business conference as an incidental benefit of being present on the coast at that time. What amount of the airfare can Melissa deduct as a business expense?

Deductible amount

$

d.

Suppose that Melissa s permanent residence and business was located in San Francisco. She attended the conference in San Francisco and paid $590 for the registration fee. She drove 107 miles over the course of three days and paid $156 for parking at the conference hotel. In addition, she spent $560 for breakfast and dinner over the three days of the conference. She bought breakfast on the way to the conference hotel and she bought dinner on her way home each night from the conference. What amount of the travel costs can Melissa deduct as business expenses? (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to one decimal place. Use standard mileage rate.)

Deductible amount

$

check my workreferencesebook & resources

3

value:
15.00 points

Renee manufactured and sold a gadget, a specialized asset used by auto manufacturers that qualifies for the domestic production activities deduction. Renee incurred $17,200 in direct expenses in the project, which includes $4,200 of wages Renee paid to employees in the manufacturing of the gadget.

What is Renee’s domestic production activities deduction for the gadget in each of the following alternative scenarios? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

a.

Renee sold the gadget for $32,200 and she reported AGI of $76,700 before considering the manufacturing deduction.

Domestic production activities deduction

$

b.

Renee sold the gadget for $30,200 and she reported AGI of $9,100 before considering the manufacturing deduction.

Domestic production activities deduction

$

c.

Renee sold the gadget for $48,700 and she reported AGI of $57,200 before considering the manufacturing deduction.

Domestic production activities deduction

$

check my workreferencesebook & resources

4.

value:
15.00 points

Jeremy is a calendar-year taxpayer who sometimes leases his business equipment to local organizations. He recorded the following receipts this year. Indicate the extent to which these payments are taxable income to Jeremy this year if Jeremy is (1) a cash-method taxpayer and (2) he is an accrual-method taxpayer. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

a.

$2,500 deposit from the Ladies Club, which wants to lease a trailer. The club will receive the entire deposit back when the trailer is returned undamaged.

Income under cash method

$

Income under accrual method

$


b.

$1,020 from the Ladies Club for leasing the trailer from December of this year through March of next year ($255 per month).

Income under cash method

$

Income under accrual method

$


c.

$495 lease payment received from the Men s Club this year for renting Jeremy s trailer last year. Jeremy billed the club last year but recently he determined that the Men s Club would never pay him, so he was surprised when he received the check.

Income under cash method

$

Income under accrual method

$


check my workreferencesebook & resources

5.

value:
15.00 points

Rebecca is a calendar-year taxpayer who operates a business. She made the following business-related expenditures in December of year 0. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Indicate the amount of these payments that she may deduct in year 0 under both the cash method of accounting and the accrual method of accounting.

a.

$1,500 for an accountant to evaluate the accounting system of Rebecca s business. The accountant spent three weeks in January of year 1 working on the evaluation.

Deductible Amount

Cash method

$

Accrual method

$


b.

$4,700 for new office furniture. The furniture was delivered on June 15, year 1.

Deductible Amount

Cash method

$

Accrual method

$


c.

$3,100 for property taxes payable on her factory.

Deductible Amount

Cash method

$

Accrual method

$


d.

$2,280 for interest on a short-term bank loan relating to the period from December 1, year 0 through March 31, year 1.

Deductible Amount

Cash method

$

Accrual method

$


check my workreferences

acct323 homework 5 495965

1.

value:
15.00 points

Indicate the amount (if any) that Josh can deduct as ordinary and necessary business deductions in each of the following situations. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

a.

Josh borrowed $87,000 from the First State Bank using his business assets as collateral. He used the money to buy City of Blanksville bonds. Over the course of a year, Josh paid interest of $13,300 on the borrowed funds, but he received $12,000 of interest on the bonds.

Deductible amount

$

b.

Josh purchased a piece of land for $50,000 in order to get a location to expand his business. He also paid $5,400 to construct a new driveway for access to the property.

Deductible amount

$

c.

This year Josh paid $23,400 to employ the mayor s son in the business. Josh would typically pay an employee with these responsibilities about $19,200 but the mayor assured Josh that after his son was hired, some city business would be coming his way.

Deductible amount

$

d.

Josh paid his brother, a mechanic, $5,550 to install a robotic machine for Josh s business. The amount he paid to his brother is comparable to what he would have paid to an unrelated party to do the same work. Once the installation was completed by his brother, Josh began calibrating the machine for operation. However, by the end of the year, he had not started using the machine in his business.

Deductible amount

$

check my workreferencesebook & resources

2.

value:
15.00 points

Melissa recently paid $640 for round-trip airfare to San Francisco to attend a business conference for three days. Melissa also paid the following expenses:

$590 fee to register for the conference,

$255 per night for three night s lodging,

$170 for meals, and

$605 for cab fare.

(Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

a.

What amount of the travel costs can Melissa deduct as business expenses (Round your answer to the nearest dollar amount.)

Deductible amount

$

b.

Suppose that while Melissa was on the coast, she also spent two days sightseeing the national parks in the area. To do the sightseeing, she paid $1,990 for transportation, $940 for lodging, and $295 for meals during this part of her trip, which she considers personal in nature. What amount of the travel costs can Melissa deduct as business expenses (Round your answer to the nearest dollar amount.)

Deductible amount

$

c.

Suppose that Melissa made the trip to San Francisco primarily to visit the national parks and only attended the business conference as an incidental benefit of being present on the coast at that time. What amount of the airfare can Melissa deduct as a business expense?

Deductible amount

$

d.

Suppose that Melissa s permanent residence and business was located in San Francisco. She attended the conference in San Francisco and paid $590 for the registration fee. She drove 107 miles over the course of three days and paid $156 for parking at the conference hotel. In addition, she spent $560 for breakfast and dinner over the three days of the conference. She bought breakfast on the way to the conference hotel and she bought dinner on her way home each night from the conference. What amount of the travel costs can Melissa deduct as business expenses (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to one decimal place. Use standard mileage rate.)

Deductible amount

$

check my workreferencesebook & resources

3

value:
15.00 points

Renee manufactured and sold a gadget, a specialized asset used by auto manufacturers that qualifies for the domestic production activities deduction. Renee incurred $17,200 in direct expenses in the project, which includes $4,200 of wages Renee paid to employees in the manufacturing of the gadget.

What is Renee’s domestic production activities deduction for the gadget in each of the following alternative scenarios (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

a.

Renee sold the gadget for $32,200 and she reported AGI of $76,700 before considering the manufacturing deduction.

Domestic production activities deduction

$

b.

Renee sold the gadget for $30,200 and she reported AGI of $9,100 before considering the manufacturing deduction.

Domestic production activities deduction

$

c.

Renee sold the gadget for $48,700 and she reported AGI of $57,200 before considering the manufacturing deduction.

Domestic production activities deduction

$

check my workreferencesebook & resources

4.

value:
15.00 points

Jeremy is a calendar-year taxpayer who sometimes leases his business equipment to local organizations. He recorded the following receipts this year. Indicate the extent to which these payments are taxable income to Jeremy this year if Jeremy is (1) a cash-method taxpayer and (2) he is an accrual-method taxpayer. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

a.

$2,500 deposit from the Ladies Club, which wants to lease a trailer. The club will receive the entire deposit back when the trailer is returned undamaged.

Income under cash method

$

Income under accrual method

$


b.

$1,020 from the Ladies Club for leasing the trailer from December of this year through March of next year ($255 per month).

Income under cash method

$

Income under accrual method

$


c.

$495 lease payment received from the Men s Club this year for renting Jeremy s trailer last year. Jeremy billed the club last year but recently he determined that the Men s Club would never pay him, so he was surprised when he received the check.

Income under cash method

$

Income under accrual method

$


check my workreferencesebook & resources

5.

value:
15.00 points

Rebecca is a calendar-year taxpayer who operates a business. She made the following business-related expenditures in December of year 0. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Indicate the amount of these payments that she may deduct in year 0 under both the cash method of accounting and the accrual method of accounting.

a.

$1,500 for an accountant to evaluate the accounting system of Rebecca s business. The accountant spent three weeks in January of year 1 working on the evaluation.

Deductible Amount

Cash method

$

Accrual method

$


b.

$4,700 for new office furniture. The furniture was delivered on June 15, year 1.

Deductible Amount

Cash method

$

Accrual method

$


c.

$3,100 for property taxes payable on her factory.

Deductible Amount

Cash method

$

Accrual method

$


d.

$2,280 for interest on a short-term bank loan relating to the period from December 1, year 0 through March 31, year 1.

Deductible Amount

Cash method

$

Accrual method

$


check my workreferences

acct330 750 words 495966

You have just finished your yearly audit of a publicly traded corporation. Describe how you would handle each of the following scenarios:

Scenario 1

Describe why there is a big emphasis placed on auditing cash and cash equivalents. Address the following:

  • Why is this area more susceptible to fraud?
  • How do the controls of traditional financial instruments differ from new types of marketable securities investments?
  • What are some new risks that you should be concerned with?
  • How is collateral figured out in these types of audits?

Scenario 2

While doing an audit, you discover inconsistencies in the company s expenses. Address the following:

  • Why might a company choose to overstate or understate its expenses?
  • How might this be accomplished?
  • Describe how professional skepticism plays into this type of audit.

Scenario 3

Why is auditing inventory more complex than auditing other asset accounts? Address the following:

  • What controls are companies expected to have from the time goods are purchased to the time invoices are payed in accounts payable?
  • What are the various tests that can be applied, and how do the internal controls play into it?

Scenario 4

When an auditor is trying to determine if the financial statements are reported fairly, how might a summary of potential adjustments help? Address the following:

  • What information would they give to the auditor?
  • Would an analysis of the internal controls report be beneficial at this point?

acct346 bravo baking company 100 correct complete 495967

Acct 346 Bravo Baking Company

Bravo Baking Company began operations in May of 2010 with the production and sales of speciality breads. The company has experienced a good market demand for its high protein, low carbohydrate product called “Hi-Lo”. Hi-Lo’s success has required that Bravo continue to make only this one product, however, Bravo’s customers, the local retailers, have been asking for more specialty breads from the company. The decision to expand will be made in the coming weeks.

Due Week 1: Tab 1 Product vs Period Costs

Due Week 2: Tab 2 Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule

Due Week 3: Tab 3 Break Even Analysis

Due Week 5: Tab 4 Incremental Analysis

Due Week 6: Tab 5 Capital Budgeting

Due Week 7: Tab 6 Variance Analysis

acct4 495968

The controllability concept is crucial to an effective responsibility accounting system. Managers should only be evaluated based on revenues or costs they control. Holding individuals responsible for things they cannot control is demotivating. Isolating control, however, may be difficult, as illustrated in the following case.

Dorothy Pasewark, a buyer for a large department store chain, was criticized when stores could not resell the merchandise she bought at the expected price. Ms. Pasewark countered that the sales staff caused the sluggish sales by not displaying the merchandise properly. The sales staff charged that the merchandise had too little sales potential to justify setting up more enticing displays. The division of influence between the buyer and the sales staff clouds the assignment of responsibility.

Comment on this case

acct420 1304b 01 government amp not for profit accounting 495970

The city in which you live provides its budget information in monthly budgetary control reports with each month representing 1/12th of the overall budget. You overhear several managers discussing the budget at a community meeting. You were surprised to hear that half of the managers liked this process and that the other half felt that it did not adequately match their expenses.

Discuss the issues regarding the preparation of the budgets and why half of the departments liked the process and why the other half did not like the process. Complete the following:

  • Give examples of 1 department on each side of this controversy.
  • Can the budgeting process be made more reflective of the work actually being completed?
  • Explain your answer

acct hmwk 495921

You ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities.

As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more time-intensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide.

In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six- to eight-page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations.

Final Paper Spreadsheet

I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.

II. Current company cash flow

a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method.

b. Once you ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions:

i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company funds?

ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow?

iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not?

iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why?

III. Product cost: ABC Company believes that it has an additional 5,000 machine hours available in the current facility before it would need to expand. ABC Company uses machine hours to allocate the fixed factory overhead, and units sold to allocate the fixed sales expenses. Bases on current research, ABC Company expects that it will take twice as long to produce the expansion product as it currently takes to produce its existing product.

a. What is the product cost for the expansion product under absorption and variable costing?

b. By adding this new expansion product, it helps to absorb the fixed factory and sales expenses. How much cheaper does this expansion make the existing product?

c. Assuming ABC Company wants a 40% gross margin for the new product, what selling price should it set for the expansion product?

d. Assuming the same sales mix of these two products, what are the contribution margins and break-even points by product?

IV. Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:

Year 1, $15,000
Year 2, $13,000
Year 3, $10,000
Year 4, $10,000
Year 5, $6,000

ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.

a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment (ignore income taxes and depreciation)?

b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?

c. Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not?

V. Conclusion:

a. What are the major risk factors that you see in this project?

b. As the controller and a management accountant, what is your responsibility to this project?

c. What do you recommend the CEO do?

Writing the Final Paper

1. Must be six to eight double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

2. Must include a title page with the following:

a. Title of paper

b. Student s name

c. Course name and number

d. Instructor s name

e. Date submitted

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document at least three, but no more than five sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

acct homework 495922

ABC company enters into a lease agreement with XYZ corporation for laser tech machines. The lease agreement qualifies as an operating lease. However, there is one thing that stands out. There is a bargain-purchase option. After the 3-year lease term, each laser tech machine can be purchased for $500, even though the market value is $850.

You are the controller of ABC company. You feel that the machine should be recorded as a capital lease because of the bargain-purchase option. Your manager, Martha, feels that at the end of the 3-year term, the laser tech will not be worth $500 because of rapid advances in technology.

  • What is the ethical issue?
  • What should you, the controller, do?
  • What are the generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) for reporting a lease as a capital lease?

acct iii 495923

Assignment 2: Required Assignment 1 Cost and Decision-Making Analysis

Cheryl Montoya picked up the phone and called her boss, Wes Chan, Vice President of Marketing at Piedmont Fasteners Corporation.

Cheryl: Wes, I’m not sure how to go about answering the questions that came up at the meeting with the President yesterday.

Wes: What’s the problem .

Cheryl: The president wanted to know the break-even point for each of the company’s products, but I am having trouble figuring them out.

Wes: I’m sure you can handle it, Cheryl. And, by the way, I need your analysis on my desk tomorrow morning at 8:00 sharp in time for the follow-up meeting at 9:00.

Piedmont Fasteners Corporation makes three different clothing fasteners at its manufacturing facility in North Carolina. Data concerning these products appear below:

Velcro Metal Nylon
Normal annual sales volume 100,000 units 200,000 units 400,000 units
Unit selling price $1.65 $1.50 $0.85
Variable cost per unit $1.25 $0.70 $0.25

Total fixed expenses are $400,000 per year.

All three products are sold in highly competitive markets, so the company is unable to raise its prices without losing unacceptably large numbers of customers.

The company has a very effective lean production system, so there is no beginning or ending work in process or finished-goods inventories.

Using the module readings, the Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet, research break-even point and costing systems. Analyze the case based on your research and what you have learned so far in the course.

Respond to the following:

  • Calculate the company’s overall break-even point in total sales dollars. Explain your methodology (approximately 2 pages).
  • Of the total fixed costs of $400,000: $20,000 could be avoided if the Velcro product were dropped, $80,000 if the Metal product were dropped, and $60,000 if the Nylon product were dropped. The remaining fixed costs of $240,000 consist of common fixed costs such as administrative salaries and rent on the factory building that could be avoided only by going out of business entirely (approximately 2 pages):
    • Calculate the break-even point in units for each product. Explain your methodology.
    • Determine the overall profit of the company if the company sells exactly the break-even quantity of each product. Present your results.
  • Evaluate costing systems for this company. Explain if this company should be using a job-order or process-costing system to accumulate costs (1 page).

Be sure to include your calculations in Microsoft Excel format.

Write a 5 6-page report in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.

acct iv 495924

Assignment 2 Applying Decision-Making Skills

As a manager, part of your role is to develop strategy, and share this strategy with various stakeholders within the organization. This assignment will allow you to take your findings as a manager and communicate these findings to those who are affected.

Your company has been presented with a decision on replacing a piece of equipment for a new computerized version that promotes efficiency for the upcoming year. As manager you will need to decide whether or not the purchase of the new equipment is a worthwhile investment and to communicate your recommendations to Executive Management for a final decision. To be convincing, sufficient support for your recommendations must be provided in order to be considered valid and accepted.

Existing Equipment
Original Cost 60,000
Present Book Value 30,000
Annual Cash Operating Costs 145,000
Current Market Value 15,000
Market Value in Ten Years 0
Remaining useful Life 10 years
Replacement Equipment
Cost 600,000
Annual Cash Operating Costs 50,000
Market Value in Ten Years 0
Useful Life 10 years
Other Information
Cost of Capital 10%
Payback requirement 6 years

In this assignment, use the information above to develop a comprehensive analysis using NPV, Payback Method, and IRR to develop a recommendation on replacing the existing equipment with a new computerized version. Develop an executive summary of your findings in a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation format to present to Executive Management.

Do the following in your presentation:

  • Include a statement of the problem or topic, a concise analysis of the findings, and a recapitulation of any main conclusions or recommendations.
  • Be sure to incorporate specific details to highlight or support the summary including calculations.
  • Using your knowledge of capital budgeting techniques, explain how principles of capital budgeting, such as the payback method, IRR, and NPV, can be used to assess the potential projects and assist in the decision-making process.

Develop a 10-12 slide presentation in PowerPoint format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.

acct v 495928

Required Assignment 2 Manufacturing Budget Analysis

Tom Emory and Jim Morris strolled back to their plant from the administrative offices of Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company. Tom is manager of the machine shop in the company’s factory; Jim is manager of the equipment maintenance department.

The men had just attended the monthly performance evaluation meeting for plant department heads. These meetings had been held on the third Tuesday of each month since Robert Ferguson, Jr., the president’s son, had become plant manager a year earlier.

As they were walking, Tom Emory spoke: Boy, I hate those meetings! I never know whether my department’s accounting reports will show good or bad performance. I’m beginning to expect the worst. If the accountants say I saved the company a dollar, I’m called Sir, but if I spend even a little too much boy, do I get in trouble. I don’t know if I can hold on until I retire.

Tom had just been given the worst evaluation he had ever received in his long career with Ferguson & Son. He was the most respected of the experienced machinists in the company. He had been with the company for many years and was promoted to supervisor of the machine shop when the company expanded and moved to its present location. The president (Robert Ferguson, Sr.) had often stated that the company’s success was due to the high-quality work of machinists like Tom. As supervisor, Tom stressed the importance of craftsmanship and told his workers that he wanted no sloppy work coming from his department.

When Robert Ferguson, Jr., became the plant manager, he directed that monthly performance comparisons be made between actual and budgeted costs for each department. The departmental budgets were intended to encourage the supervisors to reduce inefficiencies and to seek cost reduction opportunities. The company controller was instructed to have his staff tighten the budget slightly whenever a department attained its budget in a given month; this was done to reinforce the plant manager’s desire to reduce costs. The young plant manager often stressed the importance of continued progress toward attaining the budget; he also made it known that he kept a file of these performance reports for future reference when he succeeded his father.

Tom Emory’s conversation with Jim Morris continued as follows:

Emory: I really don’t understand. We’ve worked so hard to meet the budget, and the minute we do so they tighten it on us. We can’t work any faster and still maintain quality. I think my men are ready to quit trying. Besides, those reports don’t tell the whole story. We always seem to be interrupting the big jobs for all those small rush orders. All that setup and machine adjustment time is killing us. And quite frankly, Jim, you were no help. When our hydraulic press broke down last month, your people were nowhere to be found. We had to take it apart ourselves and got stuck with all that idle time.

Morris: I’m sorry about that, Tom, but you know my department has had trouble making budget, too. We were running well behind at the time of that problem, and if we had spent a day on that old machine, we would never have made it up. Instead, we made the scheduled inspections of the forklift trucks because we knew we could do those in less than the budgeted time.

Emory: Well, Jim, at least you have some options. I’m locked into what the scheduling department assigns to me and you know they’re being harassed by sales for those special orders. Incidentally, why didn’t your report show all the supplies you guys wasted last month when you were working in Bill’s department?

Morris: We’re not out of the woods on that deal yet. We charged the maximum we could to other work and haven’t even reported some of it yet.

Emory: Well, I’m glad you have a way of getting out of the pressure. The accountants seem to know everything that’s happening in my department, sometimes even before I do. I thought all that budget and accounting stuff was supposed to help, but it just gets me into trouble. It’s all a big pain. I’m trying to put out quality work; they’re trying to save pennies.

Review the case. Respond to the following:

  • Identify the problems that appear to exist in Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company’s budgetary control system and explain how the problems are likely to reduce the effectiveness of the system. (approximately 1 page)
  • Explain how Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company’s budgetary control system could be revised to improve its effectiveness. (approximately 1 2 pages)
  • Explain how the use of an activity-based costing system could change the results of the budget, if utilized. (approximately 1 page)
  • As stated in the case, many employees have quit trying and have altered behavior on the job. Provide specific ways for how you would use a budget to change employee behavior and align goals in the organization. Explain how goal alignment can improve profitability and overall return to the shareholders of the company. (approximately 1 page)
  • Synthesize data to explain the concept of ROI and describe how the use of an activity-based costing system can improve the company s ROI and the potential impact on free cash flow. (approximately 1 page)

Write a 5 6-page report in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention:

acct2001 below is the adjusted trial balance for computer services as of december 31 495929

Below is the adjusted trial balance for Computer Services as of December 31, 2011.

Adjusted
Trial Balance
Dr. Cr.
Cash 8,405
Accounts Receivable 5,147
Supplies 2,575
Prepaid Insurance 1,580
Equipment 6,000
Accumulated Depreciation – Equip 600
Accounts Payable 3,489
Salaries Payable 1,155
Unearned Rent Revenue 575
Jack Smith, Capital 10,000
Jack Smith, Drawing 4,500
Service Revenue 33,017
Rental Revenue 1,050
Depreciation Expense 600
Insurance Expense 680
Rent Expense 3,500
Salaries Expense 12,854
Supplies Expense 2,587
Utilities Expense 1,458

Totals 49,886 49,886

Requirements:

A. Prepare the necessary closing entries as of December 31,2011

B. Post the closing entries to the selected ledger accounts.

C. Prepare a Post Closing Trial Balance.

acct2001 computer services jack smith week 3 chapter 3 adjustments and financial sta 495930

Requirements:

A. Calculate the amounts of the adjusting entries and enter them in the adjustments column.
B. Enter the amounts in the adjusted trail balance column.
C. Prepare the Income Statement
D. Prepare the Statement of Owner’s Equity
E. Prepare the Balance Sheet

Given:

Jack Smith opened a new business on July 1. The name of the company is Computer Services.
The unadjusted trial balance as of July 31 is presented below.

Additional information:

1 An analysis of Prepaid Insurance shows that $75 of coverage has expired.
2 An inventory count shows that supplies costing $450 are available at the end of the month
3 Monthly depreciation on the equipment is $100.
4 On July 1 Computer Services rented part of their office for three months collecting $525.
5 Salary expense of $800 have been incurred but are not paid as of July 31.
6 Jack determined that there are $700 of revenues earned but not recorded as of July 31.
7 Electric used during the month but not recorded was $122.

Unadjusted
Trial Balance

Dr. Cr.
Cash 3,600

Accounts Receivable 2,150
Supplies 800
Prepaid Insurance 450
Equipment 6,000
Accumulated Depreciation – Equip 0
Accounts Payable 460
Salaries Payable 0
Unearned Rent Revenue 525
Jack Smith, Capital 10,000
Jack Smith, Drawing 750
Service Revenue 5,365
Rental Revenue 0
Depreciation Expense 0
Insurance Expense 0
Rent Expense 700
Salaries Expense 1,900
Supplies Expense 0
Utilities Expense 0

Totals 16,350 16,350

acct2001 inventory system calculations calculate the requested amounts showing your 495931

Calculate the requested amounts showing your work below and entering your answers to the right.

Inventory:
May 1 100 units @ $5.00
Purchases:
May 5 200 units @ $5.00
May 16 200 units @ $6.00
May 24 300 units @ $7.00
Sales:
May 14 150 units
May 20 300 units

1. Using the periodic inventory system determine ending inventory under FIFO
2. Using the periodic inventory system determine cost of goods sold under FIFO
3. Using the periodic inventory system determine ending inventory under LIFO
4. Using the periodic inventory system determine cost of goods sold under LIFO
5. Using the periodic inventory system determine ending inventory under average cost
6. Using the periodic inventory system determine cost of goods sold under average cost
7. Using the perpetual inventory system determine ending inventory under FIFO
8. Using the perpetual inventory system determine cost of goods sold under FIFO
9. Using the perpetual inventory system determine ending inventory under LIFO
10. Using the perpetual inventory system determine cost of goods sold under LIFO

acct2001 jack smith opened a new business on july 1 the name of the company is compu 495932

Jack Smith opened a new business on July 1. The name of the company is Computer Services.

On July 1, Jack Smith deposited $3,000 into his business account as his initial investment.
On July 2, he purchased office furniture for $900 cash for his new office.
On July 3, he paid $600 rent for his store.
On July 6, he paid $350 for advertising expense.
On July 7, he purchased a laptop for $999 on credit by signing a note.
On July 9, he received $700 for services provided to a client.
On July 18, he paid his assistant $275.
On July 22, he provided $650 of services on account and issued the client a bill.
On July 26, he paid a $333 installment towards the principle on the note entered into on July 7.
On July 28, he received $175 of the amount billed on July 22.
On July 30, Jack withdrew $500 for personal use.

Requirements:

A. Prepare general journal entries for each of the following transations.
B. Post the journal entries from A. to the ledger accounts.
C. Prepare a Trial Balance

acct205 495933

  • Explain the basic terminology of the accounting process or financial reporting.
  • Explain how accounting has affected your personal life emphasizing professional ethics.
  • Explain the role that technology has played in small business accounting.

Please include APA in-text citations and references.

Background on Course Research Requirements: In the business world, it is important to use research to strengthen points made in presentations and projects. Learning to use the search functions in databases for research is a crucial critical thinking skill that complements other research techniques.

There are two main types of databases. The most popular databases are ABI Inform Global, Academic Search Premier, and Business Source Premier. You must stay away from inferior Web sites with anonymous writers; articles found on consultant Web sites; and materials on sites like QuickMBA.com, MarketingProfs.com, etc. Dictionaries and encyclopedias most often repeat the information from textbooks. Acceptable internet resources include, among others, government sites (especially for statistics). Wikipedia or any open source Web sites are not permitted.

Please submit your assignment.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

acct205 495935

Choose a public company in the food industry. Analyze the financial statements and assess whether the financial performance has improved or declined year-over-year.

Analysis techniques include the following:

  • Comparative financial statements
  • Trend analysis
  • Ratio analysis
  • Percentage analysis

Presentation of 5 10 PowerPoint slides that includes the following:

  • At least 3 slides relevant to the analysis prepared
  • An analysis of the performance of the firm based on the analysis tools used
  • A summary of the company’s financial performance and assessment of whether it has improved or declined year-over-year in terms of profitability, asset utilization, and liquidity

Background on Course Research Requirements: In the business world, it is important to use research to strengthen points made in presentations and projects. Learning to use the search functions in databases for research is a crucial critical thinking skill that complements other research techniques.

There are two main types of databases. You must stay away from inferior Web sites with anonymous writers; articles found on consultant Web sites, and materials on Web sites that are not reputable. Dictionaries and encyclopedias most often repeat the information from textbooks. Acceptable Internet resources include, among others, government sites (especially for statistics).
Wikipedia or any open source Web sites are not permitted.

Please submit your assignment.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

acct205 495936

Selecting a for-profit organization of interest, you will research an unusual or conflicting accounting principle that has impacted your chosen organization. The research will require you to present, review and analyze the organizations published accounting statements of the last two years. Specifically, your research paper will:

  • Identify the core functions of each department, their strengths and weaknesses, and make recommendations for improvement, as appropriate.
  • Identify and describe the underlying problem or conflict.
  • Compare the alternative courses of action.
  • Explain the effects at issue.
  • Recommend options that would be consistent with the organization s accounting practices, accounting processes, and accounting-related departments.
  • Include the last two years of published accounting statements.

Present your findings as a 1-2 pages Word document formatted in APA style.

Please submit your assignment.

Submitting your assignment in APA format means, at a minimum, you will need the following:

  1. TITLE PAGE. Remember the Running head: AND TITLE IN ALL CAPITALS.
  2. ABSTRACT.A summary of your paper not an introduction. Begin writing in third person voice.
  3. BODY. The body of your paper begins on the page following the title page and abstract page and must be double-spaced (be careful not to triple- or quadruple-space between paragraphs). The type face should be 12-pt. Times Roman or 12-pt. Courier in regular black type. Do not use color, bold type, or italics except as required for APA level headings and references. The deliverable length of the body of your paper for this assignment is 3-4 pages. In-body academic citations to support your decisions and analysis are required. A variety of academic sources is encouraged.
  4. REFERENCE PAGE. References that align with your in-body academic sources are listed on the final page of your paper. The references must be in APA format using appropriate spacing, hang indention, italics, and upper and lower case usage as appropriate for the type of resource used. Remember, the Reference Page is not a bibliography but a further listing of the abbreviated in-body citations used in the paper. Every referenced item must have a corresponding in-body citation.

This assignment will be assessed using additional criteria providedhere.

Please submit your assignment.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

acct205 495937

You are an accountant at a local CPA firm that is auditing the accounting records of ABC Company. You have been asked to educate the accounting department about the limitations of the internal control system in preparation for an upcoming audit. During your audit, you have identified that because of a weak internal control system, an adjusting entry for prepaid insurance was not recorded for the first 3 months of the year at $500 per month.

  • Identify the limitations of the internal control system. Provide at least 3 limitations.
  • Provide at least 2 examples of internal control procedures, and explain how these procedures can be implemented.
  • Identify symptoms of a lack of internal control.
  • Explain the impact of the missing journal entry on the financial statements of the company.

Please submit your assignment.

For assistance with your assignment, please use your text, Web resources, and all course materials.

Unit Materials

acct205 principles of accounting unit 4 individual project 495938

INCLUDES WORD DOCUMENT ESSAY PLUS POWERPOINT.

Choose a public company in the food industry. Analyze the financial statements and assess whether the financial performance has improved or declined year-over-year.

Analysis techniques include the following:

  • comparative financial statements
  • trend analysis
  • ratio analysis
  • percentage analysis

Presentation of 5 10 PowerPoint slides that includes the following:

  • At least 3 slides relevant to the analysis prepared
  • An analysis of the performance of the firm based on the analysis tools used
  • A summary of the company’s financial performance and assessment of whether it has improved or declined year-over-year in terms of profitability, asset utilization, and liquidity

acct212 mcdonough products inc 100 correct answers w solutions 495940

Top managers of McDonough Products, Inc., have asked for your help in comparing the company s profit performance and financial position with the average for the industry. The accountant has given you the company s income statement and balance sheet and also the following data for the industry. The problem is that McDonough is in dollars and the Industry Average is in percentages. To complete the analysis you will need to convert McDonoughs dollar amounts to percentages.

McDonough Products, Inc.
Income Statement Compared with Industry Average
Year Ended December 31, 2010
McDonough “Industry Average”
Net sales…………………………… $700,000 100.0%
Cost of goods sold……………. 490,000 57.3
Gross profit………………….. 210,000 42.7
Operating expenses ………………… 175,000 29.4
Operating income……………….. 35,000 13.3
Other expenses………………………… 7,000 2.5
Net income ………………………… $28,000 10.8%

McDonough Products, Inc.
Balance Sheet Compared with Industry Average
December 31, 2010

McDonough “Industry Average”
Current assets……….. $471,200 72.1%
Fixed assets, net ……….. 114,700 19.0
Intangible assets, net …………….. 21,080 4.8
Other assets…………………………… 13,020 4.1
Total …………………………………. 620,000 100.0%

Current liabilities ………. 240,560 47.2%
Long-term liabilities ………… 135,160 21.0
Stockholders equity…………….. 244,280 31.8
Total ……………………… $620,000 100.0%

Industry Average Current Ratio 1.53

Industry Average Total Debt to Total Assets 0.68

Requirements

1. Prepare a common-size income statement and balance sheet for McDonough Products. The first column of each statement should present McDonough Products common-size statement, and the second column should show the industry averages.

2. For the profitability analysis, compute McDonough Products (a) ratio of gross profit to net sales (b) ratio of operating income to net sales, and (c) ratio of net income to net sales. Compare these figures with the industry averages. Is McDonough Products profit performance better or worse than the average for the industry?

3. For the analysis of financial position, compute McDonough Products (a) Current ratio and (b) Debt ratio. Compare these ratios with the industry averages. Is McDonough Products financial position better or worse than the average for the industry?

acct212 rawls repair corporation parts a and b complete 100 correct answers 495941

Acct212 Rawls Repair Corporation

PROJECT #1 -THE COMPLETE ACCOUNTING CYCLE

Part A — Requirement s 1, 2 and 3

During its first month of operation, the Rawls Repair Corporation, which specializes in bicycle repairs, completed the following transactions:

Oct. 1 Began business by making a deposit in a company bank account of $12,000, in exchange for 1,200 shares of $10 par value common stock.

Oct. 1 Paid the premium on a one-year insurance policy, $1,200.

Oct. 1 Paid the current month’s rent, $1,040.

Oct. 3 Purchased repair equipment from Conklin Company, $4,400. Paid $600 down and the balance was placed on account. Payments will be $200.00 per month for nineteen months. The first payment is due 11/1. Note: Use Accounts Payable for the Balance Due.

Oct. 8 Purchased repair supplies from McKenna Company on credit, $390.

Oct. 12 Paid utility bill for October, $154.

Oct. 16 Cash bicycle repair revenue for the first half of October, $1,362.

Oct. 19 Made payment to McKenna Company, $200.

Oct. 31 Cash bicycle repair revenue for the last half of October, $1,310.

Oct. 31 Declared and paid cash dividend of $800.

Requirement 1 – Prepare the Journal Entries in the General Journal – Journal Entries

Requirement 2 – Post Journal Entries to the General Ledger – General Ledger

Requirement 3 – Prepare a Trial Balance – Trial Balance

Part B — Requirements 4 – 10

Prepare adjusting entries using the following information in the General Journal below. Show your calculations!

a) One month’s insurance has expired.

b) The remaining inventory of repair supplies is $194.

c) The estimated depreciation on repair equipment is $70.

d) The estimated income taxes are $40.

Requirement 4 – Prepare the Adjusting Entries – Adjusting Entries

Requirement 5 – Post Adjusting Entries to the General Ledger — General Ledger

Requirement 6 – Prepare an Adjusted Trial Balance – Adjusted TB

Requirement 7 – Prepare the Financial Statements – Financial Statements

Requirement 8 – Prepare the Closing Entries – Closing Entries

Requirement 9 – Post Closing Entries to the General Ledger – General Ledger

Requirement 10 – Prepare the Post Closing Trial Balance – Post Closing TB

acct216 week 3 1 classify the following items as a an addition to the bank balance b 495942

1. Classify the following items as (a) an addition to the bank balance, (b) a subtraction from the bank balance, (c) an addition to the book balance, or (d) a subtraction from the book balance:

_____ $20 in service charges

_____ A $300 check deposited that was returned NSF

_____ An outstanding check that you wrote for $2,000

_____ A deposit in transit of $5,500

_____ Bank Error: the bank credited your account for a deposit made by another customer

2. During 2011, Jimmy Enterprises completed the following transactions:

a. Sales revenue on account, $550,000.

b. Collections on account, $325,000

c. Write-offs of uncollectibles, $13,000

d. Uncollectible account expense, 5% of sales revenue

Required:

1. Prepare the journal entries for the above transactions.

acct220 principles of accounting i final examination 495943

Acct220: Principles of Accounting I

Problem 1: 15% points:

The account balances appearing on the trial balance (below) were taken from the general ledger of Flip’s Copy Shop at June 30, 2012.

Additional information for the month of June which has not yet been recorded in the accounts is as follows:

(a) A physical count of supplies indicates $300 on hand at June 30.

(b) The amount of insurance that expired in the month of June was $200.

(c) Depreciation on equipment for June was $400.

(d) Rent owed on the copy shop for the month of June was $600 but will not be paid until July.

Flip s Copy Shop

Trial Balance

June 30, 2012

Account Titles

Debit

Credit

Cash

$1,000

Supplies

1,100

Prepaid Insurance

2,200

Equipment

24,000

Accum. Depreciation, Equipment

$4,500

Accounts Payable

2,400

Notes Payable

4,000

Flip s Capital

15,300

Flip s Drawings

2,400

Service Revenue

4,900

Utilities Expense

400

Totals

$31,100

$31,100

Instructions:

a. Prepare in journal form, without explanations, the end of month adjusting entries for Flip’s Copy Shop for the month of June.

b. Prepare a partial adjusted trial balance for the accounts provided.

c. Prepare in journal form, without explanations, the end of month closing entries for Flip’s Copy Shop for the month of June.

Problem 2: 15% points:

The following information is available for Flip Company:

Beginning inventory 600 units at $4

First purchase 900 units at $6

Second purchase 500 units at $7.20

Assume that Flip uses a periodic inventory system and that there are 700 units left at the end of the month.

Instructions:

a. Compute the cost of goods available for sale.

b. Compute the value of ending inventory and Cost of Good Sold under the

(1) LIFO method.

(2) FIFO method.

(3) Average-cost method

Problem 3: 15% points:

The following items were taken from the December 31, 2013 adjusted trial balance of Flip Company. (All balances are normal.)

Mortgage payable $ 1,443 Accumulated depreciation 3,655

Prepaid expenses 880 Accounts payable 1,444

Equipment 11,000 Notes payable after 2015 1,200

Long-term investments 1,100 Flip s capital 11,480

Short-term investments 3,690 Accounts receivable 1,696

Notes payable in 2014 1,000 Inventories 1,756

Cash 2,100 Service Revenue 9,000

Rent Expense 1,000 Wages Expense 5,000

Utilities Expense 1,000

Instructions:Prepare a classified balance sheet in good form as of December 31, 2013.

Problem 4: 10% points:

Prepare journal entries to record the following transactions entered into by Flip Company:

2012

June 1 Accepted a $10,000, 12%, 1-year note from Flop as full payment on her account.

Nov. 1 Sold merchandise on account to Flap, Inc. for $12,000, terms 2/10, n/30.

Nov. 5 Flap, Inc. returned merchandise worth $500.

Nov. 9 Received payment in full from Flap, Inc.

Dec. 31 Accrued interest on Flop’s note.

2013

June 1 Flop honored her promissory note by sending the face amount plus interest. No interest has been accrued in 2013

Problem 5: 10% points:

Flip Company purchased equipment on January 1, 2011 for $90,000. It is estimated that the equipment will have a $5,000 salvage value at the end of its 5-year useful life. It is also estimated that the equipment will produce 100,000 units over its 5-year life.

Instructions

Answer the following independent questions.

1. Compute the amount of depreciation expense for the year ended December 31, 2011, using the straight-line method of depreciation.

2. If 16,000 units of product are produced in 2011 and 24,000 units are produced in 2012, what is the book value of the equipment at December 31, 2012? The company uses the units-of-activity depreciation method.

3. If the company uses the double-declining-balance method of depreciation, what is the balance of the Accumulated Depreciation Equipment account at December 31, 2013?

Problem 6: 10% points:

Flip earns a salary of $7,500 per month during the year. FICA taxes are 8% on the first $100,000 of gross earnings. Federal unemployment insurance taxes are 6.2% of the first $7,000; however, a credit is allowed equal to the state unemployment insurance taxes of 5.4% on the $7,000. During the year, $25,600 was withheld for federal income taxes and $5,700 was withheld for state income taxes.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a journal entry summarizing the payment of Flip s total salary during the year.

(b) Prepare a journal entry summarizing the employer payroll tax expense on Flip s salary for the year.

(c) Determine the cost of employing Flip for the year.

acct221 495945

Complete the following comparison table between managerial and financial accounting.

Financial Accounting Managerial Accounting
Primary users No Independent AuditsInternal UsersInternal ReportsSpecial-purpose for a Specific DecisionsRelevant to DecisionsQuarterly and AnnuallyAs Frequently as NeededGeneral-purposeGenerally Accepted Accounting PrinciplesExternal UsersFinancial StatementsAnnual Audit by Certified Public Accountant

Quarterly and AnnuallyFinancial StatementsInternal ReportsRelevant to DecisionsExternal UsersAs Frequently as NeededInternal UsersGeneral-purposeGenerally Accepted Accounting PrinciplesSpecial-purpose for a Specific DecisionsAnnual Audit by Certified Public AccountantNo Independent Audits

Types of reports General-purposeExternal UsersAnnual Audit by Certified Public AccountantInternal UsersQuarterly and AnnuallyAs Frequently as NeededInternal ReportsSpecial-purpose for a Specific DecisionsNo Independent AuditsGenerally Accepted Accounting PrinciplesRelevant to DecisionsFinancial Statements

Quarterly and AnnuallyInternal UsersSpecial-purpose for a Specific DecisionsGeneral-purposeGenerally Accepted Accounting PrinciplesInternal ReportsAs Frequently as NeededRelevant to DecisionsNo Independent AuditsExternal UsersAnnual Audit by Certified Public AccountantFinancial Statements

Frequency of reports Annual Audit by Certified Public AccountantAs Frequently as NeededFinancial StatementsGenerally Accepted Accounting PrinciplesInternal UsersQuarterly and AnnuallyGeneral-purposeInternal ReportsExternal UsersSpecial-purpose for a Specific DecisionsRelevant to DecisionsNo Independent Audits

General-purposeFinancial StatementsSpecial-purpose for a Specific DecisionsGenerally Accepted Accounting PrinciplesQuarterly and AnnuallyAnnual Audit by Certified Public AccountantRelevant to DecisionsNo Independent AuditsInternal UsersInternal ReportsAs Frequently as NeededExternal Users

Purpose of reports Internal UsersAs Frequently as NeededGeneral-purposeAnnual Audit by Certified Public AccountantInternal ReportsSpecial-purpose for a Specific DecisionsRelevant to DecisionsNo Independent AuditsQuarterly and AnnuallyGenerally Accepted Accounting PrinciplesExternal UsersFinancial Statements

Relevant to DecisionsInternal UsersExternal UsersFinancial StatementsGeneral-purposeAs Frequently as NeededNo Independent AuditsGenerally Accepted Accounting PrinciplesAnnual Audit by Certified Public AccountantSpecial-purpose for a Specific DecisionsInternal ReportsQuarterly and Annually

Content of reports Relevant to DecisionsInternal ReportsGenerally Accepted Accounting PrinciplesAs Frequently as NeededSpecial-purpose for a Specific DecisionsNo Independent AuditsExternal UsersInternal UsersFinancial StatementsQuarterly and AnnuallyAnnual Audit by Certified Public AccountantGeneral-purpose

Relevant to DecisionsGenerally Accepted Accounting PrinciplesFinancial StatementsAnnual Audit by Certified Public AccountantGeneral-purposeQuarterly and AnnuallyNo Independent AuditsInternal UsersInternal ReportsAs Frequently as NeededSpecial-purpose for a Specific DecisionsExternal Users

Verification Internal ReportsGeneral-purposeGenerally Accepted Accounting PrinciplesAs Frequently as NeededInternal UsersQuarterly and AnnuallyAnnual Audit by Certified Public AccountantNo Independent AuditsFinancial StatementsSpecial-purpose for a Specific DecisionsExternal UsersRelevant to Decisions

As Frequently as NeededExternal UsersInternal ReportsGeneral-purposeGenerally Accepted Accounting PrinciplesNo Independent AuditsFinancial StatementsSpecial-purpose for a Specific DecisionsAnnual Audit by Certified Public AccountantQuarterly and AnnuallyRelevant to DecisionsInternal Users

acct301 1 tco 1 which of the following is a primary user of accounting information w 495947

1. (TCO 1) Which of the following is a primary user of accounting information with a direct financial interest in the business

Taxing authority

Creditor

Regulatory agency

Labor union

2. (TCO 1) Expenses are incurred _________.

to generate revenues.

only on rare occasions.

to produce assets.

to produce liabilities.

3. (TCO 1) Which of the following financial statements is concerned with the company at a point in time

Balance Sheet

Income Statement

Retained Earnings Statement

Statement of Cash Flows

4. (TCO 1) Pinson Company began the year with retained earnings of $210,000. During the year, the company recorded revenues of $300,000, expenses of $228,000, and paid dividends of $24,000. What was Pinson s retained earnings at the end of the year

$306,000

$258,000

$486,000

$282,000

5. (TCO 4) Qualitative characteristics associated with relevant accounting information are _________.

consistency, faithful representation, and timely.

predict future events, provide feedback about prior expectations, and timely.

neutral, predict future events, and reliability.

consistency and materiality.

6. (TCO 4) Using the following balance sheet and income statement data, what is the current ratio?

Current assets $9,000 Net income $12,000

Current liabilities 4,000 Stockholders equity 24,000

Total assets 30,000 Total liabilities 6,000

Average common shares outstanding was 10,000

1.75:1

2.00:1

0.44:1

2.25:1

7. (TCO 4) Using the following balance sheet and income statement data, what is the total amount of working capital?

Current assets $7,000 Net income $12,000

Current liabilities 4,000 Stockholders equity 21,000

Total assets 30,000 Total liabilities 9,000

Average common shares outstanding was 10,000

$21,000

$7,000

$2,000

$3,000

8. (TCO4) Using the following balance sheet and income statement data, what is the debt to total assets ratio?

Current assets $9,000 Net income $12,000

Current liabilities 4,000 Stockholders equity 24,000

Total assets 30,000 Total liabilities 6,000

Average common shares outstanding was 10,000

44%

20%

38%

50%

9. (TCO 2) Powers Company paid its office rent of $1,000 with cash. As a result of this event, _________.

assets decreased by $1,000.

equity increased by $1,000.

equity decreased by $1,000.

both assets decreased by $1,000 and equity decreased by $1,000.

10. (TCO 2) Which accounts normally have debit balances

Assets, expenses, and revenues

Assets, expenses, and retained earnings

Assets, liabilities, and dividends

Assets, expenses, and dividends

11. (TCO 2) In the first month of operations, the total of the debit entries to the cash account amounted to $700 and the total of the credit entries to the cash account amounted to $300. The cash account has a _________

$400 credit balance.

$700 debit balance.

$400 debit balance.

$300 credit balance.

12. (TCO 2) A trial balance would only help in detecting which one of the following errors

A transaction that is not journalized

A journal entry that is posted twice

Offsetting errors made in recording the transaction

A transposition error when transferring the debit side of a journal entry to the ledger

13. (TCO 3) From an internal control standpoint, the asset most susceptible to improper diversion and use is _________

prepaid insurance.

cash.

buildings.

land.

14. (TCO 3) Sam s Grocery Store has the following policy: Only one cashier can have access to a cash drawer. Which internal control principle supports that policy?

Documentation procedures

Segregation of duties

Physical controls

Establishment of responsibilities

15. (TCO 3) For which of the following errors should the appropriate amount be added to the balance per bank on a bank reconciliation

Check for $43 recorded as $34

Deposit of $500 recorded by bank as $50

A returned $200 check recorded by bank as $20

Check for $35 recorded as $53

acct 346 managerial accounting week 8 final devry acct346 495894

ACCT-346 Managerial Accounting Week 8 Final – Devry ACCT346
Question Detail:

Page:

1 2 3 4

Question :

(TCO 1) The principle managers follow when they only investigate significant departures from the plan is commonly known as

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 1) Which of the following is not likely to be a fixed cost?

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 2) Which of the following is not a manufacturing cost?

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 2) An allocation base is

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 3) Equivalent units are calculated by

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 3) In the assembly department, all the direct materials are added at the beginning of the processing. Beginning Work in Process inventory consists of 2,000 units with a direct materials cost of $31,860. During the period, 15,000 units are started and direct materials costing $250,000 are charged to the department. If there are 1,000 units in ending inventory, what is the cost per equivalent unit?

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 4) Regression analysis

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 4) The number of units that must be sold to exactly cover its fixed and variable costs is the

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 5) Which of the following is treated as a product cost in variable costing?

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 5) If the number of units sold is less than the number of units produced

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 6) A contract which specifies that the suppler will be paid for the cost of production as well as some fixed amount or percentage of cost is called a(n)

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 6) Which of the following is not generally true when a company compares ABC and traditional costing?

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 7) Fixed costs that will be eliminated if a particular course of action is undertaken are called

Points Received:

4 of 4

Page:

1 2 3 4

Question :

(TCO 7) Common costs

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 8) Target costing

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 8) Which of the following are relevant in deciding whether to accept or reject a special order?

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 9) Present value techniques

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 9) The internal rate of return

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 10) A method of budget preparation that requires all budgeted amounts to be justified by the department, even if the amounts were supported in prior periods, is called

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 10) Which budget is prepared first?

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 10) The standard cost is

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 10) In general, an unfavorable material variance arises from

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 10) The type of center that has responsibility for generating revenue as well as controlling costs is a(n)

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 10) Responsibility accounting holds managers responsible for

Points Received:

4 of 4

Question :

(TCO 10) Which ratio measures the rate earned on total capital provided by the owners?

Points Received:

4 of 4

Page:

1 2 3 4

Question :

(TCO 1) Distinguish managerial accounting from financial accounting. Include a brief discussion of the differences in the types of information provided to users as well as the differences of the users of the accounting information.

Points Received:

20 of 20

Question :

(TCO 6) Booth Financial Services, LLC has two revenue producing departments, Financial Planning and Business Consulting. The accounting department is trying to determine the best method to allocate $1,000,000 of common costs (secretarial staff, reception personnel, etc), either by salary or number of employees. Information on the revenue departments are as follows:

Department

Employees

Salaries

Financial Planning

150 employees

$10,000,000

Business Consulting

50 employees

$5,000,000

(a) Allocate the $1,000,000 common costs to the two revenue departments using both methods.
(b) Why are allocations called arbitrary?

Points Received:

25 of 25

Question :

(TCO 10) Charlie Corp sells it products on both credit and cash basis. Monthly sales are sold 20% for cash, 80% for credit. Credit sales are collected 40% in the month of sale and 60% the following month. Sales for the first quarter are as follows:

January $100,000
February $150,000
March $125,000

Compute cash collections for February.

Points Received:

25 of 25

Question :

(TCO 2) Acme Fireworks uses a traditional overhead allocation based on direct labor hours. For the current year overhead is estimated at $1,000,000 and direct labor hours are budgeted at 200,000 hours. Actual hours worked were 195,000 and actual overhead was $978,000.

(a) Compute the predetermined manufacturing overhead rate.
(b) Compute the applied manufacturing overhead.
(c) Compute the amount of over/under applied manufacturing overhead.

Points Received:

25 of 25

Page:

1 2 3 4

Question :

(TCO 9) An investment of $185,575 is expected to generate returns of $65,000 per year for each of the next four years. What is the investment’s internal rate of return?

Points Received:

25 of 25

Question :

(TCO 4) Legal Docs Inc is a legal services firm that files incorporation papers for small businesses. They charge $1,000 per application. This year’s income statement shows the following:

Sales $1,295,000
Variable Expenses $1,023,000
Contribution margin $272,000
Fixed costs $250,000
Profit $22,000

Required:
(a) Compute the break-even point in units.
(b) Compute the contribution margin ratio.
(c) Compute the current margin of safety.
(d) How many applications must the company sell to make a profit of $350,000?

Points Received:

25 of 25

Question :

(TCO 5) The following data has been taken from Air-Tite company in its first year of business.

Units produced 100,000
Units sold 80,000
Units in ending inventory 20,000
Fixed manufacturing overhead $400,000

(a) Compute the amount of fixed manufacturing overhead that would be expensed in the current year if full absorption costing is used.
(b) Compute the amount of fixed manufacturing overhead that would be expensed in the current year if variable costing is used.
(c) Compute the amount of fixed manufacturing overhead that would be included in ending inventory under full absorption costing.

Points Received:

25 of 25

acct 352 course project 495895

ACCT352 Course Project

Overview of Project |Report Requirements |Submission Requirements|Format

OVERVIEW OF PROJECT

This project requires you to evaluate a PC-based accounting system (Peachtree Complete Accounting) to see how the system handles recording transactions, collecting data, and generating reports and information.

STEP 1. ACCESS PEACHTREE COMPLETE ACCOUNTING

  • You will access Peachtree via the iLab tab under Course Home. There are instructions located on the DeVry iLab page to help you through this.

STEP 2. EXPLORE THE SOFTWARE

  • Review thePeachtree Guided Tour(located in the Help menu) and theWhat’s New in Peachtree(located in the Help menu) to see some of the features of Peachtree Complete Accounting.
  • Review any online documentation (Peachtree User Guide, etc. ) regarding how to use the application.

STEP 3. TRY OUT THE SOFTWARE USING A SAMPLE COMPANY

  1. Peachtree has two sample companies (Bellwether & Stone Arbor) that you can play around with.
  2. Once you are in your sample company, you must explore the sample company to determine how you can do the following.
    1. Revenue Cycle
  • How can you create and maintain customers?
  • How can you create customer invoices?
  • How can you apply customer payments?
  • What reports can you run to provide you with information regarding
  • your customers and their orders?
  • What reports can you run in order to provide you with information regarding key revenue cycle information – sales, accounts receivable, cash?

Expenditure Cycle

  • How can you create and maintain vendors?
  • How can you create and maintain inventory?
  • How can you generate payments to vendors?
  • What reports can you run to provide you with information regarding your vendors and your accounts payable?
  • What reports can you run in order to provide you with information regarding key expenditure cycle information – purchases, inventory, cash?

Financing Cycle

  • How can you create and maintain the chart of accounts?
  • How can you post journal entries?
  • What are the key financial statements that are available?
  • What are some key reports one can generate to measure the firms financial performance?

STEP 4. COMPLETE THE PROJECT

Once you have completed your evaluation, you will need to develop a report using the following layout. The details of the report are outlined below. Make sure that you number your sections and use the following format requirements.

Peachtree 2010 Tutorials – Below are links to Peachtree 2010 Tutorials that you might find helpful as you go through the Course Project.

“General Ledger – Setup New Company”

“Purchase/Payment Process”

“Sales/Collection Process”

“HR New Hire Process”

“Financial Statements”

“Adjusting Entries in Financial Statements”

REPORT REQUIREMENTS

Section I: Overview (minimum 2 pages)

Provide a general overview of Peachtree Complete Accounting. Make sure the overview provides the reader with a general understanding of the application, including the projected purchase price and any special hardware and/or software requirements.

Section II: Transactional Processing and Data Management (minimum 6 pages)

Describe how Peachtree Complete Accounting handles processing the accounting transactions and recording business activities for the revenue, expenditure and financing cycles. You should provide at least one detailed example of how one would record a specific accounting transaction/ business activity for each of the three transaction cycles below. Address the following questions in this section of the report.

1.

Revenue Cycle (2 pages) Answer the following questions.

How can you create and maintain customers?

How can you create customer invoices?

How can you apply customer payments?

What reports can you run to provide you with information regarding your customers and their orders? Describe them.

What reports can you run in order to provide you with information regarding key revenue cycle information – sales, accounts receivable, cash?

2.

Expenditure Cycle (2 pages) Answer the following questions.

How can you create and maintain vendors?

How can you create and maintain inventory?

How can you generate payments to vendors?

What reports can you run to provide you with information regarding your vendors and your accounts payable? Describe them.

What reports can you run in order to provide you with information regarding key expenditure cycle information – purchases, inventory, cash?

3.

Financing Cycle (2 pages) Answer the following questions.

How can you create and maintain the chart of accounts?

How can you post journal entries?

What are the key financial statements that are available? Describe them.

What are some key reports one can generate to measure the firms financial performance?

Section III: Reporting (minimum 3 pages)

Describe how Peachtree Complete Accounting produces information that can be used to manage the business. Identify and describe at least three key reports for each of the cycles – the revenue, expenditure and financing cycles for a total of nine reports. You should describe how the report is used, and why it is important in this section. Do not include any screen shots of your reports in this section. You will include one sample report for each of the transaction cycles in the Appendix see below.

acct 424 final exam 495897

1. Whitley Corporation identified four operating segments: Automotive, Electrical, Lawn Equipment, and Sporting Goods. Automotive met the revenue test and the profit or loss test. Electrical met all three tests. Lawn Equipment met only the asset test. Sporting Goods did not meet any of the three tests. Which of these segments must be disclosed separately?

A. Option A
B. Option B
C. Option C
D. Option D
E. Option E
2. In the United States, foreign companies filing annual reports with the SEC that are not prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP must:
A. present financial statements that comply with international GAAP.
B. conform with U.S. GAAP or present a reconciliation to U.S. GAAP.
C. have a demonstrated need for capital to be used for operations in the U.S.
D. use the U.S. dollar as their reporting currency.
E. use IFRS, or use foreign GAAP and provide a reconciliation to U.S. GAAP.
3. When a partnership is insolvent and a partner has a deficit capital balance, that partner is legally required to:
A. declare personal bankruptcy.
B. initiate legal proceedings against the partnership.
C. contribute cash to the partnership.
D. deliver a note payable to the partnership with specific payment terms.
E. None of the above. The partner has no legal responsibility to cover the capital deficit balance.
4. Pigskin Co., a U.S. corporation, sold inventory on credit to a British company on April 8, 2011. Pigskin received payment of 35,000 British pounds on May 8, 2011. The exchange rate was 1 = $1.54 on April 8 and 1 = 1.43 on May 8. What amount of foreign exchange gain or loss should be recognized? (round to the nearest dollar)
A. $10,500 loss
B. $10,500 gain
C. $1,750 loss
D. $3,850 loss
E. No gain or loss should be recognized.

5. Yaro Company owns 30% of the common stock of Dew Co. and uses the equity method to account for the investment. During 2011, Dew reported income of $250,000 and paid dividends of $80,000. There is no amortization associated with the investment. During 2011, how much income should Yaro recognize related to this investment?
A. $24,000.
B. $75,000.
C. $99,000.
D. $51,000.
E. $80,000.
6. In a father-son-grandson combination, which of the following statements is true?
A. Companies that are solely in subsidiary positions must have their realized income computed first in the consolidation process.
B. Father-son-grandson configurations never require consolidation unless one company owns 100% of at least one other member of the combined group.
C. The order of the computation of realized income is not important in the consolidation process.
D. The parent must have its realized income computed first in the consolidation process.
E. None of the above.
7. Which one of the following is a requirement that must be met before an involuntary bankruptcy petition can be filed when there are at least 12 unsecured creditors?
A. The petition must be filed by all creditor(s) to whom the debtor owes at least $13,475.
B. The petition must be signed by creditor(s) with unsecured debts of at least $5,000.
C. The petition must be signed by a majority of the creditor(s).
D. The petition must be signed by creditor(s) to whom the debtor owes more than half of its debts.
E. The petition must be signed by at least three creditors with unsecured debts of at least $13,475.
8. When Danny withdrew from John, Daniel, Harry, and Danny, LLP, he was paid $80,000, although his capital account balance was only $60,000. The four partners shared net income and losses equally. The journal entry to record the effect on John’s capital due to Danny’s withdrawal would include :
A. $6,667 debit to John, Capital.
B. $6,667 credit to John, Capital.
C. $20,000 debit to John, Capital.
D. $5,000 debit to John, Capital.
E. $5,000 credit to John, Capital.
9. Where should a company undergoing reorganization report the gains and losses resulting from the reorganization?
A. On the statement of retained earnings.
B. On the income statement, combined with the gains and losses from operations.
C. On the statement of stockholders’ equity.
D. On the income statement, separate from other gains and losses.
E. On the statement of cash flows.
10. How should the fresh start reorganization value normally be determined?
A. As the sum of current replacement cost of the company’s assets.
B. By discounting future cash flows for the entity that will emerge.
C. As the sum of the historical cost of net assets.
D. As the sum of the net realizable value of identifiable assets.
E. By adjusting current cash flows for the entity as it emerges from reorganization.
11. In reporting consolidated earnings per share when there is a wholly owned subsidiary, which of the following statements is true?
A. Parent company earnings per share equals consolidated earnings per share when the equity method is used.
B. Parent company earnings per share is equal to consolidated earnings per share when the initial value method is used.
C. Parent company earnings per share is equal to consolidated earnings per share when the partial equity method is used and acquisition-date fair value exceeds book value.
D. Parent company earnings per share is equal to consolidated earnings per share when the partial equity method is used and acquisition-date fair value is less than book value.
E. Preferred dividends are not deducted from net income for consolidated earnings per share.
12. When a parent uses the acquisition method for business combinations and sells shares of its subsidiary, which of the following statements is false?
A. If majority control is still maintained, consolidated financial statements are still required.
B. If majority control is not maintained but significant influence exists, the equity method to account for the investment is still used but consolidated financial statements are not required.
C. If majority control is not maintained but significant influence exists, the equity method is still used to account for the investment and consolidated financial statements are still required.
D. If majority control is not maintained and significant influence no longer exists, a prospective change in accounting principle to the fair value method is required.
E. A gain or loss calculation must be prepared if control is lost.
13. The Abrams, Bartle, and Creighton partnership began the process of liquidation with the following balance sheet:

Abrams, Bartle, and Creighton share profits and losses in a ratio of 3:2:5. Liquidation expenses are expected to be $12,000.
If the noncash assets were sold for $234,000, what amount of the loss would have been allocated to Bartle?
A. $43,200.
B. $46,800.
C. $40,000.
D. $42,400.
E. $43,100.
14. What is Form 10-K?
A. A quarterly report filed with the SEC.
B. An annual report filed with the SEC.
C. A semiannual report filed with the SEC.
D. A form filed with the SEC before the company issues stock for the first time.
E. A form filed with the SEC before issuing stocks to acquire another company.

15. Partnerships have alternative legal forms including all of the following except:
A. General Partnership.
B. Limited Partnership.
C. Subchapter S Partnership.
D. Limited Liability Partnership.
E. Limited Liability Company.
16. At the date of an acquisition which is not a bargain purchase, the acquisition method
A. consolidates the subsidiary’s assets at fair value and the liabilities at book value.
B. consolidates all subsidiary assets and liabilities at book value.
C. consolidates all subsidiary assets and liabilities at fair value.
D. consolidates current assets and liabilities at book value, long-term assets and liabilities at fair value.
E. consolidates the subsidiary’s assets at book value and the liabilities at fair value.
17. A company should always use the equity method to account for an investment if:
A. it has the ability to exercise significant influence over the operating policies of the investee.
B. it owns 30% of another company’s stock.
C. it has a controlling interest (more than 50%) of another company’s stock.
D. the investment was made primarily to earn a return on excess cash.
E. it does not have the ability to exercise significant influence over the operating policies of the investee.
18. On January 1, 2011, Pacer Company paid $1,920,000 for 60,000 shares of Lennon Co.’s voting common stock which represents a 45% investment. No allocation to goodwill or other specific account was made. Significant influence over Lennon was achieved by this acquisition. Lennon distributed a dividend of $2.50 per share during 2011 and reported net income of $670,000. What was the balance in the Investment in Lennon Co. account found in the financial records of Pacer as of December 31, 2011?
A. $2,040,500.
B. $2,212,500.
C. $2,260,500.
D. $2,171,500.
E. $2,071,500.
19. Under the equity method of accounting for an investment,
A. The investment account remains at initial value.
B. Dividends received are recorded as revenue.
C. Goodwill is amortized over 20 years.
D. Income reported by the subsidiary increases the investment account.
E. Dividends received increase the investment account.
20. Max, Jones and Waters shared profits and losses 20%, 40%, and 40% respectively and their partnership capital balance is $10,000, $30,000 and $50,000 respectively. Max has decided to withdraw from the partnership. An appraisal of the business and its property estimates the fair value to be $200,000. Land with a book value of $30,000 has a fair value of $45,000. Max has agreed to receive $20,000 in exchange for her partnership interest after revaluation. At what amount should land be recorded on the partnership books?
A. $20,000.
B. $30,000.
C. $45,000.
D. $50,000.
E. $200,000.

21. Sparkman Co. filed a bankruptcy petition and liquidated its noncash assets. Sparkman was paying forty cents on the dollar for unsecured claims. Bailey Co. held a mortgage of $150,000 on land that was sold for $110,000. The total amount of payment that Bailey should have received is calculated to be
A. $110,000.
B. $44,000.
C. $126,000.
D. $150,000.
E. $60,000.
22. Cherryhill and Hace had been partners for several years, and they decided to admit Quincy to the partnership. The accountant for the partnership believed that the dissolved partnership and the newly formed partnership were two separate entities. What method would the accountant have used for recording the admission of Quincy to the partnership?
A. The bonus method.
B. The equity method.
C. The goodwill method.
D. The proportionate method.
E. The cost method.
23. On January 1, 2011, Jordan Inc. acquired 30% of Nico Corp. Jordan used the equity method to account for the investment. On January 1, 2012, Jordan sold two-thirds of its investment in Nico. It no longer had the ability to exercise significant influence over the operations of Nico. How should Jordan have accounted for this change?
A. Jordan should continue to use the equity method to maintain consistency in its financial statements.
B. Jordan should restate the prior years’ financial statements and change the balance in the investment account as if the fair-value method had been used since 2011.
C. Jordan has the option of using either the equity method or the fair-value method for 2011 and future years.
D. Jordan should report the effect of the change from the equity to the fair-value method as a retrospective change in accounting principle.
E. Jordan should use the fair-value method for 2012 and future years but should not make a retrospective adjustment to the investment account.
24. How are assets and liabilities valued on a Statement of Financial Affairs?

A. Entry A.
B. Entry B.
C. Entry C.
D. Entry D.
E. Entry E.

25. The dissolution of a partnership occurs
A. only when the partnership sells its assets and permanently closes its books.
B. only when a partner leaves the partnership.
C. at the end of each year, when income is allocated to the partners.
D. only when a new partner is admitted to the partnership.
E. when there is any change in the individuals who make up the partnership.
26. In a transaction accounted for using the acquisition method where consideration transferred is less than fair value of net assets acquired, which statement is true?
A. Negative goodwill is recorded.
B. A deferred credit is recorded.
C. A gain on bargain purchase is recorded.
D. Long-term assets of the acquired company are reduced in proportion to their fair values. Any excess is recorded as a deferred credit.
E. Long-term assets and liabilities of the acquired company are reduced in proportion to their fair values. Any excess is recorded as an extraordinary gain.

27. Buckette Co. owned 60% of Shuvelle Corp. and 40% of Tayle Corp., and Shuvelle owned 35% of Tayle.
When Buckette prepared consolidated financial statements, it should include
A. Shuvelle but not Tayle.
B. Tayle but not Shuvelle.
C. either Shuvelle or Tayle.
D. Shuvelle and Tayle.
E. neither Shuvelle nor Tayle.
28. Knight Co. owned 80% of the common stock of Stoop Co. Stoop had 50,000 shares of $5 par value common stock and 2,000 shares of preferred stock outstanding. Each preferred share received an annual per share dividend of $10 and is convertible into four shares of common stock. Knight did not own any of Stoop’s preferred stock. Stoop also had 600 bonds outstanding, each of which is convertible into ten shares of common stock. Stoop’s annual after-tax interest expense for the bonds was $22,000. Knight did not own any of Stoop’s bonds. Stoop reported income of $300,000 for 2011.
Stoop’s diluted earnings per share (rounded) is calculated to be
A. $5.62.
B. $3.26.
C. $3.11.
D. $5.03.
E. $4.28.

29. Darron Co. was formed on January 1, 2011 as a wholly owned foreign subsidiary of a U.S. corporation. Darron’s functional currency was the stickle ( ). The following transactions and events occurred during 2011:

What was the amount of the translation adjustment for 2011?
A. $293,479 increase in relative value of net assets.
B. $302,137 increase in relative value of net assets.
C. $300,160 increase in relative value of net assets.
D. $187,418 increase in relative value of net assets.
E. $270,800 increase in relative value of net assets.

30. A company that was to be liquidated had the following liabilities:

Total assets, available to pay liabilities with priority and unsecured creditors, are calculated to be what amount?
A. $ 75,000.
B. $270,000.
C. $275,000.
D. $295,000.
E. $370,000.

31. On December 1, 2011, Keenan Company, a U.S. firm, sold merchandise to Velez Company of Canada for 150,000 Canadian dollars (CAD). Collection of the receivable is due on February 1, 2012. Keenan purchased a foreign currency put option with a strike price of $.97 (U.S.) on December 1, 2011. This foreign currency option is designated as a cash flow hedge. Relevant exchange rates follow:

Compute the fair value of the foreign currency option at December 1, 2011.
A. $6,000.
B. $4,500.
C. $3,000.
D. $7,500.
E. $1,500.
32. Brisco Bricks purchases raw material from its foreign supplier, Bolivian Clay, on May 8. Payment of 2,000,000 foreign currency units (FC) is due in 30 days. May 31 is Brisco’s fiscal year-end. The pertinent exchange rates were as follows:

How much US $ will it cost Brisco to finally pay the payable on June 7?
A. $1,666,667.
B. $2,440,000.
C. $2,520,000.
D. $2,500,000.
E. $2,400,000.
33. Parsons Company acquired 90% of Roxy Company several years ago and recorded goodwill of $200,000 at that date. During 2013 an analysis of the fair value of Roxy’s assets determined an impairment of goodwill in the amount of $50,000.
What journal entry would be made by Parsons regarding the impairment of goodwill?

A. Journal entry A.
B. Journal entry B.
C. Journal entry C.
D. Journal entry D.
E. Journal entry E.

acct 504 495899

(TCO A) Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report:

Income Taxes Payable

$471

Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities

8,109

Cash

8,442

Other non-current Liabilities

10,449

Common Stock

1,760

Receivables

4,812

Other Current Assets

2,973

Long-term Investments

10,448

Other Non-current Assets

3,585

Property, Plant and Equipment

23,486

Trademarks

6,527

Other Intangible Assets

20,810

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

53

Accumulated Depreciation

9,010

Accounts Payable

8,680

Short Term Notes Payable

17,874

Prepaid Expenses

2,781

Other Current Liabilities

796

Long-Term Liabilities

14,736

Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value

11,379

Retained Earnings

55,038

Inventories

3,264

Treasury Stock

35,009

Other information taken from the Annual Report:

Sales Revenue for 2012

$48,017

Cost of Goods Sold for 2012

19,053

Net Income for 2012

9,019

Inventory Balance on 12/31/11

3,092

Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11

4,920

Total Assets on 12/31/11

79,974

Equity Balance on 12/31/11

31,921

Required:
1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.
2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above, calculate the Current Ratioand Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work).

acct 504 final exam solution mcq math problems a guaranteed 495900

Question 1. 1. (TCOs A, B, and C) Which type of corporate information is not available to investors? (Points : 3)

Dividend history

Forecast of cash needs for the upcoming year

Cash provided by investing activities

Beginning cash balance

Question 2. 2. (TCO C) Debt securities sold to investors that must be repaid at a particular date some years in the future are called (Points : 3)

accounts payable.

notes receivable.

taxes payable.

bonds payable.

Question 3. 3. (TCO C) Buying and selling products are examples of (Points : 3)

operating activities.

investing activities.

financing activities.

delivering activities.

Question 4. 4. (TCO A) The cost of assets consumed or services used is also known as (Points : 3)

a revenue.

an expense.

a liability.

an asset.

Question 5. 5. (TCO C) Finley Company recorded the following cash transactions for the year.

Paid $90,000 for salaries

Paid $40,000 to purchase office equipment

Paid $10,000 for utilities

Paid $4,000 in dividends

Collected $150,000 from customers

What was Finley’s net cash provided by operating activities? (Points : 3)

$50,000

$10,000

$60,000

$46,000

Question 6. 6. (TCO A) On a classified balance sheet, prepaid insurance is classified as (Points : 3)

an intangible asset.

property, plant, and equipment.

a current asset.

a long-term investment.

Question 7. 7. (TCO A) An intangible asset (Points : 3)

may have the capacity to earn revenue for its owner.

is worthless because it has no physical substance.

is converted into a tangible asset during the operating cycle.

cannot be reported on the balance sheet because it lacks physical substance.

Question 8. 8. (TCO A) The following are selected account balances on December 31, 2010.

-Land (location of the corporation’s office building): $100,000

-Land (held for future use): 150,000

-Corporate Office Building: 600,000

-Inventory: 200,000

-Equipment: 450,000

-Office Furniture: 100,000

-Accumulated Depreciation: 300,000

What is the total NET amount of property, plant, and equipment that will appear on the balance sheet? (Points : 3)

$1,300,000

$1,100,000

$1,600,000

$950,000

Question 9. 9. (TCO B) For 2010, Landford Corporation reported net income of $30,000; net sales $400,000; and average share outstanding 6,000. There were no preferred stock dividends. What was the 2010 earnings per share? (Points : 3)

$4.66

$0.20

$66.67

$5.00

Question 10. 10. (TCO B) At December 31, 2010, Shorts Company had retained earnings of $2,184,000. During 2010 they issued stock for $98,000, and paid dividends of $34,000. Net income for 2010 was $402,000. The retained earnings balance at the beginning of 2010 was: (Points : 3)

$2,552,000

$1,816,000

$1,914,000

$2,454,000

Question 11. 11. (TCO D) Money collected from customers before the work is done is treated as (Points : 3)

prepaid expenses.

accrued revenues.

unearned revenues.

accrued expenses.

Question 12. 12. (TCO D) An account is a part of the financial information system and is described by all except which one of the following? (Points : 3)

An account has a debit and credit side.

An account has to be in paper form.

An account has a zero or nonzero balance.

An account has a title.

Question 13. 13. (TCO D) Which of the following describes the classification and normal balance of the retained earnings account? (Points : 3)

Asset, debit

Stockholders’ equity, credit

Revenues, credit

Expense, debit

Question 14. 14. (TCO D) In recording an accounting transaction in a double-entry system (Points : 3)

the number of debit accounts must equal the number of credit accounts.

there must always be entries made on both sides of the accounting equation.

the amount of the debits must equal the amount of the credits.

there must only be two accounts affected by any transaction.

Question 15. 15. (TCO D) Which of the following accounts follows the rules of debit and credit in relation to increases and decreases in the opposite manner? (Points : 3)

Prepaid insurance and dividends

Dividends and medical fees earned

Interest payable and common stock

Advertising expense and land

Question 16. 16. (TCO E) An accounting time period that is 1 year in length is called (Points : 3)

a fiscal year.

an interim period.

the time period assumption.

a reporting period.

Question 17. 17. (TCO E) In a service-type business, revenue is considered earned (Points : 3)

at the end of the month.

at the end of the year.

when the service is performed.

when cash is received.

Question 18. 18. (TCO E) Why do generally accepted accounting principles require the application of the revenue recognition principle? (Points : 3)

Failure to apply the revenue recognition principle could lead to an overstatement of revenue.

It is easy to apply the revenue recognition principle because revenue issues are always easy to identify and resolve.

Recording revenue when cash is received is an objective application of the revenue recognition principle.

Accounting software has made the revenue recognition easy to apply.

Question 19. 19. (TCO E) The following is selected information from G Corporation for the fiscal year ending October 31, 2010.

-Cash received from customers: $150,000

-Revenue earned: 175,000

-Cash paid for expenses: 85,000

-Expenses incurred: 100,000

Based on the accrual basis of accounting, what is G Corporation’s net income for the year ending October 31, 2010? (Points : 3)

$57,000

$75,000

$41,000

$85,000

Question 20. 20. (TCO E) Accounts often need to be adjusted because (Points : 3)

there are never enough accounts to record all the transactions.

many transactions affect more than one time period.

there are always errors made in recording transactions.

management can’t decide what they want to report.

Question 21. 21. (TCOs A and B) Which of the following expressions is incorrect? (Points : 3)

Gross profit – operating expenses = net income

Sales – cost of goods sold – operating expenses = net income

Net income + operating expenses = gross profit

Operating expenses – cost of goods sold = gross profit

Question 22. 22. (TCO B) Hunter Company purchased merchandise inventory with an invoice price of $12,000 and credit terms of 2/10, n/30. What is the net cost of the goods if Hunter Company pays within the discount period? (Points : 3)

$11,040

$10,800

$11,760

$12,000

Question 23. 23. (TCOs A and B) Jake’s Market recorded the following events involving a recent purchase of merchandise.

-Received goods for $20,000, terms 2/10, n/30.

-Returned $400 of the shipment for credit.

-Paid $100 freight on the shipment.

-Paid the invoice within the discount period.

As a result of these events, the company’s merchandise inventory (Points : 3)

increased by $19,208.

increased by $19,700.

increased by $19,306.

increased by $19,308.

Question 24. 24. (TCO A) If goods in transit are shipped FOB destination (Points : 3)

the seller has legal title to the goods until they are delivered.

the buyer has legal title to the goods until they are delivered.

the transportation company has legal title to the goods while the goods are in transit.

no one has legal title to the goods until they are delivered.

Question 25. 25. (TCO A) Which statement is false? (Points : 3)

Taking a physical inventory involves actually counting, weighing, or measuring each kind of inventory on hand.

No matter whether a periodic or perpetual inventory system is used, all companies need to determine inventory quantities at the end of each accounting period.

An inventory count is generally more accurate when goods are not being sold or received during the counting.

Companies that use a perpetual inventory system must take a physical inventory to determine inventory on hand on the balance-sheet date and to determine cost of goods sold for the accounting period.

Question 26. 26. (TCO A) Of the following companies, which one would not likely employ the specific identification method for inventory costing? (Points : 3)

Music store specializing in piano sales

Custom jewelry store

Antique shop

Hardware store

Question 27. 27. (TCO A) Which of the following statements is correct with respect to inventories? (Points : 3)

The FIFO method assumes that the costs of the earliest goods acquired are the last to be sold.

It is generally good business management to sell the most recently acquired goods first.

Under FIFO, the ending inventory is based on the latest units purchased.

FIFO seldom coincides with the actual physical flow of inventory.

Question 28. 28. (TCO A) In periods of rising prices, the inventory method which results in the inventory value on the balance sheet that is closest to current cost is the (Points : 3)

FIFO method.

LIFO method.

average cost method.

tax method.

Question 29. 29. (TCO B) In a perpetual inventory system, cost of goods sold is recorded (Points : 3)

on a daily basis.

on a monthly basis.

on an annual basis.

each time a sale occurs.

Question 30. 30. (TCO B) The primary source of revenue for a retailer is (Points : 3)

investment income.

service revenue.

the sale of merchandise.

the sale of plant assets the company owns.

Question 31. 31. (TCO D) An account is an important accounting record where financial information is stored until needed. Briefly explain (1) the nature of an account, (2) the different types of accounts, and (3) the manner in which an account is increased and decreased, and the normal balance of each type of accounts. (Points : 25)

Question 32. 32. (TCOs B and E) The adjusted trial balance of Gertz Company included the following selected accounts.

Debit Credit

Sales $575,000

Sales returns and allowances $ 50,000

Sales discounts 9,500

Cost of goods sold 347,000

Freight-out 2,000

Advertising expense 15,000

Interest expense 19,000

Store salaries expense 74,000

Utilities expense 18,000

Depreciation expense 3,500

Interest revenue 25,000

Instructions:

1.Use the above information to prepare a multiple-step income statement for the year ended December 31, 2010.

2.Calculate the profit margin ratio and gross profit rate. To qualify for full credit, you must state the formula you are using, show your computations, and explain your findings.

(Points : 35)

acct 504 final exam 14 mcqs answered and 2 working problem solutions 495901

ACCT 504 FINAL EXAM

1. Which of the following is an advantage of corporations relative to partnerships and sole proprietorships?
Reduced legal liability for investors
Harder to transfer ownership
Lower taxes
Most common form of organization

2. Dividends _____.
represent an expense and are an operating activity
represent an obligation and are an operating activity
represent a distribution of earnings and are a financing activity
represent an asset and are an investing activity

3. Below is a partial list of account balances for LBJ Company:

Cash $15,000
Prepaid insurance 5,000
Accounts receivable 2,500
Accounts payable 3,000
Notes payable 6,000
Common stock 10,000
Dividends 500
Revenues 15,000
Expenses 13,000

What did LBJ Company show as total debits?

$34,000
$36,000
$70,000
$31,000

4. Under the accrual basis of accounting, revenues are recorded and reported _____.
when companies receive payments for jobs performed or products provided
when companies have provided products or performed services
when companies receive payments prior to providing products or performing services
when companies receive payments after providing products or performing services

5. In a period of increasing prices, which inventory cost flow assumption will result in the highest amount of net income?
LIFO
The average cost method
FIFO
Income tax expense for the period will be the same under all assumptions.

6. Equipment was purchased for $55,000 on January 1, 2011. Freight charges of $2,200 were incurred and there was a cost of $1,800 for installation. It is estimated the equipment will have a $5,500 salvage value at the end of its 5-year useful life. Depreciation expense for 2011 using the straight-line method will be _____.
$10,340
$10,700
$10,260
$9,900

7. Payne Corporation issues 100 twenty-year, 6%, $1,000 bonds dated July 1, 2010, at 94. The journal entry to record the issuance will show a _____.
debit to Cash of $100,000
credit to Bonds Payable of $94,000
credit to Premium on Bonds Payable of $4,000
debit to Discount on Bonds Payable of $6,000

8. Accounts receivable arising from sales to customers amounted to $80,000 and $120,000 at the beginning and end of the year, respectively. Income reported on the income statement for the year was $2,000,000. Exclusive of the effect of other adjustments, the cash flows from operating activities to be reported on the statement of cash flows is _____.

$2,040,000
$2,000,000
$1,200,000
$1,960,000

9. If you are making comparisons within a company to detect changes in financial relationships and significant trends, you are performing what type of analysis?
Industry averages analysis
Intercompany analysis
Common-size analysis
Intracompany analysis

10. The formula for performing horizontal analysis is _____.
(Current Year Amount minus Base Year Amount) divided by Current Year Amount
Base Year Amount divided by Current Year Amount
Current Year Amount minus Base Year Amount
(Current Year Amount minus Base Year Amount) divided by Base Year Amount

11.Horizontal analysis of comparative financial statements includes the _____.
development of common-size statements
calculation of liquidity ratios
calculation of dollar amount changes and percentage changes from the previous year to the current year
evaluation of financial statement data that expresses each item in a financial statement as a percentage of a base amount

12. A common measure of solvency is the _____.
asset turnover
current cash debt coverage ratio
cash debt coverage ratio
current ratio

13. Stockholders would be most interested in which of the following ratios?
Days in inventory
Free cash flow
Current ratio
Average collection period

14. To calculate the market value of a bond, we need to _____.
multiply the bond price times the interest rate
calculate the present value of the principal only
calculate the present value of the interest only
calculate the present value of both the principal and interest payments

15. (TCO A)Use the following partial financial statement information below to calculate the liquidity and profitability ratios. This information can be used to correctly solve each of the ratios below.

Average common shares $10,000 Current liabilities $100,000 Capital expenditures 20,000 Net income 21,000

Cash provided by operations 28,000 Net sales 150,000

Common stock dividends paid 5,000 Total liabilities 105,000 Current assets 150,000 Total assets 175,000 Instructions: Compute the following.

a) Current ratio

b) Working capital

c) Earnings per share

d) Debt-to-total-assets ratio

e) Free cash flow

Must show the formula you are using, show your computations, and explain the meaning of each of your ratio results.

16. (TCOs D, E)Please prepare the following journal entries. Indicate which account should be debited with the abbreviation DR in front of the account name and which account should be credited with the abbreviation CR in front of the account name along with the dollar amount of the debit and credit.

a) Investors invested $600,000 in exchange for 30,000 shares of common stock.

b) Company paid rent of $3,000

c) Company billed $5,000 for services performed

d) Company purchased supplies of $3,000

e) Company received $20,000 for services not yet performed

acct 504 final financial statement analysis project oracle vs microsoft a guaranteed 495902

Your Course Project Financial Statement Analysis Project A Comparative Analysis of Oracle Corporation and Microsoft Corporation

Here is the link for the financial statements for Oracle Corporation for the fiscal year ending 2011. First, select 2011 using the drop-down arrow labeled for Year on the right-hand side of the page, and then select Annual Reports using the drop-down arrow labeled Filing Type on the left-hand side of the page.

You should select the 10k dated 6/28/2011 and choose to download in PDF, Word, or Excel format.

http://www.oracle.com/us/corporate/investor-relations/sec/index.html

Here is the link for the financial statements for Microsoft Corporation for the fiscal year ending 2011. You should select the 10k dated 7/28/2011 and choose to download in Word or Excel format.

http://www.microsoft.com/investor/SEC/default.aspx?year=2011&filing=annual

A sample project template is available for download in Doc Sharing. The sample project compares the ratio performance of Tootsie Roll and Hershey using the 2009 financial statements of Tootsie Roll and Hershey provided in Appendix A and Appendix B of your textbook.

Description

This course contains a Course Project where you will be required to submit one draft of the project at the end of Week 5 and the final completed project at the end of Week 7. Using the financial statements for Oracle Corporation and Microsoft Corporation, respectively, you will calculate and compare the financial ratios listed further down this document for the fiscal year ending 2011 and prepare your comments about the liquidity, solvency, and profitability of the two companies based on your ratio calculations. The entire project will be graded by the instructor at the end of the final submission in Week 7 and one grade will be assigned for the entire project.

Overall Requirements

For the Final Submission:

Your final Excel workbook submission should contain the following. You cannot use any other software but Excel to complete this project. 1. A completed worksheet title page tab which is really a cover sheet with your name, the course, the date, your instructor s name, and the title for the project. 2. A completed worksheet profiles tab which contains a one-paragraph description regarding each company with information about their history, what products they sell, where they are located, etc. 3. All 18 ratios for each company with the supporting calculations and commentary on your worksheet ratio tab. Supporting calculations must be shown either as a formula or as text typed into a different cell. The ratios are listed further down this document. Your comments for each ratio should include more than just a definition of the ratio. You should focus on interpreting each ratio number for each company and support your comments with the numbers found in the ratios. 4. The Summary and Conclusions worksheet tab is an overall comparison of how each company compares in terms of the major category of ratios (liquidity, profitability, and solvency). A nice way to conclude is to state which company you think is the better investment and why. 5. The Bibliography worksheet tab must contain at least your textbook as a reference. Any other information you use to profile the companies should also be cited as a reference. Required Ratios for Final Project Submission 1. Earnings per share 2. Current ratio 3. Gross profit rate 4. Profit margin ratio 5. Inventory turnover ratio 6. Days in inventory 7. Receivables turnover ratio 8. Average collection period 9. Asset turnover ratio 10. Return on assets ratio 11. Debt to total assets ratio 12. Times interest earned ratio 13. Payout ratio 14. Return on common stockholders equity ratio 15. Free cash flow 16. Current cash debt coverage ratio 17. Cash debt coverage ratio 18. Price/earnings ratio [For the purpose of this ratio, for Oracle, use the market price per share on May 30, 2011 and for Microsoft, use the market price per share on June 30, 2011.] The Excel files uploaded in the Dropboxes should not include any unnecessary numbers or information (such as previous years’ ratios, ratios that were not specifically asked for in the project, etc.).

Please upload your final submission to the Week 7 Dropbox by the Sunday ending Week 7. For the Draft:

Create an Excel spreadsheet or use the project template to show your computations for the first 12 ratios listed above. The more you can complete regarding the other requirements, the closer you will be to completion when Week 7 arrives. Supporting calculations must be shown either as a formula or as text typed into a different cell. If you plan on creating your own spreadsheet, please follow the format provided in the Tootsie Roll and Hershey template file.

Please upload your draft submission to the Week 5 Dropbox by the Sunday at the end of Week 5.

Other Helpful information:

If you feel uncomfortable with Excel, you can find many helpful references on Excel by performing a Google search.

The Appendix to Chapter 13 contains ratio calculations and comparison comments related to Kellogg and General Mills so you will likely find this information helpful.

BigCharts.com provides historical stock quotes.

Either APA or MLA style can be used to complete the references on your Bibliography tab. There is a tutorial for APA and MLA style within the Syllabus.

acct 504 final question 495903

ACCT 504 Final Question
Question Detail:

(TCO A) Below you will find selected information (in millions) from Coca-Cola Co. s 2012 Annual Report:

Income Taxes Payable

$471

Short-term Investments and Marketable Securities

8,109

Cash

8,442

Other non-current Liabilities

10,449

Common Stock

1,760

Receivables

4,812

Other Current Assets

2,973

Long-term Investments

10,448

Other Non-current Assets

3,585

Property, Plant and Equipment

23,486

Trademarks

6,527

Other Intangible Assets

20,810

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

53

Accumulated Depreciation

9,010

Accounts Payable

8,680

Short Term Notes Payable

17,874

Prepaid Expenses

2,781

Other Current Liabilities

796

Long-Term Liabilities

14,736

Paid-in-Capital in Excess of Par Value

11,379

Retained Earnings

55,038

Inventories

3,264

Treasury Stock

35,009

Other information taken from the Annual Report:

Sales Revenue for 2012

$48,017

Cost of Goods Sold for 2012

19,053

Net Income for 2012

9,019

Inventory Balance on 12/31/11

3,092

Net Accounts Receivable Balance on 12/31/11

4,920

Total Assets on 12/31/11

79,974

Equity Balance on 12/31/11

31,921

Required:
1. Using the information provided prepare a Balance Sheet. Separate the current assets from non-current assets and provide a total for each. Also separate the current liabilities from the non-current liabilities and provide a total for each.
2. Using the Balance Sheet from your answer above calculate; Current Ratio, Days in Inventory, Average Collection Period, Return on Assets Ratio, Debt to Total Assets and Return on common stockholders equity ratio. (Make sure to show all your work)

(Points : 36)

(TCO B) The following selected data was retrieved from the Wal-Mart, Inc. financial statements for the year ending January 31, 2013:

Accounts Payable

$38,080

Accounts Receivable

6,768

Cash

7,781

Common Stock

3,952

Cost of Goods Sold

352,488

Income Tax Expense

7,981

Interest Expenses

2,064

Membership Revenues

3,048

Net Sales

466,114

Operating, Selling and Administrative Expenses

88,873

Retained Earnings

72,978

Required:

Using the information provided above:
1. Prepare a multiple-step income statement
2. Calculate the Profit Margin, and Gross profit rate for the company. Be sure to provide the formula you are using, show your calculations, and discuss your findings/results.

(Points : 36)

3.(TCO C) Please review the following real-world Hewlett Packard Statement of Cash flows and address the 2 questions below:

Cash flow from operating activities

In millions

In millions

For the year ended 2012

For the year ended 2011

Net (loss) earnings

$(12,650)

$7,074

Depreciation and amortization

5,095

4,984

Impairment of goodwill and purchased intangible assets

18,035

885

Stock-based compensation expense

635

685

Provision for doubtful accounts

142

81

Provision for inventory

277

217

Restructuring charges

2,266

645

Deferred taxes on earnings

(711)

166

Excess tax benefit from stock-based competition

(12)

(163)

Other, net

265

(46)

Accounts and financing receivables

1,269

(227)

Inventory

890

(1,252)

Accounts payable

(1,414)

275

Taxes on earnings

(320)

610

Restructuring

(840)

(1,002)

Other assets and liabilities

(2,356)

(293)

Net cash provided by operating activities

10,571

12,639

Cash flows from investing activities:

Investment in property, plant, and equipment

(3,706)

(4,539)

Proceeds from sale of property, plant, and equipment

617

999

Purchases of available-for-sale securities and other investments

(972)

(96)

Maturities and sales of available-for-sale securities and other investment

662

68

Payments in connection with business acquisitions, net of cash acquired

(141)

(10,480)

Proceeds from business divestiture, net

87

89

Net cash used in investing activities

(3,453)

(13,959)

Cash flow from financing activities:

(Payments) issuance of commercial paper and notes payable, net

(2,775)

(1,270)

Issuance of debt

5,154

11,942

Payment of debt

(4,333)

(2,336)

Issuance of common stock under employee stock plans

716

896

Repurchase of common stock

(1,619)

(10,117)

Excess tax benefit from stock-based compensation

12

163

Cash dividends paid

(1,015)

(844)

Net cash used in financing activities

(3,860)

(1,566)

Increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

3,258

(2,886)

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

8,043

10,929

Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

$11,301

$8,043

Required:

1) Please calculate the percentage increase or decrease in cash for the operating, investing, and financing sections and explain the major reasons for the increase or decrease for each of these sections.

2) Please calculate the free cash flow for 2012 and explain the meaning of this ratio.

(Points : 36)

4.(TCO D) You are CFO of Goforit, Inc., a wholesale distribution company specializing in emerging technologies. Your CEO is a brilliant marketer, but relies on you to explain issues and choices in accounting and finance. She has heard from other members of a CEO organization to which she belongs that a company s net income can vary widely depending on which accounting choices are made from the GAAP menu.

Assuming the goal is to maximize net income, choose an accounting treatment from each of the following scenarios, and explain to your CEO why the choice will produce the desired effect on reported Net Income for the current year. Include in your answer the effect of the choice on both the income statement and balance sheet.

Required:

a. Goforit carries significant electronics inventory in a competitive environment where prices are actually falling. Which inventory valuation method would you choose LIFO, FIFO, or average cost Assume that unit purchases exceed unit sales.

b. Goforit has a large investment in warehouse equipment including conveyor belts, forklifts, and automated packaging systems. Which depreciation method would you choose: Straight line (SL) or double declining balance (DDB)

(Points : 36)

5.(TCO F) Please review the following real-world ratios for Johnson & Johnson and Pfizer for the year ended 2012 and address the 2 questions below.

Ratio Name

Johnson & Johnson

Pfizer

Profit margin

16.1%

24.7%

Inventory turnover ratio

3.1

1.7

Average collection period

59.4 days

69.1 days

Cash debt coverage ratio

.27

.16

Debt to Total assets

46.6%

127.5%

Required:

1) Please explain the meaning of each of the Pfizer ratios above.

2) Please state which company performed better for each ratio.

(Points : 36)

Page 1

1.(TCO A) An advantage of the corporate form of business is that _____. (Points : 5)

2.(TCO A) The Dividends account _____. (Points : 5)

3.(TCOs A, B) Below is a partial list of account balances for Cerner Company:

Cash $5,000
Prepaid insurance 500
Accounts receivable 2,500
Accounts payable 2,000
Notes payable 3,000
Common stock 1,000
Dividends 500
Revenues 15,000
Expenses 12,500

What did Cerner Company show as total credits? (Points : 5)

4.(TCOs B, E) Under the accrual basis of accounting, _____. (Points : 5)

5.(TCO D) Two companies report the same cost of goods available for sale, but each employs a different inventory costing method. If the price of goods has increased during the period, then the company using _____. (Points : 5)

6.(TCO A, E) Equipment was purchased for $17,000 on January 1, 2006. Freight charges amounted to $700 and there was a cost of $2,000 for building a foundation and installing the equipment. It is estimated that the equipment will have a $3,000 salvage value at the end of its 5-year useful life. What is the amount of accumulated depreciation at December 31, 2007, if the straight-line method of depreciation is used? (Points : 5)

7.(TCOs D, G) Lopez Corporation issues 500 ten-year, 8%, $1,000 bonds dated January 1, 2007, at 96. The journal entry to record the issuance will show a _____. (Points : 5)

8.(TCO C) Accounts receivable arising from sales to customers amounted to $40,000 and $35,000 at the beginning and end of the year, respectively. Income reported on the income statement for the year was $110,000. Exclusive of the effect of other adjustments, the cash flows from operating activities to be reported on the statement of cash flows is _____. (Points : 5)

9.(TCO F) One variation of the horizontal analysis is known as _____. (Points : 5)

10.(TCO F) In a common-size balance sheet, the 100% figure is _____. (Points : 5)

11.(TCO F) Which one of the following is not a characteristic generally evaluated in ratio analysis? (Points : 5)

12.(TCO F) A common measure of profitability is the _____. (Points : 5)

13.(TCO F) Return on common stockholder’s equity ratio is affected by _____. (Points : 5)

14.(TCO G) To calculate the market value of a bond, we need to _____. (Points : 5)

acct 504 flower landscaping corporation case study 1 100 correct a 495904

During its first month of operation, the Flower Landscaping Corporation, which specializes in residential landscaping, completed the following transactions:

March 1 Began business by making a deposit in a company bank account of $72,000, in exchange for 7,200 shares of $10 par value common stock.

March 1 Paid the current month’s rent, $4,500.

March 1 Paid the premium on a one-year insurance policy, $3,300.

March 7 Purchased supplies on account from Parkview Company, $900.

March 10 Paid employee salaries, $2,200.

March 14 Purchased equipment from Hammond Company, $9,000. Paid $1,500 down and the balance was placed on account. Payments will be $375.00 per month for twenty months. The first payment is due 4/1.

Note: Use Accounts Payable for the Balance Due.

March 15 Received cash for landscaping revenue for the first half of March, $4,896.

March 19 Made payment on account to Parkview Company, $450.

March 31 Received cash for landscaping revenue for the last half of March, $5,304.

March 31 Declared and paid cash dividend of $1,000.

Requirement 1 : Prepare journal entries to record the March transactions in the General Journal

Requirement 2: Post the March journal entries to the following T-Accounts and compute ending balances.

Requirement 3: Prepare a trial balance for March.

Requirement 4: Prepare adjusting entries using the following information in the General Journal below. Show your calculations!

a) One month’s insurance has expired.

b) The remaining inventory of supplies is $475.

c) The estimated depreciation on equipment is $150.

d) The estimated income taxes are $795.

Requirement 5: Post the adjusting entries to the General Ledger T-accounts and compute adjusted balances. Just add to the balances that are already listed.

Requirement 6: Prepare an Adjusted Trial Balance

Requirement 7: Prepare the financial statements for Flower Landscaping Corporation as of March 31.

Requirement 8: Prepare the closing entries at March 31 in the General Journal .

Requirement 9: Post the closing entries to the General Ledger T-accounts and compute ending balances. Just add to the adjusted balances already listed.

Requirement 10: Prepare a post-closing trial balance as of March 31

acct 505 capital budgeting course b clark paints 495907

The proposed project should be accepted as its Net present value is positive at $33040, which means the present value of cash inflows from the investment is higher than the present value of investment. A positive net present value means that the project’s return exceeds the discount rate. Further the payback period of the project is 3.43 years. It means the amount invested in the project with a life of 5 years, will be recovered out of cash flows from it in 3.43 years.

The Internal rate of return of the project is 17.99%, which is higher than the required rate of return of Clarks Paints. The internal rate of return (IRR) is the rate of return promised by an investment project over its useful life. The IRR is the discount rate that makes the present value of the cash inflows equal to the present value of the cash outflows. If the internal rate of return is equal to or greater than the required rate of return (or cost of capital), then the project is acceptable.

Based on above discussion it is suggested that the project should be accepted.

acct 505 course project a earrings unlimited solution 495908

You have just been hired as a new management trainee by Earrings Unlimited, a distributor of earrings to various retail outlets located in shopping malls across the country. In the past, the company has done very little in the way of budgeting and at certain times of the year has experienced a shortage of cash.

(Cont…)

Suppliers are paid $4 for a pair of earrings. One-half of a month’s purchases is paid for in the month of purchase; the other half is paid for in the following month. All sales are on credit, with no discount, and payable within 15 days. The company has found, however, that only 20% of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale. An additional 70% is collected in the following month, and the remaining 10% is collected in the second month following sale. Bad debts have been negligible.

(Cont…)

Required:

Prepare a master budget for the three-month period ending June 30. Include the following detailed budgets:

1. a. A sales budget by month and in total.

(Cont…)

4. A budgeted balance sheet as of June 30.

acct 505 week 4 midterm exam 495910

1.(TCO A) The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Larop Corporation for the just-completed year:

Sales………………………………………………………………………

$910

Purchases of raw materials…………………………………………

$225

Direct labor……………………………………………………………..

$245

Manufacturing overhead…………………………………………….

$265

Administrative expenses…………………………………………….

$150

Selling expenses……………………………………………………….

$140

Raw materials inventory, beginning……………………………….

$15

Raw materials inventory, ending…………………………………..

$45

Work-in-process inventory, beginning……………………………

$20

Work-in-process inventory, ending……………………………….

$55

Finished goods inventory, beginning……………………………..

$100

Finished goods inventory, ending…………………………………

$135

Required:Prepare a Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured in the text box below.

(Points : 15)

2.(TCO F) The Illinois Company manufactures a product that goes through three processing departments. Information relating to activity in the first department during June is given below.

Percentage Completed
Units Materials Conversion
Work in process, June 1 150,000 75% 55%
Work in process, Jun 30 145,000 85% 75%

The department started 475,000 units into production during the month and transferred 480,000 completed units to the next department.

Required: Compute the equivalent units of production for the first department for June, assuming that the company uses the weighted-average method of accounting for units and costs.

(Points : 20)

3.(TCO B) A tile manufacturer has supplied the following data:

Boxes of tile produced and sold 625,000

Sales revenue $2,975,000

Variable manufacturing expense $1,720,000

Fixed manufacturing expense $790,000

Variable selling and admin expense $152,000

Fixed selling and admin expense $133,000

Net operating income $180,000

Required:

a. Calculate the company’s unit contribution margin.

b. Calculate the company’s unit contribution ratio.

c. If the company increases its unit sales volume by 5% without increasing its fixed expenses, what would the company’s net operating income be?

(Points : 25)

4.

(TCO E) Lehne Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:

Selling price

$ 125

Units in beginning inventory

600

Units oroduced

3000

Units sold

3500

Units in ending inventory

100

Variable costs per unit:

Direct materials

$ 15

Direct labor

$ 50

Variable manufacturing overhead

$ 8

Variable selling and admin

$ 12

Fixed costs:

Fixed manufacturing overhead

$ 75,000

Fixed selling and admin

$ 20,000

The company produces the same number of units every month, although the sales in units vary from month to month. The company’s variable costs per unit and total fixed costs have been constant from month to month.

Required:

a. What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing?
b. What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing?
c. Prepare an income statement for the month using the variable costing method.
d. Prepare an income statement for the month using the absorption costing method

.

(Points : 30)

Midterm page 1

1. (TCO A) Direct material cost is a part of:(Points : 6)

Conversion Cost YES…. Prime Cost NO

Conversion Cost NO…. Prime Cost YES

Conversion Cost YES…. Prime Cost YES

Conversion Cost NO…. Prime Cost NO |

2. (TCO A) A cost incurred in the past that is not relevant to any current decision is classified as a(n): (Points : 6)

period cost.

incremental cost.

opportunity cost.

none of the above. |

3. (TCO A) The cost of lubricants used to grease a production machine in a manufacturing company is an example of a(n): (Points : 6)

period cost

direct material cost

indirect manufacturing cost

direct labor cost

none of the above |

4. (TCO A) When the activity level is expected to increase within the relevant range, what effects would be anticipated with respect to each of the following?

Fixed Cost Per Unit Variable Cost Per Unit(Points : 6)

Increase No Change

Increase Increase

decrease No Change

No Change Increase |

5. (TCO F) Emco Company uses direct labor cost as a basis for computing its predetermined overhead rate. In computing the predetermined overhead rate for last year, the company included in direct labor cost a portion of indirect labor. The effect of this misclassification will be to: (Points : 6)

understate the predetermined overhead rate

overstate the predetermined overhead rate

have no effect on the predetermined overhead rate

cannot be determined from the information given |

6. (TCO F) Which of the following statements about process costing system is incorrect?(Points : 6)

In a process costing system, each processing department has a work in process account

In a process costing system, equivalent units are separately computed for materials and for conversion costs

In a process costing system, overhead can be under- or overapplied just as in job-order costing

In a process costing system, materials costs are traced to units of products |

7. (TCO F) The weighted-average method of process costing differs from the FIFO method of process costing in that the weighted-average method: (Points : 6)

can be used under any cost flow assumption

does not require the use of predetermined overhead rates

keepscosts in the beginning inventory separate from current period costs

does not consider the degree of completion of units in the beginning work in process inventory when computing equivalent units of production |

8. (TCO B) The contribution margin ratio always increases when the:(Points : 6)

break-even point increases

break-even point decreases

variable expenses as a percentage of net sales decreases

variable expenses as a percentage of net sales increases |

9. (TCO B) The unit sales needed to attain the target profit is found by: (Points : 6)

dividing fixed costs by the contribution margin.

adding variable expenses to fixed expenses and dividing the total by the contribution margin.

adding target profit to the fixed expenses and then dividing the total by the unit contribution margin.

adding target profit to the fixed expenses and then dividing the total by the contribution margin. |

10. (TCO E) In an income statement prepared using the variable costing method, variable selling and administrative expenses would: (Points : 6)

be used in the computation of the contribution margin

be used in the computation of net operating income but not in the computation of the contribution margin

be treated differently from variable manufacturing expenses

not be used |

acct 5060 final exam 495911

ACCT 5060
Final Exam

1. The four key behavioral considerations in management accounting and control system design include all of the following EXCEPT:
a. integrating the organization s pay scale
b. using a mix of short- and long-term qualitative and quantitative performance measures
c. empowering employees to be involved in decision making and MACS design
d. developing an appropriate incentive system to reward performance

2. Pressures on managers to act unethically include all of the following EXCEPT:
a. pressures to act in the long-run best interest of the shareholders
b. solicitations for confidential information
c. requests to falsify reports
d. requests to bias information in favor of certain stakeholders

3. To the extent that an ethical hierarchy exists, _____ have the highest authority.
a. societal norms
b. legal rules
c. organizational norms
d. personal norms

4. When a manager s and employee s goals are aligned with organizational goals, it is referred to as:
a. a diagnostic control system
b. the intensity factor
c. goal congruence
d. monitoring

5. The roles of performance measurement systems in organizations include all of the following EXCEPT:
a. motivate employees to help the organization achieve its strategic objectives
b. help managers with resource allocation
c. create value from intangible assets as well as their physical and financial assets
d. communicate the company s strategic objectives

6. The Balanced Scorecard is said to be balanced because it measures:
a. short-term and long-term objectives
b. financial and nonfinancial objectives
c. internal and external objectives
d. All of the above are correct.

7. The ______________ perspective of the Balanced Scorecard asks, At which processes must we excel to satisfy our customers and shareholders
a. learning and growth
b. customer
c. process
d. shareholder

8. The __________ perspective of the Balanced Scorecard focuses on creating value for customers.
a. Value
b. Financial
c. Stakeholder
d. Customer

9. Measures of employees skills and capabilities are included in the ________ perspective of the Balanced Scorecard.
a. financial
b. internal
c. customer
d. learning and growth perspective

10. A chain of cause-and-effect relationships that appropriately link the four
balanced scorecard perspectives is:
a. a high return on investment causes customer loyalty that results in skilled production workers that improve process quality
b. skilled production workers help to produce process quality that results in customer loyalty that helps to increase return on investment
c. customer loyalty results in a high return on investment that results in the ability to attract skilled production workers that improve process quality
d. improved process quality results in a high return on investment that causes customer loyalty that results in the ability to attract skilled production workers

11. Participative budgeting is an approach to budgeting that
a. is top-down in nature.
b. allows top management to set the budget.
c. discourages budget slack.
d. is more likely to motivate people to work towards the organization’s goals t
than a top-down approach.

12. Which of the following is not included in the operating budget?
a. Budgeted balance sheet
b. Sales budget
c. Selling and administrative budget
d. Raw materials purchases budget
13. A primary financial budget is the
a.. Production budget
b. Cash budget
c. Inventory budget
d. Selling and administrative budget

14. Jackel Company produces hand tools. A sales budget for the next four months is as follows: March 10,000 units, April 13,000, May 16,000 and June 21,000. Jackel Company’s ending finished goods inventory policy is 10% of the following month’s sales. What is budgeted finished goods inventory for May?
a. 1,000
b. 1,300
c. 1,600
d. 2,100
15. In which order are the following developed?
A = Production plan B = Materials purchasing plan
C = Demand forecast D = Sales plan
a. first to last: A, B, C, D
b. first to last: C, D, A, B
c. first to last: D, C, B, A
d. first to last: C, A, D, B

THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION APPLIES TO QUESTIONS 16 -18.
For the next six months, Berry Company projects the following information (in
units).

July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.
Retail demand 100 100 150 150 200 200
Dealer demand 200 250 300 350 400 450
Shop capacity 500 500 500 500 500 500
Painting capacity 350 350 350 600 600 600

Demand drives production for that month and cannot be carried over from one month to another. Retail customers are satisfied first.

16. The production for July is projected to be:
a. 100 units
b. 300 units
c. 350 units
d. 500 units

17. The number of dealer units that will be produced and sold in September is:
a. 300 units
b. 350 units
c. 500 units
d. 200 units

18. Painting capacity appears to be:
a. short-term capacity
b. intermediate-term capacity
c. long-term capacity
d. total demand

THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION APPLIES TO QUESTIONS 19 -21
The following information for the second quarter of 2006 pertains to Huffman Company:

Month Sales Purchases
April $45,000 $24,000
May $60,000 $30,000
June $75,000 $42,000

Cash is collected from customers in the following manner:
Month of sale 30%
Month following the sale 70%

40% of purchases are paid for in cash in the month of purchase, and the balance is paid the following month.

Labor costs are 20% of sales. Other operating costs are $22,500 per month (including $6,000 of depreciation). Both of these are paid in the month incurred.

The cash balance on June 1 is $6,000. A minimum cash balance of $4,500 is required at the end of the month. Money can be borrowed in multiples of $1,500.
* No loans outstanding on June 1.

19. How much cash will be collected from customers in June?
a. $64,500
b. $70,500
c. $75,000
d. None of the above is correct.

20. How much cash will be paid to suppliers in June?
a. $34,800
b. $28,000
c. $44,000
d. None of the above is correct.

21. How much cash will be disbursed for labor and operating costs in June?
a. $31,500
b. $35,000
c. $44,200
d. $48,200

22. In __________, as one budget period passes, planners delete that budget period from the master budget and add another one.
a. zero-based budgeting
b. periodic budgeting
c. incremental budgeting
d. continuous budgeting

THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION APPLIES TO QUESTIONS 23 25.
Community Manufacturing Inc., developed the following standard costs for direct material and direct labor for one of their major products, the 30-gallon heavy-duty plastic container.

Standard quantity Standard price
Direct materials 0.20 pounds $25 per pound
Direct labor 0.10 hours $15 per hour

During May, Community produced and sold 10,000 containers using 2,200 pounds of direct materials at an average cost per pound of $24 and 1,050 direct labor hours at an average wage of $14.75 per hour.

23. May s direct material price variance was:
a. $2,800 favorable
b. $2,200 favorable
c. $5,000 unfavorable
d. None of the above is correct.

24. May s direct material quantity variance was:
a. $2,800 unfavorable
b. $2,200 favorable
c. $5,000 unfavorable
d. None of the above is correct.

25. May s direct labor rate variance was:
a. $750.00 unfavorable
b. $262.50 favorable
c. $487.50 favorable
d. indeterminable using the above information

26. Which of the following methods is calculated as annual net income as a percentage of the original investment in assets?
a. Accounting rate of return
b. Payback period
c. Net present value
d. Internal rate of return

27. Sorius Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment. The cost savings from the equipment would result in an annual increase in net cash flows of $100,000. The equipment will have an initial cost of $400,000 and have a 5 year life. If the salvage value of the equipment is estimated to be $75,000, what is the annual net income? Ignore income taxes.
a. $25,000
b. $35,000
c. $165,000
d. $175,000

28. Peet’s Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment. The cost savings from the equipment would result in an annual increase in cash flow of $100,000. The equipment will have an initial cost of $400,000 and have a 5 year life. If the salvage value of the equipment is estimated to be $75,000, what is the payback period? Ignore income taxes.
a. 3.25 years
b. 4.00 years
c. 4.75 years
d. 7.00 years

29. Marchand Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment, which would have an initial cost of $500,000, a 7 year life, and $150,000 salvage value. The increase in cash flow each year of the equipment’s life would be as follows:

What is the payback period?
a. 5.51 years
b. 5.97 years
c. 6.00 years
d. 6.18 years

30. The idea that the value of money changes over time because it can be invested to earn interest is the
a. net present value of money.
b. accounting value of money.
c. time value of money.
d. investment value of money.

31. When making screening decisions using the net present value method, a project is acceptable if
a. the NPV is greater than the hurdle rate.
b. the NPV is greater than the IRR.
c. the NPV is positive.
d. the NPV is negative.

32. Minne Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment. When discounted at a hurdle rate of 8%, the project has a net present value of $24,580. When discounted at a hurdle rate of 10%, the project has a net present value of ($28,940). The internal rate of return of the project is
a. zero.
b. between zero and 8%.
c. between 8% and 10%.
d. greater than 10%.

33. An analysis that reveals whether changing the underlying assumptions would affect the decision is a
a. net present value analysis.
b. internal rate of return analysis.
c. payback period analysis.
d. sensitivity analysis

34. Jonas Inc. is considering whether to lease or purchase a piece of equipment. The total cost to lease the equipment will be $120,000 over its estimated life, while the total cost to buy the equipment will be $75,000 over its estimated life. At Jonas’s required rate of return, the net present value of the cost of leasing the equipment is $73,700 and the net present value of the cost of buying the equipment is $68,000. Based on financial factors, Jonas should
a. lease the equipment, saving $45,000 over buying.
b. buy the equipment, saving $45,000 over leasing.
c. lease the equipment, saving $5,700 over buying.
d. buy the equipment, saving $5,700 over leasing.

35. In a decentralized organization:
a. local-division managers must receive higher approval for most business decisions
b. company-wide standard operating procedures are common
c. local-division managers have an opportunity to gain decision-making experience
d. decisions are made by senior executives

36. All of the following are true of responsibility centers EXCEPT that they:
a. operate like a small business
b. promote the interests of the larger organization
c. coordinate activities with other responsibility centers
d. are best used in a centralized organization

37. Segment margin includes:
a. all costs traceable to the segment
b. the segment s share of allocated corporate costs
c. the segment s share of allocated unavoidable costs
d. All of the above are correct.

38 The primary goal of transfer pricing is to:
a. motivate the decision maker to act in the organization s best interests
b. obtain a high transfer price for the supplying unit
c. obtain a high transfer price for the receiving unit
d. agree on a price for external sales

39. Return on investment (ROI) can be increased by:
a. increasing sales
b. decreasing operating assets
c. decreasing operating income
d. decreasing asset turnover

40. Randall Company makes and distributes outdoor play equipment. Last year sales were $2,400,000, operating income was $600,000, and the assets used were $3,000,000.The return on investment (ROI) is:
a. 20%
b. 80%
c. 25%
d. 125%

acct 557 chapter 12 quiz 495913

Acct 557 Chapter 12 quiz
Multiple Choice Question 92

On January 1, 2013, Audrey Corp. paid $800,000 for 100,000 shares of Off Company’s common stock, which represents 40% of Off’s outstanding common stock. Off reported net income of $200,000 and paid cash dividends of $60,000 during 2013. Audrey should report the investment in Off Company on its December 31, 2013, balance sheet at:

$856,000

$744,000

$824,000

$800,000
Multiple Choice Question 90
On August 1, Mistery Company buys 2,000 shares of ABC common stock for $70,000 cash plus brokerage fees of $2,200. On December 1, the stock investments are sold for $76,000 in cash. Which of the following are the correct journal entries to record for the purchase and sale of the common stock?

Aug. 1 Cash 72,200
Stock Investments 72,200
Dec. 1 Cash 76,000
Stock Investments 72,200
Gain on Sale of Stock Investments 3,800

Aug. 1 Stock Investments 72,200
Cash 72,200
Dec. 1 Stock Investments 76,000
Cash 72,200
Gain on Sale of Stock Investments 3,800

Aug. 1 Stock Investments 72,200
Cash 72,200
Dec. 1 Cash 76,000
Stock Investments 72,200
Gain on Sale of Stock Investments 3,800

Aug. 1 Cash 72,200
Stock Investments 72,200
Dec. 1 Stock Investments 76,000
Cash 72,200
Gain on Sale of Stock Investments 3,800

Multiple Choice Question 91

Laramie industries owns 45% of McCook Company. For the current year, McCook reports net income of $250,000 and declares and pays a $60,000 cash dividend. Which of the following correctly presents the journal entries to record Laramie’s equity in McCook’s net income and the receipt of dividends from McCook?

Dec. 31 Revenue from Stock Investments 112,500
Stock Investments 112,500
Dec. 31 Stock Investments 27,000
Cash 27,000

Dec. 31 Stock Investments 85,500
Revenue from Stock Investments 85,500

Dec. 31 Stock Investments 112,500
Revenue from Stock Investments 112,500
Dec. 31 Cash 27,000
Stock Investments 27,000

Dec. 31 Stock Investments 112,500
Revenue from Stock Investments 112,500
Dec. 31 Cash 60,000
Stock Investments 60,000

Multiple Choice Question 60

Tan Company had these transactions pertaining to stock investments:

Feb. 1 Purchased 3,000 shares of Norton Company (10%) for $49,800 cash plus brokerage fees of $1,200.
June 1 Received cash dividends of $3 per share on Norton stock.
Oct. 1 Sold 1,200 shares of Norton stock for $24,000 less brokerage fees of $600.

The entry to record the receipt of the dividends on June 1 would include a

debit to Stock Investments for $9,000.

credit to Dividend Revenue for $9,000.

credit to Stock Investments for $9,000.

debit to Dividend Revenue for $9,000.
Multiple Choice Question 78

Under the equity method, the Stock Investments account is increased when the

stock investment is sold at a gain.

investee company pays a dividend.

investee company reports net income.

investee company reports a loss.
Multiple Choice Question 125

Gorman Corporation has the following trading portfolio of stock investments as of December 31, 2013.
Security Cost Fair Value
A $21,000 $ 19,000
B 19,000 25,000
C 37,000 31,000
$77,000 $75,000
On January 22, 2014, Gorman Corporation sold security C for $32,000. Assuming that Gorman made the proper adjustments when closing its books on December 31, 2013, the journal entry for the 2014 sale would include a

credit to Fair Value Adjustment Trading for $32,000.

credit to Unrealized Gain Income for $1,000.

debit to Unrealized Loss Income for $5,000.

debit to Loss on Sale of Stock Investments for $5,000.
Multiple Choice Question 99

A company that owns more than 50% of the common stock of another company is known as the

parent company.

subsidiary company.

management company.

charge company.
Multiple Choice Question 37

A typical investment to house excess cash until needed is

stocks of companies in a related industry.

debt securities.

low-risk, highly liquid securities.

stock securities.
Multiple Choice Question 146

Securities bought and held primarily for sale in the near term to generate income on short-term price differences are

non-trading securities.

trading securities.

never-sell securities.

held-for-collection securities.
Multiple Choice Question 81

Revenue is recognized when cash dividends are received under

the controlling interest method.

both the cost and equity methods.

the cost method.

the equity method.
Multiple Choice Question 130

Which one of the following would not be classified as a short-term investment?

Short-term paper

Marketable stock securities

Equity method investments

Marketable debt securities
Multiple Choice Question 85

If a company acquires a 40% common stock interest in another company,

the ability to exert significant influence over the activities of the investee does not exist.

all influence is classified as controlling.

the cost method is usually applicable.

the equity method is usually applicable.
Multiple Choice Question 118

At the end of the first year of operations, the total cost of the trading securities portfolio is $244,000. Total fair value is $250,000. The financial statements should show

an addition to an asset of $6,000 and an unrealized gain of $6,000 in the stockholders’ equity section.

an addition to an asset of $6,000 in the current assets section and a realized gain of $6,000 in Other revenues and gains.

an addition to an asset of $6,000 and a realized gain of $6,000.

an addition to an asset of $6,000 in the current assets section and an unrealized gain of $6,000 in Other revenues and gains.
Multiple Choice Question 113

The balance in the Unrealized Loss Equity account will

appear on the balance sheet as a contra asset.

appear as a deduction in the stockholders’ equity section.

appear on the income statement under Other Expenses and Losses.

not be shown on the financial statements until the securities are sold
Multiple Choice Question 63

Nickel Company owns 30% interest in the stock of Finn Corporation. During the year, Finn pays $25,000 in dividends, and reports $200,000 in net income. Nickel Company’s investment in Finn will increase by

$52,500.

$25,000.

$67,500.

$60,000.

acct 557 chapter 12 quiz solution 495914

Acct 557 Chapter 12 quiz
Multiple Choice Question 92

On January 1, 2013, Audrey Corp. paid $800,000 for 100,000 shares of Off Company’s common stock, which represents 40% of Off’s outstanding common stock. Off reported net income of $200,000 and paid cash dividends of $60,000 during 2013. Audrey should report the investment in Off Company on its December 31, 2013, balance sheet at:

$856,000

$744,000

$824,000

$800,000
Multiple Choice Question 90
On August 1, Mistery Company buys 2,000 shares of ABC common stock for $70,000 cash plus brokerage fees of $2,200. On December 1, the stock investments are sold for $76,000 in cash. Which of the following are the correct journal entries to record for the purchase and sale of the common stock?

Aug. 1 Cash 72,200
Stock Investments 72,200
Dec. 1 Cash 76,000
Stock Investments 72,200
Gain on Sale of Stock Investments 3,800

Aug. 1 Stock Investments 72,200
Cash 72,200
Dec. 1 Stock Investments 76,000
Cash 72,200
Gain on Sale of Stock Investments 3,800

Aug. 1 Stock Investments 72,200
Cash 72,200
Dec. 1 Cash 76,000
Stock Investments 72,200
Gain on Sale of Stock Investments 3,800

Aug. 1 Cash 72,200
Stock Investments 72,200
Dec. 1 Stock Investments 76,000
Cash 72,200
Gain on Sale of Stock Investments 3,800

Multiple Choice Question 91

Laramie industries owns 45% of McCook Company. For the current year, McCook reports net income of $250,000 and declares and pays a $60,000 cash dividend. Which of the following correctly presents the journal entries to record Laramie’s equity in McCook’s net income and the receipt of dividends from McCook?

Dec. 31 Revenue from Stock Investments 112,500
Stock Investments 112,500
Dec. 31 Stock Investments 27,000
Cash 27,000

Dec. 31 Stock Investments 85,500
Revenue from Stock Investments 85,500

Dec. 31 Stock Investments 112,500
Revenue from Stock Investments 112,500
Dec. 31 Cash 27,000
Stock Investments 27,000

Dec. 31 Stock Investments 112,500
Revenue from Stock Investments 112,500
Dec. 31 Cash 60,000
Stock Investments 60,000

Multiple Choice Question 60

Tan Company had these transactions pertaining to stock investments:

Feb. 1 Purchased 3,000 shares of Norton Company (10%) for $49,800 cash plus brokerage fees of $1,200.
June 1 Received cash dividends of $3 per share on Norton stock.
Oct. 1 Sold 1,200 shares of Norton stock for $24,000 less brokerage fees of $600.

The entry to record the receipt of the dividends on June 1 would include a

debit to Stock Investments for $9,000.

credit to Dividend Revenue for $9,000.

credit to Stock Investments for $9,000.

debit to Dividend Revenue for $9,000.
Multiple Choice Question 78

Under the equity method, the Stock Investments account is increased when the

stock investment is sold at a gain.

investee company pays a dividend.

investee company reports net income.

investee company reports a loss.
Multiple Choice Question 125

Gorman Corporation has the following trading portfolio of stock investments as of December 31, 2013.
Security Cost Fair Value
A $21,000 $ 19,000
B 19,000 25,000
C 37,000 31,000
$77,000 $75,000
On January 22, 2014, Gorman Corporation sold security C for $32,000. Assuming that Gorman made the proper adjustments when closing its books on December 31, 2013, the journal entry for the 2014 sale would include a

credit to Fair Value Adjustment Trading for $32,000.

credit to Unrealized Gain Income for $1,000.

debit to Unrealized Loss Income for $5,000.

debit to Loss on Sale of Stock Investments for $5,000.
Multiple Choice Question 99

A company that owns more than 50% of the common stock of another company is known as the

parent company.

subsidiary company.

management company.

charge company.
Multiple Choice Question 37

A typical investment to house excess cash until needed is

stocks of companies in a related industry.

debt securities.

low-risk, highly liquid securities.

stock securities.
Multiple Choice Question 146

Securities bought and held primarily for sale in the near term to generate income on short-term price differences are

non-trading securities.

trading securities.

never-sell securities.

held-for-collection securities.
Multiple Choice Question 81

Revenue is recognized when cash dividends are received under

the controlling interest method.

both the cost and equity methods.

the cost method.

the equity method.
Multiple Choice Question 130

Which one of the following would not be classified as a short-term investment?

Short-term paper

Marketable stock securities

Equity method investments

Marketable debt securities
Multiple Choice Question 85

If a company acquires a 40% common stock interest in another company,

the ability to exert significant influence over the activities of the investee does not exist.

all influence is classified as controlling.

the cost method is usually applicable.

the equity method is usually applicable.
Multiple Choice Question 118

At the end of the first year of operations, the total cost of the trading securities portfolio is $244,000. Total fair value is $250,000. The financial statements should show

an addition to an asset of $6,000 and an unrealized gain of $6,000 in the stockholders’ equity section.

an addition to an asset of $6,000 in the current assets section and a realized gain of $6,000 in Other revenues and gains.

an addition to an asset of $6,000 and a realized gain of $6,000.

an addition to an asset of $6,000 in the current assets section and an unrealized gain of $6,000 in Other revenues and gains.
Multiple Choice Question 113

The balance in the Unrealized Loss Equity account will

appear on the balance sheet as a contra asset.

appear as a deduction in the stockholders’ equity section.

appear on the income statement under Other Expenses and Losses.

not be shown on the financial statements until the securities are sold
Multiple Choice Question 63

Nickel Company owns 30% interest in the stock of Finn Corporation. During the year, Finn pays $25,000 in dividends, and reports $200,000 in net income. Nickel Company’s investment in Finn will increase by

$52,500.

$25,000.

$67,500.

$60,000.

acct 753 chapter 25 495916

Chapter 25 – Transfer Taxes and Wealth Planning

Discussion Questions:

1. [LO 1] Identify the features common to the gift tax formula and the estate tax formula.

2. [LO 1] Explain why Congress felt it necessary to enact a gift tax to complement the estate tax.

Without a gift tax, the estate tax was easily avoided by making intervivos gifts including deathbed transfers.

3. [LO 1] Describe the unified credit and the purpose it serves in the gift and estate tax.

4. [LO 1] Fred is retired and living on his pension. He has accumulated almost $1 million of property he would like to leave to his children. However, Fred is afraid much of his wealth will be eliminated by the federal estate tax. Explain whether this fear is well founded.

5. [LO 2] Explain why the gross estate includes the value of certain property transferred by the decedent at death, such as property held in joint tenancy with the right of survivorship, even though this property is not subject to probate.

6. [LO 2] Identify the factors that determine the proportion of the value of property held in joint tenancy with the right of survivorship that will be included in a decedent s gross estate.

7. [LO 2] Define fair market value for transfer tax purposes.

8. [LO 2] {Research} Harold owns a condo in Hawaii that he plans on using for the rest of his life. However, to ensure his sister Maude will own the property after his death, Harold deeded the remainder of the property to her. He signed the deed transferring the remainder in July 2010 when the condo was worth $250,000 and his life estate was worth $75,000. In January 2010 Harold died, at which time the condo was worth $300,000. What amount, if any, is included in Harold s gross estate Explain.

. [LO 2] Paul is a widower with several grown children. He is considering transferring his residence into a trust for his children but retains a life estate in it. Comment on whether this plan will prevent the value of the home from being included in Paul s gross estate when he dies.

10. [LO 2] Explain how a remainder and an income interest are valued for transfer tax purposes.

11. [LO 2] Explain why the fair market value of a life estate is more difficult to estimate than an income interest.

12. [LO 2] Describe a reason why transfers of terminable interests should not qualify for the marital deduction.

13. [LO 2] True or false Including taxable gifts when calculating the estate tax subjects these transfers to double taxation. Explain.

14. [LO 2] People sometimes confuse the unified credit with the exemption equivalent. Describe how these terms differ.

acct for accountinexpert 495917

Muldur Corporation’s comparative balance sheets are presented below.

MULDUR CORPORATION
Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31

2012

2011

Cash $ 15,200 $ 17,700
Accounts receivable 25,200 22,300
Investments 20,000 16,000
Equipment 60,000 70,000
Accumulated depreciation

(14,000)

(10,000)

Total

$106,400

$116,000

Accounts payable $ 14,600 $ 11,100
Bonds payable 10,000 30,000
Common stock 50,000 45,000
Retained earnings

31,800

29,900

Total

$106,400

$116,000

Additional information:

  1. Net income was $18,300. Dividends declared and paid were $16,400.
  2. Equipment which cost $10,000 and had accumulated depreciation of $1,200 was sold for $3,300.
  3. All other changes in noncurrent account balances had a direct effect on cash flows, except the change in accumulated depreciation.
  4. 1 Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2012 using the indirect method 2 prepare Compute free cash flow.

acct help 495918

Luv Company enters into a non-cancelable lease agreement with Soap Company. The details of the agreement are as follows:

Inception date

Jan 1, 2011

Annual lease payment at beginning of each year, starting Jan 1, 2011

$18,000

Bargain-purchase option at the end of the lease

$4,000

Lease term

5 years

Economic life of leased equipment

5 years

Lessor s cost

$60,000

Fair value of asset

$70,000

Lessor s implicit rate

10%

Lessee s implicit rate

10%

Present value of annuity due i=10%, n=5 periods

4.16987

Present value i=10%, n=5 years

0.621

Soap company will receive the lease payments. The collectability of the lease payments is reasonably predictable and there are no uncertainties surrounding the costs to be incurred by Soap company the lessor.

  • For Luv company the lessee what is the nature of the lease? What tests does it meet?
  • For Soap company the lessor what is the nature of the lease?
  • Prepare the amortization schedule for Luv Company for the 5-year term.
  • Prepare the journal entries on the books of Luv company the lessee for recording the lease and the recording of lease payment and expenses for 2011.

acct help 1 hour time limit 495919

1.(TCO F) Sandler Corporation bases its predetermined overhead rate on the estimated machine hours for the upcoming year. Data for the upcoming year appear below.

Estimated machine hours 73,000
Estimated variable manufacturing overhead $3.49 per machine hour
Estimated total fixed manufacturing overhead $838,770

Required:

Compute the company’s predetermined overhead rate. (Points : 25)

Question 2.2.(TCO C) The selling and administrative expense budget of Fenley Corporation is based on the number of units sold, which are budgeted to be 2,500 units in January. The variable selling and administrative expense is $4.40 per unit. The budgeted fixed selling and administrative expense is $35,750 per month, which includes depreciation of $4,000. The remainder of the fixed selling and administrative expense represents current cash flows.

Required:

Prepare the selling and administrative expense budget for January. (Points : 25)

1.(TCO C) The following overhead data are for a department of a large company.

Actual costs Static
Incurred budget

Activity level (in units) 360 340

Variable costs:
Indirect materials $4,182 $4,148
Electricity $2,536 $2,414
Fixed costs:
Administration $6,540 $6,500
Rent $6,310 $6,400

Required: Construct a flexible budget performance report that would be useful in assessing how well costs were controlled in this department.

(Points : 30)

Question 2.2.(TCO D) Lindon Company uses 5,000 units of Part X each year as a component in the assembly of one of its products. The company is presently producing Part X internally at a total cost of $80,000 as follows:

Direct materials………………………………………..$18,000

Direct labor………………………………………………20,000

Variable manufacturing overhead………………. 12,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead………………….. 30,000

Total costs……………………………………………….80,000

An outside supplier has offered to provide Part X at a price of $13 per unit. If Lindon stops producing the part internally, one third of the manufacturing overhead would be eliminated.

Required:Prepare a make-or-buy analysis showing the annual advantage or disadvantage of accepting the outside supplier’s offer.

(Points : 30)

Question 3.3.(TCO E) Duif Company’s absorption costing income statement for the last year of operations is presented below.

Sales…………………………………………………$70,000
Less cost of goods sold:
Beginning inventory………………………………………. 0
Add cost of goods manufactured………………48,000
Goods available for sale………………………….48,000
Less ending inventory………………………………6,000
Cost of goods sold………………………………..42,000
Gross margin……………………………………….28,000
Less selling and admin. expenses……………..25,000
Net operating income…………………………..$ 3,000

Data on units produced and sold for the year are given below.

Units in beginning inventory……………………………..0
Units produced……………………………………….8,000
Units sold………………………………………………7,000

Fixed factory overhead totaled $16,000 for the year. This overhead was applied to products at a rate of $2 per unit. Variable selling and administrative expenses were $3 per unit sold.

Required: Prepare a new income statement for the year using variable costing. Comment on the differences between the absorption costing and the variable costing income statements.

(Points : 30)

Question 4.4.(TCO A) The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of Karmana Corporation for the just-completed year.
Sales ………………………………………………………$950
Raw materials inventory, beginning …………………$10
Raw materials inventory, ending …………………….$30
Purchases of raw materials ………………………….$120
Direct labor ………………………………………………$200
Manufacturing overhead ……………………………..$230
Administrative expenses ……………………………..$100
Selling expenses ………………………………………..$140
Work-in-process inventory, beginning ………………$70
Work-in-process inventory, ending ………………….$40
Finished goods inventory, beginning ………………$100
Finished goods inventory, ending ……………………$80

Use these data to prepare (in thousands of dollars) a schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured and a Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold for the year. In addition, elaborate on the relationship between these schedules as they relate to the flow of product costs in a manufacturing company. (Points : 25)

1.(TCO F) Loxham Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below:

Work in process, beginning:

Units in beginning work in process inventory 400

Materials costs $6,900

Conversion costs $2,500

Percent complete for materials 80%

Percent complete for conversion 15%

Units started into production during the month 6,000

Units transferred to the next department during the month 5,400

Materials costs added during the month $112,500

Conversion costs added during the month $210,300

Ending work in process:

Units in ending work-in-process inventory 1,000

Percentage complete for materials 80%

Percentage complete for conversion 30%

Required: Calculate the equivalent units for materials for the month in the first processing department.

(Points : 25)

Question 2.2.(TCO B) Heckaman Corporation produces and sells a single product. Data concerning that product appear below.

Selling price per unit $230.00
Variable expense per unit $112.70
Fixed expense per month $239,292

Required:

Determine the monthly break-even in unit sales. Show your work! (Points : 25)

Question 3.3.(TCO G) (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Five years ago, the City of Paranoya spent $30,000 to purchase a computerized radar system called W.A.S.T.E. (Watching Aliens Sent To Earth). Recently, a sales rep from W.A.S.T.E. Radar Company told the city manager about a new and improved radar system that can be purchased for $50,000. The rep also told the manager that the company would give the city $10,000 in trade on the old system. The new system will last 10 years. The old system will also last that long but only if a $4,000 upgrade is done in 5 years. The manager assembled the following information to use in the decision regarding which system is more desirable:

Old System

New System

Cost of radar system…………………..

$30,000

$50,000

Current salvage value………………….

$10,000

Salvage value in 10 years……………..

$5,000

$8,000

Annual operating costs………………..

$34,000

$29,000

Upgrade required in 5 years…………

$4,000

Discount rate……………………………..

14%

14%

Required:

a.What is the City of Paranoya’s net present value for the decision described above? Use the total cost approach.

b.Should the City of Paranoya purchase the new system or keep the old system?

(Points : 35)

acct help 495920

Capital Budgeting Decision

Here is Part B:

Clark Paints: The production department has been investigating possible ways to trim total production costs. One possibility currently being examined is to make the paint cans instead of purchasing them. The equipment needed would cost $200,000 with a disposal value of $40,000 and would be able to produce 5,500,000 cans over the life of the machinery. The production department estimates that approximately 1,100,000 cans would be needed for each of the next five years.

The company would hire three new employees. These three individuals would be full-time employees working 2,000 hours per year and earning $12.00 per hour. They would also receive the same benefits as other production employees, 18% of wages in addition to $2,500 of health benefits.

It is estimated that the raw materials will cost 25 per can and that other variable costs would be 5 per can. Since there is currently unused space in the factory, no additional fixed costs would be incurred if this proposal is accepted.

It is expected that cans would cost 45 per can if purchased from the current supplier. The company’s minimum rate of return (hurdle rate) has been determined to be 12% for all new projects, and the current tax rate of 35% is anticipated to remain unchanged. The pricing for a gallon of paint as well as number of units sold will not be affected by this decision. The unit-of-production depreciation method would be used if the new equipment is purchased.

Required:

1. Based on the above information and using Excel, calculate the following items for this proposed equipment purchase:

    • Annual cash flows over the expected life of the equipment
    • Payback period
    • Annual rate of return
    • Net present value
    • Internal rate of return

2. Would you recommend the acceptance of this proposal? Why or why not. Prepare a short double spaced Word paper elaborating and supporting your answer.

acct 220 495870

Acct220: Principles of Accounting I

Problem 1: 15% points:

The account balances appearing on the trial balance (below) were taken from the general ledger of Flip’s Copy Shop at June 30, 2012.

Additional information for the month of June which has not yet been recorded in the accounts is as follows:

(a) A physical count of supplies indicates $300 on hand at June 30.

(b) The amount of insurance that expired in the month of June was $200.

(c) Depreciation on equipment for June was $400.

(d) Rent owed on the copy shop for the month of June was $600 but will not be paid until July.

Flip s Copy Shop

Trial Balance

June 30, 2012

Account Titles

Debit

Credit

Cash

$1,000

Supplies

1,100

Prepaid Insurance

2,200

Equipment

24,000

Accum. Depreciation, Equipment

$4,500

Accounts Payable

2,400

Notes Payable

4,000

Flip s Capital

15,300

Flip s Drawings

2,400

Service Revenue

4,900

Utilities Expense

400

Totals

$31,100

$31,100

Instructions:

a. Prepare in journal form, without explanations, the end of month adjusting entries for Flip’s opy Shop for the month of June.

b. Prepare a partial adjusted trial balance for the accounts provided.

c. Prepare in journal form, without explanations, the end of month closing entries for Flip’s Copy Shop for the month of June.

Problem 3: 15% points:

The following items were taken from the December 31, 2013 adjusted trial balance of Flip Company. (All balances are normal.)

Mortgage payable $ 1,443 Accumulated depreciation 3,655

Prepaid expenses 880 Accounts payable 1,444

Equipment 11,000 Notes payable after 2015 1,200

Long-term investments 1,100 Flip s capital 11,480

Short-term investments 3,690 Accounts receivable 1,696

Notes payable in 2014 1,000 Inventories 1,756

Cash 2,100 Service Revenue 9,000

Rent Expense 1,000 Wages Expense 5,000

Utilities Expense 1,000

Instructions:Prepare a classified balance sheet in good form as of December 31, 2013.

Problem 4: 10% points:

Prepare journal entries to record the following transactions entered into by Flip Company:

2012

June 1 Accepted a $10,000, 12%, 1-year note from Flop as full payment on her account.

Nov. 1 Sold merchandise on account to Flap, Inc. for $12,000, terms 2/10, n/30.

Nov. 5 Flap, Inc. returned merchandise worth $500.

Nov. 9 Received payment in full from Flap, Inc.

Dec. 31 Accrued interest on Flop’s note.

2013

June 1 Flop honored her promissory note by sending the face amount plus interest. No interest has been accrued in 2013

Problem 5: 10% points:

Flip Company purchased equipment on January 1, 2011 for $90,000. It is estimated that the equipment will have a $5,000 salvage value at the end of its 5-year useful life. It is also estimated that the equipment will produce 100,000 units over its 5-year life

Instructions

Answer the following independent questions.

1. Compute the amount of depreciation expense for the year ended December 31, 2011, using the straight-line method of depreciation.

2. If 16,000 units of product are produced in 2011 and 24,000 units are produced in 2012, what is the book value of the equipment at December 31, 2012? The company uses the units-of-activity depreciation method.

3. If the company uses the double-declining-balance method of depreciation, what is the balance of the Accumulated Depreciation Equipment account at December 31, 2013?

Problem 6: 10% points:

Flip earns a salary of $7,500 per month during the year. FICA taxes are 8% on the first $100,000 of gross earnings. Federal unemployment insurance taxes are 6.2% of the first $7,000; however, a credit is allowed equal to the state unemployment insurance taxes of 5.4% on the $7,000. During the year, $25,600 was withheld for federal income taxes and $5,700 was withheld for state income taxes.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a journal entry summarizing the payment of Flip s total salary during the year.

(b) Prepare a journal entry summarizing the employer payroll tax expense on Flip s salary for the year.

(c) Determine the cost of employing Flip for the year.

acct 221 questions 495871

Danielle Manning, D.D.S., opened a dental practice on January 1, 2012. During the first month of operations, the following transactions occurred.

1.

Performed services for patients who had dental plan insurance. At January 31, $817 of such services was earned but not yet recorded.

2.

Utility expenses incurred but not paid prior to January 31 totaled $636.

3.

Purchased dental equipment on January 1 for $80,000, paying $24,700 in cash and signing a $55,300, 3-year note payable. (a) The equipment depreciates $400 per month. (b) Interest is $553 per month.

4.

Purchased a one-year malpractice insurance policy on January 1 for $24,828.

5.

Purchased $1,628 of dental supplies. On January 31, determined that $477 of supplies were on hand.

Prepare the adjusting entries on January 31. Account titles are: Accumulated Depreciation Equipment, Depreciation Expense, Service Revenue, Accounts Receivable, Insurance Expense, Interest Expense, Interest Payable, Prepaid Insurance, Supplies, Supplies Expense, Utilities Expense and Accounts Payable.

Selected accounts for Brianna s Salon are presented below. All June 30 postings are from closing entries.

Salaries and Wages Expense
6/10 2,711 6/30 8,443
6/28 5,732
Supplies Expense
6/12 840 6/30 1,694
6/24 854
Service Revenue
6/30 17,961 6/15 9,299
6/24 8,662
Rent Expense
6/1 2,743 6/30 2,743
Owner s Capital
6/30 2,009 6/1 11,915
6/30 5,081
Bal. 14,987
Owner s Drawings
6/13 1,165 6/30 2,009
6/25 844

acct 2302 managerial accounting chapter 22 ex 22 11 and p 22 5a 495873

Exercise 22-11A Determining transfer prices LO C2

The Trailer department of Baxter Bicycles makes bike trailers that attach to bicycles and can carry children or cargo. The trailers have a retail price of $98 each. Each trailer incurs $37 of variable manufacturing costs. The Trailer department has capacity for 26,000 trailers per year, and incurs fixed costs of $440,000 per year.

Required:
1.

Assume the Assembly division of Baxter Bicycles wants to buy 5,900 trailers per year from the Trailer division. If the Trailer division can sell all of the trailers it manufactures to outside customers, what price should be used on transfers between Baxter Bicycle s divisions?

2.

Assume the Trailer division currently only sells 10,600 trailers to outside customers, and the Assembly division wants to buy 5,900 trailers per year from the Trailer division. What is the range of acceptable prices that could be used on transfers between Baxter Bicycle s divisions?

Problem 22-5A Manufacturing cycle time and efficiency LO A4

Oakwood Company produces maple bookcases to customer order. It received an order from a customer to produce 5,000 bookcases. The following information is available for the production of the bookcases.

Process time 9.0 days
Inspection time 1.4 days
Move time 3.7 days
Wait time 12.0 days

Required:
1. Compute the company s manufacturing cycle time. (Round your answers to 1 decimal place.)

2. Compute the company s manufacturing cycle efficiency. (Round your answers to 1 decimal place.)

acct 2302 managerial accounting chapter 22 ex 22 5 and 22 7 495874

Exercise 22-5 Service department expenses allocated to operating departments LO P2

Advertising and purchasing department expenses of Cozy Bookstore are allocated to operating departments on the basis of dollar sales and purchase orders, respectively. Information about the allocation bases for the three operating departments follows.

Department Sales Purchase Orders
Books $ 447,000 425
Magazines 145,000 312
Newspapers 208,000 265



Total $ 800,000 1,002







Complete the following table by allocating the expenses of the two service departments (advertising and purchasing) to the three operating departments (see the expenses below).

Exercise 22-7 Investment center analysis LO A1

You must prepare a return on investment analysis for the regional manager of Fast & Great Burgers. This growing chain is trying to decide which outlet of two alternatives to open. The first location (A) requires a $500,000 investment and is expected to yield annual net income of $80,000. The second location (B) requires a $200,000 investment and is expected to yield annual net income of $40,000.

Compute the return on investment for each Fast & Great Burgers alternative.

acct 2302 managerial accounting chapter 22 ex 22 8 495875

Exercise 22-8 Computing return on assets and residual income; investing decision LO A1

Megamart, a retailer of consumer goods, provides the following information on two of its departments (each considered an investment center).

Investment Center Sales Net
Income
Average
Invested Assets
Electronics $ 10,000,000 $ 442,500 $ 2,950,000
Sporting goods 8,600,000 896,000 5,600,000

1.1

Compute return on investment for each department.

1.2

Using return on investment, which department is most efficient at using assets to generate returns for the company?

Sporting goods
Electronics
2.1

Assume a target income level of 12.9% of average invested assets. Compute residual income for each department.

2.2 Which department generated the most residual income for the company?
Sporting goods
Electronics
3.

Assume that the Electronics department is presented with a new investment opportunity that will yield a 15.6% return on assets. Should the new investment opportunity be accepted?

No, the new investment opportunity should not be accepted
Yes, the new investment opportunity should be accepted

acct 301 final exam 495876

Devry University

Week 8 : Final Exam – Final Exam

Page 1

1.(TCO 1) What is the accounting equation? Suppose your company sold $12,000 in merchandise to a customer for cash. How does this transaction impact the accounting equation?(Points : 17)

2.(TCO 2) What are the four basic financial statements? Describe the balance sheet, and explain why it is important.(Points : 17)

3.(TCO 3) What is the Sarbanes-Oxley Act? Do you think this act has more importance for the accounting profession or for investors? Why?(Points : 17)

4.(TCO 4) What is horizontal analysis of financial statements? How does horizontal analysis differ from vertical analysis?(Points : 17)

1.(TCO 8) Why is capital budgeting important? What is the IRR method? How is it calculated?(Points : 26)

2.(TCO 9) What are five different types of decisions that could use incremental analysis? What are the relevant costs in a make-or-buy decision?(Points : 26)

3.(TCO 10) How is a transfer price determined? Describe the cost-based method. Do you think it is better than the market-based method?(Points : 26)

4.(TCO 11) What are direct materials? Give an example of a direct material. How do direct materials differ from indirect materials? Give an example of an indirect material.(Points : 26)

1.(TCO 5) What is CVP analysis? Why is this an important analysis for a company to perform?(Points : 26)

2.(TCO 6) What is an operating budget? What does it result in? What is the first step in completing an operating budget?(Points : 26)

3.(TCO 7) What is responsibility accounting? What is a cost center? How does a cost center differ from a profit center?(Points : 26)

Page2

1.(TCO 8) Why is capital budgeting important? What is the IRR method? How is it calculated? (Points : 26)

2.(TCO 9) What are five different types of decisions that could use incremental analysis? What are the relevant costs in a make-or-buy decision? (Points : 26)

3.(TCO 10) How is a transfer price determined? Describe the cost-based method. Do you think it is better than the market-based method? (Points : 26)

4.(TCO 11) What are direct materials? Give an example of a direct material. How do direct materials differ from indirect materials? Give an example of an indirect material. (Points : 26)

1.(TCO 5) What is CVP analysis? Why is this an important analysis for a company to perform? (Points : 26)

2.(TCO 6) What is an operating budget? What does it result in? What is the first step in completing an operating budget? (Points : 26)

3.(TCO 7) What is responsibility accounting? What is a cost center? How does a cost center differ from a profit center? (Points : 26)

acct 301 week4 495878

Problem 1
Required:Use the following information to complete the below schedule of cost of goods manufactured.
(25 points)
Purchases of raw materials $ 120,000.00
Raw materials available for use $ 148,000.00
Cost of direct raw materials used $ 124,000.00
Manufacturing overhead $ 24,000.00
Total manufacturing costs $ 310,000.00
Ending work-in-process inventory $ (46,000.00)
Cost of goods manufactured $ 306,000.00
Problem 2
Required:JZ is a musician who is considering whether to independently produce and sell a CD. JZ estimates fixed costs of $10,000 and variable costs of $4.00 per unit. The expected selling price is $12 per CD. What is JZ’s break-even point in units and dollars?
(25 points)

acct 304 week 8 final exam 495879

Questions

1. Income from continuing operations sometimes includes gains from non-operating activities.
2. Intraperiod tax allocation is the process of associating income tax effects with the income statement components that create those effects.

3. Material restructuring costs are reported as an element of income from continuing operations.4. Earnings quality refers to the ability of reported earnings (income) to predict future earnings.

5. Gains, but not losses, from discontinued operations must be separately reported in an income statement.

6. An item must meet the subjective criteria of being either unusual or infrequent to be reported as extraordinary.

7. The definition of what constitutes an extraordinary item should be independent of the operating environment.
8. Income statements prepared according to both U.S. GAAP and International Accounting Standards require the separate reporting, as an extraordinary item, of material gains and losses from events that are both unusual and infrequent.

9. A change in depreciation method is accounted for by retrospectively revising prior years’ financial statements.

10. Changes in accounting estimates require disclosure of their effects, if material, on current year net income and EPS but do not require restatement of prior years’ financial statements.

11. The income effect of a change in reporting entity is shown separately in the income statement in the year of the change.

12. EPS disclosure is required only for income from continuing operations.

13. Comprehensive income reports an expanded version of income to include four types of gains and losses not included in traditional income statements.

14. Comprehensive income is the total change in shareholders’ equity that occurred during the period.

15. The direct and indirect methods of reporting the statement of cash flows present different information for investing and financing activities.

Essay Questions

Listed below are ten terms followed by a list of phrases that describe or characterize five of the terms. Match each phrase with the correct term placing the letter designating the best term in the space provided by the phrase.
Terms:
A. Change in accounting estimate
B. Income from discontinued operations
C. Income from continuing operations
D. Intraperiod tax allocation
E. Matching principle
F. Operating activities (income statement)
G. Prior period adjustment
H. Provision for income tax
I. Taxable income
J. Transitory earnings

16. _____ Also known as income tax expense.

17. _____ From transactions or events that are not likely to occur in the foreseeable future.18. _____ Associates tax with income statement items.

19. _____ Used as the base for computing taxes currently payable.

20. _____ Made to correct a material error.

Listed below are ten terms followed by a list of phrases that describe or characterize five of the terms. Match each phrase with the correct term placing the letter designating the best term in the space provided by the phrase.

Terms:
A. Change in accounting estimate
B. Income from discontinued operations
C. Income from continuing operations
D. Intraperiod tax allocation
E. Matching principle
F. Operating activities (income statement)
G. Prior period adjustment
H. Provision for income taxes
I. Taxable income
J. Transitory earnings

21. _____ Is directly related to the principal revenue-generating activities

22. _____ Requires note disclosure, if material.

23. _____ Expenses are recognized in the same period as the related revenues.

24. _____ Income (loss) from an identifiable component will cease.

25. _____ More useful to analysts in predicting future income than current net income.

Listed below are ten terms followed by a list of phrases that describe or characterize five of the terms. Match each phrase with the correct term placing the letter designating the best term in the space provided by the phrase.

Terms:
A. Cumulative effect of a change in accounting principle
B. Direct method
C. Discontinued operations
D. Financing activities
E. Gain/loss from early extinguishment of debt
F. Investing activities
G. Held for sale component
H. Multiple-step income statement
I. Non-operating activities (income statement)
J. Single-step income statement

26. _____ Not directly related to a firm’s principal revenue-generating activities.

27. _____ Likely to be discontinued within a year.

28. _____ Groups all revenues and gains.

29. _____ Related to the acquisition and disposition of long-term assets.

30. _____ Related to the external financing of the company.

Listed below are ten terms followed by a list of phrases that describe or characterize five of the terms. Match each phrase with the correct term placing the letter designating the best term in the space provided by the phrase.

Terms:
A. Cumulative effect of a change in accounting principle
B. Direct method
C. Discontinued operations
D. Financing activities
E. Gain/loss from early extinguishment of debt
F. Investing activities
G. Held for sale component
H. Multiple-step income statement
I. Non-operating activities (income statement)
J. Single-step income statement

31. _____ Difference between book value of debt and payment to retire debt.

32. _____ Reported net of tax immediately after income from continuing operations.

33. _____ No longer included in current income for voluntary changes in accounting principle.

34. _____ Reports intermediate subtotals in arriving at net income.

35. _____ Reports the cash effects of each operating activity directly on the statement.

Listed below are ten terms followed by a list of phrases that describe or characterize five of the terms. Match each phrase with the correct term placing the letter designating the best term in the space provided by the phrase.

Terms:
A. Change in reporting entity
B. Component of an entity
C. Comprehensive income
D. Earnings quality
E. Earnings per share
F. Extraordinary items
G. Indirect method
H. Non-cash financing and investing activities
I. Operating activities (SCF)
J. Restructuring costs

36. _____ Required disclosure for publicly traded corporations.

37. _____ Operations and cash flows can be clearly distinguished.

38. _____ Separately stated component of continuing operations.

39. _____ Calculations work backward from net income to cash flow from operating activities.

40. _____ Ability of reported income to predict future earnings.

Listed below are ten terms followed by a list of phrases that describe or characterize five of the terms. Match each phrase with the correct term placing the letter designating the best term in the space provided by the phrase.

Terms:
A. Change in reporting entity
B. Component of an entity
C. Comprehensive income
D. Earnings quality
E. Earnings per share
F. Extraordinary items
G. Indirect method
H. Non-cash financing and investing activities
I. Operating activities (SCF)
J. Restructuring costs

41. _____ The acquisition of assets by issuing debt or equity securities.

42. _____ Costs incurred often relate to downsizing.

43. _____ Total non-owner change in equity for a reporting period.

44. _____ Unusual, infrequent, and material gains and losses.

45. _____ When grouped together, essentially net income on a cash basis.

Listed below are ten terms followed by a list of phrases that describe or characterize the terms. Match each phrase with the correct term placing the letter designating the best term in the space provided by the phrase.

Terms:
A. Change in estimate
B. Non-operating income
C. Comprehensive income
D. Earnings quality
E. Earnings per share
F. Extraordinary items
G. Change in accounting principle
H. Multiple-step income statement
I. Discontinued operations
J. Restructuring costs

46. _____ Required disclosure for publicly traded corporations.

47. _____ Component of the entity has been sold or will be sold.

48. _____ Costs generally associated with downsizing.

49. _____ Reports a series of intermediate subtotals.

50. _____ Accounted for prospectively.

51. _____ Tangentially related to normal operations.

52. _____ Accounted for retrospectively by restating prior years’ statements.

53. _____ Unusual, infrequent, and material gains and losses.

54. _____ Total non-owner change in equity.

55. _____ Ability of reported income to predict future earnings.

Multiple Choice Questions

56. Intraperiod income tax presentation is primarily a matter of:
A. Valuation.
B. Going concern.
C. Periodicity.
D. Allocation.

57. The difference between single-step and multiple-step income statements is primarily an issue of:
A. Consistency.
B. Presentation.
C. Measurement.
D. Valuation.

58. Popson Inc. incurred a material loss which was not unusual in character, but was clearly an infrequent occurrence. This loss should be reported as:
A. An extraordinary loss.
B. A separate line item between income from continuing operations and income from discontinued operations.
C. A separate line item within income from continuing operations.
D. A separate line item in the retained earnings statement.

acct 304 week 8 final exam 50 mcqs 495880

Ch.3 Quiz
Instructions
Please read the questions carefully.
This assessment is worth 100 points.
1. Income from continuing operations sometimes includes gains from nonoperating activities. (2 points)

True

False
2. Income from continuing operations is an after-tax number consisting of revenues, expenses, gains, and losses. (2 points)

True

False
3. Income from continuing operations equals net income only in the absence of separately reported items. (2 points)

True

False
4. Intraperiod tax allocation is the process of associating income tax effects with the income statement components that create those effects. (2 points)

True

False
5. If the effective tax rate is 40%, a $200,000 before-tax extraordinary gain would increase net income by $120,000. (2 points)

True

False
6. If General Motors ceased production of the Corvette, it would report any material gains or losses that would result under discontinued operations. (2 points)

True

False
7. Discontinued operations require reclassification of prior years’ income statements but no change in prior years’ net income. (2 points)

True

False
8. Operating income or loss from discontinued operations up to the disposal date is separately reported. (2 points)

True

False
9. The measurement and disposal dates of discontinued operations must fall within the same fiscal year. (2 points)

True

False
10. If an overall loss from discontinued operations is expected, then the loss is reported in the year in which the measurement date falls. (2 points)

True

False
11. Estimated gains from discontinued operations can be reported in the measurement year only to the extent of estimated losses. (2 points)

True

False
12. An item must meet the subjective criteria of being both unusual and infrequent to be reported as extraordinary. (2 points)

True

False
13. The definition of what constitutes an extraordinary item should be independent of the operating environment. (2 points)

True

False
14. Material restructuring costs are reported as an element of income from continuing operations. (2 points)

True

False
15. The cumulative effect of a change in accounting principle is the difference between the ending balance in retained earnings and what the balance would have been had the new method been applied all year. (2 points)

True

False
16. A change in reporting entity is shown separately on the income statement in the year of the change. (2 points)

True

False
17. All corporations must disclose EPS. (2 points)

True

False
18. EPS disclosure is required for all items reported net of tax on the income statement. (2 points)

True

False
19. Net income is the starting point in disclosing comprehensive income. (2 points)

True

False
20. Quality of earnings refers to the ability of reported earnings or income to predict future earnings. (2 points)

True

False
21. The distinction between operating and nonoperating income relates to: (2 points)
a.
Continuity of income.
b.
Principal activities of the reporting entity.
c.
Consistency of income stream.
d.
Reliability of measurements.
22. The principal benefit of separately reporting discontinued operations, extraordinary items, and cumulative effects of changes in accounting principles is to enhance: (2 points)
a.
Predictive ability.
b.
Consistency in reporting.
c.
Intraperiod continuity.
d.
Comprehensive reporting.
23. Interperiod income tax allocation relates primarily to the principle of: (2 points)
a.
Valuation.
b.
Going concern.
c.
Matching.
d.
Measurement.
24. An extraordinary event for financial reporting purposes is both: (2 points)
a.
Unusual and material.
b.
Infrequent and significant.
c.
Material and infrequent.
d.
Unusual and infrequent.
25. The cumulative effect of a change in accounting principle is reported as: (2 points)
a.
A restatement of retained earnings.
b.
A separate line component of income.
c.
A prior period adjustment.
d.
Income from modified operations.
26. The amount reported for the cumulative effect of a change in accounting principle is the net-of-tax difference between: (2 points)
a.
The current year’s income under the old principle and the current year’s income under the new principle.
b.
The current year’s ending retained earnings under the old principle and under the new principle.
c.
The preceding year’s ending retained earnings under the old principle and under the new principle.
d.
The current year’s beginning retained earnings under the old principle and the current year’s net income under the new principle.
27. The financial statement presentation of the cumulative effect of a change in accounting principle is most similar to that of reporting: (2 points)
a.
Changes in accounting estimates.
b.
Prior period adjustments.
c.
Correction of errors.
d.
Extraordinary items.
28. In its Dec. 31, 2000 financial statements, MisterCard estimated that losses on its current receivables would be $18.2 million. During 2001, MisterCard determined that the losses on the Dec. 31, 2000 receivables were actually $19.4 million. Ignoring taxes, MisterCard would report, in its 2001 financial statements, the additional $1.2 million loss on receivables as: (2 points)
a.
An extraordinary item.
b.
A prior period adjustment.
c.
A retroactive adjustment.
d.
A current year’s expense.
29. Which of the following is not true about EPS? (2 points)
a.
It must be reported by all corporations whose stock is publicly traded.
b.
It may be disclosed either on the face of the income statement or in a disclosure note.
c.
It must be reported separately for discontinued operations.
d.
It must be reported separately for extraordinary items.
30. The Gargas Corporation’s income statement includes net income, extraordinary items, and the cumulative effect of a change in accounting principle. Earnings per share information would be provided for: (2 points)
a.
Net income only.
b.
Extraordinary items and net income.
c.
The cumulative effect of a change in accounting principle and net income.
d.
Extraordinary items, the cumulative effect of a change in accounting principle, and net income.
31. A reconciliation between net income and comprehensive income would include: (2 points)
a.
Unrealized losses but not unrealized gains.
b.
Unrealized gains but not unrealized losses.
c.
Unrealized losses and unrealized gains.
d.
Neither unrealized losses nor unrealized gains.
32. Operating cash flows would exclude: (2 points)
a.
Interest received.
b.
Interest paid.
c.
Dividends paid.
d.
Dividends received.
33. The statement of cash flows reports cash flows from the activities of: (2 points)
a.
Operating, purchasing, and investing.
b.
Borrowing, paying, and investing.
c.
Financing, investing, and operating.
d.
Using, investing, and financing.
34. Cash flows from financing activities include: (2 points)
a.
Interest received.
b.
Interest paid.
c.
Dividends received.
d.
Dividends paid.
35. Changes in accounting estimates are reported: (2 points)
a.
Currently and prospectively.
b.
Retroactively and currently.
c.
Retroactively, currently, and prospectively.
d.
Prospectively.
36. Precepts Inc. incurred a material loss which was not unusual in character, but was clearly an infrequent occurrence. This loss should be reported as: (2 points)
a.
An extraordinary loss.
b.
A separate line item between income from continuing operations and income from discontinued operations.
c.
A separate line item within income from continuing operations.
d.
A separate line item in the retained earnings statement.
37. Sulvane Co. reports income of $300,000 from continuing operations before income taxes and a before-tax extraordinary loss of $80,000. All income is subject to a 30% tax rate. In the year’s income statement, Sulvane would show the following line-item amounts for income tax expense and net income: (2 points)
a.
$66,000 and $210,000.
b.
$90,000 and $154,000.
c.
$90,000 and $276,000.
d.
$66,000 and $220,000.
38. LeFever Construction Co.’s 2000 income from continuing operations before income taxes was $280,000. LeFever reported a before-tax extraordinary gain of $50,000. All tax items are subject to a 40% tax rate. In its income statement for 2000, LeFever would show the following line-item amounts for before-tax net income and income tax expense: (2 points)
a.
$198,000 and $112,000.
b.
$230,000 and $92,000.
c.
$330,000 and $132,000.
d.
$198,000 and $79,000.
39. Northridge Printers purchased an offset press on January 1, 1997 at a cost of $120,000. The press had an estimated eight-year life with no residual value Northridge uses straight-line depreciation. At December 31, 2000, Northridge estimated that the press would have only two more years of remaining life with no residual value. For 2000, Northridge would report depreciation expense of: (2 points)
a.
$25,000.
b.
$15,000.
c.
$20,000.
d.
$30,000.
40. Triptic Travel reported revenue of $300,000 for its year ended December 31, 2000. Accounts receivable at December 31, 1999 and 2000 were $32,000 and $35,500, respectively. During 2000, accounts totaling $1,500 were deemed to be uncollectible and were written off. Using the direct method for reporting cash flows from operating activities, Triptic would report cash collected from customers of: (2 points)
a.
$300,000.
b.
$295,000.
c.
$303,000.
d.
$302,000.
41. Arrow Printers paid $2,000 interest on short-term notes payable, $10,000 interest on long-term bonds, and $6,000 in dividends on its common stock. Arrow would report cash outflows from activities, as follows: (2 points)
a.
Operating, $2,000; financing $16,000.
b.
Operating, $0; financing $18,000.
c.
Operating, $12,000; financing $6,000.
d.
Operating, $18,000; financing $0.
42. Parvo Dog Food Co. reported net income of $45,000 for the year ended December 31, 2000. January 1 balances in accounts receivable and accounts payable were $23,000 and $26,000 respectively. Year-end balances in these accounts were $22,000 and $28,000, respectively. Assuming that all relevant information has been presented, Parvo’s cash flows from operating activities would be: (2 points)
a.
$48,000.
b.
$44,000.
c.
$46,000.
d.
$45,000.
43. Anthrax Beef Processors reported net income of $216,000 for its year ended December 31, 2000. Purchases totaled $152,000. Accounts payable balances at the beginning and end of the year were $36,000 and $33,000, respectively. Beginning and ending inventory balances were $44,000 and $46,000, respectively. Assuming that all relevant information has been presented, Anthrax would report operating cash flows of: (2 points)
a.
$155,000.
b.
$221,000.
c.
$211,000.
d.
$151,000.
44. In Case B, Alpha would report a gain or (loss) from disposal in 2000 of: (2 points)
a.
$40,000.
b.
$(10,000).
c.
$15,000.
d.
$65,000.
45. In Case C, Alpha would report a (loss) from disposal in 2000 of: (2 points)
a.
$(50,000).
b.
$(20,000).
c.
$(10,000).
d.
$0.
46. What would be Misty’s net income for the current year? (2 points)
a.
$148.
b.
$168.
c.
$112.
d.
None of the amounts given are correct.
47. In Case B, Omega would report a gain from disposal in 2000 of: (2 points)
a.
$75,000.
b.
$60,000.
c.
$100,000.
d.
$0.
48. In Case C, Omega would report a gain from disposal in 2000 of: (2 points)
a.
$30,000.
b.
$70,000.
c.
$100,000.
d.
$0.
49. In Case D, Omega would report a gain (loss) from disposal in 2000 of: (2 points)
a.
$30,000.
b.
$(40,000).
c.
$20,000.
d.
$0.
50. Rallod would report net cash inflows (outflows) from investing activities in the amount of: (2 points)
a.
$(4,000).
b.
$100.
c.
$(3,900).
d.
$(1,900).

acct 310 495881

The following information is available from the company’s records in June 2013 for Product Z.

Units

Unit Costs

6/1/2013 beginning inventory

1,000

$16.00

Purchase on 6/5/2013

2,700

$17.00

Purchase on 6/16/2013

2,500

$19.00

Purchase on 6/25/2013

1,000

$22.00

Purchase on 6/27/2013

1,800

$23.00

A physical inventory on June 30, 2013 shows 2,000 units on hand (assume the company maintains periodic inventory). Show all supporting computations to calculate the cost of ending inventory at June 30, 2013 under each of the following inventory methods. Use the answer sheet provided.

a. FIFO

b. LIFO

The following information pertains to PVP Company:

Date

Ending inventory at end of year prices

Price Index

12/31/2010

$189,000

100

12/31/2011

$154,440

117

12/31/2012

$195,200

122

a. Show supporting computations under the dollar value LIFO method to calculate the amount of ending inventory at December 31, 2011. Use the answer sheet provided.

b. Show supporting computations under the dollar value LIFO method to calculate the amount of ending inventory at December 31, 2012. Use the answer sheet provided.

A&O Co. uses the LIFO retail inventory method to estimate its inventory for interim statement purposes. Information relating to the computation of the inventory at 7/31/2013 is as follows:

Cost Retail

Inventory, 1/1/13 $ 145,000 $ 280,000

Purchases 580,000 810,000

Freight-in 70,000

Markups, net 110,000

Sales 790,000

Estimated normal shoplifting losses 14,000

Markdowns, net 30,000

Show computation to determine the cost of estimated inventory at 7/31/2013 under the LIFO retail method. Use the answer sheet provided.

On January 1, 2012, PVP Corp borrowed $2,900,000 (5-year note) at 9% payable annually, to finance the construction of a new building. In 2012, the company made the following expenditures related to this building:

May1: $1,700,000

July 31: 2,400,000

Dec 31: $1,500,000

The company has two additional debts as follows:

Ten year 10% bond dated 12-31-2007, interest payable annually

$3,000,000

Three year 8% note dated 6-30-2011, interest payable annually

$2,500,000

Show all calculations for each of the following, using the answer sheet provided.

a. Weighted average accumulated expenditures

b. Avoidable interest

A&E Company exchanged asset A to acquire asset B from PVP Company. PVP paid $100,000 cash to A&E in this exchange. The following information pertains to the exchange:

A&E

Asset A

PVP

Asset B

Cost

$2,671,000

$2,999,000

Accumulated depreciation

1,355,000

1,699,000

Fair market value

1,555,000

1,455,000

Cash given by PVP

——

100,000

Prepare a journal entry using the answer sheet provided to record the exchange on the books of A&E Company assuming the exchange lacks commercial substance:

1. Under the Measurement Principle of accounting, the most commonly used measurements are based on

a. Expense recognition and historical cost principles.

b. Revenue recognition and fair value principles.

c. Historical cost and fair value principles.

d. Revenue recognition and historical cost principles.

2. Gains or losses from exchange of foreign currencies should not be presented as extraordinary items because

a. The underlying transactions are not expected to recur in the foreseeable future.

b. They are nonrecurring material items that differ significantly from company s typical business activities.

c. Such gains or losses are considered components of income from continuing operation.

d. The gains or losses are unusual in nature and infrequent in occurrence.

3. Which of the following earnings per share (EPS) figures is NOT disclosed on the face of the income statement?

a. Income from continuing operations net of tax.

b. Gain on disposal of discontinued operations, net of tax.

c. Extraordinary gain net of tax.

d. All of the above are disclosed.

4. Which of the following is never classified as an extraordinary item?

a. Material losses from a major casualty.

b. Gains or losses on disposal of a component of an entity.

c. Material losses from expropriation of assets.

d. A significant gain on the sale of the only security investment a company has ever had.

5. A company makes a change in accounting for its construction contracts from a percentage of completion to the completed contract method. This type of change is recognized

  1. As a change in accounting estimate that requires adjustments to prior years presented.
  2. As a correction of an error.
  3. As a change in accounting principle by making a retrospective adjustment to the financial statements.
  4. As a change in accounting principle that does not require a retrospective adjustment.

6. Under the allowance method, an entry to write off an uncollectible account

  1. Increases bad debt expense when the write off occurs.
  2. Decreases bad debt expense when the write off occurs.
  3. Increases allowance for bad debt account when the write off occurs.

d. Reduces both allowance for bad debt account and accounts receivable when the write off occurs.

7. In a period of falling prices, the inventory method, which gives the lowest value for ending inventory is

a. specific identification.

b. first-in, first-out.

c. last-in, first-out.

d. weighted-average.

8. A&E Company needs to determine if its indefinite-life intangibles other than goodwill have been impaired and should be reduced or written off on its balance sheet. The impairment test(s) to be used is (are)

a. Recoverability and Fair value tests.

b. Recoverability test.

c. Historic cost and fair value tests.

d. Fair value test.

9. A company decided to change its inventory valuation method from FIFO to LIFO in a period of rising prices. What would be the result of the change on ending inventory and cost of goods sold in the year of change?

Ending inventory Cost of goods sold

a. Increase Increase

b. Increase Decrease

c. Decrease Decrease

d. Decrease Increase

10. Which of the following statements is incorrect with respect to accounting for impairment of long-lived assets?

a. A restoration of previously recognized impairment loss is not permitted if the asset will continue to be used in business.

b. If an impairment loss is recognized, the adjusted carrying amount of a long-lived asset becomes its new cost basis.

c. Impaired assets held for sale may continue to be depreciated until the sale is finalized.

d. Impairment loss equals excess of carrying amount over fair value for assets held for use.

1. On August 1, 2011, A&O Corp. purchased equipment for $870,000. The machine has 8 year estimated life and a $40,000 estimated salvage value. Show supporting computations, using the answer sheet provided, to calculate depreciation expense on the equipment for 2012 under the double-declining balance method.

2. On July 1, 2011, A&O Corp. purchased equipment for $870,000. The machine has 8 year estimated life and a $42,000 estimated salvage value. Show supporting computations, using the answer sheet provided, to calculate depreciation expense on the equipment for 2012 under the sum-of-the-years -digits method

3. AVP Co. had a balance of $231,000 in its Accumulated Depreciation account on 1/1/2012. At 12/31/2012, the balance in that account was $275,000. During 2012, AVP sold equipment with an original cost of $35,000 and accumulated depreciation of $25,000. Calculate the amount AVP recorded as depreciation expense for the year.

4. PVP, Inc. had the following infrequent transactions during 2012:

A $10,000 write-down of receivables.

A $100,000 gain from the exchange of foreign currencies.

A $10,000 write-off of obsolete inventory.

A $100,000 gain from abandonment of equipment used in the business.

PVP s tax rate is 30%. Calculate the amount PVP should report for items not considered extraordinary.

5. PVP Co. had a balance of $91,000 in its Accounts Receivable account on 1/1/2012. At 12/31/2012, the balance was $105,000. PVP wrote-off $17,000 in uncollectible accounts during the year and collected $130,000 of Accounts Receivable during the year. Calculate the amount PVP recorded as credit sales.

6. VAP Corporation received cash of $24,000 on August 1, 2012 for two year’s rent in advance and recorded the transaction with a credit to Rent Revenue. What is the December 31, 2012 adjusting entry? Assuming VAP chooses to make reversing entries, what is the required reversing entry under the guidelines for this transaction?

7. A&O Corp. provided the following information for May 2012, from its perpetual inventory system:

May 1 balance 500 units @ $25

May 8 sales 300 units @ $35

May 10 purchases 400 units @ $30

Mary 19 sales 200 units @ $40

Assuming the LIFO perpetual method, calculate A&O s May 2012 cost of goods sold.

8. A&E Company’s accounting records indicated the following information for May 2012:

Inventory, 5/1/12 $ 99,000

Purchases during May 69,000

Sales during May 129,000

A physical inventory taken on May 31, 2012, resulted in an ending inventory of $70,000. A&E’s gross profit is 50% on its cost. A&E suspects some inventory may have been taken by a new employee. At May 31, 2012, what is the estimated cost of missing inventory?

9. On January 1, 2012, A&E Co. acquired a new truck with a fair value of $27,000. In exchange, A&E traded an old truck with a cost of $29,000, accumulated depreciation of $11,000, and a fair value of $30,000. In this exchange, A&E received a cash difference of $3,000. Assuming that this exchange lacks commercial substance, show calculations for any gain or loss that should be recognized by A&E on this exchange (round to the nearest dollar).

10. PVP Co. obtained a Patent on 1/1/2010, incurring legal costs of $21,000. The company amortizes the Patent over 10 years. PVP successfully defended its Patent on 1/1/2011, incurring $5,400 in legal fees. Calculate the amortization expense for 2011.

acct 310 week 3 the ski production corporation both excel and word file a guaranteed 495883

The Ski Pro Corporation, which produces and sells to wholesalers a highly successful line of water skis, has decided to diversify to stabilize sales throughout the year. The company is considering the production of cross-country skis.

After considerable research, a cross-country ski line has been developed. Because of the conservative nature of the company management, however, Minnetonka s president has decided to introduce only one type of the new ski for this coming winter. If the product is a success, further expansion in future years will be initiated.

The ski selected is a mass-market ski with a special binding. It will be sold to wholesalers for $80 per pair. Because of availability capacity, no additional fixed charges will be incurred to produce the skis. A $100,000 fixed charge will be absorbed by the skis, however, to allocate a fair share of the company s present fixed costs to the new product.

Using the estimated sales and production of 10,000 pairs of skis as the expected volume, the accounting department has developed the following cost per pair of skis and bindings:

Direct Labor: $35 Direct Material: $30 Total Overhead: $15 Total: $80

Ski Pro has approached a subcontractor to discuss the possibility of purchasing the bindings. The purchase price of the bindings from the subcontractor would be $5.25 per binding, or $10.50 per pair. If the Ski Pro Corporation accepts the purchase proposal, it is predicted that direct-labor and variable-overhead costs would be reduced by 10% and direct-material costs would be reduced by 20%.

Write a 1 2 page paper, and create a spreadsheet that answers the following questions: Should the Ski Pro Corporation make or buy the bindings? Show calculations to support your answer. What would be the maximum purchase price acceptable to the Ski Pro Corporation for the bindings? Support your answer with an appropriate explanation. Instead of sales of 10,000 pairs of skis, revised estimates show sales volume at 12,500 pairs. At this new volume, additional equipment, at an annual rental of $10,000 must be acquired to manufacture the bindings. This incremental cost would be the only additional fixed cost required even if sales increased to 30,000 pairs. (This 30,000 level is the goal for the third year of production.) Under these circumstances, should the Ski Pro Corporation make or buy the bindings? Show calculations to support your answer. What qualitative factors (that is, issues with vendors, customers, or within the product itself) should the Ski Pro Corporation consider in determining whether they should make or buy the bindings?

acct 313 001 fall 2013 aurora medical center amc 495884

ACCT 313.001 Fall 2013

Course Project (Part 3) 3% of course grade

Please complete the following problem as required. This assignment is due Wednesday, December 11 at the beginning of class.

Aurora Medical Center(AMC), located outside Phoenix, has an inpatient hospital and outpatient clinic. Because itis located ina retirementarea, a substantial fraction of its patients are elderly, and hence their medical insurance is provided through the Medicare program of the federal government. Medicare outpatient clinic care is reimbursed by the federal government at cost. Each clinic with Medicare outpatients submits a reimbursement form to Medicare reporting the costs of treating these patients. Medicare inpatient reimbursement is based on predetermined rates depending on the diag nosis. For example, all Medicare-paid hip replacements in Phoenix are reimbursed at $14,800 per patient, regardless of the hospital’s cost.

AMC has two administrative departments that provide services to both the hospital and the clinic: accounting and information management (IM). The accompanying tables summarize the service levels provided by these two departments:

Administrative Departments

Accounting

IM

Total cost Allocation base

$3,800,000 $4,800,000

Number of transactions Disk space (gigabytes)

Service Levels

Transactions

Gigabytes

Accounting

IM

Hospital

Clinic

40,000

1,100,000

600,000

8

7

9

Total

1,740,000

24

Accounting department costs are distributed to users based on the number of transactions posted to the general ledger generated by that user. IM costs are distributed to users based on the gigabytes of storage dedicated to the user. Medicare guidelines allow these allocation bases to be used/Medicare also provides some discretion to hospitals in the methods used to allocate costs, as long as they are reasonable and generally accepted.

Required:

a. Design a report for assigning the accounting and IM costs to the hospital and clinic. How much of the costs of accounting and IM should be allocated to inpatients and outpatients?

b. Justify your design in (a).Explain why AMC should follow your suggestions.

acct 315 assignment 5 solution a guaranteed 495885

Assignment 5

  1. American Company Inc. is a company with three divisions namely American Construction, American Publishing and American Securities Divisions. Below is information about each division as of October 31, 2013 when the accounting year ended.

American Construction Division

This division has $30,000,000 construction project which was granted in May 2013. The company began construction of the project on July 1, 2013. Estimated costs of completion at the contract date were $25,000,000 over a 2-year time period from contract date. As of fiscal year end, construction costs of $7,200,000 had been incurred and progress billings of $9,500,000 had been made. On October 31, 2013, the construction costs to complete the project were estimated to be $16,800,000 because of an expected decline in raw materials costs. The division utilizes percentage-of-completion method to recognize revenue.

American Publishing Division

This division sells large volumes of novels to book distributors who will then sell to bookstores.

The distributors are allowed to return up to 30% of sales but over the past several years, the average is 20% return. In 2013, the division has sold books worth $7,000,000 to distributors. On October 31, 2013, $1,500,000 worth of books can still be returned while the remaining $5,500,000 had actual return rate of 21%. The division recognizes revenue when sales occur but take into consideration right of return.

American Securities Division

This division serves as an agent for home and business security systems. Customers are billed

directly for the systems plus actual shipping costs. The company received orders for $6,000,000 of

goods during the fiscal year 2013. $5,200,000 of goods were billed and shipped and payments of

$600,000 were received. Actual shipping costs of $100,000 were also billed. The division pays

commissions of 10% on product price to manufacturing agents after goods are shipped to

customers. The division uses revenue recognition at point of sale.

Required

For each division, calculate the revenue to be recognized for fiscal year ended October 31, 2013.

  1. Chase Construction Company (CCC) entered into a contract to build a parking complex. The project will commence on January 1, 2014. The complex will cost approximately $600,000 and will take 3 years to complete construction. CCC will bill its client $900,000 for the construction.

The following information contain data for the construction

Description 2014 2015 2016

Costs to date $270,000 $450,000 $610,000
Estimated costs to complete 330,000 150,000 0
Progress billings to date 270,000 550,000 900,000
Cash collected to date 240,000 500,000 900,000

Required

  1. Using the percentage-of-completion method, compute the estimated gross profit that would be recognized during each year (2014, 2015, and 2016) of the construction.
  2. Prepare all necessary journal entries for each year of the construction.
  3. Schneider Company uses installment sales method. Below is a summary of its sales, cost of goods sold, and gross profit for three years.

Description 2013 2014 2015

Installment sales $250,000 $260,000 $280,000
Cost of goods sold 155,000 163,800 182,000
Gross profit 95,000 96,200 98,000

Schneider Company s collections from customers are duplicated below:

Description 2013 2014 2015

2013 installment sales $75,000 $100,000 $50,000

2014 installment sales 100,000 120,000

2014 installment sales 100,000

Required

Assume Schneider uses installment sales method of accounting

  1. Compute the gross profit for 2013, 2014, and 2015.
  2. Prepare journal entries for 2015.

acct 315 assignment 6 solution a guaranteed 495886

Assignment 6

1.Your family members know you are taking this class and you learned about time value of money. Four of them came separately to ask questions relating to time value of money. Use the applicable interest table at the end of the book to compute the unknowns for your four relatives. Note that each is independent.

a. Your cousin asked how much he must contribute at the end of the each of the next eight years if he wants to accumulate $90,000 in his account by the end of the eighth year. Cousin told you the interest is compounded annually and the account will earn interest rate of 8%.

b. Your 40-year old Aunt plans to retire at age 65. She is getting a late start but wants to start contributing towards her retirement from now (age 40) through age 64. How much must she contribute each year if he plans to accumulate $500,000 by the time he retires; if he will earn 12% annual interest and interest is compounded annually

c. Your sister owes $47,347 on her student loan. She wants to pay off before she retires. She has $20,000 today and she will invest the $20,000 in an account that pays 9% interest. How many years will it take for the $20,000 to grow so she can have enough money to pay off the $47,347 debt assume the debt amount is fixed?

d. Your uncle currently has a $27,600 loan. He plans to repay the loan in four years. She plans to invest $19,553 for the next four years and use the principal and interest balance in the account to pay off the loan. What rate of interest must your uncle earn annually so he can have enough to pay off the loan?

2. DT International (DT) intends to purchase equipment. To get the best price, DT asked for bids from vendors. Analysis shows that each equipment from the vendors is similar and has estimated useful life of 20 years.

Additionally, each equipment will have year-end maintenance costs as follows:

Year 1-5 Year 6-15 Year 16-20

Cost per year $1,000 $2,000 $3,000

Below are the packages of three vendors:

Vendor 1: DT pays $55,000 cash at time of delivery and payments of $18,000 at end of each of the next 10 years. DT can elect to purchase a 20-year maintenance service agreement for $10,000 one-time fee. The purchase agreement is optional but if purchased, DT won t have to maintain the equipment for a fee for the useful life of the equipment. (Use PV of ordinary annuity table)

Vendor 2: Sales price is $380,000. Payment of $9,500 is payable semi-annually for 20 years. Upon delivery, DT pays $9,500. Then, it makes remaining 39 payments starting 6 months after delivery. The annual maintenance for the next 20 years is included in the price. (Use PV of annuity due table; remember the payment is twice a year, so interest rate will be half of annual interest rate provided below).

Vendor 3: Sales price is $150,000. DT must pay the whole sales price at delivery. (Use PV of ordinary annuity table but take into consideration the years of the maintenance cost).

Required

Assume DT will pay for the maintenance contract with vendor 1 if selected and that vendor 2

will perform maintenance at no extra charge as indicated. Since Vendor 3 doesn t offer maintenance, DT will pay for this based on the year-end maintenance cost provided. Which vendor should DT select if its cost of funds is 10%? (Hint: calculate which one has the lowest PV of cash outflows).

3. A small business owner (Craig Osborn) has a defined-benefit retirement plan for him and three employees. At retirement, Craig will get 50% of his last-year before retirement s annual salary while each employee will get 40% of his or her last-year before retirement s annual salary. The company will fund the plan by making 15 annual contributions. The plan s compound annual interest rate is 12%. The plan will make annual payment to each participant at the beginning of each year for 20 years starting from retirement date.

She provides you the following salary and retirement information current as of January 1, 2015 (This is the date the 15 annual contributions to the plan starts).

Name Current Annual Salary Estimated Retirement Date

Craig Osborn $48,000 January 1, 2040

Dean Smith $36,000 January 1, 2045

Danny Aubrey $18,000 January 1, 2035

Pamela Langford $15,000 January 1, 2030

Each year-end, Craig and his employees will have raises of 4%.

Required

a. What is the annual retirement benefit for each plan participant? (Round to the nearest dollar.) Hint: Craig will receive raises for 24 years, Dean will receive raises for 29 years, Danny will receive raises for 19 years, and Pamela will receive raises for 14 years.

b. What amount must be contributed to the plan at the end of 15 years to ensure that all benefits will be paid? (Round to the nearest dollar.) Hint: calculate the PV of annuity for each participant then total. Note that Craig will retire 10 years after contributions stop, Dean will retire 15 years after contributions stop, Danny will retire 5 years after contributions stop, and Pamela will retire the beginning of the year after contributions stop.

c. What is the required annual beginning of the year contributions?Recall that annual compounded interest rate is 12%.

acct 315 assignment 7 solution a guaranteed 495887

Assignment 7

Guiltier Corporation uses allowance method to accounts uncollectible accounts receivables. Credit terms for sales is n30 (net is due at 30 days).

Below is the company s uncollectible policy:

Monthly provision for uncollectible accounts is 2% of credit sales.

Write-off of bad debts is debited to allowance for uncollectible accounts.

If bad debt is recovered after being written off, the amount is credited to allowance for uncollectible accounts.

Below is information about credit sales, bad debt and uncollectible accounts. All accounts are shown in thousands.

January 1, 2013, balance in allowance for uncollectible accounts was $130.

Credit sales for the year was $9,000.

As per policy, monthly provision for uncollectible accounts is 2% of credit sales was made throughout the year.

Write-off of bad debts was $90.

Recoveries of accounts previously written off was $15.

Aging Reports of accounts receivable based on months of sales is below. This was prepared on December 30, 2013 (the last day of sale for the year). All accounts are shown in thousands.

Description Balance Estimated % Uncollectible

11/1/13-12/30/13 $1,080 2%

7/1/13 10/31/13 650 10%

1/1/2013-6/30/2013 420 25%

12/31/2012 150 80%

Total $2,300

On December 31, 2013, Guiltier Corporation s accountant wrote off $60 from the 12/31/2012 accounts receivable balance. The estimated percentage uncollectible is applicable to the remaining balance after the write off.

Required:

a. Prepare a schedule as of December 31, 2013 showing the balance in the allowance for uncollectible accounts. Remember to include the write off on this date as described above.

b. Prepare journal-entry for the adjustment to allowance for uncollectible accounts on December 31, 2013.

c. Show how accounts receivables will be shown on Guiltier Corporation s balance sheet on December 31, 2013.

acct 321 495888

1) Which of the following describes a term bond?

A) A bond that repays principal in installments

B) A bond that gives the bondholder a claim for specific assets if the issuer fails to pay

C) A bond that matures at one specified time

D) A bond that is not backed by specific assets

2) Which of the following describes a secured bond?

A) A bond that repays principal in installments

B) A bond that gives the bondholder a claim for specific assets if the issuer fails to pay

C) A bond that matures at one specified time

D) A bond that is not backed by specific assets

3) Which of the following characteristics is an advantage of the corporate form of business?

A) Higher degree of government regulation

B) The potential to raise large amounts of capital

C) Separation of ownership and management

D) Double taxation

4) On December 2, 2014, Ewell Company purchases a piece of land from the original owner.In payment for the land, Ewell Company issues 8,000 shares of common stock with $1.00 par value.The land has been appraised at a market value of $400,000.The journal entry to record this transaction would include which of the following items?

A) Debit Common stock $8,000 and debit Paid-in capital $392,000.

B) Credit Common stock $8,000 and credit Paid-in capital $392,000.

C) Credit Common stock $400,000.

D) Debit Cash $400,000.

5) Please refer to the equity section of the balance sheet shown below:

Preferred stock

$100 par, 10,000 shares authorized, 1,000 shares issued

$100,000

Common stock

$1 par, 500,000 shares authorized, 20,000 shares issued

20,000

Paid-in capital in excess of par

350,000

Retained earnings

(74,000)

Total stockholders’ equity

$396,000

The amount shown for Retained earnings would be called a(n):

A) net loss.

B) earnings shortfall.

C) retained earnings deficit.

D) loss on sale of stock.

6) Please refer to the equity section shown below:

Preferred stock, $100 par, 4% non-cumulative

$20,000

1,000 shares authorized, 200 shares outstanding

Common stock, $0.01 par

400

1,000,000 shares authorized, 40,000 shares outstanding

Paid-in capital in excess of par

359,600

Retained earnings

820,000

Total stockholders’ equity

$1,200,000

Assume the preferred shares have no stated liquidation value. The preferred shares are non-cumulative, so there are no dividends in arrears.

Please calculate the book value per share of common stock.

A) $30.00 per share

B) $8.99 per share

C) $9.00 per share

D) $29.50 per share

7) Which of the following is a reason why a company would do a stock split?

A) To defend against a hostile takeover

B) To generate additional sales revenues

C) To reduce the market price at which the stock is trading

D) To provide the shareholders with something of value, when the company cannot afford a cash dividend

8) Please refer to the following information for Peartree Company:

Common stock, $1.00 par, 100,000 issued, 95,000 outstanding

Paid-in capital in excess of par: $2,150,000

Retained earnings:$910,000

Treasury stock: 5,000 shares purchased at $20 per share

If Peartree purchases an additional 1,000 shares of treasury stock at $18 per share, what journal entry will be required?

A) Debit Treasury stock $18,000 and credit Retained earnings $18,000.

B) Debit Treasury stock $20,000, credit Loss on sale $2,000 and credit Cash $18,000.

C) Debit Treasury stock $18,000 and credit Cash $18,000.

D) Debit Cash $18,000 and credit Treasury stock $18,000.

9) Which of the following would be a reason for a company to restrict its cash dividends or treasury stock purchases?

A) Because the company needs treasury stock to offer as performance incentives to upper management

B) In order to give shareholders stock dividends

C) Due to the desire of shareholders to retain the company’s earnings for future growth and capital expenditures

D) Due to requirements of lenders or creditors that companies maintain enough equity to meet their obligations

10) At January 1, 2014, Foxmore Company had 80,000 shares of common stock outstanding and no preferred stock. During the year, they issued 40,000 additional shares of common stock. At December 31, 2014, Foxmore had 120,000 shares of common stock outstanding, and no preferred stock. In addition, Foxmore reported the following results for the year 2014:

Sales revenues from regular business operations

$3,000,000

Cost of goods sold

900,000

Operating expenses from their regular business operations

600,000

Gain on disposal of several items of property, plant & equipment

15,000

Income tax expense on continuing operations

330,000

Loss on the termination of a discontinued business segment, net of tax

120,000

Losses on damage caused by earthquake, net of tax

280,000

At December 31, 2014, how much is the earnings per share for income (loss) from continuing operations?

(Please round all calculations to the nearest cent.)

A) $(1.20)

B) $7.85

C) $10.65

D) $11.85

acct 3347 cost accounting homework 01 495889

1)

Campus Package Delivery (CPD) provides transportation services in and around Paradise. Its profits have been declining, and management is planning to add a package express service that is expected to increase revenue by $305,000 per year. The total cost to lease the necessary package delivery vehicles from the local dealer is $25,000 per year. The present manager will continue to supervise all services at no increase in salary. Due to expansion, however, the labor costs and utilities would increase by 50 percent. Rent and other costs will increase by 20 percent.

CAMPUS PACKAGE DELIVERY
Annual Income Statement before Expansion
Sales revenue $ 762,000



Costs
Vehicle leases 302,000
Labor 239,000
Utilities 30,000
Rent 65,000
Other costs 35,000
Manager’s salary 117,000



Total costs $ 788,000






Operating profit (loss) $ (26,000 )







Required:
a.

Prepare a report of the differential costs and revenues if the express service is added.

b. Should management start the express service?

2)

Tom s Tax Services is a small accounting firm that offers tax services to small businesses and individuals. A local store owner has approached Tom about doing his taxes but is concerned about the fees Tom normally charges. The costs and revenues at Tom s Tax Services are presented below:

TOM S TAX SERVICES
Annual Income Statement
Sales revenue $ 740,000

Costs
Labor 471,000
Equipment lease 49,200
Rent 41,700
Supplies 32,000
Tom s salary 74,000
Other costs 22,500

Total costs $ 690,400

Operating profit (loss) $ 49,600


If Tom gets the store s business, he will incur an additional $59,500 in labor costs. Tom also estimates that he will have to increase equipment leases by about 5 percent, supplies by 10 percent, and other costs by 5 percent.

Required:
a.

What are the differential costs that would be incurred as a result of adding this new client?

b. Tom would normally charge about $75,000 in fees for the services the store would require. How much can he reduce his standard fee and still not lose money on this client?

3)

Betty s Fashions operates retail stores in both downtown and suburban locations. The company has two responsibility centers: the City Division, which contains stores in downtown locations, and the Mall Division, which contains stores in suburban locations. Betty s CEO is concerned about the profitability of the City Division, which has been operating at a loss for the last several years. The most recent City Division income statement follows. The CEO has asked for your advice on shutting down the City Division s operations. If the City Division is eliminated, corporate administration is not expected to change, nor are any other changes expected in the operations or costs of the Mall Division.

BETTY’S FASHIONS, CITY DIVISION
Divisional Income Statement
For the Year Ending January 31
Sales revenue $ 5,000,000
Costs
Advertising City Division 182,000
Cost of goods sold 2,850,000
Divisional administrative salaries 297,000
Selling costs (sales commissions) 587,000
Rent 742,000
Share of corporate administration 482,000



Total costs $ 5,140,000



Net loss before income tax benefit $ -140,000
Tax benefit at 40% rate 56,000



Net loss $ -84,000







Required:

What revenues and costs are probably differential for the decision to discontinue City division’s operations?

What will be the effect on Betty s profi ts if the division is eliminated?

4)

State University Business School (SUBS) offers several degrees, including Bachelor of Business Administration (BBA). The new dean believes in using cost accounting information to make decisions and is reviewing a staff-developed income statement broken down by the degree offered. The dean is considering closing down the BBA program because the analysis, which follows, shows a loss. Tuition increases are not possible. The dean has asked for your advice. If the BBA degree program is dropped, school administration costs are not expected to change, but direct costs of the program, such as operating costs, building maintenance, and classroom costs, would be saved. There will be no other changes in the operations or costs of other programs.

STATE UNIVERSITY BUSINESS SCHOOL, BBA DEGREE
Degree Income Statement
For the Academic Year Ending June 30
Revenue $ 425,000
Costs
Advertising BBA program 20,000
Faculty salaries 210,000
Degree operating costs (part-time staff) 24,000
Building maintenance 34,000
Classroom costs (building depreciation) 90,000
Allocated school administration costs 55,000


Total costs $ 433,000


Net loss $ (8,000)





Required:

What revenues and costs are probably differential for the decision to drop the BBA program?

5)

During May, Budget Baking is preparing its June budget. In preparing the budget the company starts with the actual results for April (the most recent month for which complete data are available). Then, they consider what the differences in costs will be between April and June.

Management expects the number of cookies sold to be 10 percent greater in June than in April, and it expects all food costs (e.g., flour, eggs) to be 10 percent higher in June than in April. Management expects “other” labor costs to be 15 percent higher in June than in April, partly because more labor will be required in June and partly because employees will get a pay raise. The manager will get a pay raise that will increase the salary from $3,100 in April to $3,600 in June. Rent and utilities are not expected to change.

Required:

Prepare a budget for Carmen’s Cookies for June. (Omit the “$” sign in by Text-Enhance” href=”http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw-hill.com/#” rel=”nofollow”>your response.)

6)

State University Business School (SUBS) offers several degrees, including Bachelor of Business Administration (BBA).

STATE UNIVERSITY BUSINESS SCHOOL, BBA DEGREE
Degree Income Statement
For the Academic Year Ending June 30
Revenue $ 2,150,000
Costs
Advertising BBA program 90,000
Faculty salaries 1,095,000
Degree operating costs (part-time staff) 205,000
Building maintenance 200,000
Classroom costs (building depreciation) 440,000
Allocated school administration costs 230,000


Total costs $ 2,260,000


Net loss $ -110,000





The dean of the Business School is considering expanding the BBA program by offering an evening program in a nearby city. The program would be the same size (in terms of students). The school s CFO estimates that the combined BBA revenue (on-campus plus the evening program) will be twice the current revenue, as shown in the above table. Because the evening program will be new, advertising expenses for the evening session will be three times their current level. Faculty salaries will double. Degree operating costs will increase by 50 percent. Building maintenance and classroom costs will remain unchanged, but classroom space will be rented at a cost of $175,000 per academic year. School administration costs will increase by $25,000 , and allocated school administration costs (for both programs) will be $335,000 per academic year.

Required:
a.

What will be the contribution of the combined BBA program be given these estimates?

Are there other factors the dean should consider before making her decision?

7)

Al’s Brake Shop had sales revenues and operating costs in 2014 of $650,000 and $525,000, respectively. In 2015, Al’s plans to expand the services it provides to customers to include lubrication services. Revenues are expected to increase by $85,000 and operating costs by $50,000 as a result of this expansion. Assuming that there are no changes to the existing brake business, operating profits would be expected to increase during 2015 by

8)

Each of the following is a key financial manager in an organization except for the

Treasurer
External auditor
Controller
Chief financial officer
Cost accountant

9)

he delivery of products or services to customers is an example of which element in the value chain?
Design
Distribution
Production

Marketing

10)

Which of the following could be considered part of the value chain in a service firm?

Raw materials
Distribution
Advertising
Inspection of product

11)

Which of the following statements concerning the value chain is false?

Successful firms are ones that operate within the entire value chain, thereby overseeing every aspect of the value chain for the customer.

The goal of a value chain is to find areas where a company can either add value or reduce cost.

The value chain focuses on the entire production process, as well as the sale of the product and service after the sale.

If a company cannot compete in a specific area of the value chain, it might outsource that portion of the value chain to another entity which can perform it better

12)

Managers first create a formal plan that includes goals for the company. They then translate those goals into quantitative formats. The process they use to do all of this is referred to as

benchmarking.
value-added analysis.
cost-benefit analysis.
activity-based costing.

budgeting

13)

A firm’s replies to customers’ questions via email would be an example of which element of the value chain?

Design
Customer Service
Supply
Marketing

14)

Which of the following does not represent a main focus of cost management information?

Preparation of financial statements
Internal auditing and control
Planning and decision making
Performance measurement

15)

The individual who would most likely use only financial accounting information in making decisions is a

vice president of marketing.
factory supervisor.
company stockholder.
department manager.

acct 346 495890

1.(TCO 9) An investment of $185,575 is expected to generate returns of $65,000 per year for each of the next four years. What is the investment’s internal rate of return? (Points : 25)

YearCash Flows

0-$185,575

1$65,000

2$65,000

3$65,000

4$65,000

2. (TCO 4) Legal Docs Inc is a legal services firm that files incorporation papers for small businesses. They charge $1,000 per application. This year’s income statement shows the following:

Sales $1,295,000

Variable Expenses $1,023,000

Contribution margin $272,000

Fixed costs $250,000

Profit $22,000

Required:

(a) Compute the break-even point in units.

(b) Compute the contribution margin ratio.

(c) Compute the current margin of safety.

(d) How many applications must the company sell to make a profit of $350,000? (Points : 25)

Number of units: 1,295

Variable Cost per unit: $789.96 per unit

3. (TCO 5) The following data has been taken from Air-Tite company in its first year of business.

Units produced 200,000

Units sold 180,000

Units in ending inventory 20,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead $600,000

(a) Compute the amount of fixed manufacturing overhead that would be expensed in the current year if full absorption costing is used.

(b) Compute the amount of fixed manufacturing overhead that would be expensed in the current year if variable costing is used.

(c) Compute the amount of fixed manufacturing overhead that would be included in ending inventory under full absorption costing. (Points : 25)

acct 346 495891

1.(TCO 1) Distinguish between product costs and period costs. Define both types of costs and provide examples.(Points : 20)

2.(TCO 6) Booth Financial Services, LLC has two revenue producing departments, Financial Planning and Business Consulting. The accounting department is trying to determine the best method to allocate $1,000,000 of common costs (secretarial staff, reception personnel, etc), either by salary or number of employees. Information on the revenue departments are as follows:

Department

Employees

Salaries

Financial Planning

150 employees

$10,000,000

Business Consulting

50 employees

$5,000,000

(a) Allocate the $1,000,000 common costs to the two revenue departments using both methods.
(b) Why are allocations called arbitrary? (Points : 25)

3.(TCO 10) Charlie Corp sells it products on both credit and cash basis. Monthly sales are sold 20% for cash, 80% for credit. Credit sales are collected 40% in the month of sale and 60% the following month. Sales for the first quarter are as follows:

January $100,000
February $150,000
March $125,000

Compute cash collections for February. (Points : 25)

4.(TCO 2) Singleton Company is trying to determine a predetermined manufacturing overhead. Estimated overhead for the upcoming year is $600,000. Budgeted machine hours are 120,000 hours, and budgeted labor hours are 15,000 hours at a rate of $20.00 per hour. Compute the predetermined overhead rate based on:

(a) Machine hours
(b) Direct labor hours
(c) Direct labor dollars (Points : 25)

acct 346 1 amp 2 questions 495892

Question 1 Booth Financial Services, LLC has two revenue producing departments, Financial Planning and Business Consulting. The accounting department is trying to determine the best method to allocate $1,000,000 of common costs (secretarial staff, reception personnel, etc), either by salary or number of employees. Information on the revenue departments are as follows: Department Employees Salaries Financial Planning 150 employees $10,000,000 Business Consulting 50 employees $5,000,000 (a) Allocate the $1,000,000 common costs to the two revenue departments using both methods. (b) Why are allocations called arbitrary?

Question 2 Gina’s Boutique makes custom jewelry. One item, the guru necklace, is a best seller and sales in units for the first quarter are as follows: January 100,000 units February 150,000 units March 180,000 units Desired ending inventory is budgeted at 20% of next month sales. Compute production for February.

acct 495855

1.

In two to three paragraphs, describe the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and why it is important to the accounting profession.

2.

Name and briefly describe the five components of COSO s internal control framework.

3.

Describe the relationship between the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and COSO.

4.

Tom Jackson is a CPA who really likes to go to Las Vegas, play poker, and bet on football games. Tom knows that the accounting profession disapproves of gambling, but because he spends a lot of time studying sports facts and how to win at poker, he feels that he is simply making educated decisions based on facts. He says that this is no different from using accounting information to buy stocks. Use the fraud triangle as a basis to comment on Tom s gambling activities.

acct 1a financial accounting ch 4 6 495857

ACCT 1A: Financial Accounting…

Ch. 4-6

1.Nix It Company s ledger on July 31, its fiscal year-end, includes the following selected accounts that have normal balances (Nix It uses the perpetual inventory system).

Merchandise inventory

$

34,800

Sales returns and allowances

$

3,500

Retained earnings

115,300

Cost of goods sold

102,000

Dividends

7,000

Depreciation expense

7,300

Sales

157,200

Salaries expense

29,500

Sales discounts

1,700

Miscellaneous expenses

2,000


A physical count of its July 31 year-end inventory discloses that the cost of the merchandise inventory still available is $32,900.

Prepare journal entries to close the balances in temporary revenue and expense accounts. Remember to consider the entry for shrinkage. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

2.

Income statement information for adidas Group, a German footwear, apparel, and accessories manufacturer, for the year ended December 31, 2009, follows. The company applies IFRS, as adopted by the European Union, and reports its results in millions of Euros.

Net income

245

Financial income

19

Financial expenses

169

Operating profit

508

Cost of sales

5,669

Income taxes

113

Income before taxes

358

Gross profit

4,712

Royalty and commission income

86

Other operating income

100

Other operating expenses

4,390

Net sales

10,381


1.

Prepare the multiple-step income statement for the company for the year ended December 31, 2009.(Enter your answers in millions. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the ” ” sign in your response.)

Prepare the single-step income statement for the company for the year ended December 31, 2009.(Enter your answers in millions. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the ” ” sign in your response.)

.

Apr. 2

Purchased merchandise from Blue Company under the following terms: $3,600 price, invoice dated April 2, credit terms of 2/15, n/60, and FOB shipping point.

3

Paid $200 for shipping charges on the April 2 purchase.

4

Returned to Blue Company unacceptable merchandise that had an invoice price of $600.

17

Sent a check to Blue Company for the April 2 purchase, net of the discount and the returned merchandise.

18

Purchased merchandise from Fox Corp. under the following terms: $7,500 price, invoice dated April 18, credit terms of 2/10, n/30, and FOB destination.

21

After negotiations, received from Fox a $2,100 allowance on the April 18 purchase.

28

Sent check to Fox paying for the April 18 purchase, net of the discount and allowance.

Prepare journal entries to record the above transactions for a retail store. Assume a perpetual inventory system. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

acct 1a financial accounting ch 10 13 495858

ACCT 1A: Financial Accounting…

Ch. 10-13

On January 1, 2011, Kidman Enterprises issues bonds that have a $1,700,000 par value, mature in 20 years, and pay 9% interest semiannually on June 30 and December 31. The bonds are sold at par.

1.

How much interest will Kidman pay (in cash) to the bondholders every six months (Do not round intermediate calculations. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

2. On January 1, 2011, Kidman Enterprises issues bonds that have a $1,700,000 par value, mature in 20 years, and pay 9% interest semiannually on June 30 and December 31. The bonds are sold at par.

1.

How much interest will Kidman pay (in cash) to the bondholders every six months (Do not round intermediate calculations. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

3. Moss issues bonds with a par value of $90,000 on January 1, 2011. The bonds annual contract rate is 8%, and interest is paid semiannually on June 30 and December 31. The bonds mature in three years. The annual market rate at the date of issuance is 10%, and the bonds are sold for $85,431.

1.

What is the amount of the discount on these bonds at issuance (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

acct 1a financial accounting ch 7 9 495859

1. Diablo Company applies the direct write-off method in accounting for uncollectible accounts.

June

11

Diablo determines that it cannot collect $9,000 of its accounts receivable from its customer Chaffey Company.

29

Chaffey Company unexpectedly pays its account in full to Diablo Company. Diablo records its recovery of this bad debt.

Prepare journal entries to record the above selected transactions of Diablo. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

2. Following are selected transactions Deshawn Company for 2010.

Dec.

13

Accepted a $10,000, 45-day, 8% note dated December 13 in granting Latisha Clark a time extension on her past-due account receivable.

31

Prepared an adjusting entry to record the accrued interest on the Clark note.

3. Prepare journal entries for the above transactions. (Use a 360-day year for interest calculation. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

At year-end (December 31), Alvare Company estimates its bad debts as 0.5% of its annual credit sales of $875,000. Alvare records its Bad Debts Expense for that estimate. On the following February 1, Alvare decides that the $420 account of P. Coble is uncollectible and writes it off as a bad debt. On June 5, Coble unexpectedly pays the amount previously written off.

Prepare the journal entries of Alvare to record these transactions and events of December 31, February 1, and June 5. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

acct 1a financial accounting ch1 3 495860

ACCT 1A: Financial Accounting…Ch1-3

1.

a.

Total assets of Caldwell Company equal $40,000 and its equity is $10,000. What is the amount of its liabilities (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Total liabilities

b.

Total assets of Waterworld equal $55,000 and its liabilities and equity amounts are equal to each other. What is the amount of its liabilities? What is the total amount of both the liabilities and equity (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Total liabilities

Total equity


acct 205 week3 individual project 495862

You are an accountant at a local CPA firm that is auditing the accounting records of ABC Company. You have been asked to educate the accounting department about the limitations of the internal control system in preparation for an upcoming audit. During your audit, you have identified that because of a weak internal control system, an adjusting entry for prepaid insurance was not recorded for the first 3 months of the year at $500 per month.

  • Identify the limitations of the internal control system. Provide at least 3 limitations.
  • Provide at least 2 examples of internal control procedures, and explain how these procedures can be implemented.
  • Identify symptoms of a lack of internal control.
  • Explain the impact of the missing journal entry on the financial statements of the company.

acct 212 495864

Instructions:

Explore a company s annual report. Choose a company whose company name begins with the same letter as your last name. Locate the most recent annual report, at the company s website. Answer below questions.

Cash Flow and Retained Earnings:

1. What investing activity provided the largest inflow of cash in the current year?

2. What investing activity used the largest amount of cash in the current year?

3. What financing activity provided the largest inflow of cash in the current year?

4. What financing activity used the largest amount of cash in the current year?

5. Does the company have sufficient cash inflows from the appropriate category? Describe any problems the company many experience with cash flow from your analysis of the cash flow statement.

6. Show the change in Retained Earnings for the 2 most recent years. What was net income for each year? How much was paid out in dividends each year?

7. Were the dividends on common stock and/or preferred stock? What was the amount of each?

8. Did Retained Earnings change for any reasons other than net income or dividends? Explain.

9. What classes of stock does your company have?

10. How many shares of each class of stock are authorized, how many are issued, and how many are outstanding?

11. Does your company have any treasury stock? How many shares and what dollar amount?

12. What is the par or stated value of each of your company s stocks?

Footnote Disclosures:

13. How many footnote disclosures does your company have?

14. How many significant accounting policies are listed under its Summary of

15. What does it include as Cash and Cash Equivalents?

16. What method does it use to value Inventory?

17. What method(s) does it use to depreciate its assets?

18. Does it have any leased assets? If yes, describe them.

19. What policies does it have in regard to Foreign Currency Translations?

20. Describe any pending lawsuits in which it is involved.

21. Provide its Earnings per Share for the 2 most recent years?

Report of the Independent Auditor(s):

22. Does the auditor(s) give a qualified opinion, an unqualified opinion, a disclaimer of opinion, or an adverse opinion? What does that opinion mean? Is it good?

23. What is the auditor s responsibility in regard to the financial statements?

24. What is management s responsibility in regard to the financial statements?

25. What financial statements were included in the auditor s opinion?

26. Did the auditor believe that the statements were presented fairly?

Management s Report:

27. Who bears the responsibility for the integrity and the objectivity of the financial statements?

28. What does management say they are doing to assure the public that the financial information is reliable?

29. What is the responsibility of the Audit Committee of the Board of Directors?

acct 212 course project 2 mcdonough products inc 495866

Top managers of McDonough Products, Inc., have asked for your help in comparing the company s profit performance and financial position with the average for the industry. The accountant has given you the company s income statement and balance sheet and also the following data for the industry:

McDonough Products, Inc.
Income Statement Compared with Industry Average
Year Ended December 31, 2010
McDonough “Industry
Average”
Net sales……………………………………………………………………. $700,000 100.0%
Cost of goods sold…………………………………………………….. 490,000 57.3
Gross profit……………………………………………………………….. 210,000 42.7
Operating expenses ………………………………………………….. 175,000 29.4
Operating income………………………………………………………. 35,000 13.3
Other expenses………………………………………………………….. 7,000 2.5
Net income ……………………………………………………………….. $28,000 10.8%

McDonough Products, Inc.
Balance Sheet Compared with Industry Average
December 31, 2010
McDonough “Industry
Average”
Current assets……………………………………………………………. $471,200 72.1%
Fixed assets, net ……………………………………………………….. 114,700 19.0
Intangible assets, net …………………………………………………. 21,080 4.8
Other assets………………………………………………………………. 13,020 4.1
Total …………………………………………………………………………. 620,000 1.0

Current liabilities ……………………………………………………….. 240,560 0.5
Long-term liabilities …………………………………………………… 135,160 21.0
Stockholders equity…………………………………………………… 244,280 31.8
Total …………………………………………………………………………. $620,000 100.0%

Requirements
1. Prepare a common-size income statement and balance sheet for McDonough Products. The first column of each statement should present McDonough Products common-size statement, and the second column should show the industry averages.

2. For the profitability analysis, compute McDonough Products (a) ratio of gross profit to net sales (b) ratio of operating income to net sales, and (c) ratio of net income to net sales. Compare these figures with the industry averages. Is McDonough Products profit performance better or worse than the average for the industry?

3. For the analysis of financial position, compute McDonough Products (a) ratios of current assets and current liabilities to total assets and (b) ratio of stockholders equity to total assets. Compare these ratios with the industry averages. Is McDonough Products financial position better or worse than the average for the industry?

acct 212 course mcdonough project 495868

Top managers of McDonough Products, Inc., have asked for your help in comparing the company s profit performance and financial position with the average for the industry. The accountant has given you the company s income statement and balance sheet and also the following data for the industry:

McDonough Products, Inc.
Income Statement Compared with Industry Average
Year Ended December 31, 2010
McDonough “IndustryAverage”
Net sales………………………………………….. $700,000 100.0%
Cost of goods sold…………………………….. 490,000 57.3
Gross profit………………………………………. 210,000 42.7
Operating expenses …………………………. 175,000 29.4
Operating income……………………………….. 35,000 13.3
Other expenses…………………………………… 7,000 2.5
Net income ………………………………………. $28,000 10.8%

McDonough Products, Inc.
Balance Sheet Compared with Industry Average
December 31, 2010
McDonough”IndustryAverage”
Current assets……………………………….. $471,200 72.1%
Fixed assets, net ……………………………. 114,700 19.0
Intangible assets, net ……………………….. 21,080 4.8
Other assets…………………………………….. 13,020 4.1
Total ……………………………………………… 620,000 100.0%

Current liabilities …………………………….. 240,560 0.5
Long-term liabilities ………………………… 135,160 21.0
Stockholders equity…………………………. 244,280 31.8
Total ……………………………………………. $620,000 100.0%

Industry Average Current Ratio 1.53

Industry Average Total Debt to Total Assets 0.68

Requirements
1. Prepare a common-size income statement and balance sheet for McDonough Products. The first column of each statement should present McDonough Products common-size statement, and the second column should show the industry averages.
2. For the profitability analysis, compute McDonough Products (a) ratio of gross profit to net sales (b) ratio of operating income to net sales, and (c) ratio of net income to net sales. Compare these figures with the industry averages. Is McDonough Products profit performance better or worse than the average for the industry?
3. For the analysis of financial position, compute McDonough Products (a) Current ratio and (b) Debt ratio. Compare these ratios with the industry averages. Is McDonough Products financial position better or worse than the average for the industry?

acct 216 week 3 495869

1. Classify the following items as (a) an addition to the bank balance, (b) a subtraction from the bank balance, (c) an addition to the book balance, or (d) a subtraction from the book balance:

_____ $20 in service charges

_____ A $300 check deposited that was returned NSF

_____ An outstanding check that you wrote for $2,000

_____ A deposit in transit of $5,500

_____ Bank Error: the bank credited your account for a deposit made by another customer

2. During 2011, Jimmy Enterprises completed the following transactions:
a. Sales revenue on account, $550,000.
b. Collections on account, $325,000
c. Write-offs of uncollectible, $13,000
d. Uncollectible account expense, 5% of sales revenue
Required:
1. Prepare the journal entries for the above transactions.
2. Suppose Robotics, Inc. s inventory records for a particular item indicated the following transactions in September:

September 1 Beginning Inventory 6 units @ $29
September 10 Purchase 19 units @ $32
September 22 Purchase 12 units @ $30
September 27 Purchase 4 units @ $31

Required: The company sold 22 units on September 30. Compute the ending inventory and cost of goods sold using each of the following methods:

1. LIFO
2. FIFO
3. Average Cost

accounts payable are listed as 120 000 suzie that s right approximately 100 000 of t 495843

accounts payable are listed as $120,000.

Suzie: That s right. Approximately $100,000 of that represents amounts due our suppliers, and the remainder is miscellaneous payables to creditors for utilities, office equipment, supplies, etc.

Sergio: That s what I thought. But as you know, we normally receive a 2% discount from our suppliers for earlier payment, and we always try to take the discount.

Suzie: That s right. I can t remember the last time we missed a discount.

Sergio: Well, in that case, it seems to me the accounts payable should be listed minus the 2% discount. Let s list the accounts payable due suppliers as $98,000, rather than $100,000. Every little bit helps. You never know. It might make the difference between getting the loan and not.

accounts receivable changes with bad debts a firm is evaluating an accounts receivab 495845

14-9 Accounts receivable changes with bad debts. A firm is evaluating an accounts receivable change that would increase bad debts from 2% to 4% of sales. Sales are currently 50,000 units, the selling price is $20 per unit, and the variable cost per unit is $15. As a result of the proposed change, sales are forecast to increase to 60,000 units.

a. What are bad debts in dollars currently and under the proposed change?

b. Calculate the cost of the marginal bad debts to the firm.

c. Ignoring the additional profit contribution from increased sales, if the proposed change saves $3,500 and causes no change in the average investment in accounts receivable, would you recommend it? Explain.

d. Considering all changes in costs and benefits, would you recommend the proposed change? Explain.

e. Compare and discuss your answers in parts c and d.

15-9Cost of bank loan Data Back-Up Systems has obtained a $10,000, 90-day bank loan at an annual interest rate of 15%, payable at maturity. (Note: Assume a 365-day year.) a) How much interest (in dollars) will the firm pay on the 90-day loan? b) Find the effective 90-day rate on the loan. c) Annualize your result in part b to find the effective annual rate for this loan, assuming that it is rolled over every 90 days throughout the year under the same terms and circumstances.

accounts transfer pricing 495846

Two divisions of a company are involved in a dispute. Division A purchases part 101 and Division B purchases part 201 from a third division, C. Both divisions need the parts for products that they assemble. The intercompany transactions have remained constant for several years.

Recently, outside suppliers have lowered their prices, but C Division is not lowering its prices. In addition, all division managers are feeling the pressure to increase profit. Managers of Divisions A and B would like the flexibility to purchase the parts they need from external parties to lower cost and increase profitability.

The current pattern is that Division A purchases 3,000 units of product part 101 from Division C (the supplying division) and another 1,000 units from an external supplier. The market price for part 101 is $900 per unit. Division B purchases 1,000 units of part 201 from Division C and another 1,000 units from an external supplier. Note that both divisions A and B purchase the needed supplies from both the internal source and an external source at the same time.

The mangers for Divisions A and B are preparing a new proposal for consideration.

  • Division C will continue to produce parts 101 and 201. All of its production will be sold to Divisions A and B. No other customers are likely to found for these products in the short term given that supply is greater than demand in the market.
  • Division C will manufacture 2,000 units of part 101 for the Division A and 500 units of part 201 for the Division B.
  • Division A will buy 2,000 units of part 101 from Division C and 2,000 units from an external supplier at $900 per unit.
  • Division B will buy 500 units of part 201 from Division C and 1,500 units from an external supplier at $1,900 per unit.

Division C Data 2012 Based on the Current Agreement

Part

101

201

Direct materials

$200

$300

Direct labor

$200

$300

Variable overhead

$300

$600

Transfer price

$1,000

$2,000

Annual Volume

3,000 units

1,000 units

Required:

  • Calculate the increase or decrease in profits for the three divisions and the company as a whole (four separate computations) if the agreement is enforced. Explain your thought process, comment on the situation, and make a suggestion based on the computations you have made.
  • Evaluate and discuss the implications of the following transfer pricing policies:
    • Transfer price = cost plus a mark-up for the selling division
    • Transfer price = fair market value
    • Transfer price = price negotiated by the managers
  • Why is transfer pricing such a significant issue both from a financial and managerial perspective

for accountsguru exclusively accounting required in excel 495847

Question 1: IsraBlof

On January 1, 2013, The IsraBlof Company signed a contract to transfer the Chinese Wallto the

middle of WallStreet. The project was completed in three years. The following table provides

for the expenses incurred by the constructor, AZ, in each of the three years, the amounts actually

paid in cash by AZ in each of the years, the billings to the buyer, MB, in each of the years and,

finally, actual collections from MB. Estimated and actual costs and collections were identical.

Year

Expenses

incurred by AZ

Paid in cash by

AZ

Billed to MB

Collected from

MB

2013$32,000,000 $24,000,000 $35,000,000 $25,000,000

2014$12,000,000 $16,000,000 $55,000,000 $60,000,000

2015$36,000,000 $40,000,000 $10,000,000 $15,000,000

a. Prepare an income statement for AZ for each of the three years if it adopted: (i) the

percentage of completion method (where costs are used to estimate progress); (ii) the

installment method; (iii) the cost recovery method; and (iv) the completed contract method.

b. Provide the journal entries recorded by AZ during 2013 if it adopted the percentage of

completion method. What was the balance of the account, Wall on Wall Street, on

December 31, 2013?

c. Suppose a manager is interested in reporting the highest cumulative income from the project

at any given point in time. Which method (if any) should the manager adopt? Is there any

method(s) the manager should never adopt? What if the manager cares only about the

overall income from the completed project?

Question 2: Apple

You are given portions of Apple s2010 Annual Report. (Note fiscal year 2010 ends on

September 25, 2010 – all years refer to fiscal year). The file has 30 non-consecutive pages (i.e.,

many pages are missing ), and some pages are only partially filled.

Only Materials already covered in class are required.

The rest is optional (and a good review for the final).

a. Describe in no more than three lines Apple sbusiness.

b. Consider Apple s Accounting Equationfor September 25, 2010 and September 26, 2009.

What is the percentage increase in the level of the equation? Which asset had the highest

growth in terms of dollar amount?

c. Calculate the Current ratioand the Quick ratiofor Appleas of September 25, 2010.

d. Over the years where data exists, in which year did Applereport the highest percentage of

Gross Margin, relative to Net Sales? In which year did Applereport the highest percentage

ofNet Income, relative toNet Sales?

e.Apple changed its revenue recognition policy in 2010. Briefly explain (in no more than three

lines) both the new and the old revenue recognition policies for sales of iPhone. Which

method allows higher revenue to be recognized at the time of sale, the new method or the old

method? Over life?

f.How many shares were used to calculate Apple s Diluted Earnings Per Share in 2010? What

was the percentage impact of the dilution on the reported Basic EPS?

g.Was 2010 Net Income higher or lower than Total Comprehensive Income? What was the

main reason for the difference (item and magnitude)?

h.Which apple do you like better (i) or (ii) ? Why?

i.What was the total value of cash that customers paid, but Apple had not yet recognized as

revenue as of September 25, 2010?

Why didApple add backLoss on Disposition of Property, Plant, and Equipment in the

Statement of Cash Flows? Why did Apple add back Stock Based Compensation Expense in

the Statement of Cash Flows? Apple added in the 2010 Statement of Cash Flows $778 for

Other Liabilities. Did such liabilities increase or decrease during the year?

k.Assume instead of deferring revenues, Apple immediately recorded the proceeds as revenue.

By how much (and in what direction) would Net Sales for 2010 change?

l.When does Apple expense warranty related costs? When does Apple expense advertising

costs?

m.Did the percentage of gross accounts receivable that Apple does not anticipate collecting

increase or decrease in 2010, relative to 2009? What kind of business partners account for

the highest percentage of trade receivables?

n.What depreciation method does Apple use? How much was the Depreciation and

Amortization on Property and Equipment in 2010?

p.What is the net balance of acquired intangible assets with definite service life as of

September 25, 2010?

q.What cost flow assumption did Apple use in valuing its inventory? What is the main

category (or categories) of inventory items?

r.Did you ever meet a Russian Spy?

s.What is the main reason for the increase in Common Stock during 2010?

t.Provide the journal entry that summarizes Apple s Income Tax Expense for 2010. How

much was actually paid in cash by Apple for Income Taxes?

u.Whatstatutory federal income tax rate didApple use for 2010? What wasApple s effective

tax rate for the same year? Which item was the most significant in explaining the difference?

As of September 25, 2010, is the market value of Apple s available-for-sale marketable

securities above or below their costs? Which of these two measurement possibilities is

reported on the Balance Sheet? What is the amount?

w.What wasApple s Rent Expense for itsOperating Leases during 2010? How much isApple

anticipating paying in 2012? What is the longest lease term for retail space?

x.Which geographical segment generated the highest Net Sales during 2010? Which

geographical segment has the highest percentage sales growth from 2009 to 2010? Which

quarter generates the highest sales for Apple? Does this quarter include the holiday season?

y.What are the Related Party Transactions that Apple reports on? With whom? How much?

z.A Judgment Question. After reading Apple s 2010 Annual Report, do you observe any

irregularity or a reason to be concerned regarding its financial reporting policies? (Only a

short answer is required here – up to 10 lines.)

for accountsguru only 495848

Cardinal Paz Corp. carries an account in its general ledger called Investments, which contained debits for investment purchases, and no credits, with the following descriptions.

Feb. 1, 2012

Sharapova Company common stock, $104 par, 208 shares

$41,400

April 1

U.S. government bonds, 12%, due April 1, 2022, interest payable April 1 and October 1, 111 bonds of $1,000 par each

111,000

July 1

McGrath Company 12% bonds, par $54,800, dated March 1, 2012, purchased at 104 plus accrued interest, interest payable annually on March 1, due March 1, 2032

59,184

Prepare the entry to record the accrued interest and the amortization of premium on December 31, 2012, using the straight-line method.(Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,500. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

Interest Receivable

Debt Investment

Interest Revenue 8,754

The fair values of the investments on December 31, 2012, were:

Sharapova Company common stock

$35,770

U.S. government bonds

146,970

McGrath Company bonds

68,160

What entry or entries, if any, would you recommend be made? (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. $2,500. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

Fair Value Adjustment

Unrealized holding gain or loss- Equity

accountting due this saturday 495849

This has to be APA GUIDELINES, TIMES NEW ROMAN,12 IN A MICROSOFT WORDS FORM ONLY

Click the Virtual Organization link on the student website to access the Virtual Organizations.

Select one of the Virtual Organizations as the basis for this assignment.

Obtain faculty approval of your selected organization before beginning the assignment.

Access the information contained in your selected organization s balance sheet and income statement to calculate the following:

Liquidity ratios

oCurrent ratio

oAcid-test, or quick, ratio

oReceivables turnover

oInventory turnover

Profitability ratios

oAsset turnover

oProfit margin

oReturn on assets

oReturn on common stockholders equity

Solvency ratios

oDebt to total assets

oTimes interest earned

Show your calculations for each ratio.

Create a horizontal and vertical analysis for the balance sheet and the income statement.

Write a 350- to 700-word memo to the CEO of your selected organization in which you discuss your

findings from your ratio calculations and your horizontal and vertical analysis. In your memo, address the following questions:

What do the liquidity, profitability, and solvency ratios reveal about the financial position of the company?

Which users may be interested in each type of ratio?

What does the collected data reveal about the performance and position of the company?

Formatyour memo consistent with APA guidelines.

accouting 495850

2.(TCO D) You are CFO of Goforit, Inc., a wholesale distribution company specializing in emerging technologies. Your CEO is a brilliant marketer, but relies on you to explain issues and choices in accounting and finance. She has heard from other members of a CEO organization to which she belongs that a company s net income can vary widely depending on which accounting choices are made from the GAAP menu.

Assuming the goal is to maximize net income, choose an accounting treatment from each of the following scenarios, and explain to your CEO why the choice will produce the desired effect on reported Net Income for the current year. Include in your answer the effect of the choice on both the income statement and balance sheet.

Required:

a. Goforit carries significant electronics inventory in a competitive environment where prices are actually falling. Which inventory valuation method would you choose LIFO, FIFO, or average cost Assume that unit purchases exceed unit sales.

b. Goforit has a large investment in warehouse equipment including conveyor belts, forklifts, and automated packaging systems. Which depreciation method would you choose: Straight line (SL) or double declining balance (DDB)

accouting theory homework plz help me i almost die here 495851

Question 1

New Century Financial Corp., formed in 1995, was a large mortgage lender in the United States. Many of these mortgages were securitized and transferred to investors. New Century accounted for the proceeds of these securitizations as sales. However, New Century committed to buy back mortgages that became troubled within up to a year after transfer.

New Century would retain some mortgages for itself (called retained interests), from which it would receive future cash flows. Also, the transfer agreements included the right to service the mortgages, for which New Century charged a fee. New Century valued these retained interests and servicing rights at current value, based on their discounted expected future cash flows. Thus, revenue from retained interests was recognized at the time of retention, and servicing revenue was recognized at the time of mortgage transfer. These policies required numerous estimates, as compared to a more conservative policy of recognizing revenues as cash flows (when retained interests were received and when servicing responsibilities were rendered).

The company s share price increased dramatically, to a high of US$64 in 2004. Its reported net income reached $1.4 billion in 2005.

However, New Century seriously underestimated the extent of its mortgage buybacks and resulting credit losses. Of $40 billion of mortgages granted in the first three quarters of 2006, it provided only $13.9 million for buybacks. Investor concerns about increasing buybacks rose in 2006 as the 2007 2008 market meltdowns approached. These buyback concerns added to concerns about early revenue recognition from retained interests and servicing. Also, the company failed to write down its retained interests as the current value of the underlying mortgages decreased.

New Century was soon unable to borrow money to finance mortgage buybacks. Its shares lost 90% of their value, and the company was delisted from the New York Stock Exchange. In April 2007, it filed for bankruptcy protection.

New Century s auditor (KPMG) was drawn into the lawsuits that followed. KPMG denied liability, claiming that the provisions for buybacks were deemed adequate at the time and blaming New Century s failure on the market meltdowns of 2007 2008. In December 2009, the SEC filed civil fraud charges against three former executives of New Century, seeking damages and return of bonuses. Several other lawsuits followed. In November 2010, financial media reported final settlement of a class action lawsuit that included a payment of over $65 million by former company officers and directors, and a payment of $44.75 million by auditor KPMG.


Required:

  1. Use the concept of relevance to defend New Century s policy of recognizing revenue as it securitized and sold mortgages. What was the policy s major weakness
  2. Outline a more conservative accounting policy for New Century s mortgage sale transactions. Consider both statement of financial position and net income effects of your policy. (Hint: Read Theory in Practice 8.3, textbook, p. 314.)
  3. Use two characteristics of investor behaviour based on psychology to explain the rapid rise in New Century s share price. Be sure to identify the specific behavioural characteristics you draw on in your answer.
  4. Despite your answer in part (c), is the rapid rise in New Century s share price necessarily inconsistent with (semi-strong) securities market efficiency? Explain.
  5. Note that retained interests meet the definition of a financial instrument. How would these financial instruments be accounted for under IAS 39

Question 2 (25 marks)

Efficient securities market theory has long been under attack from behavioural finance, which draws on behavioural theories of investor behaviour to explain why security prices do not always behave as the economic theories of rational investing and market efficiency predict. These attacks have increased since the 2007 2008 security market meltdowns.

Required:

  1. Explain why prospect theory predicts that security prices will differ from their prices under efficient security markets theory.
  2. Describe two accounting-related efficient securities market anomalies and explain why each is an anomaly.
  3. The efficient securities market anomalies suggest that investors underreact to the full information content of financial statements. Choose one behavioural theory that predicts this underreaction and explain why it predicts underreaction.
  4. Should accountants be concerned that the importance of financial reporting may decline if behaviourally biased investors do not use all the information in the financial statements? Explain.

acc solution with working 495853

1. July 2009, D Ltd. purchased a machine, which is used in a production process in the factory. On 30 June 2010, there was an indication that the machine could be impaired due to a new competitor entering in the market, so D Ltd. calculated the recoverable amounts of the machine. Information concerning the machine is summarised in the table below.

Machine

Cost

1/07/09

Value in use

30/6/10

Net selling price

30/6/10

Machine

$ 25 000

$ 13 000

$ 12 000

Assume that D Ltd. uses straight line depreciation over a 5 year period and had nil residual values at the end of the useful life of the machine.

REQUIRED

Prepare the journal entries to record anyasset impairment for the Machine at 30th June 2010.

2. HH Ltd, having bought the Van from AA Ltd on July 31, 2011 decided to depreciate the asset using diminishing value method at 30% per annum. In October 2011 a news report suggested that this type of Vans were involved in a number of fatal accidents due to a manufacturing defect in the brake-fluid transmission system. Despite the prompt assurance by the manufacturer to recall and repair affected vehicles, HH Ltd reckoned that the value could be permanently impaired due to the negative publicity. As of October 30, 2011 the re-sale value of the vehicle had been estimated to be $ 15,000.

REQUIRED:

(a) Prepare journal entries to record the depreciation charge for the 3 months ending October 30, 2011. (Show all workings)

(b) Prepare journal entries to record any asset impairment as at that date. (Show all workings)

acct 131 chapter 1 homework 495854

A review of the accounting records of Rayford Manufacturing indicated that the company incurred the following payroll costs during the month of September.

1. Salary of the company president $33,000.
2. Salary of the vice president of manufacturing $15,500.
3. Salary of the chief financial officer $19,700.
4. Salary of the vice president of marketing $14,800.
5. Salaries of middle managers (department heads, production supervisors) in manufacturing
plant $203,000.
6. Wages of production workers $943,000.
7. Salaries of administrative secretaries $111,000.
8. Salaries of engineers and other personnel responsible for maintaining production equipment $176,000.
9. Commissions paid to sales staff $246,000.
Required:
a.

What amount of payroll cost would be classified as selling, general, and administrative expense (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

b.

Assuming that Rayford made 3,200 units of product and sold 2,880 of them during the month of September, determine the amount of payroll cost that would be included in cost of goods sold. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Howle Manufacturing Company began operations on January 1. During the year, it started and completed 1,640 units of product. The company incurred the following costs.

1. Raw materials purchased and used $3,240.
2. Wages of production workers $3,520.
3. Salaries of administrative and sales personnel $1,950.
4. Depreciation on manufacturing equipment $4,392.
5. Depreciation on administrative equipment $1,755.

Howle sold 1,080 units of product.

Required:
a.

Determine the total product cost for the year.

b.

Determine the total cost of the ending inventory.(Do not round intermediate calculations. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

c.

Determine the total of cost of goods sold. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Each of the following events describes acquiring an asset that requires a year-end adjusting entry.
1.

Paid $15,400 cash on January 1 to purchase computer equipment to be used for administrative purposes. The equipment had an estimated expected useful life of five years and a $1,900 salvage value.

2.

Paid $15,400 cash on January 1 to purchase manufacturing equipment. The equipment had an estimated expected useful life of four years and a $1,900 salvage value.

3. Paid $19,200 cash in advance on May 1 for a one-year rental contract on administrative offices.
4. Paid $19,200 cash in advance on May 1 for a one-year rental contract on manufacturing facilities.
5.

Paid $3,000 cash to purchase supplies to be used by the marketing department. At the end of the year, $490 of supplies was still on hand.

6.

Paid $3,000 cash to purchase supplies to be used in the manufacturing process. At the end of the year, $490 of supplies was still on hand.

Required:

How the adjusting entry affects the amount of net income shown on the year-end financial statements. Assume a December 31 annual closing date. The first event has been recorded as an example. Assume that any products that have been made have not been sold. (If there is no effect select “NA” from dropdown.)

During 2011, Gallo Manufacturing Company incurred $45,000,000 of research and development (R&D) costs to create a long-life battery to use in computers. In accordance with FASB standards, the entire R&D cost was recognized as an expense in 2011. Manufacturing costs (direct materials, direct labor, and overhead) are expected to be $262 per unit. Packaging, shipping, and sales commissions are expected to be $60 per unit. Gallo expects to sell 1,000,000 batteries before new research renders the battery design technologically obsolete. During 2011, Gallo made 433,000 batteries and sold 409,000 of them.

Required:
a. Identify the upstream and downstream costs.
b.

Determine the amount of cost of goods sold and the ending inventory balance for the year 2011. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

c.

Determine the sales price assuming that Gallo desires to earn a profit margin that is equal to 25 percent of the total cost of developing, making, and distributing the batteries. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

d.

Prepare an income statement for 2011. Use the sales price developed in part c. (Amounts to be deducted and loss amounts should be indicated with minus sign. Do not round your intermediate calculations. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

The CFO of the Rigney Microscope Corporation intentionally misclassified a downstream transportation expense in the amount of $64,687,500 as a product cost in an accounting period when the company made 11,500 microscopes and sold 7,400 microscopes. Rigney rewards its officers with bonuses that are based on net earnings.

Required:
a.

Indicate whether the elements on the financial statements (i.e., assets, liabilities, retained earnings, expense, and net income) would be overstated or understated as a result of the downstream transportation expense. Determine the amount of the overstatement or understatement for each element. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Jolly Manufacturing Company was started on January 1, 2011, when it acquired $14,000 cash by issuing common stock. Jolly immediately purchased office furniture and manufacturing equipment costing $9,100 and $34,300, respectively. The office furniture had a five-year useful life and a zero salvage value. The manufacturing equipment had a $3,500 salvage value and an expected useful life of four years. The company paid $11,900 for salaries of administrative personnel and $15,000 for wages to production personnel. Finally, the company paid $13,780 for raw materials that were used to make inventory. All inventory was started and completed during the year. Jolly completed production on 4,800 units of product and sold 3,820 units at a price of $15 each in 2011. (Assume that all transactions are cash transactions.)

Required:
a.

Determine the total product cost and the average cost per unit of the inventory produced in 2011. (Round your average cost per unit to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

b.

Determine the amount of cost of goods sold that would appear on the 2011 income statement. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

c.

Determine the amount of the ending inventory balance that would appear on the December 31, 2011, balance sheet. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

d.

Determine the amount of net income that would appear on the 2011 income statement. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

e.

Determine the amount of retained earnings that would appear on the December 31, 2011, balance sheet.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

f.

Determine the amount of total assets that would appear on the December 31, 2011, balance sheet.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

The following transactions pertain to 2012, the first-year operations of Hall Company. All inventory was started and completed during 2012. Assume that all transactions are cash transactions.

1. Acquired $4,200 cash by issuing common stock.
2. Paid $680 for materials used to produce inventory.
3. Paid $1,860 to production workers.
4. Paid $730 rental fee for production equipment.
5. Paid $100 to administrative employees.
6. Paid $117 rental fee for administrative office equipment.
7. Produced 300 units of inventory of which 200 units were sold at a price of $13 each.
Required:

Prepare an income statement and a balance sheet.(Be sure to list the assets and liabilities in order of their liquidity. Do not round intermediate calculations.Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount.Amounts to be deducted and loss amounts should be indicated with minus sign.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

accounting for sumanc 495815

Liability

1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:

Social Security taxes: 4% on the first $55,000 earned per employee

Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned per employee

Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500

State income taxes: 4% of gross earnings

Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings

State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned per employee

Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned per employee

The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end and no wages have been paid during the month.

a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:

Social Security taxes

Medicare taxes

Federal income taxes withheld

State income taxes

Insurance withholdings

b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:

Matching Social Security taxes

Matching Medicare taxes

State unemployment taxes

Federal unemployment taxes

2. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure.A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:

1-Dec: Borrowed $10,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3-month, 15% note payable.

Interest and principal are due at maturity.

10-Dec: Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to

total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates

that 3% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit (parts only).

22-Dec: Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.

26-Dec: Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a 15% note payable due in 60 days. (Assume 360 day year for interest)

31-Dec: Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162

31-Dec: Accrued three days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.

Instructions

a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.

b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest.

c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.

3.Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:

2-Aug: Borrowed $55,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 90-day, 12% note.

20-Aug: Issued a $50,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $50,000 delivery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest r ate.

10-Sep: Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued

a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.

11-Sep: Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account

payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and carries a 14% interest rate.

10-Oct: The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.

11-Oct: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.

30-Oct: Paid note to Bank of Kingsville.

Instructions

a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.

b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest. (Daily interest is calculated utilizing the 360 day method).

c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.

accounting for sumanc 495816

Final Paper

Focus of the Final Paper

Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.

Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:

Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?

Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet

Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.

Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.

Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.

Writing the Final Paper

1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:

a. Title of paper

b. Student s name

c. Course name and number

d. Instructor s name

e. Date submitted

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style

accounting system 495817

Here are some additional instructions and guidelines for the Article Review.

Read one long, or two shorter articles, from the Journal of Accountancy (within last 18 months, your choice of articles) .

Prepare a 2-3 page paper (~1 page per article, if shorter) that:

1) Summarizes the purpose and major points of the article;

2) States whether you agree or disagree with the author’s viewpoint;

3) Explains how the article is related to, or impacts, accounting information systems.

Please attach the article(s) to your paper or provide the web-link.

You will find the articles on the Journal’s website (http://journalofaccountancy.com/).

For an example, one recently published article in the Journal involves a “fraud risk self assessment tool”. As part of an audit, the tool can be completed by the client and will help auditors assess the internal control risks to the client’s operations, accounting systems and financial information. You can find the article here:

http://journalofaccountancy.com/Issues/2013/Mar/20126264.htm

accounting tax problem philip and claire are married and file a joint 495818

INDIVIDUAL TAX RETURN PROBLEM 4

Required:

  • Use the following information to complete Phillip and Claire Dunphy’s 2011 federal income tax return. If information is missing, use reasonable assumptions to fill in the gaps. Ignore the alternative minimum tax for this problem.

  • Any required forms, schedules, and instructions can be found at the IRS Web site (www.irs.gov). The instructions can be helpful in completing the forms.

Facts:

    1. Phillip and Claire are married and file a joint return. Phillip is self-employed as a real estate agent, and Claire is a flight attendant. Phillip and Claire have three dependent children. All three children live at home with Phillip and Claire for the entire year.

      The Dunphys provide you with the following additional information:

      • The Dunphys do not want to contribute to the presidential election campaign.

      • The Dunphys live at 3701 Brighton Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90018.

      • Phillip’s birthday is 11/5/1965 and his Social Security number is 321-44-5766.

      • Claire’s birthday is 5/12/1968 and her Social Security number is 567-77-1258.

      • Haley’s birthday is 11/6/1999 and his Social Security number is 621-18-7592.

      • Alex’s birthday is 2/1/2001 and her Social Security number is 621-92-8751.

      • Luke’s birthday is 12/12/2005 and his Social Security number is 621-99-9926.

      • The Dunphys do not have any foreign bank accounts or trusts.

    2. Claire is a flight attendant for Western American Airlines (WAA), where she earned $57,000 in salary. WAA withheld federal income tax of $6,375, state income tax of $1,800, Los Angeles city income tax of $675, Social Security tax of $3,600, and Medicare tax of $825.

    3. Phillip and Claire received $300 of interest from State Savings Bank on a joint account. They also received a qualified dividend of $395 on jointly owned stock in Xila Corporation.

    4. Phillip’s real estate business is named Phillip Dunphy Realty. His business is located at 645 Grove Street, Los Angeles, CA 90018, and his employer identification number is 93-3488888. Phillip’s gross receipts during the year were $730,000. Phillip uses the cash method of accounting for his business. Phillip’s business expenses are as follows:

      Advertising $ 5,000
      Professional dues 800
      Professional journals 200
      Employee wages 48,000
      Insurance on office contents 1,120
      Accounting services 2,100
      Miscellaneous office expense 500
      Utilities and telephone 3,360
      Payroll taxes 3,600
      Depreciation To be calculated

      On March 20, Phillip moved his business out of the old offices at 1103 Allium Lane into a newly constructed and equipped office on Grove Street. Phillip sold the old office building and all its furnishings. Phillip’s expenditures for the new office building are as follows:

      Phillip computes his cost recovery allowance using MACRS. He would like to use the 179 immediate expensing, but he has elected to not claim any bonus depreciation. Phillip has never claimed 179 or bonus depreciation before. The assets Phillip sold on March 20 are as follows:

      Phillip has never sold any assets relating to his business before this transaction.

Page C-7

  1. The Dunphys sold 60 shares of Fizbo Corporation common stock on September 3, for $65 a share (minus a $50 total commission). The Dunphys purchased the stock on November 8, 2010, for $90 a share. They also sold a painting for $13,000 on March 1. Claire purchased the painting for $20,050 on September 1, 2004, as an investment.

  2. The Dunphys filed their 2010 federal, state, and local returns on April 14, 2011. They paid the following additional 2010 taxes with their returns: federal income taxes of $630, state income taxes of $250, and city income taxes of $75.

  3. The Dunphys made timely estimated federal income tax payments of $16,000 each quarter during 2011. They also made estimated state income tax payments of $1,000 each quarter and estimated city income tax payments of $300 each quarter. The Dunphys made all fourth-quarter payments on December 31, 2011. They would like to receive a refund for any overpayments.

accounting test bank 495820

Accounting Test Bank
Question Detail:

1. A bonus usually differs from a salary in terms of:

  1. Amount and timing.
  2. Base, timing, and financial statement effect.
  3. Tax implications.
  4. Motivation effects.
  5. Base, pool, and payment terms.

2. Of the three basic forms of management compensation (salary, bonus, benefits), the fastest growing part of total compensation is:

  1. Salary.
  2. Bonus.
  3. Benefits.
  4. Salary and bonus.

3. As a firm’s strategy changes to respond to different stages of a product’s life cycle, compensation:

  1. Can be affected.
  2. Is affected, but only to a very limited extent.
  3. Should change in response to the new strategy.
  4. Should increase.
  5. Should decrease.

4. Risk aversion by managers should be recognized when revising compensation plans because:

  1. Compensation mix (salary, bonus) can influence a manager’s risk aversion.
  2. Most companies want risk averse managers.
  3. Most companies want risk taking managers.
  4. It costs less to pay risk averse managers.

5. Due in part to the failure of many banks in 2008, executive compensation is getting increased oversight by:

  1. Audit committees of corporate boards
  2. Top management
  3. Compensation committees of corporate boards
  4. Banking regulators and corporate compensation committees
  5. Banking regulators such as the SEC

6. Any system of compensation:

  1. May encourage unethical behavior.
  2. Must be approved by the appropriate regulatory authority.
  3. Should be designed by top management.
  4. Must be approved by the auditor.

7. The objectives of management compensation, when compared to the objectives used to develop performance measurement systems, are:

  1. More numerous.
  2. Less specific.
  3. Consistent in content.
  4. Significantly broader in scope.
  5. More specific.

8. In developing compensation plans, the management accountant works to achieve fairness by making the plan:

  1. Precise, comprehensive and directive.
  2. Simple, clear and consistent.
  3. Attractive.
  4. Rewarding.
  5. Selective.

9. Bases for management bonus compensation often include:

  1. Stock price performance.
  2. Percentage of salary.
  3. Achievement of break-even sales.
  4. Percentage of firm-wide net income.
  5. When strategic performance measures or critical success factors are used to determine bonus compensation, the bonus will usually depend either on the amount of improvement in the measure or on:
  6. Maintaining the current level.
  7. Achieving a predetermined goal.
  8. Quality of work completed.
  9. Intensity of effort expended.

11. Bonus plans should be tied to variable cost income which is not affected by inventory level changes, rather than the conventional:

A. Tax-based net income.

  1. Marginal cost income.
  2. Full cost income.
  3. Operating income.
  4. The balanced scorecard critical success factors (CSFs) provide strong motivation in bonus compensation plans if the non-controllable factors are:
  5. Emphasized.
  6. Separated.
  7. Recognized.
  8. Excluded.
  9. Controlled.

13. If fairness only is considered, unit managers prefer:

  1. Not to be evaluated.
  2. A subjective measure.
  3. A single, objective measure.
  4. A firm-wide pool over a unit-based pool.
  5. A unit-based pool over a firm-wide pool.
  6. Generally, the current and deferred types of bonus payment options currently in use tend to focus the manager’s attention on short-term performance measures, most commonly:
  7. Division profit.
  8. After tax corporate profit.
  9. Cash flow.
  10. Growth in firm value.
  11. Stock price.

15. The stock option form of bonus payments to managers usually:

  1. Motivates well even in extended market downturns.
  2. Can lose some motivation because of the delay in reward.
  3. Focuses on the short-term.
  4. Is not consistent with shareholder interests.
  5. Has less risk than other types of bonus payment plans.
  6. The ideal compensation plan would make all company contributions to the plan immediately tax-deductible and all tax consequences for managers:
  7. Insignificant.
  8. Deferred or avoidable.
  9. Limited, but current.
  10. Limited, but pre-paid.

17. In management compensation, the use of the balanced scorecard achieves:

  1. Fairness.
  2. Alignment of manager’s incentives and the organization’s strategy.
  3. The desired ethical environment.
  4. Revenue generation and cost control.
  5. A specific non-financial measurement.

18. The balanced scorecard evaluation of the firm is an especially strong financial tool because of its:

  1. Use of qualitative measures.
  2. Use of quantitative measures.
  3. Simplicity in use.
  4. Ability to predict change.
  5. Use of multiple critical success factors (CSFs).

19. The receivables turnover ratio is a measure of:

  1. Asset value.
  2. Leverage.
  3. Sales performance.
  4. Profitability.
  5. Liquidity.

20. Market value of equity is an objective measure which clearly shows what:

  1. The firm’s financial statements show the firm’s value to be.
  2. Investors think is the firm value.
  3. Stock analysts calculate as the firm’s value.
  4. Is the sales value of the firm.
  5. Is the liquidation value of the firm.

21. Analysts prefer the following three valuation methods over all others:

A. EVA, cash flow multiplier and sales multiplier

B. Enterprise value, discounted cash flow, and sales multiple

  1. Sales multiple, earnings multiple, and discounted cash flow
  2. EVA, return on equity and discounted cash flow
  3. Enterprise value, earnings multiple, and sales multiple
  4. Since it is based on cash flows, the discounted cash flow (DCF) method of valuation has the added advantage that it is not subject to the bias of different:
  5. Discount rates.
  6. Internal rates of return.
  7. Monetary systems.
  8. Accounting policies for determining total assets and net income.
  9. The multiplier used in an earnings-based method of valuation of a firm is often estimated from the price-to-earnings ratios of the stocks of comparable:
  10. Taxable entities.
  11. Industries.
  12. Firms.
  13. For-profit firms.
  14. Publicly-held firms.

24. Which one of the following items is not a measure of a company’s liquidity?

  1. Accounts receivable turnover.
  2. Return on equity.
  3. Quick ratio.
  4. Cash flow ratio.
  5. Day’s sales in inventory.

25. Which one of the following forms of compensation is a based upon the achievement of performance goals for current the period?

  1. Perk.
  2. Stock option.
  3. Performance shares.
  4. Bonus.
  5. Salary.

26. Which one of the following forms of compensation includes special services and benefits for the employee?

  1. Perk.
  2. Stock option.
  3. Performance shares.
  4. Bonus.
  5. Salary.

27. A method for determining a bonus based upon the performance of the unit is a(n):

  1. Segment-based pool.
  2. Unit-based pool.
  3. Firm-based pool.
  4. Activity-based pool.
  5. Function-based pool.

28. A method for determining a bonus based upon the performance of the firm is a(n):

  1. Segment-based pool.
  2. Unit-based pool.
  3. Firm-based pool.
  4. Activity-based pool.
  5. Volume-based pool.

29. All of the following are listed as common payment options for bonus compensation plans except:

  1. Performance shares.
  2. Current bonus.
  3. Deferred bonus.
  4. Preferred bonus.
  5. Stock options.

30. The profit multiplier is used to measure:

  1. Efficiency.
  2. Effectiveness.
  3. Net revenue.
  4. Collectability.
  5. Accountability.

31. Each one of the following is a method for directly measuring the value of a firm’s equity except:

  1. The discounted cash flow method.
  2. Market value.

C. Sales multiple.

  1. Earnings-based valuation.
  2. Enterprise value.

32. Which one of the following refers to the firm’s ability to pay its current operating expenses and maturing debt?

  1. Discounted cash flow.
  2. Liquidity.
  3. Earnings base.
  4. Profitability.
  5. Purchasing power.

33. Which one of the following develops the value of the firm as the discounted present value of the firm’s net free cash flows?

  1. Discounted cash flow method.
  2. Liquidity method.
  3. Multiples-based method.
  4. Profitability method.
  5. Purchasing power method.

34. A deferred bonus consists of:

  1. Cash only.
  2. Stock only.
  3. Cash and/or stock.
  4. Membership in a fitness club.

35. Which one of the following computes value based on annual earnings?

  1. Discounted cash flow method.
  2. Liquidity method.
  3. Multiples-based method.
  4. Profitability method.
  5. Market value method.

36. Jackson Supply Company has a 2 to 1 current ratio. This ratio would increase to more than 2 to 1 if the company:

  1. Purchased a marketable security for cash.
  2. Wrote off an uncollectible receivable.
  3. Sold merchandise on account that earned a normal gross margin.
  4. Purchased inventory on account.

37. Benefits include all of the following except:

  1. Travel.
  2. Life insurance.
  3. Medical benefits.
  4. Membership in a fitness club.
  5. Performance shares.

38. A current bonus consists of:

  1. Cash only.
  2. Stock only.
  3. Cash and/or stock.
  4. Membership in a fitness club.

39. In service firms, improvement in long term profitability is best measured by all the following except:

  1. Staff utilization.
  2. Net revenues.
  3. Collections of customer accounts.
  4. Materials usage.

accounting theory 495822

Question 1

In July 2011, financial media reported that Glencore International, plc, a large, Swiss-based multinational producer of metals, energy, and agricultural commodities, had decided to stop reporting quarterly financial results from the second quarter of 2011. Glencore s first-quarter 2011 sales and earnings were sharply higher than they were for the same quarter of the previous year, but it appeared that earnings for the first quarter still fell short of market expectations.

Required:

  1. Outline two possible reasons Glencore reduced its information production in this manner.
  2. How do you predict that the stock market will react to this decision by Glencore? Explain.
  3. The covenants in Glencore s debt contract required the company to report quarterly. To overcome the rigidity inherent in debt contracts, Glencore offered to make a cash payment to consenting bondholders of 0.25% of their holdings, up to a maximum of $2.4 million, if they agreed to drop the covenant. If you were a Glencore bondholder, would you accept Glencore s offer or not? Explain your reasons.

Question 2

In January 2011, the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) adopted a requirement that companies give shareholders a say on pay of senior management. This requirement is part of the implementation of the 2010 Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, passed by the U.S. congress in response to the 2007 2008 market meltdowns and widespread concerns that senior managers were overpaid. Shareholders will be asked to vote on executive compensation packages at least once every three years. The result of the vote is non-binding on the company. Results of the shareholder vote must be publicly disclosed.

In Canada, the Ontario Securities Commission is considering similar requirements.

Required:

  1. With what theory of executive compensation is say on pay most consistent? Explain.
  2. The SEC is proposing that the compensation committee of the board of directors must consist of members independent of management. Also, the committee will have full authority to retain consultants, lawyers, and other advisors. Would such proposals, if implemented, eliminate the need for giving shareholders a say on pay? Explain.
  3. The expected utility of compensation to a manager can be much less than the sum of dollar compensation, share, and option awards. Explain why.
  4. Do you think the say on pay requirements and implementation of the SEC proposals on compensation committee member independence and freedom to hire advisors will be effective in increasing the efficiency of executive compensation contracts? Explain. Define a (second-best) efficient compensation contract as part of your answer.

accounting theory assignment 3 questions parts a b and c 495823

Question 1 (14 marks)

In July 2011, financial media reported that Glencore International, plc, a large, Swiss-based multinational producer of metals, energy, and agricultural commodities, had decided to stop reporting quarterly financial results from the second quarter of 2011. Glencore s first-quarter 2011 sales and earnings were sharply higher than they were for the same quarter of the previous year, but it appeared that earnings for the first quarter still fell short of market expectations.

Required

    1. (4 marks)

Outline two possible reasons why Glencore reduced its information production in this manner.

    1. (4 marks)

How do you predict that the stock market will react to this decision by Glencore? Explain.

    1. (6 marks)

The covenants in Glencore s debt contract required the company to report quarterly. To overcome the rigidity inherent in debt contracts, Glencore offered to make a cash payment to consenting bondholders of 0.25% of their holdings, up to a maximum of $2.4 million, if they agreed to drop the covenant. If you were a Glencore bondholder, would you accept Glencore s offer or not? Explain your reasons.

Question 2 (18 marks)

Income smoothing is a common earnings management pattern. Many managers feel that their reputations, and their firms share prices, are enhanced by a smooth, steadily growing sequence of reported earnings.

Required

    1. (4 marks)

A behaviourally biased investor observes a firm s earnings increasing steadily over time. The investor decides that this firm is a growth firm. Identify the specific behavioural bias that may underlie this investor behaviour and explain why it leads to identifying the firm as a growth firm. Is the investor necessarily correct in this identification as a growth firm? Explain why or why not.

    1. (4 marks)

Some firms have used low-persistence accruals to smooth net income to a level that the firm s managers felt would persist. Is this type of earnings management good or bad in terms of usefulness to equity investors?

Does such smoothing benefit the manager whose compensation depends on reported net income? Explain why or why not.

    1. (5 marks)

A researcher finds that firms that are growing rapidly have, on average, a lower proportion of manager compensation based on net income, relative to share-based compensation, than firms that are not growing rapidly. Explain why. Use concepts of recognition lag, sensitivity, and precision in your answer.

    1. (5 marks)

A firm that has smoothed earnings for many years needs to manage its earnings upwards this year to maintain the pattern of smooth, steady earnings that it has been reporting. The firm anticipates a period of lower earnings next year. Would the firm manager be wise to smooth earnings this year? Explain why or why not.

Question 3 (18 marks)

In January 2011, the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) adopted a requirement that companies give shareholders a say on pay of senior management. This requirement is part of the implementation of the 2010 Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, passed by the U.S. congress in response to the 2007-2008 market meltdowns, including widespread concerns that senior managers were overpaid. Shareholders will be asked to vote on executive compensation packages at least once every three years. The result of the vote is non-binding on the company. Results of the shareholder vote must be publicly disclosed.

In Canada, the Ontario Securities Commission is considering similar requirements.

Required

    1. (2 marks)

With what theory of executive compensation is say on pay most consistent? Explain.

    1. (6 marks)

The SEC is proposing that the compensation committee of the board of directors must consist of members independent of management. Also, the committee will have full authority to retain consultants, lawyers, and other advisors. Would such proposals, if implemented, eliminate the need for giving shareholders a say on pay? Explain.

    1. (4 marks)

The expected utility of compensation to a manager can be much less than the sum of dollar compensation, share, and option awards. Explain why.

    1. (6 marks)

Do you think the say on pay requirements and implementation of the SEC proposals on compensation committee member independence and freedom to hire advisors will be effective in increasing the efficiency of executive compensation contracts? Explain. Define a (second-best) efficient compensation contract as part of your answer.

50

accounting unit 10 495824

Writing Assignment

After reflecting on what you have learned and how you have benefited by taking AB116 Accounting II, write a minimum one page response to the questions below. Make sure to address the critical elements so you will be successful in completing this assignment.

Please answer the following questions in your paper:

  1. Reflect and describe which key concepts and topics in this course have made you a stronger candidate to enter the business world.

  2. Discuss how this course has affected you in your professional development as a student and as a person as well as encouraging you on your academic path.

Respond using the critical elements below and submit your minimum one page response to the Dropbox. This Assignment is due at the end of Unit 10.

Critical Elements:

  • Write your original response in Standard American English, paying special attention to grammar, style, and mechanics.

  • Respond to the questions in a thorough manner, providing specific examples of concepts and topics, from question 1, and specific examples of their impact on you from question 2.

  • Ensure that your viewpoint and purpose are clearly stated.

  • Demonstrate logical and appropriate transitions from one idea to another.

  • Your paper should be highly organized, logical, and focused.

accounting unit 5 495825

This week s Discussion topic comes from BYP11-2 page 547 of your textbook. PepsiCo, Inc. and Coca-Cola Co. Inc. financial statements are in Appendix A and B of your textbook. Use the financials to answer the following questions.

(a) At December 26, 2009, what was PepsiCo s largest current liability account? What were its total current liabilities? At December 31, 2009, what was Coca-Cola s largest current liability account? What were its total current liabilities?
(b) Based on information contained in those financial statements, compute the following 2009 values for each company.
(1) Working capital.
(2) Current ratio.
(c) What conclusions concerning the relative liquidity of these companies can be drawn from these data?

BYP11-2 page 547

Go to the book s companion website, www.wiley.com/college/weygandt, to see the completion of this problem.

BROADENING YOUR PERSPECTIVE

Financial Reporting and Analysis

Financial Reporting Problem: PepsiCo, Inc.

BYP11-1

The financial statements of PepsiCo, Inc. and the notes to consolidated financial statements appear in Appendix A.

Instructions

Refer to PepsiCo s financial statements and answer the following questions about current and contingent liabilities and payroll costs.

  • (a) What were PepsiCo s total current liabilities at December 26, 2009? What was the increase/decrease in PepsiCo s total current liabilities from the prior year?
  • (b) In PepsiCo s Note 2 ( Our Significant Accounting Policies ), the company explains the nature of its contingencies. Under what conditions does PepsiCo recognize (record and report) liabilities for contingencies?
  • (c) What were the components of total current liabilities on December 26, 2009?

Comparative Analysis Problem: PepsiCo, Inc. vs. The Coca-Cola Company

BYP11-2

PepsiCo, Inc. s financial statements are presented in Appendix A. Financial statements of The Coca-Cola Company are presented in Appendix B.

Instructions

accounting unit 7 discussion 495826

Ethics in financial reporting is critical to the reliability of financial statements. Corporate Managers are under enormous pressure to provide high earnings and dividend amounts. After reading the Ethics Case on page 664 of your text discuss the following:

  1. Who are the stakeholders in this situation?
  2. Is there anything unethical about Henson s intentions or actions?
  3. What is the effect of a stock dividend on a corporation s stockholders equity accounts? Which would you rather receive as a stockholder a cash dividend or a stock dividend? Why?
  4. This is page 664

Critical Thinking

Decision Making Across the OrganizationBYP14-4

The stockholders equity accounts of Fernandez, Inc., at January 1, 2012, are as follows.

Preferred Stock, no par, 4,000 shares issued

$400,000

Common Stock, no par, 140,000 shares issued

700,000

Retained Earnings

500,000

During 2012, the company had the following transactions and events.

July

1

Declared a $0.50 cash dividend on common stock.

Aug.

1

Discovered a $72,000 overstatement of 2011 depreciation expense. (Ignore income taxes.)

Sept.

1

Paid the cash dividend declared on July 1.

Dec.

1

Declared a 10% stock dividend on common stock when the market value of the stock was

$12 per share.

15

Declared a $9 per share cash dividend on preferred stock, payable January 31, 2013.

31

Determined that net income for the year was $320,000.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following questions.

accounting week 3 assignment 495828

Data are gathered regarding the length of tenure top executives have at a major corporation and whether those executives have been divorced. The Human Resources department is evaluating this data to drive decision-making in regard to their hiring process. The data for eight executives is as follows:

Tenure Divorce

1. 9.0 No

2. 9.5 No

3. 11.0 Yes

4. 11.5 Yes

5. 10.0 Yes

6. 9.75 No

7. 10.0 No

8. 10.25 Yes

In a three to five page paper, excluding title page and reference page(s), answer the following questions to analyze the data. Include clearly labeled calculations, if applicable. Calculations conducted in Excel must be copied and pasted into the Word document. This paper should be formatted according to APA guidelines outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

What s the most appropriate procedure for evaluating the relationship between tenure and divorce?

What is the correlation and how can it be interpreted in terms of magnitude, direction and practical importance?

How much of whether executives have been divorced can be accounted for by their length of tenure with the organization? How much of tenure can be explained by whether there has been a divorce?

Make a logical argument for why lengthy tenure may be causing divorce.

Make another logical argument for why divorce may be causing lengthy tenure.

accounting week 5 exercise ashford 495829

Week Five Exercise Assignment

Financial Ratios

1. Liquidity ratios. Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10:

Edison

Stagg

Thornton

Cash

$6,000

$5,000

$4,000

Short-term investments

3,000

2,500

2,000

Accounts receivable

2,000

2,500

3,000

Inventory

1,000

2,500

4,000

Prepaid expenses

800

800

800

Accounts payable

200

200

200

Notes payable: short-term

3,100

3,100

3,100

Accrued payables

300

300

300

Long-term liabilities

3,800

3,800

3,800

  1. Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why?

2. Computation and evaluation of activity ratios. The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc:

20X5

20X4

Net credit sales

$832,000

$760,000

Cost of goods sold

530,000

400,000

Cash, Dec. 31

125,000

110,000

Average Accounts receivable

205,000

156,000

Average Inventory

70,000

50,000

Accounts payable, Dec. 31

115,000

108,000

Instructions

a. Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places.

3. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity. Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The com pany reported the following information for 20X7:

Net sales

$1,750,000

Interest expense

120,000

Income tax expense

80,000

Preferred dividends

25,000

Net income

130,000

Average assets

1,200,000

Average common stockholders’ equity

500,000

  1. Compute the profit margin on sales ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places.
  2. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly ex plain.

4. Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

20X2

20X1

Current Assets

$86,000

$80,000

Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

99,000

90,000

Intangibles

25,000

50,000

Current Liabilities

40,800

48,000

Long-Term Liabilities

153,000

160,000

Stockholders Equity

16,200

12,000

Net Sales

500,000

500,000

Cost of Goods Sold

322,500

350,000

Operating Expenses

93,500

85,000

a. Prepare a horizontal analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

5.Vertical analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow.

20X2

20X1

Current Assets

$86,000

$80,000

Property, Plant, and Equipment (net)

99,000

80,000

Intangibles

25,000

50,000

Current Liabilities

40,800

48,000

Long-Term Liabilities

153,000

150,000

Stockholders Equity

16,200

12,000

Net Sales

500,000

500,000

Cost of Goods Sold

322,500

350,000

Operating Expenses

93,500

85,000

a. Prepare a vertical analysis for 20X1 and 20X2. Briefly comment on the results of your work.

6. Ratio computation. The financial statements of the Lone Pine Company follow.

LONE PINE COMPANY

Comparative Balance Sheets

December 31, 20X2 and 20X1 ($000 Omitted)

20X2

20X1

Assets

Current Assets

Cash and Short-Term Investments

$400

$600

Accounts Receivable (net)

3,000

2,400

Inventories

3,000

2,300

Total Current Assets

$6,400

$5,300

Property, Plant, and Equipment

Land

$1,700

$500

Buildings and Equipment (net)

1,500

1,000

Total Property, Plant, and Equipment

$3,200

$1,500

Total Assets

$9,600

$6,800

Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

Current Liabilities

Accounts Payable

$2,800

$1,700

Notes Payable

1,100

1,900

Total Current Liabilities

$3,900

$3,600

Long-Term Liabilities

Bonds Payable

4,100

2,100

Total Liabilities

$8,000

$5,700

Stockholders Equity

Common Stock

$200

$200

Retained Earnings

1,400

900

Total Stockholders Equity

$1,600

$1,100

Total Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

$9,600

$6,800

LONE PINE COMPANY

Statement of Income and Retained Earnings

For the Year Ending December 31,20X2 ($000 Omitted)

Net Sales*

$36,000

Less: Cost of Goods Sold

$20,000

Selling Expense

6,000

Administrative Expense

4,000

Interest Expense

400

Income Tax Expense

2,000

32,400

Net Income

$3,600

Retained Earnings, Jan. 1

900

Ending Retained Earnings

$4,500

Cash Dividends Declared and Paid

3,100

Retained Earnings, Dec. 31

$1,400

*All sales are on account.

Instructions

Compute the following items for Lone Pine Company for 20X2, rounding all calcu lations to two decimal places when necessary:

a. Quick ratio

b. Current ratio

c. Inventory-turnover ratio

d. Accounts-receivable-turnover ratio

e. Return-on-assets ratio

f. Net-profit-margin ratio

g. Return-on-common-stockholders equity

h. Debt-to-total assets

i. Number of times that interest is earned

accounting week four exercise assignment 495830

Week Four Exercise Assignment

Liability

1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:

Social Security taxes: 4% on the first $55,000 earned per employee

Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned per employee

Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500

State income taxes: 4% of gross earnings

Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings

State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned per employee

Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned per employee

The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end and no wages have been paid during the month.

a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:

Social Security taxes

Medicare taxes

Federal income taxes withheld

State income taxes

Insurance withholdings

b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:

Matching Social Security taxes

Matching Medicare taxes

State unemployment taxes

Federal unemployment taxes

2. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure.A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:

1-Dec: Borrowed $10,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3-month, 15% note payable.

Interest and principal are due at maturity.

10-Dec: Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to

total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates

that 3% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit (parts only).

22-Dec: Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.

26-Dec: Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a 15% note payable due in 60 days. (Assume 360 day year for interest)

31-Dec: Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162

31-Dec: Accrued three days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.

Instructions

a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.

b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest for each of the notes payable.

3.Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:

2-Aug: Borrowed $55,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 90-day, 12% note.

20-Aug: Issued a $50,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $50,000 delivery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest r ate.

10-Sep: Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued

a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.

11-Sep: Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account

payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and carries a 14% interest rate.

10-Oct: The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.

11-Oct: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.

30-Oct: Paid note to Bank of Kingsville.

Instructions

a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.

b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest. (Daily interest is calculated utilizing the 360 day method).

c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.

accounting wk 4 495831

Week Four Exercise Assignment
Liability

1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:
Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned per employee
Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned per employee
Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings
Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned per employee
Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned per employee

The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end.
a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:
Social Security taxes
Medicare taxes
Federal income taxes withheld
State income taxes
Insurance withholdings

b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:
Matching Social Security taxes
Matching Medicare taxes
State unemployment taxes
Federal unemployment taxes

2. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure. A review of selected financial activities of Visconti s during 20XX disclosed the following:

12/1 Borrowed $20,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3- month, 15% note payable. Interest and principal are due at maturity.
12/10 Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates that 2% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit (parts only).
12/22 Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
12/26 Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a 15% note payable due in 60 days. (Assume 360 days for daily interest calculation)
12/31 Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total cost of $162.
12/31 Accrued 3 days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.

Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest for each of the notes payable.

3. Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:
8/2: Borrowed $75,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 120-day, 12% note.
8/20: Issued a $40,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $40,000 de livery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest rate.
9/10: Purchased inventory from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued a 30-day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
9/11: Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and car ries a 14% interest rate.
10/10: The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.

10/11: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.
11/30: Paid note to Bank of Kingsville

Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.
b. Prepare adjusting entries on December 31 to record accrued interest (daily interest is calculated utilizing the 360 day method).
c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank s balance sheet as of December 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.

accounting word problem 495832

Relevant Cost Case Behemoth Motors Corp.

Behemoth Motors Corp. (BMC) is a major manufacturer of automobiles in the United States. BMC has decided to include a Global Positioning System navigator (GPSN) in all of its Sports Utility Vehicles (SUV) beginning with the 2013 model year. These models are just now being delivered and the GPSN units are manufactured in the Detroit BMC facility. Currently and for the foreseeable future, BMC will need 8,000 GPSNs per month. The total manufacturing cost of the GSPN is $425 per unit calculated as follows:

Item

Cost per unit

Direct materials (purchased locally)

$165

Direct labor (6 hours @ $28 per hour)

168

Factory Floor Space Charges (16,000 sq. ft. at $2.50 per sq. ft. per month allocated over 8,000 units per month)

5

Supervisory labor (monthly cost of $56,000 allocated over 8,000 units per month)

7

General company overhead ($640,000 per month assigned to GPSN allocated over 8,000 units per month)

80

Total Unit Cost

$425

BMC experiences a high level of quality control over these units with only 2% of total production failing quality control testing. 98% of all units manufactured are installed in SUVs.

Wally Wizard, the GPSN manager, has been approached by Far East Enterprises, Ltd (FEE) who has offered to outsource these units for MBC. FEE is a three-year-old electronic manufacturing company located in China and has experienced outstanding growth during that three-year period. FEE has offered to manufacture and deliver to Detroit 8,000 GPSN units at a unit cost of $400 beginning on Jan. 1, 2013. FEE asks for a two-year contract.

Under the existing arrangement, the direct materials are all purchased locally under month-to-month contracts. There are no future obligations under these contracts.

There are 100 direct labor employees involved in this process. These employees can be laid off but if they are, BMC must pay a penalty of $66,000 per year to the employees union. This penalty will continue for 4 years.

There are 10 supervisors, each earning $6,000 per month, assigned to the project. If the product is outsourced, all of these supervisors can be assigned to other supervisory positions within BMC.

If the product is outsourced, half of the factory floor space can be used for storage for materials that are currently stored in rented storage facilities. These rented facilities currently cost BMC $5,000 per month. There is no alternative use for the remaining factory floor space. The current $2.50 per sq. ft. charge is based on the overall BMC factory costs.

General company overhead is first assigned to operating units on the basis of total product produced and then further to produced units on a per unit basis. If the product is outsourced, this overhead will be reassigned to other operating divisions although total corporate overhead incurred will remain unchanged.

You have determined the following additional facts. The units manufactured by FEE will have the same quality as those manufactured by BMC and the delivery schedule will have the same reliability as that of BMC.

Case Assignment Task:

Make a recommendation to Wally Wizard in a 3 to 4 page paper. Be sure to support your recommendation with the decision-making process outlined in the background information.

Modular Case Expectations

It is important to answer the questions above. The discussion should be three to four pages and written in a clear and concise manner. Support your discussion with references in APA format. You are encouraged to use Excel or other compatible spreadsheet when computations are involved.

accounting2 495833

The following cash transactions took place during March, the first month of business for Cats and Dogs Company:

  1. D.C. Dawg started a business, Cats and Dogs Company, by contributing $6,000.
  2. The Cats and Dogs Company borrowed $2,000 from the bank on March 1. The note is a 1-year, 12% note, with both principal and interest to be repaid on February 28 of next year.
  3. The company earned $900 in revenue.
  4. Expenses amounted to $650.
  5. Distributions to owners amounted to $25.

You are to complete the following tasks:

  1. Show how each cash transaction affects the accounting equation.
  2. Give one additional piece of information related to the transaction that could be recorded in an information system for a purpose other than the financial statements.
  3. Prepare the four basic financial statements for the month of March.

accounting5 495834

Project 4

600 to 900 words

Research and analyze a company that has had publicly known problems with their internal control.

  • Analyze what went wrong that caused the system of internal control to fail, and what could have been done differently to prevent the problems.
  • Make 4 recommendations or suggestions on how the company could have improved its internal control system.

The deliverable for this project is a paper of 600-900 words. This does not include the title or references. All references must be properly cited in APA format.

Project 5

Deliverable Length:1000-1250 words (includes Phase 4 Key Assignment of 600-900 words)

Points Possible:250 Due Date:11/10/2013

Finalize your key assignment out line that you submitted for discussion 4

Incorporate the following into your paper:

  • Feedback received from your classmates and the instructor on the key assignment that you started in the previous phase.

Also, incorporate into the assignment the following scenario and the questions that follow it:

  • You are the head of an investigative team and your supervisor has asked you to put together a presentation for the next training session for new team members. Your focus is on the financial statements of a corporation.
    • What kind of information would be found on the financial statements.
    • Explain how the users of these statements ( i.e., investors, creditors, or government agencies) could use the information to help make better informed decisions.
    • How would you determine if any fraudulent or illegal activity has taken place?

Your final paper should be 3 4 pages in length. This does not include the title or reference pages. All references must be cited using proper APA format.

accounting excutive summary presentation in powerpoint format 495838

In the end, as a manager, part of your role is to develop strategy, and share this strategy with various stakeholders within the organization. This assignment will allow you to take your findings as a manager, and communicate these findings to those who are affected.

In M6: Assignment 2, you analyzed Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company’s budgetary control system, explained how the use of an activity-based costing system could change the results of the budget and improve ROI, and made recommendations for goal alignment. This assignment was also the LASA 2.

In this assignment, you will develop an executive summary of your findings in a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation format.

Include the following in your presentation:

  • Include a statement of the problem or topic of LASA 2, a concise analysis of the findings, and a recapitulation of any main conclusions or recommendations.
  • Be sure to incorporate specific details from LASA 2 to highlight or support the summary.
  • Using your knowledge of capital budgeting techniques, explain how principles of capital budgeting, such as the payback method, IRR, and NPV, can be used to assess changes in performance and make decisions for the future based on decisions made within the organization.

Develop a 5-slide presentation in PowerPoint format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M7_A2.ppt.

accounting mcqs cash flow statement 495839

Title:Accounting_MCQs_Cash flow Statement
Question Detail:

Question 1

Use the following to answer questions 1-4:

The financial statements of Wines, Inc., provide the following information for the current year

12-31 jan 1

Accounts Receivable

210,000

180,000

Inventory

200,000

190,000

Prepaid Expenses

14,000

10,000

Accts Pay for mdse

176,000

161,000

Accrued Expenses Payable

13,000

19,000

Net Sales

2,900,000

COGS

1,500,000

Oper Expenses incl depreciation of $40,000

300,000

1. Refer to the above data. Compute the amount of cash

1. Refer to the above data. Compute the amount of cash received from customers during the current year.

NET SALES LESS INCREASE IN ACCTS REC.

Answer

  1. A) $2,900,000.
  2. B) $2,690,000.
  3. C) $2,870,000.
  4. D) Some other amount.

.

2.144 points

Question 2

  1. 2. Refer to the above data. Compute the amount of Wine’s cash payments for purchases of merchandise during the current year.

A) 1,500,000

B) 1,495,000

C) 1,505,000

D) Other Amount

D)

D)2.144 points

Question 3

  1. 3. Refer to the above data. Compute the amount of Wine’s cash payments for operating expenses.
  2. Answer
  3. A) $260,000.
  4. B) $270,000
  5. C) $250,000.
  6. D) Some other amount.

.

2.144 points

Question 4

  1. 4. Refer to the above data. Wine’s net cash flow from operating activities for the current year is:
  2. Answer
  3. A) $1,105,000.
  4. B) $1,375,000.
  5. C) $1,495,000.
  6. D) Some other amount.

.

Question 5

  1. Use the following to answer questions 5-8:
  2. An analysis of Elmont Corporation’s Investment in Marketable Securities account during 2005 disclosed the following:

Debit entries $150,000

Credit entries $230,000

.

Elmont’s 2005 income statement included a $30,000 gain on sale of marketable securities and $20,000 dividend income from marketable securities. All payments and proceeds relating to marketable securities transactions were in cash.

5. Refer to the above data. The amount of cash paid by Elmont Corporation in 2005 for the purchase of marketable securities was:

A) 230,000

B) 150,000

C) 180,000

D) 190,000

D)

D) 6. Refer to the above data. The cash proceeds received by Elmont Corporation in 2005 for the sale of marketable securities was:

E) A) 150,000

F) B) 200,000

G) C) 230,000

H) D) 260,000

.

2.144 points

Question 7

  1. 7. Refer to the above data. How should the transactions involving marketable securities be classified in Elmont’s statement of cash flows for 2005?
  2. Answer
  3. A) The purchase of marketable securities, sales of marketable securities, and receipt of dividends are all classified as investing activities.
  4. B) The purchase and the sale of marketable securities are classified as investing activities; the receipt of dividends is classified as an operating activity.
  5. C) The purchase of marketable securities is classified as an investing activity; the sale of marketable securities is classified as a financing activity; the receipt of dividends is classified as an operating activity.
  6. D) The purchase and the sale of marketable securities are classified as investing activities; the receipt of dividends is classified as a financing activity.

.

2.144 points

Question 8

  1. 8. Refer to the above data. Based solely on the above information, Elmont’s net cash flow from investing activities for 2005 is:
  2. A) $80,000 net cash used by investing activities
  3. B) $80,000 net cash provided by investing activities
  4. C) $110,000 net cash provided by investing activities
  5. D) $230,000 net cash provided by investing activities
  6. .

2.144 points

Question 9

  1. Use the following to answer questions 9-12:
  2. An analysis of changes in selected balance sheet accounts of Gotham Corporation shows the following for the current year:
  3. Plant and Equipment accounts

Debit entries to asset accounts = 210,000

Credit entries to asset accounts = 320,000

Debit entries to accumulated depreciation accounts

(resulting from sale of plant assets) = 30,000

Credit entries to accumulated depreciation accounts

(representing depreciation for the current year = 80,000

Gotham’s income statement for the current year includes a $4,000 gain on disposal of plant assets. All payments and proceeds relating to purchase or sale of plant assets were in cash.

9. Refer to the above data. The amount of cash paid by Gotham to acquire plant assets during the current year was:

A) $130,000 B) $210,000 C) $320,000 D) Some other amount

.

Question 10

  1. 10. Refer to the above data. Total cash proceeds received by Gotham from sales of plant assets during the current year amounted to:
  1. A) $324,000 B) $294,000 C) $316,000 D) Some other amount
  2. Question 11
  3. 11. Refer to the above data. How should purchases, sales, and depreciation of plant assets be classified in Gotham’s statement of cash flows for the current year (Assume the direct method is used by Gotham.)
  4. Answer
  5. A) Purchases of plant assets are classified as investing activities; sales of plant assets are classified as financing activities; depreciation is classified as an operating activity.
  6. B) Purchases of plant assets and depreciation are classified as investing activities; sales of plant assets are classified as financing activities.
  7. C) Purchases and sales of plant assets are classified as investing activities; depreciation does not appear as an operating, financing, or investing activity.
  8. D) Since plant assets are used to generate income from operations, purchases, sales, and depreciation of plant assets are all classified as operating activities.

.

2.144 points

Question 12

  1. 12. Refer to the above data. Based solely on the data provided above, Gotham’s net cash flow from investing activities for the current year is:
  1. Answer
  2. A) $110,000 net cash provided by investing activities.
  3. B) $110,000 net cash used by investing activities.
  4. C) $84,000 net cash provided by investing activities.
  5. D) $504,000 net cash provided by investing activities.

.

2.144 points

Question 13

  1. Use the following to answer questions 13-15:
  2. During 2006, the cash flows related to Dodge Data, Inc. s lending and borrowing activities are summarized as follows:
  3. Invest Oper Finan
  4. Cash lent to borrowersLESS
  5. $85,000
  6. Payment to retire(LESS) bonds payable.
  7. 175,000
  8. Proceeds from borrowing at bank (note payable)………………..
  9. 105,000
  10. Interest received from borrowers…………………………………….
  11. 15,000
  12. Interest payments made on bonds payable.LESS………………………..
  13. 20,000

.

13. Refer to the above data. On the basis of the above information alone, what is Dodge Data’s net cash flow from financing activities?

Answer

  1. A) $70,000 net cash used for financing activities.
  2. B) $260,000 net cash used for financing activities.
  3. C) $155,000 net cash used for financing activities.
  4. D) $245,000 net cash used for financing activities.

.

2.144 points

Question 14

  1. 14. Refer to the above data. If Dodge Data’s income statement for 2006 reports interest expense of $12,000, then:
  2. Answer
  3. A) Interest payable decreased by $8,000 in 2006.
  4. B) Interest payable increased by $8,000 in 2006.
  5. C) Interest payable at the end of 2006 amounts to $8,000.
  6. D) Either the amount reported in the income statement or the interest payment shown above must be incorrect.

.

2.144 points

Question 15

  1. 15. Refer to the above data. If interest receivable was $3,000 at December 31, 2005, and is $5,000 at the end of 2006, interest revenue reported in Dodge Data’s income statement for 2006 must have been:
  2. Answer
  3. A) $8,000.
  4. B) $10,000.
  5. C) $17,000.
  6. D) Some other amount.

.

2.144 points

Question 16

  1. 16. Acme Company uses the indirect method to prepare its statement of cash flows. The following information has been gathered for the current period:
  2. Gain on Sale of land = $45,000
  3. Net Income 162,000
  4. Depreciation Expense = 74,000
  5. Cash Received from sale of land = 160,000
  6. Decrease in inventory = 10,000
  7. Increase in accounts receivable = 5,000
  8. Increase in accounts payable= 11,000

On the basis of the above information only, Acme Company’s statement of cash flows shows net cash flow from operating activities to be:

A 185,000

B 307,000

C 207,000

D 367,000

accounts 495840

C:3-52 Controlled Groups. Which of the following groups constitute controlled groups? (Any stock not listed below is held by unrelated individuals each owning less than 1% of the outstanding stock.) For brother-sister corporations, which definition applies?

a. Judy owns 90% of the single classes of stock of Hot and Ice Corporations.

b. Jones and Kane Corporations each have only a single class of stock outstanding. The two controlling individual shareholders own the stock as follows:

Stock Ownership Percentages

Shareholder Jones Corp. Kane Corp.

Tom 60% 80%

Mary 30% 0%

c. Link, Model, and Name Corporations each have a single class of stock outstanding.

The stock is owned as follows:

Stock Ownership Percentages

Shareholder Model Corp. Name Corp.

Link Corp. 80% 50%

Model Corp. 40%

Link Corporation s stock is widely held by over 1,000 shareholders, none of whom owns directly or indirectly more than 1% of Link s stock.

d. Oat, Peach, Rye, and Seed Corporations each have a single class of stock outstanding.

The stock is owned as follows:

Stock Ownership Percentages

Shareholder Oat Corp. Peach Corp. Rye Corp. Seed Corp.

Bob 100% 90%

Oat Corp. 80% 30%

Rye Corp. 60% Read Less

for your business tutor 495519

Chapter 8 assignments

Document Preview:

Belinda Santos E 8-11 Tracy Company, a manufacturer of air conditioners, sold 100 units to Thomas Company on November 17, 2013. The units have a list price of $500 each, but Thomas was given a 30% trade discount. The terms of the sale were 2/10, n/30 Thomas uses a periodic inventory system. Required: 1. Prepare the journal entries to record the purchase by Thomas on November 17 and payment on November 26, 2013, using the gross method of accounting for purchase disounts. 2. Prepare the journal entry to record the payment on December 15, 2013,using the gross method of accounting for purchase discounts. 3. Repeat requirements 1 and 2 using the net method of accounting for purchase discounts. P 8-1 James Company began the month of October with inventory of $15,000. The following inventory transactions occurred during the month: a. The company purchased merchandise on account for $22,000 on October 12, 2013. Terms of the purchase were 2/10, n/30. James uses the net method to record purchases. The merchandise was shipped f.o.b. shipping point and freight charges of $500 were paid in cash. returned came from beginning inventory, not from the October 12 purchase. c. On October 31, James paid for the merchandise purchased on October 12. b. On October 18 the company returned merchandise costing $3,000. The return reduced the amount owed to the supplier. The merchandise d. During October merchandise costing $18,000 was sold on account for $28,000. e. It was determined that inventory on hand at the end of October cost $16,060 1. Assuming that the James Company uses a periodic inventory system, prepare journal entries for the above transactions including the adjusting entry at the end of October to record cost of goods sold. 2. Assuning that the James Company uses a perpetual inventory system, prepare journal entries for the above transactions. Belinda Santos P 8-22 On January 1,2013, the Haskins Company adopted the dollar value LIFO method for its one inventory…

Attachments:

allen 495520

questions 4 through 10

Document Preview:

Generated by CamScanner Generated by CamScanner??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

chrystal telcom has budget the sale of its moble phone over the next 4 months july 3 495539

EXERCISE 2 Production Budget

Crystal Telecom has budgeted the sales of its innovative mobile phone over the next four months as follows:

The company is now in the process of preparing a production budget for the third quarter. Past experience has shown that end-of-month finished goods inventories must equal 10% of the next month”s sales. The inventory at the end of June was 3,000 units.

Sales in Units

July

30,000

August

45,000

September

60,000

October

50,000

Required:

Prepare a production budget for the third quarter showing the number of units to be produced each month and for the quarter in total.

accounting questions 495793

PROBLEMS

The Hobbit Company made the following merchandise purchases and sales during the July:

July. 1 purchased 380 units at $15 each

July 5 purchased 270 units at $20 each

July 9 sold 500 units at $55each

July 14 purchased 300 units at $24 each

July 30 sold 250 units at$55 each

Required: SHOW ALL CALCULATIONS.

There is no beginning inventory. If the company uses the last-in, first-out (LIFO) perpetual inventory system:

1) What is the value of ending inventory at July 30? $__________

2) What is the value of cost of goods sold at July 30? $_________

On September 30, Emerson Co. has $540,250 of accounts receivable. Emerson uses the allowance method of accounting for bad debts and has an existing credit balance in the allowance for doubtful accounts of $13,750.

Required: Prepare journal entries to record the following selected October transactions. The company uses the perpetual inventory system.

October 1 – Sold $325,000 of merchandise (that cost $178,500) to customers on credit.
October 10 – Received $425,100 cash in payment of accounts receivable.
October 23 – Wrote off $16,700 of uncollectible accounts receivable.
October 31 – In adjusting the accounts on October 31, its fiscal year-end, the company estimated that 3.0% of accounts receivable will be uncollectible.

Mahoney Company had the following transactions involving plant assets during year. Unless otherwise indicated, all transactions were for cash.

January 2 Purchased a truck for $50,000 plus sales taxes of $3,000. The truck is expected to have a $4,000 salvage value and a 4 year life.

January 3 Paid $1,500 to have the company s logo painted on the truck. This did not change the truck s salvage value.

December 31 Recorded straight-line depreciation on the truck.

Required: Prepare the general journal entries to record these transactions.

On April 1, Year 5 a company discarded a machine that had cost $10,000 and had accumulated depreciation of $8,000 as of December 31, Year 4. The asset had a 5-year life and $0 salvage value.

Required: Prepare the journal entries to 1) record the updating of the depreciation expense and2) discarding of this asset in Year 5.

On January 1, a machine costing $260,000 with a 4-year life and an estimated $5,000 salvage value was purchased. It was also estimated that the machine would produce 500,000 units during its life. The actual units produced during its first year of operation were 110,000.

Required: Determine the amount of depreciation expense for the first year under each of the following assumptions:

1. The company uses the units-of-production method of depreciation $__________

2. The company uses the double-declining-balance method of depreciation $_______

On November 1, Bob’s Skateboards signed a $12,000, 90-day, 5% note payable to cover a past due account payable.

Required:

    1. What amount of interest expense on this note should Bob’s Skateboards report on year-end December 31 _____________
      b. Prepare Bob’s journal entry to record the issuance of the note payable.
      c. Prepare Bob’s journal entry to record the payment of the note on February 1 of the following year.

accounting questions 495794

1. (TCO B) Adjusting Entries: Prepaid rent at 1/1/10 was $9,000. During 2010 rent payments of $110,000 were made and charged to “rent expense.” The 2010 income statement shows as a general expense the item “rent expense” in the amount of $111,000. You are to prepare the missing adjusting entry that must have been made, assuming reversing entries are not made. For each journal entry write Dr. for debit and Cr. for credit. (Points: 10)

Question 2. 2. (TCO B) Adjusting Entries: Retained Earnings at 1/1/10 was $0 and at 12/31/10 was $400,000. During 2010, cash dividends of $50,000 were paid and a stock dividend of $100,000 was issued. Both dividends were properly charged to retained earnings. You are to provide the missing closing entry. For each journal entry write Dr for debit and Cr for credit. (Points : 10)

Question 3. 3. (TCO C) Presented below is information related to Big Blast Company.

Retained earnings, December 31, 2010 $ 2,350,000
Sales 2,600,000
Selling and administrative expenses 240,000
Earthquake loss (pre-tax) on plant (extraordinary item) 250,000
Cash dividends declared on common stock 53,600
Cost of good sold 1,000,000
Gain resulting from computation error on

depreciation charge in 2009 (pre-tax) 520,000
Other revenue 80,000
Other expenses 50,000

Instructions: Prepare in good form a multiple-step income statement for the year 2011. Assume a 30% tax rate and that 100,000 shares of common stock were outstanding during the year. (Points: 40)

Question 4. 4. (TCO D) The following balance sheet was prepared by the bookkeeper for Blue Company as of December 31, 2011 Blue Company.
Balance Sheet as of December 31, 2011 is as follows.

Cash $90,000
Accounts payable $75,000
Accounts receivable (net) 42,200
Long-term liabilities 100,000
Inventories 57,000
Stockholders’ equity 218,500
Investments 76,300
Equipment (net) 96,000
Patents 32,000
$393,500 $393,500
The following additional information is provided:
(1) Cash includes the cash surrender value of a life insurance policy $5,000 and a bank overdraft of $4,000 has been deducted.
(2)The net accounts receivable balance includes:
(a) accounts receivable debit balances $50,000;
(b) accounts receivable credit balances $0; and
(c) allowance for doubtful accounts $3,800.
(3) Inventories do not include goods costing $3,000 shipped out on consignment. Receivables of $3,000 were recorded on these goods.
(4) Investments include investments in common stock, trading $13,000, available-for-sale $46,300, and franchises $17,000.
(5) Equipment costing $5,000 with accumulated depreciation $4,000 is no longer used and is held for sale. Accumulated depreciation on the other equipment is $40,000.
Instructions:
Prepare a balance sheet in good form (stockholders’ equity details can be omitted).
Do not worry about balancing the statement but rather use your time to compute the account balances properly for presentation purposes. (Points : 40)

Question 5. 5. (TCO E) Jack Sawyer is presently leasing a copier from John Office Equipment Company. The lease requires 11 annual payments of $3,500 at the end of each year and provides the leaser (John) with an 8% return on its investment. You may use the following 8% interest factors.

9 Periods 10 Periods 11 Periods
Future Value of 1 1.99900 2.15892 2.33164
Present Value of 1 .50025 .46319 .42888
Future Value of 12.48756 14.48656 16.64549
Ordinary Annuity of 1
Present Value of 6.24689 6.71008 7.13896
Ordinary Annuity of 1
Present Value of 6.74664 7.24689 7.71008
Annuity Due of 1
Instructions
(a) Assuming the computer has an 11-year life and will have no salvage value at the expiration of the lease, what was the original cost of the copier to John?
(b) What amount would each payment be if the 11 annual payments are to be made at the beginning of each period? (Points: 25)

Question 6. 6. (TCO F) Daniels Company deposits all receipts and makes all payments by check. The following information is available from the cash records.
MARCH 31
BANK RECONCILIATION
Balance per bank $26,746
Add: Deposits in transit 2,100
Deduct: Outstanding checks (3,800)
Balance per books $25,046

Month of April Results
Per Bank Per Books
Balance April 30 $27,995 $24,355
April deposits 8,864 13,889

April checks 13,100 14,080
April note collected 3,000 -0-
(not included in April deposits)
April bank service charge 35 -0-
April NSF check of a customer returned by the bank
(recorded by bank as a charge) 900 -0-

Instructions
Calculate the amount of the April 30
(1) deposits in transit; and
(2) outstanding checks.
Show all your work for potential partial credit. (Points: 25)

Question 7. 7. (TCO G) Rye Company was formed on December 1, 2010. The following information is available from Rye’s inventory record for Product Bread.

Units Unit Cost
January 1, 2011

(beginning inventory) 1,700 $17.00

Purchases:
January 5, 2011 2,600 $20.00
January 25, 2011 2,400 $21.00
February 16, 2011 1,000 $22.00
March 15, 2011 2,100 $25.00

A physical inventory on March 31, 2011, shows 3,000 units on hand.
Instructions:
Prepare schedules to compute the ending inventory at March 31, 2011, under each of the following inventory methods.
(a) FIFO
(b) LIFO
(c) Weighted-average
Show supporting computations in good form. (Points : 40)

Question 8. 8. (TCO H) A machine cost $500,000 on April 1, 2010. Its estimated salvage value is $50,000 and its expected life is 8 years.
Instructions:
Calculate the depreciation expense (to the nearest dollar) by each of the following methods, showing the figures used.
(a) Straight-line for 2010
(b) Double-declining balance for 2011
(c) Sum-of-the-years’-digits for 2011 (Points : 40)

accounting questions 495795

Please answer the following while showing work that I may understand.

1)

Look at the four basic financial statements for any publicly traded corporation. You can find them at the SEC website using their search tool here:http://sec.gov/edgar/searchedgar/companysearch.html. Find the total assets, liabilities, and shareholders equity for the most recent year (in the annual report). Study the income statement for the most recent year. What information do these statements provide? Make a list of 10 questions you have about the financial statements. Save the list so you can check to see how many of the questions you are able to answer at the end of the course.

2)

You are a consultant who advises potential new business owners. An acquaintance is planning to start a small business that he wants to run as a sole proprietor. But he explains that he does not understand other business forms that he may adopt, and two of his friends may want to join the business in management roles. The business will be a landscaping firm that is expected to grow rapidly and require large investments in equipment in two to three years. Create a PowerPoint presentation for the potential new business owner that compares and contrasts the three main business forms and addresses advantages and disadvantages of each form. Include examples of types of businesses that would best fit each form. Present your recommendation for best business type for the new business owner.

accounting questions 495796

1.On the trial balance, which of the following should have the balances listed in the debit column?

A.Assets, dividends, and expenses

B.Liabilities, revenues, and common stock

C.Liabilities, revenues, and dividends

D.Assets, revenues, and dividends

2.The unadjusted trial balance for depreciation expense shows a $780 balance. The expense was adjusted

by $235. The adjusted trial balance figure for depreciation expense is now a

A.$545 debit.

B.$1,015 debit.

C.$1,015 credit.

D.$545 credit.

3.The balance sheet is used to report

A.the financial position on a specific date.

B.results of operations for a specific period.

C.results of operations for a specific date.

D.the financial position for a specific period.

4.Which business form is similar to a corporation in regard to owner liability?

A.Sole proprietorship

B.Limited liability company

C.Partnership

D.Limited liability corporation

5.A T-account has a $509 debit balance. This account is most likely not

A.advertising expense.

B.land.

C.common stock.

D.dividends.

6.A T-account has which major parts?

A.A title, a debit side, and a credit side

B.A debit side, a credit side, and a balance

C.A debit side, a credit side, and a total column

D.A title, a current date, and a balance

7.By definition, which type of organization has stockholders?

A.Sole proprietorships

B.Corporations

C.Limited liability companies

D.Partnerships

8.Supplies on hand were $900 at the start of the year. At the end of the year, it was determined that $350 of supplies had been used. What is the adjusting entry for supplies?

A.Debit supplies, $350; credit supplies expense, $350.

B.Debit supplies expense, $550; credit supplies, $550.

C.Debit supplies, $550; credit supplies expense, $550.

D.Debit supplies expense, $350; credit supplies, $350.

9.Beginning retained earnings are $31,000; sales are $46,800; expenses are $43,500; and dividends paid are $2,800. How much is the net income or loss for the company?

A.($3,300)

B.$3,300

C.$500

D.$34,300

10.The closing entries show a debit to retained earnings of $350 and a credit to retained earnings of $750. There was also a credit to dividends payable of $100. This company had a

A.net income of $400.

B.net loss of $400.

C.net income of $500.

D.net loss of $500

11.The account “Cash” had the following changes: increase of $250, decrease of $75, increase of $113,

and decrease of $35. The final balance is a

A.debit balance of $363.

B.debit balance of $253.

C.credit balance of $110.

D.credit balance of $253.

12.The matching principle in accounting requires the matching of revenue earned with the

A.expenses incurred to produce the revenue.

B.liabilities used to produce the revenue.

C.assets used less the liabilities incurred.

D.assets used to produce the revenue.

13.Which financial statement illustrates the accounting equation?

A.Statement of cash flows

B.Balance sheet

C.Income statement

D.Statement of retained earnings

14.Beginning retained earnings are $65,000; sales are $29,500; expenses are $33,000; and dividends paid are $3,500. How much is the net income or loss for the company?

A.($3,500)

B.($7,000)

C.$26,000

D.$0

15.Rick owns a sporting goods store. In his initial accounting records, he included his personal computer and all of his personal sporting gear. Rick is violating which principle of accounting?

A.Reliability

B.Entity

C.Going concern

D.Cost

16.Which of the following is a disadvantage of the corporate form of business?

A.Ease of raising capital

B.Double taxation

C.Limited liability

D.Limited resources

17.Dividends are paid with cash to shareholders. Dividends are in which category of the chart of accounts?

A.Liabilities

B.Stockholders’ equity

C.Assets

D.Revenue

18.Collecting rent from a client three months in advance would be an example of a/an

A.accrued revenue.

B.accrued expense.

C.deferred expense.

D.deferred revenue.

19.The income statement is used to report

A.the financial position on a specific date.

B.results of operations for a specific period.

C.results of operations for a specific date.

D.the financial position for a specific period.

20.Office equipment was purchased for $2,400 on account to Business Furniture Company. The journal entry would include a

A.debit to Office Equipment and a credit to Accounts Payable.

B.credit to Cash and a debit to Office Equipment Expense.

C.debit to Office Equipment and a credit to Cash.

D.debit to Accounts Payable and a credit to Cash.

accounting questions help for acct 221 495798

Problem 15-2A
Your answer is partially correct. Try again.

Cherney Electric sold $500,000, 10%, 10-year bonds on January 1, 2012. The bonds were dated January 1 and paid interest on January 1 and July 1. The bonds were sold at 104.

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record the issuance of the bonds on January 1, 2012. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

Date Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit
Jan. 1, 2012

(b) At December 31, 2012, the balance in the Premium on Bonds Payable account is $18,000. Show the balance sheet presentation of accrued interest and the bond liability at December 31, 2012. (For Bonds Payable, Notes Payable and Mortgage payable enter the account name only and do not provide any additional descriptive information e.g. due 2017.)

Cherney Electric
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2012
$
$
: $

(c) On January 1, 2014, when the carrying value of the bonds was $516,000, the company redeemed the bonds at 105. Record the redemption of the bonds assuming that interest for the period has already been paid. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.)

Date Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit
Jan. 1, 2014

accounting quiz 495800

1. If the net variance of a business using standard costing is significant relevant to total production cost, the net variance should be:
A. assigned to cost of goods sold.
B. allocated between work in process, finished goods, and cost of goods sold.
C. carried forward to the next accounting period.
D. none of the above.

2. If the net of all variances is immaterial relative to the total production costs incurred during the period, the net variance is:
A. treated as an adjustment to cost of goods sold.
B. ignored.
C. treated as an adjustment to work in process, finished goods, and cost of goods sold.
D. treated as an adjustment to manufacturing overhead.

3. The preferred format for a segmented income statement emphasizes:
A. direct and common fixed costs.
B. variable and fixed costs.
C. operating expenses and fixed costs.
D. variable costs and operating expenses.

4. Which of the following is a true statement pertaining to segment income statements
A. Only present the individual segments’ net income, not total company net income.
B. Only include variable costs.
C. Do not present a segment margin.
D. Do not include arbitrarily allocated common fixed expenses when calculating segment margin.
E. All of the above.

5. How is performance evaluated for a cost center
A. Actual costs incurred compared to budgeted costs.
B. Actual segment margin compared to budgeted segment margin.
C. Comparison of actual and budgeted return on investment (ROI) based on segment margin and assets controlled by the segment.
D. None of the above.

6. How is performance evaluated for a profit center
A. Actual costs incurred compared to budgeted costs.
B. Actual segment margin compared to budgeted segment margin.
C. Comparison of actual and budgeted return on investment (ROI) based on segment margin and assets controlled by the segment.
D. None of the above.

7. The key to analyzing a sell as is or process further decision is to determine that:
A. opportunity costs exceed sunk costs.
B. incremental revenues exceed incremental costs.
C. differential costs do not exist.
D. all allocated costs are included in the decision.

8. In a make or buy decision which of the following costs would be considered relevant
A. Avoidable costs.
B. Unavoidable costs.
C. Sunk costs.
D. Allocated costs.

9. Which of the following qualitative factors favors the buy option in the make or buy decision
A. Production scheduling.
B. Utilization of idle capacity.
C. Ability to control quality.
D. Technical expertise of supplier.

10. Product Z sells for $18 per unit as is but if it is enhanced it can be sold for $24 per unit. The enhancement process will cost $50,000 for 10,000 units. If the 10,000 units of Product Z are sold as is without further processing, the company:
A. will incur an incremental profit of $10,000.
B. will incur an opportunity cost of $10,000.
C. will incur an incremental profit of $1 per unit.
D. will incur an incremental loss of $6 per unit.

11. A(n) _____________ is the minimum cost that can be incurred, which when subtracted from the selling price, allows for a desired profit to be earned.
A. relevant cost.
B. opportunity cost.
C. incremental cost.
D. target cost.

12. Product X sells for $80 per unit in the marketplace and ABC Company requires a 35% minimum profit margin on all product lines. In order to compete in this market, the target cost for Product X must be equal to or lower than:
A. $28
B. $45
C. $52
D. $80

13. Which of the following costs are not relevant in a decision to continue or discontinue a segment of the organization
A. Avoidable costs.
B. Unavoidable costs.
C. Opportunity costs.
D. Differential costs.

14. The decision to continue or discontinue a segment of the business should focus on:
A. sales minus total variable expenses and total fixed expenses.
B. sales minus total variable expenses and avoidable fixed expenses of the segment.
C. sales minus total variable expenses and allocated fixed expenses of the business.
D. none of the above.

15. The decision for solving production mix problems involving multiple products and scarce production resources should focus on:
A. gross profit of each product.
B. sales price of each product.
C. contribution margin per unit of scarce resource.
D. contribution margin of each product.

16. XYZ Company produces three products: A, B, and C. Product A has a contribution margin of $20 and requires 1 hour of machine time. Product B has a contribution margin of $30 and requires 2 hours of machine time. Product C has a contribution margin of $36 and requires 1.5 hours of machine time. If machine hours are considered scarce, in what product mix order should XYZ Company schedule the production of Products A, B, and C for the available machine hours
A. First A, then B, then C.
B. First C, then A, then B.
C. First C, then B, then A.
D. First B, then C, then A.

17. A principal difference between operational budgeting and capital budgeting is the time frame of the budget. Because of this difference, capital budgeting:
A. is an activity that involves only the financial staff.
B. is done on a rolling budget period basis.
C. focuses on the present value of cash flows from investments.
D. is concerned with a long-term net income forecast.

18. Capital budgeting differs from operational budgeting because:
A. depreciation calculations are required.
B. it considers the time value of money.
C. operating expenses are not relevant.
D. capital budgets don’t affect cash flow.

19 Capital expenditure analysis, which leads to the capital budget, attempts to determine the impact of a proposed capital expenditure on the organization’s:
A. segment margin.
B. contribution margin.
C. ROI.
D. cost of capital.

1. The cost formula for the maintenance department of the Eifel Co. is $6,500 per month plus $3.50 per machine hour used by the production department.

a. Calculate the maintenance cost that would be budgeted for the month of May in which 5,700 machine hours are planned to be used.
b. Prepare an appropriate performance report for the maintenance department assuming that 5,860 machine hours were actually used in the month of May, and the total maintenance cost incurred was $28,010.

2. Breaded Oak, Inc. has a policy that requires 20 percent of the expected sales of its product to be on hand at the end of the prior month. Forecasted sales, in units, for the months of January through April are as follows:

(a.) Calculate the number of units planned for ending inventory for January, February, and March.
(b.) Calculate the number of units budgeted to be produced in January, February, and March.

accounting quiz 495801

1) All of the following are examples of e-government except:

a. an eBay-seller sells surplus army supplies.

b. a contractor submits an application for a building permit using a city hall Web site.

c. an unemployed worker consults a Website operated by the state employment

department to learn about job openings in his city.

d. a citizen takes an online drivers education course.

2) An example of G2C is ___________.

a. an employee at the Chamber of Commerce gets local demographic data from a U.S.

census site.

b. a driver applies for and pays for the renewal of his auto tag online.

c. a road contractor uses the Internet to submit a closed bid on a paving contract.

d. a regional hospital conducts an online reverse auction for cleaning supplies.

3) Sharing information more quickly and conveniently between the federal and state, local, and

tribal governments is a performance objective of which category of e-government?

a. G2C

b. G2B

c. G2G

d. IEE

4) Chaplin reports quarterly sales revenue from his business to city hall over the Internet. He pays

his local business tax with a credit card. This is an example of _____________.

a. e-government

b. G2C e-commerce

c. G2B e-commerce

d. e-procurement

5) A government agency uses a reverse e-auction to comply with the tendering system requirements specified by law. This is an example of _____________.

a. e-government

b. G2C e-commerce

c. G2B e-commerce

d. e-procurement

6) What motivated the implementation of government e-procurement?

a. Governments must interact with other types of governments on a daily basis.

b. Governments buy large amounts of MROs and other materials directly from suppliers.

c. The government needs to offer training and education to thousands of employees.

d. Technology made it possible to quickly implement government-wide systems.

7) All of the following describe Second Life (SL) and SL Educators (SLED) except:

a. SLED sponsors meet-and-greet events in SL, helping real-life educators to connect with

each other.

b. Educators have been slow to embrace SL because of the complexity of its media-rich

features.

c. Students and educators can work together in SL from anywhere in the world as part of a

globally networked virtual classroom environment.

d. Using SL as a supplement to traditional classroom environments provides new

opportunities for enriching existing curricula.

8) More and more people are willing to pay for digital music, as shown by the success of

______________.

a. Napster

b. Kazaa

c. iTunes

d. P2P

9) E-books can be delivered in all of the following ways except:

a. via Web access.

b. via Web download.

c. via RFID.

d. via dedicated reader.

10) The primary advantage that e-books offer publishers is _____________.

a. the ability to reach many readers

b. lower production, marketing, and delivery costs

c. the ease of customizing textbooks and trade books

d. the ease of updating books in real-time

11) A major purpose of an organizational knowledge base is to support and allow ______________.

a. knowledge sharing

b.e-learning

c. responsible blogging

d. organizational capital

12) M-commerce transactions and activities require _____________ and ______________.

a. wired networks; access points

b. cell phones; portable computers

c. hardware and software infrastructures; infrastructure support

d. smartphones; switches

13) Characteristics of mobile devices that need to be considered when designing mobile

computing systems include all of the following except:

a. small screens.

b. reduced memory.

c. restricted input capabilities.

d. broad bandwidth.

14) A ___________ is suitable for mobile users who need to make very short-range device-to-device

wireless connections within a small space, such as a single room, and most commonly with

Bluetooth.

a. personal area network

b. local area network

c. wireless area network

d. Wi-Fi area network

15) A(n) ____________ is a computer system capable of integrating, storing, editing, analyzing,

sharing, and displaying spatial information.

a. GIS

b. GPS

c. L-commerce system

d. OnStar system

16) You are walking near a coffee shop and suddenly your cell phone beeps with a message:

Come inside and get a free biscotti with any purchase. This is an example of _____________.

a. permission marketing

b. location-based advertising

c. customer relationship management

d. m-commerce

17) Health risks of cell phone use include all of the following except:

a. cell phone addiction.

b. damage from cell radio frequency emissions.

c. spinal injury.

d. repetitive stress injury.

18) Ethical issues raised by m-commerce include all of the following except:

a. limited access to data and documents.

b. privacy invasion.

c. infringing on workers personal time.

d. isolation.

19) In order to protect the privacy of individuals, privacy protection defenses must be __________.

a. designed into RFID tags, nodes, and networks

b. addressed in a post hoc fashion

c. addressed in an ad hoc fashion

d. the responsibility of government agencies

20) The banking industry was a good candidate for disruption by person-to-person (P2P)

technology and disintermediation by ZOPA because _____________.

a. the industry offers a widely-needed service

b. of fierce competition and low barriers to entry

c. the industry was making huge profit margins off customers

d. the industry had small profit margins

21) _____________ are companies that introduce a significant change in their industries, thus

causing a disruption in normal business operations.

a. Disruptors

b. Mashups

c. Information clouds

d. Web 3.0

22) The real estate brokerage industry has been disrupted by companies such as Zillow and

HomeGain for each of the following reasons except:

a. Homeowners can enter zillow.com and go to zestimate to get an approximation of their

home s market value with a map of the neighborhood.

b. The Zillow and Homegain sites provide more services and information than Web 1.0.

c. The Web 2.0 real estate sites have driven down commissions from 6 percent to almost 1

percent.

d. Homeowners can get comparisons of the estimated price of their home with neighbors

homes.

23) Companies can interface with social networks in all of the following ways except:

a. use search engine optimization (SEO) to increase search engine ranking.

b. use existing public social networks, such as Facebook or MySpace, or virtual worlds,

such as Second Life to create pages and microcommunities.

c. create an in-house private social network and then use it for communication and

collaboration among employees and retirees or with outsiders.

d. conduct business activities in a business-oriented social network, such as LinkedIn, or

sponsor such a site.

24) Craigslist and MySpace provide ________ to search based on friends and contacts or by

geographic proximity.

a. entrepreneurial networks

b. classifieds and job listings

c. virtual malls

d. advertising campaigns

25) ________ has/have the potential to enable faster connectivity, richer ways of interacting, and

more powerful search engines.

a. Enterprise applications

b. Application program interface (API) services

c. Web 3.0

d. RSS and Web services

accounting quiz 495802

1. Occidental Produce Company has 40,000 shares of common stock outstanding and 2,000 shares of preferred stock outstanding. The common stock is $0.01 par value; the preferred stock is 4% non-cumulative, with $100 par value. On October 15, 2014, the company declares a total dividend payment of $40,000. What is the total amount of dividends that will be paid to the common shareholders? (Points : 1)

$40,000

$32,000

$ 400

$ 4,500

None of these is correct

2. Which of the following is a TRUE statement about a corporation? (Points : 1)

The owners of a corporation have co-ownership of the property of the corporation.

A corporation is not taxed on the corporation’s business income.

A corporation has a limited life.

The owners of a corporation have limited liability for the corporation’s debts.

3. The purchase of treasury stock requires a credit to the Common stock account. (Points : 1)

True

False

4. Which of the following is an advantage of preferred stock? (Points : 1)

Preferred shareholders are guaranteed that they will not take a loss on their investment.

Preferred shareholders have higher voting rights than common shareholders.

Preferred shareholders may sell their shares for a price higher than that of common stock.

Preferred shareholders have the first claim on dividend funds.

5. All forms and classes of stock carry voting rights. (Points : 1)

True

False

6. A corporation is a separate legal entity formed under the laws of a particular state. (Points : 1)

True

False

7. Cash dividends affect only stockholders’ equity accounts. (Points : 1)

True

False

8. On June 30, 2014, Stephans Company showed the following data on the equity section of their balance sheet:

Stockholders’ equity

Common stock, $1 par100,000 shares authorized$40,000

40,000 shares issued

Paid-in capital in excess of par260,000

Retained earnings940,000

Total stockholder’s equity$1,240,000

On July 1, 2014, Stephans distributed a 5% stock dividend. The market value of the stock at that time was $13 per share. Following this transaction, the total shareholders equity would go down by $26,000. (Points : 1)

True

False

9. On June 30, 2013, Stephans Company showed the following data on the equity section of their balance sheet:

Stockholders’ equity

Common stock, $1 par100,000 shares authorized$40,000

40,000 shares issued

Paid-in capital in excess of par260,000

Retained earnings940,000

Total stockholder’s equity$1,240,000

On July 1, 2013, Stephans distributed a 5% stock dividend. The market value of the stock at that time was $13 per share. Following this transaction, what would be the new number of shares issued shown on the balance sheet? (Points : 1)

26,000

66,000

42,000

105,000

None of these is correct

10. If preferred stock is non-cumulative, then the company does NOT need to pay dividends that were passed in previous years. (Points : 1)

True

False

accounting quiz 495804

Q1

Hammell Industries has been using 10% as its cost of retained earnings for a number of years. Management has decided to revisit this decision based on recent changes in financial markets. An average stock is currently earning 8%, treasury bills yield 3.5%, and shares of Hammell s stock are selling for $29.44. The firm just paid a dividend of $1.50, and anticipates growing at 5% for the foreseeable future. Hammell s CFO recently asked an investment banker about issuing bonds and was told the market was demanding a 6.5% coupon rate on similar issues. Hammell stock has a beta of 1.4. Recommend a cost of retained earnings for Hammell.

Q2

MCC: Example 13-9 (page 573)

. Whitley Motors Inc. has the following capital.

Debt: The firm issued 900, 25 year bonds five years ago which were sold at a par value of $1,000. The bonds carry a coupon rate of 7%, but are currently selling to yield new buyers 10%.

Preferred Stock:3,500 shares of 8% preferred were sold 12 years ago at a par value of $50. They re now priced to yield 11%.

Equity: The firm got started with the sale of 10,000 shares of common stock at $100 per share. Since that time earnings of $800,000 have been retained. The stock is now selling for $89. Whitley s business plan for next year projects net income of $300,000, half of which will be retained.

The firm s marginal tax rate is 38% including federal and state obligations. It pays flotation costs of 8% on all new stock issues. Whitely is expected to grow at a rate of 3.5% indefinitely and recently paid an annual dividend of $4.00.

Develop Whitley s WACC before and after the retained earnings break and indicate how much capital will have been raised when the break occurs.

Q3

The Longenes Company uses a target capital structure when calculating the cost of capital. The target structure and current component costs based on market conditions follow.

Component Mix Cost*

Debt 25% 8%

Preferred Stock 10% 12%

Common Equity 65% 20%

* The costs of debt and preferred stock are already adjusted for taxes and/or flotation costs. The cost of equity is unadjusted.

The firm expects to earn $20 million next year, and plans to invest $18 million in new capital projects. It generally pays dividends equal to 60% of earnings. Flotation costs are 10% for common and preferred stock.

a. What is Longenes initial WACC?

b. Where is the retained earnings breakpoint in the MCC (Round to the nearest $.1M.)

c. What is the new WACC after the break? (Adjust the entire cost of retained earnings for flotation costs.)

d. Longenes can borrow up to $4 million at a net cost of 8% as shown. After that the net cost of debt rises to 12%. What is the new WACC after the increase in the cost of debt

e. Where is the second break in the MCC That is, how much total capital has been raised when the second increase in WACC occurs?

f. Sketch Longenes MCC.

Q4

Cost of Capital Comprehensive Problem and IOS: Example 13-10 (page 576) and Combining the MCC and the IOS (page 575)

25. Taunton Construction Inc.’s capital situation is described as follows:

Debt: The firm issued 10,000 25-year bonds10 years ago at their par value of $1,000. The bonds carry a coupon rate of 14% and are now selling to yield 10%.

Preferred Stock: 30,000 shares of preferred stock were sold six years ago at a par value of $50. The shares pay a dividend of $6 per year. Similar preferred issues are now yielding 9%.

Equity: Taunton was initially financed by selling 2 million shares of common stock at $12. Accumulated retained earnings are now $5 million. The stock is currently selling at $13.25.

Taunton’s Target Capital Structure is as follows:

Debt 30.0%

Preferred Stock 5.0%

Common Equity 65.0%

100.0%

Other information:

Taunton’s marginal tax rate (state and federal) is 40%.

Flotation costs average 12% for common and preferred stock.

Short-term treasury bills currently yield 7.5%.

The market is returning 12.5%.

Taunton’s beta is 1.2.

The firm is expected to grow at 6% indefinitely.

The last annual dividend paid was $1.00 per share.

Taunton expects to earn $5 million next year.

The firm can borrow an additional $2 million at rates similar to the market return on its old debt. Beyond that lenders are expected to demand returns in the neighborhood of 14%.

Taunton has the following capital budgeting projects under consideration in the coming year. These represent its investment opportunity schedule (IOS).

Capital Cumulative

Project IRR Required Cap. Req.

A 15.0% $3M $3M

B 14.0% $2M $5M

C 13.0% $2M $7M

D 12.0% $2M $9M

E 11.0% $2M $11M

a. Calculate the firm’s capital structure based on book and market values and compare with the target capital structure. Is the target structure a reasonable approximation of the market value based structure Is the book structure very far off

b. Calculate the cost of debt based on the market return on the company’s existing bonds.

c. Calculate the cost of preferred stock based on the market return on the company’s existing preferred stock.

d. Calculate the cost of retained earnings using three approaches, CAPM, dividend growth, and risk premium. Reconcile the results into a single estimate.

e. Estimate the cost of equity raised through the sale of new stock using the dividend growth approach.

f. Calculate the WACC using equity from retained earnings based on your component cost estimates and the target capital structure.

g. Where is the first breakpoint in the MCC (the point where retained earnings runs out)? Calculate to the nearest $.1M.

h. Calculate the WACC after the first breakpoint.

i. Where is the second breakpoint in the MCC (the point at which the cost of debt increases.) Why does this second break exist Calculate to the nearest $.1M.

j. Calculate the WACC after the second break.

k. Plot Taunton’s MCC.

l. Plot Taunton’s IOS on the same axes as the MCC. Which projects should be accepted and which should be rejected Do any of those rejected have IRRs above the initial WACC If so, explain in words why they’re being rejected.

m. What is the WACC for the planning period?

n. Suppose project E is self-funding in that it comes with a source of its own debt financing. A loan is offered through an equipment manufacturer at 9%. The cost of the loan is 9% (1-T) = 5.4%.

Should project E be accepted under such conditions?

Q5

Newrock Manufacturing Inc. has the following target capital structure

Debt 25%,

preferred 20%

equity 55%

Investment bankers have advised the CFO that the company could raise up to $5 million in new debt financing by issuing bonds at a 6.0% coupon rate, beyond that amount new debt would require a 7% coupon. Newrock s 8.5% preferred stock, issued at a par value of $100, currently sells for $112.50. There are 3,000,000 shares of common stock outstanding on which the firm paid an annual dividend of $2.00 recently. The stock currently trades at $36 per share. Next year s net income is projected at $14,000,000 and management expects 6% growth in the foreseeable future. Floatation costs are 6% on debt and 11% on common and preferred stock. The marginal tax rate is 40%.

a. Calculate the WACC using the target capital structure and the cost of retained earnings for the equity component.

b. Plot Newrock s MCC identifying the levels of funding at which the first two breaks occur, and calculate the WACCs after each break.

c. Newrock has identified the following capital projects for next year:

Project Investment IRR

A $ 4.0 million 11.0%

B $ 3.6 million 10.5%

C $ 8.6 million 13.2%

D $ 2.0 million 8.7%

E $ 5.5 million 9.5%

F $ 5.0 million 7.2%

G $ 4.1 million 10.5%

H $ 6.4 million 8.0%

Projects A and B are mutually exclusive, as are Projects C and H. Plot the IOS and the MCC and determine the ideal size of next year s capital program.

accounting required in excel 495807

Question 2: A Cruel World 1

You are given two consecutive balance sheets, an income statement, and a few facts for A Cruel

World Inc.

Balance Sheets (years 0 and 1)

Year 0 Year 1

Cash 3,000 3,000

Accounts Receivable 2,000 4,000

Inventory 3,000 4,000

Property, Plant and Equipment (net) 12,000 11,000

Total Assets 20,000 22,000

Accounts Payable 7,000 5,000

Bonds Payable 5,000 6,000

Total Liabilities 12,000 11,000

Common Stock 3,000 4,000

Retained Earnings 5,000 7,000

Total Shareholders’ Equity 8,000 11,000

Total Liabilities and Equity 20,000 22,000

Income Statement (year 1)

Sales 20,000

Costs of Goods Sold (8,000)

Wage Expense (4,000)

Depreciation Expense (2,000)

Interest Expense (1,000)

Net Income Before Tax 5,000

Tax Expense (2,000)

Net Income 3,000

Facts

All property, plant and equipment that is retired or sold is fully depreciated.

Purchases of property, plant and equipment were made in cash.

Interest expense increases the Interest Payable Account.

Required:

a.Construct the Statement of Cash Flows for A Cruel World in year 1 using the direct method.

b.Construct the supporting schedule to the Statement of Cash Flows which reconciles net

income to cash flow from operations for A Cruel World in year 1. (That is, calculate cash

flow from operations using the indirect method.)

c.State what it is possible (with the data at hand) to know about cash purchases of inventory for

A Cruel World in year 1.

accounting required in excel 495808

Question 1: The DEF Company

The DEF Company had started its operations in 1994. The balance sheet for December 31,

1994, showed the following accounts balances (there were no other accounts listed):

Accounts receivable 45, Advances from customers 40, Accumulated depreciation

10, Paid in capital 500, Retained earnings 57, Property plant and equipment

(gross) 200, Inventory 75, Accounts payable 40, Cash 309, Prepaid rent (?).

During the 1995 the following transactions occurred:

1. DEF purchased $375 worth of inventory on account.

2. Payments on Accounts payable were $365.

3. Cash sales were $260; credit sales were $360.

4. Ending inventory was $59.

5. Depreciation expense was $20.

6. Collections from customers (not including cash sales) were $312.

7. The Prepaid rent had expired during the year.

8. DEF hired one employee, who worked for the entire year at $4 per month. At the end of

the year DEF owes its employee $6.

9. Dividend of $24 was declared and paid during 1995.

10. On the last day of the year, DEF gave a loan of $50 to its twin sister company, ABC.

11. Advances from customers account remained intact during 1995.

Required:

a.What was the balance of the Prepaid rent account on December 31, 1994?

b.Record journal entries for all transactions occurred during 1995. (You may use T accounts,

or the Accounting Equation worksheet.)

c.Prepare an Income Statementfor the year ended December 31, 1995.

d.Prepare a Balance Sheetfor December 31, 1995.

e.Prepare a Statement of Cash Flowsfor the year ended December 31, 1995.

accounting response 2 to classmate number 2 495809

Hi I need help writing a reply to a classmate response in accounting class. it is dueTODAY NOV 18, BY 10PM EASTERN TIME no less than 200 words with references and citations please. Plagarism free work please this will be sent through turnitin. Thank you

VARIABLE COSTS

Many companies rely on variable costing. Variable cost pricing is commonly used when someone wants to enter a new market with an existing product line. The prices are based on variable costs and are very responsive when controlling operations in any level of management due to level of change during production (Fess, 1986).

In accounting, variable costs are costs that vary with production volume or business activity. They go high when a production company increases; output and decrease when the company slows production. Variable costs can also be referred to as unit-level costs. Variable costs differ from fixed costs in the sense that, it can remain relatively constant regardless of the company s level of production or business activity. A combined company s fixed costs and variable costs can also be known as total cost of production.

All costs can either be fixed costs or variable costs. Variable costs are product because they are allocated to units of production and recorded in inventory accounts, such as cost of goods sold. Even though managing inventory tends to focus only on the variable cost of inventory, it is essential that financial reporting must include both the variable cost and the fixed cost of inventory. Fixed costs are all costs that are not product related. Costs that do not fluctuate directly with production volume are fixed costs. Examples of fixed costs are various indirect costs and fixed manufacturing overhead costs while examples of variable costs are direct labor, direct materials, and variable overhead (Wilkinson, 2013)

Variable costs increases as level of sales in dollars or units is sold depending on your type of business, some examples include; cost of goods sold, sales commissions, shipping charges, delivery charges, costs of direct materials or supplies, wages of part-time or temporary employees, and sales or production bonuses. Variable costs change with the number of products that are put up for sale. Therefore, entrepreneurs learn how to make profit and be successful when they are able to identify and control their cost. It is important to understand cost well enough to be able to differentiate between variable and fixed costs (Barrat et. al. 2013)

REFERENCES

Fess, Philip E. The Variable (Direct) Costing Concept in Perspective. Management Accounting (pre-1986); Apr 1969; 50, 8; Accounting & Tax

pg. 21. Retrieved fromhttp://search.proquest.com.proxy.davenport.edu/accounting/docview/198630890/141BF29A5F37DC3C75/3?accountid=40195

Wilkinson, Jim. 2013. WikiCFO. Variable Costs. Retrieved fromhttp://strategiccfo.com/wikicfo/variable-cost/

Barratt et. al. 2013. How to calculate Variable Costs. Retrieved fromhttp://strategiccfo.com/wikicfo/variable-cost/

accounting response to classmate 495810

In about 150 to 250 words respond to a classmate with reference and citation on this week topic.

Here is what a classmate wrote to our topic this week in accounting I need this response tonight within a couple of hours please.

G wrote

Relevant decision-making depends on the balance between Costs and Benefits. It is a defining attribute of high performance organizations. (Michel 2007) Managers should always keep this concept in mind in order to focus on more relevant questions that arise during business meetings and transactions. The ability to identify cost and benefits is referred to as differential analysis. The cost and benefits of one decision to an alternative is what makes a decision over another beneficial. It is important to note that unavoidable costs are future costs that do not vary based on the alternative decision.

If the cost and benefit do not vary as much should be ignored and avoided. When the cost and benefits becomes more relevant over other alternatives, it is kept. However keep in mind that sunk costs (Gschwandtner 2006) are cost that s been invested or implemented beforehand in decision-making. This is unavoidable and can be detrimental in decision-making. Sunk costs are irrelevant and different costs will be relevant for different purposes and each should be analyzed in depth before coming to a conclusion. Therefore sunk costs when included into decision rule can result in future investment potentials whereas some would argue it s a value that should never be incorporated into Net present value since it would skew interpretation and further values. (Shrader 2011)

A great example is the cost of investment between marketing and advertisement campaigns. Comparison between these values can be applied to all forms of business. The goal here is simple, and considering a difference which can result in increase in net income versus loss. This complete formula is simply differential analysis.

Since we understand what is relevant costs in difference from all costs, we should isolate irrelevant costs in order to pinpoint which sector can result in sunk costs or damaging over time. This ability to differential not only focuses on positive outlook but also helps understand where the organization is weak in and what can be done to save money.

Reference:

Michel, L. (2007). Understanding decision making in organizations to focus its practices where it matters. Measuring Business Excellence, 11(1), 33-45.

Gschwandtner, A., & Lambson, V. E. (2006). SUNK COSTS, PROFIT VARIABILITY, AND TURNOVER. Economic Inquiry, 44(2), 367-373.

Shrader, M. J., & Hickman, K. A. (2011). On the relevancy of future sunk costs. The Journal of Applied Business and Economics,12(1), 34-37.

accounting a solution 495811

Adria Lopez created Success Systems on October 1, 2013. The company has been successful, and its list of customers has grown. To accommodate the growth, the accounting system is modified to set up separate accounts for each customer. The following chart of accounts includes the account number used for each account and any balance as of December 31, 2013. Adria Lopez decided to add a fourth digit with a decimal point to the 106 account number that had been used for the single Accounts Receivable account. This change allows the company to continue using the existing chart of accounts.

No. Account Title Debit Credit 101 Cash $ 58,160 106.1 Alex s Engineering Co. 0 106.2 Wildcat Services 0 106.3 Easy Leasing 0 106.4 IFM Co. 3,000 106.5 Liu Corp. 0 106.6 Gomez Co. 2,668 106.7 Delta Co. 0 106.8 KC, Inc. 0 106.9 Dream, Inc. 0 119 Merchandise inventory 0 126 Computer supplies 580 128 Prepaid insurance 1,665 131 Prepaid rent 825 163 Office equipment 8,000 164 Accumulated depreciation Office equipment $ 400 167 Computer equipment 20,000 168 Accumulated depreciation Computer equipment 1,250 201 Accounts payable 1,100 210 Wages payable 500 236 Unearned computer services revenue 1,500 307 Common stock 83,000 318 Retained earnings 7,148 319 Dividends 0 403 Computer services revenue 0 413 Sales 0 414 Sales returns and allowances 0 415 Sales discounts 0 502 Cost of goods sold 0 612 Depreciation expense Office equipment 0 613 Depreciation expense Computer equipment 0 623 Wages expense 0 637 Insurance expense 0 640 Rent expense 0 652 Computer supplies expense 0 655 Advertising expense 0 676 Mileage expense 0 677 Miscellaneous expenses 0 684 Repairs expense Computer 0

——————————————————————————–

In response to requests from customers, A. Lopez will begin selling computer software. The company will extend credit terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, to all customers who purchase this merchandise. However, no cash discount is available on consulting fees. Additional accounts (Nos. 119, 413, 414, 415, and 502) are added to its general ledger to accommodate the company s new merchandising activities. Also, Success Systems does not use reversing entries and, therefore, all revenue and expense accounts have zero beginning balances as of January 1, 2014. Its transactions for January through March follow:

Jan. 4 The company paid cash to Lyn Addie for five days work at the rate of $125 per day. Four of the five days relate to wages payable that were accrued in the prior year.

5 Adria Lopez invested an additional $25,000 cash in the company in exchange for more common stock. 7 The company purchased $5,800 of merchandise from Kansas Corp. with terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, invoice dated January 7.

9 The company received $2,668 cash from Gomez Co. as full payment on its account. 11 The company completed a five-day project for Alex s Engineering Co. and billed it $5,500, which is the total price of $7,000 less the advance payment of $1,500.

13 The company sold merchandise with a retail value of $5,200 and a cost of $3,560 to Liu Corp., invoice dated January 13.

15 The company paid $600 cash for freight charges on the merchandise purchased on January 7.

16 The company received $4,000 cash from Delta Co. for computer services provided. 17 The company paid Kansas Corp. for the invoice dated January 7, net of the discount.

20 Liu Corp. returned $500 of defective merchandise from its invoice dated January 13. The returned merchandise, which had a $320 cost, is discarded. (The policy of Success Systems is to leave the cost of defective products in cost of goods sold.)

22 The company received the balance due from Liu Corp., net of both the discount and the credit for the returned merchandise.

24 The company returned defective merchandise to Kansas Corp. and accepted a credit against future purchases. The defective merchandise invoice cost, net of the discount, was $496.

26 The company purchased $9,000 of merchandise from Kansas Corp. with terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, invoice dated January 26.

26 The company sold merchandise with a $4,640 cost for $5,800 on credit to KC, Inc., invoice dated January 26.

29 The company received a $496 credit memorandum from Kansas Corp. concerning the merchandise returned on January 24.

31 The company paid cash to Lyn Addie for 10 days work at $125 per day. Feb. 1 The company paid $2,475 cash to Hillside Mall for another three months rent in advance.

3 The company paid Kansas Corp. for the balance due, net of the cash discount, less the $496 amount in the credit memorandum.

5 The company paid $600 cash to the local newspaper for an advertising insert in today s paper.

11 The company received the balance due from Alex s Engineering Co. for fees billed on January 11. 15 The company paid $4,800 cash for dividends. 23 The company sold merchandise with a $2,660 cost for $3,220 on credit to Delta Co., invoice dated February 23.

26 The company paid cash to Lyn Addie for eight days work at $125 per day. 27 The company reimbursed Adria Lopez for business automobile mileage (600 miles at $0.32 per mile).

Mar. 8 The company purchased $2,730 of computer supplies from Harris Office Products on credit, invoice dated March 8.

9 The company received the balance due from Delta Co. for merchandise sold on February 23.

11 The company paid $960 cash for minor repairs to the company s computer. 16 The company received $5,260 cash from Dream, Inc., for computing services provided. 19 The company paid the full amount due to Harris Office Products, consisting of amounts created on December 15 (of $1,100) and March 8.

24 The company billed Easy Leasing for $8,900 of computing services provided. 25 The company sold merchandise with a $2,002 cost for $2,800 on credit to Wildcat Services, invoice dated March 25.

30 The company sold merchandise with a $1,100 cost for $2,220 on credit to IFM Company, invoice dated March 30.

31 The company reimbursed Adria Lopez for business automobile mileage (400 miles at $0.32 per mile).

The following additional facts are available for preparing adjustments on March 31 prior to financial statement preparation:

a. The March 31 amount of computer supplies still available totals $2,005. b. Three more months have expired since the company purchased its annual insurance policy at a $2,220 cost for 12 months of coverage. c. Lyn Addie has not been paid for seven days of work at the rate of $125 per day. d. Three months have passed since any prepaid rent has been transferred to expense. The monthly rent expense is $825. e. Depreciation on the computer equipment for January 1 through March 31 is $1,250. f. Depreciation on the office equipment for January 1 through March 31 is $400. g. The March 31 amount of merchandise inventory still available totals $704.

accounting statements 495812

CARIBOU COFFEE and FAZER GROUP

CARIBOU COFFEE

Caribou owns coffee houses. Most locations are currently in the United States.

http://www.cariboucoffee.com/

FAZER GROUP

Fazer is probably most known for its chocolate. Below is the link to the company’s homepage.

http://www.fazer.com/

Required:

Go to each company s website and review the most recent financial statements for each company and answer the following questions.

  • What accounting standards are used?
  • What auditing standards are used by the external auditors?
  • Analyze and comment on the differences in the annual statements found on the companies’ websites. Provide a few specific differences in content and format.
  • How comparable are these financial statements?

Prepare a table for a period of three years showing some key financial information for the two companies. Include at least four items from the balance sheet, four items from the income statement, and four items from the statement of cash flow. Having reviwed and analyzed the financial information, please elaborate on the following three questions.

  1. Which one of the two companies is the most profitable?
  2. Compare growth of revenues versus income over time and between the two companies
  3. How can you explain the difference in profitability between the two companies?
  4. Indicate in detail the information you used to answer the above questions.

accounting statements 495813

CARIBOU COFFEE and FAZER GROUP

CARIBOU COFFEE

Caribou owns coffee houses. Most locations are currently in the United States.

http://www.cariboucoffee.com/

FAZER GROUP

Fazer is probably most known for its chocolate. Below is the link to the company’s homepage.

http://www.fazer.com/

Required:

Go to each company s website and review the most recent financial statements for each company and answer the following questions.

  • What accounting standards are used?
  • What auditing standards are used by the external auditors?
  • Analyze and comment on the differences in the annual statements found on the companies’ websites. Provide a few specific differences in content and format.
  • How comparable are these financial statements?

Prepare a table for a period of three years showing some key financial information for the two companies. Include at least four items from the balance sheet, four items from the income statement, and four items from the statement of cash flow. Having reviwed and analyzed the financial information, please elaborate on the following three questions.

  1. Which one of the two companies is the most profitable?
  2. Compare growth of revenues versus income over time and between the two companies
  3. How can you explain the difference in profitability between the two companies?
  4. Indicate in detail the information you used to answer the above questions.

what is the principle of capitalizing expenses 495496

Craig Brown, a mechanic, is planning to open his own car repair shop. He has selected the location, the kinds of cars that he will service, and the number of people that he will employ. However, he needs some help with the capitalization of the machines that he needs to buy, and how he has to depreciate these assets. He approaches you, an accountant friend, to help him understand the fundamentals of capitalization of expenses, the various depreciation methods, and the impact of this depreciation expense related to his assets on the financial statements. You use a former client and other businesses in the industry to prepare a report explaining these concepts to him.

Document Preview:

Requirements: 1500-2000 words Part A?I. Explain to Craig the following: ?1.) Why it is it important to distinguish between expenses that need to be capitalized and expenses that need to be expensed.?2.) What the underlying fundamental concept is that governs what expenses should be capitalized and what should be expensed.?3.) Give an example of a company that experienced financial difficulty because of capitalizing expenses that should have been expensed. II. The ABC car repair shop, a former client of yours, purchased a machine on January 1, 20X1, at a net cost of $65,000. At the end of the 4-year life, it expected that the machine would have a salvage value of $1,000. It also estimated that the machine would run for 13,000 hours during its 4-year life. The company’s fiscal year ends on December 31. Using the following information, compute depreciation for this machine for each of the 4 years using each of the following methods: 1.) Straight-line method?2.) Sum-of-years method?3.) Double-declining method?4.) Units-of-production?Year Machine Hours?20X1 2,000?20X2 3,500?20X3 1,500?20X4 6,000 III. The ABC car repair shop purchased a machine in 20X1 at a cost of $20,000. The tractor was sold for $2,000 in 20X3. Depreciation recorded through the disposal totaled $16,000.?1.) Prepare the journal entry to record the sale.?2.) If the machine was sold for $10,000, what will the entry be? IV. The ABC car repair shop traded an old machine for a newer model. The old model’s book value was $150,000 (original cost $350,000, less $200,000 accumulated depreciation) and its fair value was $200,000. ABC paid $40,000 to complete the exchange.?1.) Prepare the journal entry to record the exchange.? Part B?Research the annual reports of various companies to find examples of the following, and explain the meaning of your findings to Craig: I. Equity securities: Find a company that has investments and equity securities listed on its balance sheet. ?1.) Cite the source of the…

Attachments:

which of the following accounts would appear on the balance sheet 495497

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

The cost of an asset less accumulated depreciation equals: ?? ???A. book value.??????B. residual value.??????C. depreciation expense.??????D. None of these answers are correct.??? If the balance of supplies at the start of the month was $900 and at the end of the month you had $450 on hand, the adjustment for Supplies would be: A. $900. B. $350. C. $550. D. $450. Depreciation Expense would be found on which of the following financial statements? A. Income statement B. Statement of Owner’s Equity C. Balance sheet D. Depreciation report Which of the following accounts would appear on the balance sheet? A. Depreciation Expense B. Fees Earned C. Accumulated Depreciation D. None of these are correct. A form used to organize and check data before preparing financial reports is known as a(n): A. income statement. B. balance sheet. C. trial balance. D. worksheet. Which of the following is most likely to result in an adjusting entry at the end of the period? A. Payment for routine maintenance on the company van B. Owner’s withdrawals C. Payment of two months’ insurance in advance D. Payment of one month’s rent When historical cost is used to record equipment, it would appear as the: A. original cost on the income statement. B. original cost on the balance sheet. C. residual value on the balance sheet. D. residual value on the income statement. Bringing account balances up to date before preparing financial reports is called: A. adjusting. B. posting. C. analyzing. D. journalizing. Not recording the Prepaid Rent used causes: A. assets to be too low. B. expenses to be too high. C. revenue to be too high. D. assets to be too high. A contra-asset is: A. in reality a liability. B. an account with an opposite balance of a normal asset. C. an asset with a debit balance. D. an account that increases the asset. Reset Selection Equipment…

Attachments:

which of the following accounts would appear on the balance sheet 495498

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

The cost of an asset less accumulated depreciation equals: A. book value. B. residual value. C. depreciation expense. D. None of these answers are correct. If the balance of supplies at the start of the month was $900 and at the end of the month you had $450 on hand, the adjustment for Supplies would be: A. $900. B. $350. C. $550. D. $450. Depreciation Expense would be found on which of the following financial statements? A. Income statement B. Statement of Owner’s Equity C. Balance sheet D. Depreciation report Which of the following accounts would appear on the balance sheet? A. Depreciation Expense B. Fees Earned C. Accumulated Depreciation D. None of these are correct. A form used to organize and check data before preparing financial reports is known as a(n): A. income statement. B. balance sheet. C. trial balance. D. worksheet. Which of the following is most likely to result in an adjusting entry at the end of the period? A. Payment for routine maintenance on the company van B. Owner’s withdrawals C. Payment of two months’ insurance in advance D. Payment of one month’s rent When historical cost is used to record equipment, it would appear as the: A. original cost on the income statement. B. original cost on the balance sheet. C. residual value on the balance sheet. D. residual value on the income statement. Bringing account balances up to date before preparing financial reports is called: A. adjusting. B. posting. C. analyzing. D. journalizing. Not recording the Prepaid Rent used causes: A. assets to be too low. B. expenses to be too high. C. revenue to be too high. D. assets to be too high. A contra-asset is: A. in reality a liability. B. an account with an opposite balance of a normal asset. C. an asset with a debit balance. D. an account that increases the asset. Reset Selection Equipment with a cost…

Attachments:

wiley assignment week 4 495499

Indicate whether each of the following statements is true or false. 1. The corporation is an entity separate and distinct from its owners. 2. The liability of stockholders is normally limited to their investment in the corporation. 3. The relative lack of government regulation is an advantage of the corporate form of business. 4. There is no journal entry to record the authorization of capital stock. 5. No-par value stock is quite rare today. E11-15 On October 31, the stockholders’ equity section of Omar Company consists of common stock $600,000 and retained earnings $900,000.

Document Preview:

Indicate whether each of the following statements is true or false. 1.?The corporation is an entity separate and distinct from its owners.???2.?The liability of stockholders is normally limited to their investment in the corporation.???3.?The relative lack of government regulation is an advantage of the corporate form of business.???4.?There is no journal entry to record the authorization of capital stock.???5.?No-par value stock is quite rare today.??? E11-15????On October 31, the stockholders’ equity section of Omar Company consists of common stock $600,000 and retained earnings $900,000. Omar is considering the following two courses of action: (1) declaring a 5% stock dividend on the 60,000, $10 par value shares outstanding, or (2) effecting a 2-for-1 stock split that will reduce par value to $5 per share. The current market price is $14 per share. Complete the tabular summary of the effects of the alternative actions on the components of stockholders’ equity and outstanding shares. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)  ?Before Action?After Stock Dividend?After Stock Split??Stockholders’ equity? ? ? ??   Paid-in capital? ? ? ??     Common Stock?$?$?$??     In excess of par value?????        Total paid-in capital?????   Retained earnings?????        Total stockholders’ equity?$??$?? ? ? ? ??Outstanding shares????? E11-16????Before preparing financial statements for the current year, the chief accountant for Springer Company discovered the following errors in the accounts. The declaration and payment of $50,000 cash dividend was recorded as a debit to Interest Expense $50,000 and a credit to Cash $50,000. A 10% stock dividend (1,000 shares) was declared on the $10 par value stock when the market value per share was $16. The only entry made was: Retained Earnings (Dr.) $10,000 and Dividend Payable (Cr.) $10,000. The shares have not been issued. A 4-for-1 stock split involving the issue of 400,000 shares of $5 par value common…

Attachments:

wiley assignment week 5 495500

E13-1 Pioneer Corporation had the transactions below during 2011. Analyze the transactions and indicate whether each transaction resulted in a cash flow from operating activities, investing activities, financing activities, or noncash investing and financing activities. (a) Issued $50,000 par value common stock for cash. (b) Purchased a machine for $30,000, giving a long-term note in exchange. (c) Issued $200,000 par value common stock upon conversion of bonds having a face value of $200,000. (d) Declared and paid a cash dividend of $18,000.

Document Preview:

E13-1????Pioneer Corporation had the transactions below during 2011. Analyze the transactions and indicate whether each transaction resulted in a cash flow from operating activities, investing activities, financing activities, or noncash investing and financing activities. (a)?Issued $50,000 par value common stock for cash. ???(b)?Purchased a machine for $30,000, giving a long-term note in exchange. ???(c)?Issued $200,000 par value common stock upon conversion of bonds having a face value of $200,000.???(d)?Declared and paid a cash dividend of $18,000.???(e)?Sold a long-term investment with a cost of $15,000 for $15,000 cash.???(f)?Collected $16,000 of accounts receivable. ???(g)?Paid $18,000 on accounts payable. ???? HYPERLINK “javascript:void();” ?Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question? E13-8????Here are comparative balance sheets for Taguchi Company.  ??TAGUCHI COMPANY??Comparative Balance Sheets??December 31??Assets ?2011? ?2010??Cash?$73,000  ? ?$22,000  ??Accounts receivable?85,000  ? ?76,000  ??Inventories?170,000  ? ?189,000  ??Land?75,000  ? ?100,000  ??Equipment?260,000  ? ?200,000  ??Accumulated depreciation?(66,000)? ?(32,000)??     Total?$597,000  ? ?$555,000  ?? ? ? ? ??Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity? ? ??Accounts payable?$39,000? ?$47,000??Bonds payable?150,000? ?200,000??Common stock ($1 par)?216,000? ?174,000??Retained earnings?192,000? ?134,000??     Total?$597,000? ?$555,000??Additional information: Net income for 2011 was $103,000. Cash dividends of $45,000 were declared and paid. Bonds payable amounting to $50,000 were redeemed for cash $50,000. Common stock was issued for $42,000 cash. No equipment was sold during 2011, but land was sold at cost. Complete the statement of cash flows for 2011 using the indirect method. (List amounts from largest positive to smallest positive followed by most negative to least negative, e.g. 15, 14, 10, -17, -5, -1. If amount decreases cash flow, use either a negative sign…

Attachments:

wiley assignment week 5 problems 495501

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

E13-1 Pioneer Corporation had the transactions below during 2011. Analyze the transactions and indicate whether each transaction resulted in a cash flow from operating activities, investing activities, financing activities, or noncash investing and financing activities. (a) Issued $50,000 par value common stock for cash. (b) Purchased a machine for $30,000, giving a long-term note in exchange. (c) Issued $200,000 par value common stock upon conversion of bonds having a face value of $200,000. (d) Declared and paid a cash dividend of $18,000. (e) Sold a long-term investment with a cost of $15,000 for $15,000 cash. (f) Collected $16,000 of accounts receivable. (g) Paid $18,000 on accounts payable. javascript:void();Click here if you would like to Show Work for this question E13-8 Here are comparative balance sheets for Taguchi Company.   TAGUCHI COMPANY Comparative Balance Sheets December 31 Assets 2011   2010 Cash $73,000    $22,000  Accounts receivable 85,000    76,000  Inventories 170,000    189,000  Land 75,000    100,000  Equipment 260,000    200,000  Accumulated depreciation (66,000)   (32,000) Total $597,000    $555,000          Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity     Accounts payable $39,000   $47,000 Bonds payable 150,000   200,000 Common stock ($1 par) 216,000   174,000 Retained earnings 192,000   134,000 Total $597,000   $555,000 Additional information: Net income for 2011 was $103,000. Cash dividends of $45,000 were declared and paid. Bonds payable amounting to $50,000 were redeemed for cash $50,000. Common stock was issued for $42,000 cash. No equipment was sold during 2011, but land was sold at cost. Complete the statement of cash flows for 2011 using the indirect method. (List amounts from largest positive to smallest positive followed by most negative to least negative, e.g. 15, 14, 10, -17, -5, -1. If amount decreases cash flow, use…

Attachments:

will pay for entire paper to be completed as soon as finished 495502

please have a good background in accounting can’t afford wrong answers

Document Preview:

Name: ______________________________ Date: _______________ Problem Points Possible Points Received 1 25 Points   2 15 Points   3 5 Points 4 5 Points   Total 50 Points   Problem #1 – (25 Points) Sav Rocca, accountant for Shine King Cleaning is attempting to reconcile the monthly bank account. Sav Rocca has the following information: The cash ledger balance at November 30 is $73,100 The balance according to the bank statement is $73,723 Deposits in transit totaled $900 Outstanding checks Check #104 – $500 & Check #107 – $600 Bank service charges were $18 The bank collected an EFT collection of $600 for Shine King Cleaning on account from Pierre’s Wig Stand Earned interest at the bank $16 Shine King Cleaning made EFT payments Check Art Supplies $30 & Calpine Energy $145. 1) Prepare bank reconciliation at November 30 (15 Points) Bank Balance Book Balance Adjusted Bank Balance Adjusted Book Balance Problem #1 continued 2) Prepare any necessary journal entries from previous page (10 Points) GENERAL JOURNAL DATE DESCRIPTION REF DEBIT CREDIT Problem 2- (15 Points) Prepare journal entries for the following petty cash transactions of Bob’s Lawn Service: 1) Established a $200 petty cash fund (5 points) Journal Entry DATE ACCOUNTS AND EXPLANATIONS POST. REF. DEBIT CREDIT 2) Replenish the petty cash fund. The fund contained the following: $77 in cash, receipts for $45 in lawn supplies purchased, receipts for $11 in fuel costs purchased, and a $17 receipt for entertainment expenses (10 points) Journal Entry DATE ACCOUNTS AND EXPLANATIONS POST. REF. DEBIT CREDIT Problem 3 – (5 Points) 3) A petty cash fund was established with a $300 balance. It currently has cash of $78 and petty…

Attachments:

wk 3 495503

Target

Download most recent Annual Report from their Website. ( Post with assignment)

Prepare an Excel Workbook.

Tab 1 – Horizontal Analysis of the Balance Sheet

Tab 2 – Vertical Analysis of the Income Statement

Tab 3 – Financial Ratios – Select 2 profitability and 2 liquidity ratios (Use formate covered in class, I want to see details of the calculations.)

Review analysis work and select 4 of the more critical observations made in the analysis.

Write a paper of no more that 1250 words in which you conduct a comparative and ratio analysis to measure profitability and liquidity.

Document Preview:

, Page of , 12/31/2012 12/31/2011 106000 90000 400000 350000 99000 65000 122000 90000 130000 115000 155000 170000 12/31/2005 2012 2011 , , Page of Page(s), 2012 2011 800000 600000 520000 408000 120000 72000 60000 48000 30000 24000 70000 48000 2012 2011 , , Page of Page(s), 12/31/2005 2012 2011 2010 30000 20000 18000 50000 45000 48000 90000 95000 64000 55000 70000 45000 500000 370000 358000 725000 600000 533000 85000 80000 70000 145000 85000 50000 320000 310000 300000 175000 125000 113000 725000 600000 533000 2012 2011 740000 600000 40000 30000 700000 570000 425000 350000 275000 220000 180000 150000 95000 70000 1 7 7.5 8.5 2 2012 2011 2012 2011 2012 2011 2012 2011 2012 2011 2012 2011 2012 2011 , , Page of Page(s), Retained earnings Instructions: Amount Formula Name: Course: Date: Total stockholders’ equity Current assets Plant assets (net) Current liabilities Long-term liabilities Common stock, $1 par Condensed Balance Sheet Increase or (Decrease) Percentage Assets Total assets Liabilities Total liabilities Stockholders’ Equity Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity Instructor: E13-3, Prepare horizontal analysis. Here is financial information for Pauletti Inc. Prepare a schedule showing a horizontal analysis for 2012 using 2011 as the base year. PAULETTI INC. E13-4, Prepare vertical analysis. Operating data for Gladow Corporation are presented below. Sales Cost of goods sold Selling expenses Administrative expenses Income tax expense Net income Prepare a schedule showing a vertical analysis for 2012 and 2011. GLADOW CORPORATION Condensed Income Statement For the Years Ended December 31 Percent Gross profit Account title Title P13-3A, Perform ratio analysis, and discuss change in financial position and operating results. Condensed balance sheet and income statement data for Glassgow Corporation are presented here. GLASSGOW…

Attachments:

wk 6 wiley assignment acc 561 495504

Hello,

I need some help with this assignment on my final week.

Document Preview:

Description / Instructions: Complete the following in WileyPLUS: *Exercises: 20-3 *Exercises: 22-1 *Brief Exercise 23-3 *Brief Exercise 23-4 *Brief Exercise 23-6 ?? Top of Form Bottom of Form ? ?? ?Question 1????Garza and Neely, CPAs, are preparing their service revenue (sales) budget for the coming year (2012). The practice is divided into three departments: auditing, tax, and consulting. Billable hours for each department, by quarter, are provided below. Department??Quarter 1??Quarter 2??Quarter 3??Quarter 4??Auditing??2,470??1,990??2,180??2,690??Tax??3,110??2,750??2,360??2,770??Consulting??1,670??1,670??1,670??1,670???Average hourly billing rates are: auditing $84, tax $93, and consulting $103.??Prepare the service revenue (sales) budget for 2012 by listing the departments and showing for each quarter and the year in total, billable hours, billable rate, and total revenue. GARZA AND NEELY, CPAs?Sales Revenue Budget?For the Year Ending December 31, 2012???Quarter 1?Quarter 2??Dept.?Billable Hours?Billable Rate?Total Rev.?Billable Hours?Billable Rate?Total Rev.??Auditing??$?$??$?$??Tax????????Consulting???????????$???$?? GARZA AND NEELY, CPAs?Sales Revenue Budget?For the Year Ending December 31, 2012??Quarter 3?Quarter 4??Dept.?Billable Hours?Billable Rate?Total Rev.?Billable Hours?Billable Rate?Total Rev.??Auditing??$?$??$?$??Tax????????Consulting???????????$???$?? GARZA AND NEELY, CPAs?Sales Revenue Budget?For the Year Ending December 31, 2012??Year??Dept.?Billable Hours?Billable Rate?Total Rev.??Auditing??$?$??Tax?????Consulting????????$?????? ????? ??????????????????? Top of Form Bottom of Form ? ?? ?Question 2????Stanton Company is planning to produce 2,900 units of product in 2012. Each unit requires 2.10 pounds of materials at $6.60 per pound and a half-hour of labor at $13.00 per hour. The overhead rate is 70% of direct labor.??(a) Compute the budgeted amounts for 2012 for direct materials to be used, direct labor, and applied overhead. Direct…

Attachments:

wk6 acct conference 495505

please post a discussion on this topic.

just 2 to 3 short parapraphs.

thanks!

🙂

Document Preview:

Class, The attached NY Times article is one that I thought you might be interested in reading. It relates to shipping costs. Please consider what we have learned in the last few chapters. Here is one item of cost, both to the retailer as well in the end for the production plants. Enjoy the reading(. Thanks, Michael J. Class, The attached NY Times article is one that I thought you might be interested in reading. It relates to shipping costs. Please consider what we have learned in the last few chapters. Here is one item of cost, both to the retailer as well in the end for the production plants. Enjoy the reading(. Thanks, Michael J. ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

wk6 acct conference 2 495506

Please post your thoughts

on the following ppt presentations.

Just 2 to 3 short paragraphs for each.

thanks!

🙂

Document Preview:

Chapter Resources & Study Activities Please discuss on the PowerPoint presentations for Chapter 23 and Chapter 26 study resources. Chapter Resources & Study Activities Please discuss on the PowerPoint presentations for Chapter 23 and Chapter 26 study resources. ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

worksheet 495507

chapter 11 only tabs at bottom of worksheet

Document Preview:

0.12 20 50000 7.4690000000000003 50000 7.4690000000000003 373450 0.2 5 -2000 2000 2.488 4976 2.488 0.15 3 4976 4976 1.5209999999999999 7568.5 1.5209999999999999 0.08 11 2000 15.645 2000 15.645 31290 1000 0.11 30 770.33 0.14000000000000001 110 20 7.0030000000000001 790.33 0.02 1000 0.11 15 675.62 0.14000000000000001 110 140 6.1420000000000003 815.62 0.14000000000000001 1000 0.11 1 96.47 0.14000000000000001 110 877 0.877 973.47 0.877 1000 0.03 0.12 0.05 20 0.04 0.1 0.1 120 8.5139999999999993 0.03 0.14899999999999999 0.03 0.03 0.04 0.1 1021.68 149 1170.68 8 0.08 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.2 0.12 0.35 0.106 0.35 4.4000000000000004 50 2 0.35 7.0000000000000007E-2 0.15 0.1 0.5 0.13 Western Sweepstakes Discount Rate = i Periods = n Annuity PVIFA Solution: A = PVA Bruce Sutter PV FVIF FV Present Value of Investment Information FVIFA FVA PVIF Total Present Value or Price of the Bond = Present Value of Principal Payment at Maturity = Annuity = A Present Value of Principal Payment at Maturity = FV * PVIF Yield to Maturity = i Present Value of Interest Payments = Time to Maturity=n Present Value of Interest Payments = A * PVIFA Interest Par Value c) b) a) Total Return Risk Premium Inflation Rate Real Rate of Return Inflation Rate in 5 years Tom Cruise Lines, Inc. Price of Preferred Stock CURRENT VALUE ORIGINAL PRICE New Required Rate of Return Original Required Rate of Return Annual Dividend North Pole Cruise Lines United Business Forms Capital Structure Debt Aftertax Cost of Debt Preferred Stock Cost of Preferred Stock Common Equity Cost of Common Equity Cost (aftertax) Weights Weighted Cost Debt (Kd) Preferred Stock (Kp) Common Equity (Ke) Name: FINC 400 Principles of Financial Management Complete the following problems: Problem 9-17 Problem 9-19 Problem 9-27 Problem 10-6 Problem 10-13 Problem 10-24 Problem 11-19 Week 4 Homework Problems Example: FinanceA-FINC400-4 Problem 9-17 – Refer to problems at…

Attachments:

worksheet completion 495508

need excercise E4-1 worksheet to be completed.page176-177

Document Preview:

Briscoe Co. 10-Col Worksheet Work Sheet Balance Sheet Unadjusted Adjusted Income & Statement Trial Balance Adjustments Statement of Owner’s Equity Account Debit Credit Cash Accounts Receivable Supplies Accounts Payable Unearned Revenue Common Stock Service Revenue Salaries Expense Supplies Expense Salaries Payable BRISCOE COMPANY For the Month Ended June 30, 2008 Misc. Expense Net Loss Totals Complete the 10-column worksheet for Briscoe Company. Your totals will be verified. Appendix E Preparing a Financial Statement Worksheet Associate Level Material 2320.00 2440.00 1880.00 1120.00 240.00 3600.00 2400.00 560.00 160.00 7360.00 7360.00 2000.00 ^Correct! ^Try again! 2000.00 ^Correct! ^Try again! 7640.00 Correct! Try again! 7640.00 Correct! Try again! 2580.00 ^Correct! ^Try again! 2580.00 ^Correct! ^Try again! 5100.00 ^Correct! ^Try again! 5100.00 ^Correct! ^Try again! Briscoe Co. 10-Col Worksheet Work Sheet Balance Sheet Unadjusted Adjusted Income & Statement Trial Balance Adjustments Statement of Owner’s Equity Account Debit Credit Cash Accounts Receivable Supplies Accounts Payable Unearned Revenue Common Stock Service Revenue Salaries Expense Supplies Expense Salaries Payable BRISCOE COMPANY For the Month Ended June 30, 2008 Misc. Expense Net Loss Totals Complete the 10-column worksheet for Briscoe Company. Your totals will be verified. Appendix E Preparing a Financial Statement Worksheet Associate Level Material 2320.00 2440.00 1880.00 1120.00 240.00 3600.00 2400.00 560.00 160.00 7360.00 7360.00 2000.00 ^Correct! ^Try again! 2000.00 ^Correct! ^Try again! 7640.00 Correct! Try again! 7640.00 Correct! Try again! 2580.00 ^Correct! ^Try again! 2580.00 ^Correct! ^Try again! 5100.00 ^Correct! ^Try again! 5100.00 ^Correct! ^Try again! ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

write a summary to reflect on your experience 250 word minimum 495509

Play the lemonade stand game again using the coding methodology adopted by YOUR TEAM in week 2.

Look at the pricing for lemons, ice, cups, and sugar.

Remember that a pitcher will serve 12 cups if there is no ice, and about 20 cups if there are 3 ice cubes per cup.

Then, write a summary to reflect on your experience (250 word minimum).

Address the Following in your Paper:

Follow the following 5 step process. SHOW YOUR WORK.

1. Calculate the number of cups/pitcher you can serve. ROUND UP to the nearest whole number.

2. Calculate the number of lemons, cups of sugar, and cups you ll need to buy.

3. Look at the quantity pricing for each item and add up the cost to purchase your supplies.

4. Look at your costs. For every $1.00 of cost, how much is Cups? Sugar? Lemons? Ice?

5. Calculate your cost and revenue per cup (revenue should be price per cup). How did changing ingredients/quantity purchases affect your unit costs?

Put the summary data you want to focus on (i.e., what is your hypothesis regarding which variable affects net revenue) and put this information into a table

Discuss what your table reveals

Graph your cost and revenue data in a bar chart.

Graph your daily net revenue (revenue cost).

Discuss/describe what your graphs reveal.

Document Preview:

Sheet1 Sample Data Day Weather Price Lemons Sugar Ice # Cups # Lemons # Cups # Ice Cubes Assets after Cups # Customers Total Sales Total Expense Per Cup Per Pitcher of Sugar Expenses Sales Sold Overcast Cloudy Hazy Sunny Rain End of Season Report Total Income Total Expenses Liquidated Inventory Net Profit/Loss Mean Standard Deviation Net Revenue Coudy Lemonade Analysis – Tom Dullaghan Coeff. Of variation CV in % CV of Group1(%) CV of Group2(%) CV of Group3(%) CV of Group4(%) CV of Group5(%) CV of Group6(%) For entire data CV of…

Attachments:

writing final assingment statistics 495510

FInal Statistics assignment

paper APA formatt with all the given requirement in the PDF must be met.

Document Preview:

STAT500 Final Project 1 Due Date: Day 5 Week 7 Total Points: 150 points (see scoring rubric) Description Students will write a report (APA format) describing a research study they design in their area of study. This report will include the introduction, participants/sampling method, procedures, data analysis (using one of the statistical tests covered in this class), and results/conclusions. This should be your own research study that you design. This is not an evaluation of published research. YOU CANNOT USE ONE OF THE STUDIES THAT YOU ALREADY PRESENTED IN THE WEEKS 5 – 7 FORUM. NOTE: You are NOT required to collect data or run the analysis. Based on your understanding of your research question, make-up numbers that would be appropriate for your study. These numbers should make sense in the context of your research, however. Requirements: Report – maximum of five pages, double-space. Be sure to include a cover page, abstract and reference list (these 3 pages do not count as three of the five pages). You must use APA for the report. For an example, see http://owl.english.purdue.edu/owl/resource/560/18/. I recommend that you have no more than two direct quotes in your paper. You must submit your project to Turnitin (see page 2). Components of the Report: Introduction: Description of the study including the purpose and importance of the research question being asked. What is your null hypothesis? What is your research or alternative hypothesis? Your introduction should include at least two resources. These resources MUST be from peer-reviewed journals. You must use other resources and correctly cite (such as our text) when describing statistical concepts. Participants/Sampling Method: Describe the sample collected for the study, as well as the sampling method. How were your participants selected? Who is your population of interest? If you did a survey, how many will you survey to ensure your target sample size? How did you come up with that number? What do you expect…

Attachments:

ws 7 a4 495511

2013 2012 110000 99000 52000 48000 58000 51000 36000 33000 4000 4000 18000 14000 5400 4200 12600 9800 49500 18000 37000 32000 25000 38000 95000 105000 206500 193000 42000 35000 1000 500 40000 40000 83000 75500 90000 90000 33500 27500 206500 193000 2013 2012 110000 99000 52000 48000 58000 51000 36000 33000 4000 4000 18000 14000 5400 4200 12600 9800 49500 18000 37000 32000 25000 38000 95000 105000 206500 193000 42000 35000 1000 500 40000 40000 83000 75500 90000 90000 33500 27500 206500 193000 Student Name: Class

Document Preview:

2013 2012 110000 99000 52000 48000 58000 51000 36000 33000 4000 4000 18000 14000 5400 4200 12600 9800 49500 18000 37000 32000 25000 38000 95000 105000 206500 193000 42000 35000 1000 500 40000 40000 83000 75500 90000 90000 33500 27500 206500 193000 2013 2012 110000 99000 52000 48000 58000 51000 36000 33000 4000 4000 18000 14000 5400 4200 12600 9800 49500 18000 37000 32000 25000 38000 95000 105000 206500 193000 42000 35000 1000 500 40000 40000 83000 75500 90000 90000 33500 27500 206500 193000 Student Name: Class: Retained earnings Cash Given Data PA13-1: Problem A 13-1 Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity Comparative Financial Statements Income Statement Amount Increase (Decrease) Balance Sheet Inventory Additional Information: declared and paid. Requirement 2: Total Liabilities Total Assets 1. One-half of all sales are on credit. Percent PINNACLE PLUS Sales Revenue Cost of Goods Sold Gross Profit Operating Expenses Interest Expense Income before Income Tax Expense Income Tax Expense Net Income Accounts Receivable (net) Property and Equipment (net) Accounts Payable Income Tax Payable Note Payable, Long-term Capital Stock (par $10) Retained Earnings Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity Income Tax Expense (30%) Accounts Receivable, Net Property and Equipment Net December 31, 2013 2. During 2013, cash dividends amounting to $6,600 were 2013 over 2012 Enter appropriate formulas in the yellow cells. Your calculations for percentage change will be verified. HINT: use the =ROUND function rounding to four decimal places. Enter a short answer in the space provided. ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

ws6 a4 495512

I was needing help with an accounting problem

Document Preview:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1.5 1.6 2.4000000000000004 1.5 12 18 1.2 1.7999999999999998 2.5 110000 178200 267300 150000 2025 200000 270000 0 0 0 0 0 0 72000 74000 70000 2000 4000 2000 2.5 2 5 1 14 14 1 0.5 0.5 0.25 140000 360000 756000 148000 1938800 72000 50000 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 5 75 10 15 150 10 6 60 80 312 4920 27552 3060 47736 14790 20500 Student Name: Class: Standard cost information: Standard Quantity Price (rate) Unit Cost Cost Price Rate Clay (pounds) Direct labor (hours) Direct costs: Actual results from last year: Number of pounds of clay used Cost of clay Number of labor hours worked Direct labor cost Variable overhead cost Fixed overhead cost Requirement 1: Direct Materials Variance AP x AQ Direct Materials > Variance< > Variance< > Total Direct Materials Spending Variance< Requirement 2: Direct Labor Variance Labor Efficiency Actual Variable Overhead Applied Total Variance > Over/Underapplied Variable Overhead< Requirement 3: Variable Overhead Rate & Efficiency Variances > Total Direct Labor Spending Variance< Actual results for September: Number of square feet of corkboard used Cost of corkboard used Requirement 2: Direct Labor Variances Fiberglass (square feet) Actual results for June: Number of square feet of fiberglass used Cost of fiberglass used Requirement 1: Direct Materials Variances Number of units produced and sold Given Data PA09-09: Problem 09-09 Given Data PA09-05: Problem 09-05 Given Data PA09-01: Problem 09-01 BARLEY HOPP, INC. AQ x SP SQ x SP AH x AR AH x SR SH x SR BULLSEYE COMPANY Cork board (square feet) Variable manufacturing overhead Fixed Manufacturing overhead Fixed manufacturing overhead Variable manufacturing overhead (hours) AQ x AP RIP TIDE COMPANY F U Underapplied Enter the correct formulas in the yellow cells. Your answers will be verified. Select the correct answer from the drop-down list. Enter the correct formulas in the yellow…

Attachments:

xacc 290 wk 4 day 7 495514

Complete Exercise BE4-1.

Complete Problems 4-2A & 4-3A.

Answer the following:

Commercial accounting and generally accepted accounting principles, generally prescribe the accrual basis of accounting over the cash basis.

Describe both bases of accounting and explain the differences.

Submit as either a Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Word document 4-1
use of $20 of the above supplies.
(c) Made sales of $1,300, all on account.
(d) Received $800 from customers in payment of their accounts.
(e) Purchased equipment for cash, $2,500.
(f) Recorded depreciation of building for period used, $600.
BE 4-1
Brief Exercises
BE4-1Transactions that affect earnings do not necessarily affect cash. Identify the effect,
if any, that each of the following transactions would have upon cash and net income.
The first transaction has been completed as an example.

Cash Net
Income
———— ————
-$100 $0

(a) Purchased $100 of supplies for cash. $100 $ 0
(b) Recorded an adjusting entry to record use of $20 of the above supplies.
(c) Made sales of $1,300, all on account.
(d) Received $800 from customers in payment of their accounts.
(e) Purchased equipment for cash, $2,500.
(f) Recorded depreciation of building for period used, $600.

Document Preview:

Complete Exercise BE4-1. Complete Problems 4-2A & 4-3A. Answer the following: Commercial accounting and generally accepted accounting principles, generally prescribe the accrual basis of accounting over the cash basis. Describe both bases of accounting and explain the differences. Submit as either a Microsoft® Excel® or Microsoft® Word document 4-1 ?use of $20 of the above supplies. ?(c) Made sales of $1,300, all on account. ?(d) Received $800 from customers in payment of their accounts. ?(e) Purchased equipment for cash, $2,500. ?(f) Recorded depreciation of building for period used, $600. ?BE 4-1 ?Brief Exercises ?BE4-1 Transactions that affect earnings do not necessarily affect cash. Identify the effect, ?if any, that each of the following transactions would have upon cash and net income. ?The first transaction has been completed as an example. ??? Cash                                              Net ?                                                     Income ?  ————                                  ———— ?      -$100                                         $0 ??(a) Purchased $100 of supplies for cash. $100 $ 0 ?(b) Recorded an adjusting entry to record use of $20 of the above supplies. ?(c) Made sales of $1,300, all on account. ?(d) Received $800 from customers in payment of their accounts. ?(e) Purchased equipment for cash, $2,500. ?(f) Recorded depreciation of building for period used, $600. ? On Wednesday, October 16, 2013 3:43 PM, “JamieLCarter@maximus.com”

wrote: BE 4-1 ?Brief Exercises ?BE4-1 Transactions that affect earnings do not necessarily affect cash. Identify the effect, ?if any, that each of the following transactions would have upon cash and net income. ?The first transaction has been completed as an example. ??? Cash                                              Net ?                                                     Income ?  ————                                  ———— ?     …

Attachments:

xacc 291 ratio analysis memo for riordan mfg for abhishek jain 495515

UPDATED ATTACHMENTS – Need help with my ratio analysis memo using the virtual company Riordan Mfg. I have attached my syllabus, grading rubric and pertinent info regarding this company.

Following is instructions from the instructor:

Students,
For your Week Nine ratio project, please use the virtual company Riordan Mfg. The company is listed under the business tab of your virtual organizations. After clicking “intranet” in the right hand corner, look for the finance and accounting tab at the top and print the balance sheet and income statement.

Students,
What I have found is if you go through each ratio on your syllabus/assignment, get the formula and then use the balance sheet and income statement to get your answer. On your excell spreadsheet, I am only looking for the type of ratio, the calculation and the answer. You are not required to put any more than that. On seperate tabs, do the horizontal analysis, vertical analysis, and the memo. Chapter 14 details the formulas for the ratio’s and examples of each. However make sure you complete each ratio, each analysis and the memo.

Liquidity ratios

o Current ratio

o Acid-test, or quick, ratio

o Receivables turnover

o Inventory turnover

xclusive for smart writer 495517

Choose two (2) companies in the same industry and work on the criterion mentioned below: company should be from Australia Business Overview Risk Short Term Financial Policies of the business Current Capital Structure Current Dividend Policy Recommendations References Students need to clearly show the theoretical understanding of the above stated issues, defining them and using references where required.

Document Preview:

Choose two (2) companies in the same industry and work on the criterion mentioned below: company should be from Australia Business Overview Risk Short Term Financial Policies of the business Current Capital Structure Current Dividend Policy Recommendations References Students need to clearly show the theoretical understanding of the above stated issues, defining them and using references where required. Further, students need to relate the theory to the companies selected by analysing the data and the stating as to how the companies are managing their Risk, Short Term Financial Policy, Current Capital Structure and their Current Dividend Policy. Note: Students would be assessed as follows: 1 Business Overview 5 Marks 2 (Criterion: A, B, C, D, E) – Theory 5 Marks 3 (Criterion: A, B, C, D, E) – Theory related to companies and analysis 5 Marks 4 Recommendations 2.5 Marks 5 Harvard Reference 2.5 Marks TOTAL 20 Marks two (2) companies in the same industry and work on the criterion mentioned below: company should be from Australia Business Overview Risk Short Term Financial Policies of the business Current Capital Structure Current Dividend Policy Recommendations References Students need to clearly show the theoretical understanding of the above stated issues, defining them and using references where required. Further, students need to relate the theory to the companies selected by analysing the data and the stating as to how the companies are managing their Risk, Short Term Financial Policy, Current Capital Structure and their Current Dividend Policy. Note: Students would be assessed as follows: 1 Business Overview 5 Marks 2 (Criterion: A, B, C, D, E) – Theory 5 Marks 3 (Criterion: A, B, C, D, E) – Theory related to companies and analysis 5 Marks 4 Recommendations 2.5 Marks 5 Harvard Reference 2.5 Marks …

Attachments:

unit 3 tax auditing and accounting issues 495470

Document Preview:

Unit 3 – Tax, Auditing, and Accounting Issues Deliverable Length: 4+ paragraphs  A municipal village or a nonprofit organization solicits bids for the annual audit from local audit firms, and the firm with the lowest bid is selected. Answer the following questions regarding the given scenario: Is this the most prudent choice of auditor for the organization? What should the managers take into consideration when attempting to identify a suitable audit firm? Use APA style in the body of your posting as well as in the reference section.

Attachments:

university of phoenix material 495471

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

University of Phoenix Material Understanding Business Research Terms and Concepts: Part 3 Determine which level of measurement— nominal, ordinal, interval, or ratio—is used in the following examples. The Association of Accountants is conducting a survey to determine the ranking of the top 100 accounting firms in the world. How many years did it take you to earn your college degree? On a questionnaire which asks for gender, males are coded as 1 and females are coded as 2. Respondents are asked to rate a list of high-tech companies as excellent, good, fair, or poor in terms of their service delivery. Cereal brands are arranged in an ordered sequence in which an equal interval exists between each point. LeBron James wears the number 23 on his jersey. The length of time it takes the winner of a marathon to cross the finish line. Students are asked to rank computer manufacturers. The brand of charge card used by a customer. The pin number used to access your checking account. Which sampling method—simple random, systematic, stratified, cluster, convenience, judgment, quota, or snowball—is most appropriate for the following examples? The unemployment rate is calculated each month by the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics. The survey consists of 50,000 households in about 2,000 counties and cities in all 50 states. A researcher for Kraft Foods selects five states randomly, and then selects 10 supermarkets chains within each state to call for a phone survey as test markets for a new cookie. A new product researcher would like to investigate the use of virtual teams. After conducting an interview with a manager, she asks for the names of other managers that use virtual teams. A news reporter asks people on the street their opinion about the president’s new bill. Jamie select Denver, Colorado; Chicago, Illinois; and San Diego, California as test markets for a new potato chip line base on her experience with these markets. A researcher instructs field…

Attachments:

urgent work 495472

Take Test: Q9-CH10   https://myasucourses.asu.edu/webapps/assessment/take/launch.jsp?course_assessment_id=_511859_1&course_id=_262710_1&content_id=_8013066_1&step=nullSKIP TO COURSE MENU https://myasucourses.asu.edu/webapps/assessment/take/launch.jsp?course_assessment_id=_511859_1&course_id=_262710_1&content_id=_8013066_1&step=nullSKIP TO TOP FRAME TABS Content https://myasucourses.asu.edu/webapps/assessment/accessibility.jspAssistive Technology Tips [opens in new window] Instructions Description Non-Monetary Exchanges.  This quiz will close at 11:00 PM on Friday, June 21st.

Document Preview:

Take Test: Q9-CH10   https://myasucourses.asu.edu/webapps/assessment/take/launch.jsp?course_assessment_id=_511859_1&course_id=_262710_1&content_id=_8013066_1&step=nullSKIP TO COURSE MENU https://myasucourses.asu.edu/webapps/assessment/take/launch.jsp?course_assessment_id=_511859_1&course_id=_262710_1&content_id=_8013066_1&step=nullSKIP TO TOP FRAME TABS Content https://myasucourses.asu.edu/webapps/assessment/accessibility.jspAssistive Technology Tips [opens in new window] Instructions Description Non-Monetary Exchanges.  This quiz will close at 11:00 PM on Friday, June 21st.  You will be given (2) attempts to complete this quiz and your highest grade will be reported in the grade book.  The solutions will become available on Blackboard at 11:00 PM after the assessment closes. Instructions Multiple Attempts This Test allows 2 attempts. This is attempt number 1. Force Completion This Test can be saved and resumed later.  Question Completion Status:   Question 1   Use the following information to answer the next (6) questions: Turkey Inc. is trading a machine which had cost $70,000 and had accumulated depreciation of $40,000 for another fixed asset. For each of the following independent situations, determine the amount to be capitalized for the new fixed asset that Turkey is acquiring and the gain or loss to be recognized at the time of the exchange.  *If there is a gain record your answer as a positive number; if there is a loss, record your answer in parenthesis ().  If there is NO gain or loss, type in NE.   Capitalized Cost of New Asset $ Gain/Loss 1. Turkey traded the old machine for a newer machine with a fair value of $45,000 and received $5,000 on the exchange.  The exchange has commercial substance.  $_blank 1 __ $_blank_2__ 2.  Same as #1, except the exchange lacks commercial substance. $_blank_3__ $__blank_4_ 3.  Same as #1 except the exchange lacks commercial substance; and instead of receiving cash, Turkey paid $4,000…

Attachments:

use 2001 msmg budget see attached summer ville family practice pdf make the followin 495473

1. Patient Revenue is expected to grow by 3% due to the signing of a new managed care contract. What is the new dollar amount for patient revenue due to this increase?

2. The cost of expenses is expected to increase to 1.5%. What is the new dollar amount for the cost of expenses?

3. A new roof is needed which will cost $50,000. Prepare a new 12 month budget in Ms Excel, which reflects the 3% growth in patient revenue, the 1.5% in cost of expenses and the cost of the new roof.

Document Preview:

Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 INCOME Professional Fees Other Revenue Patient Refunds Refund Insurance Companies EXPENSES Salaries-Physician Owners Payroll Taxes-FICA Physician Payroll Taxes-FUTA Physcian Payroll Taxes-SUTA Physician Insurance-Physician Dues, Memberships, License Fees Meetings & Travel-Physician Meals & Entertainment-Physician Salaries-Primary Care Providers Salaries-Medical Support Salaries-Administrative Payroll Taxes-FICA Staff Payroll Taxes-FUTA Staff Payroll Taxes-SUTA Staff Insurance Staff Pension & Retirement Benefits Meetings & Travel-Staff Supplies-Drugs & Medications Supplies-Medical Supplies-Administrative Supplies-Medical Forms Supplies-Housekeeping/Maintenance Supplies-Computer Laboratory Services Rent-Buildings Utilities Rent/Lease-Furniture & Equipment Depreciation-Medical Equipment Depreciation-Laser Equipment Depreciation-Office Equipment Depreciation-Computer Equipment Property Taxes Maint/Repair-Furniture & Equipment Accounting Services Legal Services Recruitment Employee Development & Training Employee Relations Uniforms & Laundry General Liability Insurance-G&A Professional Liability Insurance Telephone/Internet Access Postage & Freight Printing Books & Subscriptions Marketing Amortization Bank Fees Interest Expense NET INCOME JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUNE JULY AUG SEPT OCT NOV DEC TOTAL % Franchise Tax OPERATING BUDGET FOR 2001 Dividends Net Cash after Dividends Sample…

quot use the topps company s annual report in appendix b to answer the following qu 495474

Understanding Real World Financial Analysis Reports

“Use the Topps Company s annual report in Appendix B to answer the following questions.

a. What was Topps inventory turnover ratio and average days to sell inventory for 2006 and 2005?

b. Is the company s management of inventory getting better or worse?

c. What cost flow method(s) did Topps use to account for inventory?”

Edmonds, Thomas. Survey of Accounting, 2nd Edition, 2nd Edition. McGraw-Hill Primis Custom Publishing.

Introduction and development of paper including conclusion APA Style

Required

Adequate supporting documentation. References cited throughout body of paper. Appropriate research. At least one references other than text and lecture material. (minimum 2 references)

Adherence to AU standards for written work:

APA format, written in third person

Major points are organized in a logical fashion. Each paragraph is clear and contains one major idea.

Rules of grammar and punctuation are followed.

No spelling errors

Conduct a grammar check. Conduct a plagiarism check please

Document Preview:

Appendix B: Annual Report for the Topps Company, Inc. In fiscal 2006, the Company’s consolidated net sales decreased 0.1% to $293.8 million from $294.2 million in fiscal 2005. Weaker foreign currencies versus the prior year reduced fiscal 2006 sales by approximately $600,000. Excluding the impact of stronger foreign currencies, net sales increased by 0.1%. Worldwide net sales of the Confectionery segment, which includes Ring Pop, Push Pop, Baby Bottle Pop, Juicy Drop Pop and Bazooka brand bubble gum, increased 0.3% to $144.3 million in 2006 from $143.8 million in 2005. Foreign exchange had virtually no impact on full year confectionery sales comparisons. Confectionery products accounted for 49% of the Company’s net sales in each of 2006 and 2005. In the U.S., fiscal 2006 confectionery sales reflected distribution gains and strong retail sales of Juicy Drop Pop, now in its third year. In addition, sales of Baby Bottle Pop increased, driven by a successful new media campaign and initial shipments of 2DMax, a new line extension, which will be officially launched in fiscal 2007. Confectionery sales in overseas markets were influenced by the introduction of Mega Mouth Candy Spray and continued growth of Pokemon candy products, offset by lower year-on-year performance of core brands in select markets, principally the U.K. and Italy. International sales represented 28% of total confectionery sales in fiscal 2006 versus 31% in 2005. * Unless otherwise indicated, all date references to 2006, 2005 and 2004 refer to the fiscal years ended February 25, 2006, February 26, 2005 and February 28, 2004, respectively (Edmonds 621) MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS This section provides an analysis of the Company’s operating results, cash flow, critical accounting policies, and other matters. It includes or incorporates “forward-looking statements” as that term is defined by the U.S. federal securities laws. In particular,…

Attachments:

vinben 495475

University of Phoenix Material Financial Statement Review What is the net income for the current fiscal year? Is it up or down from the prior year? Why would this information be important to investors? What is the ending balance in stockholders’ equity? Why would a labor union potentially be interested in this information? What is the total value of assets? Why would this information be important to a potential creditor? What is the total cash flow from operation? What financial statement user would find this information most important?

Document Preview:

University of Phoenix Material Financial Statement Review What is the net income for the current fiscal year? Is it up or down from the prior year? Why would this information be important to investors? What is the ending balance in stockholders’ equity? Why would a labor union potentially be interested in this information? What is the total value of assets? Why would this information be important to a potential creditor? What is the total cash flow from operation? What financial statement user would find this information most important? Financial Statement Review ACC/561 Version 5 1 Copyright © 2013, 2011, 2009, 2008 by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved. Title ABC/123 Version X 1 Copyright © XXXX by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved. University of Phoenix Material Financial Statement Review What is the net income for the current fiscal year? Is it up or down from the prior year? Why would this information be important to investors? What is the ending balance in stockholders’ equity? Why would a labor union potentially be interested in this information? What is the total value of assets? Why would this information be important to a potential creditor? What is the total cash flow from operation? What financial statement user would find this information most important? Financial Statement Review ACC/561 Version 5 1 Copyright © 2013, 2011, 2009, 2008 by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved. Title ABC/123 Version X 1 Copyright © XXXX by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved. ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

week 1 assignment program planning and evaluation paper 495479

Week 1 Assignment Program Planning and Evaluation Paper

Document Preview:

Program Planning and Evaluation Paper Axia College Program Planning and Evaluation Paper The Santa Rosa Philharmonic Youth Symphony (SRPYS) is an organization which supports young people who love music, encourages quality musicianship, and advanced leadership skills through their program. Local elementary and middle schools have had to cut the music programs from their curriculum; parents, students, and community members are concerned that this lack of support from the education community will discourage talented individuals. SRPYS is an organization which has developed plans to educate and advance the skills of young musicians. Their program planning and evaluation techniques are established, but always open to change as the students and musical tastes vary from year to year. Program planning and evaluation are two different processes in any human services agency, but are related to each other in many ways. Program planning is a process through activities or interventions which address and facilitate changes in a specific problem or problems. (Terao & Yuen, 2003) Through this planning, new programs can be implemented which can more appropriately address the problem or add new aspects to an existing program. Program evaluation provides information about how well a program is meeting the needs of its clientele, staff, the community, and its mission. Ongoing assessments allow for changes which need to be made as participants change, needs change, or there are better ways to address a problem. As programs are developed, the tools for assessments and evaluations need to be put into place. These evaluative tools relate directly to the program because without them there would be no measure of whether it meets the needs of its clients or if the organization has strayed from its original mission, goals, and objectives; likewise, if there were no program, there would be no need for evaluation. The evaluations help to define the current direction, past performance, and…

Attachments:

week 2a discussion 2 principles of acctg 495480

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

DISCUSSION BOARD 2: Please read the Ethical Issue 3-1 in Chapter 3 on page 195. In your first post please address the following: 1 – Compute the overall effects of these transactions on the store’s reported income for 2014. 2 – Why is Steinbach taking this action? Is his action ethical? Give your reason, identifying the parties helped and the parties harmed by Steinbach’s action. 3 – As a personal friend, what advice would you give the accountant? In your second post comment on one of your classmates posts. For example: Do you think that your classmate should have included another factor? Why or why not? Maybe you agree with your classmate, but for another reason that he/she stated. If so, explain. ETHICAL ISSUE: The net income of Steinbach & Sons, a department store, decreased sharply during 2014. Mort Steinbach, manager of the store, anticipates the need for a bank loan in 2015. Late in 2014, Steinbach instructs the stores accountant to record a $2,000 sale of furniture to the Steinbach family, even though the goods will not be shipped from the manufacturer until January 2015. Steinbach also tells the accountant not to make the following December 31, 2014, adjusting entries: ______________________________________ Salaries owed to employees……………………$900 Prepaid insurance that has expired 400 _______________________________________ CLASSMATE DISCUSSION: Steinbach is taking this type of action because the company needs to have a good credit in order to be approved for the bank loan that it is seeking in the upcoming year. Steinbach & Sons will do whatever it takes to get this loan it seems by attempting to provide the bank with faulty information under false pretenses. The false information that will be provided to the bank will be the fact that Steinbach & Sons actually made more revenue than they are actually reporting, by not stating the salaries owed to employees in the amount of $900.00 and the prepaid…

Attachments:

week 3 discussions and assignment ashford university 495481

Please refer to attachment for work

Document Preview:

ACC 206 Week 3 Assignment: Chapter 4 and 5 Problems Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Chapter 4 Exercise 7 7. Overhead application: Working backward The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review: Division A Division B Actual machine hours 22,500 ? Estimated machine hours 20,000 ? Overhead application rate $4.50 $5.00 Actual overhead $110,000 ? Estimated overhead ? $90,000 Applied overhead ? $86,000 Over- (under-) applied overhead ? $6,500 Find the unknowns for each of the divisions. Chapter 4 Problem 2 2. Computations using a job order system General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger; Work in process $ 35,200 Finished goods 86,900 Cost of goods sold 128,700 Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows: Direct Materials Direct Labor Job No. Amount Job No. Amount 101 $5,000 101 $7,800 115 19,500 103 20,800 116 36,200 115 42,000 Other 35,800 116 18,000 $96,500 Other 25,900 $114,500 Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively. General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are…

Attachments:

week 4 principles of acctg 495483

E5-18 PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 DEBIT CREDIT Journal DATE POST.REF. On June 30, 2012, Hayes Jewelers purchased inventory of $5,800 on account from Slater Diamonds, a jewelry importer. Terms were 3/15, net 45. The same day Hayes paid freight charges of $400. Upon receiving the goods, Hayes checked the order and found $800 of unsuitable merchandise, which was returned to Slater on July 4.

Document Preview:

E5-18 PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 DEBIT CREDIT Journal DATE POST.REF. On June 30, 2012, Hayes Jewelers purchased inventory of $5,800 on account from Slater Diamonds, a jewelry importer. Terms were 3/15, net 45. The same day Hayes paid freight charges of $400. Upon receiving the goods, Hayes checked the order and found $800 of unsuitable merchandise, which was returned to Slater on July 4. Then, on July 14, Hayes paid the invoice. ACCOUNTS AND EXPLANATIONS June 30 E5-18 Journalizing sales transactions – perpetual systems LO 3 [10-15 minutes] Refer to the facts presented in Exercise 5-15. Exercise 5-15 presented here for your convenience. Journalize the transactions of the seller, Slater Diamonds. Slater’s cost of goods sold was 45% of the sales price. Explanations are not required. Jul 4 Accounting, 9e Good student April 23 30.00 4.00 14.00 Print Test Your Knowledge E5-18 PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 DEBIT CREDIT Journal DATE POST.REF. On June 30, 2012, Hayes Jewelers purchased inventory of $5,800 on account from Slater Diamonds, a jewelry importer. Terms were 3/15, net 45. The same day Hayes paid freight charges of $400. Upon receiving the goods, Hayes checked the order and found $800 of unsuitable merchandise, which was returned to Slater on July 4. Then, on July 14, Hayes paid the invoice. ACCOUNTS AND EXPLANATIONS June 30 E5-18 Journalizing sales transactions – perpetual systems LO 3 [10-15 minutes] Refer to the facts presented in Exercise 5-15. Exercise 5-15 presented here for your convenience. Journalize the transactions of the seller, Slater Diamonds. Slater’s cost of goods sold was 45% of the…

week 4a discussion 4 principles of acctg 495484

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Discussion board 4: Please read the Ethical Issue in Chapter 5 on page 301. In your first post please address the following: 1 – Under Dobbs FOB policy, when should the company record a sale? 2 –Do you approve or disapprove of Dobb’s manner of deciding when to ship goods to customers and record the sales revenue? If you approve, give your reason. If you disapprove, identify a better way to decide when to ship goods. (There is no accounting rule against Dobb’s practice). In your second post comment on one of your classmates posts. For example: Do you think that your classmate should have included another factor? Why or why not? Maybe you agree with your classmate, but for another reason that he/she stated. If so, explain. ETHICAL ISSUE 5-1 – Dobbs Wholesale Antiques makes all sales under terms of FOB shipping point. The company usually ships inventory to customers approximately one week after receiving the order. For orders received late in December, Kathy Dobbs, the owner, decides when to ship the goods. If profits are already at an acceptable level, Dobbs delays shipment until January. If profits for the current year are lagging behind expectations, Dobbs ships the goods during December. CLASSMATE DISCUSSION: Under the FOB policy, the sale must be recorded when the merchandise leaves the shipping point. I disagree with Dobbs’ manners because under the FOB policy the buyer has the ownership of the property of the goods at the time of shipping and is the one paying the freight. Dobbs has to prepare for December, which is one of the busiest months for sales and should not delay the delivery of the goods at their convenience depending on the profitability of the company. Although there is not accounting rule against Dobb’s practice; it is not what a company that is respected and respects customers would do, it is not ethical. In the only way I would agree with Dobb’s decision is whether the volume of customers requesting the same is very high and is…

Attachments:

week 5 assignment 495485

Do the following:

Using the attached Spreadsheet, calculate the fees for this radiology practice assuming a 300% of

Medicare Fee schedule and only global reimbursement. You will be using the Florida Fee Schedule.

To find this online

1. Go to http://medicare.fcso.com/

2. Click on Florida and Part B

3. On left side of screen, click on Fee Schedule and proceed to Lookup

4. Make the following assumptions

a. Fee Schedule – Medicare Physician (last choice)

b. Date of Service Today

c. Location – Florida 99

d. Procedure Code – Fill in the code that you want

5. Look at the example on Sheet 1 of the HM 2010 week 5 assignment format page.xlsx excel

document.

6. Use Sheet2 of the HM 2010 week 5 assignment format page.xlsx excel document to

calculate the fees using the assumptions in steps 4a to 4d and 300% Medicare Fee Schedule

Use MS Excel to complete your assignment.

Document Preview:

70010 104.36 313.08 70015 165.03 495.09000000000003 70030 31.1 93.300000000000011 70100 37.17 111.51 70110 42.77 128.31 70120 39.31 117.93 70130 61.22 183.66 70134 60.14 180.42000000000002 70140 32.86 98.58 70150 45.97 137.91 70160 36.11 108.33 70170 16.170000000000002 48.510000000000005 70190 38.9 116.69999999999999 70200 47.01 141.03 70210 33.97 101.91 70220 42.41 127.22999999999999 70240 32.5 97.5 70250 39.93 119.78999999999999 70260 50.84 152.52000000000001 70300 16.2 48.599999999999994 70310 40.78 122.34 70320 46.04 138.12 70328 33.590000000000003 100.77000000000001 70330 52.45 157.35000000000002 70010 70015 70030 70100 70110 70120 70130 70134 70140 70150 70160 70170 70190 70200 70210 70220 70240 70250 70260 70300 70310 70320 70328 70330 Jones Radiology Services Code Description Medicare Rate Our Fee Global Services Only Cisternography, Super & Interpretation Myelography, Posterior Fossa – Super & Interpretation Eye, For Detection of Foreign Body Mandible, 4 views Mandible, less then four views Mastoids, less then three views Mastoids, complete, three view Internal Auditory Meati, Complete Facial Bones, less then four views Facial Bones, Complete, Four Views Nasal Bones, Complete Dacryocystography, Super & Interpretation Optic Foramina Orbits, Complete, minimum of four view Sinuses, paranasal, less then four views Sinuses, paranasal, mimimum of three views Sella Turcicia Skull, less then four views Skull, complete, four views Teeth, single view Mouth, partial exam, less then complete mouth Mouth, complete Tempmandibular joint, open and closed, unilateral Tempmandibular joint, open and closed, bilateral Medicare Rate (Non-Fac Par) ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

week 5 fin 571 495487

Assignment: Week 5 Assignment Problem 5.17 Problem 5.21 Problem 6.19 Problem 6.27 Problem 7.16 Problem 8.24 Problem 9.15 Problem 5.17 Your finance text book sold 49,000 copies in its first year. The publishing company expects the sales to grow at a rate of 21.0 percent for the next three years, and by 13.0 percent in the fourth year. Calculate the total number of copies that the publisher expects to sell in year 3 and 4. (If you solve this problem with algebra round intermediate calculations to 6 decimal places, in all cases round your final answers to the nearest whole number.

Document Preview:

Assignment: Week 5 Assignment?? ?Problem 5.17???Problem 5.21???Problem 6.19???Problem 6.27???Problem 7.16???Problem 8.24???Problem 9.15???? Problem 5.17????Your finance text book sold 49,000 copies in its first year. The publishing company expects the sales to grow at a rate of 21.0 percent for the next three years, and by 13.0 percent in the fourth year. Calculate the total number of copies that the publisher expects to sell in year 3 and 4. (If you solve this problem with algebra round intermediate calculations to 6 decimal places, in all cases round your final answers to the nearest whole number.) Number of copies sold after 3 years????Number of copies sold in the fourth year???????? Problem 5.21????Find the present value of $2,500 under each of the following rates and periods. (If you solve this problem with algebra round intermediate calculations to 6 decimal places, in all cases round your final answer to the nearest penny.) a. 8.9 percent compounded monthly for five years. Present value??$???b. 6.6 percent compounded quarterly for eight years. Present value??$???c. 4.3 percent compounded daily for four years. Present value??$???d. 5.7 percent compounded continuously for three years. Present value??$?? Problem 6.19????Trigen Corp. management will invest cash flows of $505,197, $636,969, $592,910, $818,400, $1,239,644, and $1,617,848 in research and development over the next six years. If the appropriate interest rate is 5.11 percent, what is the future value of these investment cash flows six years from today? (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 15.25.) Future value??$?? Problem 6.27????You wrote a piece of software that does a better job of allowing computers to network than any other program designed for this purpose. A large networking company wants to incorporate your software into their systems and is offering to pay you $520,000 today, plus $520,000 at the end of each of the following six years for permission to do this. If the appropriate…

Attachments:

week 5 principles of acctg 495488

P8-29A PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 DEBIT CREDIT Journal DATE ACCOUNTS AND EXPLANATIONS Oct 31 31 P8-29A Accounting for uncollectible accounts (aging of accounts method), card sales, notes receivable, and accrued interest revenue LO 2, 4, 5 [20-30 minutes] Relaxing Recliner Chairs completed the following selected transactions: Sold inventory to Great – Mart, receiving a $45,000, nine-month, 12% note.

Document Preview:

P8-29A PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 DEBIT CREDIT Journal DATE ACCOUNTS AND EXPLANATIONS Oct 31 31 P8-29A Accounting for uncollectible accounts (aging of accounts method), card sales, notes receivable, and accrued interest revenue LO 2, 4, 5 [20-30 minutes] Relaxing Recliner Chairs completed the following selected transactions: Sold inventory to Great – Mart, receiving a $45,000, nine-month, 12% note. Ignore cost of goods sold. Recorded credit- and debit-card sales for the period of $21,000. Card processor drafted company’s checking account for processing fee of $410. Made an adjusting entry to accrue interest on the Great – Mart note. Made an adjusting entry to record uncollectible account expense based on an aging of accounts receivable. The aging schedule shows that $15,200 of accounts receivable will not be collected. Prior to this adjustment, the credit balance in Allowance for uncollectible accounts is $11,600. Jul 1 Nov 3 Dec 31 Collected the maturity value of the Great – Mart note. Sold merchandise to Ambiance, Corp., receiving a 60-day, 9% note for $13,000. Ignore cost of goods sold. Ambiance, Corp., dishonored its note (failed to pay) at maturity; we converted the maturity value of the note to an account receivable. Loaned $21,000 cash to Creed, Inc., receiving a 90-day, 8% note. Collected in full on account from Ambiance, Corp. Accrued the interest on the Creed, Inc., note. Apr 1 Jun 23 Aug 22 Nov 16 Dec 5 Record the transactions in the journal of Relaxing Recliner Chairs. Explanations are not required. (For notes stated in days, use a 360-day year. Round to the nearest dollar.) Interest revenue ($45,000 X .12 X 3/12) Accounting, 9e Jennie April 23 2011.00 31.00 2012.00 31.00 2011.00 2012.00 1350.00 45000.00 0.12 0.25 Print Test Your…

week 5a discussion 5 principles of acctg 495489

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

DISCUSSION BOARD 5: Please read the Ethical Issue in Chapter 7 on page 402. In your first post please address the following: 1 – Identify two parties other than O’Connor who can be harmed by this theft. In what ways can they be harmed? 2 – Discuss the role accounting plays in this situation. In your second post comment on one of your classmates posts. For example: Do you think that your classmate should have included another factor? Why or why not? Maybe you agree with your classmate, but for another reason that he/she stated. If so, explain. ETHICAL ISSUE – Mel O’conner owns rental properties in Michigan. Each property has a manager who collects rent, arranges for repairs, and runs advertisements in the local newspaper. The property manager in Lansing has been stealing from the company. To cover the theft, he understates the amount of the outstanding checks on the monthly bank reconciliation. As a result, each monthly bank reconciliation appears to balance. However, the balance sheet reports more cash than O’conner actually has in the bank. O’conner is showing the balance sheet to prospective buyers. CLASSMATE POST: Mel O’Connor, unquestionably, is the main part harmed by this theft, first for placing his confidence in this manager and allowing the same person to collect rent and other cash duties and do bank reconciliations, and second by the erroneous granting he has on his company real profits. Besides O’Connor, other parties harmed are: the prospective buyers because they will assume all debts as a result of the manager’s theft unless they are able to see the misleading on the balance sheet of the company; the manager when the theft is discovered will be losing his job and ending in jail, and might be paying money back; the accountant in charge of Mr. O’Connors company by losing the job and even the license due to the incompetence in discovering the theft or because he/she agreed with it; as well the tenants may also believe that they had paid…

Attachments:

week 6 principles of accounting 495490

I NEED THIS FOR TODAY NO LATER THAN 10:00 PM WHO CAN HELP.

Document Preview:

Exam Name___________________________________ TRUE/FALSE. Write ‘T’ if the statement is true and ‘F’ if the statement is false. 1) The periodic inventory system is normally used for relatively inexpensive goods. 1) 2) When a company uses the perpetual inventory method, the inventory account should stay current 2) at all times. MULTIPLE CHOICE. Choose the one alternative that best completes the statement or answers the question. 3) In a periodic system, inventory balances and the cost of goods sold for the current period are 3) determined: A) on a frequent basis. B) on the first day of each year. C) when a physical inventory count is taken. D) at the time of sale. 4) What is the first step in the accounting cycle for a merchandising company? 4) A) The company delivers inventory to customers. B) The company sells inventory to customers, creating accounts receivable. C) The company buys inventory. D) The company collects cash. TRUE/FALSE. Write ‘T’ if the statement is true and ‘F’ if the statement is false. 5) When a company uses the perpetual inventory method, it should NOT be necessary to conduct a 5) physical count of inventory. 6) The entry to close Sales discounts and Sales returns and allowances results in a debit to Income 6) summary. 7) If a physical count of inventory indicates that the Inventory account is overstated, an additional 7) adjusting entry is required. 8) The entry to close Cost of goods sold results in a debit to Income summary. 8) MULTIPLE CHOICE. Choose the one alternative that best completes the statement or answers the question. 9) The following pertains to periodic inventory: On a merchandising income statement, which would 9) NOT be found under the heading of Cost of goods sold? A) Freight-in B) Purchases C) Supplies D) Purchases returns and allowances TRUE/FALSE. Write ‘T’ if the statement is true and ‘F’ if the statement is false. 10) The consistency principle states that a business should use the same accounting methods from…

Attachments:

week 7 495492

Assume Mr. Davis can buy either a $10,000 corporate bond yielding 10% or a municipal bond yielding 7%. Assume risk is constant. Assume also that his Federal tax rate will be 28% and his State tax rate 7% and that the municipal bond is exempt from both types of income taxes.

Which should he buy, if the yield and tax consequences are the only variables

A bond has the following terms:

Principal amount

$1,000

Semi-annual interest

$50

Maturity

10 years

(When asked for a % yield, round yields to nearest tenth of a percent, such as 10.1 %.)

  1. What is the bond’s price if comparable debt yields 12%?
  2. What would be the price if comparable debt yields 12% and the bond matures after 5 years?
  3. What are the current yields and yields to maturity if a. and b.?
  4. What would be the bond’s price in a. if interest rates declined to 8%? What if the bond matures after 5 years?
  5. What are the current yields and yields to maturity in d.?
  6. What two generalizations may be drawn from the above price changes?

You purchase a high-yield, junk bond for $1,000 that pays $140 annually. After buying the bond, yields decline and you are able to reinvest the interest at only 9 percent. You reinvest all the interest payments.

How much will you have when the bond is retired after 12 years? What was the annual return you earned on this investment?

Determine the current market prices of the following $1,000 bonds if the comparable rate is 10% and answer the questions.

    • XY 5 percent, with interest paid annually for 20 years.
    • AB 14 percent, with interest paid annually for 20 years.
  1. Which bond has a current yield that exceeds the yield to maturity?
  2. Which bond may you expect to be called? Why?
  3. If CD, Inc. has a bond with a 5 percent coupon and a maturity of 20 years but which was lower rated, what would be its price relative to the XY, Inc. bond? Explain

Attachments:

week 8 exercises 495493

Resources: Ch. 13 & 14 of Financial Accounting

Complete Exercises E13-8 & E14-3.

Submit as a Microsoft Excel or Word document

Document Preview:

JWCL165_c13_612-673.qxd 8/13/09 11:15 AM Page 612 Chapter 13 Statement of Cash Flows STUDY OBJECTIVES The Navigator ? Scan Study Objectives ¦ After studying this chapter, you should be able to: Read Feature Story ¦ 1 Indicate the usefulness of the statement Read Preview ¦ of cash flows. Read text and answer Do it! 2 Distinguish among operating, investing, p. 617 ¦ p. 625 ¦ p. 628 ¦ p. 632 ¦ and financing activities. Work Comprehensive Do it! p. 634 ¦ 3 Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method. Review Summary of Study Objectives ¦ 4 Analyze the statement of cash flows. Work Comprehensive Do it! p. 648 ¦ The Navigator ? Answer Self-Study Questions ¦ Complete Assignments ¦ Feature Story GOT CASH? In today’s environment, companies must be ready to respond to changes quickly in order to survive and thrive. They need to produce new products and expand into new markets continually. To do this takes cash—lots and lots of cash. Keeping lots of cash available is a real challenge for a young company. It requires careful cash management and attention to cash flow. One company that managed cash successfully in its early years was Microsoft (www.microsoft.com). During those years the company paid much of its payroll with stock options (rights to purchase company stock in the future at a given price) instead of cash. This strategy conserved cash, and turned more than a thousand of its employees into millionaires during the company’s first 20 years of business. In recent years Microsoft has had a different kind of cash problem. Now that it has reached a more “mature” stage in life, it generates so much cash— roughly $1 billion per month—that it cannot always figure out what to do with it. By 2004 Microsoft had accumulated $60 billion. 612JWCL165_c13_612-673.qxd 8/13/09 11:15 AM Page 613 The company said it was accumu- lating cash to invest in new oppor- tunities, buy other companies, and pay off pending lawsuits. But for years, the…

week 8 final assignment 495494

Finance quiz due Saturday Business forum due Tuesday Provide an article summary of how cross-cultural communications can impact (harm or help) situations for the international business manager. Provide at least one example.

Document Preview:

Finance quiz due Saturday Business forum due Tuesday Provide an article summary of how cross-cultural communications can impact (harm or help) situations for the international business manager. Provide at least one example. Final Exam due Saturday

Attachments:

what consist in the annual reports and discuss its financial implications 495495

Detail sent separately.

Document Preview:

18000 4.1698700000000004 75057.66 4000 0.621 2484 75057.66 2484 77541.66 For Luv company, it is a capital lease. The following tests are met: It has a bargain-purchase option. Economic test (75%): The lease term (5 years) is greater than 75% than the economic life of the leased equipment (5 years). The economic test in this case is 100%. Recovery test (90%): The present value of the lease payments (present value annuity factor for n=5 years, i=10% is 4.16987. You can use present value annuity tables to find this factor): $18,000 (annual lease payment) x 4.16987 (present value annuity factor) = 75,058, which is 107% of the fair value ($75,058 / $70,000 = 107%) For Soap Company, because there is a bargain-purchase option and payments are guaranteed without much uncertainty of payment, it is also an operating lease. However, because the fair value of the lease is $70,000, and the present value of the lease payments is $75,000—which is greater than the fair value of $70,000—it is a sales-leaseback lease. Prepare the amortization schedule for Luv Company for the 5-year term: Lease payments PV of annuity due i=10%, n=5 years Present value of lease payments Bargain option PV of i=10% , n =5 years Present value of the bargain option Present value of bargain option Total lease liability Sum-of-years method Double-declining method Units of production ABC depreciation: The journal entry to record the sale would be the following: Accumulated depreciation Dr Cash Dr Loss on sale of machine Dr If the machine was sold for $10,000, what will the entry be? ABC trade-in journal entry: Cash Cr Old machine Cr Gain on exchange Cr Straight-line depreciation: Year 1 depreciation = $ Year 2 depreciation = Year 3 depreciation = Year 4 depreciation = Year 1 depreciation = Year 3 depreciation = Year 4 depreciation = Year 2 depreciation = New model Dr Gain on sale of machine Cr As you show the depreciation computations, be sure to show your work. (show your…

Attachments:

tax accounting 4 495441

1.       Individual proprietors report their business income and deductions on: Form 1065 Form 1120S Schedule C Schedule A Form 1041 2.       According to the Internal Revenue Code §162, deductible business expenses must be one of the following? incurred for the production of investment income ordinary and necessary minimized appropriate and measurable personal and justifiable 3.

Document Preview:

1.       Individual proprietors report their business income and deductions on: Form 1065 Form 1120S Schedule C Schedule A Form 1041 2.       According to the Internal Revenue Code §162, deductible business expenses must be one of the following? incurred for the production of investment income ordinary and necessary minimized appropriate and measurable personal and justifiable 3.       Which of the following is NOT likely to be allowed as a current deduction for a landscaping and nursery business? cost of fertilizer accounting fees cost of a greenhouse cost of uniforms for employees a cash settlement for trade name infringement 4.       The IRS would most likely apply the arm’s length transaction test to determine which of the following? whether an expenditure is related to a business activity whether an expenditure will be likely to produce income timeliness of an expenditure reasonableness of an expenditure All of these 5.       Which of the following business expense deductions is most likely to be unreasonable in amount? Compensation paid to the taxpayer’s spouse in excess of salary payments to other employees. Amounts paid to a subsidiary corporation for services where the amount is in excess of the cost of comparable services by competing corporations. Cost of entertaining a former client when there is no possibility of any future benefits from a relation with that client. None of these is likely to be unreasonable in amount. Compensation paid to the taxpayer’s spouse in excess of salary payments to other employees, amounts paid to a subsidiary corporation for services where the amount is in excess of the cost of comparable services by competing corporations, and cost of entertaining a former client when there is no possibility of any future benefits from a relation with that client are all likely to be considered unreasonable in amount.  6.       Which of the following is a true statement? Interest…

Attachments:

tax help needed 495444

Document Preview:

At the beginning of the year, Calvin paid $5,000 for 60 shares of Eddington stock. In June, he received a $300 cash distribution with respect to the stock. His Form 1099-DIV reported that $170 was an ordinary dividend and $130 was nontaxable. Compute Calvin’s tax basis in his 60 shares at year-end. Mr. Gordon, a resident of Pennsylvania, paid $20,000 for a bond issued by Delaware. This year, he received $800 of interest on the bond. His marginal state tax rate is 7%, and under Pennsylvania law, interest on debt obligations issued by another state is taxable. Mr. Gordon can deduct state income tax on his federal return, and his marginal federal tax rate is 35%. Computer his after-tax rate of return on the bond. Emil Nelson paid $174,500 for an annuity that will pay him $1,300 per month for life. Based on Emil’s age, his expected return is $405,813. This year, Emil received 12 payments totaling $15,600. How much of this total is taxable income?  4.) In 2010, Mrs. Owens paid $50,000 for 3,000 shares of a mutual fund and elected to reinvest dividends in additional shares. In 2010 and 2011, she received Form 1099s reporting the following.? ?Reinvested dividends?Shares purchased?Price per share?Total shares owned??2010?$4,800?240?$20?3,240??2011?$3,150?150?$21?3,390???If Mrs. Owens sells 1,000 shares in 2012 for $22 per share and uses the average basis method, compute her recognized gain.  Tom Johnson, whose marginal tax rate on ordinary income is 35%, sold four investment assets resulting in the following capital gains and losses.??  ??How much of Tom’s net capital gain is taxed at 15%?  Ms. Kerry, who itemized deductions on Schedule A, paid $15,000 interest on funds borrowed to acquire taxable bonds. She also paid $660 of management fees that were fully deductible on Schedule A. Her AGI is $100,000, which includes $19,700 of interest income. How much of the interest expense can she deduct?  Mr. and Mrs. Shohler received $25,200 Social…

Attachments:

tax preparation am halfway someone should help me out with the rest 1040 is loaded p 495447

INDIVIDUAL TAX RETURN PROBLEM 4

Required:

  • Use the following information to complete Phillip and Claire Dunphy’s 2011 federal income tax return. If information is missing, use reasonable assumptions to fill in the gaps. Ignore the alternative minimum tax for this problem.

  • Any required forms, schedules, and instructions can be found at the IRS Web site (www.irs.gov). The instructions can be helpful in completing the forms.

Facts:

    1. Phillip and Claire are married and file a joint return. Phillip is self-employed as a real estate agent, and Claire is a flight attendant. Phillip and Claire have three dependent children. All three children live at home with Phillip and Claire for the entire year.

      The Dunphys provide you with the following additional information:

      • The Dunphys do not want to contribute to the presidential election campaign.

      • The Dunphys live at 3701 Brighton Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90018.

      • Phillip’s birthday is 11/5/1965 and his Social Security number is 321-44-5766.

      • Claire’s birthday is 5/12/1968 and her Social Security number is 567-77-1258.

      • Haley’s birthday is 11/6/1999 and his Social Security number is 621-18-7592.

      • Alex’s birthday is 2/1/2001 and her Social Security number is 621-92-8751.

      • Luke’s birthday is 12/12/2005 and his Social Security number is 621-99-9926.

      • The Dunphys do not have any foreign bank accounts or trusts.

    2. Claire is a flight attendant for Western American Airlines (WAA), where she earned $57,000 in salary. WAA withheld federal income tax of $6,375, state income tax of $1,800, Los Angeles city income tax of $675, Social Security tax of $3,600, and Medicare tax of $825.

    3. Phillip and Claire received $300 of interest from State Savings Bank on a joint account. They also received a qualified dividend of $395 on jointly owned stock in Xila Corporation.

    4. Phillip’s real estate business is named Phillip Dunphy Realty. His business is located at 645 Grove Street, Los Angeles, CA 90018, and his employer identification number is 93-3488888. Phillip’s gross receipts during the year were $730,000. Phillip uses the cash method of accounting for his business. Phillip’s business expenses are as follows:

      Advertising $ 5,000
      Professional dues 800
      Professional journals 200
      Employee wages 48,000
      Insurance on office contents 1,120
      Accounting services 2,100
      Miscellaneous office expense 500
      Utilities and telephone 3,360
      Payroll taxes 3,600
      Depreciation To be calculated

      On March 20, Phillip moved his business out of the old offices at 1103 Allium Lane into a newly constructed and equipped office on Grove Street. Phillip sold the old office building and all its furnishings. Phillip’s expenditures for the new office building are as follows:

      Phillip computes his cost recovery allowance using MACRS. He would like to use the 179 immediate expensing, but he has elected to not claim any bonus depreciation. Phillip has never claimed 179 or bonus depreciation before. The assets Phillip sold on March 20 are as follows:

      Phillip has never sold any assets relating to his business before this transaction.

Page C-7

Attachments:

tax problems 495448

Document Preview:

ACC 618 Gift Tax Form 709 John D. and Rose W. Smith (SSN’s 555-12-8899 and 555-21-7788) live at 18 Torchwood Drive, Area 51, AZ 88951. John and Rose have been married for many years and own and operate a profitable real estate business. They have two children, Donna (age 20) and Mickey (age 22), both of whom attend college. During 2010, the Smith’s made the following transfers: John paid college expenses of $50,000 in tuition and $12,000 in room and board. To establish financial responsibility with their kids, they gave the money directly to Donna and Mickey. Rose reimbursed Martha (Donna’s aunt) for her kidney transplant. Martha is not the dependent of the Smith’s. John used $150,000 in insurance proceeds he received on the death of his grandfather to purchase land in Bad Wolf Bay, listing title as “John, Donna, and Mickey Smith, equal tenants in common.” As a wedding anniversary present, John and Rose each gave $55,000 to purchase an RV for Rose’s parents (Jackie and Ben Tyler). John and Rose each gave a cash contribution of $5,000 to the reelection campaign of the Mayor of Area 51. In creating several trusts in 2008, the Smith’s made taxable gifts of $2million. Consequently, no gift tax was due because of the specific exemption ($1million for each donor spouse). Prepare 2010 gift tax returns (Form 709 for the Smith’s. As in the past, the Smith’s made the Section 2513 election to split the gifts. Croydon is calendar year, accrual Basis Corporation, MR and Mrs. Croyden (cash basis taxpayers ) are the sole corporation shareholder . Mr. Croyden is president and Mrs. croyden is vise president of the corporation, Croyden’s financial records. Prepared in accordance with GAAP, show the following information for the year, Revenues from sides goods $12,900,000 Cost of goods sold( LIFO) (9,260,000) Gross profit 3,640,000 Bad debt expense 24,000 Administration salaries and wages 612,000 State and local business taxes 135,000 Interest expense…

Attachments:

tax problems 495449

Document Preview:

Tax Return Final Project Sun & Fun Summary Can be done in small groups (2-3) Due on the last day of class On June 6, 2001, Joe Mooney and Guy Flick formed Sun and Fun Beach Products to manufacture and sell beach gear, toys, and accessories. For several years prior, Joe had run a smaller shop “Cheap Beach Stuff” which operated as a cash basis sole proprietorship. Cheap Beach Stuff reported the following balance sheet: ?June 6, 2001???Tax Basis?Fair Value??Cash?6,137?6,137??Accounts Receivable?0?24,558??Inventory?60,647?129,305??Building?55,250?110,000??Land?29,750?55,000???151,784?325,000??????Accounts Payable?0?13,189??Notes Payable?24,000?24,000??Mortgage on Land/Building?40,000?40,000??Equity?87,784?247,811???151,784?325,000?? Joe transfers all of the assets and liabilities of Cheap Beach Stuff for 70% of the common stock in Sun & Fun. Guy contributes cash of $40,000, inventory worth $56,205 (basis of $38,013) and provides services to help organize the corporation worth $10,000 for the remaining 30% of the common stock in Sun & Fun. General Information regarding the corporation is summarized as follows: The business address is 350 Main Street, White Sands, Florida The employer identification number is 75-3392543; the principal business activity code is 339900. Joe is president of the company and Guy is the secretary-treasurer. Both are full-time employess of the corporation. Joe’s compensation is $150,000 (SSN 123-45-6789). Guy’s compensation is $90,000 (SSN 333-22-4444). The corporation uses the accrual method of accounting and reports on a calendar year basis. Inventory has been consistently valued at lower of cost or market under the FIFO method. Inventory capitalization rules of IRC section 263A do not apply due to the “small business exception” (average annual gross receipts for the three preceding taxable years do not exceed $10 million). The corporation was not a grantor to a foreign trust, nor does the corporation maintain a foreign bank account or…

tax research memo 495451

I need to write Memo of tax cases. A lot of students have writen about the same case. Instructure is clear in the attachement

Document Preview:

Sarah is the sole owner of Bluegrass Corporation. The basis and value of her stock investment in Bluegrass are approximately $100,000. In addition, she manages Bluegrass’s operations on a full-time basis and pays herself an annual salary of 40,000. Because of a recent downturn in business, she needs to put an additional 80,000 into her corporation to help meet short-term cash flow needs (e.ge inventory cost, salaries, and administrative expenses). Sarah believes that the 80,000 transfers can be structured in one of three ways: as capital contribution, as a loan made to protect her stock investment, or as loan intended to protect her job. Form a tax perspective, which alternative would be preferable in the event that bluegrass’s economic slide worsens and bankruptcy results? Explain your answer.  Partial list of research aids:  Kenneth W. Graves, 87 TCM 1409, T.C. Memo. 2004-140 Instructor: Research the problem at any library with tax research facilities, or use online tax research database. The memo should contains of four sections: Issue 1-2 sentences showing the issue b. Applicable Law: a. Cite at least ONE applicable Internal Revenue Code section. b. Other cites should include Regulation, Revenue Rulings, and court cases Analysis In this section compare your fact situation to ALL the authorities cited in the “Applicable Law” section. IMPORTANT, for every authority mentioned in the “Applicable Law” section include a complete discussion of how each cited authority relates to the facts of the research problem. Be specific and thorough in your comparison. Cite every authority by name. Conclusion 1-2 sentences You don’t need to be clear in your opinion about the case but kind review the facts. Some Hints: Applicable Law section and Analysis section should have the same number of authorities. Use the Memo of the whole case in this link. http://www.ustaxcourt.gov/InOpHistoric/graves.TCM.WPD.pdf

Attachments:

tax reserch memo 495454

Document Preview:

Tax Research Memo Stusent Name Instructor Name Date Tax research memo Date:11-23-2013 To:Tax Department From: Cambro Construction Company Subject: Tax Treatment Of The Employee Reimbursement Fact: Cambro Construction Company hires union carpenters for home building. Cambro requires, as a condition of employment, that the carpenters provide and maintain various tools of their trade. Cambro pays each carpenter a set amount per hour as a “tool allowance” to cover the costs of the tools. This amount is determined quarterly based on national complied data on the costs of carpenter tools. How should this employee reimbursement be treated for tax purposes? Issue: How should this employee reimbursement be treated for tax purposes? Law and analysis: According to law Payments that are granted to the employee, being reimbursement of expenses other than expenses of travel and subsistence, which are no more than reimbursement of vouched expenses, infact these are incurred by the employee in performing the duties oduring employment, so these should not be treated as pay. Expenses incurred by Cambro Construction Company for maintenance of various tools of their trade in the form of a set amount per hour as a “tool allowance” to cover the costs of the tools,which are not treated as pay must not only be actually incurred in the performance of the duties of the employment but must also be wholly and exclusively so incurred otherwise it will be taxable under normal tax regime.. Conclusion Expenses, which are incurred by employees in maintinence of tools for performance of duties shall be allowable for tax purposes and any re-imbursement of these expenses must not be treated as pay and taxed accordingly. Citation The Internal Revenue Code, which is Title 26 of the United States Code; Decisions of the United States Tax Court, district courts, Court of Federal Claims, federal circuit courts, and the United States Supreme Court;

Attachments:

tax return problem 495455

  • Use the following information to complete Phillip and Claire Dunphy’s 2012 federal income tax return. If information is missing, use reasonable assumptions to fill in the gaps. Ignore the alternative minimum tax for this problem.
  • Any required forms, schedules, and instructions can be found at the IRS Web site (www.irs.gov). The instructions can be helpful in completing the forms. The following forms are required:

o 1040

o Schedule C

o Schedule D

o Form 4562

o Form 4797

o Form 8949

o Schedule SE

AMT (alternative minimum tax) is NOT part of this Project; You do NOT have to calculate AMT!!!

Also, you do NOT need to depreciate the Artwork

Facts:

  1. Phillip and Claire are married and file a joint return. Phillip is self-employed as a real estate agent, and Claire is a flight attendant. Phillip and Claire have three dependent children. All three children live at home with Phillip and Claire for the entire year.

The Dunphys provide you with the following additional information:

    • The Dunphys do not want to contribute to the presidential election campaign.
      • The Dunphys live at 3701 Brighton Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90018.
        • Phillip’s birthday is 11/5/1965 and his Social Security number is 321-44-5766.
          • Claire’s birthday is 5/12/1968 and her Social Security number is 567-77-1258.
            • Haley’s birthday is 11/6/1999 and his Social Security number is 621-18-7592.
              • Alex’s birthday is 2/1/2001 and her Social Security number is 621-92-8751.
                • Luke’s birthday is 12/12/2005 and his Social Security number is 621-99-9926.
                  • The Dunphys do not have any foreign bank accounts or trusts.
                1. Claire is a flight attendant for Western American Airlines (WAA), where she earned $57,000 in salary. WAA withheld federal income tax of $6,375, state income tax of $1,800, Los Angeles city income tax of $675, Social Security tax of $3,600, and Medicare tax of $825.
                2. Phillip and Claire received $300 of interest from State Savings Bank on a joint account. They also received a qualified dividend of $395 on jointly owned stock in Xila Corporation.
                3. Phillip’s real estate business is named Phillip Dunphy Realty. His business is located at 645 Grove Street, Los Angeles, CA 90018, and his employer identification number is 93-3488888. Phillip’s gross receipts during the year were $730,000. Phillip uses the cash method of accounting for his business. Phillip’s business expenses are as follows:
                4. Advertising

                  $ 5,000

                  Professional dues

                  800

                  Professional journals

                  200

                  Employee wages

                  48,000

                  Insurance on office contents

                  1,120

                  Accounting services

                  2,100

                  Miscellaneous office expense

                  500

                  Utilities and telephone

                  3,360

                  Payroll taxes

                  3,600

                  Depreciation

                  To be calculated

                  On March 20, Phillip moved his business out of the old offices at 1103 Allium Lane into a newly constructed and equipped office on Grove Street. Phillip sold the old office building and all its furnishings. Phillip’s expenditures for the new office building are as follows:

                  Date Acquired

                  Asset

                  Cost

                  3/20

                  Land

                  $300,000

                  3/20

                  Office building

                  2,500,000

                  3/20

                  Furniture

                  200,000

                  4/1

                  Computer system

                  350,000

                  6/1

                  Artwork

                  150,000

                  Phillip computes his cost recovery allowance using MACRS. He would like to use the 179 immediate expensing, but he has elected to not claim any bonus depreciation. Phillip has never claimed 179 or bonus depreciation before. The assets Phillip sold on March 20 are as follows:

                  Date Acquired

                  Asset

                  Sales Price

                  Original Cost

                  Accumulated Depreciation as of Beginning of the Year

                  5/1/05

                  Office building

                  $940,000

                  $900,000

                  $129,825

                  5/1/05

                  Land

                  200,000

                  100,000

                  0

                  7/1/05

                  Furniture

                  50,000

                  239,000

                  206,998

                  8/13/07

                  Furniture

                  10,000

                  324,000

                  222,782

                  4/12/08

                  Office equipment

                  100,000

                  120,000

                  67,524

                  5/13/10

                  Computers

                  $ 30,000

                  50,000

                  10,000

                  Phillip has never sold any assets relating to his business before this transaction.

                  1. The Dunphys sold 60 shares of Fizbo Corporation common stock on September 3, for $65 a share (minus a $50 total commission). The Dunphys purchased the stock on November 8, 2010, for $90 a share. They also sold a painting for $13,000 on March 1. Claire purchased the painting for $20,050 on September 1, 2004, as an investment.
                  2. The Dunphys filed their 2011 federal, state, and local returns on April 14, 2012. They paid the following additional 2011 taxes with their returns: federal income taxes of $630, state income taxes of $250, and city income taxes of $75.
                  3. The Dunphys made timely estimated federal income tax payments of $16,000 each quarter during 2012. They also made estimated state income tax payments of $1,000 each quarter and estimated city income tax payments of $300 each quarter. The Dunphys made all fourth-quarter payments on December 31, 2012. They would like to receive a refund for any overpayments.

                  Attachments:

                  tax return problem 4 mcgraw hill taxation of individual 495456

                  mcgraw-hill taxation of individual

                  appendix c c-5

                  Document Preview:

                  Tax Return Problem 4 Appendix C C-5 Required: Use the following information to complete Phillip and Claire Dunphy’s 2012 federal income tax return. If information is missing, use reasonable assumptions to fill in the gaps. Ignore the alternative minimum tax for this problem. Any required forms, schedules, and instructions can be found at the IRS Web site (? HYPERLINK “http://www.irs.gov” t “_blank” ?www.irs.gov?). The instructions can be helpful in completing the forms. The following forms are required: 1040 Schedule C Schedule D Form 4562 Form 4797 Form 8949 Schedule SE? Phillip and Claire are married and file a joint return. Phillip is self-employed as a real estate agent, and Claire is a flight attendant. Phillip and Claire have three dependent children. All three children live at home with Phillip and Claire for the entire year. The Dunphys provide you with the following additional information: The Dunphys do not want to contribute to the presidential election campaign. The Dunphys live at 3701 Brighton Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90018. Phillip’s birthday is 11/5/1965 and his Social Security number is 321-44-5766. Claire’s birthday is 5/12/1968 and her Social Security number is 567-77-1258. Haley’s birthday is 11/6/1999 and his Social Security number is 621-18-7592. Alex’s birthday is 2/1/2001 and her Social Security number is 621-92-8751. Luke’s birthday is 12/12/2005 and his Social Security number is 621-99-9926. The Dunphys do not have any foreign bank accounts or trusts. Claire is a flight attendant for Western American Airlines (WAA), where she earned $57,000 in salary. WAA withheld federal income tax of $6,375, state income tax of $1,800, Los Angeles city income tax of $675, Social Security tax of $3,600, and Medicare tax of $825. Phillip and Claire received $300 of interest from State Savings Bank on a joint account. They also received a qualified dividend of $395 on jointly owned stock in Xila Corporation. Phillip’s real estate business is…

                  Attachments:

                  taxation 495457

                  Income Classification Briefly discuss the income tax implications of the following, stating which sections of the ITAA 1997 or ITAA 1936, if any, are most relevant. 1.      A $10,000 bonus paid by the Australian Cricket Control Board to the captain of the Australian cricket team for outstanding leadership during a successful tour of England. 2.      A boat valued at $35,000 given to an amateur footballer to turn professional. 3.      Profit of $25,000 made by a trucking company on the disposal of one of the 30 trucks it has leased to carry on its business. 4.

                  Document Preview:

                  Income Classification Briefly discuss the income tax implications of the following, stating which sections of the ITAA 1997 or ITAA 1936, if any, are most relevant. 1.      A $10,000 bonus paid by the Australian Cricket Control Board to the captain of the Australian cricket team for outstanding leadership during a successful tour of England. 2.      A boat valued at $35,000 given to an amateur footballer to turn professional. 3.      Profit of $25,000 made by a trucking company on the disposal of one of the 30 trucks it has leased to carry on its business. 4.      An exchange gain of $500,000 made by a manufacturer in respect of money borrowed in 1997 and used to finance construction of a new building. 5.      Gift and payments made by a football club and its supporters to a star professional player, largely in their delighted response to his being selected to play for Australia. The club gave him a car valued at $25,000; supporters, through a collection at one game, gave him $2,425. Week 5 Capital Gains Tax Because of his wife’s ill-health, Brain sold his gift shop and family home in Victoria and moved to WA on 20 June this year. Brain had acquired the vacant premises 10 years ago for $750,000 and established the business on that date. He sold the business on 20 May this year for a net consideration of $1,880,000. This was made up as follows:   Items AUD $ 1 Goodwill 440,000 2 Trading Stock 60,000 3 Fittings 120,000 4 Shop and Land 1,360,000 5 Less debt taken over secured over stock and fittings (100,000) In addition, Brain received a further $20,000 for signing a contract not to open another business within a 10 Km radius for the next five years. The turnover of the shop for the previous financial year was $540,000. Brain’s home is valued at $1.8m. He also has a 45% interest in a property development company which has assets of $5.4m. His wife also has a 5% interest in that company. The turnover of the property…

                  Attachments:

                  technical paper 495458

                  Document Preview:

                  Technical Paper: Database Administrator for Department Store?Due Week 10 and worth 150 points The Strayer Oracle Server may be used to test and compile the SQL Queries developed for this assignment. Your instructor will provide you with login credentials to a Strayer University maintained Oracle server. Imagine that you have been hired as the database administrator for a local department store. The department store has recently expanded by opening five (5) stores within your local region. They have also launched a series of marketing campaigns to attract new customers and increase sales. For your hired role, you will be responsible for creating and maintaining an enterprise-wide database system that will hold the sales and inventory data for the organization. The designed database will help operations in supporting its new business marketing strategy. Using the concepts presented throughout the course, you will develop a plan to create this database and establish a design that aligns with the product sales initiatives of the organization. Write a twelve to fifteen (12-15) page paper in which you: Identify the potential sales and department store transactions that can be stored within the database. Design a database solution and the potential business rules that could be used to house the sales transactions of the department store.  Evaluate all relationships of each entity within your database solution using the Crow’s Foot notation. Include all data elements, entities, relationships (such as 1:M, 1:1, M:N), and cardinalities for the department store database in your diagram. Note: The graphically depicted solution is not included in the required page length. Research the Internet for best practices of how retail stores use databases for retaining customers and increasing sales and complete the following: Justify how Big Data tools could be used for forecasting sales and inventory of the department store. Propose two (2) SQL Stored Procedures that use SQL…

                  Attachments:

                  the towson manufacturing corporation applies overhead 495463

                  1. 1.Overhead application: Working backward
                  The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:
                  Division A Division B
                  Actual machine hours 22,500 ?
                  Estimated machine hours 20,000 ?
                  Overhead application rate $4.50 $5.00
                  Actual overhead $110,000 ?
                  Estimated overhead ? $90,000
                  Applied overhead ? $86,000
                  Over- (under-) applied overhead ? $6,500
                  FIND THE UNKNOWNS FOR EACH OF THE DIVISIONS.

                  2. 2.Computations using a job order system
                  General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;

                  Work in process $ 35,200
                  Finished goods 86,900
                  Cost of goods sold 128,700

                  Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:

                  Direct Materials Direct Labor
                  Job No. Amount Job No. Amount
                  101 $5,000 101 $7,800
                  115 19,500 103 20,800
                  116 36,200 115 42,000
                  Other 35,800 116 18,000
                  $96,500 Other 25,900
                  $114,500

                  Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively.

                  General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.

                  Instructions:
                  a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.
                  b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.
                  c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.
                  d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.

                  3. 3. High-low method
                  The following cost data pertain to 20X6 operations of Heritage Products:
                  Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 Quarter 4
                  Shipping costs $58,200 $58,620 $60,125 $59,400
                  Orders shipped 120 140 175 150

                  The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.
                  a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.
                  b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.
                  c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X7 if activity amounts to 570 orders.

                  4. 4.Break-even and other CVP relationships
                  Cedars Hospital has average revenue of $180 per patient day. Variable costs are $45 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,320,000 per year.
                  a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?
                  b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $540,000?
                  c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?

                  5. 5.Direct and absorption costing
                  The information that follows pertains to Consumer Products for the year ended December 31, 20X6.
                  Inventory, 1/1/X6 24,000 units
                  Units manufactured 80,000
                  Units sold 82,000
                  Inventory, 12/31/X6 ? units
                  Manufacturing costs:
                  Direct materials $3 per unit
                  Direct labor $5 per unit
                  Variable factory overhead $9 per unit
                  Fixed factory overhead $280,000
                  Selling & administrative expenses:
                  Variable $2 per unit
                  Fixed $136,000

                  The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.

                  Instructions:
                  a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.
                  b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:
                  1. Direct costing.
                  2. Absorption costing.
                  c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using direct costing.
                  d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X6, by using absorption costing.

                  Attachments:

                  trial balance sheet not equaling 495464

                  Document Preview:

                  Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 General Journal-For November 30, 2011 Cookie Creations, Inc. Date Account Titles Dr. Cr. November Cash US Savings Bonds (Cash Deposit) Common Stock (Cash Paid for stock) Equipment (Paper/Office supplies) (Baking Supplies) Equipment (Cash) Depreciation (Purchase of Common Stock) Notes Payable (2 year, 9% Interest) Down payment Acct. receivable (Pre payment for services) Accounts receivable (Payment for services provided) Advertising Expense Accounts payable (Website development) Prepaid Insurance (one-year policy) Account receivable Invoice $300 (services provided) Account payable Invoice payment due Dec.15 (Phone services provided) General Ledger Unearned Service Revenue 8 500 16 2,000 25 60 11 95 30 600 25 150 14 125 30 50 Bal. 210 17 900 25 60 29 100 30 300 30 1,200 Bal. 630 Supplies 15 550 17 900 Bal. 220 Bal. 1,150 Pre-Paid Insurance 30 1,200 Bal. 100 Bal. 1,200 Service Revenue 8 500 15 300 Bal. 800 30 600 Bal. 50 Bal. 600 Bal. 2,000 Trial Balance Sheet 2 2Page 2 2Page 2 2Page 8.00 520.00 520.00 8.00 500.00 500.00 11.00 95.00 95.00 14.00 125.00 125.00 15.00 550.00 250.00 300.00 16.00 2000.00 2000.00 17.00 900.00 900.00 25.00 60.00 60.00 29.00 100.00 100.00 30.00 600.00 600.00 30.00 1200.00 1200.00 30.00 300.00 300.00 30.00 50.00 50.00 ?11?/?30?/?2011 630.00 220.00 1200.00 1150.00 2000.00 50.00 210.00 800.00 100.00 300.00 600.00 3900.00 3360.00 0.00 Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 General Journal-For November 30, 2011 Cookie Creations, Inc. Date Account Titles Dr. Cr. November Cash US Savings Bonds (Cash Deposit) Common Stock (Cash Paid for stock) Equipment (Paper/Office supplies) (Baking…

                  Attachments:

                  tt 495465

                  Document Preview:

                  21.       Problem 5-23 Leverage and sensitivity analysis [LO6] Dickinson Company has $11,800,000 in assets. Currently half of these assets are financed with long-term debt at 9.0 percent and half with common stock having a par value of $8. Ms. Smith, vice-president of finance, wishes to analyze two refinancing plans, one with more debt (D) and one with more equity (E). The company earns a return on assets before interest and taxes of 9.0 percent. The tax rate is 35 percent.??            Under Plan D, a $2,950,000 long-term bond would be sold at an interest rate of 11.0 percent and 368,750 shares of stock would be purchased in the market at $8 per share and retired.??          Under Plan E, 368,750 shares of stock would be sold at $8 per share and the $2,950,000 in proceeds would be used to reduce long-term debt.??         (a)  ?Compute the earnings per share for the current plan and the two new plans. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)??           ?Current Plan?Plan D?Plan E??  Earnings per share?$   ?$   ?$   ????            (b-1)?Compute the earnings per share if return on assets fell to 4.50 percent. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Negative amounts should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)??         ?Current Plan?Plan D?Plan E??  Earnings per share?$   ?$   ?$   ????       (b-2)?Which plan would be most favorable if return on assets fell to 4.50 percent? Consider the current plan and the two new plans.?? ? ?? ??Plan E???Current Plan???Plan D????        (b-3)?Compute the earnings per share if return on assets increased to 14.0 percent. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)??         ?Current Plan?Plan D?Plan E??  Earnings per share?$   ?$   ?$   ????        (b-4)?Which plan would be most favorable if return on assets increased to 14.0 percent? Consider the current plan and…

                  Attachments:

                  unit 1 not for profit vs governmental accounting 495467

                  Items must be listed in order of importance with perhaps a sentence explaining why!

                  Document Preview:

                  Unit 1 – Not-for-profit vs. Governmental Accounting?????? 3 to 5 pages APA in paper citations and a reference page Michele Monti You recently landed your dream job working for the state as an accountant. You are given the task to research several state and local governmental financial accounting issues. For each of the following issues, rank the guidance based on the governmental GAAP hierarchy. Issue 1: Governmental accounting textbook GASB Technical Bulletin FASB statement GASB interpretation Issue 2: AICPA Practice Bulletins (applying specifically to state and local government) AICPA Industry Audit and Accounting Guides AICPA issue papers Widely recognized industry practice Issue 3: International Accounting Standards Committee Statements AIPCA Statements of Position (applying specifically to state and local government) GASB Q&As GASB Statement Issue 4: Article in a leading audit journal FASB Statement Leading accounting textbook Position statement from GASB Emerging Issues Taskforce Issue 5: GASB Technical Bulletin FASB Technical Bulletin Speech from a leading accounting professor GASB concept statement

                  Attachments:

                  unit 3 acct exercise 495468

                  Document Preview:

                  ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

                  Attachments:

                  unit 3 ip tax auditing and accounting issues 495469

                  Three to four pages APA as usual

                  Document Preview:

                  Unit 3 – Tax, Auditing, and Accounting Issues 3 Pages for this Individual Project Michele Monti Research reporting responsibilities, especially the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) Circular A-133. What are the reporting responsibilities of the auditee if, during a single audit, the auditor identifies a finding? Explain what is required in each of the following: The year of the finding Subsequent years Use APA style in the body of your posting as well as in the reference section. Available Resources: Recourses you may want to invest age: ? ? HYPERLINK “https://mycampus.aiu-online.com/Pages/ResourceTracker.aspx?r=42794” t “_blank” ?Center for Audit Quality (CAQ)? ?The Center for Audit Quality (CAQ) is an autonomous, nonpartisan, nonprofit group based in Washington, D.C. It is governed by a Board that comprises leaders from the public company auditing firms, the American Institute of CPAs and the investor and issuer communities. The organization is affiliated with the American Institute of CPAs.??   ?? ? HYPERLINK “https://mycampus.aiu-online.com/Pages/ResourceTracker.aspx?r=39022” t “_blank” ?Chief Financial Officers Council? ?The CFO Council is comprised of CFOs and Deputy CFOs of the largest federal agencies and senior officials of OMB and Treasury. The Council advises and coordinates the efforts of the largest U.S. Federal agencies with a focus on quality financial reporting and efficiency of accounting systems.??   ?? ? HYPERLINK “https://mycampus.aiu-online.com/Pages/ResourceTracker.aspx?r=43572” t “_blank” ?Flashcards: Governmental Accounting? ?A great student study site on government accounting.??   ?? ? HYPERLINK “https://mycampus.aiu-online.com/Pages/ResourceTracker.aspx?r=26724” t “_blank” ?Government Auditing Standards? ?From the U.S. General Accounting Office, this site “contains standards for audits of government organizations, programs, activities, and functions, and of government assistance received by contractors, nonprofit…

                  Attachments:

                  compute the dollar volume you are expected to bring in for 2008 using this formula 495414

                  The problem posed here, taken from experiences in textbook sales, is typical of how salespeople in all industries are expected to allocate their time to their accounts. As described in this lesson, your territory’s quota has been established in a manner that is (1) objective, (2) measurable, (3) replicable, and (4) attainable. Now, you have returned to your home/office with instructions to complete an itinerary for your territory for the coming year. The following steps will help you do so and answer Questions 1-2, below.
                  Step 1: Compute the dollar volume you are expected to bring in for 2008, using this formula:
                  Total 2007 Sales + (Total 2007 Sales X Percent Increase) = 2008 Sales Goal (Quota)
                  Next, determine how much each account has contributed historically to your territory’s performance:
                  Step 2: Calculate each account’s total contribution to your territory over the past three years, weighted to favor the most recent year:

                  Document Preview:

                  The problem posed here, taken from experiences in textbook sales, is typical of how salespeople in all industries are expected to allocate their time to their accounts. As described in this lesson, your territory’s quota has been established in a manner that is (1) objective, (2) measurable, (3) replicable, and (4) attainable. Now, you have returned to your home/office with instructions to complete an itinerary for your territory for the coming year. The following steps will help you do so and answer Questions 1-2, below. Step 1: Compute the dollar volume you are expected to bring in for 2008, using this formula: Total 2007 Sales + (Total 2007 Sales X Percent Increase) = 2008 Sales Goal (Quota) Next, determine how much each account has contributed historically to your territory’s performance: Step 2: Calculate each account’s total contribution to your territory over the past three years, weighted to favor the most recent year: Account 2005 Sales + Account 2006 Sales + (2 X Account 2007 Sales) = Historic Account Sales Step 3: Do the same for your territory as a whole using this formula: Total 2005 Sales + Total 2006 Sales + (2 X Total 2007 Sales) = Historic Territory Sales Step 4: Calculate the percent of your territory’s total results that each account produced historically over the past three years using this formula: Historic Account Sales / Historic Territory Sales = Percent Account Contributed Round your percentages to the nearest one tenth. In other words, 10.8743 should be rounded to 10.9%, not to 10.87% and not to 11%. Step 5: Determine the revenue you should expect in 2008, by individual account, using this formula: Territory 2008 Sales Goal X Percent Account Contributed = 2008 Forecast Sales Express your answers in whole dollars; no cents, please. To check your work, add your individual account 2008 Forecast Sales, which should equal your Territory 2008 Sales Goal (quota), your answer to Question 1. NOTE: In practice, depending…

                  Attachments:

                  solution mcq 039 s 495417

                  Homework If your company follows the principle of management by exception, which of the following departures from the budget would most likely be investigated? Rent ($100). Labor ($800). Water ($500). Depreciation ($2,000). Shula’s 347 Grill has budgeted the following costs for a month in which 1,600 steak dinners will be produced and sold: Materials, $4,080; hourly labor (variable), $5,200; rent (fixed), $1,700; depreciation, $800; and other fixed costs, $600. Each steak dinner sells for $14.00 each. How much would Shula’s profit increase if 10 more dinners were sold? $82.00 $140.

                  Document Preview:

                  Homework If your company follows the principle of management by exception, which of the following departures from the budget would most likely be investigated? ?Rent ($100).?? ?Labor ($800).?? ?Water ($500).?? ?Depreciation ($2,000).??Shula’s 347 Grill has budgeted the following costs for a month in which 1,600 steak dinners will be produced and sold: Materials, $4,080; hourly labor (variable), $5,200; rent (fixed), $1,700; depreciation, $800; and other fixed costs, $600. Each steak dinner sells for $14.00 each. How much would Shula’s profit increase if 10 more dinners were sold? ?$82.00?? ?$140.00?? ?$62.60?? ?$58.00????Paradise Pottery had the following costs in May when production is 800 ceramic pots: materials, $8,700; labor (variable), $2,900; depreciation, $1,100; rent, $900; and other fixed costs, $1,500. If production changes to 850 units, which will stay the same? ?total cost per unit?? ?total variable cost?? ?fixed cost per unit?? ?variable cost per unit??Raron’s Rockers is in the process of preparing a production cost budget for August. Actual costs in July for 120 rocking chairs were: Materials cost?$4,800??Labor cost?3,000??Rent?1,500??Depreciation?2,500??Other fixed costs?3,200??Total?$15,000????Materials and labor are the only variable costs. If production and sales are budgeted to increase to 150 chairs in August, how much is the expected total variable cost on the August budget? ?$9,750?? ?$17,325?? ?$16,950?? ?$18,750????ProGo plans to sell 1,200 carriers next year and has budgeted sales of $48,000 and profits of $20,000. Variable costs are projected to be $22 per unit. Nathan Co. offers to pay $21,000 to buy 600 units from ProGo. Total fixed costs are $5,000 per year. This offer does not affect ProGo’s other planned operations. The incremental revenues for this situation are ?$7,800.?? ?$6,000.?? ?$21,000.?? ?$27,000.??Breezes Curacao has 200 rooms. Each room rents at $130 per night and variable costs total $42 per room per night of…

                  Attachments:

                  solve all 495418

                  Break-Even Sales Under Present and Proposed Conditions

                  Boleyn Company, operating at full capacity, sold 120,000 units at a price of $140 per unit during 2014. Its income statement for 2014 is as follows:

                  The division of costs between variable and fixed is as follows:

                  Management is considering a plant expansion program that will permit an increase of $2,800,000 in yearly sales. The expansion will increase fixed costs by $1,250,000, but will not affect the relationship between sales and variable costs.

                  Required:

                  1. Determine the total fixed costs and the total variable costs for 2014.

                  Total variable costs $
                  Total fixed costs $

                  2. Determine for 2014 (a) the unit variable cost and (b) the unit contribution margin.

                  Unit variable cost $
                  Unit contribution margin $

                  3. Compute the break-even sales (units) for 2014.
                  units

                  4. Compute the break-even sales (units) under the proposed program.
                  units

                  5. Determine the amount of sales (units) that would be necessary under the proposed program to realize the $5,650,000 of income from operations that was earned in 2014.
                  units

                  6. Determine the maximum income from operations possible with the expanded plant.
                  $

                  7. If the proposal is accepted and sales remain at the 2014 level, what will the income or loss from operations be for 2015?
                  $

                  8. Based on the data given, would you recommend accepting the proposal?

                  1. In favor of the proposal because of the reduction in break-even point.
                  2. In favor of the proposal because of the possibility of increasing income from operations.
                  3. In favor of the proposal because of the increase in break-even point.
                  4. Reject the proposal because if future sales remain at the 2014 level, the income from operations of will increase.
                  5. Reject the proposal because the sales necessary to maintain the current income from operations would be below 2014 sales.

                  Attachments:

                  soon as possible 495419

                  PROBLEMS – Questions 1 – 8 1. On March 31, 2009, Hanson Corporation sold $7,000,000 of its 8%, 10-year bonds for $6,730,500 including accrued interest. The bonds were dated January 1, 2009. Interest is paid semiannually on January 1 and July 1. On April 1, 2013, Hanson purchased 1/2 of the bonds on the open market at 99 plus accrued interest and canceled them. Hanson uses the straight-line method for amortization of bond premiums and discounts.

                  Document Preview:

                  PROBLEMS – Questions 1 – 8 1. On March 31, 2009, Hanson Corporation sold $7,000,000 of its 8%, 10-year bonds for $6,730,500 including accrued interest. The bonds were dated January 1, 2009. Interest is paid semiannually on January 1 and July 1. On April 1, 2013, Hanson purchased 1/2 of the bonds on the open market at 99 plus accrued interest and canceled them. Hanson uses the straight-line method for amortization of bond premiums and discounts. (a) What was the amount of the gain or loss on retirement of the bonds? (b) Prepare the journal entry needed at April 1, 2013 to record retirement of the bonds. Assume that interest and premium or discount amortization have been recorded through January 1, 2013. Record interest and amortization on only the bonds retired. (c) Prepare the journal entry needed at July 1, 2013 to record interest and premium or discount amortization. 2. On January 1 of the current year, Feller Corporation issued $3,000,000 of 10% debenture bonds on a basis to yield 9%, receiving $3,134,580. Interest is payable annually on December 31 and the bonds mature in 6 years. The effective-interest method is used. (a) What is the interest expense for the first year? (b) What is the interest expense for the second year? 3. Basic and Diluted Earnings Per Share Assume that the following data relate to Rosen, Inc. for the year 2013: Net income (30% tax rate) $3,000,000 Average common shares outstanding 2013 1,000,000 shares 10% cumulative convertible preferred stock: Convertible into 80,000 shares of common $1,600,000 8% convertible bonds; convertible into 75,000 shares of common $2,500,000 Stock options: Exercisable at the option price of $25 per share; average market price in 2013, $30 84,000 shares Instructions Compute (a) basic earnings per share, and (b) diluted earnings per share. 4. Available-for-Sale Equity Investments On January 2, 2012,…

                  Attachments:

                  st leo mba 560 module 4 test 495420

                  Problem 1. Villarente Company issued 5-year $200,000 face value bonds at 95 on January 1, 2012. The stated interest rate on these bonds is 9%, and the effective interest rate is 10.33%. Use the effective interest rate method to complete the amortization schedule below.

                  Cash
                  Payment

                  Interest Expense

                  Discount Amortization

                  Carrying
                  Value

                  January 1, 2012

                  December 31, 2012

                  December 31, 2013

                  December 31, 2014

                  December 31, 2015

                  December 31, 2016

                  Totals

                  Problem 2. Allen Corporation was organized on July 15, 2012. It was authorized to issue 150,000 shares of $25 par value common stock and 50,000 shares of 6% cumulative preferred stock. The preferred stock had a stated value of $50 per share. The following stock transactions relate to Allen Corporation.

                  Issued 55,000 shares of common stock for $33 per share.

                  Issued 2,750 shares of the class A preferred stock for $62 per share.

                  Issued 27,500 shares of common stock for $35 per share.

                  Required:

                  1) Indicate the effect of each of these transactions on Allen’s financial statements. Include dollar amounts in the model, below. After recording the three transactions, calculate column totals.
                  2) After these transactions have been recorded, what is the total amount of stockholders’ equity?
                  3) After these transactions have been recorded, how many shares of common stock are outstanding?

                  Assets

                  =

                  Equity

                  Cash Flow

                  Cash

                  Common Stock

                  +

                  Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value

                  +

                  Preferred Stock

                  +

                  Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value

                  Attachments:

                  standard costs and variances 495421

                  value: 10.00 points The standard costs and variances for direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead for the month of May are as follows: Variances Standard Cost Unfavorable Favorable Direct materials $ 90,000 Price variance $ 4,500 Quantity variance $ 2,700 Direct labor 180,000 Rate variance 1,800 Efficiency variance 5,400 Manufacturing overhead 270,000 Spending variance 3,600 Volume variance 2,400 Determine the actual costs incurred during the month of May for direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.

                  Document Preview:

                  value:?10.00 points The standard costs and variances for direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead for the month of May are as follows:?? ???Variances ?????????Standard Cost??Unfavorable??Favorable???Direct materials?$?90,000??????????Price variance?????$?4,500 ??????Quantity variance????????$?2,700 ???Direct labor??180,000??????????Rate variance?????????1,800 ???Efficiency variance??????5,400 ??????Manufacturing overhead??270,000??????????Spending variance?????????3,600 ???Volume variance?????????2,400 ????? Determine the actual costs incurred during the month of May for direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)?? Actual costs incurred??Direct materials?$ ??Direct labor?$ ??Manufacturing overhead?$ ?? 2. value:?10.00 points The accountants for Polyglaze, Inc., have developed the following information regarding the standard cost and the actual cost of a product manufactured in June:?? ?Standard Cost??Actual Cost???Direct materials:????????Standard: 10 ounces at $0.15 per ounce?$?1.50 ??????Actual: 11 ounces at $0.16 per ounce????$?1.76 ???Direct labor:????????Standard: 0.50 hours at $10.00 per hour??5.00 ??????Actual: 0.45 hours at $10.40 per hour?????4.68 ???Manufacturing overhead:????????Standard: $5,000 fixed cost and $5,000 variable?cost for 10,000 units normal monthly volume??1.00 ??????Actual: $5,000 fixed cost and $4,600 variable cost?for 8,000 units actually produced in June????This document was truncated here because it was created in the Evaluation Mode.

                  Attachments:

                  standard costs part 1 1 10 495422

                  Need homework help. Need in excel. List numbers in excel exactly as they appear in the attachment below.

                  Document Preview:

                  4ftn3 Assignrnent Print Msr Exercise ))-1-16 Direet materiats and direct labor variances L”A” PZ The folilowing inforrnation describes production actir,ities of Truzar l,lanuhcturing forthe year Actuarl raw matedals used per 38,000 lbs. at lb. $5.70 Actual factory payroll 6,000 hours for a total of $96,[,110 Actual units prroduced 30,000 BudgeteJ standards for produced pounds each unit are 1.00 of nrw material at per pourd 10.0 $5.80 and minutes of direct labor at per hour. $15.50 (1)Compute the dircct matefials price quantity and ariances.{lnput all amount aea positive value. lndicate the effect of each varianc€ by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and ‘Non’e” for no effect zero variance}, Leave – {i.e., no crl{ls blank be certain to enler “0” wherrever required. Omit the ‘$” dgn in your response) Price adance $ ffi.H Quantity rariance $ (2lc.e,rnpute the dir€ct labor €te and &ciercy wiances. (lnp,ut all amount positive value. as a lndicale the effiect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, for unfavorable, and “U” fur no “None” efiect zero variance}, Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter {i,e., “0” wherever required. Omit the “$’ dgn in your raryonse) Rate rarianee Effciency ariance €xercise 2t -f 6 !)irecf m*fen’aJs and direct ia$ sr Learning Objective: 21-P? Com pute m aterials and Workshieet yariances ,? L.A f labor tariances. 2. Exercise 21-3 Preparation af a flexible budget pertormance report L.O. P1 Omanon performance Company’s fixed budget rcport for July fullcrrs. The $630,Ct00 budgeted expenses include rariable expenses $592,2ff1 and $37,800 fxed expensas. lctual expenses include fixed $49,800 expenses. Fixed Budget Actual Results Vimances (in Sales units) 8,400 10,900 Sales (in dollars) $840,000 $1,090,000 F $2rt0,000 Totat exp,enses 630,000 756,000 1i:6,000 u lncome f,om operations $21 0,000 324,000 4,000 F $ $11 Preparc a flexible budget perbrmance rcport sholving any ariances…

                  Attachments:

                  standard costs part 2 11 16 495423

                  Standard Costs – Part 2 – 11-16. Remaining problem numbers for Part 1. Need in excel.

                  Document Preview:

                  4{7113 Axrigrrnent PrintMav 11. Problem 21-3A Part 3 3. The company’s business conditions are impmling. One prrssible result is a sales olume of approximately 18,fi)0 units. The company president is confident that this plume is within the rcleBnt range of existing capacity. Hor,v much ilould operating income il:crease orgr the 2011 budgeled amount of $379,000 if lhis lercl is reached without increasing capacity? {Do not round intermediate calculatione, Omit the “$” sign in your reryon*.) Operating income increase $ ldVorksheet Fra$leni ?f -34 Parf 3 Learning ilbjective: 21-F1 Prepare a *exible budget and interpret a flexible budget perf*rmance report. Difficulty Mediurn 12. Probfem 21-3A Part 4 4. An unhrcrable change in business is rcmotely possible; in this case, pDduction and sales rolume br 2011 could fall to 12,000 units. Ho,v much income (or loss) tom operations would occur if sales Dlume hlls to this lelel? flnput the amount as positive value. Do nol round intermediate calculations Omit the ‘$” dgn in your response.) ffi$_ Worksheet Pr*bJem ?1-34 Part 4 Learning Object r{}: 21-P1 Prepsre a flexible budget and interpret a flr:xible budget performance repor”t. Problem 21-5A Flexible budget preparation; computatian af mateilals, labar, and overhead wriances: and overhead variance repart L.Q. Pl, P2, P3, C2 [fhe fallowing intomalian applies b the guestions dlsplayed belowJ Kwikeee Cornpany set the following standard costs br one unit of its product. Direct matedals {{3.0 hs. @$+.o per h.) $ 12.00 Dir€ctlabor(1.5hrs. @$14.0perhr.) 21.0O Orerhead (1.5 hns. @$18.50 perhr.) 27.75 Total sfandard cost $ 60.75 The F€detemined o,ethead rate ($18.50 psr direct labor hour) is basr:d on an expected wlume of 75% of the factory’s capacity of 20,000 units pet month. Fdlowing are the conrpany’s budgeted oerhead costs per month at the 75% leel-Owrhead Budget (75% Capacity) Variable owrhead costs lndirect materials lndirect labor Power Repairs and maintenance Total wriable…

                  Attachments:

                  start on the individual financial analysis report 495424

                  Go to theCanGo Intranet and pull the financial statements. Use these to fill out the table found in Doc Sharing labeledFinancial Analysis Project.Start on the Individual Financial Analysis Report,

                  Document Preview:

                  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ratio Formula (express the ratio in words) Total Earned Points Explanation of why ratio is important Earned points (up to 3 points per “box”/cell) Example: Grade for above 1000/2000 .50 Term A/Term B (Term A divided by Term B) 3 Green boxes to be filled in by instructor Efficiency Ratio: Inventory Turnover Financial Leverage Ratio: Debt/Equity Ratio Liquidity Ratio: Current Ratio Liquidity Ratio: Quick Ratio Profitability Ratio: Return on Assets Student Name: BUSN460 Individual Financial Analysis Project Detailed calculation (actual numbers from financial statements used for the calculation) Final number (final result of the detailed calculation) Instructor feedback Use the financial statements from the most recent year to fill in the table below. Assume interest expense is $0.00 Go to the CanGo intranet found in the Report Guide tab under Course Home You may find some formulae calling for an average, e.g., average inventory, average receivables. Because we only have the Balance sheet for one year, you can only use the one year number not an average. This is the explanation of the role of this ratio and why it is important Instructions: Be sure to cite your references Liquidity: Working Capital Profitability Ratio: Return on Sales Efficiency Ratio: Receivables Turnover and that is different from the debt equity ratio so think about how you calculate the debt equity ratio using the debt asset ratio as an example. Be careful of the Debt equity ratio. The review covers debt asset ratio as an example of how to calculate ratios and that is different from debt equity ratio, ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

                  Attachments:

                  statement of cash flows indirect methodp 5 wu company s income statement for the yea 495425

                  Statement of Cash Flows: Indirect Method P 5. Wu Company s income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011,and its comparative balance sheets as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, are presented on the next page. During 2011, Wu Company engaged in these transactions: a. Sold at a gain of $7,000 furniture and fixtures that cost $35,600, on which it had accumulated depreciation of $28,800. b. Purchased furniture and fixtures in the amount of $39,600. c. Paid a $20,000 note payable and borrowed $40,000 on a new note. d. Converted bonds payable in the amount of $100,000 into 4,000 shares of common stock. e. Declared and paid $6,000 in cash dividends. Wu Company Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31, 2011 Sales $1,609,000 Cost of goods sold 1,127,800 Gross margin $ 481,200 Operating expenses (including depreciation expense of $46,800) 449,400 Income from operations $ 31,800 Other income (expenses) Gain on sale of furniture and fixtures $ 7,000 Interest expense (23,200) (16,200) Income before income taxes $ 15,600 Income taxes expense 4,600 Net income $ 11,000 Wu Company Comparative Balance Sheets December 31, 2011 and 2010 2011 2010 Assets Cash $164,800 $ 50,000 Accounts receivable (net) 165,200 200,000 Merchandise inventory 350,000 450,000 Prepaid rent 2,000 3,000 Furniture and fixtures 148,000 144,000 Accumulated depreciation furniture and fixtures (42,000) (24,000) Total assets $788,000 $823,000 Liabilities and Stockholders Equity Accounts payable $143,400 $200,400 Income taxes payable 1,400 4,400 Notes payable (long-term) 40,000 20,000 Bonds payable 100,000 200,000 Common stock, $20 par value 240,000 200,000 Additional paid-in capital 181,440 121,440 Retained earnings 81,760 76,760 Total liabilities and stockholders equity $788,000 $823,000 Using the indirect method, prepare a statement of cash flows for Wu Company. Include a supporting schedule of noncash investing transactions and financing transactions. 2. What are the primary reasons for Wu Company s large increase in cash from 2010 to 2011, despite its low net income? 3. Compute and assess cash flow yield and free cash flow for 2011. Compare and contrast what these two performance measures tell you about Wu Company s cash-generating ability.

                  Attachments:

                  statistic paper 495426

                  microsoft excel most be used and all working must be show.

                  Document Preview:

                  1. Classify the following studies as descriptive or inferential and explain your reasons: (1 pts.) A study on stress concluded that more than half of all Americans older than 18 have at least “moderate” stress in their lives. The study was based on responses of 34,000 households to the 1985 National Health Interview Survey. (1 pts.) A report in a farming magazine indicates that more than 95% of the 400 largest farms in the nation are still considered family operations. 2. Thirty-five fourth-grade students were asked the traditional question “what do you want to be when you grow up? The responses are summarized in the following table: Employment Frequency Relative Frequency Teacher 8 0.229 Doctor 6 0.171 Scientist 3 0.086 Police Officer 9 0.257 Athlete 9 0.257 (2 pts.) Construct a pie chart for relative frequency (2 pts.) Construct a bar graph for the relative frequencies 3. In a college freshman English course, the following 20 grades were recorded 48 88 47 39 45 44 98 76 84 54 67 91 84 38 75 38 35 82 42 82 Find the: (1 pt.)Quartiles for the above data set (1 pt.)Range for the above data set (1 pt.)Mean for the above data set (1 pt.)Variance for the above data set 4. The age distribution of students at a community college is given below: Age in Years Number of Students (f) Under 21 4946 21 – 25 4808 26 – 30 2673 30 – 35 29036 Over 35 525 Suppose a student is selected at random. Let A = the event the student is under 21 B = the event the student’s age is between 21 and 25 C = the event the student’s age is between 26 and 30 D = the event the student’s age is between 31 and 35 E = the event the student’s age is under 35 (2 pts.) Find P (B) (2 pts.) Find P (E) 5. A study of the effect of college education on job satisfaction was conducted. A contingency table is presented below: Attended College Did not Attend Total Satisfied with…

                  Attachments:

                  statistics 495427

                  These questions must be done in excel

                  Document Preview:

                  Summer 2013 ?Problem Set #3 Hypothesis Testing ?  1. University of Maryland University College is concerned that out of state students may be receiving lower grades than Maryland students. Two independent random samples have been selected: 175 observations from population 1 (Out of state students) and 187 from population 2 (Maryland students). The sample means obtained are X1(bar)=85 and X2(bar)=86. It is known from previous studies that the population variances are 9.2 and 8.3 respectively. Using a level of significance of .01, is there evidence that the out of state students may be receiving lower grades? Fully explain your answer. ?  Simple Regression 2.  A CEO of a large plastics manufacturing company would like to determine if she should be placing more money allotted in the budget next year for television advertising of a new baby bottle marketed for controlling reflux and reducing gas. She wonders whether there is a strong relationship between the amount of money spent on television advertising for this new baby bottle called Gentle Bottle and the number of orders received. The manufacturing process of this baby bottle is very difficult and requires advanced quality control so the CEO would prefer to generate a stable number of orders. The cost of advertising is always an important consideration in the phase I roll-out of a new baby bottle. Data that have been collected over the past 20 months indicate the amount of money spent of television advertising and the number of orders received. The use of linear regression is a critical tool for a manager’s decision-making ability. Please carefully read the example below and try to answer the questions in terms of the problem context. The results are as follows: ?  ?  Month?Advertising Cost ?Number of…

                  Attachments:

                  statistics business research for decision making 495428

                  Please see attachment

                  Document Preview:

                  HOLMES INSTITUTE FACULTY OF HIGHER EDUCATION HI5007 Statistics Business Research for Decision Making Trimester 2 2013 ASSIGNMENT 2 – DATA ANALYSIS Weght: 20% Word Limit: 2000 words Due Week 12 Identifying a management problem and designing an appropriate business research strategy is critical for success in business, but this is only the start of the problem. This assignment requires the participant to perform quantitative research to investigate a data set. Each team member is required to make specific contributions in undertaking the required tasks of this assignment. However it is the responsibility of the team as whole to ensure that the arguments and format of the report are cohesive reflecting the collective effort of the team. To achieve this outcome, it will be necessary for the team members to meet frequently to discuss the analysis and presentation. The purpose of this assignment is to gain experience exploring a data set and applying the statistical techniques that have been learned during the lecture sessions. The Data The data set is from the World Bank and contains the following variables: ? Life expectancy at birth, total (years) ? CO2 emissions (metric tons per capita) ? Health expenditure per capita (current US$) ? GDP growth (annual %) ? Mobile cellular subscriptions (per 100 people) The Tasks 1. Create appropriate plots (histogram, pie chart, bar chart, box and whisker, scatter plots) of the data and comment on the general trends present. 2. Calculate the mean, median, standard deviation for each variable and comment. 3. Perform correlation analysis of each variable with Life expectancy. Comment on the results and the implied relationships, i.e. just because two variables are highly correlated does this imply a cause and effect relationship? Discuss. The Report ? Present concise arguments supported by your analysis ? Draw conclusions justified by the arguments and evidence ? Begin the report with an executive summary and include any detailed…

                  Attachments:

                  statistics for managers assignment 495430

                  Complete the problems below and submit your work in an Excel document. Be sure to show all of your work and clearly label all calculations. All statistical calculations will use the Employee Salary Data Set.

                  Problems

                  1. Is either that male or female salary equal to the overall mean salary? (Two hypotheses, one-sample tests needed.)
                  2. Are male and female average salaries statistically equal to each other?
                  3. Are the male and female compa average measures equal to each other?
                  4. If the salary and compa mean tests in questions 2 and 3 provide different equality results, which would be more appropriate to use in answering the question about salary equity Why?
                  5. What other information would you like to know to answer the question about salary equity between the genders Why?
                  Document Preview:

                  Week 5 Week 4 Week 3 Week 2 Week 1 Data ID Sal Compa Mid Age EES SR G Raise Deg Gen1 Gr M E B F D C A Sal – Salary in thousands Age – Age in years EES – Appraisal rating (Employee evaluation score) SER – Years of service Mid – salary grade midpoint Raise – percent of last raise Grade – job/pay grade Deg (0= BSBA 1 = MS) Gen1 (Male or Female) The column labels in the table mean: Use the descriptive stats function for one gender and the Fx functions (average and stdev) for the other. sal, compa, age, sr and raise. Week 1. Which variables does this function not work properly for, even though we have some excel generated results? a. The z score for each male salary, based on only the male salaries. Week 2 Week 4 Week 3 Week 5 Correlation and Regression Confidence Intervals and Chi Square (CHs 11 – 12) G – Gender (0 = male, 1 = female) Compa – salary divided by midpoint ID – Employee sample number Describing the data. Is either the male or female salary equal to the overall mean salary? Are the male and female salaries statistically equal to each other? Are the male and female compas equal to each other? Let’s look at some other factors that might influence pay. The ongoing question that the weekly assignments will focus on is: Are males and females paid the same for equal work (under the Equal Pay Act)? Note: to simplfy the analysis, we will assume that jobs within each grade comprise equal work. 1. Using the Excel Analysis ToolPak function descriptive statistics, generate descriptive statistics for the salary data. Testing means 4. Find: 5. Repeat question 4 for compa for each gender. 3.   What is the probability distribution table for a: a.       Randomly selected person being a male in a specific grade? b.      Randomly selected person being in a specific grade? 6.      What conclusions can you make about the issue of male and female pay equality? Are all of the results…

                  Attachments:

                  statistics spreadsheets needed today 495431

                  Stat quiz- ALOT of spreadheets!!

                  Serious inquiries only, please complete excel spreadsheets as instructed.

                  Document Preview:

                  1 6 2 6 3 10 4 10 5 6 6 10 7 8 8 14 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 6 15 4 100 19 31 24 22 20 27 14 28 18 22 35 17 22 16 22 50 44 24 15 50 17 15 30 42 52 22 16 20 91 39 27 27 16 76 21 27 37 37 19 30 26 20 17 35 30 31 16 22 77 19 34 21 25 14 51 32 15 14 36 27 20 41 17 26 28 48 40 13 16 30 15 15 55 21 28 20 38 51 33 23 18 17 35 49 14 22 37 35 14 28 24 63 15 47 23 14 26 21 13 42 23 27 14 49 38 22 30 42 15 35 25 19 29 30 17 50 48 11 20 30 40 60 1 35 2 25 3 40 4 51 5 50 6 55 7 16 8 36 9 49 10 27 11 31 12 21 13 20 14 28 15 30 16 17 17 32 18 34 19 39 20 34 21 35 22 34 23 51 24 37 25 36 26 33 27 58 28 47 29 62 30 31 31 55 32 22 33 43 34 47 35 57 36 37 37 33 38 45 39 34 40 46 41 24 42 30 43 23 44 34 45 38 46 38 47 35 48 60 49 21 50 31 51 12 52 52 53 25 54 31 55 46 56 43 57 47 58 44 59 24 60 27 61 45 62 41 63 29 64 36 65 39 66 44 67 39 68 29 69 57 70 43 71 39 72 46 73 47 74 32 75 29 76 49 77 26 78 22 79 45 80 44 81 60 82 52 83 51 84 39 85 38 86 43 87 38 88 27 89 20 90 46 91 42 92 44 93 40 94 28 95 50 96 35 97 30 98 30 99 34 100 33 101 33 102 46 103 43 104 32 105 51 106 20 107 44 108 37 109 38 110 31 111 33 112 46 113 46 114 43 115 45 116 54 117 41 118 44 119 57 120 35 121 48 122 39 123 49 124 37 125 30 126 49 127 32 128 43 129 43 130 35 131 34 132 24 133 58 134 32 135 39 136 36 137 66 138 51 139 47 140 51 141 40 142 43 143 36 144 26 145 51 146 35 147 25 148 46 149 46 150 42 151 42 152 32 153 45 154 43 155 49 1…

                  Attachments:

                  students posts 495432

                  can someone please post a comment

                  on each student discussion please?

                  just a few sentences each.

                  thanks!

                  Document Preview:

                  1. An Historical Look at Corporations ? HYPERLINK “file:///C:/Users/Owner/AppData/Local/Temp/NY%20Times%20-%20Business%20to%20Pay%20Share%20-%205.3.12-1.pdf” ?file:///C:/Users/Owner/AppData/Local/Temp/NY%20Times%20-%20Business%20to%20Pay%20Share%20-%205.3.12-1.pdf? Class, The attached NY Times article provides some interesting information that just happens to tie right into our chapter discussion. Currently it is the states & territories & DC that license (issue the charters) for corporations. I added this note & attachment to see if it might just be a bit of fodder that would stimulate some discussion. Enjoy, thanks, Michael J. Student discussion: Wow, this article is certianly an eye opener. The fact that such a profitable American company has found a way to legally not pay billions of dollars in taxes is quite alarming. I understand that due to large companies being able to afford lobbyists and certain states that benefit from the current rules, it would be difficult to pass a National Companies Act, but I feel that it is necessary. America cannot afford to allow these large companies to slip through the cracks, the success of a business should not be measured by the amount of loopholes it can find. 2. Ethical Twist Class, I found this VPR broadcast of interest. We are studying corporations. Is there a corporate soul? Is there a moral obligation that big corporations (and little ones as well) have to society. In the ethics classes we find more than just the right & wrong behavior issues. We see reasons individuals & groups of individuals act the way they do. Armed with that knowledge basis we may find ways thwart their actions. I am listening at this time to VPR (Vermont Public Radio) and there is a very good discussion going on about ethical (or unethical) actions that are being taken by employers to underpay or abuse workers. It is very interesting to see how these employers justify their actions. The broadcast is called “on…

                  Attachments:

                  tax accounting 495437

                   Draft a memo (no more than two double-spaced pages) that addresses separately the following three questions: 1. Sharmilla works for Shasta Lumber, a local lumber supplier. The company annually provides each employee with a Shasta Lumber shirt so that employees look branded and advertise for the business while wearing the shirts. Are Shasta’s employees required to include the value of the shirts in income? [Hint: See IRC Section 132 and Treasury Regulation 1.132-1.) 2. LaMont works for a company in downtown Chicago.

                  Document Preview:

                  Draft a memo (no more than two double-spaced pages) that addresses separately the following three questions: 1. Sharmilla works for Shasta Lumber, a local lumber supplier. The company annually provides each employee with a Shasta Lumber shirt so that employees look branded and advertise for the business while wearing the shirts. Are Shasta’s employees required to include the value of the shirts in income? [Hint: See IRC Section 132 and Treasury Regulation 1.132-1.) 2. LaMont works for a company in downtown Chicago. The firm encourages employees to use public transportation (to save the environment) by providing them with transit passes at a cost of $250 per month. [Hint: See IRC Section 132.] a. If LaMont receives one pass (worth $250) each month, how much of this benefit must he include in his taxable income each year? b. If the company provides each employee with $250 per month in parking benefits, how much of the parking benefit must LaMont include in his taxable income each year? 3. Ultimate Comfort Blankets Inc. has had a great couple of years and wants to distribute its earnings while avoiding the double tax. It decides to give its sole shareholder, Laura, a salary of $1,500,000 in the current year. What factors would the courts examine to determine if Laura’s salary is reasonable? [Hint: See Elliotts, Inc. v. Commissioner, 716 F.2d 1241 (9th Cir. 1983)]. 2. Draft a short (no more than two-page, single-spaced memo) responding to the following situation:??Vertovec Inc., a large local consulting firm in Utah, hired several new consultants from out of state last year to help service their expanding list of clients. To aide in relocating the consultants, Vertovec Inc. purchased the consultants’ homes in their prior location if the consultants were unable to sell their homes within 30 days of listing them for sale. Vertovec Inc. bought the homes from the consultants for 5 percent less than the list price and then continued to list the homes for sale. Each…

                  Attachments:

                  tax accounting 495438

                  Document Preview:

                  U.S. Supreme Court COMMISSIONER v. DUBERSTEIN., 363 U.S. 278 (1960) 363 U.S. 278 COMMISSIONER OF INTERNAL REVENUE v. DUBERSTEIN ET UX. CERTIORARI TO THE UNITED STATES COURT OF APPEALS FOR THE SIXTH CIRCUIT. No. 376. Argued March 23, 1960. Decided June 13, 1960. * 1. This Court rejects the Government’s suggestion that it promulgate a new “test” to serve as a standard to be applied by the lower courts and by the Tax Court in dealing with numerous cases involving the question what is a “gift” excludable from income under the Internal Revenue Code, since the governing principles are necessarily general and have already been spelled out in the opinions of this Court. Pp. 284-286. 2. The conclusion whether a transfer amounts to a “gift” is one that must be reached on consideration of all the factors. While the principles urged by the Government may, in nonabsolute from as crystallizations of experience, prove persuasive to the trier of facts in a particular case, they cannot be laid down as a matter of law. Pp. 287-289. 3. Determination in each individual case as to whether the transaction in question was a “gift” must be based ultimately on the application of the fact-finding tribunal’s experience with the mainsprings of human conduct to the totality of the facts in the case; and appellate review of the conclusion reached by the fact-finding tribunal must be quite restricted. Pp. 289-291. 4. In No. 376, Duberstein, an individual taxpayer, gave to a business corporation, upon request, the names of potential customers. The information proved valuable, and the corporation reciprocated by giving Duberstein a Cadillac automobile, charging the cost thereof as a business expense on its own corporate income tax return. The Tax Court concluded that the car was not a “gift” excludable from income under 22 (b) (3) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1939. Held: On the record in this case, it cannot be said [363 U.S. 278, 279] that the Tax Court’s conclusion was “clearly erroneous,” and…

                  Attachments:

                  tax accounting 2 495439

                  Document Preview:

                  U.S. Supreme Court HIGGINS v. COMMISSIONER OF INTERNAL REVENUE, 312 U.S. 212 (1941) 312 U.S. 212 HIGGINS v. COMMISSIONER OF INTERNAL REVENUE. No. 253. Argued Jan. 10-13, 1941. Decided Feb. 3, 1941. Rehearing Denied Mar. 3, 1941 See 312 U.S. 714 , 61 S.Ct. 728, 85 L.Ed. –. [312 U.S. 212, 213] Mr. Selden Bacon, of New York City, for petitioner. Mr. Arnold Raum, of Washington, D.C., for respondent. Mr. Justice REED delivered the opinion of the Court. Petitioner, the taxpayer, with extensive investments in real estate, bonds and stocks, devoted a considerable portion of his time to the oversight of his interests and hired others to assist him in offices rented for that purpose. For the tax years in question, 1932 and 1933, he claimed the salaries and expenses incident to looking after his properties were deductible under Section 23(a) of [312 U.S. 212, 214] the Revenue Act of 1932.1 The Commissioner refused the deductions. The applicable phrases are: ‘In computing net income there shall be allowed as deductions: (a) Expenses. … All the ordinary and necessary expenses paid or incurred during the taxable year in carrying on any trade or business ….’ There is no dispute over whether the claimed deductions are ordinary and necessary expenses. As the Commissioner also conceded before the Board of Tax Appeals that the real estate activities of the petitioner in renting buildings2 constituted a business, the Board allowed such portions of the claimed deductions as were fairly allocable to the handling of the real estate. The same offices and staffs handled both real estate and security matters. After this adjustment there remained for the year 1932 over twenty and for the year 1933 over sixteen thousand dollars expended for managing the stocks and bonds. Petitioner’s financial affairs were conducted through his New York office pursuant to his personal detailed instructions. His residence was in Paris, France, where he had a second office. By cable, telephone and mail,…

                  Attachments:

                  tax accounting 3 495440

                  Marathon Inc. (a C corporation) reported $1,000,000 of taxable income in the current year. During the year, it distributed $100,000 as dividends to its shareholders as follows:   •   $5,000 to Guy, a 5 percent individual shareholder. •   $15,000 to Little Rock Corp. a 15 percent shareholder (C corporation). •   $80,000 to other shareholders.  1.         a. How much of the dividend payment did Marathon deduct in determining its taxable income? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)  Amount deductible $   b.

                  Document Preview:

                  Top of Form Marathon Inc. (a C corporation) reported $1,000,000 of taxable income in the current year. During the year, it distributed $100,000 as dividends to its shareholders as follows:?? ??•   $5,000 to Guy, a 5 percent individual shareholder.??•   $15,000 to Little Rock Corp. a 15 percent shareholder (C corporation).??•   $80,000 to other shareholders.??  1.         a.?How much of the dividend payment did Marathon deduct in determining its taxable income? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)??   Amount deductible?$   ?? b.?Assuming Guy’s marginal ordinary tax rate is 35 percent, how much tax will he pay on the $5,000 dividend he received from Marathon Inc.? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)??   Amount deductible?$   ?? c.?Assuming Little Rock Corp.’s marginal tax rate is 34 percent, what amount of tax will it pay on the $15,000 dividend it received from Marathon Inc. (70 percent dividends received deduction)? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)??   Amount deductible?$   ??ebook & resources ?   2.         d.?Complete Form 1120 Schedule C for Little Rock Corp. to reflect its dividends received deduction.?? ? ?? Download the Tax Form and enter the required values in the appropriate fields. ?? ??Please right click on the PDF link and open the PDF link in a new window. Save your completed Tax Form to your computer and then upload it here by clicking “Browse.” Next, click “Save.”?? ?   3.         e-1.?On what line of Little Rock Corp.’s Form 1120 page 1 is the dividend from Marathon Inc. reported.??   Little Rock Corp will report the $15,000 dividend on Form 1120, page 1, line .??  e-2.?On what line of Little Rock Corp.’s Form 1120 is its dividends received deduction reported.??   Little Rock Corp. will report its $10,500 dividends received deduction on Form 1120, page 1, line .???  Bottom of Form

                  Attachments:

                  quiz 4 parts1 amp 2 hwk24 495387

                  help with acct quizzes

                  1st part is in Word doc.

                  2nd part in on mywileyplus

                  ———————————

                  help with hwk on wileyplus.

                  ———————————

                  Thanks!

                  Document Preview:

                  Class, Note: Make sure that you “submit” not “save” your quiz part 1 submission in your WebTycho assignment folder. Also, do not use the “next” or “back” button in WileyPlus. Using the “next” button on the quiz may cause your entry to be deleted and your one attempt to be used up. Once I post a solution set for quiz 4 part 1, no additional late work will be accepted for credit. • A solution to part 1 will be posted using the textbook version of the question. • Note: All exercises & problems in the WileyPlus part 2 are algorithmic. • You will be able to view your WileyPlus part 2 submission and the answers only after the due date of the quiz has been reached. Note: you may not discuss the quiz with anyone except me. You may not post a note in class that would allow others to see your work before I post the solution. Doing so for either of these actions may cause an academic honesty breach. You have the full five days in which to open and complete all parts of this quiz both in WebTycho & in WileyPlus. However, remember you have only one attempt per item. Thanks, Michael J. Omit all General Journal entry explanations. Part 1: Due by midnight on Friday, October 4, 2103. Students should plan on about 1 hour 30 minutes to complete part 1. Attached please find formatted blank Microsoft Word document (Blank Answer Sheet Page 1). Students must use this blank page 1 to submit their quiz part 1. Additionally, please find blank templates for general journal pages and other schedule forms. These are generic templates and students may/should adapt them to their need for preparing their part 1 solution. Students may develop their own general journal & financial statements if they wish. However, all submissions must be in proper journal/statement format. Submissions may be in either Microsoft Word or Adobe Acrobat PDF document format only. Page 1 of 2 Acct221 Quiz 4 Part 1Problem 1: Points = 10: CTU Company…

                  quiz help 495388

                  Managerial Accounting Quiz 7 Score % Name Course: Managerial Accounting Section FILL-IN-THE-BLANK—PRINCIPLES AND TERMINOLOGY INSTRUCTIONS: Complete each of the following statements by writing the appropriate words in the Answers column. ? ??For?? ? ?Answers?Scoring?? ? 0. Managers determine product prices by adding to a cost amount a plus, called a ??markup?? 0. ____?? ? 1. A method of decision making that focuses on the effect of alternative courses of action on the relevant revenues and costs is ??? 1. ____?? ? 2.

                  Document Preview:

                  Managerial Accounting Quiz 7 Score % Name Course: Managerial Accounting Section FILL-IN-THE-BLANK—PRINCIPLES AND TERMINOLOGY INSTRUCTIONS: Complete each of the following statements by writing the appropriate words in the Answers column. ? ??For?? ? ?Answers?Scoring?? ? 0. Managers determine product prices by adding to a cost amount a plus, called a ??markup?? 0. ____?? ? 1. A method of decision making that focuses on the effect of alternative courses of action on the relevant revenues and costs is ??? 1. ____?? ? 2. The relevant financial factors to be considered in a lease or sell decision are differential costs and ??? 2. ____?? ? 3. Costs that have been incurred in the past that are not relevant to the decision are called ??? 3. ____?? ? 4. In a decision to discontinue a product or segment, the relevant costs that will be eliminated are ??? 4. ____?? ? 5. Make or buy options often arise when a manufacturer has excess ?? 5. ____?? ? 6. Decisions to replace usable fixed assets should be based on relevant costs. The relevant costs for a decision of this type are the replacement costs and the ???? 6. ____?? ? 7. The law that prohibits price discrimination within the United States, unless differences in prices can be justified by different costs of serving different customers, is the ???? 7. ____?? ? 8. A net cash outlay of $600,000 for a new piece of equipment could alternatively be invested to earn 8%. The $48,000 forgone by not investing the funds is called ???? 8. ____?? ? 9-11. The three cost concepts used in applying the cost-plus approach to setting normal product prices are:???? ? 9. ?? 9. ____?? ? 10. ?? 10. ____?? ? 11. ?? 11. ____?? ? 12. A cost concept, pioneered by the Japanese, that assumes that the selling price is set by the marketplace is the ??? 12. ____?? ? 13. The term used to describe a situation when the demand for a company’s product exceeds the ability of the company to produce it is ??? 13….

                  Attachments:

                  quiz help 495389

                  Managerial Accounting Quiz 8 Score % Name Course: Managerial Accounting Section FILL-IN-THE-BLANK—PRINCIPLES AND TERMINOLOGY INSTRUCTIONS: Complete each of the following statements by writing the appropriate words or amount in the Answers column. ? ??For?? ? ?Answers?Scoring?? ? 0. The greatest advantage of using a single plant-wide overhead rate is that it is ? simple?? 0. ____?? ? 1. When a plant-wide factory overhead rate is used, the total overhead costs allocated to all products will be (the same, different) ??? 1. ____?? ? 2.

                  Document Preview:

                  Managerial Accounting Quiz 8 Score % Name Course: Managerial Accounting Section FILL-IN-THE-BLANK—PRINCIPLES AND TERMINOLOGY INSTRUCTIONS: Complete each of the following statements by writing the appropriate words or amount in the Answers column. ? ??For?? ? ?Answers?Scoring?? ? 0. The greatest advantage of using a single plant-wide overhead rate is that it is ? simple?? 0. ____?? ? 1. When a plant-wide factory overhead rate is used, the total overhead costs allocated to all products will be (the same, different) ??? 1. ____?? ? 2. A plant-wide factory overhead rate is computed by dividing total budgeted factory overhead costs by the?? 2. ____?? ? 3-5. The three overhead allocation methods are ???? ? 3. 1. ?? 3. ____?? ? 4. 2. ?? 4. ____?? ? 5. 3. ?? 5. ____?? ? 6. When the multiple production department factory overhead rate method is used to allocate factory overhead to products, each department uses (the same, a different) overhead rate ???? 6. ____?? ? 7. Multiple production department factory overhead rates are more accurate than are plant-wide overhead rates. (Answer, “true” or “false”) ? ?? 7. ____?? ? 8. Cost accumulations associated with a given activity are called ?? 8. ____?? ? 9-10. Estimated factory overhead costs for the year are $420,000. All products are processed on the same manufacturing line in a similar manner. Direct labor for the year is estimated to be $120,000 (8,000 hours). ???? ?? ? 9. A plant-wide overhead rate based on direct labor cost would be ? ? 9. ____?? ? 10. A plant-wide overhead rate based on direct labor hours would be ? $? 10. ____?? ? 11-13. Waxon Company produces tables and chairs in two departments, Fabrication and Assembly. The Fabrication Department overhead budget is $240,000, and the Assembly Department overhead budget is $60,000. Direct labor hours budgeted for each department are 16,000 and 5,000…

                  Attachments:

                  quiz questions for chapter 9 495390

                  Quiz Questions for Chapter 9 1. A truck was purchased for $25,000. It has a six-year life and a $4,000 salvage value. Under the straight-line method, what is the assets carrying value (book value) after 2 1/2 years? a. $8,750. b. $12,250. c. $14,583. d. $16,250. 2. On January 1, 20X1, Superior Landscaping Company paid $17,000 to buy a stump remover. If the equipment is used to remove 2,500 stumps per year, it would have an estimated useful life of 10 years and a salvage value of $4,500.

                  Document Preview:

                  Quiz Questions for Chapter 9 1. A truck was purchased for $25,000. It has a six-year life and a $4,000 salvage value. Under the straight-line method, what is the assets carrying value (book value) after 2 1/2 years? a. $8,750. b. $12,250. c. $14,583. d. $16,250. 2. On January 1, 20X1, Superior Landscaping Company paid $17,000 to buy a stump remover. If the equipment is used to remove 2,500 stumps per year, it would have an estimated useful life of 10 years and a salvage value of $4,500. The amount of depreciation to be recorded for the year 20X1, using the units-of-production method and assuming that 3,500 units were produced, is a. $2,380. b. $1,750. c. $1,700. d. $1,250. 3. The sale of equipment costing $8,000 with accumulated depreciation of $6,700 and a sale price of $2,000 would result in a a. gain of $2,000. b. gain of $700. c. loss of $700. d. loss of $1,300. 4. Underestimating the number of tons of a mineral that can be mined over a mineral deposit’s life will result in a. overstated net income each year. b. overstated total assets each year. c. overstated depletion expense each year. d. no effect on total assets each year. 5. A copyright is obtained for what becomes a very successful book. The publisher expects the book to generate sales for 10 years. The copyright should be amortized over a. 2 to 4 years. b. 10 years. c. 40 years. d. the author’s life plus 50 years. The following information pertains to the next two questions. Z Company purchased an asset that cost $24,000 on January 1, 20X2. The asset was expected to have a four-year life and a $4,000 salvage value. 6. The amount of depreciation expense for 20X4 under the double-declining-balance method would be: a. $2,000. b. $3,000. c. $6,000. d. $12,000. 7. Assume that Z Company uses the straight-line depreciation method. If on January 1, 20X5, Z Company sells the asset for $10,000, the cash flow statement would reflect a: a. $1,000 cash inflow from gain on the sale of the…

                  Attachments:

                  random accounting short answer questions 495391

                  Please see attachment

                  Document Preview:

                  Identify and explain the primary differences between fixed and flexible budgets. Describe at least five benefits of budgeting.  Identify and explain the four building blocks of financial statement analysis.   What is a bond? Identify and discuss the different types of bonds.  Job order manufacturing and process manufacturing are two major costing systems used in manufacturing. Briefly contrast the characteristics of these two systems.  Describe what happens to the net income of a company under each of the following assumptions: (a) Sales volume is less than break-even sales. (b) Sales volume is greater than break-even sales. (c) Sales volume is equal to the break-even point.  Based on the following information provided about a company’s operations, calculate its cost of goods purchased and its cash paid for merchandise. What is one advantage and one disadvantage of using the accounting rate of return to evaluate investment alternatives?  A retail store has three departments, A, B, and C, each of which has four full-time employees. The store does general advertising that benefits all departments. Advertising expense totaled $90,000 for the current year, and departmental sales were:  356,250 641,250 427,500 How much advertising expense should be allocated to each department?  A manufacturing company uses an overhead allocation rate based on direct labor cost. The company’s Goods in Process Inventory account has a $15,000 debit balance after all posting is completed, and the cost sheet of the one job still in process shows direct material costs of $6,600 and direct labor costs of $3,000. What is the company’s overhead application rate? ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

                  Attachments:

                  recod adjustments and prepare financial statements lo 1 2 3 4 495393

                  Transactions for Pops Company for 2011 were as follows:

                  a. The owners started the business as a corporation by contributing $3,000 cash in exchange for common stock.

                  b. The company purchased office equipment for $8,000 cash and land for $15,000 cash

                  c. The company earned a total of $22,000 of revenue of which $16,000 was collected in cash.

                  d. The company purchased $890 worth of supplies for cash

                  e. The company paid $6,000 in cash for other opearating expenses

                  f. At the end of the year, the company owed employees $2,480 for work that the employees had done in 2011. The next payday, however is not until January 4, 2012

                  g. Only $175 worth of supplies was left at the end of the year.

                  The office equipment was purchased on January 1 and is expected to last for 8 years ( straightline depreciation no salvage value)

                  Document Preview:

                  Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Date A s s e t s = Cash Balance Sheet Income Statement Revenue Expenses Net Income Assets Liabilities Total assets Total Total Beginning contributed capital Ending contributed capital Statement of Cash Flows Cash from operating activities Cash from investing activities Cash from financing activities Cash collected from customers Cash paid for expenses Total cash from operations Salary expense Net increase in cash Shareholder’s Equity Supplies Equipment Land Liabilities + A/R Wages Pay. Adj. 1 Adj. 2 Adj. 3 Accum. Depr. Pops Company Operating expenses Supplies expense Depreciation expense Statement of Changes in Shareholder’s Equity Net income for the year Current assets Total current assets Equipment-net Current liabilities Wages payable Total current liabilities Shareholder’s equity Common stock Retained earnings Total shareholder’s equity Purchase of equipment Purchase of land Sale of common stock Cash paid to vendors Contributions during the year Beginning retained earnings Ending retained earnings I J K Problem 3-64A a. b. c. d. e. For the Year Ended December 31, 2011 December 31, 2011 Amount Title Kenneth Reimers, Financial Accounting 3e 5.00 6.00 2011.00 7.00 8.00 8000.00 15000.00 9.00 6000.00 10.00 890.00 11.00 12.00 2480.00 13.00 -715.00 14.00 -1000.00 15.00 0.00 6000.00 175.00 8000.00 -1000.00 15000.00 2480.00 0.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 21.00 22.00 23.00 24.00 $0.00 25.00 26.00 27.00 28.00 29.00 $0.00 30.00 31.00 Amount 32.00 33.00 $0.00 34.00 35.00 36.00 37.00 38.00 39.00 40.00 41.00 42.00 43.00 44.00 $0.00 45.00 46.00 $0.00 47.00 48.00 $0.00 49.00 $0.00 $0.00 50.00 51.00 52.00 53.00 54.00 55.00 56.00 57.00 58.00 $0.00 59.00 60.00 61.00 62.00 $0.00 63.00 $0.00 64.00 $0.00 65.00 66.00 CyberCoach: This…

                  Attachments:

                  requirement 1 during its first month of operation the flower landscaping corporation 495396

                  Acct504 week 3 case study 1 the complete accounting cycle Acct504 week 3 case study 1 the complete accounting cycle Document Transcript

                  1. ACCT504 Week 3 Case Study 1 THE COMPLETE ACCOUNTING CYCLE PLEASE DOWNLOAD HERE The Entire Case Study is due Sunday at Midnight Mountain time at the end of Week 3.This Case Study is worth 100 points or 10% of your final course grade. This Case Study relates to TCOs D and E and Chapters 3 and 4.MAKE SURE TO COMPLETE ALL REQUIREMENTS WHICH ARE LISTED BELOW. There are 10 Sheets in the Workbook including this one. All of the Information you need for the Project is located in this Workbook. Requirements Requirement 1 – Prepare the Journal Entries in the General Journal Requirement 2 – Post Journal Entries to the General Ledger Requirement 3 – Prepare a Trial Balance Requirement 4 – Prepare the Adjusting Entries Requirement 5 – Post Adjusting Entries to the General Ledger Requirement 6 – Prepare an Adjusted Trial Balance Requirement 7 Prepare the Financial Statements Requirement 8 – Prepare the Closing Entries Requirement 9 – Post Closing Entries to the General Ledger Requirement 10 – Prepare the Post Closing Trial Balance Sheet in Workbook Journal Entries General Ledger Trial Balance Adjusting Entries General Ledger Adjusted TB Financial Statements Closing Entries General Ledger Post Closing TB Hint for success: review the Week 2 Lecture prior to starting this project. There are also hints contained within certain cells on some of the worksheet tabs .You can hover over the red pointer at the top right-hand corner of the cell to read the hint. Hints are provided for the following balances: 1) the debits for the journal entries on the Journal Entries tab

                  2. 2) The credits for the journal entries on the Journal Entries tab3) The cash balance on the General Ledger tab4) The debits for the trial balance on the Trial Balance tab5) The credits for the trial balance on the Trial Balance tab6) The debits for the adjusted trial balance on the Adjusted Trial Balance tab7) The credits for the adjusted trial balance on the Adjusted Trial Balance

                  Note: Please use this if don’t find it the Attachments:

                  Requirement #1:

                  During its first month of operation, the Flower Landscaping Corporation, which specializes in residential landscaping,

                  Completed the following transactions.

                  March 1

                  Began business by making a deposit in a company bank account of $72,000, in exchange

                  for 7,200 shares of $10 par value common stock.

                  March 1

                  Paid the current month’s rent, $4,500.

                  March 1

                  Paid the premium on a 1-year insurance policy, $3,300.

                  March 7

                  Purchased supplies on account from Parkview Company, $900.

                  March 10

                  Paid employee salaries, $2,200.

                  March 14

                  Purchased equipment from Hammond Company, $9,000. Paid $1,500 down and the balance was

                  placed on account. Payments will be $375.00 per month for 20 months. The first payment is due 4/1.

                  Note: Use accounts payable for the balance due.

                  March 15

                  Received cash for landscaping revenue for the first half of March, $4,896.

                  March 19

                  Made payment on account to Parkview Company, $450.

                  March 31

                  Received cash for landscaping revenue for the last half of March, $5,304.

                  March 31

                  Declared and paid cash dividend of $1,000.

                  Prepare journal entries to record the March transactions in the General Journal below.

                  Attachments:

                  revenue questions 495397

                  Part 1 – Net Revenue per Patient

                  Using the Patient Cost Analysis Form in the Appendix from your “Revenue Management

                  Manual” text (Form A-26), calculate your current costs per patient using the following

                  information.

                  Total Number of Patients $16,245

                  Total Expenses $568,758

                  Fixed Expenses $389,600

                  Total Annual Revenue $1,090,800

                  o What is the Net Revenue per patient

                  Part 2 – Reviewing the Budget

                  Use the 2011 Budget for Main Street Medical Group (see attached-Summerville Family

                  Practice.pdf) as well as the Sample Operating Budget.

                  Compare the month of January to the Month of June.

                  Were these months over-budget or under-budget and why? As an office manager what do

                  you see that can be listed as issues in these months

                  Part 3 – Preparing a Budget for 2012

                  Use the 2011 Budget for Main Street Medical Group (see attached-Summerville Family

                  Practice.pdf). Make the following adjustments and share your results:

                  o Patient Revenue is expected to grow by 3% due to the signing of a new managed

                  care contract. What is the new dollar amount for patient revenue due to this

                  increase

                  o The cost of expenses is expected to increase to 1.5%. What is the new dollar amount

                  for the cost of expenses

                  o A new roof is needed which will cost $50,000. Prepare a new 12 month budget, in

                  MS Word or wordpad or MS Excel, which reflects the 3% growth in patient revenue,

                  the 1.5% in cost of expenses and the cost of the new roof.

                  revenue questions 495398

                  Part 1 – Net Revenue per Patient

                  Using the Patient Cost Analysis Form in the Appendix from your “Revenue Management

                  Manual” text (Form A-26), calculate your current costs per patient using the following

                  information.

                  Total Number of Patients $16,245

                  Total Expenses $568,758

                  Fixed Expenses $389,600

                  Total Annual Revenue $1,090,800

                  o What is the Net Revenue per patient

                  Part 2 – Reviewing the Budget

                  Use the 2011 Budget for Main Street Medical Group (see attached-Summerville Family

                  Practice.pdf) as well as the Sample Operating Budget.

                  Compare the month of January to the Month of June.

                  Were these months over-budget or under-budget and why? As an office manager what do

                  you see that can be listed as issues in these months

                  Part 3 – Preparing a Budget for 2012

                  Use the 2011 Budget for Main Street Medical Group (see attached-Summerville Family

                  Practice.pdf). Make the following adjustments and share your results:

                  o Patient Revenue is expected to grow by 3% due to the signing of a new managed

                  care contract. What is the new dollar amount for patient revenue due to this

                  increase

                  o The cost of expenses is expected to increase to 1.5%. What is the new dollar amount

                  for the cost of expenses

                  o A new roof is needed which will cost $50,000. Prepare a new 12 month budget, in

                  MS Word or wordpad or MS Excel, which reflects the 3% growth in patient revenue,

                  the 1.5% in cost of expenses and the cost of the new roof.

                  Document Preview:

                  Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 INCOME Professional Fees Other Revenue Patient Refunds Refund Insurance Companies EXPENSES Salaries-Physician Owners Payroll Taxes-FICA Physician Payroll Taxes-FUTA Physcian Payroll Taxes-SUTA Physician Insurance-Physician Dues, Memberships, License Fees Meetings & Travel-Physician Meals & Entertainment-Physician Salaries-Primary Care Providers Salaries-Medical Support Salaries-Administrative Payroll Taxes-FICA Staff Payroll Taxes-FUTA Staff Payroll Taxes-SUTA Staff Insurance Staff Pension & Retirement Benefits Meetings & Travel-Staff Supplies-Drugs & Medications Supplies-Medical Supplies-Administrative Supplies-Medical Forms Supplies-Housekeeping/Maintenance Supplies-Computer Laboratory Services Rent-Buildings Utilities Rent/Lease-Furniture & Equipment Depreciation-Medical Equipment Depreciation-Laser Equipment Depreciation-Office Equipment Depreciation-Computer Equipment Property Taxes Maint/Repair-Furniture & Equipment Accounting Services Legal Services Recruitment Employee Development & Training Employee Relations Uniforms & Laundry General Liability Insurance-G&A Professional Liability Insurance Telephone/Internet Access Postage & Freight Printing Books & Subscriptions Marketing Amortization Bank Fees Interest Expense NET INCOME JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUNE JULY AUG SEPT OCT NOV DEC TOTAL % Franchise Tax OPERATING BUDGET FOR 2001 Dividends Net Cash after Dividends Sample…

                  revision accounting task 2 495399

                  Document Preview:

                  Evaluation Summary for Bus. Appl. for Fin., Acc. & IT: 319.1.3-01-10, 2.1-04, 2.5-05 (2008) Final Score: 3.15 (out of 4) Overall comments: The resubmission has completed the presentation section of the task; however, the ARR and payback period calculations need further revisions. Please refer to the provided comments below for details. Resubmit the revised work when ready. Detailed Results (Rubric used: FNT1-319.1.3-01-10, 2.1-04, 2.5-05) Articulation of Response (clarity, organization, word usage, ease of understandability) (1) Unacceptable (2) Needs Revision (3) Meets Standard (4) Exemplary There is no evidence of response to the prompts. The articulation of the response is weak. The articulation of the response is adequate. The articulation of the response is skillful. Criterion Score: 3.00 Accuracy of Mechanics (grammar, punctuation, spelling) (1) Unacceptable (2) Needs Revision (3) Meets Standard (4) Exemplary The work includes several major errors that disrupt the meaning or flow of the response. The work includes a few major errors and/or many minor errors that interfere with the clarity of the response. The work includes a few minor errors but no readily detectable major errors. The work includes no readily detectable major or minor errors. Criterion Score: 3.00 A1. Net Cash Flow (1) Unacceptable (2) Needs Revision (3) Meets Standard (4) Exemplary The candidate does not accurately calculate the net cash flow that should be used for each year in the discounted cash flow analysis. Not applicable. Not applicable. The candidate accurately calculates the net cash flow that should be used for each year in the discounted cash flow analysis. Criterion Score: 4.00 A2. Net Present Value (1) Unacceptable (2) Needs Revision (3) Meets Standard (4) Exemplary The candidate does not accurately calculate the net present value of this project using a discount rate equal to the company’s weighted average cost of capital. Not applicable. Not applicable. The candidate accurately…

                  Attachments:

                  saint leo mba 560 module 6 homework 495400

                  xercise 11-19Margin of safety

                  Information concerning a product produced by Askew Company appears here.

                  Required

                  Determine the following.

                  a. Contribution margin per unit.

                  b. Number of units that Askew must sell to break even.

                  c. Sales level in units that Askew must reach to earn a profit of $360,000.

                  d. Determine the margin of safety in units, sales dollars, and as a

                  percentage. (Edmonds. Survey of Accounting. 2012)

                  Problem 12-14Cost accumulation and allocation

                  Singh Manufacturing Company makes two different products, M and N. The company s two departments are named after the products; for example, Product

                  M is made in Department M. Singh s accountant has identified the following annual costs associated with these two products.

                  Required

                  a. Identify the costs that are (1) direct costs of Department M, (2) direct costs of Department N, and (3) indirect costs.

                  b. Select the appropriate cost drivers for the indirect costs and allocate these costs to Departments M and N.

                  c. Determine the total estimated cost of the products made in Departments M and N. Assume that Singh produced 2,000 units of Product M and 4,000 units of Product N during the year. If Singh prices its products at cost plus 40 percent of cost, what price per unit must it charge for Product M and for Product N?

                  Document Preview:

                  Exercise 11-19Margin of safety Information concerning a product produced by Askew Company appears here. Required Determine the following. a. Contribution margin per unit. b. Number of units that Askew must sell to break even. c. Sales level in units that Askew must reach to earn a profit of $360,000. d. Determine the margin of safety in units, sales dollars, and as a percentage. (Edmonds. Survey of Accounting. 2012) Problem 12-14Cost accumulation and allocation Singh Manufacturing Company makes two different products, M and N. The company’s two departments are named after the products; for example, Product M is made in Department M. Singh’s accountant has identified the following annual costs associated with these two products. v Required a. Identify the costs that are (1) direct costs of Department M, (2) direct costs of Department N, and (3) indirect costs. b. Select the appropriate cost drivers for the indirect costs and allocate these costs to Departments M and N. c. Determine the total estimated cost of the products made in Departments M and N. Assume that Singh produced 2,000 units of Product M and 4,000 units of Product N during the year. If Singh prices its products at cost plus 40 percent of cost, what price per unit must it charge for Product M and for Product N?

                  Attachments:

                  sample acc 495401

                  Document Preview:

                  Problem 3 Condensed financial data of Fairchild Company for 2012 and 2011 are presented below. FAIRCHILD COMPANY?COMPARATIVE BALANCE SHEET?AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2012 AND 2011????2012??2011??Cash??$1,801???$1,091???Receivables??1,757???1,301???Inventory??1,594???1,900???Plant assets??1,897???1,707???Accumulated depreciation??(1,205?)??(1,170?)??Long-term investments (held-to-maturity)??1,299? ??1,462? ????$7,143? ??$6,291? ?? ????????Accounts payable??$1,207???$796???Accrued liabilities??203???245???Bonds payable??1,418???1,631???Common stock??1,893???1,706???Retained earnings??2,422? ??1,913? ????$7,143? ??$6,291? ?? FAIRCHILD COMPANY?INCOME STATEMENT?FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2012??Sales??$6,851??Cost of goods sold??4,691??Gross margin??2,160??Selling and administrative expenses??930??Income from operations??1,230??Other revenues and gains????   Gain on sale of investments??82??Income before tax??1,312??Income tax expense??531??Net income??$781???Additional information:??During the year, $78 of common stock was issued in exchange for plant assets. No plant assets were sold in 2012. Cash dividends were $272.??Prepare a statement of cash flows using the indirect method. (If an amount reduces the account balance then enter with negative sign.) FAIRCHILD COMPANY?Statement of Cash Flows?For the Year Ended December 31, 2012?(Indirect Method)????????$??Adjustments to reconcile net income to?????????$???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????This document was truncated here because it was created in the Evaluation Mode.

                  Attachments:

                  sarbanes act 495402

                  This paper is to write a conclusion about Sarbanes Oxley Act .

                  its a part of total group project so it dose not need introduction

                  2-3 pages is perfect.

                  My other Group member will write about the Act, what it its and its effect, both positives and negatives.

                  More instruaction are provided in the picture attached

                  Attachments:

                  sec 10 k 495403

                  this is a 2 part assignment

                  you can do it like we always do. you look at it and tell me what you think and the amount.

                  i did this last sem in acct 220 using another company. if you need an idea

                  my company i am using for this assignment is Macys. http://www.sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/794367/000119312511082813/d10k.htm

                  the prsentation is do this sunday 04/21

                  the paper is do 04/28

                  Document Preview:

                  SEC 10-K Paper Selecting Your Company Access the most recent SEC 10-K filing of a publicly traded company that has inventory and accounts receivable. The company must sell a tangible product, so do not select hotels, financial services, or other service-oriented businesses. In addition you company should be headquartered in the United States to avoid any currency translation or IFRS issues. Post the name of your company in the SEC 10-K conference for approval. You must select a company that has not been previously selected by another student. Accessing and Reading the SEC 10-K for Your Company Access the most recent SEC 10-K filing for your company by using the ? HYPERLINK “http://www.sec.gov/edgar/searchedgar/companysearch.html” o “Link to SEC EDGAR database” ?EDGAR database on the SEC website? or your company’s website under Investor Relations (or a title similar). If you’ve never used the EDGAR database before, the SEC provides a guide on how to use the database: ? HYPERLINK “http://www.sec.gov/investor/pubs/edgarguide.htm” ?Researching Public Companies Through EDGAR: A Guide for Investors?. In addition, the SEC provides a very useful guide named ? HYPERLINK “http://www.sec.gov/answers/reada10k.htm” ?How to Read an SEC 10-K Report? that you should read before beginning your project. If you’d like a PDF of the guide, you can download it from ? HYPERLINK “http://www.sec.gov/investor/pubs/reada10k.pdf” ?here?. Topical Requirements Specific topics that you should address in your paper include the following: Brief description of company; Major competitors; Brief summary of current events affecting the company; Vertical Analysis of the Balance Sheet (Income Statement is optional); Horizontal Analysis of the Income Statement (Balance Sheet is optional); Analysis of the Statement of Cash Flows including operating, investing, and financing activities sections; and Financial ratios, computation, and interpretation (see Illustration 18-27 on pages 843 and 844 of the…

                  Attachments:

                  sec 10 k 495404

                  this is a 2 part assignment

                  you can do it like we always do. you look at it and tell me what you think and the amount.

                  i did this last sem in acct 220 using another company. if you need an idea

                  my company i am using for this assignment is Macys. http://www.sec.gov/Archives/edgar/data/794367/000119312511082813/d10k.htm

                  the prsentation is do this sunday 04/21-20.00

                  the paper is do 04/28

                  Attachments:

                  see below 495407

                  Multiple Choice Question 53

                  It costs Ross Co. $24 of variable and $10 of fixed costs to produce one bathroom scale which normally sells for $70. A foreign wholesaler offers to purchase 2,000 scales at $30 each. Ross would incur special shipping costs of $2 per scale if the order were accepted. Ross has sufficient unused capacity to produce the 2,000 scales. If the special order is accepted, what will be the effect on net income?

                  $8,000 decrease

                  $12,000 decrease

                  $60,000 increase

                  $8,000 increase

                  Multiple Choice Question 69

                  Carter, Inc. can make 100 units of a necessary component part with the following costs:

                  Direct Materials

                  $120,000

                  Direct Labor

                  20,000

                  Variable Overhead

                  60,000

                  Fixed Overhead

                  40,000

                  If Carter purchases the component externally, $30,000 of the fixed costs can be avoided. At what external price for the 100 units is the company indifferent between making or buying?

                  $200,000

                  $230,000

                  $240,000

                  $170,000

                  Multiple Choice Question 79

                  Mink Manufacturing is unsure of whether to sell its product assembled or unassembled. The unit cost of the unassembled product is $60 and Mink would sell it for $130. The cost to assemble the product is estimated at $42 per unit and the company believes the market would support a price of $170 on the assembled unit. What decision should Mink make?

                  Sell before assembly, the company will be better off by $2 per unit.

                  Process further, the company will be better off by $28 per unit.

                  Sell before assembly, the company will be better off by $40 per unit.

                  Process further, the company will be better off by $58 per unit.

                  Attachments:

                  selected transactions completed by gampfer company during its first fiscal year endi 495408

                  Selected transactions completed by Gampfer Company during its first fiscal year ending December 31 were as follows:
                  Jan. 2. Issued a check to establish a petty cash fund of $3,200.
                  Mar. 14. Replenished the petty cash fund, based on the following summary of petty cash receipts: office supplies, $1,200; miscellaneous selling expense, $410; miscellaneous administrative expense, $620.
                  Apr. 21. Purchased $22,400 of merchandise on account, terms 1/10, n/30. The perpetual inventory system is used to account for inventory.
                  May 20. Paid the invoice of April 21 after the discount period had passed.
                  23. Received cash from daily cash sales for $15,120. The amount indicated by the cash register was $15,152.
                  June 15. Received a 60-day, 10% note for $127,500 on the Cady account.
                  Aug. 14. Received amount owed on June 15 note, plus interest at the maturity date.
                  18. Received $5,440 on the Yoder account and wrote off the remainder owed on a $6,400 accounts receivable balance.
                  Sept. 9. Reinstated the Yoder account written off on August 18 and received $960 cash in full payment.
                  15. Purchased land by issuing a $480,000, 90-day note to Ace Development Co., which discounted it at 8%.
                  Oct. 17. Sold office equipment in exchange for $96,000 cash plus receipt of a $64,000, 90-day, 6% note. The equipment had a cost of $224,000 and accumulated depreciation of $44,800 as of October 17.
                  Nov. 30. Journalized the monthly payroll for November, based on the following data:

                  Salaries Deduction

                  Sales salaries $96,640 Income tax withheld $28,090

                  Office salaries $55,200 Social security tax withheld $9,110

                  Total $151,840 Medicare tax withheld $2,278

                  Unemployment tax rates

                  State unemployment 4.0%

                  Federal unemployment 0.8%

                  Amount subject to unemployment taxes:

                  State unemployment $5,000

                  Federal unemployment 5,000

                  30. Journalized the employer s payroll taxes on the payroll.
                  Dec. 14. Journalized the payment of the September 15 note at maturity.
                  31. The pension cost for the year was $136,000, of which $99,840 was paid to the pension plan trustee.

                  Instructions
                  1. Journalize the selected transactions.
                  2. Based on the following data, prepare a bank reconciliation for December of the current year:
                  a. Balance according to the bank statement at December 31, $202,240.
                  b. Balance according to the ledger at December 31, $175,440.
                  c. Checks outstanding at December 31, $48,960.
                  d. Deposit in transit, not recorded by bank, $21,120.
                  e. Bank debit memo for service charges, $540.
                  f. A check for $11,520 in payment of an invoice was incorrectly recorded in the accounts as $11,020.
                  3. Based on the bank reconciliation prepared in (2), journalize the entry or entries to be made by Gampfer Company.
                  4. Based on the following selected data, journalize the adjusting entries as of December 31 of the current year:
                  a. Estimated uncollectible accounts at December 31, $11,520, based on an aging of accounts receivable. The balance of Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at December 31 was $1,200 (debit).
                  b. The physical inventory on December 31 indicated an inventory shrinkage of $2,360.
                  c. Prepaid insurance expired during the year, $16,300.
                  d. Office supplies used during the year, $2,800.
                  e. Depreciation is computed as follows:

                  Asset Cost Residual Value Useful life Method

                  Building $650,000 0 50 Double-declining

                  Office Equip. 176,000 16,000 5 Straight

                  Store equip 80000 8000 10 Straight

                  f. A patent costing $36,000 when acquired on January 2 has a remaining legal life of eight years and is expected to have value for six years.
                  g. The cost of mineral rights was $390,000. Of the estimated deposit of 650,000 tons of ore, 38,400 tons were mined and sold during the year.
                  h. Vacation pay expense for December, $7,500.
                  i. A product warranty was granted beginning December 1 and covering a one-year period. The estimated cost is 3% of sales, which totaled $1,350,000 in December.
                  j. Interest was accrued on the note receivable received on October 17.
                  5. Based on the following information and the post-closing trial balance shown below, prepare a balance sheet in report form at December 31 of the current year.
                  The merchandise inventory is stated at cost by the LIFO method.
                  The product warranty payable is a current liability.
                  Vacation pay payable:
                  Current liability . $5,100
                  Long-term liability .. 2,400
                  The unfunded pension liability is a long-term liability.
                  Notes payable:
                  Current liability . $ 50,000
                  Long-term liability .450,000

                  Attachments:

                  of sharpe s sales 10 percent is for cash another 60 percent is collected 495411

                  Of Sharpe s sales 10 percent is for cash, another 60 percent is collected in the month following the sale, and 30 percent is collected in the second following the sale. November and December sales for 2010 were $220,200 and $174,100, respectively. Sharpe purchases its raw material two months in advance of is sales equal to 60 percent of their final sale price. The supplier is paid on month after it makes delivery. For example, purchases for April sales are made in February and payment is made in March. In addition, Sharpe, pays $10,300 per month for rent and $20,600 each month for other expenditures. Tax prepayments of $22,800 made each quarter, beginning in March. The company s cash balance at December 31, 2010 was $22,70; a minimum balance of $15,000 must be maintained at all times. Assume that any short-term financing needed to maintain the cash balance is paid off in the month following the month of financing if sufficient funds are available. Interest on short-term loans (12 percent) is paid monthly. Borrowing to meet estimated monthly cash needs take place at the beginning of the month. Thus, if in the month of April the firm expects to have a need for an additional $64,640 these funds would be borrowed at the beginning of April with interest of $646 (i.e., 12%x1/12x$64,640) owed for April being paid at the beginning of May.

                  a. Prepare a cash budget for Sharpe covering the first seven months of 2011.

                  b. Sharpe has $199,700 in notes payable due July that must be repaid or renegotiated for an extension. Will the firm have sufficient cash to repay the notes?

                  Complete (month by month) the cash budget below: Round to nearest dollar.

                  Cash Receipts

                  Sales for cash (10%)

                  First month after sales (60%)

                  Second month after sales (30%)

                  Total Cash Receipts

                  Cash disbursements

                  Raw material

                  Rent

                  Other expenditures

                  Tax prepayments

                  Total Cash Disbursements

                  Net Change in Cash

                  Net change in cash for period

                  (+) Beginning cash balance

                  (-) Interest on short-term borrowing

                  (-) short-term borrowing repayments

                  (=) Ending cash balance b/borrowing

                  New Financing Needed

                  Financing needed for period

                  Ending cash balance 22,700

                  Cumulative borrowing

                  Attachments:

                  short answer ac310 quiz 495412

                  Companies frequently issue both preferred stock and common stock. What are the major differences in the rights of stockholders between these two classes of stock? Are the financial statements of a partnership similar to those of a proprietorship? Discuss. The declining-balance method is an accelerated method of depreciation. Briefly explain what is meant by an accelerated method of depreciation and justify the choosing of an accelerated method. Customer purchases using credit cards are a significant source of revenue for many retailers.

                  Document Preview:

                  Companies frequently issue both preferred stock and common stock. What are the major differences in the rights of stockholders between these two classes of stock? Are the financial statements of a partnership similar to those of a proprietorship? Discuss. The declining-balance method is an accelerated method of depreciation. Briefly explain what is meant by an accelerated method of depreciation and justify the choosing of an accelerated method. Customer purchases using credit cards are a significant source of revenue for many retailers. From the standpoint of a retailer, briefly discuss some advantages and disadvantages of a retail store having its own credit card as opposed to accepting one of the national credit cards (e.g., Visa, MasterCard). What is a contingent liability? Give an example of a contingent liability that is usually recorded in the accounts. What are the similarities and differences between the terms depreciation, depletion, and amortization? Management can choose between two bases in calculating the estimated uncollectible accounts under the allowance method. One basis emphasizes an income statement viewpoint whereas the other emphasizes a balance sheet viewpoint. Identify the two bases and contrast the two approaches. How do the different points of view affect the amount recognized as Bad Debts Expense during the accounting period? Important objectives of a system of internal controls are to safeguard assets and to enhance the accuracy and reliability of the accounting records. Briefly discuss how (1) cost-benefit considerations, (2) the human element, and (3) the size of the business, affect the implementation of a system of internal controls. Identify the three activities that pertain to a petty cash fund, and indicate an internal control principle that is applicable to each activity. (b) When are journal entries required in the operation of a petty cash fund? Identify and explain the principal characteristics of the partnership…

                  Attachments:

                  prob 25 495359

                  Capital Rationing Decision Involving Four Proposals

                  Renaissance Capital Group is considering allocating a limited amount of capital investment funds among four proposals. The amount of proposed investment, estimated income from operations, and net cash flow for each proposal are as follows:

                  The company’s capital rationing policy requires a maximum cash payback period of three years. In addition, a minimum average rate of return of 12% is required on all projects. If the preceding standards are met, the net present value method and present value indexes are used to rank the remaining proposals.

                  Present Value of $1 at Compound Interest
                  Year 6% 10% 12% 15% 20%
                  1 0.943 0.909 0.893 0.870 0.833
                  2 0.890 0.826 0.797 0.756 0.694
                  3 0.840 0.751 0.712 0.658 0.579
                  4 0.792 0.683 0.636 0.572 0.482
                  5 0.747 0.621 0.567 0.497 0.402
                  6 0.705 0.564 0.507 0.432 0.335
                  7 0.665 0.513 0.452 0.376 0.279
                  8 0.627 0.467 0.404 0.327 0.233
                  9 0.592 0.424 0.361 0.284 0.194
                  10 0.558 0.386 0.322 0.247 0.162

                  Required:

                  1. Compute the cash payback period for each of the four proposals.

                  Cash Payback Period
                  Proposal A
                  Proposal B
                  Proposal C
                  Proposal D

                  2. Giving effect to straight-line depreciation on the investments and assuming no estimated residual value, compute the average rate of return for each of the four proposals. If required, round your answers to one decimal place.

                  Average Rate of Return
                  Proposal A %
                  Proposal B %
                  Proposal C %
                  Proposal D %

                  3. Using the following format, summarize the results of your computations in parts (1) and (2) by placing the calculated amounts in the first two columns on the left and indicate which proposals should be accepted for further analysis and which should be rejected. If required, round your answers to one decimal place.

                  Proposal Cash Payback Period Average Rate of Return Accept or Reject
                  A %
                  B %
                  C %
                  D %

                  4. For the proposals accepted for further analysis in part (3), compute the net present value. Use a rate of 15% and the present value of $1 table above. Round to the nearest dollar.

                  Select the proposal accepted for further analysis.
                  Present value of net cash flow total $ $
                  Less amount to be invested $ $
                  Net present value $ $

                  5. Compute the present value index for each of the proposals in part (4). If required, round your answers to two decimal places.

                  Select proposal to compute Present value index.
                  Present value index (rounded)

                  6. Rank the proposals from most attractive to least attractive, based on the present values of net cash flows computed in part (4).

                  Rank 1st
                  Rank 2nd

                  7. Rank the proposals from most attractive to least attractive, based on the present value indexes computed in part (5).

                  Rank 1st
                  Rank 2nd

                  8. The present value indexes indicate that although Proposal has the larger net present value, it is not as attractive as Proposal in terms of the amount of present value per dollar invested. Proposal requires the larger investment. Thus, management should use investment resources for Proposal before investing in Proposal , absent any other qualitative considerations that may impact the decision.

                  Attachments:

                  problem 1 red sauce canning company processes tomatoes into catsup tomato juice and 495360

                  Question is attached !!

                  Document Preview:

                  Problem 1 – Red Sauce Canning Company processes tomatoes into catsup, tomato juice, and canned tomatoes.  During the summer of 20X2, the joint costs of processing the tomatoes were $420,000.  There was no beginning or ending inventories for the summer.  Production and sales value information for the summer is as follows:   Product?Cases?Sales Value at Splitoff Point?Separable Costs?Selling Price??Catsup?100,000?$6 per case?$3.00 per case?$28 per case??Juice?150,000?8 per case?5.00 per case?25 per case??Canned?200,000?5 per case?2.50 per case?10 per case??Question: Determine the amount allocated to each product if the estimated net realizable value method is used, and compute the cost per case for each product.   Problem 2 – Zenon Chemical, Inc. processes pine rosin into three products: turpentine, paint thinner, and spot remover.  During May, the joint costs of processing were $240,000.  Production and sales value information for the month is as follows: Product?Units Produced?Sales Value at Splitoff Point??Turpentine?6,000 liters?$60,000??Paint thinner?6,000 liters?50,000??Spot remover?3,000 liters?25,000??Question: Determine the amount of joint cost allocated to each product if the physical-measure method is used.   Problem 3 – Oregon Lumber processes timber into four products.  During January, the joint costs of processing were $280,000.  There was no inventory at the beginning of the month.  Production and sales value information for the month is as follows:    ? ?Sales Value at??Product?Board feet?Splitoff Point?Ending Inventory??2 x 4’s?6,000,000?$0.30 per board foot?500,000 bdft.??2 x 6’s?3,000,000?0.40 per board foot?250,000 bdft.??4 x 4’s?2,000,000?0.45 per board foot?100,000 bdft.??Slabs?1,000,000?0.10 per board foot?50,000 bdft.??Question: Determine the value of ending inventory if the sales value at splitoff method is used for product costing.  Round to three decimal places when necessary.

                  Attachments:

                  problem 14 9 statement of cash flows 495361

                  PROBLEM 14 9 Prepare a Statement of Cash Flows; Free Cash Flow[LO1, LO2, LO3]

                  Foxboro Company s income statement for Year 2 follows:

                  Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $700,000

                  Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400,000

                  Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,000

                  Selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . 216,000

                  Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,000

                  Gain on sale of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6,000

                  Income before taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90,000

                  Income taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,000

                  Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 63,000

                  Its balance sheet amounts at the end of Years 1 and 2 are as follows:

                  Equipment that had cost $30,000 and on which there was accumulated depreciation of $10,000

                  was sold during Year 2 for $26,000. The company declared and paid a cash dividend during Year 2.

                  It did not retire any bonds or repurchase any of its own stock.

                  Required:

                  1. Using the indirect method, compute the net cash provided by operating activities for Year 2.

                  2. Prepare a statement of cash flows for Year 2.

                  3. Compute the free cash flow for Year 2.

                  4. Briefly explain why cash declined so sharply during the year.

                  Document Preview:

                  PROBLEM 14–9 Prepare a Statement of Cash Flows; Free Cash Flow [LO1, LO2, LO3] Foxboro Company’s income statement for Year 2 follows: Sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $700,000 Cost of goods sold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400,000 Gross margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,000 Selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . 216,000 Net operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84,000 Gain on sale of equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6,000 Income before taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90,000 Income taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,000 Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 63,000 Its balance sheet amounts at the end of Years 1 and 2 are as follows: Equipment that had cost $30,000 and on which there was accumulated depreciation of $10,000 was sold during Year 2 for $26,000. The company declared and paid a cash dividend during Year 2. It did not retire any bonds or repurchase any of its own stock. Required: 1. Using the indirect method, compute the net cash provided by operating activities for Year 2. 2. Prepare a statement of cash flows for Year 2. 3. Compute the free cash flow for Year 2. 4. Briefly explain why cash declined so sharply during the year.

                  Attachments:

                  problem set 8 495362

                  5 3172 166 21246 171 24418 19 44.37 11 43.18 14 42.21 45 41.8 36 37.56 47 32.21 120.08 30.75 75.86 54.05 81.900000000000006 61.83 37.880000000000003 38.82 78.790000000000006 26.4 68.73 36.85 63.83 53.84 51.08 32.83 79.77 72.3 50.21 52.94 47.94 53.09 58.47 34.130000000000003 79.88 27.67 86.29 69.37 48.63 52.46 62.9 78.52 55.43 10.64 44.84 55.95 64.06 53.5 64.17 49.61 64.989999999999995 37.28 50.68 66.400000000000006 53.82 34.31 47.97 76.06 62.43 66 60.57 11.37 65.069999999999993 8.99 58.37 83.51 81.02 29.75 30.4 39.

                  Document Preview:

                  5 3172 166 21246 171 24418 19 44.37 11 43.18 14 42.21 45 41.8 36 37.56 47 32.21 120.08 30.75 75.86 54.05 81.900000000000006 61.83 37.880000000000003 38.82 78.790000000000006 26.4 68.73 36.85 63.83 53.84 51.08 32.83 79.77 72.3 50.21 52.94 47.94 53.09 58.47 34.130000000000003 79.88 27.67 86.29 69.37 48.63 52.46 62.9 78.52 55.43 10.64 44.84 55.95 64.06 53.5 64.17 49.61 64.989999999999995 37.28 50.68 66.400000000000006 53.82 34.31 47.97 76.06 62.43 66 60.57 11.37 65.069999999999993 8.99 58.37 83.51 81.02 29.75 30.4 39.17 964 953 942 920 972 950 937 918 962 959 945 925 968 955 948 919 975 960 945 915 960 954 941 906 107 119 133 73 102 127 75 97 109 52 79 107 95 83 76 5 160 0 5 220 1 5 140 0 10 190 0 10 240 0 10 260 1 15 230 0 15 270 0 15 280 1 20 260 0 20 290 0 20 310 1 950 850 1600 1450 1200 1085 1500 1232 950 718 1700 1485 1650 1136 935 726 875 700 1150 956 1400 1100 1650 1285 2300 1985 1800 1369 1400 1175 1450 1225 1100 1245 1700 1259 1200 1150 1150 896 1600 1361 1650 1040 1200 755 800 1000 1750 1200 21 19 20 60 0 62 24 24 20 68 0 67 22 14 14 50 0 23 27 23 24 74 0 79 20 13 19 52 0 32 19 11 18 48 0 38 21 23 20 64 0 46 19 17 19 55 0 43 21 16 19 56 0 39 16 15 17 48 0 43 20 26 19 65 0 44 23 15 17 55 0 29 22 23 21 66 0 59 21 16 20 57 0 56 19 16 18 53 0 32 25 22 22 69 0 56 22 12 17 51 0 23 21 12 16 49 0 40 22 19 20 61 0 45 17 15 19 51 0 44 23 18 21 62 0 40 21 17 20 58 0 33 23 23 21 67 0 57 19 17 17 53 0 43 22 16 19 57 0 49 21 20 20 61 0 28 19 16 16 51 0 35 24 20 24 68 0 79 19 18 17 54 0 42 19 11 12 42 0 21 23 16 18 57 0 40 19 20 23 62 0 49 19 18 18 55 0 45 23 20 21 64 0 54 25 21 22 68 0 64 20 20 17 57 0 48 18 14 17 49 0 41 24 19 20 63 0 34 22 24 21 67 0 53 18 15 17 50 0 27 22 17 21 60 0 44 23 20 22 65 0 58 21 19 21 61 0 68 22 26 20 68 0 59 18 18 …

                  Attachments:

                  problems and solutions 07 05a p07 05 a 06a 07c final acc 495363

                  Problems and Solutions (07-05A , P07-05 A ,06A, 07C ) final ACC

                  Document Preview:

                  Given P07C P07C Given P07-06A P07-06A Given P07-05A P07-05A a Student Name: Class: General Journal Inv. No. Check Accounts Receivable Ledger Date Description Name or Date No. Terms Amount Accounts Payable Ledger Dec. 16 2/10, n/30 Received credit memo on returned merch. Dec. 15 Trial Balance Purchased office supplies n/10 EOM Dec. 17 Issued credit memo on returned merch. Purchased store equipment Dec. 21 Received payment less discount Dec. 12 Paid invoice less discount Paid inv. less discount and return Received payment less discount and return Sales Journal Cash Receipts Journal General Ledger Received merchandise and invoice Dec. 25 2/10, n/60 December 31 Sold office supplies for cash at cost Inv. Trans. A/R Debit Sales Accounts Other Marge Craig Fireside Company Cash Account No. Issued check to owner for personal use Account Debited Sales Credit Discount Recv. Debit Credit Check issued for sales salaries Dec. 6 Account Cr. Explanation Dec. 4 Accounts Payable-Fireside Company Item no. Balance Issued check for electric bill Dec. 2 Invoice 11/23 SJ3 Nov. 28 Nov. 30 Accounts receivable Cash sales GJ3 Dec.4 GJ2 Dec. 31 CRJ Merchandise inventory Invoice 12/6 Sales Returns and Allowances CR5 CD5 CDJ Office supplies Check figure: Trial balance totals Invoice 12/12 Accounts Receivable-Marge Craig Store supplies Totals Invoice 12/15 Store equipment Office Supplies Sold supplies Accounts Receivable Accumulated depreciation, store equipment Accounts payable SJ4 Dec. 5 PJ3 Purchases Journal Office Supplies SJ6 PJ6 Dec. 9 Office CR6 GJ5 GJ6 Sales returns and allowances Payable Purchases Supplies PJ7 SJ Sales discounts Account Cash Disbursements Journal 12/2 12/3 Accts. 12/15 Pay. Merchandise Inventory Sales salaries expense Payee Debited Nov. 23 Rent expense 12/16 Omni Realty Co. Rent Expense CR3 PJ5 Utilities…

                  Attachments:

                  process costing question 495364

                  see attached. Original work only. Please cite using APA format.

                  Document Preview:

                  Topic: Process costing Have there been any recent developments or changes in this area? Notes from class Cost management systems enable managers to measure the costs of products, services, and customers. Job order and process costing are two of the most popular cost management systems used to cost products and services. Basically, both systems assign expenses to products and services in a different way. Job Order versus Process Costing These two cost management systems are used to allocate overhead and support costs to products (goods and services). A job order costing system estimates costs of products in organizations that produce several types of products. More specifically, a job order costing system estimates costs for different jobs required for customer orders that are unique and customized . During the production process, job costs, such as direct material, direct labor, and overhead, are traced to each job in a job cost sheet. Companies that use this system offer customized products. A home-building company is a good example since they build each home differently based on the specifications of the future homeowner. Alternatively, a process costing system is utilized when all units produced are treated as one type of output. All products manufactured during the time period are homogeneous. For instance, bottled water, cement mix, and canned soda products would fall into this costing system category. The products that are created from the production batch are assigned a unit cost. A process costing system can have multiple stages. This setup is common in industries such as chemicals, basic metals, and pharmaceuticals. When using a multistage process costing system, the first step is to assess costs for each stage of the process and then to assign costs to individual products. We will focus this week on job-order costing and the process associated with calculating the total cost of a job.???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

                  Attachments:

                  project assigment please let me know if you are able to help with this 495366

                  Please see attachment

                  Document Preview:

                  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PROJECT A – Case 9-30 Student Name: SALES BUDGET: Budgeted unit sales Selling price per unit Total Sales April May June Quarter SCHEDULE OF EXPECTED CASH COLLECTIONS: February sales March sales April sales May sales June sales Total Cash Collections MERCHANDISE PURCHASES BUDGET: Add desired ending inventory Total needs Less beginning inventory Required purchases Cost of purchases @ $4 per unit BUDGETED CASH DISBURSEMENTS FOR MERCHANDISE PURCHASES: Accounts payable April purchases May purchases June purchases Total cash payments EARRINGS UNLIMITED CASH BUDGET FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDING JUNE 30 Cash balance Add collections from customers Total cash available Less Disbursements Merchandise purchases Advertising Rent Salaries Commissions Utilities Equipment purchases Dividends paid Total Disbursements over disbursements Excess (deficiency) of receipts Financing: Borrowings Repayments Interest Total financing Cash balance, ending BUDGETED INCOME STATEMENT FOR THE THREE MONTHS ENDED JUNE 30 Sales Variable expenses: Cost of goods sold Contribution Margin Fixed expenses: Advertising Insurance Depreciation Net operating income Interest expense Net income BUDGETED BALANCE SHEET JUNE 30 Assets: Cash Accounts receivable (see below) Inventory Prepaid insurance Property and equipment, net Total assets Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity Accounts payable, purchases Dividends payable Capital stock Retained earnings (see below) Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity Accounts receivable at June 30: May sales x ?% June sales x ?% Total Retained earnings at June 30: Balance, March 31 Add net income Less dividends declared Balance, June 30 ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

                  proquest article van der merwe a amp thomson j 2007 february the lowdown on lean acc 495367

                  Please see attached

                  Document Preview:

                  The Lean Revolution is off and running! But before we get too far in transforming businesses, especially the management accounting support for Lean (aka Lean Accounting or LA), it’s important to slow down just a bit and address some critical questions in the spirit of advancing the thinking for the benefit of practitioners. In this regard we want to answer two questions: (1) Is Lean Accounting a viable replacement for, complement to, and/or supplement for current and evolving management accounting approaches? (2) Does Lean Accounting have the capability to advance two of the more forward-looking roles undertaken by the management accountant: decision support and enterprise optimization? Lean thinking, the foundation for Lean Accounting, has a history of demonstrable benefit and is likely to have a significant impact on the U.S. business landscape. Lean refers to the management system of applying Lean principles to operations, and Lean Accounting refers to attempts to derive monetary management information based on Lean principles. This unique bond between an operations flow design approach (Lean) and a management accounting approach means the process of coming to terms with LA has a number of distinctive traits. The management accountant is required to gain an understanding of Lean thinking, principles, and practices, and a manufacturing shop floor emphasis requires that those from service industries dig a little deeper before they will be comfortable. A careful scrutiny of LA literature (books, articles, the Lean Accounting Summit in September 2006, etc.) reveals a number of assertions (and/or strong implications) related to management accounting that require technical analysis and broader, more open debate for the benefit of practitioners. The process of evaluating LA requires addressing four aspects of the case for it as presented: ( 1 ) LA’s assertions as stated in the literature, (2) understanding the implications of these assertions, (3) questioning the…

                  Attachments:

                  for putul only 495368

                  ACC 206 Week 4 Assignment Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Comprehensive budgeting The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 20X1, follows. WATSON COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 12X1 Assets Cash $4,595 Accounts receivable 10,000 Finished goods (575 units x $7.

                  Document Preview:

                  ACC 206 Week 4 Assignment Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Comprehensive budgeting The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 20X1, follows. WATSON COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 12X1 Assets Cash $4,595 Accounts receivable 10,000 Finished goods (575 units x $7.00) 4,025 Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50) 1,380 Plant & equipment $50,000 Less: Accumulated depreciation 10,000 40,000 Total assets $60,000 Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity Accounts payable to suppliers $14,000 Common stock $25,000 Retained earnings 21,000 46,000 Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity $60,000 The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records: All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 20X2 are: January, 1,500 units,- February, 1,600 units; March, 1,800 units; April, 2,000 units; May, 2,100 units. Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales. Watson uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs. Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month. Watson’s product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs $7. Instructions: Rounding computations to the nearest…

                  Attachments:

                  qat1 tasks 1 5 495369

                  SUBDOMAIN 309.3 – QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS Competency 309.3.1: Decision-Making Models – The graduate uses optimizing models and other models as aids for making more informed decisions. Objective 309.3.1-03: Interpret the solution depicted by a graphical linear programming model. Objective 309.3.1-11: Interpret the constraints depicted on a graphical linear programming model. Objective 309.3.1-12: Interpret the objective function depicted on a graphical linear programming model.

                  Document Preview:

                  SUBDOMAIN 309.3 – QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS Competency 309.3.1: Decision-Making Models – The graduate uses optimizing models and other models as aids for making more informed decisions. Objective 309.3.1-03: Interpret the solution depicted by a graphical linear programming model. Objective 309.3.1-11: Interpret the constraints depicted on a graphical linear programming model. Objective 309.3.1-12: Interpret the objective function depicted on a graphical linear programming model. Introduction: Graphical models enable a manager to visualize the objective function (profit line), constraints, and possible solutions to a given problem, and to make more informed decisions based on that information. Given: Company A produces and sells a popular pet food product packaged under two brand names, with formulas that contain different proportions of the same ingredients. Company A made this decision so that their national branded product would be differentiated from the private label product. Some product is sold under the company’s nationally advertised brand (Brand X), while the re-proportioned formula is packaged under a private label (Brand Y) and is sold to chain stores. Because of volume discounts and other stipulations in the sales agreements, the contribution to profit is $40 per case for product sold to distributors under the company’s Brand X national brand compared to $30 per case for the Brand Y private label product. An ample supply is available of most of the pet food ingredients; however, three additives are in limited supply. The tight supply of nutrient C (one of several nutrient additives), a flavor additive, and a color additive all limit production of both Brand X and Brand Y. The formula for a case of Brand X calls for 4 units of nutrient C, 12 units of flavor additive, and 6 units of color additive. The Brand Y formula per case requires 4 units of nutrient C, 6 units of flavor additive, and 15 units of…

                  qat1 tasks 1 5 495370

                  SUBDOMAIN 309.3 – QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS Competency 309.3.1: Decision-Making Models – The graduate uses optimizing models and other models as aids for making more informed decisions. Objective 309.3.1-01: Use probabilistic simulation to estimate the best decision alternative in a given situation. Introduction: The following task, in which you are asked to conduct a small number of simulation trials, should be done with manual calculations.

                  Document Preview:

                  SUBDOMAIN 309.3 – QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS Competency 309.3.1: Decision-Making Models – The graduate uses optimizing models and other models as aids for making more informed decisions. Objective 309.3.1-01: Use probabilistic simulation to estimate the best decision alternative in a given situation. Introduction: The following task, in which you are asked to conduct a small number of simulation trials, should be done with manual calculations. Please be aware that the simulation results of such a small number of trials would not be sufficient for one to draw valid conclusions in a real situation. A large number of trials run on a computer would be necessary in order to arrive at a valid conclusion. Random numbers are provided in the attached template; these numbers are discrete, uniform, and between 1 and 100 inclusive. Given: Management has asked you to help estimate the average cost per unit to produce a new product so that they can project profits at different selling prices. You will conduct a Monte Carlo simulation for cost behavior using provided probabilistic data for the following cost estimates. Cost per unit for materials, labor, and utilities and their probability distributions are provided in the attached worksheet. In your calculations, round to the nearest cent. Materials: • The probability is .18 that the cost will be $33. • The probability is .23 that the cost will be $35. • The probability is .32 that the cost will be $38. • The probability is .27 that the cost will be $39. Labor: • The probability is .12 that the cost will be $22. • The probability is .18 that the cost will be $23. • The probability is .22 that the cost will be $24. • The probability is .28 that the cost will be $25. • The probability is .20 that the cost will be $28. Utilities: • The probability is .26 that the cost will be $3. • The probability is .43 that the cost will be $4. • The probability is .31…

                  quarterly demand for a product 495371

                  Document Preview:

                  MGSC-303 EXAM III SUM II-2013 NAME:______________________________________________ The quarterly demand for a product(in units) is given below: Quarters: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Demand: 1300 1400 1600 1700 Each unit of product requires 5 hours of labor. A worker works for 500 hours per quarter. Compute the number of workers required each quarter to meet demand? No. of Workers, Q1 = No. of Workers, Q2 = No. of Workers, Q3 = No. of workers, Q4 = Perform a rough-cut capacity planning analysis. Does the plant have the capacity to meet the total demand for the 4 quarters? Assume 7500 labor hours of capacity is available each quarter. ?Qtr. 1?Qtr. 2?Qtr. 3?Qtr. 4?Total??Demand (units)???????Load Labor hrs???????Capacity Labor Hrs.???????Over/Under ??????? Note: Over/Under = Capacity – Load . What is your recommendation? In problem 1, assume the cost of carrying an item in inventory is $50 per unit per year. a) If level production, based on average quarterly demand is planned, compute the annual inventory carrying costs. Assume initial inventory of the product is zero. Use the following table to perform your calculations. Quarters?Aggregate Demand?Planned Production?Beginning Inventory?Ending Inventory?Avg. Qtrly Inventory?? Q1??????? Q2??????? Q3??????? Q4 ??????? Total = Total = Average Qtrly demand = Average Annual Inventory = Annual Inventory carrying cost = If the production capacity is limited to 1300 units per quarter and excess demand is met…

                  Attachments:

                  question 495376

                  Introduction Debates are exercises designed to allow you to strengthen your skills in the areas of communicating your understanding of the underlying concepts, leadership, interpersonal influence, teambuilding, group problem solving, and oral presentation. Conducting debates professionally should give you an opportunity to thoughtfully consider those topics and hear others view on the same. Debate topics and position statements are outlined below. Groups may sign up on a first come, first served basis, by specifying both the debate topic and the position desired (i.e., Pro or Con).

                  Document Preview:

                  Introduction Debates are exercises designed to allow you to strengthen your skills in the areas of communicating your understanding of the underlying concepts, leadership, interpersonal influence, teambuilding, group problem solving, and oral presentation. Conducting debates professionally should give you an opportunity to thoughtfully consider those topics and hear others view on the same. Debate topics and position statements are outlined below. Groups may sign up on a first come, first served basis, by specifying both the debate topic and the position desired (i.e., Pro or Con). Preparation will require substantial library research. Debate Topic: Graduate level Finance education is compulsory to become a successful investor PRO: Your group will stress about the importance of finance courses at graduate level to nurture investors. CON: Your group will want to prove that education is not a precondition to achieve success in the investment industry. Task for Assignment – Getting Ready!! (Individual) Register your name with the instructor by choosing your topic and the stand you will take. Individually prepare and submit your arguments for the topic chosen in the following format. Introduction to the topic and stand you have taken. At least 8 strong and well explained points to prove your stand on the topic. Each of these points must be well researched and the source should be referenced. You will need to clearly explain how your argument proves the stand you are taking for the topic. You can use examples, news item and data, real company or economic information, research findings from relevant research papers or journal articles. Conclusion paragraph where you reiterate and show confidence in proving that your argument is strong enough to attract audience agreement. The write up should be 500 to 750 words and presented in a professional and neat format. Page 1 of 1??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

                  Attachments:

                  questions help 495381

                  please see attached. work is due in 3-4 hrs. No word minimum.

                  Document Preview:

                  No word minimum. Please cite sources using APA format. 1) Regarding Southwest Airlines? Go to ? HYPERLINK “http://money.com/” ?http://money.com? or ? HYPERLINK “http://finance.yahoo.com/” ?http://finance.yahoo.com? and enter the company symbol and then find the financial statements. For your company, analyze the liability section of the balance sheet. For each liability, write a short description. Use information from the notes to help you. Then, calculate the debt-to-equity ratio for the current year with the available information. 2) Select two companies that you would invest in if you had the money. Find their financial statements on the Internet and examine the shareholders’ equity section of their balance sheets. What does your analysis tell you about each firm? Is this a good investment? Explain your findings and conclusion.

                  Attachments:

                  questions help 495383

                  1) A few years ago, the ACME Manufacturing Company installed automated robots worth millions of dollars in its furniture assembly lines, believing that the robots would improve profitability and increase the efficiency of the manufacturing process. However, ACME lost many millions of dollars more despite the fact that it was able to make furniture faster using the robots. Why would this happen? What could have caused this situation? ACME then tried to increase profits (operating income) by making more products that could be sold in a period.

                  Document Preview:

                  1) A few years ago, the ACME Manufacturing Company installed automated robots worth millions of dollars in its furniture assembly lines, believing that the robots would improve profitability and increase the efficiency of the manufacturing process. However, ACME lost many millions of dollars more despite the fact that it was able to make furniture faster using the robots. Why would this happen? What could have caused this situation? ACME then tried to increase profits (operating income) by making more products that could be sold in a period. Should this tactic be used to increase operating income? Would this happen in service companies or only manufacturing companies? Explain. 2) Over the past few decades, the cost structure of manufacturing companies has shifted. In the early 1900s, direct material costs were substantial while fixed costs represented a small fraction of total manufacturing costs. However, the cost structure has reversed and now fixed costs make up the majority of total manufacturing costs. What caused this to happen? What would explain the drastic change in cost structure? Which industries would be most affected by this change?

                  Attachments:

                  quick quiz 25 multiple choice 495384

                  all multiple choice need done as soon as possible….

                  Document Preview:

                  Chapter 11 Quiz Reporting and Analyzing Equity 25 pts This quiz is all multiple choice problems. Please choose the best possible answer for each problem. Each problem is worth one point. Problem 1:  An amount of assets defined by state law that stockholders must invest and leave invested in a corporation is called the:  A. Par value of preferred B. Minimum legal capital C. Premium capital D. Stated value E. Working capital Answer: Problem 2:  The total amount of cash and other assets received by a corporation from its stockholders in exchange for common stock is:  A. Always equal to its par value B. Always equal to its stated value C. Referred to as contributed capital D. Referred to as retained earnings E. Always below its stated value Answer: Problem 3: Stated value of no-par stock is:  A. Another name for redemption value B. An amount assigned to par value stock by the state of incorporation C. The market value of the stock on the date of issuance D. The difference between the par value of stock and the amount below or above par value contributed by the stockholder E. An amount assigned to no-par stock by the corporation’s board of directors Answer:   Problem 4: Stockholders’ equity consists of:  A. Long-term assets B. Contributed capital and retained earnings C. Contributed capital and par value D. Retained earnings and cash E. Premiums and discounts Answer:  Problem 5: A class of stock that does not have a par value and can usually be issued at any price without creating a minimum legal capital deficiency is called:  A. Convertible stock B. No-par stock C. Callable stock D. Noncumulative stock E. Discounted stock Answer:   Problem 6: A corporation’s minimum legal capital is often defined to be the total par value of the shares:  A. Issued B. Authorized C. Subscribed D. Outstanding E. In treasury Answer: Problem 7:  Preferred stock on which the right to receive dividends is forfeited for any year that the dividends are not declared…

                  Attachments:

                  quickbooks project quickbooks 2013 version 495385

                  Hello,I need help with the attached following Quickbooks project.Must be done using Quickbooks 2013 version

                  Document Preview:

                  1/1/2003 21350 43000 32000 65000 32000 48000 4000 1500 2500 1200 1800 3600 6500 3800 6900 22000 1500 2300 2200 3200 4400 3800 2600 250 450 100 500 1200 250 350 650 950 850 20 850 2000 950 2000 5000 4300 500 0 750 0 2000 0 2500 0 0 0 750 0 500 0 1200 0 1500 0 0 0 200 0 250 0 0 0 2400 0 400 0 0 0 0 0 350 0 0 0 450 0 600 0 0 0 0 0 4500 0 2100 0 22900 22900 1000 1000 0 0 500 500 890 890 23000 23000 4400 4400 2500 2500 0 0 500 500 6500 6500 2800 2800 0 0 0 0 500 500 0 0 890 890 0 0 650 650 9000 9000 0 0 4400 4400 0 0 0 0 400 400 0 0 0 0 650 650 8900 8900 5500 5500 2000 2000 0 0 44000 44000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 650 650 0 0 250 250 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 650 650 0 0 4600 4600 6000 6000 1 1 3 3 5 2 2 1 1/5/2003 2500 1/8/2010 950 1/10/2010 1000 1/15/2010 450 1/25/2010 350 1/26/2010 45 1/31/2010 32000 2/2/2010 1200 2/10/2010 24000 2/10/2010 100 2/12/2010 250 450 2/13/2010 32000 2/15/2010 200 2/15/2010 420 2/20/2010 1000 2/20/2010 2500 2/20/2010 4000 2/22/2010 150 2/22/2010 120 2/23/2010 2300 2/24/2010 400 2/27/2010 200 2/28/2010 44000 3/1/2010 450 3/5/2010 2500 3/7/2010 4000 3/9/2010 120 3/9/2010 600 400 3/10/2010 400 3/12/2010 32000 3/15/2010 400 3/17/2010 250 Instructions 1. Use the Easy Step interview to create a new company 3. Tax id: 12-3457892 4. Address: 10755 West 51st Street, New York NY 32561 5. Phone 212 555 1212 Fax: 212 555 2121 6. Email: Phoenix1@phoenix1.com 7. Industry: Retail Shop or Online Commerce 8. Partnership 9. Fiscal year January 10. Business is services and products 11. Record sales individually 12. We do collect Sales tax 13. We do create estimates in QuickBooks 14. We do not track sales…

                  Attachments:

                  quiz 495386

                  1. Accounts receivable appear in the balance sheet A) As current assets, immediately after cash and cash equivalents. B) Only if the balance sheet method of estimating uncollectible accounts is used. C) As either current assets or noncurrent assets, depending on whether the allowance method or the direct write-off method is used to account for uncollectible accounts. D) As current assets, combined with cash and cash equivalents. 2. On April 30, 2009, Tilton Products purchased machinery for $88,000.

                  Document Preview:

                  1. Accounts receivable appear in the balance sheet A) As current assets, immediately after cash and cash equivalents. B) Only if the balance sheet method of estimating uncollectible accounts is used. C) As either current assets or noncurrent assets, depending on whether the allowance method or the direct write-off method is used to account for uncollectible accounts. D) As current assets, combined with cash and cash equivalents. 2. On April 30, 2009, Tilton Products purchased machinery for $88,000. The useful life of this machinery is estimated at 8 years, with an $8,000 residual value.Refer to the information above. Assume that in its financial statements, Tilton Products uses straight-line depreciation and the half-year convention. Depreciation expense recognized on this machinery in 2009 and 2010 will be: A) $6,000 in 2009 and $12,000 in 2010. B) $5,000 in 2009 and $10,000 in 2010. C) $5,500 in 2009 and $11,000 in 2010 D) $7,500 in 2009 and $11,000 in 2010. 3. On April 30, 2009, Tilton Products purchased machinery for $88,000. The useful life of this machinery is estimated at 8 years, with an $8,000 residual value.Refer to the information above. Assume that in its financial statements, Tilton Products uses straight-line depreciation and the half-year convention.Refer to the information above. Assume that in its financial statements, Tilton Products uses straight-line depreciation and rounds depreciation for fractional years to the nearest month. Depreciation expense recognized on this machinery in 2009 and 2010 will be: A) $6,667 in 2009 and $10,000 in 2010. B) $5,833 in 2009 and $10,000 in 2010. C) $10,000 in 2009 and $10,000 in 2010. D) $2,333 in 2009 and $7,000 in 2010. 4. During the current year, Carl Equipment Stores had net sales of $600 million, a cost of goods sold of $500 million, average accounts receivable of $75 million, and average inventory of $50…

                  Attachments:

                  please help with accounting homework 495332

                  Please see attachment

                  Document Preview:

                  49680 78000 138000 7500 12360 Selling and administrative expenses Purchases Sales revenue Merchandise inventory, January 1, 2012 Merchandise inventory, December 31, 2012 Requirements: 2. Snyder sold 6,000 brushes 2012. Compute the unit cost for one brush. Snyder Brush Company sells standard hair brushes. The following information summarizes Snyder’s operating activities for 2012: 1. Prepare an income statement for 2012. Compute the ratio of operating expense to total revenue and operating income to total revenue. ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

                  please help me with this i need it in 12hours 495333

                  Questions:

                  1)

                  a) Using the domestic price PolyPrin receives and the normal mark-ups, distribution costs and duties, calculate a possible retail price in the Australian market.

                  b) Determine the cost to produce one dress, and using this plus the normal mark-ups and distribution costs and duties, calculate the potential retail price in the Australian market. :

                  2) Which pricing scenario is better for the company? Explain your answer, considering key factors beyond costing that influences pricing decisions.

                  3) Given this information, what price would you ultimately charge, and why? How would you enter the Australian market and distribute the product?

                  Attachments:

                  please just do it as the instruction demand thank you 495334

                  Please see attachment

                  Document Preview:

                  MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING-TAKE HOME QUIZ THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ARE TO BE TYPED. THE QUIZ IS DUE AT THE START OF CLASS. BRING TWO TYPED COPIES TO CLASS (SHOW ALL WORK!!!!!) Properly label all totals, subtotals, and financial statements Use the following information to prepare the required financial statements as instructed below: Administrative salaries expense $ 119,000 Advertising expense 12,000 Direct labor 110,000 Depreciation expense, factory 18,000 Finished goods inventory,1/1 27,000 Accounting and auditing expense 50,000 Direct material inventory,1/1 42,000 Plant maintenance expense 35,000 Work in process inventory,1/1 9,000 Sales discount 15,000 Factory cleaning expense 30,000 Direct material purchases 177,000 Manufacturing design expense 3,000 Legal expense 9,000 Gross sales 998,000 Indirect material 22,000 Depreciation expense 16,000 Plant property tax expense 8,000 Direct material inventory,12/31 39,000 Indirect labor 48,000 Manufacturing waste expense 15,000 Work in process inventory, 12/31 7,000 Storage and warehouse expense 12,000 Finished goods inventory, 12/31 29,000 Freight out 11,000 Security expense, plant 27,000 Sales returns and allowances 4,000 Other manufacturing overhead 13,000 Utilities expense 5,000 Plant warehouse expense 8,000 Insurance expense, selling 7,000 Research expense, Plant 15,000 Consulting expense 21,000 Factory quality control expense 13,000 Store rental expense 55,000 Instructions: Prepare the cost of goods manufacturing schedule and a separate income statement for Joy and Peace…

                  Attachments:

                  a plus writer 495336

                  Please see excel spreadsheet

                  Activity-based Costing ProblemView more

                  Objectives:

                  Complete the attached excel spreadsheet.

                  Click the Assignment Files tab to submit your assignment.

                  Document Preview:

                  1050000 2350000 3600000 1400000 R&D activities fall into four pools with the following annual costs: Market Analysis Product Design Product Development Prototype Testing Activity analysis determines that the appropriate cost drivers and their usage for the four activities are: Cost Drivers Activities Total Estimated Drivers Hours of analysis Number of designs Number of products Number of tests 1500 hours 2500 designs 90 products 500 tests a) Compute the activity-based overhead rate for each pool. Use appropriate excel formulas to show your work b) How much cost would be charged to an in-house manufacturing department that consumed 1,800 hours of Show your work. market analysis time, was provided 280 designs relating to 10 products and requested 92 engineering tests? Total c) How much cost would serve as the basis for for pricing an R&D bid with an outside company on a contract that would consume 800 hours of analysis time, require 178 designs relating to 3 products, and result in 70 engineering tests? d) What is the benefit to Acme Manufacturing of applying activity-based costing to its R&D activity for both in-house and outside charging purposes? Acme Manufacturing Company of Portland, Oregon has a Research & Development department that currently provides services to in-house manufacturing departments. Other manufacuturers have expressed interested in using Acme’s R&D department for special projects. Management has decided to conduct an activity-based costing system in order to determine charges for both outside and in-house users of the department’s services. ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

                  Attachments:

                  ppt presentation case study 2 including 8 10 min voiceover due april 9th tomorrow at 495338

                  ALL OF BTN 6-8 PAGE 291 Title slide must be the 1st slide, and the final slide must be your reference list. The presentation itself (voiceover) should be 8-10 minutes long. In addition to recording the Voiceover, the text of your Voiceover must be written into the Notes section of each slide.

                  Document Preview:

                  [GB518 | Financial Accounting Principles and Analysis] Unit 4 – Assignment 2 Case Study | Part 2 The second and final part of this project is due at the end of Unit 4. Part 2 of the Case Study Project is a PowerPoint presentation with voiceover. The Voiceover will be the narrative you would be presenting as if this were a live presentation. You will, in essence, be making a presentation to the Board of Directors of your organization. Your Unit 2 Part 1 of the Case Study will be the beginning point for your PowerPoint presentation. Begin with a brief introduction of the company. Then, using your Unit 2 Case Study assignment as the basis, build a PowerPoint Presentation that discusses all required components of textbook “Between the Numbers” problems BTN 1-8 and BTN 3-8. In addition to the information included in your previous Case Study Part 1, include 1 or 2 slides that will incorporate the requirements for the Between the Numbers Problem BTN 6-8 on page 291 of your textbook. But, instead of using a local college, respond to the requirements for BTN 6-8 using YOUR company. Keep in mind that the members of the board may or may not have read the report you completed in Parts 1 of the project. Even though this will be a brief presentation, it should include all essential information and data. This aspect of the presentation, but also the proper perspective they need to make informed decisions. Conclude your presentation with a Summary slide. The Power Point presentation should include 10 – 12 slides. The first slide must be a title slide, and the final slide must be your reference list. The presentation itself (voiceover) should be 8-10 minutes long. In addition to recording the Voiceover, the text of your Voiceover must be written into the “Notes” section of each slide. Proper grammar and spelling will be an important part of the assignment. Be sure to perform a Spell Check. Remember this very important presentation…

                  ppt presentation including 8 10 min voiceover due april 9th tomorrow at 10 00 a m 495339

                  ALL OF BTN 6-8 PAGE 291

                  Title slide, and the final slide must be your reference list. The presentation itself
                  (voiceover) should be 8-10 minutes long. In addition to recording the Voiceover, the text
                  of your Voiceover must be written into the Notes section of each slide.

                  Document Preview:

                  Unit 4 – Assignment 2 [GB518 | Financial Accounting Principles and Analysis] 1 Case Study | Part 2 The second and final part of this project is due at the end of Unit 4. Part 2 of the Case Study Project is a PowerPoint presentation with voiceover. The Voiceover will be the narrative you would be presenting as if this were a live presentation. You will, in essence, be making a presentation to the Board of Directors of your organization. Your Unit 2 Part 1 of the Case Study will be the beginning point for your PowerPoint presentation. Begin with a brief introduction of the company. Then, using your Unit 2 Case Study assignment as the basis, build a PowerPoint Presentation that discusses all required components of textbook “Between the Numbers” problems BTN 1-8 and BTN 3-8. In addition to the information included in your previous Case Study Part 1, include 1 or 2 slides that will incorporate the requirements for the Between the Numbers Problem BTN 6-8 on page 291 of your textbook. But, instead of using a local college, respond to the requirements for BTN 6-8 using YOUR company. Keep in mind that the members of the board may or may not have read the report you completed in Parts 1 of the project. Even though this will be a brief presentation, it should include all essential information and data. This aspect of the presentation, but also the proper perspective they need to make informed decisions. Conclude your presentation with a Summary slide. The Power Point presentation should include 10 – 12 slides. The first slide must be a title slide, and the final slide must be your reference list. The presentation itself (voiceover) should be 8-10 minutes long. In addition to recording the Voiceover, the text of your Voiceover must be written into the “Notes” section of each slide. Proper grammar and spelling will be an important part of the assignment. Be sure to perform a Spell Check. Remember this very important presentation technique – Do not present slides that contain too…

                  Attachments:

                  prepare the 20xx statement of cost of goods manufactured prepare the 20xx income sta 495340

                  Please see attachment

                  Document Preview:

                  1/1/2010 12/31/2010 85000 105000 120000 105000 125000 110000 75000 25000 16000 205000 6500 26000 135000 85000 4500 15000 7500 950000 150000 3500 4500 1 2 The following information was available for Hamilton Industries for the year 20XX: Inventories Materials Work in process Finished goods Advertising expense Depreciation expense-office equipment Depreciation expense-factory equipment Direct Labor Heat, light, and power-factory Indirect labor Materials purchased Office salaries expense Property taxes-factory Property taxes-headquarters Rent expense-factory Miscellaneous cost-factory Supplies-factory Sales Sales salaries expense Prepare the 20XX statement of cost of goods manufactured. Hamilton Industries Statement of Cost of Goods Manufactured For the Year ended December 31, 20XX Income Statement Prepare the 20XX income statement. Requirements: Module 10 Assignment: ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

                  Attachments:

                  prepare a bank reconciliation justquestionansweronly 495341

                  On May 31, 2010, Sharp Company had a cash balance in its general ledger of $6,675. The company’s bank statement from National Bank showed a May 31 balance of $8,240. The following facts have come to your attention

                  a:Sharp’s May 31 deposit of $1,000 was not included on the bank statement because it was dropped in the night depository after bank hours on May 31

                  b The banks general service charge for the month was $100

                  c the bank collected a note receivable of $1,500 for Sharp Company along with an additional $58 for interest. The bank deducted a $30 fee for this service. Sharp Company had not accured any interest on the note.

                  d. Sharp’s bookkeeper erroneously recoreded a payment to Williams Company for $192 as $129. The check cleared the bank for the correct amount of 192

                  e. Sharp’s outstanding checks at May 31 totaled $1,200

                  Requirements

                  1. Prepare a bank reconciliation as of May 31

                  2. Prepare the necessary adjustments to the accounting equation to update the records of sharp company

                  Document Preview:

                  Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Bank Reconciliation Bank: Add: Less: Total outstanding checks Books: Deduct: Add: Assets = Shareholders’ Equity Contributed capital + Retained earnings cash Liabilities + bank fees Problem 4-47A Sharp Company Balance, May 31 Correct (adjusted) book balance, May 31 Correct (adjusted) bank balance, May 31 May 31 Deposit in transit Amount Title Reimers, Financial Accounting 3e 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00 $0.00 13.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 21.00 22.00 23.00 24.00 25.00 26.00 27.00 28.00 29.00 30.00 31.00 ($100.00) ($100.00) 32.00 33.00 34.00 35.00 36.00 37.00 38.00 39.00 40.00 CyberCoach: This amount must equal the Adjusted book balance in cell H27. Otherwise, you have not reconciled. CyberCoach: This amount must equal the Adjusted bank balance in cell H16. Otherwise, you have not reconciled. CyberCoach: Enter amounts as a positive number in cells H24, H25, and H26 . Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Bank Reconciliation Bank: Add: Less: Total outstanding checks Books: Deduct: Add: Assets = Shareholders’ Equity Contributed capital + Retained earnings cash Liabilities + bank fees Problem 4-47A Sharp Company Balance, May 31 Correct (adjusted) book balance, May 31 Correct (adjusted) bank balance, May 31 May 31 Deposit in transit Amount Title Reimers, Financial Accounting 3e 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00 $0.00 13.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 21.00 22.00 23.00 24.00 25.00 26.00 27.00 28.00 29.00 30.00 31.00 ($100.00) ($100.00) 32.00 33.00 34.00 35.00 36.00 37.00 38.00 39.00 40.00 CyberCoach: This amount must equal the Adjusted book balance in cell H27. Otherwise, you have not reconciled. CyberCoach: This amount must equal the Adjusted bank…

                  Attachments:

                  prepare a sales budget and prepare a production budget 495344

                  True Note Audio Company manufactures two models of speakers, DL and XL. Review True Note’s production and sales data for the month of November in the Excel Template below, then:

                  This assignment needs to be done in the excel template I uploaded.

                  Thank you

                  Document Preview:

                  380 140 450 110 4400 3200 2950 2100 120 170 1 1 DL XL Estimated inventory in units November 1 Desired Inventory in units November 30 Expected sales volume in units: North region South region Unit sales price True Note Audio Company Sales Budget For the month ending November Product and region Unit sales volume Unit selling price Total Sales Production Budget Units Prepare a sales budget. Prepare a production budget. Requirements: True Note Audio Company manufactures two models of speakers, DL and XL. True Note posted the following production and sales data for the month of November. Module 11 Assignment ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

                  Attachments:

                  the present value and net present value and payback period of a project that has a t 495347

                  determine the present value and net present value and payback period of a project that has a total cost of $20,000 for the three year period, utilizing an 8% discount rate. That forecasts incremental increases in profit over the next three years of $8,000, $9,000 and $10,000.

                  Document Preview:

                  determine the present value and net present value and payback period of a project that has a total cost of $20,000 for the three year period, utilizing an 8% discount rate. That forecasts incremental increases in profit over the next three years of $8,000, $9,000 and $10,000.??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

                  Attachments:

                  principles of account ii 495348

                  Principles of Account II

                  Document Preview:

                  Principles of Account II 1. Sharp Company has $18,000 to invest. The company is trying to decide between two alternative uses of the funds as follows: Invest in Invest in Project A Project B Investment required $ 18,000 $ 18,000 Annual cash inflows $ 6,500 $ 0 Single cash inflow at the end of 12 years $ 68,000 Life of the project 12 years 12 years Sharp Company uses a 17% discount rate. (Ignore income taxes.) Click here to view Exhibit 11B-1 and Exhibit 11B-2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables. Required: Determine the net present value. (Negative amounts should be indicated by a minus sign. Round discount a. factor(s) to 3 decimal places, other intermediate calculations and final answers to the nearest whole dollar.) Net Present Value Project A $ Project B $ b. Which investment would you recommend that the company accept? Project A Project B 2. Wriston Company has $300,000 to invest. The company is trying to decide between two alternative uses of the funds. The alternatives are as follows: A B Cost of equipment required $ 300,000 $ 0 Working capital investment required $ 0 $ 300,000 Annual cash inflows $ 56,000 $ 48,000 Salvage value of equipment in nine years $ 14,000 $ 0 Life of the project 9 years 9 years The working capital needed for project B will be released for investment elsewhere at the end of nine years. Wriston Company uses a 10% discount rate. (Ignore income taxes.) Click here to view Exhibit 11B-1 and Exhibit 11B-2, to determine the appropriate discount factor(s) using tables. Required: a. Calculate net present value for each project. (Negative amounts should be indicated by a minus sign.Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Round discount factor(s) to 3…

                  Attachments:

                  principles of accounting ii final 495350

                  Principles of Accounting II
                  1. (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Gull Inc. is considering the acquisition of equipment that costs $570,000 and has a useful life of 6 years with no salvage value. The incremental net cash flows that would be generated by the equipment are:
                  Incremental net cash flows
                  Year 1
                  $148,000
                  Year 2
                  $204,000
                  Year 3
                  $153,500
                  Year 4
                  $170,500
                  Year 5
                  $160,500
                  Year 6
                  $139,500
                  If the discount rate is 10%, the net present value of the investment is closest to: (Use exhibit11b-1, exhibit11b-2) rev: 12_14_2012, 12_21_2012
                  $406,000
                  $262,884
                  $143,116
                  $713,116
                  2.
                  Jerston Company has an annual plant capacity of 3,000 units. Data concerning this product are given below:
                  Annual sales at regular selling prices
                  2,800 units
                  Manufacturing costs:
                  Variable
                  $
                  26 per unit
                  Fixed (annual) $ 74,500
                  Selling and administrative expenses:
                  Variable (sales commissions) $ 9 per unit
                  Fixed (annual)
                  $
                  17,000
                  The company has received a special order for 200 units at a selling price of $60 each. Regular sales would not be affected, and sales commissions on the 200 units would be reduced by one-third. This special order would have no impact on total fixed costs.
                  Required:
                  a.
                  Determine the net advantage (disadvantage) for the special order. (Input the amount as a positive
                  value.)
                  (Click to select)
                  $
                  b. The company should accept the special order.
                  Yes
                  No
                  3. Coakley Beet Processors, Inc., processes sugar beets in batches. A batch of sugar beets
                  costs $52 to buy from farmers and $14 to crush in the company’s plant. Two intermediate
                  products, beet fiber and beet juice, emerge from the crushing process. The beet fiber can
                  be sold as is for $30.00 or processed further for $19.00 to make the end product industrial
                  fiber that is sold for $39.00. The beet juice can be sold as is for $47.20 or processed
                  further for $33.04 to make the end product refined sugar that is sold for $78. How much
                  profit (loss) does the company make by processing the intermediate product beet juice
                  into refined sugar rather than selling it as is?
                  $(68.24)
                  $(26.04)
                  $(16.24)
                  $(2.24)
                  4.
                  The Litton Company has established standards as follows:
                  Direct material: 3 pounds per unit @ $5.20 per pound = $15.60 per unit
                  Direct labor: 2 hours per unit @ $8 per hour = $16 per unit
                  Variable manufacturing overhead: 2 hours per unit @ $3 per hour = $6 per unit
                  Actual production figures for the past year are given below. The company records the materials price variance when
                  materials are purchased.
                  Units produced 1,800 units
                  Direct material used 5,660 pounds
                  Direct material purchased (6,660) pounds $23,976
                  Direct labor cost (3,500 hours) 29,050
                  Variable manufacturing overhead cost incurred $10,520
                  The company applies variable manufacturing overhead to products on the basis of standard direct labor-hours.
                  The materials quantity variance is:
                  $260 F
                  $1,352 U
                  $5,660 U
                  $260 U
                  5. Financial statements of Ansbro Corporation follow:
                  Comparative Balance Sheet
                  Ending Balance
                  Beginning Balance
                  Assets:
                  Cash and cash equivalents
                  $78
                  $59
                  Accounts receivable
                  127
                  102
                  Inventory
                  72
                  53
                  Property, plant and equipment
                  658
                  620
                  Less accumulated depreciation
                  402
                  313
                  Total assets
                  $533
                  $521
                  Liabilities and stockholder’s equity:
                  Accounts payable
                  $79
                  $106
                  Bonds payable
                  230
                  236
                  Common stock
                  121
                  118
                  Retained earnings
                  103
                  61
                  Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity
                  $533
                  $521
                  Income Statement
                  Sales
                  $875
                  Cost of goods sold
                  506
                  Gross margin
                  369
                  Selling and administrative expenses
                  209
                  Net operating income
                  160
                  Income taxes
                  48
                  Net income
                  $112
                  Cash dividends were $70. The company did not dispose of any property, plant, and equipment. It did not issue any bonds payable or repurchase any of its own common stock. The following question pertain to the company’s statement of cash flows. The net cash provided by (used in) operating activities for the year was:
                  $130
                  $112
                  $160
                  $18
                  6. (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Rushforth Manufacturing has $126,000 to invest in either Project A or Project B. The following data are available on these projects:
                  Project A
                  Project B
                  Cost of equipment needed now
                  $126,000
                  $58,000
                  Working capital investment needed now
                  $68,000
                  Annual cash operating inflows
                  $56,000
                  $30,400
                  Salvage value of equipment in 6 years
                  $19,000
                  Both projects will have a useful life of 6 years. At the end of 6 years, the working capital investment will be released for use elsewhere. Rushforth’s required rate of return is 11%. The net present value of Project B is: (Round your ‘PV factors’ to three decimal places. Round your other intermediate calculations and final answer to the nearest whole dollar.) (Use exhibit11b-1, exhibit11b-2) rev: 12_14_2012, 12_21_2012
                  $13,860
                  $70,622
                  $39,002
                  $2,622
                  7. Carpon Lumber sells lumber and general building supplies to building contractors in a medium-sized town in Montana. Data regarding the store’s operations follow: Sales are budgeted at $450,000 for November, $460,000 for December, and $480,000 for January. Collections are expected to be 70% in the month of sale, 27% in the month following the sale, and 3% uncollectible. The cost of goods sold is 75% of sales. The company desires to have an ending merchandise inventory equal to 60% of the next month’s cost of goods sold. Payment for merchandise is made in the month following the purchase. Other monthly expenses to be paid in cash are $26,600. Monthly depreciation is $19,000. Ignore taxes.
                  Statement of Financial Position October 31
                  Assets
                  Cash
                  $22,000
                  Accounts receivable (net of allowance for uncollectible accounts)
                  80,000
                  Inventory
                  202,500
                  Property, plant and equipment (net of $609,000 accumulated depreciation)
                  1,149,000
                  Total assets
                  $1,453,500
                  Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
                  Accounts payable
                  $135,000
                  Common stock
                  700,000
                  Retained earnings
                  618,500
                  Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
                  $1,453,500
                  The accounts receivable balance, net of uncollectible accounts, at the end of December would be:
                  $138,000
                  $124,200
                  $115,000
                  $322,000
                  8. LHU Corporation makes and sells a product called Product WZ. Each unit of Product WZ requires 1.6 hours of direct labor at the rate of $6.00 per direct labor-hour. Management would like you to prepare a Direct Labor Budget for June. The company plans to sell 19,500 units of Product WZ in June. The finished goods inventories on June 1 and June 30 are budgeted to be 600 and 140 units, respectively. Budgeted direct labor costs for June would be:
                  $191,616
                  $187,200
                  $182,784
                  $114,240
                  9.
                  Diorio Corporation keeps careful track of the time required to fill orders. The times recorded for a particular order appear below:
                  Hours
                  Move time
                  4.6
                  Wait time
                  24.9
                  Queue time
                  7.2
                  Process time
                  3.3
                  Inspection time
                  0.2
                  The throughput time was:
                  32.1 hours
                  40.2 hours
                  15.3 hours
                  8.1 hours
                  10. (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Czaplinski Corporation is considering a project that would require an investment of $823,000 and would last for 6 years. The incremental annual revenues and expenses generated by the project during those 6 years would be as follows:
                  Sales
                  $224,000
                  Variable expenses
                  30,000
                  Contribution margin
                  194,000
                  Fixed expenses:
                  Salaries
                  29,000
                  Rents
                  21,000
                  Depreciation
                  83,000
                  Total fixed expenses
                  133,000
                  Net operating income
                  $61,000
                  The scrap value of the project’s assets at the end of the project would be $42,000. The payback period of the project is closest to:
                  6.6 years
                  5.7 years
                  12.9 years
                  13.5 years
                  11. The Tingey Company has 500 obsolete microcomputers that are carried in inventory at a total cost of $744,000. If these microcomputers are upgraded at a total cost of $103,000, they can be sold for a total of $208,000. As an alternative, the microcomputers can be sold in their present condition for $51,200. Suppose the selling price of the upgraded computers has not been set. At what selling price per unit would the company be as well off upgrading the computers as if it just sold the computers in their present condition? (Round your answer to one decimal place.)
                  $308.4
                  $795.2
                  $216.24
                  $102.4
                  12. Aide Industries is a division of a major corporation. Data concerning the most recent year appears below:
                  Sales $18,000,000
                  Net operating income $918,000
                  Average operating assets $4,600,000
                  The division’s margin is closest to:
                  30.7%
                  20.0%
                  25.6%
                  5.1%
                  13.
                  Eckels Wares is a division of a major corporation. The following data are for the latest year of operations:
                  Sales $ 32,400,000
                  Net operating income $ 1,782,000
                  Average operating assets $ 12,000,000
                  The company’s minimum required rate of return 12 %
                  Required:
                  a. What is the division’s margin? (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)
                  Margin %
                  b. What is the division’s turnover? (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)
                  Turnover times
                  c.
                  What is the division’s return on investment (ROI)? (Do not round intermediate calculations and
                  round your final answer to 2 decimal places.)
                  Return on investment %
                  d. What is the division’s residual income?
                  Residual income $
                  14.
                  Gentile Corporation makes a product with the following standard costs:
                  Standard
                  Quality or Hours
                  Standard Price or
                  Rate
                  Inputs
                  Direct materials 7.5 kilos $6.00 per kilo
                  Direct labor 0.9 hours $12.40 per hour
                  Variable overhead 0.9 hours $6.90 per hour
                  The company produced 6,100 units in May using 38,530 kilos of direct material and 4,600 direct
                  labor-hours. During the month, the company purchased 40,870 kilos of the direct material at
                  $7.30 per kilo. The actual direct labor rate was $18.90 per hour and the actual variable overhead
                  rate was $6.60 per hour.
                  The company applies variable overhead on the basis of direct labor-hours. The direct materials
                  purchases variance is computed when the materials are purchased.
                  The variable overhead efficiency variance for May is:
                  $6,141 U
                  $5,874 F
                  $6,141 F
                  $5,874 U
                  15.
                  (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Farah Corporation has provided the following data concerning a
                  proposed investment project:
                  Initial investment $ 460,000
                  Life of the project 9 years
                  Working capital required $ 15,000
                  Annual net cash inflows $ 92,000
                  Salvage value $ 48,000
                  The company uses a discount rate of 12%. The working capital would be released at the end of the
                  project.
                  Required:
                  Compute the net present value of the project. (Round “PV Factor” to 3 decimal places. Round your
                  other intermediate calculations and final answers to the nearest whole dollar.)(Use Exhibit 11B-
                  1,Exhibit 11B-2)
                  Net present value $
                  16. The West Division of Shekarchi Corporation had average operating assets of $622,000 and
                  net operating income of $80,300 in March. The minimum required rate of return for performance
                  evaluation purposes is 15%.
                  What was the West Division’s residual income in March?
                  -$12,045
                  -$13,000
                  $13,000
                  $12,045
                  17. (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Sibble Corporation is considering the purchase of a machine that would cost $320,000 and would last for 5 years. At the end of 5 years, the machine would have a salvage value of $49,000. By reducing labor and other operating costs, the machine would provide annual cost savings of $74,000. The company requires a minimum pretax return of 12% on all investment projects. The net present value of the proposed project is closest to: (Round your ‘PV factors’ to three decimal places.) (Use Exhibit11B-1 and Exhibit11B-2) rev: 12_14_2012
                  -$25,447
                  -$4,230
                  -$41,958
                  -$53,230
                  18. A customer has requested that Inga Corporation fill a special order for 3,200 units of product K81 for $27 a unit. While the product would be modified slightly for the special order, product K81’s normal unit product cost is $22.10:
                  Direct materials
                  $6.00
                  Direct labor
                  4.60
                  Variable manufacturing overhead
                  3.30
                  Fixed manufacturing overhead
                  8.20
                  Unit product cost
                  $22.10
                  Direct labor is a variable cost. The special order would have no effect on the company’s total fixed manufacturing overhead costs. The customer would like modifications made to product K81 that would increase the variable manufacturing costs by $1.50 per unit and that would require an investment of $11,200 in special molds that would have no salvage value. This special order would have no effect on the company’s other sales. The company has ample spare capacity for producing the special order. If the special order is accepted, the company’s overall net operating income would increase (decrease) by:
                  $(320)
                  $15,680
                  $25,920
                  $(22,720)
                  19. Diltex Farm Supply is located in a small town in the rural west. Data regarding the store’s operations follow: Sales are budgeted at $280,000 for November, $260,000 for December, and $270,000 for January. Collections are expected to be 65% in the month of sale, 32% in the month following the sale, and 3% uncollectible. The cost of goods sold is 60% of sales. The company desires to have an ending merchandise inventory at the end of each month equal to 50% of the next month’s cost of goods sold. Payment for merchandise is made in the month following the purchase. Other monthly expenses to be paid in cash are $25,500. Monthly depreciation is $16,500. Ignore taxes.
                  Statement of Financial Position October 31
                  Assets
                  Cash
                  $22,000
                  Accounts receivable (net of allowance for uncollectible accounts)
                  78,000
                  Merchandise inventory
                  84,000
                  Property, plant and equipment (net of $50 accumulated depreciation)
                  962,000
                  Total assets
                  $1,146,000
                  Liabilities and Stockholder’ Equity
                  Accounts payable
                  $130,000
                  Common stock
                  900,000
                  Retained earnings
                  116,000
                  Total liabilities and stockholder’ equity
                  $1,146,000
                  Accounts payable at the end of December would be:
                  $159,000
                  $78,000
                  $156,000
                  $81,000
                  20. Newburn Corporation’s most recent balance sheet appears below:
                  Comparative Balance Sheet
                  Ending Balance
                  Beginning Balance
                  Asset:
                  Cash and cash equivalents
                  $52
                  $46
                  Accounts receivable
                  79
                  67
                  Inventory
                  63
                  73
                  Property, plant and equipment
                  526
                  480
                  Less accumulated depreciation
                  233
                  220
                  Total assets
                  $487
                  $446
                  Liabilities and stockholders’ equity:
                  Accounts payable
                  $66
                  $73
                  Bonds payable
                  326
                  360
                  Common stock
                  61
                  60
                  Retained earnings
                  34
                  (47)
                  Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity.
                  $487
                  $446
                  The company’s net income for the year was $86 and it did not sell or retire any property, plant, and equipment during the year. Cash dividends were $5. The net cash provided by (used in) investing activities for the year was:
                  $(46)
                  $(13)
                  $13
                  $46
                  21. Nussey Clinic uses client-visits as its measure of activity. During May, the clinic budgeted for 2,600 client-visits, but its actual level of activity was 2,530 client-visits. The clinic has provided the following data concerning the formulas used in its budgeting and its actual results for May:
                  Data used in budgeting:
                  Fixed element per month
                  Variable element per client-visit
                  Revenue

                  $52.00
                  Personal expenses
                  $18,950
                  11.60
                  Medical supplies
                  675
                  7.30
                  Occupancy expenses
                  5,600
                  1.40
                  Administrative expenses
                  3,600
                  0.50
                  Total expenses
                  $ 28,825
                  $ 20.80
                  Actual results for May:
                  Revenue
                  $134,090
                  Personal expenses
                  $47,000
                  Medical supplies
                  $19,500
                  Occupancy expenses
                  $9,042
                  Administrative expenses
                  $4,100
                  The spending variance for occupancy expenses in May would be closest to:
                  $100 F
                  $100 U
                  $198 U
                  $198 F
                  22. Schleich Corporation’s most recent balance sheet appears below:
                  Comparative Balance Sheet
                  Ending Balance
                  Beginning Balance
                  Assets:
                  Cash and cash equivalents
                  $91
                  $61
                  Accounts receivable
                  53
                  39
                  Inventory
                  56
                  69
                  Property, plant and equipment
                  749
                  578
                  Less accumulated depreciation
                  276
                  255
                  Total assets
                  $673
                  $492
                  Liabilities and stockholder’s equity:
                  Accounts payable
                  $65
                  $79
                  Accrued liabilities
                  32
                  23
                  Income taxes payable
                  52
                  43
                  Bonds payable
                  163
                  218
                  Common stock
                  99
                  88
                  Retained earnings
                  262
                  41
                  Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity
                  $673
                  $492
                  Net income for the year was $282. Cash dividends were $61. The company did not sell or retire any property, plant, and equipment during the year. The net cash provided by operating activities for the year was:
                  $416
                  $367
                  $306
                  $24
                  23. Last year Burford Company’s cash account decreased by $31,800. Net cash used in investing activities was $10,500. Net cash provided by financing activities was $24,300. On the statement of cash flows, the net cash flow provided by (used in) operating activities was:
                  $13,800
                  $(45,600)
                  $(31,800)
                  $(18,000)
                  24. The Varone Company makes a single product called a Hom. The company has the capacity to produce 46,000 Homs per year. Per unit costs to produce and sell one Hom at that activity level are:
                  Direct materials
                  $35
                  Direct labor
                  $25
                  Variable manufacturing overhead
                  $20
                  Fixed manufacturing overhead
                  $7
                  Variable selling & administrative expense
                  $23
                  Fixed selling & administrative expense
                  $7
                  The regular selling price for one Hom is $135. A special order has been received at Varone from the Fairview Company to purchase 9,500 Homs next year at 15% off the regular selling price. If this special order were accepted, the variable selling expense would be reduced by 25%. However, Varone would have to purchase a specialized machine to engrave the Fairview name on each Hom in the special order. This machine would cost $13,500 and it would have no use after the special order was filled. The total fixed costs, both manufacturing and selling, are constant within the relevant range of 34,500 to 46,000 Homs per year. Assume direct labor is a variable cost. If Varone can expect to sell 32,000 Homs next year through regular channels, at what special order price from Fairview should Varone be economically indifferent between either accepting or not accepting this special order? (Round your answer to two decimal places.)
                  $103.00
                  $105.72
                  $98.67
                  $114.75
                  25. Young Enterprises has budgeted sales in units for the next five months as follows:
                  June
                  5,900 units
                  July
                  8,500 units
                  August
                  6,700 units
                  September
                  8,100 units
                  October
                  5,100 units
                  Past experience has shown that the ending inventory for each month should be equal to 24% of the next month’s sales in units. The inventory on May 31 fell short of this goal since it contained only 1,400 units. The company needs to prepare a Production Budget for the next five months. The total number of units to be produced in July is:
                  8,068 units
                  10,108 units
                  8,932 units
                  8,500 units
                  26. The Gomez Company, a merchandising firm, has budgeted its activity for December according to the following information: Sales at $540,000, all for cash. Merchandise Inventory on November 30 was $270,000. The cash balance at December 1 was $24,000. Selling and administrative expenses are budgeted at $32,000 for December and are paid for in cash. Budgeted depreciation for December is $26,000. The planned merchandise inventory on December 31 is $280,000. The cost of goods sold represents 62% of the selling price. All purchases are paid for in cash.
                  The budgeted cash receipts for December are:
                  $205,200
                  $566,000
                  $540,000
                  $334,800
                  27.
                  Yewston Hotel bases its budgets on guest-days. The hotel’s static budget for April appears below:
                  Budgeted number of guest-days
                  3,800
                  Budgeted variable costs:
                  Supplies (@$3.60 per guest-day)
                  $13,680
                  Laundry (@$9.60 per guest-day)
                  36,480
                  Total variable cost
                  50,160
                  Budgeted fixed costs:
                  Wages and salaries
                  17,480
                  Occupancy costs
                  57,000
                  Total fixed cost
                  74,480
                  Total cost
                  $124,640
                  The total variable cost at the activity level of 5,450 guest-days per month should be:
                  $71,940
                  $159,140
                  $50,160
                  $67,640
                  28. Austin Wool Products purchases raw wool and processes it into yarn. The spindles of yarn can then be sold directly to stores or they can be used by Austin Wool Products to make afghans. Each afghan requires one spindle of yarn. Current cost and revenue data for the spindles of yarn and for the afghans are as follows:
                  Data for one spindle of yarn:
                  Selling price
                  $20
                  Variable production cost
                  $12.0
                  Fixed production cost (based on 4,800 spindles of yarn produced)
                  $6.0
                  Data for one afghan:
                  Selling price
                  $56
                  Production cost per spindle of yarn
                  $18
                  Variable production cost to process the yarn into an afghan
                  $17
                  Avoidable fixed production cost to process the yarn into an afghan (based on 4,800 afghans produced)
                  $9.0
                  Each month 4,800 spindles of yarn are produced that can either be sold outright or processed into afghans. If Austin chooses to produce 4,800 afghans each month, the change in the monthly net operating income as compared to selling 4,800 spindles of yarn is:
                  $48,000 decrease.
                  $57,600 decrease.
                  $48,000 increase.
                  $57,600 increase.
                  29. Resendes Refiners, Inc., processes sugar cane that it purchases from farmers. Sugar cane is processed in batches. A batch of sugar cane costs $53 to buy from farmers and $21 to crush in the company’s plant. Two intermediate products, cane fiber and cane juice, emerge from the crushing process. The cane fiber can be sold as is for $31.50 or processed further for $20.75 to make the end product industrial fiber that is sold for $41.75. The cane juice can be sold as is for
                  $38.00 or processed further for $26.60 to make the end product molasses that is sold for $86. How much profit (loss) does the company make by processing the intermediate product cane juice into molasses rather than selling it as is?
                  $(0.40)
                  $21.40
                  $52.60
                  $(14.35)
                  30. Tolentino Kennel uses tenant-days as its measure of activity; an animal housed in the kennel for one day is counted as one tenant-day. During November, the kennel budgeted for 3,300 tenant-days, but its actual level of activity was 3,340 tenant-days. The kennel has provided the following data concerning the formulas used in its budgeting and its actual results for November:
                  Data used in budgeting:
                  Fixed element per month
                  Variable element per tenant-day
                  Revenue

                  $29.40
                  Wages and salaries
                  $2,100
                  $6.30
                  Expendables
                  800
                  10.60
                  Facility expenses
                  7,600
                  3.10
                  Administrative expenses
                  5,800
                  0.30
                  Total expenses
                  $16,300
                  $20.30
                  Actual results for November:
                  Revenue
                  $92,996
                  Wages and salaries
                  $22,582
                  Expendables
                  $37,560
                  Facility expenses
                  $14,060
                  Administrative expenses
                  $6,455
                  The net operating income in the flexible budget for November would be closest to:
                  $30,030
                  $30,394
                  $14,094
                  $13,730
                  31. Hocking Corporation’s comparative balance sheet appears below:
                  Ending Balance
                  Beginning Balance
                  Assets:
                  Current assets:
                  Cash and cash equivalents
                  $70,800
                  $31,200
                  Accounts receivable
                  26,800
                  33,200
                  Inventory
                  69,800
                  68,200
                  Prepaid expenses
                  14,800
                  18,200
                  Total current assets
                  182,200
                  150,800
                  Property, plant and equipment
                  373,000
                  347,000
                  Loss accumulated depreciation
                  169,600
                  145,000
                  Net property, plant, and equipment
                  203,400
                  202,000
                  Total assets
                  $385,600
                  $352,800
                  Liabilities and Stockholder’s Equity:
                  Current liabilities:
                  Accounts payable
                  $20,200
                  $15,200
                  Accrued liabilities
                  68,200
                  56,200
                  Income taxes payable
                  57,200
                  53,200
                  Total current liabilities
                  145,600
                  124,600
                  Bonds payable
                  85,200
                  87,200
                  Total liabilities
                  230,800
                  211,800
                  Stockholder’s equity:
                  Common stock
                  34,800
                  30,000
                  Retained earnings
                  120,000
                  111,000
                  Total stockholder’s equity
                  154,800
                  141,000
                  Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity
                  $385,600
                  352,800
                  The company’s net income (loss) for the year was $11,600 and its cash dividends were $2,600. It did not sell or retire any property, plant, and equipment during the year. The company uses the indirect method to determine the net cash provided by operating activities. The company’s net cash provided by operating activities is:
                  $65,400
                  $28,000
                  $67,000
                  $52,200
                  32. (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Rogers Company is studying a project that would have a ten-year life and would require an $1,100,000 investment in equipment which has no salvage value. The project would provide net operating income each year as follows for the life of the project:
                  Sales
                  $650,000
                  Less cash variable expenses
                  122,000
                  Contribution margin
                  528,000
                  Less fixed expenses:
                  Fixed cash expenses
                  $260,000
                  Depreciation expenses
                  92,000
                  352,000
                  Net operating income
                  $176,000
                  The company’s required rate of return is 8%. What is the payback period for this project? (Round your answer to two decimal places.)
                  6.25 years
                  4.10 years
                  2.08 years
                  3.09 years
                  33. The following transactions occurred last year at Jogger Company:
                  Issuance of shares of the company’s own common stock.
                  $116,000
                  Dividends paid to the company’s own shareholders
                  $3,600
                  Sale of long-term investment
                  $4,600
                  Interest paid to lenders
                  $9,200
                  Retirement of the company’s own bonds payable
                  $106,000
                  Proceeds from sale of the company’s used equipment
                  $30,800
                  Purchase of new equipment
                  $174,500
                  Based solely on the above information, the net cash provided by financing activities for the year on the statement of cash flows would be:
                  $(2,800)
                  $444,700
                  $(146,800)
                  $6,400

                  Attachments:

                  principles of accounting ii final exam 495351

                  Principles of Accounting II
                  1. (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Gull Inc. is considering the acquisition of equipment that costs $570,000 and has a useful life of 6 years with no salvage value. The incremental net cash flows that would be generated by the equipment are:
                  Incremental net cash flows
                  Year 1
                  $148,000
                  Year 2
                  $204,000
                  Year 3
                  $153,500
                  Year 4
                  $170,500
                  Year 5
                  $160,500
                  Year 6
                  $139,500
                  If the discount rate is 10%, the net present value of the investment is closest to: (Use exhibit11b-1, exhibit11b-2) rev: 12_14_2012, 12_21_2012
                  $406,000
                  $262,884
                  $143,116
                  $713,116
                  2.
                  Jerston Company has an annual plant capacity of 3,000 units. Data concerning this product are given below:
                  Annual sales at regular selling prices
                  2,800 units
                  Manufacturing costs:
                  Variable
                  $
                  26 per unit
                  Fixed (annual) $ 74,500
                  Selling and administrative expenses:
                  Variable (sales commissions) $ 9 per unit
                  Fixed (annual)
                  $
                  17,000
                  The company has received a special order for 200 units at a selling price of $60 each. Regular sales would not be affected, and sales commissions on the 200 units would be reduced by one-third. This special order would have no impact on total fixed costs.
                  Required:
                  a.
                  Determine the net advantage (disadvantage) for the special order. (Input the amount as a positive
                  value.)
                  (Click to select)
                  $
                  b. The company should accept the special order.
                  Yes
                  No
                  3. Coakley Beet Processors, Inc., processes sugar beets in batches. A batch of sugar beets
                  costs $52 to buy from farmers and $14 to crush in the company’s plant. Two intermediate
                  products, beet fiber and beet juice, emerge from the crushing process. The beet fiber can
                  be sold as is for $30.00 or processed further for $19.00 to make the end product industrial
                  fiber that is sold for $39.00. The beet juice can be sold as is for $47.20 or processed
                  further for $33.04 to make the end product refined sugar that is sold for $78. How much
                  profit (loss) does the company make by processing the intermediate product beet juice
                  into refined sugar rather than selling it as is?
                  $(68.24)
                  $(26.04)
                  $(16.24)
                  $(2.24)
                  4.
                  The Litton Company has established standards as follows:
                  Direct material: 3 pounds per unit @ $5.20 per pound = $15.60 per unit
                  Direct labor: 2 hours per unit @ $8 per hour = $16 per unit
                  Variable manufacturing overhead: 2 hours per unit @ $3 per hour = $6 per unit
                  Actual production figures for the past year are given below. The company records the materials price variance when
                  materials are purchased.
                  Units produced 1,800 units
                  Direct material used 5,660 pounds
                  Direct material purchased (6,660) pounds $23,976
                  Direct labor cost (3,500 hours) 29,050
                  Variable manufacturing overhead cost incurred $10,520
                  The company applies variable manufacturing overhead to products on the basis of standard direct labor-hours.
                  The materials quantity variance is:
                  $260 F
                  $1,352 U
                  $5,660 U
                  $260 U
                  5. Financial statements of Ansbro Corporation follow:
                  Comparative Balance Sheet
                  Ending Balance
                  Beginning Balance
                  Assets:
                  Cash and cash equivalents
                  $78
                  $59
                  Accounts receivable
                  127
                  102
                  Inventory
                  72
                  53
                  Property, plant and equipment
                  658
                  620
                  Less accumulated depreciation
                  402
                  313
                  Total assets
                  $533
                  $521
                  Liabilities and stockholder’s equity:
                  Accounts payable
                  $79
                  $106
                  Bonds payable
                  230
                  236
                  Common stock
                  121
                  118
                  Retained earnings
                  103
                  61
                  Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity
                  $533
                  $521
                  Income Statement
                  Sales
                  $875
                  Cost of goods sold
                  506
                  Gross margin
                  369
                  Selling and administrative expenses
                  209
                  Net operating income
                  160
                  Income taxes
                  48
                  Net income
                  $112
                  Cash dividends were $70. The company did not dispose of any property, plant, and equipment. It did not issue any bonds payable or repurchase any of its own common stock. The following question pertain to the company’s statement of cash flows. The net cash provided by (used in) operating activities for the year was:
                  $130
                  $112
                  $160
                  $18
                  6. (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Rushforth Manufacturing has $126,000 to invest in either Project A or Project B. The following data are available on these projects:
                  Project A
                  Project B
                  Cost of equipment needed now
                  $126,000
                  $58,000
                  Working capital investment needed now
                  $68,000
                  Annual cash operating inflows
                  $56,000
                  $30,400
                  Salvage value of equipment in 6 years
                  $19,000
                  Both projects will have a useful life of 6 years. At the end of 6 years, the working capital investment will be released for use elsewhere. Rushforth’s required rate of return is 11%. The net present value of Project B is: (Round your ‘PV factors’ to three decimal places. Round your other intermediate calculations and final answer to the nearest whole dollar.) (Use exhibit11b-1, exhibit11b-2) rev: 12_14_2012, 12_21_2012
                  $13,860
                  $70,622
                  $39,002
                  $2,622
                  7. Carpon Lumber sells lumber and general building supplies to building contractors in a medium-sized town in Montana. Data regarding the store’s operations follow: Sales are budgeted at $450,000 for November, $460,000 for December, and $480,000 for January. Collections are expected to be 70% in the month of sale, 27% in the month following the sale, and 3% uncollectible. The cost of goods sold is 75% of sales. The company desires to have an ending merchandise inventory equal to 60% of the next month’s cost of goods sold. Payment for merchandise is made in the month following the purchase. Other monthly expenses to be paid in cash are $26,600. Monthly depreciation is $19,000. Ignore taxes.
                  Statement of Financial Position October 31
                  Assets
                  Cash
                  $22,000
                  Accounts receivable (net of allowance for uncollectible accounts)
                  80,000
                  Inventory
                  202,500
                  Property, plant and equipment (net of $609,000 accumulated depreciation)
                  1,149,000
                  Total assets
                  $1,453,500
                  Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
                  Accounts payable
                  $135,000
                  Common stock
                  700,000
                  Retained earnings
                  618,500
                  Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
                  $1,453,500
                  The accounts receivable balance, net of uncollectible accounts, at the end of December would be:
                  $138,000
                  $124,200
                  $115,000
                  $322,000
                  8. LHU Corporation makes and sells a product called Product WZ. Each unit of Product WZ requires 1.6 hours of direct labor at the rate of $6.00 per direct labor-hour. Management would like you to prepare a Direct Labor Budget for June. The company plans to sell 19,500 units of Product WZ in June. The finished goods inventories on June 1 and June 30 are budgeted to be 600 and 140 units, respectively. Budgeted direct labor costs for June would be:
                  $191,616
                  $187,200
                  $182,784
                  $114,240
                  9.
                  Diorio Corporation keeps careful track of the time required to fill orders. The times recorded for a particular order appear below:
                  Hours
                  Move time
                  4.6
                  Wait time
                  24.9
                  Queue time
                  7.2
                  Process time
                  3.3
                  Inspection time
                  0.2
                  The throughput time was:
                  32.1 hours
                  40.2 hours
                  15.3 hours
                  8.1 hours
                  10. (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Czaplinski Corporation is considering a project that would require an investment of $823,000 and would last for 6 years. The incremental annual revenues and expenses generated by the project during those 6 years would be as follows:
                  Sales
                  $224,000
                  Variable expenses
                  30,000
                  Contribution margin
                  194,000
                  Fixed expenses:
                  Salaries
                  29,000
                  Rents
                  21,000
                  Depreciation
                  83,000
                  Total fixed expenses
                  133,000
                  Net operating income
                  $61,000
                  The scrap value of the project’s assets at the end of the project would be $42,000. The payback period of the project is closest to:
                  6.6 years
                  5.7 years
                  12.9 years
                  13.5 years
                  11. The Tingey Company has 500 obsolete microcomputers that are carried in inventory at a total cost of $744,000. If these microcomputers are upgraded at a total cost of $103,000, they can be sold for a total of $208,000. As an alternative, the microcomputers can be sold in their present condition for $51,200. Suppose the selling price of the upgraded computers has not been set. At what selling price per unit would the company be as well off upgrading the computers as if it just sold the computers in their present condition? (Round your answer to one decimal place.)
                  $308.4
                  $795.2
                  $216.24
                  $102.4
                  12. Aide Industries is a division of a major corporation. Data concerning the most recent year appears below:
                  Sales $18,000,000
                  Net operating income $918,000
                  Average operating assets $4,600,000
                  The division’s margin is closest to:
                  30.7%
                  20.0%
                  25.6%
                  5.1%
                  13.
                  Eckels Wares is a division of a major corporation. The following data are for the latest year of operations:
                  Sales $ 32,400,000
                  Net operating income $ 1,782,000
                  Average operating assets $ 12,000,000
                  The company’s minimum required rate of return 12 %
                  Required:
                  a. What is the division’s margin? (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)
                  Margin %
                  b. What is the division’s turnover? (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)
                  Turnover times
                  c.
                  What is the division’s return on investment (ROI)? (Do not round intermediate calculations and
                  round your final answer to 2 decimal places.)
                  Return on investment %
                  d. What is the division’s residual income?
                  Residual income $
                  14.
                  Gentile Corporation makes a product with the following standard costs:
                  Standard
                  Quality or Hours
                  Standard Price or
                  Rate
                  Inputs
                  Direct materials 7.5 kilos $6.00 per kilo
                  Direct labor 0.9 hours $12.40 per hour
                  Variable overhead 0.9 hours $6.90 per hour
                  The company produced 6,100 units in May using 38,530 kilos of direct material and 4,600 direct
                  labor-hours. During the month, the company purchased 40,870 kilos of the direct material at
                  $7.30 per kilo. The actual direct labor rate was $18.90 per hour and the actual variable overhead
                  rate was $6.60 per hour.
                  The company applies variable overhead on the basis of direct labor-hours. The direct materials
                  purchases variance is computed when the materials are purchased.
                  The variable overhead efficiency variance for May is:
                  $6,141 U
                  $5,874 F
                  $6,141 F
                  $5,874 U
                  15.
                  (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Farah Corporation has provided the following data concerning a
                  proposed investment project:
                  Initial investment $ 460,000
                  Life of the project 9 years
                  Working capital required $ 15,000
                  Annual net cash inflows $ 92,000
                  Salvage value $ 48,000
                  The company uses a discount rate of 12%. The working capital would be released at the end of the
                  project.
                  Required:
                  Compute the net present value of the project. (Round “PV Factor” to 3 decimal places. Round your
                  other intermediate calculations and final answers to the nearest whole dollar.)(Use Exhibit 11B-
                  1,Exhibit 11B-2)
                  Net present value $
                  16. The West Division of Shekarchi Corporation had average operating assets of $622,000 and
                  net operating income of $80,300 in March. The minimum required rate of return for performance
                  evaluation purposes is 15%.
                  What was the West Division’s residual income in March?
                  -$12,045
                  -$13,000
                  $13,000
                  $12,045
                  17. (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Sibble Corporation is considering the purchase of a machine that would cost $320,000 and would last for 5 years. At the end of 5 years, the machine would have a salvage value of $49,000. By reducing labor and other operating costs, the machine would provide annual cost savings of $74,000. The company requires a minimum pretax return of 12% on all investment projects. The net present value of the proposed project is closest to: (Round your ‘PV factors’ to three decimal places.) (Use Exhibit11B-1 and Exhibit11B-2) rev: 12_14_2012
                  -$25,447
                  -$4,230
                  -$41,958
                  -$53,230
                  18. A customer has requested that Inga Corporation fill a special order for 3,200 units of product K81 for $27 a unit. While the product would be modified slightly for the special order, product K81’s normal unit product cost is $22.10:
                  Direct materials
                  $6.00
                  Direct labor
                  4.60
                  Variable manufacturing overhead
                  3.30
                  Fixed manufacturing overhead
                  8.20
                  Unit product cost
                  $22.10
                  Direct labor is a variable cost. The special order would have no effect on the company’s total fixed manufacturing overhead costs. The customer would like modifications made to product K81 that would increase the variable manufacturing costs by $1.50 per unit and that would require an investment of $11,200 in special molds that would have no salvage value. This special order would have no effect on the company’s other sales. The company has ample spare capacity for producing the special order. If the special order is accepted, the company’s overall net operating income would increase (decrease) by:
                  $(320)
                  $15,680
                  $25,920
                  $(22,720)
                  19. Diltex Farm Supply is located in a small town in the rural west. Data regarding the store’s operations follow: Sales are budgeted at $280,000 for November, $260,000 for December, and $270,000 for January. Collections are expected to be 65% in the month of sale, 32% in the month following the sale, and 3% uncollectible. The cost of goods sold is 60% of sales. The company desires to have an ending merchandise inventory at the end of each month equal to 50% of the next month’s cost of goods sold. Payment for merchandise is made in the month following the purchase. Other monthly expenses to be paid in cash are $25,500. Monthly depreciation is $16,500. Ignore taxes.
                  Statement of Financial Position October 31
                  Assets
                  Cash
                  $22,000
                  Accounts receivable (net of allowance for uncollectible accounts)
                  78,000
                  Merchandise inventory
                  84,000
                  Property, plant and equipment (net of $50 accumulated depreciation)
                  962,000
                  Total assets
                  $1,146,000
                  Liabilities and Stockholder’ Equity
                  Accounts payable
                  $130,000
                  Common stock
                  900,000
                  Retained earnings
                  116,000
                  Total liabilities and stockholder’ equity
                  $1,146,000
                  Accounts payable at the end of December would be:
                  $159,000
                  $78,000
                  $156,000
                  $81,000
                  20. Newburn Corporation’s most recent balance sheet appears below:
                  Comparative Balance Sheet
                  Ending Balance
                  Beginning Balance
                  Asset:
                  Cash and cash equivalents
                  $52
                  $46
                  Accounts receivable
                  79
                  67
                  Inventory
                  63
                  73
                  Property, plant and equipment
                  526
                  480
                  Less accumulated depreciation
                  233
                  220
                  Total assets
                  $487
                  $446
                  Liabilities and stockholders’ equity:
                  Accounts payable
                  $66
                  $73
                  Bonds payable
                  326
                  360
                  Common stock
                  61
                  60
                  Retained earnings
                  34
                  (47)
                  Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity.
                  $487
                  $446
                  The company’s net income for the year was $86 and it did not sell or retire any property, plant, and equipment during the year. Cash dividends were $5. The net cash provided by (used in) investing activities for the year was:
                  $(46)
                  $(13)
                  $13
                  $46
                  21. Nussey Clinic uses client-visits as its measure of activity. During May, the clinic budgeted for 2,600 client-visits, but its actual level of activity was 2,530 client-visits. The clinic has provided the following data concerning the formulas used in its budgeting and its actual results for May:
                  Data used in budgeting:
                  Fixed element per month
                  Variable element per client-visit
                  Revenue

                  $52.00
                  Personal expenses
                  $18,950
                  11.60
                  Medical supplies
                  675
                  7.30
                  Occupancy expenses
                  5,600
                  1.40
                  Administrative expenses
                  3,600
                  0.50
                  Total expenses
                  $ 28,825
                  $ 20.80
                  Actual results for May:
                  Revenue
                  $134,090
                  Personal expenses
                  $47,000
                  Medical supplies
                  $19,500
                  Occupancy expenses
                  $9,042
                  Administrative expenses
                  $4,100
                  The spending variance for occupancy expenses in May would be closest to:
                  $100 F
                  $100 U
                  $198 U
                  $198 F
                  22. Schleich Corporation’s most recent balance sheet appears below:
                  Comparative Balance Sheet
                  Ending Balance
                  Beginning Balance
                  Assets:
                  Cash and cash equivalents
                  $91
                  $61
                  Accounts receivable
                  53
                  39
                  Inventory
                  56
                  69
                  Property, plant and equipment
                  749
                  578
                  Less accumulated depreciation
                  276
                  255
                  Total assets
                  $673
                  $492
                  Liabilities and stockholder’s equity:
                  Accounts payable
                  $65
                  $79
                  Accrued liabilities
                  32
                  23
                  Income taxes payable
                  52
                  43
                  Bonds payable
                  163
                  218
                  Common stock
                  99
                  88
                  Retained earnings
                  262
                  41
                  Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity
                  $673
                  $492
                  Net income for the year was $282. Cash dividends were $61. The company did not sell or retire any property, plant, and equipment during the year. The net cash provided by operating activities for the year was:
                  $416
                  $367
                  $306
                  $24
                  23. Last year Burford Company’s cash account decreased by $31,800. Net cash used in investing activities was $10,500. Net cash provided by financing activities was $24,300. On the statement of cash flows, the net cash flow provided by (used in) operating activities was:
                  $13,800
                  $(45,600)
                  $(31,800)
                  $(18,000)
                  24. The Varone Company makes a single product called a Hom. The company has the capacity to produce 46,000 Homs per year. Per unit costs to produce and sell one Hom at that activity level are:
                  Direct materials
                  $35
                  Direct labor
                  $25
                  Variable manufacturing overhead
                  $20
                  Fixed manufacturing overhead
                  $7
                  Variable selling & administrative expense
                  $23
                  Fixed selling & administrative expense
                  $7
                  The regular selling price for one Hom is $135. A special order has been received at Varone from the Fairview Company to purchase 9,500 Homs next year at 15% off the regular selling price. If this special order were accepted, the variable selling expense would be reduced by 25%. However, Varone would have to purchase a specialized machine to engrave the Fairview name on each Hom in the special order. This machine would cost $13,500 and it would have no use after the special order was filled. The total fixed costs, both manufacturing and selling, are constant within the relevant range of 34,500 to 46,000 Homs per year. Assume direct labor is a variable cost. If Varone can expect to sell 32,000 Homs next year through regular channels, at what special order price from Fairview should Varone be economically indifferent between either accepting or not accepting this special order? (Round your answer to two decimal places.)
                  $103.00
                  $105.72
                  $98.67
                  $114.75
                  25. Young Enterprises has budgeted sales in units for the next five months as follows:
                  June
                  5,900 units
                  July
                  8,500 units
                  August
                  6,700 units
                  September
                  8,100 units
                  October
                  5,100 units
                  Past experience has shown that the ending inventory for each month should be equal to 24% of the next month’s sales in units. The inventory on May 31 fell short of this goal since it contained only 1,400 units. The company needs to prepare a Production Budget for the next five months. The total number of units to be produced in July is:
                  8,068 units
                  10,108 units
                  8,932 units
                  8,500 units
                  26. The Gomez Company, a merchandising firm, has budgeted its activity for December according to the following information: Sales at $540,000, all for cash. Merchandise Inventory on November 30 was $270,000. The cash balance at December 1 was $24,000. Selling and administrative expenses are budgeted at $32,000 for December and are paid for in cash. Budgeted depreciation for December is $26,000. The planned merchandise inventory on December 31 is $280,000. The cost of goods sold represents 62% of the selling price. All purchases are paid for in cash.
                  The budgeted cash receipts for December are:
                  $205,200
                  $566,000
                  $540,000
                  $334,800
                  27.
                  Yewston Hotel bases its budgets on guest-days. The hotel’s static budget for April appears below:
                  Budgeted number of guest-days
                  3,800
                  Budgeted variable costs:
                  Supplies (@$3.60 per guest-day)
                  $13,680
                  Laundry (@$9.60 per guest-day)
                  36,480
                  Total variable cost
                  50,160
                  Budgeted fixed costs:
                  Wages and salaries
                  17,480
                  Occupancy costs
                  57,000
                  Total fixed cost
                  74,480
                  Total cost
                  $124,640
                  The total variable cost at the activity level of 5,450 guest-days per month should be:
                  $71,940
                  $159,140
                  $50,160
                  $67,640
                  28. Austin Wool Products purchases raw wool and processes it into yarn. The spindles of yarn can then be sold directly to stores or they can be used by Austin Wool Products to make afghans. Each afghan requires one spindle of yarn. Current cost and revenue data for the spindles of yarn and for the afghans are as follows:
                  Data for one spindle of yarn:
                  Selling price
                  $20
                  Variable production cost
                  $12.0
                  Fixed production cost (based on 4,800 spindles of yarn produced)
                  $6.0
                  Data for one afghan:
                  Selling price
                  $56
                  Production cost per spindle of yarn
                  $18
                  Variable production cost to process the yarn into an afghan
                  $17
                  Avoidable fixed production cost to process the yarn into an afghan (based on 4,800 afghans produced)
                  $9.0
                  Each month 4,800 spindles of yarn are produced that can either be sold outright or processed into afghans. If Austin chooses to produce 4,800 afghans each month, the change in the monthly net operating income as compared to selling 4,800 spindles of yarn is:
                  $48,000 decrease.
                  $57,600 decrease.
                  $48,000 increase.
                  $57,600 increase.
                  29. Resendes Refiners, Inc., processes sugar cane that it purchases from farmers. Sugar cane is processed in batches. A batch of sugar cane costs $53 to buy from farmers and $21 to crush in the company’s plant. Two intermediate products, cane fiber and cane juice, emerge from the crushing process. The cane fiber can be sold as is for $31.50 or processed further for $20.75 to make the end product industrial fiber that is sold for $41.75. The cane juice can be sold as is for
                  $38.00 or processed further for $26.60 to make the end product molasses that is sold for $86. How much profit (loss) does the company make by processing the intermediate product cane juice into molasses rather than selling it as is?
                  $(0.40)
                  $21.40
                  $52.60
                  $(14.35)
                  30. Tolentino Kennel uses tenant-days as its measure of activity; an animal housed in the kennel for one day is counted as one tenant-day. During November, the kennel budgeted for 3,300 tenant-days, but its actual level of activity was 3,340 tenant-days. The kennel has provided the following data concerning the formulas used in its budgeting and its actual results for November:
                  Data used in budgeting:
                  Fixed element per month
                  Variable element per tenant-day
                  Revenue

                  $29.40
                  Wages and salaries
                  $2,100
                  $6.30
                  Expendables
                  800
                  10.60
                  Facility expenses
                  7,600
                  3.10
                  Administrative expenses
                  5,800
                  0.30
                  Total expenses
                  $16,300
                  $20.30
                  Actual results for November:
                  Revenue
                  $92,996
                  Wages and salaries
                  $22,582
                  Expendables
                  $37,560
                  Facility expenses
                  $14,060
                  Administrative expenses
                  $6,455
                  The net operating income in the flexible budget for November would be closest to:
                  $30,030
                  $30,394
                  $14,094
                  $13,730
                  31. Hocking Corporation’s comparative balance sheet appears below:
                  Ending Balance
                  Beginning Balance
                  Assets:
                  Current assets:
                  Cash and cash equivalents
                  $70,800
                  $31,200
                  Accounts receivable
                  26,800
                  33,200
                  Inventory
                  69,800
                  68,200
                  Prepaid expenses
                  14,800
                  18,200
                  Total current assets
                  182,200
                  150,800
                  Property, plant and equipment
                  373,000
                  347,000
                  Loss accumulated depreciation
                  169,600
                  145,000
                  Net property, plant, and equipment
                  203,400
                  202,000
                  Total assets
                  $385,600
                  $352,800
                  Liabilities and Stockholder’s Equity:
                  Current liabilities:
                  Accounts payable
                  $20,200
                  $15,200
                  Accrued liabilities
                  68,200
                  56,200
                  Income taxes payable
                  57,200
                  53,200
                  Total current liabilities
                  145,600
                  124,600
                  Bonds payable
                  85,200
                  87,200
                  Total liabilities
                  230,800
                  211,800
                  Stockholder’s equity:
                  Common stock
                  34,800
                  30,000
                  Retained earnings
                  120,000
                  111,000
                  Total stockholder’s equity
                  154,800
                  141,000
                  Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity
                  $385,600
                  352,800
                  The company’s net income (loss) for the year was $11,600 and its cash dividends were $2,600. It did not sell or retire any property, plant, and equipment during the year. The company uses the indirect method to determine the net cash provided by operating activities. The company’s net cash provided by operating activities is:
                  $65,400
                  $28,000
                  $67,000
                  $52,200
                  32. (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Rogers Company is studying a project that would have a ten-year life and would require an $1,100,000 investment in equipment which has no salvage value. The project would provide net operating income each year as follows for the life of the project:
                  Sales
                  $650,000
                  Less cash variable expenses
                  122,000
                  Contribution margin
                  528,000
                  Less fixed expenses:
                  Fixed cash expenses
                  $260,000
                  Depreciation expenses
                  92,000
                  352,000
                  Net operating income
                  $176,000
                  The company’s required rate of return is 8%. What is the payback period for this project? (Round your answer to two decimal places.)
                  6.25 years
                  4.10 years
                  2.08 years
                  3.09 years
                  33. The following transactions occurred last year at Jogger Company:
                  Issuance of shares of the company’s own common stock.
                  $116,000
                  Dividends paid to the company’s own shareholders
                  $3,600
                  Sale of long-term investment
                  $4,600
                  Interest paid to lenders
                  $9,200
                  Retirement of the company’s own bonds payable
                  $106,000
                  Proceeds from sale of the company’s used equipment
                  $30,800
                  Purchase of new equipment
                  $174,500
                  Based solely on the above information, the net cash provided by financing activities for the year on the statement of cash flows would be:
                  $(2,800)
                  $444,700
                  $(146,800)
                  $6,400

                  Attachments:

                  principles of acctg hw 1 extra 495352

                  FROM THE TEXT

                  Horngren, C.T., Harrison, W.T., and Oliver, M. S. (2009). Accounting: Chapters 1-14: 2009(9th ed.). Prentice-Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson. ISBN 0-13-256905-7

                  Please read the Ethical Issue in Chapter 2 on page 128.

                  In your first post please address the following:

                  1 What is the ethical issue in this situation?

                  2 State why you approve or disapprove of Henson s management of Better Days Ahead s funds.

                  In your second post comment on one of your classmates posts.For example:

                  Do you think that your classmate should have included another factor?Why or why not?

                  discussion board: 1

                  In my opinion the ethical issue is the accounting equation of the company.If the accounting equation must always be balance,the manager must recorded each transaction using a double entry system where debits equals credits.We have no information about this type of expenses and why manager decided to do it.

                  An account with a normal debit balance may occasionally have a credit balance.Thats indicates a negative amount of the item-in this case Cash.Also the liability Accounts payable -a credit balance account-could have a debit balance if the company overpays its account payable.In other cases , a non normal account balance indicates an error. In this case a non normal credit balance in office supplies,furniture or buildings makes no sense because negative amount of this assets make no sense.The ethical issue appears because the money he is using not even exists-he is expending money is not made and putting the company on risk, by increasing liability. I do not agree with this style of management, but I know in real life many companies take high risk to obtain high profit.In the case of Better Days Ahead the transparency and good management are vital to obtain fundraising. This company is a charitable organization and must be an example of good financial behavior and manage its funds wisely in order to keep donations and business running .Any type of scandal or corruption could put the whole organization at risk.In this particular case manager must be extra careful when front ethical dilemmas.We must remember ethics demands more than legal- sometimes it is legal but still unethical.

                  2. The actions of the new president are questionable as he takes advantage of the trust that First Nations Bank has in the organization, the bank knows that the organization rarely even makes use of the overdraw in the first place, so the bank has no qualms on allowing the overdraw or how much the organization can exceed their limit. This of course is taking advantage of the banks good business standing that has been forge over long periods of excellent relationship, this is a bad business move from the new president as it places the organization in a horrible position and may even jeopardize any future support from the bank. This is also an unethical thing to do, as the president is overdrawing on money that the organization may not be able to repay back to the bank, specially if the investments on the charity do not return the amount of money already borrowed. This is made more drastic as the bank allowed the organization to borrow money if they were ever left short from donations, yet the president borrowed and spend the money as he saw fit

                  Maybe you agree with your classmate, but for another reason that he/she stated. If so, explain.

                  Attachments:

                  principles of acctg hw 1a 495353

                  EX2-17 PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. 2. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 E2-17 Describing transactions, posting to T-accounts, and preparing a trial balance LO 2,3,4,5 [20-30 minutes] May, 2012: Purchased supplies of $500 on account. Paid $53,000 cash for a building. Performed service for customers and received cash, $2,600. Paid $400 on accounts payable. Performed service for customers on account, $2,500. Received $1,900 cash on account from a customer.

                  Document Preview:

                  EX2-17 PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. 2. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 E2-17 Describing transactions, posting to T-accounts, and preparing a trial balance LO 2,3,4,5 [20-30 minutes] May, 2012: Purchased supplies of $500 on account. Paid $53,000 cash for a building. Performed service for customers and received cash, $2,600. Paid $400 on accounts payable. Performed service for customers on account, $2,500. Received $1,900 cash on account from a customer. Paid the following expenses: salary, $1,100; rent, $900. May 1 Describe each transaction. For example, the May 4 transaction description could be “Paid cash for building.” Open T-accounts using the following account numbers: Cash, 110; Accounts 3. Post to the accounts. Write dates and journal references (use account numbers) in the accounts. Compute the balance of each account after posting. 4. Prepare the trial balance of Ward Technology Solutions at May 31, 2012. E2-17 Accounts Receivable Acct. 120 May 31 Req. 2 & 3 Req. 4 Trial Balance May 31, 2012 ACCOUNT DEBIT CREDIT Cash Accounts Receivable Supplies Building Accounts payable Service revenue Salary expense Rent expense Total Cash Acct. 110 Supplies Acct. 130 Building Acct. 140 Accounts Payable Acct. 210 Service revenue Acct. 410 Rent expense Acct. 510 Salary expense Acct. 520 The journal of Ward Technology Solutions,includes the following entries for The business received cash of $75,000 and and gave capital to the owner. receivable, 120; Supplies, 130; Building, 140; Accounts payable, 210; Ward, capital, 310; Service revenue, 410; Rent expense, 510; Salary expense, 520. Ward, capital …

                  principles of acctg hw 2 495354

                  E4-15 PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 DEBIT CREDIT Salary expense Journal DATE POST.REF. Supplies expense a. b. c. d. e. Adjusting Entries E4-15 Journalizing adjusting and closing entries LO 3 [15-25 minutes] Use your answer from E4-13. [E4-13 is repeated here for your convenience.

                  Document Preview:

                  E4-15 PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 DEBIT CREDIT Salary expense Journal DATE POST.REF. Supplies expense a. b. c. d. e. Adjusting Entries E4-15 Journalizing adjusting and closing entries LO 3 [15-25 minutes] Use your answer from E4-13. [E4-13 is repeated here for your convenience.] Trial Balance Account Title Debit Credit Cash Accounts receivable Equipment Accumulated depreciation Accounts payable Service revenue Depreciation expense Utilities expense Total Prepaid rent Salary payable Rent expense Additional information at November 30, 2012: Accrued service revenue, $600. Depreciation, $300. Accrued salary expense, $800. Prepaid rent expired, $500. Supplies used, $100. Journalize Telegraphic Link’s adjusting and closing entries at November 30, 2012. Nov. 30 Use this information for your adjusting entries: Accounting, 9e TELEGRAPHIC LINK Thomas, capital Thomas, drawing Good student April 22, 2011 ?11?/?30?/?2012 $4,000.00 3200.00 1900.00 3000.00 34800.00 1600.00 5400.00 35700.00 2100.00 8600.00 1700.00 600.00 51300.00 $51,300.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 Print Test Your Knowledge E4-15 PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 DEBIT CREDIT Salary expense Journal DATE POST.REF. Supplies expense a. b. c. d. e. Adjusting Entries E4-15 Journalizing adjusting and closing entries LO 3 [15-25 minutes] Use your answer from E4-13. [E4-13 is repeated here for your convenience.] Trial Balance Account Title Debit Credit Cash Accounts receivable Equipment Accumulated depreciation Accounts payable Service revenue Depreciation expense Utilities expense Total Prepaid…

                  principles of acctg hw 3 495355

                  Student Name_____________________________ Student ID#__________________ Accounting is the information system that measures business activity, processes the data into reports, and communicates the results to decision makers. Accounting is “the language of business.” 3) A debt that a business owes to an outside party is called: A) an asset. B) a liability. C) stockholders’ equity. D) revenue. 4) There are relatively few types of revenue.

                  Document Preview:

                  Student Name_____________________________ Student ID#__________________ Accounting is the information system that measures business activity, processes the data into reports, and communicates the results to decision makers. Accounting is “the language of business.” 3) A debt that a business owes to an outside party is called: A) an asset. B) a liability. C) stockholders’ equity. D) revenue. 4) There are relatively few types of revenue. Which of the following in NOT a type of revenue? A) Common Stock B) Service C) Interest D) Sales 5) A promise received from a business’s customers to pay for goods and services that they received from the business is called a(n): A) account receivable. B) account payable. C) revenue. D) expense. 6) Managerial accounting focuses on information for decision makers outside of the business, such as creditors and taxing authorities. 7) Business owners use accounting information to set goals, evaluate progress toward those goals, and take corrective action when needed. 8) Outside investors would ordinarily use financial accounting information to decide whether or not to invest in a business. 9) An investor is someone who loans money to a business. 10) A creditor is a party that has an ownership interest in a business. 11) The AICPA’s Code of Professional Conduct for Accountants provides guidance to CPAs in the performance of their work. 12) A proprietor has unlimited liability for the debts and obligations of the proprietorship. 13) The most that a proprietor can lose, as a result of business debts or lawsuits, is limited to the amount he/she has invested 14) A proprietor may have to pay self-employment tax in addition to income tax. 15) In an LLC, the business, not the owners, is responsible for the corporation’s debts. 16) A proprietorship is created by: A) electing a board of directors. B) obtaining a state charter. C) issuing shares of stock. D) one individual deciding to start a business. 17) An account is the…

                  Attachments:

                  principles of acctg ii homework 1 495356

                  Please see attachment

                  Document Preview:

                  P10-15A PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 DEBIT CREDIT Journal DATE ACCOUNTS AND EXPLANATIONS P10-15A Journalizing liability transactions LO 1, 2 [30-40 minutes] The following transactions of Denver Pharmacies occurred during 2011 and 2012: Purchased computer equipment at a cost of $9,000, signing a six-month, 6% note payable for that amount. Recorded the week’s sales of $64,000, three-fourths on credit, and one-fourth for cash. Sales amounts are subject to a 6% state sales tax. Sent the last week’s sales tax to the state. Borrowed $204,000 on a four-year, 10% note payable that calls for $51,000 annual installment payments plus interest. Record the current and long-term portions of the note payable in two separate accounts. Paid the six-month, 6% note, plus interest, at maturity. Purchased inventory for $12,000, signing a six-month, 9% note payable. Accrued warranty expense, which is estimated at 2% of sales of $603,000. Accrued interest on all outstanding notes payable. Make a separate interest accrual for each note payable. Jan 9 Feb 5 Jul 9 Aug 31 Dec 31 Paid the first installment and interest for one year on the four-year note payable. Paid off the 9% note plus interest at maturity. Feb 28 Journalize the transactions in Denver’s general journal. Explanations are not required. Cash ($64,000 X 1/4 X 1.06) Jan 29 Interest payable Accounting, 9e Student name here Date here 2011.00 29.00 28.00 31.00 2012.00 29.00 2011.00 16960.00 64000.00 0.25 1.06 31.00 0.00 31.00 2012.00 Print Test Your Knowledge P10-15A PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 DEBIT CREDIT Journal DATE ACCOUNTS AND…

                  principles of finance 495357

                    1. A firm has the following preferred stocks outstanding:
                      • PFD A: $40 annual dividend; $1,000 par value; no maturity
                      • PFD B: $95 annual dividend; $1,000 par value; maturity after twenty-five years

                  If comparable yields are 9 percent, what should be the price of each preferred stock?

                  1. Given the information below, answer the following questions.

                    A convertible bond has the following features:

                  Principal

                  $1,000

                  Maturity date

                  20 years

                  Interest

                  $80 (8% coupon) paid yearly

                  Call price

                  $1,050

                  Exercise price

                  $65 a share

                  1. The bond may be converted into how many shares?
                  2. If comparable non-convertible debt offered an annual yield of 12 percent, what would be the value of this bond as debt?
                  3. If the stock were selling for $52, what is the value of the bond in terms of stock?
                  4. Would you expect the bond to sell for its value as debt (i.e., the value determined in b) if the price of the stock were $52?
                  5. If the price of the bond were $960, what are the premiums paid over the bond’s value as stock and its value as debt?
                  6. If the price of the stock were $35, what would be the minimum price of the bond?
                  7. What is the probability that the bond will be called when the price of the stock is $52?
                  8. If the price of the stock rose to $73, what would happen to the price of the bond?
                  9. If the price of the stock were $73, what would the investor receive if the bond were called

                  Attachments:

                  prob 24 495358

                  On October 1, White Way Stores Inc. is considering leasing a building and purchasing the necessary equipment to operate a retail store. Alternatively, the company could use the funds to invest in $180,000 of 6% U.S. Treasury bonds that mature in 16 years. The bonds could be purchased at face value. The following data have been assembled:

                  Required:

                  Hide

                  1. Prepare a differential analysis as of October 1, 2014, presenting the proposed operation of the store for the 16 years (Alternative 1) as compared with investing in U.S. Treasury bonds (Alternative 2). If an amount is zero, enter zero “0”.

                  Differential Analysis
                  Operate Retail Store (Alt. 1) or Invest in Bonds (Alt. 2)
                  October 1, 2014
                  Operate Retail Store (Alternative 1)
                  Invest in Bonds (Alternative 2)
                  Differential Effect on Income (Alternative 2)
                  Revenues
                  $
                  $
                  $
                  Costs:
                  Costs to operate store
                  Cost of equipment less residual value
                  Income (Loss)
                  $
                  $
                  $

                  2. Based on the results disclosed by the differential analysis, should the proposal to operate the retail store be accepted?

                  3. If the proposal is accepted, what would be the total estimated income from operations of the store for the 16 years?
                  $

                  • Check My Work (1 remaining)

                  Attachments:

                  operations management 495308

                  for the law firm. The desired service level is 95%. The corresponding Z =1.64. NOTE: Show all steps. Solve problems using EXCEL. Date: 7-19-2013 Time: 5pm to 9pm. is 2 days. The daily demand for clean towels at the hotel is normally distributed with a mean of is a constant at 10000 pages to be copied. The mean lead time for the contractor is 4 days with a standard deviation of 1.25 days for delivering copies. Find the re-order point ordering cost is $60 per order. The holding cost is $4 per unit per year. The lead time for this item is 3 days. Assume 250 working days per year.

                  Document Preview:

                  for the law firm. The desired service level is 95%. The corresponding Z =1.64. NOTE: Show all steps. Solve problems using EXCEL. Date: 7-19-2013 Time: 5pm to 9pm. is 2 days. The daily demand for clean towels at the hotel is normally distributed with a mean of is a constant at 10000 pages to be copied. The mean lead time for the contractor is 4 days with a standard deviation of 1.25 days for delivering copies. Find the re-order point ordering cost is $60 per order. The holding cost is $4 per unit per year. The lead time for this item is 3 days. Assume 250 working days per year. Find: b) What is the optimal number of orders per year. c) What is the annual cost of ordering and holding inventory. d) What is the re-order point. 2. ABC Co. manufactures a subcomponent at the rate of 400 per day when required. Its annual demand for this item is 50000 units. Assume 250 working days per year. Holding cost is $10 per unit per year. Set-up cost is $150 per set-up. Find: 800 and a standard deviation of 150. Management has set the service level 95%. For this service level, Z = 1.64 a) The Reorder point. 4. A printing company has a contract with a legal firm to copy their court documents. Daily demand MGSC 303 Exam 2 SUM II 2013 1. ABC Co. purchases an item. The annual demand for this item is 75000 units. The 3. Hotel ABC has contracted out its towel laundering work. The lead time for the contractor Find: b) Safety stock. d) What percentage of time during the year will this item be produced. a) Economic production quantity. b)How many production runs will be made per year. c)What will be the maximum inventory level. e) What is the annual cost for ordering and holding inventory. a) Economic order quantity, EOQ. ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

                  Attachments:

                  operations management assignment 495309

                  In a 3- to 4-page Microsoft Word document, address the following:

                  • Draw the AON project network using Microsoft Project, Microsoft Visio, or some other tool capable of creating such a network. Perform a critical path analysis for the network and calculate the ES, EF, LS, and LF times.
                  • Calculate the slack time for each activity.
                  • Identify the critical path.
                  • Assume that the organization will receive a $400 bonus for each day the duration of the project is shortened. The organization is also responsible for paying the crash cost associated with shortening the schedule. To maximize the net profit, identify which task you should crash and by how much.

                  Support your responses with examples.

                  Cite any sources in APA format.

                  Submission Details

                  Name your document SU_MGT3059_W2_A2_LastName_FirstInitial.doc.

                  Attachments:

                  original work and all questions answered 495310

                  2-3 pages showing all calculations; 2 pages showing all calculations
                  Details:

                  Weekly tasks or assignments (Individual or Group Projects) will be due by Monday and late submissions will be assigned a late penalty in accordance with the late penalty policy found in the syllabus. NOTE: All submission posting times are based on midnight Central Time.

                  Key Assignment

                  Brian Miller is an entrepreneur. He started a small-town friendly grocery store. People stopped by his store to pick up things they did not want to run to the regular grocery store for. In 3 years, because of popular demand, he started adding more items on his shelf and pretty soon, he had grown into a regular grocery store. People loved his store because he knew everyone by their first name and would try to fulfill everyone s requests. He now needs some help with his inventory. He hired a CPA firm that would give him some advice on how he should maintain his inventory.

                  You are his CPA. You want to give Brian an overview on the inventory system, some different methods of recording cost of goods sold, and educate him on the accounting side of recording inventory and recording cost of goods sold.

                  Part 1

                  1. Explain to Brian the perpetual and periodic inventory systems, covering the main differences between the two systems, and why companies use perpetual inventory system.
                  2. Contrast the 4 methods of recording cost of goods sold:
                    • Specific identification
                    • Average cost
                    • First in, First out (FIFO)
                    • Last in, Last out (LIFO)
                  3. ABC, a grocery company, uses a periodic inventory system. They have the following information for the month of January:

                    Beginning inventory

                    Jan 1: 400 units @ $10 each

                    Purchases

                    Jan 10: 300 units @$12 each

                    Jan 15: 200 units @$15 each

                    Sales

                    Jan 5: 200 units @ $15 each

                    Jan 12: 200 units @ $20 each

                    Jan 18: 100 units @ $25 each

                    Ending inventory

                    Jan 31: 400 units

                    • Will LIFO or FIFO generate the highest cost of goods sold? Why? Show all calculations.
                    • Will the ending inventory balance will be higher under LIFO or FIFO? Why? Show all calculations.
                    • What is the cost of goods sold under LIFO? Show all calculations.
                    • What is the cost of goods sold under FIFO? Show all calculations.

                  Part 2

                  1. Discuss the revenue principle and the matching principle as per the generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP).
                  2. Contrast the percentage-of-completion method of revenue recognition versus the completed contract method.
                  3. Solve this accounting problem for the ABC grocery company relating to revenue and expense recognition as per GAAP: ABC Corporation uses the percentage-of-completion method of accounting. In 2010, ABC entered into a contract for a contract price of $2,000,000.

                    2010

                    Costs incurred during the year

                    600,000

                    Estimated costs to complete as of Dec 31

                    900,000

                    Billings during the year

                    400,000

                    Collections during the year

                    300,000

                    • What portion of the total contract price is recognized as revenue in 2010?
                    • What is the profit recognized for 2010?
                    • Prepare the journal entries for 2010 under the percentage completion method.

                  Attachments:

                  other income and deductions including resp 495311

                  Assignment Program Nine -5 (other income and deductions including RESP) we need the whole answer

                  Katrina Watts is 42 years old and has custody of her two children from a previous marriage. The son is 11 years old and the daughter is 9 years old. They are both in good health. She is currently married to very successful electrician who earns an income in excess of $ 300,000 per year.

                  As her children are now in school most of the year, she had decided to pursue a career in environmental design. To this end, she had enrolled, on a full time basis, at the University of Calgary. Her studies began on January 1, 2012.

                  As she was very successful in her first term of studies, she was able to obtain summer employment as an assistant in an environment study in Cold Lake, Alberta. As this location was over 600 kilometres from Calgary, she and her children movies to a rented cottage in Cold Lake for the period June 1, 2012 through September 1, 2012. As this was a temporary move, it was accomplished using a rented van at a total cost of $685.

                  During her summer in Cold Lake, Ms. Watts required someone to take care of her two children while she was at work. For this service, she paid a local retired teacher $125 per week for a period of 12 week. She has the appropriate documentation to support these costs.

                  She returned to Calgary on September 1, 2012in order to resume her studies at the University of Calgary. Once again, the move was accomplished using a rented van. The total cost was $826. During the fall term, she found a part time job working in a Calgary architecture firm.

                  On January 1, 2012, Ms. Watts did not have a Tax Free Savings Account (TFSA). In October, 2012, she opened a TFSA and deposited a total of $ 4,500. Her husband also made a contribution in the amount of $ 5,000.

                  During 2012, Ms. Watts received the following amounts:

                  Wages from Cold Lake Employment $ 9, 600

                  Wages from Part Time Employment in Calgary 600

                  Scholarship Granted By Uni for September2012 semester 4, 000

                  Eligible Dividends Received 3,500

                  Child Support Received 10, 500

                  Inheritance From Aunt 30, 000

                  TFSA withdrawal 8, 000

                  During November, 2012 Ms. Watts establishes RESPs for both of her children. She contributes $1,000 to each of these plans.

                  Required:

                  A. Determine the minimum Net Income For Tax Purposes that Ms. Watts will have to report for her 2012 taxation year. Provide reasons for omitting items that you have not included in your calculations. Also, indicate any amounts that can be carried forward to future years.

                  B. Provide any advice you feel would assist her in planning future actions concerning the RESPs that have been established for her children.

                  Attachments:

                  overhead amp variance problems preble company harmon household products inc airmeals 495312

                  Please see attachment

                  Document Preview:

                  Preble Company manufactures one product. Its variable manufacturing overhead is applied to production based on direct labor-hours and its standard cost card per unit is as follows: The company also established the following cost formulas for its selling expenses: The planning budget for March was based on producing and selling 25,000 units. However, during March the company actually produced and sold 30,000 units and incurred the following costs: Purchased 160,000 pounds of raw materials at a cost of $7.50 per pound. All of this material was used in production. Direct-laborers worked 55,000 hours at a rate of $15.00 per hour. Total variable manufacturing overhead for the month was $280,500. Total advertising, sales salaries and commissions, and shipping expenses were $210,000, $455,000, and $115,000, respectively. Complete the following: What raw materials cost would be included in the company’s flexible budget for March? What is the materials quantity variance for March? What is the materials price variance for March? If Preble had purchased 170,000 pounds of materials at $7.50 per pound and used 160,000 pounds in production, what would be the materials quantity variance for March? If Preble had purchased 170,000 pounds of materials at $7.50 per pound and used 160,000 pounds in production, what would be the materials price variance for March? What direct labor cost would be included in the company’s flexible budget for March? What is the direct labor efficiency variance for March? What is the direct labor rate variance for March? What variable manufacturing overhead cost would be included in the company’s flexible budget for March? What is the variable overhead efficiency variance for March? What is the variable overhead rate variance for March? What amounts of advertising, sales salaries and commissions, and shipping expenses would be included in the company’s flexible budget for March? What is the spending variance related to advertising? What is the…

                  Attachments:

                  p3 9 adjusting and closing nancy drew boutique 495314

                  *P3-9 (Adjusting and Closing)
                  Presented below is the December 31 trial balance of Nancy DrewBoutique. NANCY DREW BOUTIQUE

                  TRIAL BALANCE

                  DECEMBER 31

                  Debit Credit

                  Cash $ 18,500

                  Accounts Receivable 42,000

                  Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $ 700

                  Inventory, December 31 80,000

                  Prepaid Insurance 5,100

                  Furniture and Equipment 84,000

                  Accumulated Depreciation Furniture and Equipment 35,000

                  Notes Payable 28,000

                  Common Stock 80,600

                  Retained Earnings 10,000

                  Sales 600,000

                  Cost of Goods Sold 398,000

                  Sales Salaries Expense 50,000

                  Advertising Expense 6,700

                  Administrative Salaries Expense 65,000

                  Office Expense 5,000

                  $754,300 $754,300

                  Instructions

                  (a) Construct T-accounts and enter the balances shown.

                  (b) Prepare adjusting journal entries for the following and post to the T-accounts. (Omit explanations.)

                  Open additional T-accounts as necessary. (The books are closed yearly on December 31.)

                  (1) Bad debts are estimated to be $1,400.

                  (2) Furniture and equipment is depreciated based on a 6-year life (no salvage value).

                  (3) Insurance expired during the year $2,550.

                  (4) Interest accrued on notes payable $3,360.

                  (5) Sales salaries earned but not paid $2,400.

                  (6) Advertising paid in advance $700.

                  (7) Office supplies on hand $1,500, charged to Office Expense when purchased.

                  (c) Prepare closing entries and post to the accounts.

                  Attachments:

                  part 1 495315

                  Accounting Principles 1 Exam 3 (Chapters 5 & 6) Businsky Spring 2013 Name ________________________   POINTS POINTS PROBLEM POSSIBLE RECEIVED 1 16   2 30   3 14 4 15   TOTAL 75   PROBLEM 1 (16 points) The merchandise inventory of Planter Co was destroyed by flood on August 15.

                  Document Preview:

                  Accounting Principles 1 Exam 3 (Chapters 5 & 6) Businsky Spring 2013 Name ________________________   POINTS POINTS PROBLEM POSSIBLE RECEIVED 1 16   2 30   3 14 4 15   TOTAL 75   PROBLEM 1 (16 points) The merchandise inventory of Planter Co was destroyed by flood on August 15. The following data was obtained from the accounting records: Jan 1 Inventory $650,000 Jan 1 – August 15 Purchases (net) 1,100,000 Sales (net) 2,600,000 Gross Profit Rate 40% Instructions: Estimate the cost of the inventory destroyed in the flood. Show all work. Sales (1/1 – 8/15) 100% Cost of Goods Sold (1/1 – 8/15) 60% Gross Profit 40% Inventory Beg Inventory (1/1) – COGS (1/1 – 8/15): Purchases (1/1 – 8/15): Ending (8/15): Problem 2 (30 points) Beginning inventory, purchases, and sales data for personal organizers are as follows: Jan 1 Beginning Inventory 45 units @ $24 3 Sold 35 units 8 Purchased 70 units @ $32 21 Sold 65 units 30 Purchased 25 units @ $47 Instructions: 1 – Using the above transactions prepare the perpetual inventory record using each of the costing methods listed below. 2 – In the space provided below identify the ending inventory balance and cost of goods sold for June under each method. FIFO LIFO Weighted Average (Round unit cost to the nearest cent and total costs to the nearest dollar) FIFO FIFO Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory On Hand Date Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Jan 1 45 $24 $1,080 Jan 3 35 $24 $840 10 $24 $240 Jan 8 70 $32 $2,240 70 $32 $2,240 Jan21 10 $24 $240 55 $32 $1,760 15 $32 $480 Jan30 25 $47 $1,175 25 $47 $1,175         100 $2,840 40 $1,655 Ending Inventory: $1,655 Cost of Goods Sold:…

                  Attachments:

                  penn foster 06168900 495318

                  To begin, review the financial statements on pages 122 and 127 of your textbook (Exhibits 3-4 through 3-7). Then, follow-ing the instructions below, complete the electronic forms provided at the end of this file. Submission instructions are given the end of this project.
                  1. Journalize the transactions. Omit explanations.
                  2. Post the transactions to the general ledger, creating new ledger accounts as necessary. Calculate the new general ledger account balances.
                  3. Prepare the unadjusted trial balance for Aqua Elite, Inc., at the end of July.
                  4. Journalize and post the adjusting entries for July based on the following adjustment information:
                  a. Record the expired rent.
                  b. Supplies on hand, $350.
                  c. Depreciation: $400 equipment, $210 furniture, $650 vehicles.
                  d. Services performed but unbilled, $1,900.
                  e. Accrued salaries, $675.
                  f. Unearned service revenue earned as of July 31, $800.
                  5. Prepare an adjusted trial balance for Aqua Elite, Inc., at the end of July.
                  6. Prepare the Income Statement, Statement of Retained Earnings, and Balance Sheet for the three-month period May through July 20XX.
                  7. Prepare, journalize, and post closing entries.
                  8. Prepare a Post-Closing Trial Balance for the end of the period.

                  Document Preview:

                  Graded Project Graded Project Lesson 1: Business Accounting and You OVERVIEW The focus of this project is for the student to keep a set of books through an accounting period to perform the following functions: n Set up the books of accounting n Analyze and record transactions n Post the journal entries to general ledger accounts n Generate an unadjusted trial balance n Calculate, journalize, and post adjusting entries n Generate an adjusted trial balance n Generate financial statements n Create and post closing entries n Generate a post-closing trial balance INSTRUCTIONS Use the explanation below and the information in the assumptions section to complete the steps in the require- ments for this accounting project. Mike Hanson recently left his job at a local pool com- pany to open his own pool and spa maintenance business. Mike Hanson took all of the money he and his wife had in their personal savings account and used it to open Aqua Elite, Inc., on May 1, 20XX. Assume that the following transactions for the first three months of operations for the Hanson’s Aqua Elite, Inc., are true and accurate. 1 06168900: Graded Project Instructions & WorksheetsAssumptions n Because Aqua Elite, Inc. is a new startup business, the beginning balances in all the general ledger accounts are zero to start. n The length of the accounting periods are three months using a fiscal calendar year. (A fiscal calendar is on a yearly basis other than a calendar year—January 1st to December 31st. For example, a fiscal calendar year can be May 1, 2009, through April 30, 2010). Therefore, posting to the general ledger, adjustments and closing entries are made on a fiscal quarterly basis. n Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable subsidiary ledgers aren’t being used. Any references to invoicing, receipts, or payments “on account” assume changes to the running balance in the Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable general ledger accounts. n Payroll calculations aren’t necessary. Assume the…

                  Attachments:

                  penn foster 06168900 aqua elite inc 495319

                  Penn Foster 06168900 (Aqua Elite, Inc.)

                  Document Preview:

                  Graded Project Graded Project Lesson 1: Business Accounting and You OVERVIEW The focus of this project is for the student to keep a set of books through an accounting period to perform the following functions: n Set up the books of accounting n Analyze and record transactions n Post the journal entries to general ledger accounts n Generate an unadjusted trial balance n Calculate, journalize, and post adjusting entries n Generate an adjusted trial balance n Generate financial statements n Create and post closing entries n Generate a post-closing trial balance INSTRUCTIONS Use the explanation below and the information in the assumptions section to complete the steps in the require- ments for this accounting project. Mike Hanson recently left his job at a local pool com- pany to open his own pool and spa maintenance business. Mike Hanson took all of the money he and his wife had in their personal savings account and used it to open Aqua Elite, Inc., on May 1, 20XX. Assume that the following transactions for the first three months of operations for the Hanson’s Aqua Elite, Inc., are true and accurate. 1 06168900: Graded Project Instructions & WorksheetsAssumptions n Because Aqua Elite, Inc. is a new startup business, the beginning balances in all the general ledger accounts are zero to start. n The length of the accounting periods are three months using a fiscal calendar year. (A fiscal calendar is on a yearly basis other than a calendar year—January 1st to December 31st. For example, a fiscal calendar year can be May 1, 2009, through April 30, 2010). Therefore, posting to the general ledger, adjustments and closing entries are made on a fiscal quarterly basis. n Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable subsidiary ledgers aren’t being used. Any references to invoicing, receipts, or payments “on account” assume changes to the running balance in the Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable general ledger accounts. n Payroll calculations aren’t necessary. Assume the…

                  Attachments:

                  pension 495320

                  Complete the following exercise. Submit journal entries in an Excel file and written segments in an MS Word document. Label each question clearly.

                  Melanie Vail Corp. sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its employees. On January 1, 2012, the following balances relate to this plan.

                  Plan assets $480,000
                  Projected benefit obligation 625,000
                  Accumulated OCI (PSC) 100,000 Dr.

                  As a result of the operation of the plan during 2012, the following additional data are provided by the actuary.

                  Service cost for 2012 $90,000
                  Settlement rate 9%
                  Actual return on plan assets in 2012 57,000
                  Amortization of prior service cost 19,000
                  Expected return on plan assets 52,000
                  Unexpected loss from change in projected benefit obligation, due to change in actuarial predictions 76,000
                  Contributions in 2012 99,000
                  Benefits paid retirees in 2012 85,000

                  attched file isthe spreadsheets you will need for this exercise.

                  1. Use the spreadsheet Pensions to prepare a pension worksheet. On the pension worksheet, compute pension expense, pension asset/liability, projected benefit obligation, plan assets, prior service cost, and net gain or loss.
                  2. Compute the same items as in (1), assuming that the settlement rate is now 7% and the expected rate of return is 10%.
                  3. Prepare the journal entry using the spreadsheet Journal Entries to record pension expense in 2012.
                  4. Indicate the reporting of the 2012 pension amounts in the income statement and balance sheet using the spreadsheet Pensions.

                  Attachments:

                  pension plan 495321

                  provide a memo, like a paper, one to two pages, please give out necessary journal entries for supplement. if you need codifications, please go to http://aaahq.org/ascLogin.cfm, user name is AAA51471 and password is Fun511!.

                  Please ensure the quality!! Thanks.

                  Attachments:

                  perfect answers 495322

                  1.Question : (TCO 4) A variable declared before and outside all function blocks

                  is visible only in main.
                  is visible to all functions.
                  is visible to all functions except main.
                  is not visible to any functions.

                  2. Question : (TCO 4) What is the value of i after the following code fragment executes?
                  int i = 2;
                  int k = 5 ;
                  i *= k + 1;

                  7
                  11
                  12
                  14

                  3. Question : (TCO 4) How many times will variable i be printed to the screen?
                  for (i = 1 ; i
                  {
                  cout
                  }

                  10
                  20
                  1
                  0

                  4. Question : (TCO 4) Which looping statement is best if the number of iterations is known?

                  If/Else
                  For
                  While
                  Do/While

                  5. Question : (TCO 4) C++ selection statements include

                  for, while, do-while.
                  cout and cin.
                  if, if-else, if-else if, switch.
                  #include and using namespace std;.

                  6. Question : (TCO 4) If firstName and lastName are string object variables, which statement can be used to combine (append or concatenate) the two into a single string variable?

                  fullName = firstName + lastName;
                  fullName = firstName, lastName;
                  fullName = firstName & lastName;
                  fullName = firstName && lastName;

                  7. Question : (TCO 4) Which type of error does the following code fragment cause?
                  int main (void)
                  {
                  int MAX;
                  cout << Enter array size: <> MAX;
                  int foo [MAX];
                  for (int i = 0; i
                  {
                  foo= i * 2;
                  }

                  Compiler: Array size must be known at compile time.
                  Compiler: Variable MAX cannot be all uppercase.
                  Compiler: Array subscript out of bounds.
                  Run-time: User cannot enter a value for MAX.

                  8. Question : (TCO 4) The code below computes the length of a C-style string. What should the value of FLAG be?
                  char name[20]= “Lancilot”;
                  int length=0;
                  while(name[length] != FLAG)
                  {
                  length = length+1;
                  }
                  cout


                  20
                  NULL
                  0

                  9. Question : (TCO 4) Which type of error does the following code fragment cause?
                  const int MAX = 500;
                  int main (void)
                  {
                  int foo [MAX];
                  for (int i = 0; i
                  {
                  foo= i * 2;
                  }

                  Compiler, because of out-of-bounds array subscript
                  Run-time, because of out-of-bounds array subscript
                  Compiler, because of invalid array initialization
                  None of the above. It does not create any type of error.

                  10. Question : (TCO 4) What is the declaration for a C-style string that can hold a name with up to 3 printable characters (for example, Ron )?

                  int name [3];
                  char name [3]
                  int name [4];
                  char name [4];

                  11. Question : (TCO 4) What is the output of the following code?
                  void func(int x)
                  {
                  x = x * 2;
                  }
                  int main( )
                  {
                  int x = 10;
                  func(x);
                  cout
                  }

                  20
                  30
                  10
                  5

                  12. Question : (TCO 4) Which of the following function definitions uses pass-by-values?

                  int myFunc( int * x, int * y );
                  int myFunc( int x, int y ) ;
                  int myFunc( int & x, int & y ) ;
                  int myFunc( int @ value1, int @ value2 ) ;

                  13. Question : (TCO 4) Which of the following statements call the following function correctly?
                  int MultiplyValues (int, int);

                  int a = MultiplyValues (int x, int y);
                  int a = MultiplyValues (10, 20);
                  double d = MultiplyValues (int 10, int 20);
                  All of the above

                  14. Question : (TCO 4) What is the output of the following code?
                  void func(int *x)
                  {
                  *x = *x * 3;
                  };
                  int main()
                  {
                  int x = 10;
                  func (&x) ;
                  cout
                  }

                  20
                  30
                  10
                  5

                  15. Question : (TCO 4) A Distance class has two private members, feet , of type int, and inches , of type double. Which prototype correctly declares the copy constructor for such class?

                  Distance Distance(const Distance &);
                  Distance(const Distance &);
                  int Distance(int, double);
                  Distance(feet, inches);

                  16. Question : (TCO 4) The word const inside the parentheses of the following declaration of isEqual
                  bool isEqual (const Distance & rightSideObject) const;

                  ensures the member variables of the called objects are protected (cannot be changed).
                  ensures the argument passed in to the function is protected (cannot be changed).
                  ensures the return value of the function is protected (cannot be changed).
                  ensures the return value is routed to the proper variable.

                  17. Question : (TCO 4) Given the following class definition and lines of code, Line 1 in main is a call to what?

                  class Distance
                  {
                  private:
                  int feet;
                  double inches;
                  public:
                  Distance( );
                  Distance(int initFt, double initIn);
                  void setFeet(int feetIn);
                  void setInches(double inchesIn);
                  int getFeet() const;
                  double getInches( ) const;
                  };
                  int main( )
                  {
                  Distance d1; //Line 1
                  const int MAX = 100; //Line 2
                  Distance list[MAX]; //Line 3
                  Distance d2(1, 2.3); //Line 4
                  Distance * pDist; //Line 5
                  d1.feet = 5; //Line 6
                  // etc. assume the remaining code is correct
                  }

                  The 0-argument Distance constructor
                  The 2-argument, int, double, Distance constructor
                  The 2-argument, double, int, Distance constructor
                  The 1-argument, int, Distance constructor

                  18. Question : (TCO 4) Creating one class from another in a parent/child hierarchy is an example of

                  encapsulation.
                  polymorphism.
                  inheritance.
                  abstraction.

                  19. Question : (TCO 4) Which of the following is a valid declaration to overload the following function?
                  int whatever (double x);

                  double whatever (double x);
                  int whatever (int x);
                  int whatever2 (double x);
                  int overload (double x);

                  20. Question : (TCO 4) How many parameters are required to overload the pre-increment operator for a class as a member function?

                  None
                  1
                  2
                  No limit

                  21. Question : (TCO 4) Given the following definitions and statements,
                  void myFunction (double * dptr);;
                  double data [10];
                  which of the following statements correctly calls the function passing in the address of the data array?

                  myFunction(data);
                  myFunction(&data);
                  myFunction(*data);
                  myFunction(data[0]);

                  22. Question : (TCO 4) Assume you have to write a class that makes use of dynamic memory allocation (the class needs to allocate and de-allocate memory). According to best practices, where would the keyword delete be placed?

                  Classes are smart data types. The compiler takes care of calling new/delete
                  It is in the constructor.
                  It is in the destructor.
                  It is in a separate, dedicated function.

                  23. Question : (TCO 4) When writing a class, the compiler automatically creates some support functions for the class. What are some of these functions?

                  Assignment operator function
                  Copy constructor
                  Assignment operator and copy constructor
                  None of the above

                  24. Question : (TCO 4) Assume you have to write a class that makes use of dynamic memory allocation (the class needs to allocate and de-allocate memory). According to best practices, where would the keyword new be placed?

                  Classes are smart data types. The compiler takes care of calling new/delete.
                  In the constructor
                  In the destructor
                  In a separate, dedicated function

                  25. Question : (TCO 4) What is wrong with the following C++ statements?
                  int * iptr;
                  double d = 123.321;
                  iptr = &d;
                  cout

                  The cout statement does not contain an endl.
                  The space following the ampersand should not be there.
                  The iptr variable cannot be given an address of a double.
                  All of the above

                  Attachments:

                  for perfecto 495323

                  460 words taken from ‘http://www.everyculture.com/To-Z/United-Arab-Emirates.html’ “… Before the establishment of the oil economy in the early 1960s, two main orientations shaped traditional Emeriati culture: the nomadic … About two-thirds of the immigrants are Asians, mainly from India, Pakistan, Iran, Sri Lanka, Bangladesh, and the Philippines. The remainder are Arabs, Europeans, and … Among the immigrant population, English, Hindi, Urdu, Farsi, and Filipino are spoken. English is the language of commerce. Symbolism.

                  Document Preview:

                  460 words taken from ‘http://www.everyculture.com/To-Z/United-Arab-Emirates.html’ “… Before the establishment of the oil economy in the early 1960s, two main orientations shaped traditional Emeriati culture: the nomadic … About two-thirds of the immigrants are Asians, mainly from India, Pakistan, Iran, Sri Lanka, Bangladesh, and the Philippines. The remainder are Arabs, Europeans, and … Among the immigrant population, English, Hindi, Urdu, Farsi, and Filipino are spoken. English is the language of commerce. Symbolism. National Day symbolizes one of the most successful experiments in unity in the modern Arab world. The main metaphor is … Other cultural symbols are the falcon, camel, Arabian horse, pearling boat, … Towns have been transformed from mud-walled communities into commercial capitals integrated in the global economy. Because of the small population and harsh desert interior, 80 percent of the population lives in the coastal capital cities, leading … To create a balance between their global and local aspects, in municipalities have adopted policies projecting Arab-Islamic architectural design, particularly arched windows, gates, and decorative stucco. … Preservation of the urban heritage also is seen in the renovation of old forts, palaces, souks (marketplaces), and mosques. Date palm trees, symbols of the local culture, have been planted extensively along city roadsides. Food … Before the 1960s, food consisted mainly of fish, rice, bread, dates, yogurt, homegrown vegetables, and meat from sheep, goats, and camels. The diet has improved in quality and variety, with modern supermarkets … offering imported foods. Lunch is the main family meal and is eaten at home at around two o’clock. It usually consists of fish, rice, meat, and a vegetable dish. Many Emiratis … prefer the traditional style of eating with the right hand. There are strict Muslim taboos against pork and alcohol, and meat must be slaughtered according to the Islamic halal…

                  Attachments:

                  for perfecto 495324

                  here is the information

                  Document Preview:

                  ACC-281. DQ1 Read and respond to ATC 7-7 on page 285. This situation is similar to the Enron scandal from several years ago. Use the Ashford Online Library to research Enron accounting procedures. In your post, discuss how these accounting procedures affected the company and stockholders.   ATC 7-7 Corporate Governance Sometimes debt is not debt -THIS IS THE READING OUT OF THE BOOK FOR THE ASSIGNMENT SINCE David Sheridan was a well-respected CPA in his mid-fifties. After spending 10 years at a na- o tional accounting firm, he was hired by Global, Inc., a multinational corporation headquarters- tered in the United States. He patiently worked his way up to the top of Global’ s accounting per department and in the early 1990s, took over as chief financial officer for the company. As the Internet began to explode, management at Global, Inc., decided to radically change the nature of its business to one of e-commerce. Two years after the transition, Internet commerce began to slow down, and Global was in dire need of cash in order to continue operations. Manage- ment turned to the accounting department. Global, Inc., needed to borrow a substantial amount of money but couldn’t afford to in- crease the amount of liabilities on the balance sheet for fear of the stock price dropping and banks becoming nervous and demanding repayment of existing loans. David discovered a way that would allow the company to raise the needed cash to continue operations without having to report the long-term notes payable on the balance sheet. Under an obscure rule, companies can set up separate legal organizations that do not have to be reported on the parent company’s financial statements, if a third party contributes just 3 percent of the start-up capital. David called a friend, Brian Johnson, and asked him to participate in a business venture with Global. Brian agreed, and created a special purpose entity with Global named BrianCo. For his par- ticipation, Brian was awarded a…

                  Attachments:

                  peyton department store master budget 495326

                  Peyton Department Store_Master Budget
                  Question Detail:

                  Developing a Master Budget
                  for a Merchandising Organization
                  Peyton Department Store prepares budgets quarterly. The following information is available for use in planning the second quarter budgets for 2010.

                  PEYTON DEPARTMENT STORE
                  Balance Sheet
                  March 31, 2010

                  Assets

                  Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

                  Cash

                  $2,000

                  Accounts payable

                  $26,000

                  Accounts receivable

                  25,000

                  Dividends payable

                  17,000

                  Inventory

                  30,000

                  Rent payable

                  1,000

                  Prepaid Insurance

                  2,000

                  Stockholders’ equity

                  40,000

                  Fixtures

                  25,000

                  Total assets

                  $84,000

                  Total liabilities and equity

                  $84,000

                  Actual and forecasted sales for selected months in 2010 are as follows:

                  Month

                  Sales Revenue

                  January

                  $70,000

                  February

                  50,000

                  March

                  40,000

                  April

                  50,000

                  May

                  60,000

                  June

                  70,000

                  July

                  90,000

                  August

                  80,000

                  Monthly operating expenses are as follows:

                  Wages and salaries

                  $26,000

                  Depreciation

                  100

                  Utilities

                  1,000

                  Rent

                  1,000

                  Cash dividends of $17,000 are declared during the third month of each quarter and are paid during the first month of the following quarter.

                  Operating expenses, except insurance, rent, and depreciation are paid as incurred. Rent is paid during the following month. The prepaid insurance is for five more months.

                  Cost of goods sold is equal to 50 percent of sales. Ending inventories are sufficient for 120 percent of the next month’s sales. Purchases during any given month are paid in full during the following month.

                  All sales are on account, with 50 percent collected during the month of sale, 40 percent during the next month, and 10 percent during the month thereafter.

                  Money can be borrowed and repaid in multiples of $1,000 at an interest rate of 12 percent per year. The company desires a minimum cash balance of $2,000 on the first of each month. At the time the principal is repaid, interest is paid on the portion of principal that is repaid. All borrowing is at the beginning of the month, and all repayment is at the end of the month. Money is never repaid at the end of the month it is borrowed.

                  (a) Prepare a purchases budget for each month of the second quarter ending June 30, 2010.

                  Peyton Department Store
                  Monthly Purchase Budget
                  Quarter Ending June 30, 2010

                  April

                  May

                  June

                  Total

                  Budgeted purchases

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  (b) Prepare a cash receipts schedule for each month of the second quarter ending June 30, 2010. Do not include borrowings.

                  Peyton Department Store
                  Schedule of Monthly Cash Receipts
                  Quarter Ending June 30, 2010

                  April

                  May

                  June

                  Total

                  Total cash receipts

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  (c) Prepare a cash disbursements schedule for each month of the second quarter ending June 30, 2010. Do not include repayments of borrowings.

                  Peyton Department Store
                  Schedule of Monthly Cash Disbursements
                  Quarter Ending June 30, 2010

                  April

                  May

                  June

                  Total

                  Total cash disbursements

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  (d) Prepare a cash budget for each month of the second quarter ending June 30, 2010. Include budgeted borrowings and repayments.

                  Peyton Department Store
                  Monthly Cash Budget
                  Quarter Ending June 30, 2010

                  April

                  May

                  June

                  Total

                  Cash balance, beginning

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  Receipts

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Disbursements

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Excess receipts over disb.

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Balance before borrowings

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Borrowings

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Loan repayments

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Cash balance, ending

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  (e) Prepare an income statement for each month of the second quarter ending June 30, 2010.

                  Peyton Department Store
                  Budgeted Monthly Income Statements
                  Quarter Ending June 30, 2010

                  April

                  May

                  June

                  Total

                  Sales

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  Cost of sales

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Gross profit

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Operating expenses:

                  Wages and salaries

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Depreciation

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Utilities

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Rent

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Insurance

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Interest

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Total expenses

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Net income

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  (f) Prepare a budgeted balance sheet as of June 30, 2010.

                  Peyton Department Store
                  Budgeted Balance Sheet
                  June 30, 2010

                  Assets

                  Liabilities and Equity

                  Cash

                  $Answer

                  Merchandise payable

                  $Answer

                  Accounts receivable

                  Answer

                  Dividend payable

                  Answer

                  Inventory

                  Answer

                  Rent payable

                  Answer

                  Prepaid insurance

                  Answer

                  Loans payable

                  Answer

                  Fixtures

                  Answer

                  Interest payable

                  Answer

                  Total assets

                  $Answer

                  Stockholders’ equity

                  Answer

                  Total liab. & equity

                  $Answer

                  Developing a Master Budget

                  for a Merchandising Organization
                  Peyton Department Store prepares budgets quarterly. The following information is available for use in planning the second quarter budgets for 2010.

                  PEYTON DEPARTMENT STORE
                  Balance Sheet
                  March 31, 2010

                  Assets

                  Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

                  Cash

                  $2,000

                  Accounts payable

                  $26,000

                  Accounts receivable

                  25,000

                  Dividends payable

                  17,000

                  Inventory

                  30,000

                  Rent payable

                  1,000

                  Prepaid Insurance

                  2,000

                  Stockholders’ equity

                  40,000

                  Fixtures

                  25,000

                  Total assets

                  $84,000

                  Total liabilities and equity

                  $84,000

                  Actual and forecasted sales for selected months in 2010 are as follows:

                  Month

                  Sales Revenue

                  January

                  $70,000

                  February

                  50,000

                  March

                  40,000

                  April

                  50,000

                  May

                  60,000

                  June

                  70,000

                  July

                  90,000

                  August

                  80,000

                  Monthly operating expenses are as follows:

                  Wages and salaries

                  $26,000

                  Depreciation

                  100

                  Utilities

                  1,000

                  Rent

                  1,000

                  Cash dividends of $17,000 are declared during the third month of each quarter and are paid during the first month of the following quarter.

                  Operating expenses, except insurance, rent, and depreciation are paid as incurred. Rent is paid during the following month. The prepaid insurance is for five more months.

                  Cost of goods sold is equal to 50 percent of sales. Ending inventories are sufficient for 120 percent of the next month’s sales. Purchases during any given month are paid in full during the following month.

                  All sales are on account, with 50 percent collected during the month of sale, 40 percent during the next month, and 10 percent during the month thereafter.

                  Money can be borrowed and repaid in multiples of $1,000 at an interest rate of 12 percent per year. The company desires a minimum cash balance of $2,000 on the first of each month. At the time the principal is repaid, interest is paid on the portion of principal that is repaid. All borrowing is at the beginning of the month, and all repayment is at the end of the month. Money is never repaid at the end of the month it is borrowed.

                  (a) Prepare a purchases budget for each month of the second quarter ending June 30, 2010.

                  Peyton Department Store
                  Monthly Purchase Budget
                  Quarter Ending June 30, 2010

                  April

                  May

                  June

                  Total

                  Budgeted purchases

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  (b) Prepare a cash receipts schedule for each month of the second quarter ending June 30, 2010. Do not include borrowings.

                  Peyton Department Store
                  Schedule of Monthly Cash Receipts
                  Quarter Ending June 30, 2010

                  April

                  May

                  June

                  Total

                  Total cash receipts

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  (c) Prepare a cash disbursements schedule for each month of the second quarter ending June 30, 2010. Do not include repayments of borrowings.

                  Peyton Department Store
                  Schedule of Monthly Cash Disbursements
                  Quarter Ending June 30, 2010

                  April

                  May

                  June

                  Total

                  Total cash disbursements

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  (d) Prepare a cash budget for each month of the second quarter ending June 30, 2010. Include budgeted borrowings and repayments.

                  Peyton Department Store
                  Monthly Cash Budget
                  Quarter Ending June 30, 2010

                  April

                  May

                  June

                  Total

                  Cash balance, beginning

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  Receipts

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Disbursements

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Excess receipts over disb.

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Balance before borrowings

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Borrowings

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Loan repayments

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Cash balance, ending

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  (e) Prepare an income statement for each month of the second quarter ending June 30, 2010.

                  Peyton Department Store
                  Budgeted Monthly Income Statements
                  Quarter Ending June 30, 2010

                  April

                  May

                  June

                  Total

                  Sales

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  Cost of sales

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Gross profit

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Operating expenses:

                  Wages and salaries

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Depreciation

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Utilities

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Rent

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Insurance

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Interest

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Total expenses

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Answer

                  Net income

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  $Answer

                  (f) Prepare a budgeted balance sheet as of June 30, 2010.

                  Peyton Department Store
                  Budgeted Balance Sheet
                  June 30, 2010

                  Assets

                  Liabilities and Equity

                  Cash

                  $Answer

                  Merchandise payable

                  $Answer

                  Accounts receivable

                  Answer

                  Dividend payable

                  Answer

                  Inventory

                  Answer

                  Rent payable

                  Answer

                  Prepaid insurance

                  Answer

                  Loans payable

                  Answer

                  Fixtures

                  Answer

                  Interest payable

                  Answer

                  Total assets

                  $Answer

                  Stockholders’ equity

                  Answer

                  Total liab. & equity

                  $Answer

                  Attachments:

                  play the lemonade stand game again using the coding methodology adopted by your team 495327

                  Play the lemonade stand game again using the coding methodology adopted by YOUR TEAM in week 2.

                  Look at the pricing for lemons, ice, cups, and sugar.

                  Remember that a pitcher will serve 12 cups if there is no ice, and about 20 cups if there are 3 ice cubes per cup.

                  Then, write a summary to reflect on your experience (250 word minimum).

                  Address the Following in your Paper:

                  Follow the following 5 step process. SHOW YOUR WORK.

                  1. Calculate the number of cups/pitcher you can serve. ROUND UP to the nearest whole number.

                  2. Calculate the number of lemons, cups of sugar, and cups you ll need to buy.

                  3. Look at the quantity pricing for each item and add up the cost to purchase your supplies.

                  4. Look at your costs. For every $1.00 of cost, how much is Cups? Sugar? Lemons? Ice?

                  5. Calculate your cost and revenue per cup (revenue should be price per cup). How did changing ingredients/quantity purchases affect your unit costs?

                  Put the summary data you want to focus on (i.e., what is your hypothesis regarding which variable affects net revenue) and put this information into a table

                  Discuss what your table reveals

                  Graph your cost and revenue data in a bar chart.

                  Graph your daily net revenue (revenue cost).

                  Discuss/describe what your graphs reveal.

                  Document Preview:

                  Sheet1 Sample Data Day Weather Price Lemons Sugar Ice # Cups # Lemons # Cups # Ice Cubes Assets after Cups # Customers Total Sales Total Expense Per Cup Per Pitcher of Sugar Expenses Sales Sold Overcast Cloudy Hazy Sunny Rain End of Season Report Total Income Total Expenses Liquidated Inventory Net Profit/Loss Mean Standard Deviation Net Revenue Coudy Lemonade Analysis – Tom Dullaghan Coeff. Of variation CV in % CV of Group1(%) CV of Group2(%) CV of Group3(%) CV of Group4(%) CV of Group5(%) CV of Group6(%) For entire data CV of…

                  Attachments:

                  please explain 495328

                  please see attached to help with the following questions.

                  Document Preview:

                  In your own words, please explain. No word minimum. 1) The two main sources of financing for a business are debt and equity. The biggest risk with debt is that the company will not be able to repay it. Because terms and cash flows can be varied, bonds are a more flexible source of debt financing than mortgage loans. Enron is a company that used creative accounting to show reduced debt on its balance sheet. This is known as “off balance sheet financing”. Please explain “off balance sheet financing. 2) One of the risks of borrowing money is changing interest rates. For example, if a company issues bonds when the market rate is 7%, what happens if the market rate goes down while the bonds are outstanding? Name some actions a company could take to control this risk.??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

                  Attachments:

                  please explain 495329

                  Please see attached. No word minimum. Brief explanation will do. Please cite any sources using APA format. ORiginal work only.

                  Document Preview:

                  Over the past few decades, the cost structure of manufacturing companies has shifted. In the early 1900s, direct material costs were substantial while fixed costs represented a small fraction of total manufacturing costs. However, the cost structure has reversed and now fixed costs make up the majority of total manufacturing costs. 1) Do you think that businesses should focus on advances that cost less money, or keep using technology that changes everyday to increase profit? Also, how do think businesses swill operate in the next 5 years, will fixed costs still be the major component of driving sales in manufacturing? 2) Would quality inspection costs be direct or indirect? Production workers’ holiday and vacation pay?

                  Attachments:

                  please help 495330

                  What is the amount of unrestricted cash and investments at 9/30/15?

                  What is the amount restricted Cash and Investments at 9/30/15?

                  What is the amount of Accounts Receivable – Customers at 9/30/15?

                  What is the amount of Accrued Interest Receivable at 9/30/15?

                  What is the total amount of Property, Plant, and Equipment at 9/30/15?

                  What is the net book value of Property, Plant, and Equipment at 9/30/15?

                  What is the total amount of Accounts Payable and accrued expenses at 9/30/15?

                  What is the total amount of Net Position at 9/30/15?

                  What is the amount of Net Investment in Capital Assets at 9/30/15?

                  What is the amount of Restricted Net Position at 9/30/15?

                  What is the amount of Unrestricted Net Position at 9/30/15?

                  What was the amount of Water & Sewer Revenues for the year ending 9/30/15?

                  What is the total amount of Investment Income for the year ending 9/30/15?

                  What is the amount of cash that was paid for expenses for the year ending 9/30/15?

                  What is the total amount of expenses excluding depreciation for the year ending 9/30/15?

                  What is the total amount of expenses including depreciation for the year ending 9/30/15?

                  What is the amount of total Net Position for the Governmental Activities at 9/30/15?

                  Document Preview:

                  ACG 3501 – Fall 2013 Government Activity – Part Three Instructions Use an Excel spreadsheet to organize the background information provided here in such a manner as to allow you to answer the questions noted under the “Quizzes” tab for “Government Activity 3”. You may find it helpful to actually prepare journal entries and post them to T accounts. Please clearly label all rows and columns in your spreadsheet and show all calculations. Remember, your formulas in a cell may not always be visible when uploaded; therefore, please show all work using the rows and columns approach. Your work will be completed a lot more efficiently if you thoroughly review the questions you are required to answer before attempting to set up your Excel spreadsheet. Submission of your Excel spreadsheet is a required part of this assignment and is worth 15 points. The remaining 60 points for this assignment are related to the questions (located under the “Quizzes” tab) that you will need to answer using the background information provided here. In order to receive the total 15 points for your spreadsheet, you will need to attach it and then submit it via the “Assignments” tab in Webcourses. Guidelines for the preparation of your Excel spreadsheet are as follows: ? Use only one “sheet” for your work. ? Your name and ACG 3501 section number should appear at the top of the spreadsheet. ? Order your spreadsheet in the same order as the questions are asked in the “quiz”. Indicate the question number(s) from the “quiz” on your spreadsheet next to the related work. ? Clearly label all columns and rows and show ALL of your work. Please avoid using abbreviations that are not generally accepted in the accounting vernacular. ? Enable the spreadsheet to allow the instructor to view the formulae used in each cells. ? Use commas for all numbers but do not use decimals or places (i.e. one thousand ten dollars and 20 cents should show as 1,010 not $1,010.20). …

                  Attachments: